101 Innovation Drive
San Jose, CA 95134
www.altera.com
SIV5V1-4.8
Volume 1
Stratix IV Device Handbook
January
© 2016 Altera Corporation. All rights reserved. ALTERA, ARRIA, CYCLONE, HARDCOPY, MAX, MEGACORE, NIOS, QUARTUS and STRATIX words and logos
are trademarks of Altera Corporation and registered in the U.S. Patent and Trademark Office and in other countries. All other words and logos identified as
trademarks or service marks are the property of their respective holders as described at www.altera.com/common/legal.html. Altera warrants performance of its
semiconductor products to current specifications in accordance with Altera's standard warranty, but reserves the right to make changes to any products and
services at any time without notice. Altera assumes no responsibility or liability arising out of the application or use of any information, product, or service
described herein except as expressly agreed to in writing by Altera. Altera customers are advised to obtain the latest version of device specifications before relying
on any published information and before placing orders for products or services.
January 2016 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
ISO
9001:2008
Registered
January 2016 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
Contents
Chapter Revision Dates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi
Section I. Device Core
Chapter 1. Overview for the Stratix IV Device Family
Feature Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2
Stratix IV GX Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–3
Stratix IV E Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–4
Stratix IV GT Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–5
Architecture Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–6
High-Speed Transceiver Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–6
Highest Aggregate Data Bandwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–6
Wide Range of Protocol Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–6
Diagnostic Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–7
Signal Integrity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–7
FPGA Fabric and I/O Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–8
Device Core Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–8
Embedded Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–8
Digital Signal Processing (DSP) Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–8
Clock Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–8
PLLs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–9
I/O Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–9
High-Speed Differential I/O with DPA and Soft-CDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–9
External Memory Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–9
System Integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–10
Integrated Software Platform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–19
Ordering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–19
Chapter 2. Logic Array Blocks and Adaptive Logic Modules in Stratix IV Devices
Logic Array Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
LAB Interconnects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–4
LAB Control Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–4
Adaptive Logic Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–5
ALM Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–8
Normal Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–9
Extended LUT Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–11
Arithmetic Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–12
Shared Arithmetic Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–14
LUT-Register Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–15
Register Chain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–17
ALM Interconnects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–18
Clear and Preset Logic Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–18
LAB Power Management Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–19
Chapter 3. TriMatrix Embedded Memory Blocks in Stratix IV Devices
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1
TriMatrix Memory Block Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–3
Parity Bit Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–3
iv Contents
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2016 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Byte Enable Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–3
Packed Mode Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–5
Address Clock Enable Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–6
Mixed Width Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–7
Asynchronous Clear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–7
Error Correction Code (ECC) Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–8
Memory Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–9
Single-Port RAM Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–10
Simple Dual-Port Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–11
True Dual-Port Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–14
Shift-Register Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–16
ROM Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–17
FIFO Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–17
Clocking Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–17
Independent Clock Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–18
Input/Output Clock Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–18
Read/Write Clock Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–18
Single Clock Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–18
Design Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–18
Selecting TriMatrix Memory Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–18
Conflict Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–19
Read-During-Write Behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–19
Same-Port Read-During-Write Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–19
Mixed-Port Read-During-Write Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–21
Power-Up Conditions and Memory Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–23
Power Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–24
Chapter 4. DSP Blocks in Stratix IV Devices
Stratix IV DSP Block Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–2
Stratix IV Simplified DSP Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–4
Stratix IV Operational Modes Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–8
Stratix IV DSP Block Resource Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–9
Input Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–10
Multiplier and First-Stage Adder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–12
Pipeline Register Stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–13
Second-Stage Adder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–13
Rounding and Saturation Stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–14
Second Adder and Output Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–14
Stratix IV Operational Mode Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–15
Independent Multiplier Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–15
9-, 12-, and 18-Bit Multiplier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–15
36-Bit Multiplier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–19
Double Multiplier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–20
Two-Multiplier Adder Sum Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–23
18 x 18 Complex Multiply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–25
Four-Multiplier Adder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–26
High-Precision Multiplier Adder Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–28
Multiply Accumulate Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–30
Shift Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–31
Rounding and Saturation Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–33
DSP Block Control Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–35
Software Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–36
Contents v
January 2016 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
Chapter 5. Clock Networks and PLLs in Stratix IV Devices
Clock Networks in Stratix IV Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1
Global Clock Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–3
Regional Clock Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–4
Periphery Clock Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–6
Clock Sources Per Quadrant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–9
Clock Regions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–9
Clock Network Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–10
Dedicated Clock Input Pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–10
LABs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–10
PLL Clock Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–11
Clock Input Connections to the PLLs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–12
Clock Output Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–13
Clock Control Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–14
Clock Enable Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–17
Clock Source Control for PLLs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–18
Cascading PLLs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–19
PLLs in Stratix IV Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–19
Stratix IV PLL Hardware Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–23
PLL Clock I/O Pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–24
PLL Control Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–27
pfdena . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–27
areset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–27
locked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–27
Clock Feedback Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–28
Source Synchronous Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–29
Source-Synchronous Mode for LVDS Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–30
No-Compensation Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–30
Normal Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–31
Zero-Delay Buffer (ZDB) Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–31
External Feedback Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–32
Clock Multiplication and Division . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–33
Post-Scale Counter Cascading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–34
Programmable Duty Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–35
Programmable Phase Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–35
Programmable Bandwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–37
Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–37
Implementation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–38
Spread-Spectrum Tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–39
Clock Switchover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–39
Automatic Clock Switchover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–40
Manual Clock Switchover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–43
Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–43
PLL Reconfiguration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–44
PLL Reconfiguration Hardware Implementation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–45
Post-Scale Counters (C0 to C9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–47
Scan Chain Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–48
Charge Pump and Loop Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–50
Bypassing a PLL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–51
Dynamic Phase-Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–51
PLL Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–54
Section II. I/O Interfaces
vi Contents
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2016 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Chapter 6. I/O Features in Stratix IV Devices
I/O Standards Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–2
I/O Standards and Voltage Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–3
I/O Banks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–5
Modular I/O Banks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–8
I/O Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–17
3.3-V I/O Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–19
External Memory Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–19
High-Speed Differential I/O with DPA Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–20
Programmable Current Strength . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–20
Programmable Slew Rate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–21
Programmable I/O Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–22
Programmable IOE Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–22
Programmable Output Buffer Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–22
Open-Drain Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–22
Bus Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–22
Programmable Pull-Up Resistor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–23
Programmable Pre-Emphasis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–23
Programmable Differential Output Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–23
MultiVolt I/O Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–23
On-Chip Termination Support and I/O Termination Schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–24
On-Chip Series (RS) Termination Without Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–25
On-Chip Series Termination with Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–26
Left-Shift Series Termination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–27
On-Chip Parallel Termination with Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–28
Expanded On-Chip Series Termination with Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–29
Dynamic On-Chip Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–29
LVDS Input OCT (RD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–31
Summary of OCT Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–31
OCT Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–32
OCT Calibration Block Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–32
Sharing an OCT Calibration Block on Multiple I/O Banks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–34
OCT Calibration Block Modes of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–35
Power-Up Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–35
User Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–36
OCT Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–37
Serial Data Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–37
Example of Using Multiple OCT Calibration Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–38
RS Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–38
Termination Schemes for I/O Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–38
Single-Ended I/O Standards Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–38
Differential I/O Standards Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–41
LVDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–43
Differential LVPECL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–44
RSDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–45
Mini-LVDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–46
Design Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–46
I/O Bank Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–46
Non-Voltage-Referenced Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–47
Voltage-Referenced Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–47
Mixing Voltage-Referenced and Non-Voltage-Referenced Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–47
Chapter 7. External Memory Interfaces in Stratix IV Devices
Contents vii
January 2016 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
Memory Interfaces Pin Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–3
Using the RUP and RDN Pins in a DQS/DQ Group Used for Memory Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–26
Combining ×16/×18 DQS/DQ Groups for a ×36 QDR II+/QDR II SRAM Interface . . . . . . . . . . . 7–26
Rules to Combine Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–27
Stratix IV External Memory Interface Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–29
DQS Phase-Shift Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–29
DLL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–31
Phase Offset Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–41
DQS Logic Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–43
DQS Delay Chain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–44
Update Enable Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–44
DQS Postamble Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–45
Leveling Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–46
Dynamic On-Chip Termination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–48
I/O Element Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–49
Delay Chain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–52
I/O Configuration Block and DQS Configuration Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–54
Chapter 8. High-Speed Differential I/O Interfaces and DPA in Stratix IV Devices
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–1
Locations of the I/O Banks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–3
LVDS Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–4
LVDS SERDES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–8
ALTLVDS Port List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–9
Differential Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–11
Programmable VOD and Programmable Pre-Emphasis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–14
Programmable VOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–15
Programmable Pre-Emphasis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–16
Differential Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–17
Differential I/O Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–18
Receiver Hardware Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–19
DPA Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–19
Synchronizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–20
Data Realignment Block (Bit Slip) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–20
Deserializer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–22
Receiver Data Path Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–22
Non-DPA Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–22
DPA Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–24
Soft-CDR Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–25
LVDS Interface with the Use External PLL Option Enabled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–26
Left and Right PLLs (PLL_Lx and PLL_Rx) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–29
Stratix IV Clocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–30
Source-Synchronous Timing Budget . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–31
Differential Data Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–31
Differential I/O Bit Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–31
Transmitter Channel-to-Channel Skew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–33
Receiver Skew Margin for Non-DPA Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–33
Differential Pin Placement Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–38
Guidelines for DPA-Enabled Differential Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–38
DPA-Enabled Channels and Single-Ended I/Os . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–38
DPA-Enabled Channel Driving Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–38
Using Corner and Center Left and Right PLLs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–38
Using Both Center Left and Right PLLs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–40
Guidelines for DPA-Disabled Differential Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–42
viii Contents
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2016 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
DPA-Disabled Channels and Single-Ended I/Os . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–42
DPA-Disabled Channel Driving Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–42
Using Corner and Center Left and Right PLLs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–42
Using Both Center Left and Right PLLs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–45
Section III. System Integration
Chapter 9. Hot Socketing and Power-On Reset in Stratix IV Devices
Stratix IV Hot-Socketing Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–1
Stratix IV Devices can be Driven Before Power Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–2
I/O Pins Remain Tri-Stated During Power Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–2
Insertion or Removal of a Stratix IV Device from a Powered-Up System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–2
Hot-Socketing Feature Implementation in Stratix IV Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–3
Power-On Reset Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–4
Power-On Reset Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–5
Chapter 10. Configuration, Design Security, and Remote System Upgrades in Stratix IV Devices
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–1
Configuration Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–2
Configuration Schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–2
Configuration Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–4
Power-On Reset Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–5
VCCPGM Pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–5
VCCPD Pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–5
Fast Passive Parallel Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–6
FPP Configuration Using a MAX II Device as an External Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–6
FPP Configuration Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–12
FPP Configuration Using a Microprocessor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–16
Fast Active Serial Configuration (Serial Configuration Devices) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–16
Estimating Active Serial Configuration Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–22
Programming Serial Configuration Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–23
Guidelines for Connecting Serial Configuration Devices on an AS Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–25
Passive Serial Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–25
PS Configuration Using a MAX II Device as an External Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–26
PS Configuration Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–31
PS Configuration Using a Microprocessor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–32
PS Configuration Using a Download Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–32
JTAG Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–35
Jam STAPL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–40
Device Configuration Pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–40
Configuration Data Decompression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–48
Remote System Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–50
Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–51
Enabling Remote Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–53
Configuration Image Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–54
Remote System Upgrade Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–54
Remote Update Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–54
Dedicated Remote System Upgrade Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–57
Remote System Upgrade Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–58
Remote System Upgrade Control Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–58
Remote System Upgrade Status Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–59
Remote System Upgrade State Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–60
User Watchdog Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–62
Contents ix
January 2016 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
Quartus II Software Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–63
ALTREMOTE_UPDATE Megafunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–63
Design Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–64
Stratix IV Security Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–65
Security Against Copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–65
Security Against Reverse Engineering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–65
Security Against Tampering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–65
AES Decryption Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–65
Flexible Security Key Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–65
Stratix IV Design Security Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–66
Security Modes Available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–67
Volatile Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–67
Non-Volatile Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–67
Non-Volatile Key with Tamper Protection Bit Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–67
No Key Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–68
Supported Configuration Schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–68
Chapter 11. SEU Mitigation in Stratix IV Devices
Error Detection Fundamentals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11–2
Configuration Error Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11–2
User Mode Error Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11–2
Automated Single-Event Upset Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11–5
Error Detection Pin Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11–5
CRC_ERROR Pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11–5
Error Detection Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11–6
Error Detection Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11–7
Error Detection Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11–8
Software Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11–10
Recovering From CRC Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11–11
Chapter 12. JTAG Boundary-Scan Testing in Stratix IV Devices
BST Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12–1
BST Operation Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12–2
I/O Voltage Support in a JTAG Chain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12–4
BST Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12–4
BSDL Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12–4
Chapter 13. Power Management in Stratix IV Devices
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13–1
Stratix IV Power Technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13–2
Programmable Power Technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13–2
Stratix IV External Power Supply Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13–3
Temperature Sensing Diode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13–4
External Pin Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13–4
Additional Information
About this Handbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Info–1
How to Contact Altera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Info–1
Typographic Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Info–1
xContents
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2016 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
January 2016 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
Chapter Revision Dates
The chapters in this document, Stratix IV Device Handbook, were revised on the
following dates. Where chapters or groups of chapters are available separately, part
numbers are listed.
Chapter 1. Overview for the Stratix IV Device Family
Revised: January 2016
Part Number: SIV51001-3.5
Chapter 2. Logic Array Blocks and Adaptive Logic Modules in Stratix IV Devices
Revised: February 2011
Part Number: SIV51002-3.1
Chapter 3. TriMatrix Embedded Memory Blocks in Stratix IV Devices
Revised: December 2011
Part Number: SIV51003-3.3
Chapter 4. DSP Blocks in Stratix IV Devices
Revised: February 2011
Part Number: SIV51004-3.1
Chapter 5. Clock Networks and PLLs in Stratix IV Devices
Revised: September 2012
Part Number: SIV51005-3.4
Chapter 6. I/O Features in Stratix IV Devices
Revised: September 2012
Part Number: SIV51006-3.4
Chapter 7. External Memory Interfaces in Stratix IV Devices
Revised: February 2011
Part Number: SIV51007-3.2
Chapter 8. High-Speed Differential I/O Interfaces and DPA in Stratix IV Devices
Revised: September 2012
Part Number: SIV51008-3.4
Chapter 9. Hot Socketing and Power-On Reset in Stratix IV Devices
Revised: February 2011
Part Number: SIV51009-3.2
Chapter 10. Configuration, Design Security, and Remote System Upgrades in Stratix IV Devices
Revised: September 2012
Part Number: SIV51010-3.5
Chapter 11. SEU Mitigation in Stratix IV Devices
Revised: February 2011
Part Number: SIV51011-3.2
Chapter 12. JTAG Boundary-Scan Testing in Stratix IV Devices
xii Chapter Revision Dates
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2016 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Revised: February 2011
Part Number: SIV51012-3.2
Chapter 13. Power Management in Stratix IV Devices
Revised: February 2011
Part Number: SIV51013-3.2
January 2016 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
Section I. Device Core
This section provides a complete overview of all features relating to the Stratix® IV
device family, which is the most architecturally advanced, high-performance,
low-power FPGA in the market place. This section includes the following chapters:
■Chapter 1, Overview for the Stratix IV Device Family
■Chapter 2, Logic Array Blocks and Adaptive Logic Modules in Stratix IV Devices
■Chapter 3, TriMatrix Embedded Memory Blocks in Stratix IV Devices
■Chapter 4, DSP Blocks in Stratix IV Devices
■Chapter 5, Clock Networks and PLLs in Stratix IV Devices
Revision History
Refer to each chapter for its own specific revision history. For information on when
each chapter was updated, refer to the Chapter Revision Dates section, which appears
in the full handbook.
I–2 Section I: Device Core
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2016 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
SIV51001-3.5
© 2016 Altera Corporation. All rights reserved. ALTERA, ARRIA, CYCLONE, HARDCOPY, MAX, MEGACORE, NIOS, QUARTUS and STRATIX words and logos
are trademarks of Altera Corporation and registered in the U.S. Patent and Trademark Office and in other countries. All other words and logos identified as
trademarks or service marks are the property of their respective holders as described at www.altera.com/common/legal.html. Altera warrants performance of its
semiconductor products to current specifications in accordance with Altera's standard warranty, but reserves the right to make changes to any products and
services at any time without notice. Altera assumes no responsibility or liability arising out of the application or use of any information, product, or service
described herein except as expressly agreed to in writing by Altera. Altera customers are advised to obtain the latest version of device specifications before relying
on any published information and before placing orders for products or services.
Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
January 2016
Feedback Subscribe
ISO
9001:2008
Registered
1. Overview for the Stratix IV Device
Family
Altera® Stratix® IV FPGAs deliver a breakthrough level of system bandwidth and
power efficiency for high-end applications, allowing you to innovate without
compromise. Stratix IV FPGAs are based on the Taiwan Semiconductor
Manufacturing Company (TSMC) 40-nm process technology and surpass all other
high-end FPGAs, with the highest logic density, most transceivers, and lowest power
requirements.
The Stratix IV device family contains three optimized variants to meet different
application requirements:
■Stratix IV E (Enhanced) FPGAs—up to 813,050 logic elements (LEs), 33,294 kilobits
(Kb) RAM, and 1,288 18 x 18 bit multipliers
■Stratix IV GX transceiver FPGAs—up to 531,200 LEs, 27,376 Kb RAM, 1,288
18 x 18-bit multipliers, and 48 full-duplex clock data recovery (CDR)-based
transceivers at up to 8.5 Gbps
■Stratix IV GT—up to 531,200 LEs, 27,376 Kb RAM, 1,288 18 x 18-bit multipliers,
and 48 full-duplex CDR-based transceivers at up to 11.3 Gbps
The complete Altera high-end solution includes the lowest risk, lowest total cost path
to volume using HardCopy® IV ASICs for all the family variants, a comprehensive
portfolio of application solutions customized for end-markets, and the industry
leading Quartus® II software to increase productivity and performance.
fFor information about upcoming Stratix IV device features, refer to the Upcoming
Stratix IV Device Features document.
fFor information about changes to the currently published Stratix IV Device Handbook,
refer to the Addendum to the Stratix IV Device Handbook chapter.
This chapter contains the following sections:
■“Feature Summary” on page 1–2
■“Architecture Features” on page 1–6
■“Integrated Software Platform” on page 1–19
■“Ordering Information” on page 1–19
January 2016
SIV51001-3.5
1–2 Chapter 1: Overview for the Stratix IV Device Family
Feature Summary
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2016 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Feature Summary
The following list summarizes the Stratix IV device family features:
■Up to 48 full-duplex CDR-based transceivers in Stratix IV GX and GT devices
supporting data rates up to 8.5 Gbps and 11.3 Gbps, respectively
■Dedicated circuitry to support physical layer functionality for popular serial
protocols, such as PCI Express (PCIe) (PIPE) Gen1 and Gen2, Gbps Ethernet (GbE),
Serial RapidIO, SONET/SDH, XAUI/HiGig, (OIF) CEI-6G, SD/HD/3G-SDI, Fibre
Channel, SFI-5, and Interlaken
■Complete PCIe protocol solution with embedded PCIe hard IP blocks that
implement PHY-MAC layer, Data Link layer, and Transaction layer functionality
fFor more information, refer to the IP Compiler for PCI Express User Guide.
■Programmable transmitter pre-emphasis and receiver equalization circuitry to
compensate for frequency-dependent losses in the physical medium
■Typical physical medium attachment (PMA) power consumption of 100 mW at
3.125 Gbps and 135 mW at 6.375 Gbps per channel
■72,600 to 813,050 equivalent LEs per device
■7,370 to 33,294 Kb of enhanced TriMatrix memory consisting of three RAM block
sizes to implement true dual-port memory and FIFO buffers
■High-speed digital signal processing (DSP) blocks configurable as 9 x 9-bit,
12 x 12-bit, 18 x 18-bit, and 36 x 36-bit full-precision multipliers at up to 600 MHz
■Up to 16 global clocks (GCLK), 88 regional clocks (RCLK), and 132 periphery
clocks (PCLK) per device
■Programmable power technology that minimizes power while maximizing device
performance
■Up to 1,120 user I/O pins arranged in 24 modular I/O banks that support a wide
range of single-ended and differential I/O standards
■Support for high-speed external memory interfaces including DDR, DDR2,
DDR3 SDRAM, RLDRAM II, QDR II, and QDR II+ SRAM on up to 24 modular
I/O banks
■High-speed LVDS I/O support with serializer/deserializer (SERDES), dynamic
phase alignment (DPA), and soft-CDR circuitry at data rates up to 1.6 Gbps
■Support for source-synchronous bus standards, including SGMII, GbE, SPI-4
Phase 2 (POS-PHY Level 4), SFI-4.1, XSBI, UTOPIA IV, NPSI, and CSIX-L1
■Pinouts for Stratix IV E devices designed to allow migration of designs from
Stratix III to Stratix IV E with minimal PCB impact
Chapter 1: Overview for the Stratix IV Device Family 1–3
Feature Summary
January 2016 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
Stratix IV GX Devices
Stratix IV GX devices provide up to 48 full-duplex CDR-based transceiver channels
per device:
■Thirty-two out of the 48 transceiver channels have dedicated physical coding
sublayer (PCS) and physical medium attachment (PMA) circuitry and support
data rates between 600 Mbps and 8.5 Gbps
■The remaining 16 transceiver channels have dedicated PMA-only circuitry and
support data rates between 600 Mbps and 6.5 Gbps
1The actual number of transceiver channels per device varies with device selection. For
more information about the exact transceiver count in each device, refer to Table 1–1
on page 1–11.
1For more information about transceiver architecture, refer to the Transceiver
Architecture in Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Figure 1–1 shows a high-level Stratix IV GX chip view.
Figure 1–1. Stratix IV GX Chip View (1)
Note to Figure 1–1:
(1) Resource counts vary with device selection, package selection, or both.
General Purpose
I/O and Memory
Interface
600 Mbps-8.5 Gbps CDR-based Transceiver
General Purpose I/O and 150 Mbps-1.6 Gbps
LVDS interface with DPA and Soft-CDR
Transceiver
Block
Transceiver
Block
Transceiver
Block
Transceiver
Block
PCI Express
Hard IP Block
PCI Express
Hard IP Block
PCI Express
Hard IP Block
PCI Express
Hard IP Block
General Purpose
I/O and Memory
Interface
PLL
PLL
PLL
PLL
PLL PLL
General Purpose
I/O and Memory
Interface
General Purpose
I/O and Memory
Interface
PLL PLL
FPGA Fabric
(Logic Elements, DSP,
Embedded Memory,
Clock Networks)
Transceiver Block
General Purpose I/O and
High-Speed LVDS I/O
with DPA and Soft CDR
General Purpose
I/O and
High-Speed
LVDS I/O with
DPA and Soft CDR
PLL
PLL
PLL
PLL
Transceiver
Block
Transceiver
Block
Transceiver
Block
Transceiver
Block
General Purpose
I/O and
High-Speed
LVDS I/O with
DPA and Soft CDR
General Purpose
I/O and
High-Speed
LVDS I/O with
DPA and Soft CDR
General Purpose
I/O and
High-Speed
LVDS I/O with
DPA and Soft CDR
1–4 Chapter 1: Overview for the Stratix IV Device Family
Feature Summary
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2016 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Stratix IV E Device
Stratix IV E devices provide an excellent solution for applications that do not require
high-speed CDR-based transceivers, but are logic, user I/O, or memory intensive.
Figure 1–2 shows a high-level Stratix IV E chip view.
Figure 1–2. Stratix IV E Chip View (1)
Note to Figure 1–2:
(1) Resource counts vary with device selection, package selection, or both.
General Purpose
I/O and Memory
Interface
General Purpose I/O and
150 Mbps-1.6 Gbps
LVDS interface with DPA and Soft-CDR
General
Purpose
I/O and
High-Speed
LVDS I/O
with DPA
and Soft-CDR
General Purpose
I/O and Memory
Interface
PLL
PLL
PLL
PLL
PLL
PLL
PLL
PLL
PLL PLL
General Purpose
I/O and Memory
Interface
General Purpose
I/O and Memory
Interface
PLL PLL
FPGA Fabric
(Logic Elements, DSP,
Embedded Memory,
Clock Networks)
General Purpose I/O and
High-Speed LVDS I/O with DPA
and Soft-CDR
General
Purpose
I/O and
High-Speed
LVDS I/O
with DPA
and Soft-CDR
General
Purpose
I/O and
High-Speed
LVDS I/O
with DPA
and Soft-CDR
General
Purpose
I/O and
High-Speed
LVDS I/O
with DPA
and Soft-CDR
Chapter 1: Overview for the Stratix IV Device Family 1–5
Feature Summary
January 2016 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
Stratix IV GT Devices
Stratix IV GT devices provide up to 48 CDR-based transceiver channels per device:
■Thirty-two out of the 48 transceiver channels have dedicated PCS and PMA
circuitry and support data rates between 600 Mbps and 11.3 Gbps
■The remaining 16 transceiver channels have dedicated PMA-only circuitry and
support data rates between 600 Mbps and 6.5 Gbps
1The actual number of transceiver channels per device varies with device selection. For
more information about the exact transceiver count in each device, refer to Table 1–7
on page 1–16.
1For more information about Stratix IV GT devices and transceiver architecture, refer
to the Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Figure 1–3 shows a high-level Stratix IV GT chip view.
Figure 1–3. Stratix IV GT Chip View (1)
Note to Figure 1–3:
(1) Resource counts vary with device selection, package selection, or both.
General Purpose
I/O and Memory
Interface
600 Mbps-11.3 Gbps CDR-based Transceiver
General Purpose I/O and up to 1.6 Gbps
LVDS interface with DPA and Soft-CDR
PCI Express
Hard IP Block
PCI Express
Hard IP Block
PCI Express
Hard IP Block
PCI Express
Hard IP Block
Transceiver
Block
Transceiver
Block
Transceiver
Block
Transceiver
Block
General Purpose
I/O and Memory
Interface
PLL
PLL
PLL
PLL
PLL PLL
General Purpose
I/O and Memory
Interface
General Purpose
I/O and Memory
Interface
PLL PLL
FPGA Fabric
(Logic Elements, DSP,
Embedded Memory,
Clock Networks)
Transceiver Block
General Purpose I/O and
High-Speed LVDS I/O
with DPA and Soft CDR
General Purpose
I/O and
High-Speed
LVDS I/O with
DPA and Soft CDR
PLL
PLL
PLL
PLL
General Purpose
I/O and
High-Speed
LVDS I/O with
DPA and Soft CDR
General Purpose
I/O and
High-Speed
LVDS I/O with
DPA and Soft CDR
General Purpose
I/O and
High-Speed
LVDS I/O with
DPA and Soft CDR
Transceiver
Block
Transceiver
Block
Transceiver
Block
Transceiver
Block
1–6 Chapter 1: Overview for the Stratix IV Device Family
Architecture Features
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2016 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Architecture Features
The Stratix IV device family features are divided into high-speed transceiver features
and FPGA fabric and I/O features.
1The high-speed transceiver features apply only to Stratix IV GX and Stratix IV GT
devices.
High-Speed Transceiver Features
The following sections describe high-speed transceiver features for Stratix IV GX and
GT devices.
Highest Aggregate Data Bandwidth
Up to 48 full-duplex transceiver channels supporting data rates up to 8.5 Gbps in
Stratix IV GX devices and up to 11.3 Gbps in Stratix IV GT devices.
Wide Range of Protocol Support
Physical layer support for the following serial protocols:
■Stratix IV GX—PCIe Gen1 and Gen2, GbE, Serial RapidIO, SONET/SDH,
XAUI/HiGig, (OIF) CEI-6G, SD/HD/3G-SDI, Fibre Channel, SFI-5, GPON,
SAS/SATA, HyperTransport 1.0 and 3.0, and Interlaken
■Stratix IV GT—40G/100G Ethernet, SFI-S, Interlaken, SFI-5.1, Serial RapidIO,
SONET/SDH, XAUI/HiGig, (OIF) CEI-6G, 3G-SDI, and Fibre Channel
■Extremely flexible and easy-to-configure transceiver data path to implement
proprietary protocols
■PCIe Support
■Complete PCIe Gen1 and Gen2 protocol stack solution compliant to PCI
Express base specification 2.0 that includes PHY-MAC, Data Link, and
transaction layer circuitry embedded in PCI Express hard IP blocks
fFor more information, refer to the PCI Express Compiler User Guide.
■Root complex and end-point applications
■x1, x4, and x8 lane configurations
■PIPE 2.0-compliant interface
■Embedded circuitry to switch between Gen1 and Gen2 data rates
■Built-in circuitry for electrical idle generation and detection, receiver detect,
power state transitions, lane reversal, and polarity inversion
■8B/10B encoder and decoder, receiver synchronization state machine, and
± 300 parts per million (ppm) clock compensation circuitry
■Transaction layer support for up to two virtual channels (VCs)
Chapter 1: Overview for the Stratix IV Device Family 1–7
Architecture Features
January 2016 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
■XAUI/HiGig Support
■Compliant to IEEE802.3ae specification
■Embedded state machine circuitry to convert XGMII idle code groups (||I||)
to and from idle ordered sets (||A||, ||K||, ||R||) at the transmitter and
receiver, respectively
■8B/10B encoder and decoder, receiver synchronization state machine, lane
deskew, and ± 100 ppm clock compensation circuitry
■GbE Support
■Compliant to IEEE802.3-2005 specification
■Automatic idle ordered set (/I1/, /I2/) generation at the transmitter,
depending on the current running disparity
■8B/10B encoder and decoder, receiver synchronization state machine, and
± 100 ppm clock compensation circuitry
■Support for other protocol features such as MSB-to-LSB transmission in
SONET/SDH configuration and spread-spectrum clocking in PCIe configurations
Diagnostic Features
■Serial loopback from the transmitter serializer to the receiver CDR for transceiver
PCS and PMA diagnostics
■Reverse serial loopback pre- and post-CDR to transmitter buffer for physical link
diagnostics
■Loopback master and slave capability in PCI Express hard IP blocks
fFor more information, refer to the PCI Express Compiler User Guide.
Signal Integrity
Stratix IV devices simplify the challenge of signal integrity through a number of chip,
package, and board-level enhancements to enable efficient high-speed data transfer
into and out of the device. These enhancements include:
■Programmable 3-tap transmitter pre-emphasis with up to 8,192 pre-emphasis
levels to compensate for pre-cursor and post-cursor inter-symbol interference (ISI)
■Up to 900% boost capability on the first pre-emphasis post-tap
■User-controlled and adaptive 4-stage receiver equalization with up to 16 dB of
high-frequency gain
■On-die power supply regulators for transmitter and receiver phase-locked loop
(PLL) charge pump and voltage controlled oscillator (VCO) for superior noise
immunity
■On-package and on-chip power supply decoupling to satisfy transient current
requirements at higher frequencies, thereby reducing the need for on-board
decoupling capacitors
■Calibration circuitry for transmitter and receiver on-chip termination (OCT)
resistors
1–8 Chapter 1: Overview for the Stratix IV Device Family
Architecture Features
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2016 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
FPGA Fabric and I/O Features
The following sections describe the Stratix IV FPGA fabric and I/O features.
Device Core Features
■Up to 531,200 LEs in Stratix IV GX and GT devices and up to 813,050 LEs in
Stratix IV E devices, efficiently packed in unique and innovative adaptive logic
modules (ALMs)
■Ten ALMs per logic array block (LAB) deliver faster performance, improved logic
utilization, and optimized routing
■Programmable power technology, including a variety of process, circuit, and
architecture optimizations and innovations
■Programmable power technology available to select power-driven compilation
options for reduced static power consumption
Embedded Memory
■TriMatrix embedded memory architecture provides three different memory block
sizes to efficiently address the needs of diversified FPGA designs:
■640-bit MLAB
■9-Kb M9K
■144-Kb M144K
■Up to 33,294 Kb of embedded memory operating at up to 600 MHz
■Each memory block is independently configurable to be a single- or dual-port
RAM, FIFO, ROM, or shift register
Digital Signal Processing (DSP) Blocks
■Flexible DSP blocks configurable as 9 x 9-bit, 12 x 12-bit, 18 x 18-bit, and 36 x 36-bit
full-precision multipliers at up to 600 MHz with rounding and saturation
capabilities
■Faster operation due to fully pipelined architecture and built-in addition,
subtraction, and accumulation units to combine multiplication results
■Optimally designed to support advanced features such as adaptive filtering, barrel
shifters, and finite and infinite impulse response (FIR and IIR) filters
Clock Networks
■Up to 16 global clocks and 88 regional clocks optimally routed to meet the
maximum performance of 800 MHz
■Up to 112 and 132 periphery clocks in Stratix IV GX and Stratix IV E devices,
respectively
■Up to 66 (16 GCLK + 22 RCLK + 28 PCLK) clock networks per device quadrant in
Stratix IV GX and Stratix IV GT devices
■Up to 71 (16 GCLK + 22 RCLK + 33 PCLK) clock networks per device quadrant in
Stratix IV E devices
Chapter 1: Overview for the Stratix IV Device Family 1–9
Architecture Features
January 2016 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
PLLs
■Three to 12 PLLs per device supporting spread-spectrum input tracking,
programmable bandwidth, clock switchover, dynamic reconfiguration, and delay
compensation
■On-chip PLL power supply regulators to minimize noise coupling
I/O Features
■Sixteen to 24 modular I/O banks per device with 24 to 48 I/Os per bank designed
and packaged for optimal simultaneous switching noise (SSN) performance and
migration capability
■Support for a wide range of industry I/O standards, including single-ended
(LVTTL/CMOS/PCI/PCIX), differential (LVDS/mini-LVDS/RSDS),
voltage-referenced single-ended and differential (SSTL/HSTL Class I/II) I/O
standards
■On-chip series (RS) and on-chip parallel (RT) termination with auto-calibration for
single-ended I/Os and on-chip differential (RD) termination for differential I/Os
■Programmable output drive strength, slew rate control, bus hold, and weak
pull-up capability for single-ended I/Os
■User I/O:GND:VCC ratio of 8:1:1 to reduce loop inductance in the package—PCB
interface
■Programmable transmitter differential output voltage (VOD) and pre-emphasis for
high-speed LVDS I/O
High-Speed Differential I/O with DPA and Soft-CDR
■Dedicated circuitry on the left and right sides of the device to support differential
links at data rates from 150 Mbps to 1.6 Gbps
■Up to 98 differential SERDES in Stratix IV GX devices, up to 132 differential
SERDES in Stratix IV E devices, and up to 47 differential SERDES in Stratix IV GT
devices
■DPA circuitry at the receiver automatically compensates for channel-to-channel
and channel-to-clock skew in source synchronous interfaces
■Soft-CDR circuitry at the receiver allows implementation of asynchronous serial
interfaces with embedded clocks at up to 1.6 Gbps data rate (SGMII and GbE)
External Memory Interfaces
■Support for existing and emerging memory interface standards such as DDR
SDRAM, DDR2 SDRAM, DDR3 SDRAM, QDRII SRAM, QDRII+ SRAM, and
RLDRAM II
■DDR3 up to 1,067 Mbps/533 MHz
■Programmable DQ group widths of 4 to 36 bits (includes parity bits)
■Dynamic OCT, trace mismatch compensation, read-write leveling, and half-rate
register capabilities provide a robust external memory interface solution
1–10 Chapter 1: Overview for the Stratix IV Device Family
Architecture Features
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2016 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
System Integration
■All Stratix IV devices support hot socketing
■Four configuration modes:
■Passive Serial (PS)
■Fast Passive Parallel (FPP)
■Fast Active Serial (FAS)
■JTAG configuration
■Ability to perform remote system upgrades
■256-bit advanced encryption standard (AES) encryption of configuration bits
protects your design against copying, reverse engineering, and tampering
■Built-in soft error detection for configuration RAM cells
fFor more information about how to connect the PLL, external memory interfaces, I/O,
high-speed differential I/O, power, and the JTAG pins to PCB, refer to the
Stratix IV GX and Stratix IV E Device Family Pin Connection Guidelines and the
Stratix IV GT Device Family Pin Connection Guidelines.
Chapter 1: Overview for the Stratix IV Device Family 1–11
Architecture Features
January 2016 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
Table 1–1 lists the Stratix IV GX device features.
Table 1–1. Stratix IV GX Device Features (Part 1 of 2)
Feature EP4SGX70 EP4SGX110 EP4SGX180 EP4SGX230 EP4SGX290 EP4SGX360 EP4SGX530
Package
Option
F780
F1152
F780
F1152
F780
F1152
F1517
F780
F1152
F1517
F780
F1152
F1517
F1760
F1932
F780
F1152
F1517
F1760
F1932
F1760
F1932
ALMs 29,040 42,240 70,300 91,200 116,480 141,440 212,480
LEs 72,600 105,600 175,750 228,000 291,200 353,600 531,200
0.6 Gbps-
8.5 Gbps
Transceivers
(PMA + PCS)
(1)
— 16 — — 16 — —1624 — — 1624 — — 16242432 — — 162424 32 24 32
0.6 Gbps-
6.5 Gbps
Transceivers
(PMA + PCS)
(1)
8 — 8 16 — 8 16 — — 8 16 — — 16 16 — — — — 16 16 — — — — — —
PMA-only
CMU
Channels
(0.6 Gbps-
6.5 Gbps)
— 8 — — 8 — — 8 12 — — 8 12 — — 8 12 12 16 — — 8 12 12 16 12 16
PCI Express
hard IP
Blocks
121 2 1 2 1 2 2 4 2 4 4
High-Speed
LVDS
SERDES (up
to 1.6 Gbps)
(4)
28 56 28 28 56 28 44 88 28 44 88 — 44 88 88 98 — 44 88 88 98 88 98
SPI-4.2 Links 1 1 1 2 4 1 2 4 — 2 4 — 2 4 4
1–12 Chapter 1: Overview for the Stratix IV Device Family
Architecture Features
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2016 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
M9K Blocks
(256 x
36 bits)
462 660 950 1,235 936 1,248 1,280
M144K
Blocks
(2048 x
72 bits)
16 16 20 22 36 48 64
Total Memory
(MLAB+M9K
+M144K) Kb
7,370 9,564 13,627 17,133 17,248 22,564 27,376
Embedded
Multipliers
18 x 18 (2)
384 512 920 1,288 832 1,040 1,02
41,024
PLLs 3 4 3 4 3 6 8 3 6 8 4 6 8 12 12 4 6 8 12 12 12 12
User I/Os (3) 372 488 372 372 48
8372 56
4
56
4
74
4372 564 56
4
74
4289 564 56
4
74
4
88
0
92
0289 564 56
4
74
4
88
0920 880 920
Speed Grade
(fastest to
slowest) (5)
–2,
–3,
–4
–2,
–3,
–4
–2
,
–3,
–4
–2
,
–3,
–4
–2,
–3,
–4
–2
,
–3,
–4
–2
,
–3,
–4
–2
,
–3
,
–4
–2,
–3,
–4
–2
,
–3,
–4
–2
,
–3,
–4
–2,
–3,
–4
–2,
–3,
–4
–2
,
–3,
–4
–2
,
–3,
–4
–2,
–3,
–4
–2,
–3,
–4
–2,
–3,
–4
–2,
–3,
–4
–2
,
–3,
–4
–2
,
–3,
–4
–2,
–3,
–4
–2,
–3,
–4
–2,
–3,
–4
–2,
–3,
–4
–2, –3,
–4
–2, –3,
–4
Notes to Table 1–1:
(1) The total number of transceivers is divided equally between the left and right side of each device, except for the devices in the F780 package. These devices have eight transceiver channels located only
on the right side of the device.
(2) Four multiplier adder mode.
(3) The user I/Os count from pin-out files includes all general purpose I/O, dedicated clock pins, and dual purpose configuration pins. Transceiver pins and dedicated configuration pins are not included in
the pin count.
(4) Total pairs of high-speed LVDS SERDES take the lowest channel count of RX/TX.
(5) The difference between the Stratix IV GX devices in the –2 and –2x speed grades is the number of available transceiver channels. The –2 device allows you to use the transceiver CMU blocks as
transceiver channels. The –2x device does NOT allow you to use the CMU blocks as transceiver channels. In addition to the reduction of available transceiver channels in the Stratix IV GX –2x device,
the data rates in the –2x device are limited to 6.5 Gbps.
Table 1–1. Stratix IV GX Device Features (Part 2 of 2)
Feature EP4SGX70 EP4SGX110 EP4SGX180 EP4SGX230 EP4SGX290 EP4SGX360 EP4SGX530
Package
Option
F780
F1152
F780
F1152
F780
F1152
F1517
F780
F1152
F1517
F780
F1152
F1517
F1760
F1932
F780
F1152
F1517
F1760
F1932
F1760
F1932
Chapter 1: Overview for the Stratix IV Device Family 1–13
Architecture Features
January 2016 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
Table 1–2 lists the Stratix IV GX device package options.
1On-package decoupling reduces the need for on-board or PCB decoupling capacitors by satisfying the transient current
requirements at higher frequencies. The Power Delivery Network design tool for Stratix IV devices accounts for the on-package
decoupling and reflects the reduced requirements for PCB decoupling capacitors.
Table 1–2. Stratix IV GX Device Package Options (1), (2)
Device F780
(29 mm x 29 mm) (6)
F1152
(35 mm x 35 mm)
(6)
F1152
(35 mm x 35 mm) (5), (7)
F1517
(40 mm x 40 mm)
(5), (7)
F1760
(42.5 mm x 42.5 mm)
(7)
F1932
(45 mm x 45 mm)
(7)
EP4SGX70 DF29 — — HF35 — — — —
EP4SGX110 DF29 — FF35 HF35 — — — —
EP4SGX180 DF29 — FF35 — HF35 KF40 — —
EP4SGX230 DF29 — FF35 — HF35 KF40 — —
EP4SGX290 — FH29 (3) FF35 — HF35 KF40 KF43 NF45
EP4SGX360 — FH29 (3) FF35 — HF35 KF40 KF43 NF45
EP4SGX530 — — — — HH35 (4) KH40 (4) KF43 NF45
Notes to Table 1–2:
(1) Device packages in the same column and marked under the same arrow sign have vertical migration capability.
(2) Use the Pin Migration Viewer in the Pin Planner to verify the pin migration compatibility when migrating devices. For more information, refer to I/O Management in the Quartus II Handbook, Volume 2.
(3) The 780-pin EP4SGX290 and EP4SGX360 devices are available only in 33 mm x 33 mm Hybrid flip chip package.
(4) The 1152-pin and 1517-pin EP4SGX530 devices are available only in 42.5 mm x 42.5 mm Hybrid flip chip packages.
(5) When migrating between hybrid and flip chip packages, there is an additional keep-out area. For more information, refer to the Package Information Datasheet for Altera Devices.
(6) Devices listed in this column are available in –2x, –3, and –4 speed grades. These devices do not have on-package decoupling capacitors.
(7) Devices listed in this column are available in –2, –3, and –4 speed grades. These devices have on-package decoupling capacitors. For more information about on-package decoupling capacitor value
in each device, refer to Table 1–3.
1–14 Chapter 1: Overview for the Stratix IV Device Family
Architecture Features
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2016 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Table 1–3 lists the Stratix IV GX device on-package decoupling information.
Table 1–3. Stratix IV GX Device On-Package Decoupling Information (1)
Ordering Information VCC VCCIO VCCL_GXB VCCA_L/R VCCT and VCCR (Shared)
EP4SGX70 HF35 21uF + 2470nF 10nF per bank (2) 100nF per transceiver block 100nF 1470nF + 147nF per side
EP4SGX110 HF35 21uF + 2470nF 10nF per bank (2) 100nF per transceiver block 100nF 1470nF + 147nF per side
EP4SGX180 HF35
KF40 21uF + 2470nF 10nF per bank (2) 100nF per transceiver block 100nF 1470nF + 147nF per side
EP4SGX230 HF35
KF40 21 uF + 2470 nF 10 nF per bank (2) 100 nF per transceiver block 100 nF 1470 nF + 147 nF
per side
EP4SGX290
HF35
KF40
KF43
NF45
41 uF + 4470 nF 10 nF per bank (2) 100 nF per transceiver block 100nF 1470 nF + 147 nF
per side
EP4SGX360
HF35
KF40
KF43
NF45
41 uF + 4470 nF 10 nF per bank (2) 100 nF per transceiver block 100 nF 1470 nF + 147 nF
per side
EP4SGX530
HH35
KH40
KF43
NF45
41 uF + 4470 nF 10 nF per bank (2) 100 nF per transceiver block 100 nF 1470 nF + 147 nF
per side
Notes to Table 1–3:
(1) Table 1–3 refers to production devices on-package decoupling. For more information about decoupling design of engineering sample (ES) devices, contact Altera Technical Support.
(2) For I/O banks 3(*), 4(*), 7(*), and 8(*) only. There is no OPD for I/O bank 1(*), 2(*), 5(*), and 6(*).
Chapter 1: Overview for the Stratix IV Device Family 1–15
Architecture Features
January 2016 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
Table 1–4 lists the Stratix IV E device features.
Table 1–4. Stratix IV E Device Features
Feature EP4SE230 EP4SE360 EP4SE530 EP4SE820
Package Pin Count 780 780 1152 1152 1517 1760 1152 1517 1760
ALMs 91,200 141,440 212,480 325,220
LEs 228,000 353,600 531,200 813,050
High-Speed LVDS
SERDES (up to
1.6 Gbps) (1)
56 56 88 88 112 112 88 112 132
SPI-4.2 Links 3 3 4 4 6 4 6 6
M9K Blocks
(256 x 36 bits) 1,235 1,248 1,280 1610
M144K Blocks
(2048 x 72 bits) 22 48 64 60
Total Memory
(MLAB+M9K+
M144K) Kb
17,133 22,564 27,376 33,294
Embedded Multipliers
(18 x 18) (2) 1,288 1,040 1,024 960
PLLs 4 4 8 8 12 12 8 12 12
User I/Os (3) 488 488 744 744 976 976 744 (4) 976 (4) 1120 (4)
Speed Grade
(fastest to slowest) –2, –3, –4 –2, –3, –4 –2, –3, –4 –2, –3, –4 –2, –3, –4 –2, –3, –4 –3, –4 –3, –4 –3, –4
Notes to Table 1–4:
(1) The user I/O count from the pin-out files include all general purpose I/Os, dedicated clock pins, and dual purpose configuration pins. Transceiver pins
and dedicated configuration pins are not included in the pin count.
(2) Four multiplier adder mode.
(3) Total pairs of high-speed LVDS SERDES take the lowest channel count of RX/TX.
(4) This data is preliminary.
1–16 Chapter 1: Overview for the Stratix IV Device Family
Architecture Features
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2016 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Table 1–5 summarizes the Stratix IV E device package options.
Table 1–6 lists the Stratix IV E on-package decoupling information.
Table 1–7 lists the Stratix IV GT device features.
Table 1–5. Stratix IV E Device Package Options (1), (2)
Device F780
(29 mm x 29 mm) (5), (6)
F1152
(35 mm x 35 mm) (5), (7)
F1517
(40 mm x 40 mm) (7)
F1760
(42.5 mm x 42.5 mm) (7)
EP4SE230 F29 — — —
EP4SE360 H29 (3) F35 — —
EP4SE530 — H35 (4) H40 (4) F43
EP4SE820 — H35 (4) H40 (4) F43
Notes to Table 1–5:
(1) Device packages in the same column and marked under the same arrow sign have vertical migration capability.
(2) Use the Pin Migration Viewer in the Pin Planner to verify the pin migration compatibility when migrating devices. For more information, refer to
I/O Management in the Quartus II Handbook, Volume 2.
(3) The 780-pin EP4SE360 device is available only in the 33 mm x 33 mm Hybrid flip chip package.
(4) The 1152-pin and 1517-pin for EP4SE530 and EP4SE820 devices are available only in the 42.5 mm x 42.5 mm Hybrid flip chip package.
(5) When migrating between hybrid and flip chip packages, there is an additional keep-out area. For more information, refer to the Package
Information Datasheet for Altera Devices.
(6) Devices listed in this column do not have on-package decoupling capacitors.
(7) Devices listed in this column have on-package decoupling capacitors. For more information about on-package decoupling capacitor value for
each device, refer to Table 1–6.
Table 1–6. Stratix IV E Device On-Package Decoupling Information (1)
Ordering Information VCC VCCIO
EP4SE360 F35 41 uF + 4470 nF 10 nF per bank
EP4SE530
H35
H40
F43
41 uF + 4470 nF 10 nF per bank
EP4SE820
H35
H40
F43
41 uF + 4470 nF 10 nF per bank
Note to Table 1–6:
(1) Table 1–6 refers to production devices on-package decoupling. For more information about decoupling design of engineering sample (ES)
devices, contact Altera Technical Support.
Table 1–7. Stratix IV GT Device Features (Part 1 of 2)
Feature EP4S40G2 EP4S40G5 EP4S100G2 EP4S100G3 EP4S100G4 EP4S100G5
Package Pin Count 1517 1517 1517 1932 1932 1517 1932
ALMs 91,200 212,480 91,200 116,480 141,440 212,480
LEs 228,000 531,200 228,000 291,200 353,600 531,200
Total Transceiver
Channels 36 36 36 48 48 36 48
Chapter 1: Overview for the Stratix IV Device Family 1–17
Architecture Features
January 2016 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
10G Transceiver
Channels
(600 Mbps - 11.3 Gbps
with PMA + PCS)
12 12 24 24 24 24 32
8G Transceiver
Channels
(600 Mbps - 8.5 Gbps
with PMA + PCS) (1)
12 12 0 8 8 0 0
PMA-only CMU
Channels
(600 Mbps- 6.5 Gbps)
12 12 12 16 16 12 16
PCIe hard IP Blocks 2 2 2 4 4 2 4
High-Speed LVDS
SERDES
(up to 1.6 Gbps) (2)
46 46 46 47 47 46 47
SP1-4.2 Links 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
M9K Blocks
(256 x 36 bits) 1,235 1,280 1,235 936 1,248 1,280
M144K Blocks
(2048 x 72 bits) 22 64 22 36 48 64
Total Memory (MLAB +
M9K + M144K) Kb 17,133 27,376 17,133 17,248 22,564 27,376
Embedded Multipliers
18 x 18 (3) 1,288 1,024 1,288 832 1,024 1,024
PLLs 8 8 8 12 12 8 12
User I/Os (4), (5) 654 654 654 781 781 654 781
Speed Grade
(fastest to slowest) –1, –2, –3 –1, –2, –3 –1, –2, –3 –1, –2, –3 –1, –2, –3 –1, –2, –3 –1, –2, –3
Notes to Table 1–7:
(1) You can configure all 10G transceiver channels as 8G transceiver channels. For example, the EP4S40G2F40 device has twenty-four 8G
transceiver channels and the EP4S100G5F45 device has thirty-two 8G transceiver channels.
(2) Total pairs of high-speed LVDS SERDES take the lowest channel count of RX/TX.
(3) Four multiplier adder mode.
(4) The user I/O count from the pin-out files include all general purpose I/Os, dedicated clock pins, and dual purpose configuration pins. Transceiver
pins and dedicated configuration pins are not included in the pin count.
(5) This data is preliminary.
Table 1–7. Stratix IV GT Device Features (Part 2 of 2)
Feature EP4S40G2 EP4S40G5 EP4S100G2 EP4S100G3 EP4S100G4 EP4S100G5
1–18 Chapter 1: Overview for the Stratix IV Device Family
Architecture Features
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2016 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Table 1–8 lists the resource counts for the Stratix IV GT devices.
Table 1–9 lists the Stratix IV GT on-package decoupling information.
Table 1–8. Stratix IV GT Device Package Options (1), (2)
Device 1517 Pin
(40 mm x 40 mm) (3)
1932 Pin
(45 mm x 45 mm)
Stratix IV GT 40 G Devices
EP4S40G2 F40 —
EP4S40G5 H40 (4), (5) —
Stratix IV GT 100 G Devices
EP4S100G2 F40 —
EP4S100G3 — F45
EP4S100G4 — F45
EP4S100G5 H40 (4), (5) F45
Notes to Table 1–8:
(1) This table represents pin compatability; however, it does not include hard IP block placement compatability.
(2) Devices under the same arrow sign have vertical migration capability.
(3) When migrating between hybrid and flip chip packages, there is an additional keep-out area. For more information,
refer to the Altera Device Package Information Data Sheet.
(4) EP4S40G5 and EP4S100G5 devices with 1517 pin-count are only available in 42.5-mm x 42.5-mm Hybrid flip chip
packages.
(5) If you are using the hard IP block, migration is not possible.
Table 1–9. Stratix IV GT Device On-Package Decoupling Information (1)
Ordering
Information VCC VCCIO VCCL_GXB VCCA_L/R VCCT_L/R VCCR_L/R
EP4S40G2F40
EP4S100G2F40 21 uF + 2470 nF 10 nF per bank (2) 100 nF per
transceiver block 100 nF 100 nF 100 nF
EP4S100G3F45
41 uF + 4470 nF 10 nF per bank (2) 100 nF per
transceiver block 100 nF 100 nF 100 nF
EP4S100G4F45
EP4S40G5H40
EP4S100G5H40
EP4S100G5F45
Notes to Table 1–9:
(1) Table 1–9 refers to production devices on-package decoupling. For more information about decoupling design of engineering sample (ES)
devices, contact Altera Technical Support.
(2) For I/O banks 3(*), 4(*), 7(*), and 8(*) only. There is no OPD for I/O bank 1(*), 2(*), 5(*), and 6(*).
Chapter 1: Overview for the Stratix IV Device Family 1–19
Integrated Software Platform
January 2016 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
Integrated Software Platform
The Quartus II software provides an integrated environment for HDL and schematic
design entry, compilation and logic synthesis, full simulation and advanced timing
analysis, SignalTap II Logic Analyzer, and device configuration of Stratix IV designs.
The Quartus II software provides the MegaWizard Plug-In Manager user interface to
generate different functional blocks, such as memory, PLL, and digital signal
processing logic. For transceivers, the Quartus II software provides the ALTGX
MegaWizard Plug-In Manager interface that guides you through configuration of the
transceiver based on your application requirements.
The Stratix IV GX and GT transceivers allow you to implement low-power and
reliable high-speed serial interface applications with its fully reconfigurable
hardware, optimal signal integrity, and integrated Quartus II software platform.
fFor more information about the QuarJanuary2016tus II software features, refer to the
Quartus II Handbook.
Ordering Information
This section describes the Stratix IV E, GT, and GX devices ordering information.
Figure 1–4 shows the ordering codes for Stratix IV GX and E devices.
Figure 1–4. Stratix IV GX and E Device Packaging Ordering Information
Device Density
Transceiver Count
Package Type
2, 2x, 3, or 4, with 2 being the fastest
Contact Altera for availability
Corresponds to pin count
29 = 780 pins
35 = 1152 pins
40 = 1517 pins
43 = 1760 pins
45 = 1932 pins
F: FineLine BGA (FBGA)
H: Hybrid FineLine BGA
EP4SGX: Stratix IV Transceiver
D: 8
F: 16
H: 24
K: 36
N: 48
EP4SE: Stratix IV Logic/Memory
70
110
180
230
290
360
530
820
Optional SuffixFa m i l y S i g n a t u r e
Operating Temperature
Sp e e d Gr ad e
N: RoHS5
G: RoHS6
Leaded
RoHS
Ball Array Dimension
2EP4SGX 230 CG
40
FK ES
Indicates specific device
options or shipment method
ES: Engineering sample
C: Commercial Temperature (tJ=0° C to 85° C)
I: Industrial Temperature (tJ=–40° C to 100° C)
M: Military Temperature (tJ=–55° C to 125° C)
1–20 Chapter 1: Overview for the Stratix IV Device Family
Ordering Information
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2016 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Figure 1–5 shows the ordering codes for Stratix IV GT devices.
Document Revision History
Table 1–10 lists the revision history for this chapter.
Figure 1–5. Stratix IV GT Device Packaging Ordering Information
o
Device Density
Package Type
1, 2, 3 with 1 being the fastest
Corresponds to pin count
40 = 1517 pins
45 = 1932 pins
F: FineLine BGA (FBGA)
H: Hybrid FineLine BGA
2 = 230k LEs
3 = 290k LEs
4 = 360k LEs
5 = 530k LEs
C: Commercial temperature (tJ=0 Cto85 C)
In du st ri al t emper at ure (t J= 0°C to 100°C)
Optional SuffixFa m i l y S i g n a t u r e
Operating Temperature
Sp eed Grade
Ball Array Dimension
2
EP4S 230 C
40
FES
Indicates specific device options
N: Lead-free devices
I:
ES: Engineering sample
Aggregate Bandwidth
EP4S 240G
40G
100G
Table 1–10. Document Revision History (Part 1 of 2)
Date Version Changes
January 2016 3.5 ■Updated Figure 1–4 with new RoHS information
September 2012 3.4
■Updated Table 1–1 to close FB #30986.
■Updated Table 1–2 and Table 1–5 to close FB #31127.
June 2011 3.3 ■Added military temperature to Figure 1–4.
February 2011 3.2
■Updated Table 1–7 and Table 1–8.
■Applied new template.
■Minor text edits.
March 2010 3.1
■Updated Table 1–1, Table 1–2, and Table 1–7.
■Updated Figure 1–3.
■Updated the “Stratix IV GT Devices” section.
■Added two new references to the Introduction section.
■Minor text edits.
Chapter 1: Overview for the Stratix IV Device Family 1–21
Ordering Information
January 2016 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
November 2009 3.0
■Updated the “Stratix IV Device Family Overview”, “Feature Summary”, “Stratix IV GT
Devices”, “High-Speed Transceiver Features”, “FPGA Fabric and I/O Features”, “Highest
Aggregate Data Bandwidth”, “System Integration”, and “Integrated Software Platform”
sections.
■Added Table 1–3, Table 1–6, and Table 1–9.
■Updated Table 1–1, Table 1–2, Table 1–4, Table 1–5, Table 1–7, and Table 1–8.
■Updated Figure 1–3, Figure 1–4, and Figure 1–5.
■Minor text edits.
June 2009 2.4
■Updated Table 1–1.
■Minor text edits.
April 2009 2.3
■Added Table 1–5, Table 1–6, and Figure 1–3.
■Updated Figure 1–5.
■Updated Table 1–1, Table 1–2, Table 1–3, and Table 1–4.
■Updated “Introduction”, “Feature Summary”, “Stratix IV GX Devices”, “Stratix IV GT
Devices”, “Architecture Features”, and “FPGA Fabric and I/O Features”
March 2009 2.2
■Updated “Feature Summary”, “Stratix IV GX Devices”, “Stratix IV E Device”, “Stratix IV
GT Devices”, “Signal Integrity”
■Removed Tables 1-5 and 1-6
■Updated Figure 1–4
March 2009 2.1
■Updated “Introduction”, “Feature Summary”, “Stratix IV Device Diagnostic Features”,
“Signal Integrity”, “Clock Networks”,“High-Speed Differential I/O with DPA and Soft-
CDR”, “System Integration”, and “Ordering Information” sections.
■Added “Stratix IV GT 100G Devices” and “Stratix IV GT 100G Transceiver Bandwidth”
sections.
■Updated Table 1–1, Table 1–2, Table 1–3, and Table 1–4.
■Added Table 1–5 and Table 1–6.
■Updated Figure 1–3 and Figure 1–4.
■Added Figure 1–5.
■Removed “Referenced Documents” section.
November 2008 2.0
■Updated “Feature Summary” on page 1–1.
■Updated “Stratix IV Device Diagnostic Features” on page 1–7.
■Updated “FPGA Fabric and I/O Features” on page 1–8.
■Updated Table 1–1.
■Updated Table 1–2.
■Updated “Table 1–5 shows the total number of transceivers available in the Stratix IV GT
Device.” on page 1–15.
July 2008 1.1 Revised “Introduction”.
May 2008 1.0 Initial release.
Table 1–10. Document Revision History (Part 2 of 2)
Date Version Changes
1–22 Chapter 1: Overview for the Stratix IV Device Family
Ordering Information
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2016 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
SIV51002-3.1
© 2011 Altera Corporation. All rights reserved. ALTERA, ARRIA, CYCLONE, HARDCOPY, MAX, MEGACORE, NIOS, QUARTUS and STRATIX words and logos
are trademarks of Altera Corporation and registered in the U.S. Patent and Trademark Office and in other countries. All other words and logos identified as
trademarks or service marks are the property of their respective holders as described at www.altera.com/common/legal.html. Altera warrants performance of its
semiconductor products to current specifications in accordance with Altera's standard warranty, but reserves the right to make changes to any products and
services at any time without notice. Altera assumes no responsibility or liability arising out of the application or use of any information, product, or service
described herein except as expressly agreed to in writing by Altera. Altera customers are advised to obtain the latest version of device specifications before relying
on any published information and before placing orders for products or services.
Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
February 2011
Feedback Subscribe
ISO
9001:2008
Registered
2. Logic Array Blocks and Adaptive Logic
Modules in Stratix IV Devices
This chapter describes the features of the logic array blocks (LABs) in the Stratix®IV
core fabric. LABs are made up of adaptive logic modules (ALMs) that you can
configure to implement logic functions, arithmetic functions, and register functions.
LABs and ALMs are the basic building blocks of the Stratix IV device. Use these to
configure logic, arithmetic, and register functions. The ALM provides advanced
features with efficient logic usage and is completely backward-compatible.
This chapter contains the following sections:
■“Logic Array Blocks”
■“Adaptive Logic Modules” on page 2–5
Logic Array Blocks
Each LAB consists of ten ALMs, various carry chains, shared arithmetic chains, LAB
control signals, local interconnect, and register chain connection lines. The local
interconnect transfers signals between ALMs in the same LAB. The direct link
interconnect allows the LAB to drive into the local interconnect of its left and right
neighbors. Register chain connections transfer the output of the ALM register to the
adjacent ALM register in the LAB. The Quartus®II Compiler places associated logic in
the LAB or adjacent LABs, allowing the use of local, shared arithmetic chain, and
register chain connections for performance and area efficiency.
February 2011
SIV51002-3.1
2–2 Chapter 2: Logic Array Blocks and Adaptive Logic Modules in Stratix IV Devices
Logic Array Blocks
Stratix IV Device Handbook February 2011 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Figure 2–1 shows the Stratix IV LAB structure and interconnects.
The LAB of the Stratix IV device has a derivative called memory LAB (MLAB), which
adds look-up table (LUT)-based SRAM capability to the LAB, as shown in Figure 2–2.
The MLAB supports a maximum of 640 bits of simple dual-port static random access
memory (SRAM). You can configure each ALM in an MLAB as either a 64 × 1 or a
32 × 2 block, resulting in a configuration of either a 64 × 10 or a 32 × 20 simple
dual-port SRAM block. MLAB and LAB blocks always coexist as pairs in all Stratix IV
families. MLAB is a superset of the LAB and includes all LAB features.
Figure 2–1. Stratix IV LAB Structure and Interconnects
Direct link
interconnect from
adjacent block
Direct link
interconnect to
adjacent block
Row Interconnects of
Variable Speed & Length
Column Interconnects of
Variable Speed & Length
Local Interconnect is Driven
from Either Side by Columns & LABs,
& from Above by Rows
Local Interconnect LAB
Direct link
interconnect from
adjacent block
Direct link
interconnect to
adjacent block
ALMs
MLAB
C4 C12
R20
R4
Chapter 2: Logic Array Blocks and Adaptive Logic Modules in Stratix IV Devices 2–3
Logic Array Blocks
February 2011 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
fFor more information about the MLAB, refer to the chapter.
Figure 2–2. Stratix IV LAB and MLAB Structure
Note to Figure 2–2:
(1) You can use the MLAB ALM as a regular LAB ALM or configure it as a dual-port SRAM, as shown.
MLAB LAB
LUT-based-64 x 1
Simple dual-port SRAM
LUT-based-64 x 1
Simple dual-port SRAM
LUT-based-64 x 1
Simple dual-port SRAM
LUT-based-64 x 1
Simple dual-port SRAM
LUT-based-64 x 1
Simple dual-port SRAM
LUT-based-64 x 1
Simple dual-port SRAM
LUT-based-64 x 1
Simple dual-port SRAM
LUT-based-64 x 1
Simple dual-port SRAM
LUT-based-64 x 1
Simple dual-port SRAM
LUT-based-64 x 1
Simple dual-port SRAM
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
ALM
ALM
ALM
ALM
ALM
ALM
ALM
ALM
ALM
ALM
LAB Control Block
LAB Control Block
2–4 Chapter 2: Logic Array Blocks and Adaptive Logic Modules in Stratix IV Devices
Logic Array Blocks
Stratix IV Device Handbook February 2011 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
LAB Interconnects
The LAB local interconnect can drive ALMs in the same LAB. It is driven by column
and row interconnects and ALM outputs in the same LAB. Neighboring
LABs/MLABs, M9K RAM blocks, M144K blocks, or digital signal processing (DSP)
blocks from the left or right can also drive the LAB’s local interconnect through the
direct link connection. The direct link connection feature minimizes the use of row
and column interconnects, providing higher performance and flexibility. Each LAB
can drive 30 ALMs through fast-local and direct-link interconnects.
Figure 2–3 shows the direct-link connection.
LAB Control Signals
Each LAB contains dedicated logic for driving control signals to its ALMs. Control
signals include three clocks, three clock enables, two asynchronous clears, a
synchronous clear, and synchronous load control signals. This gives a maximum of 10
control signals at a time. Although you generally use synchronous-load and clear
signals when implementing counters, you can also use them with other functions.
Each LAB has two unique clock sources and three clock enable signals, as shown in
Figure 2–4. The LAB control block can generate up to three clocks using two clock
sources and three clock enable signals. Each LAB’s clock and clock enable signals are
linked. For example, any ALM in a particular LAB using the
labclk1
signal also uses
the
labclkena1
signal. If the LAB uses both the rising and falling edges of a clock, it
also uses two LAB-wide clock signals. De-asserting the clock enable signal turns off
the corresponding LAB-wide clock.
Figure 2–3. Direct-Link Connection
Chapter 2: Logic Array Blocks and Adaptive Logic Modules in Stratix IV Devices 2–5
Adaptive Logic Modules
February 2011 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
The LAB row clocks [5..0] and LAB local interconnects generate the LAB-wide control
signals. The MultiTrack interconnect’s inherent low skew allows clock and control
signal distribution in addition to data.
Adaptive Logic Modules
The ALM is the basic building block of logic in the Stratix IV architecture. It provides
advanced features with efficient logic usage. Each ALM contains a variety of
LUT-based resources that can be divided between two combinational adaptive LUTs
(ALUTs) and two registers. With up to eight inputs for the two combinational ALUTs,
one ALM can implement various combinations of two functions. This adaptability
allows an ALM to be completely backward-compatible with four-input LUT
architectures. One ALM can also implement any function with up to six inputs and
certain seven-input functions.
Figure 2–4. LAB-Wide Control Signals
Dedicated Row LAB Clocks
Local Interconnect
Local Interconnect
Local Interconnect
Local Interconnect
Local Interconnect
Local Interconnect
labclk2 syncload
labclkena0
or asyncload
or labpreset
labclk0
labclk1 labclr1
labclkena1 labclkena2 labclr0 synclr
6
6
6
There are two unique
clock signals per LAB.
2–6 Chapter 2: Logic Array Blocks and Adaptive Logic Modules in Stratix IV Devices
Adaptive Logic Modules
Stratix IV Device Handbook February 2011 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
In addition to the adaptive LUT-based resources, each ALM contains two
programmable registers, two dedicated full adders, a carry chain, a shared arithmetic
chain, and a register chain. Through these dedicated resources, an ALM can efficiently
implement various arithmetic functions and shift registers. Each ALM drives all types
of interconnects: local, row, column, carry chain, shared arithmetic chain, register
chain, and direct link. Figure 2–5 shows a high-level block diagram of the Stratix IV
ALM.
Figure 2–5. High-Level Block Diagram of the Stratix IV ALM
DQ To general or
local routing
reg0
To general or
local routing
datae0
dataf0
reg_chain_in
reg_chain_out
adder0
dataa
datab
datac
datad
datae1
dataf1
DQ To general or
local routing
reg1
To general or
local routing
adder1
carry_in
carry_out
Combinational/Memory ALUT0
6-Input LUT
6-Input LUT
shared_arith_out
shared_arith_in
Combinational/Memory ALUT1
labclk
Chapter 2: Logic Array Blocks and Adaptive Logic Modules in Stratix IV Devices 2–7
Adaptive Logic Modules
February 2011 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
Figure 2–6 shows a detailed view of all the connections in an ALM.
One ALM contains two programmable registers. Each register has data, clock, clock
enable, synchronous and asynchronous clear, and synchronous load and clear inputs.
Global signals, general-purpose I/O pins, or any internal logic can drive the register’s
clock and clear-control signals. Either general-purpose I/O pins or internal logic can
drive the clock enable. For combinational functions, the register is bypassed and the
output of the LUT drives directly to the outputs of an ALM.
Each ALM has two sets of outputs that drive the local, row, and column routing
resources. The LUT, adder, or register outputs can drive these output drivers (refer to
Figure 2–6). For each set of output drivers, two ALM outputs can drive column, row,
or direct-link routing connections. One of these ALM outputs can also drive local
interconnect resources. This allows the LUT or adder to drive one output while the
register drives another output.
Figure 2–6. Stratix IV ALM Connection Details
D Q
+
reg_chain_in
aclr[1:0]
sclr
syncload
clk[2:0]
carry_in
dataf0
datae0
dataa
datab
datac1
datae1
dataf1
shared_arith_out carry_out
reg_chain_out
CLR
D Q
CLR
shared_arith_in
local
interconnect
row, column
direct link routing
row, column
direct link routing
local
interconnect
4-INPUT
LUT
4-INPUT
LUT
3-INPUT
LUT
3-INPUT
LUT
3-INPUT
LUT
3-INPUT
LUT
+
datac0
VCC
GND
row, column
direct link routing
row, column
direct link routing
2–8 Chapter 2: Logic Array Blocks and Adaptive Logic Modules in Stratix IV Devices
Adaptive Logic Modules
Stratix IV Device Handbook February 2011 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
This feature, called register packing, improves device utilization because the device
can use the register and the combinational logic for unrelated functions. Another
special packing mode allows the register output to feed back into the LUT of the same
ALM so that the register is packed with its own fan-out LUT. This provides another
mechanism for improved fitting. The ALM can also drive out registered and
unregistered versions of the LUT or adder output.
ALM Operating Modes
The Stratix IV ALM operates in one of the following modes:
■Normal
■Extended LUT
■Arithmetic
■Shared Arithmetic
■LUT-Register
Each mode uses ALM resources differently. In each mode, eleven available inputs to
an ALM—the eight data inputs from the LAB local interconnect, carry-in from the
previous ALM or LAB, the shared arithmetic chain connection from the previous
ALM or LAB, and the register chain connection—are directed to different destinations
to implement the desired logic function. LAB-wide signals provide clock,
asynchronous clear, synchronous clear, synchronous load, and clock enable control for
the register. These LAB-wide signals are available in all ALM modes.
For more information about the LAB-wide control signals, refer to “LAB Control
Signals” on page 2–4.
The Quartus II software and supported third-party synthesis tools, in conjunction
with parameterized functions such as the library of parameterized modules (LPM)
functions, automatically choose the appropriate mode for common functions such as
counters, adders, subtractors, and arithmetic functions.
Chapter 2: Logic Array Blocks and Adaptive Logic Modules in Stratix IV Devices 2–9
Adaptive Logic Modules
February 2011 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
Normal Mode
Normal mode is suitable for general logic applications and combinational functions.
In this mode, up to eight data inputs from the LAB local interconnect are inputs to the
combinational logic. Normal mode allows two functions to be implemented in one
Stratix IV ALM, or a single function of up to six inputs. The ALM can support certain
combinations of completely independent functions and various combinations of
functions that have common inputs.
Figure 2–7 shows the supported LUT combinations in normal mode.
Normal mode provides complete backward-compatibility with four-input LUT
architectures.
Figure 2–7. ALM in Normal Mode (1)
Note to Figure 2–7:
(1) Combinations of functions with fewer inputs than those shown are also supported. For example, combinations of functions with the following
number of inputs are supported: 4 and 3, 3 and 3, 3 and 2, and 5 and 2.
6-Input
LUT
dataf0
datae0
dataf0
datae0
dataa
datab
dataa
datab
datab
datac
datac
dataf0
datae0
dataa
datac
6-Input
LUT
datad
datad
datae1
combout0
combout1
combout0
combout1
combout0
combout1
dataf1
datae1
dataf1
datad
datae1
dataf1
4-Input
LUT
4-Input
LUT
4-Input
LUT
6-Input
LUT
dataf0
datae0
dataa
datab
datac
datad
combout0
5-Input
LUT
5-Input
LUT
dataf0
datae0
dataa
datab
datac
datad
combout0
combout1
datae1
dataf1
5-Input
LUT
dataf0
datae0
dataa
datab
datac
datad
combout0
combout1
datae1
dataf1
5-Input
LUT
3-Input
LUT
2–10 Chapter 2: Logic Array Blocks and Adaptive Logic Modules in Stratix IV Devices
Adaptive Logic Modules
Stratix IV Device Handbook February 2011 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
For the packing of 2 five-input functions into one ALM, the functions must have at
least two common inputs. The common inputs are
dataa
and
datab
. The combination
of a four-input function with a five-input function requires one common input (either
dataa
or
datab
).
In the case of implementing 2 six-input functions in one ALM, four inputs must be
shared and the combinational function must be the same. In a sparsely used device,
functions that could be placed in one ALM may be implemented in separate ALMs by
the Quartus II software to achieve the best possible performance. As a device begins
to fill up, the Quartus II software automatically uses the full potential of the Stratix IV
ALM. The Quartus II Compiler automatically searches for functions using common
inputs or completely independent functions to be placed in one ALM to make efficient
use of device resources. In addition, you can manually control resource usage by
setting location assignments.
You can implement any six-input function using inputs
dataa
,
datab
,
datac
,
datad
,
and either
datae0
and
dataf0
or
datae1
and
dataf1
. If you use
datae0
and
dataf0
, the
output is driven to
register0
, and/or
register0
is bypassed and the data drives out
to the interconnect using the top set of output drivers (refer to Figure 2–8). If you use
datae1
and
dataf1
, the output either drives to
register1
or bypasses
register1
and
drives to the interconnect using the bottom set of output drivers. The Quartus II
Compiler automatically selects the inputs to the LUT. ALMs in normal mode support
register packing.
Figure 2–8. Input Function in Normal Mode (1)
Notes to Figure 2–8:
(1) If you use datae1 and dataf1 as inputs to a six-input function, datae0 and dataf0 are available for register packing.
(2) The dataf1 input is available for register packing only if the six-input function is unregistered.
6-Input
LUT
dataf0
datae0
dataa
datab
datac
datad
datae1
dataf1
DQ
DQ
To general or
local routing
To general or
local routing
To general or
local routing
reg0
reg1
These inputs are available for register packing.
(2)
labclk
Chapter 2: Logic Array Blocks and Adaptive Logic Modules in Stratix IV Devices 2–11
Adaptive Logic Modules
February 2011 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
Extended LUT Mode
Use extended LUT mode to implement a specific set of seven-input functions. The set
must be a 2-to-1 multiplexer fed by two arbitrary five-input functions sharing four
inputs. Figure 2–9 shows the template of supported seven-input functions using
extended LUT mode. In this mode, if the seven-input function is unregistered, the
unused eighth input is available for register packing.
Functions that fit into the template shown in Figure 2–9 occur naturally in designs.
These functions often appear in designs as “if-else” statements in Verilog HDL or
VHDL code.
Figure 2–9. Template for Supported Seven-Input Functions in Extended LUT Mode
Note to Figure 2–9:
(1) If the seven-input function is unregistered, the unused eighth input is available for register packing. The second register, reg1, is
not available.
datae0
combout0
5-Input
LUT
5-Input
LUT
datac
dataa
datab
datad
dataf0
datae1
dataf1
DQ To general or
local routing
To general or
local routing
reg0
This input is available
for register packing.
(1)
2–12 Chapter 2: Logic Array Blocks and Adaptive Logic Modules in Stratix IV Devices
Adaptive Logic Modules
Stratix IV Device Handbook February 2011 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Arithmetic Mode
Arithmetic mode is ideal for implementing adders, counters, accumulators, wide
parity functions, and comparators. The ALM in arithmetic mode uses two sets of
2 four-input LUTs along with two dedicated full adders. The dedicated adders allow
the LUTs to be available to perform pre-adder logic; therefore, each adder can add the
output of 2 four-input functions.
The four LUTs share
dataa
and
datab
inputs. As shown in Figure 2–10, the carry-in
signal feeds to
adder0
and the carry-out from
adder0
feeds to the carry-in of
adder1
.
The carry-out from
adder1
drives to
adder0
of the next ALM in the LAB. ALMs in
arithmetic mode can drive out registered and/or unregistered versions of the adder
outputs.
While operating in arithmetic mode, the ALM can support simultaneous use of the
adder’s carry output along with combinational logic outputs. In this operation, adder
output is ignored. Using the adder with combinational logic output provides resource
savings of up to 50% for functions that can use this ability.
Arithmetic mode also offers clock enable, counter enable, synchronous up/down
control, add/subtract control, synchronous clear, and synchronous load. The LAB
local interconnect data inputs generate the clock enable, counter enable, synchronous
up/down, and add/subtract control signals. These control signals are good
candidates for the inputs that are shared between the four LUTs in the ALM. The
synchronous clear and synchronous load options are LAB-wide signals that affect all
registers in the LAB. These signals can also be individually disabled or enabled per
register. The Quartus II software automatically places any registers that are not used
by the counter into other LABs.
Figure 2–10. ALM in Arithmetic Mode
datae0
carry_in
carry_out
dataa
datab
datac
datad
datae1
DQ
DQ
To general or
local routing
To general or
local routing
reg0
reg1
To general or
local routing
To general or
local routing
4-Input
LUT
4-Input
LUT
4-Input
LUT
4-Input
LUT
adder1
adder0
dataf0
dataf1
Chapter 2: Logic Array Blocks and Adaptive Logic Modules in Stratix IV Devices 2–13
Adaptive Logic Modules
February 2011 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
Carry Chain
The carry chain provides a fast carry function between the dedicated adders in
arithmetic or shared-arithmetic mode. The two-bit carry select feature in Stratix IV
devices halves the propagation delay of carry chains within the ALM. Carry chains
can begin in either the first ALM or the fifth ALM in the LAB. The final carry-out
signal is routed to the ALM, where it is fed to local, row, or column interconnects.
The Quartus II Compiler automatically creates carry-chain logic during design
processing, or you can create it manually during design entry. Parameterized
functions such as LPM functions automatically take advantage of carry chains for the
appropriate functions.
The Quartus II Compiler creates carry chains longer than 20 (10 ALMs in arithmetic or
shared arithmetic mode) by linking LABs together automatically. For enhanced
fitting, a long carry chain runs vertically, allowing fast horizontal connections to
TriMatrix memory and DSP blocks. A carry chain can continue as far as a full column.
To avoid routing congestion in one small area of the device when a high fan-in
arithmetic function is implemented, the LAB can support carry chains that only use
either the top half or bottom half of the LAB before connecting to the next LAB. This
leaves the other half of the ALMs in the LAB available for implementing narrower
fan-in functions in normal mode. Carry chains that use the top five ALMs in the first
LAB carry into the top half of the ALMs in the next LAB within the column. Carry
chains that use the bottom five ALMs in the first LAB carry into the bottom half of the
ALMs in the next LAB within the column. In every alternate LAB column, the top half
can be bypassed; in the other MLAB columns, the bottom half can be bypassed.
For more information about carry-chain interconnects, refer to “ALM Interconnects”
on page 2–18.
2–14 Chapter 2: Logic Array Blocks and Adaptive Logic Modules in Stratix IV Devices
Adaptive Logic Modules
Stratix IV Device Handbook February 2011 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Shared Arithmetic Mode
In shared arithmetic mode, the ALM can implement a three-input add within the
ALM. In this mode, the ALM is configured with 4 four-input LUTs. Each LUT either
computes the sum of three inputs or the carry of three inputs. The output of the carry
computation is fed to the next adder (either to
adder1
in the same ALM or to
adder0
of
the next ALM in the LAB) using a dedicated connection called the shared arithmetic
chain. This shared arithmetic chain can significantly improve the performance of an
adder tree by reducing the number of summation stages required to implement an
adder tree. Figure 2–11 shows the ALM using this feature.
You can find adder trees in many different applications. For example, the summation
of the partial products in a logic-based multiplier can be implemented in a tree
structure. Another example is a correlator function that can use a large adder tree to
sum filtered data samples in a given time frame to recover or de-spread data that was
transmitted using spread-spectrum technology.
Shared Arithmetic Chain
The shared arithmetic chain available in enhanced arithmetic mode allows the ALM
to implement a three-input add. This significantly reduces the resources necessary to
implement large adder trees or correlator functions.
Shared arithmetic chains can begin in either the first or sixth ALM in the LAB. The
Quartus II Compiler creates shared arithmetic chains longer than 20 (10 ALMs in
arithmetic or shared arithmetic mode) by linking LABs together automatically. For
enhanced fitting, a long shared arithmetic chain runs vertically, allowing fast
horizontal connections to the TriMatrix memory and DSP blocks. A shared arithmetic
chain can continue as far as a full column.
Figure 2–11. ALM in Shared Arithmetic Mode
datae0
carry_in
shared_arith_in
shared_arith_out
carry_out
dataa
datab
datac
datad
datae1
DQ
DQ
To general or
local routing
To general or
local routing
reg0
reg1
To general or
local routing
To general or
local routing
4-Input
LUT
4-Input
LUT
4-Input
LUT
4-Input
LUT
labclk
Chapter 2: Logic Array Blocks and Adaptive Logic Modules in Stratix IV Devices 2–15
Adaptive Logic Modules
February 2011 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
Similar to the carry chains, the top and bottom halves of shared arithmetic chains in
alternate LAB columns can be bypassed. This capability allows the shared arithmetic
chain to cascade through half of the ALMs in an LAB while leaving the other half
available for narrower fan-in functionality. Every other LAB column is top-half
by-passable, while the other LAB columns are bottom-half by-passable.
For more information about the shared arithmetic chain interconnect, refer to “ALM
Interconnects” on page 2–18.
LUT-Register Mode
LUT-register mode allows third-register capability within an ALM. Two internal
feedback loops allow combinational
ALUT1
to implement the master latch and
combinational
ALUT0
to implement the slave latch needed for the third register. The
LUT register shares its clock, clock enable, and asynchronous clear sources with the
top dedicated register. Figure 2–12 shows the register constructed using two
combinational blocks within the ALM.
Figure 2–12. LUT Register from Two Combinational Blocks
4-input
LUT
5-input
LUT
clk
aclr
datain(datac)
sclr
sumout
combout
LUT regout
sumout
combout
2–16 Chapter 2: Logic Array Blocks and Adaptive Logic Modules in Stratix IV Devices
Adaptive Logic Modules
Stratix IV Device Handbook February 2011 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Figure 2–13 shows the ALM in LUT-register mode.
Figure 2–13. ALM in LUT-Register Mode with Three-Register Capability
datain
aclr
sclr regout
latchout
datain
sdata regout
aclr
datain
sdata regout
aclr
DC1
E0
F1
E1
F0
clk [2:0] aclr [1:0] reg_chain_in
lelocal 0
leout 0 a
leout 0 b
reg_chain_out
lelocal 1
leout 1 a
leout 1 b
Chapter 2: Logic Array Blocks and Adaptive Logic Modules in Stratix IV Devices 2–17
Adaptive Logic Modules
February 2011 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
Register Chain
In addition to general routing outputs, ALMs in the LAB have register-chain outputs.
Register-chain routing allows registers in the same LAB to be cascaded together. The
register-chain interconnect allows the LAB to use LUTs for a single combinational
function and the registers to be used for an unrelated shift-register implementation.
These resources speed up connections between ALMs while saving local interconnect
resources (refer to Figure 2–14). The Quartus II Compiler automatically takes
advantage of these resources to improve utilization and performance.
For more information about the register chain interconnect, refer to “ALM
Interconnects” on page 2–18.
Figure 2–14. Register Chain within the LAB (1)
Note to Figure 2–14:
(1) You can use the combinational or adder logic to implement an unrelated, un-registered function.
DQ
To general or
local routing
reg0
To general or
local routing
reg_chain_in
adder0
DQ
To general or
local routing
reg1
To general or
local routing
adder1
DQ
To general or
local routing
reg0
To general or
local routing
reg_chain_out
adder0
DQ
To general or
local routing
reg1
To general or
local routing
adder1
From previous ALM
within the LAB
To next ALM
within the LAB
Combinational
Logic
Combinational
Logic
labclk
2–18 Chapter 2: Logic Array Blocks and Adaptive Logic Modules in Stratix IV Devices
Adaptive Logic Modules
Stratix IV Device Handbook February 2011 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
ALM Interconnects
There are three dedicated paths between the ALMs—register cascade, carry chain,
and shared arithmetic chain. Stratix IV devices include an enhanced interconnect
structure in LABs for routing shared arithmetic chains and carry chains for efficient
arithmetic functions. The register chain connection allows the register output of one
ALM to connect directly to the register input of the next ALM in the LAB for fast shift
registers. These ALM-to-ALM connections bypass the local interconnect. The
Quartus II Compiler automatically takes advantage of these resources to improve
utilization and performance. Figure 2–15 shows the shared arithmetic chain, carry
chain, and register chain interconnects.
Clear and Preset Logic Control
LAB-wide signals control the logic for the register’s clear signal. The ALM directly
supports an asynchronous clear function. You can achieve the register preset through
the Quartus II software’s NOT-gate push-back logic option. Each LAB supports up to
two clears.
Stratix IV devices provide a device-wide reset pin (
DEV_CLRn
) that resets all the
registers in the device. An option set before compilation in the Quartus II software
controls this pin. This device-wide reset overrides all other control signals.
Figure 2–15. Shared Arithmetic Chain, Carry Chain, and Register Chain Interconnects
ALM 1
ALM 2
ALM 3
ALM 4
ALM 5
ALM 6
Carry chain & shared
arithmetic chain
routing to adjacent ALM
Local
interconnect
Register chain
routing to adjacent
ALM's register input
Local interconnect
routing among ALMs
in the LAB
ALM 7
ALM 8
ALM 9
ALM 10
Chapter 2: Logic Array Blocks and Adaptive Logic Modules in Stratix IV Devices 2–19
Adaptive Logic Modules
February 2011 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
LAB Power Management Techniques
The following techniques are used to manage static and dynamic power consumption
within the LAB:
■To save AC power, the Quartus II software forces all adder inputs low when ALM
adders are not in use.
■Stratix IV LABs operate in high-performance mode or low-power mode. The
Quartus II software automatically chooses the appropriate mode for the LAB,
based on the design, to optimize speed versus leakage trade-offs.
■Clocks represent a significant portion of dynamic power consumption due to their
high switching activity and long paths. The LAB clock that distributes a clock
signal to registers within an LAB is a significant contributor to overall clock power
consumption. Each LAB’s clock and clock enable signal are linked. For example, a
combinational ALUT or register in a particular LAB using the
labclk1
signal also
uses the
labclkena1
signal. To disable LAB-wide clock power consumption
without disabling the entire clock tree, use LAB-wide clock enable to gate the
LAB-wide clock. The Quartus II software automatically promotes register-level
clock enable signals to the LAB-level. All registers within the LAB that share a
common clock and clock enable are controlled by a shared, gated clock. To take
advantage of these clock enables, use a clock-enable construct in your HDL code
for the registered logic.
fFor more information about implementing static and dynamic power consumption
within the LAB, refer to the Power Optimization chapter in volume 2 of the Quartus II
Handbook.
Document Revision History
Table 2–1 lists the revision history for this chapter.
Table 2–1. Document Revision History
Date Version Changes
February 2011 3.1
■Updated Figure 2–6.
■Applied new template.
■Minor text edits.
November 2009 3.0
■Updated graphics.
■Minor text edits.
June 2009 2.2
■Removed the Conclusion section.
■Added introductory sentences to improve search ability.
■Minor text edits.
March 2009 2.1 Removed “Referenced Documents” section.
November 2008 2.0
■Updated Figure 2–6.
■Made minor editorial changes.
May 2008 1.0 Initial release.
2–20 Chapter 2: Logic Array Blocks and Adaptive Logic Modules in Stratix IV Devices
Adaptive Logic Modules
Stratix IV Device Handbook February 2011 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
SIV51003-3.3
© 2011 Altera Corporation. All rights reserved. ALTERA, ARRIA, CYCLONE, HARDCOPY, MAX, MEGACORE, NIOS, QUARTUS and STRATIX words and logos
are trademarks of Altera Corporation and registered in the U.S. Patent and Trademark Office and in other countries. All other words and logos identified as
trademarks or service marks are the property of their respective holders as described at www.altera.com/common/legal.html. Altera warrants performance of its
semiconductor products to current specifications in accordance with Altera's standard warranty, but reserves the right to make changes to any products and
services at any time without notice. Altera assumes no responsibility or liability arising out of the application or use of any information, product, or service
described herein except as expressly agreed to in writing by Altera. Altera customers are advised to obtain the latest version of device specifications before relying
on any published information and before placing orders for products or services.
Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
December 2011
Feedback Subscribe
ISO
9001:2008
Registered
3. TriMatrix Embedded Memory Blocks in
Stratix IV Devices
This chapter describes the TriMatrix embedded memory blocks in Stratix®IV devices.
TriMatrix embedded memory blocks provide three different sizes of embedded
SRAM to efficiently address the needs of Stratix IV FPGA designs. TriMatrix memory
includes 640-bit memory logic array blocks (MLABs), 9-Kbit M9K blocks, and
144-Kbit M144K blocks. MLABs have been optimized to implement filter delay lines,
small FIFO buffers, and shift registers. You can use the M9K blocks for general
purpose memory applications and the M144K blocks for processor code storage,
packet buffering, and video frame buffering.
You can independently configure each embedded memory block to be a single- or
dual-port RAM, FIFO buffer, ROM, or shift register using the Quartus®II
MegaWizard™ Plug-In Manager. You can stitch together multiple blocks of the same
type to produce larger memories with minimal timing penalty. TriMatrix memory
provides up to 31,491 Kbits of embedded SRAM at up to 600 MHz operation.
This chapter contains the following sections:
■“Overview”
■“Memory Modes” on page 3–9
■“Clocking Modes” on page 3–17
■“Design Considerations” on page 3–18
Overview
Table 3–1 lists the features supported by the three sizes of TriMatrix memory.
Table 3–1. Summary of TriMatrix Memory Features (Part 1 of 2)
Feature MLABs M9K Blocks M144K Blocks
Maximum performance 600 MHz 600 MHz 540 MHz
Total RAM bits
(including parity bits) 640 9216 147,456
December 2011
SIV51003-3.3
3–2 Chapter 3: TriMatrix Embedded Memory Blocks in Stratix IV Devices
Overview
Stratix IV Device Handbook December 2011 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Configurations
(depth × width)
64×8
64×9
64 × 10
32 × 16
32 × 18
32 × 20
8K × 1
4K × 2
2K × 4
1K × 8
1K × 9
512 × 16
512 × 18
256 × 32
256 × 36
16K × 8
16K × 9
8K × 16
8K × 18
4K × 32
4K × 36
2K × 64
2K × 72
Parity bits Supported Supported Supported
Byte enable Supported Supported Supported
Packed mode — Supported Supported
Address clock enable Supported Supported Supported
Single-port memory Supported Supported Supported
Simple dual-port memory Supported Supported Supported
True dual-port memory — Supported Supported
Embedded shift register Supported Supported Supported
ROM Supported Supported Supported
FIFO buffer Supported Supported Supported
Simple dual-port mixed
width support — Supported Supported
True dual-port mixed width
support — Supported Supported
Memory Initialization File
(.mif)Supported Supported Supported
Mixed clock mode Supported Supported Supported
Power-up condition
Outputs cleared if
registered, otherwise reads
memory contents
Outputs cleared Outputs cleared
Register clears Output registers Output registers Output registers
Write/Read operation
triggering
Write: Falling clock edges
Read: Rising clock edges
Write and Read: Rising clock
edges
Write and Read: Rising clock
edges
Same-port read-during-write Outputs set to don’t care Outputs set to old data or
new data
Outputs set to old data or
new data
Mixed-port read-during-write Outputs set to old data,
new data, or don’t care (1)
Outputs set to old data or
don’t care
Outputs set to old data or
don’t care
ECC Support Soft IP support using the
Quartus II software
Soft IP support using the
Quartus II software
Built-in support in ×64-wide
SDP mode or soft IP support
using the Quartus II software
Note to Table 3–1:
(1) The mixed-port read-during-write options of new data or old data are only supported for MLABs when you use both the read address registers
and the output registers.
Table 3–1. Summary of TriMatrix Memory Features (Part 2 of 2)
Feature MLABs M9K Blocks M144K Blocks
Chapter 3: TriMatrix Embedded Memory Blocks in Stratix IV Devices 3–3
Overview
December 2011 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
Table 3–2 lists the capacity and distribution of the TriMatrix memory blocks in each
Stratix IV family member.
TriMatrix Memory Block Types
While the M9K and M144K memory blocks are dedicated resources, the MLABs are
dual-purpose blocks. They can be configured as regular logic array blocks (LABs) or
as MLABs. Ten adaptive logic modules (ALMs) make up one MLAB. You can
configure each ALM in an MLAB as either a 64 × 1 or a 32 × 2 block, resulting in a
64 × 10 or 32 × 20 simple dual-port SRAM block in a single MLAB.
Parity Bit Support
All TriMatrix memory blocks have built-in parity-bit support. The ninth bit associated
with each byte can store a parity bit or serve as an additional data bit. No parity
function is actually performed on the ninth bit.
Byte Enable Support
All TriMatrix memory blocks support byte enables that mask the input data so that
only specific bytes of data are written. The unwritten bytes retain the previously
written values. The write enable (
wren
) signals, along with the byte enable (
byteena
)
signals, control the RAM blocks’ write operations.
Table 3–2. TriMatrix Memory Capacity and Distribution in Stratix IV Devices
Device MLABs M9K Blocks M144K
Blocks
Total Dedicated RAM Bits
(Dedicated Memory Blocks Only)
(Kb)
Total RAM Bits
(Including MLABs)
(Kb)
EP4SE230 4,560 1,235 22 14,283 17,133
EP4SE360 7,072 1,248 48 18,144 22,564
EP4SE530 10,624 1,280 64 20,736 27,376
EP4SE820 16,261 1,610 60 23,130 33,294
EP4SGX70 1,452 462 16 6,462 7,370
EP4SGX110 2,112 660 16 8,244 9,564
EP4SGX180 3,515 950 20 11,430 13,627
EP4SGX230 4,560 1,235 22 14,283 17,133
EP4SGX290 5,824 936 36 13,608 17,248
EP4SGX360 7,072 1,248 48 18,144 22,564
EP4SGX530 10,624 1,280 64 20,736 27,376
EP4S40G2 4,560 1,235 22 14,283 17,133
EP4S40G5 10,624 1280 64 20,736 27,376
EP4S100G2 4,560 1,235 22 14,283 17,133
EP4S100G3 5,824 936 36 13,608 17,248
EP4S100G4 7,072 1,248 48 18,144 22,564
EP4S100G5 10,624 1,280 64 20,736 27,376
3–4 Chapter 3: TriMatrix Embedded Memory Blocks in Stratix IV Devices
Overview
Stratix IV Device Handbook December 2011 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
The default value for the byte enable signals is high (enabled), in which case writing is
controlled only by the write enable signals. The byte enable registers have no clear
port. When using parity bits on the M9K and M144K blocks, the byte enable controls
all nine bits (eight bits of data plus one parity bit). When using parity bits on the
MLAB, the byte-enable controls all 10 bits in the widest mode.
The MSB for the
byteena
signal corresponds to the MSB of the data bus and the LSB of
the
byteena
signal corresponds to the LSB of the data bus. For example, if you use a
RAM block in ×18 mode, with
byteena = 01
,
data[8..0]
is enabled, and
data[17..9]
id disabled. Similarly, if
byteena = 11
, both
data[8..0]
and
data[17..9]
are enabled.
Byte enables are active high.
1You cannot use the byte enable feature when using the error correction coding (ECC)
feature on M144K blocks.
1Byte enables are only supported for true dual-port memory configurations when both
the PortA and PortB data widtByths of the individual M9K memory blocks are
multiples of 8 or 9 bits. For example, if you implement a mixed data width memory
configured with portA = 32 and portB = 8 as two separate 16 x 4 bit memories, you
cannot use the byte enable feature.
Figure 3–1 shows how the write enable (
wren
) and byte enable (
byteena
) signals
control the operations of the RAM blocks.
When a byte-enable bit is de-asserted during a write cycle, the corresponding data
byte output can appear as either a “don’t care” value or the current data at that
location. The output value for the masked byte is controllable using the Quartus II
software. When a byte-enable bit is asserted during a write cycle, the corresponding
data byte output also depends on the setting chosen in the Quartus II software.
Figure 3–1. Byte Enable Functional Waveform
inclock
wren
address
data
don't care: q (asynch)
byteena
XXXX ABCD XXXX
XX 10 01 11 XX
an a0 a1 a2 a0 a1 a2
ABCDFFFF
FFFF ABFF
FFFF FFCD
contents at a0
contents at a1
contents at a2
doutn ABXX XXCD ABCD ABFF FFCD ABCD
doutn ABFF FFCD ABCD ABFF FFCD ABCD
current data: q (asynch)
Chapter 3: TriMatrix Embedded Memory Blocks in Stratix IV Devices 3–5
Overview
December 2011 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
Packed Mode Support
Stratix IV M9K and M144K blocks support packed mode. The packed mode feature
packs two independent single-port RAMs into one memory block. The Quartus II
software automatically implements packed mode where appropriate by placing the
physical RAM block into true dual-port mode and using the MSB of the address to
distinguish between the two logical RAMs. The size of each independent single-port
RAM must not exceed half of the target block size.
3–6 Chapter 3: TriMatrix Embedded Memory Blocks in Stratix IV Devices
Overview
Stratix IV Device Handbook December 2011 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Address Clock Enable Support
All Stratix IV memory blocks support address clock enable, which holds the previous
address value for as long as the signal is enabled (
addressstall
=
1
). When the
memory blocks are configured in dual-port mode, each port has its own independent
address clock enable. The default value for the address clock enable signals is low
(disabled).
Figure 3–2 shows an address clock enable block diagram. The address clock enable is
referred to by the port name
addressstall
.
Figure 3–3 shows the address clock enable waveform during the read cycle.
Figure 3–2. Address Clock Enable
Figure 3–3. Address Clock Enable During Read Cycle Waveform
address[0]
address[N]
addressstall
clock
1
0
address[0]
register
address[N]
register address[N]
address[0]
1
0
inclock
rden
rdaddress
q (synch)
a0 a1 a2 a3 a4 a5 a6
q (asynch)
an a0 a4 a5
latched address
(inside memory)
dout0 dout1 dout4
dout4 dout5
addressstall
a1
doutn-1 doutn
doutn dout0 dout1
Chapter 3: TriMatrix Embedded Memory Blocks in Stratix IV Devices 3–7
Overview
December 2011 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
Figure 3–4 shows the address clock enable waveform during the write cycle.
Mixed Width Support
M9K and M144K memory blocks support mixed data widths inherently. MLABs can
support mixed data widths through emulation using the Quartus II software. When
using simple dual-port, true dual-port, or FIFO modes, mixed width support allows
you to read and write different data widths to a memory block. For more information
about the different widths supported per memory mode, refer to “Memory Modes”
on page 3–9.
1MLABs do not support mixed-width FIFO mode.
Asynchronous Clear
Stratix IV TriMatrix memory blocks support asynchronous clears on output latches
and output registers. Therefore, if your RAM is not using output registers, you can
still clear the RAM outputs using the output latch asynchronous clear. Figure 3–5
shows a waveform of the output latch asynchronous clear function.
You can selectively enable asynchronous clears per logical memory using the
Quartus II RAM MegaWizard Plug-In Manager.
fFor more information, refer to the Internal Memory (RAM and ROM) User Guide.
Figure 3–4. Address Clock Enable During the Write Cycle Waveform
inclock
wren
wraddress a0 a1 a2 a3 a4 a5 a6
an a0 a4 a5
latched address
(inside memory)
addressstall
a1
data 00 01 02 03 04 05 06
contents at a0
contents at a1
contents at a2
contents at a3
contents at a4
contents at a5
XX
04
XX
00
03
01
XX 02
XX
XX
XX 05
Figure 3–5. Output Latch Asynchronous Clear Waveform
aclr
aclr at latch
q
outclk
3–8 Chapter 3: TriMatrix Embedded Memory Blocks in Stratix IV Devices
Overview
Stratix IV Device Handbook December 2011 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Error Correction Code (ECC) Support
Stratix IV M144K blocks have built-in support for error correction code (ECC) when in
×64-wide simple dual-port mode. ECC allows you to detect and correct data errors in
the memory array. The M144K blocks have a single-error-correction
double-error-detection (SECDED) implementation. SECDED can detect and fix a
single bit error in a 64-bit word, or detect two bit errors in a 64-bit word. It cannot
detect three or more errors.
The M144K ECC status is communicated using a three-bit status flag
eccstatus[2..0]
. The status flag can be either registered or unregistered. When
registered, it uses the same clock and asynchronous clear signals as the output
registers. When unregistered, it cannot be asynchronously cleared.
Table 3–3 lists the truth table for the ECC status flags.
1You cannot use the byte enable feature when ECC is engaged.
1Read-during-write “old data mode” is not supported when ECC is engaged.
Table 3–3. Truth Table for ECC Status Flags
Status eccstatus[2] eccstatus[1] eccstatus[0]
No error 000
Single error and fixed 0 1 1
Double error and no fix 1 0 1
Illegal 0 0 1
Illegal 0 1 0
Illegal 1 0 0
Illegal 1 1 X
Chapter 3: TriMatrix Embedded Memory Blocks in Stratix IV Devices 3–9
Memory Modes
December 2011 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
Figure 3–6 shows a diagram of the ECC block of the M144K block.
Memory Modes
Stratix IV TriMatrix memory blocks allow you to implement fully synchronous SRAM
memory in multiple modes of operation. M9K and M144K blocks do not support
asynchronous memory (unregistered inputs). MLABs support asynchronous
(flow-through) read operations.
Depending on which TriMatrix memory block you target, you can use the following:
■“Single-Port RAM Mode” on page 3–10
■“Simple Dual-Port Mode” on page 3–11
■“True Dual-Port Mode” on page 3–14
■“Shift-Register Mode” on page 3–16
■“ROM Mode” on page 3–17
■“FIFO Mode” on page 3–17
cWhen using the memory blocks in ROM, single-port, simple dual-port, or true
dual-port mode, you can corrupt the memory contents if you violate the setup or
hold-time on any of the memory block input registers. This applies to both read and
write operations.
Figure 3–6. ECC Block Diagram of the M144K Block
Data Input
64 64
64
872
SECDED
Encoder
RAM
Array
72 64
64
8
8
8
8
64
64 3
Status Flags
Data Output
SECDED
Encoder Comparator
Error
Correction
Block
Error
Locator
Flag
Generator
3–10 Chapter 3: TriMatrix Embedded Memory Blocks in Stratix IV Devices
Memory Modes
Stratix IV Device Handbook December 2011 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Single-Port RAM Mode
All TriMatrix memory blocks support single-port mode. Single-port mode allows you
to do either one-read or one-write operation at a time. Simultaneous reads and writes
are not supported in single-port mode. Figure 3–7 shows the single-port RAM
configuration.
During a write operation, RAM output behavior is configurable. If you use the
read-enable signal and perform a write operation with read enable de-activated, the
RAM outputs retain the values they held during the most recent active read enable. If
you activate read enable during a write operation, or if you are not using the
read-enable signal at all, the RAM outputs either show the “new data” being written,
the “old data” at that address, or a “don’t care” value. To choose the desired behavior,
set the read-during-write behavior to either new data, old data, or don’t care in the
RAM MegaWizard Plug-In Manager in the Quartus II software. For more information,
refer to “Read-During-Write Behavior” on page 3–19.
Table 3–4 lists the possible port width configurations for TriMatrix memory blocks in
single-port mode.
Figure 3–7. Single-Port RAM (1)
Note to Figure 3–7:
(1) You can implement two single-port memory blocks in a single M9K or M144K block. For more information, refer to
“Packed Mode Support” on page 3–5.
Table 3–4. Port Width Configurations for MLABs, M9K, and M144K Blocks (Single-Port Mode)
MLABs M9K Blocks M144K Blocks
Port Width
Configurations
64×8
64×9
64 × 10
32 × 16
32 × 18
32 × 20
8K × 1
4K × 2
2K × 4
1K × 8
1K × 9
512 × 16
512 × 18
256 × 32
256 × 36
16K × 8
16K × 9
8K × 16
8K × 18
4K × 32
4K × 36
2K × 64
2K × 72
data[ ]
address[ ]
wren
byteena[]
addressstall
inclock
clockena
rden
aclr
outclock
q[]
Chapter 3: TriMatrix Embedded Memory Blocks in Stratix IV Devices 3–11
Memory Modes
December 2011 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
Figure 3–8 shows timing waveforms for read and write operations in single-port
mode with unregistered outputs. Registering the RAM’s outputs simply delays the
q
output by one clock cycle.
Simple Dual-Port Mode
All TriMatrix memory blocks support simple dual-port mode. Simple dual-port mode
allows you to perform one read and one write operation to different locations at the
same time. Write operation happens on port A; read operation happens on port B.
Figure 3–9 shows a simple dual-port configuration.
Simple dual-port mode supports different read and write data widths (mixed-width
support). Table 3–5 lists the mixed width configurations for M9K blocks in simple
dual-port mode. MLABs do not have native support for mixed-width operation. The
Quartus II software implements mixed-width memories in MLABs by using more
than one MLAB.
Figure 3–8. Timing Waveform for Read-Write Operations (Single-Port Mode)
clk_a
wrena
rdena
address A0 A1
bytenna 01 10 00 11
data_a A123 B456 C789 DDDD EEEE FFFF
q_a (asyn) A0
(old data)
A1
(old data)
DDDD EEEEB423
D
old
D
old
23
Figure 3–9. Stratix IV Simple Dual-Port Memory (1)
Note to Figure 3–9:
(1) Simple dual-port RAM supports input/output clock mode in addition to read/write clock mode.
data[ ]
wraddress[ ]
wren
byteena[]
wr_addressstall
wrclock
wrclocken
aclr
rdaddress[ ]
rden
q[ ]
rd_addressstall
rdclock
rdclocken
ecc_status
Table 3–5. M9K Block Mixed-Width Configurations (Simple Dual-Port Mode) (Part 1 of 2)
Read Port
Write Port
8K×1 4K×2 2K×4 1K×8 512×16 256×32 1K×9 512×18 256×36
8K×1 YYYY Y Y —— —
4K×2 YYYY Y Y —— —
2K×4 YYYY Y Y —— —
3–12 Chapter 3: TriMatrix Embedded Memory Blocks in Stratix IV Devices
Memory Modes
Stratix IV Device Handbook December 2011 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Table 3–6 lists the mixed-width configurations for M144K blocks in simple dual-port
mode.
In simple dual-port mode, M9K and M144K blocks support separate write-enable and
read-enable signals. You can save power by keeping the read-enable signal low
(inactive) when not reading. Read-during-write operations to the same address can
either output a “don’t care” value or “old data” value. To choose the desired behavior,
set the read-during-write behavior to either don’t care or old data in the RAM
MegaWizard Plug-In Manager in the Quartus II software. For more information, refer
to “Read-During-Write Behavior” on page 3–19.
MLABs only support a write-enable signal. For MLABs, you can set the same-port
read-during-write behavior to don’t care and the mixed-port read-during-write
behavior to either don’t care or old data. The available choices depend on the
configuration of the MLAB. There is no “new data” option for MLABs.
1K×8 YYYY Y Y —— —
512×16 YYYY Y Y —— —
256×32 YYYY Y Y —— —
1K×9 ———— — — Y Y Y
512×18 ———— — — Y Y Y
256×36 ———— — — Y Y Y
Table 3–5. M9K Block Mixed-Width Configurations (Simple Dual-Port Mode) (Part 2 of 2)
Read Port
Write Port
8K×1 4K×2 2K×4 1K×8 512×16 256×32 1K×9 512×18 256×36
Table 3–6. M144K Block Mixed-Width Configurations (Simple Dual-Port Mode)
Read Port
Write Port
16K × 8 8K × 16 4K × 32 2K × 64 16K × 9 8K × 18 4K × 36 2K × 72
16K×8 YYYY————
8K×16 YYYY————
4K×32 YYYY————
2K×64 YYYY————
16K×9 ———— YYYY
8K×18 ———— YYYY
4K×36 ———— YYYY
2K×72 ———— YYYY
Chapter 3: TriMatrix Embedded Memory Blocks in Stratix IV Devices 3–13
Memory Modes
December 2011 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
Figure 3–10 shows timing waveforms for read and write operations in simple
dual-port mode with unregistered outputs. Registering the RAM outputs simply
delays the
q
output by one clock cycle.
Figure 3–11 shows timing waveforms for read and write operations in mixed-port
mode with unregistered outputs.
Figure 3–10. Simple Dual-Port Timing Waveforms
wrclock
wren
wraddress
rdclock
an-1 an a0 a1 a2 a3 a4 a5 a6
q (asynch)
rden
rdaddress bn b0 b1 b2 b3
doutn-1 doutn dout0
din-1 din din4 din5 din6
data
Figure 3–11. Mixed-Port Read-During-Write Timing Waveforms
wrclock
wren
wraddress
rdclock
an-1 an a0 a1 a2 a3 a4 a5 a6
q (asynch)
rden
rdaddress bn b0 b1 b2 b3
doutn-1 doutn dout0
din-1 din din4 din5 din6
data
3–14 Chapter 3: TriMatrix Embedded Memory Blocks in Stratix IV Devices
Memory Modes
Stratix IV Device Handbook December 2011 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
True Dual-Port Mode
Stratix IV M9K and M144K blocks support true dual-port mode. Sometimes called
bi-directional dual-port, this mode allows you to perform any combination of two
port operations: two reads, two writes, or one read and one write at two different
clock frequencies.
Figure 3–12 shows the true dual-port RAM configuration.
The widest bit configuration of the M9K and M144K blocks in true dual-port mode is
as follows:
■M9K: 512 × 16-bit (or 512 ×18-bit with parity)
■M144K: 4K × 32-bit (or 4K ×36-bit with parity)
Wider configurations are unavailable because the number of output drivers is
equivalent to the maximum bit width of the respective memory block. Because true
dual-port RAM has outputs on two ports, its maximum width equals half of the total
number of output drivers. Table 3–7 lists the possible M9K block mixed-port width
configurations in true dual-port mode.
Figure 3–12. Stratix IV True Dual-Port Memory (1)
Note to Figure 3–12:
(1) True dual-port memory supports input/output clock mode in addition to independent clock mode.
Table 3–7. M9K Block Mixed-Width Configuration (True Dual-Port Mode)
Read Port
Write Port
8K × 1 4K × 2 2K × 4 1K × 8 512 × 16 1K × 9 512 × 18
8K×1 YYYYY——
4K×2 YYYYY——
2K×4 YYYYY——
1K×8 YYYYY——
512 × 16 Y Y Y Y Y — —
1K×9 —————YY
512 × 18 — — — — — Y Y
data_a[ ]
address_a[ ]
wren_a
byteena_a[]
addressstall_a
clock_a
rden_a
aclr_a
q_a[]
data_b[ ]
address_b[]
wren_b
byteena_b[]
addressstall_b
clock_b
rden_b
aclr_b
q_b[]
Chapter 3: TriMatrix Embedded Memory Blocks in Stratix IV Devices 3–15
Memory Modes
December 2011 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
Table 3–8 lists the possible M144K block mixed-port width configurations in true
dual-port mode.
In true dual-port mode, M9K and M144K blocks support separate write-enable and
read-enable signals. You can save power by keeping the read-enable signal low
(inactive) when not reading. Read-during-write operations to the same address can
either output “new data” at that location or “old data”. To choose the desired
behavior, set the read-during-write behavior to either new data or old data in the
RAM MegaWizard Plug-In Manager in the Quartus II software. For more information,
refer to “Read-During-Write Behavior” on page 3–19.
In true dual-port mode, you can access any memory location at any time from either
port. When accessing the same memory location from both ports, you must avoid
possible write conflicts. A write conflict happens when you attempt to write to the
same address location from both ports at the same time. This results in unknown data
being stored to that address location. No conflict resolution circuitry is built into the
Stratix IV TriMatrix memory blocks. You must handle address conflicts external to the
RAM block.
Figure 3–13 shows true dual-port timing waveforms for the write operation at port A
and the read operation at port B, with the read-during-write behavior set to new data.
Registering the RAM’s outputs simply delays the
q
outputs by one clock cycle.
Table 3–8. M144K Block Mixed-Width Configurations (True Dual-Port Mode)
Read Port
Write Port
16K × 8 8K × 16 4K × 32 16K × 9 8K × 18 4K × 36
16K × 8 Y Y Y — — —
8K×16 Y Y Y ———
4K×32 Y Y Y ———
16K × 9 — — — Y Y Y
8K×18 ———YYY
4K×36 ———YYY
Figure 3–13. True Dual-Port Timing Waveform
clk_a
wren_a
address_a
clk_b
an-1 an a0 a1 a2 a3 a4 a5 a6
q_b (asynch)
wren_b
address_bbnb0b1b2b3
doutn-1 doutn dout0
q_a (asynch)
din-1 din din4 din5 din6
data_a
din-1 din dout0 dout1 dout2 dout3 din4 din5
dout2
dout1
3–16 Chapter 3: TriMatrix Embedded Memory Blocks in Stratix IV Devices
Memory Modes
Stratix IV Device Handbook December 2011 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Shift-Register Mode
All Stratix IV memory blocks support shift register mode. Embedded memory block
configurations can implement shift registers for digital signal processing (DSP)
applications, such as finite impulse response (FIR) filters, pseudo-random number
generators, multi-channel filtering, and auto- and cross-correlation functions. These
and other DSP applications require local data storage, traditionally implemented with
standard flipflops that quickly exhaust many logic cells for large shift registers. A
more efficient alternative is to use embedded memory as a shift-register block, which
saves logic cell and routing resources.
The size of a shift register (
w
×
m
×
n
) is determined by the input data width (
w
), the
length of the taps (
m
), and the number of taps (
n
). You can cascade memory blocks to
implement larger shift registers.
Figure 3–14 shows the TriMatrix memory block in shift-register mode.
Figure 3–14. Shift-Register Memory Configuration
W
w x m x n Shift Register
m-Bit Shift Register
m-Bit Shift Register
m-Bit Shift Register
m-Bit Shift Register
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
n Number of Taps
Chapter 3: TriMatrix Embedded Memory Blocks in Stratix IV Devices 3–17
Clocking Modes
December 2011 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
ROM Mode
All Stratix IV TriMatrix memory blocks support ROM mode. A .mif file initializes the
ROM contents of these blocks. The address lines of the ROM are registered on M9K
and M144K blocks, but can be unregistered on MLABs. The outputs can be registered
or unregistered. Output registers can be asynchronously cleared. The ROM read
operation is identical to the read operation in the single-port RAM configuration.
FIFO Mode
All TriMatrix memory blocks support FIFO mode. MLABs are ideal for designs with
many small, shallow FIFO buffers. To implement FIFO buffers in your design, use the
Quartus II software FIFO MegaWizard Plug-In Manager. Both single- and dual-clock
(asynchronous) FIFO buffers are supported.
fFor more information about implementing FIFO buffers, refer to the SCFIFO and
DCFIFO Megafunctions User Guide.
1MLABs do not support mixed-width FIFO mode.
Clocking Modes
Stratix IV TriMatrix memory blocks support the following clocking modes:
■“Independent Clock Mode” on page 3–18
■“Input/Output Clock Mode” on page 3–18
■“Read/Write Clock Mode” on page 3–18
■“Single Clock Mode” on page 3–18
cViolating the setup or hold time on the memory block address registers could corrupt
memory contents. This applies to both read and write operations.
Table 3–9 lists which clocking mode/memory mode combinations are supported.
Table 3–9. TriMatrix Memory Clock Modes
Clocking Mode True
Dual-Port Mode
Simple
Dual-Port Mode Single-Port Mode ROM Mode FIFO Mode
Independent Y — — Y —
Input/output Y Y Y Y —
Read/write — Y — — Y
Single clock Y Y Y Y Y
3–18 Chapter 3: TriMatrix Embedded Memory Blocks in Stratix IV Devices
Design Considerations
Stratix IV Device Handbook December 2011 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Independent Clock Mode
Stratix IV TriMatrix memory blocks can implement independent clock mode for true
dual-port memories. In this mode, a separate clock is available for each port (clock A
and clock B). Clock A controls all registers on the port A side; clock B controls all
registers on the port B side. Each port also supports independent clock enables for
both port A and port B registers, respectively. Asynchronous clears are supported
only for output latches and output registers on both ports.
Input/Output Clock Mode
Stratix IV TriMatrix memory blocks can implement input/output clock mode for true
dual-port and simple dual-port memories. In this mode, an input clock controls all
registers related to the data input to the memory block including data, address, byte
enables, read enables, and write enables. An output clock controls the data output
registers. Asynchronous clears are available on output latches and output registers
only.
Read/Write Clock Mode
Stratix IV TriMatrix memory blocks can implement read/write clock mode for simple
dual-port memories. In this mode, a write clock controls the data-input,
write-address, and write-enable registers. Similarly, a read clock controls the
data-output, read-address, and read-enable registers. The memory blocks support
independent clock enables for both read and write clocks. Asynchronous clears are
available on data output latches and registers only.
When using read/write clock mode, if you perform a simultaneous read/write to the
same address location, the output read data is unknown. If you require the output
data to be a known value, use either single-clock mode or input/output clock mode
and choose the appropriate read-during-write behavior in the MegaWizard Plug-In
Manager.
Single Clock Mode
Stratix IV TriMatrix memory blocks can implement single-clock mode for true
dual-port, simple dual-port, and single-port memories. In this mode, a single clock,
together with a clock enable, is used to control all registers of the memory block.
Asynchronous clears are available on output latches and output registers only.
Design Considerations
This section describes guidelines for designing with TriMatrix memory blocks.
Selecting TriMatrix Memory Blocks
The Quartus II software automatically partitions user-defined memory into
embedded memory blocks by taking into account both speed and size constraints
placed on your design. For example, the Quartus II software may spread memory out
across multiple memory blocks when resources are available to increase the
performance of the design. You can manually assign memory to a specific block size
using the RAM MegaWizard Plug-In Manager.
Chapter 3: TriMatrix Embedded Memory Blocks in Stratix IV Devices 3–19
Design Considerations
December 2011 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
MLABs can implement single-port SRAM through emulation using the Quartus II
software. Emulation results in minimal additional logic resources being used. Because
of the dual-purpose architecture of the MLAB, it only has data input registers and
output registers in the block. MLABs gain input address registers and additional data
output registers from ALMs.
fFor more information about register packing, refer to the Logic Array Blocks and
Adaptive Logic Modules in Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Conflict Resolution
When using memory blocks in true dual-port mode, it is possible to attempt two write
operations to the same memory location (address). Because no conflict resolution
circuitry is built into the memory blocks, this results in unknown data being written to
that location. Therefore, you must implement conflict resolution logic external to the
memory block to avoid address conflicts.
Read-During-Write Behavior
You can customize the read-during-write behavior of the Stratix IV TriMatrix memory
blocks to suit your design needs. Two types of read-during-write operations are
available: same port and mixed port. Figure 3–15 shows the difference between the
two types.
Same-Port Read-During-Write Mode
This mode applies to either a single-port RAM or the same port of a true dual-port
RAM. For MLABs, the output of the MLABs can only be set to don’t care in same-port
read-during-write mode. In this mode, the output of the MLABs is unknown during a
write cycle. There is a window near the falling edge of the clock during which the
output is unknown. Prior to that window, “old data” is read out; after that window,
“new data” is seen at the output.
Figure 3–15. Stratix IV Read-During-Write Data Flow
Port A
data in
Port B
data in
Port A
data out
Port B
data out
Mixed-port
data flow
Same-port
data flow
3–20 Chapter 3: TriMatrix Embedded Memory Blocks in Stratix IV Devices
Design Considerations
Stratix IV Device Handbook December 2011 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Figure 3–16 shows sample functional waveforms of same-port read-during-write
behavior in don’t care mode for MLABs.
For M9K and M144K memory blocks, three output choices are available in same-port
read-during-write mode: “new data” (or flow-through) or “old data”. In new data
mode, the “new data” is available on the rising edge of the same clock cycle on which
it was written. In old data mode, the RAM outputs reflect the “old data” at that
address before the write operation proceeds. In don’t care mode, the RAM outputs
“unknown values” for a read-during-write operation.
Figure 3–17 shows sample functional waveforms of same-port read-during-write
behavior in new data mode for M9K and M144K blocks.
Figure 3–16. MLABs Same-Port Read-During Write: Don’t Care Mode
Figure 3–17. M9K and M144K Blocks Same-Port Read-During-Write: New Data Mode
clk_a
wrena
data_in
address A1
q(unregistered) A0(old data)
A2
FFFF AAAA XXXX
XX FFFF AAAA
A1(old data) A2(old data)
q(registered) FFFF AAAA
A0
XX
XX
XX
clk_a
wrena
rdena
address 0A 0B
bytenna 01 10 00 11
data_a A123 B456 C789 DDDD EEEE FFFF
q_a (asyn) XX23 B423 B423 DDDD EEEE FFFF
Chapter 3: TriMatrix Embedded Memory Blocks in Stratix IV Devices 3–21
Design Considerations
December 2011 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
Figure 3–18 shows sample functional waveforms of same-port read-during-write
behavior in old data mode for M9K and M144K blocks.
Mixed-Port Read-During-Write Mode
This mode applies to a RAM in simple or true dual-port mode that has one port
reading from and the other port writing to the same address location with the same
clock.
In this mode, you have two output choices if you use the output register: “old data,”
or “don’t care”. With MLABs, you also have the output register “new data.” In old
data mode, a read-during-write operation to different ports causes the RAM outputs
to reflect the “old data” at that address location. In don’t care mode, the same
operation results in a “don’t care” or “unknown” value on the RAM outputs.
fRead-during-write behavior is controlled with the RAM MegaWizard Plug-In
Manager. For more information, refer to the Internal Memory (RAM and ROM) User
Guide.
Figure 3–19 shows a sample functional waveform of mixed-port read-during-write
behavior for old data mode in MLABs.
Figure 3–18. M9K and M144K Blocks Same-Port Read-During-Write: Old Data Mode
clk_a
wrena
rdena
address A0 A1
bytenna 01 10 00 11
data_a A123 B456 C789 DDDD EEEE FFFF
q_a (asyn) A0
(old data)
A1
(old data)
DDDD EEEEB423
D
old
D
old
23
Figure 3–19. MLABs Mixed-Port Read-During-Write: Old Data Mode
clk_a
wrena
data_in
wraddress A1
byteena_a
q_b(registered)
A0
rdaddress A1
A0
AAAA BBBB CCCC DDDD EEEE FFFF
A0
(old data)
A1
(old data)
DDDDAABB
AAAA
11 01 10 11 01 10
DDEE
3–22 Chapter 3: TriMatrix Embedded Memory Blocks in Stratix IV Devices
Design Considerations
Stratix IV Device Handbook December 2011 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Figure 3–20 shows a sample functional waveform of mixed-port read-during-write
behavior for don’t care mode in MLABs.
Figure 3–21 shows a sample functional waveform of mixed-port read-during-write
behavior for old data mode in M9K and M144K blocks.
Figure 3–20. MLABs Mixed-Port Read-During-Write: Don’t Care Mode
Figure 3–21. M9K and M144K Blocks Mixed-Port Read-During Write: Old Data Mode
clk_a
wrena
data_in
wraddress A1
byteena_a
q_b(registered)
A0
rdaddress A1
A0
AAAA BBBB CCCC DDDD EEEE FFFF
AAAA DDDD DDEECCBB
AABB
11 01 10 11 01 10
FFEE
clk_a&b
wrena
address_a
bytenna 11 01 11
data_a
q_b_(asyn)
A0
(old data)
A1
(old data)
DDDD EEEEAABB
AAAA
A1
A0
AAAA BBBB CCCC DDDD EEEE FFFF
A1
A0
address_b
10
rdenb
Chapter 3: TriMatrix Embedded Memory Blocks in Stratix IV Devices 3–23
Design Considerations
December 2011 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
Figure 3–22 shows a sample functional waveform of mixed-port read-during-write
behavior for don’t care mode in M9K and M144K blocks.
Mixed-port read-during-write is not supported when two different clocks are used in
a dual-port RAM. The output value is unknown during a dual-clock mixed-port
read-during-write operation.
Power-Up Conditions and Memory Initialization
M9K memory cells are initialized to all zeros through a default .mif file in the
Quartus II software. However, you may specify your own initialization of the
memory cells through a defined .mif file. M144K memory cells are not initialized and;
therefore, come up in an undefined state. This is to prevent the programming file from
being too large. Again, you may specify your own initialization of the memory cells
through a defined .mif file.
MLABs power up to zero if output registers are used and power up reading the
memory contents if output registers are not used. You must take this into
consideration when designing logic that might evaluate the initial power-up values of
the MLAB memory block. For Stratix IV devices, the Quartus II software initializes
the RAM cells to zero unless there is a .mif file specified.
As mentioned, all memory blocks support initialization using a .mif file. You can
create .mif files in the Quartus II software and specify their use with the RAM
MegaWizard Plug-In Manager when instantiating a memory in your design. Even if a
memory is pre-initialized (for example, using a .mif file), it still powers up with its
outputs cleared.
fFor more information about .mif files, refer to the Internal Memory (RAM and ROM)
User Guide and the Quartus II Handbook.
Figure 3–22. M9K and M144K Blocks Mixed-Port Read-During Write: Don’t Care Mode
clk_a&b
wrena
rdenb
address_a A0 A1
bytenna 11 01 10 11
data_a AAAA BBBB CCCC DDDD EEEE FFFF
q_b_(asyn) XXXX (unknown data)
address_b A0 A1
3–24 Chapter 3: TriMatrix Embedded Memory Blocks in Stratix IV Devices
Design Considerations
Stratix IV Device Handbook December 2011 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Power Management
Stratix IV memory block clock-enables allow you to control clocking of each memory
block to reduce AC power consumption. Use the read-enable signal to ensure that
read operations only occur when you need them to. If your design does not need
read-during-write, you can reduce your power consumption by de-asserting the
read-enable signal during write operations, or any period when no memory
operations occur.
The Quartus II software automatically places any unused memory blocks in
low-power mode to reduce static power.
Document Revision History
Table 3–10 lists the revision history for this chapter.
Table 3–10. Document Revision History
Date Version Changes
December 2011 3.3
■Updated the “Byte Enable Support” and “Mixed-Port Read-During-Write Mode” sections.
■Updated Table 3–1.
February 2011 3.2
■Updated the “Byte Enable Support” and “Power-Up Conditions and Memory Initialization”
sections.
■Applied new template.
■Minor text edits.
March 2010 3.1
■Updated the “Simple Dual-Port Mode”, “Same-Port Read-During-Write Mode”, and
“Mixed-Port Read-During-Write Mode” sections.
■Updated Figure 3–14.
■Minor text edits.
November 2009 3.0
■Updated Table 3–2.
■Updated the “Simple Dual-Port Mode” section.
■Minor text edits.
■Updated graphics.
June 2009 2.3
■Updated Table 3–1 and Figure 3–2.
■Updated the “Introduction”, “Byte Enable Support”, “Mixed Width Support”,
“Asynchronous Clear”, “Single-Port RAM”, “Simple Dual-Port Mode”, “True Dual-Port
Mode”, “FIFO Mode”, and “Read/Write Clock Mode” sections.
■Added introductory sentences to improve search ability.
■Removed the Conclusion section.
■Minor text edits.
April 2009 2.2 ■Updated Table 3–2.
March 2009 2.1
■Updated Table 3–2.
■Removed “Referenced Documents” section.
November 2008 2.0 Updated “Power-Up Conditions and Memory Initialization” on page 3–20
May 2008 1.0 Initial release.
SIV51004-3.1
© 2011 Altera Corporation. All rights reserved. ALTERA, ARRIA, CYCLONE, HARDCOPY, MAX, MEGACORE, NIOS, QUARTUS and STRATIX words and logos
are trademarks of Altera Corporation and registered in the U.S. Patent and Trademark Office and in other countries. All other words and logos identified as
trademarks or service marks are the property of their respective holders as described at www.altera.com/common/legal.html. Altera warrants performance of its
semiconductor products to current specifications in accordance with Altera's standard warranty, but reserves the right to make changes to any products and
services at any time without notice. Altera assumes no responsibility or liability arising out of the application or use of any information, product, or service
described herein except as expressly agreed to in writing by Altera. Altera customers are advised to obtain the latest version of device specifications before relying
on any published information and before placing orders for products or services.
Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
February 2011
Feedback Subscribe
ISO
9001:2008
Registered
4. DSP Blocks in Stratix IV Devices
This chapter describes how the Stratix®IV device digital signal processing (DSP)
blocks are optimized to support DSP applications requiring high data throughput,
such as finite impulse response (FIR) filters, infinite impulse response (IIR) filters, fast
Fourier transform (FFT) functions, and encoders. You can configure the DSP blocks to
implement one of several operational modes to suit your application. The built-in
shift register chain, multipliers, and adders/subtractors minimize the amount of
external logic to implement these functions, resulting in efficient resource usage and
improved performance and data throughput for DSP applications.
Many complex systems, such as WiMAX, 3GPP WCDMA, high-performance
computing (HPC), voice over Internet protocol (VoIP), H.264 video compression,
medical imaging, and HDTV use sophisticated digital signal processing techniques,
which typically require a large number of mathematical computations. Stratix IV
devices are ideally suited for these tasks because the DSP blocks consist of a
combination of dedicated elements that perform multiplication, addition, subtraction,
accumulation, summation, and dynamic shift operations.
Along with the high-performance Stratix IV soft logic fabric and TriMatrix memory
structures, you can configure DSP blocks to build sophisticated fixed-point and
floating-point arithmetic functions. These can be manipulated easily to implement
common, larger computationally intensive subsystems such as FIR filters, complex
FIR filters, IIR filters, FFT functions, and discrete cosine transform (DCT) functions.
This chapter contains the following sections:
■“Stratix IV DSP Block Overview” on page 4–2
■“Stratix IV Simplified DSP Operation” on page 4–4
■“Stratix IV Operational Modes Overview” on page 4–8
■“Stratix IV DSP Block Resource Descriptions” on page 4–9
■“Stratix IV Operational Mode Descriptions” on page 4–15
■“Software Support” on page 4–36
February 2011
SIV51004-3.1
4–2 Chapter 4: DSP Blocks in Stratix IV Devices
Stratix IV DSP Block Overview
Stratix IV Device Handbook February 2011 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Stratix IV DSP Block Overview
Each Stratix IV device has two to seven columns of DSP blocks that implement
multiplication, multiply-add, multiply-accumulate (MAC), and dynamic shift
functions efficiently. Architectural highlights of the Stratix IV DSP block include:
■High-performance, power optimized, fully registered, and pipelined
multiplication operations
■Natively supported 9-, 12-, 18-, and 36-bit wordlengths
■Natively supported 18-bit complex multiplications
■Efficiently supported floating-point arithmetic formats (24-bit for single precision
and 53-bit for double precision)
■Signed and unsigned input support
■Built-in addition, subtraction, and accumulation units to combine multiplication
results efficiently
■Cascading 18-bit input bus to form the tap-delay line for filtering applications
■Cascading 44-bit output bus to propagate output results from one block to the next
block without external logic support
■Rich and flexible arithmetic rounding and saturation units
■Efficient barrel shifter support
■Loopback capability to support adaptive filtering
Table 4–1 lists the number of DSP blocks for the Stratix IV device family.
Table 4–1. Number of DSP Blocks in Stratix IV Devices (Part 1 of 2)
Family Device
DSP Blocks
Independent Input and Output Multiplication Operators High-Precision
Multiplier
Adder Mode
Four
Multiplier
Adder
Mode
9×9
Multipliers 12 × 12
Multipliers 18 × 18
Multipliers 18 × 18
Complex 36 × 36
Multipliers 18 × 36
Multipliers 18 × 18
Multipliers
Stratix IV E
EP4SE230 161 1,288 966 644 322 322 644 1288
EP4SE360 130 1,040 780 520 260 260 520 1040
EP4SE530 128 1,024 768 512 256 256 512 1024
EP4SE820 120 960 720 480 240 240 480 960
Stratix IV GX
EP4SGX70 48 384 288 192 96 96 192 384
EP4SGX110 64 512 384 256 128 128 256 512
EP4SGX180 115 920 690 460 230 230 460 920
EP4SGX230 161 1,288 966 644 322 322 644 1288
EP4SGX290 104 832 624 416 208 208 416 832
EP4SGX360 (1) 130 1,040 780 520 260 260 520 1,040
EP4SGX360 (2) 128 1,024 768 512 256 256 512 1,024
EP4SGX530 128 1,024 768 512 256 256 512 1,024
Chapter 4: DSP Blocks in Stratix IV Devices 4–3
Stratix IV DSP Block Overview
February 2011 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
Table 4–1 shows that the largest Stratix IV DSP-centric device provides up to 1288
18 × 18 multiplier functionality in the 36 × 36, complex 18 × 18, and summation
modes.
Each DSP block occupies four LABs in height and can be divided further into two half
blocks that share some common clock signals, but are for all common purposes
identical in functionality. Figure 4–1 shows the layout of each DSP block.
Stratix IV GT
EP4S40G2 161 1,288 966 644 322 322 644 1,288
EP4S40G5 128 1,024 768 512 256 256 512 1,024
EP4S100G2 161 1,288 966 644 322 322 644 1,288
EP4S100G3 104 832 624 416 208 208 416 832
EP4S100G4 128 1,024 768 512 256 256 512 1,024
EP4S100G5 128 1,024 768 512 256 256 512 1,024
Notes to Table 4–1:
(1) This is applicable for all packages in EP4SGX360 except F1932.
(2) This is applicable for EP4SGX360F1932 only.
Table 4–1. Number of DSP Blocks in Stratix IV Devices (Part 2 of 2)
Family Device
DSP Blocks
Independent Input and Output Multiplication Operators High-Precision
Multiplier
Adder Mode
Four
Multiplier
Adder
Mode
9×9
Multipliers 12 × 12
Multipliers 18 × 18
Multipliers 18 × 18
Complex 36 × 36
Multipliers 18 × 36
Multipliers 18 × 18
Multipliers
Figure 4–1. Overview of DSP Block Signals
34
144
144
288
72
72
Half-DSP Block
Half-DSP Block
Output
Data
Output
Data
Full DSP Block
Control
Input
Data
4–4 Chapter 4: DSP Blocks in Stratix IV Devices
Stratix IV Simplified DSP Operation
Stratix IV Device Handbook February 2011 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Stratix IV Simplified DSP Operation
In Stratix IV devices, the fundamental building block is a pair of 18 × 18-bit
multipliers followed by a first-stage 37-bit addition/subtraction unit, as shown in
Equation 4–1 and Figure 4–2.
1All signed numbers, input, and output data are represented in 2’s-complement format
only.
The structure shown in Figure 4–2 is useful for building more complex structures,
such as complex multipliers and 36 × 36 multipliers, as described in later sections.
Each Stratix IV DSP block contains four two-multiplier adder units (2 two-multiplier
adder units per half block). Therefore, there are eight 18 × 18 multiplier functionalities
per DSP block.
Equation 4–1. Multiplier Equation
P[36..0] = A0[17..0] × B0[17..0] ± A1[17..0] × B1[17..0]
Figure 4–2. Basic Two-Multiplier Adder Building Block
DQ
DQ
A0[17..0]
A1[17..0]
B1[17..0]
B0[17..0]
P[36..0]
+/-
Chapter 4: DSP Blocks in Stratix IV Devices 4–5
Stratix IV Simplified DSP Operation
February 2011 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
Following the two-multiplier adder units are the pipeline registers, the second-stage
adders, and an output register stage. You can configure the second-stage adders to
provide the alternative functions per half block, as shown in Equation 4–2 and
Equation 4–3.
In these equations, n denotes sample time and P[36..0] denotes the result from the
two-multiplier adder units.
Equation 4–2 provides a sum of four 18 × 18-bit multiplication operations
(four-multiplier adder). Equation 4–3 provides a four 18 × 18-bit multiplication
operation but with a maximum 44-bit accumulation capability by feeding the output
of the unit back to itself, as shown in Figure 4–3.
Depending on the mode you select, you can bypass all register stages except
accumulation and loopback mode. In these two modes, one set of registers must be
enabled. If the register set is not enabled, an infinite loop occurs.
Equation 4–2. Four-Multiplier Adder Equation
Z[37..0] = P0[36..0] + P1[36..0]
Equation 4–3. Four-Multiplier Adder Equation (44-Bit Accumulation)
Wn[43..0] = Wn-1[43..0] ± Zn[37..0]
Figure 4–3. Four-Multiplier Adder and Accumulation Capability
144 44
Input
Data
Input Register Bank
Adder/
Accumulator
Output Register Bank
Half-DSP Block
Result[]
Pipeline Register Bank
4–6 Chapter 4: DSP Blocks in Stratix IV Devices
Stratix IV Simplified DSP Operation
Stratix IV Device Handbook February 2011 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
To support commonly found FIR-like structures efficiently, a major addition to the
DSP block in Stratix IV devices is the ability to propagate the result of one half block
to the next half block completely within the DSP block without additional soft logic
overhead. This is achieved by the inclusion of a dedicated addition unit and routing
that adds the 44-bit result of a previous half block with the 44-bit result of the current
block. The 44-bit result is either fed to the next half block or out of the DSP block using
the output register stage, as shown in Figure 4–4. Detailed examples are described in
later sections.
The combination of a fast, low-latency four-multiplier adder unit and the “chained
cascade” capability of the output chaining adder provides the optimal FIR and vector
multiplication capability.
To support single-channel type FIR filters efficiently, you can configure one of the
multiplier input’s registers to form a tap delay line input, saving resources and
providing higher system performance.
Also shown in Figure 4–4 is the optional rounding and saturation unit (RSU). This
unit provides a rich set of commonly found arithmetic rounding and saturation
functions used in signal processing.
In addition to the independent multipliers and sum modes, you can use DSP blocks to
perform shift operations. DSP blocks can dynamically switch between logical shift
left/right, arithmetic shift left/right, and rotation operation in one clock cycle.
Figure 4–4. Output Cascading Feature for FIR Structures
144 44
44
From Previous Half DSP Block
To Next
Half DSP Block
Input
Data
Input Register Bank
Adder/
Accumulator
Round/Saturate
Output Register Bank
44
Half DSP Block
Result[]
Pipeline Register Bank
Chapter 4: DSP Blocks in Stratix IV Devices 4–7
Stratix IV Simplified DSP Operation
February 2011 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
Figure 4–5 shows a top-level view of the Stratix IV DSP block.
Figure 4–6 on page 4–9 shows a more detailed top-level view of the DSP block.
Figure 4–5. Stratix IV Full DSP Block
Input Register Bank
Pipeline Register Bank
Adder/Accumulator
Output Multiplexer
Round/Saturate
Output Register Bank
From Previous
Half DSP Block
To Next Half DSP Block
44
44
Input
Data
144
Input Register Bank
Pipeline Register Bank
Adder/Accumulator
Output Multiplexter
Round/Saturate
Output Register Bank
Input
Data
144
Top Half DSP Block
Bottom Half DSP Block
Result[]
Result[]
4–8 Chapter 4: DSP Blocks in Stratix IV Devices
Stratix IV Operational Modes Overview
Stratix IV Device Handbook February 2011 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Stratix IV Operational Modes Overview
You can use each Stratix IV DSP block in one of five basic operational modes.
Table 4–2 lists the five basic operational modes and the number of multipliers that you
can implement within a single DSP block, depending on the mode.
The DSP block consists of two identical halves (the top half and bottom half). Each
half has four 18 × 18 multipliers.
The Quartus®II software includes megafunctions used to control the mode of
operation of the multipliers. After making the appropriate parameter settings using
the megafunction’s MegaWizard Plug-In Manager, the Quartus II software
automatically configures the DSP block.
Stratix IV DSP blocks can operate in different modes simultaneously. Each half block
is fully independent except for the sharing of the three
clock
,
ena
, and
aclr
signals.
For example, you can break down a single DSP block to operate a 9 × 9 multiplier in
one half block and an 18 × 18 two-multiplier adder in the other half block. This
increases DSP block resource efficiency and allows you to implement more
multipliers within a Stratix IV device. The Quartus II software automatically places
multipliers that can share the same DSP block resources within the same block.
Table 4–2. Stratix IV DSP Block Operation Modes
Mode Multiplier
in Width
# of
Mults
# per
Block
Signed or
Unsigned
RND,
SAT
In Shift
Register
Chainout
Adder
1st Stage
Add/Sub
2nd
Stage
Add/Acc
Independent
Multiplier
9 bits 1 8 Both No No No — —
12 bits 1 6 Both No No No — —
18 bits 1 4 Both Yes Yes No — —
36 bits 1 2 Both No No No — —
Double 1 2 Both No No No — —
Two-Multiplier
Adder (1) 18 bits 2 4 Signed (4) Yes No No Both —
Four-Multiplier
Adder 18 bits 4 2 Both Yes Yes Yes Both Add Only
Multiply
Accumulate 18 bits 4 2 Both Yes Yes Yes Both Both
Shift (2) 36 bits (3) 1 2 Both No No — — —
High Precision
Multiplier Adder 1836 2 2 Both No No No — Add Only
Notes to Table 4–2:
(1) This mode also supports loopback mode. In loopback mode, the number of loopback multipliers per DSP block is two. You can use the
remaining multipliers in regular two-multiplier adder mode.
(2) Dynamic shift mode supports arithmetic shift left, arithmetic shift right, logical shift left, logical shift right, and rotation operation.
(3) Dynamic shift mode operates on a 32-bit input vector but the multiplier width is configured as 36 bits.
(4) Unsigned value is also supported but you must ensure that the result can be contained within 36 bits.
Chapter 4: DSP Blocks in Stratix IV Devices 4–9
Stratix IV DSP Block Resource Descriptions
February 2011 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
Stratix IV DSP Block Resource Descriptions
The DSP block consists of the following elements:
■Input register bank
■Four two-multiplier adders
■Pipeline register bank
■Two second-stage adders
■Four rounding and saturation logic units
■Second adder register and output register bank
Figure 4–6 shows a detailed overall architecture of the top half of the DSP block.
Table 4–9 on page 4–35 shows a list of DSP block dynamic signals.
Figure 4–6. Half DSP Block Architecture
Notes to Figure 4–6:
(1) Block output for accumulator overflow and saturate overflow.
(2) Block output for saturation overflow of
chainout
.
(3) The
chainin
port must only be connected to
chainout
of the previous DSP blocks and must not be connected to general routings.
chainin[ ] (3)
scanina[ ]
dataa_0[ ]
datab_0[ ]
dataa_1[ ]
datab_1[ ]
dataa_2[ ]
datab_2[ ]
dataa_3[ ]
scanouta chainout
datab_3[ ]
Input Register Bank
First Stage Adder First Stage Adder
Pipeline Register Bank
Second Stage Adder/Accumulator
First Round/Saturate
Second Adder Register Bank
Chainout Adder
Second Round/Saturate
Output Register Bank
Shift/Rotate
result[ ]
clock[3..0]
ena[3..0]
alcr[3..0]
zero_loopback
accum_sload
zero_chainout
chainout_round
chainout_saturate
signa
signb
output_round
output_saturate
rotate
shift_right
overflow (1)
chainout_sat_overflow(2)
Half-DSP Block
loopback
Multiplexer
4–10 Chapter 4: DSP Blocks in Stratix IV Devices
Stratix IV DSP Block Resource Descriptions
Stratix IV Device Handbook February 2011 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Input Registers
All of the DSP block registers are triggered by the positive edge of the clock signal and
are cleared after power up. Each multiplier operand can feed an input register or go
directly to the multiplier, bypassing the input registers. The following DSP block
signals control the input registers within the DSP block:
■
clock[3..0]
■
ena[3..0]
■
aclr[3..0]
Every DSP block has nine 18-bit data input register banks per half DSP block. Every
half DSP block has the option to use the eight data register banks as inputs to the four
multipliers. The special ninth register bank is a delay register required by modes that
use both the cascade and chainout features of the DSP block. Use the ninth register
bank to balance the latency requirements when using the chained cascade feature.
Chapter 4: DSP Blocks in Stratix IV Devices 4–11
Stratix IV DSP Block Resource Descriptions
February 2011 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
A feature of the input register bank is to support a tap delay line. Therefore, the top
leg of the multiplier input (A) can be driven from general routing or from the cascade
chain, as shown in Figure 4–7. Table 4–9 on page 4–35 lists the DSP block dynamic
signals.
At compile time, you must select whether the A-input comes from general routing or
from the cascade chain. In cascade mode, the dedicated shift outputs from one
multiplier block and directly feeds the input registers of the adjacent multiplier below
it (within the same half DSP block) or the first multiplier in the next half DSP block, to
form an 8-tap shift register chain per DSP Block. The DSP block can increase the
length of the shift register chain by cascading to the lower DSP blocks. The dedicated
shift register chain spans a single column, but you can implement longer shift register
chains requiring multiple columns using the regular FPGA routing resources.
Figure 4–7. Input Register of a Half DSP Block
+/-
+/-
signa
signb
clock[3..0]
ena[3..0]
aclr[3..0]
scanina[17..0]
dataa_0[17..0]
loopback
datab_0[17..0]
dataa_1[17..0]
datab_1[17..0]
dataa_2[17..0]
datab_2[17..0]
dataa_3[17..0]
datab_3[17..0]
scanouta
Delay
Register
4–12 Chapter 4: DSP Blocks in Stratix IV Devices
Stratix IV DSP Block Resource Descriptions
Stratix IV Device Handbook February 2011 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Shift registers are useful in DSP functions such as FIR filters. When implementing
18 × 18 or smaller width multipliers, you do not need external logic to create the shift
register chain because the input shift registers are internal to the DSP block. This
implementation significantly reduces the logical element (LE) resources required,
avoids routing congestion, and results in predictable timing.
The first multiplier in every half DSP block (top- and bottom-half) in Stratix IV
devices has a multiplexer for the first multiplier B-input (lower-leg input) register to
select between general routing and loopback, as shown in Figure 4–6 on page 4–9. In
loopback mode, the most significant 18-bit registered outputs are connected as
feedback to the multiplier input of the first top multiplier in each half DSP block.
Loopback modes are used by recursive filters where the previous output is needed to
compute the current output.
Loopback mode is described in “Two-Multiplier Adder Sum Mode” on page 4–23.
Table 4–3 lists input register modes for the DSP block.
Multiplier and First-Stage Adder
The multiplier stage natively supports 9 × 9, 12 × 12, 18 × 18, or 36 × 36 multipliers.
Other wordlengths are padded up to the nearest appropriate native wordlength; for
example, 16 × 16 would be padded up to use 18 × 18. For more information, refer to
“Independent Multiplier Modes” on page 4–15. Depending on the data width of the
multiplier, a single DSP block can perform many multiplications in parallel.
Each multiplier operand can be a unique signed or unsigned number. Two dynamic
signals,
signa
and
signb
, control the representation of each operand, respectively. A
logic 1
value on the
signa/signb
signal indicates that
data A/data B
is a signed
number; a
logic 0
value indicates an unsigned number. Table 4–4 lists the sign of the
multiplication result for the various operand sign representations. The result of the
multiplication is signed if any one of the operands is a signed value.
Table 4–3. Input Register Modes
Register Input Mode (1) 9×9 12×12 18×18 36×36 Double
Parallel input Y Y Y Y Y
Shift register input (2) ——Y——
Loopback input (3) ——Y——
Notes to Table 4–3:
(1) Multiplier operand input wordlengths are statically configured at compile time.
(2) Available only on the A-operand.
(3) Only one loopback input is allowed per half block. For more information, refer to Figure 4–15 on page 4–25.
Table 4–4. Multiplier Sign Representation
Data A (signa Value) Data B (signb Value) Result
Unsigned (logic 0) Unsigned (logic 0) Unsigned
Unsigned (logic 0) Signed (logic 1) Signed
Signed (logic 1) Unsigned (logic 0) Signed
Signed (logic 1) Signed (logic 1) Signed
Chapter 4: DSP Blocks in Stratix IV Devices 4–13
Stratix IV DSP Block Resource Descriptions
February 2011 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
Each half block has its own
signa
and
signb
signal. Therefore, all of the
data A
inputs
feeding the same half DSP block must have the same sign representation. Similarly, all
of the
data B
inputs feeding the same half DSP block must have the same sign
representation. The multiplier offers full precision regardless of the sign
representation in all operational modes except for full precision 18 × 18 loopback and
two-multiplier adder modes. For more information, refer to “Two-Multiplier Adder
Sum Mode” on page 4–23.
1By default, when the
signa
and
signb
signals are unused, the Quartus II software sets
the multiplier to perform unsigned multiplication.
Figure 4–6 on page 4–9 shows that the outputs of the multipliers are the only outputs
that can feed into the first-stage adder. There are four first-stage adders in a DSP block
(two adders per half DSP block). The first-stage adder block has the ability to perform
addition and subtraction. The control signal for addition or subtraction is static and
has to be configured after compile time. The first-stage adders are used by the sum
modes to compute the sum of two multipliers, 18 × 18-complex multipliers, and to
perform the first stage of a 36 × 36 multiply and shift operations.
Depending on your specifications, the output of the first-stage adder has the option to
feed into the pipeline registers, second-stage adder, rounding and saturation unit, or
output registers.
Pipeline Register Stage
Figure 4–6 on page 4–9 shows that the output from the first-stage adder can either
feed or bypass the pipeline registers. Pipeline registers increase the DSP block’s
maximum performance (at the expense of extra cycles of latency), especially when
using the subsequent DSP block stages. Pipeline registers split up the long signal path
between the input registers/multiplier/first-stage adder and the second-stage adder/
round-and-saturation/output registers, creating two shorter paths.
Second-Stage Adder
There are four individual 44-bit second-stage adders per DSP block (two adders
per half DSP block). You can configure the second-stage adders as follows:
■The final stage of a 36-bit multiplier
■A sum of four (18 × 18)
■An accumulator (44-bits maximum)
■A chained output summation (44-bits maximum)
1You can use the chained-output adder at the same time as a second-level adder in
chained output summation mode.
The output of the second-stage adder has the option to go into the rounding and
saturation logic unit or the output register.
1You cannot use the second-stage adder independently from the multiplier and
first-stage adder.
4–14 Chapter 4: DSP Blocks in Stratix IV Devices
Stratix IV DSP Block Resource Descriptions
Stratix IV Device Handbook February 2011 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Rounding and Saturation Stage
The rounding and saturation logic units are located at the output of the 44-bit
second-stage adder (the rounding logic unit followed by the saturation logic unit).
There are two rounding and saturation logic units per half DSP block. The input to the
rounding and saturation logic unit can come from one of the following stages:
■Output of the multiplier (independent multiply mode in 18 × 18)
■Output of the first-stage adder (two-multiplier adder)
■Output of the pipeline registers
■Output of the second-stage adder (four-multiplier adder and multiply-accumulate
mode in 18 × 18)
These stages are described in “Stratix IV Operational Mode Descriptions” on
page 4–15.
The rounding and saturation logic unit is controlled by the dynamic rounding and
saturate signals, respectively. A
logic 1
value on the rounding and/or saturate
signals enables the rounding and/or saturate logic unit, respectively.
1You can use the rounding and saturation logic units together or independently.
Second Adder and Output Registers
The second adder register and output register banks are two banks of 44-bit registers
that you can combine to form larger 72-bit banks to support 36 × 36 output results.
The outputs of the different stages in the Stratix IV devices are routed to the output
registers through an output selection unit. Depending on the operational mode of the
DSP block, the output selection unit selects whether the outputs of the DSP blocks
comes from the outputs of the multiplier block, first-stage adder, pipeline registers,
second-stage adder, or the rounding and saturation logic unit. The output selection
unit is set automatically by the software, based on the DSP block operational mode
you specified, and has the option to either drive or bypass the output registers. The
exception is when you use the block in shift mode, in which case you dynamically
control the output-select multiplexer directly.
When the DSP block is configured in chained cascaded output mode, both of the
second-stage adders are used. Use the first one for performing a four-multiplier
adder; use the second for the chainout adder.
The outputs of the four-multiplier adder are routed to the second-stage adder
registers before they enter the chainout adder. The output of the chainout adder goes
to the regular output register bank. Depending on the configuration, you can route
the chainout results to the input of the next half block’s chainout adder input or to the
general fabric (functioning as regular output registers). For more information, refer to
“Stratix IV Operational Mode Descriptions” on page 4–15.
Chapter 4: DSP Blocks in Stratix IV Devices 4–15
Stratix IV Operational Mode Descriptions
February 2011 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
The second-stage and output registers are triggered by the positive edge of the clock
signal and are cleared after power up. The following DSP block signals control the
output registers within the DSP block:
■
clock[3..0]
■
ena[3..0]
■
aclr[3..0]
Stratix IV Operational Mode Descriptions
This section contains an explanation of different operational modes in Stratix IV
devices.
Independent Multiplier Modes
In independent input and output multiplier mode, the DSP block performs individual
multiplication operations for general-purpose multipliers.
9-, 12-, and 18-Bit Multiplier
You can configure each DSP block multiplier for 9-, 12-, or 18-bit multiplication. A
single DSP block can support up to eight individual 9 × 9 multipliers, six individual
12 × 12 multipliers, or four individual 18 × 18 multipliers. For operand widths up to
9 bits, a 9 × 9 multiplier is implemented. For operand widths from 10 to 12 bits, a
12 × 12 multiplier is implemented, and for operand widths from 13 to 18 bits, an
18 × 18 multiplier is implemented. This is done by the Quartus II software by
zero-padding the LSBs. Figure 4–8, Figure 4–9, and Figure 4–10 show the DSP block in
the independent multiplier operation. Table 4–9 on page 4–35 lists the dynamic
signals for the DSP block.
4–16 Chapter 4: DSP Blocks in Stratix IV Devices
Stratix IV Operational Mode Descriptions
Stratix IV Device Handbook February 2011 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Figure 4–8. 18-Bit Independent Multiplier Mode Shown for a Half DSP Block
Note to Figure 4–8:
(1) Block output for accumulator overflow and saturate overflow.
clock[3..0]
ena[3..0]
aclr[3..0]
signa
signb
output_round
output_saturate
overflow (1)
36
36
dataa_0[17..0]
datab_0[17..0]
dataa_1[17..0]
datab_1[17..0]
Half-DSP Block
Input Register Bank
Pipeline Register Bank
Round/Saturate Round/Saturate
Output Register Bank
18
18
18
18
result_0[ ]
result_1[ ]
Chapter 4: DSP Blocks in Stratix IV Devices 4–17
Stratix IV Operational Mode Descriptions
February 2011 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
Figure 4–9. 12-Bit Independent Multiplier Mode Shown for a Half DSP Block
24
12
12
12
12
12
12
24
24
Input Register Bank
Pipeline Register Bank
Output Register Bank
clock[3..0]
ena[3..0]
aclr[3..0]
signa
signb
Half-DSP Block
dataa_0[11..0]
datab_0[11..0]
dataa_1[11..0]
datab_1[11..0]
dataa_2[11..0]
datab_2[11..0]
result_0[ ]
result_1[ ]
result_2[ ]
4–18 Chapter 4: DSP Blocks in Stratix IV Devices
Stratix IV Operational Mode Descriptions
Stratix IV Device Handbook February 2011 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
The multiplier operands can accept signed integers, unsigned integers, or a
combination of both. You can change the
signa
and
signb
signals dynamically and
can register the signals in the DSP block. Additionally, the multiplier inputs and
results can be registered independently. You can use the pipeline registers within the
DSP block to pipeline the multiplier result, increasing the performance of the DSP
block.
1The rounding and saturation logic unit is supported for 18-bit independent multiplier
mode only.
Figure 4–10. 9-Bit Independent Multiplier Mode Shown for a Half Block
18
9
9
9
9
18
9
9
18
9
9
18
Input Register Bank
Pipeline Register Bank
Output Register Bank
dataa_0[8..0]
datab_0[8..0]
dataa_1[8..0]
datab_1[8..0]
dataa_2[8..0]
datab_2[8..0]
dataa_3[8..0]
datab_3[8..0]
Half-DSP Block
clock[3..0]
ena[3..0]
aclr[3..0]
signa
signb
result_0[ ]
result_1[ ]
result_2[ ]
result_3[ ]
Chapter 4: DSP Blocks in Stratix IV Devices 4–19
Stratix IV Operational Mode Descriptions
February 2011 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
36-Bit Multiplier
You can efficiently construct a 36 × 36 multiplier using four 18 × 18 multipliers. This
simplification fits conveniently into one half DSP block and is implemented in the
DSP block automatically by selecting 36 × 36 mode. Stratix IV devices can have up to
two 36-bit multipliers per DSP block (one 36-bit multiplier per half DSP block). The
36-bit multiplier is also under the independent multiplier mode but uses the entire
half DSP block, including the dedicated hardware logic after the pipeline registers to
implement the 36 × 36 bit multiplication operation, as shown in Figure 4–11.
The 36-bit multiplier is useful for applications requiring more than 18-bit precision;
for example, for the mantissa multiplication portion of single precision and extended
single precision floating-point arithmetic applications.
Figure 4–11. 36-Bit Independent Multiplier Mode Shown for a Half DSP Block
Pipeline Register Bank
Input Register Bank
Output Register Bank
Half-DSP Block
dataa_0[35..18]
datab_0[35..18]
dataa_0[17..0]
datab_0[35..18]
dataa_0[35..18]
datab_0[17..0]
dataa_0[17..0]
datab_0[17..0]
72
clock[3..0]
ena[3..0]
aclr[3..0]
signa
signb
+
+
+result[ ]
4–20 Chapter 4: DSP Blocks in Stratix IV Devices
Stratix IV Operational Mode Descriptions
Stratix IV Device Handbook February 2011 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Double Multiplier
You can configure the Stratix IV DSP block to efficiently support a signed or unsigned
54 × 54-bit multiplier that is required to compute the mantissa portion of an IEEE
double-precision floating point multiplication. You can build a 54 × 54-bit multiplier
using basic 18 × 18 multipliers, shifters, and adders. In order to efficiently use the
Stratix IV DSP block’s built-in shifters and adders, a special double mode (partial
54 × 54 multiplier) is available that is a slight modification to the basic 36 × 36
multiplier mode, as shown in Figure 4–12 and Figure 4–13.
Figure 4–12. Double Mode Shown for a Half DSP Block
Pipeline Register Bank
Input Register Bank
Output Register Bank
Half-DSP Block
dataa_0[35..18]
datab_0[35..18]
dataa_0[17..0]
datab_0[35..18]
dataa_0[35..18]
datab_0[17..0]
dataa_0[17..0]
datab_0[17..0]
72
clock[3..0]
ena[3..0]
aclr[3..0]
signa
signb
+
+
+result[ ]
Chapter 4: DSP Blocks in Stratix IV Devices 4–21
Stratix IV Operational Mode Descriptions
February 2011 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
Figure 4–13. Unsigned 54 × 54 Multiplier for a Half-DSP Block
Shifters and Adders
Double Mode
Shifters and Adders
36 x 36 Mode
+
Two Multiplier
Adder Mode
Final Adder (implemented with ALUT logic)
36
55
72
108
result[ ]
Unsigned 54 X 54 Multiplier
"0"
"0"
dataa[53..36]
dataa[53..36]
dataa[53..36]
datab[53..36]
dataa[35..18]
datab[53..36]
dataa[17..0]
datab[53..36]
datab[35..18]
datab[17..0]
clock[3..0]
ena[3..0]
aclr[3..0]
signa
signb
dataa[35..18]
dataa[35..18]
datab[35..18]
datab[17..0]
datab[17..0]
dataa[17..0]
datab[35..18]
dataa[17..0]
4–22 Chapter 4: DSP Blocks in Stratix IV Devices
Stratix IV Operational Mode Descriptions
Stratix IV Device Handbook February 2011 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Two-Multiplier Adder Sum Mode
In a two-multiplier adder configuration, the DSP block can implement four 18-bit
two-multiplier adders (2 two-multiplier adders per half DSP block). You can
configure the adders to take the sum or difference of two multiplier outputs. You must
select summation or subtraction at compile time. The two-multiplier adder function
is useful for applications such as FFTs, complex FIR, and IIR filters. Figure 4–14 on
page 4–24 shows the DSP block configured in two-multiplier adder mode.
Loopback mode is the other sub-feature of the two-multiplier adder mode.
Figure 4–15 on page 4–25 shows the DSP block configured in the loopback mode. This
mode takes the 36-bit summation result of the two multipliers and feeds back the
most significant 18-bits to the input. The lower 18-bits are discarded. You have the
option to disable or zero-out the loopback data by using the dynamic
zero_loopback
signal. A
logic 1
value on the
zero_loopback
signal selects the
zeroed
data or
disables the looped back data, while a
logic 0
selects the looped back data.
1You must select the option to use loopback mode or the general two-multiplier adder
mode at compile time.
For two-multiplier adder mode, if all the inputs are full 18-bit and unsigned, the result
requires 37 bits. As the output data width in two-multiplier adder mode is limited to
36 bits, this 37-bit output requirement is not allowed. Any other combination that
does not violate the 36-bit maximum result is permitted; for example, two 16 × 16
signed two-multiplier adders is valid.
Two-multiplier adder mode supports the rounding and saturation logic unit. You can
use the pipeline registers and output registers within the DSP block to pipeline the
multiplier-adder result, increasing the performance of the DSP block.
Chapter 4: DSP Blocks in Stratix IV Devices 4–23
Stratix IV Operational Mode Descriptions
February 2011 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
Figure 4–14. Two-Multiplier Adder Mode Shown for a Half DSP Block
Note to Figure 4–14:
(1) Block output for accumulator overflow and saturate overflow.
Input Register Bank
Pipeline Register Bank
Round/Saturate
Output Register Bank
clock[3..0]
ena[3..0]
aclr[3..0]
signa
signb
output_round
output_saturate
overflow (1)
result[ ]
+
dataa_0[17..0]
datab_0[17..0]
dataa_1[17..0]
datab_1[17..0]
Half-DSP Block
4–24 Chapter 4: DSP Blocks in Stratix IV Devices
Stratix IV Operational Mode Descriptions
Stratix IV Device Handbook February 2011 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
18 x 18 Complex Multiply
You can configure the DSP block to implement complex multipliers using
two-multiplier adder mode. A single half DSP block can implement one 18-bit
complex multiplier.
Equation 4–4 shows a complex multiplication.
Figure 4–15. Loopback Mode for a Half DSP Block
Note to Figure 4–15:
(1) Block output for accumulator overflow and saturate overflow.
Input Register Bank
Pipeline Register Bank
Round/Saturate
Output Register Bank
dataa_0[17..0]
datab_0[17..0]
dataa_1[17..0]
datab_1[17..0]
zero_loopback
clock[3..0]
ena[3..0]
aclr[3..0]
signa
signb
output_round
output_saturate
overflow (1)
result[ ]
+
loopback
Half-DSP Block
Equation 4–4. Complex Multiplication Equation
(a + jb) × (c + jd) = ((a × c) – (b × d)) + j((a × d) + (b × c))
Chapter 4: DSP Blocks in Stratix IV Devices 4–25
Stratix IV Operational Mode Descriptions
February 2011 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
To implement this complex multiplication within the DSP block, the real part
((a × c) – (b × d)) is implemented using two multipliers feeding one subtractor block
while the imaginary part ((a × d) + (b × c)) is implemented using another two
multipliers feeding an adder block. Figure 4–16 shows an 18-bit complex
multiplication. This mode automatically assumes all inputs are using signed
numbers.
Figure 4–16. Complex Multiplier Using Two-Multiplier Adder Mode
Input Register Bank
Pipeline Register Bank
Output Register Bank
Ax CBx D
Real Part
Ax DBx C
Imaginary Part
clock[3..0]
ena[3..0]
aclr[3..0]
signa
signb
A
C
B
D
Half-DSP Block
36
36
4–26 Chapter 4: DSP Blocks in Stratix IV Devices
Stratix IV Operational Mode Descriptions
Stratix IV Device Handbook February 2011 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Four-Multiplier Adder
In the four-multiplier adder configuration shown in Figure 4–17, the DSP block can
implement two four-multiplier adders (one four-multiplier adder per half DSP block).
These modes are useful for implementing one-dimensional and two-dimensional
filtering applications. The four-multiplier adder is performed in two addition stages.
The outputs of two of the four multipliers are initially summed in the two first-stage
adder blocks. The results of these two adder blocks are then summed in the
second-stage adder block to produce the final four-multiplier adder result, as shown
by Equation 4–2 on page 4–5 and Equation 4–3 on page 4–5.
Figure 4–17. Four-Multiplier Adder Mode Shown for a Half DSP Block
Note to Figure 4–17:
(1) Block output for accumulator overflow and saturate overflow.
clock[3..0]
ena[3..0]
aclr[3..0]
signa
signb
output_round
output_saturate
overflow (1)
Input Register Bank
Pipeline Register Bank
Round/Saturate
Output Register Bank
dataa_0[ ]
datab_0[ ]
dataa_1[ ]
datab_1[ ]
dataa_2[ ]
datab_2[ ]
dataa_3[ ]
datab_3[ ]
Half-DSP Block
+
+
+
result[ ]
Chapter 4: DSP Blocks in Stratix IV Devices 4–27
Stratix IV Operational Mode Descriptions
February 2011 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
Four-multiplier adder mode supports the rounding and saturation logic unit. You can
use the pipeline registers and output registers within the DSP block to pipeline the
multiplier-adder result, increasing the performance of the DSP block.
High-Precision Multiplier Adder Mode
In a high-precision multiplier adder configuration, shown in Figure 4–18 on
page 4–29, the DSP block can implement 2 two-multiplier adders, with multiplier
precision of 18 x 36 (one two-multiplier adder per half DSP block). This mode is useful
in filtering or FFT applications where a data path greater than 18 bits is required, yet
18 bits is sufficient for the coefficient precision. This can occur where the data has a
high dynamic range. If the coefficients are fixed, as in FFT and most filter applications,
the precision of 18 bits provide a dynamic range over 100 dB, if the largest coefficient
is normalized to the maximum 18-bit representation.
In these situations, the data path can be up to 36 bits, allowing sufficient capacity for
bit growth or gain changes in the signal source without loss of precision. This mode is
also extremely useful in single precision block floating point applications.
The high-precision multiplier adder is performed in two stages. The 18 × 36 multiply
is divided into two 18 × 18 multipliers. The multiplier with the LSB of the data source
is performed unsigned, while the multiplier with the MSB of the data source can be
signed or unsigned. The latter multiplier has its result left shifted by 18 bits prior to
the first adder stage, creating an effective 18 x 36 multiplier. The results of these two
adder blocks are then summed in the second stage adder block to produce the final
result:
Z[54..0] = P0[53..0] + P1[53..0]
where:
P0 = A[17..0] × B[35..0]
P1 = C[17..0] × D[35..0]
4–28 Chapter 4: DSP Blocks in Stratix IV Devices
Stratix IV Operational Mode Descriptions
Stratix IV Device Handbook February 2011 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Figure 4–18. High-Precision Multiplier Adder Configuration
Note to Figure 4–18:
(1) Block output for accumulator overflow and saturate overflow.
clock[3..0]
ena[3..0]
aclr[3..0]
signa
signb
overflow (1)
Input Register Bank
Pipeline Register Bank
Output Register Bank
dataA[0:17]
P0
P1
dataA[0:17]
dataC[0:17]
dataC[0:17]
dataD[0:17]
dataD[18:35]
dataB[0:17]
<<18
<<18
dataB[18:35]
Half-DSP Block
+
+
+
result[ ]
Chapter 4: DSP Blocks in Stratix IV Devices 4–29
Stratix IV Operational Mode Descriptions
February 2011 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
Multiply Accumulate Mode
In multiply accumulate mode, the second-stage adder is configured as a 44-bit
accumulator or subtractor. The output of the DSP block is looped back to the
second-stage adder and added or subtracted with the two outputs of the first-stage
adder block according to Equation 4–3 on page 4–5. Figure 4–19 shows the DSP block
configured to operate in multiply accumulate mode.
A single DSP block can implement up to two independent 44-bit accumulators.
Figure 4–19. Multiply Accumulate Mode Shown for a Half DSP Block
Note to Figure 4–19:
(1) Block output for saturation overflow of chainout.
clock[3..0]
ena[3..0]
aclr[3..0]
signa
signb
output_round
output_saturate
chainout_sat_overflow (1)
Input Register Bank
Pipeline Register Bank
Round/Saturate
Output Register Bank
dataa_0[ ]
datab_0[ ]
dataa_1[ ]
datab_1[ ]
dataa_2[ ]
datab_2[ ]
dataa_3[ ]
datab_3[ ]
Half-DSP Block
+
+
+
result[ ]
accum_sload
44
Second Register Bank
4–30 Chapter 4: DSP Blocks in Stratix IV Devices
Stratix IV Operational Mode Descriptions
Stratix IV Device Handbook February 2011 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Use the dynamic
accum_sload
control signal to clear the accumulation. A
logic 1
value on the
accum_sload
signal synchronously loads the accumulator with the
multiplier result only, while a
logic 0
enables accumulation by adding or subtracting
the output of the DSP block (accumulator feedback) to the output of the multiplier
and first-stage adder.
1You must configure the control signal for the accumulator and subtractor if static at
compile time.
This mode supports the rounding and saturation logic unit because it is configured as
an 18-bit multiplier accumulator. You can use the pipeline registers and output
registers within the DSP block to increase the performance of the DSP block.
Shift Modes
Stratix IV devices support the following shift modes for 32-bit input only:
■Arithmetic shift left,
ASL[N]
■Arithmetic shift right,
ASR[32-N]
■Logical shift left,
LSL[N]
■Logical shift right,
LSR[32-N]
■32-bit rotator or barrel shifter,
ROT[N]
1You can switch between these modes using the dynamic rotate and shift control
signals.
You can use shift mode in a Stratix IV device by using a soft embedded processor such
as Nios®II to perform the dynamic shift and rotate operation. Figure 4–20 on
page 4–32 shows the shift mode configuration.
Shift mode makes use of the available multipliers to logically or arithmetically shift
left, right, or rotate the desired 32-bit data. You can configure the DSP block similar to
the independent 36-bit multiplier mode to perform shift mode operations.
Arithmetic shift right requires a signed input vector. During an arithmetic shift right,
the sign is extended to fill the MSB of the 32-bit vector. The logical shift right uses an
unsigned input vector. During a logical shift right, zeros are padded in the MSBs,
shifting the 32-bit vector to the right. The barrel shifter uses unsigned input vector
and implements a rotation function on a 32-bit word length.
Two control signals,
rotate
and
shift_right
, together with the
signa
and
signb
signals, determine the shifting operation. Table 4–5 on page 4–32 lists examples of
shift operations.
Chapter 4: DSP Blocks in Stratix IV Devices 4–31
Stratix IV Operational Mode Descriptions
February 2011 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
Figure 4–20. Shift Operation Mode Shown for a Half DSP Block
clock[3..0]
ena[3..0]
aclr[3..0]
signa
signb
rotate
shift_right
Input Register Bank
Pipeline Register Bank
Output Register Bank
dataa_0[35..18]
datab_0[35..18]
dataa_0[17..0]
datab_0[35..18]
dataa_0[35..18]
datab_0[17..0]
dataa_0[17..0]
datab_0[17..0]
Half-DSP Block
+
+
+
result[ ]
32
Shift/Rotate
Table 4–5. Examples of Shift Operations
Example Signa Signb Shift Rotate A-input B-input Result
Logical Shift Left
LSL[N]
Unsigned Unsigned 0 0 0xAABBCCDD 0x0000100 0xBBCCDD00
Logical Shift Right
LSR[32-N]
Unsigned Unsigned 1 0 0xAABBCCDD 0x0000100 0x000000AA
Arithmetic Shift Left
ASL[N]
Signed Unsigned 0 0 0xAABBCCDD 0x0000100 0xBBCCDD00
Arithmetic Shift Right
ASR[32-N]
Signed Unsigned 1 0 0xAABBCCDD 0x0000100 0xFFFFFFAA
Rotation
ROT[N]
Unsigned Unsigned 0 1 0xAABBCCDD 0x0000100 0xBBCCDDAA
4–32 Chapter 4: DSP Blocks in Stratix IV Devices
Stratix IV Operational Mode Descriptions
Stratix IV Device Handbook February 2011 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Rounding and Saturation Mode
Rounding and saturation functions are often required in DSP arithmetic. Use
rounding to limit bit growth and its side effects; use saturation to reduce overflow and
underflow side effects.
Two rounding modes are supported in Stratix IV devices:
■Round-to-nearest-integer mode
■Round-to-nearest-even mode
1You must select one of these two options at compile time.
Round-to-nearest-integer provides the biased rounding support and is the simplest
form of rounding commonly used in DSP arithmetic. The round-to-nearest-even
method provides unbiased rounding support and is used where DC offsets are a
concern. Table 4–6 lists how round-to-nearest-even works.
Table 4–7 lists examples of the difference between the two modes. In this example, a
6-bit input is rounded to 4 bits. The main difference between the two rounding
options is when the residue bits are exactly halfway between its nearest two integers
and the LSB is zero (even).
Table 4–6. Example of Round-To-Nearest-Even Mode
6- to 4-bits
Rounding
Odd/Even
(Integer) Fractional Add to Integer Result
010111 x > 0.5 (11) 1 0110
001101 x < 0.5 (01) 0 0011
001010 Even (0010) = 0.5 (10) 0 0010
001110 Odd (0011) = 0.5 (10) 1 0100
110111 x > 0.5 (11) 1 1110
101101 x < 0.5 (01) 0 1011
110110 Odd (1101) = 0.5 (10) 1 1110
110010 Even (1100) = 0.5 (10) 0 1100
Table 4–7. Comparison of Round-to-Nearest-Integer and Round-to-Nearest-Even
Round-To-Nearest-Integer Round-To-Nearest-Even
010111 ➱ 0110 010111 ➱ 0110
001101 ➱ 0011 001101 ➱ 0011
001010 ➱ 0011 001010 ➱ 0010
001110 ➱ 0100 001110 ➱ 0100
110111 ➱ 1110 110111 ➱ 1110
101101 ➱ 1011 101101 ➱ 1011
110110 ➱ 1110 110110 ➱ 1110
110010 ➱ 1101 110010 ➱ 1100
Chapter 4: DSP Blocks in Stratix IV Devices 4–33
Stratix IV Operational Mode Descriptions
February 2011 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
Two saturation modes are supported in Stratix IV:
■Asymmetric saturation mode
■Symmetric saturation mode
1You must select one of the two options at compile time.
In 2’s-complement format, the maximum negative number that can be represented is
–2(n–1), while the maximum positive number is 2(n–1) – 1. Symmetrical saturation limits
the maximum negative number to –2(n–1) + 1. For example, for 32 bits:
■Asymmetric 32-bit saturation: Max = 0x7FFFFFFF, Min = 0x80000000
■Symmetric 32-bit saturation: Max = 0x7FFFFFFF, Min = 0x80000001
Table 4–8 lists how saturation works. In this example, a 44-bit input is saturated to
36-bits.
Stratix IV devices have up to 16 configurable bit positions out of the 44-bit bus
(
[43:0]
) for the rounding and saturate logic unit, providing higher flexibility. These
16-bit positions are located at bits
[21:6]
for rounding and
[43:28]
for saturation, as
shown in Figure 4–21.
1You must select the 16 configurable bit positions at compile time.
1For symmetric saturation, the RND bit position is also used to determine where the
LSP for the saturated data is located.
Table 4–8. Examples of Saturation
44- to 36-Bits Saturation Symmetric SAT Result Asymmetric SAT Result
5926AC01342h 7FFFFFFFFh 7FFFFFFFFh
ADA38D2210h 800000001h 800000000h
Figure 4–21. Rounding and Saturation Locations
43 42 29 28 1 0
43 42 21 20 7 6 0
16 User defined SAT Positions (bit 43-28)
16 User defined RND Positions (bit 21-6)
4–34 Chapter 4: DSP Blocks in Stratix IV Devices
Stratix IV Operational Mode Descriptions
Stratix IV Device Handbook February 2011 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Use the rounding and saturation function just described in regular supported
multiplication operations, as specified in Table 4–2 on page 4–8. However, for
accumulation-type operations, use the following convention:
The functionality of the round logic unit is in the format of:
Result = RND[S(A × B)], when used for an accumulation type of operation.
Likewise, the functionality of the saturation logic unit is in the format of:
Result = SAT[S(A × B)], when used for an accumulation type of operation.
If you use both the rounding and saturation logic units for an accumulation type of
operation, the format is:
Result = SAT[RND[S(A × B)]]
DSP Block Control Signals
The Stratix IV DSP block is configured using a set of static and dynamic signals. You
can configure the DSP block dynamic signals. You can set the signals to toggle or not
toggle at run time. Table 4–9 lists the dynamic signals for the DSP block.
Table 4–9. DSP Block Dynamic Signals (Part 1 of 2)
Signal Name Function Count
■
signa
■
signb
Signed/unsigned control for all multipliers and adders.
■
signa
for “multiplicand” input bus to
dataa[17:0]
to each
multiplier
■
signb
for “multiplier” input bus
datab[17:0]
to each multiplier
■
signa
= 1,
signb
= 1 for signed-signed multiplication
■
signa
= 1,
signb
= 0 for signed-unsigned multiplication
■
signa
= 0,
signb
= 1 for unsigned-signed multiplication
■
signa
= 0,
signb
= 0 for unsigned-unsigned multiplication
2
output_round
Round control for the first stage round and saturation block.
■
output_round
= 1 for rounding on multiply output
■
output_round
= 0 for normal multiply output
1
chainout_round
Round control for the second stage round and saturation block.
■
chainout_round
= 1 for rounding multiply output
■
chainout_round
= 0 for normal multiply output
1
output_saturate
Saturation control for the first stage round and saturation block for
Q-format multiply. If you enable both rounding and saturation,
saturation is done on the rounded result.
■
output_saturate
= 1 for saturation support
■
output_saturate
= 0 for no saturation support
1
chainout_saturate
Saturation control for the second stage round and saturation block for
Q-format multiply. If you enable both rounding and saturation,
saturation is done on the rounded result.
■
chainout_saturate
= 1 for saturation support
■
chainout_saturate
= 0 for no saturation support
1
Chapter 4: DSP Blocks in Stratix IV Devices 4–35
Software Support
February 2011 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
Software Support
Altera provides two distinct methods for implementing various modes of the DSP
block in a design—instantiation and inference. Both methods use the following
Quartus II megafunctions:
■
lpm_mult
■
altmult_add
■
altmult_accum
■
altfp_mult
To use the DSP block, instantiate the megafunctions in the Quartus II software.
Alternatively, with inference, create an HDL design and synthesize it using a
third-party synthesis tool (such as LeonardoSpectrum, Synplify, or Quartus II
Native Synthesis) that infers the appropriate megafunction by recognizing
multipliers, multiplier adders, multiplier accumulators, and shift functions. Using
either method, the Quartus II software maps the functionality to the DSP blocks
during compilation.
fFor instructions about using these megafunctions and the MegaWizard Plug-In
Manager, refer to Quartus II software Help.
accum_sload
Dynamically specifies whether the accumulator value is zero.
■
accum_sload
= 0, accumulation input is from the output registers
■
accum_sload
= 1, accumulation input is set to zero
1
zero_chainout
Dynamically specifies whether the chainout value is zero. 1
zero_loopback
Dynamically specifies whether the loopback value is zero. 1
rotate rotate
= 1, the rotation feature is enabled 1
shift_right shift_right
= 1, the shift right feature is enabled 1
Total Signals per Half Block 11
clock0
clock1
clock2
clock3
DSP-block-wide clock signals. 4
ena0
ena1
ena2
ena3
Input and Pipeline Register enable signals. 4
aclr0
aclr1
aclr2
aclr3
DSP block-wide asynchronous clear signals (active low). 4
Total Count per Full Block 34
Table 4–9. DSP Block Dynamic Signals (Part 2 of 2)
Signal Name Function Count
4–36 Chapter 4: DSP Blocks in Stratix IV Devices
Software Support
Stratix IV Device Handbook February 2011 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
fFor more information, refer to the “Synthesis” section in volume 1 of the Quartus II
Handbook.
Document Revision History
Table 4–10 lists the revision history for this chapter.
Table 4–10. Document Revision History
Date Version Changes
February 2011 3.1
■Applied new template.
■Minor text edits.
November 2009 3.0
■Updated Table 4–1.
■Updated “Stratix IV Simplified DSP Operation” section.
■Updated graphics.
■Minor text edits.
June 2009 2.3
■Added an introductory paragraph to increase search ability.
■Removed the Conclusion section.
April 2009 2.2 ■Updated Table 4–1.
March 2009 2.1
■Updated Table 4–1.
■Removed “Referenced Documents” section.
November 2008 2.0
■Updated Table 4–2.
■Updated Figure 4–16.
■Updated Figure 4–18.
May 2008 1.0 Initial release.
Chapter 4: DSP Blocks in Stratix IV Devices 4–37
Software Support
February 2011 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
4–38 Chapter 4: DSP Blocks in Stratix IV Devices
Software Support
Stratix IV Device Handbook February 2011 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
SIV51005-3.4
© 2012 Altera Corporation. All rights reserved. ALTERA, ARRIA, CYCLONE, HARDCOPY, MAX, MEGACORE, NIOS, QUARTUS and STRATIX words and logos
are trademarks of Altera Corporation and registered in the U.S. Patent and Trademark Office and in other countries. All other words and logos identified as
trademarks or service marks are the property of their respective holders as described at www.altera.com/common/legal.html. Altera warrants performance of its
semiconductor products to current specifications in accordance with Altera's standard warranty, but reserves the right to make changes to any products and
services at any time without notice. Altera assumes no responsibility or liability arising out of the application or use of any information, product, or service
described herein except as expressly agreed to in writing by Altera. Altera customers are advised to obtain the latest version of device specifications before relying
on any published information and before placing orders for products or services.
Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
September 2012
Feedback Subscribe
ISO
9001:2008
Registered
5. Clock Networks and PLLs in Stratix IV
Devices
This chapter describes the hierarchical clock networks and phase-locked loops (PLLs)
which have advanced features in Stratix®IV devices. It includes details about the
ability to reconfigure the PLL counter clock frequency and phase shift in real time,
allowing you to sweep PLL output frequencies and dynamically adjust the output
clock phase shift.
The Quartus®II software enables the PLLs and their features without external
devices. The following sections describe the Stratix IV clock networks and PLLs in
detail:
■“Clock Networks in Stratix IV Devices” on page 5–1
■“PLLs in Stratix IV Devices” on page 5–19
Clock Networks in Stratix IV Devices
The global clock networks (GCLKs), regional clock networks (RCLKs), and periphery
clock networks (PCLKs) available in Stratix IV devices are organized into hierarchical
clock structures that provide up to 236 unique clock domains (16 GCLKs + 88 RCLKs
+ 132 PCLKs) within the Stratix IV device and allow up to 71 unique GCLK, RCLK,
and PCLK clock sources (16 GCLKs + 22 RCLKs + 33 PCLKs) per device quadrant.
Table 5–1 lists the clock resources available in Stratix IV devices.
Table 5–1. Clock Resources in Stratix IV Devices (Part 1 of 2)
Clock Resource Number of Resources Available Source of Clock Resource
Clock input pins 32 Single-ended
(16 Differential)
CLK[0..15]p
and
CLK[0..15]n
pins
GCLK networks 16
CLK[0..15]p
and
CLK[0..15]n
pins, PLL clock outputs, and
logic array
RCLK networks 64/88 (1)
CLK[0..15]p
and
CLK[0..15]n
pins, PLL clock outputs, and
logic array
PCLK networks 56/88/112/132 (33 per device
quadrant) (2)
DPA clock outputs, PLD-transceiver interface clocks, horizontal
I/O pins, and logic array
GCLKs/RCLKs per
quadrant 32/38 (3) 16 GCLKs + 16 RCLKs
16 GCLKs + 22 RCLKs
September 2012
SIV51005-3.4
5–2 Chapter 5: Clock Networks and PLLs in Stratix IV Devices
Clock Networks in Stratix IV Devices
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Stratix IV devices have up to 32 dedicated single-ended clock pins or 16 dedicated
differential clock pins (
CLK[0..15]p
and
CLK[0..15]n
) that can drive either the GCLK
or RCLK networks. These clock pins are arranged on the four sides of the Stratix IV
device, as shown in Figure 5–1 through Figure 5–4 on page 5–5.
fFor more information about how to connect the clock input pins, refer to the
Stratix IV GX and Stratix IV E Device Family Pin Connection Guidelines.
GCLKs/RCLKs per
device 80/104 (4) 16 GCLKs + 64 RCLKs
16 GCLKs + 88 RCLKs
Notes to Table 5–1:
(1) There are 64 RCLKs in the EP4S40G2, EP4S100G2, EP4SE230, EP4SGX70, EP4SGX110, EP4SGX180, and EP4SGX230 devices. There are 88
RCLKs in the EP4S40G5, EP4S100G3, EP4S100G4, EP4S100G5, EP4SE360, EP4SE530, EP4SE820, EP4SGX290, EP4SGX360, and
EP4SGX530 devices.
(2) There are 56 PCLKs in the EP4SGX70, and EP4SGX110 devices. There are 88 PCLKs in the EP4S40G2, EP4S100G2, EP4SE230, EP4SE360,
EP4SGX180, EP4SGX230, EP4SGX290, and EP4SGX360 devices. There are 112 PCLKs in the EP4S40G5, EP4S100G3, EP4S100G4,
EP4S100G5, EP4SE530 and EP4SGX530 devices. There are 132 PCLKs in the EP4SE820 device.
(3) There are 32 GCLKs/RCLKs per quadrant in the EP4S40G2, EP4S100G2, EP4SE230, EP4SGX70, EP4SGX110, EP4SGX180, and EP4SGX230
devices. There are 38 GCLKs/RCLKs per quadrant in the EP4S40G5, EP4S100G3, EP4S100G4, EP4S100G5, EP4SE360, EP4SE530, EP4SE820,
EP4SGX290, EP4SGX360, and EP4SGX530 devices.
(4) There are 80 GCLKs/RCLKs per entire device in the EP4S40G2, EP4S100G2, EP4SE230, EP4SGX70, EP4SGX110, EP4SGX180, and EP4SGX230
devices. There are 104 GCLKs/RCLKS per entire device in the EP4S40G5, EP4S100G3, EP4S100G4, EP4S100G5, EP4SE360, EP4SE530,
EP4SE820, EP4SGX290, EP4SGX360, and EP4SGX530 devices.
Table 5–1. Clock Resources in Stratix IV Devices (Part 2 of 2)
Clock Resource Number of Resources Available Source of Clock Resource
Chapter 5: Clock Networks and PLLs in Stratix IV Devices 5–3
Clock Networks in Stratix IV Devices
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
Global Clock Networks
Stratix IV devices provide up to 16 GCLKs that can drive throughout the device,
serving as low-skew clock sources for functional blocks such as adaptive logic
modules (ALMs), digital signal processing (DSP) blocks, TriMatrix memory blocks,
and PLLs. Stratix IV device I/O elements (IOEs) and internal logic can also drive
GCLKs to create internally generated global clocks and other high fan-out control
signals; for example, synchronous or asynchronous clears and clock enables.
Figure 5–1 shows the CLK pins and PLLs that can drive the GCLK networks in
Stratix IV devices.
Figure 5–1. GCLK Networks
T1 T2
L1
L2
L3
L4
B1 B2
R1
R2
R3
R4
GCLK[0..3]
GCLK[4..7]
GCLK[8..11]
GCLK[12..15]
CLK[12..15]
CLK[4..7]
CLK[0..3] CLK[8..11]
5–4 Chapter 5: Clock Networks and PLLs in Stratix IV Devices
Clock Networks in Stratix IV Devices
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Regional Clock Networks
RCLK networks only pertain to the quadrant they drive into. RCLK networks provide
the lowest clock delay and skew for logic contained within a single device quadrant.
The Stratix IV device IOEs and internal logic within a given quadrant can also drive
RCLKs to create internally generated regional clocks and other high fan-out control
signals; for example, synchronous or asynchronous clears and clock enables.
Figure 5–2 through Figure 5–4 on page 5–5 show the CLK pins and PLLs that can
drive the RCLK networks in Stratix IV devices.
Figure 5–2. RCLK Networks (EP4SE230, EP4SGX70, and EP4SGX110 Devices) (1)
Note to Figure 5–2:
(1) A maximum of four signals from the core can drive into each group of RCLKs. For example, only four core signals can drive into
RCLK[0..5]
and
another four core signals can drive into
RCLK[54..63]
at any one time.
T1
B1
RCLK[0..5] RCLK[38..43]
RCLK[6..11] RCLK[32..37]
RCLK[54..63] RCLK[44..53]
RCLK[12..21] RCLK[22..31]
CLK[12..15]
CLK[4..7]
CLK[0..3] CLK[8..11]
Q1 Q2
Q4 Q3
L2 R2
Chapter 5: Clock Networks and PLLs in Stratix IV Devices 5–5
Clock Networks in Stratix IV Devices
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
Figure 5–3. RCLK Networks (EP4S40G2, EP4S100G2, EP4SGX180, and EP4SGX230 Devices) (1)
Note to Figure 5–3:
(1) A maximum of four signals from the core can drive into each group of RCLKs. For example, only four core signals can drive into
RCLK[0..5]
and
another four core signals can drive into
RCLK[54..63]
at any one time.
RCLK[0..5] RCLK[38..43]
RCLK[6..11] RCLK[32..37]
RCLK[54..63] RCLK[44..53]
RCLK[12..21] RCLK[22..31]
CLK[12..15]
CLK[4..7]
CLK[0..3] CLK[8..11]
Q1 Q2
Q4 Q3 R3
R2
T2T1
B2B1
L3
L2
Figure 5–4. RCLK Networks (EP4S40G5, EP4S100G3, EP4S100G4, EP4S100G5, EP4SE360, EP4SE530, EP4SE820,
EP4SGX290, EP4SGX360, and EP4SGX530 Devices) (1), (2), (3)
Notes to Figure 5–4:
(1) The corner
RCLK[64..87]
can only be fed by their respective corner PLL outputs. For more information about connectivity, refer to Table 5–6 on
page 5–13.
(2) The EP4S40G5 and EP4SE360 devices have up to eight PLLs. For more information about PLL availability, refer to Table 5–7 on page 5–19.
(3) A maximum of four signals from the core can drive into each group of RCLKs. For example, only four core signals can drive into
RCLK[0..5]
and
another four core signals can drive into
RCLK[54..63]
at any one time.
RCLK[0..5] RCLK[38..43]
RCLK[6..11] RCLK[32..37]
RCLK[64..69] RCLK[70..75]
RCLK[82..87] RCLK[76..81]
RCLK[54..63] RCLK[44..53]
RCLK[12..21] RCLK[22..31]
CLK[12..15]
CLK[4..7]
CLK[0..3] CLK[8..11]
Q1 Q2
Q4 Q3
L3 R3
L2 R2
L4 R4
L1 R1
T2T1
B2B1
5–6 Chapter 5: Clock Networks and PLLs in Stratix IV Devices
Clock Networks in Stratix IV Devices
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Periphery Clock Networks
PCLK networks shown in Figure 5–5 through Figure 5–8 on page 5–8 are collections of
individual clock networks driven from the periphery of the Stratix IV device. Clock
outputs from the dynamic phase aligner (DPA) block, programmable logic device
(PLD)-transceiver interface clocks, I/O pins, and internal logic can drive the PCLK
networks.
PCLKs have higher skew when compared with GCLK and RCLK networks. You can
use PCLKs for general purpose routing to drive signals into and out of the Stratix IV
device.
Figure 5–5. PCLK Networks (EP4SGX70 and EP4SGX110 Devices)
T1
B1
CLK[12..15]
CLK[4..7]
CLK[0..3] CLK[8..11]
Q1 Q2
Q4 Q3
L2 R2
PCLK[0..13] PCLK[42..56]
PCLK[14..27] PCLK[28..41]
Chapter 5: Clock Networks and PLLs in Stratix IV Devices 5–7
Clock Networks in Stratix IV Devices
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
Figure 5–6. PCLK Networks (EP4S40G2, EP4S100G2, EP4SE230, EP4SE360, EP4SGX180, EP4SGX230, EP4SGX290, and
EP4SGX360 Devices) (1)
Note to Figure 5–6:
(1) The EP4SE230 device has four PLLs. The EP4SGX290 and EP4SGX360 devices have up to 12 PLLs. For more information about PLL availability,
refer to Table 5–7 on page 5–19.
T2
B2
T1
B1
PCLK[77..87]
CLK[12..15]
CLK[4..7]
CLK[0..3] CLK[8..11]
Q1 Q2
Q4 Q3
L3 R3
L2 R2
PCLK[0..10]
PCLK[11..21] PCLK[66..76]
PCLK[22..32] PCLK[55..65]
PCLK[33..43] PCLK[44..54]
Figure 5–7. PCLK Networks (EP4S40G5, EP4S100G3, EP4S100G4, EP4S100G5, EP4SE530, and EP4SGX530 Devices) (1)
Note to Figure 5–7:
(1) The EP4S40G5 device has eight PLLs. For more information about PLL availability, refer to Table 5–7 on page 5–19.
Q1 Q2
Q4 Q3
PCLK[0..13] PCLK[98..111]
PCLK[84..97]
PCLK[14..27]
PCLK[28..41]
PCLK[42..55]
PCLK[70..83]
PCLK[56..69]
T2
B2
T1
B1
CLK[12..15]
CLK[4..7]
CLK[0..3] CLK[8..11]
L3 R3
L2 R2
L4 R4
L1 R1
5–8 Chapter 5: Clock Networks and PLLs in Stratix IV Devices
Clock Networks in Stratix IV Devices
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Figure 5–8. PCLK Networks (EP4SE820 Device)
Q1 Q2
Q4 Q3
PCLK[0..15]
PCLK[16..32]
PCLK[116..131]
PCLK[99..115]
PCLK[82..98]
PCLK[33..49]
PCLK[50..65]
PCLK[66..81]
T2
B2
T1
B1
CLK[12..15]
CLK[4..7]
CLK[0..3] CLK[8..11]
L3 R3
L2 R2
L4 R4
L1 R1
Chapter 5: Clock Networks and PLLs in Stratix IV Devices 5–9
Clock Networks in Stratix IV Devices
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
Clock Sources Per Quadrant
There are 26 section clock (SCLK) networks available in each spine clock that can
drive six row clocks in each logic array block (LAB) row, nine column I/O clocks, and
three core reference clocks. The SCLKs are the clock resources to the core functional
blocks, PLLs, and I/O interfaces of the device. Figure 5–9 shows that the SCLKs can
be driven by the GCLK, RCLK, PCLK, or the PLL feedback clock networks in each
spine clock.
1A spine clock is another layer of routing below the GCLKs, RCLKs, and PCLKs before
each clock is connected to clock routing for each LAB row. The settings for spine
clocks are transparent to all users. The Quartus II software automatically routes the
spine clock based on the GCLK, RCLK, and PCLKs.
Clock Regions
Stratix IV devices provide up to 104 distinct clock domains (16 GCLKs + 88 RCLKs) in
the entire device. You can use these clock resources to form the following types of
clock regions:
■Entire device
■Regional
■Dual-regional
To form the entire device clock region, a source (not necessarily a clock signal) drives a
GCLK network that can be routed through the entire device. This clock region has the
maximum delay when compared with other clock regions, but allows the signal to
reach every destination within the device. This is a good option for routing global
reset and clear signals or routing clocks throughout the device.
Figure 5–9. Hierarchical Clock Networks per Spine Clock (1)
Notes to Figure 5–9:
(1) The GCLK, RCLK, PCLK, and PLL feedback clocks share the same routing to the SCLKs. The total number of clock
resources must not exceed the SCLK limits in each region to ensure successful design fitting in the Quartus II
software.
(2) There are up to 16 PCLKs that can drive the SCLKs in each spine clock in the largest device.
(3) There are up to 22 RCLKs that can drive the SCLKs in each spine clock in the largest device.
(4) The PLL feedback clock is the clock from the PLL that drives into the SCLKs.
(5) The column I/O clock is the clock that drives the column I/O core registers and I/O interfaces.
(6) The core reference clock is the clock that feeds into the PLL as the PLL reference clock.
(7) The row clock is the clock source to the LAB, memory blocks, and row I/O interfaces in the core row.
SCLK
Column I/O clock
(5)
Core reference clock
(6)
Row clock
(7)
GCLK
RCLK
PLL feedback clock
(4)
PCLK
9
326
16
3
16 (2)
22 (3)
6
5–10 Chapter 5: Clock Networks and PLLs in Stratix IV Devices
Clock Networks in Stratix IV Devices
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
To form a RCLK region, a source drives a single quadrant of the device. This clock
region provides the lowest skew within a quadrant and is a good option if all the
destinations are within a single device quadrant.
To form a dual-regional clock region, a single source (a clock pin or PLL output)
generates a dual-regional clock by driving two RCLK networks (one from each
quadrant). This technique allows destinations across two device quadrants to use the
same low-skew clock. The routing of this signal on an entire side has approximately
the same delay as a RCLK region. Internal logic can also drive a dual-regional clock
network. Corner PLL outputs only span one quadrant, they cannot generate a
dual-regional clock network. Figure 5–10 shows the dual-regional clock region.
Clock Network Sources
In Stratix IV devices, clock input pins, PLL outputs, and internal logic can drive the
GCLK and RCLK networks. For connectivity between dedicated pins
CLK[0..15]
and
the GCLK and RCLK networks, refer to Table 5–2 and Table 5–3 on page 5–11.
Dedicated Clock Input Pins
Clock pins can be either differential clocks or single-ended clocks. Stratix IV devices
support 16 differential clock inputs or 32 single-ended clock inputs. You can also use
dedicated clock input pins
CLK[15..0]
for high fan-out control signals such as
asynchronous clears, presets, and clock enables for protocol signals such as
TRDY
and
IRDY
for PCIe through the GCLK or RCLK networks.
LABs
You can drive each GCLK and RCLK network using LAB-routing to enable internal
logic to drive a high fan-out, low-skew signal.
1Stratix IV PLLs cannot be driven by internally generated GCLKs or RCLKs. The input
clock to the PLL has to come from dedicated clock input pins or pin/PLL-fed GCLKs
or RCLKs.
Figure 5–10. Stratix IV Dual-Regional Clock Region
Clock pins or PLL outputs
can drive half of the device to
create side-wide clocking
regions for improved
interface timing.
Chapter 5: Clock Networks and PLLs in Stratix IV Devices 5–11
Clock Networks in Stratix IV Devices
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
PLL Clock Outputs
Stratix IV PLLs can drive both GCLK and RCLK networks, as described in Table 5–5
on page 5–13 and Table 5–6 on page 5–13.
Table 5–2 lists the connection between the dedicated clock input pins and GCLKs.
Table 5–3 lists the connectivity between the dedicated clock input pins and RCLKs in
Stratix IV devices. A given clock input pin can drive two adjacent RCLK networks to
create a dual-regional clock network.
Table 5–2. Clock Input Pin Connectivity to the GCLK Networks
Clock Resources
CLK (p/n Pins)
0123456789101112131415
GCLK0
Y Y Y Y ————————————
GCLK1
Y Y Y Y ————————————
GCLK2
Y Y Y Y ————————————
GCLK3
Y Y Y Y ————————————
GCLK4
———— Y Y Y Y ————————
GCLK5
———— Y Y Y Y ————————
GCLK6
———— Y Y Y Y ————————
GCLK7
———— Y Y Y Y ————————
GCLK8
———————— YYYY————
GCLK9
———————— YYYY————
GCLK10
———————— YYYY————
GCLK11
———————— YYYY————
GCLK12
———————————— YYYY
GCLK13
———————————— YYYY
GCLK14
———————————— YYYY
GCLK15
———————————— YYYY
Table 5–3. Clock Input Pin Connectivity to the RCLK Networks (Part 1 of 2)
Clock Resource
CLK (p/n Pins)
0123456789101112131415
RCLK [0, 4, 6, 10]
Y ———————————————
RCLK [1, 5, 7, 11]
— Y ——————————————
RCLK [2, 8]
—— Y —————————————
RCLK [3, 9]
——— Y ————————————
RCLK [13, 17, 21, 23,
27, 31]
———— Y ———————————
RCLK [12, 16, 20, 22,
26, 30]
————— Y ——————————
RCLK [15, 19, 25, 29]
—————— Y —————————
RCLK [14, 18, 24, 28]
——————— Y ————————
RCLK [35, 41]
———————— Y ———————
5–12 Chapter 5: Clock Networks and PLLs in Stratix IV Devices
Clock Networks in Stratix IV Devices
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Clock Input Connections to the PLLs
Table 5–4 lists the dedicated clock input pin connectivity to Stratix IV PLLs.
RCLK [34, 40]
————————— Y ——————
RCLK [33, 37, 39, 43]
—————————— Y —————
RCLK [32, 36, 38, 42]
——————————— Y ————
RCLK [47, 51, 57, 61]
———————————— Y ———
RCLK [46, 50, 56, 60]
————————————— Y——
RCLK [45, 49, 53, 55,
59, 63]
——————————————Y—
RCLK [44, 48, 52, 54,
58, 62]
———————————————Y
Table 5–3. Clock Input Pin Connectivity to the RCLK Networks (Part 2 of 2)
Clock Resource
CLK (p/n Pins)
0123456789101112131415
Table 5–4. Device PLLs and PLL Clock Pin Drivers (1),(2)
Dedicated Clock
Input Pin
CLK (p/n Pins)
PLL Number
L1 (3) L2 L3 L4 (3) B1 B2 R1 (3) R2 R3 R4 (3) T1 T2
CLK0
Y Y Y Y ————— ———
CLK1
Y Y Y Y ————— ———
CLK2
Y Y Y Y ————— ———
CLK3
Y Y Y Y ————— ———
CLK4
——— — Y Y ——— ———
CLK5
——— — Y Y ——— ———
CLK6
——— — Y Y ——— ———
CLK7
——— — Y Y ——— ———
CLK8
——— — —— Y Y Y Y ——
CLK9
——— — —— Y Y Y Y ——
CLK10
——— — —— Y Y Y Y ——
CLK11
——— — —— Y Y Y Y ——
CLK12
——— — ————— — Y Y
CLK13
——— — ————— — Y Y
CLK14
——— — ————— — Y Y
CLK15
——— — ————— — Y Y
Notes to Table 5–4:
(1) For single-ended clock inputs, only the
CLK<#>p
pin has a dedicated connection to the PLL. If you use the
CLK<#>n
pin, a global clock is used.
(2) For the availability of the clock input pins in each device density, refer to the “Stratix IV Device Pin-Out Files” section of the Pin-Out Files for
Altera Devices site.
(3) These are non-compensated clock input paths. For the compensated input for these PLLs, use the corresponding
PLL_[L, R][1,4]_CLK
input
pin.
Chapter 5: Clock Networks and PLLs in Stratix IV Devices 5–13
Clock Networks in Stratix IV Devices
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
1Dedicated clock pins can drive PLLs over dedicated routing; they do not require the
global or regional network. Compensated inputs, which are a subset of dedicated
clock pins, drive PLLs that can only compensate the input delay when a dedicated
clock pin is in the same I/O bank as the PLL used.
Clock Output Connections
PLLs in Stratix IV devices can drive up to 20 RCLK networks and four GCLK
networks. For Stratix IV PLL connectivity to GCLK networks, refer to Table 5–5. The
Quartus II software automatically assigns PLL clock outputs to RCLK and GCLK
networks.
Table 5–5 lists how the PLL clock outputs connect to the GCLK networks.
Table 5–6 lists how the PLL clock outputs connect to the RCLK networks.
Table 5–5. Stratix IV PLL Connectivity to the GCLK Networks (1)
Clock Network
PLL Number
L1 L2 L3 L4 B1 B2 R1 R2 R3 R4 T1 T2
GCLK0
Y Y Y Y ————————
GCLK1
Y Y Y Y ————————
GCLK2
Y Y Y Y ————————
GCLK3
Y Y Y Y ————————
GCLK4
———— Y Y ——————
GCLK5
———— Y Y ——————
GCLK6
———— Y Y ——————
GCLK7
———— Y Y ——————
GCLK8
—————— Y Y Y Y ——
GCLK9
—————— Y Y Y Y ——
GCLK10
—————— Y Y Y Y ——
GCLK11
—————— Y Y Y Y ——
GCLK12
—————————— Y Y
GCLK13
—————————— Y Y
GCLK14
—————————— Y Y
GCLK15
—————————— Y Y
Note to Table 5–5:
(1) Only PLL counter outputs C0 - C3 can drive the GCLK networks.
Table 5–6. Stratix IV RCLK Outputs From the PLL Clock Outputs (1) (Part 1 of 2)
Clock Resource
PLL Number
L1 L2 L3 L4 B1 B2 R1 R2 R3 R4 T1 T2
RCLK[0..11]
— Y Y —————————
RCLK[12..31]
———— Y Y ——————
RCLK[32..43]
——————— Y Y———
RCLK[44..63]
——————————Y Y
5–14 Chapter 5: Clock Networks and PLLs in Stratix IV Devices
Clock Networks in Stratix IV Devices
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Clock Control Block
Every GCLK and RCLK network has its own clock control block. The control block
provides the following features:
■Clock source selection (dynamic selection for GCLKs)
■Global clock multiplexing
■Clock power down (static or dynamic clock enable or disable)
Figure 5–11 and Figure 5–12 show the GCLK and RCLK select blocks, respectively.
You can select the clock source for the GCLK select block either statically or
dynamically. You can statically select the clock source using a setting in the Quartus II
software or you can dynamically select the clock source using internal logic to drive
the multiplexer-select inputs. When selecting the clock source dynamically, you can
select either PLL outputs (such as
C0
or
C1
) or a combination of clock pins or PLL
outputs.
RCLK[64..69]
——— Y ————————
RCLK[70..75]
—————————Y——
RCLK[76..81]
—————— Y —————
RCLK[82..87]
Y ———————————
Note to Table 5–6:
(1) All PLL counter outputs can drive the RCLK networks.
Table 5–6. Stratix IV RCLK Outputs From the PLL Clock Outputs (1) (Part 2 of 2)
Clock Resource
PLL Number
L1 L2 L3 L4 B1 B2 R1 R2 R3 R4 T1 T2
Figure 5–11. Stratix IV GCLK Control Block
Notes to Figure 5–11:
(1) When the device is operating in user mode, you can dynamically control the clock select signals through internal
logic.
(2) When the device is operation in user mode, you can only set the clock select signals through a configuration file
(SRAM object file [.sof] or programmer object file [.pof]) and cannot be dynamically controlled.
CLKp
Pins
PLL Counter
Outputs
Internal
Logic
Static Clock
Select (2)
CLKSELECT[1..0]
This multiplexer
supports user-controllable
dynamic switching
(1)
2
2
2CLKn
Pin
Enable/
Disable
GCLK
Internal
Logic
Chapter 5: Clock Networks and PLLs in Stratix IV Devices 5–15
Clock Networks in Stratix IV Devices
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
The mapping between the input clock pins, PLL counter outputs, and clock control
block inputs is as follows:
■
inclk[0]
and
inclk[1]
—can be fed by any of the four dedicated clock pins on the
same side of the Stratix IV device
■
inclk[2]
—can be fed by PLL counters C0 and C2 from the two center PLLs on the
same side of the Stratix IV device
■
inclk[3]
—can be fed by PLL counters C1 and C3 from the two center PLLs on the
same side of the Stratix IV device
The corner PLLs (L1, L4, R1, and R4) and the corresponding clock input pins
(
PLL_L1_CLK
and so forth) do not support dynamic selection for the GCLK network.
The clock source selection for the GCLK and RCLK networks from the corner PLLs
(L1, L4, R1, and R4) and the corresponding clock input pins (
PLL_L1_CLK
and so forth)
are controlled statically using configuration bit settings in the configuration file (.sof
or .pof) generated by the Quartus II software.
You can only control the clock source selection for the RCLK select block statically
using configuration bit settings in the configuration file (.sof or .pof) generated by the
Quartus II software.
You can power down the Stratix IV clock networks using both static and dynamic
approaches. When a clock network is powered down, all the logic fed by the clock
network is in off-state, thereby reducing the overall power consumption of the device.
The unused GCLK and RCLK networks are automatically powered down through
configuration bit settings in the configuration file (.sof or .pof) generated by the
Quartus II software. The dynamic clock enable or disable feature allows the internal
logic to control power-up or power-down synchronously on the GCLK and RCLK
networks, including dual-regional clock regions. This function is independent of the
PLL and is applied directly on the clock network, as shown in Figure 5–11 and
Figure 5–12.
Figure 5–12. RCLK Control Block
Notes to Figure 5–12:
(1) When the device is operation in user mode, you can only set the clock select signals through a configuration file (.sof
or .pof) and cannot be dynamically controlled.
(2) The
CLKn
pin is not a dedicated clock input when used as a single-ended PLL clock input.
CLKp
Pin
PLL Counter
Outputs Internal
Logic
CLKn
Pin
Enable/
Disable
RCLK
Internal
Logic
Static Clock Select (1)
2
(2)
5–16 Chapter 5: Clock Networks and PLLs in Stratix IV Devices
Clock Networks in Stratix IV Devices
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
You can set the input clock sources and the
clkena
signals for the GCLK and RCLK
network multiplexers through the Quartus II software using the ALTCLKCTRL
megafunction. You can also enable or disable the dedicated external clock output pins
using the ALTCLKCTRL megafunction. Figure 5–13 shows the external PLL output
clock control block.
1When using the ALTCLKCTRL megafunction to implement dynamic clock source
selection, the inputs from the clock pins feed the
inclk[0..1]
ports of the multiplexer,
while the PLL outputs feed the
inclk[2..3]
ports. You can choose from among these
inputs using the
CLKSELECT[1..0]
signal.
fFor more information, refer to the Clock Control Block (ALTCLKCTRL) Megafunction
User Guide.
Figure 5–13. Stratix IV External PLL Output Clock Control Block
Notes to Figure 5–13:
(1) When the device is operation in user mode, you can only set the clock select signals through a configuration file (.sof
or .pof) and cannot be dynamically controlled.
(2) The clock control block feeds to a multiplexer within the PLL_<#>_CLKOUT pin’s IOE. The PLL_<#>_CLKOUT
pin is a dual-purpose pin. Therefore, this multiplexer selects either an internal signal or the output of the clock control
block.
PLL Counter
Outputs
Enable/
Disable
PLL_<#>_CLKOUT pin
Internal
Logic
Static Clock Select
IOE
(1)
Static Clock
Select (1)
Internal
Logic
(2)
7 or 10
Chapter 5: Clock Networks and PLLs in Stratix IV Devices 5–17
Clock Networks in Stratix IV Devices
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
Clock Enable Signals
Figure 5–14 shows how the clock enable and disable circuit of the clock control block
is implemented in Stratix IV devices.
In Stratix IV devices, the
clkena
signals are supported at the clock network level
instead of at the PLL output counter level. This allows you to gate off the clock even
when you are not using a PLL. You can also use the
clkena
signals to control the
dedicated external clocks from the PLLs. Figure 5–15 shows a waveform example for
a clock output enable.
clkena
is synchronous to the falling edge of the clock output.
Stratix IV devices also have an additional metastability register that aids in
asynchronous enable and disable of the GCLK and RCLK networks. You can
optionally bypass this register in the Quartus II software.
Figure 5–14. clkena Implementation
Notes to Figure 5–14:
(1) The R1 and R2 bypass paths are not available for the PLL external clock outputs.
(2) The select line is statically controlled by a bit setting in the configuration file (.sof or .pof).
clkena GCLK/
RCLK/
PLL_<#>_CLKOUT (1)
output of clock
select mux
(2)
R1 R2
(1)
(1)
DQDQ
Figure 5–15. clkena Signals (1)
Note to Figure 5–15:
(1) You can use the clkena signals to enable or disable the GCLK and RCLK networks or the PLL_<#>_CLKOUT pins.
output of clock
select mux
clkena
output of AND gate
with R2 bypassed
output of AND gate
with R2 not bypassed
5–18 Chapter 5: Clock Networks and PLLs in Stratix IV Devices
Clock Networks in Stratix IV Devices
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
The PLL can remain locked independent of the
clkena
signals because the
loop-related counters are not affected. This feature is useful for applications that
require a low-power or sleep mode. The
clkena
signal can also disable clock outputs if
the system is not tolerant of frequency over-shoot during resynchronization.
Clock Source Control for PLLs
The clock input to Stratix IV PLLs comes from clock input multiplexers. The clock
multiplexer inputs come from dedicated clock input pins, PLLs through the GCLK
and RCLK networks, or from dedicated connections between adjacent top/bottom
and left/right PLLs. The clock input sources to top/bottom and left/right PLLs (L2,
L3, T1, T2, B1, B2, R2, and R3) are shown in Figure 5–16; the corresponding clock
input sources to left and right PLLs (L1, L4, R1, and R4) are shown in Figure 5–17.
The multiplexer select lines are only set in the configuration file (.sof or .pof). After
programmed, this block cannot be changed without loading a new configuration file
(.sof or .pof). The Quartus II software automatically sets the multiplexer select signals
depending on the clock sources selected in the design.
Figure 5–16. Clock Input Multiplexer Logic for L2, L3, T1, T2, B1, B2, R2, and R3 PLLs
Notes to Figure 5–16:
(1) When the device is operating in user mode, input clock multiplexing is controlled through a configuration file (.sof
or .pof) only and cannot be dynamically controlled.
(2) n=0 for L2 and L3 PLLs; n=4 for B1 and B2 PLLs; n=8 for R2 and R3 PLLs, and n=12 for T1 and T2 PLLs.
(3) You can drive the GCLK or RCLK input using an output from another PLL, a pin-driven GCLK or RCLK, or through a
clock control block provided the clock control block is fed by an output from another PLL or a pin-driven dedicated
GCLK or RCLK. An internally generated global signal or general purpose I/O pin cannot drive the PLL.
Figure 5–17. Clock Input Multiplexer Logic for L1, L4, R1, and R4 PLLs
Notes to Figure 5–17:
(1) Dedicated clock input pins to the PLLs are L1, L4, R1, and R4, respectively. For example, PLL_L1_CLK is the
dedicated clock input for PLL_L1.
(2) You can drive the GCLK or RCLK input using an output from another PLL, a pin-driven GCLK or RCLK, or through a
clock control block provided the clock control block is fed by an output from another PLL or a pin-driven dedicated
GCLK or RCLK. An internally generated global signal or general purpose I/O pin cannot drive the PLL.
(3) The center clock pins can feed the corner PLLs on the same side directly through a dedicated path. However, these
paths may not be fully compensated.
4
4
(1)
(1)
inclk0
inclk1
To the clock
switchover bloc
k
clk[n+3..n]
(2)
GCLK / RCLK input
(3)
Adjacent PLL output
inclk0
inclk1
CLK[0..3] or CLK[8..11]
(3)
GCLK/RCLK
(2)
PLL_<L1/L4/R1/R4>_CLK
(1)
4
4
Chapter 5: Clock Networks and PLLs in Stratix IV Devices 5–19
PLLs in Stratix IV Devices
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
Cascading PLLs
You can cascade the left/right and top/bottom PLLs through the GCLK and RCLK
networks. In addition, where two left/right or top/bottom PLLs exist next to each
other, there is a direct connection between them that does not require the GCLK or
RCLK network. Using this path reduces clock jitter when cascading PLLs.
1Stratix IV GX devices allow cascading the left and right PLLs to transceiver PLLs
(CMU PLLs and receiver CDRs).
fFor more information, refer to the “FPGA Fabric PLLs -Transceiver PLLs Cascading”
section in the Transceiver Clocking in Stratix IV Devices chapter.
When cascading PLLs in Stratix IV devices, the source (upstream) PLL must have a
low-bandwidth setting while the destination (downstream) PLL must have a
high-bandwidth setting. Ensure that there is no overlap of the bandwidth ranges of
the two PLLs.
fFor more information about PLL cascading in external memory interfaces designs,
refer to the External Memory PHY Interface (ALTMEMPHY) (nonAFI) Megafunction User
Guide.
PLLs in Stratix IV Devices
Stratix IV devices offer up to 12 PLLs that provide robust clock management and
synthesis for device clock management, external system clock management, and
high-speed I/O interfaces. The nomenclature for the PLLs follows their geographical
location in the device floor plan. The PLLs that reside on the top and bottom sides of
the device are named
PLL_T1
,
PLL_T2
,
PLL_B1
and
PLL_B2
; the PLLs that reside on the
left and right sides of the device are named
PLL_L1
,
PLL_L2
,
PLL_L3
,
PLL_L4
,
PLL_R1
,
PLL_R2
,
PLL_R3
, and
PLL_R4
.
Table 5–7 lists the number of PLLs available in the Stratix IV device family.
Table 5–7. PLL Availability for Stratix IV Devices (Part 1 of 2)
Device Package L1 L2 L3 L4 T1 T2 B1 B2 R1 R2 R3 R4
EP4S40G2 F1517 — YY
—YYYY
—YY
—
EP4S40G5 H1517 — YY
—YYYY
—YY
—
EP4S100G2 F1517 — YY
—YYYY
—YY
—
EP4S100G3 F1932 YYYYYYYYYYYY
EP4S100G4 F1932 YYYYYYYYYYYY
EP4S100G5 H1517 — YY
—YYYY
—YY
—
F1932 YYYYYYYYYYYY
EP4SE230 F780 — Y—— Y—Y—— Y——
EP4SE360 H780 — Y—— Y—Y—— Y——
F1152 — YY
—YYYY
—YY
—
5–20 Chapter 5: Clock Networks and PLLs in Stratix IV Devices
PLLs in Stratix IV Devices
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
All Stratix IV PLLs have the same core analog structure with only minor differences in
the features that are supported. Table 5–8 lists the features of top/bottom and
left/right PLLs in Stratix IV devices.
EP4SE530
H1152 — YY
—YYYY
—YY
—
H1517 YYYYYYYYYYYY
F1760 YYYYYYYYYYYY
EP4SE820
H1152 — YY
—YYYY
—YY
—
H1517 YYYYYYYYYYYY
F1760 YYYYYYYYYYYY
EP4SGX70 F780 — Y—— Y—Y—————
F1152 — Y—— Y—Y—— Y——
EP4SGX110 F780 — Y—— Y—Y—————
F1152 — Y—— Y—Y—— Y——
EP4SGX180
F780 — Y—— Y—Y—————
F1152 — Y—— YYYY
—Y——
F1517 — YY
—YYYY
—YY
—
EP4SGX230
F780 — Y—— Y—Y—————
F1152 — Y—— YYYY
—Y——
F1517 — YY
—YYYY
—YY
—
EP4SGX290
H780———— YYYY
————
F1152 — Y—— YYYY
—Y——
F1517 — YY
—YYYY
—YY
—
F1760 YYYYYYYYYYYY
F1932 YYYYYYYYYYYY
EP4SGX360
H780———— YYYY
————
F1152 — Y—— YYYY
—Y——
F1517 — YY
—YYYY
—YY
—
F1760 YYYYYYYYYYYY
F1932 YYYYYYYYYYYY
EP4SGX530
H1152 — Y—— YYYY
—Y——
H1517 — YY
—YYYY
—YY
—
F1760 YYYYYYYYYYYY
F1932 YYYYYYYYYYYY
Table 5–7. PLL Availability for Stratix IV Devices (Part 2 of 2)
Device Package L1 L2 L3 L4 T1 T2 B1 B2 R1 R2 R3 R4
Table 5–8. PLL Features in Stratix IV Devices (Part 1 of 2) (1)
Feature Stratix IV Top/Bottom PLLs Stratix IV Left/Right PLLs
C
(output) counters 10 7
M
,
N
,
C
counter sizes 1 to 512 1 to 512
Dedicated clock outputs 6 single-ended or 4 single-ended and 1
differential pair 2 single-ended or 1 differential pair
Chapter 5: Clock Networks and PLLs in Stratix IV Devices 5–21
PLLs in Stratix IV Devices
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
Clock input pins (2) 4 single-ended or 4 differential pin pairs 4 single-ended or 4 differential pin
pairs
External feedback input pin Single-ended or differential Single-ended only
Spread-spectrum input clock tracking Yes (3) Yes (3)
PLL cascading Through GCLK and RCLK and a dedicated
path between adjacent PLLs
Through GCLK and RCLK and
dedicated path between adjacent PLLs
(4)
Compensation modes All except LVDS clock network
compensation
All except external feedback mode
when using differential I/Os
PLL drives
LVDSCLK
and
LOADEN
No Yes
VCO output drives the DPA clock No Yes
Phase shift resolution Down to 96.125 ps (5) Down to 96.125 ps (5)
Programmable duty cycle Yes Yes
Output counter cascading Yes Yes
Input clock switchover Yes Yes
Notes to Table 5–8:
(1) While there is pin compatibility, there is no hard IP block placement compatibility.
(2) General purpose I/O pins cannot drive the PLL clock input pins.
(3) Provided input clock jitter is within input jitter tolerance specifications.
(4) The dedicated path between adjacent PLLs is not available on L1, L4, R1, and R4 PLLs.
(5) The smallest phase shift is determined by the voltage-controlled oscillator (VCO) period divided by eight. For degree increments, the Stratix IV
device can shift all output frequencies in increments of at least 45°. Smaller degree increments are possible depending on the frequency and
divide parameters.
Table 5–8. PLL Features in Stratix IV Devices (Part 2 of 2) (1)
Feature Stratix IV Top/Bottom PLLs Stratix IV Left/Right PLLs
5–22 Chapter 5: Clock Networks and PLLs in Stratix IV Devices
PLLs in Stratix IV Devices
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Figure 5–18 shows the location of PLLs in Stratix IV devices.
Figure 5–18. PLL Locations in Stratix IV Devices
PLL_R1_CLK
PLL-R4_CLK
CLK[8..11]
PLL_L4_CLK
CLK[0..3]
L1
L2
L3
L4
R1
R2
R3
R4
T2
B1 B2
CLK[4..7]
CLK[12..15]
T1
Q1
Q4
Q2
Q3
Left/Right PLLs
Left/Right PLLs
Left/Right PLLs
Left/Right PLLs
Top/Bottom PLLs
PLL_L1_CLK
Top/Bottom PLLs
Top/Bottom PLLs
Top/Bottom PLLs
Chapter 5: Clock Networks and PLLs in Stratix IV Devices 5–23
PLLs in Stratix IV Devices
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
Stratix IV PLL Hardware Overview
Stratix IV devices contain up to 12 PLLs with advanced clock management features.
The goal of a PLL is to synchronize the phase and frequency of an internal or external
clock to an input reference clock. There are a number of components that comprise a
PLL to achieve this phase alignment.
Stratix IV PLLs align the rising edge of the input reference clock to a feedback clock
using the phase-frequency detector (PFD). The falling edges are determined by the
duty-cycle specifications. The PFD produces an up or down signal that determines
whether the VCO must operate at a higher or lower frequency. The output of the PFD
feeds the charge pump and loop filter, which produces a control voltage for setting the
VCO frequency. If the PFD produces an up signal, the VCO frequency increases. A
down signal decreases the VCO frequency. The PFD outputs these up and down
signals to a charge pump. If the charge pump receives an up signal, current is driven
into the loop filter. Conversely, if the charge pump receives a down signal, current is
drawn from the loop filter.
The loop filter converts these up and down signals to a voltage that is used to bias the
VCO. The loop filter also removes glitches from the charge pump and prevents
voltage over-shoot, which filters the jitter on the VCO. The voltage from the loop filter
determines how fast the VCO operates. A divide counter (
m
) is inserted in the
feedback loop to increase the VCO frequency above the input reference frequency.
VCO frequency (fVCO) is equal to (
m
) times the input reference clock (fREF). The input
reference clock (fREF) to the PFD is equal to the input clock (fIN) divided by the
pre-scale counter (
N
). Therefore, the feedback clock (fFB) applied to one input of the
PFD is locked to the fREF that is applied to the other input of the PFD.
The VCO output from the left and right PLLs can feed seven post-scale counters
(
C[0..6]
), while the corresponding VCO output from the top and bottom PLLs can
feed ten post-scale counters (
C[0..9]
). These post-scale counters allow a number of
harmonically related frequencies to be produced by the PLL.
5–24 Chapter 5: Clock Networks and PLLs in Stratix IV Devices
PLLs in Stratix IV Devices
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Figure 5–19 shows a simplified block diagram of the major components of the
Stratix IV PLL.
1You can drive the GCLK or RCLK inputs using an output from another PLL, a
pin-driven GCLK or RCLK, or through a clock control block provided the clock
control block is fed by an output from another PLL or a pin-driven dedicated GCLK
or RCLK. An internally generated global signal or general purpose I/O pin cannot
drive the PLL.
PLL Clock I/O Pins
Each top and bottom PLL supports six clock I/O pins, organized as three pairs of
pins:
■1st pair—two single-ended I/O or one differential I/O
■2nd pair—two single-ended I/O or one differential external feedback input
(FBp/FBn)
■3rd pair—two single-ended I/O or one differential input
Figure 5–19. Stratix IV PLL Block Diagram
Notes to Figure 5–19:
(1) The number of post-scale counters is seven for left and right PLLs and ten for top and bottom PLLs.
(2) This is the VCO post-scale counter
K
.
(3) The
FBOUT
port is fed by the
M
counter in Stratix IV PLLs.
Clock
Switchover
Block
inclk0
inclk1
Dedicated
clock inputs
Cascade input
from adjacent PLL
pfdena
clkswitch
clkbad0
clkbad1
activeclock
PFD
Lock
Circuit locked
÷n CP LF
VCO
÷2
(2)
GCLK/RCLK
8
4
FBIN
DIFFIOCLK network
GCLK/RCLK network
no compensation mode
ZDB, External feedback modes
LVDS Compensation mode
Source Synchronous, normal modes
÷C0
÷C1
÷C2
÷C3
÷Cn
÷m
(1)
PLL Output Mux
Casade output
to adjacent PLL
GCLKs
RCLKs
External clock
outputs
DIFFIOCLK from
Left/Right PLLs
LOAD_EN from
Left/Right PLLs
FBOUT
(3)
External
memory
interface DLL
88
To DPA block on
Left/Right PLLs
/2, /4
Chapter 5: Clock Networks and PLLs in Stratix IV Devices 5–25
PLLs in Stratix IV Devices
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
Figure 5–20 shows the clock I/O pins associated with the top and bottom PLLs.
Figure 5–20. External Clock Outputs for Top and Bottom PLLs
Notes to Figure 5–20:
(1) You can feed these clock output pins using any one of the C[9..0], m counters.
(2) The CLKOUT0p and CLKOUT0n pins can be either single-ended or differential clock outputs. The CLKOUT1 and CLKOUT2 pins are
dual-purpose I/O pins that you can use as two single-ended outputs or one differential external feedback input pin. The CLKOUT3 and CLKOUT4
pins are two single-ended output pins.
(3) These external clock enable signals are available only when using the ALTCLKCTRL megafunction.
Top/Bottom
PLLs
C2
C3
C4
C6
C7
C5
PLL_<#>_CLKOUT3
(1), (2)
C8
C0
C1
C9
Internal Logic
PLL_<#>_CLKOUT4
(1), (2)
PLL_<#>_FBn/CLKOUT2 (1), (2)
PLL_<#>_FBp/CLKOUT1 (1), (2)
PLL_<#>_CLKOUT0n (1), (2)
PLL_<#>_CLKOUT0p (1), (2)
clkena0 (3)
clkena1 (3) clkena3 (3)
clkena2 (3) clkena4 (3)
clkena5 (3)
m(fbout)
5–26 Chapter 5: Clock Networks and PLLs in Stratix IV Devices
PLLs in Stratix IV Devices
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Any of the output counters (
C[9..0]
on the top and bottom PLLs and
C[6..0]
on the
left and right PLLs) or the
M
counter can feed the dedicated external clock outputs, as
shown in Figure 5–20 and Figure 5–21. Therefore, one counter or frequency can drive
all output pins available from a given PLL.
Each left and right PLL supports two clock I/O pins, configured as either two
single-ended I/Os or one differential I/O pair. When using both pins as single-ended
I/Os, one of them can be the clock output while the other pin is the external feedback
input (FB) pin. Therefore, for single-ended I/O standards, the left and right PLLs only
support external feedback mode.
Each pin of a single-ended output pair can either be in-phase or 180° out-of-phase.
The Quartus II software places the NOT gate in the design into the IOE to implement
the 180° phase with respect to the other pin in the pair. The clock output pin pairs
support the same I/O standards as standard output pins (in the top and bottom
banks) as well as LVDS, LVPECL, differential High-Speed Transceiver Logic (HSTL),
and differential SSTL.
fTo determine which I/O standards are supported by the PLL clock input and output
pins, refer to the I/O Features in Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Stratix IV PLLs can also drive out to any regular I/O pin through the GCLK or RCLK
network. You can also use the external clock output pins as user I/O pins if you do
not need external PLL clocking.
Figure 5–21. External Clock Outputs for Left and Right PLLs
Notes to Figure 5–21:
(1) You can feed these clock output pins using any one of the C[6..0], m counters.
(2) The CLKOUT0p and CLKOUT0n pins are dual-purpose I/O pins that you can use as two single-ended outputs or one single-ended output and
one external feedback input pin.
(3) These external clock enable signals are available only when using the ALTCLKCTRL megafunction.
LEFT/RIGHT
PLLs
C2
C3
C4
C6
C5
clkena0
(3)
C0
C1
Internal Logic
PLL_<L2, L3, R2, R3>_FB_CLKOUT0p/CLKOUT0n (1), (2)
PLL_<L2, L3, R2, R3>_CLKOUT0n/FB_CLKOUT0p (1), (2)
clkena1
(3)
m(fbout)
Chapter 5: Clock Networks and PLLs in Stratix IV Devices 5–27
PLLs in Stratix IV Devices
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
PLL Control Signals
You can use the
pfdena
,
areset
, and
locked
signals to observe and control PLL
operation and resynchronization.
pfdena
Use the
pfdena
signal to maintain the most recent locked frequency so your system
has time to store its current settings before shutting down. The
pfdena
signal controls
the PFD output with a programmable gate. If you disable PFD, the VCO operates at
its most recent set value of control voltage and frequency, with some long-term drift to
a lower frequency. The PLL continues running even if it goes out-of-lock or the input
clock is disabled. You can use either your own control signal or the control signals
available from the clock switchover circuit (
activeclock
,
clkbad[0]
, or
clkbad[1]
) to
control
pfdena
.
areset
The
areset
signal is the reset or resynchronization input for each PLL. The device
input pins or internal logic can drive these input signals. When
areset
is driven high,
the PLL counters reset, clearing the PLL output and placing the PLL out-of-lock. The
VCO is then set back to its nominal setting. When
areset
is driven low again, the PLL
resynchronizes to its input as it re-locks.
You must assert the
areset
signal every time the PLL loses lock to guarantee the
correct phase relationship between the PLL input and output clocks. You can set up
the PLL to automatically reset (self reset) after a loss-of-lock condition using the
Quartus II MegaWizard Plug-In Manager. You must include the
areset
signal in
designs if either of the following conditions is true:
■PLL reconfiguration or clock switchover is enabled in the design
■Phase relationships between the PLL input and output clocks must be maintained
after a loss-of-lock condition
1If the input clock to the PLL is not toggling or is unstable after power up, assert the
areset
signal after the input clock is stable and within specifications.
locked
The
locked
signal output of the PLL indicates that the PLL has locked onto the
reference clock and the PLL clock outputs are operating at the desired phase and
frequency set in the Quartus II MegaWizard Plug-In Manager. The lock detection
circuit provides a signal to the core logic that gives an indication when the feedback
clock has locked onto the reference clock both in phase and frequency.
1Altera recommends using the
areset
and
locked
signals in your designs to control
and observe the status of your PLL.
5–28 Chapter 5: Clock Networks and PLLs in Stratix IV Devices
PLLs in Stratix IV Devices
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Clock Feedback Modes
Stratix IV PLLs support up to six different clock feedback modes. Each mode allows
clock multiplication and division, phase shifting, and programmable duty cycle.
Table 5–9 lists the clock feedback modes supported by the Stratix IV device PLLs.
1The input and output delays are fully compensated by a PLL only when using the
dedicated clock input pins associated with a given PLL as the clock source. For
example, when using
PLL_T1
in normal mode, the clock delays from the input pin to
the PLL clock output-to-destination register are fully compensated, provided the
clock input pin is one of the following two pins:
CLK14
and
CLK15
. Compensated pins
are only in the same I/O bank as the PLL. When an RCLK or GCLK network drives
the PLL, the input and output delays may not be fully compensated in the Quartus II
software. Another example is when you configure
PLL_T2
in zero-delay buffer mode
and the PLL input is driven by a dedicated clock input pin, a fully compensated clock
path results in zero-delay between the clock input and one of the output clocks from
the PLL. If the PLL input is instead fed by a non-dedicated input (using the GCLK
network), the output clock may not be perfectly aligned with the input clock.
Table 5–9. Clock Feedback Mode Availability
Clock Feedback Mode
Availability
Top and Bottom PLLs Left and Right PLLs
Source-synchronous Yes Yes
No-compensation Yes Yes
Normal Yes Yes
Zero-delay buffer (ZDB) Yes Yes
External feedback (1) Yes Yes (2)
LVDS compensation No Yes
Notes to Table 5–9:
(1) The high-bandwidth PLL setting is not supported in external feedback mode.
(2) External feedback mode is supported for single-ended inputs and outputs only on the left and right PLLs.
Chapter 5: Clock Networks and PLLs in Stratix IV Devices 5–29
PLLs in Stratix IV Devices
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
Source Synchronous Mode
If data and clock arrive at the same time on the input pins, the same phase
relationship is maintained at the clock and data ports of any IOE input register.
Figure 5–22 shows an example waveform of the clock and data in this mode. Altera
recommends source synchronous mode for source-synchronous data transfers. Data
and clock signals at the IOE experience similar buffer delays as long as you use the
same I/O standard.
Source-synchronous mode compensates for the delay of the clock network used plus
any difference in the delay between these two paths:
■Data pin to the IOE register input
■Clock input pin to the PLL PFD input
The Stratix IV PLL can compensate multiple pad-to-input-register paths, such as a
data bus when it is set to use source-synchronous compensation mode. You can use
the “PLL Compensation” assignment in the Quartus II software Assignment Editor to
select which input pins are used as the PLL compensation targets. You can include
your entire data bus, provided the input registers are clocked by the same output of a
source-synchronous-compensated PLL. In order for the clock delay to be properly
compensated, all of the input pins must be on the same side of the device. The PLL
compensates for the input pin with the longest pad-to-register delay among all input
pins in the compensated bus.
If you do not make the “PLL Compensation” assignment, the Quartus II software
automatically selects all of the pins driven by the compensated output of the PLL as
the compensation target.
Figure 5–22. Phase Relationship Between Clock and Data in Source-Synchronous Mode
Data pin
PLL
reference clock
at input pin
Data at register
Clock at register
5–30 Chapter 5: Clock Networks and PLLs in Stratix IV Devices
PLLs in Stratix IV Devices
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Source-Synchronous Mode for LVDS Compensation
The goal of source-synchronous mode is to maintain the same data and clock timing
relationship seen at the pins of the internal serializer/deserializer (SERDES) capture
register, except that the clock is inverted (180° phase shift). Thus, source-synchronous
mode ideally compensates for the delay of the LVDS clock network plus any
difference in delay between these two paths:
■Data pin-to-SERDES capture register
■Clock input pin-to-SERDES capture register. In addition, the output counter must
provide the 180° phase shift
Figure 5–23 shows an example waveform of the clock and data in LVDS mode.
No-Compensation Mode
In no-compensation mode, the PLL does not compensate for any clock networks. This
mode provides better jitter performance because the clock feedback into the PFD
passes through less circuitry. Both the PLL internal- and external-clock outputs are
phase-shifted with respect to the PLL clock input. Figure 5–24 shows an example
waveform of the PLL clocks’ phase relationship in no-compensation mode.
Figure 5–23. Phase Relationship Between the Clock and Data in LVDS Mode
Figure 5–24. Phase Relationship Between the PLL Clocks in No Compensation Mode
Note to Figure 5–24:
(1) The PLL clock outputs lag the PLL input clocks depending on routine delays.
Data pin
PLL
reference clock
at input pin
Data at register
Clock at register
PLL Reference
Clock at the
Input Pin
PLL Clock at the
Register Clock Port
(1)
External PLL Clock Outputs
(1)
Phase Aligned
Chapter 5: Clock Networks and PLLs in Stratix IV Devices 5–31
PLLs in Stratix IV Devices
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
Normal Mode
An internal clock in normal mode is phase-aligned to the input clock pin. The external
clock-output pin has a phase delay relative to the clock input pin if connected in this
mode. The Quartus II software timing analyzer reports any phase difference between
the two. In normal mode, the delay introduced by the GCLK or RCLK network is fully
compensated. Figure 5–25 shows an example waveform of the PLL clocks’ phase
relationship in normal mode.
Zero-Delay Buffer (ZDB) Mode
In ZDB mode, the external clock output pin is phase-aligned with the clock input pin
for zero-delay through the device. When using this mode, you must use the same I/O
standard on the input clocks and output clocks to guarantee clock alignment at the
input and output pins. ZDB mode is supported on all Stratix IV PLLs.
When using Stratix IV PLLs in ZDB mode, along with single-ended I/O standards, to
ensure phase alignment between the CLK pin and the external clock output (
CLKOUT
)
pin, you must instantiate a bi-directional I/O pin in the design to serve as the
feedback path connecting the
FBOUT
and
FBIN
ports of the PLL. The PLL uses this
bi-directional I/O pin to mimic, and compensate for, the output delay from the clock
output port of the PLL to the external clock output pin. Figure 5–26 shows ZDB mode
in Stratix IV PLLs. When using ZDB mode, you cannot use differential I/O standards
on the PLL clock input or output pins.
1The bi-directional I/O pin that you instantiate in your design must always be
assigned a single-ended I/O standard.
Figure 5–25. Phase Relationship Between the PLL Clocks in Normal Mode
Note to Figure 5–25:
(1) The external clock output can lead or lag the PLL internal clock signals.
PLL Clock at the
Register Clock Port
Dedicated PLL Clock Outputs
(1)
Phase Aligned
PLL Reference
Clock at the
Input Pin
5–32 Chapter 5: Clock Networks and PLLs in Stratix IV Devices
PLLs in Stratix IV Devices
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
1When using ZDB mode, to avoid signal reflection, do not place board traces on the
bi-directional I/O pin.
Figure 5–27 shows an example waveform of the PLL clocks’ phase relationship in
ZDB mode.
External Feedback Mode
In external feedback mode, the external feedback input pin (
fbin
) is phase-aligned
with the clock input pin, as shown in Figure 5–28. Aligning these clocks allows you to
remove clock delay and skew between devices. This mode is supported on all
Stratix IV PLLs.
In external feedback mode, the output of the
M
counter (
FBOUT
) feeds back to the PLL
fbin
input (using a trace on the board) becoming part of the feedback loop. Also, use
one of the dual-purpose external clock outputs as the
fbin
input pin in this mode.
When using external feedback mode, you must use the same I/O standard on the
input clock, feedback input, and output clocks. Left and right PLLs support this mode
when using single-ended I/O standards only.
Figure 5–26. ZDB Mode in Stratix IV PLLs
Note to Figure 5–26:
(1) The bidirectional I/O pin must be assigned to the
PLL_<#>_FB_CLKOUT0p
pin for left and right PLLs and to the
PLL_<#>_FBp_/CLKOUT1
pin for
top and bottom PLLs.
inclk
fbin
fbout
PLL_<#>_CLKOUT#
÷n PFD CP/LF VCO ÷C0
÷C1
÷m bidirectional
I/O pin
(1)
PLL_<#>_CLKOUT#
Figure 5–27. Phase Relationship Between the PLL Clocks in ZDB Mode
Note to Figure 5–27:
(1) The internal PLL clock output can lead or lag the external PLL clock outputs.
PLL Clock at the
Register Clock Port (1)
Dedicated PLL
Clock Outputs
Phase Aligned
PLL Reference
Clock at the
Input Pin
Chapter 5: Clock Networks and PLLs in Stratix IV Devices 5–33
PLLs in Stratix IV Devices
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
Figure 5–28 shows an example waveform of the phase relationship between the PLL
clocks in external feedback mode.
Figure 5–29 shows external feedback mode implementation in Stratix IV devices.
Clock Multiplication and Division
Each Stratix IV PLL provides clock synthesis for PLL output ports using
M/(N* post-scale counter) scaling factors. The input clock is divided by a pre-scale
factor,
n
, and is then multiplied by the m feedback factor. The control loop drives the
VCO to match fin (M/N). Each output port has a unique post-scale counter that
divides down the high-frequency VCO. For multiple PLL outputs with different
frequencies, the VCO is set to the least common multiple of the output frequencies
that meets its frequency specifications. For example, if the output frequencies required
from one PLL are 33 and 66 MHz, the Quartus II software sets the VCO to 660 MHz
(the least common multiple of 33 and 66 MHz within the VCO range). Then the
post-scale counters scale down the VCO frequency for each output port.
Figure 5–28. Phase Relationship Between the PLL Clocks in External Feedback Mode
Note to Figure 5–28:
(1) The PLL clock outputs can lead or lag the
fbin
clock input.
Dedicated PLL
Clock Outputs (1)
PLL Clock at
the Register
Clock Port (1)
fbin Clock Input Pin
Phase Aligned
PLL Reference
Clock at the
Input Pin
Figure 5–29. External Feedback Mode in Stratix IV Devices
inclk
fbin
fbout external
board
trace
PLL_<#>_CLKOUT#
PLL_<#>_CLKOUT#
÷n PFD CP/LF VCO ÷C0
÷C1
÷m
5–34 Chapter 5: Clock Networks and PLLs in Stratix IV Devices
PLLs in Stratix IV Devices
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Each PLL has one pre-scale counter,
n
, and one multiply counter,
m
, with a range of
1 to 512 for both
m
and
n
. The
n
counter does not use duty-cycle control because the
only purpose of this counter is to calculate frequency division. There are seven generic
post-scale counters per left or right PLL and ten post-scale counters per top or bottom
PLL that can feed the GCLKs, RCLKs, or external clock outputs. These post-scale
counters range from 1 to 512 with a 50% duty cycle setting. The high- and low-count
values for each counter range from 1 to 256. The sum of the high- and low-count
values chosen for a design selects the divide value for a given counter.
The Quartus II software automatically chooses the appropriate scaling factors
according to the input frequency, multiplication, and division values entered into the
ALTPLL megafunction.
Post-Scale Counter Cascading
Stratix IV PLLs support post-scale counter cascading to create counters larger than
512. This is automatically implemented in the Quartus II software by feeding the
output of one
C
counter into the input of the next
C
counter, as shown in Figure 5–30.
When cascading post-scale counters to implement a larger division of the
high-frequency VCO clock, the cascaded counters behave as one counter with the
product of the individual counter settings. For example, if C0 = 40 and C1 = 20, the
cascaded value is C0 × C1 = 800.
1Post-scale counter cascading is set in the configuration file. You cannot set this using
PLL reconfiguration.
Figure 5–30. Counter Cascading
Note to Figure 5–30:
(1) N = 6 or N = 9
C0
C1
C2
Cn
C3
C4
VCO Output
VCO Output
VCO Output
VCO Output
VCO Output
VCO Output(1)
from preceding
post-scale counter
Chapter 5: Clock Networks and PLLs in Stratix IV Devices 5–35
PLLs in Stratix IV Devices
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
Programmable Duty Cycle
The programmable duty cycle allows PLLs to generate clock outputs with a variable
duty cycle. This feature is supported on the PLL post-scale counters. The duty-cycle
setting is achieved by a low and high time-count setting for the post-scale counters. To
determine duty cycle choices, the Quartus II software uses the frequency input and
the required multiply or divide rate. The post-scale counter value determines the
precision of the duty cycle. Precision is defined as 50% divided by the post-scale
counter value. For example, if the
C0
counter is 10, steps of 5% are possible for
duty-cycle choices from 5% to 90%.
If the PLL is in external feedback mode, set the duty cycle for the counter driving the
fbin
pin to 50%. Combining the programmable duty cycle with programmable phase
shift allows the generation of precise non-overlapping clocks.
Programmable Phase Shift
Use phase shift to implement a robust solution for clock delays in Stratix IV devices.
Implement phase shift by using a combination of the VCO phase output and the
counter starting time. A combination of VCO phase output and counter starting time
is the most accurate method of inserting delays because it is only based on counter
settings, which are independent of process, voltage, and temperature (PVT).
You can phase-shift the output clocks from the Stratix IV PLLs in either of these two
resolutions:
■Fine resolution using VCO phase taps
■Coarse resolution using counter starting time
Implement fine-resolution phase shifts by allowing any of the output counters
(
C[n..0])
or the
m
counter to use any of the eight phases of the VCO as the reference
clock. This allows you to adjust the delay time with a fine resolution. Equation 5–1
shows the minimum delay time that you can insert using this method.
where fREF is the input reference clock frequency.
For example, if fREF is 100 MHz, N is 1, and M is 8, then fVCO is 800 MHz and fine
equals 156.25 ps. This phase shift is defined by the PLL operating frequency, which is
governed by the reference clock frequency and the counter settings.
Equation 5–1. Fine-Resolution Phase Shift
Φ
fine
= T
VCO
= =
1
8
1
8f
VCO
N
8Mf
REF
5–36 Chapter 5: Clock Networks and PLLs in Stratix IV Devices
PLLs in Stratix IV Devices
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Equation 5–2 shows the coarse-resolution phase shifts are implemented by delaying
the start of the counters for a predetermined number of counter clocks.
where C is the count value set for the counter delay time (this is the initial setting in
the “PLL usage” section of the compilation report in the Quartus II software). If the
initial value is 1, C – 1 = 0° phase shift.
Figure 5–31 shows an example of phase-shift insertion with fine resolution using the
VCO phase-taps method. The eight phases from the VCO are shown and labeled for
reference. For this example,
CLK0
is based on the
0phase
from the VCO and has the C
value for the counter set to one. The
CLK1
signal is divided by four, two VCO clocks
for high time and two VCO clocks for low time.
CLK1
is based on the 135° phase tap
from the VCO and also has the C value for the counter set to one. In this case, the two
clocks are offset by 3 FINE.
CLK2
is based on the
0phase
from the VCO but has the
C value for the counter set to three. This arrangement creates a delay of 2 COARSE
(two complete VCO periods).
You can use coarse- and fine-phase shifts to implement clock delays in Stratix IV
devices.
Stratix IV devices support dynamic phase-shifting of VCO phase taps only. You can
reconfigure the phase shift any number of times. Each phase shift takes about one
SCANCLK
cycle, allowing you to implement large phase shifts quickly.
Equation 5–2. Coarse-Resolution Phase Shift
Φ
coarse
= =
C − 1
f
(C − 1)
N
Mf
REFVco
Figure 5–31. Delay Insertion Using VCO Phase Output and Counter Delay Time
td0-1
td0-2
1/8 tVCO tVCO
0
90
135
180
225
270
315
CLK0
CLK1
CLK2
45
Chapter 5: Clock Networks and PLLs in Stratix IV Devices 5–37
PLLs in Stratix IV Devices
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
Programmable Bandwidth
Stratix IV PLLs provide advanced control of the PLL bandwidth using the PLL loop’s
programmable characteristics, including loop filter and charge pump.
Background
PLL bandwidth is the measure of the PLL’s ability to track the input clock and its
associated jitter. The closed-loop gain 3 dB frequency in the PLL determines PLL
bandwidth. Bandwidth is approximately the unity gain point for open loop PLL
response. As Figure 5–32 shows, these points correspond to approximately the same
frequency. Stratix IV PLLs provide three bandwidth settings—low, medium (default),
and high.
Figure 5–32. Open- and Closed-Loop Response Bode Plots
Increasing the PLL's
bandwidth in effect pushes
the open loop response out.
Gain
Gain
0 dB
Frequency
Frequency
Open-Loop Reponse Bode Plot
Closed-Loop Reponse Bode Plot
5–38 Chapter 5: Clock Networks and PLLs in Stratix IV Devices
PLLs in Stratix IV Devices
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
A high-bandwidth PLL provides a fast lock time and tracks jitter on the reference
clock source, passing it through to the PLL output. A low-bandwidth PLL filters out
reference clock jitter but increases lock time. Stratix IV PLLs allow you to control the
bandwidth over a finite range to customize the PLL characteristics for a particular
application. The programmable bandwidth feature in Stratix IV PLLs benefits
applications requiring clock switchover.
A high-bandwidth PLL can benefit a system that must accept a spread-spectrum clock
signal. Stratix IV PLLs can track a spread-spectrum clock by using a high-bandwidth
setting. Using a low-bandwidth setting in this case could cause the PLL to filter out
the jitter on the input clock.
A low-bandwidth PLL can benefit a system using clock switchover. When clock
switchover occurs, the PLL input temporarily stops. A low-bandwidth PLL reacts
more slowly to changes on its input clock and takes longer to drift to a lower
frequency (caused by input stopping) than a high-bandwidth PLL.
Implementation
Traditionally, external components such as the VCO or loop filter control a PLL’s
bandwidth. Most loop filters consist of passive components such as resistors and
capacitors that take up unnecessary board space and increase cost. With Stratix IV
PLLs, all the components are contained within the device to increase performance and
decrease cost.
When you specify the bandwidth setting (low, medium, or high) in the ALTPLL
MegaWizardPlug-in Manager, the Quartus II software automatically sets the
corresponding charge pump and loop filter (
Icp
,
R
,
C
) values to achieve the desired
bandwidth range.
Figure 5–33 shows the loop filter and components that you can set using the
Quartus II software. The components are the loop filter resistor, R, the high frequency
capacitor, Ch, and the charge pump current, IUP or IDN.
Figure 5–33. Loop Filter Programmable Components
IUP
IDN
Ch
PFD
R
C
Chapter 5: Clock Networks and PLLs in Stratix IV Devices 5–39
PLLs in Stratix IV Devices
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
Spread-Spectrum Tracking
Stratix IV devices can accept a spread-spectrum input with typical modulation
frequencies. However, the device cannot automatically detect that the input is a
spread-spectrum signal. Instead, the input signal looks like deterministic jitter at the
input of the PLL. Stratix IV PLLs can track a spread-spectrum input clock as long as it
is within input-jitter tolerance specifications. Stratix IV devices cannot internally
generate spread-spectrum clocks.
Clock Switchover
The clock switchover feature allows the PLL to switch between two reference input
clocks. Use this feature for clock redundancy or for a dual-clock domain application
such as in a system that turns on the redundant clock if the previous clock stops
running. The design can perform clock switchover automatically when the clock is no
longer toggling or based on a user control signal,
clkswitch
.
The following clock switchover modes are supported in Stratix IV PLLs:
■Automatic switchover—The clock sense circuit monitors the current reference
clock and if it stops toggling, automatically switches to the other
inclk0
or
inclk1
clock.
■Manual clock switchover—Clock switchover is controlled using the
clkswitch
signal. When the
clkswitch
signal goes from logic low to logic high, and stays
high for at least three clock cycles, the reference clock to the PLL is switched from
inclk0
to
inclk1
, or vice-versa.
■Automatic switchover with manual override—This mode combines automatic
switchover and manual clock switchover. When the
clkswitch
signal goes high, it
overrides the automatic clock switchover function. As long as the
clkswitch
signal
is high, further switchover action is blocked.
5–40 Chapter 5: Clock Networks and PLLs in Stratix IV Devices
PLLs in Stratix IV Devices
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Stratix IV PLLs support a fully configurable clock switchover capability. Figure 5–34
shows a block diagram of the automatic switchover circuit built into the PLL. When
the current reference clock is not present, the clock sense block automatically switches
to the backup clock for PLL reference. The clock switchover circuit also sends out
three status signals—
clkbad[0]
,
clkbad[1]
, and
activeclock
—from the PLL to
implement a custom switchover circuit in the logic array. You can select a clock source
as the backup clock by connecting it to the
inclk1
port of the PLL in your design.
Automatic Clock Switchover
Use the switchover circuitry to automatically switch between
inclk0
and
inclk1
when the current reference clock to the PLL stops toggling. For example, in
applications that require a redundant clock with the same frequency as the reference
clock, the switchover state machine generates a signal (
clksw
) that controls the
multiplexer select input, as shown in Figure 5–34. In this case,
inclk1
becomes the
reference clock for the PLL. When using automatic switchover mode, you can switch
back and forth between
inclk0
and
inclk1
any number of times when one of the two
clocks fails and the other clock is available.
When using automatic clock switchover mode, the following requirements must be
satisfied:
■Both clock inputs must be running
■The period of the two clock inputs can differ by no more than 100% (2×)
If the current clock input stops toggling while the other clock is also not toggling,
switchover is not initiated and the
clkbad[0..1]
signals are not valid. Also, if both
clock inputs are not the same frequency, but their period difference is within 100%, the
clock sense block detects when a clock stops toggling, but the PLL may lose lock after
the switchover is completed and needs time to re-lock.
1Altera recommends resetting the PLL using the
areset
signal to maintain the phase
relationships between the PLL input and output clocks when using clock switchover.
Figure 5–34. Automatic Clock Switchover Circuit Block Diagram
Switchover
State
Machine
Clock
Sense
n Counter PFD
clkswitch
activeclock
clkbad[1]
clkbad[0]
muxout
inclk0
inclk1
refclk fbclk
clksw
Clock Switch
Control Logic
Chapter 5: Clock Networks and PLLs in Stratix IV Devices 5–41
PLLs in Stratix IV Devices
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
In automatic switchover mode, the
clkbad[0]
and
clkbad[1]
signals indicate the
status of the two clock inputs. When they are asserted, the clock sense block has
detected that the corresponding clock input has stopped toggling. These two signals
are not valid if the frequency difference between
inclk0
and
inclk1
is greater than
20%.
The
activeclock
signal indicates which of the two clock inputs (
inclk0
or
inclk1
) is
being selected as the reference clock to the PLL. When the frequency difference
between the two clock inputs is more than 20%, the
activeclock
signal is the only
valid status signal.
Figure 5–35 shows an example waveform of the switchover feature when using
automatic switchover mode. In this example, the
inclk0
signal is stuck low. After the
inclk0
signal is stuck at low for approximately two clock cycles, the clock sense
circuitry drives the
clkbad[0]
signal high. Also, because the reference clock signal is
not toggling, the switchover state machine controls the multiplexer through the
clkswitch
signal to switch to the backup clock,
inclk1
.
Manual Override
In automatic switchover with manual override mode, you can use the
clkswitch
input for user- or system-controlled switch conditions. You can use this mode for
same-frequency switchover, or to switch between inputs of different frequencies. For
example, if
inclk0
is 66 MHz and
inclk1
is 200 MHz, you must control switchover
using
clkswitch
because the automatic clock-sense circuitry cannot monitor clock
input (
inclk0
and
inclk1
) frequencies with a frequency difference of more than 100%
(2×). This feature is useful when the clock sources originate from multiple cards on the
backplane, requiring a system-controlled switchover between the frequencies of
operation. You must choose the backup clock frequency and set the
m
,
n
,
c
, and
k
counters accordingly so the VCO operates within the recommended operating
frequency range of 600 to 1,600 MHz. The ALTPLL MegaWizard Plug-in Manager
notifies you if a given combination of
inclk0
and
inclk1
frequencies cannot meet this
requirement.
Figure 5–35. Automatic Switchover After Loss of Clock Detection
Note to Figure 5–35:
(1) Switchover is enabled on the falling edge of
inclk0
or
inclk1
, depending on which clock is available. In this figure,
switchover is enabled on the falling edge of
inclk1
.
inclk0
inclk1
muxout
clkbad0
clkbad1
(1)
activeclock
5–42 Chapter 5: Clock Networks and PLLs in Stratix IV Devices
PLLs in Stratix IV Devices
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Figure 5–36 shows a clock switchover waveform controlled by
clkswitch
. In this case,
both clock sources are functional and
inclk0
is selected as the reference clock;
clkswitch
goes high, which starts the switchover sequence. On the falling edge of
inclk0
, the counter’s reference clock,
muxout
, is gated off to prevent clock glitching.
On the falling edge of
inclk1
, the reference clock multiplexer switches from
inclk0
to
inclk1
as the PLL reference and the
activeclock
signal changes to indicate which
clock is currently feeding the PLL.
In automatic override with manual switchover mode, the
activeclock
signal mirrors
the
clkswitch
signal. As both clocks are still functional during the manual switch,
neither
clkbad
signal goes high. Because the switchover circuit is positive-edge
sensitive, the falling edge of the
clkswitch
signal does not cause the circuit to switch
back from
inclk1
to
inclk0
. When the
clkswitch
signal goes high again, the process
repeats.
clkswitch
and automatic switch only work if the clock being switched to is
available. If the clock is not available, the state machine waits until the clock is
available.
Figure 5–36. Clock Switchover Using the clkswitch (Manual) Control (1)
Note to Figure 5–36:
(1) To initiate a manual clock switchover event, both
inclk0
and
inclk1
must be running when the
clkswitch
signal
goes high.
inclk0
inclk1
muxout
clkswitch
activeclock
clkbad0
clkbad1
Chapter 5: Clock Networks and PLLs in Stratix IV Devices 5–43
PLLs in Stratix IV Devices
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
Manual Clock Switchover
In manual clock switchover mode, the
clkswitch
signal controls whether
inclk0
or
inclk1
is selected as the input clock to the PLL. By default,
inclk0
is selected. A
low-to-high transition on
clkswitch
and
clkswitch
being held high for at least three
inclk
cycles initiates a clock switchover event. You must bring
clkswitch
back low
again in order to perform another switchover event in the future. If you do not require
another switchover event in the future, you can leave
clkswitch
in a logic high state
after the initial switch. Pulsing
clkswitch
high for at least three
inclk
cycles performs
another switchover event. If
inclk0
and
inclk1
are different frequencies and are
always running, the
clkswitch
minimum high time must be greater than or equal to
three of the slower frequency
inclk0
or
inclk1
cycles. Figure 5–37 shows a block
diagram of the manual switchover circuit.
fFor more information about PLL software support in the Quartus II software, refer to
the Phase-Locked Loop (ALTPLL) Megafunction User Guide.
Guidelines
When implementing clock switchover in Stratix IV PLLs, use the following
guidelines:
■Automatic clock switchover requires that the
inclk0
and
inclk1
frequencies be
within 100% (2×) of each other. Failing to meet this requirement causes the
clkbad[0]
and
clkbad[1]
signals to not function properly.
■When using manual clock switchover, the difference between
inclk0
and
inclk1
can be more than 100% (2×). However, differences in frequency, phase, or both, of
the two clock sources will likely cause the PLL to lose lock. Resetting the PLL
ensures that the correct phase relationships are maintained between the input and
output clocks.
1Both
inclk0
and
inclk1
must be running when the
clkswitch
signal goes
high to initiate the manual clock switchover event. Failing to meet this
requirement causes the clock switchover to not function properly.
■Applications that require a clock switchover feature and a small frequency drift
must use a low-bandwidth PLL. The low-bandwidth PLL reacts more slowly than
a high-bandwidth PLL to reference input clock changes. When switchover
happens, a low-bandwidth PLL propagates the stopping of the clock to the output
more slowly than a high-bandwidth PLL. However, be aware that the
low-bandwidth PLL also increases lock time.
Figure 5–37. Manual Clock Switchover Circuitry in Stratix IV PLLs
n Counter PFD
fbcl
k
clkswitch
inclk0
inclk1
muxoutrefclk
Clock Switch
Control Logic
5–44 Chapter 5: Clock Networks and PLLs in Stratix IV Devices
PLLs in Stratix IV Devices
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
■After a switchover occurs, there may be a finite resynchronization period for the
PLL to lock onto a new clock. The exact amount of time it takes for the PLL to
re-lock depends on the PLL configuration.
■The phase relationship between the input clock to the PLL and the output clock
from the PLL is important in your design. Assert
areset
for at least 10 ns after
performing a clock switchover. Wait for the locked signal to go high and be stable
before re-enabling the output clocks from the PLL.
■Figure 5–38 shows how the VCO frequency gradually decreases when the current
clock is lost and then increases as the VCO locks on to the backup clock.
■Disable the system during clock switchover if it is not tolerant of frequency
variations during the PLL resynchronization period. You can use the
clkbad[0]
and
clkbad[1]
status signals to turn off the PFD (
PFDENA
=
0
) so the VCO
maintains its most recent frequency. You can also use the state machine to switch
over to the secondary clock. When the PFD is re-enabled, output clock-enable
signals (
clkena
) can disable clock outputs during the switchover and
resynchronization period. When the lock indication is stable, the system can
re-enable the output clocks.
PLL Reconfiguration
PLLs use several divide counters and different VCO phase taps to perform frequency
synthesis and phase shifts. In Stratix IV PLLs, you can reconfigure both the counter
settings and phase-shift the PLL output clock in real time. You can also change the
charge pump and loop-filter components, which dynamically affects PLL bandwidth.
You can use these PLL components to update the output-clock frequency and PLL
bandwidth and to phase-shift in real time, without reconfiguring the entire Stratix IV
device.
The ability to reconfigure the PLL in real time is useful in applications that operate at
multiple frequencies. It is also useful in prototyping environments, allowing you to
sweep PLL output frequencies and adjust the output-clock phase dynamically. For
instance, a system generating test patterns is required to generate and transmit
patterns at 75 or 150 MHz, depending on the requirements of the device under test.
Reconfiguring the PLL components in real time allows you to switch between two
such output frequencies within a few microseconds. You can also use this feature to
adjust clock-to-out (
tCO
) delays in real time by changing the PLL output clock phase
shift. This approach eliminates the need to regenerate a configuration file with the
new PLL settings.
Figure 5–38. VCO Switchover Operating Frequency
ΔFvco
Primary Clock Stops Running
Switchover Occurs
VCO Tracks Secondary Clock
Chapter 5: Clock Networks and PLLs in Stratix IV Devices 5–45
PLLs in Stratix IV Devices
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
PLL Reconfiguration Hardware Implementation
The following PLL components are reconfigurable in real time:
■Pre-scale counter (
n
)
■Feedback counter (
m
)
■Post-scale output counters (
C0
-
C9
)
■Post VCO Divider (
K
)
■Dynamically adjust the charge-pump current (
Icp
) and loop-filter components
(
R
,
C
) to facilitate reconfiguration of the PLL bandwidth
Figure 5–39 shows how you can dynamically adjust the PLL counter settings by
shifting their new settings into a serial shift-register chain or scan chain. Serial data is
input to the scan chain using the
scandata
port. Shift registers are clocked by
scanclk
.
The maximum
scanclk
frequency is 100 MHz. Serial data is shifted through the scan
chain as long as the
scanclkena
signal stays asserted. After the last bit of data is
clocked, asserting the
configupdate
signal for at least one
scanclk
clock cycle causes
the PLL configuration bits to be synchronously updated with the data in the scan
registers.
1The counter settings are updated synchronously to the clock frequency of the
individual counters. Therefore, all counters are not updated simultaneously.
Figure 5–39. PLL Reconfiguration Scan Chain (1)
Notes to Figure 5–39:
(1) Stratix IV left and right PLLs support C0 - C6 counters.
(2) i = 6 or i = 9.
(3) This figure shows the corresponding scan register for the
K
counter in between the scan registers for the charge pump and loop filter. The
K
counter is physically located after the VCO.
/Ci
(2)
/Ci-1 /C2 /C1 /C0 /m /n
scanclk
scandone
scandata
LF/K/CP
(3)
configupdate
inclk
PFD VCO
scanclkena
scandataout
from m counter
from n counter
5–46 Chapter 5: Clock Networks and PLLs in Stratix IV Devices
PLLs in Stratix IV Devices
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Table 5–10 lists how these signals can be driven by the PLD logic array or I/O pins.
To reconfigure the PLL counters, follow these steps:
1. The
scanclkena
signal is asserted at least one
scanclk
cycle prior to shifting in the
first bit of
scandata
(
D0
).
2. Serial data (
scandata
) is shifted into the scan chain on the second rising edge of
scanclk
.
3. After all 234 bits (top and bottom PLLs) or 180 bits (left and right PLLs) have been
scanned into the scan chain, the
scanclkena
signal is de-asserted to prevent
inadvertent shifting of bits in the scan chain.
4. The
configupdate
signal is asserted for one
scanclk
cycle to update the PLL
counters with the contents of the scan chain.
5. The
scandone
signal goes high, indicating the PLL is being reconfigured. A falling
edge indicates the PLL counters have been updated with new settings.
6. Reset the PLL using the
areset
signal if you make any changes to the
M
,
N
, or
post-scale output C counters or to the
Icp
,
R
, or
C
settings.
7. You can repeat steps 1-5 to reconfigure the PLL any number of times.
Table 5–10. Real-Time PLL Reconfiguration Ports
PLL Port Name Description Source Destination
scandata
Serial input data stream to scan
chain. Logic array or I/O pin PLL reconfiguration circuit
scanclk
Serial clock input signal. This clock
can be free running. GCLK, RCLK or I/O pins PLL reconfiguration circuit
scanclkena
Enables
scanclk
and allows the
scandata
to be loaded in the scan
chain. Active high.
Logic array or I/O pin PLL reconfiguration circuit
configupdate
Writes the data in the scan chain to
the PLL. Active high. Logic array or I/O pin PLL reconfiguration circuit
scandone
Indicates when the PLL has finished
reprogramming. A rising edge
indicates the PLL has begun
reprogramming. A falling edge
indicates the PLL has finished
reprogramming.
PLL reconfiguration circuit Logic array or I/O pins
scandataout
Used to output the contents of the
scan chain. PLL reconfiguration circuit Logic array or I/O pins
Chapter 5: Clock Networks and PLLs in Stratix IV Devices 5–47
PLLs in Stratix IV Devices
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
Figure 5–40 shows a functional simulation of the PLL reconfiguration feature.
1When you reconfigure the counter clock frequency, you cannot reconfigure the
corresponding counter phase shift settings using the same interface. Instead,
reconfigure the phase shifts in real time using the dynamic phase shift reconfiguration
interface. If you reconfigure the counter frequency, but wish to keep the same
non-zero phase shift setting (for example, 90°) on the clock output, you must
reconfigure the phase shift immediately after reconfiguring the counter clock
frequency.
Post-Scale Counters (C0 to C9)
You can reconfigure the multiply or divide values and duty cycle of post-scale
counters in real time. Each counter has an 8-bit high-time setting and an 8-bit
low-time setting. The duty cycle is the ratio of output high- or low-time to the total
cycle time, which is the sum of the two. Additionally, these counters have two control
bits,
rbypass
, for bypassing the counter, and
rselodd
, to select the output clock duty
cycle.
When the
rbypass
bit is set to 1, it bypasses the counter, resulting in a divide by 1.
When the
rbypass
bit is set to 0, the high- and low-time counters are added to
compute the effective division of the VCO output frequency. For example, if the
post-scale divide factor is 10, the high- and low-count values can be set to 5 and 5,
respectively, to achieve a 50% - 50% duty cycle. The PLL implements this duty cycle
by transitioning the output clock from high to low on the rising edge of the VCO
output clock. However, a 4 and 6 setting for the high- and low-count values,
respectively, produces an output clock with a 40% - 60% duty cycle.
Figure 5–40. PLL Reconfiguration Waveform
SCANDATA
SCANCLK
SCANCLKENA
SCANDATAOUT
CONFIGUPDATE
SCANDONE
ARESET
D0_old Dn_old Dn
Dn
(MSB)(LSB)
D0
5–48 Chapter 5: Clock Networks and PLLs in Stratix IV Devices
PLLs in Stratix IV Devices
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
The
rselodd
bit indicates an odd divide factor for the VCO output frequency along
with a 50% duty cycle. For example, if the post-scale divide factor is 3, the high- and
low-time count values could be set to 2 and 1, respectively, to achieve this division.
This implies a 67% - 33% duty cycle. If you need a 50% - 50% duty cycle, you can set
the
rselodd
control bit to 1 to achieve this duty cycle despite an odd division factor.
The PLL implements this duty cycle by transitioning the output clock from high to
low on a falling edge of the VCO output clock. When you set
rselodd
=1, you
subtract 0.5 cycles from the high time and you add 0.5 cycles to the low time. For
example:
■High-time count = 2 cycles
■Low-time count = 1 cycle
■
rselodd
= 1 effectively equals:
■High-time count = 1.5 cycles
■Low-time count = 1.5 cycles
■Duty cycle = (1.5/3) % high-time count and (1.5/3) % low-time count
Scan Chain Description
The length of the scan chain varies for different Stratix IV PLLs. The top and bottom
PLLs have ten post-scale counters and a 234-bit scan chain, while the left and right
PLLs have seven post-scale counters and a 180-bit scan chain. Table 5–11 lists the
number of bits for each component of a Stratix IV PLL.
Table 5–11. Top and Bottom PLL Reprogramming Bits (Part 1 of 2)
Block Name
Number of Bits
Total
Counter Other (1)
C9 (2) 16 2 18
C8 16 2 18
C7 16 2 18
C6 (3) 16 2 18
C5 16 2 18
C4 16 2 18
C3 16 2 18
C2 16 2 18
C1 16 2 18
C0 16 2 18
M16218
N16218
Charge Pump Current 0 3 3
VCO Post-Scale divider (
K
)101
Chapter 5: Clock Networks and PLLs in Stratix IV Devices 5–49
PLLs in Stratix IV Devices
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
Table 5–11 lists the scan chain order of PLL components for the top and bottom PLLs,
which have 10 post-scale counters. The order of bits is the same for the left and right
PLLs, but the reconfiguration bits start with the C6 post-scale counter.
Figure 5–41 shows the scan-chain order of PLL components for the top and bottom
PLLs.
Figure 5–42 shows the scan-chain bit-order sequence for post-scale counters in all
Stratix IV PLLs.
Loop Filter Capacitor (4) 022
Loop Filter Resistor 0 5 5
Unused CP/LF 0 7 7
Total number of bits — — 234
Notes to Table 5–11:
(1) Includes two control bits,
rbypass
, for bypassing the counter, and
rselodd
, to select the output clock duty
cycle.
(2) The LSB for the C9 low-count value is the first bit shifted into the scan chain for the top and bottom PLLs.
(3) The LSB for the C6 low-count value is the first bit shifted into the scan chain for the left and right PLLs.
(4) The MSB for the loop filter is the last bit shifted into the scan chain.
Table 5–11. Top and Bottom PLL Reprogramming Bits (Part 2 of 2)
Block Name
Number of Bits
Total
Counter Other (1)
Figure 5–41. Scan-Chain Order of PLL Components for Top and Bottom PLLs (1)
Note to Figure 5–41:
(1) Left and right PLLs have the same scan-chain order. The post-scale counters end at C6.
DATAIN
MSB
LF K CP
LSB NMC0
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7 C8 DATAO U T
C9
Figure 5–42. Scan-Chain Bit-Order Sequence for Post-Scale Counters in Stratix IV PLLs
DATAIN
rbypass
HB
7
HB
6
HB
5
HB
4
HB
3
HB
2
HB
1
HB
0
rselodd
LB
7
LB
6
LB
5
LB
4
LB
3
LB
2
LB
1
LB
0
DATAO U T
5–50 Chapter 5: Clock Networks and PLLs in Stratix IV Devices
PLLs in Stratix IV Devices
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Charge Pump and Loop Filter
You can reconfigure the charge-pump and loop-filter settings to update the PLL
bandwidth in real time.
Table 5–12 lists the possible settings for charge pump current (
Icp
) values for
Stratix IV PLLs.
Table 5–13 lists the possible settings for loop-filter resistor (
R
) values for Stratix IV
PLLs.
Table 5–14 lists the possible settings for loop-filter capacitor (
C
) values for Stratix IV
PLLs.
Table 5–12. Charge Pump Current Bit Settings
CP[2] CP[1] CP[0] Decimal Value for Setting
000 0
001 1
011 3
111 7
Table 5–13. Loop-Filter Resistor Bit Settings
LFR[4] LFR[3] LFR[2] LFR[1] LFR[0] Decimal Value for Setting
00000 0
00011 3
00100 4
01000 8
10000 16
10011 19
10100 20
11000 24
11011 27
11100 28
11110 30
Table 5–14. Loop-Filter Capacitor Bit Settings
LFC[1] LFC[0] Decimal Value for Setting
00 0
01 1
11 3
Chapter 5: Clock Networks and PLLs in Stratix IV Devices 5–51
PLLs in Stratix IV Devices
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
Bypassing a PLL
Bypassing a PLL counter results in a multiply (
m
counter) or a divide (
n
and
C0
to
C9
counters) factor of one.
Table 5–15 lists the settings for bypassing the counters in Stratix IV PLLs.
1To bypass any of the PLL counters, set the bypass bit to 1. The values on the other bits
are ignored. To bypass the VCO post-scale counter (
K
), set the corresponding bit to
0
.
Dynamic Phase-Shifting
The dynamic phase-shifting feature allows the output phases of individual PLL
outputs to be dynamically adjusted relative to each other and to the reference clock,
without having to send serial data through the scan chain of the corresponding PLL.
This feature simplifies the interface and allows you to quickly adjust the clock-to-out
(
t
CO) delays by changing the output clock phase-shift in real time. This adjustment is
achieved by incrementing or decrementing the VCO phase-tap selection to a given
C
counter or to the
M
counter. The phase is shifted by 1/8 of the VCO frequency at a
time. The output clocks are active during this phase-reconfiguration process.
Table 5–16 lists the control signals that are used for dynamic phase-shifting.
Table 5–15. PLL Counter Settings
PLL Scan Chain Bits [0..8] Settings
LSB MSB Description
X XXXXXXX1
(1) PLL counter bypassed
X XXXXXXX0
(1) PLL counter not bypassed because
bit 8 (MSB) is set to 0
Note to Table 5–15:
(1) Counter-bypass bit.
Table 5–16. Dynamic Phase-Shifting Control Signals (Part 1 of 2)
Signal Name Description Source Destination
PHASECOUNTERSELECT
[3..0]
Counter select. Four bits decoded to
select either the
M
or one of the
C
counters for phase adjustment. One
address maps to select all
C
counters.
This signal is registered in the PLL on
the rising edge of
SCANCLK
.
Logic array or I/O pins PLL reconfiguration circuit
PHASEUPDOWN
Selects dynamic phase shift direction;
1 = UP; 0 = DOWN. Signal is registered
in the PLL on the rising edge of
SCANCLK
.
Logic array or I/O pin PLL reconfiguration circuit
PHASESTEP
Logic high enables dynamic phase
shifting. Logic array or I/O pin PLL reconfiguration circuit
5–52 Chapter 5: Clock Networks and PLLs in Stratix IV Devices
PLLs in Stratix IV Devices
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Table 5–17 lists the PLL counter selection based on the corresponding
PHASECOUNTERSELECT
setting.
To perform one dynamic phase-shift, follow these steps:
1. Set
PHASEUPDOWN
and
PHASECOUNTERSELECT
as required.
2. Assert
PHASESTEP
for at least two
SCANCLK
cycles. Each
PHASESTEP
pulse enables
one phase shift.
3. Deassert
PHASESTEP
after
PHASEDONE
goes low.
4. Wait for
PHASEDONE
to go high.
5. Repeat steps 1-4 as many times as required to perform multiple phase-shifts.
The
PHASEUPDOWN
and
PHASECOUNTERSELECT
signals are synchronous to
SCANCLK
and
must meet tsu/th requirements with respect to
SCANCLK
edges.
SCANCLK
Free running clock from the core used
in combination with
PHASESTEP
to
enable and disable dynamic phase
shifting. Shared with
SCANCLK
for
dynamic reconfiguration.
GCLK, RCLK or I/O pin PLL reconfiguration circuit
PHASEDONE
When asserted, this indicates to
core-logic that the phase adjustment is
complete and the PLL is ready to act
on a possible second adjustment
pulse. Asserts based on internal PLL
timing. De-asserts on the rising edge
of
SCANCLK
.
PLL reconfiguration
circuit Logic array or I/O pins
Table 5–16. Dynamic Phase-Shifting Control Signals (Part 2 of 2)
Signal Name Description Source Destination
Table 5–17. Phase Counter Select Mapping
PHASECOUNTERSELECT[3] [2] [1] [0] Selects
0 0 0 0 All Output Counters
0 001
M
Counter
0 010
C0
Counter
0 011
C1
Counter
0 100
C2
Counter
0 101
C3
Counter
0 110
C4
Counter
0 111
C5
Counter
1 000
C6
Counter
1 001
C7
Counter
1 010
C8
Counter
1 011
C9
Counter
Chapter 5: Clock Networks and PLLs in Stratix IV Devices 5–53
PLLs in Stratix IV Devices
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
1You can repeat dynamic phase-shifting indefinitely. For example, in a design where
the VCO frequency is set to 1000 MHz and the output clock frequency is 100 MHz,
performing 40 dynamic phase shifts (each one yields 125 ps phase shift) results in
shifting the output clock by 180°, which is a phase shift of 5 ns.
The
PHASESTEP
signal is latched on the negative edge of
SCANCLK
(a,c) and must remain
asserted for at least two
SCANCLK
cycles. De-assert
PHASESTEP
after
PHASEDONE
goes low.
On the second
SCANCLK
rising edge (b,d) after
PHASESTEP
is latched, the values of
PHASEUPDOWN
and
PHASECOUNTERSELECT
are latched and the PLL starts dynamic
phase-shifting for the specified counters and in the indicated direction.
PHASEDONE
is
de-asserted synchronous to
SCANCLK
at the second rising edge (b,d) and remains low
until the PLL finishes dynamic phase-shifting. Depending on the VCO and
SCANCLK
frequencies,
PHASEDONE
low time may be greater than or less than one
SCANCLK
cycle.
You can perform another dynamic phase-shift after the
PHASEDONE
signal goes from
low to high. Each
PHASESTEP
pulse enables one phase shift.
PHASESTEP
pulses must be
at least one
SCANCLK
cycle apart.
Depending on the VCO and
SCANCLK
frequencies,
PHASEDONE
low time may be greater
than or less than one
SCANCLK
cycle.
After
PHASEDONE
goes from low to high, you can perform another dynamic phase shift.
PHASESTEP
pulses must be at least one
SCANCLK
cycle apart.
fFor information about the ALTPLL_RECONFIG MegaWizard Plug-In Manager, refer
to the Phase-Locked Loops Reconfiguration (ALTPLL_RECONFIG) Megafunction User
Guide.
Figure 5–43. Dynamic Phase Shifting Waveform
SCANCLK
PHASESTEP
PHASEUPDOWN
PHASEDONE
t
PHASEDONE goes low synchronous with SCANCLK
ab cd
PHASECOUNTERSELECT
CONFIGPHASE
5–54 Chapter 5: Clock Networks and PLLs in Stratix IV Devices
PLLs in Stratix IV Devices
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
PLL Specifications
fFor information about PLL timing specifications, refer to the DC and Switching
Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Document Revision History
Table 5–18 lists the revision history for this chapter.
Table 5–18. Document Revision History (Part 1 of 2)
Date Version Changes
September 2012 3.4 Updated the “Periphery Clock Networks” section.
December 2011 3.3
■Updated the “Dynamic Phase-Shifting” section.
■Updated Figure 5–43.
February 2011 3.2
■Updated the “Clock Input Connections to the PLLs,” “PLL Clock I/O Pins,” “Clock
Feedback Modes,” and “Clock Switchover” sections.
■Updated Table 5–4 and Table 5–8.
■Updated Figure 5–26, Figure 5–40, and Figure 5–43.
■Applied new template.
■Minor text edits.
March 2010 3.1
■Updated Table 5–3.
■Updated notes to Figure 5–2, Figure 5–3, Figure 5–4, and Figure 5–9.
■Added a note to Table 5–5 and Table 5–6.
■Added two notes to Table 5–4.
■Updated Figure 5–43.
■Updated the “Dynamic Phase-Shifting” section.
■Minor text edits.
November 2009 3.0
■Updated Table 5–1 and Table 5–7.
■Updated “Clock Networks in Stratix IV Devices”, “Periphery Clock Networks”, and
“Cascading PLLs” sections.
■Added Figure 5–5, Figure 5–6, Figure 5–7, Figure 5–8, and Figure 5–9.
■Added “Clock Sources Per Region” section.
■Updated Figure 5–40.
■Removed EP4SE110, EP4SE290, and EP4SE680 devices.
■Added EP4S40G2, EP4S100G2, EP4S40G5, EP4S100G3, EP4S100G4, EP4S100G5, and
EP4SE820 devices.
June 2009 2.3
■Updated Table 5–7.
■Updated the “PLL Reconfiguration Hardware Implementation” and “Zero-Delay Buffer
Mode” sections.
■Added introductory sentences to improve search ability.
■Removed the Conclusion section.
■Minor text edits.
Chapter 5: Clock Networks and PLLs in Stratix IV Devices 5–55
PLLs in Stratix IV Devices
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
April 2009 2.2
■Updated Table 5–1 and Table 5–7.
■Updated Figure 5–3 and Figure 5–4.
■Updated the “Periphery Clock Networks” section.
March 2009 2.1
■Updated Table 5–7.
■Updated Figure 5–34.
■Updated “Guidelines” section.
■Removed “Referenced Documents” section.
November 2008 2.0
■Updated Table 5–7.
■Updated Note 1 of Figure 5–10.
■Updated Figure 5–15.
■Updated Figure 5–20.
■Added Figure 5–21.
■Made minor editorial changes.
May 2008 1.0 Initial release.
Table 5–18. Document Revision History (Part 2 of 2)
Date Version Changes
5–56 Chapter 5: Clock Networks and PLLs in Stratix IV Devices
PLLs in Stratix IV Devices
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
January 2016 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
Section II. I/O Interfaces
This section provides information on Stratix® IV device I/O features, external
memory interfaces, and high-speed differential interfaces with DPA. This section
includes the following chapters:
■Chapter 6, I/O Features in Stratix IV Devices
■Chapter 7, External Memory Interfaces in Stratix IV Devices
■Chapter 8, High-Speed Differential I/O Interfaces and DPA in Stratix IV Devices
Revision History
Refer to each chapter for its own specific revision history. For information on when
each chapter was updated, refer to the Chapter Revision Dates section, which appears
in the full handbook.
II–2 Section II: I/O Interfaces
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2016 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
SIV51006-3.4
© 2012 Altera Corporation. All rights reserved. ALTERA, ARRIA, CYCLONE, HARDCOPY, MAX, MEGACORE, NIOS, QUARTUS and STRATIX words and logos
are trademarks of Altera Corporation and registered in the U.S. Patent and Trademark Office and in other countries. All other words and logos identified as
trademarks or service marks are the property of their respective holders as described at www.altera.com/common/legal.html. Altera warrants performance of its
semiconductor products to current specifications in accordance with Altera's standard warranty, but reserves the right to make changes to any products and
services at any time without notice. Altera assumes no responsibility or liability arising out of the application or use of any information, product, or service
described herein except as expressly agreed to in writing by Altera. Altera customers are advised to obtain the latest version of device specifications before relying
on any published information and before placing orders for products or services.
Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
September 2012
Feedback Subscribe
ISO
9001:2008
Registered
6. I/O Features in Stratix IV Devices
This chapter describes how StratixIV devices provide I/O capabilities that allow
you to work in compliance with current and emerging I/O standards and
requirements. With these device features, you can reduce board design interface costs
and increase development flexibility.
Altera Stratix IV FPGAs deliver a breakthrough level of system bandwidth and
power efficiency for high-end applications, allowing you to innovate without
compromise. Stratix IV I/Os are specifically designed for ease-of-use and rapid
system integration while simultaneously providing the high bandwidth required to
maximize internal logic capabilities and produce system-level performance.
Stratix IV device I/O capability far exceeds the I/O bandwidth available from
previous generation FPGAs. Independent modular I/O banks with a common bank
structure for vertical migration lend efficiency and flexibility to the high-speed I/O.
Package and die enhancements with dynamic termination and output control provide
best-in-class signal integrity. Numerous I/O features assist high-speed data transfer
into and out of the device, including:
■Up to 32 full-duplex clock data recovery (CDR)-based transceivers supporting
data rates between 600 Mbps and 8.5 Gbps
■Dedicated circuitry to support physical layer functionality for popular serial
protocols, such as PCI Express® (PIPE) (PCIe) Gen1 and Gen2, Gigabit Ethernet
(GbE), Serial RapidIO®, SONET/SDH, XAUI/HiGig, (OIF) CEI-6G,
SD/HD/3G-SDI, Fibre Channel, SFI-5, and Interlaken
■Complete PCIe protocol solution with embedded PCIe hard IP blocks that
implement PHY-MAC layer, data link layer, and transaction layer functionality
■Single-ended, non-voltage-referenced, and voltage-referenced I/O standards
■Low-voltage differential signaling (LVDS), reduced swing differential signaling
(RSDS), mini-LVDS, high-speed transceiver logic (HSTL), and SSTL
■Single data rate (SDR) and half data rate (HDR—half frequency and twice data
width of SDR) input and output options
■Up to 132 full duplex 1.6 Gbps true LVDS channels (132 Tx + 132 Rx) on the row
I/O banks
■Hard dynamic phase alignment (DPA) block with serializer/deserializer
(SERDES)
■Deskew, read and write leveling, and clock-domain crossing functionality
■Programmable output current strength
■Programmable slew rate
September 2012
SIV51006-3.4
6–2 Chapter 6: I/O Features in Stratix IV Devices
I/O Standards Support
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
■Programmable delay
■Programmable bus-hold circuit
■Programmable pull-up resistor
■Open-drain output
■Serial, parallel, and dynamic on-chip termination (OCT)
■Differential OCT
■Programmable pre-emphasis
■Programmable equalization
■Programmable differential output voltage (VOD)
This chapter contains the following sections:
■“I/O Standards Support”
■“I/O Banks” on page 6–5
■“I/O Structure” on page 6–17
■“On-Chip Termination Support and I/O Termination Schemes” on page 6–24
■“OCT Calibration” on page 6–32
■“Termination Schemes for I/O Standards” on page 6–38
■“Design Considerations” on page 6–46
I/O Standards Support
Stratix IV devices support a wide range of industry I/O standards. Table 6–1 lists the
I/O standards Stratix IV devices support, as well as the typical applications. These
devices support VCCIO voltage levels of 3.0, 2.5, 1.8, 1.5, and 1.2 V.
Table 6–1. I/O Standards and Applications for Stratix IV Devices (Part 1 of 2)
I/O Standard Application
3.3-V LVTTL/LVCMOS (1), (2) General purpose
2.5-V LVCMOS General purpose
1.8-V LVCMOS General purpose
1.5-V LVCMOS General purpose
1.2-V LVCMOS General purpose
3.0-V PCI/PCI-X PC and embedded system
SSTL-2 Class I and II DDR SDRAM
SSTL-18 Class I and II DDR2 SDRAM
SSTL-15 Class I and II DDR3 SDRAM
HSTL-18 Class I and II QDRII/RLDRAM II
HSTL-15 Class I and II QDRII/QDRII+/RLDRAM II
HSTL-12 Class I and II General purpose
Differential SSTL-2 Class I and II DDR SDRAM
Differential SSTL-18 Class I and II DDR2 SDRAM
Chapter 6: I/O Features in Stratix IV Devices 6–3
I/O Standards Support
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
fFor more information about transceiver supported I/O standards, refer to the
Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices chapter.
I/O Standards and Voltage Levels
Stratix IV devices support a wide range of industry I/O standards, including
single-ended, voltage-referenced single-ended, and differential I/O standards.
Table 6–2 lists the supported I/O standards and typical values for input and output
VCCIO, VCCPD, VREF
, and board VTT.
Differential SSTL-15 Class I and II DDR3 SDRAM
Differential HSTL-18 Class I and II Clock interfaces
Differential HSTL-15 Class I and II Clock interfaces
Differential HSTL-12 Class I and II Clock interfaces
LVDS High-speed communications
RSDS Flat panel display
mini-LVDS Flat panel display
LVPECL Video graphics and clock distribution
Notes to Table 6–1:
(1) The 3.3-V LVTTL/LVCMOS standard is supported using VCCIO at 3.0 V.
(2) For more information about the 3.3-V LVTTL/LVCMOS standard supported in Stratix IV devices, refer to “3.3-V I/O
Interface” on page 6–19.
Table 6–1. I/O Standards and Applications for Stratix IV Devices (Part 2 of 2)
I/O Standard Application
Table 6–2. I/O Standards and Voltage Levels for Stratix IV Devices (1) (Part 1 of 3)
I/O Standard Standard
Support
VCCIO (V)
VCCPD (V)
(Pre-Driver
Voltage)
VREF (V)
(Input Ref
Voltage)
VTT (V)
(Board
Termination
Voltage)
Input Operation Output Operation
Column
I/O Banks
Row
I/O Banks
Column
I/O Banks
Row
I/O Banks
3.3-V LVTTL JESD8-B 3.0/2.5 3.0/2.5 3.0 3.0 3.0 — —
3.3-V LVCMOS (3) JESD8-B 3.0/2.5 3.0/2.5 3.0 3.0 3.0 — —
2.5-V LVCMOS JESD8-5 3.0/2.5 3.0/2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 — —
1.8-V LVCMOS JESD8-7 1.8/1.5 1.8/1.5 1.8 1.8 2.5 — —
1.5-V LVCMOS JESD8-11 1.8/1.5 1.8/1.5 1.5 1.5 2.5 — —
1.2-V LVCMOS JESD8-12 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 2.5 — —
3.0-V PCI PCI
Rev 2.1 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 — —
3.0-V PCI-X PCI-X
Rev 1.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 — —
SSTL-2 Class I JESD8-9B (2) (2) 2.5 2.5 2.5 1.25 1.25
SSTL-2 Class II JESD8-9B (2) (2) 2.5 2.5 2.5 1.25 1.25
SSTL-18 Class I JESD8-15 (2) (2) 1.8 1.8 2.5 0.90 0.90
SSTL-18 Class II JESD8-15 (2) (2) 1.8 1.8 2.5 0.90 0.90
6–4 Chapter 6: I/O Features in Stratix IV Devices
I/O Standards Support
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
SSTL-15 Class I — (2) (2) 1.5 1.5 2.5 0.75 0.75
SSTL-15 Class II — (2) (2) 1.5 — 2.5 0.75 0.75
HSTL-18 Class I JESD8-6 (2) (2) 1.8 1.8 2.5 0.90 0.90
HSTL-18 Class II JESD8-6 (2) (2) 1.8 1.8 2.5 0.90 0.90
HSTL-15 Class I JESD8-6 (2) (2) 1.5 1.5 2.5 0.75 0.75
HSTL-15 Class II JESD8-6 (2) (2) 1.5 — 2.5 0.75 0.75
HSTL-12 Class I JESD8-16A (2) (2) 1.2 1.2 2.5 0.6 0.6
HSTL-12 Class II JESD8-16A (2) (2) 1.2 — 2.5 0.6 0.6
Differential SSTL-2
Class I JESD8-9B (2) (2) 2.5 2.5 2.5 — 1.25
Differential SSTL-2
Class II JESD8-9B (2) (2) 2.5 2.5 2.5 — 1.25
Differential
SSTL-18 Class I JESD8-15 (2) (2) 1.8 1.8 2.5 — 0.90
Differential
SSTL-18 Class II JESD8-15 (2) (2) 1.8 1.8 2.5 — 0.90
Differential
SSTL-15 Class I —(2) (2) 1.5 1.5 2.5 — 0.75
Differential
SSTL-15 Class II —(2) (2) 1.5 — 2.5 — 0.75
Differential
HSTL-18 Class I JESD8-6 (2) (2) 1.8 1.8 2.5 — 0.90
Differential
HSTL-18 Class II JESD8-6 (2) (2) 1.8 1.8 2.5 — 0.90
Differential
HSTL-15 Class I JESD8-6 (2) (2) 1.5 1.5 2.5 — 0.75
Differential
HSTL-15 Class II JESD8-6 (2) (2) 1.5 — 2.5 — 0.75
Differential
HSTL-12 Class I JESD8-16A (2) (2) 1.2 1.2 2.5 — 0.60
Differential
HSTL-12 Class II JESD8-16A (2) (2) 1.2 — 2.5 — 0.60
LVDS (4), (5), (8) ANSI/TIA/
EIA-644 (2) (2) 2.5 2.5 2.5 — —
RSDS (6), (7), (8) —(2) (2) 2.5 2.5 2.5 — —
mini-LVDS (6), (7),
(8) —(2) (2) 2.5 2.5 2.5 — —
Table 6–2. I/O Standards and Voltage Levels for Stratix IV Devices (1) (Part 2 of 3)
I/O Standard Standard
Support
VCCIO (V)
VCCPD (V)
(Pre-Driver
Voltage)
VREF (V)
(Input Ref
Voltage)
VTT (V)
(Board
Termination
Voltage)
Input Operation Output Operation
Column
I/O Banks
Row
I/O Banks
Column
I/O Banks
Row
I/O Banks
Chapter 6: I/O Features in Stratix IV Devices 6–5
I/O Banks
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
fFor more information about the electrical characteristics of each I/O standard, refer to
the DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices chapter.
I/O Banks
Stratix IV devices contain up to 24 I/O banks, as shown in Figure 6–1 and Figure 6–2.
The row I/O banks contain true differential input and output buffers and dedicated
circuitry to support differential standards at speeds up to 1.6 Gbps.
Each I/O bank in Stratix IV devices can support high-performance external memory
interfaces with dedicated circuitry. The I/O pins are organized in pairs to support
differential standards. Each I/O pin pair can support both differential input and
output buffers. The only exceptions are the
clk[1,3,8,10]
,
PLL_L[1,4]_clk
, and
PLL_R[1,4]_clk
pins, which support differential input operations only.
fFor information about the number of channels available for the LVDS I/O standard,
refer to the High-Speed Differential I/O Interface and DPA in Stratix IV Devices chapter.
For more information about transceiver-bank-related features, refer to the Transceiver
Architecture in Stratix IV Devices chapter.
LVPECL — (4) 2.5 — — 2.5 — —
Notes to Table 6–2:
(1) VCCPD is either 2.5 or 3.0 V. For VCCIO = 3.0 V, VCCPD = 3.0 V. For VCCIO = 2.5 V or less, VCCPD = 2.5 V.
(2) Single-ended HSTL/SSTL, differential SSTL/HSTL, and LVDS input buffers are powered by VCCPD. Row I/O banks support both true differential
input buffers and true differential output buffers. Column I/O banks support true differential input buffers, but not true differential output buffers.
I/O pins are organized in pairs to support differential standards. Column I/O differential HSTL and SSTL inputs use LVDS differential input buffers
without on-chip RD support.
(3) For more information about the 3.3-V LVTTL/LVCMOS standard supported in Stratix IV devices, refer to “3.3-V I/O Interface” on page 6–19.
(4) Column I/O banks support LVPECL I/O standards for input clock operation. Clock inputs on column I/Os are powered by VCCCLKIN when configured
as differential clock inputs. They are powered by VCCIO when configured as single-ended clock inputs. Differential clock inputs in row I/Os are
powered by VCCPD.
(5) Column and row I/O banks support LVDS outputs using two single-ended output buffers, an external one-resistor (LVDS_E_1R), and a
three-resistor (LVDS_E_3R) network.
(6) Row I/O banks support RSDS and mini-LVDS I/O standards using a true LVDS output buffer without a resistor network.
(7) Column and row I/O banks support RSDS and mini-LVDS I/O standards using two single-ended output buffers with one-resistor (RSDS_E_1R
and mini-LVDS_E_1R) and three-resistor (RSDS_E_3R and mini-LVDS_E_3R) networks.
(8) The emulated differential output standard that supports the tri-state feature includes: LVDS_E_1R, LVDS_E_3R, RSDS_E_1R, RSDS_E_3R,
Mini_LVDS_E_1R, and Mini_LVDS_E_3R. For more information, refer to the I/O Buffer (ALTIOBUF) Megafunction User Guide.
Table 6–2. I/O Standards and Voltage Levels for Stratix IV Devices (1) (Part 3 of 3)
I/O Standard Standard
Support
VCCIO (V)
VCCPD (V)
(Pre-Driver
Voltage)
VREF (V)
(Input Ref
Voltage)
VTT (V)
(Board
Termination
Voltage)
Input Operation Output Operation
Column
I/O Banks
Row
I/O Banks
Column
I/O Banks
Row
I/O Banks
6–6 Chapter 6: I/O Features in Stratix IV Devices
I/O Banks
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Figure 6–1. Stratix IV E Devices I/0 Banks (1), (2), (3), (4), (5), (6), (7), (8)
Notes to Figure 6–1:
(1) Differential HSTL and SSTL outputs are not true differential outputs. They use two single-ended outputs with the second output programmed as
inverted.
(2) Column I/O differential HSTL and SSTL inputs use LVDS differential input buffers without differential OCT support.
(3) Column I/O supports LVDS outputs using single-ended buffers and external resistor networks.
(4) Column I/O supports PCI/PCI-X with on-chip clamp diode. Row I/O supports PCI/PCI-X with external clamp diode.
(5) Clock inputs on column I/Os are powered by VCCCLKIN when configured as differential clock inputs. They are powered by VCCIO when configured as
single-ended clock inputs. All outputs use the corresponding bank VCCIO.
(6) Row I/O supports the true LVDS output buffer.
(7) Column and row I/O banks support LVPECL standards for input clock operation.
(8) Figure 6–1 is a top view of the silicon die that corresponds to a reverse view for flip chip packages. It is a graphical representation only.
Bank 1A
Bank 8A
Bank 1C Bank 1B
Bank 2C
Bank 2A Bank 2B
Bank 8B Bank 7B Bank 7ABank 7C
Bank 8C
Bank 3A Bank 3B Bank 4B Bank 4A
Bank 4C
Bank 3C
Bank 6A
Bank 6C Bank 6B
Bank 5C
Bank 5A Bank 5B
I/O banks 8A, 8B, and 8C support all
single-ended and differential input
and output operations except LVPECL,
which is supported on clk input pins only.
I/O banks 7A, 7B, and 7C support all
single-ended and differential input
and output operations except LVPECL,
which is supported on clk input pins only.
I/O banks 3A, 3B, and 3C support all
single-ended and differential input
and output operations except LVPECL,
which is supported on clk input pins only.
I/O banks 4A, 4B, and 4C support all
single-ended and differential input
and output operations except LVPECL,
which is supported on clk input pins only.
Row I/O banks support LVTTL, LVCMOS, 2.5-V, 1.8-V,
1.5-V, 1.2-V, SSTL-2 Class I & II, SSTL-18 Class I & II,
SSTL-15 Class I, HSTL-18 Class I & II, HSTL-15 Class I,
HSTL-12 Class I, LVDS, RSDS, mini-LVDS, differential
SSTL-2 Class I & II, differential SSTL-18 Class I & II,
differential SSTL-15 Class I, differential HSTL-18 Class I &
II, differential HSTL-15 Class I, and differential HSTL-12
Class I standards for input and output operations.
LVPECL I/O standard for input operation on dedicated
clock input pins.
SSTL-15 Class II, HSTL-15 Class II, HSTL-12 Class II,
differential SSTL-15 Class II, differential HSTL-15
Class II, differential HSTL-12 Class II standards are
only supported for input operations.
Chapter 6: I/O Features in Stratix IV Devices 6–7
I/O Banks
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
Figure 6–2. Stratix IV GX Devices I/O Banks (1), (2), (3), (4), (5), (6), (7), (8), (9)
Notes to Figure 6–2:
(1) Differential HSTL and SSTL outputs are not true differential outputs. They use two single-ended outputs with the second output programmed as
inverted.
(2) Column I/O differential HSTL and SSTL inputs use LVDS differential input buffers without differential OCT support.
(3) Column I/O supports LVDS outputs using single-ended buffers and external resistor networks.
(4) Column I/O supports PCI/PCI-X with an on-chip clamp diode. Row I/O supports PCI/PCI-X with an external clamp diode.
(5) Clock inputs on column I/Os are powered by VCCCLKIN when configured as differential clock inputs. They are powered by VCCIO when configured as
single-ended clock inputs. All outputs use the corresponding bank VCCIO.
(6) Row I/O supports the true LVDS output buffer.
(7) Column and row I/O banks support LVPECL standards for input clock operation.
(8) Figure 6–2 is a top view of the silicon die that corresponds to a reverse view for flip chip packages. It is a graphical representation only.
(9) Stratix IV devices do not support the PCI clamp diode when VCCIO is 1.2 V, 1.5 V, or 1.8 V.
Bank 3A Bank 3B Bank 4B Bank 4A
Bank 4C
Bank 3C
I/O banks 8A, 8B & 8C support al l
single-ended an d diff erential input
and output operat io n.
I/O banks 7A , 7B & 7C support all
single-ended and diff e rent i al i nput
and output operat io n.
I/O banks 3A, 3B & 3C support al l
single-ended an d diff erential input
and output operat io n.
I/O banks 4A, 4B & 4C support al l
single-ended and diff erential input
and output operat io n.
Bank 1A
Bank 1C
Bank 2C
Bank 2BBank 2A
Bank 5A Bank 5B Bank5C Bank 6C Bank 6A
Transceiver Bank
GXBR3
Transceiver Bank
GXBR2
Transceiver Bank
GXBR1
Transceiver Bank
GXBR0
Transceiver Bank
GXBL3
Transceiver Bank
GXBL2
Transceiver Bank
GXBL1
Transceiver Bank
GXBL0
Row I/O banks support LVTTL, LV CMOS, 2.5-V, 1.8-
V, 1.5-V, 1.2-V, SSTL-2 Class I & II, SSTL-18 Class I
& II, SSTL-15 Class I, HSTL-18 Class I & II, HSTL-15
Class I, HSTL-12 Class I, LV DS, RSDS, mini-LVDS,
differenti a l S STL-2 Class I & II, differential SSTL-18
Class I & II, different i al SSTL-15 Class I, diff erent ial
HSTL-18 Class I & II, diff erent ial HSTL-15 Class I and
differenti al HSTL-12 Class I s tandards for input and
output operation.
SSTL-15 class II, HSTL-15 Class II, HSTL-12 Class I I,
differenti al SSTL-15 Class II, differential HSTL-15
Class II, di fferential HS TL-12 Cl ass II standards are
only support ed for input operations
Bank 1B
Bank 6B
Bank 8A Bank 8B Bank 7B Bank 7A
Bank 7C
Bank 8C
6–8 Chapter 6: I/O Features in Stratix IV Devices
I/O Banks
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Modular I/O Banks
The I/O pins in Stratix IV devices are arranged in groups called modular I/O banks.
Depending on device densities, the number of Stratix IV device I/O banks range from
16 to 24. The number of I/O pins on each bank is 24, 32, 36, 40, or 48. Figure 6–4
through Figure 6–16 show the number of I/O pins available in each I/O bank.
In Stratix IV devices, the maximum number of I/O banks per side is either four or six,
depending on the device density. When migrating between devices with a different
number of I/O banks per side, it is the middle or “B” bank that is removed or
inserted. For example, when moving from a 24-bank device to a 16-bank device, the
banks that are dropped are “B” banks, namely: 1B, 2B, 3B, 4B, 5B, 6B, 7B, and 8B.
Similarly, when moving from a 16-bank device to a 24-bank device, the banks that are
added are the same “B” banks.
After migration from a smaller device to a larger device, the bank size increases or
remains the same, but never decreases. For example, the number of I/O pins to a bank
may increase from 24 to 26, 32, 36, 40, 42, or 48, but will never decrease. This is shown
in Figure 6–3.
Figure 6–3. Bank Migration Path with Increasing Device Size
24 26 32 36 40 42 48
Chapter 6: I/O Features in Stratix IV Devices 6–9
I/O Banks
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
Figure 6–4 through Figure 6–16 show the number of I/O pins and packaging
information for different sets of available devices. They show the top view of the
silicon die that corresponds to a reverse view for flip chip packages. They are
graphical representations only.
1For Figure 6–4 through Figure 6–16, the pin count includes all general purpose I/Os,
dedicated clock pins, and dual purpose configuration pins. Transceiver pins and
dedicated configuration pins are not included in the pin count.
Figure 6–4. Number of I/Os in Each Bank in EP4SE230 and EP4SE360 Devices in the 780-Pin FineLine BGA Package
EP4SE230
EP4SE360
Bank 7A 40
Bank 7C 24
26 Bank 1C
26 Bank 2C
40 Bank 4A
24 Bank 4C
Bank 5C 26
32 Bank 2A
Bank 8C 24
Bank 8A 40
24 Bank 3C
40 Bank 3A
Bank 5A 32
Bank 6A 32
Bank
Name
Number
of I/Os
Bank
Name
Number
of I/Os
32 Bank 1A
Bank 6C 26
Figure 6–5. Number of I/Os in Each Bank in EP4SE360, EP4SE530, and EP4SE820 Devices in the 1152-Pin FineLine BGA
Package
EP4SE360
EP4SE530
EP4SE820
Bank 8B 24
Bank 7A 40
Bank 7B 24
Bank 7C 32
42 Bank 1C
42 Bank 2C
24 Bank 3B
40 Bank 4A
24 Bank 4B
32 Bank 4C
Bank 6C 42
Bank 5C 42
48 Bank 2A
Bank 8C 32
Bank 8A 40
32 Bank 3C
40 Bank 3A
Bank 5A 48
Bank 6A 48
Bank
Name
Number
of I/Os
Bank
Name
Number
of I/Os
48 Bank 1A
6–10 Chapter 6: I/O Features in Stratix IV Devices
I/O Banks
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Figure 6–6. Number of I/Os in Each Bank in EP4SE530 and EP4SE820 Devices in the 1517-Pin FineLine BGA Package
EP4SE530
EP4SE820
Bank 8B 48
Bank 7A 48
Bank 7B 48
Bank 7C 32
42 Bank 1C
24 Bank 1B
24 Bank 2B
42 Bank 2C
48 Bank 3B
48 Bank 4A
48 Bank 4B
32 Bank 4C
Bank 6C 42
Bank 6B 24
Bank 5B 24
Bank 5C 42
50 Bank 1A
50 Bank 2A
Bank 8C 32
Bank 8A 48
32 Bank 3C
48 Bank 3A
Bank 5A 50
Bank 6A 50
Bank
Name
Number
of I/Os
Bank
Name
Number
of I/Os
Figure 6–7. Number of I/Os in Each Bank in EP4SE530 and EP4SE820 Devices in the 1760-Pin Fineline BGA Package
EP4SE530
EP4SE820
Bank 8B 48
Bank 7A 48
Bank 7B 48
Bank 7C 48
50 Bank 1C
36 Bank 1B
36 Bank 2B
50 Bank 2C
48 Bank 3B
48 Bank 4A
48 Bank 4B
48 Bank 4C
Bank 6C 50
Bank 6B 36
Bank 5B 36
Bank 5C 50
50 Bank 1A
50 Bank 2A
Bank 8C 48
Bank 8A 48
48 Bank 3C
48 Bank 3A
Bank 5A 50
Bank 6A 50
Bank
Name
Number
of I/Os
Bank
Name
Number
of I/Os
Chapter 6: I/O Features in Stratix IV Devices 6–11
I/O Banks
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
Figure 6–8. Number of I/Os in Each Bank in EP4SGX70, EP4SGX110, EP4SGX180, and EP4SGX230 Devices in the 780-Pin
FineLine BGA Package
Bank 7A 40
Bank 7C 24
26 Bank 1C
26 Bank 2C
40 Bank 4A
24 Bank 4C
32 Bank 2A
Bank 8C 24
Bank 8A 40
24 Bank 3C
40 Bank 3A
Bank
Name
Number
of I/Os
Bank
Name
Number
of I/Os
32 Bank 1A
Number of
Transceiver
Channels
Bank
GXBR0
4
4
Bank
GXBR1
EP4SGX70
EP4SGX110
EP4SGX180
EP4SGX230
Figure 6–9. Number of I/Os in Each Bank in EP4SGX290 and EP4SGX360 Devices in the 780-Pin FineLine BGA Package
40 Bank 4A
32 Bank 4C
32 Bank 3C
40 Bank 3A
4
4
4
4
Number
of I/Os
Bank
Name
Number of
Transceiver
Channels
Bank
Name
Number
of I/Os
Bank
GXBR1
Bank
GXBR0
Bank
GXBL1
Bank
GXBL0
Number of
Transceiver
Channels
Bank
1C
Bank 7A 40
Bank 7C 32
Bank 8C 32
Bank 8A 40
1
EP4SGX290
EP4SGX360
6–12 Chapter 6: I/O Features in Stratix IV Devices
I/O Banks
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Figure 6–10. Number of I/Os in Each Bank in EP4SGX70 and EP4SGX110 Devices in the 1152-Pin FineLine BGA Package
Bank 7A 40
Bank 7C 24
40 Bank 4A
24 Bank 4C
Bank 8C 24
Bank 8A 40
24 Bank 3C
40 Bank 3A
Bank
Name
Number
of I/Os
Number
of I/Os
Bank
Name
*Number of
Transceiver
Channels
4*
4*
4*
4*
32
26
Bank 1A
Bank 1C
Bank
GXBL1
Bank
GXBL0
Bank
GXBR1
Bank
GXBR0
Bank 6A
Bank 6C
32
26
EP4SGX70
EP4SGX110
Figure 6–11. Number of I/Os in Each Bank in EP4SGX180, EP4SGX230, EP4SGX290, EP4SGX360, and EP4SGX530 Devices
in the 1152-Pin FineLine BGA Package (1), (2)
Notes to Figure 6–11:
(1) Except for the EP4SGX530 device, all listed devices have two variants in the F1152 package option—one with no PMA-only transceiver channels
and the other with two PMA-only transceiver channels for each transceiver bank. The EP4SGX530 device is only offered with two PMA-only
transceiver channels for each transceiver bank in the F1152 package option.
(2) There are two additional PMA-only transceiver channels in each transceiver bank for devices with the PMA-only transceiver package option.
EP4SGX180
EP4SGX290
EP4SGX360
Bank 8B 24
Bank 7A 40
Bank 7B 24
Bank 7C 32
24 Bank 3B
40 Bank 4A
24 Bank 4B
32 Bank 4C
Bank 8C 32
Bank 8A 40
32 Bank 3C
40 Bank 3A
Bank
Name
Number
of I/Os
Bank
Name
Number
of I/Os
4 (2)
4 (2)
48
42
Bank
GXBL1
Bank
GXBL0
Bank 1A
Bank 1C
48
42
Bank
GXBR1
Bank
GXBR0
Bank 6A
Bank 6C
EP4SGX230
EP4SGX530
4 (2)
4 (2)
Chapter 6: I/O Features in Stratix IV Devices 6–13
I/O Banks
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
Figure 6–12. Number of I/Os in Each Bank in EP4SGX180, EP4SGX230, EP4SGX290, EP4SGX360, and EP4SGX530 Devices
in the 1517-Pin FineLine BGA Package (1)
Note to Figure 6–12:
(1) There are two additional PMA-only transceiver channels in each transceiver bank.
Bank 8B 24
Bank 7A 40
Bank 7B 24
Bank 7C 32
42 Bank 1C
42 Bank 2C
24 Bank 3B
40 Bank 4A
24 Bank 4B
32 Bank 4C
Bank 6C 42
Bank 5C 42
48 Bank 2A
Bank 8C 32
Bank 8A 40
32 Bank 3C
40 Bank 3A
Bank 5A 48
Bank 6A 48
Bank
Name
Number
of I/Os
Bank
Name
Number
of I/Os
48 Bank 1A
Bank
GXBL2
Bank
GXBL1
Bank
GXBL0
4 (1)
Bank
GXBR2
Bank
GXBR1
Bank
GXBR0
4 (1)
4 (1)
4 (1)
4 (1)
4 (1)
EP4SGX180
EP4SGX230
EP4SGX290
EP4SGX360
EP4SGX530
6–14 Chapter 6: I/O Features in Stratix IV Devices
I/O Banks
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Figure 6–13. Number of I/Os in Each Bank in EP4SGX290, EP4SGX360, and EP4SGX530 Devices in the 1932-Pin FineLine
BGA Package (1)
Note to Figure 6–13:
(1) There are two additional PMA-only transceiver channels in each transceiver bank.
EP4SGX530
EP4SGX290
EP4SGX360
Bank 8B 48
Bank 7A 48
Bank 7B 48
Bank 7C 32
48 Bank 3B
48 Bank 4A
48 Bank 4B
32 Bank 4C
Bank 8C 32
Bank 8A 48
32 Bank 3C
48 Bank 3A
Number
of I/Os
Bank
Name
Bank
Name
Number
of I/Os
Bank 1A
Bank 1C
Bank 2C
Bank 2B
Bank 2A
Bank
GXBL3
Bank
GXBL2
Bank
GXBL1
Bank
GXBL0
50
50
42
42
20
4
(1)
Bank 6A
Bank 6C
Bank 5C
Bank 5B
Bank 5A
Bank
GXBR3
Bank
GXBR2
Bank
GXBR1
Bank
GXBR0
50
50
42
42
20
4
(1)
4
(1)
4
(1)
4
(1)
4
(1)
4
(1)
4
(1)
Chapter 6: I/O Features in Stratix IV Devices 6–15
I/O Banks
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
Figure 6–14. Number of I/Os in Each Bank in EP4SGX290, EP4SGX360, and EP4SGX530 Devices in the 1760-Pin FineLine
BGA Package (1)
Note to Figure 6–14:
(1) There are two additional PMA-only transceiver channels in each transceiver bank.
Bank 8B 48
Bank 7A 48
Bank 7B 48
Bank 7C 32
42 Bank 1C
42 Bank 2C
48 Bank 3B
48 Bank 4A
48 Bank 4B
32 Bank 4C
Bank 6C 42
Bank 5C 42
50 Bank 2A
Bank 8C 32
Bank 8A 48
32 Bank 3C
48 Bank 3A
Bank 5A 50
Bank 6A 50
Bank
Name
Number
of I/Os
Bank
Name
Number
of I/Os
50 Bank 1A
Bank
GXBL2
Bank
GXBL1
Bank
GXBL0
4 (1)
Bank
GXBR2
Bank
GXBR1
Bank
GXBR0
4 (1)
4 (1)
4 (1)
4 (1)
4 (1)
EP4SGX290
EP4SGX360
EP4SGX530
6–16 Chapter 6: I/O Features in Stratix IV Devices
I/O Banks
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
1The information in Figure 6–15 and Figure 6–16 applies to Stratix IV GX and GT
devices.
Figure 6–15. Number of I/Os in Each Bank in EP4S100G3, EP4S100G4, and EP4S100G5 Devices in the 1932-Pin FineLine
BGA Package (1)
Note to Figure 6–15:
(1) There are two additional PMA-only transceiver channels in each transceiver bank.
Bank 8B 48
Bank 7A 48
Bank 7B 48
Bank 7C 32
21 Bank 1C
21 Bank 2C
48 Bank 3B
48 Bank 4A
48 Bank 4B
32 Bank 4C
Bank 6C 22
Bank 5C 19
41 Bank 2A
Bank 8C 32
Bank 8A 48
32 Bank 3C
48 Bank 3A
Bank 5A 42
Bank 6A 38
Bank
Name
Number
of I/Os
Bank
Name
Number
of I/Os
40 Bank 1A
Bank
GXBL2
Bank
GXBL1
Bank
GXBL0
4 (1)
Bank
GXBR2
Bank
GXBR1
Bank
GXBR0
4 (1)
4 (1)
4 (1)
4 (1)
4 (1)
13 Bank 2B Bank 5B 12
EP4S100G3
EP4S100G4
EP4S100G5
Chapter 6: I/O Features in Stratix IV Devices 6–17
I/O Structure
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
I/O Structure
The I/O element (IOE) in Stratix IV devices contain a bidirectional I/O buffer and I/O
registers to support a complete embedded bidirectional single data rate or DDR
transfer. The IOEs are located in I/O blocks around the periphery of the Stratix IV
device. There are up to four IOEs per row I/O block and four IOEs per column I/O
block. The row IOEs drive row, column, or direct link interconnects. The column IOEs
drive column interconnects.
The Stratix IV bidirectional IOE also supports the following features:
■Programmable input delay
■Programmable output-current strength
■Programmable slew rate
■Programmable output delay
■Programmable bus-hold
■Programmable pull-up resistor
■Open-drain output
■On-chip series termination with calibration
Figure 6–16. Number of I/Os in Each Bank in EP4S40G2, EP4S40G5, EP4S100G2, and EP4S100G5 Devices in the 1517-Pin
FineLine BGA Package (1)
Note to Figure 6–16:
(1) There are two additional PMA-only transceiver channels in each transceiver bank.
Bank 8B 24
Bank 7A 40
Bank 7B 24
Bank 7C 32
22 Bank 1C
23 Bank 2C
24 Bank 3B
40 Bank 4A
24 Bank 4B
32 Bank 4C
Bank 6C 23
Bank 5C 23
46 Bank 2A
Bank 8C 32
Bank 8A 40
32 Bank 3C
40 Bank 3A
Bank 5A 46
Bank 6A 44
Bank
Name
Number
of I/Os
Bank
Name
Number
of I/Os
43 Bank 1A
Bank
GXBL2
Bank
GXBL1
Bank
GXBL0
4 (1)
Bank
GXBR2
Bank
GXBR1
Bank
GXBR0
4 (1)
4 (1)
4 (1)
4 (1)
4 (1)
EP4S40G2
EP4S40G5
EP4S100G2
EP4S100G5
6–18 Chapter 6: I/O Features in Stratix IV Devices
I/O Structure
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
■On-chip series termination without calibration
■On-chip parallel termination with calibration
■On-chip differential termination
■PCI clamping diode
I/O registers are composed of the input path for handling data from the pin to the
core, the output path for handling data from the core to the pin, and the output-enable
(OE) path for handling the OE signal to the output buffer. These registers allow faster
source-synchronous register-to-register transfers and resynchronization. The input
path consists of the DDR input registers, alignment and synchronization registers,
and HDR. You can bypass each block of the input path.
The output and OE paths are divided into output or OE registers, alignment registers,
and HDR blocks. You can bypass each block of the output and OE paths.
Figure 6–17 shows the Stratix IV IOE structure.
Figure 6–17. IOE Structure in Stratix IV Devices (1), (2), (3), (4)
Notes to Figure 6–17:
(1) The following features are not supported by true differential standards: open drain or tri-state output,; programmable current strength and slew
rate control; PCI Clamp; programmable pull-up resistor; bus-hold circuit.
(2) The
D3_0
and
D3_1
delays have the same available settings in the Quartus® II software
(3) One dynamic OCT control is available per DQ/DQS group.
(4) Column I/O supports PCI/PCI-X with an on-chip clamp diode. Row I/O supports PCI/PCI-X with an external clamp diode.
2
OE
from
Core
4
Open Drain
On-Chip
Termination
Bus-Hold
Circuit
Programmable
Current
Strength and
Slew Rate
Control
PCI Clamp
VCCIO
VCCIO
Programmable
Pull-Up Resistor
Half Data
Rate Block
Alignment
Registers
Half Data
Rate Block
Write
Data
from
Core
Alignment
Registers
4Half Data
Rate Block
Alignment and
Synchronization
Registers
PRN
DQ
PRN
DQ
PRN
DQ
PRN
DQ
PRN
DQ
OE Register
OE Register
Output Register
Output Register
clkout
To
Core
To
Core
D5, D6
Delay
Input Register
PRN
DQ
Input Register
PRN
DQ
Input Register
clkin
D5, D6
Delay
Read
Data
to
Core
From OCT
Calibration
Block
D2 Delay
D3_0
Delay
D3_1
Delay
D1
Delay
Output Buffer
Input Buffer
D5_OCT D6_OCT
Firm Core
DQS Logic Block
Dynamic OCT Control
(2)
D4 Delay
DQS
CQn
Chapter 6: I/O Features in Stratix IV Devices 6–19
I/O Structure
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
fFor more information about I/O registers and how they are used for memory
applications, refer to the External Memory Interfaces in Stratix IV Devices chapter.
3.3-V I/O Interface
Stratix IV I/O buffers support 3.3-V I/O standards. You can use them as transmitters
or receivers in your system. The output high voltage (VOH), output low voltage (VOL),
input high voltage (VIH), and input low voltage (VIL) levels meet the 3.3-V I/O
standards specifications defined by EIA/JEDEC Standard JESD8-B with margin when
the Stratix IV VCCIO voltage is powered by 3.0 V.
To ensure device reliability and proper operation, when interfacing with a 3.3-V I/O
system using Stratix IV devices, ensure that you do not violate the absolute maximum
ratings of the devices. Altera recommends performing IBIS simulation to determine
that the overshoot and undershoot voltages are within the guidelines.
When using the Stratix IV device as a transmitter, you can use slow slew rate and
series termination to limit overshoot and undershoot at the I/O pins, but they are not
required. Transmission line effects that cause large voltage deviations at the receiver
are associated with an impedance mismatch between the driver and the transmission
lines. By matching the impedance of the driver to the characteristic impedance of the
transmission line, you can significantly reduce overshoot voltage. You can use a series
termination resistor placed physically close to the driver to match the total driver
impedance to the transmission line impedance. Stratix IV devices support series OCT
for all LVTTL and LVCMOS I/O standards in all I/O banks.
When using the Stratix IV device as a receiver, you can use a clamping diode (on-chip
or off-chip) to limit overshoot, though this is not required. Stratix IV devices provide
an optional on-chip PCI-clamping diode for column I/O pins. You can use this diode
to protect the I/O pins against overshoot voltage.
The 3.3-V I/O standard is supported using bank supply voltage (VCCIO) at 3.0 V. In
this method, the clamping diode (on-chip or off-chip), when enabled, can sufficiently
clamp overshoot voltage to within the DC and AC input voltage specifications. The
clamped voltage can be expressed as the sum of the supply voltage (VCCIO) and the
diode forward voltage.
fFor more information about the absolute maximum rating and maximum allowed
overshoot during transitions, refer to the DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV
Devices chapter.
External Memory Interfaces
In addition to the I/O registers in each IOE, Stratix IV devices also have dedicated
registers and phase-shift circuitry on all I/O banks for interfacing with external
memory interfaces.
fFor more information about external memory interfaces, refer to the External Memory
Interfaces in Stratix IV Devices chapter.
6–20 Chapter 6: I/O Features in Stratix IV Devices
I/O Structure
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
High-Speed Differential I/O with DPA Support
Stratix IV devices have the following dedicated circuitry for high-speed differential
I/O support:
■Differential I/O buffer
■Transmitter serializer
■Receiver deserializer
■Data realignment
■Dynamic phase aligner (DPA)
■Synchronizer (FIFO buffer)
■Phase-locked loops (PLLs)
fFor more information about DPA support, refer to the High-Speed Differential I/O
Interfaces and DPA in Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Programmable Current Strength
The output buffer for each Stratix IV device I/O pin has a programmable current
strength control for certain I/O standards. Use programmable current strength to
mitigate the effects of high signal attenuation due to a long transmission line or a
legacy backplane. The LVTTL, LVCMOS, SSTL, and HSTL standards have several
levels of current strength that you can control. Table 6–3 lists the programmable
current strength for Stratix IV devices.
Table 6–3. Programmable Current Strength (Part 1 of 2) (1), (2)
I/O Standard
IOH / IOL Current Strength
Setting (mA) for
Column I/O Pins
IOH / IOL Current Strength
Setting (mA) for
Row I/O Pins
3.3-V LVTTL 16, 12, 8, 4 12, 8, 4
3.3-V LVCMOS 16, 12, 8, 4 8, 4
2.5-V LVCMOS 16, 12, 8, 4 12, 8, 4
1.8-V LVCMOS 12, 10, 8, 6, 4, 2 8, 6, 4, 2
1.5-V LVCMOS 12, 10, 8, 6, 4, 2 8, 6, 4, 2
1.2-V LVCMOS 8, 6, 4, 2 4, 2
SSTL-2 Class I 12, 10, 8 12, 8
SSTL-2 Class II 16 16
SSTL-18 Class I 12, 10, 8, 6, 4 12, 10, 8, 6, 4
SSTL-18 Class II 16, 8 16, 8
SSTL-15 Class I 12, 10, 8, 6, 4 8, 6, 4
SSTL-15 Class II 16, 8 —
HSTL-18 Class I 12, 10, 8, 6, 4 12, 10, 8, 6, 4
HSTL-18 Class II 16 16
HSTL-15 Class I 12, 10, 8, 6, 4 8, 6, 4
HSTL-15 Class II 16 —
Chapter 6: I/O Features in Stratix IV Devices 6–21
I/O Structure
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
1Altera recommends performing IBIS or SPICE simulations to determine the best
current strength setting for your specific application.
Programmable Slew Rate Control
The output buffer for each Stratix IV device regular- and dual-function I/O pin has a
programmable output slew-rate control that you can configure for low-noise or
high-speed performance. A faster slew rate provides high-speed transitions for
high-performance systems. A slower slew rate can help reduce system noise, but adds
a nominal delay to the rising and falling edges. Each I/O pin has an individual
slew-rate control, allowing you to specify the slew rate on a pin-by-pin basis.
1You cannot use the programmable slew rate feature when using OCT.
The Quartus II software allows four settings for programmable slew rate control—0,
1, 2, and 3—where 0 is slow slew rate and 3 is fast slew rate. Figure 6–4 lists the
default slew rate settings from the Quartus II software.
You can use faster slew rates to improve the available timing margin in
memory-interface applications or when the output pin has high-capacitive loading.
1Altera recommends performing IBIS or SPICE simulations to determine the best slew
rate setting for your specific application.
HSTL-12 Class I 12, 10, 8, 6, 4 8, 6, 4
HSTL-12 Class II 16 —
Notes to Table 6–3:
(1) The default setting in the Quartus II software is 50-OCT RS without calibration for all non-voltage reference and
HSTL and SSTL Class I I/O standards. The default setting is 25-OCT RS without calibration for HSTL and SSTL
Class II I/O standards.
(2) The 3.3-V LVTTL and 3.3-V LVCMOS are supported using VCCIO and VCCPD at 3.0 V.
Table 6–3. Programmable Current Strength (Part 2 of 2) (1), (2)
I/O Standard
IOH / IOL Current Strength
Setting (mA) for
Column I/O Pins
IOH / IOL Current Strength
Setting (mA) for
Row I/O Pins
Table 6–4. Default Slew Rate Settings
I/O Standard Slew Rate Option Default Slew Rate
1.2-V, 1.5-V, 1.8-V, 2.5-V LVCMOS, and 3.3-V LVTTL/LVCMOS 0, 1, 2, 3 3
SSTL-2, SSTL-18, SSTL-15, HSTL-18, HSTL-15, and HSTL-12 0, 1, 2, 3 3
3.0-V PCI/PCI-X 0, 1, 2, 3 3
LVDS_E_1R, mini-LVDS_E_1R, and RSDS_E_1R 0, 1, 2, 3 3
LVDS_E_3R, mini-LVDS_E_3R, and RSDS_E_3R 0, 1, 2, 3 3
6–22 Chapter 6: I/O Features in Stratix IV Devices
I/O Structure
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Programmable I/O Delay
The following sections describe programmable IOE delay and programmable output
buffer delay.
Programmable IOE Delay
The Stratix IV device IOE includes programmable delays, shown in Figure 6–17 on
page 6–18, that you can activate to ensure zero hold times, minimize setup times, or
increase clock-to-output times. Each pin can have a different input delay from
pin-to-input register or a delay from output register-to-output pin values to ensure
that the bus has the same delay going into or out of the device. This feature helps read
and time margins because it minimizes the uncertainties between signals in the bus.
fFor more information about programmable IOE delay specifications, refer to the
High-Speed Differential I/O Interfaces and DPA in Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Programmable Output Buffer Delay
Stratix IV devices support delay chains built inside the single-ended output buffer, as
shown in Figure 6–17 on page 6–18. The delay chains can independently control the
rising and falling edge delays of the output buffer, providing the ability to adjust the
output-buffer duty cycle, compensate channel-to-channel skew, reduce simultaneous
switching output (SSO) noise by deliberately introducing channel-to-channel skew,
and improve high-speed memory-interface timing margins. Stratix IV devices
support four levels of output buffer delay settings. The default setting is No Delay.
fFor more information about programmable output buffer delay specifications, refer to
the High-Speed Differential I/O Interfaces and DPA in Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Open-Drain Output
Stratix IV devices provide an optional open-drain output (equivalent to an open
collector output) for each I/O pin. When configured as open drain, the logic value of
the output is either high-Z or 0. Typically, an external pull-up resistor is required to
provide logic high.
Bus Hold
Each Stratix IV device I/O pin provides an optional bus-hold feature. Bus-hold
circuitry can weakly hold the signal on an I/O pin at its last-driven state. Because the
bus-hold feature holds the last-driven state of the pin until the next input signal is
present, you do not need an external pull-up or pull-down resistor to hold a signal
level when the bus is tri-stated.
Bus-hold circuitry also pulls non-driven pins away from the input threshold voltage
where noise can cause unintended high-frequency switching. You can select this
feature individually for each I/O pin. The bus-hold output drives no higher than
VCCIO to prevent over-driving signals. If you enable the bus-hold feature, you cannot
use the programmable pull-up option. Disable the bus-hold feature if the I/O pin is
configured for differential signals.
Bus-hold circuitry uses a resistor with a nominal resistance (RBH) of approximately
7k
to weakly pull the signal level to the last-driven state.
Chapter 6: I/O Features in Stratix IV Devices 6–23
I/O Structure
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
fFor more information about the specific sustaining current driven through this
resistor and the overdrive current used to identify the next-driven input level, refer to
the High-Speed Differential I/O Interfaces and DPA in Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Bus-hold circuitry is active only after configuration. When going into user mode, the
bus-hold circuit captures the value on the pin present at the end of configuration.
Programmable Pull-Up Resistor
Each Stratix IV device I/O pin provides an optional programmable pull-up resistor
during user mode. If you enable this feature for an I/O pin, the pull-up resistor
(typically 25 K ) weakly holds the I/O to the VCCIO level.
Programmable pull-up resistors are only supported on user I/O pins and are not
supported on dedicated configuration pins, JTAG pins, or dedicated clock pins. If you
enable the programmable pull-up option, you cannot use the bus-hold feature.
1When the optional
DEV_OE
signal drives low, all the I/O pins remain tri-stated even
with the programmable pull-up option enabled.
Programmable Pre-Emphasis
Stratix IV LVDS transmitters support programmable pre-emphasis to compensate for
the frequency dependent attenuation of the transmission line. The Quartus II software
allows four settings for programmable pre-emphasis.
fFor more information about programmable pre-emphasis, refer to the High-Speed
Differential I/O Interfaces and DPA in Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Programmable Differential Output Voltage
Stratix IV LVDS transmitters support programmable VOD. The programmable VOD
settings allow you to adjust output eye height to optimize trace length and power
consumption. A higher VOD swing improves voltage margins at the receiver end; a
smaller VOD swing reduces power consumption. The Quartus II software allows four
settings for programmable VOD.
fFor more information about programmable VOD, refer to the High-Speed Differential I/O
Interfaces and DPA in Stratix IV Devices chapter.
MultiVolt I/O Interface
The Stratix IV architecture supports the MultiVolt I/O interface feature that allows the
Stratix IV devices in all packages to interface with systems of different supply
voltages.
You can connect the
VCCIO
pins to a 1.2-, 1.5-, 1.8-, 2.5-, or 3.0-V power supply,
depending on the output requirements. The output levels are compatible with
systems of the same voltage as the power supply. (For example, when
VCCIO
pins are
connected to a 1.5-V power supply, the output levels are compatible with 1.5-V
systems.)
6–24 Chapter 6: I/O Features in Stratix IV Devices
On-Chip Termination Support and I/O Termination Schemes
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
fFor more information about pin connection guidelines, refer to the Stratix IV GX and
Stratix IV E Device Family Pin Connection Guidelines.
The Stratix IV
VCCPD
power pins must be connected to a 2.5- or 3.0-V power supply.
Using these power pins to supply the pre-driver power to the output buffers increases
the performance of the output pins. Table 6–5 lists Stratix IV MultiVolt I/O support.
On-Chip Termination Support and I/O Termination Schemes
Stratix IV devices feature dynamic series and parallel OCT to provide I/O impedance
matching and termination capabilities. OCT maintains signal quality, saves board
space, and reduces external component costs.
Stratix IV devices support:
■On-chip series termination (RS) with calibration
■On-chip series termination (RS) without calibration
■On-chip Parallel termination (RT) with calibration
■Dynamic series termination for single-ended I/O standards
■Dynamic Parallel termination for single-ended I/O standards
■On-chip differential termination (RD) for differential LVDS I/O standards
Stratix IV devices support OCT in all I/O banks by selecting one of the OCT I/O
standards.
These devices also support OCT RS and RT in the same I/O bank for different I/O
standards if they use the same VCCIO supply voltage. You can independently configure
each I/O in an I/O bank to support OCT RS, programmable current strength, or OCT
RT.
1You cannot configure both OCT RS and programmable current strength for the same
I/O buffer.
Table 6–5. Stratix IV MultiVolt I/O Support (1)
VCCIO (V) (3) Input Signal (V) Output Signal (V)
1.2 1.5 1.8 2.5 3.0 3.3 1.2 1.5 1.8 2.5 3.0 3.3
1.2 Y ————— Y —————
1.5 — Y Y ———— Y ————
1.8 — Y Y ————— Y ———
2.5 ——— YY
(2) Y(2) ——— Y ——
3.0 ——— Y Y Y ———— Y —
Notes to Table 6–5:
(1) The pin current may be slightly higher than the default value. You must verify that the driving device’s VOL maximum and VOH minimum voltages
do not violate the applicable Stratix IV VIL maximum and VIH minimum voltage specifications.
(2) Altera recommends that you use an external clamping diode on the I/O pins when the input signal is 3.0 V or 3.3 V. You have the option to use
an internal clamping diode for column I/O pins.
(3) Each I/O bank of a Stratix IV device has its own
VCCIO
pins and supports only one VCCIO, either 1.2, 1.5, 1.8, or 3.0 V. The LVDS I/O standard
is not supported when VCCIO is 3.0 V. The LVDS input operations are supported when VCCIO is 1.2 V, 1.5 V, 1.8 V, or 2.5 V. The LVDS output
operations are only supported when VCCIO is 2.5 V.
Chapter 6: I/O Features in Stratix IV Devices 6–25
On-Chip Termination Support and I/O Termination Schemes
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
A pair of
RUP
and
RDN
pins are available in a given I/O bank and are shared for
series- and parallel-calibrated termination. The
RUP
and
RDN
pins share the same VCCIO
and GND, respectively, with the I/O bank where they are located. The
RUP
and
RDN
pins are dual-purpose I/Os and function as regular I/Os if you do not use the
calibration circuit.
For calibration, the connections are as follows:
■
The RUP
pin is connected to VCCIO through an external 25-±1% or 50-±1%
resistor for an on-chip series termination value of 25-or 50-, respectively.
■
The RDN
pin is connected to GND through an external 25-±1% or 50-±1%
resistor for an on-chip series termination value of 25-or 50-, respectively.
For on-chip parallel termination, the connections are as follows:
■
The RUP
pin is connected to VCCIO through an external 50- ±1% resistor.
■
The RDN
pin is connected to GND through an external 50- ±1% resistor.
On-Chip Series (RS) Termination Without Calibration
Stratix IV devices support driver-impedance matching to provide the I/O driver with
controlled output impedance that closely matches the impedance of the transmission
line. As a result, you can significantly reduce reflections. Stratix IV devices support
on-chip series termination for single-ended I/O standards (Figure 6–18).
The RS shown in Figure 6–18 is the intrinsic impedance of the output transistors.
Typical RS values are 25 and 50 . When you select matching impedance, current
strength is no longer selectable.
To use on-chip termination for the SSTL Class I standard, you must select the 50-
on-chip series termination setting, thus eliminating the external 25-RS (to match
the 50- transmission line). For the SSTL Class II standard, you must select the 25-
on-chip series termination setting (to match the 50- transmission line and the
near-end external 50- pull-up to VTT).
Figure 6–18. On-Chip Series Termination Without Calibration
Stratix IV Driver
Series Termination Receiving
Device
VCCIO
RS
RS
GND
= 50 Ω
ZO
6–26 Chapter 6: I/O Features in Stratix IV Devices
On-Chip Termination Support and I/O Termination Schemes
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
On-Chip Series Termination with Calibration
Stratix IV devices support on-chip series termination with calibration in all banks. The
on-chip series termination calibration circuit compares the total impedance of the I/O
buffer to the external 25-±1% or 50-±1% resistors connected to the
RUP
and
RDN
pins and dynamically enables or disables the transistors until they match.
The RS shown in Figure 6–19 is the intrinsic impedance of the transistors. Calibration
occurs at the end of device configuration. When the calibration circuit finds the
correct impedance, it powers down and stops changing the characteristics of the
drivers.
Table 6–6 lists the I/O standards that support on-chip series termination with and
without calibration.
Figure 6–19. On-Chip Series Termination with Calibration
Table 6–6. Selectable I/O Standards for On-Chip Series Termination with and Without Calibration
(Part 1 of 2)
I/O Standard
On-Chip Series Termination Setting
Row I/O () Column I/O ()
3.3-V LVTTL/LVCMOS 50 50
25 25
2.5-V LVCMOS 50 50
25 25
1.8-V LVCMOS 50 50
25 25
1.5-V LVCMOS 50 50
25
1.2-V LVCMOS 50 50
25
SSTL-2 Class I 50 50
SSTL-2 Class II 25 25
SSTL-18 Class I 50 50
SSTL-18 Class II 25 25
Stratix IV Driver
Series Termination Receiving
Device
VCCIO
RS
RS
GND
= 50 Ω
ZO
Chapter 6: I/O Features in Stratix IV Devices 6–27
On-Chip Termination Support and I/O Termination Schemes
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
Left-Shift Series Termination Control
Stratix IV devices support left-shift series termination control. You can use left-shift
series termination control to get the calibrated OCT RS with half of the impedance
value of the external reference resistors connected to the
RUP
and
RDN
pins. This feature
is useful in applications that require both 25- and 50- calibrated OCT RS at the
same VCCIO. For example, if your application requires 25- and 50- calibrated OCT
RS for SSTL-2 Class I and Class II I/O standards, you only need one OCT calibration
block with 50- external reference resistors.
You can enable the left-shift series termination control feature in the ALTIOBUF
megafunction in the Quartus II software. The Quartus II software only allows
left-shift series termination control for 25- calibrated OCT RS with 50- external
reference resistors connected to the
RUP
and
RDN
pins. You can only use left-shift series
termination control for the I/O standards that support 25- calibrated OCT RS .
1This feature is automatically enabled if you are using a bidirectional I/O with 25-
calibrated OCT RS and 50- parallel OCT.
fFor more information about how to enable the left-shift series termination feature in
the ALTIOBUF megafunction, refer to the I/O Buffer (ALTIOBUF) Megafunction User
Guide.
SSTL-15 Class I 50 50
SSTL-15 Class II — 25
HSTL-18 Class I 50 50
HSTL-18 Class II 25 25
HSTL-15 Class I 50 50
HSTL-15 Class II — 25
HSTL-12 Class I 50 50
HSTL-12 Class II — 25
Table 6–6. Selectable I/O Standards for On-Chip Series Termination with and Without Calibration
(Part 2 of 2)
I/O Standard
On-Chip Series Termination Setting
Row I/O () Column I/O ()
6–28 Chapter 6: I/O Features in Stratix IV Devices
On-Chip Termination Support and I/O Termination Schemes
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
On-Chip Parallel Termination with Calibration
Stratix IV devices support on-chip parallel termination with calibration in all banks.
On-chip parallel termination with calibration is only supported for input
configuration of input and bidirectional pins. Output pin configurations do not
support on-chip parallel termination with calibration. Figure 6–20 shows on-chip
parallel termination with calibration. When you use parallel OCT, the VCCIO of the
bank must match the I/O standard of the pin where the parallel OCT is enabled.
The on-chip parallel termination calibration circuit compares the total impedance of
the I/O buffer to the external 50-±1% resistors connected to the
RUP
and
RDN
pins
and dynamically enables or disables the transistors until they match. Calibration
occurs at the end of device configuration. When the calibration circuit finds the
correct impedance, it powers down and stops changing the characteristics of the
drivers. Table 6–7 lists the I/O standards that support on-chip parallel termination
with calibration.
Figure 6–20. On-Chip Parallel Termination with Calibration
Table 6–7. Selectable I/O Standards with On-Chip Parallel Termination with Calibration
I/O Standard
On-Chip Parallel
Termination Setting
(Column I/O) ()
On-Chip Parallel
Termination Setting
(Row I/O) ()
SSTL-2 Class I, II 50 50
SSTL-18 Class I, II 50 50
SSTL-15 Class I, II 50 50
HSTL-18 Class I, II 50 50
HSTL-15 Class I, II 50 50
HSTL-12 Class I, II 50 50
Differential SSTL-2 Class I, II 50 50
Differential SSTL-18 Class I, II 50 50
Differential SSTL-15 Class I, II 50 50
Differential HSTL-18 Class I, II 50 50
Differential HSTL-15 Class I, II 50 50
Differential HSTL-12 Class I, II 50 50
Transmitter Receiver
GND
= 50 Ω
ZO
VCCIO
100 Ω
100 Ω
Stratix IV OCT
VREF
Chapter 6: I/O Features in Stratix IV Devices 6–29
On-Chip Termination Support and I/O Termination Schemes
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
Expanded On-Chip Series Termination with Calibration
OCT calibration circuits always adjust OCT RS to match the external resistors
connected to the
RUP
and
RDN
pin; however, it is possible to achieve OCT RS values
other than the 25- and 50- resistors. Theoretically, if you need a different OCT RS
value, you can change the resistance connected to the
RUP
and
RDN
pins accordingly.
Practically, the OCT RS range that Stratix IV devices support is limited because of
output buffer size and granularity limitations.
The Quartus II software only allows discrete OCT RS calibration settings of 25, 40, 50,
and 60 . You can select the closest discrete value of OCT RS with calibration settings
in the Quartus II software to your system to achieve the closest timing. For example, if
you are using 20- OCT RS with calibration in your system, you can select the 25-
OCT RS with calibration setting in the Quartus II software to achieve the closest
timing.
Table 6–8 lists expanded OCT RS with calibration supported in Stratix IV devices. Use
expanded on-chip series termination with calibration of SSTL and HSTL for
impedance matching to improve signal integrity but do not use it to meet the JEDEC
standard.
Dynamic On-Chip Termination
Stratix IV devices support on and off dynamic termination, both series and parallel,
for a bidirectional I/O in all I/O banks. Figure 6–21 shows the termination schemes
supported in Stratix IV devices. Dynamic parallel termination is enabled only when
the bidirectional I/O acts as a receiver and is disabled when it acts as a driver.
Similarly, dynamic series termination is enabled only when the bidirectional I/O acts
as a driver and is disabled when it acts as a receiver. This feature is useful for
terminating any high-performance bidirectional path because signal integrity is
optimized depending on the direction of the data.
Using dynamic OCT helps save power because device termination is internal instead
of external. Termination only switches on during input operation, thus drawing less
static power.
Table 6–8. Selectable I/O Standards with Expanded On-Chip Series Termination with Calibration
Range
I/O Standard
Expanded OCT RS Range
Row I/O () Column I/O ()
3.3-V LVTTL/LVCMOS 20–60 20–60
2.5-V LVTTL/LVCMOS 20–60 20–60
1.8-V LVTTL/LVCMOS 20–60 20–60
1.5-V LVTTL/LVCMOS 40–60 20–60
1.2-V LVTTL/LVCMOS 40–60 20–60
SSTL-2 20–60 20–60
SSTL-18 20–60 20–60
SSTL-15 40–60 20–60
HSTL-18 20–60 20–60
HSTL-15 40–60 20–60
HSTL-12 40–60 20–60
6–30 Chapter 6: I/O Features in Stratix IV Devices
On-Chip Termination Support and I/O Termination Schemes
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
1When using calibrated input parallel and calibrated output series termination on
bidirectional pins, they must use the same termination value because each I/O pin
can only reference one OCT calibration block. The only exception is when using 50 
parallel OCT and 25 series OCT using the left shift series termination control. For
example, you cannot use calibrated 50 parallel OCT on the input buffer of a
bidirectional pin and calibrated 40 series OCT on the output buffer because these
would require two separate calibration blocks with different
RUP
and
RDN
resistor
values.
fFor more information about tolerance specifications for OCT with calibration, refer to
the DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Figure 6–21. Dynamic Parallel OCT in Stratix IV Devices
Receiver
Stratix IV OCT
VCCIO
GND
Stratix IV OCT
Transmitter
Receiver
Stratix IV OCT
Stratix IV OCT
Transmitter
VCCIO
GND
VCCIO
GND
GND
VCCIO
100 Ω
100 Ω
100 Ω
100 Ω
100 Ω
100 Ω
100
100 Ω
100
100 Ω
100
100 Ω
100
100 Ω
50 50 Ω
50 Ω
50 Ω
50
50 Ω
= 50 Ω
Z
O
= 50 Ω
Z
O
Chapter 6: I/O Features in Stratix IV Devices 6–31
On-Chip Termination Support and I/O Termination Schemes
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
LVDS Input OCT (RD)
Stratix IV devices support OCT for differential LVDS input buffers with a nominal
resistance value of 100 , as shown in Figure 6–22. Differential OCT RD can be
enabled in row I/O banks when both the VCCIO and VCCPD is set to 2.5 V. Column I/O
banks do not support OCT RD. Dedicated clock input pairs
CLK[1,3,8,10][p,n]
,
PLL_L[1,4]_CLK[p,n]
, and
PLL_R[1,4]_CLK[p,n]
on the row I/O banks of Stratix IV
devices do not support RD termination.
fFor more information about differential on-chip termination, refer to the High-Speed
Differential I/O Interfaces and DPA in Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Summary of OCT Assignments
Table 6–9 lists the OCT assignments for the Quartus II software version 9.1 and later.
Figure 6–22. Differential Input OCT
Transmitter Receiver
100 Ω
= 50 Ω
Z
O
= 50 Ω
Z
O
Table 6–9. Summary of OCT Assignments in the Quartus II Software
Assignment Name Value Applies To
Input Termination
Parallel 50 with calibration Input buffers for single-ended and
differential HSTL/SSTL standards
Differential Input buffers for LVDS receivers on
row I/O banks (1)
Output Termination
Series 25 without
calibration
Output buffers for single-ended
LVTTL/LVCMOS and HSTL/SSTL
standards as well as differential
HSTL/SSTL standards
Series 50 without
calibration
Series 25 with calibration
Series 40 with calibration
Series 50 with calibration
Series 60 with calibration
Note to Table 6–9:
(1) You can enable differential OCT RD in row I/O banks when both VCCIO and VCCPD are set to 2.5 V.
6–32 Chapter 6: I/O Features in Stratix IV Devices
OCT Calibration
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
OCT Calibration
Stratix IV devices support calibrated on-chip series termination (RS) and calibrated
on-chip parallel termination (RT) on all I/O pins. You can calibrate the device’s I/O
bank with any of the OCT calibration blocks available in the device provided the
VCCIO of the I/O bank with the pins using calibrated OCT matches the VCCIO of the
I/O bank with the calibration block and its associated
RUP
and
RDN
pins.
OCT Calibration Block Location
Table 6–10 and Table 6–11 list the location of OCT calibration blocks in Stratix IV
devices. For both tables, the following legend applies:
■“Y” indicates I/O banks with OCT calibration block
■”N” indicates I/O banks without OCT calibration block
■“—” indicates I/O banks that are not available in the device
1Table 6–10 and Table 6–11 do not show transceiver banks and transceiver calibration
blocks.
Table 6–10 lists the OCT calibration blocks in Banks 1A through 4C.
Table 6–10. OCT Calibration Block Counts and Placement in Stratix IV Devices (1A through 4C) (Part 1 of 2)
Device Pin Number of
OCT Blocks
Bank
1A 1B 1C 2A 2B 2C 3A 3B 3C 4A 4B 4C
EP4SE230 780 8 Y — N Y — N Y — N Y — N
EP4SE360 780 8 Y—N Y—N Y—N Y—N
1152 8 Y — N Y — N Y N N Y N N
EP4SE530
1152 8 Y — N Y — N Y N N Y N N
1517 10 Y N N Y N N Y N Y Y N N
1760 10 Y N N Y N N Y N Y Y N N
EP4SE820
1152 8 Y — N Y — N Y N N Y N N
1517 10 Y N N Y N N Y N Y Y N N
1760 10 Y N N Y N N Y N Y Y N N
EP4SGX70 780 8 Y — N Y — N Y — N Y — N
EP4SGX110 780 8 Y—N Y—N Y—N Y—N
1152 8 Y — N — — — Y — N Y — N
EP4SGX180
780 8 Y—N Y—N Y—N Y—N
1152 8 Y — N — — — Y N N Y N N
1517 8 Y — N Y — N Y N N Y N N
EP4SGX230
780 8 Y—N Y—N Y—N Y—N
1152 8 Y — N — — — Y N N Y N N
1517 8 Y — N Y — N Y N N Y N N
Chapter 6: I/O Features in Stratix IV Devices 6–33
OCT Calibration
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
Table 6–11 lists the OCT calibration blocks in Banks 5A through 8C.
EP4SGX290
780 8 —————— Y — N Y — N
1152 8 Y — N — — — Y N N Y N N
1517 8 Y — N Y — N Y N N Y N N
1760 8 Y — N Y — N Y N N Y N N
1932 10 Y N N Y — N Y N Y Y N N
EP4SGX360
780 8 —————— Y — N Y — N
1152 8 Y — N — — — Y N N Y N N
1517 8 Y — N Y — N Y N N Y N N
1760 8 Y — N Y — N Y N N Y N N
1932 10 Y N N Y — N Y N Y Y N N
EP4SGX530
1152 8 Y — N — — — Y N Y Y N N
1517 10 Y — N Y — N Y N Y Y N N
1760 10 Y — N Y — N Y N Y Y N N
1932 10 Y — N Y N N Y N Y Y N N
EP4S40G2 1517 8 Y — N Y — N Y N N Y N N
EP4S40G5 1517 10 Y — N Y — N Y N Y Y N N
EP4S100G2 1517 8 Y — N Y — N Y N N Y N N
EP4S100G3 1932 10 Y — N Y N N Y N Y Y N N
EP4S100G4 1932 10 Y — N Y N N Y N Y Y N N
EP4S100G5 1517 10 Y — N Y — N Y N Y Y N N
1932 10 Y — N Y N N Y N Y Y N N
Table 6–10. OCT Calibration Block Counts and Placement in Stratix IV Devices (1A through 4C) (Part 2 of 2)
Device Pin Number of
OCT Blocks
Bank
1A 1B 1C 2A 2B 2C 3A 3B 3C 4A 4B 4C
Table 6–11. OCT Calibration Block Counts and Placement in Stratix IV Devices (5A through 8C) (Part 1 of 2)
Device Pin Number of
OCT Blocks
Bank
5A 5B 5C 6A 6B 6C 7A 7B 7C 8A 8B 8C
EP4SE230 780 8 Y — N Y — N Y — N Y — N
EP4SE360 780 8 Y—N Y—N Y—N Y—N
1152 8 Y — N Y — N Y N N Y N N
EP4SE530
1152 8 Y — N Y — N Y N N Y N N
1517 10 Y N N Y N N Y N N Y N Y
1760 10 Y N N Y N N Y N N Y N Y
EP4SE820
1152 8 Y — N Y — N Y N N Y N N
1517 10 Y N N Y N N Y N N Y N Y
1760 10 Y N N Y N N Y N N Y N Y
EP4SGX70 780 8 —————— Y — N Y — N
6–34 Chapter 6: I/O Features in Stratix IV Devices
OCT Calibration
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Sharing an OCT Calibration Block on Multiple I/O Banks
An OCT calibration block has the same VCCIO as the I/O bank that contains the block.
OCT RS calibration is supported on all I/O banks with different VCCIO voltage
standards, up to the number of available OCT calibration blocks. You can configure
the I/O banks to receive calibration codes from any OCT calibration block with the
same VCCIO. All I/O banks with the same VCCIO can share one OCT calibration block,
even if that particular I/O bank has an OCT calibration block.
EP4SGX110 780 8 —————— Y — N Y — N
1152 8 — — — Y — N Y — N Y — N
EP4SGX180
780 8 —————— Y — N Y — N
1152 8 — — — Y — N Y N N Y Y N
1517 8 Y — N Y — N Y N N Y N N
EP4SGX230
780 8 —————— Y — N Y — N
1152 8 — — — Y — N Y N N Y Y N
1517 8 Y — N Y — N Y N N Y N N
EP4SGX290
780 8 —————— Y — N Y — N
1152 8 — — — Y — N Y N N Y N N
1517 8 Y — N Y — N Y N N Y N N
1760 8 Y — N Y — N Y N N Y N N
1932 10 Y — N Y N N Y N N Y N Y
EP4SGX360
780 8 —————— Y — N Y — N
1152 8 — — — Y — N Y N N Y N N
1517 8 Y — N Y — N Y N N Y N N
1760 8 Y — N Y — N Y N N Y N N
1932 10 Y — N Y N N Y N N Y N Y
EP4SGX530
1152 8 — — — Y — N Y N N Y N Y
1517 10 Y — N Y — N Y N N Y N Y
1760 10 Y — N Y — N Y N N Y N Y
1932 10 Y N N Y — N Y N N Y N Y
EP4S40G2 1517 8 Y — N Y — N Y N N Y N N
EP4S40G5 1517 10 Y — N Y — N Y N N Y N Y
EP4S100G2 1517 8 Y — N Y — N Y N N Y N N
EP4S100G3 1932 10 Y N N Y — N Y N N Y N Y
EP4S100G4 1932 10 Y N N Y — N Y N N Y N Y
EP4S100G5 1517 10 Y — N Y — N Y N N Y N Y
1932 10 Y N N Y — N Y N N Y N Y
Table 6–11. OCT Calibration Block Counts and Placement in Stratix IV Devices (5A through 8C) (Part 2 of 2)
Device Pin Number of
OCT Blocks
Bank
5A 5B 5C 6A 6B 6C 7A 7B 7C 8A 8B 8C
Chapter 6: I/O Features in Stratix IV Devices 6–35
OCT Calibration
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
For example, Figure 6–23 shows a group of I/O banks that has the same VCCIO
voltage. If a group of I/O banks has the same VCCIO voltage, you can use one OCT
calibration block to calibrate the group of I/O banks placed around the periphery.
Because 3B, 4C, 6C, and 7B have the same VCCIO as bank 7A, you can calibrate all four
I/O banks (3B, 4C, 6C, and 7B) with the OCT calibration block (CB7) located in bank
7A. You can enable this by serially shifting out OCT RS calibration codes from the
OCT calibration block located in bank 7A to the I/O banks located around the
periphery.
1I/O banks that do not contain calibration blocks share calibration blocks with I/O
banks that do contain calibration blocks.
Figure 6–23 is a top view of the silicon die that corresponds to a reverse view for flip
chip packages. It is a graphical representation only. This figure does not show
transceiver banks and transceiver calibration blocks.
OCT Calibration Block Modes of Operation
Stratix IV devices support OCT RS and OCT RT on all I/O banks. The calibration can
occur in either power-up or user mode.
Power-Up Mode
In power-up mode, OCT calibration is automatically performed at power up.
Calibration codes are shifted to selected I/O buffers before transitioning to user
mode.
Figure 6–23. Example of Calibrating Multiple I/O Banks with One Shared OCT Calibration Block
Stratix IV
Bank 8A
Bank 8C
Bank 8B
Bank 7B
Bank 7C
Bank 1A
Bank 1C
Bank 1B
Bank 2A
Bank 2B
Bank 2C
Bank 3A
Bank 3C
Bank 3B
Bank 4A
Bank 4B
Bank 4C
Bank 6A
Bank 6C
Bank 6B
Bank 5A
Bank 5B
Bank 5C
Bank 7A CB 7
I/O bank with the same V
CCIO
I/O bank with different V
CCIO
6–36 Chapter 6: I/O Features in Stratix IV Devices
OCT Calibration
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
User Mode
In user mode, the
OCTUSRCLK
,
ENAOCT
,
nCLRUSR
, and
ENASER[9..0]
signals are used to
calibrate and serially transfer calibration codes from each OCT calibration block to
any I/O. Table 6–12 lists the user-controlled calibration block signal names and their
descriptions.
Figure 6–24 shows the flow of the user signal. When
ENAOCT
is 1, all OCT calibration
blocks are in calibration mode; when
ENAOCT
is 0, all OCT calibration blocks are in
serial data transfer mode. The
OCTUSRCLK
clock frequency must be 20 MHz or less.
1You must generate all user signals on the rising edge of
OCTUSRCLK
.
Figure 6–24 does not show transceiver banks and transceiver calibration blocks.
Table 6–12. OCT Calibration Block Ports for User Control
Signal Name Description
OCTUSRCLK
Clock for OCT block.
ENAOCT
Enable OCT Termination (Generated by user IP).
ENASER[9..0]
When
ENOCT
= 0, each signal enables the OCT serializer for the
corresponding OCT calibration block.
When
ENAOCT
= 1, each signal enables OCT calibration for the
corresponding OCT calibration block.
S2PENA_<bank#>
Serial-to-parallel load enable per I/O bank.
nCLRUSR
Clear user.
Figure 6–24. Signals Used for User Mode Calibration
Bank 8A
Bank 8C
Bank 8B
Bank 7B
Bank 7C
Bank 1A
Bank 1C
Bank 1B
Bank 2A
Bank 2B
Bank 2C
Bank 3A
Bank 3C
Bank 3B
Bank 4A
Bank 4B
Bank 4C
Bank 6A
Bank 6C
Bank 6B
Bank 5A
Bank 5B
Bank 5C
Bank 7A
Stratix IV
Core
S2PENA_1C S2PENA_6C
S2PENA_4C
CB0
CB9
CB1
CB2 CB4
CB3
CB5
CB6
CB7
CB8
ENAOCT, nCLRUSR,
OCTUSRCLK,
ENASER[N]
Chapter 6: I/O Features in Stratix IV Devices 6–37
OCT Calibration
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
OCT Calibration
Figure 6–25 shows user mode signal-timing waveforms. To calibrate OCT block[N]
(where N is a calibration block number), you must assert
ENAOCT
one cycle before
asserting
ENASER[N]
. Also,
nCLRUSR
must be set to low for one
OCTUSRCLK
cycle before
the
ENASER[N]
signal is asserted. Assert the
ENASER[N]
signals for 1000
OCTUSRCLK
cycles to perform OCTRS and OCTRT calibration. You can de-assert
ENAOCT
one clock
cycle after the last
ENASER
is de-asserted.
Serial Data Transfer
After you complete calibration, you must serially shift out the 28-bit OCT calibration
codes (14-bit OCT RS and 14-bit OCT RT) from each OCT calibration block to the
corresponding I/O buffers. Only one OCT calibration block can send out the codes at
any time by asserting only one
ENASER[N]
signal at a time. After you de-assert
ENAOCT
,
wait at least one
OCTUSRCLK
cycle to enable any
ENASER[N]
signal to begin serial
transfer. To shift the 28-bit code from the OCT calibration block[N], you must assert
ENASER[N]
for exactly 28
OCTUSRCLK
cycles. Between two consecutive asserted
ENASER
signals, there must be at least one
OCTUSRCLK
cycle gap. (Figure 6–25).
After calibrated codes are shifted in serially to each I/O bank, the calibrated codes
must be converted from serial to parallel format before being used in the I/O buffers.
Figure 6–25 shows the
S2PENA
signals that can be asserted at any time to update the
calibration codes in each I/O bank. All I/O banks that received the codes from the
same OCT calibration block can have
S2PENA
asserted at the same time, or at a
different time, even while another OCT calibration block is calibrating and serially
shifting codes. The
S2PENA
signal is asserted one
OCTUSRCLK
cycle after
ENASER
is
de-asserted for at least 25 ns. You cannot use I/Os for transmitting or receiving data
when their
S2PENA
is asserted for parallel codes transfer.
Figure 6–25. OCT User Mode Signal—Timing Waveform for One OCT Block
Note to Figure 6–25:
(1) ts2p 25 ns.
OCTUSRCLK
nCLRUSR
ENAOCT
ENASER0
Calibration Phase
S2PENA_1A
28
OCTUSRCLK
Cycles
ts2p (1)
1000 OCTUSRCLK Cycles
6–38 Chapter 6: I/O Features in Stratix IV Devices
Termination Schemes for I/O Standards
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Example of Using Multiple OCT Calibration Blocks
Figure 6–26 shows a signal timing waveform for two OCT calibration blocks doing RS
and RT calibration. Calibration blocks can start calibrating at different times by
asserting the
ENASER
signals at different times.
ENAOCT
must remain asserted while any
calibration is ongoing. You must set
nCLRUSR
low for one
OCTUSRCLK
cycle before each
ENASER[N]
signal is asserted. In Figure 6–26, when you set
nCLRUSR
to 0 for the second
time to initialize OCT calibration block 0, this does not affect OCT calibration block 1,
whose calibration is already in progress.
RS Calibration
If only RS calibration is used for an OCT calibration block, its corresponding
ENASER
signal only requires to be asserted for 240
OCTUSRCLK
cycles.
1You must assert the
ENASER
signal for 28
OCTUSRCLK
cycles for serial transfer.
Termination Schemes for I/O Standards
The following sections describe the different termination schemes for the I/O
standards used in Stratix IV devices.
Single-Ended I/O Standards Termination
Voltage-referenced I/O standards require both an input reference voltage, VREF
, and a
termination voltage, VTT. The reference voltage of the receiving device tracks the
termination voltage of the transmitting device.
Figure 6–27 and Figure 6–28 show the details of SSTL and HSTL I/O termination on
Stratix IV devices.
Figure 6–26. OCT User-Mode Signal Timing Waveform for Two OCT Blocks
Notes to Figure 6–26:
(1) ts2p 25 ns.
(2) S2PENA_1A is asserted in Bank 1A for calibration block 0.
(3) S2PENA_2A is asserted in Bank 2A for calibration block 1.
OCTUSRCLK
ENAOCT
nCLRUSR
ENASER0
ENASER1
S2PENA_1A
(2)
S2PENA_2A
(3)
ts2p
(1)
ts2p
(1)
Calibration Phase
1000
CYCLES
OCTUSRCLK
1000
CYCLES
OCTUSRCLK
28
CYCLES
OCTUSRCLK
28
CYCLES
OCTUSRCLK
Chapter 6: I/O Features in Stratix IV Devices 6–39
Termination Schemes for I/O Standards
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
1In Stratix IV devices, you cannot use series and parallel OCT simultaneously. For
more information, refer to “Dynamic On-Chip Termination” on page 6–29.
Figure 6–27. SSTL I/O Standard Termination
SSTL Class I
SSTL Class II
External
On-Board
Termination
OCT
Transmit
OCT
Receive
OCT
in Bi-
Directional
Pins
VTT
50 Ω
25 Ω
50 Ω
VTT
50 Ω
25 Ω
50 Ω
VTT
50 Ω
Transmitter
Transmitter
Receiver
Receiver
VTT
50 Ω
50
8
50 Ω
Transmitter Receiver
Stratix IV
Series OCT 50 Ω
VTT
50 Ω
50 Ω
VTT
50 Ω
Transmitter Receiver
25 Ω
Stratix IV
Series OCT
VCCIO
100 Ω
25 Ω
50 Ω
Transmitter Receiver
Stratix IV
Parallel OCT
100 Ω
V
CCIO
100 Ω
25 Ω
50 8
Transmitter Receiver
Stratix IV
Parallel OCT
100 Ω
VTT
50 Ω
VCCIO
100 Ω
50 Ω
Stratix IV
100 Ω
VCCIO
100 Ω
100 Ω
Stratix IV
VREF
VREF
VREF
V
REF
VREF
VREF
VREF
Termination
Series OCT
50 Ω
Series
OCT 50 Ω
VCCIO
100 Ω
50 Ω
Stratix IV
100 Ω
VCCIO
100 Ω
100 Ω
Stratix IV
Series OCT
25 Ω
Series
OCT 25 Ω
6–40 Chapter 6: I/O Features in Stratix IV Devices
Termination Schemes for I/O Standards
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Figure 6–28. HSTL I/O Standard Termination
HSTL Class I HSTL Class II
External
On-Board
Termination
OCT
Transmit
OCT
Receive
OCT
in Bi-
Directional
Pins
VTT
50 Ω
50 Ω
VTT
50 Ω
50 Ω
VTT
50 Ω
Transmitter Transmitter
Receiver Receiver
VTT
50 Ω
50 Ω
Transmitter Receiver
VTT
50 Ω
50 Ω
VTT
50 Ω
Transmitter Receiver
VCCIO
100 Ω
50 Ω
Transmitter Receiver
Stratix IV
Parallel OCT
100 Ω
VCCIO
100 Ω
50 Ω
Transmitter Receiver
Stratix IV
Parallel OCT
100 Ω
VTT
50 Ω
VCCIO
100 Ω
50 Ω
Stratix IV
100 Ω
VCCIO
100 Ω
100 Ω
Stratix IV
Stratix IV
Series OCT
50 Ω
Stratix IV
Series OCT 25 Ω
VREF
VREF
VREF
VREF
VREF
VREF
Termination
Series OCT
50 Ω
Series
OCT 50 Ω
VCCIO
100 Ω
50 8
Stratix IV
100 Ω
VCCIO
100 Ω
100 Ω
Stratix IV
Series OCT
25 Ω
Series
OCT 25 Ω
Chapter 6: I/O Features in Stratix IV Devices 6–41
Termination Schemes for I/O Standards
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
Differential I/O Standards Termination
Stratix IV devices support differential SSTL-18 and SSTL-2, differential HSTL-18,
HSTL-15, HSTL-12, LVDS, LVPECL, RSDS, and mini-LVDS. Figure 6–29 through
Figure 6–35 show the details of various differential I/O terminations on these devices.
1Differential HSTL and SSTL outputs are not true differential outputs. They use two
single-ended outputs with the second output programmed as inverted.
Figure 6–29. Differential SSTL I/O Standard Termination
Differential SSTL Class I Differential SSTL Class II
External
On-Board
Termination
OCT
Transmitter Receiver
50 Ω
50 Ω50 Ω
50 Ω
VTT VTT
25 Ω
25 Ω
Transmitter Receiver
50 Ω
50 Ω50 Ω
50 Ω
VTT VTT
25 Ω
25 Ω
50 Ω50 Ω
VTT VTT
50 Ω
50 Ω
Termination
Transmitter Receiver
Z0= 50 Ω
Z0= 50 Ω
100 Ω
100 Ω
100 Ω
100 Ω
VCCIO
VCCIO
25 Ω
Series OCT
GND
GND
VTT
VTT
Differential SSTL Class II
Transmitter Receiver
Z0= 50 Ω
Z0= 50 Ω
100 Ω
100 Ω
100 Ω
100 Ω
VCCIO
VCCIO
50 Ω
Series OCT
GND
GND
Differential SSTL Class I
6–42 Chapter 6: I/O Features in Stratix IV Devices
Termination Schemes for I/O Standards
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Figure 6–30. Differential HSTL I/O Standard Termination
Differential HSTL Class I Differential HSTL Class II
External
On-Board
Termination
OCT
Transmitter Receiver
50 Ω
50 Ω50 Ω
50 Ω
VTT VTT
Transmitter Receiver
50 Ω
50 Ω50 Ω
50 Ω
VTT VTT
50 Ω50 Ω
VTT
VTT
Termination
Transmitter Receiver
Z0= 50 Ω
Z0= 50 Ω
100 Ω
100 Ω
100 Ω
100 Ω
VCCIO
VCCIO
50 Ω
Series OCT
GND
GND
Differential HSTL Class I
50 Ω
50 Ω
Transmitter Receiver
Z0= 50 Ω
Z0= 50 Ω
100 Ω
100 Ω
100 Ω
100 Ω
VCCIO
VCCIO
25 Ω
Series OCT
GND
GND
VTT
VTT
Differential HSTL Class II
Chapter 6: I/O Features in Stratix IV Devices 6–43
Termination Schemes for I/O Standards
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
LVDS
The LVDS I/O standard is a differential high-speed, low-voltage swing, low-power,
general-purpose I/O interface standard. In Stratix IV devices, the LVDS I/O standard
requires a 2.5-V VCCIO level. The LVDS input buffer requires 2.5-V VCCPD. Use this
standard in applications requiring high-bandwidth data transfer, such as backplane
drivers and clock distribution. LVDS requires a 100- termination resistor between
the two signals at the input buffer. Stratix IV devices provide an optional 100-
differential termination resistor in the device using on-chip differential termination.
Figure 6–31 shows LVDS termination. The on-chip differential resistor is only
available in the row I/O banks.
Figure 6–31. LVDS I/O Standard Termination (1)
Notes to Figure 6–31:
(1) For LVDS output with a three-resistor network, the RS and RP values are 120 and 170 , respectively. For LVDS output with a one-resistor network, the
RP value is 120 .
(2) Side I/O banks support true LVDS output buffers.
(3) Column and side I/O banks support LVDS_E_1R and LVDS_E_3R I/O standards using two single-ended output buffers.
Differential Outputs Differential Inputs
100 Ω
Single-Ended Outputs Differential Inputs
100 Ω
Rp
External Resistor
Single-Ended Outputs Differential Inputs
100 Ω
Rp
External Resistor
Rs
Rs
Stratix IV OCT
Stratix IV OCT
Stratix IV OCT
Differential Outputs Differential Inputs
100 Ω
External On-Board
Termination
OCT Receive
(True LVDS
Output)
(2)
Termination LVDS
50 Ω
50 Ω
50 Ω
50 Ω
50 Ω
50 Ω
50 Ω
50 Ω
OCT Receive
(Single-Ended
LVDS Output
with One-Resistor
Network,
LVDS_E_1R)
(3)
OCT Receive
(Single-Ended
LVDS Output
with Three-Resistor
Network,
LVDS_E_3R)
(3)
≤1 inch
≤1 inch
6–44 Chapter 6: I/O Features in Stratix IV Devices
Termination Schemes for I/O Standards
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Differential LVPECL
In Stratix IV devices, the LVPECL I/O standard is supported on input clock pins on
column and row I/O banks. LVPECL output operation is not supported in Stratix IV
devices. LVDS input buffers are used to support LVPECL input operation. AC
coupling is required when the LVPECL common-mode voltage of the output buffer is
higher than the LVPECL input common-mode voltage. Figure 6–32 shows the
AC-coupled termination scheme. The 50- resistors used at the receiver end are
external to the device.
DC-coupled LVPECL is supported if the LVPECL output common mode voltage is
within the Stratix IV LVPECL input buffer specification (Figure 6–33).
Figure 6–32. LVPECL AC-Coupled Termination (1)
Note to Figure 6–32:
(1) The LVPECL AC-coupled termination is applicable only when you use an Altera FPGA LVPECL transmitter.
Figure 6–33. LVPECL DC-Coupled Termination (1)
Note to Figure 6–33:
(1) The LVPECL DC-coupled termination is applicable only when you use an Altera FPGA LVPECL transmitter.
Altera FPGA
LVPECL Output Buffer Stratix IV LVPECL
Input Buffer
50 Ω
= 50 Ω
= 50 Ω
0.1 μF
0.1 μF
50 Ω
VICM
ZO
ZO
Altera FPGA
LVPECL Output Buffer
Stratix IV LVPECL
Input Buffer
100 Ω
= 50 Ω
ZO
= 50 Ω
ZO
Chapter 6: I/O Features in Stratix IV Devices 6–45
Termination Schemes for I/O Standards
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
RSDS
Stratix IV devices support the RSDS output standard with data rates up to 230 Mbps
using LVDS output buffer types. For transmitters, use two single-ended output
buffers with the external one- or three-resistor networks in the column I/O bank, as
shown in Figure 6–34. The one-resistor topology is for data rates up to 200 Mbps. The
three-resistor topology is for data rates above 200 Mbps. The row I/O banks support
RSDS output using true LVDS output buffers without an external resistor network.
A resistor network is required to attenuate the LVDS output-voltage swing to meet
RSDS specifications. You can modify the three-resistor network values to reduce
power or improve noise margin. The resistor values chosen must satisfy Equation 6–1.
1Altera recommends performing additional simulations using IBIS models to validate
that custom resistor values meet the RSDS requirements.
fFor more information about the RSDS I/O standard, refer to the RSDS Specification
from the National Semiconductor website at www.national.com.
Figure 6–34. RSDS I/O Standard Termination (1)
Note to Figure 6–34:
(1) The RS and RP values are pending characterization.
50
Ω
50
Ω
RS
RS
RP
Transmitter Receiver
≤1 inch
50
Ω
50
Ω
RP
Transmitter
≤1 inch
50
Ω
50
Ω
100
Ω
RP
Transmitter Receiver
≤1 inch
50
Ω
50
Ω
RS
RS
RP
Transmitter Receiver
1 inch
Termination
External
On-Board
Termination
OCT
One-Resistor Network (RSDS_E_1R) Three-Resistor Network (RSDS_E_3R)
≤
100
Ω
Receiver
Stratix IV OCT Stratix IV OCT
Ω
100
Ω
100
Equation 6–1.
Rs
Rp
2
-------
Rs
Rp
2
-------
+
-------------------- 50=
6–46 Chapter 6: I/O Features in Stratix IV Devices
Design Considerations
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Mini-LVDS
Stratix IV devices support the mini-LVDS output standard with data rates up to
340 Mbps using LVDS output buffer types. For transmitters, use two single-ended
output buffers with external one- or three-resistor networks, as shown in Figure 6–35.
The one-resistor topology is for data rates up to 200 Mbps. The three-resistor topology
is for data rates above 200 Mbps. The row I/O banks support mini-LVDS output using
true LVDS output buffers without an external resistor network.
A resistor network is required to attenuate the LVDS output voltage swing to meet the
mini-LVDS specifications. You can modify the three-resistor network values to reduce
power or improve noise margin. The resistor values chosen must satisfy Equation 6–1
on page 6–45.
1Altera recommends that you perform additional simulations using IBIS models to
validate that custom resistor values meet the RSDS requirements.
fFor more information about the mini-LVDS I/O standard, see the mini-LVDS
Specification from the Texas Instruments website at www.ti.com.
Design Considerations
Although Stratix IV devices feature various I/O capabilities for high-performance
and high-speed system designs, there are several other design considerations that
require your attention to ensure the success of your designs.
I/O Bank Restrictions
Each I/O bank can simultaneously support multiple I/O standards. The following
sections provide guidelines for mixing non-voltage-referenced and voltage-referenced
I/O standards in Stratix IV devices.
Figure 6–35. Mini-LVDS I/O Standard Termination (1)
Note to Figure 6–35:
(1) The RS and RP values are pending characterization.
50
Ω
50
Ω
RS
RS
RP
Transmitter Receiver
≤1 inch
50
Ω
RP
Transmitter Receiver
≤1 inch
50
Ω
50
Ω
RP
Transmitter Receiver
≤1 inch
50
Ω
50
Ω
RS
RS
RP
Transmitter Receiver
1 inch
Termination
External
On-Board
Termination
OCT
One-Resistor Network (mini-LVDS_E_1R) Three-Resistor Network (mini-LVDS_E_3R)
≤
50
Ω
100
Ω
Stratix IV OCT Stratix IV OCT
Ω
100
Ω
100
100
Ω
Chapter 6: I/O Features in Stratix IV Devices 6–47
Design Considerations
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
Non-Voltage-Referenced Standards
Each I/O bank of a Stratix IV device has its own
VCCIO
pins and supports only one
VCCIO, either 1.2, 1.5, 1.8, 2.5, or 3.0 V. An I/O bank can simultaneously support any
number of input signals with different I/O standard assignments if it meets the VCCIO
and VCCPD requirement, as shown in Table 6–2 on page 6–3.
For output signals, a single I/O bank supports non-voltage-referenced output signals
that are driving at the same voltage as VCCIO. Because an I/O bank can only have one
VCCIO value, it can only drive out that one value for non-voltage-referenced signals.
For example, an I/O bank with a 2.5-V VCCIO setting can support 2.5-V standard
inputs and outputs as well as 3.0-V LVCMOS inputs (but not output or bidirectional
pins).
Voltage-Referenced Standards
To accommodate voltage-referenced I/O standards, each Stratix IV device’s I/O bank
supports multiple
VREF
pins feeding a common VREF bus. The number of available
VREF
pins increases as device density increases. If these pins are not used as
VREF
pins,
they cannot be used as generic I/O pins and must be tied to VCCIO or GND. Each bank
can only have a single VCCIO voltage level and a single VREF voltage level at a given
time.
An I/O bank featuring single-ended or differential standards can support
voltage-referenced standards if all voltage-referenced standards use the same VREF
setting.
For performance reasons, voltage-referenced input standards use their own VCCPD
level as the power source. This feature allows you to place voltage-referenced input
signals in an I/O bank with a VCCIO of 2.5 V or below. For example, you can place
HSTL-15 input pins in an I/O bank with 2.5-V VCCIO. However, the voltage-referenced
input with parallel OCT enabled requires the VCCIO of the I/O bank to match the
voltage of the input standard.
Voltage-referenced bidirectional and output signals must be the same as the I/O
bank’s VCCIO voltage. For example, you can only place SSTL-2 output pins in an I/O
bank with a 2.5-V VCCIO.
Mixing Voltage-Referenced and Non-Voltage-Referenced Standards
An I/O bank can support both voltage-referenced and non-voltage-referenced pins by
applying each of the rule sets individually. For example, an I/O bank can support
SSTL-18 inputs and 1.8-V inputs and outputs with a 1.8-V VCCIO and a 0.9-V VREF
.
Similarly, an I/O bank can support 1.5-V standards, 1.8-V inputs (but not outputs),
and HSTL and HSTL-15 I/O standards with a 1.5-V VCCIO and 0.75-V VREF
.
6–48 Chapter 6: I/O Features in Stratix IV Devices
Design Considerations
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Document Revision History
Table 6–13 lists the revision history for this chapter.
Table 6–13. Document Revision History (Part 1 of 2)
Date Version Changes
September 2012 3.4
■Updated the “Programmable Slew Rate Control” section to close FB #68385.
■Updated Figure 6–17 to close FB #57979.
December 2011 3.3 Updated Figure 6–2 and Figure 6–17.
February 2011 3.2
■Updated the “Modular I/O Banks”, “On-Chip Termination Support and I/O Termination
Schemes”, “Dynamic On-Chip Termination”, and “Programmable Pull-Up Resistor”
sections.
■Updated Figure 6–17, Figure 6–32, and Figure 6–33.
■Applied new template.
■Minor text edits.
March 2010 3.1
■Updated Table 6–2 and Table 6–5.
■Updated Figure 6–18, Figure 6–19, Figure 6–27, Figure 6–28, and Figure 6–31.
■Added the “Summary of OCT Assignments” section.
■Added a note to the “Sharing an OCT Calibration Block on Multiple I/O Banks” section.
■Updated the “OCT Calibration” section.
■Minor text edits.
November 2009 3.0
■Updated Table 6–2, Table 6–4, Table 6–6, Table 6–9, and Table 6–10.
■Updated Figure 6–1, Figure 6–2, Figure 6–4, Figure 6–5, Figure 6–6, Figure 6–8,
Figure 6–9, Figure 6–10, Figure 6–11, Figure 6–12, Figure 6–13, and Figure 6–31.
■Added Table 6–8.
■Added Figure 6–7, Figure 6–14, Figure 6–15, and Figure 6–16.
■Added “Left-Shift Series Termination Control” and “Expanded On-Chip Series Termination
with Calibration” sections.
■Updated “MultiVolt I/O Interface”, “RSDS”, “Mini-LVDS”, and “Non-Voltage-Referenced
Standards” sections.
■Deleted Figure 6-5: Number of I/Os in Each Bank in EP4SE290 and EP4SE360 in the
1517-Pin FineLine BGA Package.
■Minor text edits.
June 2009 2.3
■Added introductory sentences to improve search ability.
■Removed the Conclusion section.
April 2009 2.2
■Updated Figure 6–2.
■Updated Table 6–8 and Table 6–9.
■Deleted Figure 6-14.
March 2009 2.1
■Updated Table 6–1, Table 6–2,Table 6–3, Table 6–4, Table 6–6, Table 6–8, and Table 6–9.
■Updated Figure 6–2, Figure 6–7, Figure 6–8, Figure 6–9, Figure 6–10, Figure 6–11, and
Figure 6–12.
■Added Figure 6–14.
■Removed Equation 6–2 and “Referenced Documents” section.
Chapter 6: I/O Features in Stratix IV Devices 6–49
Design Considerations
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
November 2008 2.0
■Updated “Modular I/O Banks” on page 6–7.
■Updated Figure 6–3 and Figure 6–21.
■Made minor editorial changes.
May 2008 1.0 Initial release.
Table 6–13. Document Revision History (Part 2 of 2)
Date Version Changes
6–50 Chapter 6: I/O Features in Stratix IV Devices
Design Considerations
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
SIV51007-3.2
© 2011 Altera Corporation. All rights reserved. ALTERA, ARRIA, CYCLONE, HARDCOPY, MAX, MEGACORE, NIOS, QUARTUS and STRATIX words and logos
are trademarks of Altera Corporation and registered in the U.S. Patent and Trademark Office and in other countries. All other words and logos identified as
trademarks or service marks are the property of their respective holders as described at www.altera.com/common/legal.html. Altera warrants performance of its
semiconductor products to current specifications in accordance with Altera's standard warranty, but reserves the right to make changes to any products and
services at any time without notice. Altera assumes no responsibility or liability arising out of the application or use of any information, product, or service
described herein except as expressly agreed to in writing by Altera. Altera customers are advised to obtain the latest version of device specifications before relying
on any published information and before placing orders for products or services.
Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
February 2011
Feedback Subscribe
ISO
9001:2008
Registered
7. External Memory Interfaces in
Stratix IV Devices
This chapter describes external memory interfaces available with the StratixIV
device family and that family’s silicon capability to support external memory
interfaces. To support the level of system bandwidth achievable with Altera
Stratix IV FPGAs, the devices provide an efficient architecture to quickly and easily fit
wide external memory interfaces within their small modular I/O bank structure. The
I/Os are designed to provide high-performance support for existing and emerging
external double data rate (DDR) memory standards, such as DDR3, DDR2, DDR
SDRAM, QDR II+, QDR II SRAM, and RLDRAM II.
Stratix IV I/O elements provide easy-to-use built-in functionality required for a rapid
and robust implementation with features such as dynamic calibrated on-chip
termination (OCT), trace mismatch compensation, read- and write-leveling circuit for
DDR3 SDRAM interfaces, half data rate (HDR) blocks, and 4- to 36-bit programmable
DQ group widths.
The high-performance memory interface solution is backed-up by a self-calibrating
megafunction (ALTMEMPHY), optimized to take advantage of the Stratix IV I/O
structure and the TimeQuest Timing Analyzer, which completes the picture by
providing the total solution for the highest reliable frequency of operation across
process, voltage, and temperature (PVT) variations.
This chapter contains the following sections:
■“Memory Interfaces Pin Support” on page 7–3
■“Stratix IV External Memory Interface Features” on page 7–29
fFor more information about external memory system performance specifications,
board design guidelines, timing analysis, simulation, and debugging information,
refer to the External Memory Interface Handbook.
February 2011
SIV51007-3.2
7–2 Chapter 7: External Memory Interfaces in Stratix IV Devices
Stratix IV Device Handbook February 2011 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Figure 7–1 shows an overview of the memory interface data path that uses all the
Stratix IV I/O element (IOE) features.
Memory interfaces use Stratix IV device features such as delay-locked loops (DLLs),
dynamic OCT control, read- and write-leveling circuitry, and I/O features such as
OCT, programmable input delay chains, programmable output delay, slew rate
adjustment, and programmable drive strength.
fFor more information about I/O features, refer to the I/O Features in Stratix IV Devices
chapter.
The ALTMEMPHY megafunction instantiates a phase-locked loop (PLL) and PLL
reconfiguration logic to adjust the phase shift based on VT variation. vs
fFor more information about the Stratix IV PLL, refer to the Clock Networks and PLLs in
Stratix IV Devices chapter. For more information about the ALTMEMPHY
megafunction, refer to the External Memory PHY Interface (ALTMEMPHY) (nonAFI)
Megafunction User Guide.
Figure 7–1. External Memory Interface Data Path Overview (1), (2)
Notes to Figure 7–1:
(1) You can bypass each register block.
(2) The blocks used for each memory interface may differ slightly. The shaded blocks are part of the Stratix IV IOE.
(3) These signals may be bidirectional or unidirectional, depending on the memory standard. When bidirectional, the signal is active during both read
and write operations.
DDR Output
and Output
Enable
Registers
Memory
Stratix IV FPGA
DLL
DDR Input
Registers
Alignment &
Synchronization
Registers
Half Data Rate
Output Registers
Clock Management & Reset
4n 2n
n
n
2n
4n
DPRAM
(2)
DQ (Read) (3)
DQ (Write) (3)
DQS Logic
Block DQS (Read) (3)
Half Data Rate
Input Registers
2n
Half Data Rate
Output Registers
42
DQS (Write) (3)
Resynchronization Clock
Alignment Clock
DQS Write Clock
Half-Rate
Resynchronization
Clock
Half-Rate Clock
Alignment
Registers
Alignment
Registers
2n
2
DQ Write Clock
DQS Enable
Circuit
Postamble
Control
Circuit
Postamble Enable
Postamble Clock
DDR Output
and Output
Enable
Registers
Chapter 7: External Memory Interfaces in Stratix IV Devices 7–3
Memory Interfaces Pin Support
February 2011 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
Memory Interfaces Pin Support
A typical memory interface requires data (D, Q, or DQ), data strobe (DQS/CQ and
DQSn/CQn), address, command, and clock pins. Some memory interfaces use data
mask (DM, BWSn, or NWSn) pins to enable write masking and QVLD pins to indicate
that the read data is ready to be captured. This section describes how Stratix IV
devices support all these different pins.
1If you have more than one clock pair, you must place them in the same DQ group. For
example, if you have two clock pairs, you must place both of them in the same ×4
DQS group.
fFor more information about pin connections, refer to the Stratix IV GX and Stratix IV E
Device Family Pin Connection Guidelines.
fFor more information about pin planning and pin connections between a Stratix IV
device and an external memory device, refer to the External Memory Interface
Handbook.
DDR3, DDR2, DDR SDRAM, and RLDRAM II devices use the CK and CK# signals to
capture the address and command signals. Generate these signals to mimic the
write-data strobe using Stratix IV DDR I/O registers (DDIOs) to ensure that the
timing relationships between the CK/CK# and DQS signals (tDQSS, tDSS, and tDSH in
DDR3, DDR2, and DDR SDRAM devices or tCKDK in RLDRAM II devices) are met.
QDR II+ and QDR II SRAM devices use the same clock (K/K#) to capture write data,
address, and command signals.
Memory clock pins in Stratix IV devices are generated using a DDIO register going to
differential output pins (refer to Figure 7–2), marked in the pin table with
DIFFOUT
,
DIFFIO_TX
, or
DIFFIO_RX
prefixes.
7–4 Chapter 7: External Memory Interfaces in Stratix IV Devices
Memory Interfaces Pin Support
Stratix IV Device Handbook February 2011 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
fFor more information about which pins to use for memory clock pins, refer to the
External Memory Interface Handbook.
Stratix IV devices offer differential input buffers for differential read-data strobe and
clock operations. In addition, Stratix IV devices also provide an independent DQS
logic block for each CQn pin for complementary read-data strobe and clock
operations. In the Stratix IV pin tables, the differential DQS pin pairs are denoted as
DQS and DQSn pins, while the complementary CQ signals are denoted as CQ and
CQn pins. DQSn and CQn pins are marked separately in the pin table. Each CQn pin
connects to a DQS logic block and the shifted CQn signals go to the negative-edge
input registers in the DQ IOE registers.
1Use differential DQS signaling for DDR2 SDRAM interfaces running at or above
333 MHz.
DQ pins can be bidirectional signals, as in DDR3, DDR2, and DDR SDRAM, and
RLDRAM II common I/O (CIO) interfaces, or unidirectional signals, as in QDR II+,
QDR II SRAM, and RLDRAM II separate I/O (SIO) devices. Connect the
unidirectional read-data signals to Stratix IV DQ pins and the unidirectional
write-data signals to a different DQS/DQ group than the read DQS/DQ group.
Furthermore, the write clocks must be assigned to the DQS/DQSn pins associated to
this write DQS/DQ group. Do not use the CQ/CQn pin-pair for write clocks.
1Using a DQS/DQ group for the write-data signals minimizes output skew, allows
access to the write-leveling circuitry (for DDR3 SDRAM interfaces), and allows
vertical migration. These pins also have access to deskewing circuitry (using
programmable delay chains) that can compensate for delay mismatch between signals
on the bus.
Figure 7–2. Memory Clock Generation
Notes to Figure 7–2:
(1) For pin location requirements,refer to the External Memory Interface Handbook.
(2) The mem_clk[0] and mem_clk_n[0] pins for DDR3, DDR2, and DDR SDRAM interfaces use the I/O input buffer for feedback required by
the ALTMEMPHY megafunction for tracking; therefore, use bidirectional I/O buffers for these pins. For memory interfaces using a differential DQS
input, the input feedback buffer is configured as differential input. For memory interfaces using a single-ended DQS input, the input buffer is
configured as a single-ended input. Using a single-ended input feedback buffer requires that I/O standard’s VREF voltage is provided to that I/O
bank’s VREF pins.
(3) To minimize jitter, regional clock networks are required for memory output clock generation.
mem_clk
(2)
QD
QD
System Clock
(3)
FPGA LEs I/O Elements
VCC
mem_clk_n
(2
)
1
0
Chapter 7: External Memory Interfaces in Stratix IV Devices 7–5
Memory Interfaces Pin Support
February 2011 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
The DQS and DQ pin locations are fixed in the pin table. Memory interface circuitry is
available in every Stratix IV I/O bank that does not support transceivers. All the
memory interface pins support the I/O standards required to support DDR3, DDR2,
DDR SDRAM, QDR II+, QDR II SRAM, and RLDRAM II devices.
The Stratix IV device family supports DQS and DQ signals with DQ bus modes of ×4,
×8/×9, ×16/×18, or ×32/×36, although not all devices support DQS bus mode
×32/×36. When any of these pins are not used for memory interfacing, you can use
them as user I/Os. In addition, you can use any DQSn or CQn pins not used for
clocking as DQ (data) pins. Table 7–1 lists pin support per DQS/DQ bus mode,
including the DQS/CQ and DQSn/CQn pin pair.
Table 7–2 lists the number of DQS/DQ groups available per side in each Stratix IV
device. For a more detailed listing of the number of DQS/DQ groups available per
bank in each Stratix IV device, see Figure 7–3 through Figure 7–19. These figures
represent the die-top view of the Stratix IV device.
Table 7–1. Stratix IV DQS/DQ Bus Mode Pins
Mode DQSn Support CQn Support Parity or DM
(Optional)
QVLD
(Optional) (1)
Typical
Number of
Data Pins
per Group
Maximum
Number of
Data Pins
per Group (2)
×4 Yes No No (6) No 4 5
×8/×9 (3) Yes Yes Yes Yes 8 or 9 11
×16/×18 (4) Yes Yes Yes Yes 16 or 18 23
×32/×36 (5) Yes Yes Yes Yes 32 or 36 47
×32/×36 (7) Yes Yes No (8) Yes 32 or 36 39
Notes to Table 7–1:
(1) The QVLD pin is not used in the ALTMEMPHY megafunction.
(2) This represents the maximum number of DQ pins (including parity, data mask, and QVLD pins) connected to the DQS bus network with
single-ended DQS signaling. When you use differential or complementary DQS signaling, the maximum number of data per group decreases
by one. This number may vary per DQS/DQ group in a particular device. Check the pin table for the exact number per group. For DDR3, DDR2,
and DDR interfaces, the number of pins is further reduced for an interface larger than ×8 due to the need of one DQS pin for each ×8/×9 group
that is used to form the x16/×18 and ×32/×36 groups.
(3) Two ×4 DQS/DQ groups are stitched to make a ×8/×9 group so there are a total of 12 pins in this group.
(4) Four ×4 DQS/DQ groups are stitched to make a ×16/×18 group.
(5) Eight ×4 DQS/DQ groups are stitched to make a ×32/×36 group.
(6) The DM pin can be supported if differential DQS is not used and the group does not have additional signals.
(7) These ×32/×36 DQS/DQ groups are available in EP4SGX290, EP4SGX360, and EP4SGX530 devices in 1152- and 1517-pin FineLine BGA
packages. There are 40 pins in each of these DQS/DQ groups.
(8) There are 40 pins in each of these DQS/DQ groups. The BWSn pins cannot be placed within the same DQS/DQ group as the write data pins
because of insufficient pins available.
Table 7–2. Number of DQS/DQ Groups in Stratix IV Devices per Side (Part 1 of 3) (1)
Device Package Side ×4 (2) ×8/×9 ×16/×18 ×32/×36 (3) Refer to:
EP4SGX70
EP4SGX110
EP4SGX180
EP4SGX230
780-pin
FineLine BGA
Left 14 6 2 0
Figure 7–3
Top/Bottom 17 8 2 0
Right 0 0 0 0
EP4SGX290
EP4SGX360
780-pin
FineLine BGA
Left/Right 0 0 0 0 Figure 7–5
Top/Bottom 18 8 2 0
7–6 Chapter 7: External Memory Interfaces in Stratix IV Devices
Memory Interfaces Pin Support
Stratix IV Device Handbook February 2011 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
EP4SE230
EP4SE360
780-pin
FineLine BGA
Left/Right 14 6 2 0 Figure 7–4
Top/Bottom 17 8 2 0
EP4SGX110
1152-pin
FineLine BGA
(with 16
transceivers)
Right/Left 7 3 1 0
Figure 7–6
Top/Bottom 17 8 2 0
EP4SGX70
EP4SGX110
1152-pin
FineLine BGA
(with 24
transceivers)
Right/Left 14 6 2 0
Figure 7–7
Top/Bottom 17 8 2 0
EP4SGX180
EP4SGX230
1152-pin
FineLine BGA
Right/Left 13 6 2 0 Figure 7–8
Top/Bottom 26 12 4 0
EP4SGX290
EP4SGX360
EP4SGX530
1152-pin
FineLine BGA
Right/Left 13 6 2 0
Figure 7–9
Top/Bottom 26 12 4 2 (4)
EP4SE360
EP4SE530
EP4SE820
1152-pin
FineLine BGA All sides 26 12 4 0 Figure 7–10
EP4SGX180
EP4SGX230
1517-pin
FineLine BGA All sides 26 12 4 0 Figure 7–11
EP4SGX290
EP4SGX360
EP4SGX530
1517-pin
FineLine BGA
Right/Left 26 12 4 0
Figure 7–12
Top/Bottom 26 12 4 2 (4)
EP4SE530
EP4SE820
1517-pin
FineLine BGA
Right/Left 34 16 6 0 Figure 7–13
Top/Bottom 38 18 8 4
EP4S40G2
EP4S40G5
EP4S100G2
EP4S100G5
1517-pin
FineLine BGA
Left 12 3 1 0
Figure 7–14
Top/Bottom 26 12 4 0
Right 11 4 1 0
EP4SGX290
EP4SGX360
EP4SGX530
1760-pin
FineLine BGA
Right/Left 26 12 4 0
Figure 7–15
Top/Bottom 38 18 8 4
EP4SE530 1760-pin
FineLine BGA
Right/Left 34 16 6 0 Figure 7–16
Top/Bottom 38 18 8 4
EP4SE820 1760-pin
FineLine BGA
Right/Left 40 18 6 0 Figure 7–17
Top/Bottom 44 22 10 4
EP4SGX290
EP4SGX360
EP4SGX530
1932-pin
FineLine BGA
Right/Left 29 13 4 0
Figure 7–18
Top/Bottom 38 18 8 4
Table 7–2. Number of DQS/DQ Groups in Stratix IV Devices per Side (Part 2 of 3) (1)
Device Package Side ×4 (2) ×8/×9 ×16/×18 ×32/×36 (3) Refer to:
Chapter 7: External Memory Interfaces in Stratix IV Devices 7–7
Memory Interfaces Pin Support
February 2011 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
EP4S100G3
EP4S100G4
EP4S100G5
1932-pin
FineLine BGA
Left 8 2 0 0
Figure 7–19Top/Bottom 38 18 8 4
Right 7 1 0 0
Notes to Table 7–2:
(1) These numbers are preliminary until the devices are available.
(2) Some of the ×4 groups may use RUP and RDN pins. You cannot use these groups if you use the Stratix IV calibrated OCT feature.
(3) To interface with a ×36 QDR II+/QDR II SRAM device in a Stratix IV FPGA that does not support the ×32/×36 DQS/DQ group, refer to “Combining
×16/×18 DQS/DQ Groups for a ×36 QDR II+/QDR II SRAM Interface” on page 7–26.
(4) These ×32/×36 DQS/DQ groups have 40 pins instead of 48 pins per group. BWSn pins cannot be placed within the same DQS/DQ group as the
write data pins because of insufficient pins available.
Table 7–2. Number of DQS/DQ Groups in Stratix IV Devices per Side (Part 3 of 3) (1)
Device Package Side ×4 (2) ×8/×9 ×16/×18 ×32/×36 (3) Refer to:
7–8 Chapter 7: External Memory Interfaces in Stratix IV Devices
Memory Interfaces Pin Support
Stratix IV Device Handbook February 2011 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Figure 7–3. Number of DQS/DQ Groups per Bank in EP4SGX70, EP4SGX110, EP4SGX180, and EP4SGX230 Devices in the
780-Pin FineLine BGA Package (1), (2), (3), (4). (5)
Notes to Figure 7–3:
(1) These numbers are preliminary until the devices are available.
(2) EP4SGX70, EP4SGX110, EP4SGX180, and EP4SGX230 devices do not support ×32/×36 mode. To interface with a ×36 QDR II+/QDR II SRAM
device, refer to “Combining ×16/×18 DQS/DQ Groups for a ×36 QDR II+/QDR II SRAM Interface” on page 7–26.
(3) You can also use DQS/DQSn pins in some of the ×4 groups as RUP and RDN pins, but you cannot use a ×4 group for memory interfaces if two pins
of the ×4 group are used as RUP and RDN pins for OCT calibration. If two pins of a ×4 group are used as RUP and RDN pins for OCT calibration, you
can use the ×16/×18 or ×32/×36 groups that include that ×4 group; however, there are restrictions on using ×8/×9 groups that include that ×4
group.
(4) You can also use some of the DQS/DQ pins in I/O Bank 1C as configuration pins. You cannot use a ×4 DQS/DQ group with any of its pin members
used for configuration purposes. Ensure that the DQS/DQ groups that you have chosen are not also used for configuration because you may lose
up to four ×4 DQS/DQ groups, depending on your configuration scheme.
(5) All I/O pin counts include dedicated clock inputs that you can use for data inputs.
DLL0 DLL3
DLL1 DLL2
I/O Bank 8A
40 User I/Os
x4=6
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
I/O Bank 8C
24 User I/Os
x4=2
x8/x9=1
x16/x18=0
I/O Bank 7C
24 User I/Os
x4=3
x8/x9=1
x16/x18=0
I/O Bank 7A
40 User I/Os
x4=6
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
I/O Bank 4A
40 User I/Os
x4=6
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
I/O Bank 4C
24 User I/Os
x4=3
x8/x9=1
x16/x18=0
I/O Bank 3C
24 User I/Os
x4=2
x8/x9=1
x16/x18=0
I/O Bank 3A
40 User I/Os
x4=6
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
I/O Bank 2A
32 User I/Os
x4=4
x8/x9=2
x16/x18=1
I/O Bank 2C
26 User I/Os
x4=3
x8/x9=1
x16/x18=0
I/O Bank 1C
26 User I/Os
x4=3
x8/x9=1
x16/x18=0
I/O Bank 1A
32 User I/Os
x4=4
x8/x9=2
x16/x18=1
EP4SGX70, EP4SGX110, EP4SGX180, and
EP4SGX230 Devices in the
780-Pin FineLine BGA
Chapter 7: External Memory Interfaces in Stratix IV Devices 7–9
Memory Interfaces Pin Support
February 2011 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
Figure 7–4. Number of DQS/DQ Groups per Bank in EP4SE230 and EP4SE360 Devices in the 780-Pin FineLine BGA
Package (1), (2), (3), (4), (5)
Notes to Figure 7–4:
(1) These numbers are preliminary until the devices are available.
(2) EP4SE230 and EP4SE360 devices do not support ×32/×36 mode. To interface with a ×36 QDR II+/QDR II SRAM device, refer to “Combining
×16/×18 DQS/DQ Groups for a ×36 QDR II+/QDR II SRAM Interface” on page 7–26.
(3) You can also use DQS/DQSn pins in some of the ×4 groups as RUP and RDN pins, but you cannot use a ×4 group for memory interfaces if two pins
of the ×4 group are used as RUP and RDN pins for OCT calibration. If two pins of a ×4 group are used as RUP and RDN pins for OCT calibration, you
can use the ×16/×18 or ×32/×36 groups that include that ×4 group; however, there are restrictions on using ×8/×9 groups that include that ×4
group.
(4) You can also use some of the DQS/DQ pins in I/O Bank 1C as configuration pins. You cannot use a ×4 DQS/DQ group with any of its pin members
used for configuration purposes. Ensure that the DQS/DQ groups that you have chosen are not also used for configuration because you may lose
up to four ×4 DQS/DQ groups, depending on your configuration scheme.
(5) All I/O pin counts include dedicated clock inputs that you can use for data inputs.
DLL0 DLL3
I/O Bank 8A
40 User I/Os
x4=6
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
I/O Bank 8C
24 User I/Os
x4=2
x8/x9=1
x16/x18=0
I/O Bank 7C
24 User I/Os
x4=3
x8/x9=1
x16/x18=0
I/O Bank 7A
40 User I/Os
x4=6
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
I/O Bank 1A
32 User I/Os
x4=4
x8/x9=2
x16/x18=1
I/O Bank 1C
26 User I/Os
x4=3
x8/x9=1
x16/x18=0
I/O Bank 2C
26 User I/Os
x4=3
x8/x9=1
x16/x18=0
I/O Bank 2A
32 User I/Os
x4=4
x8/x9=2
x16/x18=1
DLL1
I/O Bank 3A
40 User I/Os
x4=6
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
I/O Bank 3C
24 User I/Os
x4=2
x8/x9=1
x16/x18=0
I/O Bank 4C
24 User I/Os
x4=3
x8/x9=1
x16/x18=0
I/O Bank 4A
40 User I/Os
x4=6
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
DLL2
I/O Bank 6A
32 User I/Os
x4=4
x8/x9=2
x16/x18=1
I/O Bank 6C
26 User I/Os
x4=3
x8/x9=1
x16/x18=0
I/O Bank 5C
26 User I/Os
x4=3
x8/x9=1
x16/x18=0
I/O Bank 5A
32 User I/Os
x4=4
x8/x9=2
x16/x18=1
EP4SE230 and EP4SE360 Devices in the
780-Pin FineLine BGA
7–10 Chapter 7: External Memory Interfaces in Stratix IV Devices
Memory Interfaces Pin Support
Stratix IV Device Handbook February 2011 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Figure 7–5. Number of DQS/DQ Groups per Bank in EP4SGX290 and EP4SGX360 Devices in the 780-Pin FineLine BGA
Package (1), (2)
Notes to Figure 7–5:
(1) These numbers are preliminary until the devices are available.
(2) EP4SGX290 and EP4SGX360 devices do not support ×32/×36 mode. To interface with a ×36 QDR II+/QDR II SRAM device, refer to “Combining
×16/×18 DQS/DQ Groups for a ×36 QDR II+/QDR II SRAM Interface” on page 7–26.
DLL0 DLL3
DLL1 DLL2
I/O Bank 8A
40 User I/Os
x4=6
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
I/O Bank 8C I/O Bank 7C I/O Bank 7A
I/O Bank 4AI/O Bank 4CI/O Bank 3C
I/O Bank 3A
32 User I/Os
x4=3
x8/x9=1
x16/x18=0
32 User I/Os
x4=3
x8/x9=1
x16//x18=0
40 User I/Os
x4=6
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
40 User I/Os
x4=6
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
32 User I/Os
x4=3
x8/x9=1
x16/x18=0
32 User I/Os
x4=3
x8/x9=1
x16/x18=0
40 User I/Os
x4=6
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
EP4SGX290 and EP4SGX360 Devices
in the 780-Pin FineLine BGA
Chapter 7: External Memory Interfaces in Stratix IV Devices 7–11
Memory Interfaces Pin Support
February 2011 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
Figure 7–6. Number of DQS/DQ Groups per Bank in EP4SGX110 Devices with 16 Transceivers in the 1152-Pin FineLine
BGA Package (1), (2), (3), (4), (5)
Notes to Figure 7–6:
(1) These numbers are preliminary until the devices are available.
(2) EP4SGX110 devices do not support ×32/×36 mode. To interface with a ×36 QDR II+/QDR II SRAM device, refer to “Combining ×16/×18 DQS/DQ
Groups for a ×36 QDR II+/QDR II SRAM Interface” on page 7–26.
(3) You can also use DQS/DQSn pins in some of the ×4 groups as RUP and RDN pins, but you cannot use a ×4 group for memory interfaces if two pins
of the ×4 group are used as RUP and RDN pins for OCT calibration. If two pins of a ×4 group are used as RUP and RDN pins for OCT calibration, you
can use the ×16/×18 or ×32/×36 groups that include that ×4 group; however, there are restrictions on using ×8/×9 groups that include that ×4
group.
(4) You can also use some of the DQS/DQ pins in I/O Bank 1C as configuration pins. You cannot use a ×4 DQS/DQ group with any of its pin members
used for configuration purposes. Ensure that the DQS/DQ groups that you have chosen are not also used for configuration because you may lose
up to four ×4 DQS/DQ groups, depending on your configuration scheme.
(5) All I/O pin counts include dedicated clock inputs that you can use for data inputs.
DLL0 DLL3
DLL1 DLL2
I/O Bank 8A
40 User I/Os
x4=6
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
I/O Bank 8C
24 User I/Os
x4=2
x8/x9=1
x16/x18=0
I/O Bank 7C
24 User I/Os
x4=3
x8/x9=1
x16/x18=0
I/O Bank 7A
40 User I/Os
x4=6
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
I/O Bank 6A
32 User I/Os
x4=4
x8/x9=2
x16/x18=1
I/O Bank 6C
26 User I/Os
x4=3
x8/x9=1
x16/x18=0
I/O Bank 4A
40 User I/Os
x4=6
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
I/O Bank 4C
24 User I/Os
x4=3
x8/x9=1
x16/x18=0
I/O Bank 3C
24 User I/Os
x4=2
x8/x9=1
x16/x18=0
I/O Bank 3A
40 User I/Os
x4=6
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
I/O Bank 1C
26 User I/Os
x4=3
x8/x9=1
x16/x18=0
I/O Bank 1A
32 User I/Os
x4=4
x8/x9=2
x16/x18=1 EP4SGX110 Devices
in the 1152-Pin FineLine BGA
(with 16 Transceivers)
7–12 Chapter 7: External Memory Interfaces in Stratix IV Devices
Memory Interfaces Pin Support
Stratix IV Device Handbook February 2011 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Figure 7–7. Number of DQS/DQ Groups per Bank in EP4SGX70 and EP4SGX110 Devices with 24 Transceivers in the
1152-Pin FineLine BGA Package (1), (2), (3), (4), (5)
Notes to Figure 7–7:
(1) These numbers are preliminary until the devices are available.
(2) EP4SGX70 and EP4SGX110 devices do not support ×32/×36 mode. To interface with a ×36 QDR II+/QDR II SRAM device, refer to “Combining
×16/×18 DQS/DQ Groups for a ×36 QDR II+/QDR II SRAM Interface” on page 7–26.
(3) You can also use DQS/DQSn pins in some of the ×4 groups as RUP and RDN pins, but you cannot use a ×4 group for memory interfaces if two pins
of the ×4 group are used as RUP and RDN pins for OCT calibration. If two pins of a ×4 group are used as RUP and RDN pins for OCT calibration, you
can use the ×16/×18 or ×32/×36 groups that include that ×4 group; however, there are restrictions on using ×8/×9 groups that include that ×4
group.
(4) All I/O pin counts include dedicated clock inputs that you can use for data inputs.
(5) You can also use some of the DQS/DQ pins in I/O Bank 1C as configuration pins. You cannot use a ×4 DQS/DQ group with any of its pin members
used for configuration purposes. Ensure that the DQS/DQ groups that you have chosen are not also used for configuration because you may lose
up to four ×4 DQS/DQ groups, depending on your configuration scheme.
DLL0 DLL3
I/O Bank 8A
(3)
40 User I/Os
x4=6
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
I/O Bank 8C
24 User I/Os
x4=2
x8/x9=1
x16/x18=0
I/O Bank 7C
24 User I/Os
x4=3
x8/x9=1
x16/x18=0
I/O Bank 7A
(3)
40 User I/Os
x4=6
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
I/O Bank 6A
(3)
32 User I/Os
x4=4
x8/x9=2
x16/x18=1
I/O Bank 6C
26 User I/Os
(5)
x4=3
x8/x9=1
x16/x18=0
I/O Bank 1C
(4)
26 User I/Os
(5)
x4=3
x8/x9=1
x16/x18=0
I/O Bank 1A
(3)
32 User I/Os
x4=4
x8/x9=2
x16/x18=1
EP4SGX70 and EP4SGX110 Devices
in the 1152-Pin FineLine BGA
(with 24 Transceivers)
DLL1 DLL2
I/O Bank 4A
(3)
40 User I/Os
x4=6
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
I/O Bank 4C
24 User I/Os
x4=3
x8/x9=1
x16/x18=0
I/O Bank 3C
24 User I/Os
x4=2
x8/x9=1
x16/x18=0
I/O Bank 3A
(3)
40 User I/Os
x4=6
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
I/O Bank 6A
(3)
32 User I/Os
x4=4
x8/x9=2
x16/x18=1
I/O Bank 6C
26 User I/Os
(5)
x4=3
x8/x9=1
x16/x18=0
I/O Bank 1C
(4)
26 User I/Os
(5)
x4=3
x8/x9=1
x16/x18=0
32 User I/Os
x4=4
x8/x9=2
x16/x18=1
Chapter 7: External Memory Interfaces in Stratix IV Devices 7–13
Memory Interfaces Pin Support
February 2011 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
Figure 7–8. Number of DQS/DQ Groups per Bank in EP4SGX180 and EP4SGX230 Devices in the 1152-Pin FineLine BGA
Package (1), (2), (3), (4), (5)
Notes to Figure 7–8:
(1) These numbers are preliminary until the devices are available.
(2) EP4SGX180 and EP4SGX230 devices do not support ×32/×36 mode. To interface with a ×36 QDR II+/QDR II SRAM device, refer to “Combining
×16/×18 DQS/DQ Groups for a ×36 QDR II+/QDR II SRAM Interface” on page 7–26.
(3) You can also use DQS/DQSn pins in some of the ×4 groups as RUP and RDN pins, but you cannot use a ×4 group for memory interfaces if two pins
of the ×4 group are used as RUP and RDN pins for OCT calibration. If two pins of a ×4 group are used as RUP and RDN pins for OCT calibration, you
can use the ×16/×18 or ×32/×36 groups that include that ×4 group; however, there are restrictions on using ×8/×9 groups that include that ×4
group.
(4) All I/O pin counts include dedicated clock inputs that you can use for data inputs.
(5) You can also use some of the DQS/DQ pins in I/O Bank 1C as configuration pins. You cannot use a ×4 DQS/DQ group with any of its pin members
used for configuration purposes. Ensure that the DQS/DQ groups that you have chosen are not also used for configuration because you may lose
up to four ×4 DQS/DQ groups, depending on your configuration scheme.
DLL0 DLL3
DLL1 DLL2
I/O Bank 8A
40 User I/Os
x4=6
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
I/O Bank 8B I/O Bank 8C I/O Bank 7C I/O Bank 7B I/O Bank 7A
I/O Bank 6A
I/O Bank 6C
I/O Bank 4A
I/O Bank 4B
I/O Bank 4CI/O Bank 3C
I/O Bank 3B
I/O Bank 3A
I/O Bank 1C
I/O Bank 1A
24 User I/Os
x4=4
x8/x9=2
x16/x18=1
32 User I/Os
x4=3
x8/x9=1
x16/x18=0
32 User I/Os
x4=3
x8/x9=1
x16//x18=0
24 User I/Os
x4=4
x8/x9=2
x16/x18=1
40 User I/Os
x4=6
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
48 User I/Os
x4=7
x8/x9=3
x6/x18=1
42 User I/Os
x4=6
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
40 User I/Os
x4=6
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
24 User I/Os
x4=4
x8/x9=2
x16/x18=1
32 User I/Os
x4=3
x8/x9=1
x16/x18=0
32 User I/Os
x4=3
x8/x9=1
x16/x18=0
24 User I/Os
x4=4
x8/x9=2
x16/x18=1
40 User I/Os
x4=6
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
48 User I/Os
x4=7
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
42 User I/Os
x4=6
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
EP4SGX180 and EP4SGX230 Devices
in the 1152-Pin FineLine BGA
7–14 Chapter 7: External Memory Interfaces in Stratix IV Devices
Memory Interfaces Pin Support
Stratix IV Device Handbook February 2011 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Figure 7–9. Number of DQS/DQ Groups per Bank in EP4SGX290, EP4SGX360, and EP4SGX530 Devices in the 1152-Pin
FineLine BGA Package (1), (3), (4), (5)
Notes to Figure 7–9:
(1) These numbers are preliminary until the devices are available.
(2) These ×32/×36 DQS/DQ groups have 40 pins instead of 48 pins per group.
(3) You can also use DQS/DQSn pins in some of the ×4 groups as RUP and RDN pins, but you cannot use a ×4 group for memory interfaces if two pins
of the ×4 group are used as RUP and RDN pins for OCT calibration. If two pins of a ×4 group are used as RUP and RDN pins for OCT calibration, you
can use the ×16/×18 or ×32/×36 groups that include that ×4 group; however, there are restrictions on using ×8/×9 groups that include that ×4
group.
(4) All I/O pin counts include dedicated clock inputs that you can use for data inputs.
(5) You can also use some of the DQS/DQ pins in I/O Bank 1C as configuration pins. You cannot use a ×4 DQS/DQ group with any of its pin members
used for configuration purposes. Ensure that the DQS/DQ groups that you have chosen are not also used for configuration because you may lose
up to four ×4 DQS/DQ groups, depending on your configuration scheme.
DLL0 DLL3
DLL1 DLL2
I/O Bank 8A
40 User I/Os
x4=6
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
x32/x36=1 (2)
I/O Bank 8B I/O Bank 8C I/O Bank 7C I/O Bank 7B I/O Bank 7A
I/O Bank 6A
I/O Bank 6C
I/O Bank 4A
I/O Bank 4B
I/O Bank 4CI/O Bank 3C
I/O Bank 3B
I/O Bank 3A
I/O Bank 1C
I/O Bank 1A
24 User I/Os
x4=4
x8/x9=2
x16/x18=1
32 User I/Os
x4=3
x8/x9=1
x16/x18=0
32 User I/Os
x4=3
x8/x9=1
x16//x18=0
24 User I/Os
x4=4
x8/x9=2
x16/x18=1
40 User I/Os
x4=6
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
x32/x36=1 (2)
48 User I/Os
x4=7
x8/x9=3
x6/x18=1
42 User I/Os
x4=6
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
40 User I/Os
x4=6
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
x32/x36=1 (2)
24 User I/Os
x4=4
x8/x9=2
x16/x18=1
32 User I/Os
x4=3
x8/x9=1
x16/x18=0
32 User I/Os
x4=3
x8/x9=1
x16/x18=0
24 User I/Os
x4=4
x8/x9=2
x16/x18=1
40 User I/Os
x4=6
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
x32/x36=1 (2)
48 User I/Os
x4=7
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
42 User I/Os
x4=6
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
EP4SGX290, EP4SGX360, and EP4SGX530 Devices
in the 1152-Pin FineLine BGA
Chapter 7: External Memory Interfaces in Stratix IV Devices 7–15
Memory Interfaces Pin Support
February 2011 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
Figure 7–10. Number of DQS/DQ Groups per Bank in EP4SE360, EP4SE530, and EP4SE820 Devices in the 1152-Pin
FineLine BGA Package (1), (2), (3), (4), (5)
Notes to Figure 7–10:
(1) These numbers are preliminary until the devices are available.
(2) EP4SE360, EP4SE530, and EP4SE820 devices do not support ×32/×36 mode. To interface with a ×36 QDR II+/QDR II SRAM device, refer to
“Combining ×16/×18 DQS/DQ Groups for a ×36 QDR II+/QDR II SRAM Interface” on page 7–26.
(3) You can also use DQS/DQSn pins in some of the ×4 groups as RUP and RDN pins, but you cannot use a ×4 group for memory interfaces if two pins
of the ×4 group are used as RUP and RDN pins for OCT calibration. If two pins of a ×4 group are used as RUP and RDN pins for OCT calibration, you
can use the ×16/×18 or ×32/×36 groups that include that ×4 group, however there are restrictions on using ×8/×9 groups that include that ×4
group.
(4) You can also use some of the DQS/DQ pins in I/O Bank 1C as configuration pins. You cannot use a ×4 DQS/DQ group with any of its pin members
used for configuration purposes. Ensure that the DQS/DQ groups that you have chosen are not also used for configuration because you may lose
up to four ×4 DQS/DQ groups, depending on your configuration scheme.
(5) All I/O pin counts include dedicated clock inputs that you can use for data inputs.
DLL0 DLL3
DLL1 DLL2
I/O Bank 8A
40 User I/Os
x4=6
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
I/O Bank 8B I/O Bank 8C I/O Bank 7C I/O Bank 7B I/O Bank 7A
I/O Bank 6A
I/O Bank 6C
I/O Bank 5C
I/O Bank 5A
I/O Bank 4A
I/O Bank 4B
I/O Bank 4C I/O Bank 3C
I/O Bank 3B
I/O Bank 3A
I/O Bank 2A
I/O Bank 2C
I/O Bank 1C
I/O Bank 1A
24 User I/Os
x4=4
x8/x9=2
x16/x18=1
32 User I/Os
x4=3
x8/x9=1
x16/x18=0
32 User I/Os
x4=3
x8/x9=1
x16//x18=0
24 User I/Os
x4=4
x8/x9=2
x16/x18=1
40 User I/Os
x4=6
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
48 User I/Os
x4=7
x8/x9=3
x6/x18=1
42 User I/Os
x4=6
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
42 User I/Os
x4=6
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
48 User I/Os
x4=7
x8/x9=3
x6/x18=1
40 User I/Os
x4=6
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
24 User I/Os
x4=4
x8/x9=2
x16/x18=1
32 User I/Os
x4=3
x8/x9=1
x16/x18=0
32 User I/Os
x4=3
x8/x9=1
x16/x18=0
24 User I/Os
x4=4
x8/x9=2
x16/x18=1
40 User I/Os
x4=6
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
48 User I/Os
x4=7
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
42 User I/Os
x4=6
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
42 User I/Os
x4=6
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
48 User I/Os
x4=7
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
EP4SE360, EP4SE530
and EP4SE820 Devices
in the 1152-Pin FineLine BGA
7–16 Chapter 7: External Memory Interfaces in Stratix IV Devices
Memory Interfaces Pin Support
Stratix IV Device Handbook February 2011 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Figure 7–11. Number of DQS/DQ Groups per Bank in EP4SGX180 and EP4SGX230 Devices in the 1517-Pin FineLine BGA
Package (1), (2), (3), (4), (5)
Notes to Figure 7–11:
(1) These numbers are preliminary until the devices are available.
(2) EP4SGX180 and EP4SGX230 devices do not support ×32/×36 mode. To interface with a ×36 QDR II+/QDR II SRAM device, refer to “Combining
×16/×18 DQS/DQ Groups for a ×36 QDR II+/QDR II SRAM Interface” on page 7–26.
(3) You can also use DQS/DQSn pins in some of the ×4 groups as RUP and RDN pins, but you cannot use a ×4 group for memory interfaces if two pins
of the ×4 group are used as RUP and RDN pins for OCT calibration. If two pins of a ×4 group are used as RUP and RDN pins for OCT calibration, you
can use the ×16/×18 or ×32/×36 groups that include that ×4 group, however there are restrictions on using ×8/×9 groups that include that ×4
group.
(4) All I/O pin counts include dedicated clock inputs that you can use for data inputs.
(5) You can also use some of the DQS/DQ pins in I/O Bank 1C as configuration pins. You cannot use a ×4 DQS/DQ group with any of its pin members
used for configuration purposes. Ensure that the DQS/DQ groups that you have chosen are not also used for configuration because you may lose
up to four ×4 DQS/DQ groups, depending on your configuration scheme.
DLL0 DLL3
DLL1 DLL2
I/O Bank 8A
40 User I/Os
x4=6
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
I/O Bank 8B I/O Bank 8C I/O Bank 7C I/O Bank 7B I/O Bank 7A
I/O Bank 6A
I/O Bank 6C
I/O Bank 5C
I/O Bank 5A
I/O Bank 4A
I/O Bank 4B
I/O Bank 4CI/O Bank 3C
I/O Bank 3B
I/O Bank 3A
I/O Bank 2A
I/O Bank 2C
I/O Bank 1C
I/O Bank 1A
24 User I/Os
x4=4
x8/x9=2
x16/x18=1
32 User I/Os
x4=3
x8/x9=1
x16/x18=0
32 User I/Os
x4=3
x8/x9=1
x16//x18=0
24 User I/Os
x4=4
x8/x9=2
x16/x18=1
40 User I/Os
x4=6
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
48 User I/Os
x4=7
x8/x9=3
x6/x18=1
42 User I/Os
x4=6
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
42 User I/Os
x4=6
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
48 User I/Os
x4=7
x8/x9=3
x6/x18=1
40 User I/Os
x4=6
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
24 User I/Os
x4=4
x8/x9=2
x16/x18=1
32 User I/Os
x4=3
x8/x9=1
x16/x18=0
32 User I/Os
x4=3
x8/x9=1
x16/x18=0
24 User I/Os
x4=4
x8/x9=2
x16/x18=1
40 User I/Os
x4=6
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
48 User I/Os
x4=7
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
42 User I/Os
x4=6
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
42 User I/Os
x4=6
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
48 User I/Os
x4=7
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
EP4SGX180 and EP4SGX230 Devices
in the 1517-Pin FineLine BGA
Chapter 7: External Memory Interfaces in Stratix IV Devices 7–17
Memory Interfaces Pin Support
February 2011 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
Figure 7–12. Number of DQS/DQ Groups per Bank in EP4SGX290, EP4SGX360, and EP4SGX530 Devices in the 1517-Pin
FineLine BGA Package (1), (3), (4), (5)
Notes to Figure 7–12:
(1) These numbers are preliminary until the devices are available.
(2) These ×32/×36 DQS/DQ groups have 40 pins instead of 48 pins per group.
(3) You can also use DQS/DQSn pins in some of the ×4 groups as RUP and RDN pins, but you cannot use a ×4 group for memory interfaces if two pins
of the ×4 group are used as RUP and RDN pins for OCT calibration. If two pins of a ×4 group are used as RUP and RDN pins for OCT calibration, you
can use the ×16/×18 or ×32/×36 groups that include that ×4 group, however there are restrictions on using ×8/×9 groups that include that ×4
group.
(4) All I/O pin counts include dedicated clock inputs that you can use for data inputs.
(5) You can also use some of the DQS/DQ pins in I/O Bank 1C as configuration pins. You cannot use a ×4 DQS/DQ group with any of its pin members
used for configuration purposes. Ensure that the DQS/DQ groups that you have chosen are not also used for configuration because you may lose
up to four ×4 DQS/DQ groups, depending on your configuration scheme.
DLL0 DLL3
DLL1 DLL2
I/O Bank 8A
40 User I/Os
x4=6
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
x32/x36=1 (2)
I/O Bank 8B I/O Bank 8C I/O Bank 7C I/O Bank 7B I/O Bank 7A
I/O Bank 6A
I/O Bank 6C
I/O Bank 5C
I/O Bank 5A
I/O Bank 4A
I/O Bank 4B
I/O Bank 4CI/O Bank 3C
I/O Bank 3B
I/O Bank 3A
I/O Bank 2A
I/O Bank 2C
I/O Bank 1C
I/O Bank 1A
24 User I/Os
x4=4
x8/x9=2
x16/x18=1
32 User I/Os
x4=3
x8/x9=1
x16/x18=0
32 User I/Os
x4=3
x8/x9=1
x16//x18=0
24 User I/Os
x4=4
x8/x9=2
x16/x18=1
40 User I/Os
x4=6
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
x32/x36=1 (2)
48 User I/Os
x4=7
x8/x9=3
x6/x18=1
42 User I/Os
x4=6
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
42 User I/Os
x4=6
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
48 User I/Os
x4=7
x8/x9=3
x6/x18=1
40 User I/Os
x4=6
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
x32/x36=1 (2)
24 User I/Os
x4=4
x8/x9=2
x16/x18=1
32 User I/Os
x4=3
x8/x9=1
x16/x18=0
32 User I/Os
x4=3
x8/x9=1
x16/x18=0
24 User I/Os
x4=4
x8/x9=2
x16/x18=1
40 User I/Os
x4=6
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
x32/x36=1 (2)
48 User I/Os
x4=7
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
42 User I/Os
x4=6
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
42 User I/Os
x4=6
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
48 User I/Os
x4=7
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
EP4SGX290, EP4SGX360, and EP4SGX530 Devices
in the 1517-Pin FineLine BGA
7–18 Chapter 7: External Memory Interfaces in Stratix IV Devices
Memory Interfaces Pin Support
Stratix IV Device Handbook February 2011 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Figure 7–13. Number of DQS/DQ Groups per Bank in EP4SE530 and EP4SE820 Devices in the 1517-pin FineLine BGA
Package (1), (2), (3), (4)
Notes to Figure 7–13:
(1) These numbers are preliminary until the devices are available.
(2) You can also use DQS/DQSn pins in some of the ×4 groups as RUP and RDN pins, but you cannot use a ×4 group for memory interfaces if two pins
of the ×4 group are used as RUP and RDN pins for OCT calibration. If two pins of a ×4 group are used as RUP and RDN pins for OCT calibration, you
can use the ×16/×18 or ×32/×36 groups that include that ×4 group, however there are restrictions on using ×8/×9 groups that include that ×4
group.
(3) All I/O pin counts include dedicated clock inputs and dedicated corner PLL clock inputs that you can use for data inputs.
(4) You can also use some of the DQS/DQ pins in I/O Bank 1C as configuration pins. You cannot use a ×4 DQS/DQ group with any of its pin members
used for configuration purposes. Ensure that the DQS/DQ groups that you have chosen are not also used for configuration because you may lose
up to four ×4 DQS/DQ groups, depending on your configuration scheme.
DLL0 DLL3
DLL1 DLL2
I/O Bank 8A
48 User I/Os
x4=8
x8/x9=4
x16/x18=2
x32/x36=1
I/O Bank 8B I/O Bank 8C I/O Bank 7C I/O Bank 7B I/O Bank 7A
I/O Bank 6A
I/O Bank 6B
I/O Bank 6C
I/O Bank 5C
I/O Bank 4AI/O Bank 4BI/O Bank 4C I/O Bank 3CI/O Bank 3B I/O Bank 3A
I/O Bank 2C
I/O Bank 1C
I/O Bank 1B
I/O Bank 1A
48 User I/Os
x4=8
x8/x9=4
x16/x18=2
x32/x36=1
32 User I/Os
x4=3
x8/x9=1
x16/x18=0
x32/x36=0
32 User I/Os
x4=3
x8/x9=1
x16/x18=0
x32/x36=0
48 User I/Os
x4=8
x8/x9=4
x16/x18=2
x32/x36=1
48 User I/Os
x4=8
x8/x9=4
x16/x18=2
x32/x36=1
50 User I/Os
x4=7
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
x32/x36=0
24 User I/Os
x4=4
x8/x9=2
x16/x18=1
x32/x36=0
42 User I/Os
x4=6
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
x32/x36=0
42 User I/Os
x4=6
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
x32/x36=0
48 User I/Os
x4=8
x8/x9=4
x16/x18=2
x32/x36=1
48 User I/Os
x4=8
x8/x9=4
x16/x18=2
x32/x36=1
32 User I/Os
x4=3
x8/x9=1
x16/x18=0
x32/x36=0
32 User I/Os
x4=3
x8/x9=1
x16/x18=0
x32/x36=0
48 User I/Os
x4=8
x8/x9=4
x16/x18=2
x32/x36=1
48 User I/Os
x4=8
x8/x9=4
x16/x18=2
x32/x36=1
50 User I/Os
x4=7
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
x32/x36=0
24 User I/Os
x4=4
x8/x9=2
x16/x18=1
x32/x36=0
42 User I/Os
x4=6
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
x32/x36=0
42 User I/Os
x4=6
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
x32/x36=0
I/O Bank 5B
24 User I/Os
x4=4
x8/x9=2
x16/x18=1
x32/x36=0
I/O Bank 5A
50 User I/Os
x4=7
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
x32/x36=0
I/O Bank 2B
24 User I/Os
x4=4
x8/x9=2
x16/x18=1
x32/x36=0
I/O Bank 2A
50 User I/Os
x4=7
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
x32/x36=0
EP4SE530 and EP4SE820 Devices
in the 1517-Pin FineLine BGA
Chapter 7: External Memory Interfaces in Stratix IV Devices 7–19
Memory Interfaces Pin Support
February 2011 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
Figure 7–14. Number of DQS/DQ Groups per Bank in EP4S40G2, EP4S40G5, EP4S100G2, and EP4S100G5 Devices in the
1517-Pin FineLine BGA Package (1), (2), (3), (4), (5)
Notes to Figure 7–14:
(1) These numbers are preliminary until the devices are available.
(2) EP4S40G2, EP4S40G5, EP4S100G2, and EP4S100G5 devices do not support 32/36 mode. To interface with a 36 QDR II+/QDR II SRAM
device, refer to “Combining ×16/×18 DQS/DQ Groups for a ×36 QDR II+/QDR II SRAM Interface” on page 7–26.
(3) You can also use DQS/DQSn pins in some of the ×4 groups as RUP and RDN pins, but you cannot use a ×4 group for memory interfaces if two pins
of the ×4 group are used as RUP and RDN pins for OCT calibration. If two pins of a ×4 group are used as RUP and RDN pins for OCT calibration, you
can use the ×16/×18 or ×32/×36 groups that include that ×4 group, however there are restrictions on using ×8/×9 groups that include that ×4
group.
(4) All I/O pin counts include dedicated clock inputs that you can use for data inputs.
(5) You can also use some of the DQS/DQ pins in I/O Bank 1C as configuration pins. You cannot use a 4 DQS/DQ group with any of its pin members
used for configuration purposes. Make sure that the DQS/DQ groups that you have chosen are not used for configuration as you may lose up to
four 4 DQS/DQ groups, depending on your configuration scheme.
DLL0 DLL3
I/O Bank 8A
40 User I/Os
x4=6
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
I/O Bank 8B I/O Bank 8C I/O Bank 7C I/O Bank 7B I/O Bank 7A
I/O Bank 6A
I/O Bank 6C
I/O Bank 5C
I/O Bank 5A
I/O Bank 2A
I/O Bank 2C
I/O Bank 1C
I/O Bank 1A
24 User I/Os
x4=4
x8/x9=2
x16/x18=1
32 User I/Os
x4=3
x8/x9=1
x16/x18=0
32 User I/Os
x4=3
x8/x9=1
x16/x18=0
24 User I/Os
x4=4
x8/x9=2
x16/x18=1
40 User I/Os
x4=6
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
44 User I/Os
x4=5
x8/x9=1
x16/x18=0
21 User I/Os
x4=0
x8/x9=0
x16/x18=0
21 User I/Os
x4=0
x8/x9=0
x16/x18=0
46 User I/Os
x4=6
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
DLL1 DLL2
I/O Bank 4A
I/O Bank 4BI/O Bank 4C
I/O Bank 3C
I/O Bank 3B
I/O Bank 3A
40 User I/Os
x4=6
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
24 User I/Os
x4=4
x8/x9=2
x16/x18=1
32 User I/Os
x4=3
x8/x9=1
x16/x18=0
32 User I/Os
x4=3
x8/x9=1
x16/x18=0
24 User I/Os
x4=4
x8/x9=2
x16/x18=1
40 User I/Os
x4=6
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
43 User I/Os
x4=5
x8/x9=1
x16/x18=0
20 User I/Os
x4=0
x8/x9=0
x16/x18=0
21 User I/Os
x4=1
x8/x9=0
x16/x18=0
46 User I/Os
x4=6
x8/x9=2
x16/x18=1
EP4S40G2, EP4S40G5, EP4S100G2, and EP4S100G5 Devices
in the 1517-Pin FineLine BGA
7–20 Chapter 7: External Memory Interfaces in Stratix IV Devices
Memory Interfaces Pin Support
Stratix IV Device Handbook February 2011 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Figure 7–15. Number of DQS/DQ Groups per Bank in EP4SGX290, EP4SGX360, and EP4SGX530 Devices in the 1760-Pin
FineLine BGA Package (1), (2), (3), (4)
Notes to Figure 7–15:
(1) These numbers are preliminary until the devices are available.
(2) You can also use DQS/DQSn pins in some of the ×4 groups as RUP and RDN pins, but you cannot use a ×4 group for memory interfaces if two pins
of the ×4 group are used as RUP and RDN pins for OCT calibration. If two pins of a ×4 group are used as RUP and RDN pins for OCT calibration, you
can use the ×16/×18 or ×32/×36 groups that include that ×4 group, however there are restrictions on using ×8/×9 groups that include that ×4
group.
(3) All I/O pin counts include dedicated clock inputs and dedicated corner PLL clock inputs that you can use for data inputs.
(4) You can also use some of the DQS/DQ pins in I/O Bank 1C as configuration pins. You cannot use a ×4 DQS/DQ group with any of its pin members
used for configuration purposes. Ensure that the DQS/DQ groups that you have chosen are not also used for configuration because you may lose
up to four ×4 DQS/DQ groups, depending on your configuration scheme.
DLL0 DLL3
DLL1 DLL2
I/O Bank 8A
48 User I/Os
x4=8
x8/x9=4
x16/x18=2
x32/x36=1
I/O Bank 8B I/O Bank 8C I/O Bank 7C I/O Bank 7B I/O Bank 7A
I/O Bank 6A
I/O Bank 6C
I/O Bank 5C
I/O Bank 5A
I/O Bank 4A
I/O Bank 4B
I/O Bank 4C I/O Bank 3C
I/O Bank 3B
I/O Bank 3A
I/O Bank 2A
I/O Bank 2C
I/O Bank 1C
I/O Bank 1A
48 User I/Os
x4=8
x8/x9=4
x16/x18=2
x32/x36=1
32 User I/Os
x4=3
x8/x9=1
x16/x18=0
x32/x36=0
32 User I/Os
x4=3
x8/x9=1
x16//x18=0
x32/x36=0
48 User I/Os
x4=8
x8/x9=4
x16/x18=2
x32/x36=1
48 User I/Os
x4=8
x8/x9=4
x16/x18=2
x32/x36=1
50 User I/Os
x4=7
x8/x9=3
x6/x18=1
x32/x36=0
42 User I/Os
x4=6
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
x32/x36=0
42 User I/Os
x4=6
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
x32/x36=0
50 User I/Os
x4=7
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
x32/x36=0
48 User I/Os
x4=8
x8/x9=4
x16/x18=2
x32/x36=1
48 User I/Os
x4=8
x8/x9=4
x16/x18=2
x32/x36=1
32 User I/Os
x4=3
x8/x9=1
x16/x18=0
x32/x36=0
32 User I/Os
x4=3
x8/x9=1
x16/x18=0
x32/x36=0
48 User I/Os
x4=8
x8/x9=4
x16/x18=2
x32/x36=1
48 User I/Os
x4=8
x8/x9=4
x16/x18=2
x32/x36=1
50 User I/Os
x4=7
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
x32/x36=0
42 User I/Os
x4=6
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
x32/x36=0
42 User I/Os
x4=6
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
x32/x36=0
50 User I/Os
x4=7
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
x32/x36=0
EP4SGX290, EP4SGX360, and EP4SGX530 Devices
in the 1760-Pin FineLine BGA
Chapter 7: External Memory Interfaces in Stratix IV Devices 7–21
Memory Interfaces Pin Support
February 2011 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
Figure 7–16. Number of DQS/DQ Groups per Bank in EP4SE530 Devices in the 1760-Pin FineLine BGA Package (1), (2), (3),
(4)
Notes to Figure 7–16:
(1) These numbers are preliminary until the devices are available.
(2) You can also use DQS/DQSn pins in some of the ×4 groups as RUP and RDN pins, but you cannot use a ×4 group for memory interfaces if two pins
of the ×4 group are used as RUP and RDN pins for OCT calibration. If two pins of a ×4 group are used as RUP and RDN pins for OCT calibration, you
can use the ×16/×18 or ×32/×36 groups that include that ×4 group, however there are restrictions on using ×8/×9 groups that include that ×4
group.
(3) All I/O pin counts include dedicated clock inputs and dedicated corner PLL clock inputs that you can use for data inputs.
(4) You can also use some of the DQS/DQ pins in I/O Bank 1C as configuration pins. You cannot use a ×4 DQS/DQ group with any of its pin members
used for configuration purposes. Ensure that the DQS/DQ groups that you have chosen are not also used for configuration because you may lose
up to four ×4 DQS/DQ groups, depending on your configuration scheme.
DLL0 DLL3
DLL1 DLL2
I/O Bank 8A
48 User I/Os
x4=8
x8/x9=4
x16/x18=2
x32/x36=1
I/O Bank 8B I/O Bank 8C I/O Bank 7C I/O Bank 7B I/O Bank 7A
I/O Bank 6A
I/O Bank 6B
I/O Bank 6C
I/O Bank 5C
I/O Bank 4AI/O Bank 4BI/O Bank 4C I/O Bank 3CI/O Bank 3B I/O Bank 3A
I/O Bank 2C
I/O Bank 1C
I/O Bank 1B
I/O Bank 1A
48 User I/Os
x4=8
x8/x9=4
x16/x18=2
x32/x36=1
32 User I/Os
x4=3
x8/x9=1
x16/x18=0
x32/x36=0
32 User I/Os
x4=3
x8/x9=1
x16/x18=0
x32/x36=0
48 User I/Os
x4=8
x8/x9=4
x16/x18=2
x32/x36=1
48 User I/Os
x4=8
x8/x9=4
x16/x18=2
x32/x36=1
50 User I/Os
x4=7
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
x32/x36=0
24 User I/Os
x4=4
x8/x9=2
x16/x18=1
x32/x36=0
42 User I/Os
x4=6
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
x32/x36=0
42 User I/Os
x4=6
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
x32/x36=0
48 User I/Os
x4=8
x8/x9=4
x16/x18=2
x32/x36=1
48 User I/Os
x4=8
x8/x9=4
x16/x18=2
x32/x36=1
32 User I/Os
x4=3
x8/x9=1
x16/x18=0
x32/x36=0
32 User I/Os
x4=3
x8/x9=1
x16/x18=0
x32/x36=0
48 User I/Os
x4=8
x8/x9=4
x16/x18=2
x32/x36=1
48 User I/Os
x4=8
x8/x9=4
x16/x18=2
x32/x36=1
50 User I/Os
x4=7
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
x32/x36=0
24 User I/Os
x4=4
x8/x9=2
x16/x18=1
x32/x36=0
42 User I/Os
x4=6
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
x32/x36=0
42 User I/Os
x4=6
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
x32/x36=0
I/O Bank 5B
24 User I/Os
x4=4
x8/x9=2
x16/x18=1
x32/x36=0
I/O Bank 5A
50 User I/Os
x4=7
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
x32/x36=0
I/O Bank 2B
24 User I/Os
x4=4
x8/x9=2
x16/x18=1
x32/x36=0
I/O Bank 2A
50 User I/Os
x4=7
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
x32/x36=0
EP4SE530 Devices
in the 1760-Pin FineLine BGA
7–22 Chapter 7: External Memory Interfaces in Stratix IV Devices
Memory Interfaces Pin Support
Stratix IV Device Handbook February 2011 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Figure 7–17. Number of DQS/DQ Groups per Bank in EP4SE820 Devices in the 1760-pin FineLine BGA Package (1), (2), (3),
(4)
Notes to Figure 7–17:
(1) These numbers are preliminary until the devices are available.
(2) You can also use DQS/DQSn pins in some of the ×4 groups as RUP and RDN pins, but you cannot use a ×4 group for memory interfaces if two pins
of the ×4 group are used as RUP and RDN pins for OCT calibration. If two pins of a ×4 group are used as RUP and RDN pins for OCT calibration, you
can use the ×16/×18 or ×32/×36 groups that include that ×4 group, however there are restrictions on using ×8/×9 groups that include that ×4
group.
(3) All I/O pin counts include dedicated clock inputs and dedicated corner PLL clock inputs that you can use for data inputs.
(4) You can also use some of the DQS/DQ pins in I/O Bank 1C as configuration pins. You cannot use a ×4 DQS/DQ group with any of its pin members
used for configuration purposes. Ensure that the DQS/DQ groups that you have chosen are not also used for configuration because you may lose
up to four ×4 DQS/DQ groups, depending on your configuration scheme.
DLL0 DLL3
DLL1 DLL2
I/O Bank 8A
48 User I/Os
x4=8
x8/x9=4
x16/x18=2
x32/x36=1
I/O Bank 8B I/O Bank 8C I/O Bank 7C I/O Bank 7B I/O Bank 7A
I/O Bank 6A
I/O Bank 6B
I/O Bank 6C
I/O Bank 5C
I/O Bank 4A
I/O Bank 4BI/O Bank 4C
I/O Bank 3C
I/O Bank 3B
I/O Bank 3A
I/O Bank 2C
I/O Bank 1C
I/O Bank 1B
I/O Bank 1A
48 User I/Os
x4=8
x8/x9=4
x16/x18=2
x32/x36=1
48 User I/Os
x4=6
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
x32/x36=0
48 User I/Os
x4=6
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
x32/x36=0
48 User I/Os
x4=8
x8/x9=4
x16/x18=2
x32/x36=1
48 User I/Os
x4=8
x8/x9=4
x16/x18=2
x32/x36=1
50 User I/Os
x4=7
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
x32/x36=0
36 User I/Os
x4=6
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
x32/x36=0
50 User I/Os
x4=7
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
x32/x36=0
50 User I/Os
x4=7
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
x32/x36=0
48 User I/Os
x4=8
x8/x9=4
x16/x18=2
x32/x36=1
48 User I/Os
x4=8
x8/x9=4
x16/x18=2
x32/x36=1
48 User I/Os
x4=6
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
x32/x36=0
48 User I/Os
x4=6
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
x32/x36=0
48 User I/Os
x4=8
x8/x9=4
x16/x18=2
x32/x36=1
48 User I/Os
x4=8
x8/x9=4
x16/x18=2
x32/x36=1
50 User I/Os
x4=7
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
x32/x36=0
36 User I/Os
x4=6
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
x32/x36=0
50 User I/Os
x4=7
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
x32/x36=0
50 User I/Os
x4=7
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
x32/x36=0
I/O Bank 5B
36 User I/Os
x4=6
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
x32/x36=0
I/O Bank 5A
50 User I/Os
x4=7
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
x32/x36=0
I/O Bank 2B
36 User I/Os
x4=6
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
x32/x36=0
I/O Bank 2A
50 User I/Os
x4=7
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
x32/x36=0
EP4SE820 Devices
in the 1760-Pin FineLine BGA
Chapter 7: External Memory Interfaces in Stratix IV Devices 7–23
Memory Interfaces Pin Support
February 2011 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
Figure 7–18. Number of DQS/DQ Groups per Bank in EP4SGX290, EP4SGX360, and EP4SGX530 Devices in the 1932-Pin
FineLine BGA Package (1), (2), (3), (4)
Notes to Figure 7–18:
(1) These numbers are preliminary until the devices are available.
(2) You can also use DQS/DQSn pins in some of the ×4 groups as RUP and RDN pins, but you cannot use a ×4 group for memory interfaces if two pins
of the ×4 group are used as RUP and RDN pins for OCT calibration. If two pins of a ×4 group are used as RUP and RDN pins for OCT calibration, you
can use the ×16/×18 or ×32/×36 groups that include that ×4 group, however there are restrictions on using ×8/×9 groups that include that ×4
group.
(3) All I/O pin counts include dedicated clock inputs and dedicated corner PLL clock inputs that you can use for data inputs.
(4) You can also use some of the DQS/DQ pins in I/O Bank 1C as configuration pins. You cannot use a ×4 DQS/DQ group with any of its pin members
used for configuration purposes. Ensure that the DQS/DQ groups that you have chosen are not also used for configuration because you may lose
up to four ×4 DQS/DQ groups, depending on your configuration scheme.
DLL0 DLL3
DLL1 DLL2
I/O Bank 8A
48 User I/Os
x4=8
x8/x9=4
x16/x18=2
x32/x36=1
I/O Bank 8B I/O Bank 8C I/O Bank 7C I/O Bank 7B I/O Bank 7A
I/O Bank 6A
I/O Bank 6C
I/O Bank 5C
I/O Bank 4A
I/O Bank 4BI/O Bank 4C
I/O Bank 3C
I/O Bank 3B
I/O Bank 3A
I/O Bank 2C
I/O Bank 1C
I/O Bank 1A
48 User I/Os
x4=8
x8/x9=4
x16/x18=2
x32/x36=1
32 User I/Os
x4=3
x8/x9=1
x16/x18=0
x32/x36=0
32 User I/Os
x4=3
x8/x9=1
x16/x18=0
x32/x36=0
48 User I/Os
x4=8
x8/x9=4
x16/x18=2
x32/x36=1
48 User I/Os
x4=8
x8/x9=4
x16/x18=2
x32/x36=1
50 User I/Os
x4=7
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
x32/x36=0
42 User I/Os
x4=6
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
x32/x36=0
42 User I/Os
x4=6
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
x32/x36=0
48 User I/Os
x4=8
x8/x9=4
x16/x18=2
x32/x36=1
48 User I/Os
x4=8
x8/x9=4
x16/x18=2
x32/x36=1
32 User I/Os
x4=3
x8/x9=1
x16/x18=0
x32/x36=0
32 User I/Os
x4=3
x8/x9=1
x16/x18=0
x32/x36=0
48 User I/Os
x4=8
x8/x9=4
x16/x18=2
x32/x36=1
48 User I/Os
x4=8
x8/x9=4
x16/x18=2
x32/x36=1
50 User I/Os
x4=7
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
x32/x36=0
42 User I/Os
x4=6
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
x32/x36=0
42 User I/Os
x4=6
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
x32/x36=0
I/O Bank 5B
20 User I/Os
x4=3
x8/x9=1
x16/x18=0
x32/x36=0
I/O Bank 5A
50 User I/Os
x4=7
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
x32/x36=0
I/O Bank 2B
20 User I/Os
x4=3
x8/x9=1
x16/x18=0
x32/x36=0
I/O Bank 2A
50 User I/Os
x4=7
x8/x9=3
x16/x18=1
x32/x36=0
EP4SGX290, EP4SGX360, and EP4SGX530 Devices
in the 1932-Pin FineLine BGA
7–24 Chapter 7: External Memory Interfaces in Stratix IV Devices
Memory Interfaces Pin Support
Stratix IV Device Handbook February 2011 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
The DQS and DQSn pins are listed in the Stratix IV pin tables as
DQSXY
and
DQSnXY
,
respectively, where
X
indicates the DQS/DQ grouping number and
Y
indicates
whether the group is located on the top (T), bottom (B), left (L), or right (R) side of the
device. The DQS/DQ pin numbering is based on ×4 mode.
The corresponding DQ pins are marked as
DQXY
, where
X
indicates which DQS group
the pins belong to and
Y
indicates whether the group is located on the top (T), bottom
(B), left (L), or right (R) side of the device. For example,
DQS1L
indicates a DQS pin
located on the left side of the device. The DQ pins belonging to that group are shown
as
DQ1L
in the pin table. For more information, refer to Figure 7–20.
Figure 7–19. Number of DQS/DQ Groups per Bank in EP4S100G3, EP4S100G4, and EP4S100G5 Devices in the 1932-Pin
FineLine BGA Package (1), (2), (3), (4)
Notes to Figure 7–19:
(1) These numbers are preliminary until the devices are available.
(2) You can also use DQS/DQSn pins in some of the ×4 groups as RUP and RDN pins, but you cannot use a ×4 group for memory interfaces if two pins
of the ×4 group are used as RUP and RDN pins for OCT calibration. If two pins of a ×4 group are used as RUP and RDN pins for OCT calibration, you
can use the ×16/×18 or ×32/×36 groups that include that ×4 group, however there are restrictions on using ×8/×9 groups that include that ×4
group.
(3) All I/O pin counts include dedicated clock inputs and dedicated corner PLL clock inputs that you can use for data inputs.
(4) You can also use some of the DQS/DQ pins in I/O Bank 1C as configuration pins. You cannot use a ×4 DQS/DQ group with any of its pin members
used for configuration purposes. Ensure that the DQS/DQ groups that you have chosen are not also used for configuration because you may lose
up to four ×4 DQS/DQ groups, depending on your configuration scheme.
DLL0 DLL3
DLL1 DLL2
I/O Bank 8A
48 User I/Os
x4=8
x8/x9=4
x16/x18=2
x32/x36=1
I/O Bank 8B I/O Bank 8C I/O Bank 7C I/O Bank 7B I/O Bank 7A
I/O Bank 6A
I/O Bank 6C
I/O Bank 5C
I/O Bank 4A
I/O Bank 4BI/O Bank 4C
I/O Bank 3C
I/O Bank 3B
I/O Bank 3A
I/O Bank 2C
I/O Bank 1C
I/O Bank 1A
48 User I/Os
x4=8
x8/x9=4
x16/x18=2
x32/x36=1
32 User I/Os
x4=3
x8/x9=1
x16/x18=0
x32/x36=0
32 User I/Os
x4=3
x8/x9=1
x16/x18=0
x32/x36=0
48 User I/Os
x4=8
x8/x9=4
x16/x18=2
x32/x36=1
48 User I/Os
x4=8
x8/x9=4
x16/x18=2
x32/x36=1
38 User I/Os
x4=3
x8/x9=0
x16/x18=0
x32/x36=0
20 User I/Os
x4=0
x8/x9=0
x16/x18=0
x32/x36=0
17 User I/Os
x4=0
x8/x9=0
x16/x18=0
x32/x36=0
48 User I/Os
x4=8
x8/x9=4
x16/x18=2
x32/x36=1
48 User I/Os
x4=8
x8/x9=4
x16/x18=2
x32/x36=1
32 User I/Os
x4=3
x8/x9=1
x16/x18=0
x32/x36=0
32 User I/Os
x4=3
x8/x9=1
x16/x18=0
x32/x36=0
48 User I/Os
x4=8
x8/x9=4
x16/x18=2
x32/x36=1
48 User I/Os
x4=8
x8/x9=4
x16/x18=2
x32/x36=1
40 User I/Os
x4=3
x8/x9=1
x16/x18=0
x32/x36=0
19 User I/Os
x4=0
x8/x9=0
x16/x18=0
x32/x36=0
19 User I/Os
x4=0
x8/x9=0
x16/x18=0
x32/x36=0
I/O Bank 5B
12 User I/Os
x4=0
x8/x9=0
x16/x18=0
x32/x36=0
I/O Bank 5A
40 User I/Os
x4=4
x8/x9=1
x16/x18=0
x32/x36=0
I/O Bank 2B
13 User I/Os
x4=1
x8/x9=0
x16/x18=0
x32/x36=0
I/O Bank 2A
39 User I/Os
x4=4
x8/x9=1
x16/x18=0
x32/x36=0
EP4S100G3, EP4S100G4, and EP4S100G5 Devices
in the 1932-Pin FineLine BGA
Chapter 7: External Memory Interfaces in Stratix IV Devices 7–25
Memory Interfaces Pin Support
February 2011 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
1The parity, DM, BWSn, NWSn, ECC, and QVLD pins are shown as DQ pins in the pin
table.
The numbering scheme starts from the top-left corner of the device going
counter-clockwise in a die-top view. Figure 7–20 shows how the DQS/DQ groups are
numbered in a die-top view of the device. The top and bottom sides of the device can
contain up to 38 ×4 DQS/DQ groups. The left and right sides of the device can contain
up to 34 ×4 DQS/DQ groups.
Figure 7–20. DQS Pins in Stratix IV I/O Banks
8A 8B 8C 7C 7B 7A
DQS38T
DQS1L
1A
1B
1C
2C
2B
2A
DQS34L
3A 3B 3C 4C 4B 4A
5A
5B
5C
6C
6B
6A
DQS17L
DQS20T DQS19T DQS1T
DQS34R
DQS18R
DQS1R
DQS1B DQS19B DQS20B DQS38B
DQS17R
DQS18L
Stratix IV Device
PLL_L1
DLL0
PLL_L4
DLL1
PLL_R4
DLL2
DLL3
PLL_R1
PLL_L2
PLL_L3
PLL_R2
PLL_R3
PLL_T1 PLL_T2
PLL_B2
PLL_B1
7–26 Chapter 7: External Memory Interfaces in Stratix IV Devices
Memory Interfaces Pin Support
Stratix IV Device Handbook February 2011 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Using the RUP and RDN Pins in a DQS/DQ Group Used for Memory Interfaces
You can use the DQS/DQSn pins in some of the ×4 groups as RUP and RDN pins (listed
in the pin table). You cannot use a ×4 DQS/DQ group for memory interfaces if any of
its pin members are used as RUP and RDN pins for OCT calibration. You may be able to
use the ×8/×9 group that includes this ×4 DQS/DQ group, if either of the following
applies:
■You are not using DM pins with your differential DQS pins
■You are not using complementary or differential DQS pins
You can use the ×8/×9 group because a DQS/DQ ×8/×9 group actually comprises 12
pins, as the groups are formed by stitching two DQS/DQ groups in ×4 mode with six
pins each (refer to Table 7–1 on page 7–5). A typical ×8 memory interface consists of
one DQS, one DM, and eight DQ pins that add up to 10 pins. If you choose your pin
assignment carefully, you can use the two extra pins for RUP and RDN. In a DDR3
SDRAM interface, you must use differential DQS, which means that you only have
one extra pin. In this case, pick different pin locations for the RUP and RDN pins (for
example, in the bank that contains the address and command pins).
You cannot use the RUP and RDN pins shared with DQS/DQ group pins when using
×9 QDR II+/QDR II SRAM devices, as the RUP and RDN pins are dual purpose with
the CQn pins. In this case, pick different pin locations for RUP and RDN pins to avoid
conflict with memory interface pin placement. In this case, you have the choice of
placing the RUP and RDN pins in the data-write group or in the same bank as the
address and command pins.
There is no restriction on using ×16/×18 or ×32/×36 DQS/DQ groups that include the
×4 groups whose pins are being used as RUP and RDN pins, because there are enough
extra pins that can be used as DQS pins.
1For ×8, ×16/×18, or ×32/×36 DQS/DQ groups whose members are used for RUP and
RDN, you must assign DQS and DQ pins manually. The Quartus®II software might
not be able to place DQS and DQ pins without manual pin assignments, resulting in a
“no-fit”.
Combining ×16/×18 DQS/DQ Groups for a ×36 QDR II+/QDR II SRAM Interface
This implementation combines ×16/×18 DQS/DQ groups to interface with a ×36
QDR II+/QDR II SRAM device. The ×36 read data bus uses two ×16/×18 groups
while the ×36 write data uses another two ×16/×18 or four ×8/×9 groups. The
CQ/CQn signal traces are split on the board trace to connect to two pairs of CQ/CQn
pins in the FPGA. This is the only connection on the board that you need to change for
this implementation. Other QDR II+/QDR II SRAM interface rules for Stratix IV
devices also apply for this implementation.
1The ALTMEMPHY megafunction and UniPHY-based external memory interface IPs
do not use the QVLD signal, so you can leave the QVLD signal unconnected as in any
QDR II+/QDR II SRAM interface.
fFor more information about the ALTMEMPHY megafunction or UniPHY-based IPs,
refer to the External Memory Interface Handbook.
Chapter 7: External Memory Interfaces in Stratix IV Devices 7–27
Memory Interfaces Pin Support
February 2011 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
Rules to Combine Groups
In 780-, 1152-, and some 1517-pin package devices, there is at most one ×16/×18 group
per I/O sub-bank. You can combine two ×16/×18 groups from a single side of the
device for a ×36 interface.
For devices that do not have four ×16/×18 groups in a single side of the device to
form two ×36 groups for read and write data, you can form one ×36 group on one side
of the device and another ×36 group on the other side of the device.
For vertical migration with the ×36 emulation implementation, check if migration is
possible by enabling device migration in the Quartus II project. The Quartus II
software supports the use of four ×8/×9 DQ groups for write data pins and migration
of these groups across device density. Table 7–3 lists the possible combinations to use
two ×16/×18 DQS/DQ groups to form a ×32/×36 group on Stratix IV devices lacking
a native ×32/×36 DQS/DQ group.
Table 7–3. Possible Group Combinations in Stratix IV Devices (Part 1 of 2)
Package Device Density I/O Sub-Bank Combinations
780-Pin
FineLine BGA
■EP4SGX70
■EP4SGX110
■EP4SGX180
■EP4SGX230
■EP4SGX290
■EP4SGX360
3A and 4A, 7A and 8A (bottom and top I/O banks) (1)
■EP4SE230
■EP4SE360
1A and 2A, 5A and 6A (left and right I/O banks)
3A and 4A, 7A and 8A (bottom and top I/O banks) (1)
1152-Pin
FineLine BGA
■EP4SGX70
■EP4SGX110 3A and 4A, 7A and 8A (bottom and top I/O banks) (1)
■EP4SGX180
■EP4SGX230
■EP4SGX290 (2)
■EP4SGX360 (2)
■EP4SGX530 (2)
1A and 1C, 6A and 6C (left and right I/O banks)
3A and 3B, 4A and 4B (bottom I/O banks)
7A and 7B, 8A and 8B (top I/O banks)
■EP4SE360
■EP4SE530
■EP4SE820
1A and 1C, 2A and 2C (left I/O banks)
3A and 3B, 4A and 4B (bottom I/O banks)
5A and 5C, 6A and 6C (right I/O banks)
7A and 7B, 8A and 8B (top I/O banks)
7–28 Chapter 7: External Memory Interfaces in Stratix IV Devices
Memory Interfaces Pin Support
Stratix IV Device Handbook February 2011 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
1517-Pin
FineLine BGA
■EP4SGX180
■EP4SGX230
■EP4SGX290 (2)
■EP4SGX360 (2)
■EP4SGX530 (2)
1A and 1C, 2A and 2C (left I/O banks)
3A and 3B, 4A and 4B (bottom I/O banks)
5A and 5C, 6A and 6C (right I/O banks)
7A and 7B, 8A and 8B (top I/O banks)
■EP4SE530 (2)
■EP4SE820 (2)
1A and 1B, 2A and 2B or 1B and 1C, 2B and 2C (left I/O
banks) (3)
5A and 5B, 6A and 6B or 5B and 5C, 6B and 6C (right I/O
banks) (3)
■EP4S40G2
■EP4S40G5
■EP4S100G2
■EP4S100G5
3A and 3B, 4A and 4B (bottom I/O banks)
7A and 7B, 8A and 8B (top I/O banks)
1760-Pin
FineLine BGA
■EP4SGX290
■EP4SGX360
■EP4SGX530
1A and 1C, 2A and 2C (left I/O banks)
3A and 3B, 4A and 4B (bottom I/O banks)
5A and 5C, 6A and 6C (right I/O banks)
7A and 7B, 8A and 8B (top I/O banks)
■EP4SE530 (2)
■EP4SE820 (2)
1A and 1B, 2A and 2B or 1B and 1C, 2B and 2C (left I/O
banks) (3)
5A and 5B, 6A and 6B or 5B and 5C, 6B and 6C (right I/O
banks) (3)
1932-Pin
FineLine BGA
■EP4SGX290 (2)
■EP4SGX360 (2)
■EP4SGX530 (2)
1A and 1C, 2A and 2C (left I/O banks)
5A and 5C, 6A and 6C (right I/O banks)
Notes to Table 7–3:
(1) Each side of the device in these packages has four remaining ×8/×9 groups. You can combine them for the write
side (only) if you want to keep the ×36 QDR II+/QDR II SRAM interface on one side of the device. You must change
the Memory Interface Data Group default assignment from the default 18 to 9 in this case.
(2) This device supports ×36 DQS/DQ groups on the top and bottom I/O banks natively.
(3) Although it is possible to combine the ×16/×18 DQS/DQ groups from I/O banks 1A and 1C, 2A and 2C, 5A and 5C,
and 6A and 6C, Altera does not recommend this due to the size of the package. Similarly, crossing a bank number
(for example, combining groups from I/O banks 6C and 5C) is not supported in this package.
Table 7–3. Possible Group Combinations in Stratix IV Devices (Part 2 of 2)
Package Device Density I/O Sub-Bank Combinations
Chapter 7: External Memory Interfaces in Stratix IV Devices 7–29
Stratix IV External Memory Interface Features
February 2011 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
Stratix IV External Memory Interface Features
Stratix IV devices are rich with features that allow robust high-performance external
memory interfacing. The ALTMEMPHY megafunction allows you to use these
external memory interface features and helps set up the physical interface (PHY) best
suited for your system. This section describes each Stratix IV device feature that is
used in external memory interfaces from the DQS phase-shift circuitry, DQS logic
block, leveling multiplexers, and dynamic OCT control block.
1The ALTMEMPHY megafunction and the Altera memory controller MegaCore®
functions can run at half the frequency of the I/O interface of the memory devices to
allow better timing management in high-speed memory interfaces. Stratix IV devices
have built-in registers in the IOE to convert data from full-rate (the I/O frequency) to
half-rate (the controller frequency) and vice versa. You can bypass these registers if
your memory controller is not running at half the rate of the I/O frequency. When
using the Altera memory controller MegaCore functions, the ALTMEMPHY
megafunction is instantiated for you.
fFor more information about the ALTMEMPHY megafunction, refer to the External
Memory PHY Interface (ALTMEMPHY) (nonAFI) Megafunction User Guide.
DQS Phase-Shift Circuitry
Stratix IV phase-shift circuitry provides phase shift to the DQS/CQ and CQn pins on
read transactions when the DQS/CQ and CQn pins are acting as input clocks or
strobes to the FPGA. The DQS phase-shift circuitry consists of DLLs that are shared
between multiple DQS pins and the phase-offset module to further fine-tune the DQS
phase shift for different sides of the device.
7–30 Chapter 7: External Memory Interfaces in Stratix IV Devices
Stratix IV External Memory Interface Features
Stratix IV Device Handbook February 2011 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Figure 7–21 shows how the DQS phase-shift circuitry is connected to the DQS/CQ
and CQn pins in the device where memory interfaces are supported on all sides of the
Stratix IV device.
DQS phase-shift circuitry is connected to the DQS logic blocks that control each
DQS/CQ or CQn pin. The DQS logic blocks allow the DQS delay settings to be
updated concurrently at every DQS/CQ or CQn pin.
Figure 7–21. DQS/CQ and CQn Pins and DQS Phase-Shift Circuitry (1), (2)
Notes to Figure 7–21:
(1) For possible reference input clock pins for each DLL, refer to “DLL” on page 7–31.
(2) You can configure each DQS/CQ and CQn pin with a phase shift based on one of two possible DLL output settings.
DLL
Reference
Clock
DQS
Phase-Shift
Circuitry
DQS/CQ
Pin
CQn
Pin
CQn
Pin
DQS/CQ
Pin
to
IOE
Δt
Δt
Δt
Δt
DQS
Phase-Shift
Circuitry
DLL
Reference
Clock
DLL
Reference
Clock
DQS/CQ
Pin
CQn
Pin
DQS/CQ
Pin
CQn
Pin
to IOE to IOE to IOE
ΔtΔtΔt
to IOE
Δt
DQS Logic
Blocks
DQS/CQ
Pin
CQn
Pin
CQn
Pin
DQS/CQ
Pin
to IOE to IOE
to IOE
to IOE
Δt
Δt
ΔtΔt
DQS/CQ
Pin
CQn
Pin
DQS/CQ
Pin
CQn
Pin
Δt
Δt
Δt
Δt
DQS Logic
Blocks
DLL
Reference
Clock
DQS
Phase-Shift
Circuitry
to
IOE
to
IOE
to
IOE
DQS
Phase-Shift
Circuitry
to
IOE
to
IOE
to
IOE
to
IOE
Chapter 7: External Memory Interfaces in Stratix IV Devices 7–31
Stratix IV External Memory Interface Features
February 2011 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
DLL
DQS phase-shift circuitry uses a DLL to dynamically control the clock delay needed
by the DQS/CQ and CQn pin. The DLL, in turn, uses a frequency reference to
dynamically generate control signals for the delay chains in each of the DQS/CQ and
CQn pins, allowing it to compensate for PVT variations. The DQS delay settings are
Gray-coded to reduce jitter when the DLL updates the settings. The phase-shift
circuitry needs 1,280 clock cycles to lock and calculate the correct input clock period
when the DLL is in low jitter mode. Otherwise, only 256 clock cycles are needed. Do
not send data during these clock cycles because there is no guarantee that it will be
captured properly. As the settings from the DLL may not be stable until this lock
period has elapsed, be aware that anything using these settings (including the
leveling delay system) may be unstable during this period.
1You can still use the DQS phase-shift circuitry for any memory interfaces that are less
than 100 MHz. However, the DQS signal may not shift over 2.5 ns. Even if the DQS
signal is not shifted exactly to the middle of the DQ valid window, the I/O element
should still be able to capture the data in low-frequency applications in which a large
amount of timing margin is available.
There are a maximum of four DLLs in a Stratix IV device, located in each corner of the
device. These four DLLs support a maximum of four unique frequencies, with each
DLL running at one frequency. Each DLL can have two outputs with different phase
offsets, which allows one Stratix IV device to have eight different DLL phase shift
settings.
7–32 Chapter 7: External Memory Interfaces in Stratix IV Devices
Stratix IV External Memory Interface Features
Stratix IV Device Handbook February 2011 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Figure 7–22 shows the DLL and I/O bank locations in Stratix IV devices from a
die-top view if all sides of the device support external memory interfaces.
The DLL can access the two adjacent sides from its location within the device. For
example, DLL0 on the top left of the device can access the top side (I/O banks 7A, 7B,
7C, 8A, 8B, and 8C) and the left side of the device (I/O banks 1A, 1B, 1C, 2A, 2B, and
2C). This means that each I/O bank is accessible by two DLLs, giving more flexibility
to create multiple frequencies and multiple-type interfaces. You can have two
different interfaces with the same frequency on the two sides adjacent to a DLL, where
the DLL controls the DQS delay settings for both interfaces.
Each bank can use settings from either or both DLLs the bank is adjacent to. For
example,
DQS1L
can get its phase-shift settings from DLL0, while
DQS2L
can get its
phase-shift settings from DLL1. Table 7–4 lists the DLL location and supported I/O
banks for Stratix IV devices.
Figure 7–22. Stratix IV DLL and I/O Bank Locations (Die-Top View)
PLL_T1 PLL_T2
PLL_B1 PLL_B2
Stratix IV FPGA
8A 8B 8C 7C 7B 7A
3A 3B 3C 4C 4B 4A
2A
2B
2C
PLL_L2
1C
1B
1A
5A
5B
5C
6C
6B
6A
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
DLL0
PLL_L1
DLL3
PLL_R1
DLL2
PLL_R4
DLL1
PLL_L4
PLL_R3
PLL_R2
PLL_L3
Chapter 7: External Memory Interfaces in Stratix IV Devices 7–33
Stratix IV External Memory Interface Features
February 2011 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
1You can only have one memory interface in each I/O sub-bank (such as I/O
sub-banks 1A, 1B, and 1C) when you use leveling delay chains. This is because there
is only one leveling delay chain per I/O sub-bank.
The reference clock for each DLL may come from PLL output clocks or any of the two
dedicated clock input pins located in either side of the DLL. Table 7–5 through
Table 7–17 lists the available DLL reference clock input resources for the Stratix IV
device family.
1When you have a dedicated PLL that only generates the DLL input reference clock, set
the PLL mode to No Compensation to achieve better performance or the Quartus II
software changes it automatically. Because the PLL does not use any other outputs, it
does not need to compensate for any clock paths.
Table 7–4. DLL Location and Supported I/O Banks
DLL Location Accessible I/O Banks (1)
DLL0 Top-left corner 1A, 1B, 1C, 2A, 2B, 2C, 7A, 7B, 7C, 8A, 8B, 8C
DLL1 Bottom-left corner 1A, 1B, 1C, 2A, 2B, 2C, 3A, 3B, 3C, 4A, 4B, 4C
DLL2 Bottom-right corner 3A, 3B, 3C, 4A, 4B, 4C, 5A, 5B, 5C, 6A, 6B, 6C
DLL3 Top-right corner 5A, 5B, 5C, 6A, 6B, 6C, 7A, 7B, 7C, 8A, 8B, 8C
Note to Table 7–4:
(1) The DLL can access these I/O banks if they are available for memory interfacing.
Table 7–5. DLL Reference Clock Input for EP4SGX70, EP4SGX110, EP4SGX180, and EP4SGX230 Devices in the 780-Pin
FineLine BGA Package
DLL CLKIN
(Top/Bottom)
CLKIN
(Left/Right)
PLL
(Top/Bottom)
PLL
(Left/Right)
PLL
(Corner)
DLL0
CLK12P
CLK13P
CLK14P
CLK15P
CLK0P
CLK1P
CLK2P
CLK3P
PLL_T1 PLL_L2 —
DLL1
CLK4P
CLK5P
CLK6P
CLK7P
CLK0P
CLK1P
CLK2P
CLK3P
PLL_B1 — —
DLL2
CLK4P
CLK5P
CLK6P
CLK7P
— PLL_B1 — —
DLL3
CLK12P
CLK13P
CLK14P
CLK15P
— PLL_T1 — —
7–34 Chapter 7: External Memory Interfaces in Stratix IV Devices
Stratix IV External Memory Interface Features
Stratix IV Device Handbook February 2011 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Table 7–6. DLL Reference Clock Input for EP4SE230 and EP4SE360 Devices in the 780-Pin FineLine BGA Package
DLL CLKIN
(Top/Bottom)
CLKIN
(Left/Right)
PLL
(Top/Bottom)
PLL
(Left/Right)
PLL
(Corner)
DLL0
CLK12P
CLK13P
CLK14P
CLK15P
CLK0P
CLK1P
CLK2P
CLK3P
PLL_T1 PLL_L2 —
DLL1
CLK4P
CLK5P
CLK6P
CLK7P
CLK0P
CLK1P
CLK2P
CLK3P
PLL_B1 PLL_L2 —
DLL2
CLK4P
CLK5P
CLK6P
CLK7P
CLK8P
CLK9P
CLK10P
CLK11P
PLL_B1 PLL_R2 —
DLL3
CLK12P
CLK13P
CLK14P
CLK15P
CLK8P
CLK9P
CLK10P
CLK11P
PLL_T1 PLL_R2 —
Table 7–7. DLL Reference Clock Input for EP4SGX290 and EP4SGX360 Devices in the 780-Pin FineLine BGA Package
DLL CLKIN (Top/Bottom) CLKIN
(Left/Right) PLL (Top/Bottom) PLL
(Left/Right)
PLL
(Corner)
DLL0
CLK12P
CLK13P
CLK14P
CLK15P
— PLL_T1 — —
DLL1
CLK4P
CLK5P
CLK6P
CLK7P
— PLL_B1 — —
DLL2
CLK4P
CLK5P
CLK6P
CLK7P
— PLL_B2 — —
DLL3
CLK12P
CLK13P
CLK14P
CLK15P
— PLL_T2 — —
Chapter 7: External Memory Interfaces in Stratix IV Devices 7–35
Stratix IV External Memory Interface Features
February 2011 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
Table 7–8. DLL Reference Clock Input for EP4SGX70 and EP4SGX110 Devices in the 1152-Pin FineLine BGA Package
(with 24 Transceivers)
DLL CLKIN
(Top/Bottom)
CLKIN
(Left/Right)
PLL
(Top/Bottom)
PLL
(Left/Right)
PLL
(Corner)
DLL0
CLK12P
CLK13P
CLK14P
CLK15P
CLK0P
CLK1P
CLK2P
CLK3P
PLL_T1 PLL_L2 —
DLL1
CLK4P
CLK5P
CLK6P
CLK7P
CLK0P
CLK1P
CLK2P
CLK3P
PLL_B1 PLL_L2 —
DLL2
CLK4P
CLK5P
CLK6P
CLK7P
CLK8P
CLK9P
CLK10P
CLK11P
PLL_B1 PLL_R2 —
DLL3
CLK12P
CLK13P
CLK14P
CLK15P
CLK8P
CLK9P
CLK10P
CLK11P
PLL_T1 PLL_R2 —
Table 7–9. DLL Reference Clock Input for EP4SGX110 Devices in the 1152-Pin FineLine BGA Package (with 16
Transceivers)
DLL CLKIN
(Top/Bottom)
CLKIN
(Left/Right)
PLL
(Top/Bottom)
PLL
(Left/Right)
PLL
(Corner)
DLL0
CLK12P
CLK13P
CLK14P
CLK15P
CLK0P
CLK1P PLL_T1 PLL_L2 —
DLL1
CLK4P
CLK5P
CLK6P
CLK7P
CLK0P
CLK1P PLL_B1 — —
DLL2
CLK4P
CLK5P
CLK6P
CLK7P
CLK10P
CLK11P PLL_B1 — —
DLL3
CLK12P
CLK13P
CLK14P
CLK15P
CLK10P
CLK11P PLL_T1 PLL_R2 —
7–36 Chapter 7: External Memory Interfaces in Stratix IV Devices
Stratix IV External Memory Interface Features
Stratix IV Device Handbook February 2011 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Table 7–10. DLL Reference Clock Input for EP4SGX180, EP4SGX230, EP4SGX290, EP4SGX360, and EP4SGX530 Devices
in the 1152-Pin FineLine BGA Package
DLL CLKIN
(Top/Bottom)
CLKIN
(Left/Right)
PLL
(Top/Bottom)
PLL
(Left/Right)
PLL
(Corner)
DLL0
CLK12P
CLK13P
CLK14P
CLK15P
CLK0P
CLK1P PLL_T1 PLL_L2 —
DLL1
CLK4P
CLK5P
CLK6P
CLK7P
CLK0P
CLK1P PLL_B1 — —
DLL2
CLK4P
CLK5P
CLK6P
CLK7P
CLK10P
CLK11P PLL_B2 — —
DLL3
CLK12P
CLK13P
CLK14P
CLK15P
CLK10P
CLK11P PLL_T2 PLL_R2 —
Table 7–11. DLL Reference Clock Input for EP4SE360, EP4SE530, and EP4SE820 Devices in the 1152-Pin FineLine BGA
Packages
DLL CLKIN
(Top/Bottom)
CLKIN
(Left/Right)
PLL
(Top/Bottom)
PLL
(Left/Right)
PLL
(Corner)
DLL0
CLK12P
CLK13P
CLK14P
CLK15P
CLK0P
CLK1P
CLK2P
CLK3P
PLL_T1 PLL_L2 —
DLL1
CLK4P
CLK5P
CLK6P
CLK7P
CLK0P
CLK1P
CLK2P
CLK3P
PLL_B1 PLL_L3 —
DLL2
CLK4P
CLK5P
CLK6P
CLK7P
CLK8P
CLK9P
CLK10P
CLK11P
PLL_B2 PLL_R3 —
DLL3
CLK12P
CLK13P
CLK14P
CLK15P
CLK8P
CLK9P
CLK10P
CLK11P
PLL_T2 PLL_R2 —
Chapter 7: External Memory Interfaces in Stratix IV Devices 7–37
Stratix IV External Memory Interface Features
February 2011 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
Table 7–12. DLL Reference Clock Input for EP4SE530 and EP4SE820 Devices in the 1517- and 1760-Pin FineLine BGA
Packages
DLL CLKIN
(Top/Bottom)
CLKIN
(Left/Right)
PLL
(Top/Bottom)
PLL
(Left/Right)
PLL
(Corner)
DLL0
CLK12P
CLK13P
CLK14P
CLK15P
CLK0P
CLK1P
CLK2P
CLK3P
PLL_T1 PLL_L2 PLL_L1
DLL1
CLK4P
CLK5P
CLK6P
CLK7P
CLK0P
CLK1P
CLK2P
CLK3P
PLL_B1 PLL_L3 PLL_L4
DLL2
CLK4P
CLK5P
CLK6P
CLK7P
CLK8P
CLK9P
CLK10P
CLK11P
PLL_B2 PLL_R3 PLL_R4
DLL3
CLK12P
CLK13P
CLK14P
CLK15P
CLK8P
CLK9P
CLK10P
CLK11P
PLL_T2 PLL_R2 PLL_R1
Table 7–13. DLL Reference Clock Input for EP4SGX180, EP4SGX230, EP4SGX290, EP4SGX360, and EP4SGX530 Devices
in the 1517-Pin FineLine BGA Package
DLL CLKIN
(Top/Bottom)
CLKIN
(Left/Right)
PLL
(Top/Bottom)
PLL
(Left/Right)
PLL
(Corner)
DLL0
CLK12P
CLK13P
CLK14P
CLK15P
CLK0P
CLK1P
CLK2P
CLK3P
PLL_T1 PLL_L2 —
DLL1
CLK4P
CLK5P
CLK6P
CLK7P
CLK0P
CLK1P
CLK2P
CLK3P
PLL_B1 PLL_L3 —
DLL2
CLK4P
CLK5P
CLK6P
CLK7P
CLK8P
CLK9P
CLK10P
CLK11P
PLL_B2 PLL_R3 —
DLL3
CLK12P
CLK13P
CLK14P
CLK15P
CLK8P
CLK9P
CLK10P
CLK11P
PLL_T2 PLL_R2 —
7–38 Chapter 7: External Memory Interfaces in Stratix IV Devices
Stratix IV External Memory Interface Features
Stratix IV Device Handbook February 2011 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Table 7–14. DLL Reference Clock Input for EP4S40G2, EP4S40G5, EP4S100G2, and EP4S100G5 Devices in the 1517-Pin
FineLine BGA Package
DLL CLKIN
(Top/Bottom)
CLKIN
(Left/Right)
PLL
(Top/Bottom)
PLL
(Left/Right)
PLL
(Corner)
DLL0
CLK12P
CLK13P
CLK14P
CLK15P
CLK1P
CLK3P PLL_T1 PLL_L2 —
DLL1
CLK4P
CLK5P
CLK6P
CLK7P
CLK1P
CLK3P PLL_B1 PLL_L3 —
DLL2
CLK4P
CLK5P
CLK6P
CLK7P
CLK8P
CLK10P PLL_B2 PLL_R3 —
DLL3
CLK12P
CLK13P
CLK14P
CLK15P
CLK8P
CLK10P PLL_T2 PLL_R2 —
Table 7–15. DLL Reference Clock Input for EP4SGX290, EP4SGX360, and EP4SGX530 Devices in the 1760-Pin FineLine
BGA Package
DLL CLKIN
(Top/Bottom)
CLKIN
(Left/Right)
PLL
(Top/Bottom)
PLL
(Left/Right)
PLL
(Corner)
DLL0
CLK12P
CLK13P
CLK14P
CLK15P
CLK0P
CLK1P
CLK2P
CLK3P
PLL_T1 PLL_L2 —
DLL1
CLK4P
CLK5P
CLK6P
CLK7P
CLK0P
CLK1P
CLK2P
CLK3P
PLL_B1 PLL_L3 —
DLL2
CLK4P
CLK5P
CLK6P
CLK7P
CLK8P
CLK9P
CLK10P
CLK11P
PLL_B2 PLL_R3 —
DLL3
CLK12P
CLK13P
CLK14P
CLK15P
CLK8P
CLK9P
CLK10P
CLK11P
PLL_T2 PLL_R2 —
Chapter 7: External Memory Interfaces in Stratix IV Devices 7–39
Stratix IV External Memory Interface Features
February 2011 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
Table 7–16. DLL Reference Clock Input for EP4SGX290, EP4SGX360, and EP4SGX530 Devices in the 1932-Pin FineLine
BGA Package
DLL CLKIN
(Top/Bottom)
CLKIN
(Left/Right)
PLL
(Top/Bottom)
PLL
(Left/Right)
PLL
(Corner)
DLL0
CLK12P
CLK13P
CLK14P
CLK15P
CLK0P
CLK1P
CLK2P
CLK3P
PLL_T1 PLL_L2 PLL_L1
DLL1
CLK4P
CLK5P
CLK6P
CLK7P
CLK0P
CLK1P
CLK2P
CLK3P
PLL_B1 PLL_L3 PLL_L4
DLL2
CLK4P
CLK5P
CLK6P
CLK7P
CLK8P
CLK9P
CLK10P
CLK11P
PLL_B2 PLL_R3 PLL_R4
DLL3
CLK12P
CLK13P
CLK14P
CLK15P
CLK8P
CLK9P
CLK10P
CLK11P
PLL_T2 PLL_R2 PLL_R1
Table 7–17. DLL Reference Clock Input for EP4S100G3, EP4S100G4, and EP4S100G5 Devices in the 1932-Pin FineLine
BGA Package
DLL CLKIN
(Top/Bottom)
CLKIN
(Left/Right)
PLL
(Top/Bottom)
PLL
(Left/Right)
PLL
(Corner)
DLL0
CLK12P
CLK13P
CLK14P
CLK15P
— PLL_T1 PLL_L2 PLL_L1
DLL1
CLK4P
CLK5P
CLK6P
CLK7P
— PLL_B1 PLL_L3 PLL_L4
DLL2
CLK4P
CLK5P
CLK6P
CLK7P
CLK9P
CLK11P PLL_B2 PLL_R3 PLL_R4
DLL3
CLK12P
CLK13P
CLK14P
CLK15P
CLK9P
CLK11P PLL_T2 PLL_R2 PLL_R1
7–40 Chapter 7: External Memory Interfaces in Stratix IV Devices
Stratix IV External Memory Interface Features
Stratix IV Device Handbook February 2011 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Figure 7–23 shows a simple block diagram of the DLL. The input reference clock goes
into the DLL to a chain of up to 16 delay elements. The phase comparator compares
the signal coming out of the end of the delay chain block to the input reference clock.
The phase comparator then issues the
upndn
signal to the Gray-code counter. This
signal increments or decrements a six-bit delay setting (DQS delay settings) that
increases or decreases the delay through the delay element chain to bring the input
reference clock and the signals coming out of the delay element chain in phase.
1In the Quartus II assignment, phase offset control block ‘A’ is designated as
DLLOFFSETCTRL_<coordinate x>_<coordinate y>_N1
and phase offset control block
‘B’ is designated as
DLLOFFSETCTRL_<coordinate x>_<coordinate y>_N2
.
You can reset the DLL from either the logic array or a user I/O pin. Each time the DLL
is reset, you must wait for 1,280 clock cycles for the DLL to lock before you can
capture the data properly.
Depending on the DLL frequency mode, the DLL can shift the incoming DQS signals
by 0°, 22.5°, 30°, 36°, 45°, 60°, 67.5°, 72°, 90°, 108°, 120°, 135°, 144°, 180°, or 240°. The
shifted DQS signal is then used as the clock for the DQ IOE input registers.
All DQS/CQ and CQn pins, referenced to the same DLL, can have their input signal
phase shifted by a different degree amount but all must be referenced at one
particular frequency. For example, you can have a 90° phase shift on
DQS1T
and a 60°
phase shift on
DQS2T
, referenced from a 200-MHz clock. Not all phase-shift
combinations are supported. The phase shifts on the DQS pins referenced by the same
DLL must all be a multiple of 22.5° (up to 90°), 30° (up to 120°), 36° (up to 144°), 45°
(up to 180°), or 60° (up to 240°).
Figure 7–23. Simplified Diagram of the DQS Phase-Shift Circuitry (1)
Notes to Figure 7–23:
(1) All features of the DQS phase-shift circuitry are accessible from the ALTMEMPHY megafunction in the Quartus II software.
(2) The input reference clock for the DQS phase-shift circuitry can come from a PLL output clock or an input clock pin. For more information, refer
to Table 7–5 on page 7–33 through Table 7–17 on page 7–39.
(3) Phase offset settings can only go to the DQS logic blocks.
(4) DQS delay settings can go to the logic array, DQS logic block, and leveling circuitry.
6
6
6
Phase
Offset
Control
A
6
Phase offset settings
from the logic array
Phase offset
settings to DQS pins
on top or bottom edge (3)
DQS Delay
Settings
delayctrlout [5:0]
offsetdelayctrlout [5:0]
offsetdelayctrlout [5:0]
dqsupdate
aload
clk
(4)
Input Reference
Clock (2) upndnin
upndninclkena
DLL
6
Phase
Comparator
Delay Chains
Up/Down
Counter
6
Phase
Offset
Control
B
Phase offset settings
from the logic array
Phase offset
settings to DQS pin
on left or right edge
(3)
6
addnsub
(dll_offset_ctrl_a)
(dll_offset_ctrl_b)
addnsub
( offset [5:0] )
( offset [5:0] )
( offsetctrlout [5:0] )
( offsetctrlout [5:0] )
offsetdelayctrlin [5:0]
offsetdelayctrlin [5:0]
Chapter 7: External Memory Interfaces in Stratix IV Devices 7–41
Stratix IV External Memory Interface Features
February 2011 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
There are eight different frequency modes for the Stratix IV DLL, as listed in
Table 7–18. Each frequency mode provides different phase shift selections. In
frequency mode 0, 1, 2, and 3, the 6-bit DQS delay settings vary with PVT to
implement the phase-shift delay. In frequency modes 4, 5, 6, and 7, only 5 bits of the
DQS delay settings vary with PVT to implement the phase-shift delay; the most
significant bit of the DQS delay setting is set to 0.
fFor the frequency range of each mode, refer to the DC and Switching Characteristics for
Stratix IV Devices chapter.
For 0° shift, the DQS/CQ signal bypasses both the DLL and DQS logic blocks. The
Quartus II software automatically sets the DQ input delay chains so that the skew
between the DQ and DQS/CQ pin at the DQ IOE registers is negligible when 0° shift
is implemented. You can feed the DQS delay settings to the DQS logic block and logic
array.
The shifted DQS/CQ signal goes to the DQS bus to clock the IOE input registers of the
DQ pins. The signal can also go into the logic array for resynchronization if you are
not using IOE resynchronization registers. The shifted CQn signal can only go to the
negative-edge input register in the DQ IOE and is only used for QDR II+ and QDR II
SRAM interfaces.
Phase Offset Control
Each DLL has two phase-offset modules and can provide two separate DQS delay
settings with independent offsets, one for the top and bottom I/O bank and one for
the left and right I/O bank, so you can fine-tune the DQS phase-shift settings between
two different sides of the device. Even though you have independent phase offset
control, the frequency of the interface using the same DLL must be the same. Use the
phase offset control module for making small shifts to the input signal and use the
DQS phase-shift circuitry for larger signal shifts. For example, if the DLL only offers a
multiple of 30° phase shift, but your interface needs a 67.5° phase shift on the DQS
signal, you can use two delay chains in the DQS logic blocks to give you 60° phase
shift and use the phase offset control feature to implement the extra 7.5° phase shift.
Table 7–18. Stratix IV DLL Frequency Modes
Frequency Mode Available Phase Shift Number of Delay Chains
0 22.5, 45, 67.5, 90 16
1 30, 60, 90, 120 12
2 36, 72, 108, 144 10
3 45, 90, 135, 180 8
4 30, 60, 90, 120 12
5 36, 72, 108, 144 10
6 45, 90, 135, 180 8
7 60, 120, 180, 240 6
7–42 Chapter 7: External Memory Interfaces in Stratix IV Devices
Stratix IV External Memory Interface Features
Stratix IV Device Handbook February 2011 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
You can use either a static phase offset or a dynamic phase offset to implement the
additional phase shift. The available additional phase shift is implemented in 2’s:
complement in Gray-code between settings –64 to +63 for frequency mode 0, 1, 2, and
3, and between settings –32 to +31 for frequency modes 4, 5, 6, and 7. An additional bit
indicates whether the setting has a positive or negative value. The settings are linear,
each phase offset setting adds a delay amount specified in the DC and Switching
Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices chapter. The DQS phase shift is the sum of the DLL
delay settings and the user-selected phase offset settings whose top setting is 64 for
frequency modes 0, 1, 2, and 3; and 32 for frequency modes 4, 5, 6, and 7, so the actual
physical offset setting range is 64 or 32 subtracted by the DQS delay settings from the
DLL.
1When using this feature, you need to monitor the DQS delay settings to know how
many offsets you can add and subtract in the system. Note that the DQS delay settings
output by the DLL are also Gray coded.
For example, if the DLL determines that DQS delay settings of 28 is needed to achieve
a 30° phase shift in DLL frequency mode 1, you can subtract up to 28 phase offset
settings and you can add up to 35 phase offset settings to achieve the optimal delay
that you need. However, if the same DQS delay settings of 28 is needed to achieve 30°
phase shift in DLL frequency mode 4, you can still subtract up to 28 phase offset
settings, but you can only add up to 3 phase offset settings before the DQS delay
settings reach their maximum settings because DLL frequency mode 4 only uses 5-bit
DLL delay settings.
fFor more information about the value for each step, refer to the DC and Switching
Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices chapter.
When using static phase offset, you can specify the phase offset amount in the
ALTMEMPHY megafunction as a positive number for addition or a negative number
for subtraction. You can also have a dynamic phase offset that is always added to,
subtracted from, or both added to and subtracted from the DLL phase shift. When
you always add or subtract, you can dynamically input the phase offset amount into
the
dll_offset[5..0]
port. When you want to both add and subtract dynamically,
you control the
addnsub
signal in addition to the
dll_offset[5..0]
signals.
7–43 Chapter 7: External Memory Interfaces in Stratix IV Devices
Stratix IV External Memory Interface Features
Stratix IV Device Handbook February 2011 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
DQS Logic Block
Each DQS/CQ and CQn pin is connected to a separate DQS logic block, which consists of the DQS delay chains, update enable
circuitry, and DQS postamble circuitry, as shown in Figure 7–24.
Figure 7–24. Stratix IV DQS Logic Block
Notes to Figure 7–24:
(1) The input reference clock for the DQS phase-shift circuitry can come from a PLL output clock or an input clock pin. For more information, refer to Table 7–5 on page 7–33 through Table 7–17 on page 7–39.
(2) The dqsenable signal can also come from the Stratix IV FPGA fabric.
DD Update
Enable
Circuitry
6
6
6
6 4
6
66
DQS delay
settings from the
DQS phase-shift
circuitry
DQS/CQ or
CQn Pin dqsin
delayctrlin [5:0]
offsetctrlin [5:0]
<dqs_offsetctrl_enable>
dqsupdateen
<dqs_ctrl_latches_enable>
phasectrlin[2:0]
DQS Delay Chain
Bypass
6
6
DQS Enable Control
Postamble
Enable
dqsenablein
dqsenableout
enaphasetransferreg
<level_dqs_enable>
<delay_dqs_enable_by_half_cycle>
postamble control clock
Resynchronization
Clock
delayctrlin
clk
phasectrlin
phaseinvertctrl
0
1
0
1
0
10
1
DQS Enable
DQS bus
PRE
Q
dqsenable (2)
dqsbusout
dqsin
dqsbusoutD
1xx
000
001
010
011
0
1
0
1
1
0
0110
0101
0100
0011
0010
0001
0000
0111
Q
Q
Input Reference
Clock (1)
Phase offset
settings from the
DQS phase-shift
circuitry
7–44 Chapter 7: External Memory Interfaces in Stratix IV Devices
Stratix IV External Memory Interface Features
Stratix IV Device Handbook February 2011 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
DQS Delay Chain
DQS delay chains consist of a set of variable delay elements to allow the input
DQS/CQ and CQn signals to be shifted by the amount specified by the DQS
phase-shift circuitry or the logic array. There are four delay elements in the DQS delay
chain; the first delay chain closest to the DQS/CQ pin can be shifted either by the
DQS delay settings or by the sum of the DQS delay setting and the phase-offset
setting. The number of delay chains required is transparent because the
ALTMEMPHY megafunction automatically sets it when you choose the operating
frequency. The DQS delay settings can come from the DQS phase-shift circuitry on
either end of the I/O banks or from the logic array.
The delay elements in the DQS logic block have the same characteristics as the delay
elements in the DLL. When the DLL is not used to control the DQS delay chains, you
can input your own Gray-coded 6-bit or 5-bit settings using the
dqs_delayctrlin[5..0]
signals available in the ALTMEMPHY megafunction. These
settings control 1, 2, 3, or all 4 delay elements in the DQS delay chains. The
ALTMEMPHY megafunction can also dynamically choose the number of DQS delay
chains needed for the system. The amount of delay is equal to the sum of the delay
element’s intrinsic delay and the product of the number of delay steps and the value
of the delay steps.
You can also bypass the DQS delay chain to achieve a 0° phase shift.
Update Enable Circuitry
Both the DQS delay settings and the phase-offset settings pass through a register
before going into the DQS delay chains. The registers are controlled by the update
enable circuitry to allow enough time for any changes in the DQS delay setting bits to
arrive at all the delay elements. This allows them to be adjusted at the same time. The
update enable circuitry enables the registers to allow enough time for the DQS delay
settings to travel from the DQS phase-shift circuitry or core logic to all the DQS logic
blocks before the next change. It uses the input reference clock or a user clock from the
core to generate the update enable output. The ALTMEMPHY megafunction uses this
circuit by default. Figure 7–25 shows an example waveform of the update enable
circuitry output.
Figure 7–25. DQS Update Enable Waveform
Update Enable
Circuitry Output
System Clock
DQS Delay Settings
(Updated every 8 cycles)
DLL Counter Update
(Every 8 cycles)
6 bit
DLL Counter Update
(Every 8 cycles)
Chapter 7: External Memory Interfaces in Stratix IV Devices 7–45
Stratix IV External Memory Interface Features
February 2011 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
DQS Postamble Circuitry
For external memory interfaces that use a bidirectional read strobe such as in DDR3,
DDR2, and DDR SDRAM, the DQS signal is low before going to or coming from a
high-impedance state. The state in which DQS is low, just after a high-impedance
state, is called the preamble; the state in which DQS is low, just before it returns to a
high-impedance state, is called the postamble. There are preamble and postamble
specifications for both read and write operations in DDR3, DDR2, and DDR SDRAM.
The DQS postamble circuitry ensures that data is not lost if there is noise on the DQS
line during the end of a read operation that occurs while DQS is in a postamble state.
Stratix IV devices have dedicated postamble registers that you can control to ground
the shifted DQS signal used to clock the DQ input registers at the end of a read
operation. This ensures that any glitches on the DQS input signals during the end of a
read operation that occurs while DQS is in a postamble state do not affect the DQ IOE
registers.
In addition to the dedicated postamble register, Stratix IV devices also have an HDR
block inside the postamble enable circuitry. Use these registers if the controller is
running at half the frequency of the I/Os.
Using the HDR block as the first stage capture register in the postamble enable
circuitry block is optional. The HDR block is clocked by the half-rate
resynchronization clock, which is the output of the I/O clock divider circuit (shown in
Figure 7–31 on page 7–49). There is an AND gate after the postamble register outputs
that is used to avoid postamble glitches from a previous read burst on a
non-consecutive read burst. This scheme allows a half-a-clock cycle latency for
dqsenable
assertion and zero latency for
dqsenable
de-assertion, as shown in
Figure 7–26.
Figure 7–26. Avoiding Glitch on a Non-Consecutive Read Burst Waveform
Delayed by
1/2T logic
Preamble
Postamble
Postamble glitch
DQS
Postamble Enable
dqsenable
7–46 Chapter 7: External Memory Interfaces in Stratix IV Devices
Stratix IV External Memory Interface Features
Stratix IV Device Handbook February 2011 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Leveling Circuitry
DDR3 SDRAM unbuffered modules use a fly-by clock distribution topology for better
signal integrity. This means that the CK/CK# signals arrive at each DDR3 SDRAM
device in the module at different times. The difference in arrival time between the first
DDR3 SDRAM device and the last device on the module can be as long as 1.6 ns.
Figure 7–27 shows the clock topology in DDR3 SDRAM unbuffered modules.
Because the data and read strobe signals are still point-to-point, take special care to
ensure that the timing relationship between the CK/CK# and DQS signals (
tDQSS
,
tDSS
, and
tDSH
) during a write is met at every device on the modules. Furthermore,
read data coming back into the FPGA from the memory is also staggered in a similar
way.
Stratix IV FPGAs have leveling circuitry to address these two situations. There is one
leveling circuitry per I/O sub-bank (for example, I/O sub-bank 1A, 1B, and 1C each
has one leveling circuitry). These delay chains are PVT-compensated by the same DQS
delay settings as the DLL and DQS delay chains.
For frequencies equal to and above 400 MHz, the DLL uses eight delay chains, such
that each delay chain generates a 45° delay. The generated clock phases are
distributed to every DQS logic block that is available in the I/O sub-bank. The delay
chain taps then feeds a multiplexer controlled by the ALTMEMPHY megafunction to
select which clock phases are to be used for that ×4 or × 8 DQS group. Each group can
use a different tap output from the read-leveling and write-leveling delay chains to
compensate for the different CK/CK# delay going into each device on the module.
Figure 7–27. DDR3 SDRAM Unbuffered Module Clock Topology
DQS/DQ DQS/DQDQS/DQ
DQS/DQ
DQS/DQ DQS/DQ CK/CK#
Stratix IV Device
DQS/DQ DQS/DQ
Chapter 7: External Memory Interfaces in Stratix IV Devices 7–47
Stratix IV External Memory Interface Features
February 2011 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
Figure 7–28 and Figure 7–29 show the Stratix IV write- and read-leveling circuitry.
The –90° write clock of the ALTMEMPHY megafunction feeds the write-leveling
circuitry to produce the clock to generate the DQS and DQ signals. During
initialization, the ALTMEMPHY megafunction picks the correct write-leveled clock
for the DQS and DQ clocks for each DQS/DQ group after sweeping all the available
clocks in the write calibration process. The DQ clock output is –90° phase-shifted
compared to the DQS clock output.
Similarly, the resynchronization clock feeds the read-leveling circuitry to produce the
optimal resynchronization and postamble clock for each DQS/DQ group in the
calibration process. The resynchronization and postamble clocks can use different
clock outputs from the leveling circuitry. The output from the read-leveling circuitry
can also generate the half-rate resynchronization clock that goes to the FPGA fabric.
Figure 7–28. Stratix IV Write-Leveling Delay Chains and Multiplexers (1)
Note to Figure 7–28:
(1) There is one leveling delay chain per I/O sub-bank (for example, I/O sub-banks 1A, 1B, and 1C). You can only have
one memory interface in each I/O sub-bank when you use the leveling delay chain.
Write clk
(-900)Write-Leveled DQS Clock
Write-Leveled DQ Clock
Figure 7–29. Stratix IV Read-Leveling Delay Chains and Multiplexers (1)
Notes to Figure 7–29:
(1) There is one leveling delay chain per I/O sub-bank (for example, I/O sub-banks 1A, 1B, and 1C). You can only have one memory interface in each
I/O sub-bank when you use the leveling delay chain.
(2) Each divider feeds up to six pins (from a 4 DQS group) in the device. To feed wider DQS groups, you must chain multiple clock dividers together
by feeding the
slaveout
output of one divider to the
masterin
input of the neighboring pins’ divider.
DQS
Half-Rate
Resynchronization Clock
Read-Leveled Resynchronization Clock
Half-Rate Source
Synchronous Clock
Resynchronization Clock
(resync_clk_2x)
6
phasectrlin
phaseinvertctrl
delayctrlin
0111
0110
0100
0011
0010
0001
0000
0101
0
1
4
DFF
0
1
0
1
slaveout
masterin
I/O Clock Divider (2)
use_masterin
phaseselect
clkout
7–48 Chapter 7: External Memory Interfaces in Stratix IV Devices
Stratix IV External Memory Interface Features
Stratix IV Device Handbook February 2011 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
1The ALTMEMPHY megafunction dynamically calibrates the alignment for read- and
write-leveling during the initialization process.
fFor more information about the ALTMEMPHY megafunction, refer to the External
Memory PHY Interface (ALTMEMPHY) (nonAFI) Megafunction User Guide.
Dynamic On-Chip Termination Control
Figure 7–30 shows the dynamic OCT control block. The block includes all the registers
needed to dynamically turn on OCT RT during a read and turn OCT RT off during a
write.
fFor more information about dynamic on-chip termination control, refer to the I/O
Features in Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Figure 7–30. Stratix IV Dynamic OCT Control Block
Note to Figure 7–30:
(1) The write clock comes from either the PLL or the write-leveling delay chain.
OCT Control
Write
Clock
(1)
OCT Enable
Resynchronization
Registers
OCT Half-
Rate Clock
OCT Control Path
DFFDFF
2
HDR
Block
Chapter 7: External Memory Interfaces in Stratix IV Devices 7–49
Stratix IV External Memory Interface Features
February 2011 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
I/O Element Registers
The IOE registers are expanded to allow source-synchronous systems to have faster
register-to-register transfers and resynchronization. Both top and bottom and left and
right IOEs have the same capability. Left and right IOEs have extra features to support
LVDS data transfer.
Figure 7–31 shows the registers available in the Stratix IV input path. The input path
consists of the DDR input registers, resynchronization registers, and HDR block. You
can bypass each block of the input path.
Figure 7–31. Stratix IV IOE Input Registers (1)
Notes to Figure 7–31:
(1) You can bypass each register block in this path.
(2) This is the 0-phase resynchronization clock (from the read-leveling delay chain).
(3) The input clock can be from the DQS logic block (whether the postamble circuitry is bypassed or not) or from a global clock line.
(4) This input clock comes from the CQn logic block.
(5) This resynchronization clock comes from a PLL through the clock network (resync_ck_2x).
(6) The I/O clock divider resides adjacent to the DQS logic block. In addition to the PLL and read-leveled resync clock, the I/O clock divider can also
be fed by the DQS bus or CQn bus.
(7) The half-rate data and clock signals feed into a dual-port RAM in the FPGA core.
(8) You can dynamically change the dataoutbypass signal after configuration to select either the
directin
input or the output from the half data
rate register to feed
dataout
.
(9) The DQS and DQSn signals must be inverted for DDR, DDR2, and DDR3 interfaces. When using Altera’s memory interface IPs, the DQS and DQSn
signals are automatically inverted.
(10) The bypass_output_register option allows you to select either the output from the second mux or the output of the fourth alignment/
synchronization register to feed
dataout
.
1
CQn
(4)
DFF
I
DFF
Input Reg A
Input Reg B
neg_reg_out
II
DQ
DQ
0
DQS/CQ (3), (9)
DQ
Input Reg C
DFF
DQ
Double Data Rate Input Registers
DQSn (9)
Differential
Input
Buffer
DFF
DFF
DQ
DQ
DFF
DQ
DFF
DFF
DQ
DQ
DFF
DQ
Alignment & Synchronization Registers
Half Data Rate Registers
To Core
dataout[2]
(7)
To Core
dataout [0]
(7)
To Core
dataout [3]
(7)
To Core
dataout [1]
(7)
to core (7)
0
1
dataoutbypass
(8)
(2)
DFF
D
Q
DFF
DQ
DFF
DQ
DFF
DQ
DFF
DQ
DFF
DQ
DFF
DQ
DFF
DQ
0
1
<bypass_output_register>(10)
enainputcycledelay
enaphasetransferreg
datain [1]
datain [0] dataout
dataout
0
00
1
11
0
1
directin
Resynchronization Clock
(resync_clk_2x) (5)
Half-Rate Resynchronization Clock (resync_clk_1x)
I/O Clock
Divider (6)
7–50 Chapter 7: External Memory Interfaces in Stratix IV Devices
Stratix IV External Memory Interface Features
Stratix IV Device Handbook February 2011 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
There are three registers in the DDR input registers block. Two registers capture data
on the positive and negative edges of the clock, while the third register aligns the
captured data. You can choose to use the same clock for the positive edge and
negative edge registers, or two complementary clocks (DQS/CQ for the positive-edge
register and DQSn/CQn for the negative-edge register). The third register that aligns
the captured data uses the same clock as the positive edge registers.
The resynchronization registers consist of up to three levels of registers to
resynchronize the data to the system clock domain. These registers are clocked by the
resynchronization clock that is either generated by the PLL or the read-leveling delay
chain. The outputs of the resynchronization registers can go straight to the core or to
the HDR blocks, which are clocked by the divided-down resynchronization clock.
For more information about the read-leveling delay chain, refer to “Leveling
Circuitry” on page 7–46.
Figure 7–32 shows the registers available in the Stratix IV output and output-enable
paths. The path is divided into the HDR block, resynchronization registers, and
output and output-enable registers. The device can bypass each block of the output
and output-enable path.
7–51 Chapter 7: External Memory Interfaces in Stratix IV Devices
Stratix IV External Memory Interface Features
Stratix IV Device Handbook February 2011 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Figure 7–32. Stratix IV IOE Output and Output-Enable Path Registers (1)
Notes to Figure 7–32:
(1) You can bypass each register block of the output and output-enable paths.
(2) Data coming from the FPGA core are at half the frequency of the memory interface clock frequency in half-rate mode.
(3) The half-rate clock comes from the PLL, while the alignment clock comes from the write-leveling delay chains.
(4) These registers are only used in DDR3 SDRAM interfaces for write-leveling purposes.
(5) The write clock can come from either the PLL or from the write-leveling delay chain. The DQ write clock and DQS write clock have a 90° offset between them.
Alignment Registers
(4)
DFF
DFF
DQ
DQ
DFF
DQ
DFF
DFF
DQ
DQ
DFF
DQ
Half Data Rate to Single Data Rate Output Registers
DFF
DFF
DQ
DQ
DFF
DQ
Half Data Rate to Single Data Rate Output-Enable Registers
Alignment Registers
(4)
Alignment
Clock
(3)
0
1
0
1
0
1
From Core
(2)
From Core
(2)
From Core
(wdata2)
(2)
From Core
(wdata0)
(2)
From Core
(wdata3)
(2)
From Core
(wdata1)
(2)
DQ
DFF
DQ
DFF
0
1
Output Reg Ao
Output Reg Bo
DQ
DFF
DQ
DFF
OR2
TRI
OE Reg BOE
OE Reg AOE
0
1
Double Data Rate Output-Enable Registers
Double Data Rate Output Registers
DQ or DQS
Write
Clock
(5)
Half-Rate Clock
(3)
DFF
DQ
DFF
DQ
DFF
DQ
DFF
DQ
DFF
DQ
DFF
DQ
DFF
DQ
DFF
DQ
DFF
DQ
7–52 Chapter 7: External Memory Interfaces in Stratix IV Devices
Stratix IV External Memory Interface Features
Stratix IV Device Handbook February 2011 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
The output path is designed to route combinatorial or registered SDR outputs and
full-rate or half-rate DDR outputs from the FPGA core. Half-rate data is converted to
full-rate using the HDR block, clocked by the half-rate clock from the PLL. The
resynchronization registers are also clocked by the same 0° system clock, except in the
DDR3 SDRAM interface. In DDR3 SDRAM interfaces, the leveling registers are
clocked by the write-leveling clock.
For more information about the write-leveling delay chain, refer to “Leveling
Circuitry” on page 7–46.
The output-enable path has a structure similar to the output path. You can have a
combinatorial or registered output in SDR applications and you can use half-rate or
full-rate operation in DDR applications. Also, the ouput-enable path’s
resynchronization registers have a structure similar to the output path registers,
ensuring that the output-enable path goes through the same delay and latency as the
output path.
Delay Chain
Stratix IV devices have run-time adjustable delay chains in the I/O blocks and the
DQS logic blocks. You can control the delay chain setting through the I/O or the DQS
configuration block output. Figure 7–33 shows the delay chain ports.
Every I/O block contains the following:
■Two delay chains in a series between the output registers and the output buffer
■One delay chain between the input buffer and the input register
■Two delay chains between the output enable and the output buffer
■Two delay chains between the OCT RT enable control register and the output
buffer
Figure 7–33. Delay Chain
Δt
datain
dataout
delayctrlin [3..0]
Δt
finedelayctrlin
<use finedelayctrlin>
0
1
Chapter 7: External Memory Interfaces in Stratix IV Devices 7–53
Stratix IV External Memory Interface Features
February 2011 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
Figure 7–34 shows the delay chains in an I/O block.
Each DQS logic block contains a delay chain after the
dqsbusout
output and another
delay chain before the
dqsenable
input. Figure 7–35 shows the delay chains in the
DQS input path.
Figure 7–34. Delay Chains in an I/O Block
Figure 7–35. Delay Chains in the DQS Input Path
(outputdelaysetting2 +
outputfinedelaysetting2)
octdelaysetting1 (only)
D5 OCT
Delay
Chain
rtena oe
octdelaysetting2 (only)
(outputdelaysetting1 +
outputfinedelaysetting1)
0
1
(padtoinputregisterdelaysetting +
padtoinputregisterfinedelaysetting)
(outputdelaysetting2 + outputfinedelaysetting2) or
(outputonlydelaysetting2 + outputonlyfinedelaysetting2)
D6 OCT
Delay
Chain
D5 Output-
Enable Delay
Chain
D6 Output-
Enable Delay
Chain
D6 Delay
Delay
Chain
D5 Delay
Delay
Chain
D1 Delay
Delay Chain
(dqsbusoutdelaysetting +
dqsbusoutfinedelaysetting)
dqsbusou
t
(dqsenabledelaysetting +
dqsenablefinedelaysetting)
DQS
Delay
Chain
DQS
Enable
Control
DQS
Enable
dqsin
dqsenable
DQS
D4 Delay
Chain
T11 Delay
Chain
7–54 Chapter 7: External Memory Interfaces in Stratix IV Devices
Stratix IV External Memory Interface Features
Stratix IV Device Handbook February 2011 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
I/O Configuration Block and DQS Configuration Block
The I/O configuration block and the DQS configuration block are shift registers that
you can use to dynamically change the settings of various device configuration bits.
The shift registers power-up low. Every I/O pin contains one I/O configuration
register, while every DQS pin contains one DQS configuration block in addition to the
I/O configuration register. Figure 7–36 shows the I/O configuration block and the
DQS configuration block circuitry.
Table 7–19 lists the I/O configuration block bit sequence.
Table 7–20 lists the DQS configuration block bit sequence.
Figure 7–36. I/O Configuration Block and DQS Configuration Block
Table 7–19. I/O Configuration Block Bit Sequence
Bit Bit Name
0..3 outputdelaysetting1[0..3]
4..6 outputdelaysetting2[0..2]
7..10 padtoinputregisterdelaysetting[0..3]
Table 7–20. DQS Configuration Block Bit Sequence (Part 1 of 2)
Bit Bit Name
0..3 dqsbusoutdelaysetting[0..3]
4..6 dqsinputphasesetting[0..2]
7..10 dqsenablectrlphasesetting[0..3]
11..14 dqsoutputphasesetting[0..3]
15..18 dqoutputphasesetting[0..3]
19..22 resyncinputphasesetting[0..3]
23 dividerphasesetting
24 enaoctcycledelaysetting
25 enainputcycledelaysetting
26 enaoutputcycledelaysetting
27..29 dqsenabledelaysetting[0..2]
30..33 octdelaysetting1[0..3]
datain
update
ena
clk
MSB
bit 0 bit 1 bit 2
Chapter 7: External Memory Interfaces in Stratix IV Devices 7–55
Stratix IV External Memory Interface Features
February 2011 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
Document Revision History
Table 7–21 lists the revision history for this chapter.
34..36 octdelaysetting2[0..2]
37 enadataoutbypass
38 enadqsenablephasetransferreg
39 enaoctphasetransferreg
40 enaoutputphasetransferreg
41 enainputphasetransferreg
42 resyncinputphaseinvert
43 dqsenablectrlphaseinvert
44 dqoutputphaseinvert
45 dqsoutputphaseinvert
Table 7–20. DQS Configuration Block Bit Sequence (Part 2 of 2)
Bit Bit Name
Table 7–21. Document Revision History (Part 1 of 2)
Date Version Changes
February 2011 3.2
■Updated Table 7–5, Table 7–6, Table 7–11, Table 7–19, and Table 7–20.
■Added Table 7–12.
■Updated Figure 7–36.
■Removed Table 7-1 and Table 7-6.
■Applied new template.
■Minor text edits.
March 2010 3.1
■Updated Figure 7–8, Figure 7–11, Figure 7–23, Figure 7–24, Figure 7–29, Figure 7–31,
and Figure 7–36.
■Added Figure 7–9 and Figure 7–12.
■Added Table 7–7.
■Updated Table 7–1, Table 7–2, Table 7–3, Table 7–4, Table 7–6, Table 7–8 and Table 7–19.
■Added note to the “Memory Interfaces Pin Support” section.
■Changed “DLL1 through DLL4” to “DLL0 through DLL3” throughout.
■Added frequency mode 7 throughout.
■Minor text edits.
7–56 Chapter 7: External Memory Interfaces in Stratix IV Devices
Stratix IV External Memory Interface Features
Stratix IV Device Handbook February 2011 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
November 2009 3.0
■Updated the “Memory Interfaces Pin Support” and “Combining ×16/×18 DQS/DQ Groups
for a ×36 QDR II+/QDR II SRAM Interface” sections.
■Updated Table 7–1, Table 7–2, Table 7–7, and Table 7–12.
■Updated Figure 7–3, Figure 7–4, Figure 7–5, Figure 7–6, Figure 7–7, Figure 7–8,
Figure 7–9, Figure 7–10, Figure 7–11, Figure 7–13, Figure 7–14, Figure 7–15, and
Figure 7–16.
■Added Figure 7–12 and Figure 7–17.
■Added Table 7–14, Table 7–17, Table 7–19, and Table 7–20.
■Added “Delay Chain” and “I/O Configuration Block and DQS Configuration Block”
sections.
■Removed Figure 7-8 and Figure 7-12.
■Removed Table 7-1, Table 7-2, and Table 7-24.
■Minor text edits.
June 2009 2.3
■Updated “Overview” and “Leveling Circuitry”.
■Updated Figure 7–26 and Figure 7–27.
■Updated Table 7–3.
■Added introductory sentences to improve search ability.
■Removed the Conclusion section.
April 2009 2.2
■Updated Table 7–5, Table 7–6, Table 7–15, and Table 7–17
■Removed Figure 7-12, Figure 7-13, and Figure 7-20
March 2009 2.1
■Updated Table 7–1, Table 7–5, Table 7–8, Table 7–12, Table 7–13, Table 7–14,
Table 7–15, and Table 7–17.
■Replaced Table 7–6.
■Added Table 7–11 and Table 7–16.
■Updated Figure 7–3, Figure 7–6, Figure 7–8, Figure 7–9, and Figure 7–11.
■Added Figure 7–7, Figure 7–11, Figure 7–12, Figure 7–13, and Figure 7–20.
■Updated “Combining ×16/×18 DQS/DQ Groups for ×36 QDR II+/QDR II SRAM Interface”.
■Updated “Rules to Combine Groups”.
■Removed “Referenced Documents” section.
November 2008 2.0
■Updated Table 7–1, Table 7–2, Table 7–3, Table 7–4, Table 7–5, and Table 7–6.
■Added Table 7–7.
■Updated Figure 7–1 and Figure 7–19.
■Updated “Combining ×16/×18 DQS/DQ groups for ×36 QDR II+/QDR II SRAM Interface”
on page 7–26.
■Updated “Rules to Combine Groups” on page 7–27.
■Updated “DQS Phase-Shift Circuitry” on page 7–29.
■Updated Table 7–9, Table 7–10, Table 7–11, Table 7–13, Table 7–13, Table 7–14,
Table 7–15, Table 7–15, Table 7–16, and Table 7–18.
■Updated Figure 7–30 and Figure 7–31.
■Made minor editorial changes.
May 2008 1.0 Initial release.
Table 7–21. Document Revision History (Part 2 of 2)
Date Version Changes
SIV51008-3.4
© 2012 Altera Corporation. All rights reserved. ALTERA, ARRIA, CYCLONE, HARDCOPY, MAX, MEGACORE, NIOS, QUARTUS and STRATIX words and logos
are trademarks of Altera Corporation and registered in the U.S. Patent and Trademark Office and in other countries. All other words and logos identified as
trademarks or service marks are the property of their respective holders as described at www.altera.com/common/legal.html. Altera warrants performance of its
semiconductor products to current specifications in accordance with Altera's standard warranty, but reserves the right to make changes to any products and
services at any time without notice. Altera assumes no responsibility or liability arising out of the application or use of any information, product, or service
described herein except as expressly agreed to in writing by Altera. Altera customers are advised to obtain the latest version of device specifications before relying
on any published information and before placing orders for products or services.
Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
September 2012
Feedback Subscribe
ISO
9001:2008
Registered
8. High-Speed Differential I/O Interfaces
and DPA in Stratix IV Devices
This chapter describes the significant advantages of the high-speed differential I/O
interfaces and the dynamic phase aligner (DPA) over single-ended I/Os and their
contribution to the overall system bandwidth achievable with Stratix® IV FPGAs. All
references to Stratix IV devices in this chapter apply to Stratix IV E, GT, and GX
devices.
The Stratix IV device family consists of the Stratix IV E (Enhanced) devices without
high-speed clock data recovery (CDR) based transceivers, Stratix IV GT devices with
up to 48 CDR-based transceivers running up to 11.3 Gbps, and Stratix IV GX devices
with up to 48 CDR-based transceivers running up to 8.5 Gbps.
The following sections describe the Stratix IV high-speed differential I/O interfaces
and DPA:
■“Locations of the I/O Banks” on page 8–3
■“LVDS Channels” on page 8–4
■“LVDS SERDES” on page 8–8
■“ALTLVDS Port List” on page 8–9
■“Differential Transmitter” on page 8–11
■“Differential Receiver” on page 8–17
■“LVDS Interface with the Use External PLL Option Enabled” on page 8–26
■“Left and Right PLLs (PLL_Lx and PLL_Rx)” on page 8–29
■“Stratix IV Clocking” on page 8–30
■“Source-Synchronous Timing Budget” on page 8–31
■“Differential Pin Placement Guidelines” on page 8–38
Overview
All Stratix IV E, GX, and GT devices have built-in serializer/deserializer (SERDES)
circuitry that supports high-speed LVDS interfaces at data rates of up to 1.6 Gbps.
SERDES circuitry is configurable to support source-synchronous communication
protocols such as Utopia, Rapid I/O, XSBI, small form factor interface (SFI), serial
peripheral interface (SPI), and asynchronous protocols such as SGMII and Gigabit
Ethernet.
September 2012
SIV51008-3.4
8–2 Chapter 8: High-Speed Differential I/O Interfaces and DPA in Stratix IV Devices
Overview
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
The Stratix IV device family has the following dedicated circuitry for high-speed
differential I/O support:
■Differential I/O buffer
■Transmitter serializer
■Receiver deserializer
■Data realignment
■DPA
■Synchronizer (FIFO buffer)
■Phase-locked loops (PLLs) (located on left and right sides of the device)
For high-speed differential interfaces, the Stratix IV device family supports the
following differential I/O standards:
■LVDS
■Mini-LVDS
■Reduced swing differential signaling (RSDS)
In the Stratix IV device family, I/Os are divided into row and column I/Os. Figure 8–1
shows I/O bank support for the Stratix IV device family. The row I/Os provide
dedicated SERDES circuitry.
Figure 8–1. I/O Bank Support in the Stratix IV Device Family (1), (2), (3), (4)
Notes to Figure 8–1:
(1) Column input buffers are true LVDS buffers, but do not support 100-differential on-chip termination.
(2) Column output buffers are single ended and need external termination schemes to support LVDS, mini-LVDS, and RSDS standards. For more
information, refer to the I/O Features in Stratix IV Devices chapter.
(3) Row input buffers are true LVDS buffers and support 100-differential on-chip termination.
(4) Row output buffers are true LVDS buffers.
LVDS I/Os
Row I/Os with
Dedicated
SERDES Circuitry
(3), (4)
LVDS Interface
with 'Use External PLL'
Option Disabled
LVDS Interface
with 'Use External PLL'
Option Enabled
Column I/Os
(1), (2)
Chapter 8: High-Speed Differential I/O Interfaces and DPA in Stratix IV Devices 8–3
Locations of the I/O Banks
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
The ALTLVDS transmitter and receiver requires various clock and load enable signals
from a left or right PLL. The Quartus®II software provides the following two choices
when configuring the LVDS SERDES circuitry when using the PLL:
■LVDS interface with the Use External PLL option enabled—You control the PLL
settings, such as dynamically reconfiguring the PLL to support different data
rates, dynamic phase shift, and so on. You must enable the Use External PLL
option in the ALTLVDS_TX and ALTLVDS_RX megafunctions, using the
ALTLVDS MegaWizard Plug-in Manager software. You also must instantiate an
ALTPLL megafunction to generate the various clocks and load enable signals. For
more information, refer to “LVDS Interface with the Use External PLL Option
Enabled” on page 8–26.
■LVDS interface with the Use External PLL option disabled—The Quartus II
software configures the PLL settings automatically. The software is also
responsible for generating the various clock and load enable signals based on the
input reference clock and data rate selected.
1Both choices target the same physical PLL; the only difference is the additional
flexibility provided when an LVDS interface has the Use External PLL option enabled.
Locations of the I/O Banks
Stratix IV I/Os are divided into 16 to 24 I/O banks. The dedicated circuitry that
supports high-speed differential I/Os is located in banks in the right and left side of
the device. Figure 8–2 shows a high-level chip overview of the Stratix IV E device.
Figure 8–2. High-Speed Differential I/Os with DPA Locations in Stratix IV E Devices
FPGA Fabric
(Logic Elements, DSP,
Embedded Memory, PLL
PLL
PLL
General Purpose
I/O and Memory
Interface
General Purpose
I/O and Memory
Interface
General Purpose
I/O and Memory
Interface
General Purpose
I/O and Memory
Interface
PLL
PLL
PLL
PLL
PLL PLL
PLL PLL
Clock Networks)
PLL
General Purpose
I/O and
High-Speed
LVDS I/O with
DPA and Soft CDR
General Purpose
I/O and
High-Speed
LVDS I/O with
DPA and Soft CDR
General Purpose
I/O and
High-Speed
LVDS I/O with
DPA and Soft CDR
General Purpose
I/O and
High-Speed
LVDS I/O with
DPA and Soft CDR
8–4 Chapter 8: High-Speed Differential I/O Interfaces and DPA in Stratix IV Devices
LVDS Channels
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Figure 8–3 shows a high-level chip overview of the Stratix IV GT and GX devices.
LVDS Channels
The Stratix IV device family supports LVDS on both row and column I/O banks. Row
I/Os support true LVDS input with 100- differential input termination (OCT RD),
and true LVDS output buffers. Column I/Os supports true LVDS input buffers
without OCT RD. Alternately, you can configure the row and column LVDS pins as
emulated LVDS output buffers that use two single-ended output buffers with an
external resistor network to support LVDS, mini-LVDS, and RSDS standards.
Stratix IV devices offer single-ended I/O refclk support for the LVDS.
Dedicated SERDES and DPA circuitries are implemented on the row I/O banks to
further enhance LVDS interface performance in the device. For column I/O banks,
SERDES is implemented in the core logic because there is no dedicated SERDES
circuitry on column I/O banks.
1Emulated differential output buffers support tri-state capability starting with the
Quartus II software version 9.1.
Figure 8–3. High-Speed Differential I/Os with DPA Locations in Stratix IV GT and GX Devices
PCI Express
Hard IP Block
FPGA Fabric
(Logic Elements, DSP,
Embedded Memory, PLL
PLL
PLL
General Purpose
I/O and Memory
Interface
General Purpose
I/O and Memory
Interface
General Purpose
I/O and Memory
Interface
General Purpose
I/O and Memory
Interface
Transceiver
Block
Transceiver
Block
Transceiver
Block
Transceiver
Block
PCI Express
Hard IP Block
PCI Express
Hard IP Block
PCI Express
Hard IP Block
PLL
PLL
PLL
PLL
PLL PLL
PLL PLL
Clock Networks)
PLL
Transceiver
Block
Transceiver
Block
Transceiver
Block
Transceiver
Block
General Purpose
I/O and
High-Speed
LVDS I/O with
DPA and Soft CDR
General Purpose
I/O and
High-Speed
LVDS I/O with
DPA and Soft CDR
General Purpose
I/O and
High-Speed
LVDS I/O with
DPA and Soft CDR
General Purpose
I/O and
High-Speed
LVDS I/O with
DPA and Soft CDR
Chapter 8: High-Speed Differential I/O Interfaces and DPA in Stratix IV Devices 8–5
LVDS Channels
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
Table 8–1 and Table 8–2 list the maximum number of row and column LVDS I/Os
supported in Stratix IV E devices. You can design the LVDS I/Os as true LVDS buffers
or emulated LVDS buffers, as long as the combination of the two do not exceed the
maximum count.
For example, there are a total of 112 LVDS pairs on row I/Os in the 780-pin EP4SE230
device (refer to Table 8–1). You can design up to a maximum of 56 true LVDS input
buffers and 56 true LVDS output buffers, or up to a maximum of 112 emulated LVDS
output buffers. For the 780-pin EP4SE230 device (refer to Table 8–2), there are a total
of 128 LVDS pairs on column I/Os. You can design up to a maximum of 64 true LVDS
input buffers and 64 emulated LVDS output buffers, or up to a maximum of 128
emulated LVDS output buffers.
Table 8–1. LVDS Channels Supported in Stratix IV E Device Row I/O Banks (1), (2),(3)
Device 780-Pin FineLine BGA 1152-Pin FineLine BGA 1517-Pin FineLine BGA 1760- Pin FineLine BGA
EP4SE230 56 Rx or eTx + 56 Tx
or eTx ———
EP4SE360 56 Rx or eTx + 56 Tx
or eTx (4)
88 Rx or eTx + 88 Tx
or eTx ——
EP4SE530 — 88 Rx or eTx + 88 Tx
or eTx (5)
112 Rx or eTx + 112 Tx
or eTx (6)
112 Rx or eTx + 112 Tx
or eTx
EP4SE820 — 88 Rx or eTx + 88 Tx
or eTx
112 Rx or eTx + 112 Tx
or eTx
132 Rx or eTx + 132 Tx
or eTx
Notes to Table 8–1:
(1) Receiver (Rx) = true LVDS input buffers with OCT RD, Transmitter (Tx) = true LVDS output buffers, eTx = emulated LVDS output buffers (either
LVDS_E_1R
or
LVDS_E_3R
).
(2) The LVDS Rx and Tx channels are equally divided between the left and right sides of the device.
(3) The LVDS channel count does not include dedicated clock input pins.
(4) EP4SE360 devices are offered in the H780 package instead of the F780 package.
(5) EP4SE530 devices are offered in the H1152 package instead of the F1152 package.
(6) EP4SE530 devices are offered in the H1517 package instead of the F1517 package.
Table 8–2. LVDS Channels Supported in Stratix IV E Device Column I/O Banks (1), (2), (3)
Device 780-Pin FineLine BGA 1152-Pin FineLine BGA 1517-Pin FineLine BGA 1760-Pin FineLine BGA
EP4SE230 64 Rx or eTx + 64 eTx — — —
EP4SE360 64 Rx or eTx + 64 eTx
(4) 96 Rx or eTx + 96 eTx — —
EP4SE530 — 96 Rx or eTx + 96 eTx
(5)
128 Rx or eTx + 128 eTx
(6) 128 Rx or eTx + 128 eTx
EP4SE820 — 96 Rx or eTx + 96 eTx 128 Rx or eTx + 128 eTx 144 Rx or eTx + 144 eTx
Notes to Table 8–2:
(1) Rx = true LVDS input buffers without OCT RD, eTx = emulated LVDS output buffers (either
LVDS_E_1R
or
LVDS_E_3R
).
(2) The LVDS Rx and Tx channels are equally divided between the top and bottom sides of the device.
(3) The LVDS channel count does not include dedicated clock input pins.
(4) EP4SE360 devices are offered in the H780 package instead of the F780 package.
(5) EP4SE530 devices are offered in the H1152 package instead of the F1152 package.
(6) EP4SE530 devices are offered in the H1517 package instead of the F1517 package.
8–6 Chapter 8: High-Speed Differential I/O Interfaces and DPA in Stratix IV Devices
LVDS Channels
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Table 8–3 and Table 8–4 list the maximum number of row and column LVDS I/Os
supported in Stratix IV GT devices.
Table 8–5 and Table 8–6 list the maximum number of row and column LVDS I/Os
supported in Stratix IV GX devices.
Table 8–3. LVDS Channels Supported in Stratix IV GT Device Row I/O Banks (1), (2)
Device 1517-pin FineLine BGA 1932-pin FineLine BGA
EP4S40G2 46 Rx or eTx + 73 Tx or eTx —
EP4S40G5 46 Rx or eTx + 73 Tx or eTx —
EP4S100G2 46 Rx or eTx + 73 Tx or eTx —
EP4S100G3 — 47 Rx or eTx + 56 Tx or eTx
EP4S100G4 — 47 Rx or eTx + 56 Tx or eTx
EP4S100G5 46 Rx or eTx + 73 Tx or eTx 47 Rx or eTx + 56 Tx or eTx
Notes to Table 8–3:
(1) Rx = true LVDS input buffers with OCT RD, eTx = emulated LVDS output buffers (either
LVDS_E_1R
or
LVDS_E_3R
).
(2) The LVDS Rx and Tx channel count does not include dedicated clock input pins.
Table 8–4. LVDS Channels Supported in Stratix IV GT Device Column I/O Banks (1), (2)
Device 1517-pin FineLine BGA 1932-pin FineLine BGA
EP4S40G2 96 Rx or eTx + 96 eTx —
EP4S40G5 96 Rx or eTx + 96 eTx —
EP4S100G2 96 Rx or eTx + 96 eTx —
EP4S100G3 — 128 Rx or eTx + 128 eTx
EP4S100G4 — 128 Rx or eTx + 128 eTx
EP4S100G5 96 Rx or eTx + 96 eTx 128 Rx or eTx + 128 eTx
Notes to Table 8–4:
(1) Rx = true LVDS input buffers without OCT RD, eTx = emulated LVDS output buffers (either
LVDS_E_1R
or
LVDS_E_3R
).
(2) The LVDS Rx and Tx channel count does not include dedicated clock input pins.
Table 8–5. LVDS Channels Supported in Stratix IV GX Device Row I/O Banks (1), (2), (3) (Part 1 of 2)
Device 780-Pin
FineLine BGA
1152-Pin
FineLine BGA
1152-Pin
FineLine BGA
(4)
1517-Pin
FineLine BGA
1760-Pin
FineLine BGA
1932-Pin
FineLine BGA
EP4SGX70 28 Rx or eTx +
28 Tx or eTx —56 Rx or eTx +
56 Tx or eTx ———
EP4SGX110 28 Rx or eTx +
28 Tx or eTx
28 Rx or eTx +
28 Tx or eTx
56 Rx or eTx +
56 Tx or eTx ———
EP4SGX180 28 Rx or eTx +
28 Tx or eTx
44 Rx or eTx +
44 Tx or eTx
44 Rx or eTx +
44 Tx or eTx
88 Rx or eTx +
88 Tx or eTx ——
EP4SGX230 28 Rx or eTx +
28 Tx or eTx
44 Rx or eTx +
44 Tx or eTx
44 Rx or eTx +
44 Tx or eTx
88 Rx or eTx +
88 Tx or eTx ——
EP4SGX290 — (5) 44 Rx or eTx +
44 Tx or eTx
44 Rx or eTx +
44 Tx or eTx
88 Rx or eTx +
88 Tx or eTx
88 Rx or eTx +
88 Tx or eTx
98 Rx or eTx +
98 Tx or eTx
Chapter 8: High-Speed Differential I/O Interfaces and DPA in Stratix IV Devices 8–7
LVDS Channels
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
EP4SGX360 — (5) 44 Rx or eTx +
44 Tx or eTx
44 Rx or eTx +
44 Tx or eTx
88 Rx or eTx +
88 Tx or eTx
88 Rx or eTx +
88 Tx or eTx
98 Rx or eTx +
98 Tx or eTx
EP4SGX530 — — 44 Rx or eTx +
44 Tx or eTx (6)
88 Rx or eTx +
88 Tx or eTx (7)
88 Rx or eTx +
88 Tx or eTx
98 Rx or eTx +
98 Tx or eTx
Notes to Table 8–5:
(1) Rx = true LVDS input buffers with OCT RD, Tx = true LVDS output buffers, eTx = emulated LVDS output buffers (either
LVDS_E_1R
or
LVDS_E_3R
).
(2) The LVDS Rx and Tx channels are equally divided between the left and right sides of the device, except for the devices in the 780-pin Fineline
BGA. These devices have the LVDS Rx and Tx located on the left side of the device.
(3) The LVDS channel count does not include dedicated clock input pins.
(4) This package supports PMA-only transceiver channels.
(5) EP4SGX290 and EP4SGX360 devices are offered in the H780 package instead of the F780 package.
(6) EP4SGX530 devices are offered in the H1152 package instead of the F1152 package.
(7) EP4SGX530 devices are offered in the H1517 package instead of the F1517 package.
Table 8–5. LVDS Channels Supported in Stratix IV GX Device Row I/O Banks (1), (2), (3) (Part 2 of 2)
Device 780-Pin
FineLine BGA
1152-Pin
FineLine BGA
1152-Pin
FineLine BGA
(4)
1517-Pin
FineLine BGA
1760-Pin
FineLine BGA
1932-Pin
FineLine BGA
Table 8–6. LVDS Channels Supported in Stratix IV GX Device Column I/O Banks (1), (2), (3)
Device 780-Pin
FineLine BGA
1152-Pin
FineLine BGA
1152-Pin
FineLine BGA
(4)
1517-Pin
FineLine BGA
1760-Pin
FineLine BGA
1932-Pin
FineLine BGA
EP4SGX70 64 Rx or eTx +
64 eTx —64 Rx or eTx +
64 eTx ———
EP4SGX110 64 Rx or eTx +
64 eTx
64 Rx or eTx +
64 eTx
64 Rx or eTx +
64 eTx ———
EP4SGX180 64 Rx or eTx +
64 eTx
96 Rx or eTx +
96 eTx
96 Rx or eTx +
96 eTx
96 Rx or eTx +
96 eTx ——
EP4SGX230 64 Rx or eTx +
64 eTx
96 Rx or eTx +
96 eTx
96 Rx or eTx +
96 eTx
96 Rx or eTx +
96 eTx ——
EP4SGX290 72 Rx or eTx +
72 eTx (5)
96 Rx or eTx +
96 eTx
96 Rx or eTx +
96 eTx
96 Rx or eTx +
96 eTx
128 Rx or eTx +
128 eTx
128 Rx or eTx +
128 eTx (8)
EP4SGX360 72 Rx or eTx +
72 eTx (5)
96 Rx or eTx +
96 eTx
96 Rx or eTx +
96 eTx
96 Rx or eTx +
96 eTx
128 Rx or eTx +
128 eTx
128 Rx or eTx +
128 eTx (8)
EP4SGX530 — — 96 Rx or eTx +
96 eTx (6)
96 Rx or eTx +
96 eTx (7)
128 Rx or eTx +
128 eTx
128 Rx or eTx +
128 eTx
Notes to Table 8–6:
(1) Rx = true LVDS input buffers without OCT RD, eTx = emulated LVDS output buffers (either
LVDS_E_1R
or
LVDS_E_3R
).
(2) The LVDS Rx and Tx channels are equally divided between the left and right sides of the device.
(3) The LVDS channel count does not include dedicated clock input pins.
(4) This package supports PMA-only transceiver channels.
(5) EP4SGX290 and EP4SGX360 devices are offered in the H780 package instead of the F780 package.
(6) EP4SGX530 devices are offered in the H1152 package instead of the F1152 package.
(7) EP4SGX530 devices are offered in the H1517 package instead of the F1517 package.
(8) The Quartus II software version 9.0 does not support EP4SGX290 and EP4SGX360 devices in the 1932-Pin FineLine BGA package. These
devices will be supported in a future release of the Quartus II software.
8–8 Chapter 8: High-Speed Differential I/O Interfaces and DPA in Stratix IV Devices
LVDS SERDES
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
LVDS SERDES
Figure 8–4 shows a transmitter and receiver block diagram for the LVDS SERDES
circuitry in the left and right banks. This diagram shows the interface signals of the
transmitter and receiver data path. For more information, refer to “Differential
Transmitter” on page 8–11 and “Differential Receiver” on page 8–17.
Figure 8–4. LVDS SERDES (1), (2), (3)
Notes to Figure 8–4:
(1) This diagram shows a shared PLL between the transmitter and receiver. If the transmitter and receiver are not sharing the same PLL, the two left
and right PLLs are required.
(2) In SDR and DDR modes, the data width is 1 and 2 bits, respectively.
(3) The tx_in and rx_out ports have a maximum data width of 10 bits.
+
-
+
-
IOE
tx_in 10
Serializer 2IOE
IOE Supports SDR, DDR, or
Non-Registered Datapath
DIN DOUT
LVDS Transmitter
LVDS Receiver
tx_coreclock
tx_out
rx_in
DPA Circuitry
Synchronizer
DIN
Retimed
Data
DPA Clock
DINDOUT
DINDOUT
DIN
DOUT
Deserializer Bit Slip
2
3(LVDS_LOAD_EN, diffioclk,
tx_coreclock)
IOE Supports SDR, DDR, or
Non-Registered Datapath
FPGA
Fabric
10
rx_out
(LOAD_EN, diffioclk)
2
diffioclk
Clock MUX
rx_divfwdclk
rx_outclock
Left/Right PLL
rx_inclock/tx_inclock
(LVDS_LOAD_EN,
LVDS_diffioclk,
rx_outclock
3
LVDS_diffioclk
DPA_diffioclk
3
(DPA_LOAD_EN,
DPA_diffioclk,
rx_divfwdclk)
8 Serial LVDS
Clock Phases
LVDS Clock Domain
DPA Clock Domain
Chapter 8: High-Speed Differential I/O Interfaces and DPA in Stratix IV Devices 8–9
ALTLVDS Port List
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
ALTLVDS Port List
Table 8–7 lists the interface signals for an LVDS transmitter and receiver.
Table 8–7. Port List of the LVDS Interface (ALTLVDS) (1), (2) (Part 1 of 3)
Port Name Input /
Output Description
PLL Signals
pll_areset
Input Asynchronous reset to the LVDS transmitter and receiver PLL. The
minimum pulse width requirement for this signal is 10 ns.
LVDS Transmitter Interface Signals
tx_in[ ]
Input The data bus width per channel is the same as the serialization factor (SF).
Input data must be synchronous to the
tx_coreclock
signal.
tx_inclock
Input
Reference clock input for the transmitter PLL.
The ALTLVDS MegaWizard Plug-In Manager software automatically selects
the appropriate PLL multiplication factor based on the data rate and
reference clock frequency selection.
For more information about the allowed frequency range for this reference
clock, refer to the “High-Speed I/O Specification” section in the DC and
Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices chapter.
tx_enable
(3) Input
This port is instantiated only when you select the Use External PLL option
in the MegaWizard Plug-In Manager software. This input port must be
driven by the PLL instantiated though the ALTPLL MegaWizard Plug-In
Manager software.
tx_out
Output LVDS transmitter serial data output port.
tx_out
is clocked by a serial clock
generated by the left and right PLL.
tx_outclock
Output
The frequency of this clock is programmable to be the same as the data
rate, half the data rate, or one-fourth the data rate. The phase offset of this
clock, with respect to the serial data, is programmable in increments of 45°.
tx_coreclock
(3) Output
FPGA fabric-transmitter interface clock. The parallel transmitter data
generated in the FPGA fabric must be clocked with this clock.
This port is not available when you select the Use External PLL option in the
MegaWizard Plug-In Manager software. The FPGA fabric-transmitter
interface clock must be driven by the PLL instantiated through the ALTPLL
MegaWizard Plug-In Manager software.
tx_locked
Output When high, this signal indicates that the transmitter PLL is locked to the
input reference clock.
8–10 Chapter 8: High-Speed Differential I/O Interfaces and DPA in Stratix IV Devices
ALTLVDS Port List
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
LVDS Receiver Interface Signals
rx_in Input LVDS receiver serial data input port.
rx_inclock
Input
Reference clock input for the receiver PLL.
The ALTLVDS MegaWizard Plug-In Manager software automatically selects
the appropriate PLL multiplication factor based on the data rate and
reference clock frequency selection.
For more information about the allowed frequency range for this reference
clock, refer to the “High-Speed I/O Specification” section in the DC and
Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices chapter.
rx_channel_data_align
Input
Edge-sensitive bit-slip control signal. Each rising edge on this signal causes
the data re-alignment circuitry to shift the word boundary by one bit. The
minimum pulse width requirement is one parallel clock cycle. There is no
maximum pulse width requirement.
rx_dpll_hold
Input
When low, the DPA tracks any dynamic phase variations between the clock
and data. When high, the DPA holds the last locked phase and does not
track any dynamic phase variations between the clock and data. This port is
not available in non-DPA mode.
rx_enable
(3) Input
This port is instantiated only when you select the Use External PLL option
in the MegaWizard Plug-In Manager software. This input port must be
driven by the PLL instantiated though the ALTPLL MegaWizard Plug-In
Manager software.
rx_out[ ]
Output
Receiver parallel data output. The data bus width per channel is the same as
the deserialization factor (DF). The output data is synchronous to the
rx_outclock
signal in non-DPA and DPA modes. It is synchronous to the
rx_divfwdclk
signal in soft-CDR mode.
rx_outclock
Output
Parallel output clock from the receiver PLL. The parallel data output from
the receiver is synchronous to this clock in non-DPA and DPA modes. This
port is not available when you select the Use External PLL option in the
MegaWizard Plug-In Manager software. The FPGA fabric-receiver interface
clock must be driven by the PLL instantiated through the ALTPLL
MegaWizard Plug-In Manager software.
rx_locked
Output When high, this signal indicates that the receiver PLL is locked to
rx_inclock
.
rx dpa locked
Output
This signal only indicates an initial DPA lock condition to the optimum
phase after power up or reset. This signal is not de-asserted if the DPA
selects a new phase out of the eight clock phases to sample the received
data. You must not use the
rx_dpa_locked
signal to determine a DPA
loss-of-lock condition.
rx_cda_max
Output
Data re-alignment (bit slip) roll-over signal. When high for one parallel clock
cycle, this signal indicates that the user-programmed number of bits for the
word boundary to roll-over have been slipped.
rx_divfwdclk
Output
Parallel DPA clock to the FPGA fabric logic array. The parallel receiver
output data to the FPGA fabric logic array is synchronous to this clock in
soft-CDR mode. This signal is not available in non-DPA and DPA modes.
dpa_pll_recal
Input Enable PLL calibration dynamically without resetting the DPA circuitry or
the PLL.
Table 8–7. Port List of the LVDS Interface (ALTLVDS) (1), (2) (Part 2 of 3)
Port Name Input /
Output Description
Chapter 8: High-Speed Differential I/O Interfaces and DPA in Stratix IV Devices 8–11
Differential Transmitter
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
fFor more information about the LVDS transmitter and receiver settings using
ALTLVDS_TX and ALTLVDS_RX megafunction, refer to the ALTLVDS Megafunction
User Guide.
Differential Transmitter
The Stratix IV transmitter has a dedicated circuitry to provide support for LVDS
signaling. The dedicated circuitry consists of a differential buffer, a serializer, and left
and right PLLs that can be shared between the transmitter and receiver. The
differential buffer can drive out LVDS, mini-LVDS, and RSDS signaling levels. The
serializer takes up to 10 bits wide parallel data from the FPGA fabric, clocks it into the
load registers, and serializes it using shift registers clocked by the left and right PLL
before sending the data to the differential buffer. The MSB of the parallel data is
transmitted first.
1When using emulated LVDS I/O standards at the differential transmitter, the SERDES
circuitry must be implemented in logic cells but not hard SERDES.
dpa_pll_cal_busy
Output
Busy
signal that is asserted high when the PLL calibration occurs.
Reset Signals
rx_reset
Input
Asynchronous reset to the DPA circuitry and FIFO. The minimum pulse
width requirement for this reset is one parallel clock cycle. This signal
resets DPA and FIFO blocks.
rx_fifo_reset
Input
Asynchronous reset to the FIFO between the DPA and the data realignment
circuits. The synchronizer block must be reset after a DPA loses lock
condition and the data checker shows corrupted received data. The
minimum pulse width requirement for this reset is one parallel clock cycle.
This signal resets the FIFO block.
rx_cda_reset
Input
Asynchronous reset to the data realignment circuitry. The minimum pulse
width requirement for this reset is one parallel clock cycle. This signal
resets the data realignment block.
Notes to Table 8–7:
(1) Unless stated, signals are valid in all three modes (non-DPA, DPA, and soft-CDR) for a single channel.
(2) All reset and control signals are active high.
(3) For more information, refer to “LVDS Interface with the Use External PLL Option Enabled” on page 8–26.
Table 8–7. Port List of the LVDS Interface (ALTLVDS) (1), (2) (Part 3 of 3)
Port Name Input /
Output Description
8–12 Chapter 8: High-Speed Differential I/O Interfaces and DPA in Stratix IV Devices
Differential Transmitter
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
The load enable (
LVDS_LOAD_EN
) signal and the
diffioclk
signal (the clock running at
serial data rate) generated from
PLL_Lx
(left PLL) or
PLL_Rx
(right PLL) clocks the load
and shift registers. You can statically set the serialization factor to ×3, ×4, ×6, ×7, ×8, or
×10 using the Quartus II software. The load enable signal is derived from the
serialization factor setting. Figure 8–5 shows a block diagram of the Stratix IV
transmitter.
You can configure any Stratix IV transmitter data channel to generate a
source-synchronous transmitter clock output. This flexibility allows the placement of
the output clock near the data outputs to simplify board layout and reduce
clock-to-data skew. Different applications often require specific clock-to-data
alignments or specific data-rate-to-clock-rate factors. The transmitter can output a
clock signal at the same rate as the data with a maximum frequency of 800 MHz. The
output clock can also be divided by a factor of 1, 2, 4, 6, 8, or 10, depending on the
serialization factor. You can set the phase of the clock in relation to the data at 0° or
180° (edge or center aligned). The left and right PLLs (
PLL_Lx
and
PLL_Rx
) provide
additional support for other phase shifts in 45° increments. These settings are made
statically in the Quartus II MegaWizard Plug-In Manager software.
Figure 8–5. Stratix IV Transmitter (1), (2)
Notes to Figure 8–5:
(1) In SDR and DDR modes, the data width is 1 and 2 bits, respectively.
(2) The tx_in port has a maximum data width of 10 bits.
tx_coreclock
FPGA
Fabric
tx_in 10
Serializer 2IOE
LVDS Transmitter
IOE supports SDR, DDR, or
Non-Registered Datapath
Left/Right PLL tx_inclock
(LVDS_LOAD_EN, diffioclk, tx_coreclock)
3
LVDS Clock Domain
DIN DOUT
+
-
tx_out
Chapter 8: High-Speed Differential I/O Interfaces and DPA in Stratix IV Devices 8–13
Differential Transmitter
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
Figure 8–6 shows the Stratix IV transmitter in clock output mode. In clock output
mode, you can use an LVDS channel as a clock output channel.
You can bypass the Stratix IV serializer to support DDR (×2) and SDR (×1) operations
to achieve a serialization factor of 2 and 1, respectively. The I/O element (IOE)
contains two data output registers that can each operate in either DDR or SDR mode.
Figure 8–7 shows the serializer bypass path.
Figure 8–6. Stratix IV Transmitter in Clock Output Mode
Transmitter Circuit
diffioclk
LVDS_LOAD_EN
Txclkout–
Txclkout+
Parallel Series
FPGA
Fabric
Left/Right
PLL
Figure 8–7. Serializer Bypass in Stratix IV Devices (1), (2), (3)
Notes to Figure 8–7:
(1) All disabled blocks and signals are grayed out.
(2) In DDR mode, tx_inclock clocks the IOE register. In SDR mode, data is directly passed through the IOE.
(3) In SDR and DDR modes, the data width to the IOE is 1 and 2 bits, respectively.
+
-
tx_coreclocktx_coreclock
FPGA
Fabric
tx_in 2
Serializer
Serializer 2IOE
DINDIN DOUTDOUT
LVDS Transmitter
IOE supports SDR, DDR, or
Non-Registered Datapath
tx_out
Left/Right PLLLeft/Right PLL
(LVDS_LOAD_EN, diffioclk, tx_coreclock)(LVDS_LOAD_EN, diffioclk, tx_coreclock)
3
8–14 Chapter 8: High-Speed Differential I/O Interfaces and DPA in Stratix IV Devices
Differential Transmitter
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Programmable VOD and Programmable Pre-Emphasis
Stratix IV LVDS transmitters support programmable pre-emphasis and
programmable VOD. Pre-emphasis increases the amplitude of the high-frequency
component of the output signal, and thus helps to compensate for the
frequency-dependent attenuation along the transmission line. Figure 8–8 shows the
differential LVDS output.
Figure 8–9 shows the LVDS output with pre-emphasis.
Figure 8–8. Differential VOD
Figure 8–9. Programmable Pre-Emphasis (1)
Note to Figure 8–9:
(1) VP— voltage boost from pre-emphasis. VOD— Differential output voltage (peak-peak).
Single-Ended Waveform
Positive Channel (p)
Negative Channel (n)
Ground
Differential Waveform
p - n = 0V
VOD
VOD
VOD
VCM
VOD (diff peak - peak) = 2 x VOD(single-ended)
OUT
OUT
VOD
VP
VP
Chapter 8: High-Speed Differential I/O Interfaces and DPA in Stratix IV Devices 8–15
Differential Transmitter
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
Pre-emphasis is an important feature for high-speed transmission. Without
pre-emphasis, the output current is limited by the VOD setting and the output
impedance of the driver. At high frequency, the slew rate may not be fast enough to
reach full VOD before the next edge, producing pattern-dependent jitter.
With pre-emphasis, the output current is boosted momentarily during switching to
increase the output slew rate. The overshoot introduced by the extra current happens
only during switching and does not ring, unlike the overshoot caused by signal
reflection. The amount of pre-emphasis needed depends on the attenuation of the
high-frequency component along the transmission line. The Quartus II software
allows four settings for programmable pre-emphasis—zero (0), low (1), medium (2),
and high (3). The default setting is low.
The VOD is also programmable with four settings: low (0), medium low (1), medium
high (2), and high (3). The default setting is medium low.
Programmable VOD
You can statically assign the VOD settings from the Assignment Editor. Table 8–8 lists
the assignment name for programmable VOD and its possible values in the Quartus II
software Assignment Editor.
Figure 8–10 shows the assignment of programmable VOD for a transmit data output
from the Quartus II software Assignment Editor.
Table 8–8. Quartus II Software Assignment Editor
To
tx_out
Assignment name Programmable Differential Output Voltage (VOD)
Allowed values 0, 1, 2, 3
Figure 8–10. Quartus II Software Assignment Editor—Programmable VOD
8–16 Chapter 8: High-Speed Differential I/O Interfaces and DPA in Stratix IV Devices
Differential Transmitter
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Programmable Pre-Emphasis
Four different settings are allowed for pre-emphasis from the Assignment Editor for
each LVDS output channel. Table 8–9 lists the assignment name and its possible
values for programmable pre-emphasis in the Quartus II software Assignment Editor.
Figure 8–11 shows the assignment of programmable pre-emphasis for a transmit data
output port from the Quartus II software Assignment Editor.
Table 8–9. Quartus II Software Assignment Editor
To
tx_out
Assignment name Programmable Pre-emphasis
Allowed values 0, 1, 2, 3
Figure 8–11. Quartus II Software Assignment Editor – Programmable Pre-Emphasis
Chapter 8: High-Speed Differential I/O Interfaces and DPA in Stratix IV Devices 8–17
Differential Receiver
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
Differential Receiver
The Stratix IV device family has a dedicated circuitry to receive high-speed
differential signals in row I/Os. Figure 8–12 shows the hardware blocks of the
Stratix IV receiver. The receiver has a differential buffer and left and right PLLs that
can be shared between the transmitter and receiver, a DPA block, a synchronizer, a
data realignment block, and a deserializer. The differential buffer can receive LVDS,
mini-LVDS, and RSDS signal levels, which are statically set in the Quartus II software
Assignment Editor.
The left and right PLL receives the external clock input and generates different phases
of the same clock. The DPA block chooses one of the clocks from the left and right PLL
and aligns the incoming data on each channel. The synchronizer circuit is a 1 bit wide
by 6 bit deep FIFO buffer that compensates for any phase difference between the DPA
clock and the data realignment block. If necessary, the user-controlled data
realignment circuitry inserts a single bit of latency in the serial bit stream to align to
the word boundary. The deserializer includes shift registers and parallel load
registers, and sends a maximum of 10 bits to the internal logic.
The Stratix IV device family supports three different receiver modes:
■“Non-DPA Mode” on page 8–22
■“DPA Mode” on page 8–24
■“Soft-CDR Mode” on page 8–25
The physical medium connecting the transmitter and receiver LVDS channels may
introduce skew between the serial data and the source-synchronous clock. The
instantaneous skew between each LVDS channel and the clock also varies with the
jitter on the data and clock signals as seen by the receiver. The three different modes—
non-DPA, DPA, and soft-CDR—provide different options to overcome skew between
the source synchronous clock (non-DPA, DPA) /reference clock (soft-CDR) and the
serial data.
1Only non-DPA mode requires manual skew adjustment.
8–18 Chapter 8: High-Speed Differential I/O Interfaces and DPA in Stratix IV Devices
Differential Receiver
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Non-DPA mode allows you to statically select the optimal phase between the source
synchronous clock and the received serial data to compensate skew. In DPA mode, the
DPA circuitry automatically chooses the best phase to compensate for the skew
between the source synchronous clock and the received serial data. Soft-CDR mode
provides opportunities for synchronous and asynchronous applications for
chip-to-chip and short reach board-to-board applications for SGMII protocols.
Differential I/O Termination
The Stratix IV device family provides a 100- on-chip differential termination option
on each differential receiver channel for LVDS standards. On-chip termination saves
board space by eliminating the need to add external resistors on the board. You can
enable on-chip termination in the Quartus II software Assignment Editor.
On-chip differential termination is supported on all row I/O pins and dedicated clock
input pins (
CLK[0,2,9,11]
). It is not supported for column I/O pins, dedicated clock
input pins (
CLK[1,3,8,10]
), or the corner PLL clock inputs.
Figure 8–12. Receiver Block Diagram (1), (2)
Notes to Figure 8–12:
(1) In SDR and DDR modes, the data width from the IOE is 1 and 2 bits, respectively.
(2) The rx_out port has a maximum data width of 10 bits.
IOE
2
Deserializer Bit Slip
Synchronizer
DPA Circuitry
2
Clock Mux
8 Serial LVDS
Clock Phases
Left/Right PLL
rx_inclock
LVDS Clock Domain
DPA Clock Domain
10
DOUT DIN DOUT DIN
DOUT DIN DIN
Retimed
Data
DPA Clock
LVDS_diffiioclk
DPA_diffioclk
3
(DPA_LOAD_EN,
DPA_diffioclk,
rx_divfwdclk)
(LVDS_LOAD_EN,
LVDS_diffioclk,
rx_outclk)
3
(LOAD_EN, diffioclk)
diffioclk
rx_out
rx_divfwdclk
rx_outclock
rx_in
+
FPGA
Fabric
LVDS Receiver
IOE Supports SDR, DDR, or Non-Registered Datapath
Chapter 8: High-Speed Differential I/O Interfaces and DPA in Stratix IV Devices 8–19
Differential Receiver
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
Figure 8–13 shows device on-chip termination.
Receiver Hardware Blocks
The differential receiver has the following hardware blocks:
■“DPA Block” on page 8–19
■“Synchronizer” on page 8–20
■“Data Realignment Block (Bit Slip)” on page 8–20
■“Deserializer” on page 8–22
DPA Block
The DPA block takes in high-speed serial data from the differential input buffer and
selects one of the eight phases generated by the left and right PLL to sample the data.
The DPA chooses a phase closest to the phase of the serial data. The maximum phase
offset between the received data and the selected phase is 1/8 UI, which is the
maximum quantization error of the DPA. The eight phases of the clock are equally
divided, offering a 45° resolution.
Figure 8–14 shows the possible phase relationships between the DPA clocks and the
incoming serial data.
Figure 8–13. On-Chip Differential I/O Termination
LVDS
Transmitter
Stratix IV Differential
Receiver with On-Chip
100 Ω Termination
RD
Z0 = 50 Ω
Z0 = 50 Ω
Figure 8–14. DPA Clock Phase to Serial Data Timing Relationship (1)
Note to Figure 8–14:
(1) TVCO is defined as the PLL serial clock period.
45˚
90˚
135˚
180˚
225˚
270˚
315˚
0.125T
vco
T
vco
0˚
rx_in D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 Dn
8–20 Chapter 8: High-Speed Differential I/O Interfaces and DPA in Stratix IV Devices
Differential Receiver
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
The DPA block continuously monitors the phase of the incoming serial data and
selects a new clock phase if needed. You can prevent the DPA from selecting a new
clock phase by asserting the optional
RX_DPLL_HOLD
port, which is available for each
channel.
DPA circuitry does not require a fixed training pattern to lock to the optimum phase
out of the eight phases. After reset or power up, DPA circuitry requires transitions on
the received data to lock to the optimum phase. An optional output port,
RX_DPA_LOCKED
, is available to indicate an initial DPA lock condition to the optimum
phase after power up or reset. This signal is not de-asserted if the DPA selects a new
phase out of the eight clock phases to sample the received data. Do not use the
rx_dpa_locked
signal to determine a DPA loss-of-lock condition. Use data checkers
such as a cyclic redundancy check (CRC) or diagonal interleaved parity (DIP-4) to
validate the data.
An independent reset port,
RX_RESET
, is available to reset the DPA circuitry. DPA
circuitry must be retrained after reset.
1The DPA block is bypassed in non-DPA mode.
Synchronizer
The synchronizer is a 1 bit wide and 6 bit deep FIFO buffer that compensates for the
phase difference between
DPA_diffioclk
, which is the optimal clock selected by the
DPA block, and
LVDS_diffioclk
, which is produced by the left and right PLL. The
synchronizer can only compensate for phase differences, not frequency differences
between the data and the receiver’s input reference clock.
An optional port,
RX_FIFO_RESET
, is available to the internal logic to reset the
synchronizer. The synchronizer is automatically reset when the DPA first locks to the
incoming data. Altera recommends using
RX_FIFO_RESET
to reset the synchronizer
when the DPA signals a loss-of-lock condition and the data checker indicates
corrupted received data.
1The synchronizer circuit is bypassed in non-DPA and soft-CDR mode.
Data Realignment Block (Bit Slip)
Skew in the transmitted data along with skew added by the link causes
channel-to-channel skew on the received serial data streams. If the DPA is enabled,
the received data is captured with different clock phases on each channel. This may
cause the received data to be misaligned from channel to channel. To compensate for
this channel-to-channel skew and establish the correct received word boundary at
each channel, each receiver channel has a dedicated data realignment circuit that
realigns the data by inserting bit latencies into the serial stream.
An optional
RX_CHANNEL_DATA_ALIGN
port controls the bit insertion of each receiver
independently controlled from the internal logic. The data slips one bit on the rising
edge of
RX_CHANNEL_DATA_ALIGN
. The requirements for the
RX_CHANNEL_DATA_ALIGN
signal include:
■The minimum pulse width is one period of the parallel clock in the logic array.
■The minimum low time between pulses is one period of the parallel clock.
■This is an edge-triggered signal.
Chapter 8: High-Speed Differential I/O Interfaces and DPA in Stratix IV Devices 8–21
Differential Receiver
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
■Valid data is available two parallel clock cycles after the rising edge of
RX_CHANNEL_DATA_ALIGN
.
Figure 8–15 shows receiver output (
RX_OUT
) after one bit slip pulse with the
deserialization factor set to 4.
The data realignment circuit can have up to 11 bit-times of insertion before a rollover
occurs. The programmable bit rollover point can be from 1 to 11 bit-times,
independent of the deserialization factor. The programmable bit rollover point must
be set equal to or greater than the deserialization factor, allowing enough depth in the
word alignment circuit to slip through a full word. You can set the value of the bit
rollover point using the MegaWizard Plug-In Manager software. An optional status
port,
RX_CDA_MAX
, is available to the FPGA fabric from each channel to indicate when
the preset rollover point is reached.
Figure 8–16 shows a preset value of four bit-times before rollover occurs. The
rx_cda_max
signal pulses for one
rx_outclock
cycle to indicate that rollover has
occurred.
Figure 8–15. Data Realignment Timing
rx_in
rx_outclock
rx_channel_data_align
rx_out
rx_inclock
3
3210 321x xx21 0321
21 0 3 2 1 0 3 2 1 0
Figure 8–16. Receiver Data Re-alignment Rollover
rx_outclock
rx_channel_data_align
rx_cda_max
rx_inclock
8–22 Chapter 8: High-Speed Differential I/O Interfaces and DPA in Stratix IV Devices
Differential Receiver
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Deserializer
You can statically set the deserialization factor to 3, 4, 6, 7, 8, or 10 by using the
Quartus II software. You can bypass the Stratix IV deserializer in the Quartus II
MegaWizard Plug-In Manager software to support DDR (×2) or SDR (×1) operations,
as shown Figure 8–17. The DPA and data realignment circuit cannot be used when the
deserializer is bypassed. The IOE contains two data input registers that can operate in
DDR or SDR mode.
Receiver Data Path Modes
The Stratix IV device family supports three receiver datapath modes—non-DPA
mode, DPA mode, and soft-CDR mode.
Non-DPA Mode
Figure 8–18 shows the non-DPA datapath block diagram. In non-DPA mode, the DPA
and synchronizer blocks are disabled. Input serial data is registered at the rising or
falling edge of the serial
LVDS_diffioclk
clock produced by the left and right PLL.
You can select the rising/falling edge option using the ALTLDVS MegaWizard
Plug-In Manager software. Both data realignment and deserializer blocks are clocked
by the
LVDS_diffioclk
clock, which is generated by the left and right PLL.
Figure 8–17. Deserializer Bypass in Stratix IV Devices (1), (2), (3)
Notes to Figure 8–17:
(1) All disabled blocks and signals are grayed out.
(2) In DDR mode, rx_inclock clocks the IOE register. In SDR mode, data is directly passed through the IOE.
(3) In SDR and DDR modes, the data width from the IOE is 1 and 2 bits, respectively.
IOE
2
Dese
ri
a
liz
e
r
Deserializer
B
it Slip
S
y
nchronize
r
DPA Circuitr
y
2
C
lock Mu
x
8
S
erial LVD
S
C
lock Phases
Left/Right PLLLeft/Right PLL
2
DOUT
DIN
DOUT
DIN
DO
U
T
DIN
DIN
R
etimed
D
at
a
DPA
C
lock
LVD
S_
diffiioclk
DPA
_
di
ff
ioclk
3
(
DPA_L
O
AD_EN
,
D
PA_diffioclk
,
rx_divfwdclk
)
(LVD
S
_L
O
AD_EN,
L
VDS_diffioclk,
rx_outclk
)
3
(
LOAD_EN, diffioclk
)
di
ff
ioclk
rx_out
r
x
_
div
f
wdclk
rx_outc
l
oc
k
rx_in+
FPGA
Fabric
LVDS Receiver
IOE Supports SDR, DDR, or Non-Registered Datapath
Chapter 8: High-Speed Differential I/O Interfaces and DPA in Stratix IV Devices 8–23
Differential Receiver
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
1When using non-DPA receivers, you must drive the PLL from a dedicated and
compensated clock input pin. Compensated clock inputs are dedicated clock pins in
the same I/O bank as the PLL.
fFor more information about dedicated and compensated clock inputs, refer to the
Clock Networks and PLLs in Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Figure 8–18. Receiver Data Path in Non-DPA Mode (1), (2)
Notes to Figure 8–18:
(1) In SDR and DDR modes, the data width from the IOE is 1 and 2 bits, respectively.
(2) The rx_out port has a maximum data width of 10 bits.
2
Deserializer Bit Slip
Synchroni
z
er
D
P
A Circuitr
P
P
y
2
Clock Mux
8
S
e
r
ial
L
VDS
L
L
C
loc
k
Phases
Left/Right PLL
rx_inclock LVDS Clock Domain
10
DOUT DIN DOUT DIN
DO
U
T
DIN
N
DIN
R
etimed
D
ata
DP
A Cloc
PP
k
L
VDS_diffiioclk
L
L
D
P
A_diffioclk
P
P
3
(DP
A_LO
P
P
A
D_EN
,
DP
A_diffioclk,
P
P
rx_divfwdclk
)
(LVDS_LOAD_EN,
LVDS_diffioclk,
rx_outclk)
3
(LOAD_EN, diffioclk)
diffioclk
rx_out
r
x
_
div
f
wdclk
rx_outclock
rx_in
+
FPGA
Fabric
LVDS Receiver
I
O
E
S
uppo
r
t
s
S
DR, DDR, or Non-Registered Datapat
h
I
O
E
8–24 Chapter 8: High-Speed Differential I/O Interfaces and DPA in Stratix IV Devices
Differential Receiver
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
DPA Mode
Figure 8–19 shows the DPA mode datapath, where all the hardware blocks mentioned
in “Receiver Hardware Blocks” on page 8–19 are active. The DPA block chooses the
best possible clock (
DPA_diffioclk
) from the eight fast clocks sent by the left and right
PLL. This serial
DPA_diffioclk
clock is used for writing the serial data into the
synchronizer. A serial
LVDS_diffioclk
clock is used for reading the serial data from
the synchronizer. The same
LVDS_diffioclk
clock is used in data realignment and
deserializer blocks.
Figure 8–19. Receiver Datapath in DPA Mode (1), (2), (3)
Notes to Figure 8–19:
(1) All disabled blocks and signals are grayed out.
(2) In SDR and DDR modes, the data width from the IOE is 1 and 2 bits, respectively.
(3) The rx_out port has a maximum data width of 10 bits.
2
Deserializer Bit Slip
Synchronizer
DPA Circuitry
2
Clock Mux
8 Serial LVDS
Clock Phases
Left/Right PLL
rx_inclock
LVDS Clock Domain
DPA Clock Domain
10
DOUT DIN DIN
Retimed
Data
DPA Clock
LVDS_diffiioclk
DPA_diffioclk
3
(DPA_LOAD_EN,
DPA_diffioclk,
rx_divfwdclk)
(LVDS_LOAD_EN,
LVDS_diffioclk,
rx_outclk)
3
(LOAD_EN, diffioclk)
diffioclk
rx_out
rx_divfwdcl
k
rx_outclock
rx_in
+
FPGA
Fabric
LVDS Receiver
I
O
E
S
u
pp
o
r
t
s
S
DR, DDR, or Non-Re
g
istered Datapat
h
IO
E
DOUT DINDOUT DIN
Chapter 8: High-Speed Differential I/O Interfaces and DPA in Stratix IV Devices 8–25
Differential Receiver
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
Soft-CDR Mode
The Stratix IV LVDS channel offers soft-CDR mode to support the Gigabit Ethernet
and SGMII protocols. A receiver PLL uses the local clock source for reference.
Figure 8–20 shows the soft-CDR mode datapath.
In soft-CDR mode, the synchronizer block is inactive. The DPA circuitry selects an
optimal DPA clock phase to sample the data. Use the selected DPA clock for bit-slip
operation and deserialization. The DPA block also forwards the selected DPA clock,
divided by the deserialization factor called
rx_divfwdclk
, to the FPGA fabric, along
with the deserialized data. This clock signal is put on the periphery clock (PCLK)
network. When using soft-CDR mode, the
rx_reset
port must not be asserted after
the DPA training is asserted because the DPA will continuously choose new phase
taps from the PLL to track parts per million (PPM) differences between the reference
clock and incoming data.
fFor more information about periphery clock networks, refer to the Clock Networks and
PLLs in Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Figure 8–20. Receiver Datapath in Soft-CDR Mode (1), (2), (3)
Notes to Figure 8–20:
(1) All disabled blocks and signals are grayed out.
(2) In SDR and DDR modes, the data width from the IOE is 1 and 2 bits, respectively.
(3) The rx_out port has a maximum data width of 10 bits.
2
Deserializer Bit Slip
Synchronizer
DPA Circuitry
2
Clock Mux
8 Serial LVDS
Clock Phases
Left/Right PLL
rx_inclock
LVDS Clock Domain
DPA Clock Domain
10
DOUT DIN DOUT DIN
DOUT DIN DIN
Retimed
Data
DPA Clock
LVDS_diffiioclk
DPA_diffioclk
3
(DPA_LOAD_EN,
DPA_diffioclk,
rx_divfwdclk)
(LVDS_LOAD_EN,
LVDS_diffioclk,
rx_outclk)
3
(LOAD_EN, diffioclk)
diffioclk
rx_out
rx_divfwdclk
rx_outclock
rx_in
+
FPGA
Fabric
LVDS Receiver
I
O
E
S
u
pp
o
r
t
s
S
DR, DDR, or Non-Re
g
istered Datapat
h
IO
E
8–26 Chapter 8: High-Speed Differential I/O Interfaces and DPA in Stratix IV Devices
LVDS Interface with the Use External PLL Option Enabled
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
You can use every LVDS channel in soft-CDR mode and can drive the FPGA fabric
using the periphery clock network in the Stratix IV device family. The
rx_dpa_locked
signal is not valid in soft-CDR mode because the DPA continuously changes its phase
to track PPM differences between the upstream transmitter and the local receiver
input reference clocks. The parallel clock
rx_outclock
, generated by the left and right
PLL, is also forwarded to the FPGA fabric.
LVDS Interface with the Use External PLL Option Enabled
The ALTLVDS MegaWizard Plug-In Manager software provides an option for
implementing the LVDS interface with the Use External PLL option. With this option
enabled you can control the PLL settings, such as dynamically reconfiguring the PLL
to support different data rates, dynamic phase shift, and other settings. You also must
instantiate an ALTPLL megafunction to generate the various clock and load enable
signals.
When you enable the Use External PLL option with the ALTLVDS transmitter and
receiver, the following signals are required from the ALTPLL megafunction:
■Serial clock input to the SERDES of the ALTLVDS transmitter and receiver
■Load enable to the SERDES of the ALTLVDS transmitter and receiver
■Parallel clock used to clock the transmitter FPGA fabric logic and parallel clock
used for the receiver
rx_syncclock
port and receiver FPGA fabric logic
■Asynchronous PLL reset port of the ALTLVDS receiver
1As an example, Table 8–10 describes the serial clock output, load enable output, and
parallel clock output generated on ports c0, c1, and c2, respectively, along with the
locked signal of the ALTPLL instance. You can choose any of the PLL output clock
ports to generate the interface clocks.
fWith soft SERDES, a different clocking requirement is needed. For more information,
refer to the LVDS SERDES Transmitter/Receiver (ALTLVDS_RX/TX) Megafunction User
Guide.
1The high-speed clock generated from the PLL is intended to clock the LVDS SERDES
circuitry only. Do not use the high-speed clock to drive other logic because the
allowed frequency to drive the core logic is restricted by the PLL FOUT specification.
For more information about the FOUT specification, refer to the DC and Switching
Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Table 8–10 lists the signal interface between the output ports of the ALTPLL
megafunction and the input ports of the ALTLVDS transmitter and receiver.
Table 8–10. Signal Interface Between ALTPLL and ALTLVDS_TX and ALTLVDS_RX Megafunctions (Part 1 of 2)
From the ALTPLL
Megafunction To the ALTLVDS Transmitter To the ALTLVDS Receiver
Serial clock output (c0) (1)
tx_inclock
(serial clock input to the
transmitter)
rx_inclock
(serial clock input)
Load enable output (c1)
tx_enable
(load enable to the transmitter)
rx_enable
(load enable for the
deserializer)
Chapter 8: High-Speed Differential I/O Interfaces and DPA in Stratix IV Devices 8–27
LVDS Interface with the Use External PLL Option Enabled
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
1The
rx_syncclock
port is automatically enabled in an LVDS receiver in external PLL
mode. The Quartus II compiler errors out if this port is not connected, as shown in
Figure 8–21.
When generating the ALTPLL megafunction, the Left/Right PLL option is configured
to set up the PLL in LVDS mode. Figure 8–21 shows the connection between the
ALTPLL and ALTLVDS_TX and ALTLVDS_RX megafunctions.
Parallel clock output (c2) Parallel clock used inside the transmitter core
logic in the FPGA fabric
rx_syncclock
(parallel clock input) and
parallel clock used inside the receiver
core logic in the FPGA fabric
~(locked) —
pll_areset
(asynchronous PLL reset
port) (2)
Notes to Table 8–10:
(1) The serial clock output (c0) can only drive
tx_inclock
on the ALTLVDS transmitter and
rx_inclock
on the ALTLVDS receiver. This clock
cannot drive the core logic.
(2) The
pll_areset
signal is automatically enabled for the LVDS receiver in external PLL mode. This signal does not exist for LVDS transmitter
instantiation when the external PLL option is enabled.
Table 8–10. Signal Interface Between ALTPLL and ALTLVDS_TX and ALTLVDS_RX Megafunctions (Part 2 of 2)
From the ALTPLL
Megafunction To the ALTLVDS Transmitter To the ALTLVDS Receiver
Figure 8–21. LVDS Interface with the ALTPLL Megafunction (1)
Note to Figure 8–21:
(1) Instantiation of
pll_areset
is optional for the ALTPLL instantiation.
Transmitter Core Logic
tx_coreclk
rx_coreclk
Receiver Core Logic
tx_in
tx_inclock
tx_enable ALTPLL
LVDS Receiver
(ALTLVDS)
LVDS Transmitter
(ALTLVDS)
FPGA Fabric
c0
inclk0
c1
c2
rx_out
rx_inclock
rx_enable
rx_syncclock
pll_areset
locked
pll_areset
8–28 Chapter 8: High-Speed Differential I/O Interfaces and DPA in Stratix IV Devices
LVDS Interface with the Use External PLL Option Enabled
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Example 8–1 shows how to generate three output clocks using an ALTPLL
megafunction.
Example 8–1. Generating Three Output Clocks Using an ALTPLL Megafunction
LVDS data rate = 1 Gbps; serialization factor = 10; input reference clock = 100 MHz
The following settings are used when generating the three output clocks using an ALTPLL megafunction.
The serial clock must be 1000 MHz and the parallel clock must be 100 MHz (serial clock divided by the
serialization factor):
■c0
■Frequency = 1000 MHz (multiplication factor = 10 and division factor = 1)
■Phase shift = –180° with respect to the voltage-controlled oscillator (VCO) clock
■Duty cycle = 50%
■c1
■Frequency = (1000/10) = 100 MHz (multiplication factor = 1 and division factor = 1)
■Phase shift = (10 - 2) × 360/10 = 288° [(deserialization factor - 2)/deserialization factor] × 360°
■Duty cycle = (100/10) = 10% (100 divided by the serialization factor)
■c2
■Frequency = (1000/10) = 100 MHz (multiplication factor = 1 and division factor = 1)
■Phase shift = (–180/10) = –18° (c0 phase shift divided by the serialization factor)
■Duty cycle = 50%
Chapter 8: High-Speed Differential I/O Interfaces and DPA in Stratix IV Devices 8–29
Left and Right PLLs (PLL_Lx and PLL_Rx)
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
The Equation 8–1 calculations for phase shift assume that the input clock and serial
data are edge aligned. Introducing a phase shift of –180° to sampling clock (c0)
ensures that the input data is center-aligned with respect to the c0, as shown in
Figure 8–22.
Left and Right PLLs (PLL_Lx and PLL_Rx)
The Stratix IV device family contains up to eight left and right PLLs with up to four
PLLs located on the left side and four on the right side of the device. The left PLLs can
support high-speed differential I/O banks on the left side; the right PLLs can support
high-speed differential I/O banks on the right side of the device. The high-speed
differential I/O receiver and transmitter channels use these left and right PLLs to
generate the parallel clocks (
rx_outclock
and
tx_outclock
) and high-speed clocks
(
diffioclk
).
Figure 8–2 on page 8–3 and Figure 8–3 on page 8–4 show the locations of the left and
right PLLs for Stratix IV E, GT, and GX devices. The PLL VCO operates at the clock
frequency of the data rate. Clock switchover and dynamic reconfiguration are allowed
using the left and right PLL in high-speed differential I/O support mode.
fFor more information, refer to the Clock Networks and PLLs in Stratix IV Devices
chapter.
Figure 8–22. Phase Relationship for External PLL Interface Signals
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10
inclk0
VCO clk
(internal PLL clk)
c0 (-180
phase shift)
c1 (288
phase shift)
c2 (-18
phase shift)
Serial data
8–30 Chapter 8: High-Speed Differential I/O Interfaces and DPA in Stratix IV Devices
Stratix IV Clocking
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Stratix IV Clocking
The left and right PLLs feed into the differential transmitter and receive channels
through the LVDS and DPA clock network. The center left and right PLLs can clock
the transmitter and receive channels above and below them. The corner left and right
PLLs can drive I/Os in the banks adjacent to them.
Figure 8–23 shows center PLL clocking in the Stratix IV device family. For more
information about PLL clocking restrictions, refer to “Differential Pin Placement
Guidelines” on page 8–38.
Figure 8–24 shows center and corner PLL clocking in the Stratix IV device family. For
more information about PLL clocking restrictions, refer to “Differential Pin Placement
Guidelines” on page 8–38.
Figure 8–23. LVDS/DPA Clocks in the Stratix IV Device Family with Center PLLs
4
2
2
2
2
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
Quadrant Quadrant
Quadrant Quadrant
LVDS
Clock
Center
PLL_L2
Center
PLL_L3
DPA
Clock
LVDS
Clock
DPA
Clock
LVDS
Clock
Center
PLL_R2
Center
PLL_R3
DPA
Clock
LVDS
Clock
DPA
Clock
Figure 8–24. LVDS/DPA Clocks in the Stratix IV Device Family with Center and Corner PLLs
4
2
2
2
2
4
Quadrant Quadrant
Quadrant Quadrant
LVDS
Clock
Center
PLL_L2
Center
PLL_L3
LVDS
Clock
DPA
Clock
2
4
2
4
4
4
2
4
2
4
LVDS
Clock
Center
PLL_R2
Center
PLL_R3
DPA
Clock
LVDS
Clock
DPA
Clock
Corner
PLL_L1
Corner
PLL_L4
DPA
Clock
Corner
PLL_R1
Corner
PLL_R4
Chapter 8: High-Speed Differential I/O Interfaces and DPA in Stratix IV Devices 8–31
Source-Synchronous Timing Budget
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
Source-Synchronous Timing Budget
This section describes the timing budget, waveforms, and specifications for
source-synchronous signaling in the Stratix IV device family. LVDS I/O standards
enable high-speed data transmission. This high data transmission rate results in better
overall system performance. To take advantage of fast system performance, it is
important to understand how to analyze timing for these high-speed signals. Timing
analysis for the differential block is different from traditional synchronous timing
analysis techniques.
Instead of focusing on clock-to-output and setup times, source synchronous timing
analysis is based on the skew between the data and the clock signals. High-speed
differential data transmission requires the use of timing parameters provided by IC
vendors and is strongly influenced by board skew, cable skew, and clock jitter. This
section defines the source-synchronous differential data orientation timing
parameters, the timing budget definitions for the Stratix IV device family, and how to
use these timing parameters to determine a design’s maximum performance.
Differential Data Orientation
There is a set relationship between an external clock and the incoming data. For
operations at 1 Gbps and a serialization factor of 10, the external clock is multiplied by
10. You can set phase-alignment in the PLL to coincide with the sampling window of
each data bit. The data is sampled on the falling edge of the multiplied clock.
Figure 8–25 shows the data bit orientation of the ×10 mode.
Differential I/O Bit Position
Data synchronization is necessary for successful data transmission at high
frequencies. Figure 8–26 shows the data bit orientation for a channel operation. This
figure is based on the following:
■Serialization factor equals the clock multiplication factor
■Edge alignment is selected for phase alignment
■Implemented in hard SERDES
Figure 8–25. Bit Orientation in the Quartus II Software
987 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
10 LVDS Bits
MSB LSB
inclock/outclock
data in
8–32 Chapter 8: High-Speed Differential I/O Interfaces and DPA in Stratix IV Devices
Source-Synchronous Timing Budget
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
For other serialization factors, use the Quartus II software tools to find the bit position
within the word. Table 8–11 lists the bit positions after deserialization.
Table 8–11 lists the conventions for differential bit naming for 18 differential channels.
The MSB and LSB positions increase with the number of channels used in a system.
Figure 8–26. Bit-Order and Word Boundary for One Differential Channel (1)
Note to Figure 8–26:
(1) These are only functional waveforms and are not intended to convey timing information.
Previous Cycle
76543210
MSB LSB
tx_outclock
tx_out
XXXXXXXX XXX XXXXX
Current Cycle Next Cycle
Transmitter Channel
Operation (x8 Mode)
X
XXXXXXXX
rx_inclock
rx_in
76543210 XXX XXXXXXX XXXX X
Receiver Channel
Operation (x8 Mode)
rx_outclock
rx_out [7..0]
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 X X X X
Table 8–11. Differential Bit Naming
Receiver Channel Data Number
Internal 8-Bit Parallel Data
MSB Position LSB Position
170
2158
32316
43124
53932
64740
75548
86356
97164
10 79 72
11 87 80
12 95 88
13 103 96
14 111 104
15 119 112
16 127 120
17 135 128
18 143 136
Chapter 8: High-Speed Differential I/O Interfaces and DPA in Stratix IV Devices 8–33
Source-Synchronous Timing Budget
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
Transmitter Channel-to-Channel Skew
Transmitter channel-to-channel skew (TCCS) is an important parameter based on the
Stratix IV transmitter in a source synchronous differential interface. This parameter is
used in receiver skew margin calculation. For more information, refer to “Receiver
Skew Margin for Non-DPA Mode” on page 8–33.
TCCS is the difference between the fastest and slowest data output transitions,
including the TCO variation and clock skew. For LVDS transmitters, the TimeQuest
Timing Analyzer provides a TCCS report, which shows TCCS values for serial output
ports.
fYou can get the TCCS value from the TCCS report (
report_TCCS
) in the Quartus II
compilation report under the TimeQuest Timing Analyzer, or from the DC and
Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Receiver Skew Margin for Non-DPA Mode
Changes in system environment, such as temperature, media (cable, connector, or
PCB), and loading effect the receiver’s setup and hold times; internal skew affects the
sampling ability of the receiver.
Different modes of LVDS receivers use different specifications that can help in
deciding the ability to sample the received serial data correctly. In DPA mode, you
must use DPA jitter tolerance instead of receiver input skew margin (RSKM).
In non-DPA mode, use TCCS, RSKM, and sampling window (SW) specifications for
high-speed source-synchronous differential signals in the receiver data path. The
relationship between RSKM, TCCS, and SW is expressed by the RSKM equation
shown in Equation 8–1.
Conventions used for the equation:
■Time unit interval (TUI)—Time period of the serial data.
■RSKM—The timing margin between the receiver’s clock input and the data input
sampling window.
■SW—The period of time that the input data must be stable to ensure that data is
successfully sampled by the LVDS receiver. The SW is a device property and varies
with device speed grade.
■TCCS—The timing difference between the fastest and the slowest output edges,
including tCO variation and clock skew, across channels driven by the same PLL.
The clock is included in the TCCS measurement.
Equation 8–1. RSKM
RSKM TUI SW–TCCS–
2
----------------------------------------------
=
8–34 Chapter 8: High-Speed Differential I/O Interfaces and DPA in Stratix IV Devices
Source-Synchronous Timing Budget
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Figure 8–27 shows the relationship between the RSKM, TCCS, and the receiver’s SW.
You must calculate the RSKM value to decide whether or not data can be sampled
properly by the LVDS receiver with the given data rate and device. A positive RSKM
value indicates that the LVDS receiver can sample the data properly, whereas a
negative RSKM indicates that it cannot.
Figure 8–27. Differential High-Speed Timing Diagram and Timing Budget for Non-DPA Mode
TUI
Time Unit Interval (TUI)
TCCS
Internal
Clock
Falling Edge
TCCS
TCCS
2
Receiver
Input Data
Transmitter
Output Data
Internal
Clock
Synchronization
External
Clock
Receiver
Input Data
Internal
Clock
External
Input Clock
Timing Budget
Timing Diagram
Clock Placement
SW
TCCS
RSKM RSKM
SW
RSKM RSKM
Chapter 8: High-Speed Differential I/O Interfaces and DPA in Stratix IV Devices 8–35
Source-Synchronous Timing Budget
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
For LVDS receivers, the Quartus II software provides an RSKM report showing the
SW, TUI, and RSKM values for non-DPA mode. You can generate the RSKM report by
executing the
report_RSKM
command in the TimeQuest Timing Analyzer. You can find
the RSKM report in the Quartus II compilation report under the TimeQuest Timing
Analyzer section.
1In order to obtain the RSKM value, you must assign an appropriate input delay to the
LVDS receiver through the TimeQuest Timing Analyzer constraints menu.
For assigning input delay, follow these steps:
1. The Quartus II TimeQuest Timing Analyzer GUI has many options for setting the
constraints and analyzing the design. Figure 8–28 shows various commands on
the Constraints menu. For setting input delay, you must select the Set Input Delay
option.
Figure 8–28. Selection of Constraint Menu in TimeQuest Timing Analyzer
8–36 Chapter 8: High-Speed Differential I/O Interfaces and DPA in Stratix IV Devices
Source-Synchronous Timing Budget
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
2. Figure 8–29 shows the setting parameters for the Set Input Delay option. The
clock name must reference the source synchronous clock that feeds the LVDS
receiver. Select the desired clock using the pull-down menu.
3. Figure 8–30 shows the Targets option. You can view a list of all available ports
using the List option in the Name Finder window.
Figure 8–29. Input Time Delay Assignment Through TimeQuest Timing Analyzer
Figure 8–30. Name Finder Window in Set Input Delay Option
Chapter 8: High-Speed Differential I/O Interfaces and DPA in Stratix IV Devices 8–37
Source-Synchronous Timing Budget
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
4. Select the LVDS receiver serial input ports (from the list) according to the input
delay you set. Click OK.
5. In the Set Input Delay window, set the appropriate values in the Input Delay
Options section and Delay value.
6. Click Run to incorporate these values in the TimeQuest Timing Analyzer.
7. Assign the appropriate delay for all the LVDS receiver input ports following these
steps. If you have already assigned Input Delay and you need to add more delay
to that input port, use the Add Delay option in the Set Input Delay window.
1If no input delay is set in the TimeQuest Timing Analyzer, the receiver
channel-to-channel skew (RCCS) defaults to zero. You can also directly set the input
delay in a Synopsys Design Constraint file (.sdc) using the
set_input_delay
command.
fFor more information about .sdc commands and the TimeQuest Timing Analyzer,
refer to the Quartus II TimeQuest Timing Analyzer chapter in volume 3 of the Quartus II
Development Software Handbook.
Example 8–2 shows the RSKM calculation.
1You can also calculate RSKM using the steps described in “Guidelines for DPA-
Enabled Differential Channels” on page 8–38.
Example 8–2. RSKM
Data Rate: 1 Gbps, Board channel-to-channel skew = 200 ps
For Stratix IV devices:
TCCS = 100 ps (pending characterization)
SW = 300 ps (pending characterization)
TUI = 1000 ps
Total RCCS = TCCS + Board channel-to-channel skew= 100 ps + 200 ps
= 300 ps
RSKM= TUI - SW - RCCS
= 1000 ps - 300 ps - 300 ps
= 400 ps > 0
Because the RSKM > 0 ps, receiver non-DPA mode must work correctly.
8–38 Chapter 8: High-Speed Differential I/O Interfaces and DPA in Stratix IV Devices
Differential Pin Placement Guidelines
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Differential Pin Placement Guidelines
To ensure proper high-speed operation, differential pin placement guidelines have
been established. The Quartus II compiler automatically checks that these guidelines
are followed and issues an error message if they are not met.
This section is divided into pin placement guidelines with and without DPA usage
because DPA usage adds some constraints on the placement of high-speed differential
channels.
1DPA-enabled differential channels refer to DPA mode or soft-CDR mode; DPA
disabled channels refer to non-DPA mode.
Guidelines for DPA-Enabled Differential Channels
The Stratix IV device family has differential receivers and transmitters in I/O banks
on the left and right sides of the device. Each receiver has a dedicated DPA circuit to
align the phase of the clock to the data phase of its associated channel. When you use
DPA-enabled channels in differential banks, you must adhere to the guidelines listed
in the following sections.
DPA-Enabled Channels and Single-Ended I/Os
When you enable a DPA channel in a bank, both single-ended I/Os and differential
I/O standards are allowed in the bank.
■Single-ended I/Os are allowed in the same I/O bank, as long as the single-ended
I/O standard uses the same VCCIO as the DPA-enabled differential I/O bank.
■Single-ended inputs can be in the same logic array block (LAB) row as a
differential channel using the SERDES circuitry.
■DDIO can be placed within the same LAB row as a SERDES differential channel
but half rate DDIO (single data rate) output pins cannot be placed within the same
LAB row as a receiver SERDES differential channel. The input register must be
implemented within the FPGA fabric logic.
DPA-Enabled Channel Driving Distance
If the number of DPA channels driven by each left and right PLL exceeds 25 LAB
rows, Altera recommends implementing data realignment (bit slip) circuitry for all
the DPA channels.
Using Corner and Center Left and Right PLLs
If a differential bank is being driven by two left and right PLLs, where the corner left
and right PLL is driving one group and the center left and right PLL is driving
another group, there must be at least one row of separation between the two groups of
DPA-enabled channels (refer to Figure 8–31). The two groups can operate at
independent frequencies.
Chapter 8: High-Speed Differential I/O Interfaces and DPA in Stratix IV Devices 8–39
Differential Pin Placement Guidelines
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
You do not need a separation if a single left and right PLL is driving the DPA-enabled
channels as well as DPA-disabled channels.
Figure 8–31. Corner and Center Left and Right PLLs Driving DPA-Enabled Differential I/Os in the
Same Bank
Center
Left /Right PLL
Corner
Left
/
Right PLL
Diff I/O
DPA-enabled
Diff I/O
DPA-enabled
Diff I/O
DPA
-enabled
Diff I/O
DPA-
enabled
Diff I/O
Channels
driven by
Corner
Left/Right
PLL
Channels
driven by
Center
Left/Right
PLL
One Unused
Channel for Buffer
DPA -enabled
Diff I/O
DPA - enabled
Diff I/O
DPA - enabled
Diff I/O
DPA - enabled
Diff I/O
DPA - enabled
Diff I/O
Reference
Reference
CLK
CLK
8–40 Chapter 8: High-Speed Differential I/O Interfaces and DPA in Stratix IV Devices
Differential Pin Placement Guidelines
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Using Both Center Left and Right PLLs
You can use both center left and right PLLs to drive DPA-enabled channels
simultaneously, as long as they drive these channels in their adjacent banks only, as
shown in Figure 8–32.
If one of the center left and right PLLs drives the top and bottom banks, you cannot
use the other center left and right PLL to drive differential channels, as shown in
Figure 8–32.
If the top PLL_L2 and PLL_R2 drives DPA-enabled channels in the lower differential
bank, the PLL_L3 and PLL_R3 cannot drive DPA-enabled channels in the upper
differential banks and vice versa. In other words, the center left and right PLLs cannot
drive cross-banks simultaneously, as shown in Figure 8–33.
Figure 8–32. Center Left and Right PLLs Driving DPA-Enabled Differential I/Os
Reference
CLK
DPA-enabled
Diff I/O
DPA-enabled
Diff I/O
DPA-enabled
Diff I/O
DPA-enabled
Diff I/O
DPA-enabled
Diff I/O
DPA-enabled
Diff I/O
DPA-enabled
Diff I/O
DPA-enabled
Diff I/O
DPA-enabled
Diff I/O
DPA-enabled
Diff I/O
DPA-enabled
Diff I/O
Center
Left/Right PLL
(PLL_L2/PLL_R2)
Center
Left/Right PLL
(PLL_L2/PLL_R2)
Center
Left/Right PLL
(PLL_L3/PLL_R3)
Center
Left/Right PLL
(PLL_L3/PLL_R3)
Unused
PLL
Reference
CLK
Reference
CLK
Reference
CLK
DPA-enabled
Diff I/O
DPA-enabled
Diff I/O
DPA-enabled
Diff I/O
DPA-enabled
Diff I/O
DPA-enabled
Diff I/O
Chapter 8: High-Speed Differential I/O Interfaces and DPA in Stratix IV Devices 8–41
Differential Pin Placement Guidelines
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
Figure 8–33. Invalid Placement of DPA-Enabled Differential I/Os Driven by Both Center Left and
Right PLLs
DPA-enabled
Diff I/O
Center Left /Right
PLL
DPA-enabled
Diff I/O
DPA-enabled
Diff I/O
Reference
CLK
Reference
CLK
DPA-enabled
Diff I/O
DPA-enabled
Diff I/O
DPA-enabled
Diff I/O
Center Left /Right
PLL
DPA-enabled
Diff I/O
DPA-enabled
Diff I/O
8–42 Chapter 8: High-Speed Differential I/O Interfaces and DPA in Stratix IV Devices
Differential Pin Placement Guidelines
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Guidelines for DPA-Disabled Differential Channels
When you use DPA-disabled channels in the left and right banks of a Stratix IV
device, you must adhere to the guidelines in the following sections.
1When using non-DPA receivers, you must drive the PLL from a dedicated and
compensated clock input pin. Compensated clock inputs are dedicated clock pins in
the same I/O bank as the PLL.
fFor more information about dedicated and compensated clock inputs, refer to the
Clock Networks and PLLs in Stratix IV Devices chapter.
DPA-Disabled Channels and Single-Ended I/Os
The placement rules for DPA-disabled channels and single-ended I/Os are the same
as those for DPA-enabled channels and single-ended I/Os. For more information,
refer to “DPA-Enabled Channels and Single-Ended I/Os” on page 8–38.
DPA-Disabled Channel Driving Distance
Each left and right PLL can drive all the DPA-disabled channels in the entire bank.
Using Corner and Center Left and Right PLLs
You can use a corner left and right PLL to drive all transmitter channels and a center
left and right PLL to drive all DPA-disabled receiver channels within the same
differential bank. In other words, a transmitter channel and a receiver channel in the
same LAB row can be driven by two different PLLs, as shown in Figure 8–34.
A corner left and right PLL and a center left and right PLL can drive duplex channels
in the same differential bank, as long as the channels driven by each PLL are not
interleaved. Separation is not necessary between the group of channels driven by the
corner and center left and right PLLs, as shown in Figure 8–34 and Figure 8–35.
Chapter 8: High-Speed Differential I/O Interfaces and DPA in Stratix IV Devices 8–43
Differential Pin Placement Guidelines
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
Figure 8–34. Corner and Center Left and Right PLLs Driving DPA-Disabled Differential I/Os in the
Same Bank
Diff RX
Corner Left/Right
PLL
Diff TX
Diff RX
Diff RX Diff TX
Diff TX
Diff TX
Diff TX
Diff TX
Diff TX
Diff RX
Diff RX Diff TX
Diff RX
Diff RX Diff TX
Diff RX
Diff RX
Diff RX Diff TX
Corner Left/Right
PLL
DPA -disabled
Diff I /O
Channels
driven by
Corner
Left/Right
PLL
Channels
driven by
Center
Left/Right
PLL
No
separation
buffer
needed
Reference
CLK
Reference
CLK
Reference
CLK
Reference
CLK
DPA-disabled
Diff I/O
DPA-disabled
Diff I/O
DPA-disabled
Diff I/O
DPA-disabled
Diff I/O
DPA-disabled
Diff I/O
DPA-disabled
Diff I/O
DPA-disabled
Diff I/O
DPA-disabled
Diff I/O
DPA-disabled
Diff I/O
Center Left/Right
PLL
Center Left/Right
PLL
8–44 Chapter 8: High-Speed Differential I/O Interfaces and DPA in Stratix IV Devices
Differential Pin Placement Guidelines
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Figure 8–35. Invalid Placement of DPA-Disabled Differential I/Os Due to Interleaving of Channels
Driven by the Corner and Center Left and Right PLLs
DPA-disabled
Diff I/O
DPA-disabled
Diff I/O
DPA-disabled
Diff I/O
DPA-disabled
Diff I/O
DPA-disabled
Diff I/O
DPA-disabled
Diff I/O
DPA-disabled
Diff I/O
DPA-disabled
Diff I/O
Corner Left/Right
PLL
Reference CLK
DPA-disabled
Diff I/O
DPA-disabled
Diff I/O
Reference CLK
Center Left/Right
PLL
Chapter 8: High-Speed Differential I/O Interfaces and DPA in Stratix IV Devices 8–45
Differential Pin Placement Guidelines
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
Using Both Center Left and Right PLLs
You can use both center left and right PLLs simultaneously to drive DPA-disabled
channels on upper and lower differential banks. Unlike DPA-enabled channels, the
center left and right PLLs can drive cross-banks. For example, the upper-center left
and right PLL can drive the lower differential bank at the same time the lower center
left and right PLL is driving the upper differential bank, and vice versa, as shown in
Figure 8–36.
Figure 8–36. Both Center Left and Right PLLs Driving Cross-Bank DPA-Disabled Channels
Simultaneously
DPA-disabled
Diff I/O
DPA-disabled
Diff I/O
DPA-disabled
Diff I/O
DPA-disabled
Diff I/O
DPA-disabled
Diff I/O
DPA-disabled
Diff I/O
DPA-disabled
Diff I/O
DPA-disabled
Diff I/O
Reference
CLK
Reference
CLK
Center
Left/Right PLL
Center
Left/Right PLL
8–46 Chapter 8: High-Speed Differential I/O Interfaces and DPA in Stratix IV Devices
Differential Pin Placement Guidelines
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Document Revision History
Table 8–12 lists the revision history for this chapter.
Table 8–12. Document Revision History (Part 1 of 2)
Date Version Changes
September 2012 3.4
■Updated Figure 8–22 to close FB case #.28708.
■Updated the “Soft-CDR Mode” section to close FB #41886.
December 2011 3.3
■Updated the “Overview” and “ALTLVDS Port List” sections.
■Updated Table 8–10.
February 2011 3.2
■Updated Table 8–10.
■Updated the “Differential Transmitter”, “Non-DPA Mode”, “LVDS Interface with the Use
External PLL Option Enabled”, “Deserializer”, and “Guidelines for DPA-Disabled
Differential Channels” sections.
■Applied new template.
■Minor text edits.
March 2010 3.1
■Removed note 7 from Table 8–1 and Table 8–2.
■Updated Figure 8–5.
■Updated the “LVDS Channels” section.
■Updated Table 8–7.
■Added a note to the “LVDS Interface with the Use External PLL Option Enabled” and
“ALTLVDS Port List” sections.
■Minor text edits.
November 2009 3.0
■Changed “dedicated LVDS” to “true LVDS”.
■Removed EP4SE110, EP4SE290, and EP4SE680 devices.
■Added EP4SE820 and Stratix IV GT devices.
■Updated “LVDS Channels”, “Differential Transmitter”, “Soft-CDR Mode”, and “DPA-
Enabled Channels and Single-Ended I/Os” sections.
■Updated Table 8–1, Table 8–2, Table 8–5, and Table 8–6.
■Added Table 8–3 and Table 8–4.
■Updated Example 8–1.
■Updated Figure 8–22.
■Minor text edits.
June 2009 2.3
■Added an introductory paragraph to increase search ability.
■Minor text edits.
April 2009 2.2
■Updated “Introduction”.
■Updated Figure 8–3.
■Removed Table 8-5 and Table 8-6.
March 2009 2.1
■Updated “Introduction”, “Stratix IV LVDS Channels”, “Stratix IV Differential Transmitter”,
“Differential I/O Termination”, and “Dynamic Phase Alignment (DPA) Block” sections.
■Updated Table 8–1, Table 8–2, Table 8–3, Table 8–4, and Table 8–7.
■Added Table 8–5 and Table 8–6.
■Updated Figure 8–2.
■Removed “Referenced Documents” section.
Chapter 8: High-Speed Differential I/O Interfaces and DPA in Stratix IV Devices 8–47
Differential Pin Placement Guidelines
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
November 2008 2.0
■Updated Figure 8–2, Figure 8–3, Figure 8–21, Figure 8–34.
■Removed Figure 8–31.
■Updated Table 8–1, Table 8–10.
■Updated “Differential Pin Placement Guidelines” section.
May 2008 1.0 Initial release.
Table 8–12. Document Revision History (Part 2 of 2)
Date Version Changes
8–48 Chapter 8: High-Speed Differential I/O Interfaces and DPA in Stratix IV Devices
Differential Pin Placement Guidelines
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
January 2016 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
Section III. System Integration
This section includes the following chapters:
■Chapter 9, Hot Socketing and Power-On Reset in Stratix IV Devices
■Chapter 10, Configuration, Design Security, and Remote System Upgrades in
Stratix IV Devices
■Chapter 11, SEU Mitigation in Stratix IV Devices
■Chapter 12, JTAG Boundary-Scan Testing in Stratix IV Devices
■Chapter 13, Power Management in Stratix IV Devices
Revision History
Refer to each chapter for its own specific revision history. For information on when
each chapter was updated, refer to the Chapter Revision Dates section, which appears
in the full handbook.
III–2 Section III: System Integration
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2016 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
SIV51009-3.2
© 2011 Altera Corporation. All rights reserved. ALTERA, ARRIA, CYCLONE, HARDCOPY, MAX, MEGACORE, NIOS, QUARTUS and STRATIX words and logos
are trademarks of Altera Corporation and registered in the U.S. Patent and Trademark Office and in other countries. All other words and logos identified as
trademarks or service marks are the property of their respective holders as described at www.altera.com/common/legal.html. Altera warrants performance of its
semiconductor products to current specifications in accordance with Altera's standard warranty, but reserves the right to make changes to any products and
services at any time without notice. Altera assumes no responsibility or liability arising out of the application or use of any information, product, or service
described herein except as expressly agreed to in writing by Altera. Altera customers are advised to obtain the latest version of device specifications before relying
on any published information and before placing orders for products or services.
Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
February 2011
Feedback Subscribe
ISO
9001:2008
Registered
9. Hot Socketing and Power-On Reset in
Stratix IV Devices
This chapter describes hot-socketing specifications, power-on reset (POR)
requirements, and their implementation in Stratix®IV devices.
Stratix IV devices offer hot socketing, also known as hot plug-in or hot swap, and
power sequencing support without the use of external devices. You can insert or
remove a Stratix IV device or a board in a system during system operation without
causing undesirable effects to the running system bus or board that is inserted into the
system.
The hot-socketing feature also removes some of the difficulty when you use Stratix IV
devices on PCBs that contain a mixture of 3.0-, 2.5-, 1.8-, 1.5-, and 1.2-V devices.
The Stratix IV hot-socketing feature provides:
■Board or device insertion and removal without external components or board
manipulation
■Support for any power-up sequence with the exception that VCC must power up
fully before VCCAUX for all Stratix IV production devices
■I/O buffers non-intrusive to system buses during hot insertion
This section also describes POR circuitry in Stratix IV devices. POR circuitry keeps the
devices in the reset state until the power supply outputs are within operating range
(provided VCC powers up fully before VCCAUX).
This chapter contains the following sections:
■“Stratix IV Hot-Socketing Specifications”
■“Hot-Socketing Feature Implementation in Stratix IV Devices” on page 9–2
■“Power-On Reset Circuitry” on page 9–3
■“Power-On Reset Specifications” on page 9–4
Stratix IV Hot-Socketing Specifications
Stratix IV devices are hot-socketing compliant without the need for external
components or special design requirements. Hot-socketing support in Stratix IV
devices has the following advantages:
■“Stratix IV Devices can be Driven Before Power Up” on page 9–2
■“I/O Pins Remain Tri-Stated During Power Up” on page 9–2
■“Insertion or Removal of a Stratix IV Device from a Powered-Up System” on
page 9–2
February 2011
SIV51009-3.2
9–2 Chapter 9: Hot Socketing and Power-On Reset in Stratix IV Devices
Stratix IV Hot-Socketing Specifications
Stratix IV Device Handbook February 2011 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Stratix IV Devices can be Driven Before Power Up
You can drive signals into I/O pins, dedicated input pins, and dedicated clock pins of
Stratix IV devices before or during power up or power down without damaging the
device.
I/O Pins Remain Tri-Stated During Power Up
A device that does not support hot socketing can interrupt system operation or cause
contention by driving out before or during power up. In a hot-socketing situation, the
Stratix IV device’s output buffers are turned off during system power up or power
down. Also, the Stratix IV device does not drive out until the device is configured and
working within the recommended operating conditions.
Insertion or Removal of a Stratix IV Device from a Powered-Up System
Devices that do not support hot socketing can short power supplies when powered
up through the device signal pins. This irregular power up can damage both the
driving and driven devices and can disrupt card power up.
You can insert a Stratix IV device into or remove it from a powered-up system board
without damaging the system board or interfering with its operation.
You can power up or power down the VCCIO, VCC, VCCPGM, and VCCPD supplies in any
sequence (with any time between them) which are monitored by the hot socket circuit.
In addition, all other power supplies for the device can be powered up or down in any
sequence. Individual power supply ramp-up and ramp-down rates range from 50 µs
to 100 ms. During hot socketing, the I/O pin capacitance is less than 15 pF and the
clock pin capacitance is less than 20 pF.
1To successfully power-up and exit POR on production devices, fully power VCC
before VCCAUX begins to ramp.
A possible concern regarding hot socketing is the potential for “latch-up.” Stratix IV
devices are immune to latch-up when hot socketing. Latch-up can occur when
electrical subsystems are hot socketed into an active system. During hot socketing, the
signal pins can be connected and driven by the active system before the power supply
can provide current to the device’s power and ground planes. This condition can lead
to latch-up and cause a low-impedance path from power to ground within the device.
As a result, the device draws a large amount of current, possibly causing electrical
damage.
Chapter 9: Hot Socketing and Power-On Reset in Stratix IV Devices 9–3
Hot-Socketing Feature Implementation in Stratix IV Devices
February 2011 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
Hot-Socketing Feature Implementation in Stratix IV Devices
The hot-socketing feature turns off the output buffer during power up and power
down of the VCC, VCCAUX, VCCIO, VCCPGM, or VCCPD power supplies. The hot-socketing
circuitry generates an internal
HOTSCKT
signal when the VCC, VCCAUX, VCCIO, VCCPGM,
or VCCPD power supplies are below the threshold voltage. Hot-socketing circuitry is
designed to prevent excess I/O leakage during power up. When the voltage ramps up
very slowly, it is still relatively low, even after the POR signal is released and the
configuration is completed. The
CONF_DONE
,
nCEO
, and
nSTATUS
pins fail to respond, as
the output buffer cannot flip from the state set by the hot-socketing circuit at this low
voltage. Therefore, the hot-socketing circuitry has been removed from these
configuration pins to make sure that they are able to operate during configuration.
Thus, it is expected behavior for these pins to drive out during power-up and
power-down sequences.
Figure 9–1 shows the Stratix IV device’s I/O pin circuitry.
The POR circuit monitors the voltage level of the power supplies (VCC, VCCAUX, VCCPT,
VCCPGM, and VCCPD) and keeps the I/O pins tri-stated until the device is in user mode.
The weak pull-up resistor (R) in the Stratix IV input/output element (IOE) keeps the
I/O pins from floating. The 3.0-V tolerance control circuit permits the I/O pins to be
driven by 3.0 V before the VCC, VCCAUX, VCCPT, VCCPGM, or VCCPD supplies are
powered. It also prevents the I/O pins from driving out when the device is not in user
mode. To successfully power-up and exit POR on production devices, fully power
VCC before VCCAUX begins to ramp.
1Altera uses GND as a reference for hot-socketing operations and I/O buffer designs.
To ensure proper operation, you must connect the GND between boards before
connecting the power supplies. This prevents the GND on your board from being
pulled up inadvertently by a path to power through other components on your board.
A pulled up GND could otherwise cause an out-of-specification I/O voltage or
current condition with the Altera device.
Figure 9–1. Hot-Socketing Circuitry for Stratix IV Devices
V
CCIO
PAD
R
Voltage
Tolerance
Control
Output Enable
Hot Socket
Output
Pre-Driver
Power On
Reset
Monitor
Weak
Pull-Up
Resistor
Input Buffer
to Logic Array
9–4 Chapter 9: Hot Socketing and Power-On Reset in Stratix IV Devices
Power-On Reset Circuitry
Stratix IV Device Handbook February 2011 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Power-On Reset Circuitry
When power is applied to a Stratix IV device, a POR event occurs if the power supply
reaches the recommended operating range within the maximum power supply ramp
time (tRAMP). If tRAMP is not met, the device I/O pins and programming registers
remain tri-stated, during which device configuration could fail. The maximum tRAMP
for Stratix IV devices is 100 ms; the minimum tRAMP is 50 µs. When the
PORSEL
pin is
high, the maximum TRAMP for Stratix IV devices is 4 ms.
Stratix IV devices provide a dedicated input pin (
PORSEL
) to select a POR delay time
during power up. When the
PORSEL
pin is connected to GND, the POR delay time is
100 to 300 ms. When the
PORSEL
pin is set to high, the POR delay time is 4 to 12 ms.
The POR block consists of a regulator POR, satellite POR, and main POR to check the
power supply levels for proper device configuration.
The satellite POR monitors the following:
■VCCPD and VCCPGM power supplies that are used in the I/O buffers and for device
programming
■VCCAUX power supply which is the auxiliary supply for the programmable power
technology
■VCC and VCCPT power supplies that are used in the device core
1Altera requires powering up VCC before VCCAUX.
The main POR waits for satellite POR and the regulator POR to release the POR
signal. Until the release of the POR signal, the device configuration cannot start.
The internal configuration memory supply that is used during device configuration is
checked by the regulator POR block and is gated in the main POR block for the final
POR trip. Figure 9–2 shows a simplified diagram of the POR block.
1All configuration-related dedicated and dual function I/O pins must be powered by
VCCPGM.
Figure 9–2. Simplified POR Diagram for Stratix IV Devices
Regulator POR
Satellite POR
POR Pulse
Setting
PORSEL
POR
Main POR
VCCPGM
VCCPD
VCC
VCCPT
VCCAUX
Chapter 9: Hot Socketing and Power-On Reset in Stratix IV Devices 9–5
Power-On Reset Specifications
February 2011 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
Power-On Reset Specifications
Table 9–1 lists the power supplies that the POR circuit monitors.
1Altera requires powering up VCC before VCCAUX.
Table 9–2 lists the power supplies that the POR circuit does not monitor.
1VCCIO, VCCA_PLL, VCCD_PLL, VCC_CLKIN, and VCCBAT are not monitored by POR and have
no affect on the device configuration.
The POR specification is designed to ensure that all the circuits in the Stratix IV device
are at certain known states during power up.
The POR signal pulse width is programmable using the
PORSEL
input pin. When the
PORSEL
pin is connected to GND, the POR delay time is 100 to 300 ms. When the
PORSEL
pin is set to high, the POR delay time is 4 to 12 ms.
fFor more information about the POR specification, refer to the DC and Switching
Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Table 9–1. Power Supplies Monitored by the POR Circuitry
Power Supply Description Setting (V)
VCC Core and periphery power supply 0.9
VCCPT Programmable power technology power supply 1.5
VCCPD I/O pre-driver power supply 2.5, 3.0
VCCPGM Configuration pins power supply 1.8, 2.5, 3.0
VCCAUX Auxiliary supply for the programmable power technology 2.5
Table 9–2. Power Supplies Not Monitored by the POR Circuitry (Note 1)
Power Supply Description Setting (V)
VCCIO I/O power supply 1.2, 1.5, 1.8,
2.5, 3.0
VCCA_PLL PLL analog global power supply 2.5
VCCD_PLL PLL digital power supply 0.9
VCC_CLKIN
PLL differential clock input power supply (top and bottom I/O
banks only) 2.5
VCCBAT
Battery back-up power supply for design security volatile key
storage 1.2-3.3
Note to Table 9–2:
(1) The transceiver supplies are not monitored by POR.
9–6 Chapter 9: Hot Socketing and Power-On Reset in Stratix IV Devices
Power-On Reset Specifications
Stratix IV Device Handbook February 2011 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Document Revision History
Table 9–3 lists the revision history for this chapter.
Table 9–3. Document Revision History
Date Version Changes
February 2011 3.2
■Updated Table 9–2.
■Updated the “Power-On Reset Circuitry”, “Power-On Reset Specifications”, and “Insertion
or Removal of a Stratix IV Device from a Powered-Up System” sections.
■Applied new template.
■Minor text edits.
March 2010 3.1
■Updated the introduction and the “Stratix IV Hot-Socketing Specifications”, “Insertion or
Removal of a Stratix IV Device from a Powered-Up System”, “Hot-Socketing Feature
Implementation in Stratix IV Devices”, “Power-On Reset Circuitry”, and “Power-On Reset
Specifications” sections.
■Updated Table 9–1 and Table 9–2.
■Updated Figure 9–2.
■Minor text edits.
November 2009 3.0
■Updated graphics.
■Minor text edits.
June 2009 2.2
■Updated Table 9–2.
■Added introductory sentences to improve search ability.
■Removed the Conclusion section.
■Minor text edits.
March 2009 2.1
■Changed all “Stratix IV E” to “Stratix IV”.
■Updated “Stratix IV Hot-Socketing Specifications” and “Hot-Socketing Feature
Implementation in Stratix IV Devices” sections.
■Updated Figure 9–2.
■Removed “Referenced Documents” section.
November 2008 2.0
■Updated “Hot-Socketing Feature Implementation in Stratix IV Devices” on page 9–2.
■Updated “Power-On Reset Circuitry” on page 9–4.
■Updated Table 9–1.
■Made minor editorial changes.
July 2008 1.1 Revised “Introduction”.
May 2008 1.0 Initial release.
SIV51010-3.5
© 2012 Altera Corporation. All rights reserved. ALTERA, ARRIA, CYCLONE, HARDCOPY, MAX, MEGACORE, NIOS, QUARTUS and STRATIX words and logos
are trademarks of Altera Corporation and registered in the U.S. Patent and Trademark Office and in other countries. All other words and logos identified as
trademarks or service marks are the property of their respective holders as described at www.altera.com/common/legal.html. Altera warrants performance of its
semiconductor products to current specifications in accordance with Altera's standard warranty, but reserves the right to make changes to any products and
services at any time without notice. Altera assumes no responsibility or liability arising out of the application or use of any information, product, or service
described herein except as expressly agreed to in writing by Altera. Altera customers are advised to obtain the latest version of device specifications before relying
on any published information and before placing orders for products or services.
Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
September 2012
Feedback Subscribe
ISO
9001:2008
Registered
10. Configuration, Design Security, and
Remote System Upgrades in Stratix IV
Devices
This chapter describes the configuration, design security, and remote system
upgrades in Stratix®IV devices. To save configuration memory space and time,
Stratix IV devices provide configuration data decompression. They also provide a
built-in design security feature that protects your designs against IP theft and
tampering of your configuration files.
Stratix IV devices also offer remote system upgrade capability so that you can
upgrade your system in real-time through any network. This helps to deliver feature
enhancements and bug fixes and provides error detection, recovery, and status
information to ensure reliable reconfiguration.
Overview
This chapter describes supported configuration schemes for Stratix IV devices,
instructions about how to execute the required configuration schemes, and the
necessary pin settings.
Stratix IV devices use SRAM cells to store configuration data. As SRAM is volatile,
you must download configuration data to the Stratix IV device each time the device
powers up. You can configure Stratix IV devices using one of four configuration
schemes:
■Fast passive parallel (FPP)
■Fast active serial (AS)
■Passive serial (PS)
■Joint Test Action Group (JTAG)
All configuration schemes use either an external controller (for example, a MAX® II
device or microprocessor), a configuration device, or a download cable. For more
information, refer to “Configuration Features” on page 10–4.
This chapter includes the following sections:
■“Configuration Schemes” on page 10–2
■“Configuration Features” on page 10–4
■“Fast Passive Parallel Configuration” on page 10–6
■“Fast Active Serial Configuration (Serial Configuration Devices)” on page 10–16
■“Passive Serial Configuration” on page 10–24
■“JTAG Configuration” on page 10–34
■“Device Configuration Pins” on page 10–39
September 2012
SIV51010-3.5
10–2 Chapter 10: Configuration, Design Security, and Remote System Upgrades in Stratix IV Devices
Configuration Schemes
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
■“Configuration Data Decompression” on page 10–47
■“Remote System Upgrades” on page 10–49
■“Remote System Upgrade Mode” on page 10–53
■“Dedicated Remote System Upgrade Circuitry” on page 10–56
■“Quartus II Software Support” on page 10–62
■“Design Security” on page 10–63
Configuration Devices
Altera® serial configuration devices support a single-device and multi-device
configuration solution for Stratix IV devices and are used in the fast AS configuration
scheme. Serial configuration devices offer a low-cost, low pin-count configuration
solution.
fFor information about serial configuration devices, refer to the Serial Configuration
Devices (EPCS1, EPCS4, EPCS16, EPCS64, and EPCS128) Data Sheet in volume 2 of the
Configuration Handbook.
1All minimum timing information in this chapter covers the entire Stratix IV family.
Some devices may work at less than the minimum timing stated in this handbook due
to process variation.
Configuration Schemes
Select the configuration scheme by driving the Stratix IV device
MSEL
pins either high
or low, as shown in Table 10–1. The
MSEL
input buffers are powered by the VCC power
supply. Altera recommends hard wiring the
MSEL[]
pins to VCCPGM and GND. The
MSEL[2..0]
pins have 5-k internal pull-down resistors that are always active.
During power-on reset (POR) and during reconfiguration, the
MSEL
pins must be at
VIL and VIH levels of VCCPGM voltage to be considered logic low and logic high.
1To avoid problems with detecting an incorrect configuration scheme, hardwire the
MSEL[]
pins to VCCPGM and GND without pull-up or pull-down resistors. Do not drive
the
MSEL[]
pins by a microprocessor or another device.
Table 10–1. Configuration Schemes for Stratix IV Devices (Part 1 of 2)
Configuration Scheme MSEL2 MSEL1 MSEL0
Fast passive parallel 0 0 0
Passive serial 0 1 0
Fast AS (40 MHz) (1) 011
Remote system upgrade fast AS (40 MHz) (1) 011
FPP with design security feature and/or decompression enabled (2) 001
Chapter 10: Configuration, Design Security, and Remote System Upgrades in Stratix IV Devices 10–3
Configuration Schemes
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
Table 10–2 lists the uncompressed raw binary file (.rbf) configuration file sizes for
Stratix IV devices.
Use the data in Table 10–2 to estimate the file size before design compilation. Different
configuration file formats; for example, a hexidecimal (.hex) or tabular text file (.ttf)
format, have different file sizes. Refer to the Quartus® II software for the different
types of configuration file and file sizes. However, for any specific version of the
Quartus II software, any design targeted for the same device has the same
uncompressed configuration file size. If you are using compression, the file size can
vary after each compilation because the compression ratio depends on the design.
JTAG-based configuration (4) (3) (3) (3)
Notes to Table 10–1:
(1) Stratix IV devices only support fast AS configuration. You must use either EPCS64 or EPCS128 devices to configure a Stratix IV device in fast
AS mode.
(2) These modes are only supported when using a MAX II device or a microprocessor with flash memory for configuration. In these modes, the
host system must output a
DCLK
that is ×4 the data rate.
(3) Do not leave the
MSEL
pins floating, connect them to VCCPGM or GND. These pins support the non-JTAG configuration scheme used in
production. If you only use the JTAG configuration, connect the
MSEL
pins to GND.
(4) The JTAG-based configuration takes precedence over other configuration schemes, which means the
MSEL
pin settings are ignored. The
JTAG-based configuration does not support the design security or decompression features.
Table 10–1. Configuration Schemes for Stratix IV Devices (Part 2 of 2)
Configuration Scheme MSEL2 MSEL1 MSEL0
Table 10–2. Uncompressed Raw Binary File (.rbf) Sizes for Stratix IV Devices
Device Data Size (Bits)
EP4SE230 94,557,472
EP4SE360 128,395,584
EP4SE530 171,722,064
EP4SE820 241,684,472
EP4SGX70 47,833,352
EP4SGX110 47,833,352
EP4SGX180 94,557,472
EP4SGX230 94,557,472
EP4SGX290 128,395,584
171,722,064 (1)
EP4SGX360 128,395,584
171,722,064 (1)
EP4SGX530 171,722,064
EP4S40G2 94,557,472
EP4S40G5 171,722,064
EP4S100G2 94,557,472
EP4S100G3 171,722,064
EP4S100G4 171,722,064
EP4S100G5 171,722,064
Note to Table 10–2:
(1) This only applies to the F45 package.
10–4 Chapter 10: Configuration, Design Security, and Remote System Upgrades in Stratix IV Devices
Configuration Features
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
fFor more information about setting device configuration options or creating
configuration files, refer to the Device Configuration Options and Configuration File
Formats chapters in volume 2 of the Configuration Handbook.
Configuration Features
Stratix IV devices offer design security, decompression, and remote system upgrade
features. Design security using configuration bitstream encryption is available in
Stratix IV devices, which protects your designs. Stratix IV devices can receive a
compressed configuration bitstream and decompress this data in real-time, reducing
storage requirements and configuration time. You can make real-time system
upgrades from remote locations of your Stratix IV designs with the remote system
upgrade feature.
Table 10–3 lists which configuration features you can use in each configuration
scheme.
You can also refer to the following:
■For more information about the configuration data decompression feature, refer to
“Configuration Data Decompression” on page 10–47.
■For more information about the remote system upgrade feature, refer to “Remote
System Upgrades” on page 10–49.
■For more information about the design security feature, refer to “Design Security”
on page 10–63.
If your system already contains a common flash interface (CFI) flash memory, you can
use it for Stratix IV device configuration storage as well. The MAX II parallel flash
loader (PFL) feature in MAX II devices provides an efficient method to program CFI
flash memory devices through the JTAG interface and provides the logic to control
configuration from the flash memory device to the Stratix IV device. Both PS and FPP
configuration modes are supported using this PFL feature.
fFor more information about PFL, refer to Parallel Flash Loader Megafunction User Guide.
For more information about programming Altera serial configuration devices, refer to
“Programming Serial Configuration Devices” on page 10–22.
Table 10–3. Configuration Features for Stratix IV Devices
Configuration
Scheme Configuration Method Decompression Design
Security
Remote
System
Upgrade
FPP MAX II device or a microprocessor with flash memory Y (1) Y(1) Y
Fast AS Serial configuration device Y Y Y
PS MAX II device or a microprocessor with flash memory Y Y —
Download cable Y Y —
JTAG MAX II device or a microprocessor with flash memory — — —
Download cable — — —
Note to Table 10–3:
(1) In these modes, the host system must send a
DCLK
that is ×4 the data rate.
Chapter 10: Configuration, Design Security, and Remote System Upgrades in Stratix IV Devices 10–5
Configuration Features
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
Power-On Reset Circuit
The POR circuit keeps the entire system in reset until the power supply voltage levels
have stabilized on power-up. After power-up, the device does not release
nSTATUS
until VCC, VCCAUX, VCCPT, VCCPGM, and VCCPD are above the device’s POR trip point.
On power down, brown-out occurs if the VCC, VCCAUX, VCCPT, VCCPGM, or VCCPD drops
below the threshold voltage.
In Stratix IV devices, a pin-selectable option (
PORSEL)
is provided that allows you to
select between the standard POR time or fast POR time. When
PORSEL
is driven low,
the standard POR time is 100 ms < TPOR < 300 ms, which has a lower power-ramp rate.
When
PORSEL
is driven high, the fast POR time is 4 ms < TPOR < 12 ms.
VCCPGM Pins
Stratix IV devices have a power supply, VCCPGM, for all the dedicated configuration
pins and dual function pins. The supported configuration voltage is 1.8, 2.5, and 3.0 V.
Stratix IV devices do not support 1.5 V configuration.
Use the VCCPGM pin to power all dedicated configuration inputs, dedicated
configuration outputs, dedicated configuration bidirectional pins, and some of the
dual functional pins that you use for configuration. With VCCPGM, the configuration
input buffers do not have to share power lines with the regular I/O buffer in
Stratix IV devices.
The operating voltage for the configuration input pin is independent of the I/O banks
power supply VCCIO during configuration. Therefore, Stratix IV devices do not need
configuration voltage constraints on VCCIO.
VCCPD Pins
Stratix IV devices have a dedicated programming power supply, VCCPD, which must
be connected to 3.0 V/2.5 V to power the I/O pre-drivers and JTAG I/O pins (
TCK
,
TMS
,
TDI
,
TDO
, and
TRST
).
1VCCPGM and VCCPD must ramp up from 0 V to the desired voltage level within 100 ms
when
PORSEL
is low or 4 ms when
PORSEL
is high. If these supplies are not ramped up
within this specified time, your Stratix IV device will not configure successfully. If
your system cannot ramp up the power supplies within 100 ms or 4 ms, you must
hold
nCONFIG
low until all the power supplies are stable.
1VCCPD must be greater than or equal to VCCIO of the same bank. If VCCIO of the bank is
set to 3.0 V, VCCPD must be powered up to 3.0 V. If the VCCIO of the bank is powered to
2.5 V or lower, VCCPD must be powered up to 2.5 V.
For more information about configuration pins power supply, refer to “Device
Configuration Pins” on page 10–39.
10–6 Chapter 10: Configuration, Design Security, and Remote System Upgrades in Stratix IV Devices
Fast Passive Parallel Configuration
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Fast Passive Parallel Configuration
Fast passive parallel configuration in Stratix IV devices is designed to meet the
continuously increasing demand for faster configuration times. Stratix IV devices are
designed with the capability of receiving byte-wide configuration data per clock
cycle.
You can perform FPP configuration of Stratix IV devices using an intelligent host,
such as a MAX II device or a microprocessor.
FPP Configuration Using a MAX II Device as an External Host
FPP configuration using an external host provides the fastest method to configure
Stratix IV devices. In this configuration scheme, you can use a MAX II device as an
intelligent host that controls the transfer of configuration data from a storage device,
such as flash memory, to the target Stratix IV device. You can store configuration data
in .rbf, .hex, or .ttf format. When using the MAX II device as an intelligent host, a
design that controls the configuration process, such as fetching the data from flash
memory and sending it to the device, must be stored in the MAX II device.
1If you are using the Stratix IV decompression and/or design security features, the
external host must be able to send a
DCLK
frequency that is ×4 the data rate.
The ×4
DCLK
signal does not require an additional pin and is sent on the
DCLK
pin. The
maximum
DCLK
frequency is 125 MHz, which results in a maximum data rate of
250 Mbps. If you are not using the Stratix IV decompression or design security
features, the data rate is ×8 the
DCLK
frequency.
Figure 10–1 shows the configuration interface connections between the Stratix IV
device and a MAX II device for single device configuration.
Figure 10–1. Single Device FPP Configuration Using an External Host
Note to Figure 10–1:
(1) Connect the resistor to a supply that provides an acceptable input signal for the Stratix IV device. VCCPGM must be
high enough to meet the VIH specification of the I/O on the device and the external host. Altera recommends powering
up all configuration system I/Os with VCCPGM.
(2) A pull-up or pull-down resistor helps keep the nCONFIG line in a known state when the external host is not driving
the line.
External Host
(MAX II Device or
Microprocessor)
CONF_DONE
nSTATUS
nCE
DATA[7..0]
nCONFIG
Stratix IV Device
Memory
ADDR DATA[7..0]
GND
MSEL[2..0]
VCCPGM (1) VCCPGM/VCCIO (2)
VCCPGM (1)
GND
DCLK
nCEO N.C.
10 kΩ10 kΩ10 kΩ
Chapter 10: Configuration, Design Security, and Remote System Upgrades in Stratix IV Devices 10–7
Fast Passive Parallel Configuration
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
After power-up, the Stratix IV device goes through a POR. The POR delay depends on
the
PORSEL
pin setting. When
PORSEL
is driven low, the standard POR time is
100 ms < TPOR < 300 ms. When
PORSEL
is driven high, the fast POR time is
4ms<T
POR < 12 ms. During POR, the device resets, holds
nSTATUS
low, and tri-states
all user I/O pins. After the device successfully exits POR, all user I/O pins continue to
be tri-stated. If
nIO_pullup
is driven low during power up and configuration, the user
I/O pins and dual-purpose I/O pins have weak pull-up resistors, which are on (after
POR) before and during configuration. If
nIO_pullup
is driven high, the weak pull-up
resistors are disabled.
The configuration cycle consists of three stages: reset, configuration, and initialization.
While
nCONFIG
or
nSTATUS
are low, the device is in the reset stage. To initiate
configuration, the MAX II device must drive the
nCONFIG
pin from low to high.
1To begin the configuration process, you must fully power VCCPT, VCC, VCCPD, and
VCCPGM of the banks where the configuration pins reside to the appropriate voltage
levels.
When
nCONFIG
goes high, the device comes out of reset and releases the open-drain
nSTATUS
pin, which is then pulled high by an external 10-k pull-up resistor. After
nSTATUS
is released, the device is ready to receive configuration data and the
configuration stage begins. When
nSTATUS
is pulled high, the MAX II device places
the configuration data one byte at a time on the
DATA[7..0]
pins.
1A pull-up or pull-down resistor helps keep the
nCONFIG
line in a known state when
the external host (a Max II CPLD or a microcontroller) is not driving the line. For
example, during external host reprogramming or power-up where the I/O driving
nCONFIG
may be tri-stated. If a pull-up resistor is added to the
nCONFIG
line, the FPGA
stays in user mode if the external host is being reprogrammed. If a pull-down resistor
is added to the
nCONFIG
line, the FPGA goes into reset mode if the external host is
being reprogrammed. Whenever the
nCONFIG
line is released high, ensure that the first
DCLK
and
DATA
are not driven unintentionally.
1Stratix IV devices receive configuration data on the
DATA[7..0]
pins and the clock is
received on the
DCLK
pin. Data is latched into the device on the rising edge of
DCLK
.
If you are using the Stratix IV decompression and/or design security features,
configuration data is latched on the rising edge of every first
DCLK
cycle out of the four
DCLK
cycles. Altera recommends that you to keep the data on
DATA[7. . 0]
stable for
the next 3 clock cycles when the data is being processed. You can only stop
DCLK
after
three clock cycles after the last data is latched.
Data is continuously clocked into the target device until
CONF_DONE
goes high. The
CONF_DONE
pin goes high one byte early in FPP modes. The last byte is required for
FPP mode. After the device has received the next-to-last byte of the configuration data
successfully, it releases the open-drain
CONF_DONE
pin, which is pulled high by an
external 10-kpull-up resistor. A low-to-high transition on
CONF_DONE
indicates
configuration is complete and initialization of the device can begin. The
CONF_DONE
pin must have an external 10-k pull-up resistor for the device to initialize.
10–8 Chapter 10: Configuration, Design Security, and Remote System Upgrades in Stratix IV Devices
Fast Passive Parallel Configuration
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
In Stratix IV devices, the initialization clock source is either the internal oscillator or
the optional
CLKUSR
pin. By default, the internal oscillator is the clock source for
initialization. If you use the internal oscillator, the Stratix IV device provides itself
with enough clock cycles for proper initialization. Therefore, if the internal oscillator
is the initialization clock source, sending the entire configuration file to the device is
sufficient to configure and initialize the device. Driving
DCLK
to the device after
configuration is complete does not affect device operation.
You can also synchronize initialization of multiple devices or delay initialization with
the
CLKUSR
option. You can turn on the Enable user-supplied start-up clock
(CLKUSR) option in the Quartus II software from the General tab of the Device and
Pin Options dialog box. Supplying a clock on
CLKUSR
does not affect the configuration
process. The
CONF_DONE
pin goes high one byte early in FPP modes. The last byte is
required for FPP mode. After the
CONF_DONE
pin transitions high,
CLKUSR
is enabled
after the time specified at tCD2CU. After this time period elapses, Stratix IV devices
require 8,532 clock cycles to initialize properly and enter user mode. Stratix IV devices
support a
CLKUSR
fMAX of 125 MHz.
An optional
INIT_DONE
pin is available, which signals the end of initialization and the
start of user-mode with a low-to-high transition. This Enable INIT_DONE Output
option is available in the Quartus II software from the General tab of the Device and
Pin Options dialog box. If you use the
INIT_DONE
pin, it is high because of an external
10-k pull-up resistor when
nCONFIG
is low and during the beginning of
configuration. After the option bit to enable
INIT_DONE
is programmed into the device
(during the first frame of configuration data), the
INIT_DONE
pin goes low. When
initialization is complete, the
INIT_DONE
pin is released and pulled high. The MAX II
device must be able to detect this low-to-high transition, which signals the device has
entered user mode. When initialization is complete, the device enters user mode. In
user-mode, the user I/O pins no longer have weak pull-up resistors and function as
assigned in your design.
1Two
DCLK
falling edges are required after
CONF_DONE
goes high to begin the
initialization of the device for both uncompressed and compressed bitstream in FPP.
To ensure
DCLK
and
DATA[7..0]
are not left floating at the end of configuration, the
MAX II device must drive them either high or low, whichever is convenient on your
board. The
DATA[7..0]
pins are available as user I/O pins after configuration. When
you select the FPP scheme as a default in the Quartus II software, these I/O pins are
tri-stated in user mode. To change this default option in the Quartus II software, select
the Dual-Purpose Pins tab of the Device and Pin Options dialog box.
The configuration clock (
DCLK
) speed must be below the specified frequency to ensure
correct configuration. No maximum
DCLK
period exists, which means you can pause
configuration by halting
DCLK
for an indefinite amount of time.
Chapter 10: Configuration, Design Security, and Remote System Upgrades in Stratix IV Devices 10–9
Fast Passive Parallel Configuration
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
1If you need to stop
DCLK
, it can only be stopped:
■three clock cycles after the last data byte was latched into the Stratix IV device
when you use the decompression and/or design security features.
■two clock cycles after the last data byte was latched into the Stratix IV device when
you do not use the Stratix IV decompression and/or design security features.
By stopping
DCLK
, the configuration circuit allows enough clock cycles to process the
last byte of latched configuration data. When the clock restarts, the MAX II device
must provide data on the
DATA[7..0]
pins prior to sending the first
DCLK
rising edge.
If an error occurs during configuration, the device drives its
nSTATUS
pin low, resetting
itself internally. The low signal on the
nSTATUS
pin also alerts the MAX II device that
there is an error. If the Auto-restart configuration after error option (available in the
Quartus II software from the General tab of the Device and Pin Options dialog box)
is turned on, the device releases
nSTATUS
after a reset time-out period (a maximum of
500 s). After
nSTATUS
is released and pulled high by a pull-up resistor, the MAX II
device can try to reconfigure the target device without needing to pulse
nCONFIG
low.
If this option is turned off, the MAX II device must generate a low-to-high transition
(with a low pulse of at least 2 s) on
nCONFIG
to restart the configuration process.
1If you have enabled the Auto-restart configuration after error option, the
nSTATUS
pin
transitions from high to low and back again to high when a configuration error is
detected. This appears as a low pulse at the
nSTATUS
pin with a minimum pulse width
of 10 s to a maximum pulse width of 500 s, as defined in the tSTATUS specification.
The MAX II device can also monitor the
CONF_DONE
and
INIT_DONE
pins to ensure
successful configuration. The MAX II device must monitor the
CONF_DONE
pin to detect
errors and determine when programming completes. If all the configuration data is
sent, but the
CONF_DONE
or
INIT_DONE
signals have not gone high, the MAX II device
reconfigures the target device.
1If you use the optional
CLKUSR
pin and
nCONFIG
is pulled low to restart the
configuration during device initialization, ensure that
CLKUSR
continues toggling
during the time
nSTATUS
is low (a maximum of 500 s).
When the device is in user mode, initiating reconfiguration is done by transitioning
the
nCONFIG
pin low-to-high. The
nCONFIG
pin must be low for at least 2 s. When
nCONFIG
is pulled low, the device also pulls
nSTATUS
and
CONF_DONE
low and all I/O
pins are tri-stated. After
nCONFIG
returns to a logic high level and
nSTATUS
is released
by the device, reconfiguration begins.
10–10 Chapter 10: Configuration, Design Security, and Remote System Upgrades in Stratix IV Devices
Fast Passive Parallel Configuration
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Figure 10–2 shows how to configure multiple Stratix IV devices using a MAX II
device. This circuit is similar to the FPP configuration circuit for a single device,
except the devices are cascaded for multi-device configuration.
In a multi-device FPP configuration, the first device’s
nCE
pin is connected to GND
while its
nCEO
pin is connected to
nCE
of the next device in the chain. The last device’s
nCE
input comes from the previous device, while its
nCEO
pin is left floating. After the
first device completes configuration in a multi-device configuration chain, its
nCEO
pin
drives low to activate the second device’s
nCE
pin, which prompts the second device
to begin configuration. The second device in the chain begins configuration within
one clock cycle; therefore, the transfer of data destinations is transparent to the
MAX II device. All other configuration pins (
nCONFIG
,
nSTATUS
,
DCLK
,
DATA[7..0]
, and
CONF_DONE
) are connected to every device in the chain. The configuration signals may
require buffering to ensure signal integrity and prevent clock skew problems. Ensure
that the
DCLK
and
DATA
lines are buffered for every fourth device. Because all device
CONF_DONE
pins are tied together, all devices initialize and enter user mode at the same
time.
All
nSTATUS
and
CONF_DONE
pins are tied together; if any device detects an error,
configuration stops for the entire chain and you must reconfigure the entire chain. For
example, if the first device flags an error on
nSTATUS
, it resets the chain by pulling its
nSTATUS
pin low. This behavior is similar to a single device detecting an error.
If the Auto-restart configuration after error option is turned on, the devices release
their
nSTATUS
pins after a reset time-out period (a maximum of 500 s). After all
nSTATUS
pins are released and pulled high, the MAX II device tries to reconfigure the
chain without pulsing
nCONFIG
low. If this option is turned off, the MAX II device
must generate a low-to-high transition (with a low pulse of at least 2 s) on
nCONFIG
to
restart the configuration process.
Figure 10–2. Multi-Device FPP Configuration Using an External Host
Note to Figure 10–2:
(1) Connect the pull-up resistor to a supply that provides an acceptable input signal for all Stratix IV devices in the chain. VCCPGM must be high enough
to meet the VIH specification of the I/O standard on the device and the external host. Altera recommends powering up all configuration system
I/Os with VCCPGM.
(2) A pull-up or pull-down resistor helps keep the nCONFIG line in a known state when the external host is not driving the line.
CONF_DONE
nSTATUS
nCE
DATA[7..0]
nCONFIG
Stratix IV Device 1 Stratix IV Device 2
Memory
ADDR DATA[7..0]
GND
VCCPGM (1)
VCCPGM (1)
DCLK
nCEO
CONF_DONE
nSTATUS
nCE
DATA[7..0]
nCONFIG
DCLK
nCEO N.C.
10 kΩ10 kΩ
External Host
(MAX II Device or
Microprocessor)
MSEL[2..0]
GND
MSEL[2..0]
GND
VCCPGM/VCCIO (2)
10 kΩ
Chapter 10: Configuration, Design Security, and Remote System Upgrades in Stratix IV Devices 10–11
Fast Passive Parallel Configuration
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
1If you have enabled the Auto-restart configuration after error option, the
nSTATUS
pin
transitions from high to low and back again to high when a configuration error is
detected. This appears as a low pulse at the
nSTATUS
pin with a minimum pulse width
of 10 s to a maximum pulse width of 500 s, as defined in the tSTATUS specification.
In a multi-device FPP configuration chain, all Stratix IV devices in the chain must
either enable or disable the decompression and/or design security features. You
cannot selectively enable the decompression and/or design security features for each
device in the chain because of the
DATA
and
DCLK
relationship. If the chain contains
devices that do not support design security, use a serial configuration scheme.
If a system has multiple devices that contain the same configuration data, tie all
device
nCE
inputs to GND and leave the
nCEO
pins floating. All other configuration
pins (
nCONFIG
,
nSTATUS
,
DCLK
,
DATA[7..0]
, and
CONF_DONE
) are connected to every
device in the chain. Configuration signals may require buffering to ensure signal
integrity and prevent clock skew problems. Ensure that the
DCLK
and
DATA
lines are
buffered for every fourth device. Devices must be the same density and package. All
devices start and complete configuration at the same time.
Figure 10–3 shows a multi-device FPP configuration when both Stratix IV devices are
receiving the same configuration data.
You can use a single configuration chain to configure Stratix IV devices with other
Altera devices that support FPP configuration, such as other types of Stratix devices.
To ensure that all devices in the chain complete configuration at the same time, or that
an error flagged by one device initiates reconfiguration in all devices, tie all of the
device
CONF_DONE
and
nSTATUS
pins together.
fFor more information about configuring multiple Altera devices in the same
configuration chain, refer to the Configuring Mixed Altera FPGA Chains in volume 2 of
the Configuration Handbook.
Figure 10–3. Multiple-Device FPP Configuration Using an External Host When Both Devices Receive the Same Data
Notes to Figure 10–3:
(1) Connect the resistor to a supply that provides an acceptable input signal for all Stratix IV devices in the chain. VCCPGM must be high enough to
meet the VIH specification of the I/O on the device and the external host. Altera recommends powering up all configuration system I/Os with VCCPGM.
(2) A pull-up or pull-down resistor helps keep the nCONFIG line in a known state when the external host is not driving the line.
(3) The nCEO pins of both Stratix IV devices are left unconnected when configuring the same configuration data into multiple devices.
CONF_DONE
nSTATUS
nCE
DATA[7..0]
nCONFIG
Stratix IV Device Stratix IV Device
Memory
ADDR DATA[7..0] V
CCPGM
(1)
V
CCPGM
(1)
DCLK
nCEO N.C. (3)
CONF_DONE
nSTATUS
nCE
DATA[7..0]
nCONFIG
GND
DCLK
nCEO N.C.
10 kΩ10 kΩ
External Host
(MAX II Device or
Microprocessor)
GND
MSEL[2..0] MSEL[2..0]
GNDGND
V
CCPGM/
V
CCIO
(2)
10 kΩ
10–12 Chapter 10: Configuration, Design Security, and Remote System Upgrades in Stratix IV Devices
Fast Passive Parallel Configuration
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
FPP Configuration Timing
Figure 10–4 shows the timing waveform for an FPP configuration when using a
MAX II device as an external host. This waveform shows the timing when you have
not enabled the decompression and design security features.
Table 10–4 lists the timing parameters for Stratix IV devices for an FPP configuration
when you have not enabled the decompression and design security features.
Figure 10–4. FPP Configuration Timing Waveform (Note 1), (2)
Notes to Figure 10–4:
(1) Use this timing waveform when you have not enabled the decompression and design security features.
(2) The beginning of this waveform shows the device in user mode. In user mode, nCONFIG, nSTATUS, and CONF_DONE are at logic high levels.
When nCONFIG is pulled low, a reconfiguration cycle begins.
(3) After power-up, the Stratix IV device holds nSTATUS low for the time of the POR delay.
(4) After power-up, before and during configuration, CONF_DONE is low.
(5) Do not leave DCLK floating after configuration. You can drive it high or low, whichever is more convenient.
(6) DATA[7..0] are available as user I/O pins after configuration except for some exceptions on Stratix IV GT devices. The state of these pins
depends on the dual-purpose pin settings.
nCONFIG
nSTATUS (3)
CONF_DONE(4)
DCLK
DATA[7..0]
User I/O
INIT_DONE
Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte n-2 Byte n-1 Byte n
tCD2UM
tCF2ST1
tCF2CD
tCFG
tCH tCL
tDH
tDSU
tCF2CK
tSTATUS
tCLK
tCF2ST0
tST2CK
High-Z User Mode
(6)
(5)
User Mode
Table 10–4. FPP Timing Parameters for Stratix IV Devices (Part 1 of 2) (Note 1), (2)
Symbol Parameter
Minimum Maximum
Units
Stratix IV
(7)
Stratix IV
(8)
Stratix IV
(9)
Stratix IV
(7)
Stratix IV
(8)
Stratix IV
(9)
tCF2CD
nCONFIG
low to
CONF_DONE
low — 800 ns
tCF2ST0
nCONFIG
low to
nSTATUS
low — 800 ns
tCFG
nCONFIG
low pulse width 2 — s
tSTATUS
nSTATUS
low pulse width 10 500 (3) s
tCF2ST1
nCONFIG
high to
nSTATUS
high — 500 (4) s
tCF2CK
nCONFIG
high to first rising
edge on
DCLK
500 — s
Chapter 10: Configuration, Design Security, and Remote System Upgrades in Stratix IV Devices 10–13
Fast Passive Parallel Configuration
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
tST2CK
nSTATUS
high to first rising
edge of
DCLK
2—s
tDSU
Data setup time before
rising edge on
DCLK
4 — ns
tDH
Data hold time after rising
edge on
DCLK
1—ns
TRInput rise time — 40 ns
t Input fall time — 40 ns
tCD2UM
CONF_DONE
high to user
mode (5) 55 150 s
tCD2CU
CONF_DONE
high to
CLKUSR
enabled
4 × maximum
DCLK
period ——
tCD2UMC
CONF_DONE
high to user
mode with
CLKUSR
option
on
tCD2CU + (8532 ×
CLKUSR
period) ——
tCH
DCLK
high time (6) 3.6 4.5 5.6 — ns
tCL
DCLK
low time (6) 3.6 4.5 5.6 — ns
tCLK
DCLK
period (6) 8 10 12.5 — ns
fMAX
DCLK
frequency — 125 100 80 MHz
Notes to Table 10–4:
(1) This information is preliminary.
(2) Use these timing parameters when you have not enabled the decompression and design security features.
(3) You can obtain this value if you do not delay the configuration by extending the
nCONFIG
or
nSTATUS
low pulse width.
(4) This value is applicable if you do not delay the configuration by externally holding
nSTATUS
low.
(5) The minimum and maximum numbers apply only if you chose the internal oscillator as the clock source for starting the device.
(6) Adding up tCH and tCL equals to tCLK. When EP4SE230 tCH is 3.6 ns (min), tCL must be 4.4 ns and vice versa.
(7) Applicable to EP4SE230, EP4SE360, EP4SGX70, EP4SGX110, EP4SGX180, EP4SGX230, EP4SGX290 (except F45 package), EP4SGX360 (except
F45 package), EP4S40G2, EP4S100G2 devices.
(8) Applicable to EP4SE530, EP4SGX290 (only for F45 package), EP4SGX360 (only for F45 package), EP4SGX530, EP4S40G5, EP4S100G3,
EP4S100G4, EP4S100G5 devices.
(9) Applicable to EP4SE820 only.
Table 10–4. FPP Timing Parameters for Stratix IV Devices (Part 2 of 2) (Note 1), (2)
Symbol Parameter
Minimum Maximum
Units
Stratix IV
(7)
Stratix IV
(8)
Stratix IV
(9)
Stratix IV
(7)
Stratix IV
(8)
Stratix IV
(9)
10–14 Chapter 10: Configuration, Design Security, and Remote System Upgrades in Stratix IV Devices
Fast Passive Parallel Configuration
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Figure 10–5 shows the timing waveform for an FPP configuration when using a
MAX II device as an external host. This waveform shows the timing when you have
enabled the decompression and/or design security features.
Table 10–5 lists the timing parameters for Stratix IV devices for an FPP configuration
when you enable the decompression and/or the design security features.
Figure 10–5. FPP Configuration Timing Waveform with Decompression or Design Security Feature Enabled (Note 1), (2)
Notes to Figure 10–5:
(1) Use this timing waveform when you have enabled the decompression and/or design security features.
(2) The beginning of this waveform shows the device in user-mode. In user-mode, nCONFIG, nSTATUS, and CONF_DONE are at logic high levels.
When nCONFIG is pulled low, a reconfiguration cycle begins.
(3) After power-up, the Stratix IV device holds nSTATUS low for the time of the POR delay.
(4) After power-up, before and during configuration, CONF_DONE is low.
(5) Do not leave DCLK floating after configuration. You can drive it high or low, whichever is more convenient.
(6) DATA[7..0] are available as user I/O pins after configuration except for some exceptions on Stratix IV GT devices. The state of these pins
depends on the dual-purpose pin settings.
(7) If needed, you can pause DCLK by holding it low. When DCLK restarts, the external host must provide data on the DATA[7..0] pins prior to
sending the first DCLK rising edge.
nCONFIG
nSTATUS (3)
CONF_DONE(4)
DCLK
DATA[7..0]
User I/O
INIT_DONE
tCD2UM
tCF2ST1
tCF2CD
tCFG
tCF2CK
t
tCF2ST0
tST2CK
High-Z User Mode
12341234 1
Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte (n-1) Byte n
43
tDSU tDH
STATUS
tDH
tCH
tCL
tCLK
(7) (5)
(6) User Mode
Table 10–5. FPP Timing Parameters for Stratix IV Devices with the Decompression and/or Design Security Features
Enabled (Note 1), (2) (Part 1 of 2)
Symbol Parameter
Minimum Maximum
Units
Stratix IV
(7)
Stratix IV
(8)
Stratix IV
(9)
Stratix IV
(7)
Stratix IV
(8)
Stratix IV
(9)
tCF2CD
nCONFIG
low to
CONF_DONE
low — 800 ns
tCF2ST0
nCONFIG
low to
nSTATUS
low — 800 ns
tCFG
nCONFIG
low pulse width 2 — s
tSTATUS
nSTATUS
low pulse width 10 500 (3) s
tCF2ST1
nCONFIG
high to
nSTATUS
high — 500 (4) s
tCF2CK
nCONFIG
high to first rising
edge on
DCLK
500 — s
Chapter 10: Configuration, Design Security, and Remote System Upgrades in Stratix IV Devices 10–15
Fast Passive Parallel Configuration
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
fFor more information about device configuration options and how to create
configuration files, refer to the Device Configuration Options and Configuration File
Formats chapters in volume 2 of the Configuration Handbook.
tST2CK
nSTATUS
high to first rising
edge of
DCLK
2— s
tDSU
Data setup time before rising
edge on
DCLK
4—ns
tDH
Data hold time after rising
edge on
DCLK
3/(
DCLK
frequency) + 1 — s
tDATA Data rate — 250 Mbps
tRInput rise time — 40 ns
t Input fall time — 40 ns
tCD2UM
CONF_DONE
high to user mode
(5) 55 150 s
tCD2CU
CONF_DONE
high to
CLKUSR
enabled
4 × maximum
DCLK
period ——
tCD2UMC
CONF_DONE
high to user mode
with
CLKUSR
option on (5) tCD2CU + (8532 ×
CLKUSR
period) — —
tCH
DCLK
high time (6) 3.6 4.5 5.6 — ns
tCL
DCLK
low time (6) 3.6 4.5 5.6 — ns
tCLK
DCLK
period (6) 8 10 12.5 — ns
fMAX
DCLK
frequency — 125 100 80 MHz
Notes to Table 10–5:
(1) This information is preliminary.
(2) Use these timing parameters when you use the decompression and/or design security features.
(3) You can obtain this value if you do not delay the configuration by extending the
nCONFIG
or
nSTATUS
low pulse width.
(4) This value is applicable if you do not delay the configuration by externally holding
nSTATUS
low.
(5) The minimum and maximum numbers apply only if you chose the internal oscillator as the clock source for starting the device.
(6) Adding up tCH and tCL equals to tCLK. When EP4SE230 tCH is 3.6 ns (min), tCL must be 4.4 ns and vice versa.
(7) Applicable for EP4SE230, EP4SE360, EP4SGX70, EP4SGX110, EP4SGX180, EP4SGX230, EP4SGX290 (except F45 package), EP4SGX360 (except
F45 package), EP4S40G2, EP4S100G2 devices.
(8) Applicable for EP4SE530, EP4SGX290 (only for F45 package), EP4SGX360 (only for F45 package), EP4SGX530, EP4S40G5, EP4S100G3,
EP4S100G4, EP4S100G5 devices.
(9) Applicable to EP4SE820 only.
Table 10–5. FPP Timing Parameters for Stratix IV Devices with the Decompression and/or Design Security Features
Enabled (Note 1), (2) (Part 2 of 2)
Symbol Parameter
Minimum Maximum
Units
Stratix IV
(7)
Stratix IV
(8)
Stratix IV
(9)
Stratix IV
(7)
Stratix IV
(8)
Stratix IV
(9)
10–16 Chapter 10: Configuration, Design Security, and Remote System Upgrades in Stratix IV Devices
Fast Active Serial Configuration (Serial Configuration Devices)
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
FPP Configuration Using a Microprocessor
In this configuration scheme, a microprocessor can control the transfer of
configuration data from a storage device, such as flash memory, to the target
Stratix IV device.
All information in “FPP Configuration Using a MAX II Device as an External Host”
on page 10–6 is also applicable when using a microprocessor as an external host. Refer
to this section for all configuration and timing information.
Fast Active Serial Configuration (Serial Configuration Devices)
In the fast AS configuration scheme, Stratix IV devices are configured using a serial
configuration device. These configuration devices are low-cost devices with
non-volatile memory that feature a simple four-pin interface and a small form factor.
The largest serial configuration device currently supports 128 MBits of configuration
bitstream. Use the Stratix IV decompression features or select an FPP or PS
configuration scheme for EP4SE360, EP4SGX290, EP4S40G5, EP4S100G3 and larger
devices.
fFor more information about serial configuration devices, refer to the Serial
Configuration Devices (EPCS1, EPCS4, EPCS16, EPCS64, and EPCS128) Data Sheet
chapter in volume 2 of the Configuration Handbook.
Serial configuration devices provide a serial interface to access configuration data.
During device configuration, Stratix IV devices read configuration data using the
serial interface, decompress data if necessary, and configure their SRAM cells. This
scheme is referred to as the AS configuration scheme because the Stratix IV device
controls the configuration interface. This scheme contrasts with the PS configuration
scheme where the configuration device controls the interface.
1The Stratix IV decompression and design security features are fully available when
configuring your Stratix IV device using fast AS mode.
Chapter 10: Configuration, Design Security, and Remote System Upgrades in Stratix IV Devices 10–17
Fast Active Serial Configuration (Serial Configuration Devices)
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
Serial configuration devices have a four-pin interface—serial clock input (
DCLK
), serial
data output (
DATA
), AS data input (
ASDI
), and an active-low chip select (
nCS
). This
four-pin interface connects to Stratix IV device pins, as shown in Figure 10–6.
You can power the EPCS serial configuration device with 3.0 V when you configure
the Stratix IV FPGA using Active Serial (AS) configuration mode. This is feasible
because the power supply to the EPCS device ranges between 2.7 V and 3.6 V. You do
not need a dedicated 3.3 V power supply to power the EPCS device. The EPCS device
and the
VCCPGM
pins on the Stratix IV device may share the same 3.0 V power supply.
After power-up, the Stratix IV devices go through a POR. The POR delay depends on
the
PORSEL
pin setting. When
PORSEL
is driven low, the standard POR time is
100 ms < TPOR < 300 ms. When
PORSEL
is driven high, the fast POR time is
4ms<T
POR < 12 ms. During POR, the device resets, holds
nSTATUS
and
CONF_DONE
low, and tri-states all user I/O pins. After the device successfully exits POR, all the
user I/O pins continue to be tri-stated. If
nIO_pullup
is driven low during power-up
and configuration, the user I/O pins and dual-purpose I/O pins will have weak
pull-up resistors, which are on (after POR) before and during configuration. If
nIO_pullup
is driven high, the weak pull-up resistors are disabled.
The configuration cycle consists of three stages—reset, configuration, and
initialization. While
nCONFIG
or
nSTATUS
are low, the device is in reset. After POR, the
Stratix IV device releases
nSTATUS
, which is pulled high by an external 10-k pull-up
resistor and enters configuration mode.
1To begin configuration, power the VCC, VCCIO, VCCPGM, and VCCPD voltages (for the
banks where the configuration pins reside) to the appropriate voltage levels.
The serial clock (
DCLK
) generated by the Stratix IV device controls the entire
configuration cycle and provides timing for the serial interface. Stratix IV devices use
an internal oscillator to generate
DCLK
. Using the
MSEL[]
pins, you can select to use a
40 MHz oscillator.
Figure 10–6. Single Device Fast AS Configuration
Notes to Figure 10–6:
(1) Connect the pull-up resistors to VCCPGM at a 3.0-V supply.
(2) Stratix IV devices use the ASDO-to-ASDI path to control the configuration device.
DATA
DCLK
nCS
ASDI
DATA0
DCLK
nCSO
ASDO
Serial Configuration
Device Stratix IV Device
10
kΩ
10
kΩ
10
kΩ
V
CCPGM (1)
GND
nCEO
nCE
nSTATUS
nCONFIG
CONF_DONE
(2)
MSEL1
MSEL0
N.C.
MSEL2
GND
V
CCPGM
V
CCPGM (1)
V
CCPGM (1)
10–18 Chapter 10: Configuration, Design Security, and Remote System Upgrades in Stratix IV Devices
Fast Active Serial Configuration (Serial Configuration Devices)
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
In fast AS configuration schemes, Stratix IV devices drive out control signals on the
falling edge of
DCLK
. The serial configuration device responds to the instructions by
driving out configuration data on the falling edge of
DCLK
. Then the data is latched
into the Stratix IV device on the following falling edge of
DCLK
.
In configuration mode, Stratix IV devices enable the serial configuration device by
driving the
nCSO
output pin low, which connects to the chip select (
nCS
) pin of the
configuration device. The Stratix IV device uses the serial clock (
DCLK
) and serial data
output (
ASDO
) pins to send operation commands and/or read address signals to the
serial configuration device. The configuration device provides data on its serial data
output (
DATA
) pin, which connects to the
DATA0
input of the Stratix IV devices.
After all the configuration bits are received by the Stratix IV device, it releases the
open-drain
CONF_DONE
pin, which is pulled high by an external 10-k resistor.
Initialization begins only after the
CONF_DONE
signal reaches a logic high level. All AS
configuration pins (
DATA0
,
DCLK
,
nCSO
, and
ASDO
) have weak internal pull-up resistors
that are always active. After configuration, these pins are set as input tri-stated and
are driven high by the weak internal pull-up resistors. The
CONF_DONE
pin must have
an external 10-k pull-up resistor in order for the device to initialize.
In Stratix IV devices, the initialization clock source is either the internal oscillator or
the optional
CLKUSR
pin. By default, the internal oscillator is the clock source for
initialization. If you use the internal oscillator, the Stratix IV device provides itself
with enough clock cycles for proper initialization. You also have the flexibility to
synchronize initialization of multiple devices or to delay initialization with the
CLKUSR
option. You can turn on the Enable user-supplied start-up clock (CLKUSR) option in
the Quartus II software from the General tab of the Device and Pin Options dialog
box. When you select the Enable user supplied start-up clock option, the
CLKUSR
pin
is the initialization clock source. Supplying a clock on
CLKUSR
does not affect the
configuration process. After all configuration data is accepted and
CONF_DONE
goes
high,
CLKUSR
is enabled after four clock cycles of
DCLK
. After this time period elapses,
Stratix IV devices require 8,532 clock cycles to initialize properly and enter user mode.
Stratix IV devices support a
CLKUSR
fMAX of 125 MHz.
An optional
INIT_DONE
pin is available, which signals the end of initialization and the
start of user-mode with a low-to-high transition. The Enable INIT_DONE Output
option is available in the Quartus II software from the General tab of the Device and
Pin Options dialog box. If you use the
INIT_DONE
pin, it is high due to an external
10-k pull-up resistor when
nCONFIG
is low and during the beginning of
configuration. After the option bit to enable
INIT_DONE
is programmed into the device
(during the first frame of configuration data), the
INIT_DONE
pin goes low. When
initialization is complete, the
INIT_DONE
pin is released and pulled high. This
low-to-high transition signals that the device has entered user mode. When
initialization is complete, the device enters user mode. In user mode, the user I/O
pins no longer have weak pull-up resistors and function as assigned in your design.
If an error occurs during configuration, Stratix IV devices assert the
nSTATUS
signal
low, indicating a data frame error, and the
CONF_DONE
signal stays low. If the
Auto-restart configuration after error option (available in the Quartus II software
from the General tab of the Device and Pin Options dialog box) is turned on, the
Stratix IV device resets the configuration device by pulsing
nCSO
, releases
nSTATUS
after a reset time-out period (a maximum of 500 µs), and retries configuration. If this
option is turned off, the system must monitor
nSTATUS
for errors and then pulse
nCONFIG
low for at least 2 s to restart configuration.
Chapter 10: Configuration, Design Security, and Remote System Upgrades in Stratix IV Devices 10–19
Fast Active Serial Configuration (Serial Configuration Devices)
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
1If you have enabled the Auto-restart configuration after error option, the
nSTATUS
pin
transitions from high to low and back again to high when a configuration error is
detected. This appears as a low pulse at the
nSTATUS
pin with a minimum pulse width
of 10 s to a maximum pulse width of 500 s, as defined in the tSTATUS specification.
When the Stratix IV device is in user mode, you can initiate reconfiguration by pulling
the
nCONFIG
pin low. The
nCONFIG
pin must be low for at least 2 s. When
nCONFIG
is
pulled low, the device also pulls
nSTATUS
and
CONF_DONE
low and all I/O pins are
tri-stated. After
nCONFIG
returns to a logic high level and
nSTATUS
is released by the
Stratix IV device, reconfiguration begins.
1If you wish to gain control of the EPCS pins, hold the
nCONFIG
pin low and pull the
nCE
pin high. This causes the device to reset and tri-state the AS configuration pins.
The timing parameters for AS mode are not listed here because the tCF2CD, tCF2ST0, tCFG,
tSTATUS, tCF2ST1, and tCD2UM timing parameters are identical to the timing parameters
for PS mode listed in Table 10–7 on page 10–30.
You can configure multiple Stratix IV devices using a single serial configuration
device. You can cascade multiple Stratix IV devices using the chip-enable (
nCE
) and
chip-enable-out (
nCEO
) pins. The first device in the chain must have its
nCE
pin
connected to GND. You must connect its
nCEO
pin to the
nCE
pin of the next device in
the chain. When the first device captures all of its configuration data from the
bitstream, it drives the
nCEO
pin low, enabling the next device in the chain. You must
leave the
nCEO
pin of the last device unconnected. The
nCONFIG
,
nSTATUS
,
CONF_DONE
,
DCLK
, and
DATA0
pins of each device in the chain are connected (refer to Figure 10–7).
The first Stratix IV device in the chain is the configuration master and controls
configuration of the entire chain. You must connect its
MSEL
pins to select the AS
configuration scheme. The remaining Stratix IV devices are configuration slaves. You
must connect their
MSEL
pins to select the PS configuration scheme. Any other Altera
device that supports PS configuration can also be part of the chain as a configuration
slave.
10–20 Chapter 10: Configuration, Design Security, and Remote System Upgrades in Stratix IV Devices
Fast Active Serial Configuration (Serial Configuration Devices)
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Figure 10–7 shows the pin connections for the multi-device fast AS configuration.
As shown in Figure 10–7, the
nSTATUS
and
CONF_DONE
pins on all target devices are
connected together with external pull-up resistors. These pins are open-drain
bidirectional pins on the devices. When the first device asserts
nCEO
(after receiving all
of its configuration data), it releases its
CONF_DONE
pin. But the subsequent devices in
the chain keep this shared
CONF_DONE
line low until they have received their
configuration data. When all target devices in the chain have received their
configuration data and have released
CONF_DONE
, the pull-up resistor drives a high
level on this line and all devices simultaneously enter initialization mode.
If an error occurs at any point during configuration, the
nSTATUS
line is driven low by
the failing device. If you enable the Auto-restart configuration after error option,
reconfiguration of the entire chain begins after a reset time-out period (a maximum of
500 s). If you did not enable the Auto-restart configuration after error option, the
external system must monitor
nSTATUS
for errors and then pulse
nCONFIG
low to
restart configuration. The external system can pulse
nCONFIG
if it is under system
control rather than tied to VCCGPM.
1If you have enabled the Auto-restart configuration after error option, the
nSTATUS
pin
transitions from high to low and back again to high when a configuration error is
detected. This appears as a low pulse at the
nSTATUS
pin with a minimum pulse width
of 10 s to a maximum pulse width of 500 s, as defined in the tSTATUS specification.
Figure 10–7. Multi-Device Fast AS Configuration
Notes to Figure 10–7:
(1) Connect the pull-up resistors to VCCPGM at a 3.0-V supply.
(2) Connect the repeater buffers between the Stratix IV master and slave device(s) for DATA[0] and DCLK. This is to prevent potential signal
integrity and clock skew problems.
DATA
DCLK
nCS
ASDI
DATA0
DCLK
nCSO
ASDO
Serial Configuration
Device Stratix IV Device Master Stratix IV Device Slave
10
kΩ
10
kΩ
GND
nCEOnCE
nSTATUS
CONF_DONE
DATA0
DCLK
nCEO
nCE
nSTATUS
CONF_DONE
10
kΩ
nCONFIG nCONFIG
N.C.
MSEL1
MSEL0 GND
MSEL2
VCCPGM
MSEL1
MSEL0
MSEL2
GND
VCCPGM
VCCPGM (1) VCCPGM (1) VCCPGM (1)
Buffers (2)
Chapter 10: Configuration, Design Security, and Remote System Upgrades in Stratix IV Devices 10–21
Fast Active Serial Configuration (Serial Configuration Devices)
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
1While you can cascade Stratix IV devices, you cannot cascade or chain together serial
configuration devices.
If the configuration bitstream size exceeds the capacity of a serial configuration
device, you must select a larger configuration device and/or enable the compression
feature. When configuring multiple devices, the size of the bitstream is the sum of the
individual device configuration bitstreams.
A system may have multiple devices that contain the same configuration data. In
active serial chains, you can implement this by storing one copy of the .sof in the
serial configuration device. The same copy of the .sof configures the master Stratix IV
device and all remaining slave devices concurrently. All Stratix IV devices must be the
same density and package.
To configure four identical Stratix IV devices with the same .sof, set up the chain as
shown in Figure 10–8. The first device is the master device and its
MSEL
pins must be
set to select AS configuration. The other three slave devices are set up for concurrent
configuration and their
MSEL
pins must be set to select PS configuration. The
nCE
input
pins from the master and slave are connected to GND, and the
DATA
and
DCLK
pins
connect in parallel to all four devices. During the configuration cycle, the master
device reads its configuration data from the serial configuration device and transmits
the configuration data to all three slave devices, configuring all of them
simultaneously.
10–22 Chapter 10: Configuration, Design Security, and Remote System Upgrades in Stratix IV Devices
Fast Active Serial Configuration (Serial Configuration Devices)
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Figure 10–8 shows the multi-device fast AS configuration when the devices receive
the same data using a single .sof.
Estimating Active Serial Configuration Time
Active serial configuration time is dominated by the time it takes to transfer data from
the serial configuration device to the Stratix IV device. This serial interface is clocked
by the Stratix IV
DCLK
output (generated from an internal oscillator) and must be set to
40 MHz (25 ns).Therefore, the minimum configuration time estimate for an EP4SE230
device (94, 600, 000 bits of uncompressed data) is:
RBF Size × (minimum
DCLK
period / 1 bit per
DCLK
cycle) = estimated minimum
configuration time
94, 600, 000 bits × (25 ns / 1 bit) = 2365 ms
Enabling compression reduces the amount of configuration data that is transmitted to
the Stratix IV device, which also reduces configuration time. On average, compression
reduces configuration time, depending on the design.
Figure 10–8. Multi-Device Fast AS Configuration When the Devices Receive the Same Data Using a Single .sof
Notes to Figure 10–8:
(1) Connect the pull-up resistors to VCCPGM at a 3.0-V supply.
(2) Connect the repeater buffers between the Stratix IV master and slave device(s) for DATA[0] and DCLK. This is to prevent potential signal
integrity and clock skew problems.
DATA
DCLK
nCS
ASDI
DATA0
DCLK
nCSO
ASDO
Serial Configuration
Device
Stratix IV
Device Master
10
kΩ
10
kΩ
GND
nCEOnCE
nSTATUS
CONF_DONE
DATA0
DCLK
nCEO
nCE
nSTATUS
CONF_DONE
10
kΩ
nCONFIG nCONFIG
N.C.
MSEL1
MSEL0
MSEL2
MSEL1
MSEL0
GND
MSEL2
V
CCPGM
DATA0
DCLK
Stratix IV
Device Slave
Stratix IV
Device Slave
Stratix IV
Device Slave
nCEO
nCE
nSTATUS
CONF_DONE
nCONFIG
N.C.
MSEL1
MSEL0
GND
MSEL2
V
CCPGM
DATA0
DCLK
nCEO
nCE
nSTATUS
CONF_DONE
nCONFIG
N.C.
MSEL1
MSEL0
GND
MSEL2
V
CCPGM
GND
V
CCPGM
V
CCPGM (1)
V
CCPGM (1)
V
CCPGM (1)
Buffers (2)
GND
N.C.
Chapter 10: Configuration, Design Security, and Remote System Upgrades in Stratix IV Devices 10–23
Fast Active Serial Configuration (Serial Configuration Devices)
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
Programming Serial Configuration Devices
Serial configuration devices are non-volatile, flash-memory-based devices. You can
program these devices in-system using the USB-Blaster™, EthernetBlaster™, or
ByteBlaster™ II download cable. Alternatively, you can program them using the
Altera programming unit (APU), supported third-party programmers, or a
microprocessor with the SRunner software driver.
You can perform in-system programming of serial configuration devices using the
conventional AS programming interface or the JTAG interface solution.
Because serial configuration devices do not support the JTAG interface, the
conventional method to program them is using the AS programming interface. The
configuration data used to program serial configuration devices is downloaded using
programming hardware.
During in-system programming, the download cable disables device access to the AS
interface by driving the
nCE
pin high. Stratix IV devices are also held in reset by a low
level on
nCONFIG
. After programming is complete, the download cable releases
nCE
and
nCONFIG
, allowing the pull-down and pull-up resistors to drive GND and VCCPGM,
respectively. Figure 10–9 shows the download cable connections for the serial
configuration device.
Altera has developed Serial FlashLoader (SFL), an in-system programming solution
for serial configuration devices using the JTAG interface. This solution requires the
Stratix IV device to be a bridge between the JTAG interface and the serial
configuration device.
fFor more information about SFL, refer to AN 370: Using the Serial FlashLoader with
Quartus II Software.
10–24 Chapter 10: Configuration, Design Security, and Remote System Upgrades in Stratix IV Devices
Fast Active Serial Configuration (Serial Configuration Devices)
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
fFor more information about the USB-Blaster download cable, refer to the USB-Blaster
Download Cable User Guide. For more information about the ByteBlaster II cable, refer
to the ByteBlaster II Download Cable User Guide. For more information about the
EthernetBlaster download cable, refer to the EthernetBlaster Communications Cable User
Guide.
You can program serial configuration devices with the Quartus II software using the
Altera programming hardware and the appropriate configuration device
programming adapter.
In production environments, you can program serial configuration devices using
multiple methods. You can use Altera programming hardware or other third-party
programming hardware to program blank serial configuration devices before they are
mounted on PCBs. Alternatively, you can use an on-board microprocessor to program
the serial configuration device in-system using C-based software drivers provided by
Altera.
Figure 10–9. In-System Programming of Serial Configuration Devices
Notes to Figure 10–9:
(1) Connect these pull-up resistors to VCCPGM at a 3.0-V supply.
(2) Power up the USB-ByteBlaster, ByteBlaster II, or EthernetBlaster cable’s VCC(TRGT) with VCCPGM.
DATA
DCLK
nCS
ASDI
DATA0
DCLK
nCSO
nCE
nCONFIG
nSTATUS nCEO
CONF_DONE
ASDO
VCCPGM
10 kΩ10 kΩ10 kΩ
10 kΩ
Stratix IV Device
Serial
Configuration
Device
Pin 1
USB Blaster or ByteBlaser II
(AS Mode)
10-Pin Male Header
N.C.
(2)
MSEL1
MSEL0
GND
MSEL2
VCCPGM
V
CCPGM (1)
V
CCPGM (1)
V
CCPGM (1)
Chapter 10: Configuration, Design Security, and Remote System Upgrades in Stratix IV Devices 10–25
Passive Serial Configuration
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
You can program a serial configuration device in-system by an external
microprocessor using SRunner. SRunner is a software driver developed for embedded
serial configuration device programming, which can be easily customized to fit in
different embedded systems. SRunner is able to read raw programming data (.rpd)
and write to serial configuration devices. The serial configuration device
programming time using SRunner is comparable to the programming time with the
Quartus II software.
fFor more information about SRunner, refer to AN 418: SRunner: An Embedded Solution
for Serial Configuration Device Programming and the source code on the Altera website
at www.altera.com.
fFor more information about programming serial configuration devices, refer to the
Serial Configuration Devices (EPCS1, EPCS4, EPCS16, EPCS64, and EPCS128) Data Sheet
chapter in volume 2 of the Configuration Handbook.
Guidelines for Connecting Serial Configuration Devices on an AS Interface
For single- and multi-device AS configurations, the board trace length and loading
between the supported serial configuration device and the Stratix IV device family
must follow the recommendations listed in Table 10–6.
Passive Serial Configuration
You can program a PS configuration for Stratix IV devices using an intelligent host,
such as a MAX II device or microprocessor with flash memory, or a download cable.
In the PS scheme, an external host (a MAX II device, embedded processor, or host PC)
controls configuration. Configuration data is clocked into the target Stratix IV device
using the
DATA0
pin at each rising edge of
DCLK
.
1The Stratix IV decompression and design security features are fully available when
configuring your Stratix IV device using PS mode.
Table 10–6. Maximum Trace Length and Loading for the AS Configuration
Stratix IV Device AS Pins
Maximum Board Trace Length
from the Stratix IV Device to
the Serial Configuration
Device (Inches)
Maximum Board Load (pF)
DCLK
10 15
DATA[0]
10 30
nCSO
10 30
ASDO
10 30
10–26 Chapter 10: Configuration, Design Security, and Remote System Upgrades in Stratix IV Devices
Passive Serial Configuration
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
PS Configuration Using a MAX II Device as an External Host
In this configuration scheme, you can use a MAX II device as an intelligent host that
controls the transfer of configuration data from a storage device, such as flash
memory, to the target Stratix IV device. You can store configuration data in .rbf, .hex,
or .ttf format.
Figure 10–10 shows the configuration interface connections between a Stratix IV
device and a MAX II device for single device configuration.
After power-up, Stratix IV devices go through a POR. The POR delay depends on the
PORSEL
pin setting. When
PORSEL
is driven low, the standard POR time is
100 ms < TPOR < 300 ms. When
PORSEL
is driven high, the fast POR time is
4ms<T
POR < 12 ms. During POR, the device resets, holds
nSTATUS
low, and tri-states
all user I/O pins. After the device successfully exits POR, all user I/O pins continue to
be tri-stated. If
nIO_pullup
is driven low during power-up and configuration, the user
I/O pins and dual-purpose I/O pins will have weak pull-up resistors that are on
(after POR) before and during configuration. If
nIO_pullup
is driven high, the weak
pull-up resistors are disabled.
The configuration cycle consists of three stages—reset, configuration, and
initialization. While
nCONFIG
or
nSTATUS
are low, the device is in reset. To initiate
configuration, the MAX II device must generate a low-to-high transition on the
nCONFIG
pin.
1VCC, VCCIO, VCCPGM, and VCCPD of the banks where the configuration pins reside must
be fully powered to the appropriate voltage levels to begin the configuration process.
Figure 10–10. Single Device PS Configuration Using an External Host
Note to Figure 10–10:
(1) Connect the resistor to a supply that provides an acceptable input signal for the Stratix IV device. VCCPGM must be
high enough to meet the VIH specification of the I/O on the device and the external host. Altera recommends powering
up all configuration system I/Os with VCCPGM.
(2) A pull-up or pull-down resistor helps keep the nCONFIG line in a known state when the external host is not driving
the line.
External Host
(MAX II Device or
Microprocessor)
CONF_DONE
nSTATUS
nCE
DATA0
nCONFIG
Stratix IV Device
Memory
ADDR DATA0
GND
10 kΩ10 k Ω
DCLK
nCEO N.C.
MSEL1
MSEL0
GND
MSEL2
V
CCPGM
VCCPGM (1) VCCPGM (1)
V
CCPGM/
V
CCIO
(2)
10 kΩ
Chapter 10: Configuration, Design Security, and Remote System Upgrades in Stratix IV Devices 10–27
Passive Serial Configuration
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
When
nCONFIG
goes high, the device comes out of reset and releases the open-drain
nSTATUS
pin, which is then pulled high by an external 10-kpull-up resistor. After
nSTATUS
is released, the device is ready to receive configuration data and the
configuration stage begins. When
nSTATUS
is pulled high, the MAX II device places
the configuration data one bit at a time on the
DATA0
pin. If you are using
configuration data in .rbf, .hex, or .ttf format, you must send the LSB of each data byte
first. For example, if the .rbf contains the byte sequence
02 1B EE 01 FA
, the serial
bitstream you must transmit to the device is
0100-0000 1101-1000 0111-0111 1000-0000 0101-1111
.
1A pull-up or pull-down resistor helps keep the
nCONFIG
line in a known state when
the external host (a Max II CPLD or a microcontroller) is not driving the line. For
example, during external host reprogramming or power-up where the I/O driving
nCONFIG
may be tri-stated. If a pull-up resistor is added to the
nCONFIG
line, the FPGA
stays in user mode if the external host is being reprogrammed. If a pull-down resistor
is added to the
nCONFIG
line, the FPGA goes into reset mode if the external host is
being reprogrammed. Whenever the
nCONFIG
line is released high, ensure that the first
DCLK
and
DATA
are not driven unintentionally.
The Stratix IV device receives configuration data on the
DATA0
pin and the clock is
received on the
DCLK
pin. Data is latched into the device on the rising edge of
DCLK
.
Data is continuously clocked into the target device until
CONF_DONE
goes high. After
the device has received all configuration data successfully, it releases the open-drain
CONF_DONE
pin, which is pulled high by an external 10-kpull-up resistor. A
low-to-high transition on
CONF_DONE
indicates configuration is complete and
initialization of the device can begin. The
CONF_DONE
pin must have an external 10-k
pull-up resistor for the device to initialize.
In Stratix IV devices, the initialization clock source is either the internal oscillator or
the optional
CLKUSR
pin. By default, the internal oscillator is the clock source for
initialization. If you use the internal oscillator, the Stratix IV device provides itself
with enough clock cycles for proper initialization. Therefore, if the internal oscillator
is the initialization clock source, sending the entire configuration file to the device is
sufficient to configure and initialize the device. Driving
DCLK
to the device after
configuration is complete does not affect device operation.
You also have the flexibility to synchronize initialization of multiple devices or to
delay initialization with the
CLKUSR
option. You can turn on the Enable user-supplied
start-up clock (CLKUSR) option in the Quartus II software from the General tab of
the Device and Pin Options dialog box. If you supply a clock on
CLKUSR
, it will not
affect the configuration process. After all configuration data has been accepted and
CONF_DONE
goes high,
CLKUSR
is enabled after the time specified at tCD2CU. After this
time period elapses, Stratix IV devices require 8,532 clock cycles to initialize properly
and enter user mode. Stratix IV devices support a
CLKUSR
fMAX of 125 MHz.
An optional
INIT_DONE
pin is available that signals the end of initialization and the
start of user-mode with a low-to-high transition. The Enable INIT_DONE Output
option is available in the Quartus II software from the General tab of the Device and
Pin Options dialog box. If you use the
INIT_DONE
pin, it is high due to an external
10-k pull-up resistor when
nCONFIG
is low and during the beginning of
configuration. After the option bit to enable
INIT_DONE
is programmed into the device
(during the first frame of configuration data), the
INIT_DONE
pin goes low. When
10–28 Chapter 10: Configuration, Design Security, and Remote System Upgrades in Stratix IV Devices
Passive Serial Configuration
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
initialization is complete, the
INIT_DONE
pin is released and pulled high. The MAX II
device must be able to detect this low-to-high transition that signals the device has
entered user mode. When initialization is complete, the device enters user mode. In
user-mode, the user I/O pins no longer have weak pull-up resistors and function as
assigned in your design.
1Two
DCLK
falling edges are required after
CONF_DONE
goes high to begin the
initialization of the device for both uncompressed and compressed bitstream in PS.
To ensure
DCLK
and
DATA0
are not left floating at the end of configuration, the MAX II
device must drive them either high or low, whichever is convenient on your board.
The
DATA[0]
pin is available as a user I/O pin after configuration. When you chose the
PS scheme as a default in the Quartus II software, this I/O pin is tri-stated in user
mode and must be driven by the MAX II device. To change this default option in the
Quartus II software, select the Dual-Purpose Pins tab of the Device and Pin Options
dialog box.
The configuration clock (
DCLK
) speed must be below the specified frequency to ensure
correct configuration. No maximum
DCLK
period exists, which means you can pause
the configuration by halting
DCLK
for an indefinite amount of time.
If an error occurs during configuration, the device drives its
nSTATUS
pin low, resetting
itself internally. The low signal on the
nSTATUS
pin also alerts the MAX II device that
there is an error. If the Auto-restart configuration after error option (available in the
Quartus II software from the General tab of the Device and Pin Options dialog box)
is turned on, the Stratix IV device releases
nSTATUS
after a reset time-out period (a
maximum of 500 s). After
nSTATUS
is released and pulled high by a pull-up resistor,
the MAX II device can try to reconfigure the target device without needing to pulse
nCONFIG
low. If this option is turned off, the MAX II device must generate a
low-to-high transition (with a low pulse of at least 2 s) on
nCONFIG
to restart the
configuration process.
1If you have enabled the Auto-restart configuration after error option, the
nSTATUS
pin
transitions from high to low and back again to high when a configuration error is
detected. This appears as a low pulse at the
nSTATUS
pin with a minimum pulse width
of 10 s to a maximum pulse width of 500 s, as defined in the tSTATUS specification.
The MAX II device can also monitor the
CONF_DONE
and
INIT_DONE
pins to ensure
successful configuration. The
CONF_DONE
pin must be monitored by the MAX II device
to detect errors and determine when programming completes. If all configuration
data is sent, but
CONF_DONE
or
INIT_DONE
have not gone high, the MAX II device must
reconfigure the target device.
1If you use the optional
CLKUSR
pin and
nCONFIG
is pulled low to restart configuration
during device initialization, you must ensure that
CLKUSR
continues toggling during
the time
nSTATUS
is low (a maximum of 500 s).
When the device is in user-mode, you can initiate a reconfiguration by transitioning
the
nCONFIG
pin low-to-high. The
nCONFIG
pin must be low for at least 2 s. When
nCONFIG
is pulled low, the device also pulls
nSTATUS
and
CONF_DONE
low and all I/O
pins are tri-stated. After
nCONFIG
returns to a logic high level and
nSTATUS
is released
by the device, reconfiguration begins.
Chapter 10: Configuration, Design Security, and Remote System Upgrades in Stratix IV Devices 10–29
Passive Serial Configuration
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
Figure 10–11 shows how to configure multiple devices using a MAX II device. This
circuit is similar to the PS configuration circuit for a single device, except the Stratix IV
devices are cascaded for multi-device configuration.
In multi-device PS configuration, the first device’s
nCE
pin is connected to GND, while
its
nCEO
pin is connected to
nCE
of the next device in the chain. The last device’s
nCE
input comes from the previous device, while its
nCEO
pin is left floating. After the first
device completes configuration in a multi-device configuration chain, its
nCEO
pin
drives low to activate the second device’s
nCE
pin, which prompts the second device
to begin configuration. The second device in the chain begins configuration within
one clock cycle. Therefore, the transfer of data destinations is transparent to the
MAX II device. All other configuration pins (
nCONFIG
,
nSTATUS
,
DCLK
,
DATA0
, and
CONF_DONE
) are connected to every device in the chain. Configuration signals can
require buffering to ensure signal integrity and prevent clock skew problems. Ensure
that the
DCLK
and
DATA
lines are buffered for every fourth device. Because all device
CONF_DONE
pins are tied together, all devices initialize and enter user mode at the same
time.
Because all
nSTATUS
and
CONF_DONE
pins are tied together, if any device detects an
error, configuration stops for the entire chain and you must reconfigure the entire
chain. For example, if the first device flags an error on
nSTATUS
, it resets the chain by
pulling its
nSTATUS
pin low. This behavior is similar to a single device detecting an
error.
If the Auto-restart configuration after error option is turned on, the devices release
their
nSTATUS
pins after a reset time-out period (a maximum of 500 s). After all
nSTATUS
pins are released and pulled high, the MAX II device can try to reconfigure
the chain without needing to pulse
nCONFIG
low. If this option is turned off, the
MAX II device must generate a low-to-high transition (with a low pulse of at least
2s) on
nCONFIG
to restart the configuration process.
Figure 10–11. Multi-Device PS Configuration Using an External Host
Note to Figure 10–11:
(1) Connect the resistor to a supply that provides an acceptable input signal for all Stratix IV devices in the chain. VCCPGM must be high enough to
meet the VIH specification of the I/O on the device and the external host. Altera recommends powering up all configuration system I/Os with VCCPGM.
(2) A pull-up or pull-down resistor helps keep the nCONFIG line in a known state when the external host is not driving the line.
CONF_DONE
nSTATUS
nCE
DATA 0
nCONFIG
Stratix IV Device 1 Stratix IV Device 2
Memory
ADDR DATA0
GND
10 kΩ10 kΩ
DCLK
CONF_DONE
nSTATUS
nCE
DATA0
nCONFIG
DCLK
nCEO
nCEO N.C.
External Host
(MAX II Device or
Microprocessor)
MSEL1
MSEL0
GND
MSEL2
V
CCPGM
MSEL1
MSEL0
GND
MSEL2
V
CCPGM
V
CCPGM (1)
V
CCPGM (1)
VCCPGM/VCCIO (2)
10 kΩ
10–30 Chapter 10: Configuration, Design Security, and Remote System Upgrades in Stratix IV Devices
Passive Serial Configuration
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
1If you have enabled the Auto-restart configuration after error option, the
nSTATUS
pin
transitions from high to low and back again to high when a configuration error is
detected. This appears as a low pulse at the
nSTATUS
pin with a minimum pulse width
of 10 s to a maximum pulse width of 500 s, as defined in the tSTATUS specification.
In your system, you can have multiple devices that contain the same configuration
data. To support this configuration scheme, all device
nCE
inputs are tied to GND,
while the
nCEO
pins are left floating. All other configuration pins (
nCONFIG
,
nSTATUS
,
DCLK
,
DATA0
, and
CONF_DONE
) are connected to every device in the chain.
Configuration signals can require buffering to ensure signal integrity and prevent
clock skew problems. Ensure that the
DCLK
and
DATA
lines are buffered for every fourth
device. Devices must be the same density and package. All devices start and complete
configuration at the same time.
Figure 10–12 shows multi-device PS configuration when both Stratix IV devices are
receiving the same configuration data.
You can use a single configuration chain to configure Stratix IV devices with other
Altera devices. To ensure that all devices in the chain complete configuration at the
same time, or that an error flagged by one device initiates reconfiguration in all
devices, all of the device
CONF_DONE
and
nSTATUS
pins must be tied together.
fFor more information about configuring multiple Altera devices in the same
configuration chain, refer to the Configuring Mixed Altera FPGA Chains chapter in
volume 2 of the Configuration Handbook.
Figure 10–12. Multiple-Device PS Configuration When Both Devices Receive the Same Data
Notes to Figure 10–12:
(1) Connect the resistor to a supply that provides an acceptable input signal for all Stratix IV devices in the chain. VCCPGM must be high enough to
meet the VIH specification of the I/O on the device and the external host. Altera recommends powering up all configuration system I/Os with VCCPGM.
(2) A pull-up or pull-down resistor helps keep the nCONFIG line in a known state when the external host is not driving the line.
(3) The nCEO pins of both devices are left unconnected when configuring the same configuration data into multiple devices.
CONF_DONE
nSTATUS
nCE
DATA 0
nCONFIG
Stratix IV Device Stratix IV Device
Memory
ADDR DATA0
GND
10 kΩ10 kΩ
DCLK
CONF_DONE
nSTATUS
nCE
DATA0
nCONFIG
DCLK
nCEO
nCEO N.C.
External Host
(MAX II Device or
Microprocessor)
MSEL1
MSEL0
GND
MSEL2
V
CCPGM
MSEL1
MSEL0
GND
MSEL2
V
CCPGM
N.C.
GND
(3)
(3)
V
CCPGM (1)
V
CCPGM (1)
VCCPGM/VCCIO (2)
10 kΩ
Chapter 10: Configuration, Design Security, and Remote System Upgrades in Stratix IV Devices 10–31
Passive Serial Configuration
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
PS Configuration Timing
Figure 10–13 shows the timing waveform for PS configuration when using a MAX II
device as an external host.
Table 10–7 lists the timing parameters for Stratix IV devices for PS configuration.
Figure 10–13. PS Configuration Timing Waveform (Note 1)
Notes to Figure 10–13:
(1) The beginning of this waveform shows the device in user mode. In user mode, nCONFIG, nSTATUS, and CONF_DONE are at logic high levels.
When nCONFIG is pulled low, a reconfiguration cycle begins.
(2) After power-up, the Stratix IV device holds nSTATUS low for the time of the POR delay.
(3) After power-up, before and during configuration, CONF_DONE is low.
(4) Do not leave DCLK floating after configuration. You can drive it high or low, whichever is more convenient.
(5) DATA[0] is available as a user I/O pin after configuration. The state of this pin depends on the dual-purpose pin settings.
nCONFIG
nSTATUS (2)
CONF_DONE(3)
DCLK
DATA
User I/O
INIT_DONE
Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit n
tCD2UM
tCF2ST1
tCF2CD
tCFG
tCH tCL
tDH
tDSU
tCF2CK
tSTATUS
tCLK
tCF2ST0
tST2CK
High-Z User Mode
(5)
(4)
Table 10–7. PS Timing Parameters for Stratix IV Devices (Part 1 of 2) (Note 1)
Symbol Parameter Minimum Maximum Units
tCF2CD
nCONFIG
low to
CONF_DONE
low — 800 ns
tCF2ST0
nCONFIG
low to
nSTATUS
low — 800 ns
tCFG
nCONFIG
low pulse width 2 — s
tSTATUS
nSTATUS
low pulse width 10 500 (2) s
tCF2ST1
nCONFIG
high to
nSTATUS
high — 500 (3) s
tCF2CK
nCONFIG
high to first rising edge on
DCLK
500 — s
tST2CK
nSTATUS
high to first rising edge of
DCLK
2—s
tDSU Data setup time before rising edge on
DCLK
4—ns
tDH Data hold time after rising edge on
DCLK
0—ns
tCH
DCLK
high time (5) 3.2 — ns
tCL
DCLK
low time (5) 3.2 — ns
tCLK
DCLK
period (5) 8—ns
fMAX
DCLK
frequency — 125 MHz
tRInput rise time — 40 ns
10–32 Chapter 10: Configuration, Design Security, and Remote System Upgrades in Stratix IV Devices
Passive Serial Configuration
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
fDevice configuration options and how to create configuration files are described in
the Device Configuration Options and Configuration File Formats chapters in volume 2 of
the Configuration Handbook.
PS Configuration Using a Microprocessor
In this PS configuration scheme, a microprocessor controls the transfer of
configuration data from a storage device, such as flash memory, to the target
Stratix IV device.
For more information about configuration and timing information, refer to “PS
Configuration Using a MAX II Device as an External Host” on page 10–25. This
section is also applicable when using a microprocessor as an external host.
PS Configuration Using a Download Cable
1In this section, the generic term “download cable” includes the Altera USB-Blaster
universal serial bus (USB) port download cable, MasterBlaster serial/USB
communications cable, ByteBlaster II parallel port download cable, ByteBlasterMV
parallel port download cable, and EthernetBlaster download cable.
In a PS configuration with a download cable, an intelligent host (such as a PC)
transfers data from a storage device to the device using the USB Blaster, MasterBlaster,
ByteBlaster II, EthernetBlaster, or ByteBlasterMV cable.
After power-up, Stratix IV devices go through a POR. The POR delay depends on the
PORSEL
pin setting. When
PORSEL
is driven low, the standard POR time is
100 ms < TPOR < 300 ms. When
PORSEL
is driven high, the fast POR time is
4ms<T
POR < 12 ms. During POR, the device resets, holds
nSTATUS
low, and tri-states
all user I/O pins. After the device successfully exits POR, all user I/O pins continue to
be tri-stated. If
nIO_pullup
is driven low during power-up and configuration, the user
I/O pins and dual-purpose I/O pins will have weak pull-up resistors, which are on
(after POR) before and during configuration. If
nIO_pullup
is driven high, the weak
pull-up resistors are disabled.
tFInput fall time — 40 ns
tCD2UM
CONF_DONE
high to user mode (4) 55 150 s
tCD2CU
CONF_DONE
high to
CLKUSR
enabled 4 × maximum
DCLK
period ——
tCD2UMC
CONF_DONE
high to user mode with
CLKUSR
option on
tCD2CU + (8532
CLKUSR
period)
——
Notes to Table 10–7:
(1) This information is preliminary.
(2) This value is applicable if you do not delay the configuration by extending the
nCONFIG
or
nSTATUS
low pulse width.
(3) This value is applicable if you do not delay the configuration by externally holding
nSTATUS
low.
(4) The minimum and maximum numbers apply only if you choose the internal oscillator as the clock source for starting the device.
(5) Adding up tCH and tCL equals to tCLK. When tCH is 3.2 ns (min), tCL must be 4.8 ns and vice versa.
Table 10–7. PS Timing Parameters for Stratix IV Devices (Part 2 of 2) (Note 1)
Symbol Parameter Minimum Maximum Units
Chapter 10: Configuration, Design Security, and Remote System Upgrades in Stratix IV Devices 10–33
Passive Serial Configuration
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
The configuration cycle consists of three stages—reset, configuration, and
initialization. While
nCONFIG
or
nSTATUS
are low, the device is in reset. To initiate
configuration in this scheme, the download cable generates a low-to-high transition
on the
nCONFIG
pin.
1To begin configuration, power the VCC, VCCIO, VCCPGM, and VCCPD voltages (for the
banks where the configuration pins reside) to the appropriate voltage levels.
When
nCONFIG
goes high, the device comes out of reset and releases the open-drain
nSTATUS
pin, which is then pulled high by an external 10-k pull-up resistor. After
nSTATUS
is released, the device is ready to receive configuration data and the
configuration stage begins. The programming hardware or download cable then
places the configuration data one bit at a time on the device’s
DATA0
pin. The
configuration data is clocked into the target device until
CONF_DONE
goes high. The
CONF_DONE
pin must have an external 10-k pull-up resistor for the device to initialize.
When using a download cable, setting the Auto-restart configuration after error
option does not affect the configuration cycle because you must manually restart
configuration in the Quartus II software when an error occurs. Additionally, the
Enable user-supplied start-up clock (CLKUSR) option has no affect on the device
initialization because this option is disabled in the .sof when programming the device
using the Quartus II programmer and download cable. Therefore, if you turn on the
CLKUSR
option, you do not need to provide a clock on
CLKUSR
when you are
configuring the device with the Quartus II programmer and a download cable.
Figure 10–14 shows PS configuration for Stratix IV devices using a USB Blaster,
EthernetBlaster, MasterBlaster, ByteBlaster II, or ByteBlasterMV cable.
Figure 10–14. PS Configuration Using a USB Blaster, EthernetBlaster, MasterBlaster, ByteBlaster II, or ByteBlasterMV
Cable
Notes to Figure 10–14:
(1) Connect the pull-up resistor to the same supply voltage (VCCPGM) as the USB Blaster, MasterBlaster (
VIO
pin), ByteBlaster II, ByteBlasterMV, or
EthernetBlaster cable.
(2) You only need the pull-up resistors on DATA0 and DCLK if the download cable is the only configuration scheme used on your board. This ensures
that DATA0 and DCLK are not left floating after configuration. For example, if you are also using a configuration device, you do not need the
pull-up resistors on DATA0 and DCLK.
(3) Pin 6 of the header is a VIO reference voltage for the MasterBlaster output driver. VIO must match the device’s VCCPGM. For more information about
this value, refer to the MasterBlaster Serial/USB Communications Cable User Guide. In the USB-Blaster, ByteBlaster II, and ByteBlasterMV cable,
this pin is a no connect.
Download Cable
10-Pin Male Header
(PS Mode)
VCCPGM (1)
Stratix IV Device
DCLK
nCONFIG
CONF_DONE
Shield
GND
10 kΩ10 kΩ10 kΩ
10 kΩ
10 kΩ
nSTATUS
DATA0
Pin 1
nCE
GND
GND
VIO (3)
(2)
(2)
nCEO N.C.
MSEL1
MSEL0
GND
MSEL2
VCCPGM
VCCPGM (1) VCCPGM (1) VCCPGM (1)
VCCPGM (1)
VCCPGM (1)
10–34 Chapter 10: Configuration, Design Security, and Remote System Upgrades in Stratix IV Devices
Passive Serial Configuration
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
You can use a download cable to configure multiple Stratix IV devices by connecting
each device’s
nCEO
pin to the subsequent device’s
nCE
pin. The first device’s
nCE
pin is
connected to GND, while its
nCEO
pin is connected to the
nCE
of the next device in the
chain. The last device’s
nCE
input comes from the previous device, while its
nCEO
pin is
left floating. All other configuration pins (
nCONFIG
,
nSTATUS
,
DCLK
,
DATA0
, and
CONF_DONE
) are connected to every device in the chain. Because all
CONF_DONE
pins are
tied together, all devices in the chain initialize and enter user mode at the same time.
In addition, because the
nSTATUS
pins are tied together, the entire chain halts
configuration if any device detects an error. The Auto-restart configuration after
error option does not affect the configuration cycle because you must manually restart
the configuration in the Quartus II software when an error occurs.
Figure 10–15 shows how to configure multiple Stratix IV devices with a download
cable.
Figure 10–15. Multi-Device PS Configuration Using a USB Blaster, EthernetBlaster, MasterBlaster, ByteBlaster II, or
ByteBlasterMV Cable
Notes to Figure 10–15:
(1) Connect the pull-up resistor to the same supply voltage (VCCPGM) as the USB Blaster, MasterBlaster (
VIO
pin), ByteBlaster II, ByteBlasterMV, or
EthernetBlaster cable.
(2) You only need the pull-up resistors on DATA0 and DCLK if the download cable is the only configuration scheme used on your board. This is to
ensure that DATA0 and DCLK are not left floating after configuration. For example, if you are also using a configuration device, you do not need
the pull-up resistors on DATA0 and DCLK.
(3) Pin 6 of the header is a VIO reference voltage for the MasterBlaster output driver. VIO must match the device’s VCCPGM. For more information about
this value, refer to the MasterBlaster Serial/USB Communications Cable User Guide. In the USB-Blaster, ByteBlaster II, and ByteBlasterMV cables,
this pin is a no connect.
Stratix IV Device 1
Stratix IV Device 2
nCE
nCONFIG
CONF_DONE
DCLK
nCE
nCONFIG
CONF_DONE
DCLK
nCEO
GND
(PS Mode)
VCCPGM (1)
nSTATUS
nSTATUS
DATA0
DATA0
GND
10 kΩ
10 kΩ
10 kΩ
10 kΩ
10 kΩ
Pin 1
Download Cable
10-Pin Male Header
nCEO N.C.
GND
VIO (3
)
(2)
(2)
MSEL1
MSEL0
GND
MSEL2
MSEL1
MSEL0
GND
MSEL2
VCCPGM (1)
VCCPGM (1)
VCCPGM (1)
VCCPGM (1)
VCCPGM (1)
VCCPGM (1
)
VCCPGM (1)
Chapter 10: Configuration, Design Security, and Remote System Upgrades in Stratix IV Devices 10–35
JTAG Configuration
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
fFor more information about how to use the USB Blaster, MasterBlaster, ByteBlaster II,
or ByteBlasterMV cables, refer to the following user guides:
■USB-Blaster Download Cable User Guide
■MasterBlaster Serial/USB Communications Cable User Guide
■ByteBlaster II Download Cable User Guide
■ByteBlasterMV Download Cable User Guide
■EthernetBlaster Communications Cable User Guide
JTAG Configuration
JTAG has developed a specification for boundary-scan testing. This boundary-scan
test (BST) architecture offers the capability to efficiently test components on PCBs
with tight lead spacing. The BST architecture can test pin connections without using
physical test probes and capture functional data while a device is operating normally.
You can also use JTAG circuitry to shift configuration data into the device. The
Quartus II software automatically generates .sofs that you can use for JTAG
configuration with a download cable in the Quartus II software programmer.
fFor more information about JTAG boundary-scan testing and commands available
using Stratix IV devices, refer to the following documents:
■JTAG Boundary Scan Testing in Stratix IV Devices chapter
■Programming Support for Jam STAPL Language
Stratix IV devices are designed such that JTAG instructions have precedence over any
device configuration modes. Therefore, JTAG configuration can take place without
waiting for other configuration modes to complete. For example, if you attempt JTAG
configuration of Stratix IV devices during PS configuration, PS configuration is
terminated and JTAG configuration begins.
1You cannot use the Stratix IV decompression or design security features if you are
configuring your Stratix IV device when using JTAG-based configuration.
1A device operating in JTAG mode uses four required pins,
TDI
,
TDO
,
TMS
, and
TCK
, and
one optional pin,
TRST
. The
TCK
pin has an internal weak pull-down resistor, while the
TDI
,
TMS
, and
TRST
pins have weak internal pull-up resistors (typically 25 k). The
JTAG output pin
TDO
and all JTAG input pins are powered by 2.5-V/3.0-V VCCPD. All
the JTAG pins only support the LVTTL I/O standard.
All user I/O pins are tri-stated during JTAG configuration.
fAll the JTAG pins are powered by the VCCPD power supply of I/O bank 1A. For more
information about how to connect a JTAG chain with multiple voltages across the
devices in the chain, refer to the JTAG Boundary Scan Testing in Stratix IV Devices
chapter.
10–36 Chapter 10: Configuration, Design Security, and Remote System Upgrades in Stratix IV Devices
JTAG Configuration
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
During JTAG configuration, you can download data to the device on the PCB through
the USB Blaster, MasterBlaster, ByteBlaster II, EthernetBlaster, or ByteBlasterMV
download cable. Configuring devices through a cable is similar to programming
devices in-system, except you must connect the
TRST
pin to VCCPD. This ensures that
the TAP controller is not reset.
Figure 10–16 shows JTAG configuration of a single Stratix IV device when using a
download cable.
Figure 10–16. JTAG Configuration of a Single Device Using a Download Cable
Notes to Figure 10–16:
(1) Connect the pull-up resistor to the same supply voltage as the USB Blaster, MasterBlaster (
VIO
pin), ByteBlaster II, ByteBlasterMV, or
EthernetBlaster cable. The voltage supply can be connected to the VCCPD of the device.
(2) Connect the nCONFIG and MSEL[2..0] pins to support a non-JTAG configuration scheme. If you only use the JTAG configuration, connect
nCONFIG to VCCPGM and MSEL[2..0] to GND. Pull DCLK either high or low, whichever is convenient on your board.
(3) Pin 6 of the header is a VIO reference voltage for the MasterBlaster output driver. VIO must match the device’s VCCPD. For more information about
this value, refer to the MasterBlaster Serial/USB Communications Cable User Guide. In the USB-Blaster, ByteBlaster II, and ByteBlasterMV cable,
this pin is a no connect.
(4) You must connect nCE to GND or driven low for successful JTAG configuration.
(5) The pull-up resistor value can vary from 1 k to 10 k.
nCE (4)
MSEL[2..0]
nCONFIG
CONF_DONE
VCCPD (1)
GND
GND
(2)
(2)
VCCPD (1)
10 kΩ
10 kΩ
nSTATUS
Pin 1
Download Cable
10-Pin Male Header
(JTAG Mode)
(Top View)
GND
TCK
TDO
TMS
TDI
1 kΩ
GND
VIO (3)
Stratix IV Device
nCE0
N.C.
TRST
DCLK
(2)
VCCPGM
VCCPGM
VCCPD (1)
VCCPD (1)
(5)
(5)
Chapter 10: Configuration, Design Security, and Remote System Upgrades in Stratix IV Devices 10–37
JTAG Configuration
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
To configure a single device in a JTAG chain, the programming software places all
other devices in bypass mode. In bypass mode, devices pass programming data from
the
TDI
pin to the
TDO
pin through a single bypass register without being affected
internally. This scheme enables the programming software to program or verify the
target device. Configuration data driven into the device appears on the
TDO
pin one
clock cycle later.
The Quartus II software verifies successful JTAG configuration upon completion. At
the end of configuration, the software checks the state of
CONF_DONE
through the JTAG
port. When the Quartus II software generates a JAM file (.jam) for a multi-device
chain, it contains instructions so that all the devices in the chain are initialized at the
same time. If
CONF_DONE
is not high, the Quartus II software indicates that
configuration has failed. If
CONF_DONE
is high, the software indicates that
configuration was successful. After the configuration bitstream is transmitted serially
using the JTAG
TDI
port, the
TCK
port is clocked an additional 1,094 cycles to perform
device initialization.
Stratix IV devices have dedicated JTAG pins that always function as JTAG pins. Not
only can you perform JTAG testing on Stratix IV devices before and after, but also
during configuration. While other device families do not support JTAG testing during
configuration, Stratix IV devices support the bypass, ID code, and sample instructions
during configuration without interrupting configuration. All other JTAG instructions
may only be issued by first interrupting configuration and reprogramming the I/O
pins using the
CONFIG_IO
instruction.
The
CONFIG_IO
instruction allows I/O buffers to be configured using the JTAG port
and when issued, interrupts configuration. This instruction allows you to perform
board-level testing prior to configuring the Stratix IV device or waiting for a
configuration device to complete configuration. After configuration has been
interrupted and JTAG testing is complete, you must reconfigure the part using JTAG
(
PULSE_CONFIG
instruction) or by pulsing
nCONFIG
low.
The chip-wide reset (
DEV_CLRn
) and chip-wide output enable (
DEV_OE
) pins on
Stratix IV devices do not affect JTAG boundary-scan or programming operations.
Toggling these pins does not affect JTAG operations (other than the usual
boundary-scan operation).
When designing a board for JTAG configuration for Stratix IV devices, consider the
dedicated configuration pins. Table 10–8 lists how these pins are connected during
JTAG configuration.
Table 10–8. Dedicated Configuration Pin Connections During JTAG Configuration (Part 1 of 2)
Signal Description
nCE
On all Stratix IV devices in the chain,
nCE
must be driven low by connecting it to
GND, pulling it low using a resistor, or driving it by some control circuitry. For
devices that are also in multi-device FPP, AS, or PS configuration chains, the
nCE
pins must be connected to GND during JTAG configuration or JTAG must be
configured in the same order as the configuration chain.
nCEO
On all Stratix IV devices in the chain, you can leave
nCEO
floating or connected to
the
nCE
of the next device.
MSEL
Do not leave these pins floating. These pins support whichever non-JTAG
configuration is used in production. If you only use JTAG configuration, tie these
pins to GND.
10–38 Chapter 10: Configuration, Design Security, and Remote System Upgrades in Stratix IV Devices
JTAG Configuration
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
When programming a JTAG device chain, one JTAG-compatible header is connected
to several devices. The number of devices in the JTAG chain is limited only by the
drive capability of the download cable. When four or more devices are connected in a
JTAG chain, Altera recommends buffering the
TCK
,
TDI
, and
TMS
pins with an on-board
buffer.
JTAG-chain device programming is ideal when the system contains multiple devices,
or when testing your system using JTAG BST circuitry.
Figure 10–17 shows a multi-device JTAG configuration when using a download cable.
nCONFIG
Driven high by connecting to VCCPGM, pulling up using a resistor, or driven high by
some control circuitry.
nSTATUS
Pull to VCCPGM using a 10-k resistor. When configuring multiple devices in the
same JTAG chain, each
nSTATUS
pin must be pulled up to VCCPGM individually.
CONF_DONE
Pull to VCCPGM using a 10-k resistor. When configuring multiple devices in the
same JTAG chain, each
CONF_DONE
pin must be pulled up to VCCPGM individually.
CONF_DONE
going high at the end of JTAG configuration indicates successful
configuration.
DCLK
Do not leave
DCLK
floating. Drive low or high, whichever is more convenient on
your board.
Table 10–8. Dedicated Configuration Pin Connections During JTAG Configuration (Part 2 of 2)
Signal Description
Figure 10–17. JTAG Configuration of Multiple Devices Using a Download Cable
Notes to Figure 10–17:
(1) Connect the pull-up resistor to the same supply voltage as the USB Blaster, MasterBlaster (VIO pin), ByteBlaster II, ByteBlasterMV, or
EthernetBlaster cable. Connect the voltage supply to VCCPD of the device.
(2) Connect the nCONFIG and MSEL[2..0] pins to support a non-JTAG configuration scheme. If you only use a JTAG configuration, connect
nCONFIG to VCCPGM and MSEL[2..0] to GND. Pull DCLK either high or low, whichever is convenient on your board.
(3) Pin 6 of the header is a VIO reference voltage for the MasterBlaster output driver. VIO must match the device’s VCCPD. For more information about
this value, refer to the MasterBlaster Serial/USB Communications Cable User Guide. In the USB-Blaster, ByteBlaster II, and ByteBlasterMV cables,
this pin is a no connect.
(4) You must connect nCE to GND or drive it low for successful JTAG configuration.
(5) The pull-up resistor value can vary from 1 k to 10 k.
TMS TCK
Download Cable
10-Pin Male Header
(JTAG Mode)
TDI TDO
VCCPD
VCCPD (1)
Pin 1
nSTATUS
nCONFIG
MSEL[2..0]
nCE (4)
VCCPGM
CONF_DONE
TMS TCK
TDI TDO
nSTATUS
nCONFIG
MSEL[2..0]
nCE (4)
CONF_DONE
TMS TCK
TDI TDO
nSTATUS
nCONFIG
MSEL[2..0]
nCE (4)
CONF_DONE
(1)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
VIO
(3)
Stratix IV DeviceStratix IV Device
Stratix II or Stratix II GX
Device
TRST TRST TRST
10 kΩ
10 kΩ
10 kΩ
10 kΩ
10 kΩ
1 kΩ
10 kΩ
DCLK DCLK DCLK
(2) (2) (2)
Stratix IV Device
VCCPD (1)
VCCPD (1) VCCPD (1) VCCPD (1)
VCCPGM VCCPGM VCCPGM VCCPGM VCCPGM
(5)
(5)
Chapter 10: Configuration, Design Security, and Remote System Upgrades in Stratix IV Devices 10–39
JTAG Configuration
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
You must connect the
nCE
pin to GND or drive it low during JTAG configuration. In
multi-device FPP, AS, and PS configuration chains, the first device’s
nCE
pin is
connected to GND, while its
nCEO
pin is connected to
nCE
of the next device in the
chain. The last device’s
nCE
input comes from the previous device, while its
nCEO
pin is
left floating. In addition, the
CONF_DONE
and
nSTATUS
signals are all shared in
multi-device FPP, AS, or PS configuration chains so the devices can enter user mode at
the same time after configuration is complete. When the
CONF_DONE
and
nSTATUS
signals are shared among all the devices, you must configure every device when JTAG
configuration is performed.
If you only use JTAG configuration, Altera recommends connecting the circuitry as
shown in Figure 10–17, where each of the
CONF_DONE
and
nSTATUS
signals are isolated,
so that each device can enter user mode individually.
After the first device completes configuration in a multi-device configuration chain,
its
nCEO
pin drives low to activate the second device’s
nCE
pin, which prompts the
second device to begin configuration. Therefore, if these devices are also in a JTAG
chain, ensure the
nCE
pins are connected to GND during JTAG configuration or that
the devices are JTAG configured in the same order as the configuration chain. As long
as the devices are JTAG configured in the same order as the multi-device
configuration chain, the
nCEO
of the previous device drives the
nCE
of the next device
low when it has successfully been JTAG configured.
You can place other Altera devices that have JTAG support in the same JTAG chain for
device programming and configuration.
1JTAG configuration support is enhanced and allows more than 17 Stratix IV devices to
be cascaded in a JTAG chain.
fFor more information about configuring multiple Altera devices in the same
configuration chain, refer to the Configuring Mixed Altera FPGA Chains chapter in
volume 2 of the Configuration Handbook.
You can configure Stratix IV devices using multiple configuration schemes on the
same board. Combining JTAG configuration with AS configuration on your board is
useful in the prototyping environment because it allows multiple methods to
configure your FPGA.
fFor more information about combining JTAG configuration with other configuration
schemes, refer to the Combining Different Configuration Schemes chapter in volume 2 of
the Configuration Handbook.
10–40 Chapter 10: Configuration, Design Security, and Remote System Upgrades in Stratix IV Devices
Device Configuration Pins
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Figure 10–18 shows JTAG configuration of a Stratix IV device using a microprocessor.
Jam STAPL
Jam STAPL, JEDEC standard JESD-71, is a standard file format for in-system
programmability (ISP) purposes. Jam STAPL supports programming or configuration
of programmable devices and testing of electronic systems, using the IEEE 1149.1
JTAG interface. Jam STAPL is a freely licensed open standard.
The Jam Player provides an interface for manipulating the IEEE Std. 1149.1 JTAG TAP
state machine.
fFor more information about JTAG and Jam STAPL in embedded environments, refer
to Using Jam STAPL for ISP via an Embedded Processor. To download the Jam Player,
visit the Altera website at www.altera.com.
Device Configuration Pins
The following tables list the connections and functionality of all the
configuration-related pins on Stratix IV devices. Table 10–9 lists the Stratix IV
configuration pins and their power supply.
Figure 10–18. JTAG Configuration of a Single Device Using a Microprocessor
Notes to Figure 10–18:
(1) Connect the pull-up resistor to a supply that provides an acceptable input signal for all Stratix IV devices in the chain.
VCCPGM must be high enough to meet the VIH specification of the I/O on the device.
(2) Connect the nCONFIG and MSEL[2..0] pins to support a non-JTAG configuration scheme. If you use only a JTAG
configuration, connect nCONFIG to VCCGPM and MSEL[2..0] to GND. Pull DCLK either high or low, whichever is
convenient on your board.
(3) Connect nCE to GND or drive it low for successful JTAG configuration.
(4) The microprocessor must use the same I/O standard as VCCPD to drive the JTAG pins.
TRST
TDI (4)
TCK (4)
TMS (4)
TDO (4)
Microprocessor
Memory
ADDR DATA
Stratix IV Device
nSTATUS
CONF_DONE
VCCPGM (1)
10 kΩ
10 kΩ
(3) nCE
nCONFIG
N.C.
GND
(2)
(2)
VCCPD
nCEO
MSEL[2..0]
DCLK (2)
VCCPGM (1)
Table 10–9. Stratix IV Configuration Pin Summary (Part 1 of 2) (Note 1)
Description Input/Output Dedicated Powered By Configuration Mode
TDI
Input Yes VCCPD JTAG
TMS
Input Yes VCCPD JTAG
TCK
Input Yes VCCPD JTAG
TRST
Input Yes VCCPD JTAG
TDO
Output Yes VCCPD JTAG
CRC_ERROR
Output — Pull-up Optional, all modes
Chapter 10: Configuration, Design Security, and Remote System Upgrades in Stratix IV Devices 10–41
Device Configuration Pins
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
DATA0
Input — VCCPGM/VCCIO (3) All modes except JTAG
DATA[7..1]
Input — VCCPGM/VCCIO (3) FPP
INIT_DONE
Output — Pull-up Optional, all modes
CLKUSR
Input — VCCPGM/VCCIO (3) Optional
nSTATUS
Bidirectional Yes VCCPGM/Pull-up All modes
nCE
Input Yes VCCPGM All modes
CONF_DONE
Bidirectional Yes VCCPGM/Pull-up All modes
nCONFIG
Input Yes VCCPGM All modes
PORSEL
Input Yes VCC (2) All modes
ASDO (4)
Output Yes VCCPGM AS
nCSO (4)
Output Yes VCCPGM AS
DCLK (4)
Input Yes VCCPGM PS, FPP
Output Yes VCCPGM AS
nIO_PULLUP
Input Yes VCC (2) All modes
nCEO
Output Yes VCCPGM All modes
MSEL[2..0]
Input Yes VCC (2) All modes
Notes to Table 10–9:
(1) The total number of pins is 29. The total number of dedicated pins is 18.
(2) Although
MSEL[2..0],
PORSEL,
and
nIO_PULLUP
are powered up by VCC, Altera recommends connecting these pins to VCCPGM or GND directly
without using a pull-up or pull-down resistor.
(3) These pins are powered up by VCCPGM during configuration. These pins are powered up by VCCIO if they are used as regular I/O in user mode.
(4) To tri-state this pin, in the Quartus II software, on the Assignments menu, select Device. On the Device page, select Device and Pin Options...
On the Device and Pin Options page, select Configuration and select the Enable input tri-state on active configuration pins in user mode
option.
Table 10–9. Stratix IV Configuration Pin Summary (Part 2 of 2) (Note 1)
Description Input/Output Dedicated Powered By Configuration Mode
10–42 Chapter 10: Configuration, Design Security, and Remote System Upgrades in Stratix IV Devices
Device Configuration Pins
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Table 10–10 lists the dedicated configuration pins. You must connect these pins
properly on your board for successful configuration. Some of these pins may not be
required for your configuration schemes.
Table 10–10. Dedicated Configuration Pins on the Stratix IV Device (Part 1 of 4)
Pin Name User Mode Configuration
Scheme Pin Type Description
VCCPGM
N/A All Power
Dedicated power pin. Use this pin to power all dedicated
configuration inputs, dedicated configuration outputs,
dedicated configuration bidirectional pins, and some of the
dual functional pins that are used for configuration.
You must connect this pin to 1.8, 2.5, or 3.0 V. VCCPGM must
ramp-up from 0 V to VCCPGM within 100 ms when
PORSEL
is
low or 4 ms when
PORSEL
is high. If VCCPGM is not ramped
up within this specified time, your Stratix IV device will not
configure successfully. If your system does not allow a
VCCPGM ramp-up within 100 ms or 4 ms, you must hold
nCONFIG
low until all power supplies are stable.
VCCPD
N/A All Power
Dedicated power pin. Use this pin to power the I/O
pre-drivers, JTAG input and output pins, and design
security circuitry.
You must connect this pin to 2.5 V or 3.0 V, depending on
the I/O standards selected. For the 3.0-V I/O standard,
VCCPD = 3.0 V. For the 2.5 V or below I/O standards,
VCCPD =2.5V.
VCCPD must ramp-up from 0 V to 2.5 V / 3.0 V within
100 ms when
PORSEL
is low or 4 ms when
PORSEL
is high.
If VCCPD is not ramped up within this specified time, your
Stratix IV device will not configure successfully. If your
system does not allow a VCCPD to ramp-up time within
100 ms or 4 ms, you must hold
nCONFIG
low until all
power supplies are stable.
PORSEL
N/A All Input
Dedicated input that selects between a standard POR time
or a fast POR time. A logic low selects a standard POR time
setting of 100 ms < TPOR < 300 ms and a logic high selects
a fast POR time setting of 4 ms < TPOR < 12 ms.
The
PORSEL
input buffer is powered by VCC and has an
internal 5-kpull-down resistor that is always active. Tie
the
PORSEL
pin directly to VCCPGM or GND.
nIO_PULLUP
N/A All Input
Dedicated input that chooses whether the internal pull-up
resistors on the user I/O pins and dual-purpose I/O pins
(
nCSO
,
nASDO
,
DATA[7..0]
,
CLKUSR
, and
INIT_DONE
) are
on or off before and during configuration. A logic high turns
off the weak internal pull-up resistors; a logic low turns
them on.
The
nIO-PULLUP
input buffer is powered by VCC and has an
internal 5-k pull-down resistor that is always active. The
nIO-PULLUP
can be tied directly to VCCPGM, using a 1-k
pull-up resistor or tied directly to GND, depending on your
device requirements.
Chapter 10: Configuration, Design Security, and Remote System Upgrades in Stratix IV Devices 10–43
Device Configuration Pins
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
MSEL[2..0]
N/A All Input
Three-bit configuration input that sets the Stratix IV device
configuration scheme. For the appropriate connections,
refer to Table 10–1 on page 10–2.
You must hardwire these pins to VCCPGM or GND.
The
MSEL[2..0]
pins have internal 5-k pull-down
resistors that are always active.
nCONFIG
N/A All Input
Configuration control input. Pulling this pin low during
user-mode causes the device to lose its configuration data,
enter a reset state, and tri-state all I/O pins. Returning this
pin to a logic high level initiates a reconfiguration.
Configuration is possible only if this pin is high, except in
JTAG programming mode, when
nCONFIG
is ignored.
nSTATUS
N/A All Bidirectional
open-drain
The device drives
nSTATUS
low immediately after power-up
and releases it after the POR time.
During user mode and regular configuration, this pin is
pulled high by an external 10-k resistor.
This pin, when driven low by the Stratix IV device, indicates
that the device has encountered an error during
configuration.
■Status output—If an error occurs during configuration,
nSTATUS
is pulled low by the target device.
■Status input—If an external source drives the
nSTATUS
pin low during configuration or initialization, the target
device enters an error state.
Driving
nSTATUS
low after configuration and initialization
does not affect the configured device. If you use a
configuration device, driving
nSTATUS
low causes the
configuration device to attempt to configure the device, but
because the device ignores transitions on
nSTATUS
in user
mode, the device does not reconfigure. To initiate a
reconfiguration,
nCONFIG
must be pulled low.
If you have enabled the Auto-restart configuration after
error option, the
nSTATUS
pin transitions from high to low
and back again to high when a configuration error is
detected. This appears as a low pulse at the pin with a
minimum pulse width of 10 s to a maximum pulse width
of 500 s, as defined in the tSTATUS specification.
Table 10–10. Dedicated Configuration Pins on the Stratix IV Device (Part 2 of 4)
Pin Name User Mode Configuration
Scheme Pin Type Description
10–44 Chapter 10: Configuration, Design Security, and Remote System Upgrades in Stratix IV Devices
Device Configuration Pins
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
nSTATUS
(continued) —— —
If VCCPGM is not fully powered up, the following could occur:
■VCCPGM is powered high enough for the
nSTATUS
buffer
to function properly and
nSTATUS
is driven low. When
VCCPGM is ramped up, POR trips and
nSTATUS
is released
after POR expires.
■VCCPGM is not powered high enough for the
nSTATUS
buffer to function properly. In this situation,
nSTATUS
might appear logic high, triggering a configuration
attempt that would fail because POR did not yet trip.
When VCCPD is powered up,
nSTATUS
is pulled low
because POR did not yet trip. When POR trips after
VCCPGM is powered up,
nSTATUS
is released and pulled
high. At that point, reconfiguration is triggered and the
device is configured.
CONF_DONE
N/A All Bidirectional
open-drain
Status output. The target device drives the
CONF_DONE
pin
low before and during configuration. After all the
configuration data is received without error and the
initialization cycle starts, the target device releases
CONF_DONE
.
Status input. After all the data is received and
CONF_DONE
goes high, the target device initializes and enters user
mode. The
CONF_DONE
pin must have an external 10-k
pull-up resistor for the device to initialize.
Driving
CONF_DONE
low after configuration and initialization
does not affect the configured device.
nCE
N/A All Input
Active-low chip enable. The
nCE
pin activates the device
with a low signal to allow configuration. The
nCE
pin must
be held low during configuration, initialization, and user
mode. In single device configuration, it must be tied low. In
multi-device configuration,
nCE
of the first device is tied
low, while its
nCEO
pin is connected to
nCE
of the next
device in the chain.
The
nCE
pin must also be held low for successful JTAG
programming of the device.
nCEO
N/A All Output
Output that drives low when device configuration is
complete. In single device configuration, this pin is left
floating. In multi-device configuration, this pin feeds the
next device’s
nCE
pin. The
nCEO
of the last device in the
chain is left floating.
The
nCEO
pin is powered by VCCPGM.
ASDO
N/A AS Output
Control signal from the Stratix IV device to the serial
configuration device in AS mode used to read out
configuration data.
In AS mode,
ASDO
has an internal pull-up resistor that is
always active.
Table 10–10. Dedicated Configuration Pins on the Stratix IV Device (Part 3 of 4)
Pin Name User Mode Configuration
Scheme Pin Type Description
Chapter 10: Configuration, Design Security, and Remote System Upgrades in Stratix IV Devices 10–45
Device Configuration Pins
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
nCSO
N/A AS Output
Output control signal from the Stratix IV device to the serial
configuration device in AS mode that enables the
configuration device.
In AS mode,
nCSO
has an internal pull-up resistor that is
always active.
DCLK
N/A
Synchronous
configuration
schemes
(PS, FPP, AS)
Input
(PS, FPP)
Output (AS)
In PS and FPP configurations,
DCLK
is the clock input used
to clock data from an external source into the target device.
Data is latched into the device on the rising edge of
DCLK
.
In AS mode,
DCLK
is an output from the Stratix IV device
that provides timing for the configuration interface. In AS
mode,
DCLK
has an internal pull-up resistor (typically
25 k) that is always active.
In AS configuration schemes, this pin is driven into an
inactive state after configuration completes. You can use
this pin as a user I/O during user mode.
In PS or FPP schemes that use a control host, you must
drive
DCLK
either high or low, whichever is more
convenient. In passive schemes, you cannot use
DCLK
as a
user I/O during user mode.
Toggling this pin after configuration does not affect the
configured device.
DATA0
N/A in AS
mode. I/O
in PS or
FPP mode.
PS, FPP, AS Input
Data input. In serial configuration modes, bit-wide
configuration data is presented to the target device on the
DATA0
pin.
In AS mode,
DATA0
has an internal pull-up resistor that is
always active.
After PS or FPP configuration,
DATA0
is available as a user
I/O pin. The state of this pin depends on the Dual-Purpose
Pin settings.
DATA[7..1]
I/O
Parallel
configuration
schemes
(FPP)
Inputs
Data inputs. Byte-wide configuration data is presented to
the target device on
DATA[7..0]
.
In serial configuration schemes, they function as user I/O
pins during configuration, which means they are tri-stated.
After FPP configuration,
DATA[7..1]
are available as user
I/O pins. The state of these pins depends on the
Dual-Purpose Pin settings.
Table 10–10. Dedicated Configuration Pins on the Stratix IV Device (Part 4 of 4)
Pin Name User Mode Configuration
Scheme Pin Type Description
10–46 Chapter 10: Configuration, Design Security, and Remote System Upgrades in Stratix IV Devices
Device Configuration Pins
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Table 10–11 lists the optional configuration pins. If these optional configuration pins
are not enabled in the Quartus II software, they are available as general-purpose user
I/O pins. Therefore, during configuration, these pins function as user I/O pins and
are tri-stated with weak pull-up resistors.
Table 10–11. Optional Configuration Pins
Pin Name User Mode Pin Type Description
CLKUSR
N/A if option is on.
I/O if option is off. Input
Optional user-supplied clock input synchronizes the initialization of
one or more devices. Enable this pin by turning on the Enable
user-supplied start-up clock (CLKUSR) option in the Quartus II
software.
INIT_DONE
N/A if option is on.
I/O if option is off.
Output
open-drain
Use as a status pin to indicate when the device has initialized and is
in user mode. When
nCONFIG
is low and during the beginning of
configuration, the
INIT_DONE
pin is tri-stated and pulled high due to
an external 10-k pull-up resistor. After the option bit to enable
INIT_DONE
is programmed into the device (during the first frame of
configuration data), the
INIT_DONE
pin goes low. When initialization
is complete, the
INIT_DONE
pin is released and pulled high and the
device enters user mode. Thus, the monitoring circuitry must be able
to detect a low-to-high transition. Enable this pin by turning on the
Enable INIT_DONE output option in the Quartus II software.
DEV_OE
N/A if option is on.
I/O if option is off. Input
Optional pin that allows you to override all tri-states on the device.
When this pin is driven low, all I/O pins are tri-stated. When this pin
is driven high, all I/O pins behave as programmed. Enable this pin by
turning on the Enable device-wide output enable (DEV_OE) option
in the Quartus II software.
DEV_CLRn
N/A if option is on.
I/O if option is off. Input
Optional pin that allows you to override all clears on all device
registers. When this pin is driven low, all registers are cleared. When
this pin is driven high, all registers behave as programmed. Enable
this pin by turning on the Enable device-wide reset (DEV_CLRn)
option in the Quartus II software.
Chapter 10: Configuration, Design Security, and Remote System Upgrades in Stratix IV Devices 10–47
Device Configuration Pins
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
Table 10–12 lists the dedicated JTAG pins. JTAG pins must be kept stable before and
during configuration to prevent accidental loading of JTAG instructions. The
TDI
,
TMS,
and
TRST
pins have weak internal pull-up resistors, while
TCK
has a weak
internal pull-down resistor (typically 25 k). If you plan to use the SignalTap®
embedded logic array analyzer, you must connect the JTAG pins of the Stratix IV
device to a JTAG header on your board.
fFor more information about the pin connection recommendations, refer to the
Stratix IV GX and Stratix IV E Device Family Pin Connection Guidelines.
Table 10–12. Dedicated JTAG Pins
Pin
Name
User
Mode Pin Type Description
TDI
N/A Test data
input
Serial input pin for instructions as well as test and programming data. Data is shifted on
the rising edge of
TCK
. The
TDI
pin is powered by the 2.5-V/3.0-V VCCPD supply.
If the JTAG interface is not required on your board, you can disable the JTAG circuitry by
connecting this pin to logic high using a 1-k resistor.
TDO
N/A Test data
output
Serial data output pin for instructions as well as test and programming data. Data is
shifted out on the falling edge of
TCK
. The pin is tri-stated if data is not being shifted out of
the device. The
TDO
pin is powered by VCCPD. For recommendations about connecting a
JTAG chain with multiple voltages across the devices in the chain, refer to the JTAG
Boundary Scan Testing in Stratix IV Devices chapter.
If the JTAG interface is not required on your board, you can disable the JTAG circuitry by
leaving this pin unconnected.
TMS
N/A Test mode
select
Input pin that provides the control signal to determine the transitions of the TAP controller
state machine.
TMS
is evaluated on the rising edge of
TCK
. Therefore, you must set up
TMS
before the rising edge of
TCK
. Transitions within the state machine occur on the falling
edge of
TCK
after the signal is applied to
TMS
. The
TMS
pin is powered by 2.5-V/3.0-V
VCCPD.
If the JTAG interface is not required on your board, you can disable the JTAG circuitry by
connecting this pin to logic high using a 1-k resistor.
TCK
N/A Test clock
input
Clock input to the BST circuitry. Some operations occur at the rising edge, while others
occur at the falling edge. The
TCK
pin is powered by the 2.5-V/3.0-V VCCPD supply.
It is expected that the clock input waveform have a nominal 50% duty cycle.
If the JTAG interface is not required on your board, you can disable the JTAG circuitry by
connecting
TCK
to GND.
TRST
N/A
Test reset
input
(optional)
Active-low input to asynchronously reset the boundary-scan circuit. The
TRST
pin is
optional according to IEEE Std. 1149.1. The
TRST
pin is powered by the 2.5-V/3.0-V VCCPD
supply.
Hold
TMS
at 1 or keep
TCK
static while
TRST
is changed from 0 to 1.
If the JTAG interface is not required on your board, you can disable the JTAG circuitry by
connecting the
TRST
pin to GND.
10–48 Chapter 10: Configuration, Design Security, and Remote System Upgrades in Stratix IV Devices
Configuration Data Decompression
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Configuration Data Decompression
Stratix IV devices support configuration data decompression, which saves
configuration memory space and time. This feature allows you to store compressed
configuration data in configuration devices or other memory and transmit this
compressed bitstream to Stratix IV devices. During configuration, the Stratix IV
device decompresses the bitstream in real time and programs its SRAM cells.
1Preliminary data indicates that compression typically reduces the configuration
bitstream size by 30% to 55% based on the designs used.
Stratix IV devices support decompression in the FPP (when using a MAX II device or
microprocessor + flash), fast AS, and PS configuration schemes. The Stratix IV
decompression feature is not available in the JTAG configuration scheme.
In PS mode, use the Stratix IV decompression feature because sending compressed
configuration data reduces configuration time.
When you enable compression, the Quartus II software generates configuration files
with compressed configuration data. This compressed file reduces the storage
requirements in the configuration device or flash memory, and decreases the time
needed to transmit the bitstream to the Stratix IV device. The time required by a
Stratix IV device to decompress a configuration file is less than the time needed to
transmit the configuration data to the device.
There are two ways to enable compression for Stratix IV bitstreams—before design
compilation (in the Compiler Settings menu) and after design compilation (in the
Convert Programming Files window).
To enable compression in the project’s Compiler Settings menu, follow these steps:
1. On the Assignments menu, click Device to bring up the Settings dialog box.
2. After selecting your Stratix IV device, open the Device and Pin Options window.
Chapter 10: Configuration, Design Security, and Remote System Upgrades in Stratix IV Devices 10–49
Configuration Data Decompression
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
3. In the Configuration settings tab, turn on Generate compressed bitstreams (as
shown in Figure 10–19).
You can also enable compression when creating programming files from the Convert
Programming Files window. To do this, follow these steps:
1. On the File menu, click Convert Programming Files.
2. Select the programming file type (.pof, .sram, .hex, .rbf, or .ttf).
3. For .pof output files, select a configuration device.
4. In the Input files to convert box, select SOF Data.
5. Select Add File and add a Stratix IV device .sof file.
6. Select the name of the file you added to the SOF Data area and click Properties.
7. Check the Compression check box.
Figure 10–19. Enabling Compression for Stratix IV Bitstreams in Compiler Settings
10–50 Chapter 10: Configuration, Design Security, and Remote System Upgrades in Stratix IV Devices
Remote System Upgrades
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
When multiple Stratix IV devices are cascaded, you can selectively enable the
compression feature for each device in the chain if you are using a serial configuration
scheme. Figure 10–20 shows a chain of two Stratix IV devices. The first Stratix IV
device has compression enabled; therefore, receives a compressed bitstream from the
configuration device. The second Stratix IV device has the compression feature
disabled and receives uncompressed data.
In a multi-device FPP configuration chain (with a MAX II device or microprocessor +
flash), all Stratix IV devices in the chain must either enable or disable the
decompression feature. You cannot selectively enable the compression feature for
each device in the chain because of the
DATA
and
DCLK
relationship.
You can generate programming files for this setup by clicking Convert Programming
Files on the File menu in the Quartus II software.
Remote System Upgrades
This section describes the functionality and implementation of the dedicated remote
system upgrade circuitry. It also defines several concepts related to remote system
upgrade, including factory configuration, application configuration, remote update
mode, and user watchdog timer. Additionally, this section provides design guidelines
for implementing remote system upgrades with the supported configuration
schemes.
System designers sometimes face challenges such as shortened design cycles,
evolving standards, and system deployments in remote locations. Stratix IV devices
help overcome these challenges with their inherent reprogrammability and dedicated
circuitry to perform remote system upgrades. Remote system upgrades help deliver
feature enhancements and bug fixes without costly recalls, reduce time-to-market,
extend product life, and avoid system downtime.
Stratix IV devices feature dedicated remote system upgrade circuitry. Soft logic (either
the Nios® II embedded processor or user logic) implemented in a Stratix IV device can
download a new configuration image from a remote location, store it in configuration
memory, and direct the dedicated remote system upgrade circuitry to initiate a
reconfiguration cycle. The dedicated circuitry performs error detection during and
after the configuration process, recovers from any error condition by reverting back to
a safe configuration image, and provides error status information.
Figure 10–20. Compressed and Uncompressed Configuration Data in the Same Configuration File
nCE
GND
nCEO
Decompression
Controller
Stratix IV
Device
nCE nCEO N.C.
Serial Configuration Data
Compressed Uncompressed
Configuration
Data
Configuration
Data
Serial Configuration
Device
Stratix IV
Device
Chapter 10: Configuration, Design Security, and Remote System Upgrades in Stratix IV Devices 10–51
Remote System Upgrades
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
Remote system upgrade is supported in fast AS Stratix IV configuration schemes. You
can also implement remote system upgrade in conjunction with advanced Stratix IV
features such as real-time decompression of configuration data and design security
using the advanced encryption standard (AES) for secure and efficient field upgrades.
The largest serial configuration device currently supports 128 Mbits of configuration
bitstream.
1Stratix IV devices only support remote system upgrade in the single device fast AS
configuration scheme. Because the largest serial configuration device currently
supports 128 Mbits of configuration bitstream, the remote system upgrade feature is
not supported in EP4SGX290, EP4SE360, and larger devices.
1The remote system upgrade feature is not supported in a multi-device chain.
Functional Description
The dedicated remote system upgrade circuitry in Stratix IV devices manages remote
configuration and provides error detection, recovery, and status information. User
logic or a Nios II processor implemented in the Stratix IV device logic array provides
access to the remote configuration data source and an interface to the system’s
configuration memory.
Stratix IV devices have remote system upgrade processes that involve the following
steps:
1. A Nios II processor (or user logic) implemented in the Stratix IV device logic array
receives new configuration data from a remote location. The connection to the
remote source uses a communication protocol such as the transmission control
protocol/Internet protocol (TCP/IP), peripheral component interconnect (PCI),
user datagram protocol (UDP), universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter
(UART), or a proprietary interface.
2. The Nios II processor (or user logic) stores this new configuration data in
non-volatile configuration memory.
3. The Nios II processor (or user logic) initiates a reconfiguration cycle with the new
or updated configuration data.
4. The dedicated remote system upgrade circuitry detects and recovers from any
error(s) that might occur during or after the reconfiguration cycle and provides
error status information to the user design.
10–52 Chapter 10: Configuration, Design Security, and Remote System Upgrades in Stratix IV Devices
Remote System Upgrades
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Figure 10–21 shows the steps required for performing remote configuration updates.
(The numbers in Figure 10–21 coincide with the steps just mentioned.)
Figure 10–22 shows a block diagram for implementing a remote system upgrade with
the Stratix IV fast AS configuration scheme.
You must set the mode select pins (
MSEL[2..0]
) to fast AS mode to use remote system
upgrade in your system. Table 10–13 lists the
MSEL
pin settings for Stratix IV devices in
standard configuration mode and remote system upgrade mode. The following
sections describe remote update of the remote system upgrade mode.
For more information about standard configuration schemes supported in Stratix IV
devices, refer to “Configuration Schemes” on page 10–2.
Figure 10–21. Functional Diagram of Stratix IV Remote System Upgrade
Figure 10–22. Remote System Upgrade Block Diagram for Stratix IV Fast AS Configuration
Scheme
Table 10–13. Remote System Upgrade Modes in Stratix IV Devices
Configuration Scheme MSEL[2..0] Remote System Upgrade Mode
Fast AS (40 MHz) 011 Standard
011 Remote update (1), (2)
Notes to Table 10–13:
(1) All EPCS densities are able to support
DCLK
up to 40 MHz, but batches of EPCS1 and EPCS4 manufactured on
0.18-m process geometry can only support
DCLK
up to 20 MHz. For more information, refer to the Serial
Configuration Devices (EPCS1, EPCS4, EPCS16, EPCS64, and EPCS128) Data Sheet chapter in volume 2 of the
Configuration Handbook.
(2) The DCLK frequency is restricted in remote update mode. For more information, refer to the DC and Switching
Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices chapter in volume 4 of the Stratix IV Device Handbook.
Development
Location Memory
Stratix IV Configuration
Stratix IV
Device
Control Module
Data
Data
Data
Configuration
1
2
3
Stratix IV
Device
Serial
Configuration
Device
Nios II Processor
or User Logic
Chapter 10: Configuration, Design Security, and Remote System Upgrades in Stratix IV Devices 10–53
Remote System Upgrades
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
1When using fast AS mode, you must select remote update mode in the Quartus II
software and insert the ALTREMOTE_UPDATE megafunction to access the circuitry.
For more information, refer to “ALTREMOTE_UPDATE Megafunction” on
page 10–62.
Enabling Remote Update
You can enable remote update for Stratix IV devices in the Quartus II software before
design compilation (in the Compiler Settings menu). In remote update mode, the
auto-restart configuration after error option is always enabled. To enable remote
update in the project’s compiler settings, in the Quartus II software, follow these
steps:
1. On the Assignment menu, click Device. The Settings dialog box appears.
2. Click Device and Pin Options. The Device and Pin Options dialog box appears.
3. Click the Configuration tab.
4. From the Configuration scheme list, select Active Serial (you can also use
Configuration Device) (Figure 10–23).
5. From the Configuration Mode list, select Remote (Figure 10–23).
6. Click OK.
7. In the Settings dialog box, click OK.
Figure 10–23. Enabling Remote Update for Stratix IV Devices in the Compiler Settings Menu
10–54 Chapter 10: Configuration, Design Security, and Remote System Upgrades in Stratix IV Devices
Remote System Upgrade Mode
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Configuration Image Types
When performing a remote system upgrade, Stratix IV device configuration
bitstreams are classified as factory configuration images or application configuration
images. An image, also referred to as a configuration, is a design loaded into the
Stratix IV device that performs certain user-defined functions.
Each Stratix IV device in your system requires one factory image or the addition of
one or more application images. The factory image is a user-defined fall-back, or safe
configuration, and is responsible for administering remote updates in conjunction
with the dedicated circuitry. Application images implement user-defined
functionality in the target Stratix IV device. You may include the default application
image functionality in the factory image.
A remote system upgrade involves storing a new application configuration image or
updating an existing one using the remote communication interface. After an
application configuration image is stored or updated remotely, the user design in the
Stratix IV device initiates a reconfiguration cycle with the new image. Any errors
during or after this cycle are detected by the dedicated remote system upgrade
circuitry and cause the device to automatically revert to the factory image. The factory
image then performs error processing and recovery. The factory configuration is
written to the serial configuration device only once by the system manufacturer and
must not be remotely updated. On the other hand, application configurations may be
remotely updated in the system. Both images can initiate system reconfiguration.
Remote System Upgrade Mode
Remote system upgrade has one mode of operation—remote update mode. Remote
update mode allows you to determine the functionality of your system after
power-up and offers several features.
Remote Update Mode
In remote update mode, Stratix IV devices load the factory configuration image after
power up. The user-defined factory configuration determines which application
configuration is to be loaded and triggers a reconfiguration cycle. The factory
configuration may also contain application logic.
When used with serial configuration devices, remote update mode allows an
application configuration to start at any flash sector boundary. For example, this
translates to a maximum of 128 sectors in the EPCS64 device and 32 sectors in the
EPCS16 device, where the minimum size of each page is 512 KBits. Altera
recommends not using the same page in the serial configuration devices for two
images. Additionally, remote update mode features a user watchdog timer that
determines the validity of an application configuration.
When a Stratix IV device is first powered up in remote update mode, it loads the
factory configuration located at page zero (page registers
PGM[23:0]
=
24'b0
). Always
store the factory configuration image for your system at page address zero. This
corresponds to the start address location 0×000000 in the serial configuration device.
Chapter 10: Configuration, Design Security, and Remote System Upgrades in Stratix IV Devices 10–55
Remote System Upgrade Mode
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
The factory image is user-designed and contains soft logic to:
■Process any errors based on status information from the dedicated remote system
upgrade circuitry
■Communicate with the remote host and receive new application configurations
and store this new configuration data in the local non-volatile memory device
■Determine which application configuration is to be loaded into the Stratix IV
device
■Enable or disable the user watchdog timer and load its time-out value (optional)
■Instruct the dedicated remote system upgrade circuitry to initiate a
reconfiguration cycle
Figure 10–24 shows the transitions between the factory and application
configurations in remote update mode.
After power up or a configuration error, the factory configuration logic is loaded
automatically. The factory configuration also must specify whether to enable the user
watchdog timer for the application configuration and if enabled, to include the timer
setting information.
The user watchdog timer ensures that the application configuration is valid and
functional. The timer must be continually reset within a specific amount of time
during user mode operation of an application configuration. Only valid application
configurations contain the logic to reset the timer in user mode. This timer reset logic
must be part of a user-designed hardware and/or software health monitoring signal
that indicates error-free system operation. If the timer is not reset in a specific amount
of time; for example, the user application configuration detects a functional problem
or if the system hangs, the dedicated circuitry updates the remote system upgrade
status register, triggering the loading of the factory configuration.
Figure 10–24. Transitions Between Configurations in Remote Update Mode
Set Control Register
and Reconfigure
Set Control Register
and Reconfigure
Reload a
Different Application
Application n
Configuration
Application 1
Configuration
Factory
Configuration
(page 0)
Configuration Error
Configuration Error
Power Up
Configuration
Error
Reload a
Different Application
10–56 Chapter 10: Configuration, Design Security, and Remote System Upgrades in Stratix IV Devices
Remote System Upgrade Mode
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
1The user watchdog timer is automatically disabled for factory configurations. For
more information about the user watchdog timer, refer to “User Watchdog Timer” on
page 10–61.
If there is an error while loading the application configuration, the cause of the
reconfiguration is written by the dedicated circuitry to the remote system upgrade
status register. Actions that cause the remote system upgrade status register to be
written are:
■
nSTATUS
driven low externally
■Internal
CRC
error
■User watchdog timer time-out
■A configuration reset (logic array
nCONFIG
signal or external
nCONFIG
pin assertion
to low)
Stratix IV devices automatically load the factory configuration located at page address
zero. This user-designed factory configuration can read the remote system upgrade
status register to determine the reason for the reconfiguration. The factory
configuration then takes appropriate error recovery steps and writes to the remote
system upgrade control register to determine the next application configuration to be
loaded.
When Stratix IV devices successfully load the application configuration, they enter
into user mode. In user mode, the soft logic (Nios II processor or state machine and
the remote communication interface) assists the Stratix IV device in determining
when a remote system update is arriving. When a remote system update arrives, the
soft logic receives the incoming data, writes it to the configuration memory device,
and triggers the device to load the factory configuration. The factory configuration
reads the remote system upgrade status register and control register, determines the
valid application configuration to load, writes the remote system upgrade control
register accordingly, and initiates system reconfiguration.
Chapter 10: Configuration, Design Security, and Remote System Upgrades in Stratix IV Devices 10–57
Dedicated Remote System Upgrade Circuitry
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
Dedicated Remote System Upgrade Circuitry
This section describes the implementation of the Stratix IV remote system upgrade
dedicated circuitry. The remote system upgrade circuitry is implemented in hard
logic. This dedicated circuitry interfaces to the user-defined factory and application
configurations implemented in the Stratix IV device logic array to provide the
complete remote configuration solution. The remote system upgrade circuitry
contains the remote system upgrade registers, a watchdog timer, and a state machine
that controls those components.
Figure 10–25 shows the data path for the remote system upgrade block.
Figure 10–25. Remote System Upgrade Circuit Data Path (Note 1)
Note to Figure 10–25:
(1) The RU_DOUT, RU_SHIFTnLD, RU_CAPTnUPDT, RU_CLK, RU_DIN, RU_nCONFIG, and RU_nRSTIMER signals are internally
controlled by the ALTREMOTE_UPDATE megafunction.
Logic Array
Shift Register
Status Register (SR)
[4..0]
Control Register
[37..0]
din
capture
doutBit [4..0]
Logic Array
clkout
RU_SHIFTnLD RU_CAPTnUPDT RU_CLK RU_DINRU_nCONFIG RU_nRSTIMER
User
Watchdog
Timer
RU_DOUT
capture
clkin
update
Logic Array
capture
din
Bit [37..0]
dout
update
Update Register
[37..0]
time-out
RSU
State
Machine
Internal Oscillator
10–58 Chapter 10: Configuration, Design Security, and Remote System Upgrades in Stratix IV Devices
Dedicated Remote System Upgrade Circuitry
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Remote System Upgrade Registers
The remote system upgrade block contains a series of registers that store the page
addresses, watchdog timer settings, and status information. Table 10–14 lists these
registers.
The remote system upgrade control and status registers are clocked by the 10-MHz
internal oscillator (the same oscillator that controls the user watchdog timer).
However, the remote system upgrade shift and update registers are clocked by the
user clock input (
RU_CLK
).
Remote System Upgrade Control Register
The remote system upgrade control register stores the application configuration page
address and user watchdog timer settings. The control register functionality depends
on the remote system upgrade mode selection. In remote update mode, the control
register page address bits are set to all zeros (
24'b0
=
0×000000
) at power up to load
the factory configuration. A factory configuration in remote update mode has write
access to this register.
Figure 10–26 and Table 10–15 specify the control register bit positions. In the figure,
the numbers show the bit position of a setting within a register. For example, bit
number 25 is the enable bit for the watchdog timer.
Table 10–14. Remote System Upgrade Registers
Register Description
Shift register This register is accessible by the logic array and allows the update, status, and control registers to be
written and sampled by user logic.
Control register
This register contains the current page address, user watchdog timer settings, and one bit specifying
whether the current configuration is a factory configuration or an application configuration. During a read
operation in an application configuration, this register is read into the shift register. When a
reconfiguration cycle is initiated, the contents of the update register are written into the control register.
Update register
This register contains data similar to that in the control register. However, it can only be updated by the
factory configuration by shifting data into the shift register and issuing an update operation. When a
reconfiguration cycle is triggered by the factory configuration, the control register is updated with the
contents of the update register. During a capture in a factory configuration, this register is read into the
shift register.
Status register
This register is written to by the remote system upgrade circuitry on every reconfiguration to record the
cause of the reconfiguration. This information is used by the factory configuration to determine the
appropriate action following a reconfiguration. During a capture cycle, this register is read into the shift
register.
Figure 10–26. Remote System Upgrade Control Register
Wd_timer[11..0] Wd_en PGM[23..0] AnF
37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 .. 3 2 1 0
Chapter 10: Configuration, Design Security, and Remote System Upgrades in Stratix IV Devices 10–59
Dedicated Remote System Upgrade Circuitry
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
The application-not-factory (
AnF
) bit indicates whether the current configuration
loaded in the Stratix IV device is the factory configuration or an application
configuration. This bit is set low by the remote system upgrade circuitry when an
error condition causes a fall-back to the factory configuration. When the
AnF
bit is
high, the control register access is limited to read operations. When the
AnF
bit is low,
the register allows write operations and disables the watchdog timer.
In remote update mode, the factory configuration design sets this bit high (1'b1) when
updating the contents of the update register with the application page address and
watchdog timer settings.
Table 10–15 lists the remote system upgrade control register contents.
Remote System Upgrade Status Register
The remote system upgrade status register specifies the reconfiguration trigger
condition. The various trigger and error conditions include:
■Cyclic redundancy check (CRC) error during application configuration
■
nSTATUS
assertion by an external device due to an error
■Stratix IV device logic array triggered a reconfiguration cycle, possibly after
downloading a new application configuration image
■External configuration reset (
nCONFIG
) assertion
■User watchdog timer time-out
Table 10–15. Remote System Upgrade Control Register Contents
Control Register Bit Remote System
Upgrade Mode Value (2) Definition
AnF
(1) Remote update 1'b0 Application not factory
PGM[23..0]
Remote update 24'b0×000000 AS configuration start address
(
StAdd[23..0]
)
Wd_en
Remote update 1'b0 User watchdog timer enable bit
Wd_timer[11..0]
Remote update 12'b000000000000
User watchdog time-out value
(most significant 12 bits of 29-bit
count value:
{Wd_timer[11..0],
17'b0}
)
Notes to Table 10–15:
(1) In remote update mode, the remote configuration block does not update the
AnF
bit automatically (you can update it manually).
(2) This is the default value of the control register bit.
10–60 Chapter 10: Configuration, Design Security, and Remote System Upgrades in Stratix IV Devices
Dedicated Remote System Upgrade Circuitry
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Figure 10–27 and Table 10–16 specify the contents of the status register. The numbers
in the figure show the bit positions within a 5-bit register.
Remote System Upgrade State Machine
The remote system upgrade control and update registers have identical bit
definitions, but serve different roles (refer to Table 10–14 on page 10–57). While both
registers can only be updated when the device is loaded with a factory configuration
image, the update register writes are controlled by the user logic; the control register
writes are controlled by the remote system upgrade state machine.
In factory configurations, the user logic sends the
AnF
bit (set high), the page address,
and the watchdog timer settings for the next application configuration bit to the
update register. When the logic array configuration reset (
RU_nCONFIG
) goes low, the
remote system upgrade state machine updates the control register with the contents
of the update register and initiates system reconfiguration from the new application
page.
1To ensure successful reconfiguration between the pages, assert the
RU_nCONFIG
signal
for a minimum of 250 ns. This is equivalent to strobing the reconfiguration input of
the ALTREMOTE_UPDATE megafunction high for a minimum of 250 ns.
In the event of an error or reconfiguration trigger condition, the remote system
upgrade state machine directs the system to load a factory or application
configuration (page zero or page one, based on the mode and error condition) by
setting the control register accordingly. Table 10–17 lists the contents of the control
register after such an event occurs for all possible error or trigger conditions.
Figure 10–27. Remote System Upgrade Status Register
Wd
4
CRC
0
nCONFIG
3
nSTATUS
1
Core_nCONFIG
2
Table 10–16. Remote System Upgrade Status Register Contents
Status Register Bit Definition POR Reset Value
CRC
(from the configuration)
CRC
error caused reconfiguration 1 bit '0'
nSTATUS nSTATUS
caused reconfiguration 1 bit '0'
CORE_nCONFIG
(1) Device logic array caused reconfiguration 1 bit '0'
nCONFIG nCONFIG
caused reconfiguration 1 bit '0'
Wd
Watchdog timer caused reconfiguration 1 bit '0'
Note to Table 10–16:
(1) Logic array reconfiguration forces the system to load the application configuration data into the Stratix IV device. This occurs after the factory
configuration specifies the appropriate application configuration page address by updating the update register.
Chapter 10: Configuration, Design Security, and Remote System Upgrades in Stratix IV Devices 10–61
Dedicated Remote System Upgrade Circuitry
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
The remote system upgrade status register is updated by the dedicated error
monitoring circuitry after an error condition but before the factory configuration is
loaded.
Capture operations during factory configuration access the contents of the update
register. This feature is used by the user logic to verify that the page address and
watchdog timer settings were written correctly. Read operations in application
configurations access the contents of the control register. This information is used by
the user logic in the application configuration.
Table 10–17. Control Register Contents after an Error or Reconfiguration Trigger Condition
Reconfiguration Error/Trigger Control Register Setting
Remote Update
nCONFIG
reset All bits are 0
nSTATUS
error All bits are 0
CORE
triggered reconfiguration Update register
CRC
error All bits are 0
Wd
time out All bits are 0
10–62 Chapter 10: Configuration, Design Security, and Remote System Upgrades in Stratix IV Devices
Dedicated Remote System Upgrade Circuitry
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
User Watchdog Timer
The user watchdog timer prevents a faulty application configuration from stalling the
device indefinitely. The system uses the timer to detect functional errors after an
application configuration is successfully loaded into the Stratix IV device.
The user watchdog timer is a counter that counts down from the initial value loaded
into the remote system upgrade control register by the factory configuration. The
counter is 29 bits wide and has a maximum count value of 229. When specifying the
user watchdog timer value, specify only the most significant 12 bits. The granularity
of the timer setting is 217 cycles. The cycle time is based on the frequency of the
10-MHz internal oscillator. Table 10–18 lists the operating range of the 10-MHz
internal oscillator.
The user watchdog timer begins counting after the application configuration enters
device user mode. This timer must be periodically reloaded or reset by the application
configuration before the timer expires by asserting
RU_nRSTIMER
. If the application
configuration does not reload the user watchdog timer before the count expires, a
time-out signal is generated by the remote system upgrade dedicated circuitry. The
time-out signal tells the remote system upgrade circuitry to set the user watchdog
timer status bit (
Wd
) in the remote system upgrade status register and reconfigures the
device by loading the factory configuration.
1To allow remote system upgrade dedicated circuitry to reset the watchdog timer, you
must assert the
RU_nRSTIMER
signal active for a minimum of 250 ns. This is equivalent
to strobing the
reset_timer
input of the ALTREMOTE_UPDATE megafunction high
for a minimum of 250 ns.
The user watchdog timer is not enabled during the configuration cycle of the device.
Errors during configuration are detected by the CRC engine. Also, the timer is
disabled for factory configurations. Functional errors should not exist in the factory
configuration because it is stored and validated during production and is never
updated remotely.
1The user watchdog timer is disabled in factory configurations and during the
configuration cycle of the application configuration. It is enabled after the application
configuration enters user mode.
Table 10–18. 10-MHz Internal Oscillator Specifications (Note 1)
Minimum Typical Maximum Units
4.3 5.3 10 MHz
Note to Table 10–18:
(1) These values are preliminary.
Chapter 10: Configuration, Design Security, and Remote System Upgrades in Stratix IV Devices 10–63
Quartus II Software Support
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
Quartus II Software Support
The Quartus II software provides the flexibility to include the remote system upgrade
interface between the Stratix IV device logic array and the dedicated circuitry,
generate configuration files for production, and allows remote programming of the
system configuration memory.
The ALTREMOTE_UPDATE megafunction is the implementation option in the
Quartus II software that you use for the interface between the remote system upgrade
circuitry and the device logic array interface. Using the megafunction block instead of
creating your own logic saves design time and offers more efficient logic synthesis
and device implementation.
ALTREMOTE_UPDATE Megafunction
The ALTREMOTE_UPDATE megafunction provides a memory-like interface to the
remote system upgrade circuitry and handles the shift register read and write
protocol in the Stratix IV device logic. This implementation is suitable for designs that
implement the factory configuration functions using a Nios II processor or user logic
in the device.
Figure 10–28 shows the interface signals between the ALTREMOTE_UPDATE
megafunction and Nios II processor or user logic.
fFor more information about the ALTREMOTE_UPDATE megafunction and the
description of ports shown in Figure 10–28, refer to the Remote Update Circuitry
(ALTREMOTE_UPDATE) Megafunction User Guide.
Figure 10–28. Interface Signals between the ALTREMOTE_UPDATE Megafunction and the Nios II Processor
Nios II Processor or
User Logic
read_param
write_param
param[2..0]
data_in[23..0]
reconfig
reset_timer
clock
reset
busy
data_out[23..0]
ALTREMOTE_UPDATE
10–64 Chapter 10: Configuration, Design Security, and Remote System Upgrades in Stratix IV Devices
Design Security
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Design Security
This section provides an overview of the design security feature and its
implementation on Stratix IV devices using the advanced encryption standard (AES).
It also covers the new security modes available in Stratix IV devices.
As Stratix IV devices continue play a role in larger and more critical designs in
competitive commercial and military environments, it is increasingly important to
protect the designs from copying, reverse engineering, and tampering.
Stratix IV devices address these concerns with both volatile and non-volatile security
feature support. Stratix IV devices have the ability to decrypt configuration bitstreams
using the AES algorithm, an industry-standard encryption algorithm that is FIPS-197
certified. Stratix IV devices have a design security feature that utilizes a 256-bit
security key.
Stratix IV devices store configuration data in SRAM configuration cells during device
operation. Because SRAM is volatile, the SRAM cells must be loaded with
configuration data each time the device powers up. It is possible to intercept
configuration data when it is being transmitted from the memory source (flash
memory or a configuration device) to the device. The intercepted configuration data
could then be used to configure another device.
When using the Stratix IV design security feature, the security key is stored in the
Stratix IV device. Depending on the security mode, you can configure the Stratix IV
device using a configuration file that is encrypted with the same key, or for board
testing, configured with a normal configuration file.
The design security feature is available when configuring Stratix IV devices using FPP
configuration mode with an external host (such as a MAX II device or
microprocessor), or when using fast AS or PS configuration schemes. The design
security feature is also available in remote update with fast AS configuration mode.
The design security feature is not available when you are configuring your Stratix IV
device using JTAG-based configuration. For more information, refer to “Supported
Configuration Schemes” on page 10–67.
1When using a serial configuration scheme such as PS or fast AS, configuration time is
the same whether or not you enable the design security feature. If the FPP scheme is
used with the design security or decompression feature, a ×4
DCLK
is required. This
results in a slower configuration time when compared with the configuration time of
a Stratix IV device that has neither the design security nor the decompression feature
enabled.
Chapter 10: Configuration, Design Security, and Remote System Upgrades in Stratix IV Devices 10–65
Design Security
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
Stratix IV Security Protection
Stratix IV device designs are protected from copying, reverse engineering, and
tampering using configuration bitstream encryption.
Security Against Copying
The security key is securely stored in the Stratix IV device and cannot be read out
through any interfaces. In addition, as configuration file read-back is not supported in
Stratix IV devices, the design information cannot be copied.
Security Against Reverse Engineering
Reverse engineering from an encrypted configuration file is very difficult and time
consuming because the Stratix IV configuration file formats are proprietary and the
file contains millions of bits which require specific decryption. Reverse engineering
the Stratix IV device is just as difficult because the device is manufactured on the most
advanced 40-nm process technology.
Security Against Tampering
The non-volatile keys are one-time programmable. After the Tamper Protection bit is
set in the key programming file generated by the Quartus II software, the Stratix IV
device can only be configured with configuration files encrypted with the same key.
AES Decryption Block
The main purpose of the AES decryption block is to decrypt the configuration
bitstream prior to entering data decompression or configuration.
Prior to receiving encrypted data, you must enter and store the 256-bit security key in
the device. You can choose between a non-volatile security key and a volatile security
key with battery backup.
The security key is scrambled prior to storing it in the key storage to make it more
difficult for anyone to retrieve the stored key using de-capsulation of the device.
Flexible Security Key Storage
Stratix IV devices support two types of security key programming—volatile and
non-volatile keys. Table 10–19 lists the differences between volatile keys and
non-volatile keys.
Table 10–19. Security Key Options (Part 1 of 2)
Options Volatile Key Non-Volatile Key
Key programmability Reprogrammable and erasable One-time programmable
External battery Required Not required
Key programming method (1) On-board On and off board
10–66 Chapter 10: Configuration, Design Security, and Remote System Upgrades in Stratix IV Devices
Design Security
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
You can program the non-volatile key to the Stratix IV device without an external
battery. Also, there are no additional requirements to any of the Stratix IV power
supply inputs.
VCCBAT is a dedicated power supply for volatile key storage and not shared with other
on-chip power supplies, such as VCCIO or VCC. VCCBAT continuously supplies power to
the volatile register regardless of the on-chip supply condition.
1After power-up, you must wait 300 ms (
PORSEL
= 0) or 12 ms (
PORSEL
= 1) before
beginning key programming to ensure that VCCBAT is at full rail.
1For more information about how to calculate the key retention time of the battery
used for volatile key storage, refer to the Stratix III, Stratix IV, Stratix V, HardCopy III
and HardCopy IV PowerPlay Early Power Estimator.
fFor more information about battery specifications, refer to the DC and Switching
Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices chapter.
fFor more information about the VCCBAT pin connection recommendations, refer to the
Stratix IV GX and Stratix IV E Device Family Pin Connection Guidelines.
Stratix IV Design Security Solution
Stratix IV devices are SRAM-based devices. To provide design security, Stratix IV
devices require a 256-bit security key for configuration bitstream encryption.
You can carry out secure configuration in the following steps, as shown in
Figure 10–29:
1. Program the security key into the Stratix IV device.
2. Program the user-defined 256-bit AES keys to the Stratix IV device through the
JTAG interface.
3. Encrypt the configuration file and store it in the external memory.
4. Encrypt the configuration file with the same 256-bit keys used to program the
Stratix IV device. Encryption of the configuration file is done using the Quartus II
software. The encrypted configuration file is then loaded into the external
memory, such as a configuration or flash device.
5. Configure the Stratix IV device.
Design protection Secure against copying and
reverse engineering
Secure against copying and
reverse engineering. Tamper
resistant if tamper protection
bit is set.
Note to Table 10–19:
(1) Key programming is carried out using the JTAG interface.
Table 10–19. Security Key Options (Part 2 of 2)
Options Volatile Key Non-Volatile Key
Chapter 10: Configuration, Design Security, and Remote System Upgrades in Stratix IV Devices 10–67
Design Security
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
At system power-up, the external memory device sends the encrypted configuration
file to the Stratix IV device.
Security Modes Available
The following security modes are available on the Stratix IV device.
Volatile Key
Secure operation with volatile key programmed and required external battery: this
mode accepts both encrypted and unencrypted configuration bitstreams. Use the
unencrypted configuration bitstream support for board-level testing only.
Non-Volatile Key
Secure operation with one time programmable (OTP) security key programmed: this
mode accepts both encrypted and unencrypted configuration bitstreams. Use the
unencrypted configuration bitstream support for board level testing only.
Non-Volatile Key with Tamper Protection Bit Set
Secure operation in tamper resistant mode with OTP security key programmed: only
encrypted configuration bitstreams are allowed to configure the device. Tamper
protection disables JTAG configuration with unencrypted configuration bitstream.
Figure 10–29. Design Security (Note 1)
Note to Figure 10–29:
(1) Step 1, Step 2, and Step 3 correspond to the procedure described in “Design Security” on page 10–63.
User-Defined
AES Key
Key Storage
Encrypted
Configuration
File
Memory or
Configuration
Device
Stratix IV Device
AES
Decryption
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
10–68 Chapter 10: Configuration, Design Security, and Remote System Upgrades in Stratix IV Devices
Design Security
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
1Enabling the tamper protection bit disables test mode in Stratix IV devices. This
process is irreversible and prevents Altera from conducting carry-out failure analysis
if test mode is disabled. Contact Altera Technical Support to enable the tamper
protection bit.
No Key Operation
Only unencrypted configuration bitstreams are allowed to configure the device.
Table 10–20 lists the different security modes and configuration bitstream supported
for each mode.
Supported Configuration Schemes
The Stratix IV device supports only selected configuration schemes, depending on the
security mode you select when you encrypt the Stratix IV device.
Figure 10–30 shows the restrictions of each security mode when encrypting Stratix IV
devices.
Table 10–20. Security Modes Supported
Mode (1) Function Configuration File
Volatile key Secure Encrypted
Board-level testing Unencrypted
Non-volatile key Secure Encrypted
Board-level testing Unencrypted
Non-volatile key with tamper
protection bit set Secure (tamper resistant) (2) Encrypted
Notes to Table 10–20:
(1) In No key operation, only the unencrypted configuration file is supported.
(2) The tamper protection bit setting does not prevent the device from being reconfigured.
Figure 10–30. Security Modes in Stratix IV Devices—Sequence and Restrictions
Volatile Key
Unencrypted or
Encrypted
Configuration File
No Key
Unencrypted
Configuration File
Non-Volatile Key
Unencrypted or
Encrypted
Configuration File
Non-Volatile Key
with
Tamper-Protection
Bit Set
Encrypted
Configuration File
Chapter 10: Configuration, Design Security, and Remote System Upgrades in Stratix IV Devices 10–69
Design Security
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
Table 10–21 lists the configuration modes allowed in each of the security modes.
You can use the design security feature with other configuration features, such as
compression and remote system upgrade features. When you use compression with
the design security feature, the configuration file is first compressed and then
encrypted using the Quartus II software. During configuration, the Stratix IV device
first decrypts and then decompresses the configuration file.
Document Revision History
Table 10–22 lists the revision history for this chapter.
Table 10–21. Allowed Configuration Modes for Various Security Modes (Note 1)
Security Mode Configuration
File Allowed Configuration Modes
No key Unencrypted All configuration modes that do not engage the design security feature.
Secure with volatile key Encrypted
■Passive serial with AES (and/or with decompression)
■Fast passive parallel with AES (and/or with decompression)
■Remote update fast AS with AES (and/or with decompression)
■Fast AS (and/or with decompression)
Board-level testing with
volatile key Unencrypted All configuration modes that do not engage the design security feature.
Secure with non-volatile key Encrypted
■Passive serial with AES (and/or with decompression)
■Fast passive parallel with AES (and/or with decompression)
■Remote update fast AS with AES (and/or with decompression)
■Fast AS (and/or with decompression)
Board-level testing with
non-volatile key Unencrypted All configuration modes that do not engage the design security feature.
Secure in tamper resistant
mode using non-volatile key
with tamper protection set
Encrypted
■Passive serial with AES (and/or with decompression)
■Fast passive parallel with AES (and/or with decompression)
■Remote update fast AS with AES (and/or with decompression)
■Fast AS (and/or with decompression)
Note to Table 10–21:
(1) There is no impact to the configuration time required when compared with unencrypted configuration modes except FPP with AES (and/or
decompression), which requires a
DCLK
that is ×4 the data rate.
Table 10–22. Document Revision History (Part 1 of 2)
Date Version Changes
September 2012 3.5
■Updated the “FPP Configuration Using a MAX II Device as an External Host” section to
close FB #36583 and #63157.
■Updated the “Estimating Active Serial Configuration Time” section to close FB #64163.
■Updated the “PS Configuration Using a MAX II Device as an External Host” section to
close FB #63157.
■Updated Figure 10–1, Figure 10–2, Figure 10–3, Figure 10–10,Figure 10–11 and
Figure 10–12 to close FB #63155.
December 2011 3.4 Updated Table 10–2 and Table 10–7.
10–70 Chapter 10: Configuration, Design Security, and Remote System Upgrades in Stratix IV Devices
Design Security
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
April 2011 3.3
■Updated the “FPP Configuration Using a MAX II Device as an External Host”, “Fast Active
Serial Configuration (Serial Configuration Devices)”, and “PS Configuration Using a
MAX II Device as an External Host”.
■Updated Table 10–10.
February 2011 3.2
■Updated the “Fast Active Serial Configuration (Serial Configuration Devices)”, “FPP
Configuration Using a MAX II Device as an External Host” “Configuration Data
Decompression”, and “User Watchdog Timer” sections.
■Updated Table 10–2, Table 10–4, Table 10–5, Table 10–7, and Table 10–9.
■Applied new template.
■Minor text edits.
March 2010 3.1
■Added the “Guidelines for Connecting Serial Configuration Devices on an AS Interface”
section.
■Updated the “Power-On Reset Circuit” and “Fast Active Serial Configuration (Serial
Configuration Devices)” sections.
■Updated Table 10–2, Table 10–4, Table 10–5, Table 10–10, and Table 10–13.
■Updated Figure 10–16 and Figure 10–17 with Note 5.
■Updated Figure 10–4, Figure 10–5, and Figure 10–13.
■Updated the reference in the “Configuration Schemes” section.
November 2009 3.0
■Updated Table 10–1 and Table 10–2.
■Updated the “FPP Configuration Using a MAX II Device as an External Host”,“Fast Active
Serial Configuration (Serial Configuration Devices)”, “Device Configuration Pins”,
“Remote System Upgrades”, “Remote System Upgrade Mode”, “Estimating Active Serial
Configuration Time”, “Remote System Upgrade State Machine”, and “User Watchdog
Timer” sections.
■Removed Table 10-4, Table 10-7, Table 10-8, and Table 10-25.
■Minor text edits.
June 2009 2.3
■Updated the “VCCPD Pins”, “FPP Configuration Using a MAX II Device as an External
Host”, “Estimating Active Serial Configuration Time”, “Fast Active Serial Configuration
(Serial Configuration Devices)”, “Remote System Upgrades”, “PS Configuration Using a
MAX II Device as an External Host”, and “PS Configuration Using a Download Cable”
sections.
■Updated Table 10–3, Table 10–13 and Table 10–2.
■Added introductory sentences to improve search ability.
■Removed the Conclusion section.
■Minor text edits.
April 2009 2.2 ■Updated Table 10–2.
March 2009 2.1
■Updated Table 10–1, Table 10–2, and Table 10–9.
■Removed “Referenced Documents” section.
November 2008 2.0
■Updated “Fast Active Serial Configuration (Serial Configuration Devices)” and “JTAG
Configuration” sections.
■Updated Figure 10–4, Figure 10–5, Figure 10–6, and Figure 10–13.
■Updated Table 10–2 and Table 10–13.
May 2008 1.0 Initial release.
Table 10–22. Document Revision History (Part 2 of 2)
Date Version Changes
SIV51011-3.2
© 2011 Altera Corporation. All rights reserved. ALTERA, ARRIA, CYCLONE, HARDCOPY, MAX, MEGACORE, NIOS, QUARTUS and STRATIX words and logos
are trademarks of Altera Corporation and registered in the U.S. Patent and Trademark Office and in other countries. All other words and logos identified as
trademarks or service marks are the property of their respective holders as described at www.altera.com/common/legal.html. Altera warrants performance of its
semiconductor products to current specifications in accordance with Altera's standard warranty, but reserves the right to make changes to any products and
services at any time without notice. Altera assumes no responsibility or liability arising out of the application or use of any information, product, or service
described herein except as expressly agreed to in writing by Altera. Altera customers are advised to obtain the latest version of device specifications before relying
on any published information and before placing orders for products or services.
Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
February 2011
Feedback Subscribe
ISO
9001:2008
Registered
11. SEU Mitigation in Stratix IV Devices
This chapter describes how to use the error detection cyclical redundancy check
(CRC) feature when a Stratix®IV device is in user mode and recovers from CRC
errors. The purpose of the error detection CRC feature in the Stratix IV device is to
detect a flip in any of the configuration random access memory (CRAM) bits in
Stratix IV devices due to a soft error. With the error detection circuitry, you can
continuously verify the integrity of the configuration CRAM bits.
In critical applications such as avionics, telecommunications, system control, and
military applications, it is important to be able to do the following:
■Confirm that the configuration data stored in a Stratix IV device is correct
■Alert the system to the occurrence of a configuration error
1The error detection feature is enhanced in the Stratix IV device family. Similar to
Stratix III devices, the error detection and recovery time for single-event upset (SEU)
in Stratix IV devices is reduced when compared with Stratix II devices.
fFor more information about test methodology for enhanced error detection in
Stratix IV devices, refer to AN 539: Test Methodology of Error Detection and Recovery
using CRC in Altera FPGA Devices.
Dedicated circuitry is built into Stratix IV devices and consists of a CRC error
detection feature that optionally checks for SEUs continuously and automatically.
1For Stratix IV devices, the error detection CRC feature is provided in the Quartus®II
software version 8.0 and onwards.
Using error detection CRC for the Stratix IV device family has no impact on fitting or
performance of your device.
This chapter contains the following sections:
■“Error Detection Fundamentals” on page 11–2
■“Configuration Error Detection” on page 11–2
■“User Mode Error Detection” on page 11–2
■“Error Detection Pin Description” on page 11–5
■“Error Detection Block” on page 11–6
■“Error Detection Timing” on page 11–8
■“Recovering From CRC Errors” on page 11–11
February 2011
SIV51011-3.2
11–2 Chapter 11: SEU Mitigation in Stratix IV Devices
Error Detection Fundamentals
Stratix IV Device Handbook February 2011 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Error Detection Fundamentals
Error detection determines whether the data received is corrupted during
transmission. To accomplish this, the transmitter uses a function to calculate a
checksum value for the data and appends the checksum to the original data frame.
The receiver uses the same calculation methodology to generate a checksum for the
received data frame and compares the received checksum to the transmitted
checksum. If the two checksum values are equal, the received data frame is correct
and no data corruption occurred during transmission or storage.
The error detection CRC feature uses the same concept. When Stratix IV devices are
configured successfully and are in user mode, the error detection CRC feature ensures
the integrity of the configuration data.
1There are two CRC error checks. One CRC error check always runs during
configuration and a second optional CRC error check runs in the background in user
mode. Both CRC error checks use the same CRC polynomial but different error
detection implementations. For more information, refer to the “Configuration Error
Detection” and “User Mode Error Detection” sections.
Configuration Error Detection
In configuration mode, a frame-based CRC is stored within the configuration data
and contains the CRC value for each data frame.
During configuration, the Stratix IV device calculates the CRC value based on the
frame of data that is received and compares it against the frame CRC value in the data
stream. Configuration continues until either the device detects an error or
configuration is completed.
In Stratix IV devices, the CRC value is calculated during the configuration stage. A
parallel CRC engine generates 16 CRC check bits per frame and then stores them in
CRAM. The CRAM chain used for storing the CRC check bits is 16 bits wide and its
length is equal to the number of frames in the device.
User Mode Error Detection
Stratix IV devices have built-in error detection circuitry to detect data corruption by
soft errors in the CRAM cells. This feature allows all CRAM contents to be read and
verified to match a configuration-computed CRC value. Soft errors are changes in a
CRAM bit state due to an ionizing particle.
The error detection capability continuously computes the CRC of the configured
CRAM bits and compares it with the pre-calculated CRC. If the CRCs match, there is
no error in the current configuration CRAM bits. The process of error detection
continues until the device is reset (by setting
nCONFIG
low).
If you enable the CRC error detection option in the Quartus II software, after the
device transitions into user mode, the error detection process is enabled. The internal
100 MHz configuration oscillator is divided down by a factor of two to 256 (at powers
of two) to be used as the clock source during the error detection process. You must set
the clock divide factor in the Quartus II software.
Chapter 11: SEU Mitigation in Stratix IV Devices 11–3
User Mode Error Detection
February 2011 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
A single 16-bit CRC calculation is done on a per-frame basis. After it has finished the
CRC calculation for a frame, the resulting 16-bit signature is
hex 0000
if there are no
CRAM bit errors detected in a frame by the error detection circuitry and the output
signal
CRC_ERROR
is
0
. If a CRAM bit error is detected by the circuitry within a frame in
the device, the resulting signature is non-zero. This causes the CRC engine to start
searching for the error bit location.
Error detection in Stratix IV devices calculates CRC check bits for each frame and
pulls the
CRC_ERROR
pin high when it detects bit errors in the chip. Within a frame, it
can detect all single-bit, double-bit, and three-bit errors. The probability of more than
three CRAM bits being flipped by an SEU event is very low. In general, for all error
patterns the probability of detection is 99.998%.
The CRC engine reports the bit location and determines the type of error for all
single-bit errors and over 99.641% of double-adjacent errors. The probability of other
error patterns is very low and report of the location of bit flips is not guaranteed by
the CRC engine.
You can also read-out the error bit location through the JTAG and the core interface.
Shift these bits out through either the
SHIFT_EDERROR_REG
JTAG instruction or the core
interface before the CRC detects the next error in another frame. If the next frame also
has an error, you must shift these bits out within the amount of time of one frame CRC
verification. You can choose to extend this time interval by slowing down the error
detection clock frequency, but this slows down the error recovery time for the SEU
event. For the minimum update interval for Stratix IV devices, refer to Table 11–6 on
page 11–9. If these bits are not shifted out before the next error location is found, the
previous error location and error message is overwritten by the new information. The
CRC circuit continues to run, and if an error is detected, you must decide whether to
complete a reconfiguration or to ignore the CRC error.
The error detection logic continues to calculate the
CRC_ERROR
and 16-bit signatures for
the next frame of data regardless if any error has occurred in the current frame or not.
You need to monitor these signals and take the appropriate actions if a soft error
occurs.
The error detection circuitry in Stratix IV devices uses a 16-bit CRC-ANSI standard
(16-bit polynomial) as the CRC generator.
The computed 16-bit CRC signature for each frame is stored in the registers within the
core. The total storage register size is 16 (the number of bits per frame) × the number
of frames.
The Stratix IV device error detection feature does not check memory blocks and I/O
buffers. Thus, the
CRC_ERROR
signal might stay solid high or low depending on the
error status of the previously checked CRAM frame. The I/O buffers are not verified
during error detection because these bits use flipflops as storage elements that are
more resistant to soft errors when compared with CRAM cells. The support parity bits
of MLAB, M9K, and M144K are used to check the contents of the memory blocks for
any errors. The M144K TriMatrix memory block has a built-in error correction code
block that checks and corrects the errors in the block.
fFor more information, refer to the TriMatrix Embedded Memory Blocks in Stratix IV
Devices chapter.
11–4 Chapter 11: SEU Mitigation in Stratix IV Devices
User Mode Error Detection
Stratix IV Device Handbook February 2011 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
A JTAG instruction,
EDERROR_INJECT
, is provided to test the capability of the error
detection block. This instruction is able to change the content of the 21-bit JTAG fault
injection register that is used for error injection in Stratix IV devices, enabling the
testing of the error detection block.
1You can only execute the
EDERROR_INJECT
JTAG instruction when the device is in user
mode.
Table 11–1 lists the description of the
EDERROR_INJECT
JTAG instruction.
You can create a Jam™ file (.jam) to automate the testing and verification process.
This allows you to verify the CRC functionality in-system, on-the-fly, without having
to reconfigure the device. You can then switch to the CRC circuit to check for real
errors induced by an SEU.
You can introduce a single-error or double-errors adjacent to each other to the
configuration memory. This provides an extra way to facilitate design verification and
system fault tolerance characterization. Use the JTAG fault injection register with the
EDERROR_INJECT
instruction to flip the readback bits. The Stratix IV device is then
forced into error test mode.
The content of the JTAG fault injection register is not loaded into the fault injection
register during the processing of the last and first frame. It is only loaded at the end of
this period.
1You can only introduce error injection in the first data frame, but you can monitor the
error information at any time. For more information about the JTAG fault injection
register and fault injection register, refer to “Error Detection Registers” on page 11–7.
Table 11–2 lists how the fault injection register is implemented and describes error
injection.
Table 11–1. EDERROR_INJECT JTAG Instruction
JTAG Instruction Instruction Code Description
EDERROR_INJECT
00 0001 0101
This instruction controls the 21-bit JTAG fault
injection register, which is used for error
injection.
Table 11–2. Fault Injection Register
Bit Bit[20..19] Bit[18..8] Bit[7..0]
Description Error Type Byte Location of
the Injected Error Error Byte Value
Content
Error Type (1)
Error injection type Depicts the location
of the injected error
in the first data
frame.
Depicts the location
of the bit error and
corresponds to the
error injection type
selection.
Bit[20] Bit[19]
0 1 Single-byte error injection
1 0 Double-adjacent byte error injection
0 0 No error injection
Note to Table 11–2:
(1)
Bit[20]
and
Bit[19]
cannot both be set to 1 as this is not a valid selection. The error detection circuitry decodes this as no error injection.
Chapter 11: SEU Mitigation in Stratix IV Devices 11–5
Error Detection Pin Description
February 2011 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
1After the test completes, Altera recommends reconfiguring the device.
Automated Single-Event Upset Detection
Stratix IV devices offer on-chip circuitry for automated checking of SEU detection.
Some applications that require the device to operate error-free in high-neutron flux
environments require periodic checks to ensure continued data integrity. The error
detection CRC feature ensures data reliability and is one of the best options for
mitigating SEU.
You can implement the error detection CRC feature with existing circuitry in
Stratix IV devices, eliminating the need for external logic. The
CRC_ERROR
pin reports a
soft error when the configuration CRAM data is corrupted. You must decide whether
to reconfigure the device or to ignore the error.
Error Detection Pin Description
Depending on the type of error detection feature you choose, you must use different
error detection pins to monitor the data during user mode.
CRC_ERROR Pin
Table 11–3 describes the
CRC_ERROR
pin.
1The WYSIWYG function performs optimization on the Verilog Quartus Mapping
(VQM) netlist within the Quartus II software.
fFor more information about the
stratixiv_crcblock
WYSIWYG function, refer to the
AN 539: Test Methodology of Error Detection and Recovery using CRC in Altera FPGA
Devices.
fFor more information about the
CRC_ERROR
pin for Stratix IV devices, refer to Device
Pin-Outs on the Altera website.
Table 11–3. CRC_ERROR Pin Description
Pin Name Pin Type Description
CRC_ERROR
I/O and
open-drain
Active-high signal indicates that the error detection circuit has detected errors in the
configuration CRAM bits. This pin is optional and is used when the error detection CRC
circuit is enabled. When the error detection CRC circuit is disabled, it is a user I/O pin.
To use the
CRC_ERROR
pin, you can either tie this pin to VCCPGM through a 10k resistor or,
depending on the input voltage specification of the system receiving the signal, you can tie
this pin to a different pull-up voltage.
11–6 Chapter 11: SEU Mitigation in Stratix IV Devices
Error Detection Block
Stratix IV Device Handbook February 2011 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Error Detection Block
You can enable the Stratix IV device error detection block in the Quartus II software
(refer to “Software Support” on page 11–10). This block contains the logic necessary to
calculate the 16-bit CRC signature for the configuration CRAM bits in the device.
The CRC circuit continues running even if an error occurs. When a soft error occurs,
the device sets the
CRC_ERROR
pin high. Two types of CRC detection checks the
configuration bits:
■CRAM error checking ability (16-bit CRC), which occurs during user mode to be
used by the
CRC_ERROR
pin.
■For each frame of data, the pre-calculated 16-bit CRC enters the CRC circuit at
the end of the frame data and determines whether there is an error or not.
■If an error occurs, the search engine starts to find the location of the error.
■The error messages are shifted out through the JTAG instruction or core
interface logics while the error detection block continues running.
■The JTAG interface reads out the 16-bit CRC result for the first frame and also
shifts the 16-bit CRC bits to the 16-bit CRC storage registers for test purposes.
■Single error, double errors, or double-errors adjacent to each other are
deliberately introduced to configuration memory for testing and design
verification.
■16-bit CRC that is embedded in every configuration data frame.
■During configuration, after a frame of data is loaded into the Stratix IV device,
the pre-computed CRC is shifted into the CRC circuitry.
■At the same time, the CRC value for the data frame shifted-in is calculated. If
the pre-computed CRC and calculated CRC values do not match,
nSTATUS
is set
low. Every data frame has a 16-bit CRC; therefore, there are many 16-bit CRC
values for the whole configuration bitstream. Every device has different
lengths of configuration data frame.
1The “Error Detection Block” section describes the 16-bit CRC only when the device is
in user mode.
Chapter 11: SEU Mitigation in Stratix IV Devices 11–7
Error Detection Block
February 2011 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
Error Detection Registers
There is one set of 16-bit registers in the error detection circuitry that stores the
computed CRC signature. A non-zero value on the syndrome register causes the
CRC_ERROR
pin to be set high.
Figure 11–1 shows the error detection circuitry, syndrome registers, and error injection
block.
Table 11–4 lists the registers shown in Figure 11–1.
Figure 11–1. Error Detection Block Diagram
Error Detection
State Machine
Fault Injection
Register
JTAG Fault
Injection Register
Error Injection Block
Control Signals
16-Bit CRC
Calculation and Error
Search Engine
Readback bit
stream with
expected CRC
included
Syndrome
Register
8
16
CRC_ERROR
JTAG Update
Register
User Update
Register
Error Message
Register
46
30
JTAG Shift
Register
User Shift
Register
General Routing
JTAG TDO
Table 11–4. Error Detection Registers (Part 1 of 2)
Register Description
Syndrome Register This register contains the CRC signature of the current frame through the error detection
verification cycle. The
CRC_ERROR
signal is derived from the contents of this register.
Error Message
Register
This 46-bit register contains information on the error type, location of the error, and the actual
syndrome. The types of errors and location reported are single- and double-adjacent bit errors.
The location bits for other types of errors are not identified by the error message register. The
content of the register can be shifted out through the
SHIFT_EDERROR_REG
JTAG instruction or to
the core through the core interface.
11–8 Chapter 11: SEU Mitigation in Stratix IV Devices
Error Detection Timing
Stratix IV Device Handbook February 2011 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Error Detection Timing
When you enable the CRC feature through the Quartus II software, the device
automatically activates the CRC process after entering user mode, after configuration,
and after initialization is complete.
If an error is detected within a frame,
CRC_ERROR
is driven high at the end of the error
location search, after the error message register is updated. At the end of this cycle,
the
CRC_ERROR
pin is pulled low for a minimum of 32 clock cycles. If the next frame
contains an error,
CRC_ERROR
is driven high again after the error message register is
overwritten by the new value. You can start to unload the error message on each
rising edge of the
CRC_ERROR
pin. Error detection runs until the device is reset.
The error detection circuitry runs off an internal configuration oscillator with a divisor
that sets the maximum frequency. Table 11–5 lists the minimum and maximum error
detection frequencies based on the best performance of the internal configuration
oscillator.
JTAG Update Register
This register is automatically updated with the contents of the error message register one cycle
after the 46-bit register content is validated. It includes a clock enable that must be asserted prior
to being sampled into the JTAG shift register. This requirement ensures that the JTAG update
register is not being written into by the contents of the error message register at the same time
that the JTAG shift register is reading its contents.
User Update Register
This register is automatically updated with the contents of the Error Message Register, one cycle
after the 46-bit register content is validated. It includes a clock enable that must be asserted prior
to being sampled into the User Shift Register. This requirement ensures that the User Update
Register is not being written into by the contents of the Error Message Register at exactly the
same time that the User Shift Register is reading its contents.
JTAG Shift Register This register is accessible by the JTAG interface and allows the contents of the JTAG Update
Register to be sampled and read by the JTAG instruction
SHIFT_EDERROR_REG
.
User Shift Register This register is accessible by the core logic and allows the contents of the User Update Register to
be sampled and read by user logic.
JTAG Fault Injection
Register
This 21-bit register is fully controlled by the JTAG instruction
EDERROR_INJECT
. This register
holds the information of the error injection that you want in the bitstream.
Fault Injection Register The content of the JTAG Fault Injection Register is loaded into this 21-bit register when it is being
updated.
Table 11–4. Error Detection Registers (Part 2 of 2)
Register Description
Table 11–5. Minimum and Maximum Error Detection Frequencies
Device Type Error Detection
Frequency
Maximum Error
Detection Frequency
Minimum Error Detection
Frequency Valid Divisors (n)
Stratix IV 100 MHz / 2n50 MHz 390 kHz 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8
Chapter 11: SEU Mitigation in Stratix IV Devices 11–9
Error Detection Timing
February 2011 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
You can set a lower clock frequency by specifying a division factor in the Quartus II
software (refer to “Software Support” on page 11–10). The divisor is a power of two,
in which n is between 1 and 8. The divisor ranges from 2 through 256. Refer to
Equation 11–1.
1The error detection frequency reflects the frequency of the error detection process for
a frame because the CRC calculation in the Stratix IV device is done on a per-frame
basis.
You must monitor the error message to avoid missing information in the error
message register. The error message register is updated whenever an error occurs. The
minimum interval time between each update for the error message register depends
on the device and the error detection clock frequency.
Table 11–6 lists the estimated minimum interval time between each update for the
error message register for Stratix IV devices.
CRC calculation time for the error detection circuitry to check from the first until the
last frame depends on the device and the error detection clock frequency.
Equation 11–1.
error detection frequency 100 MHz
2n
------------------------
=
Table 11–6. Minimum Update Interval for Error Message Register (1)
Device Timing Interval (s)
EP4SGX70 13.8
EP4SGX110 13.8
EP4SGX180 19.8
EP4SGX230 19.8
EP4SGX290 21.8
EP4SGX360 21.8
EP4SGX530 26.8
EP4SE230 19.8
EP4SE360 21.8
EP4SE530 26.8
EP4SE820 33.8
EP4S40G2 19.8
EP4S40G5 26.8
EP4S100G2 19.8
EP4S100G3 26.8
EP4S100G4 26.8
EP4S100G5 26.8
Note to Table 11–6:
(1) These timing numbers are preliminary.
11–10 Chapter 11: SEU Mitigation in Stratix IV Devices
Error Detection Timing
Stratix IV Device Handbook February 2011 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Table 11–7 lists the estimated time for each CRC calculation with minimum and
maximum clock frequencies for Stratix IV devices. The minimum CRC calculation
time is calculated by using the maximum error detection frequency with a divisor
factor of one, and the maximum CRC calculation time is calculated by using the
minimum error detection frequency with a divisor factor of eight.
Software Support
The Quartus II software version 8.0 and onwards supports the error detection CRC
feature for Stratix IV devices. Enabling this feature generates the
CRC_ERROR
output to
the optional dual purpose
CRC_ERROR
pin.
The error detection CRC feature is controlled by the Device and Pin Options dialog
box in the Quartus II software.
To enable the error detection feature using CRC, follow these steps:
1. Open the Quartus II software and load a project using a Stratix IV device.
2. On the Assignments menu, click Settings. The Settings dialog box is shown.
3. In the Category list, select Device. The Device page is shown.
4. Click Device and Pin Options. The Device and Pin Options dialog box is shown
(refer to Figure 11–2).
Table 11–7. CRC Calculation Time (1)
Device Minimum Time (ms) Maximum Time (s)
EP4SGX70 111 30.90
EP4SGX110 111 30.90
EP4SGX180 225 62.44
EP4SGX230 225 62.44
EP4SGX290 296 82.05
EP4SGX360 296 82.05
EP4SGX530 398 110.38
EP4SE230 225 62.44
EP4SE360 296 82.05
EP4SE530 398 110.38
EP4SE820 577 160.00
EP4S40G2 225 62.44
EP4S40G5 398 110.38
EP4S100G2 225 62.44
EP4S100G3 398 110.38
EP4S100G4 398 110.38
EP4S100G5 398 110.38
Note to Table 11–7:
(1) These timing numbers are preliminary.
Chapter 11: SEU Mitigation in Stratix IV Devices 11–11
Recovering From CRC Errors
February 2011 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
5. In the Device and Pin Options dialog box, click the Error Detection CRC tab.
6. Turn on Enable error detection CRC (Figure 11–2).
7. In the Divide error check frequency by pull-down list, enter a valid divisor as
listed in Table 11–5 on page 11–8.
1The divide value divides the frequency of the configuration oscillator output clock
that clocks the CRC circuitry.
8. Click OK.
Recovering From CRC Errors
The system that the Stratix IV device resides in must control device reconfiguration.
After detecting an error on the
CRC_ERROR
pin, strobing the
nCONFIG
signal low directs
the system to perform the reconfiguration at a time when it is safe for the system to
reconfigure the device.
When the data bit is rewritten with the correct value by reconfiguring the device, the
device functions correctly.
While soft errors are uncommon in Altera devices, certain high-reliability applications
require a design to account for these errors.
Figure 11–2. Enabling the Error Detection CRC Feature in the Quartus II Software
11–12 Chapter 11: SEU Mitigation in Stratix IV Devices
Recovering From CRC Errors
Stratix IV Device Handbook February 2011 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Document Revision History
Table 11–8 lists the revision history for this chapter.
Table 11–8. Document Revision History
Date Version Changes
February 2011 3.2
■Applied new template.
■Minor Text edits.
March 2010 3.1
■Updated Table 11–3 and Table 11–6.
■Minor text edits.
November 2009 3.0
■Updated Table 11–3, Table 11–5, Table 11–6, and Table 11–7.
■Updated the “CRC_ERROR Pin” section.
■Minor text edits.
June 2009 2.3
■Added an introductory paragraph to increase search ability.
■Removed the Conclusion section.
■Minor text edits.
April 2009 2.2 ■Updated Table 11–6 and Table 11–7.
March 2009 2.1
■Updated “Error Detection Timing” section.
■Updated Table 11–6.
■Added Table 11–7.
■Removed “Critical Error Detection”, “Critical Error Pin”, and “Referenced Documents”
sections.
November 2008 2.0 Minor text edits.
May 2008 1.0 Initial release.
SIV51012-3.2
© 2011 Altera Corporation. All rights reserved. ALTERA, ARRIA, CYCLONE, HARDCOPY, MAX, MEGACORE, NIOS, QUARTUS and STRATIX words and logos
are trademarks of Altera Corporation and registered in the U.S. Patent and Trademark Office and in other countries. All other words and logos identified as
trademarks or service marks are the property of their respective holders as described at www.altera.com/common/legal.html. Altera warrants performance of its
semiconductor products to current specifications in accordance with Altera's standard warranty, but reserves the right to make changes to any products and
services at any time without notice. Altera assumes no responsibility or liability arising out of the application or use of any information, product, or service
described herein except as expressly agreed to in writing by Altera. Altera customers are advised to obtain the latest version of device specifications before relying
on any published information and before placing orders for products or services.
Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
February 2011
Feedback Subscribe
ISO
9001:2008
Registered
12. JTAG Boundary-Scan Testing in
Stratix IV Devices
The IEEE Std. 1149.1 boundary-scan test (BST) circuitry available in Stratix®IV
devices provides a cost-effective and efficient way to test systems that contain devices
with tight lead spacing. Circuit boards with Altera and other IEEE Std.
1149.1-compliant devices can use
EXTEST
,
SAMPLE/PRELOAD
, and
BYPASS
modes to
create serial patterns that internally test the pin connections between devices and
check device operation.
This chapter describes how to use the IEEE Std. 1149.1 BST circuitry in Stratix IV
devices. The features are similar to Stratix III devices, unless stated otherwise in this
chapter.
This chapter contains the following sections:
■“BST Architecture”
■“BST Operation Control” on page 12–2
■“I/O Voltage Support in a JTAG Chain” on page 12–4
■“BST Circuitry” on page 12–4
■“BSDL Support” on page 12–4
BST Architecture
A device operating in IEEE Std. 1149.1 BST mode uses four required pins,
TDI
,
TDO
,
TMS,
TCK
, and one optional pin,
TRST
. The
TCK
pin has an internal weak pull-down
resistor, while the
TDI
,
TMS
, and
TRST
pins have internal weak pull-up resistors. The
TDO
output pin and all the JTAG input pins are powered by the 2.5-V/3.0-V VCCPD
supply of I/O bank 1A. All user I/O pins are tri-stated during JTAG configuration.
fFor more information about the description and functionality of all JTAG pins,
registers used by the IEEE Std. 1149.1 BST circuitry, and the test access port (TAP)
controller, refer to the IEEE 1149.1 (JTAG) Boundary-Scan Testing in Stratix III Devices
chapter in volume 1 of the Stratix III Device Handbook.
February 2011
SIV51012-3.2
12–2 Chapter 12: JTAG Boundary-Scan Testing in Stratix IV Devices
BST Operation Control
Stratix IV Device Handbook February 2011 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
BST Operation Control
Table 12–1 lists the boundary-scan register length for Stratix IV devices.
Table 12–2 lists the
IDCODE
information for Stratix IV devices.
Table 12–1. Boundary-Scan Register Length in Stratix IV Devices
Device Boundary-Scan Register Length
EP4SGX70 1506
EP4SGX110 1506
EP4SGX180 2274
EP4SGX230 2274
EP4SGX290 (1) 2682
EP4SGX360 (1) 2682
EP4SGX530 2970
EP4SE230 2274
EP4SE360 2682
EP4SE530 2970
EP4SE820 3402
EP4S40G2 2274
EP4S40G5 2970
EP4S100G2 2274
EP4S100G3 2970
EP4S100G4 2970
EP4S100G5 2970
Note to Table 12–1:
(1) For the F1932 package of EP4SGX290 and EP4SGX360 devices, the boundary-scan register length is 2970.
Table 12–2. IDCODE Information for Stratix IV Devices (Part 1 of 2)
Device
IDCODE (32 Bits) (1)
Version (4 Bits) Part Number (16 Bits) Manufacturer Identity
(11 Bits)
LSB
(1 Bit) (2)
EP4SGX70 0000 0010 0100 0010 0000 000 0110 1110 1
EP4SGX110 0000 0010 0100 0000 0000 000 0110 1110 1
EP4SGX180 0000 0010 0100 0010 0001 000 0110 1110 1
EP4SGX230 0000 0010 0100 0000 1001 000 0110 1110 1
EP4SGX290 (3) 0000 0010 0100 0010 0010 000 0110 1110 1
EP4SGX290 (4) 0000 0010 0100 0100 0011 000 0110 1110 1
EP4SGX360 (3) 0000 0010 0100 0000 0010 000 0110 1110 1
EP4SGX360 (4) 0000 0010 0100 1000 0011 000 0110 1110 1
EP4SGX530 0000 0010 0100 0000 0011 000 0110 1110 1
EP4SE230 0000 0010 0100 0001 0001 000 0110 1110 1
EP4SE360 0000 0010 0100 0001 0010 000 0110 1110 1
Chapter 12: JTAG Boundary-Scan Testing in Stratix IV Devices 12–3
BST Operation Control
February 2011 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
1If the device is in reset state, when the
nCONFIG
or
nSTATUS
signal is low, the device
IDCODE might not be read correctly. To read the device IDCODE correctly, you must
issue the IDCODE JTAG instruction only when the
nSTATUS
signal is high.
fFor more information about the following topics, refer to the IEEE 1149.1 (JTAG)
Boundary-Scan Testing in Stratix III Devices chapter in volume 1 of the Stratix III Device
Handbook:
■JTAG instruction codes with descriptions
■TAP controller state-machine
■Timing requirements for IEEE Std. 1149.1 signals
■Instruction mode
■Mandatory JTAG instructions (
SAMPLE/PRELOAD
,
EXTEST,
and
BYPASS
)
■Optional JTAG instructions (
IDCODE
,
USERCODE
,
CLAMP,
and
HIGHZ
)
EP4SE530 0000 0010 0100 0001 0011 000 0110 1110 1
EP4SE820 0000 0010 0100 0000 0100 000 0110 1110 1
EP4S40G2 (5) 0000 0010 0100 0100 0001 000 0110 1110 1
EP4S40G5 (6) 0000 0010 0100 0010 0011 000 0110 1110 1
EP4S100G2 (5) 0000 0010 0100 0100 0001 000 0110 1110 1
EP4S100G3 0000 0010 0100 1010 0011 000 0110 1110 1
EP4S100G4 0000 0010 0100 0110 0011 000 0110 1110 1
EP4S100G5 (6) 0000 0010 0100 0010 0011 000 0110 1110 1
Notes to Table 12–2:
(1) The MSB is on the left.
(2) The LSB of the
IDCODE
is always 1.
(3) The
IDCODE
is applicable for all packages except F1932.
(4) The
IDCODE
is applicable for package F1932 only.
(5) For the ES1 device, the
IDCODE
is the same as the
IDCODE
of EP4SGX230.
(6) For the ES1 device, the
IDCODE
is the same as the
IDCODE
of EP4SGX530.
Table 12–2. IDCODE Information for Stratix IV Devices (Part 2 of 2)
Device
IDCODE (32 Bits) (1)
Version (4 Bits) Part Number (16 Bits) Manufacturer Identity
(11 Bits)
LSB
(1 Bit) (2)
12–4 Chapter 12: JTAG Boundary-Scan Testing in Stratix IV Devices
I/O Voltage Support in a JTAG Chain
Stratix IV Device Handbook February 2011 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
I/O Voltage Support in a JTAG Chain
The JTAG chain supports several devices. However, you must use caution if the chain
contains devices that have different VCCIO levels.
fFor more information, refer to the IEEE 1149.1 (JTAG) Boundary-Scan Testing in
Stratix III Devices chapter in volume 1 of the Stratix III Device Handbook.
BST Circuitry
The IEEE Std. 1149.1 BST circuitry is enabled after device power-up. You can perform
BST on Stratix IV devices before, during, and after configuration. Stratix IV devices
support
BYPASS
,
IDCODE
, and
SAMPLE
JTAG instructions during configuration without
interrupting configuration. To send all other JTAG instructions, you must interrupt
configuration using the
CONFIG_IO
JTAG instruction.
fFor more information, refer to AN 39: IEEE Std. 1149.1 (JTAG) Boundary-Scan Testing in
Altera Devices.
fFor more information about using the
CONFIG_IO
JTAG instruction for dynamic I/O
buffer configuration, considerations when performing BST for configured devices,
and JTAG pin connections to mask-out the BST circuitry, refer to the IEEE 1149.1
(JTAG) Boundary-Scan Testing in Stratix III Devices chapter in volume 1 of the Stratix III
Device Handbook.
fFor more information about using the IEEE Std.1149.1 circuitry for device
configuration, refer to the Configuration, Design Security, Remote System Upgrades in
Stratix IV Devices chapter.
fIf you must perform BST for configured devices, you must use the Quartus II software
version 8.1 and onwards to generate the design-specific boundary-scan description
language (BSDL) files. For the procedure to generate post-configured BSDL files using
the Quartus II software, refer to the BSDL Files Generation in Quartus II on the Altera
website.
BSDL Support
BSDL, a subset of VHDL, provides a syntax that allows you to describe the features of
an IEEE Std. 1149.1 BST-capable device that can be tested.
fFor more information about BSDL files for IEEE Std. 1149.1-compliant Stratix IV
devices, refer to the Stratix IV BSDL Files on the Altera website.
fBSDL files for IEEE std. 1149.1-compliant Stratix IV devices can also be generated
using the Quartus II software version 8.1 and onwards. For more information about
the procedure to generate BSDL files using the Quartus II software, refer to the BSDL
Files Generation in Quartus II on the Altera website.
Chapter 12: JTAG Boundary-Scan Testing in Stratix IV Devices 12–5
BSDL Support
February 2011 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
Document Revision History
Table 12–3 lists the revision history for this chapter.
Table 12–3. Document Revision History
Date Version Changes
February 2011 3.2
■Applied new template.
■Minor text edits.
March 2010 3.1
■Updated the hand note in the “BST Operation Control” section.
■Changed “IDCODE JTAG Instruction” to read “IDCODE” as needed.
■Minor text edits
November 2009 3.0
■Updated Table 12–1 and Table 12–2.
■Minor text edits.
June 2009 2.3
■Added an introductory paragraph to increase search ability.
■Removed the Conclusion section.
■Minor text edits.
April 2009 2.2 ■Updated Table 12–1.
March 2009 2.1
■Updated Table 12–1 and Table 12–2.
■Removed “Referenced Documents” section.
November 2008 2.0 Minor text edits.
April 2010 1.0 Initial release.
12–6 Chapter 12: JTAG Boundary-Scan Testing in Stratix IV Devices
BSDL Support
Stratix IV Device Handbook February 2011 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
SIV51013-3.2
© 2011 Altera Corporation. All rights reserved. ALTERA, ARRIA, CYCLONE, HARDCOPY, MAX, MEGACORE, NIOS, QUARTUS and STRATIX words and logos
are trademarks of Altera Corporation and registered in the U.S. Patent and Trademark Office and in other countries. All other words and logos identified as
trademarks or service marks are the property of their respective holders as described at www.altera.com/common/legal.html. Altera warrants performance of its
semiconductor products to current specifications in accordance with Altera's standard warranty, but reserves the right to make changes to any products and
services at any time without notice. Altera assumes no responsibility or liability arising out of the application or use of any information, product, or service
described herein except as expressly agreed to in writing by Altera. Altera customers are advised to obtain the latest version of device specifications before relying
on any published information and before placing orders for products or services.
Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
February 2011
Feedback Subscribe
ISO
9001:2008
Registered
13. Power Management in Stratix IV
Devices
This chapter describes power management in Stratix®IV devices. Stratix IV devices
offer programmable power technology options for low-power operation. You can use
these options, along with speed grade choices, in different permutations to give the
best power and performance combination. For thermal management, use the
Stratix IV internal temperature sensing device (TSD) with built-in analog-to-digital
converter (ADC) circuitry or external TSD with an external temperature sensor to
easily incorporate this feature in your designs. Being able to monitor the junction
temperature of the device at any time also offers the ability to control air flow to the
device and save power for the whole system.
Overview
Stratix IV FPGAs deliver a breakthrough level of system bandwidth and power
efficiency for high-end applications, allowing you to innovate without compromise.
Stratix IV devices use advanced power management techniques to enable both
density and performance increases while simultaneously reducing power dissipation.
The total power of an FPGA includes static and dynamic power.
■Static power is the power consumed by the FPGA when it is configured but no
clocks are operating.
■Dynamic power is the switching power when the device is configured and
running. You configure dynamic power with the equation shown in
Equation 13–1.
Equation 13–1 shows that frequency is design dependant. However, you can vary the
voltage to lower dynamic power consumption by the square value of the voltage
difference. Stratix IV devices minimize static and dynamic power with advanced
process optimizations and programmable power technology. These technologies
enable Stratix IV designs to optimally meet design-specific performance requirements
with the lowest possible power.
The Quartus® II software optimizes all designs with Stratix IV power technology to
ensure performance is met at the lowest power consumption. This automatic process
allows you to concentrate on the functionality of the design instead of the power
consumption of the design.
Equation 13–1. Dynamic Power Equation (1)
Note to Equation 13–1:
(1) P = power; C = load capacitance; and V = supply voltage level.
P1
2
---CV2frequency=
February 2011
SIV51013-3.2
13–2 Chapter 13: Power Management in Stratix IV Devices
Stratix IV Power Technology
Stratix IV Device Handbook February 2011 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Power consumption also affects thermal management. Stratix IV devices offer a TSD
feature that self-monitors the device junction temperature and can be used with
external circuitry for other activities, such as controlling air flow to the Stratix IV
FPGA.
This chapter contains the following sections:
■“Stratix IV Power Technology”
■“Stratix IV External Power Supply Requirements”
■“Temperature Sensing Diode”
Stratix IV Power Technology
The following sections describe Stratix IV programmable power technology.
Programmable Power Technology
Stratix IV devices offer the ability to configure portions of the core, called tiles, for
high-speed or low-power mode of operation performed by the Quartus II software
without user intervention. Setting a tile to high-speed or low-power mode is
accomplished with on-chip circuitry and does not require extra power supplies
brought into the Stratix IV device. In a design compilation, the Quartus II software
determines whether a tile must be in high-speed or low-power mode based on the
timing constraints of the design.
fFor more information about how the Quartus II software uses programmable power
technology when compiling a design, refer to AN 514: Power Optimization in Stratix IV
FPGAs.
A Stratix IV tile can consist of the following:
■Memory logic array block (MLAB)/logic array block (LAB) pairs with routing to
the pair
■MLAB/LAB pairs with routing to the pair and to adjacent digital signal processing
(DSP)/memory block routing
■TriMatrix memory blocks
■DSP blocks
All blocks and routing associated with the tile share the same setting of either
high-speed or low-power mode. By default, tiles that include DSP blocks or memory
blocks are set to high-speed mode for optimum performance. Unused DSP blocks and
memory blocks are set to low-power mode to minimize static power. Clock networks
do not support programmable power technology.
With programmable power technology, faster speed grade FPGAs may require less
power because there are fewer high-speed MLAB and LAB pairs, when compared
with slower speed grade FPGAs. The slower speed grade device may have to use
more high-speed MLAB and LAB pairs to meet performance requirements, while the
faster speed grade device can meet performance requirements with MLAB and LAB
pairs in low-power mode.
Chapter 13: Power Management in Stratix IV Devices 13–3
Stratix IV External Power Supply Requirements
February 2011 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
The Quartus II software sets unused device resources in the design to low-power
mode to reduce static and dynamic power. It also sets the following resources to
low-power mode when they are not used in the design:
■LABs and MLABs
■TriMatrix memory blocks
■DSP blocks
If a phase-locked loop (PLL) is instantiated in the design, asserting the
areset
pin
high keeps the PLL in low-power mode.
Table 13–1 lists the available Stratix IV programmable power capabilities. Speed grade
considerations can add to the permutations to give you flexibility in designing your
system.
Stratix IV External Power Supply Requirements
This section describes the different external power supplies required to power
Stratix IV devices. You can supply some of the power supply pins with the same
external power supply, provided they have the same voltage level.
fFor power supply pin connection guidelines and power regulator sharing, refer to the
Stratix IV GX and Stratix IV E Device Family Pin Connection Guidelines.
fFor each Altera recommended power supply’s operating conditions, refer to the DC
and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Table 13–1. Programmable Power Capabilities in Stratix IV Devices
Feature Programmable Power Technology
LAB Yes
Routing Yes
Memory Blocks Fixed setting (1)
DSP Blocks Fixed setting (1)
Global Clock Networks No
Note to Table 13–1:
(1) Tiles with DSP blocks and memory blocks that are used in the design are always set to high-speed mode. By
default, unused DSP blocks and memory blocks are set to low-power mode.
13–4 Chapter 13: Power Management in Stratix IV Devices
Temperature Sensing Diode
Stratix IV Device Handbook February 2011 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Temperature Sensing Diode
The Stratix IV TSD uses the characteristics of a PN junction diode to determine die
temperature. Knowing the junction temperature is crucial for thermal management.
Historically, junction temperature is calculated using ambient or case temperature,
junction-to-ambient (ja) or junction to-case (jc) thermal resistance, and device power
consumption. Stratix IV devices can either monitor its die temperature with the
internal TSD with built-in ADC circuitry or the external TSD with an external
temperature sensor. This allows you to control the air flow to the device.
You can use the Stratix IV internal TSD in two different modes of operation—
power-up mode and user mode. For power-up mode, the internal TSD reads the die’s
temperature during configuration if the ALTTEMP_SENSE megafunction is enabled
in your design. The ALTTEMP_SENSE megafunction allows temperature sensing
during device user mode by asserting the
clken
signal to the internal TSD circuitry. To
reduce device static power, disable the internal TSD with built-in ADC circuitry when
not in use.
fFor more information about using the ALTTEMP_SENSE megafunction, refer to the
Thermal Sensor (ALTTEMP_SENSE) Megafunction User Guide.
The external temperature sensor steers bias current through the Stratix IV external
TSD, which measures forward voltage and converts this reading to temperature in the
form of an 8-bit signed number (7 bits plus sign). The 8-bit output represents the
junction temperature of the Stratix IV device and can be used for intelligent power
management.
External Pin Connections
The Stratix IV external TSD requires two pins for voltage reference. Figure 13–1 shows
how to connect the external TSD with an external temperature sensor device. As an
example, external temperature sensing devices, such as MAX1619, MAX1617A,
MAX6627, and ADT 7411, can be connected to the two external TSD pins for
temperature reading.
fFor more information about the external TSD specification, refer to the DC and
Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Figure 13–1. TSD External Pin Connections in Stratix IV Devices
Stratix IV Device
TEMPDIODEP
External TSD
TEMPDIODEN
External
Temperature
Sensor
Chapter 13: Power Management in Stratix IV Devices 13–5
Temperature Sensing Diode
February 2011 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
The TSD is a very sensitive circuit that can be influenced by noise coupled from other
traces on the board and possibly within the device package itself, depending on your
device usage. The interfacing device registers’ temperature is based on millivolts
(mV) of difference, as seen at the external TSD pins. Switching the I/O near the TSD
pins can affect the temperature reading. Altera recommends taking temperature
readings during periods of inactivity in the device or use the internal TSD with
built-in ADC circuitry.
The following are board connection guidelines for the TSD external pin connections:
■The maximum trace lengths for the TEMPDIODEP/TEMPDIODEN traces must be
less than eight inches.
■Route both traces in parallel and place them close to each other with grounded
guard tracks on each side.
■Altera recommends 10-mils width and space for both traces.
■Route traces through a minimum number of vias and crossunders to minimize the
thermocouple effects.
■Ensure that the number of vias are the same on both traces.
■Ensure both traces are approximately the same length.
■Avoid coupling with toggling signals (for example, clocks and I/O) by having the
GND plane between the diode traces and the high frequency signals.
■For high-frequency noise filtering, place an external capacitor (close to the external
chip) between the TEMPDIODEP/TEMPDIODEN trace.
■For Maxim devices, use an external capacitor between 2200 pF to 3300 pF.
■Place a 0.1 uF bypass capacitor close to the external device.
■You can use internal TSD with built-in ADC circuitry and external TSD at the same
time.
■If you only use internal ADC circuitry, the external TSD pins
(TEMPDIODEP/TEMPDIODEN) can connect these pins to GND because the
external TSD pins are not used.
fFor more information about the TEMPDIODEP/TEMPDIODEN pin
connection when you are not using an external TSD, refer to the
Stratix IV GX and Stratix IV E Pin Connection Guidelines.
fFor device specification and connection guidelines, refer to the external temperature
sensor device data sheet from the device manufacturer.
13–6 Chapter 13: Power Management in Stratix IV Devices
Temperature Sensing Diode
Stratix IV Device Handbook February 2011 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Document Revision History
Table 13–2 lists the revision history for this chapter.
Table 13–2. Document Revision History
Date Version Changes
February 2011 3.2
■Applied new template.
■Minor text edits.
March 2010 3.1
■Updated the “External Pin Connections” section.
■Minor text edits.
November 2009 3.0
■Updated the “Temperature Sensing Diode” and “External Pin Connections” sections.
■Updated Equation 13–1.
■Removed Table 13-2: Stratix IV External Power Supply Pins.
■Minor text edits.
June 2009 2.2
■Updated the “External Pin Connections” section.
■Added an introductory paragraph to increase search ability.
■Removed the Conclusion section.
March 2009 2.1
■Updated “Temperature Sensing Diode” and “External Pin Connections” sections.
■Updated Figure 13–1.
■Removed “Referenced Documents” section.
November 2008 2.0 Minor text edits.
May 2008 1.0 Initial release.
January 2016 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 1
Additional Information
About this Handbook
This chapter provides additional information about the document and Altera.
How to Contact Altera
To locate the most up-to-date information about Altera products, refer to the
following table.
Typographic Conventions
The following table shows the typographic conventions this document uses.
Contact (1) Contact Method Address
Technical support Website www.altera.com/support
Technical training Website www.altera.com/training
Email custrain@altera.com
Product literature Website www.altera.com/literature
Nontechnical support (general) Email nacomp@altera.com
(software licensing) Email authorization@altera.com
Note to Table:
(1) You can also contact your local Altera sales office or sales representative.
Visual Cue Meaning
Bold Type with Initial Capital
Letters
Indicate command names, dialog box titles, dialog box options, and other GUI
labels. For example, Save As dialog box. For GUI elements, capitalization matches
the GUI.
bold type
Indicates directory names, project names, disk drive names, file names, file name
extensions, software utility names, and GUI labels. For example, \qdesigns
directory, D: drive, and chiptrip.gdf file.
Italic Type with Initial Capital Letters Indicate document titles. For example, Stratix IV Design Guidelines.
italic type
Indicates variables. For example, n + 1.
Variable names are enclosed in angle brackets (< >). For example, <file name> and
<project name>.pof file.
Initial Capital Letters Indicate keyboard keys and menu names. For example, the Delete key and the
Options menu.
“Subheading Title” Quotation marks indicate references to sections in a document and titles of
Quartus II Help topics. For example, “Typographic Conventions.”
Info–2 Additional Information
Typographic Conventions
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2016 Altera Corporation
Volume 1
Courier type
Indicates signal, port, register, bit, block, and primitive names. For example,
data1
,
tdi
, and
input
. The suffix
n
denotes an active-low signal. For example,
resetn
.
Indicates command line commands and anything that must be typed exactly as it
appears. For example,
c:\qdesigns\tutorial\chiptrip.gdf
.
Also indicates sections of an actual file, such as a Report File, references to parts of
files (for example, the AHDL keyword
SUBDESIGN
), and logic function names (for
example,
TRI
).
r An angled arrow instructs you to press the Enter key.
1., 2., 3., and
a., b., c., and so on
Numbered steps indicate a list of items when the sequence of the items is important,
such as the steps listed in a procedure.
■■■Bullets indicate a list of items when the sequence of the items is not important.
1The hand points to information that requires special attention.
h The question mark directs you to a software help system with related information.
f The feet direct you to another document or website with related information.
m The multimedia icon directs you to a related multimedia presentation.
cA caution calls attention to a condition or possible situation that can damage or
destroy the product or your work.
w A warning calls attention to a condition or possible situation that can cause you
injury.
The envelope links to the Email Subscription Management Center page of the Altera
website, where you can sign up to receive update notifications for Altera documents.
The feedback icon allows you to submit feedback to Altera about the document.
Methods for collecting feedback vary as appropriate for each document.
The social media icons allow you to inform others about Altera documents. Methods
for submitting information vary as appropriate for each medium.
Visual Cue Meaning
101 Innovation Drive
San Jose, CA 95134
www.altera.com
SIV5V2-4.7
Volume 2: Transceivers
Stratix IV Device Handbook
© 2015 Altera Corporation. All rights reserved. ALTERA, ARRIA, CYCLONE, HARDCOPY, MAX, MEGACORE, NIOS, QUARTUS and STRATIX words and logos
are trademarks of Altera Corporation and registered in the U.S. Patent and Trademark Office and in other countries. All other words and logos identified as
trademarks or service marks are the property of their respective holders as described at www.altera.com/common/legal.html. Altera warrants performance of its
semiconductor products to current specifications in accordance with Altera's standard warranty, but reserves the right to make changes to any products and
services at any time without notice. Altera assumes no responsibility or liability arising out of the application or use of any information, product, or service
described herein except as expressly agreed to in writing by Altera. Altera customers are advised to obtain the latest version of device specifications before relying
on any published information and before placing orders for products or services.
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
ISO
9001:2008
Registered
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Contents
Chapter Revision Dates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix
Section I. Transceiver Architecture
Chapter 1. Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
Transceiver Channel Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–4
Stratix IV GX Device Offerings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–4
Stratix IV GT Device Offerings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–8
Transceiver Block Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–16
Transceiver Channel Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–17
Transmitter Channel Datapath . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–19
Receiver Channel Datapath . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–40
CMU Channel Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–100
Configuring CMU Channels for Clock Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–101
Configuring CMU Channels as Transceiver Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–106
Other CMU Channel Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–109
Dynamic Reconfiguration of the CMU Channel Analog Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–110
Functional Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–110
Basic Functional Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–111
Deterministic Latency Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–122
PCIe Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–127
XAUI Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–153
GIGE Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–164
SONET/SDH Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–172
SDI Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–178
(OIF) CEI PHY Interface Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–181
Serial RapidIO Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–182
Basic (PMA Direct) Functional Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–187
Loopback Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–190
Serial Loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–190
Parallel Loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–191
Reverse Serial Loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–193
Reverse Serial Pre-CDR Loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–194
PCIe Reverse Parallel Loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–194
Auxiliary Transmit (ATX) PLL Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–195
6G ATX PLL Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–195
10G ATX PLL Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–196
Input Reference Clocks for the ATX PLL Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–198
Architecture of the ATX PLL Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–199
ATX Clock Divider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–200
The Differences Between 10G ATX PLL, 6G ATX PLL, and CMU PLL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–200
Calibration Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–201
Calibration Block Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–201
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–205
Input Signals to the Calibration Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–205
Built-In Self Test Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–207
BIST Mode Pattern Generators and Verifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–207
iv Contents
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
PRBS in Single-Width Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–208
PRBS in Double-Width Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–209
Transceiver Port Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–210
Reference Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–225
Chapter 2. Transceiver Clocking in Stratix IV Devices
Glossary of Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
Input Reference Clocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
Input Reference Clock Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3
refclk0 and refclk1 Pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–7
Inter-Transceiver Block (ITB) Clock Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–8
Dedicated CLK Input Pins on the FPGA Global Clock Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–8
Clock Output from Left and Right PLLs in the FPGA Fabric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–9
FPGA Fabric PLLs-Transceiver PLLs Cascading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–9
Example 1: Channel Configuration with a 4 Gbps Data Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–9
Dedicated Left and Right PLL Cascade Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–10
FPGA Fabric PLLs-Transceiver PLLs Cascading in the 780-Pin Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–11
FPGA Fabric PLLs-Transceiver PLLs Cascading in the 1152-Pin Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–11
FPGA Fabric PLLs-Transceiver PLLs Cascading in the 1517-Pin Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–12
FPGA Fabric PLLs-Transceiver PLLs Cascading in the 1932-Pin Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–13
FPGA Fabric PLLs-Transceiver PLLs Cascading Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–14
Example 2: Design Target—EP4SGX530NF45 Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–14
Left and Right, Left, or Right PLL in VCO Bypass Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–17
Transceiver Channel Datapath Clocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–20
Transmitter Channel Datapath Clocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–20
Transmitter Channel-to-Channel Skew Optimization for Modes Other than Basic (PMA Direct)
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–21
Transmitter Channel Datapath Clocking Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–22
Transmitter Channel Clocking Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–23
Non-Bonded Channel Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–24
Bonded Channel Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–27
Non-Bonded Basic (PMA Direct) Mode Channel Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–34
Bonded Basic (PMA Direct) ×N Mode Channel Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–36
Receiver Channel Datapath Clocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–39
Non-Bonded Channel Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–39
Bonded Channel Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–43
Basic (PMA Direct) Mode Channel Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–49
FPGA Fabric-Transceiver Interface Clocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–51
FPGA Fabric-Transmitter Interface Clocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–52
Quartus II-Selected Transmitter Phase Compensation FIFO Write Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–52
User-Selected Transmitter Phase Compensation FIFO Write Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–58
FPGA Fabric-Receiver Interface Clocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–61
Quartus II Software-Selected Receiver Phase Compensation FIFO Read Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–62
User-Selected Receiver Phase Compensation FIFO Read Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–68
Using the CMU/ATX PLL for Clocking User Logic in the FPGA Fabric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–71
Configuration Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–72
Configuration Example 1: Configuring 24 Channels in Basic (PMA Direct) ×N Mode in the
EP4S100G5F45 Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–73
Configuration Example 2: Configuring Sixteen Identical Channels Across Four Transceiver Blocks .
2–75
Configuration Example 3: Configuring Sixteen Channels Across Four Transceiver Blocks . . . . . . 2–76
Configuration Example 4: Configuring Left and Right, Left, or Right PLL in VCO Bypass Mode 2–78
Contents v
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Chapter 3. Configuring Multiple Protocols and Data Rates in Stratix IV Devices
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1
Glossary of Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–2
Creating Transceiver Channel Instances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–3
General Requirements to Combine Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–3
Transmitter Buffer Voltage (VCCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–3
Transceiver Analog Power (VCCA_L/R) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–3
Control Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–4
gxb_powerdown Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–4
reconfig_fromgxb and reconfig_togxb Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–4
Calibration Clock and Power Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–5
Sharing CMU PLLs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–5
Multiple Channels Sharing a CMU PLL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–5
Example 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–6
Example 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–9
Sharing ATX PLLs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–10
Combining Receiver Only Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–10
Combining Transmitter Channel and Receiver Channel Instances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–11
Multiple Transmitter Channel and Receiver Channel Instances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–11
Example 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–11
Combining Transceiver Instances in Multiple Transceiver Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–13
Example 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–14
Combining Transceiver Instances Using PLL Cascade Clocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–16
Combining Channels Configured in Protocol Functional Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–17
Combining Channels in Bonded Functional Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–17
Bonded ×4 Functional Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–17
Bonded x8 Functional Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–20
Combining Channels Configured in Deterministic Latency Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–24
Combining Channels Using the PCIe hard IP Block with Other Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–24
Combining Transceiver Channels in Basic (PMA Direct) Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–25
Combining Multiple Channels Configured in Basic (PMA Direct) ×1 Configurations . . . . . . . . . . 3–26
Multiple Basic (PMA Direct) ×1 Configuration Instances with One Channel per Instance . . . . 3–26
One Instance in a Basic (PMA Direct) ×1 Configuration with Multiple Transceiver Channels . 3–26
Combining Multiple Instances of Transmitter Only and Receiver Only Configurations in Basic
(PMA Direct) ×1 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–29
Combining Channels Configured in Basic (PMA Direct) ×1 with Non-Basic (PMA Direct) Modes
3–29
Basic (PMA Direct) ×N Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–33
Channel Placement in a Basic (PMA Direct) ×N Mode Instance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–33
Examples of Combining Multiple Instances of Basic (PMA Direct) ×N Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–35
Combination Requirements When You Enable Channel Reconfiguration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–42
Combination Requirements When You Enable the Use Alternate CMU PLL Option . . . . . . . . . . . 3–42
Example 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–43
Combination Requirements When You Use Multiple TX PLLs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–44
Example 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–45
Combining Transceiver Channels When You Enable the Adaptive Equalization (AEQ) Feature . . . 3–47
Example 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–48
Combination Requirements for Stratix IV Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–49
Placement Rules for Transceiver Channels at 9.9 Gbps to 11.3 Gbps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–49
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–49
Chapter 4. Reset Control and Power Down in Stratix IV Devices
User Reset and Power-Down Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–2
vi Contents
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Blocks Affected by the Reset and Power-Down Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–3
Transceiver Reset Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–4
All Supported Functional Modes Except PCIe Functional Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–6
Bonded Channel Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–6
Non-Bonded Channel Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–15
PCIe Functional Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–22
PCIe Reset Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–22
PCIe Initialization/Compliance Phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–23
PCIe Normal Phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–23
PMA Direct Drive Mode Reset Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–24
Basic (PMA Direct) Drive ×N Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–25
Transmitter Only Channel with No PLL_L/R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–25
Transmitter Only Channel with a PLL_L/R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–26
Basic (PMA Direct) Drive x1 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–31
Receiver and Transmitter Channel Set-Up—Receiver CDR in Automatic Lock Mode . . . . . . . 4–32
Receiver and Transmitter Channel Set-up—Receiver CDR in Manual Lock Mode . . . . . . . . . . 4–34
Dynamic Reconfiguration Reset Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–36
Reset Sequence when Using Dynamic Reconfiguration with the ‘data rate division in TX’ Option . . .
4–36
Reset Sequence when Using Dynamic Reconfiguration with the ‘Channel and TX PLL select/reconfig’
Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–37
Power Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–38
Simulation Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–39
Reference Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–39
Chapter 5. Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices
Glossary of Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1
Dynamic Reconfiguration Controller Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–3
Quartus II MegaWizard Plug-In Manager Interfaces to Support Dynamic Reconfiguration . . . . . . . . 5–4
ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–4
The reconfig_clk Clock Requirements for the ALTGX Instance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–4
ALTGX_RECONFIG MegaWizard Plug-In Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–5
The reconfig_clk Clock Requirements for the ALTGX_RECONFIG Instance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–5
Interfacing ALTGX and ALTGX_RECONFIG Instances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–5
Logical Channel Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–5
Total Number of Channels Option in the ALTGX_RECONFIG Instance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–10
Connecting the ALTGX and ALTGX_RECONFIG Instances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–11
Dynamic Reconfiguration Modes Implementation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–12
PMA Controls Reconfiguration Mode Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–12
Dynamically Reconfiguring PMA Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–13
Transceiver Channel Reconfiguration Mode Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–19
Memory Initialization File (.mif) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–20
Channel and CMU PLL Reconfiguration Mode Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–24
Channel Reconfiguration with Transmitter PLL Select Mode Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–48
CMU PLL Reconfiguration Mode Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–54
Central Control Unit Reconfiguration Mode Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–57
Special Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–57
Data Rate Division in Transmitter Mode Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–63
Offset Cancellation Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–67
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–67
ALTGX_RECONFIG Instance Signals Transition during Offset Cancellation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–68
EyeQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–69
Enabling the EyeQ Control Logic and the EyeQ Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–70
Connections Between the ALTGX and ALTGX_RECONFIG Instances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–70
Contents vii
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Controlling the EyeQ Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–71
Adaptive Equalization (AEQ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–75
Adaptive Equalization Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–75
Enabling the AEQ Control Logic and AEQ Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–75
Connections Between the ALTGX and ALTGX_RECONFIG Instances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–76
One Time Mode for a Single Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–78
Dynamic Reconfiguration Controller Port List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–78
Error Indication During Dynamic Reconfiguration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–90
Dynamic Reconfiguration Duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–91
PMA Controls Reconfiguration Duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–91
Offset Cancellation Duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–93
Dynamic Reconfiguration Duration for Channel and Transmitter PLL Select/Reconfig Modes . . .
5–94
Dynamic Reconfiguration (ALTGX_RECONFIG Instance) Resource Utilization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–94
Functional Simulation of the Dynamic Reconfiguration Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–95
Dynamic Reconfiguration Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–96
Example 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–96
Example 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–100
Additional Information
How to Contact Altera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Info–1
Typographic Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Info–1
viii Contents
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Chapter Revision Dates
The chapters in this document, Stratix IV Device Handbook Volume 2, were revised on
the following dates. Where chapters or groups of chapters are available separately,
part numbers are listed.
Chapter 1. Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Revised: September 2015
Part Number: SIV52001-4.7
Chapter 2. Transceiver Clocking in Stratix IV Devices
Revised: September 2012
Part Number: SIV52002-3.4
Chapter 3. Configuring Multiple Protocols and Data Rates in Stratix IV Devices
Revised: September 2012
Part Number: SIV52003-4.2
Chapter 4. Reset Control and Power Down in Stratix IV Devices
Revised: January 2014
Part Number: SIV52004-4.4
Chapter 5. Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices
Revised: January 2014
Part Number: SIV52005-3.6
xChapter Revision Dates
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Section I. Transceiver Architecture
This section provides a description of transceiver architecture and transceiver
clocking for the Stratix® IV device family. It also describes configuring for multiple
protocols and data rates, reset control and power down, and dynamic reconfiguration
for Stratix IV devices. This section includes the following chapters:
■Chapter 1, Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
■Chapter 2, Transceiver Clocking in Stratix IV Devices
■Chapter 3, Configuring Multiple Protocols and Data Rates in Stratix IV Devices
■Chapter 4, Reset Control and Power Down in Stratix IV Devices
■Chapter 5, Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices
Revision History
Refer to each chapter for its own specific revision history. For information on when
each chapter was updated, refer to the Chapter Revision Dates section, which appears
in the full handbook.
I–2 Section I: Transceiver Architecture
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
SIV52001-4.7
© 2015 Altera Corporation. All rights reserved. ALTERA, ARRIA, CYCLONE, HARDCOPY, MAX, MEGACORE, NIOS, QUARTUS and STRATIX words and logos
are trademarks of Altera Corporation and registered in the U.S. Patent and Trademark Office and in other countries. All other words and logos identified as
trademarks or service marks are the property of their respective holders as described at www.altera.com/common/legal.html. Altera warrants performance of its
semiconductor products to current specifications in accordance with Altera's standard warranty, but reserves the right to make changes to any products and
services at any time without notice. Altera assumes no responsibility or liability arising out of the application or use of any information, product, or service
described herein except as expressly agreed to in writing by Altera. Altera customers are advised to obtain the latest version of device specifications before relying
on any published information and before placing orders for products or services.
Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
September 2015
Feedback Subscribe
ISO
9001:2008
Registered
1. Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV
Devices
This chapter provides details about Stratix® IV GX and GT transceiver architecture,
transceiver channels, available modes, and a description of transmitter and receiver
channel datapaths.
fFor information about upcoming Stratix IV device features, refer to the Upcoming
Stratix IV Device Features document.
fFor information about changes to the currently published Stratix IV Device Handbook,
refer to the Addendum to the Stratix IV Device Handbook chapter.
Overview
Stratix IV FPGAs deliver a breakthrough level of system bandwidth and power
efficiency for high-end applications, allowing you to innovate without compromise
with two offerings: Stratix IV GX and Stratix IV GT.
Stratix IV GX devices are part of the Altera® 40 nm Stratix IV device family.
Stratix IV GX devices provide up to 32 full-duplex CDR-based transceivers with
physical coding sublayer (PCS) and physical medium attachment (PMA), at serial
data rates between 600 Mbps and 8.5 Gbps. Also, Stratix IV GX provides up to
16 additional full-duplex CDR-based transceivers with PMA supporting serial data
rates between 600 Mbps and 6.5 Gbps. Table 1–1 lists the Stratix IV GX serial protocols
the transceiver channels support.
To implement proprietary protocols, the transceiver channels in the Stratix IV GX
device supports the highly flexible Basic single-width (600 Mbps to 3.75 Gbps) and
Basic double-width (1 Gbps to 8.5 Gbps) functional modes.
Table 1–1. Serial Protocols Supported by the Stratix IV GX Transceiver Channels
Protocol Description
PCI Express® (PCIe) Gen 1 at 2.5 Gbps and Gen 2 at 5.0 Gbps
XAUI 3.125 Gbps to 3.75 Gbps for HiGig support
GIGE 1.25 Gbps
Serial RapidIO®1.25 Gbps, 2.5 Gbps, and 3.125 Gbps
SONET/SDH OC-12 at 622 Mbps, OC-48 at 2.488 Gbps, and
OC-96 at 4.976 Gbps
(OIF) CEI PHY Interface 4.976 Gbps to 6.375 Gbps for Interlaken support
Serial Digital Interface (SDI) HD-SDI at 1.485 Gbps and 1.4835 Gbps
3G-SDI at 2.97 Gbps and 2.967 Gbps
September 2015
SIV52001-4.7
1–2 Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Overview
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Stratix IV GT devices are also part of Altera’s 40 nm Stratix IV device family and
contain serial transceivers that support data rates between 600 Mbps and 11.3 Gbps.
Stratix IV GT devices are targeted towards implementing 40 Gbps/100 Gbps
transceiver links. Example applications include 40G/100G Ethernet and SFI-S.
Stratix IV GT devices can be broadly classified into the following:
■Stratix IV GT devices targeted to achieve 100 Gbps ingress/egress data rates—48
full duplex clock and clock data recovery (CDR)-based transceivers, 32 of which
support data rates up to 11.3 Gbps
■Stratix IV GT devices targeted to achieve 40 Gbps ingress/egress data rates—36
full duplex CDR-based transceivers, 12 of which support data rates up to
11.3 Gbps
Though optimized for 40 Gbps/100 Gbps systems, Stratix IV GT transceivers also
provide PMA and PCS support for the protocols shown in Table 1–2.
To implement proprietary protocols, the transceiver channels in the Stratix IV GT
device support the highly flexible Basic single-width (600 Mbps to 3.75 Gbps) and
Basic double-width (600 Mbps to 11.3 Gbps) functional modes.
fStratix IV GX and GT devices have PCIe hard IP, PCS, and PMA blocks. For more
information, refer to the PCI Express Compiler User Guide.
fFor more information about Stratix IV GX and GT protocols, refer to the Configuring
Multiple Protocols and Data Rates in Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Table 1–2. Serial Protocols Supported by the Stratix IV GT Transceiver Channels
Protocol Description
PCIe Gen 1 at 2.5 Gbps and Gen 2 at 5.0 Gbps
XAUI 3.125 Gbps up to HiGig at 3.75 Gbps
GIGE 1.25 Gbps
Serial RapidIO 2.5 Gbps and 3.125 Gbps
SONET/SDH OC-48 and OC-96
(OIF) CEI PHY Interface 4.976 Gbps to 6.375 Gbps
Serial Digital Interface (SDI) 3G-SDI at 2.97Gbps and 2.967 Gbps
Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices 1–3
Overview
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Figure 1–1 shows an example of the Stratix IV GX and GT transceiver architecture.
Links to the corresponding transceiver architecture descriptions are listed below. This
is an elementary diagram and does not represent an actual transceiver block.
Descriptions for the example transceiver architecture are as follows:
1. “Transceiver Block Architecture” on page 1–16
2. “Transceiver Channel Architecture” on page 1–17
3. “Transmitter Channel Datapath” on page 1–19
4. “Transmitter Local Clock Divider Block” on page 1–39
5. “Receiver Channel Datapath” on page 1–40
6. “CMU Channel Architecture” on page 1–100
7. “Loopback Modes” on page 1–190
8. “Auxiliary Transmit (ATX) PLL Block” on page 1–195
Figure 1–1. Example of a Transceiver Block
Transceiver Block
GXBL1
Transceiver Channel 3
Transceiver Channel 2
Transceiver Channel 1
Transceiver Channel 0
Transceiver Block
Transceiver Block
GXBL0
Transceiver Block
GXBR1
Transceiver Block
GXBR0
Channel 3
Channel 2
Channel 1
Channel 0
Channel 3
Channel 2
Channel 1
Channel 0
Channel 3
Channel 2
Channel 1
Channel 0
Channel 3
Channel 2
Channel 1
Channel 0
CMU1 Channel
CMU0 Channel
Central
Control
Unit (CCU)
ATX PLL Block
Local Clock Divider Block
(each Transceiver Channel)
Calibration Block
6
6
8
ATX PLL Block
8
2
2
2
Transmitter Channel Datapath
3
4
Receiver Channel Datapath
5
BIST Loopback 7
BIST 10 Loopback 7
BIST Loopback 7
BIST 10 Loopback 7
Calibration Block 9
Calibration Block Calibration Block 9
1
2
1
9
9
10
10
1–4 Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Channel Locations
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
9. “Calibration Blocks” on page 1–201
10. “Built-In Self Test Modes” on page 1–207
Transceiver Channel Locations
Stratix IV GX and GT transceivers are structured into full-duplex (Transmitter and
Receiver) four-channel groups called transceiver blocks. The total number of
transceiver channels and the location of transceiver blocks varies from device to
device.
Stratix IV GX Device Offerings
Table 1–3 lists the total number of transceiver channels and transceiver block locations
in each Stratix IV GX device member structured into full-duplex four- and six-channel
groups called transceiver blocks.
Table 1–3. Number of Transceiver Channels and Transceiver Block Locations in Stratix IV GX Devices (Part 1 of 2)
Device Member
Total Number of
Transceiver
Channels
Transceiver Channel Location
EP4SGX70DF29
EP4SGX110DF29
EP4SGX180DF29
EP4SGX230DF29
8
Eight transceiver channels located in two transceiver blocks:
■Right side—
GXBR0
and
GXBR1
Refer to Figure 1–2 on page 1–5.
EP4SGX290FH29
EP4SGX360FH29
EP4SGX110FF35
EP4SGX180FF35
EP4SGX230FF35
EP4SGX290FF35
EP4SGX360FF35
16
Eight transceiver channels located in two transceiver blocks:
■Right side—
GXBR0
and
GXBR1
■Left side—
GXBL0
and
GXBL1
Refer to Figure 1–2 on page 1–5.
EP4SGX180HF35
EP4SGX230HF35
EP4SGX290HF35
EP4SGX360HF35
24
Eight regular transceiver channels supporting data rates between 600 Mbps
and 8.5 Gbps and four clock multiplier unit (CMU) channels supporting data
rates between 600 Mbps and 6.5 Gbps located in two transceiver blocks:
■Right side—
GXBR0
and
GXBR1
■Left side—
GXBL0
and
GXBL1
Refer to Figure 1–3 on page 1–6.
Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices 1–5
Transceiver Channel Locations
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Figure 1–2 shows transceiver channel, PLL, and PCIe hard IP block locations in each
Stratix IV GX device that has 8 or 16 transceiver channels.
EP4SGX180KF40
EP4SGX230KF40
EP4SGX290KF40
EP4SGX290KF43
EP4SGX360KF40
EP4SGX360KF43
EP4SGX530KF40
36
Twelve regular transceiver channels supporting data rates between 600 Mbps
and 8.5 Gbps and six CMU channels supporting data rates between 600 Mbps
and 6.5 Gbps located in three transceiver blocks:
■Right side—
GXBR0
,
GXBR1
, and
GXBR2
■Left side—
GXBL0
,
GXBL1
, and
GXBL2
Refer to Figure 1–3 on page 1–6.
EP4SGX290NF45
EP4SGX360NF45
EP4SGX530NF45
48
Sixteen regular transceiver channels supporting data rates between 600 Mbps
and 8.5 Gbps and eight CMU channels supporting data rates between
600 Mbps and 6.5 Gbps located in four transceiver blocks:
■Right side—
GXBR0
,
GXBR1
,
GXBR2
, and
GXBR3
■Left side—
GXBL0
,
GXBL1
,
GXBL2
, and
GXBL3
Refer to Figure 1–4 on page 1–7.
Table 1–3. Number of Transceiver Channels and Transceiver Block Locations in Stratix IV GX Devices (Part 2 of 2)
Device Member
Total Number of
Transceiver
Channels
Transceiver Channel Location
Figure 1–2. Transceiver Channel, PLL, and PCIe Hard IP Block Locations with 8 and 16
Stratix IV GX Transceiver Channels
EP4SGX70DF29
EP4SGX110DF29
EP4SGX180DF29
EP4SGX230DF29
(8 transceivers)
Transceiver Block GXBL0
Channel 3
Channel 2
CMU Channel 1
CMU Channel 0
Channel 1
Channel 0
Transceiver Block GXBL1
Channel 3
Channel 2
CMU Channel 1
CMU Channel 0
Channel 1
Channel 0
EP4SGX290FH29, EP4SGX360FH29, EP4SGX110FF35, EP4SGX180FF35,
EP4SGX230FF35, EP4SGX290FF35, EP4SGX360FF35
(16 transceivers)
ATX PLL L0 (6G)
Transceiver Block GXBR0
Channel 3
Channel 2
CMU Channel 1
CMU Channel 0
Channel 1
Channel 0
Transceiver Block GXBR1
Channel 3
Channel 2
CMU Channel 1
CMU Channel 0
Channel 1
Channel 0
ATX PLL R0 (6G)
PCIe hard IP
PCIe hard IP
1–6 Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Channel Locations
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Figure 1–3 shows transceiver channel, PLL, and PCIe hard IP block locations in each
Stratix IV GX device that has 24 or 36 transceiver channels (except for the EP4SGX530
device).
Figure 1–3. Transceiver Channel, PLL, and PCIe Hard IP Block Locations with 24 or 36
Stratix IV GX Transceiver Channels (Except the EP4SGX530 Device)
Note to Figure 1–3:
(1) The 6G ATX PLL R1 and L1 blocks are not available in the EP4SGX230KF40 devices.
Transceiver Block GXBL2 Transceiver Block GXBR2
Transceiver Block GXBL1 Transceiver Block GXBR1
Transceiver Block GXBL0 Transceiver Block GXBR0
Channel 3
Channel 2
CMU Channel 1
CMU Channel 0
Channel 1
Channel 0
Channel 3
Channel 2
CMU Channel 1
CMU Channel 0
Channel 1
Channel 0
Channel 3
Channel 2
CMU Channel 1
CMU Channel 0
Channel 1
Channel 0
Channel 3
Channel 2
CMU Channel 1
CMU Channel 0
Channel 1
Channel 0
Channel 3
Channel 2
CMU Channel 1
CMU Channel 0
Channel 1
Channel 0
Channel 3
Channel 2
CMU Channel 1
CMU Channel 0
Channel 1
Channel 0
EP4SGX180KF40, EP4SGX230KF40 (1), EP4SGX290KF40, EP4SGX290KF43,
EP4SGX360KF43, EP4SGX360KF40,
(36 transceivers)
EP4SGX180HF35, EP4SGX230HF35, EP4SGX290HF35,
EP4SGX360HF35,
(24 transceivers)
ATX PLL L1 (6G) (1) ATX PLL R1 (6G) (1)
ATX PLL L0 (6G) ATX PLL R01 (6G)
PCIe hard IP
PCIe hard IP
Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices 1–7
Transceiver Channel Locations
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Figure 1–4 shows transceiver channel, PLL, and PCIe hard IP block locations in each
EP4SGX530 Stratix IV GX device that has 24 and 36 transceiver channels and the
remaining Stratix IV GX devices that have 48 transceiver channels.
Figure 1–4. Transceiver Channel, PLL, and PCIe Hard IP Block Locations with 48 Stratix IV GX
Transceiver Channels and EP4SGX530 with 24, 36, and 48 Stratix IV GX Transceiver Channels
Notes to Figure 1–4:
(1) The 6G ATX PLL R1 and L1 blocks are not available in the EP4SGX530KF40 devices.
(2) Only the EP4SGX530 device in the six transceiver block package has four PCI hard IP blocks.
Transceiver Block GXBL2 Transceiver Block GXBR2
Transceiver Block GXBL1 Transceiver Block GXBR1
Transceiver Block GXBL0 Transceiver Block GXBR0
Channel 3
Channel 2
CMU Channel 1
CMU Channel 0
Channel 1
Channel 0
Channel 3
Channel 2
CMU Channel 1
CMU Channel 0
Channel 1
Channel 0
Channel 3
Channel 2
CMU Channel 1
CMU Channel 0
Channel 1
Channel 0
Channel 3
Channel 2
CMU Channel 1
CMU Channel 0
Channel 1
Channel 0
Channel 3
Channel 2
CMU Channel 1
CMU Channel 0
Channel 1
Channel 0
Channel 3
Channel 2
CMU Channel 1
CMU Channel 0
Channel 1
Channel 0
EP4SGX530KF43,
EP4SGX530KF40
(1),
(2)
(36 transceivers)
EP4SGX530HH35
(24 transceivers)
ATX PLL L1 (6G) (1) ATX PLL R1 (6G) (1)
ATX PLL L0 (6G) ATX PLL R01 (6G)
PCIe hard IP
PCIe hard IP
Transceiver Block GXBL3 Transceiver Block GXBR3
Channel 3
Channel 2
CMU Channel 1
CMU Channel 0
Channel 1
Channel 0
Channel 3
Channel 2
CMU Channel 1
CMU Channel 0
Channel 1
Channel 0
EP4SGX290NF45, EP4SGX360NF45, EP4SGX530NF45
(48 transceivers)
PCIe hard IP
PCIe hard IP
1–8 Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Channel Locations
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Stratix IV GT Device Offerings
Table 1–4 lists the Stratix IV GT device offerings along with the number of transceiver
channels available in each device.
Table 1–5 lists the transceiver blocks in each Stratix IV GT device that support
transceiver channels up to 11.3 Gbps.
Table 1–4. Stratix IV GT Device Offerings and Transceiver Channels Available in Each Device
Transceiver
Channels
EP4S40G2F40
(4) EP4S40G5H40 EP4S100G2F40
(4) EP4S100G5H40 EP4S100G3F45,
EP4S100G4F45 EP4S100G5F45
Total
Transceiver
Channels
36 36 36 36 48 48
10G Transceiver
Channels (1) 12 12 24 24 24 32
8G Transceiver
Channels (2) 12 12 0 0 8 0
CMU Channels
(PMA-only) (3) 12 12 12 12 16 16
Notes to Table 1–4:
(1) 10G transceiver channels support data rates between 600 Mbps and 11.3 Gbps.
(2) 8G transceiver channels support data rates between 600 Mbps and 8.5 Gbps. All 10G transceiver channels can also be configured as 8G transceiver
channels. For example, the EP4S40G2F40 device has twenty-four 8G transceiver channels and the EP4S100G5F45 device has thirty-two 8G
transceiver channels.
(3) CMU channels that support data rates between 600 Mbps and 6.5 Gbps are PMA-only channels that do not have PCS circuitry. For more
information, refer to “CMU Channel Architecture” on page 1–100.
(4) F40 devices use 1517-pin flip chip packages. H40 devices use 1517-pin hybrid flip chip packages. F45 devices use 1932-pin flip chip packages.
Table 1–5. Transceiver Blocks in Stratix IV GT Devices Supporting Transceiver Channels up to
11.3 Gbps (Part 1 of 2)
Device Member Total number of Transceiver
Channels Transceiver Channel Location
EP4S40G2F40 36
12 regular transceiver channels (six 10G
and six 8G), located in three transceiver
blocks:
Left Side—4 in
GXBL2
, 2 in
GXBL1
Right Side—4 in
GXBR2
, 2 in
GXBR1
Refer to Figure 1–5 on page 1–10.
EP4S40G5H40 36
12 regular transceiver channels (six 10G
and six 8G), located in three transceiver
blocks:
Left Side—4 in
GXBL2
, 4 in
GXBL1
, 4 in
GXBL0
Right Side—4 in
GXBR2
, 4 in
GXBR1
, 4 in
GXBR0
Refer to Figure 1–6 on page 1–11.
Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices 1–9
Transceiver Channel Locations
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
EP4S100G2F40 36
12 regular transceiver channels, capable of
10G each, located in three transceiver
blocks:
Left Side—4 in
GXBL2
, 4 in
GXBL1
, 4 in
GXBL0
Right Side—4 in
GXBR2
, 4 in
GXBR1
, 4 in
GXBR0
Refer to Figure 1–7 on page 1–12.
EP4S100G5H40 36
12 regular transceiver channels, capable of
10G each, located in three transceiver
blocks:
Left Side—4 in
GXBL2
, 4 in
GXBL1
, 4 in
GXBL0
Right Side—4 in
GXBR2
, 4 in
GXBR1
, 4 in
GXBR0
Refer to Figure 1–8 on page 1–13.
EP4S100G3F45
EP4S100G4F45 48
16 regular transceiver channels (twelve
10G and four 8G) located in four
transceiver blocks:
Left Side—4 in
GXBL3
, 4 in
GXBL2
, 4 in
GXBL1
, 4 in
GXBL0
(8G)
Right Side—4 in
GXBR3
, 4 in
GXBR2
, 4 in
GXBR1
, 4 in
GXBR0
(8G)
Refer to Figure 1–9 on page 1–14.
EP4S100G5F45 48
16 regular transceiver channels, all
capable of 10G each, located in four
transceiver blocks:
Left Side—4 in
GXBL3
, 4 in
GXBL2
, 4 in
GXBL1
, 4 in
GXBL0
Right Side—4 in
GXBR3
, 4 in
GXBR2
, 4 in
GXBR1
, 4 in
GXBR0
Refer to Figure 1–10 on page 1–15.
Table 1–5. Transceiver Blocks in Stratix IV GT Devices Supporting Transceiver Channels up to
11.3 Gbps (Part 2 of 2)
Device Member Total number of Transceiver
Channels Transceiver Channel Location
1–10 Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Channel Locations
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Figure 1–5 shows the transceiver channel, PLL, and PCIe hard IP block locations for
the EP4S40G2F40 Stratix IV GT devices.
Figure 1–5. Transceiver Channel, PLL, and PCIe Hard IP Block Locations in EP4S40G2F40
Stratix IV GT Devices (1), (2)
Notes to Figure 1–5:
(1) EP4S40G2F40ES1 devices do not have 10G auxiliary transmit (ATX) PLL blocks. Use the CMU PLL to generate
transceiver clocks for channels configured at 11.3 Gbps.
(2) If you are using the PCIe hard IP block, the EP4S40G2F40 device is not able to migrate to the EP4S40G5H40 device.
ATX PLL (10G)
ATX PLL (6G)
ATX PLL (10G)
ATX PLL (6G)
Transceiver Block GXBR0
Transceiver Block GXBR1
Transceiver Block GXBR2
Transceiver Block GXBL0
Transceiver Block GXBL1
Transceiver Block GXBL2
10G Channel 3
10G Channel 2
CMU Channel 1
CMU Channel 0
10G Channel 1
10G Channel 0
10G Channel 3
10G Channel 2
CMU Channel 1
CMU Channel 0
8G Channel 1
8G Channel 0
8G Channel 3
8G Channel 2
CMU Channel 1
CMU Channel 0
8G Channel 1
8G Channel 0
10G Channel 3
10G Channel 2
CMU Channel 1
CMU Channel 0
10G Channel 1
10G Channel 0
10G Channel 3
10G Channel 2
CMU Channel 1
CMU Channel 0
8G Channel 1
8G Channel 0
8G Channel 3
8G Channel 2
CMU Channel 1
CMU Channel 0
8G Channel 1
8G Channel 0
EP4S40G2F40
PCIe hard IP
PCIe hard IP
Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices 1–11
Transceiver Channel Locations
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Figure 1–6 shows the transceiver channel, PLL, and PCIe hard IP block locations for
the EP4S40G5H40 Stratix IV GT devices.
Figure 1–6. Transceiver Channel, PLL, and PCIe Hard IP Block Locations in EP4S40G5H40
Stratix IV GT Devices (1)
Note to Figure 1–6:
(1) If you are using the PCIe hard IP block, the EP4S40G2F40 device is not able to migrate to the EP4S40G5H40 device.
ATX PLL (10G)
ATX PLL (6G)
ATX PLL (10G)
ATX PLL (6G)
Transceiver Block GXBR0
Transceiver Block GXBR1
Transceiver Block GXBR2
Transceiver Block GXBL0
Transceiver Block GXBL1
Transceiver Block GXBL2
10G Channel 3
10G Channel 2
CMU Channel 1
CMU Channel 0
10G Channel 1
10G Channel 0
10G Channel 3
10G Channel 2
CMU Channel 1
CMU Channel 0
8G Channel 1
8G Channel 0
8G Channel 3
8G Channel 2
CMU Channel 1
CMU Channel 0
8G Channel 1
8G Channel 0
10G Channel 3
10G Channel 2
CMU Channel 1
CMU Channel 0
10G Channel 1
10G Channel 0
10G Channel 3
10G Channel 2
CMU Channel 1
CMU Channel 0
8G Channel 1
8G Channel 0
8G Channel 3
8G Channel 2
CMU Channel 1
CMU Channel 0
8G Channel 1
8G Channel 0
EP4S40G5H40
PCIe hard IP
PCIe hard IP
1–12 Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Channel Locations
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Figure 1–7 shows the transceiver channel, PLL, and PCIe hard IP block locations in
EP4S100G2F40 Stratix IV GT devices.
Figure 1–7. Transceiver Channel, PLL, and PCIe Hard IP Block Locations in EP4S100G2F40
Stratix IV GT Devices
Notes to Figure 1–7:
(1) EP4S100G2F40ES1 devices do not have 10G ATX PLL blocks. Use the CMU PLL to generate transceiver clocks for
channels configured at 11.3 Gbps.
(2) If you are using the PCIe hard IP block, the EP4S100G2F40 device is not able to migrate to the EP4S100G5H40
device.
ATX PLL (10G)
ATX PLL (6G)
ATX PLL (10G)
ATX PLL (6G)
Transceiver Block QR0
Transceiver Block QR1
Transceiver Block QR2
Transceiver Block QL0
Transceiver Block QL1
Transceiver Block QL2
10G Channel 3
10G Channel 2
CMU Channel 1
CMU Channel 0
10G Channel 1
10G Channel 0
10G Channel 3
10G Channel 2
CMU Channel 1
CMU Channel 0
10G Channel 1
10G Channel 0
10G Channel 3
10G Channel 2
CMU Channel 1
CMU Channel 0
10G Channel 1
10G Channel 0
10G Channel 3
10G Channel 2
CMU Channel 1
CMU Channel 0
10G Channel 1
10G Channel 0
10G Channel 3
10G Channel 2
CMU Channel 1
CMU Channel 0
10G Channel 1
10G Channel 0
10G Channel 3
10G Channel 2
CMU Channel 1
CMU Channel 0
10G Channel 1
10G Channel 0
EP4S100G2F40
PCIe hard IP
PCIe hard IP
Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices 1–13
Transceiver Channel Locations
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Figure 1–8 shows the transceiver channel, PLL, and PCIe hard IP block locations for
the EP4S100G5H40 Stratix IV GT devices.
Figure 1–8. Transceiver Channel, PLL, and Hard IP Block Locations in EP4S100G5H40
Stratix IV GT Devices
Note to Figure 1–8:
(1) If you are using the PCIe hard IP block, the EP4S100G2F40 device is not able to migrate to the EP4S100G5H40
device.
ATX PLL (10G)
ATX PLL (6G)
ATX PLL (10G)
ATX PLL (6G)
Transceiver Block QR0
Transceiver Block QR1
Transceiver Block QR2
Transceiver Block QL0
Transceiver Block QL1
Transceiver Block QL2
10G Channel 3
10G Channel 2
CMU Channel 1
CMU Channel 0
10G Channel 1
10G Channel 0
10G Channel 3
10G Channel 2
CMU Channel 1
CMU Channel 0
10G Channel 1
10G Channel 0
10G Channel 3
10G Channel 2
CMU Channel 1
CMU Channel 0
10G Channel 1
10G Channel 0
10G Channel 3
10G Channel 2
CMU Channel 1
CMU Channel 0
10G Channel 1
10G Channel 0
10G Channel 3
10G Channel 2
CMU Channel 1
CMU Channel 0
10G Channel 1
10G Channel 0
10G Channel 3
10G Channel 2
CMU Channel 1
CMU Channel 0
10G Channel 1
10G Channel 0
EP4S100G5H40
PCIe hard IP
PCIe hard IP
1–14 Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Channel Locations
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Figure 1–9 shows the transceiver channel, PLL, and PCIe hard IP block locations for
the EP4S100G3F45 and EP4S100G4F45 Stratix IV GT devices.
Figure 1–9. Transceiver Channel, PLL, and PCIe Hard IP Block Locations in EP4S100G3F45 and
EP4S100G4F45 Stratix IV GT Devices (1)
Note to Figure 1–9:
(1) EP4S100G2F40C2ES1 devices do not have 10G ATX PLL blocks. Use the CMU PLL to generate transceiver clocks for
channels configured at 11.3 Gbps.
ATX PLL (10G)
ATX PLL (6G)
ATX PLL (10G)
ATX PLL (6G)
Transceiver Block QR1
Transceiver Block QR2
Transceiver Block QR3
Transceiver Block QL1
Transceiver Block QL2
Transceiver Block QL3
Transceiver Block QR0
ATX PLL (6G)
Transceiver Block QL0
ATX PLL (6G)
EP4S100G3F45, EP4S100G4F45
Channel 3 (10G)
Channel 2 (10G)
CMU Channel 1
CMU Channel 0
Channel 1 (10G)
Channel 0 (10G)
Channel 3 (8G)
Channel 2 (8G)
CMU Channel 1
CMU Channel 0
Channel 1 (8G)
Channel 0 (8G)
Channel 3 (10G)
Channel 2 (10G)
CMU Channel 1
CMU Channel 0
Channel 1 (10G)
Channel 0 (10G)
Channel 3 (10G)
Channel 2 (10G)
CMU Channel 1
CMU Channel 0
Channel 1 (10G)
Channel 0 (10G)
Channel 3 (10G)
Channel 2 (10G)
CMU Channel 1
CMU Channel 0
Channel 1 (10G)
Channel 0 (10G)
Channel 3 (10G)
Channel 2 (10G)
CMU Channel 1
CMU Channel 0
Channel 1 (10G)
Channel 0 (10G)
Channel 3 (10G)
Channel 2 (10G)
CMU Channel 1
CMU Channel 0
Channel 1 (10G)
Channel 0 (10G)
Channel 3 (8G)
Channel 2 (8G)
CMU Channel 1
CMU Channel 0
Channel 1 (8G)
Channel 0 (8G)
PCIe hard IP
PCIe hard IP
PCIe hard IP
PCIe hard IP
Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices 1–15
Transceiver Channel Locations
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Figure 1–10 shows the transceiver channel, PLL, and PCIe hard IP block locations for
the EP4S100G5F45 Stratix IV GT devices.
Figure 1–10. Transceiver Channel, PLL, and PCIe Hard IP Block Locations in EP4S100G5F45
Stratix IV GT Devices (1)
Note to Figure 1–10:
(1) EP4S100G5F45 devices are the same as EP4S100G3F45 and EP4S100G4F45 devices except that the GXBR0
transceiver block is 10G instead of 8G.
ATX PLL (10G)
ATX PLL (6G)
ATX PLL (10G)
ATX PLL (6G)
Transceiver Block QR1
Transceiver Block QR2
Transceiver Block QR3
Transceiver Block QL1
Transceiver Block QL2
Transceiver Block QL3
Transceiver Block QR0
ATX PLL (6G)
Transceiver Block QL0
ATX PLL (6G)
Channel 3 (10G)
Channel 2 (10G)
CMU Channel 1
CMU Channel 0
Channel 1 (10G)
Channel 0 (10G)
Channel 3 (10G)
Channel 2 (10G)
CMU Channel 1
CMU Channel 0
Channel 1 (10G)
Channel 0 (10G)
EP4S100G5F45
Channel 3 (10G)
Channel 2 (10G)
CMU Channel 1
CMU Channel 0
Channel 1 (10G)
Channel 0 (10G)
Channel 3 (10G)
Channel 2 (10G)
CMU Channel 1
CMU Channel 0
Channel 1 (10G)
Channel 0 (10G)
Channel 3 (10G)
Channel 2 (10G)
CMU Channel 1
CMU Channel 0
Channel 1 (10G)
Channel 0 (10G)
Channel 3 (10G)
Channel 2 (10G)
CMU Channel 1
CMU Channel 0
Channel 1 (10G)
Channel 0 (10G)
Channel 3 (10G)
Channel 2 (10G)
CMU Channel 1
CMU Channel 0
Channel 1 (10G)
Channel 0 (10G)
Channel 3 (10G)
Channel 2 (10G)
CMU Channel 1
CMU Channel 0
Channel 1 (10G)
Channel 0 (10G)
PCIe hard IP
PCIe hard IP
PCIe hard IP
PCIe hard IP
1–16 Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Block Architecture
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Transceiver Block Architecture
Figure 1–11 shows the transceiver block architecture of Stratix GX and GT devices.
Each transceiver block has the following components:
1. Four full-duplex (transmitter and receiver) transceiver channels that support serial
data rates from 600 Mbps to 8.5 Gbps in Stratix IV GX devices and 600 Mbps to
11.3 Gbps in Stratix IV GT devices. For more information, refer to “Transceiver
Channel Architecture” on page 1–17.
2. Two CMU channels—
CMU0
and
CMU1
channels—that provide the high-speed serial
and low-speed parallel clock to the transceiver channels. For more information,
refer to “CMU Channel Architecture” on page 1–100.
3. Central control unit (CCU) that implements the XAUI state machine for
XGMII-to-PCS code group conversion, XAUI deskew state machine, shared
control signal generation block, PCIe rateswitch controller block, and reset control
logic
■The shared control signal generation block provides control signals to the
transceiver channels in bonded functional modes, such as XAUI, PCIe, and
Basic ×4.
■The PCIe rateswitch controller block controls the rateswitch circuit in the
CMU0
channel in ×4 configurations. In PCIe ×8 configuration, the PCIe rateswitch
controller block of the CCU in the master transceiver block is active. For more
information, refer to “PCIe Gen2 (5 Gbps) Support” on page 1–140.
Figure 1–11. Top-Level View of a Transceiver Block
Transceiver Block
QL1
Transceiver Channel 3
Transceiver Channel 2
Transceiver Channel 1
Transceiver Channel 0
Transceiver Block
Transceiver Block
QL0
Transceiver Block
QR1
Transceiver Block
QR0
Channel 3
Channel 2
Channel 1
Channel 0
Channel 3
Channel 2
Channel 1
Channel 0
Channel 3
Channel 2
Channel 1
Channel 0
Channel 3
Channel 2
Channel 1
Channel 0
CMU1 Channel
CMU0 Channel
Central
Control
Unit (CCU)
1
2
2
1
1
1
3
Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices 1–17
Transceiver Block Architecture
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
The Stratix IV GT transceiver architecture has the following components:
■Regular transceiver channels with PMA and PCS support
■CMU channels with PMA-only support
■ATX PLL blocks
Four transceiver channels and two CMU channels are located in each transceiver
block on the left and right sides of the device. Each Stratix IV GT device also has two
10G ATX PLLs that support data rates between 9.9 Gbps and 11.3 Gbps. Additionally,
each Stratix IV GT device has two 6G ATX PLLs that support data rates between
600 Mbps and 6.5 Gbps, except the EP4S100G5F45 device that has four 6G ATX PLLs.
1The 6G ATX PLL does not support all data rates between 600 Mbps and 6.5 Gbps.
Transceiver Channel Architecture
Figure 1–12 shows the Stratix IV GX and GT transceiver channel datapath.
Each transceiver channel consists of the:
■Transmitter channel, further divided into:
■Transmitter channel PCS
■Transmitter channel PMA
■Receiver channel, further divided into:
■Receiver channel PCS
■Receiver channel PMA
Each transceiver channel interfaces to either the PCIe hard IP block (PCIe hard
IP-transceiver interface) or directly to the FPGA fabric (FPGA fabric-transceiver
interface). The transceiver channel interfaces to the PCIe hard IP block if the hard IP
block is used to implement the PCIe PHY MAC, data link layer, and transaction layer.
Otherwise, the transceiver channel interfaces directly to the FPGA fabric.
Figure 1–12. Stratix IV GX and GT Transceiver Datapath
Byte Deserializer
Byte Serializer
8B/10 Decoder
8B/10B Encoder
Rate Match FIFO
Receiver Channel PCS Receiver Channel
PMA
Deskew FIFO
Word Aligner
rx_datain
Deserializer
CDR
Transmitter Channel PCS Transmitter Channel
PMA
tx_dataout
Serializer
wrclk wrclkrdclk rdclk
PCIe hard IP
FPGA
Fabric
PIPE Interface
Transmitter Channel Datapath
Receiver Channel Datapath
TX Phase
Compensation
FIFO
Byte Ordering
RX Phase
Compensation
FIFO
1–18 Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Block Architecture
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Each regular Stratix IV GT transceiver channel can be categorized into:
■8G transceiver channel—supports data rates between 600 Mbps and 8.5 Gbps
■10G Transceiver Channel—supports data rates between 600 Mbps and 11.3 Gbps
1The PCIe hard IP-transceiver interface is beyond the scope of this chapter. This
chapter describes the FPGA fabric-transceiver interface.
fFor more information about the PCIe hard IP block, refer to the PCI Express Compiler
User Guide.
Figure 1–13 shows the FPGA fabric-transceiver interface and transceiver PMA-PCS
interface.
The transceiver channel datapath can be divided into the following two modes based
on the FPGA fabric-transceiver interface width (channel width) and the transceiver
channel PMA-PCS width (serialization factor):
■Single-width mode
■Double-width mode
Table 1–6 lists the FPGA fabric-transceiver interface widths (channel width) and
transceiver PMA-PCS widths (serialization factor) allowed in single-width and
double-width modes.
Figure 1–13. FPGA Fabric-Transceiver Interface and Transceiver PMA-PCS Interface
PMA-PCS Interface
FPGA Fabric
Byte Deserializer
Byte Serializer
8B/10 Decoder
8B/10B Encoder
Rate Match FIFO
Receiver Channel PCS
Deskew FIFO
Transmitter Channel PCS
wrclk wrclkrdclk rdclk
TX Phase
Compensation
FIFO
Byte Ordering
RX Phase
Compensation
FIFO
Transmitter Channel
PMA
rx_datain
CDR
tx_dataout
Serializer
Receiver Channel
PMA
Word Aligner
Deserializer
tx_clkouttx_clkout
FPGA
Fabric
PMA-PCS
Interface
FPGA
Fabric-Transceiver
Interface
PCIe hard IP
PIPE Interface
Table 1–6. FPGA Fabric-Transceiver Interface Width and Transceiver PMA-PCS Widths (Part 1 of 2)
Name Single-Width Double-Width
PMA-PCS interface widths 8/10 bit 16/20 bit
FPGA fabric-transceiver interface width 8/10 bit
16/20 bit
16/20 bit
32/40 bit
Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices 1–19
Transceiver Block Architecture
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Transmitter Channel Datapath
The transmitter channel datapath, shown in Figure 1–12 on page 1–17, consists of the
following blocks:
■TX phase compensation FIFO
■Byte serializer
■8B/10B encoder
■Transmitter output buffer
The Stratix IV GX and GT transceiver provides the Enable low latency PCS mode
option in the ALTGX MegaWizard™ Plug-In Manager. If you select this option, the
8B/10B encoder in the datapath is disabled.
TX Phase Compensation FIFO
The TX phase compensation FIFO interfaces the transmitter channel PCS and the
FPGA fabric PCIe interface. It compensates for the phase difference between the
low-speed parallel clock and the FPGA fabric interface clock. The TX phase
compensation FIFO operates in low-latency and high-latency modes.
Figure 1–14 shows the datapath and clocking of the TX phase compensation FIFO.
Supported functional modes
■PCIe Gen1 and Gen2
■XAUI
■GIGE
■Serial RapidIO
■SONET/SDH OC12 and OC48
■SDI
■Basic single-width
■(OIF) CEI PHY Interface
■SONET/SDH OC96
■Basic double-width
Data rate range in Basic functional mode 0.6 Gbps to 3.75 Gbps 1 Gbps to 8.5 Gbps
Table 1–6. FPGA Fabric-Transceiver Interface Width and Transceiver PMA-PCS Widths (Part 2 of 2)
Name Single-Width Double-Width
Figure 1–14. TX Phase Compensation FIFO
Note to Figure 1–14:
(1) The clock used to clock the write side of the compensation FIFO is based on whether or not you enable the tx_coreclk
option in the ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager.
Data Path from the FPGA
Fabric or PIPE Interface
tx_coreclk
tx_clkout
coreclkout
Data Path to the Byte Serializer
or the 8B/10B Encoder or
Serializer
TX Phase
Compensation
FIFO
wr_clk rd_clk
(1)
1–20 Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Block Architecture
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Table 1–7 lists the TX phase compensation FIFO modes.
fFor more information about the TX phase compensation FIFO, refer to the
“Limitations of the Quartus II Software-Selected Transmitter Phase Compensation
FIFO Write Clock” section of the Transceiver Clocking in Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Input Data
In PCIe functional mode, the input data comes from the PCIe interface. In all other
functional modes, the input data comes directly from the FPGA fabric.
Output Data Destination Block
The output from the TX phase compensation FIFO is used by the byte serializer block,
8B/10B encoder, or serializer block. Table 1–8 lists the conditions under which the TX
phase compensation FIFO outputs are provided to these blocks.
Table 1–7. TX Phase Compensation FIFO Modes
Modes Description
Low-Latency
The FIFO is four words deep. Latency through the FIFO is two to three FPGA fabric
parallel clock cycles (pending characterization).
The default setting for every mode.
High-Latency The FIFO is eight words deep. The latency through the FIFO is four to five FPGA parallel
cycles (pending characterization).
Non-Bonded Functional
For example, in GIGE mode, the read port of the phase compensation FIFO is clocked
by the low-speed parallel clock. The write clock is fed by the
tx_clkout
port of the
associated channel.
Bonded Functional
For example, in XAUI mode, the write clock of the FIFO is clocked by
coreclkout
provided by the
CMU0
clock divider block. You can clock the write side using
tx_coreclk
provided from the FPGA fabric by enabling the
tx_coreclk
port in the
ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager. If you use this port, ensure that there is
0 parts-per-million (PPM) difference in frequency between the write and read side. The
Quartus® II software requires that you provide a 0 PPM assignment in the Assignment
Editor.
Table 1–8. Output Data Destination Block for the TX Phase Compensation FIFO Output Data
Byte Serializer 8B/10B Encoder Serializer
If you select:
single-width mode and channel
width = 16 or 20
If you select:
single-width mode and
channel width = 8 and
8B/10B encoder enabled
If you select:
low-latency PCS bypass mode
enabled or single-width mode and
channel width = 8 or 10
If you select:
double-width mode and
channel width = 32 or 40
If you select:
double-width mode and
channel width = 16 and
8B/10B encoder enabled
If you select:
low-latency PCS bypass mode
enabled or double-width mode
and channel width = 16 or 20
Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices 1–21
Transceiver Block Architecture
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
TX Phase Compensation FIFO Status Signal
An optional
tx_phase_comp_fifo_error
port is available in all functional modes to
indicate a receiver phase compensation FIFO overflow or under-run condition. The
tx_phase_comp_fifo_error
signal is asserted high when the TX phase compensation
FIFO either overflows or under-runs due to any frequency PPM difference between
the FIFO read and write clocks. If the
tx_phase_comp_fifo_error
flag is asserted,
verify the FPGA fabric-transceiver interface clocking to ensure that there is 0 PPM
difference between the TX phase compensation FIFO read and write clocks.
Byte Serializer
The byte serializer divides the input datapath by two. This allows you to run the
transceiver channel at higher data rates while keeping the FPGA fabric interface
frequency within the maximum limit stated in the “Interface Frequency” section in
the DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices chapter. In single-width
mode, it converts the two-byte-wide datapath to a one-byte-wide datapath. In
double-width mode, it converts the four-byte-wide datapath to a two-byte-wide
datapath. It is optional in configurations that do not exceed the FPGA fabric-
transceiver interface maximum frequency limit.
For example, if you want to run the transceiver channel at 6.25 Gbps, without the byte
serializer in double-width mode, the FPGA fabric interface clock frequency must be
312.5 MHz (6.25/20). This violates the FPGA fabric interface frequency limit. When
you use the byte serializer, the FPGA fabric interface frequency is 156.25 MHz
(6.25G/40). You can enable the byte serializer in single-width or double-width mode.
1The byte deserializer is required in configurations that exceed the FPGA
fabric-transceiver interface maximum frequency limit.
fFor more information about the maximum frequency limit for the transceiver
interface, refer to the DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Single-Width Mode
Figure 1–15 shows the byte serializer datapath in single-width mode. For data port
width, refer to Table 1–9.
Figure 1–15. Byte Serializer Datapath in Single-Width Mode (1), (2)
Notes to Figure 1–15:
(1) For the datain[] and dataout[] port widths, refer to Table 1–9.
(2) The datain signal is the input from the FPGA fabric that has already passed through the TX phase compensation
FIFO.
/2
datain[] dataout[]
Low-Speed Parallel
Clock
Byte Serializer
1–22 Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Block Architecture
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
The byte serializer forwards the LSByte first, followed by the MSByte. The input data
width to the byte serializer depends on the channel width option that you selected in
the ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager. For example, in single-width mode,
assuming a channel width of 20, the byte serializer sends out the least significant
word
datain[9:0]
of the parallel data from the FPGA fabric, followed by
datain[19:10]
. Table 1–9 lists the input and output data widths of the byte serializer
in single-width mode.
Double-Width Mode
Figure 1–16 shows the byte serializer datapath in double-width mode. For data port
width, refer to Table 1–10.
The operation in double-width mode is similar to that of single-width mode. For
example, assuming a channel width of 40, the byte serializer forwards
datain[19:0]
first, followed by
datain[39:20]
. Table 1–10 lists the input and output data widths of
the byte serializer in double-width mode.
Asserting the
tx_digitalreset
signal resets the byte serializer block.
If you select the 8B/10B Encoder option in the ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager,
the 8B/10B encoder uses the output from the byte serializer. Otherwise, the byte
serializer output is forwarded to the serializer.
Table 1–9. Input and Output Data Width of the Byte Serializer in Single-Width Mode
Deserialization Width Input Data Width to the Byte
Serializer
Output Data Width from the
Byte Serializer
Single-width mode 16 8
20 10
Figure 1–16. Byte Serializer Datapath in Double-Width Mode (1), (2)
Notes to Figure 1–16:
(1) For the datain[] and dataout[] port width, refer to Table 1–10.
(2) The datain signal is the input from the FPGA fabric that has already passed through the TX phase compensation
FIFO.
Table 1–10. Input and Output Data Width of the Byte Serializer in Double-Width Mode
Deserialization Width Input Data Width to the Byte
Serializer
Output Data Width from the
Byte Serializer
Double-width mode 32 16
40 20
/2
Byte Serializer
datain[] dataout[]
Low-Speed Parallel
Clock
Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices 1–23
Transceiver Block Architecture
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
8B/10B Encoder
The 8B/10B encoder generates 10-bit code groups from the 8-bit data and 1-bit control
identifier. The 8B/10B encoder operates in two modes: single-width and
double-width. Figure 1–17 shows the 8B/10B encoder in single-width and
double-width mode.
Single-Width Mode
The left side of Figure 1–17 shows the 8B/10B encoder in single-width mode. In this
mode, the 8B/10B encoder translates the 8-bit data to a 10-bit code group (control
word or data word) with proper disparity. If the
control_code
input is high, the
8B/10B encoder translates the input
data[7:0]
to a 10-bit control word. If the
control_code
input is low, the 8B/10B encoder translates the input
data[7:0]
to a
10-bit data word.
You can use the
tx_forcedisp
and
tx_dispval
ports to control the running disparity
of the generated output data. For more information, refer to “Controlling Running
Disparity” on page 1–27.
Figure 1–17. 8B/10B Encoder in Single-Width Mode
From the
Byte Serializer
datain[15:8]
tx_forcedisp[1]
tx_dispval[1]
To the Serializer
dataout[19:10]
8B/10B Encoder
MSB Encoding
LSB Encoding
dataout[9:0]
datain[7:0]
control_code[0]
tx_forcedisp[0]
tx_dispval[0]
Single Width
Double Width
From the
Byte Serializer
To the Serializer
8B/10B Encoder
datain[7:0]
control_code
tx_forcedisp
tx_dispval
dataout[9:0]
control_code[1]
1–24 Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Block Architecture
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Figure 1–18 shows the conversion format. The LSB is transmitted first.
Control Code Encoding
The ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager provides the
tx_ctrlenable
port to
indicate whether the 8-bit data at the
tx_datain
port should be encoded as a control
word (Kx.y). When
tx_ctrlenable
is low, the 8B/10B encoder block encodes the byte
at the
tx_datain
port (the user-input port) as data (Dx.y). When
tx_ctrlenable
is
high, the 8B/10B encoder encodes the input data as a Kx.y code group. The waveform
in Figure 1–19 shows the second 0 × BC encoded as a control word (K28.5). The rest of
the
tx_datain
bytes are encoded as a data word (Dx.y).
The IEEE 802.3 8B/10B encoder specification identifies only a set of 8-bit characters
for which
tx_ctrlenable
should be asserted. If you assert
tx_ctrlenable
for any
other set of bytes, the 8B/10B encoder might encode the output 10-bit code as an
invalid code (it does not map to a valid Dx.y or Kx.y code), or unintended valid Dx.y
code, depending on the value entered. It is possible for a downstream 8B/10B decoder
to decode an invalid control word into a valid Dx.y code without asserting code error
flags.
Figure 1–18. 8B/10B Conversion Format
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
HGFEDCBA
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 09 8
gf iedcbajh
LSB
MSB
control_code
8B/10B Conversion
Figure 1–19. Control Word and Data Word Transmission
clock
tx_datain[7:0]
tx_ctrlenable
code group
83 78 BC BC 0F 00 BF 3C
D3.4 D24.3 D28.5 K28.5 D15.0 D0.0 D31.5 D28.1
Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices 1–25
Transceiver Block Architecture
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
1For example, depending on the current running disparity, the invalid code K24.1
(
tx_datain
= 8'h38 +
tx_ctrl
= 1'b1) can be encoded to 10'b0110001100 (0 × 18C),
which is equivalent to a D24.6+ (8'hD8 from the RD+ column). Altera recommends
that you do not assert
tx_ctrlenable
for unsupported 8-bit characters.
Reset Condition
The
tx_digitalreset
signal resets the 8B/10B encoder. During reset, running
disparity and data registers are cleared. Also, the 8B/10B encoder outputs a K28.5
pattern from the RD- column continuously until
tx_digitalreset
is de-asserted. The
input data and control code from the FPGA fabric is ignored during the reset state.
After reset, the 8B/10B encoder starts with a negative disparity (RD-) and transmits
three K28.5 code groups for synchronization before it starts encoding and
transmitting the data on its output.
1While
tx_digitalreset
is asserted, the downstream 8B/10B decoder that receives the
data might observe synchronization or disparity errors.
Figure 1–20 shows the reset behavior of the 8B/10B encoder. When in reset
(
tx_digitalreset
is high), a K28.5- (K28.5 10-bit code group from the RD- column) is
sent continuously until
tx_digitalreset
is low. Due to some pipelining of the
transmitter channel PCS, some “don’t cares” (10'hxxx) are sent before the three
synchronizing K28.5 code groups. User data follows the third K28.5 code group.
Double-Width Mode
In double-width mode, the 8B/10B encoder operates in a cascaded mode, as shown
on the right side of Figure 1–20 on page 1–25. The LSByte of the input data is encoded
and transmitted prior to the MSByte.
Figure 1–20. 8B/10B Encoder Output During tx_digitalreset Assertion
clock
tx_digitalreset
dataout[9:0]
K28.5- K28.5- K28.5- xxx ... K28.5-xxx K28.5-K28.5+ Dx.y+
1–26 Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Block Architecture
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
In double-width mode, the cascaded 8B/10B encoder generates two 10-bit code
groups from two 8-bit data and their respective control code identifiers. Figure 1–21
shows the conversion format. The LSB shown in Figure 1–21 is transmitted first.
Control Code Encoding
In double-width mode, the
tx_ctrlenable[1:0]
port is used to identify which 8-bit
data is to be encoded as a control word. The lower bit,
tx_ctrlenable[0]
, is
associated with the LSByte; the upper bit,
tx_ctrlenable[1]
, is associated with the
MSByte. When
tx_ctrlenable
is low, the byte at the
tx_datain
port of the transceiver
is encoded as data (Dx.y); otherwise, it is encoded as a control code (Kx.y).
Figure 1–22 shows that only the lower byte of the
tx_datain[15:0]
port is encoded as
a control code because
tx_ctrlenable[0]
is high in the second clock cycle.
The 8B/10B encoder does not check to see if the code word entered is one of the 12
valid control code groups specified in the IEEE 802.3 8B/10B encoder specification. If
an invalid control code is entered, the resulting 10-bit code may be encoded as an
invalid code (it does not map to a valid Dx.y or Kx.y code), or unintended valid Dx.y
code, depending on the value entered.
Figure 1–21. 8B/10B Conversion Format in Double-Width Mode
G' F' E' D' C' B' A'H' GFEDCBAH
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
LSB
MSB
g' f' i' e' d' c' b' a'j'h' gf i edcbajh
19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
CTRL[1:0]
Parallel Data
Cascaded 8B/10B Conversion
Figure 1–22. Encoded Control Word and Data Word Transmission
clock
tx_datain[15:0]
tx_ctrlenable[1:0]
code group
8378 BCBC 0F00 BF3C
00 0001
D3.4 D24.3 D28.5 K28.5 D15.0 D0.0 D31.5 D28.1
Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices 1–27
Transceiver Block Architecture
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
The following is an example of an invalid control word encoded into a valid Dx.y
code. With an encoding invalid code K24.1 (
tx_datain
= 8'h38 +
tx_ctrl
= 1'b1),
depending on the current running disparity, the K24.1 can be encoded as
10'b0110001100 (0 × 18C), which is equivalent to a D24.6+ (8'hD8 from the RD+
column). An 8B/10B decoder can decode this and not assert a code error flag.
1Altera does not recommend sending invalid control words to the 8B/10B encoder.
Reset Condition
The
tx_digitalreset
signal resets the 8B/10B encoder. During reset, the running
disparity and data registers are cleared. Also, the 8B/10B encoder outputs a K28.5
pattern with proper disparity continuously until
tx_digitalreset
goes low. The
inputs from the
tx_datain
and
tx_ctrlenable
ports are ignored during the reset
state. After reset, the 8B/10B encoder starts the LSByte with a negative disparity (RD-)
and the MSByte with a positive disparity (RD+) and transmits six K28.5 code groups
(three on the LSByte and three on the MSByte encoder) for synchronizing before it
starts encoding and transmitting data.
1If the
tx_digitalreset
signal is asserted, the downstream 8B/10B decoder receiving
the data might get synchronization or disparity errors.
Figure 1–23 shows the reset behavior of the 8B/10B encoder. When in reset
(
tx_digitalreset
is high), a K28.5- on LSB and K28.5+ on MSB is sent continuously
until
tx_digitalreset
is low. Due to pipelining of the TX channel, there will be some
“don’t cares” (10'hxxx) until the first K28.5 is sent (Figure 1–23 shows six “don’t
cares”, but the number of “don’t cares” can vary). Both the LSByte and MSByte
transmit three K28.5s before the data at the
tx_datain
port is encoded and sent out.
Controlling Running Disparity
After power on or reset, the 8B/10B encoder has a negative disparity and chooses the
10-bit code from the RD- column (refer to the 8B/10B encoder specification for the
RD+ and RD- column values). The ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager provides
the
tx_forcedisp
and
tx_dispval
ports to control the running disparity of the output
from the 8B/10B encoder. These ports are available only in Basic single-width and
Basic double-width modes.
Figure 1–23. Transmitted Output Data When tx_digitalreset is Asserted
clock
tx_digitalreset
dataout[19:10]
dataout[9:0]
k28.5+ k28.5+ k28.5+ xxx xxx xxx k28.5+ k28.5+ k28.5+ Dx.y+
k28.5- k28.5- k28.5- Dx.y-xxx xxx xxxk28.5- k28.5- k28.5-
1–28 Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Block Architecture
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
A high value on the
tx_forcedisp
port is the control signal to the disparity value of
the output data. The disparity value (RD+ or RD-) is indicated by the value on the
tx_dispval
port. If the
tx_forcedisp
port is low,
tx_dispval
is ignored and the
current running disparity is not altered. Forcing disparity can either maintain the
current running disparity calculations if the forced disparity value (on the
tx_dispval
bit) matches the current running disparity, or flip the current running disparity
calculations if it does not. If the forced disparity flips the current running disparity,
the downstream 8B/10B decoder might detect a disparity error.
Table 1–11 lists the
tx_forcedisp
and
tx_dispval
port values.
Figure 1–24 shows the current running disparity being altered in Basic single-width
mode by forcing a positive disparity K28.5 when it was supposed to be a negative
disparity K28.5. In this example, a series of K28.5 code groups are continuously being
sent. The stream alternates between a positive running disparity (RD+) K28.5 and a
negative running disparity (RD-) K28.5 to maintain a neutral overall disparity. The
current running disparity at time n + 3 indicates that the K28.5 in time n + 4 should be
encoded with a negative disparity. Because
tx_forcedisp
is high at time n + 4, and
tx_dispval
is low, the K28.5 at time n + 4 is encoded as a positive disparity code
group.
Figure 1–25 shows the current running disparity being altered in Basic double-width
mode by forcing a positive disparity on a negative disparity K28.5. In this example, a
series of K28.5 are continuously being sent. The stream alternates between a positive
ending running disparity (RD+) K28.5 and a negative ending running disparity (RD-)
K28.5 as governed by the 8B/10B encoder specification to maintain a neutral overall
disparity. The current running disparity at the end of time n + 2 indicates that the
Table 1–11. tx_forcedisp and tx_dispval Port Values
tx_forcedisp tx_dispval Disparity Value
0 X Current running disparity has no change
1 0 Encoded data has positive disparity
1 1 Encoded data has negative disparity
Figure 1–24. 8B/10B Encoder Force Running Disparity Operation in Single-Width Mode
Current Running
Disparity
clock
tx_in[7:0]
tx_forcedisp
BC BC BC BC BC BC BC
tx_ctrlenable
BC
dataout[9:0]
17C 283 17C 283 283 283 17C17C
RD- RD+ RD+RD- RD+ RD- RD+ RD-
n n + 1 n + 2 n + 3 n + 4 n + 5 n + 6 n + 7
tx_dispval
Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices 1–29
Transceiver Block Architecture
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
K28.5 at the low byte position in time n + 4 should be encoded with a positive
disparity. Because
tx_forcedisp
is high at time n + 4, the low signal level of
tx_dispval
is used to convert the lower byte K28.5 to be encoded as a positive
disparity code word. As the upper bit of
tx_forcedisp
is low at n + 4, the high byte
K28.5 takes the current running disparity from the low byte.
Transmitter Polarity Inversion
The positive and negative signals of a serial differential link might accidentally be
swapped during board layout. Solutions like a board re-spin or major updates to the
logic in the FPGA fabric can be expensive. The transmitter polarity inversion feature
is provided to correct this situation. An optional
tx_invpolarity
port is available in
all functional modes except (OIF) CEI PHY to dynamically enable the transmitter
polarity inversion feature.
In single-width mode, a high value on the
tx_invpolarity
port inverts the polarity of
every bit of the 8-bit or 10-bit input data word to the serializer in the transmitter
datapath. In double-width mode, a high value on the
tx_invpolarity
port inverts the
polarity of every bit of the 16-bit or 20-bit input data word to the serializer in the
transmitter datapath. Because inverting the polarity of each bit has the same effect as
swapping the positive and negative signals of the differential link, correct data is seen
by the receiver.
tx_invpolarity
is a dynamic signal and might cause initial disparity
errors at the receiver of an 8B/10B encoded link. The downstream system must be
able to tolerate these disparity errors.
Figure 1–25. 8B/10B Encoder Force Current Running Disparity in Double-Width Mode
Current Running
Disparity
clock
BC BC BC BC BC BC BCBC
tx_dataout[19:0] 17C 283 17C 283 283 283 17C17C
RD-RD+RD+
RD- RD+ RD- RD+ RD-
n
01 00
00
00
tx_datain[15:0]
tx_ctrlenable[1:0]
tx_forcedisp[1:0]
tx_dispval[1:0]
11
n + 2 n + 4
1–30 Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Block Architecture
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Figure 1–26 shows the transmitter polarity inversion feature in a single-width and
double-width datapath configuration.
Figure 1–26. Transmitter Polarity Inversion in Single-Width and Double-Width Mode
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
0
1
1
LSB LSB
MSB MSB
tx_invpolarity = high
tx_invpolarity = high
Single-Width Configuration
Output from transmitter PCS
Converted data output to the
transmitter serializer
Double-Width Configuration
Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices 1–31
Transceiver Block Architecture
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Transmitter Bit Reversal
Table 1–12 lists the transmission bit order with and without the transmitter bit
reversal enabled.
Figure 1–27 shows the transmitter bit reversal feature in Basic single-width for a 10-bit
wide datapath configuration.
Table 1–12. Transmission Bit Order for the Bit Reversal Feature
Transmitter Bit Reversal
Feature
Single-Width Mode
(8- or 10-Bit)
Double-Width Mode
(16- or 20-Bit)
Not enabled (default) LSB to MSB LSB to MSB
Enabled
MSB to LSB
For example:
■8-bit—
D[7:0]
rewired to
D[0:7]
■10-bit—
D[9:0]
rewired to
D[0:9]
MSB to LSB
For example:
■16-bit—
D[15:0]
rewired to
D[0:15]
■20-bit—
D[19:0]
rewired to
D[0:19]
Figure 1–27. Transmitter Bit Reversal Operation in Basic Single-Width Mode
Output from transmitter PCS Converted data output to the
transmitter serializer
TX bit reversal option enabled in
the ALTGX MegaWizard
D[9]
D[8]
D[7]
D[6]
D[5]
D[4]
D[3]
D[2]
D[1]
D[0]
D[0]
D[1]
D[2]
D[3]
D[4]
D[5]
D[6]
D[7]
D[8]
D[9]
1–32 Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Block Architecture
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Figure 1–28 shows the transmitter bit reversal feature in Basic double-width mode for
a 20-bit wide datapath configuration.
Figure 1–28. Transmitter Bit Reversal Operation in Basic Double-Width Mode
Output from transmitter PCS
Converted data output to the
transmitter serializer
D[0]
D[2]
D[1]
D[4]
D[3]
D[6]
D[5]
D[8]
D[7]
D[10]
D[9]
D[12]
D[11]
D[15]
D[13]
D[14]
D[17]
D[16]
D[19]
D[18]
D[18]
D[19]
D[16]
D[17]
D[15]
D[13]
D[14]
D[11]
D[12]
D[9]
D[10]
D[7]
D[8]
D[5]
D[6]
D[3]
D[4]
D[1]
D[2]
D[0]
TX bit reversal option enabled
in the ALTGX MegaWizard
Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices 1–33
Transceiver Block Architecture
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Serializer
The serializer converts the incoming low-speed parallel signal from the transceiver
PCS to high-speed serial data and sends it to the transmitter buffer. The serializer
supports an 8-bit or 10-bit serialization factor in single-width mode and a 16-bit or
20-bit serialization factor in double-width mode. The serializer block drives the serial
data to the output buffer, as shown in Figure 1–29. The serializer block sends out the
LSB of the input data.
Figure 1–30 shows the serial bit order of the serializer block output. In this example, a
constant 8'h6A (01101010) value is serialized and the serial data is transmitted from
LSB to MSB.
Figure 1–29. Serializer Block in 8-Bit PCS-PMA Interface
Note to Figure 1–29:
(1) The
CMU0
clock divider of the master transceiver block provides the clocks. It is used only in bonded modes (for example, Basic ×8, PCIe ×8 mode).
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
8
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
To Output Buffer
Low-Speed
Parallel Clock
High-Speed Serial Clock
parallel clock from local divider block
parallel clock from CMU0 clock divider
parallel clock from master transceiver block
(1)
serial clock from local divider block
serial clock from CMU0 clock divider
serial clock from master transceiver block
(1)
1–34 Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Block Architecture
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Transmitter Output Buffer
The Stratix IV GX and GT transmitter buffers are architecturally similar to each other.
They both support programmable output differential voltage (VOD), pre-emphasis,
and on-chip termination (OCT) settings.
The transmitter buffer power supply only provides voltage to the transmitter output
buffers in the transceiver channels. The transmitter output buffer, shown in
Figure 1–31, has additional circuitry to improve signal integrity, such as VOD,
programmable three-tap pre-emphasis circuit, internal termination circuitry, and
receiver detect capability to support PCIe functional mode.
Figure 1–30. Serializer Bit Order (1)
Note to Figure 1–30:
(1) It is assumed that the input data to the serializer is 8 bits (channel width = 8 bits or 16 bits with the 8B/10B encoder disabled).
Low-speed parallel clock
01101010
01 0 0 01 1 1
00000000
High-speed serial clock
tx_datain[7..0]
tx_dataout[0]
Figure 1–31. Transmitter Output Buffer
50ΩΩΩ
, 60 , 75
Transmitter Output Pins
Programmable
Pre-emphasis
and V
OD
+VTT-
Receiver
Detect
42.5Ω,
50ΩΩ
, 60 , 75
42.5Ω, Ω
Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices 1–35
Transceiver Block Architecture
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Table 1–13 and Table 1–14 list the supported settings of the transmitter buffers in the
Stratix IV GX and GT devices, respectively.
Programmable Transmitter Termination
The Stratix IV GX and GT transmitter buffers includes programmable on-chip
differential termination of 85, 100, 120, or 150 . The resistance is adjusted by the
on-chip calibration circuit in the calibration block (for more information, refer to
“Calibration Blocks” on page 1–201), which compensates for temperature, voltage,
and process changes. The Stratix IV GX and GT transmitter buffers in the transceiver
are current mode drivers. Therefore, the resultant VOD is a function of the transmitter
termination value. For more information about resultant VOD values, refer to
“Programmable Output Differential Voltage” on page 1–36.
You can disable OCT and use external termination. If you select external termination,
the transmitter common mode is tri-stated. You can set the transmitter termination in
the ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager.
You can also set the OCT through the Assignment Editor. Set the assignment shown in
Table 1–15 to the transmitter serial output pin.
Table 1–13. Supported Settings for the Stratix IV GX Transmitter Buffer
Parameter Setting
Data rate 600 Mbps to 8.5 Gbps (1.4 V)
600 Mbps to 6.5 Gbps (1.5 V)
Transmitter buffer power (
V
CCH_GXBL/Rn) 1.4 V or 1.5 V
Transmitter buffer I/O standard 1.4-V and 1.5-V pseudo current mode logic
(PCML)
Transmitter buffer VCM 0.65 V
Table 1–14. Supported Settings for the Stratix IV GT Transmitter Buffer
Parameter Setting
Data rate 600 Mbps—11.3 Gbps
Transmitter buffer power (
V
CCH_GXBL/Rn)1.4V
Transmitter buffer I/O standard 1.4-V PCML
Transmitter buffer VCM 0.65 V
Table 1–15. Stratix IV GX and GT OCT Assignment Settings
Assign To Transmitter Serial Output Data Pin
Assignment Name Output termination
Available Values OCT 85 , OCT 100 , OCT 120 , OCT 150
1–36 Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Block Architecture
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Programmable Output Differential Voltage
The Stratix IV GX and GT devices allow you to customize the differential output
voltage to handle different trace lengths, various backplanes, and receiver
requirements, as shown in Figure 1–32. You can change the VOD values using the
dynamic reconfiguration controller. Set the VOD value through the
tx_vodctrl[2:0]
port of the dynamic reconfiguration controller. For example, to set VOD to a value of 3,
set the
tx_vodctrl[2:0]
to 011.
fFor more information about Stratix IV GX and GT VOD values, refer to the DC and
Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Programmable Pre-Emphasis
The programmable pre-emphasis module in each transmit buffer boosts high
frequencies in the transmit data signal, which might be attenuated in the transmission
media. Using pre-emphasis can maximize the data opening at the far-end receiver.
The transmission line’s transfer function can be represented in the frequency domain
as a low-pass filter. Any frequency components below –3dB can pass through with
minimal loss. Frequency components greater than –3dB are attenuated. This variation
in frequency response yields data-dependant jitter and other inter-symbol
interference (ISI) effects. By applying pre-emphasis, the high-frequency components
are boosted; that is, pre-emphasized. Pre-emphasis equalizes the frequency response
at the receiver so the difference between the low-frequency and high-frequency
components is reduced, which minimizes the ISI effects from the transmission
medium. Pre-emphasis requirements increase as data rates through legacy backplanes
increase. You set the pre-emphasis settings in the ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In
Manager.
The Stratix IV GX and GT transceivers provide three pre-emphasis taps—pre tap, first
post tap, and second post tap. The ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager provides
options to select the different values on these three taps. The pre tap sets the
pre-emphasis on the data bit before the transition. The first post tap and second post
tap set the pre-emphasis on the transition bit and the successive bit, respectively. The
pre tap and second post tap also provide inversion control, shown by negative values
on the corresponding tap settings in the ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager. The
ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager only shows the valid pre-emphasis tap values
for a selected VOD and transmitter termination resistance setting.
Figure 1–32. VOD (Differential) Signal Level
Single-Ended Waveform
Differential Waveform
V
A
V
B
+V
OD
+V
OD
-V
OD
V
OD
(Differential)
0-V Differential
+700
-700
-
V
OD
(Differential)
= V
A
–
V
B
Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices 1–37
Transceiver Block Architecture
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Programmable Transmitter Output Buffer Power (VCCH)
The ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager provides an option to select VCCH.
Table 1–16 lists the data rates for the two VCCH options.
Link Coupling for Stratix IV GX and GT Devices
A high-speed serial link can be AC-coupled or DC-coupled, depending on the serial
protocol being implemented.
AC-Coupled Links
In an AC-coupled link, the AC-coupling capacitor blocks the transmitter DC VCM. The
on-chip or off-chip receiver termination and biasing circuitry automatically restores
the selected VCM. Figure 1–33 shows an AC-coupled link.
The following protocols supported by Stratix IV GX and GT devices mandate
AC-coupled links:
■PCIe
■Gigabit Ethernet
■Serial RapidIO
■XAUI
■SDI
Stratix IV GT devices allow the high-speed links to be AC-coupled for the entire data
rate range between 600 Mbps and 11.3 Gbps.
Table 1–16. VCCH Option Data Rates
VCCH Options Stratix IV GX Data Rate Stratix IV GT Data Rate
1.4 V 600 Mbps to 8.5 Gbps 600 Mbps to 11.3 Gbps
1.5 V 600 Mbps to 6.5 Gbps —
Figure 1–33. AC-Coupled Link
Physical Medium
Transmitter Receiver
TX
VCM
RX
VCM
TX Termination RX Termination
AC Coupling
Capacitor
AC Coupling
Capacitor
Physical Medium
1–38 Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Block Architecture
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
DC-Coupled Links
In a DC-coupled link, the transmitter DC VCM is seen unblocked at the receiver buffer.
The link VCM depends on the transmitter VCM and the receiver VCM. The on-chip or
off-chip receiver termination and biasing circuitry must ensure compatibility between
the transmitter and receiver VCM. Figure 1–34 shows a DC-coupled link.
The Stratix IV GX and GT transmitter can be DC-coupled to a Stratix IV GX and GT
receiver for the entire operating data rate range of Stratix IV GX, from 600 Mbps to
8.5 Gbps.
The Stratix IV GT transmitter can be DC-coupled to the Stratix IV GT receiver for the
entire data rate range of 600 Mbps to 11.3 Gbps with Tx Vcm = 0.65 V and
Rx Vcm = 0.82 V.
For more information on the DC coupling capabilities of the Stratix IV GT device,
refer to Table 1–23 on page 1–48.
PCIe Receiver Detect
The Stratix IV GX and GT transmitter buffers have a built-in receiver detection circuit
for use in the PCIe mode for Gen1 and Gen2 data rates. This circuit detects if there is a
receiver downstream by sending out a pulse on the common mode of the transmitter
and monitoring the reflection. This mode requires the transmitter buffer to be
tri-stated (in Electrical Idle mode), OCT utilization, and a 125 MHz
fixedclk
signal.
You can enable this feature in PCIe mode by setting the
tx_forceelecidle
and
tx_detectrxloopback
ports to 1'b1. Receiver detect circuitry is active only in the P1
power state.
fFor more information about power states, refer to the PCIe 2.0 specification.
In the P1 power state, the transmitter output buffer is tri-stated because the
transmitter output buffer is in electrical idle. A high on the
tx_detectrxloopback
port
triggers the receiver detect circuitry to alter the transmitter output buffer VCM. The
sudden change in VCM effectively appears as a step voltage at the tri-stated
transmitter buffer output. If a receiver (that complies with PCIe input impedance
Figure 1–34. DC-Coupled Link
Physical Medium
Transmitter Receiver
TX
VCM
RX
VCM
TX Termination RX Termination
Physical Medium
Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices 1–39
Transceiver Block Architecture
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
requirements) is present at the far end, the time constant of the step voltage is higher.
If a receiver is not present or is powered down, the time constant of the step voltage is
lower. The receiver detect circuitry snoops the transmitter buffer output for the time
constant of the step voltage to detect the presence of the receiver at the far end. A high
pulse is driven on the
pipephydonestatus
port and 3'b011 is driven on the
pipestatus
port to indicate that a receiver has been detected. There is some latency after asserting
the
tx_detectrxloopback
signal, before the receiver detection is indicated on the
pipephydonestatus
port. For signal timing to perform the receiver detect operation,
refer to Figure 1–109 on page 1–134.
1The
tx_forceelecidle
port must be asserted at least 10 parallel clock cycles prior to
the
tx_detectrxloopback
port to ensure that the transmitter buffer is tri-stated.
PCIe Electrical Idle
The Stratix IV GX and GT transmitter output buffers support transmission of PCIe
Electrical Idle (or individual transmitter tri-state). The
tx_forceelecidle
port puts
the transmitter buffer in Electrical Idle mode. This port has a specific functionality in
each power state. For the signal timing to perform the electrical idle transmission in
PCIe mode, refer to Figure 1–108 on page 1–133.
fFor more information about using the
tx_forceelecidle
signal under different power
states, refer to the PCIe specification 2.0.
Transmitter Local Clock Divider Block
Each transmitter channel contains a local clock divider block. It receives the
high-speed clock from the
CMU0
PLL or
CMU1
PLL and generates the high-speed serial
clock for the serializer and the low-speed parallel clock for the transmitter PCS
datapath. The low-speed parallel clock is also forwarded to the FPGA fabric
(
tx_clkout
). The local clock divider block allows each transmitter channel to run at
/1, /2, or /4 of the CMU PLL data rate. The local clock divider block is used only in
non-bonded functional modes (for example, GIGE, SONET/SDH, and SDI mode).
Figure 1–35 shows the transmitter local clock divider block.
Figure 1–35. Transmitter Local Clock Divider Block
4, 5, 8, or 10
High-Speed
Serial Clock
Low-Speed
Parallel Clock
CMU0 PLL High-Speed Clock
CMU1 PLL High-Speed Clock 1, 2, or 4
n
÷
÷
÷
1–40 Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Block Architecture
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Receiver Channel Datapath
This section describes the Stratix IV GX and GT receiver channel datapath
architecture. The sub-blocks in the receiver datapath are described in order from the
serial receiver input buffer to the receiver phase compensation FIFO buffer at the
FPGA fabric-transceiver interface. Figure 1–12 on page 1–17 shows the receiver
channel datapath in Stratix IV GX and GT devices.
The receiver channel PMA datapath consists of the following blocks:
■Receiver input buffer
■Clock and data recovery (CDR) unit
■Deserializer
The receiver channel PCS datapath consists of the following blocks:
■Word aligner
■Deskew FIFO
■Rate match (clock rate compensation) FIFO
■8B/10B decoder
■Byte deserializer
■Byte ordering
■Receiver phase compensation FIFO
■PCIe interface
The receiver datapath is very flexible and allows multiple configurations, depending
on the selected functional mode. You can configure the receiver datapath using the
ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager.
Receiver Input Buffer
The Stratix IV GX and GT receiver input buffers are architecturally similar to each
other. They both support programmable common mode voltage (Rx VCM),
equalization, DC gain, and on-chip termination (OCT) settings. Table 1–17 lists the
supported settings of the receiver input buffers in Stratix IV GX and GT devices.
Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices 1–41
Transceiver Block Architecture
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
The receiver input buffer receives serial data from the
rx_datain
port and feeds it to
the CDR unit. In the reverse serial loopback (pre-CDR) configuration, it also feeds the
received serial data to the transmitter output buffer. Figure 1–36 shows the receiver
input buffer.
Table 1–17 lists the electrical features supported by the Stratix IV GX and GT receiver
input buffer.
The Stratix IV GX and GT receiver buffers support the following features:
■Programmable differential OCT
■Programmable VCM
■AC and DC coupling
Figure 1–36. Receiver Input Buffer
RX
Vcm
To CDR
Receiver Input Buffer
Signal Detect
Note:
(1)
These resistor values represent the combined total of the values in both resistors.
From Serial Data
Input Pins
(rx_datain)
85/100/
120/150-
(1)
0.82/1.1-V
Equalization
and
DC Gain
Circuitry
Signal
Threshold
Detection
Circuitry
p( )
Configuration
Table 1–17. Electrical Features Supported by the Receiver Input Buffer for Stratix IV GX and GT Devices (1)
Data Rate I/O Standard Differential OCT with
Calibration ()VCM (V) Coupling Programmable
DC Gain (dB)
Stratix IV GX
0.6 Gbps to
8.5 Gbps
1.4 V PCML 85, 100, 120, 150 0.82 AC, DC up to 16
1.5 V PCML 85, 100, 120, 150 0.82 AC, DC up to 16
2.5 V PCML 85, 100, 120, 150 0.82 AC up to 16
LVPECL 85, 100, 120, 150 0.82 AC up to 16
LVDS 85, 100, 120, 150 1.1 AC, DC up to 16
Stratix IV GT
0.6 Gbps to
11.3 Gbps
1.4 V PCML 85, 100, 120, 150 0.82 AC, DC up to 16
LVDS 85, 100, 120, 150 1.1 AC, DC up to 16
Note to Table 1–17:
(1) Programmable equalization settings are 1 to 16 dB for Stratix IV GX and GT devices; for example,
rx_eqctrl
= 4’h0 maps to 1 dB gain,
rx_eqctrl
= 4’h1 maps to 2 dB gain, and so on.
1–42 Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Block Architecture
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
■Programmable equalization and DC gain
■Signal threshold detection circuitry
Programmable Differential On-Chip Termination
The Stratix IV GX and GT receiver buffers support optional differential OCT resistors
of 85, 100, 120, and 150 . To select the desired receiver OCT resistor, make the
assignments shown in Table 1–18 in the Quartus II software Assignment Editor.
1The Stratix IV GX and GT receiver OCT resistors have calibration support to
compensate for process, voltage, and temperature variations. For more information
about OCT calibration support, refer to “Calibration Blocks” on page 1–201.
Programmable VCM
The Stratix IV GX and GT receiver buffers have on-chip biasing circuitry to establish
the required VCM at the receiver input. It supports VCM settings of 0.82 V and 1.1 V
that you can select in the ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager.
You must select 0.82 V as the receiver buffer VCM for the following receiver input
buffer I/O standards:
■1.4-V PCML
■1.5-V PCML
■2.5-V PCML
■LVPECL
You must select 1.1 V as the receiver buffer VCM for the LVDS receiver input buffer
I/O standard.
1On-chip biasing circuitry is effective only if you select on-chip receiver termination.
If you select external termination, you must implement off-chip biasing circuitry to
establish the VCM at the receiver input buffer.
Link Coupling for Stratix IV GX Devices
A high-speed serial link can either be AC-coupled or DC-coupled, depending on the
serial protocol being implemented. Most of the serial protocols require links to be
AC-coupled, but protocols such as Common Electrical I/O (CEI) optionally allow DC
coupling.
Table 1–18. Stratix IV GX and GT Receiver On-Chip Termination Assignment Settings
Assign To rx_datain (Receiver Input Data Pins)
Assignment Name Input Termination
Stratix IV GX Available Values OCT 85 , OCT 100 , OCT 120 , OCT 150 , Off
Stratix IV GT Available Values OCT 85 ,OCT 100 , OCT 120 , OCT 150 , Off
Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices 1–43
Transceiver Block Architecture
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
AC-Coupled Links
In an AC-coupled link, the AC coupling capacitor blocks the transmitter DC VCM. The
on-chip or off-chip receiver termination and biasing circuitry automatically restores
the selected VCM. Figure 1–37 shows an AC-coupled link.
The following protocols supported by Stratix IV GX and GT devices mandate
AC-coupled links:
■PCIe
■Gigabit Ethernet
■Serial RapidIO
■XAUI
■SDI
Figure 1–37. AC-Coupled Link
Note to Figure 1–37:
(1) The receiver termination and biasing can be on-chip or off-chip.
Physical Medium
Transmitter Receiver
TX
VCM
RX
VCM
TX Termination RX Termination
AC Coupling
Capacitor
AC Coupling
Capacitor
Physical Medium
1–44 Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Block Architecture
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
DC-Coupled Links
In a DC-coupled link, the transmitter DC VCM is seen unblocked at the receiver buffer.
Link VCM depends on the transmitter VCM and the receiver VCM. The on-chip or
off-chip receiver termination and biasing circuitry must ensure compatibility between
the transmitter and the receiver VCM. Figure 1–38 shows a DC-coupled link.
You might choose to use the DC-coupled high-speed link for these functional modes
only:
■Basic single- and double-width
■(OIF) CEI PHY interface
The following sections describe DC-coupling requirements for a high-speed link with
a Stratix IV GX device used as the transmitter, receiver, or both. Specifically, the
following link configurations are described:
■Stratix IV GX Transmitter (PCML) to Stratix IV GX Receiver (PCML)
■Stratix II GX Transmitter (PCML) to Stratix IV GX Receiver (PCML)
■Stratix IV GX Transmitter (PCML) to Stratix II GX Receiver (PCML)
■LVDS Transmitter to Stratix IV GX Receiver (PCML)
Figure 1–38. DC-Coupled Link
Note to Figure 1–38:
(1) The receiver termination and biasing can be on-chip or off-chip.
Physical Medium
Transmitter Receiver
TX
VCM
RX
VCM
TX Termination RX Termination
Physical Medium
Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices 1–45
Transceiver Block Architecture
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Figure 1–39 shows a typical Stratix IV GX transmitter (PCML) to Stratix IV GX
Receiver (PCML) DC-coupled link.
Table 1–19 lists the allowed transmitter and receiver settings in a Stratix IV GX
transmitter (PCML) to Stratix IV GX receiver (PCML) DC-coupled link.
Figure 1–39. Stratix IV GX Transmitter (PCML) to Stratix IV GX Receiver (PCML)
Note to Figure 1–39:
(1) RS is the parasitic resistance present in the on-chip RX termination and biasing circuitry.
Physical Medium
Stratix IV GX
Receiver
TX
VCM RX
VCM
V
CCH
= 1.4 V/1.5 V
Stratix IV GX
Transmitter
42.5/50/60/75-
TX Termination
Ω
0.65 V
0.82 V
R
s
42.5/50/60/75-
TX Termination
Ω42.5/50/60/75-
RX Termination
Ω42.5/50/60/75-
RX Termination
Ω
Physical Medium
(1)
Table 1–19. Settings for a Stratix IV GX Transmitter (PCML) to Stratix IV GX Receiver (PCML) DC-Coupled Link
Transmitter (Stratix IV GX) Settings Receiver (Stratix IV GX) Settings
Data Rate VCCH (1) TX VCM Differential
Termination Data Rate RX VCM Differential
Termination
600-8500 Mbps 1.4 V/1.5 V 0.65 V 85/100/120/150 600-8500 Mbps 0.82 V 85/100/120/150
Note to Table 1–19:
(1) VCCH = 1.5 V can support data rates from 600 Mbps to 6500 Mbps. VCCH = 1.4 V can support data rates from 600 Mbps to 8500 Mbps.
1–46 Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Block Architecture
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Figure 1–40 shows the Stratix II GX transmitter (PCML) to Stratix IV GX receiver
(PCML) coupled link.
Table 1–20 lists the allowed transmitter and receiver settings in a Stratix II GX to
Stratix IV GX DC-coupled link.
Figure 1–40. Stratix II GX Transmitter (PCML) to Stratix IV GX Receiver (PCML)
Note to Figure 1–40:
(1) RS is the parasitic resistance present in the on-chip RX termination and biasing circuitry.
Physical Medium
Stratix IV GX
Receiver
TX
VCM RX
VCM
V
CCH
= 1.2 V/1.5 V
Stratix II GX
Transmitter
50/60/75-
TX Termination
Ω
50/60/75-
TX Termination
Ω
0.6 V/0.7 V
42.5/50/60/75-
RX Termination
Ω
0.82 V
R
s
42.5/50/60/75-
RX Termination
Ω
(1)
Physical Medium
Table 1–20. Settings for a Stratix II GX to Stratix IV GX DC-Coupled Link
Transmitter (Stratix II GX) Settings Receiver (Stratix IV GX) Settings
Data Rate VCCH (1) TX VCM (1) Differential
Termination Data Rate RX VCM Differential
Termination
600-6375 Mbps 1.5 V
(1.5 V PCML) 0.6 V/0.7 V 100/120/150 600-6375 Mbps 0.82 V 100/120/150
Note to Table 1–20:
(1) VCCH = 1.5 V with TX VCM = 0.7 V can support data rates from 600 Mbps to 3125 Mbps. VCCH = 1.5 V with TX VCM = 0.6 V can support data rates
from 600 Mbps to 6375 Mbps.
Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices 1–47
Transceiver Block Architecture
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Figure 1–41 shows the Stratix IV GX transmitter (PCML) to Stratix II GX receiver
(PCML) DC-coupled link.
Table 1–21 lists the allowed transmitter and receiver settings in a Stratix IV GX
transmitter (PCML) to Stratix II GX receiver (PCML) DC-coupled link.
Figure 1–41. Stratix IV GX Transmitter (PCML) to Stratix II GX Receiver (PCML)
Note to Figure 1–41:
(1) RS is the parasitic resistance present in the on-chip RX termination and biasing circuitry.
Physical Medium
Stratix II GX
Receiver
TX
VCM RX
VCM
50/60/75-
RX Termination
Ω
V
CCH
= 1.4/1.5 V
Stratix IV GX
Transmitter
42.5/50/60/75-
TX Termination
Ω
0.65 V
50/60/75-
RX Termination
Ω
0.85 V
R
s
42.5/50/60/75-
TX Termination
Ω
Physical Medium
(1)
Table 1–21. Settings for a Stratix IV GX to Stratix II GX DC-Coupled Link
Transmitter (Stratix IV GX) Settings Receiver (Stratix II GX) Settings
Data Rate VCCH (1) TX VCM Differential
Termination Data Rate I/O
Standard RX VCM Differential
Termination
600-6375 Mbps 1.4/1.5 V 0.65 V 100/120/150 600-6375 Mbps 1.4/1.5 V
PCML 0.85 V 100/120/150
Note to Table 1–21:
(1) VCCH = 1.5 V can support data rates from 600 Mbps to 6500 Mbps. VCCH = 1.4 V can support data rates from 600 Mbps to 6375 Mbps.
1–48 Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Block Architecture
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Figure 1–42 shows the LVDS transmitter to Stratix IV GX receiver (PCML)
DC-coupled link.
Table 1–22 lists the allowed transmitter and receiver settings in a LVDS transmitter to
Stratix IV GX receiver DC-coupled link.
Link Coupling for Stratix IV GT Devices
Stratix IV GT devices allow the high-speed links to be AC- or DC-coupled links
(AC-coupling allowed for the entire data rate range between 600 Mbps and
11.3 Gbps).
Table 1–23 lists the allowed DC-coupling scenarios for Stratix IV GT devices.
Figure 1–42. LVDS Transmitter to Stratix IV GX Receiver (PCML)
Note to Figure 1–42:
(1) RS is the parasitic resistance present in the on-chip RX termination and biasing circuitry.
Table 1–22. Settings for a LVDS transmitter to Stratix IV GX Receiver DC-Coupled Link (1)
Receiver (Stratix IV GX) Settings
RX VCM Differential Termination RS
1.1 V 100 (2)
Notes to Table 1–22:
(1) When DC-coupling an LVDS transmitter to the Stratix IV GX receiver, use RX VCM = 1.1 V and series resistance
value RS to verify compliance with the LVDS specification.
(2) Pending characterization.
Physical Medium
(1)
Stratix IV GX
Receiver
RX
VCM
LVDS
Transmitter
50-
RX Termination
Ω
1.1 V
Rs
50-
RX Termination
Ω
Physical Medium
Table 1–23. Allowed DC-Coupling Scenarios for Stratix IV GT Devices (Part 1 of 2)
From
(Transmitter I/O Standard)
To
(Receiver I/O Standard) Data Rate Range Conditions
Stratix IV GT Transmitter
(1.4-V PCML)
Stratix IV GT Receiver
(1.4-V PCML) 600 Mbps to 11.3 Gbps
■TX VCM = 0.65 V
■RX VCM = 0.82 V
Stratix IV GX Transmitter
(1.4-V PCML)
Stratix IV GT Receiver
(1.4-V PCML) 600 Mbps to 8.5 Gbps
■TX VCM = 0.65 V
■RX VCM = 0.82 V
Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices 1–49
Transceiver Block Architecture
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Programmable Equalization and DC Gain
The transfer function of the physical medium can be represented as a low-pass filter in
the frequency domain. Frequency components below –3 dB frequency pass through
with minimal loss. Frequency components greater than –3 dB frequency are
attenuated as a function of frequency due to skin-effect and dielectric losses. This
variation in frequency response yields data-dependent jitter and other ISI effects,
which can cause incorrect sampling of the input data.
Each Stratix IV GX and GT receiver buffer has independently programmable
equalization circuitry that boosts the high-frequency gain of the incoming signal,
thereby compensating for the low-pass filter effects of the physical medium. The
amount of high-frequency gain required depends on the loss characteristics of the
physical medium. Stratix IV GX and GT equalization circuitry supports 16
equalization settings that provide up to 16 dB of high-frequency boost. You can select
the appropriate equalization setting in the ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager.
Stratix IV GX and GT receiver buffers also support programmable DC gain circuitry.
Unlike equalization circuitry, DC gain circuitry provides equal boost to the incoming
signal across the frequency spectrum. The receiver buffer supports DC gain settings of
0, 3, 6, 9, and 12 dB. You can select the appropriate DC gain setting in the ALTGX
MegaWizard Plug-In Manager.
Signal Threshold Detection Circuitry
In PCIe mode, you can enable the optional signal threshold detection circuitry by not
selecting the Force signal detection option in the ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In
Manager. If enabled, this option senses whether the signal level present at the receiver
input buffer is above the signal detect threshold voltage that you specified in the
What is the signal detect and signal loss threshold? option in the ALTGX
MegaWizard Plug-In Manager.
1The appropriate signal detect threshold level that complies with the PCIe compliance
parameter VRX-IDLE-DETDIFFp-p is available in the DC and Switching Characteristics
for Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Signal threshold detection circuitry has a hysteresis response that filters out any
high-frequency ringing caused by inter-symbol interference or high-frequency losses
in the transmission medium. If the signal threshold detection circuitry senses the
signal level present at the receiver input buffer to be higher than the signal detect
threshold, it asserts the
rx_signaldetect
signal high. Otherwise, the signal threshold
detection circuitry de-asserts the
rx_signaldetect
signal low.
Stratix II GX Transmitter
(1.5-V PCML)
Stratix IV GT Receiver
(1.4-V PCML) 600 Mbps to 6.375 Gbps
■TX VCM = 0.7 V
(600 Mbps to 3.125 Gbps)
■TX VCM = 0.6 V
(3.125 Gbps to 6.375 Gbps)
■RX VCM = 0.82 V
Third-Party LVDS Transmitter Stratix IV GT Receiver
(LVDS) 600 Mbps to 6.5 Gbps ■RX VCM = 1.1 V
Table 1–23. Allowed DC-Coupling Scenarios for Stratix IV GT Devices (Part 2 of 2)
From
(Transmitter I/O Standard)
To
(Receiver I/O Standard) Data Rate Range Conditions
1–50 Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Block Architecture
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Adaptive Equalization (AEQ)
Stratix IV GX and GT receivers offer an Adaptive Equalization feature that
automatically compensates for losses on the receiver channels. High-speed interface
systems are used at different data rates with multiple backplane environments. These
systems require different equalization settings to compensate for changing data rates
and back plane characteristics. Manually selecting optimal equalization settings is
cumbersome under these changing system characteristics. The Adaptive Equalization
feature solves this problem by enabling the Stratix IV device to continuously tune the
receiver equalization settings based on the frequency content of the incoming signal
and comparing it with internally generated reference signals.
Without this feature, you would have to tune the receiver channel’s equalization
stages manually, finding the optimal settings through trial and error, then locking in
those values at compile time.
The AEQ block resides within the PMA of the receiver channel and is available on the
four regular channels of a transceiver block. To use AEQ, you must first enable the
AEQ hardware in the ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager and the AEQ control
block in the ALTGX_RECONFIG MegaWizard Plug-In Manager.
To enable the AEQ feature, in ALTGX and ALTGX_RECONFIG MegaWizard Plug-In
Managers, select the Enable adaptive equalizer control option.
When you select AEQ, two ports,
aeq_fromgxb[]
and
aeq_togxb[]
, become available
on the ALTGX and ALTGX_RECONFIG instances. These ports provide an interface
between the PMA of the receiver channel and the AEQ control block in the
ALTGX_RECONFIG MegaWizard Plug-In Manager.
1AEQ hardware is not present in the CMU channels.
Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices 1–51
Transceiver Block Architecture
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Figure 1–43 shows the receiver channel data path with the AEQ feature.
Modes of Operation of the AEQ
Depending on the value you set for
reconfig_mode_sel[3:0]
, the AEQ has three
modes of operation:
■Continuous mode—This feature is not supported.
■One-time mode—The AEQ finds a stable setting of the receiver equalizer and
locks that value. After it is locked, the equalizer values are no longer changed. This
mode is available in one channel or all channels of the receiver. The
reconfig_mode_sel[3:0]
= 1001 in this mode.
■Powerdown mode—This feature is not supported.
fFor more information about the AEQ port connections and various waveforms in all
the above modes, refer to the Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices chapter.
EyeQ
The EyeQ hardware is available in Stratix IV GX and GT transceivers to analyze the
receiver data recovery path, including receiver gain, clock jitter and noise level. You
can use EyeQ to monitor the width of the incoming data eye and assess the quality of
the incoming signal.
Figure 1–43. Receiver Channel Data Path Showing AEQ
Receiver Channel 0
AEQ Hardware
busy
error
User Logic
ALTGX Instance 1
aeq_togxb[23:0]
aeq_fromgxb[7:0]
logical_channel_address = 0
rx_datain[0]
ALTGX Instance 2
Receiver Channel 1
logical_channel_address = 4
AEQ Hardware
rx_datain[1]
ALTGX_RECONFIG
AEQ Control
Block
aeq_fromgxb[15:8]
aeq_togxb[47:24]
reconfig_mode_sel[3:0]
1–52 Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Block Architecture
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Normally, the receiver CDR samples the incoming signal at the center of the eye.
When you enable the EyeQ hardware, it allows the CDR to sample across 32 different
positions within one unit interval (UI) of a data eye. You can manually control the
sampling points and check the bit-error rate (BER) at each of these 32 sampling points.
At the center of the eye, the BER is 0. As the sampling point is moved away from the
center of the eye towards an edge, the BER increases. By observing sampling points
with 0 BER and sampling points with higher BER, you can determine the eye width.
1The EyeQ hardware is available for both regular transceiver channels and CMU
channels.
The EyeQ block resides within the PMA of the receiver channel and is available for
both the transceiver channels and CMU channels of a transceiver block. Figure 1–44
shows the EyeQ feature within a receiver channel datapath.
1You must implement logic to check the bit error rate (BER). This includes a pattern
generator and checker.
Figure 1–44 shows the receiver channel data path using the EyeQ feature.
fFor more information about using the EyeQ feature, refer to the Dynamic
Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Figure 1–44. Receiver Channel Data Path showing the EyeQ Feature
busy
error
ctrl_writedata[15:0]
ctrl_address[15:0]
ctrl_write
ctrl_read
reconfig_fromgxb[17:0]
reconfig_togxb[3:0]
rx_datain[0]
ALTGX Instance
EyeQ Hardware
Receiver Channel 0
ALTGX_RECONFIG Instance
EyeQ Control
Block
ctrl_waitrequest
ctrl_readdata[15:0]
reconfig_mode_sel[3:0]
Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices 1–53
Transceiver Block Architecture
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Clock and Data Recovery Unit
Each Stratix IV GX and GT receiver channel has an independent CDR unit to recover
the clock from the incoming serial data stream. The high-speed and low-speed
recovered clocks are used to clock the receiver PMA and PCS blocks. Figure 1–45
shows the CDR block diagram.
The CDR operates either in LTR mode or LTD mode. In LTR mode, the CDR tracks the
input reference clock. In LTD mode, the CDR tracks the incoming serial data.
After the receiver power up and reset cycle, the CDR must be kept in LTR mode until
it locks to the input reference clock. After it is locked to the input reference clock, the
CDR output clock is trained to the configured data rate. The CDR can now switch to
LTD mode to recover the clock from incoming data. The LTR/LTD controller controls
the switch between LTR and LTD modes.
Lock-to-Reference (LTR) Mode
In LTR mode, the phase frequency detector in the CDR tracks the receiver input
reference clock,
rx_cruclk
. The PFD controls the charge pump that tunes the VCO in
the CDR. Depending on the data rate and the selected input reference clock frequency,
the Quartus II software automatically selects the appropriate /M and /L divider
values such that the CDR output clock frequency is half the data rate. An active high,
the
rx_pll_locked
status signal is asserted to indicate that the CDR has locked to the
phase and frequency of the receiver input reference clock. Figure 1–45 on page 1–53
shows the active blocks (in blue) when the CDR is in LTR mode.
1The phase detector (PD) is inactive in LTR mode.
Figure 1–45. Clock and Data Recovery Unit (1)
Note to Figure 1–45:
(1) The blue colored path is active in lock-to-reference mode; the red colored path is active in lock-to-data mode.
Clock and Data Recovery (CDR)Unit
Up
Down
rx_locktorefclk
rx_locktodata
signal detect
rx_freqlocked
rx_datain
rx_cruclk
LTR/LTD
Controller
Phase
Frequency
Detector
(PFD)
/2
Charge Pump
+
Loop Filter
VCO /L
/M
rx_pll_locked
Recovered Clock
Phase
Detector
(PD)
Down
Up
/2
/1, /2, /4
1–54 Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Block Architecture
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
You can drive the receiver input reference clock with the following clock sources:
■Dedicated REFCLK pins (
refclk0
and
refclk1
) of the associated transceiver block
■Inter-transceiver block (ITB) clock lines from other transceiver blocks on the same
side of the device (up to six ITB clock lines, two from each transceiver block)
■Global PLD clock driven by a dedicated clock input pin
■Clock output from the left and right PLLs in the FPGA fabric
Table 1–24 lists CDR /M and/L divider values.
For input reference clock frequencies greater than 325 MHz, the Quartus II software
automatically selects the appropriate /1, /2, or /4 pre-divider to meet the PFD input
frequency limitation of 325 MHz.
Lock-to-Data (LTD) Mode
The CDR must be in LTD mode to recover the clock from the incoming serial data
during normal operation. In LTD mode, the phase detector (PD) in the CDR tracks the
incoming serial data at the receiver buffer. Depending on the phase difference
between the incoming data and the CDR output clock, the PD controls the CDR
charge pump that tunes the VCO. Figure 1–45 on page 1–53 shows the active blocks
(in red) when the CDR is in LTD mode.
1The PFD is inactive in LTD mode. The
rx_pll_locked
signal toggles randomly and
has no significance in LTD mode.
After switching to LTD mode, it can take a maximum of 1 ms for the CDR to get
locked to the incoming data and produce a stable recovered clock. The actual lock
time depends on the transition density of the incoming data and the PPM difference
between the receiver input reference clock and the upstream transmitter reference
clock. The receiver PCS logic must be held in reset until the CDR produces a stable
recovered clock.
fFor more information about receiver reset recommendations, refer to the Reset Control
and Power Down in Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Table 1–24. CDR Divider Values
Parameter Value
/M Divider 4, 5, 8, 10, 16, 20, 25
/L Divider 1, 2, 4, 8
Note to Table 1–24:
(1) The maximum reference clock frequency of 672 MHz is only applicable to speed grades -2 and -3. For speed grade
-4, the maximum reference clock frequency is 637.5 MHz.
Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices 1–55
Transceiver Block Architecture
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
PCIe Clock Switch Circuitry
The feedback path from the CDR VCO to the PD has a /2 divider that is used in PCIe
mode configured at Gen2 (5 Gbps) data rate for the dynamic switch between Gen1
(2.5 Gbps) and Gen2 (5 Gbps) signaling rates. When the PHY-MAC layer instructs a
Gen2-to-Gen1 signaling rateswitch, the /2 divider is enabled. When the PHY-MAC
layer instructs a Gen1-to-Gen2 signaling rateswitch, the /2 divider is disabled. For
more information about the PCIe signaling rateswitch, refer to “Dynamic Switch
Between Gen1 (2.5 Gbps) and Gen2 (5 Gbps) Signaling Rate” on page 1–141.
1The /2 divider in the receiver CDR between the VCO and the PD is disabled in all
other functional modes.
LTR/LTD Controller
The LTR/LTD controller controls whether the CDR is in LTR or LTD mode. You can
configure the LTR/LTD controller either in automatic lock mode or manual lock
mode.
Two optional input ports (
rx_locktorefclk
and
rx_locktodata
) allow you to
configure the LTR/LTD controller in either automatic lock mode or manual lock
mode. Table 1–25 lists the relationship between these optional input ports and the
LTR/LTD controller lock mode.
1If you do not instantiate the optional
rx_locktorefclk
and
rx_locktodata
signals, the
Quartus II software automatically configures the LTR/LTD controller in automatic
lock mode.
Automatic Lock Mode
In automatic lock mode, the LTR/LTD controller initially sets the CDR to lock to the
input reference clock (LTR mode). After the CDR locks to the input reference clock,
the LTR/LTD controller automatically sets it to lock to the incoming serial data (LTD
mode) when the following three conditions are met:
■Signal threshold detection circuitry indicates the presence of valid signal levels at
the receiver input buffer
■Valid for PCIe mode only. This condition is defaulted to true for all other
modes.
■The CDR output clock is within the configured PPM frequency threshold setting
with respect to the input reference clock (frequency locked)
■The CDR output clock and the input reference clock are phase matched within
approximately 0.08 UI (phase locked)
The switch from LTR to LTD mode is indicated by the assertion of the
rx_freqlocked
signal.
Table 1–25. Optional Input Ports and LTR/LTD Controller Lock Mode
rx_locktorefclk rx_locktodata LTR/LTD Controller Lock Mode
1 0 Manual – LTR Mode
x 1 Manual – LTD Mode
0 0 Automatic Lock Mode
1–56 Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Block Architecture
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
In LTD mode, the CDR uses a phase detector to keep the recovered clock
phase-matched to the data. If the CDR does not stay locked to data due to frequency
drift or severe amplitude attenuation, the LTR/LTD controller switches the CDR back
to LTR mode to lock to the input reference clock. In automatic lock mode, the
LTR/LTD controller switches the CDR from LTD to LTR mode when the following
conditions are met:
■Signal threshold detection circuitry indicates the absence of valid signal levels at
the receiver input buffer
■Valid for PCIe mode only. This condition is defaulted to true for all other
modes.
■The CDR output clock is not within the configured PPM frequency threshold
setting with respect to the input reference clock
The switch from LTD to LTR mode is indicated by the de-assertion of the
rx_freqlocked
signal.
Manual Lock Mode
In automatic lock mode, the LTR/LTD controller relies on the PPM detector and the
phase relationship detector to set the CDR in LTR or LTD mode. The PPM detector
and phase relationship detector reaction times can be too long for some applications
that require faster CDR lock time. You can manually control the CDR to reduce its lock
time using the
rx_locktorefclk
and
rx_locktodata
ports. In manual lock mode, the
LTR/LTD controller sets the CDR in LTR or LTD mode depending on the logic level
on the
rx_locktorefclk
and
rx_locktodata
signals.
When the
rx_locktorefclk
signal is asserted high, the LTR/LTD controller forces the
CDR to lock to the reference clock. When the
rx_locktodata
signal is asserted high, it
forces the CDR to lock to data. When both signals are asserted, the
rx_locktodata
signal takes precedence over the
rx_locktorefclk
signal, forcing the CDR to lock to
data.
When the
rx_locktorefclk
signal is asserted high, the
rx_freqlocked
signal does not
have any significance and is always driven low, indicating that the CDR is in LTR
mode. When the
rx_locktodata
signal is asserted high, the
rx_freqlocked
signal is
always driven high, indicating that the CDR is in LTD mode. If both signals are de-
asserted, the CDR is in automatic lock mode.
1The Altera-recommended transceiver reset sequence varies depending on the CDR
lock mode.
fFor more information about reset sequence recommendations, refer to the Reset
Control and Power Down in Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Offset Cancellation in the Receiver Buffer and Receiver CDR
As silicon progresses towards smaller process nodes, the performance of circuits at
these smaller nodes depends more on process variations. These process variations
result in analog voltages that can be offset from the required ranges. Offset
cancellation logic corrects these offsets. The receiver buffer and receiver CDR require
offset cancellation.
Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices 1–57
Transceiver Block Architecture
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Offset cancellation is executed automatically once each time a Stratix IV GX and GT
device is powered on (after the device has finished programming and switches to user
mode as indicated by
CONFIG_DONE=1
). The control logic for offset cancellation is
integrated into the ALTGX_RECONFIG megafunction. The
reconfig_fromgxb
and
reconfig_togxb
buses and the necessary clocks must be connected between the
ALTGX instance and the ALTGX_RECONFIG instance.
1You must reprogram your device to restart the Offset Cancellation process.
fFor more information about offset cancellation control logic connectivity, refer to the
Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices chapter.
1During offset cancellation, signified by a high on the
busy
signal,
rx_analogreset
is
not relevant until the
busy
signal goes low.
Offset cancellation logic requires a separate clock. In PCIe mode, you must connect
the clock input to the
fixedclk
port provided by the ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In
Manager. The frequency of this clock input must be 125 MHz. For all other functional
modes, connect the clock input to the
reconfig_clk
port provided by the ALTGX
MegaWizard Plug-In Manager. The frequency of the clock connected to the
reconfig_clk
port must be within the range of 37.5 to 50 MHz. Figure 1–46 shows the
interface of the offset cancellation control logic (ALTGX_RECONFIG instance) and the
ALTGX instance.
The offset cancellation process begins by disconnecting the path from the receiver
input buffer to the receiver CDR. It then sets the receiver CDR into a fixed set of
dividers to guarantee a VCO clock rate that is within the range necessary to provide
proper offset cancellation. Subsequently, the offset cancellation process goes through
various states and culminates in the offset cancellation of the receiver buffer and the
receiver CDR.
Figure 1–46. Interface of Offset Cancellation Control Logic to the ALTGX Instance
[
ALTGX_RECONFIG Instance
Offset Cancellation
Logic
Transceiver Block
reconfig_togxb
reconfig_fromgxb
RX
TX
Buffer CDR
RX
TX
Buffer CDR
RX
TX
Buffer CDR
RX
TX
Buffer CDR
Dynamic Re-config
logic
busy
ALTGX Instance with 4 Channels
reconfig_clk
reconfig_clk
1–58 Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Block Architecture
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
After offset cancellation is complete, the divider settings are restored. Then the
reconfiguration block sends and receives data to the ALTGX instance using the
reconfig_togxb
and
reconfig_fromgxb
buses. Connect the buses between the
ALTGX_RECONFIG and ALTGX instances. The de-assertion of the
busy
signal from
the offset cancellation control logic indicates the offset cancellation process is
complete.
fDue to the offset cancellation process, the transceiver reset sequence has changed. For
more information about the offset cancellation process, refer to the Reset Control and
Power Down in Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Deserializer
The deserializer block clocks in serial input data from the receiver buffer using the
high-speed serial recovered clock and deserializes it using the low-speed parallel
recovered clock. It forwards the deserialized data to the receiver PCS channel.
In single-width mode, the deserializer supports 8-bit and 10-bit deserialization
factors. In double-width mode, the deserializer supports 16-bit and 20-bit
deserialization factors.
Figure 1–47 shows the deserializer operation in single-width mode with a 10-bit
deserialization factor.
Figure 1–47. Deserializer Operation in Single-Width Mode
D9
D8
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
D9
D8
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
10
High-Speed Serial Recovered Clock
Low-Speed Parallel Recovered Clock
Clock
Recovery
Unit
Received Data
To Word
Aligner
Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices 1–59
Transceiver Block Architecture
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Figure 1–48 shows the serial bit order of the deserializer block input and the parallel
data output of the deserializer block in single-width mode with a 10-bit
deserialization factor. The serial stream (0101111100) is deserialized to a value 10'h17C.
The serial data is assumed to be received LSB to MSB.
Word Aligner
Because the data is serialized before transmission and then deserialized at the
receiver, it loses the word boundary of the upstream transmitter upon deserialization.
The word aligner receives parallel data from the deserializer and restores the word
boundary based on a pre-defined alignment pattern that must be received during link
synchronization.
Serial protocols such as PCIe, XAUI, Gigabit Ethernet, Serial RapidIO, and
SONET/SDH, specify a standard word alignment pattern. For proprietary protocols,
the Stratix IV GX and GT transceiver architecture allows you to select a custom word
alignment pattern specific to your implementation.
In addition to restoring the word boundary, the word aligner also implements the
following features:
■Synchronization state machine in functional modes such as PCIe, XAUI, GIGE,
Serial RapidIO, and Basic single-width
■Programmable run length violation detection in all functional modes
■Receiver polarity inversion in all functional modes except PCIe
■Receiver bit reversal in Basic single-width and Basic double-width modes
■Receiver byte reversal in Basic double-width modes
Depending on the configured functional mode, the word aligner operates in one of
the following three modes:
■Manual alignment mode
■Automatic synchronization state machine mode
■Bit-slip mode
Figure 1–48. Deserializer Bit Order in Single-Width Mode
0101111100 1010000011
0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 10
Low-Speed Parallel Clock
High-Speed Serial Clock
datain
dataout
1–60 Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Block Architecture
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Figure 1–49 shows the word aligner operation in all supported configurations.
Word Aligner in Single-Width Mode
In single-width mode, the PMA-PCS interface is either 8 or 10 bits wide. In 8-bit wide
PMA-PCS interface modes, the word aligner receives 8-bit wide data from the
deserializer. In 10-bit wide PMA-PCS interface modes, the word aligner receives
10-bit wide data from the deserializer. Depending on the configured functional mode,
you can configure the word aligner in manual alignment mode, automatic
synchronization state machine mode, or bit-slip mode.
Word Aligner in Single-Width Mode with 8-Bit PMA-PCS Interface Modes
The following functional modes support the 8-bit PMA-PCS interface:
■SONET/SDH OC-12
■SONET/SDH OC-48
■Basic single-width
Table 1–26 lists the word aligner configurations allowed in functional modes with an
8-bit PMA-PCS interface.
Manual Alignment Mode Word Aligner with 8-Bit PMA-PCS Interface Modes
In manual alignment mode, the word aligner operation is controlled by the input
signal
rx_enapatternalign
. The word aligner operation is edge-sensitive to the
rx_enapatternalign
signal. After de-assertion of
rx_digitalreset
, a rising edge on
the
rx_enapatternalign
signal triggers the word aligner to look for the word
alignment pattern in the received data stream. In SONET/SDH OC-12 and OC-48
modes, the word aligner looks for 16'hF628 (A1A2) or 32'hF6F62828 (A1A1A2A2),
Figure 1–49. Word Aligner in All Supported Configurations
PMA-PCS Interface Width
Single-Width
8-Bit Wide 10-Bit Wide
Manual
Alignment
(OC-12, OC-48,
Basic Single-Width)
Bit-Slip
(Basic
Single-Width)
Manual
Alignment
(Basic
Single-Width) Automatic
Synchronization
State Machine
(PCIe
XAUI, GIGE,
Basic Single-Width,
Serial RapidIO)
Bit-Slip
(Basic Single-Width,
SDI)
Double-Width
16-Bit Wide 20-Bit Wide
Manual
Alignment
(Basic
Double-Width,
OC-96)
Bit-Slip
(Basic
Double-Width)
Manual
Alignment
(Basic
Double-Width)
Bit-Slip
(Basic
Double-Width)
Table 1–26. Word Aligner Configurations with an 8-Bit PMA-PCS Interface
Functional Mode Allowed Word Configurations Allowed Word Alignment
Pattern Length
SONET/SDH OC-12 Manual Alignment 16 bits
SONET/SDH OC-48 Manual Alignment 16 bits
Basic single-width Manual Alignment, Bit-Slip 16 bits
Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices 1–61
Transceiver Block Architecture
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
depending on whether the input signal
rx_a1a2size
is driven low or high,
respectively. In Basic single-width mode, the word aligner looks for the 16-bit word
alignment pattern programmed in the ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager. The
word aligner aligns the 8-bit word boundary to the first word alignment pattern
received after the rising edge on the
rx_enapatternalign
signal.
Two status signals,
rx_syncstatus
and
rx_patterndetect
, with the same latency as
the datapath, are forwarded to the FPGA fabric to indicate word aligner status. On
receiving the first word alignment pattern after the rising edge on the
rx_enapatternalign
signal, both the
rx_syncstatus
and
rx_patterndetect
signals
are driven high for one parallel clock cycle synchronous to the MSByte of the word
alignment pattern. Any word alignment pattern received thereafter in the same word
boundary causes only the
rx_patterndetect
signal to go high for one clock cycle.
1For the word aligner to re-synchronize to a new word boundary, you must de-assert
rx_enapatternalign
and re-assert it again to create a rising edge. After a rising edge
on the
rx_enapatternalign
signal, if the word alignment pattern is found in a
different word boundary, the word aligner re-synchronizes to the new word boundary
and asserts the
rx_syncstatus
and
rx_patterndetect
signals for one parallel clock
cycle.
Figure 1–50 shows word aligner behavior in SONET/SDH OC-12 functional mode.
The LSByte (8'hF6) and the MSByte (8'h28) of the 16-bit word alignment pattern are
received in parallel clock cycles n and n + 1, respectively. The
rx_syncstatus
and
rx_patterndetect
signals are both driven high for one parallel clock cycle
synchronous to the MSByte (8'h28) of the word alignment pattern. After initial word
alignment, the 16-bit word alignment pattern is again received across the word
boundary in clock cycles m, m + 1, and m + 2. The word aligner does not re-align to
the new word boundary because of the lack of a preceding rising edge on the
rx_enapatternalign
signal. If you create a rising edge on the
rx_enapatternalign
signal before the word alignment pattern is received across clock cycles m, m + 1, and
m + 2, the word aligner re-aligns to the new word boundary, causing both the
rx_syncstatus
and
rx_patterndetect
signals to go high for one parallel clock cycle.
Figure 1–50. Bit-Slip Mode in 8-Bit PMA-PCS Interface Mode
11110110 00101000 10001111
28
rx_dataout[7:0]
rx_enapatternalign
rx_patterndetect
rx_syncstatus
0110xxxx xxxx0010
F6 6x 8F x2
nn + 1 mm + 1 m + 2
1–62 Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Block Architecture
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Bit-Slip Mode Word Aligner with 8-Bit PMA-PCS Interface Modes
Basic single-width mode with 8-bit PMA-PCS interface width allows the word aligner
to be configured in bit-slip mode. The word aligner operation is controlled by the
input signal
rx_bitslip
in bit-slip mode. At every rising edge of the
rx_bitslip
signal, the bit-slip circuitry slips one bit into the received data stream, effectively
shifting the word boundary by one bit. In bit-slip mode, the word aligner status signal
rx_patterndetect
is driven high for one parallel clock cycle when the received data
after bit-slipping matches the 16-bit word alignment pattern programmed in the
ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager.
You can implement a bit-slip controller in the FPGA fabric that monitors either the
rx_dataout
signal and/or the
rx_patterndetect
signal and controls the
rx_bitslip
signal to achieve word alignment.
Figure 1–51 shows an example of the word aligner configured in bit-slip mode. For
this example, consider that 8'b11110000 is received back-to-back and
16'b0000111100011110 is specified as the word alignment pattern. A rising edge on the
rx_bitslip
signal at time n + 1 slips a single bit 0 at the MSB position, forcing the
rx_dataout
to 8'b01111000. Another rising edge on the
rx_bitslip
signal at time n + 5
forces
rx_dataout
to 8'b00111100. Another rising edge on the
rx_bitslip
signal at
time n + 9 forces
rx_dataout
to 8'b00011110. Another rising edge on the
rx_bitslip
signal at time n + 13 forces the
rx_dataout
to 8'b00001111. At this instance,
rx_dataout
in cycles n + 12 and n + 13 is 8'b00011110 and 8'b00001111, respectively,
which matches the specified 16-bit alignment pattern 16'b0000111100011110. This
results in the assertion of the
rx_patterndetect
signal.
Figure 1–51. Word Aligner Configured in Bit-Slip Mode
01111000
n
11110000
00111100 00011110 00001111
rx_clkout
rx_datain
rx_dataout[7:0]
rx_bitslip
rx_patterndetect
11110000
n + 1 n + 2 n + 3 n + 4 n + 5 n + 6 n + 7 n + 8 n + 9 n + 10 n + 11 n + 12 n + 13 n + 14
Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices 1–63
Transceiver Block Architecture
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Word Aligner in Single-Width Mode with 10-Bit PMA-PCS Interface Modes
The following functional modes support the 10-bit PMA-PCS interface:
■PCIe Gen1 and Gen2
■Serial RapidIO
■XAUI
■GIGE
■SDI
■Basic single-width mode
This section describes the following word aligner 10-bit PMA-PCS interface modes:
■Automatic synchronization state machine mode with 10-bit PMA-PCS interface
mode
■Manual alignment mode with 10-bit PMA-PCS interface mode
■Bit-slip mode with 10-bit PMA-PCS interface mode
Table 1–27 lists the word aligner configurations allowed in functional modes with a
10-bit PMA-PCS interface.
Automatic Synchronization State Machine Mode Word Aligner with 10-Bit PMA-PCS
Interface Mode
Protocols such as PCIe, XAUI, Gigabit Ethernet, and Serial RapidIO require the
receiver PCS logic to implement a synchronization state machine to provide hysteresis
during link synchronization. Each of these protocols defines a specific number of
synchronization code groups that the link must receive to acquire synchronization
and a specific number of erroneous code groups that it must receive to fall out of
synchronization.
In PCIe, XAUI, Gigabit Ethernet, and Serial RapidIO functional modes, the Quartus II
software configures the word aligner in automatic synchronization state machine
mode. It automatically selects the word alignment pattern length and pattern as
specified by each protocol. In each of these functional modes, the protocol-compliant
synchronization state machine is implemented in the word aligner.
Table 1–27. Word Aligner Configurations with a 10-Bit PMA-PCS Interface
Functional Mode Allowed Word Aligner Configurations Allowed Word Alignment
Pattern Length
PCIe Automatic synchronization state machine 10 bits
Serial RapidIO Automatic synchronization state machine 10 bits
XAUI Automatic synchronization state machine 7 bits, 10 bits
GIGE Automatic synchronization state machine 7 bits, 10 bits
SDI Bit-slip N/A
Basic single-width
mode
Manual alignment, Automatic
synchronization state machine, Bit-slip 7 bits, 10 bits
1–64 Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Block Architecture
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
In Basic single-width functional mode with a 10-bit PMA-PCS interface, you can
configure the word aligner in automatic synchronization state machine mode by
selecting the Use the built-in synchronization state machine option in the ALTGX
MegaWizard Plug-In Manager. It also allows you to program a custom 7-bit or 10-bit
word alignment pattern that the word aligner uses for synchronization.
1The 10-bit input data to the word aligner configured in automatic synchronization
state machine mode must be 8B/10B encoded.
Table 1–28 lists the synchronization state machine parameters that the Quartus II
software allows in supported functional modes. The synchronization state machine
parameters are fixed for PCIe, XAUI, GIGE, and Serial RapidIO modes as specified by
the respective protocol. For Basic single-width mode, you can program these
parameters as suited to your proprietary protocol implementation.
After de-assertion of the
rx_digitalreset
signal in automatic synchronization state
machine mode, the word aligner starts looking for the word alignment pattern or
synchronization code groups in the received data stream. When the programmed
number of valid synchronization code groups or ordered sets is received, the
rx_syncstatus
signal is driven high to indicate that synchronization is acquired. The
rx_syncstatus
signal is constantly driven high until the programmed number of
erroneous code groups is received without receiving intermediate good groups; after
which the
rx_syncstatus
is driven low. The word aligner indicates loss of
synchronization (
rx_syncstatus
remains low) until the programmed number of valid
synchronization code groups are received again.
Manual Alignment Mode Word Aligner with 10-Bit PMA-PCS Interface Mode
In Basic single-width mode with a 10-bit PMA-PCS interface, you can configure the
word aligner in manual alignment mode by selecting the Use manual word
alignment mode option in the ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager.
In manual alignment mode, the word aligner operation is controlled by the input
signal
rx_enapatternalign
. The word aligner operation is level-sensitive to the
rx_enapatternalign
signal. If the
rx_enapatternalign
signal is held high, the word
aligner looks for the programmed 7-bit or 10-bit word alignment pattern in the
received data stream. It updates the word boundary if it finds the word alignment
pattern in a new word boundary. If the
rx_enapatternalign
signal is de-asserted low,
the word aligner maintains the current word boundary even when it sees the word
alignment pattern in a new word boundary.
Table 1–28. Synchronization State Machine Functional Modes
Functional Mode PCIe XAUI GIGE Serial
RapidIO
Basic
Single-Width
Mode
Number of valid synchronization code groups or
ordered sets received to achieve
synchronization
4 4 3 127 1 to 256
Number of erroneous code groups received to
lose synchronization 17 4 4 3 1 to 64
Number of continuous good code groups
received to reduce the error count by one 16 4 4 255 1 to 256
Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices 1–65
Transceiver Block Architecture
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Two status signals,
rx_syncstatus
and
rx_patterndetect
, with the same latency as
the datapath, are forwarded to the FPGA fabric to indicate the word aligner status.
After receiving the first word alignment pattern after the
rx_enapatternalign
signal
is asserted high, both the
rx_syncstatus
and
rx_patterndetect
signals are driven
high for one parallel clock cycle. Any word alignment pattern received thereafter in
the same word boundary causes only the
rx_patterndetect
signal to go high for one
clock cycle. Any word alignment pattern received thereafter in a different word
boundary causes the word aligner to re-align to the new word boundary only if the
rx_enapatternalign
signal is held high. The word aligner asserts the
rx_syncstatus
signal for one parallel clock cycle whenever it re-aligns to the new word boundary.
Figure 1–52 shows the manual alignment mode word aligner operation with 10-bit
PMA-PCS interface mode. In this example, a /K28.5/ (10'b0101111100) is specified as
the word alignment pattern. The word aligner aligns to the /K28.5/ alignment
pattern in cycle n because the
rx_enapatternalign
signal is asserted high. The
rx_syncstatus
signal goes high for one clock cycle, indicating alignment to a new
word boundary. The
rx_patterndetect
signal also goes high for one clock cycle to
indicate initial word alignment. At time n + 1, the
rx_enapatternalign
signal is
de-asserted to instruct the word aligner to lock the current word boundary. The
alignment pattern is detected again in a new word boundary across cycles n + 2 and
n + 3. The word aligner does not align to this new word boundary because the
rx_enapatternalign
signal is held low. The /K28.5/ word alignment pattern is
detected again in the current word boundary during cycle n + 5, causing the
rx_patterndetect
signal to go high for one parallel clock cycle.
1If the word alignment pattern is known to be unique and does not appear between
word boundaries, you can constantly hold the
rx_enapatternalign
signal high
because there is no possibility of false word alignment. If there is a possibility of the
word alignment pattern occurring across word boundaries, you must control the
rx_enapatternalign
signal to lock the word boundary after the desired word
alignment is achieved to avoid re-alignment to an incorrect word boundary.
Figure 1–52. Word Aligner with 10-Bit PMA-PCS Manual Alignment Mode
rx_clkout
rx_enapatternalign
rx_patterndetect
rx_syncstatus
rx_dataout[10..0] 111110000 0101111100 111110000 1111100001000000101 01011111001111001010
n n + 1 n + 2 n + 3 n + 4 n + 5
1–66 Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Block Architecture
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Bit-Slip Mode Word Aligner with 10-Bit PMA-PCS Interface Mode
In some Basic single-width configurations with a 10-bit PMA-PCS interface, you can
configure the word aligner in bit-slip mode by selecting the Use manual bit slipping
mode option in the ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager.
The word aligner operation for Basic single-width with a 10-bit PMA-PCS interface is
similar to the word aligner operation in Basic single-width mode with an 8-bit
PMA-PCS interface. For word aligner operation in bit-slip mode, refer to “Manual
Alignment Mode Word Aligner with 8-Bit PMA-PCS Interface Modes” on page 1–60.
The only difference is that the bit-slip word aligner with 10-bit PMA-PCS interface
modes allows 7-bit and 10-bit word alignment patterns, whereas the one with 8-bit
PMA-PCS interface modes allows only 16-bit word alignment patterns.
Word Aligner in Double-Width Mode
In double-width mode, the PMA-PCS interface is either 16 or 20 bits wide. In 16-bit
PMA-PCS interface modes, the word aligner receives 16 bit wide data from the
deserializer. In 20-bit PMA-PCS interface modes, the word aligner receives 10-bit
wide data from the deserializer. Depending on the configured functional mode, you
can configure the word aligner in manual alignment mode or bit-slip mode.
Automatic synchronization state machine mode is not supported for word aligner in
double-width mode.
Word Aligner in Double-Width Mode with 16-Bit PMA-PCS Interface Modes
The following functional modes support the 16-bit PMA-PCS interface:
■SONET/SDH OC-96
■(OIF) CEI PHY interface
■Basic double-width
Table 1–29 lists the word aligner configurations allowed in functional modes with a
16-bit PMA-PCS interface.
Manual Alignment Mode Word Aligner with 16-Bit PMA-PCS Interface Modes
In manual alignment mode, the word aligner starts looking for the programmed 8-bit,
16-bit, or 32-bit word alignment pattern in the received data stream as soon as
rx_digitalreset
is de-asserted low. It aligns to the first word alignment pattern
received regardless of the logic level driven on the
rx_enapatternalign
signal. Any
word alignment pattern received thereafter in a different word boundary does not
cause the word aligner to re-align to this new word boundary. After the initial word
alignment following de-assertion of the
rx_digitalreset
signal, if a word
re-alignment is required, you must use the
rx_enapatternalign
signal.
Table 1–29. Word Aligner Configurations with 16-Bit PMA-PCS Interface (1)
Functional Mode Allowed Word Aligner
Configurations
Allowed Word Alignment
Pattern Length
SONET/SDH OC-96 Manual alignment 16 bits, 32 bits
Basic double-width Manual alignment, Bit-slip 8 bits, 16 bits, 32 bits
Note to Table 1–29:
(1) The word aligner is bypassed in (OIF) CEI PHY interface mode.
Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices 1–67
Transceiver Block Architecture
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Word aligner operation is controlled by the input signal
rx_enapatternalign
and is
edge-sensitive to the
rx_enapatternalign
signal. A rising edge on the
rx_enapatternalign
signal triggers the word aligner to look for the word alignment
pattern in the received data stream. The word aligner aligns the 16-bit word boundary
to the first word alignment pattern received after the rising edge on the
rx_enapatternalign
signal. Any word alignment pattern received thereafter in a
different word boundary does not cause the word aligner to re-align to this new word
boundary. If another word re-alignment is required, you must de-assert and re-assert
the
rx_enapatternalign
signal to create a rising edge on this signal.
Two status signals,
rx_syncstatus
and
rx_patterndetect
, with the same latency as
the datapath, are forwarded to the FPGA fabric to indicate word aligner status.
After receiving the first word alignment pattern, the
rx_patterndetect
signal is
driven high for one parallel clock cycle synchronous to the data that matches the
MSByte of the word alignment pattern. Any word alignment pattern received
thereafter in the same word boundary causes
rx_patterndetect
to go high for one
parallel clock cycle.
After receiving the first word alignment pattern, the
rx_syncstatus
signal is
constantly driven high until the word aligner sees another rising edge on the
rx_enapatternalign
signal. The rising edge on the
rx_enapatternalign
signal
re-triggers the word alignment operation.
Figure 1–53 shows the manual alignment mode word aligner operation in 16-bit
PMA-PCS interface mode. In this example, a 16'hF628 is specified as the word
alignment pattern. The word aligner aligns to the 16'hF628 pattern received in cycle n
after de-assertion of
rx_digitalreset
. The
rx_patterndetect[1]
signal is driven
high for one parallel clock cycle. The
rx_syncstatus[1]
signal is driven high
constantly until cycle n + 2, after which it is driven low because of the rising edge on
the
rx_enapatternalign
signal that re-triggers the word aligner operation. The word
aligner receives the word alignment pattern again in cycle n + 4, causing the
rx_patterndetect[1]
signal to be driven high for one parallel clock cycle and the
rx_syncstatus[1]
signal to be driven high constantly.
Figure 1–53. Manual Alignment Mode Word Aligner in 16-Bit PMA-PCS Interface Modes
xxxx F628 xxxx xxxx xxxx F628 xxxx xxxx
00 10 0011 10 11
00 10 10
00 00
n n + 1 n + 2 n + 3 n + 4
rx_dataout
rx_digitalreset
rx_enapatternalign
rx_syncstatus[1:0]
rx_patterndetect[1:0]
1–68 Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Block Architecture
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Bit-Slip Mode Word Aligner with 16-Bit PMA-PCS Interface Modes
In some Basic double-width configurations with 16-bit PMA-PCS interface, you can
configure the word aligner in bit-slip mode by selecting the Use manual bit slipping
mode option in the ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager.
The word aligner operation for Basic double-width with 16-bit PMA-PCS interface is
similar to the word aligner operation in Basic single-width mode with 8-bit PMA-PCS
interface. For word aligner operation in bit-slip mode, refer to “Word Aligner in
Single-Width Mode with 8-Bit PMA-PCS Interface Modes” on page 1–60. The only
difference is that the bit-slip word aligner in 16-bit PMA-PCS interface modes allows
8-bit and 16-bit word alignment patterns, whereas the bit-slip word aligner in 8-bit
PMA-PCS interface modes allows only a 16-bit word alignment pattern.
Word Aligner in Double-Width Mode with 20-Bit PMA-PCS Interface Modes
A 20-bit PMA-PCS interface is supported only in Basic double-width mode.
Table 1–30 lists the word aligner configurations allowed in functional modes with a
20-bit PMA-PCS interface.
Manual Alignment Mode Word Aligner with 20-Bit PMA-PCS Interface Modes
The word aligner operation in Basic double-width mode with 20-bit PMA-PCS
interface is similar to the word aligner operation in Basic double-width mode with a
16-bit PMA-PCS interface. For word aligner operation in manual alignment mode,
refer to “Word Aligner in Double-Width Mode with 16-Bit PMA-PCS Interface
Modes” on page 1–66. The only difference is that the manual alignment mode word
aligner in 20-bit PMA-PCS interface modes allows 7-, 10-, and 20-bit word alignment
patterns, whereas the manual alignment mode word aligner in 16-bit PMA-PCS
interface modes allows only 8-, 16-, and 32-bit word alignment patterns.
Bit-Slip Mode Word Aligner with 20-Bit PMA-PCS Interface Modes
In some Basic single-width configurations with 20-bit PMA-PCS interface, you can
configure the word aligner in bit-slip mode by selecting the Use manual bit slipping
mode option in the ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager.
The word aligner operation for Basic double-width with 20-bit PMA-PCS interface is
similar to the word aligner operation in Basic single-width mode with an 8-bit
PMA-PCS interface. For word aligner operation in bit-slip mode, refer to “Word
Aligner in Single-Width Mode with 8-Bit PMA-PCS Interface Modes” on page 1–60.
The difference is that the bit-slip word aligner in 20-bit PMA-PCS interface modes
allows only 7-, 10-, and 20-bit word alignment patterns, whereas the bit-slip word
aligner in 8-bit PMA-PCS interface modes allows only a 16-bit word alignment
pattern.
Table 1–30. Word Aligner in 20-Bit PMA-PCS Interface Modes
Functional Mode Allowed Word Aligner
Configurations
Allowed Word Alignment
Pattern Length
Basic double-width Manual alignment, Bit-slip 7 bits, 10 bits, 20 bits
Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices 1–69
Transceiver Block Architecture
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Table 1–31 lists the word aligner options available in Basic single-width and
double-width modes.
Table 1–31. Word Aligner Options Available in Basic Single-Width and Double-Width Modes (1) (Part 1 of 2)
Functional
Mode
PMA-PCS
Interface
Width
Word Alignment
Mode
Word
Alignment
Pattern
Length
rx_enapatternalign
Sensitivity
rx_syncstatus
Behavior
rx_patterndetect
Behavior
Basic
Single-Width
8-bit
Manual
Alignment 16-bit Rising Edge
Sensitive
Asserted high for
one parallel clock
cycle when the
word aligner
aligns to a new
word boundary.
Asserted high for
one parallel clock
cycle when the
word alignment
pattern appears in
the current word
boundary.
Bit-Slip 16-bit N/A N/A
Asserted high for
one parallel clock
cycle when the
word alignment
pattern appears in
the current word
boundary.
10-bit
Manual
Alignment 7- and 10-bit Level Sensitive
Asserted high for
one parallel clock
cycle when the
word aligner
aligns to a new
word boundary.
Asserted high for
one parallel clock
cycle when the
word alignment
pattern appears in
the current word
boundary.
Bit-Slip 7- and 10-bit N/A N/A
Asserted high for
one parallel clock
cycle when the
word alignment
pattern appears in
the current word
boundary.
Automatic
Synchronization
State Machine
7- and 10-bit N/A
Stays high as
long as the
synchronization
conditions are
satisfied.
Asserted high for
one parallel clock
cycle when the
word alignment
pattern appears in
the current word
boundary.
1–70 Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Block Architecture
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Basic
Double-
Width
16-bit
Manual
Alignment
8-, 16-, and
32-bit
Rising Edge
Sensitive
Stays high after
the word aligner
aligns to the
word alignment
pattern. Goes low
on receiving a
rising edge on
rx_enapattern
align
until a
new word
alignment pattern
is received.
Asserted high for
one parallel clock
cycle when the
word alignment
pattern appears in
the current word
boundary.
Bit-Slip 8-, 16-, and
32-bit N/A N/A
Asserted high for
one parallel clock
cycle when the
word alignment
pattern appears in
the current word
boundary.
20-bit
Manual
Alignment
7-, 10-, and
20-bit
Rising Edge
Sensitive
Stays high after
the word aligner
aligns to the
word alignment
pattern. Goes low
on receiving a
rising edge on
rx_enapattern
align
until a
new word
alignment pattern
is received.
Asserted high for
one parallel clock
cycle when the
word alignment
pattern appears in
the current word
boundary.
Bit-Slip 7-, 10-, and
20-bit N/A N/A
Asserted high for
one parallel clock
cycle when the
word alignment
pattern appears in
the current word
boundary.
Note to Table 1–31:
(1) For more information about word aligner operation, refer to “Word Aligner in Single-Width Mode” on page 1–60 and “Word Aligner in Double-
Width Mode” on page 1–66.
Table 1–31. Word Aligner Options Available in Basic Single-Width and Double-Width Modes (1) (Part 2 of 2)
Functional
Mode
PMA-PCS
Interface
Width
Word Alignment
Mode
Word
Alignment
Pattern
Length
rx_enapatternalign
Sensitivity
rx_syncstatus
Behavior
rx_patterndetect
Behavior
Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices 1–71
Transceiver Block Architecture
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Programmable Run Length Violation Detection
The programmable run length violation circuit resides in the word aligner block and
detects consecutive 1s or 0s in the data. If the data stream exceeds the preset
maximum number of consecutive 1s or 0s, the violation is signified by the assertion of
the
rx_rlv
signal.
The run length violation status signal on the
rx_rlv
port has lower latency when
compared with the parallel data on the
rx_dataout
port. The
rx_rlv
signal in each
channel is clocked by its parallel recovered clock. The FPGA fabric clock might have
phase difference and/or PPM difference (in asynchronous systems) with respect to
the recovered clock. To ensure that the FPGA fabric clock can latch the
rx_rlv
signal
reliably, the run length violation circuitry asserts the
rx_rlv
signal for a minimum of
two recovered clock cycles in single-width modes and a minimum of three recovered
clock cycles in double-width modes. The
rx_rlv
signal can be asserted longer,
depending on the run length of the received data.
In single-width mode, the run length violation circuit detects up to a run length of 128
(for an 8-bit deserialization factor) or 160 (for a 10-bit deserialization factor). The
settings are in increments of four or five for the 8-bit or 10-bit deserialization factors,
respectively.
In double-width mode, the run length violation circuit maximum run length detection
is 512 (with a run length increment of eight) and 640 (with a run length increment of
10) for the 16-bit and 20-bit deserialization factors, respectively.
Table 1–32 lists the detection capabilities of the run length violation circuit.
Receiver Polarity Inversion
The positive and negative signals of a serial differential link are often erroneously
swapped during board layout. Solutions like board re-spin or major updates to the
PLD logic can be expensive. The receiver polarity inversion feature is provided to
correct this situation.
An optional
rx_invpolarity
port is available in all single-width and double-width
modes except (OIF) CEI PHY and PCIe modes to dynamically enable the receiver
polarity inversion feature. In single-width modes, a high value on the
rx_invpolarity
port inverts the polarity of every bit of the 8-bit or 10-bit input data word to the word
aligner in the receiver datapath. In double-width modes, a high value on the
rx_invpolarity
port inverts the polarity of every bit of the 16-bit or 20-bit input data
word to the word aligner in the receiver datapath. Because inverting the polarity of
each bit has the same effect as swapping the positive and negative signals of the
differential link, correct data is seen by the receiver.
rx_invpolarity
is a dynamic
signal and can cause initial disparity errors in an 8B/10B encoded link. The
downstream system must be able to tolerate these disparity errors.
Table 1–32. Detection Capabilities of the Run Length Violation Circuit
Mode PMA-PCS Interface
Width
Run Length Violation Detector Range
Minimum Maximum
Single-width mode 8-bit 4 128
10-bit 5 160
Double-width mode 16-bit 8 512
20-bit 10 640
1–72 Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Block Architecture
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
The generic receiver polarity inversion feature is different from the PCIe 8B/10B
polarity inversion feature. The generic receiver polarity inversion feature inverts the
polarity of the data bits at the input of the word aligner and is not available in PCIe
mode. The PCIe 8B/10B polarity inversion feature inverts the polarity of the data bits
at the input of the 8B/10B decoder and is available only in PCIe mode.
Figure 1–54 shows the receiver polarity inversion feature in single-width and
double-width datapath configurations.
Figure 1–54. Receiver Polarity Inversion in Single-Width and Double Width Mode
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
Output from Deserializer Input to Word Aligner
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
Single-Width ConfigurationSingle-Width Configuration
Double-Width ConfigurationDouble-Width Configuration
rx_invpolarity = Highrx_invpolarity = High To the Word AlignerTo the Word Aligner
Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices 1–73
Transceiver Block Architecture
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Receiver Bit Reversal
By default, the Stratix IV GX and GT receiver assumes a LSB-to-MSB transmission. If
the transmission order is MSB-to-LSB, the receiver forwards the bit-flipped version of
the parallel data to the FPGA fabric on the
rx_dataout
port. The receiver bit reversal
feature is available to correct this situation.
The receiver bit reversal feature is available through the
rx_revbitordwa
port only in
Basic single-width and double-width modes with the word aligner configured in
bit-slip mode. When the
rx_revbitordwa
signal is driven high in Basic single-width
mode, the 8-bit or 10-bit data
D[7:0]
or
D[9:0]
at the output of the word aligner gets
rewired to
D[0:7]
or
D[0:9]
, respectively. When the
rx_revbitordwa
signal is driven
high in Basic double-width mode, the 16-bit or 20-bit data
D[15:0]
or
D[19:0]
at the
output of the word aligner gets rewired to
D[0:15]
or
D[0:19]
, respectively.
Flipping the parallel data using this feature allows the receiver to forward the correct
bit-ordered data to the FPGA fabric on the
rx_dataout
port in the case of MSB-to-LSB
transmission.
Figure 1–55 shows the receiver bit reversal feature in Basic single-width 10-bit wide
datapath configurations.
Figure 1–55. Receiver Bit Reversal in Single-Width Mode
D[9]
D[8]
D[7]
D[6]
D[5]
D[4]
D[3]
D[2]
D[1]
D[0]
D[0]
D[1]
D[2]
D[3]
D[4]
D[5]
D[6]
D[7]
D[8]
D[9]
Output of Word Aligner before
RX bit reversal
Output of Word Aligner after RX
bit reversal
rx_revbitordwa = high
1–74 Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Block Architecture
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Figure 1–56 shows the receiver bit reversal feature in Basic double-width 20-bit wide
datapath configurations.
Because receiver bit reversal is done at the output of the word aligner, a dynamic bit
reversal also requires a reversal of the word alignment pattern. As a result, the
Receiver Bit Reversal feature is dynamic only if the receiver is dynamically
reconfigurable (it allows changing the word alignment pattern dynamically) or uses
manual bit slip alignment mode (no word alignment pattern). The Receiver Bit
Reversal feature is static in all other Basic mode configurations. You can enable this
feature using the MegaWizard Plug-In Manager. In configurations where the Receiver
Bit Reversal feature is dynamic, an
rx_revbitordwa
port is available to control the bit
reversal dynamically. A high on the
rx_revbitordwa
port reverses the bit order at the
input of the word aligner.
Figure 1–56. Receiver Bit Reversal in Double-Width Mode
D[0]
D[2]
D[1]
D[4]
D[3]
D[6]
D[5]
D[8]
D[7]
D[10]
D[9]
D[12]
D[11]
D[15]
D[13]
D[14]
D[17]
D[16]
D[19]
D[18]
D[18]
D[19]
D[16]
D[17]
D[15]
D[13]
D[14]
D[11]
D[12]
D[9]
D[10]
D[7]
D[8]
D[5]
D[6]
D[3]
D[4]
D[1]
D[2]
D[0]
Output of Word Aligner
before RX bit reversal
Output of Word Aligner
after RX bit reversal
rx_revbitordwa = high
Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices 1–75
Transceiver Block Architecture
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Receiver Byte Reversal in Basic Double-Width Modes
The MSByte and LSByte of the input data to the transmitter may be erroneously
swapped. The receiver byte reversal feature is available to correct this situation.
An optional port,
rx_revbyteordwa
, is available only in Basic double-width mode to
enable receiver byte reversal. In 8B/10B enabled mode, a high value on
rx_revbyteordwa
exchanges the 10-bit MSByte for the LSByte of the 20-bit word at the
output of the word aligner in the receiver datapath. In non-8B/10B enabled mode, a
high value on
rx_revbyteordwa
exchanges the 8-bit MSByte for the LSByte of the
16-bit word at the output of the word aligner in the receiver datapath. This
compensates for the erroneous exchanging at the transmitter and corrects the data
received by the downstream systems.
rx_revbyteorderwa
is a dynamic signal and can
cause an initial disparity error at the receiver of an 8B/10B encoded link. The
downstream system must be able to tolerate this disparity error.
Figure 1–57 shows the receiver byte reversal feature.
Deskew FIFO
Code groups received across four lanes in a XAUI link can be misaligned with respect
to one another because of skew in the physical medium or differences between the
independent clock recoveries per lane. The XAUI protocol allows a maximum skew of
40 UI (12.8 ns) as seen at the receiver of the four lanes.
XAUI protocol requires the physical layer device to implement a deskew circuitry to
align all four channels. To enable the deskew circuitry at the receiver to align the four
channels, the transmitter sends a /A/ (/K28.3/) code group simultaneously on all
four channels during inter-packet gap (IPG). The skew introduced in the physical
medium and the receiver channels can cause the /A/ code groups to be received
misaligned.
Figure 1–57. Receiver Byte Reversal Feature
01
00
03
02
05
04
07
06
09
08
0B
0A
MSByte
LSByte
00
01
02
03
07
06
09
08
0B
0A
MSByte
LSByte
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
0A
0B
MSByte
LSByte
Data with Receiver Byte
Reversal enabled
rx_revbyteordwa
Word Aligner Output
with rx_revbyteordwa
asserted
Data without Receiver Byte
Reversal enabled
1–76 Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Block Architecture
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Deskew circuitry performs the deskew operation by the XAUI functional mode.
Deskew circuitry consists of:
■A 16-word deep deskew FIFO in each of the four channels
■Control logic in the
CMU0
channel of the transceiver block that controls the deskew
FIFO write and read operations in each channel
1Deskew circuitry is only available in XAUI mode.
The deskew FIFO in each channel receives data from its word aligner. The deskew
operation begins only after link synchronization is achieved on all four channels as
indicated by a high level on the
rx_syncstatus
signal from the word aligner in each
channel. Until the first /A/ code group is received, the deskew FIFO read and write
pointers in each channel are not incremented. After the first /A/ code group is
received, the write pointer starts incrementing for each word received but the read
pointer is frozen. If the /A/ code group is received on each of the four channels
within 10 recovered clock cycles of each other, the read pointer for all four deskew
FIFOs is released simultaneously, aligning all four channels.
Figure 1–58 shows lane skew at the receiver input and how the deskew FIFO uses the
/A/ code group to align the channels.
After alignment of the first ||A|| column, if three additional aligned ||A||
columns are observed at the output of the deskew FIFOs of the four channels, the
rx_channelaligned
signal is asserted high, indicating channel alignment is acquired.
After acquiring channel alignment, if four misaligned ||A|| columns are seen at the
output of the deskew FIFOs in all four channels with no aligned ||A|| columns in
between, the
rx_channelaligned
signal is de-asserted low, indicating loss-of-channel
alignment.
Figure 1–58. Deskew FIFO—Lane Skew at the Receiver Input
Lanes are
Deskewed by
Lining up
the "Align"/A/,
Code Groups
Lane Skew at
Receiver Input
A
Lane 0 K K R A K R R K K KRR
Lane 1 K K R A K R R K K KRR
Lane 0 K K R K R R K K KRR
Lane 1 K K R A K R R K K KRR
Lane 2 K K R A K R R K K KRR
Lane 3 K K R A K R R K K KRR
Lane 2 K K R A K R R K K KRR
Lane 3 K K R A K R R K K KRR
Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices 1–77
Transceiver Block Architecture
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
The deskew operation in XAUI functional mode is compliant to the PCS deskew state
machine diagram specified in clause 48 of IEEE P802.3ae, as shown in Figure 1–59.
Rate Match (Clock Rate Compensation) FIFO
In asynchronous systems, the upstream transmitter and local receiver can be clocked
with independent reference clocks. Frequency differences in the order of a few
hundred PPM can corrupt the data when latching from the recovered clock domain
(the same clock domain as the upstream transmitter reference clock) to the local
receiver reference clock domain.
The rate match FIFO compensates for small clock frequency differences between the
upstream transmitter and the local receiver clocks by inserting or removing SKP
symbols or ordered sets from the IPG or idle streams. It deletes SKP symbols or
ordered sets when the upstream transmitter reference clock frequency is higher than
the local receiver reference clock frequency. It inserts SKP symbols or ordered-sets
when the local receiver reference clock frequency is higher than the upstream
transmitter reference clock frequency.
Figure 1–59. Deskew FIFO Operation in XAUI Functional Mode (1)
Note to Figure 1–59:
(1) This figure is from IEEE P802.3ae.
reset +
(sync_status=FAIL * SUDI)
sync_status OK * SUDI(![/||A||/])
!deskew_error
* SUDI(![/||A||/])
!deskew_error
* SUDI(![/||A||/])
!deskew_error
* SUDI(![/||A||/])
SUDI(![/||A||/])
SUDI(![/||A||/])
SUDI(![/||A||/])
deskew_error * SUDI
deskew_error * SUDI
deskew_error * SUDI
deskew_error * SUDI
deskew_error * SUDI
deskew_error * SUDI
deskew_error * SUDI
SUDI(![/||A||/])
LOSS_OF_ALIGNMENT
align_status ⇐ FAIL
enable_deskew ⇐TRUE
AUDI
ALIGN_DETECT_1
enable_deskew ⇐ FALSE
AUDI
ALIGN_DETECT_2
AUDI
ALIGN_DETECT_3
AUDI
3
!deskew_error
* SUDI(![/||A||/])
!deskew_error
* SUDI(![/||A||/])
!deskew_error
* SUDI(![/||A||/])
SUDI(![/||A||/])
ALIGN_ACQUIRED_1
enable_deskew ⇐ FALSE
AUDI
ALIGN_ACQUIRED_2
AUDI
ALIGN_ACQUIRED_3
AUDI
1
2
3
!deskew_error
* SUDI(![/||A||/])
SUDI(![/||A||/])
ALIGN_ACQUIRED_4
AUDI
2
SUDI(![/||A||/])
1
SUDI(![/||A||/])
1–78 Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Block Architecture
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
The rate match FIFO consists of a 20-word deep FIFO and necessary logic that controls
insertion and deletion of a skip character or ordered set, depending on the PPM
difference.
The rate match FIFO is mandatory and cannot be bypassed in the following functional
modes:
■PCIe
■XAUI
■GIGE
The rate match FIFO is optional in the following functional modes:
■Basic single-width
■Basic double-width
■SRIO
The rate match FIFO receives data from the word aligner (non-XAUI functional
modes) or deskew FIFO (XAUI functional mode) in the receiver datapath. It provides
the following status signals forwarded to the FPGA fabric:
■
rx_rmfifodatainserted
—indicates insertion of a skip character or ordered set
■
rx_rmfifodatadeleted
—indicates deletion of a skip character or ordered set
■
rx_rmfifofull
—indicates rate match FIFO full condition
■
rx_rmfifoempty
—indicates rate match FIFO empty condition
1The rate match FIFO status signals are not available in PCIe mode. These signals are
encoded on the
pipestatus[2:0]
signal in PCIe mode as specified in the PCIe
specification.
Rate Match FIFO in PCIe Mode
In PCIe mode, the rate match FIFO is capable of compensating up to ± 300 PPM (total
600 PPM) difference between the upstream transmitter and the local receiver. The
PCIe protocol requires the transmitter to send SKP ordered sets during IPGs, adhering
to rules listed in the base specification. The SKP ordered set is defined as a /K28.5/
COM symbol followed by three consecutive /K28.0/ SKP symbol groups. The PCIe
protocol requires the receiver to recognize a SKP ordered set as a /K28.5/ COM
symbol followed by one to five consecutive /K28.0/ SKP symbols.
The rate match FIFO operation is compliant to PCIe Base Specification 2.0. The rate
match operation begins after the synchronization state machine in the word aligner
indicates synchronization is acquired by driving the
rx_syncstatus
signal high. The
rate match FIFO looks for the SKP ordered set and deletes or inserts SKP symbols as
necessary to prevent the rate match FIFO from overflowing or under-running.
Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices 1–79
Transceiver Block Architecture
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
The rate match FIFO inserts or deletes only one SKP symbol per SKP ordered set
received. Rate match FIFO insertion and deletion events are communicated to the
FPGA fabric on the
pipestatus[2:0]
port from each channel. The
pipestatus[2:0]
signal is driven to 3'b001 for one clock cycle synchronous to the /K28.5/ COM symbol
of the SKP ordered set in which the /K28.0/ SKP symbol is inserted. The
pipestatus[2:0]
signal is driven to 3'b010 for one clock cycle synchronous to the
/K28.5/ COM symbol of the SKP ordered set from which the /K28.0/ SKP symbol is
deleted.
Figure 1–60 shows an example of rate match deletion in the case where two /K28.0/
SKP symbols are required to be deleted. Only one /K28.0/ SKP symbol is deleted per
SKP ordered set received.
Figure 1–61 shows an example of rate match insertion in the case where two SKP
symbols are required to be inserted. Only one /K28.0/ SKP symbol is inserted per
SKP ordered set received.
The rate match FIFO full and empty conditions are communicated to the FPGA fabric
on the
pipestatus[2:0]
port from each channel.
The rate match FIFO in PCIe mode automatically deletes the data byte that causes the
FIFO to go full and drives
pipestatus[2:0] = 3'b101
synchronous to the subsequent
data byte.
Figure 1–60. Rate Match Deletion in PCIe Mode
datain
dataout
pipestatus[2:0]
First Skip Ordered Set
K28.5 K28.0
K28.0
Dx.y K28.5 K28.0
Dx.y K28.5K28.5 K28.0 K28.0 K28.0 K28.0
Second Skip Ordered Set
SKIP Symbol Deleted
3'b010 xxx
xxx
xxx 3'b010 xxx
Figure 1–61. Rate Match Insertion in PCIe Mode
datain
dataout
pipestatus[2:0]
First Skip Ordered Set
K28.0 K28.0
Dx.y K28.5K28.5 K28.0 K28.0 K28.0
Second Skip Ordered Set
SKIP Symbol Inserted
K28.5 K28.0 Dx.y K28.5
K28.0 K28.0
K28.0 K28.0 K28.0 K28.0
xxx xxx
3'b001 xxx xxx 3'b001 xxx xxx xxx xxx
1–80 Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Block Architecture
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Figure 1–62 shows the rate match FIFO full condition in PCIe mode. The rate match
FIFO becomes full after receiving data byte D4.
The rate match FIFO automatically inserts /K30.7/ (9'h1FE) after the data byte that
causes the FIFO to go empty and drives
PCIestatus[2:0] = 3’b110
flag synchronous
to the inserted /K30.7/ (9'h1FE).
Figure 1–63 shows rate match FIFO empty condition in PCIe mode. The rate match
FIFO becomes empty after reading out data byte D3.
1You can configure the rate match FIFO in low latency mode by turning off the Enable
Rate Match FIFO option in the ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager.
Rate Match FIFO in XAUI Mode
In XAUI mode, the rate match FIFO is capable of compensating for up to ±100 PPM
(200 PPM total) difference between the upstream transmitter and the local receiver
reference clock. The XAUI protocol requires the transmitter to send /R/ (/K28.0/)
code groups simultaneously on all four lanes (denoted as ||R|| column) during
inter-packet gaps, adhering to rules listed in the IEEE P802.3ae specification. The rate
match FIFO operation in XAUI mode is compliant to the IEEE P802.3ae specification.
The rate match operation begins after:
■The synchronization state machine in the word aligner of all four channels
indicates synchronization was acquired by driving its
rx_syncstatus
signal high
■The deskew FIFO block indicates alignment was acquired by driving the
rx_channelaligned
signal high
The rate match FIFO looks for the ||R|| column (simultaneous /R/ code group on
all four channels) and deletes or inserts the ||R|| column to prevent the rate match
FIFO from overflowing or under-running. It can insert or delete as many ||R||
columns as necessary to perform the rate match operation.
Figure 1–62. Rate Match FIFO Full Condition in PCIe Mode
D1 D2
D1 D2 D7
datain
dataout D4
D4 D5 D6 D7 D8
D3
D3 D6 xxD8 xxxx
xxx xxx xxx 3'b101 xxx
xxx xxx xxx
pipestatus[2:0]
Figure 1–63. Rate Match FIFO Empty Condition in PCIe Mode
D1 D2
D1 D2 D5
datain
dataout /K30.7/
D4 D5 D6
D3
D3 D4
pipestatus[2:0] 3'b110
xxx xxx xxx xxx xxx
Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices 1–81
Transceiver Block Architecture
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Two flags,
rx_rmfifodatadeleted
and
rx_rmfifodatainserted
, that indicate rate
match FIFO deletion and insertion events, respectively, are forwarded to the FPGA
fabric. If an ||R|| column is deleted, the
rx_rmfifodeleted
flag from each of the
four channels goes high for one clock cycle per deleted ||R|| column. If an ||R||
column is inserted, the
rx_rmfifoinserted
flag from each of the four channels goes
high for one clock cycle per inserted ||R|| column.
Figure 1–64 shows an example of rate match deletion in the case where three ||R||
columns must be deleted.
Figure 1–64. Rate Match Deletion in XAUI Mode
datain[3]
rx_rmfifodatadeleted
K28.0
K28.3 K28.5 K28.5 K28.0 K28.0 K28.0 K28.5
First ||R||
Column
Second ||R||
Column
Third ||R||
Column
Fourth ||R||
Column
K28.5
datain[2]
K28.0
K28.3 K28.5 K28.5 K28.0 K28.0 K28.0 K28.5
K28.5
datain[1]
K28.0
K28.3 K28.5 K28.5 K28.0 K28.0 K28.0 K28.5
K28.5
datain[0]
K28.0
K28.3 K28.5 K28.5 K28.0 K28.0 K28.0 K28.5
K28.5
dataout[3]
K28.5
K28.3 K28.5 K28.0 K28.5
K28.5
dataout[2]
K28.5
K28.3 K28.5 K28.0 K28.5
K28.5
dataout[1]
K28.5
K28.3 K28.5 K28.0 K28.5
K28.5
dataout[0]
K28.5
K28.3 K28.5 K28.0 K28.5
K28.5
Before Rate Match:
After Rate Match:
1–82 Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Block Architecture
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Figure 1–65 shows an example of rate match insertion in the case where two ||R||
columns are required to be inserted.
Two flags,
rx_rmfifofull
and
rx_rmfifoempty
, are forwarded to the FPGA fabric to
indicate rate match FIFO full and empty conditions.
In XAUI mode, the rate match FIFO does not automatically insert or delete code
groups to overcome FIFO empty and full conditions, respectively. It asserts the
rx_rmfifofull
and
rx_rmfifoempty
flags for at least three recovered clock cycles to
indicate rate match FIFO full and empty conditions, respectively.
1In the case of rate match FIFO full and empty conditions, you must assert the
rx_digitalreset
signal to reset the receiver PCS blocks.
Rate Match FIFO in GIGE Mode
In GIGE mode, the rate match FIFO is capable of compensating for up to ±100 PPM
(200 PPM total) difference between the upstream transmitter and the local receiver
reference clock. The GIGE protocol requires the transmitter to send idle ordered sets
/I1/ (/K28.5/D5.6/) and /I2/ (/K28.5/D16.2/) during inter-packet gaps, adhering
to rules listed in the IEEE 802.3 specification.
The rate match operation begins after the synchronization state machine in the word
aligner indicates synchronization is acquired by driving the
rx_syncstatus
signal
high. The rate match FIFO is capable of deleting or inserting the /I2/
(/K28.5/D16.2/) ordered set to prevent the rate match FIFO from overflowing or
under running during normal packet transmission. The rate match FIFO is also
capable of deleting or inserting the first two bytes of the /C2/ ordered set
(/K28.5/D2.2/Dx.y/Dx.y/) to prevent the rate match FIFO from overflowing or
under running during the auto negotiation phase.
Figure 1–65. Rate Match Insertion in XAUI Mode
dataout[3]
rx_rmfifodatainserted
K28.0
K28.3 K28.5 K28.0 K28.0 K28.5 K28.0
First ||R||
Column
Second ||R||
Column
K28.5
dataout[2]
K28.0
K28.3 K28.5 K28.0 K28.0 K28.5 K28.0
K28.5
dataout[1]
K28.0
K28.3 K28.5 K28.0 K28.0 K28.5 K28.0
K28.5
dataout[0]
K28.0
K28.3 K28.5 K28.0 K28.0 K28.5 K28.0
K28.5
datain[3]
K28.0
K28.3 K28.5 K28.5 K28.0
K28.5
datain[2]
K28.0
K28.3 K28.5 K28.5 K28.0
K28.5
datain[1]
K28.0
K28.3 K28.5 K28.5 K28.0
K28.5
datain[0]
K28.0
K28.3 K28.5 K28.5 K28.0
K28.5
Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices 1–83
Transceiver Block Architecture
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
The rate match FIFO can insert or delete as many /I2/ or /C2/ (first two bytes) as
necessary to perform the rate match operation.
Two flags,
rx_rmfifodatadeleted
and
rx_rmfifodatainserted
, that indicate rate
match FIFO deletion and insertion events, respectively, are forwarded to the FPGA
fabric. Both the
rx_rmfifodatadeleted
and
rx_rmfifodatainserted
flags are asserted
for two clock cycles for each deleted and inserted /I2/ ordered set, respectively.
Figure 1–66 shows an example of rate match FIFO deletion in the case where three
symbols are required to be deleted. Because the rate match FIFO can only delete /I2/
ordered set, it deletes two /I2/ ordered sets (four symbols deleted).
Figure 1–67 shows an example of rate match FIFO insertion in the case where one
symbol is required to be inserted. Because the rate match FIFO can only insert a /I2/
ordered set, it inserts one /I2/ ordered set (two symbols inserted).
Two flags,
rx_rmfifofull
and
rx_rmfifoempty
, are forwarded to the FPGA fabric to
indicate rate match FIFO full and empty conditions.
In GIGE mode, the rate match FIFO does not insert or delete code groups
automatically to overcome FIFO empty and full conditions, respectively. It asserts the
rx_rmfifofull
and
rx_rmfifoempty
flags for at least two recovered clock cycles to
indicate rate match FIFO full and empty conditions, respectively.
1In the case of rate match FIFO full and empty conditions, you must assert the
rx_digitalreset
signal to reset the receiver PCS blocks.
Figure 1–66. Rate Match Deletion in GIGE Mode
datain
dataout
rx_rmfifodatadeleted
First /I2/ Ordered Set
Dx.y K28.5
K28.5
Second /I2/ Ordered Set
/I2/ Ordered Set Deleted
D16.2 D16.2 K28.5 D16.2 Dx.y
Third /I2/ Ordered Set
Dx.y K28.5 D16.2 Dx.y
Figure 1–67. Rate Match Insertion in GIGE Mode
datain
dataout
rx_rmfifodatainserted
First /I2/ Ordered Set
Dx.y K28.5
K28.5
Second /I2/ Ordered Set
D16.2 D16.2
Dx.y K28.5 D16.2 D16.2 Dx.y
K28.5 D16.2 K28.5
1–84 Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Block Architecture
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Rate Match FIFO in Basic Single-Width Mode
In Basic single-width mode, the rate match FIFO is capable of compensating for up to
±300 PPM (600 PPM total) difference between the upstream transmitter and the local
receiver reference clock.
1To enable the rate match FIFO in Basic single-width mode, the transceiver channel
must have both the transmitter and receiver channel instantiated. You must select the
Receiver and Transmitter option in the What is the operation mode? field in the
ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager. You must also enable the 8B/10B
encoder/decoder in Basic single-width mode with rate match FIFO enabled.
Depending on your proprietary protocol implementation, you can select two 20-bit
rate match patterns in the ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager under the What is
the rate match pattern1 and What is the rate match pattern2 fields. Each of the two
programmed 20-bit rate match patterns consists of a 10-bit skip pattern and a 10-bit
control pattern. You must choose 10-bit code groups that have a neutral disparity as
the skip patterns. The rate match FIFO operation begins after the word aligner
synchronization status
rx_syncstatus
goes high. When the rate matcher receives
either of the two 10-bit control patterns followed by the respective 10-bit skip pattern,
it inserts or deletes the 10-bit skip pattern as necessary to avoid the rate match FIFO
from overflowing or under running.
The rate match FIFO can delete a maximum of four skip patterns from a cluster, if
there is one skip pattern left in the cluster after deletion. The rate match FIFO can
insert a maximum of four skip patterns in a cluster, if there are no more than five skip
patterns in the cluster after insertion. Two flags,
rx_rmfifodatadeleted
and
rx_rmfifodatainserted
, indicating rate match FIFO deletion and insertion events,
respectively, are forwarded to the FPGA fabric.
Figure 1–68 shows an example of rate match FIFO deletion in the case where three
skip patterns are required to be deleted. In this example, /K28.5/ is the control
pattern and neutral disparity /K28.0/ is the skip pattern. The first skip cluster has a
/K28.5/ control pattern followed by two /K28.0/ skip patterns. The second skip
cluster has a /K28.5/ control pattern followed by four /K28.0/ skip patterns. The rate
match FIFO deletes only one /K28.0/ skip pattern from the first skip cluster to
maintain at least one skip pattern in the cluster after deletion. Two /K28.0/ skip
patterns are deleted from the second cluster for a total of three skip patterns deletion
requirement.
Figure 1–68. Rate Match Deletion in Basic Single-Width Mode
datain
dataout
rx_rmfifodatadeleted
First Skip Cluster
K28.5
K28.5
Second Skip Cluster
Three Skip Patterns Deleted
K28.0 K28.0 K28.0 K28.0 K28.0 K28.0
K28.5 K28.0 K28.5 K28.0 K28.0 K28.0
Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices 1–85
Transceiver Block Architecture
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Figure 1–69 shows an example of rate match FIFO insertion in the case where three
skip patterns are required to be inserted. In this example, /K28.5/ is the control
pattern and neutral disparity /K28.0/ is the skip pattern. The first skip cluster has a
/K28.5/ control pattern followed by three /K28.0/ skip patterns. The second skip
cluster has a /K28.5/ control pattern followed by one /K28.0/ skip pattern. The rate
match FIFO inserts only two /K28.0/ skip patterns into the first skip cluster to
maintain a maximum of five skip patterns in the cluster after insertion. One /K28.0/
skip pattern is inserted into the second cluster for a total of three skip patterns to meet
the insertion requirement.
Two flags,
rx_rmfifofull
and
rx_rmfifoempty
, are forwarded to the FPGA fabric to
indicate rate match FIFO full and empty conditions.
The rate match FIFO in Basic single-width mode automatically deletes the data byte
that causes the FIFO to go full and asserts the
rx_rmfifofull
flag synchronous to the
subsequent data byte.
Figure 1–70 shows the rate match FIFO full condition in Basic single-width mode. The
rate match FIFO becomes full after receiving data byte D4.
The rate match FIFO automatically inserts /K30.7/ (9'h1FE) after the data byte that
causes the FIFO to go empty and asserts the
rx_fifoempty
flag synchronous to the
inserted /K30.7/ (9'h1FE).
Figure 1–69. Rate Match Insertion in Basic Single-Width Mode
datain
dataout
rx_rmfifoinserted
First Skip Cluster
K28.0K28.5
Second Skip Cluster
Three Skip Patterns Inserted
K28.0 K28.0 K28.5 K28.0 Dx.y
K28.5 K28.0 K28.0 K28.0 K28.0
K28.0
K28.0 K28.5 K28.0 Dx.y
K28.0 K28.0
Figure 1–70. Rate Match FIFO Full Condition in Basic Single-Width Mode
D1 D2
D1 D2 D7
datain
dataout D4
D4 D5 D6 D7 D8
D3
D3 D6
rx_rmfifofull
xxD8 xxxx
1–86 Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Block Architecture
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Figure 1–71 shows the rate match FIFO empty condition in Basic single-width mode.
The rate match FIFO becomes empty after reading out data byte D3.
Rate Match FIFO in Basic Double-Width Mode
In Basic double-width mode, the rate match FIFO is capable of compensating up to
±300 PPM (total 600 PPM total) difference between the upstream transmitter and the
local receiver reference clock.
1To enable the rate match FIFO in Basic double-width mode, the transceiver channel
must have both the transmitter and receiver channel instantiated. You must select the
Receiver and Transmitter option in the What is the operation mode? field in the
ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager. You must also enable the 8B/10B
encoder/decoder in Basic double-width mode with rate match FIFO enabled.
Depending on your proprietary protocol implementation, you can select two 20-bit
rate match patterns in the ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager under the What is
the rate match pattern1 and What is the rate match pattern2 fields. Each of the two
programmed 20-bit rate match patterns consists of a 10-bit skip pattern and a 10-bit
control pattern. You must choose 10-bit code groups that have a neutral disparity as
the skip patterns. The rate match FIFO operation begins after the word aligner
synchronization status
rx_syncstatus
goes high. When the rate matcher receives
either of the two 10-bit control patterns followed by the respective 10-bit skip pattern,
it inserts or deletes a pair of 10-bit skip patterns as necessary to avoid the rate match
FIFO from overflowing or under running.
The rate match FIFO can delete as many pairs of skip patterns from a cluster
necessary to avoid the rate match FIFO from overflowing. The rate match FIFO can
delete a pair of skip patterns only if the two 10-bit skip patterns appear in the same
clock cycle on the LSByte and MSByte of the 20-bit word. If the two skip patterns
appear straddled on the MSByte of a clock cycle and the LSByte of the next clock
cycle, the rate match FIFO cannot delete the pair of skip patterns. The rate match FIFO
can insert as many pairs of skip patterns into a cluster necessary to avoid the rate
match FIFO from under running. The 10-bit skip pattern can appear on MSByte or
LSByte, or both, of the 20-bit word.
Two flags,
rx_rmfifodatadeleted
and
rx_rmfifodatainserted
, indicating rate match
FIFO deletion and insertion events, respectively, are forwarded to the FPGA fabric.
Figure 1–72 shows an example of rate match FIFO deletion in the case where three
skip patterns are required to be deleted. In this example, /K28.5/ is the control
pattern and neutral disparity /K28.0/ is the skip pattern. The first skip cluster has a
/K28.5/ control pattern in the LSByte and /K28.0/ skip pattern in the MSByte of a
clock cycle followed by one /K28.0/ skip pattern in the LSByte of the next clock cycle.
Figure 1–71. Rate Match FIFO Empty Condition in Basic Single-Width Mode
D1 D2
D1 D2 D5
datain
dataout /K30.7/
D4 D5 D6
D3
D3 D4
rx_rmfifoempty
Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices 1–87
Transceiver Block Architecture
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
The rate match FIFO cannot delete the two skip patterns in this skip cluster because
they do not appear in the same clock cycle. The second skip cluster has a /K28.5/
control pattern in the MSByte of a clock cycle followed by two pairs of /K28.0/ skip
patterns in the next two cycles. The rate match FIFO deletes both pairs of /K28.0/
skip patterns (for a total of four skip patterns deleted) from the second skip cluster to
meet the three skip pattern deletion requirement.
Figure 1–73 shows an example of rate match FIFO insertion in the case where three
skip patterns are required to be inserted. In this example, /K28.5/ is the control
pattern and neutral disparity /K28.0/ is the skip pattern. The first skip cluster has a
/K28.5/ control pattern in the LSByte and /K28.0/ skip pattern in the MSByte of a
clock cycle followed by one /K28.0/ skip pattern in the LSByte of the next clock cycle.
The rate match FIFO inserts pairs of skip patterns in this skip cluster to meet the three
skip pattern insertion requirement.
Figure 1–72. Rate Match Deletion in Basic Double-Width Mode
datain[19:10]
rx_rmfifodatadeleted
K28.5
K28.0 Dx.y K28.0 K28.0 Dx.y
First Skip Cluster Second Skip Cluster
Dx.y
datain[9:0]
Dx.y
K28.5 K28.0 K28.0 K28.0 Dx.y
dataout[19:0]
K28.5
K28.0 Dx.y Dx.y
dataout[9:0]
Dx.y
K28.5 K28.0 Dx.y
Dx.y
Dx.y
Dx.y
Two Pairs of Skip Patterns
Deleted
Figure 1–73. Rate Match Insertion in Basic Double-Width Mode
datain[19:10]
rx_rmfifodatainserted
K28.0
K28.0 K28.0 Dx.y K28.5 K28.0
First Skip Cluster Second Skip Cluster
Dx.y
datain[9:0]
K28.0
K28.5 K28.0 Dx.y Dx.y K28.0
Dx.y
dataout[19:0]
K28.5
K28.0 Dx.y K28.0
dataout[9:0]
Dx.y
K28.5 Dx.y K28.0
Dx.y
Dx.y
K28.0
K28.0
K28.0
K28.0
1–88 Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Block Architecture
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Two flags,
rx_rmfifofull
and
rx_rmfifoempty
, are forwarded to the FPGA fabric to
indicate rate match FIFO full and empty conditions.
The rate match FIFO in Basic double-width mode automatically deletes the pair of
data byte that causes the FIFO to go full and asserts the
rx_rmfifofull
flag
synchronous to the subsequent pair of data bytes.
Figure 1–74 shows the rate match FIFO full condition in Basic double-width mode.
The rate match FIFO becomes full after receiving the 20-bit word D5D6.
The rate match FIFO automatically inserts a pair of /K30.7/ ({9'h1FE,9'h1FE}) after the
data byte that causes the FIFO to go empty and asserts the
rx_fifoempty
flag
synchronous to the inserted pair of /K30.7/ ({9'h1FE,9'h1FE}).
Figure 1–75 shows the rate match FIFO empty condition in Basic double-width mode.
The rate match FIFO becomes empty after reading out the 20-bit word D5D6.
1If you enabled the auto-negotiation state machine in the FPGA core with the rate
match FIFO, refer to “Rate Match FIFO” on page 1–171.
Figure 1–74. Rate Match FIFO Full Condition in Basic Double-Width Mode
datain[19:10]
datain[9:0]
dataout[19:0]
dataout[9:0]
rx_rmfifofull
D2 D4 D6
D8
D10 D12
D1 D3 D5
D7
D9 D11
D2 D4 D6
D10
D12 xx
D1 D3 D5
D9
D11 xx
Figure 1–75. Rate Match FIFO Empty Condition in Basic Double-Width Mode
datain[19:10]
datain[9:0]
dataout[19:0]
dataout[9:0]
rx_rmfifoempty
D2 D4 D6
D8
D10 D12
D2 D4 D6 D8 D10
/K30.7/
/K30.7/
D1 D3 D5
D7
D9 D11
D1 D3 D5 D7 D9
Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices 1–89
Transceiver Block Architecture
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
8B/10B Decoder
Protocols such as PCIe, XAUI, GIGE, and Serial RapidIO require the serial data sent
over the link to be 8B/10B encoded to maintain the DC balance in the serial data
transmitted. These protocols require the receiver PCS logic to implement an 8B/10B
decoder to decode the data before forwarding it to the upper layers for packet
processing.
The Stratix IV GX and GT receiver channel PCS datapaths implement the 8B/10B
decoder after the rate matcher. In functional modes with rate matcher enabled, the
8B/10B decoder receives data from the rate matcher. In functional modes with rate
matcher disabled, the 8B/10B decoder receives data from the word aligner.
The 8B/10B decoder operates in two modes (Figure 1–76):
■Single-width mode
■Double-width mode
8B/10B Decoder in Single-Width Mode
The left side of Figure 1–76 shows the 8B/10B decoder in single-width mode. In this
mode, the 8B/10B decoder receives 10-bit data from the rate matcher or word aligner
(when rate matcher is disabled) and decodes it into an 8-bit data + 1-bit control
identifier. The decoded data is fed to the byte deserializer or the receiver phase
compensation FIFO (if byte deserializer is disabled).
1The 8B/10B decoder is compliant to Clause 36 in the IEEE802.3 specification.
Figure 1–76. 8B/10B Decoder in Single-Width and Double-Width Mode
datain [19:10]
recovered clock or
tx_clkout[0]
Current Running Disparity
rx_dataout [15:8]
rx_ctrldetect[1]
rx_errdetect[1]
rx_disperr[1]
datain[9:0] rx_dataout[7:0]
rx_ctrldetect
rx_errdetect
rx_disperr
recovered clock or
tx_clkout[0]
Single-Width Mode
Current Running Disparity
datain[19:10] rx_dataout[15:8]
rx_ctrldetect[1]
rx_errdetect[1]
rx_disperr[1]
recovered clock or
tx_clkout[0]
datain[9:0] rx_dataout[7:0]
rx_ctrldetect
rx_errdetect
rx_disperr
recovered clock or
tx_clkout[0]
Double-Width Mode
8B/10B Decoder
(LSB Byte)
8B/10B Decoder
(LSB Byte)
8B/10B Decoder
(MSB Byte)
8B/10B Decoder
(MSB Byte)
1–90 Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Block Architecture
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
The 8B/10B decoder operates in single-width mode in the following functional
modes:
■PCIe
■XAUI
■GIGE
■Serial RapidIO
■Basic single-width
For PCIe, XAUI, GIGE, and Serial RapidIO functional modes, the ALTGX
MegaWizard Plug-In Manager forces selection of the 8B/10B decoder in the receiver
datapath. In Basic single-width mode, it allows you to enable or disable the 8B/10B
decoder depending on your proprietary protocol implementation.
Figure 1–77 shows a 10-bit code group decoded into an 8-bit data and a 1-bit control
identifier by the 8B/10B decoder in single-width mode.
Control Code Group Detection
The 8B/10B decoder indicates whether the decoded 8-bit code group is a data or
control code group on the
rx_ctrldetect
port. If the received 10-bit code group is one
of the 12 control code groups (/Kx.y/) specified in the IEEE802.3 specification, the
rx_ctrldetect
signal is driven high. If the received 10-bit code group is a data code
group (/Dx.y/), the
rx_ctrldetect
signal is driven low.
Figure 1–77. 8B/10B Decoder in Single-Width Mode
9876543210
8B/10B Conversion
jhgfiedcba
MSB Received Last LSB Received First
76543210
HGFED CB A
ctrl Parallel Data
Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices 1–91
Transceiver Block Architecture
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Figure 1–78 shows the 8B/10B decoder decoding the received 10-bit /K28.5/ control
code group into an 8-bit data code group (8'hBC) driven on the
rx_dataout
port. The
rx_ctrldetect
signal is asserted high synchronous with 8'hBC on the
rx_dataout
port, indicating that it is a control code group. The rest of the codes received are data
code groups /Dx.y/.
8B/10B Decoder in Double-Width Mode
The left side of Figure 1–76 on page 1–89 shows the 8B/10B decoder in double-width
mode. In this mode, two 8B/10B decoders are cascaded for decoding the 20-bit
encoded data, as shown in Figure 1–79. The 10-bit LSByte of the received 20-bit
encoded data is decoded first and the ending running disparity is forwarded to the
8B/10B decoder responsible for decoding the 10-bit MSByte. The cascaded 8B/10B
decoder decodes the 20-bit encoded data into 16-bit data + 2-bit control identifier. The
MSB and LSB of the 2-bit control identifier corresponds to the MSByte and LSByte of
the 16-bit decoded data code group. The decoded data is fed to the byte deserializer or
the receiver phase compensation FIFO (if byte deserializer is disabled).
1Each of the two cascaded 8B/10B decoders is compliant to Clause 36 in the IEEE802.3
specification.
The 8B/10B decoder operates in double-width mode only in Basic double-width
functional mode. You can enable or disable the 8B/10B decoder depending on your
proprietary protocol implementation.
Figure 1–79 shows a 20-bit code group decoded into 16-bit data and 2-bit control
identifier by the 8B/10B decoder in double-width mode.
Figure 1–78. 8B/10B Decoder in Control Code Group Detection
D3.4 D24.3 D28.5 K28.5 D15.0 D0.0 D31.5
clock
rx_ctrldetect
datain[9..0 ]
rx_dataout[7..0] 83 78 BC BC 0F 00 BF
Figure 1–79. 8B/10 Decoder in 20-Bit Double-Width Mode
19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
Cascaded 8B/10B Conversion
j1h1g1f1i1e1d1c1b1a1
MSB LSB
15 14 13 13 11 10 9 8
H1G1F1E1D1C1B1A1
CTRL[1..0]
9876543210
jhgfiedcba
7 6543 21 0
HGFED CB A
Parallel Data
1–92 Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Block Architecture
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Control Code Group Detection
The cascaded 8B/10B decoder indicates whether the decoded 16-bit code group is a
data or control code group on the 2-bit
rx_ctrldetect[1:0]
port. The
rx_ctrldetect[0]
signal is driven high or low depending on whether decoded data
on the
rx_dataout[7:0]
port (LSByte) is a control or data code group, respectively.
The
rx_ctrldetect[1]
signals are driven high or low depending on whether decoded
data on the
rx_dataout[15:8]
port (MSByte) is a control or data code group,
respectively.
Figure 1–80 shows the 8B/10B decoding of the received 10-bit /K28.5/ control code
group into 8-bit data code group (8'hBC) driven on the
rx_dataout
port. The
rx_ctrldetect
signal is asserted high synchronous with 8'hBC on the
rx_dataout
port, indicating that it is a control code group. The rest of the codes received are data
code groups /Dx.y/.
Byte Deserializer
The FPGA fabric-transceiver interface frequency has an upper limit that is stated in
the “Interface Frequency” section in the DC and Switching Characteristics chapter. In
functional modes that have a receiver PCS frequency greater than the upper limit
stated in the DC and Switching Characteristics chapter, the parallel received data and
status signals cannot be forwarded directly to the FPGA fabric because it violates this
upper limit for the FPGA fabric-transceiver interface frequency. In such
configurations, the byte deserializer is required to reduce the FPGA fabric-transceiver
interface frequency to half while doubling the parallel data width. For example, at
3.2 Gbps data rate with a deserialization factor of 10, the receiver PCS datapath runs
at 320 MHz. The 10-bit parallel received data and status signals at 320 MHz cannot be
forwarded to the FPGA fabric because it violates the upper limit for the FPGA
fabric-transceiver interface frequency. The byte serializer converts the 10-bit parallel
received data at 320 MHz into 20-bit parallel data at 160 MHz before forwarding to
the FPGA fabric.
1The byte deserializer is required in configurations that exceed the FPGA
fabric-transceiver interface clock upper frequency limit. It is optional in
configurations that do not exceed the FPGA fabric-transceiver interface clock upper
frequency limit.
The byte deserializer operates in two modes:
■Single-width mode
■Double-width mode
Figure 1–80. 8B/10B Decoder 10-Bit Control Code Group
00 01 00
clock
datain[19:10]
datain[9:0]
rx_ctrldetect[1:0]
rx_dataout[15:0]
D3.4 D28.5 D15.0 D3.4
D28.5 D15.0 D3.4
D24.3
16'h8378 16'hBCBC 16'h0F0F 16'h8383
Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices 1–93
Transceiver Block Architecture
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Byte Deserializer in Single-Width Mode
In single-width mode, the byte deserializer receives 8-bit wide data from the 8B/10B
decoder or 10-bit wide data from the word aligner (if the 8B/10B decoder is disabled)
and deserializes it into 16-bit or 20-bit wide data at half the speed.
Figure 1–81 shows the byte deserializer in single-width mode.
Byte Deserializer in Double-Width Mode
In double-width mode, the byte deserializer receives 16-bit wide data from the
8B/10B decoder or 20-bit wide data from the word aligner (if the 8B/10B decoder is
disabled) and deserializes it into 32-bit or 40-bit wide data at half the speed.
Figure 1–82 shows the byte deserializer in double-width mode.
Figure 1–81. Byte Deserializer in Single-Width Mode
or
/2
Byte
Deserializer
Receiver PCS Clock
dataout[15:0]
dataout[19:0]
D1
D2
D3
D4
D1 D2 D3 D4
or
datain[7:0]
datain[9:0]
Figure 1–82. Byte Deserializer in Double-Width Mode
or
/2
Receiver PCS Clock
Byte
Deserializer
dataout[31:0]
dataout[39:0]
D3D4 D7D8
D1D2 D5D6
D3D4
D1D2 D5D6 D7D8
or
dataout[15:0]
dataout[19:0]
1–94 Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Block Architecture
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Byte Ordering Block
In single-width modes with the 16-bit or 20-bit FPGA fabric-transceiver interface, the
byte deserializer receives one data byte (8 or 10 bits) and deserializes it into two data
bytes (16 or 20 bits). Depending on when the receiver PCS logic comes out of reset, the
byte ordering at the output of the byte deserializer may or may not match the original
byte ordering of the transmitted data. The byte misalignment resulting from byte
deserialization is unpredictable because it depends on which byte is being received by
the byte deserializer when it comes out of reset. Figure 1–83 shows a scenario in
which the MSByte and LSByte of the two-byte transmitter data appears straddled
across two word boundaries after getting byte deserialized at the receiver.
In double-width modes with the 32-bit or 40-bit FPGA fabric-transceiver interface, the
byte deserializer receives two data bytes (16 or 20 bits) and deserializes it into four
data bytes (32 or 40 bits). Figure 1–84 shows a scenario in which the two MSBytes and
LSBytes of the four-byte transmitter data appears straddled across two word
boundaries after getting byte deserialized at the receiver.
Stratix IV GX and GT transceivers have an optional byte ordering block in the receiver
datapath that you can use to restore proper byte ordering before forwarding the data
to the FPGA fabric. The byte ordering block looks for the user-programmed byte
ordering pattern in the byte-deserialized data. You must select a byte ordering pattern
that you know appears at the LSByte(s) position of the parallel transmitter data. If the
byte ordering block finds the programmed byte ordering pattern in the MSByte(s)
position of the byte-deserialized data, it inserts the appropriate number of
user-programmed PAD bytes to push the byte ordering pattern to the LSByte(s)
position, thereby restoring proper byte ordering.
Figure 1–83. MSByte and LSByte of the Two-Byte Transmitter Data Straddled Across Two Word Boundaries
Transmitter Receiver
tx_datain[15:8]
(MSByte)
tx_datain[7:0]
(LSByte)
D2 D4 D6
D5
D3
D1
Byte
Serializer
xx D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 xx Byte
Deserializer
D1 D3 D5 xx
xx D2 D4 D6
rx_dataout[15:8]
(MSByte)
rx_dataout[7:0]
(LSByte)
Figure 1–84. MSByte and LSByte of the Four-Byte Transmitter Data Straddled Across Two Word Boundaries
Transmitter Receiver
tx_datain[31:16]
(MSBytes)
tx_datain[15:0]
(LSBytes)
D3D4
D1D2
D7D8
D5D6
Byte
Serializer xx D1D2 D2D4 D5D6 D7D8 xx Byte
Deserializer
rx_dataout[31:16]
(MSBytes)
rx_dataout[15:0]
(LSBytes)
D1D2 D5D6 xx
xx D3D4 D7D8
Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices 1–95
Transceiver Block Architecture
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Byte Ordering Block in Single-Width Modes
Table 1–33 lists the single-width byte ordering block functional modes.
1For more information about configurations that allow the byte ordering block in the
receiver datapath, refer to “Basic Single-Width Mode Configurations” on page 1–113.
The Quartus II software automatically configures the byte ordering pattern and byte
ordering PAD pattern for SONET/SDH OC-48 functional mode. For more
information, refer to “OC-48 Byte Ordering” on page 1–177.
In Basic single-width mode, you can program a custom byte ordering pattern and
byte ordering PAD pattern in the ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager. Table 1–34
lists the byte ordering pattern length allowed in Basic single-width mode.
Table 1–33. Single Width Functional Modes for the Byte Ordering Block
Functional Modes Descriptions
SONET/SDH OC-48 —
Basic single-width mode with:
■16-bit FPGA fabric-transceiver interface
■No 8B/10B decoder (8-bit PMA-PCS interface)
■Word aligner in manual alignment mode
Basic single-width mode with:
■16-bit FPGA fabric-transceiver interface
■8B/10B decoder
■Word aligner in automatic synchronization state machine
mode
Table 1–34. Byte Ordering Pattern Length in Basic Single-Width Mode
Functional Mode Byte Ordering Pattern
Length
Byte Ordering PAD
Pattern Length
Basic single-width mode with:
■16-bit FPGA fabric-transceiver interface
■No 8B/10B decoder
■Word aligner in manual alignment mode
8 bits 8 bits
Basic single-width mode with:
■16-bit FPGA fabric-transceiver interface
■8B/10B decoder
■Word aligner in automatic synchronization
state machine mode
9 bits (1) 9 bits
Note to Table 1–34:
(1) If a /Kx.y/ control code group is selected as the byte ordering pattern, the MSB of the 9-bit byte ordering pattern
must be 1'b1. If a /Dx.y/ data code group is selected as the byte ordering pattern, the MSB of the 9-bit byte ordering
pattern must be 1'b0. The least significant 8 bits must be the 8B/10B decoded version of the code group used for
byte ordering.
1–96 Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Block Architecture
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Byte Ordering Block in Double-Width Modes
Table 1–35 lists the double-width byte ordering block functional modes.
1For more information about configurations that allow the byte ordering block in the
receiver datapath, refer to “Basic Double-Width Mode Configurations” on page 1–117.
In Basic double-width modes, you can program a custom byte ordering pattern and
byte ordering PAD pattern in the ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager. Table 1–36
lists the byte ordering pattern length allowed in Basic double-width mode.
Table 1–35. Double Width Functional Modes for the Byte Ordering Block
Functional Modes Descriptions
Basic double-width mode with:
■32-bit FPGA fabric-transceiver interface
■No 8B/10B decoder (16-bit PMA-PCS interface)
■Word aligner in manual alignment mode
Basic double-width mode with:
■32-bit FPGA fabric-transceiver interface
■8B/10B decoder (20-bit PMA-PCS interface)
■Word aligner in manual alignment mode
Basic double-width mode with:
■40-bit FPGA fabric-transceiver interface
■No 8B/10B decoder (20-bit PMA-PCS interface)
■Word aligner in manual alignment mode
Table 1–36. Byte Ordering Pattern Length in Basic Double-Width Mode
Functional Mode Byte Ordering
Pattern Length
Byte Ordering PAD
Pattern Length
Basic double-width mode with:
■32-bit FPGA fabric-transceiver interface
■No 8B/10B decoder (16-bit PMA-PCS interface)
■Word aligner in manual alignment mode
16 bits, 8 bits 8 bits
Basic double-width mode with:
■32-bit FPGA fabric-transceiver interface
■8B/10B decoder (20-bit PMA-PCS interface)
■Word aligner in manual alignment mode
18 bits, 9 bits (1) 9 bits
Basic double-width mode with:
■40-bit FPGA fabric-transceiver interface
■No 8B/10B decoder (20-bit PMA-PCS interface)
■Word aligner in manual alignment mode
20 bits, 10 bits 10 bits
Note to Table 1–36:
(1) The 18-bit byte ordering pattern
D[17:0]
consists of MSByte
D[17:9]
and LSByte
D[8:0]
;
D[17]
corresponds
to
rx_ctrldetect[1]
and
D[16:9]
corresponds to
rx_dataout[15:8]
. Similarly,
D[8]
corresponds to
rx_ctrldetect[0]
and
D[7:0]
corresponds to
rx_dataout[7:0]
.
Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices 1–97
Transceiver Block Architecture
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
The byte ordering block modes of operation in both single-width and double-width
modes are:
■Word-alignment-based byte ordering
■User-controlled byte ordering
Word-Alignment-Based Byte Ordering
In word-alignment-based byte ordering, the byte ordering block starts looking for the
byte ordering pattern in the byte-deserialized data every time it sees a rising edge on
the
rx_syncstatus
signal. After a rising edge on the
rx_syncstatus
signal, if the byte
ordering block finds the first data byte that matches the programmed byte ordering
pattern in the MSByte position of the byte-deserialized data, it inserts one
programmed PAD pattern to push the byte ordering pattern in the LSByte position. If
the byte ordering block finds the first data byte that matches the programmed byte
ordering pattern in the LSByte position of the byte-deserialized data, it considers the
data to be byte ordered and does not insert any PAD pattern. In either case, the byte
ordering block asserts the
rx_byteorderalignstatus
signal.
1You can choose word-alignment-based byte ordering in the Rate match/Byte order
tab of the ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager. For the What do you want the byte
ordering to be based on? question, select the The sync status signal from the word
aligner option.
Figure 1–85 shows an example of the byte ordering operation in single-width modes.
In this example, A is the programmed byte ordering pattern and PAD is the
programmed PAD pattern. The byte deserialized data places the byte ordering pattern
A in the MSByte position, resulting in incorrect byte ordering. Assuming that a rising
edge on the
rx_syncstatus
signal had occurred before the byte ordering block sees
the byte ordering pattern A in the MSByte position, the byte ordering block inserts a
PAD byte and pushes the byte ordering pattern A in the LSByte position. The data at
the output of the byte ordering block has correct byte ordering as reflected on the
rx_byteorderalignstatus
signal.
Figure 1–85. Byte Ordering in Single-Width Modes
A
Transmitter Receiver
xx
A
xx
PAD
A
Channel
tx_datain[15:8]
tx_datain[7:0]
D2 D3 D5
D4
D1
Byte
Serializer
Byte
Deserializer
D1 D4
D3
D2
Byte
Ordering
rx_byteorderalignstatus
D1 D3 D5
D4
D2
rx_dataout[15:8]
rx_dataout[7:0]
1–98 Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Block Architecture
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
User-Controlled Byte Ordering
Unlike word-alignment-based byte ordering, user-controlled byte ordering provides
control to the user logic to restore correct byte ordering at the receiver. When enabled,
an
rx_enabyteord
port is available that you can use to trigger the byte ordering
operation. A rising edge on the
rx_enabyteord
port triggers the byte ordering block.
After a rising edge on the
rx_enabyteord
signal, if the byte ordering block finds the
first data byte that matches the programmed byte ordering pattern in the MSByte
position of the byte-deserialized data, it inserts one programmed PAD pattern to push
the byte ordering pattern in the LSByte position. If the byte ordering block finds the
first data byte that matches the programmed byte ordering pattern in the LSByte
position of the byte-deserialized data, it considers the data to be byte ordered and
does not insert any PAD byte. In either case, the byte ordering block asserts the
rx_byteorderalignstatus
signal.
Figure 1–86 shows user-controlled byte ordering in Basic double-width Mode.
Receiver Phase Compensation FIFO
The receiver phase compensation FIFO in each channel ensures reliable transfer of
data and status signals between the receiver channel and the FPGA fabric. The
receiver phase compensation FIFO compensates for the phase difference between the
parallel receiver PCS clock (FIFO write clock) and the FPGA fabric clock (FIFO read
clock).
The receiver phase compensation FIFO operates in one of the following two modes:
■Low latency mode—The Quartus II software automatically configures the receiver
phase compensation FIFO in low latency mode in all functional modes. In this
mode, the FIFO is four words deep and the latency through the FIFO is two to
three parallel clock cycles (pending characterization).
■High latency mode—In this mode, the FIFO is eight words deep and the latency
through the FIFO is four to five parallel clock cycles (pending characterization).
Figure 1–86. User-Controlled Byte Ordering in Basic Double-Width Mode
Transmitter ReceiverChannel
Byte
Serializer
Byte
Deserializer
Byte
Ordering
rx_enabyteord
rx_byteorderalignstatus
xxxx
tx_datain[31:16]
(MSByte)
tx_datain[15:0]
(LSByte)
D2D3 D4D5 D8D9
D0D1 B1B2 D6D7 B1B2
D8D9
D0D1
D2D3 D4D5
xxxx
B1B2 D6D7 B1B2
D8D9
D0D1 P1P2 D4D5
xxxx D2D3 B1B2 D6D7
xxxx
B1B2
rx_dataout [31:16]
(MSByte)
rx_dataout[15:0]
(LSByte)
Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices 1–99
Transceiver Block Architecture
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
The receiver phase compensation FIFO write clock source varies with the receiver
channel configuration. Table 1–37 lists the receiver phase compensation FIFO write
clock source in different configurations.
The receiver phase compensation FIFO read clock source varies depending on
whether or not you instantiate the
rx_coreclk
port in the ALTGX MegaWizard
Plug-In Manager. Table 1–38 lists the receiver phase compensation FIFO read clock
source in different configurations.
Table 1–37. Receiver Phase Compensation FIFO Write Clock Source
Configuration
Receiver Phase Compensation FIFO Write Clock
Without Byte Serializer With Byte Serializer
Non-bonded channel
configuration with rate matcher
Parallel transmitter PCS clock from the
local clock divider in the associated
channel (
tx_clkout
)
Divide-by-two version of the parallel
transmitter PCS clock from the local clock
divider in the associated channel
(
tx_clkout
)
Non-bonded channel
configuration without rate
matcher
Parallel recovered clock from the receiver
PMA in the associated channel
(
rx_clkout
)
Divide-by-two version of the parallel
recovered clock from the receiver PMA in
the associated channel (
rx_clkout
)
×4 bonded channel configuration
Parallel transmitter PCS clock from the
central clock divider in the
CMU0
of the
associated transceiver block
(
coreclkout
)
Divide-by-two version of the parallel
transmitter PCS clock from the central
clock divider in
CMU0
of the associated
transceiver block (
coreclkout
)
×8 bonded channel configuration
Parallel transmitter PCS clock from the
central clock divider in
CMU0
of the master
transceiver block (
coreclkout
from
master transceiver block)
Divide-by-two version of the parallel
transmitter PCS clock from the central
clock divider in
CMU0
of the master
transceiver block (
coreclkout
from
master transceiver block)
Table 1–38. Receiver Phase Compensation FIFO Read Clock Source
Configuration
Receiver Phase Compensation FIFO Read Clock
rx_coreclk Port Not Instantiated rx_coreclk Port Instantiated (1)
Non-bonded channel
configuration with rate matcher
FPGA fabric clock driven by the clock
signal on the
tx_clkout
port
FPGA fabric clock driven by the clock
signal on the
rx_coreclk
port
Non-bonded channel
configuration without rate
matcher
FPGA fabric clock driven by the clock
signal on the
rx_clkout
port
FPGA fabric clock driven by the clock
signal on the
rx_coreclk
port
×4 bonded channel configuration FPGA fabric clock driven by the clock
signal on the
coreclkout
port
FPGA fabric clock driven by the clock
signal on the
rx_coreclk
port
×8 bonded channel configuration FPGA fabric clock driven by the clock
signal on the
coreclkout
port
FPGA fabric clock driven by the clock
signal on the
rx_coreclk
port
Note to Table 1–38:
(1) The clock signal driven on the
rx_coreclk
port must have 0 PPM frequency difference with respect to the receiver phase compensation FIFO
write clock.
1–100 Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Block Architecture
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Receiver Phase Compensation FIFO Error Flag
An optional
rx_phase_comp_fifo_error
port is available in all functional modes to
indicate a receiver phase compensation FIFO under-run or overflow condition. The
rx_phase_comp_fifo_error
signal is asserted high when the phase compensation
FIFO gets either full or empty. This feature is useful to verify a phase compensation
FIFO under-run or overflow condition as a probable cause of link errors.
CMU Channel Architecture
Stratix IV GX and GT devices contain two CMU channels—
CMU0
and
CMU1
—within
each transceiver block that you can configure as a transceiver channel or as a clock
generation block. In addition, each CMU channel contains a CMU PLL that provides
clocks to the transmitter channels within the same transceiver block.
Figure 1–87 shows the two CMU channels in a transceiver block.
Figure 1–87. CMU Channels in a Transceiver Block
Notes to Figure 1–87:
(1) Clocks are provided to support bonded channel functional mode.
(2) For more information, refer to the Transceiver Clocking in Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Stratix IV GX Transceiver Block
Local Clock
Divider
Block
High-Speed Serial Clock
Low-Speed Parallel Clock
Transmitter Channel 2
Transmitter Channel 3
To Transmitter PMA
To Transmitter PCS
CMU1 PLL
High-Speed Clock
CMU0 PLL
High-Speed Clock
High-Speed
SERIAL Clock
(1)
Low-Speed
PARALLEL Clock
(1)
Local Clock
Divider
Block
High-Speed Serial Clock
Low-Speed Parallel Clock
Transmitter Channel 0
Transmitter Channel 1
To Transmitter PMA
To Transmitter PCS
CMU1 Channel
CMU0 Channel
Input Reference
Clocks
(2)
Input Reference
Clocks
(2)
High-speed serial clock from xN top
High-speed serial clock from xN bottom
High-speed serial clock from xN top
High-speed serial clock from xN bottom
Low-speed parallel clock from xN top
Low-speed parallel clock from xN bottom
Low-speed parallel clock from xN top
Low-speed parallel clock from xN bottom
Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices 1–101
Transceiver Block Architecture
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
The following sections describe the CMU channel building blocks.
Configuring CMU Channels for Clock Generation
Each CMU channel has a CMU PLL that generates high-speed serial transceiver
clocks when the CMU channel is configured as a CMU. The
CMU0
clock divider block
also generates the low-speed parallel transceiver clock for ×4, ×8, and ×N bonded
mode configurations such as XAUI, Basic ×4, Basic ×8, and Basic (PMA-Direct) ×N.
The
CMU0
channel has additional capabilities to support bonded protocol functional
modes such as Basic ×4, XAUI, and PCIe. Use the ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In
Manager to select these functional modes (to enable Basic ×4 functional mode, select
the ×4 option in Basic mode). For more information, refer to “Functional Modes” on
page 1–110.
1For Stratix IV GT devices, you can use the CMU PLL to generate transceiver clocks at
data rates between 600 Mbps and 11.3 Gbps.
CMU0 Channel
The
CMU0
channel, shown in Figure 1–88, contains the following blocks:
■
CMU0
PLL (refer to “CMU0 Clock Divider” on page 1–103)
■
CMU0
clock divider (refer to “CMU Clock Divider” on page 1–108)
Figure 1–88. CMU0 Channel with the CMU0 PLL and CMU0 Clock Divider
Notes to Figure 1–88:
(1) To provide clocks for its PMA and PCS blocks in non-bonded functional modes (for example, GIGE functional mode), the transmitter channel uses
the transmitter local clock divider to divide this high-speed clock output.
(2) Used in XAUI, Basic ×4, and PCIe ×4 functional modes. In PCIe ×8 functional mode, only the
CMU0
channel of the master transceiver block provides
clock output to all eight transceiver channels configured in PCIe functional mode.
6
pll_powerdown
PLL Cascade Clock
Global Clock Line
Dedicated refclk0
Dedicated refclk1
ITB Clock Lines
CMU0 PLL
input
reference clock CMU0 PLL
CMU0 PLL
High-Speed
Clock
(1)
CMU0 Channel
CMU1 PLL
High-Speed Clock
CMU0 Clock
Divider
PCIE_gen2switch
(to PCIe rate switch controller block in the CCU)
PCIE_gen2switch_done
(to PCIe rate switch controller block in the CCU)
High-Speed Serial Clock
for Bonded Modes
(2)
Low-Speed Parallel Clock
for Bonded Modes
pll_powerdown
pll_locked
1–102 Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Block Architecture
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
CMU0 PLL
Figure 1–89 shows the
CMU0
PLL.
You can select the input reference clock to the
CMU0
PLL from multiple clock sources:
■PLL cascade clock—the output from the general purpose PLLs in the FPGA fabric
■Global clock line—the input reference clock from the dedicated CLK pins are
connected to the global clock line
■
refclk0
—dedicated REFCLK in the transceiver block
■
refclk1
—dedicated REFCLK in the transceiver block
■Inter transceiver block lines—the ITB lines connect
refclk0
and
refclk1
of all
other transceiver blocks on the same side of the device
The
CMU0
PLL generates the high-speed clock from the input reference clock. The PFD
tracks the VCO output with the input reference clock.
fFor more information about transceiver input reference clocks, refer to the Transceiver
Clocking in Stratix IV Devices chapter.
The VCO in the
CMU0
PLL is half rate and runs at half the serial data rate. To generate
the high-speed clock required to support a native data rate range of 600 Mbps to
8.5 Gbps, the
CMU0
PLL uses two multiplier blocks (/M and /L) in the feedback path
(shown in Figure 1–89).
1The ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager provides the list of input reference clock
frequencies based on the data rate you select. The Quartus II software automatically
selects the /M and /L settings based on the input reference clock frequency and serial
data rate.
fThe
CMU0
and
CMU1
PLLs have a dedicated
pll_locked
signal that is asserted to
indicate that the CMU PLL is locked to the input reference clock. You can use the
pll_locked
signal in your transceiver reset sequence, as described in the Reset Control
and Power Down in Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Figure 1–89. CMU0 PLL
Note to Figure 1–89:
(1) The inter transceiver block (ITB) clock lines are the maximum value. The actual number of ITB lines in your device depends on the number of
transceiver blocks on one side of your device.
PFD
6
CMU0 PLL
PLL Cascade Clock
Global Clock Line
Dedicated refclk0
Dedicated refclk1
ITB Clock Lines
(1)
CMU0 PLL
Input Reference
Clock
/M
Charge Pump
+ Loop Filter VCO /L
CMU0
High-Speed
Clock
/1, /2, /4, /8
Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices 1–103
Transceiver Block Architecture
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
PLL Bandwidth Setting
The bandwidth of a PLL is the measure of its ability to track input clock and jitter. It is
determined by the –3 dB frequency of the closed-loop gain of the PLL. There are three
bandwidth settings: high, medium, and low. You can program the PLL bandwidth
setting using the ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager.
■The high bandwidth setting filters out internal noise from the VCO because it
tracks the input clock above the frequency of the internal VCO noise.
■With the low bandwidth setting, if the noise on the input reference clock is greater
than the internal noise of the VCO, the PLL filters out the noise above the –3 dB
frequency of the closed-loop gain of the PLL.
■The medium bandwidth setting is a compromise between the high and low
bandwidth settings.
The –3 dB frequencies for these settings can vary because of the non-linear nature and
frequency dependencies of the circuit.
Power Down CMU0 PLL
You can power down the
CMU0
PLL by asserting the
pll_powerdown
signal.
fFor more information, refer to the Reset Control and Power Down in Stratix IV Devices
chapter.
CMU0 Clock Divider
The high-speed clock output from the
CMU0
PLL is forwarded to two clock dividers:
the
CMU0
clock divider and the transmitter channel local clock divider. Use the clock
divider only in bonded channel functional modes. In non-bonded functional modes
(such as GIGE functional mode), the local clock divider divides the high-speed clock
to provide clocks for its PCS and PMA blocks. This section only describes the
CMU0
clock divider.
fFor more information about the local clock divider, refer to the “Transceiver Channel
Datapath Clocking” section in the Transceiver Clocking in Stratix IV Devices chapter.
You can configure the
CMU0
clock divider shown in Figure 1–90 to select the
high-speed clock output from the
CMU0
or
CMU1
PLLs. The
CMU1
PLL is present in the
CMU1
channel.
Figure 1–90. CMU0 Clock Divider
PCIE_gen2switch_done
PCIE_gen2switch
CMU0 High-Speed
Clock Output
CMU1 High-Speed
Clock Output
CMU0 Clock Divider Block
/N (1, 2, 4) PCIE rateswitch
circuit
/S
(4, 5, 8, 10)
coreclkout to FPGA Fabric
(for Bonded Modes)
High-Speed Serial Clock
(for Bonded Modes)
Low-Speed Parallel Clock
for Transmitter Channel PCS
(for Bonded Modes)
/2
1
0
1–104 Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Block Architecture
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
High-Speed Serial Clock Generation
The /N divider receives the high-speed clock output from one of the CMU PLLs and
produces a high-speed serial clock. Use this clock for bonded functional modes such
as Basic ×4/×8, XAUI, and PCIe ×4/×8 configurations. In XAUI and Basic ×4/×8
modes, the Quartus II software chooses the path (shown by “1” in the MUX) and
provides the high-speed serial clock to all the transmitter channels within the
transceiver block.
■In PCIe ×4 mode, the clock path through the PCIe rateswitch circuit block is
selected. This high-speed serial clock is provided to all the transmitter channels.
■In PCIe ×8 mode and Basic ×8 mode, only the
CMU0
clock divider of the master
transceiver block provides the high-speed serial clock to all eight channels.
■In PCIe ×1 mode, the
CMU0
clock divider does not provide a high-speed serial
clock. Instead, the local clock divider block in the transmitter channel receives the
CMU0
or
CMU1
PLL high-speed clock output and generates the high-speed serial
clock to its serializer.
fFor more information about the clock from the master transceiver block, refer to the
Transceiver Clocking in Stratix IV Devices chapter.
PCIE Rateswitch Circuit
The PCIE rateswitch circuit is enabled only in PCIe ×4 mode. In PCIe ×8 mode, the
PCIE rateswitch circuit of the
CMU0
clock divider of the master transceiver block is
active.
There are two paths in the PCIE rateswitch circuit. One path divides the /N output by
two. The other path forwards the /N divider output.
■When you set the
rateswitch
port to 0, the PCIe rateswitch controller (in the CCU)
signals the PCIE rateswitch circuit to select the divide by /2 to provide a
high-speed serial clock for the Gen1 (2.5 Gbps) data rate.
■When you set the
rateswitch
port to 1, the /N divider output is forwarded,
providing a high-speed serial clock for the Gen2 (5 Gbps) data rate to the
transmitter channels.
1The PCIE rateswitch circuit performs the rateswitch operation only for the transmitter
channels. For the receiver channels, the rateswitch circuit within the receiver CDR
performs the rateswitch operation.
The PCIE rateswitch circuit is controlled by the PCIe rateswitch controller in the CCU.
The PCIe rateswitch controller asserts the
pipephydonestatus
signal for one clock
cycle after the rateswitch operation is completed for both the transmit and receive
channels. Figure 1–91 shows the timing diagram for the rateswitch operation.
Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices 1–105
Transceiver Block Architecture
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
For more information about PCIe functional mode rate switching, refer to “PCIe Gen2
(5 Gbps) Support” on page 1–140.
1When creating a PCIe Gen2 configuration, configure the CMU PLL to 5 Gbps. This
helps to generate the 2.5 Gbps and 5 Gbps high-speed serial clock using the rateswitch
circuit.
Low-Speed Parallel Clock Generation
The /S divider receives the clock output from the /N divider or PCIE rateswitch
circuit (only in PCIe mode) and generates the low-speed parallel clock for the PCS
block of all transmitter channels and
coreclkout
for the FPGA fabric. If the byte
serializer block is enabled in bonded channel modes, the /S divider output is divided
by the /2 divider and sent out as
coreclkout
to the FPGA fabric. The Quartus II
software automatically selects the /S values based on the deserialization width setting
(single-width or double-width mode) that you select in the ALTGX MegaWizard
Plug-In Manager. For more information about single-width or double-width mode,
refer to “Transceiver Channel Architecture” on page 1–17.
1The Quartus II software automatically selects all the divider settings based on the
input clock frequency, data rate, deserialization width, and channel width settings.
Figure 1–91. Rateswitch in PCIe Mode (1)
Note to Figure 1–91:
(1) Time T1 is pending characterization.
rateswitch
pipephydonestatus
T1 T1
Low-Speed Parallel Clock
250 MHz (Gen 1) 500 MHz (Gen 2) 250 MHz (Gen 1)
1–106 Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Block Architecture
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
CMU1 Channel
The
CMU1
channel, shown in Figure 1–92, contains the
CMU1
PLL that provides the
high-speed clock to the transmitter channels within the transceiver block. The
CMU1
PLL is similar to the
CMU0
PLL (refer to “CMU0 PLL” on page 1–102).
The
CMU1
PLL generates the high-speed clock that is only used in non-bonded
functional modes. The transmitter channels within the transceiver block can receive a
high-speed clock from either of the two CMU PLLs and uses local dividers to provide
clocks to its PCS and PMA blocks.
fFor more information about using two CMU PLLs to configure transmitter channels,
refer to the Configuring Multiple Protocols and Data Rates in Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Power Down CMU1 PLL
You can power down the
CMU1
PLL by asserting the
pll_powerdown
signal.
fFor more information, refer to the Reset Control and Power Down in Stratix IV Devices
chapter.
Configuring CMU Channels as Transceiver Channels
You can configure the two CMU channels in the transceiver block of Stratix IV GX
and GT devices as full-duplex PMA-only channels to run between 600 Mbps and
6.5 Gbps.
Figure 1–92. CMU1 Channel (Grayed Area Shows the Inactive Block)
6
PLL Cascade Clock
Global Clock Line
Dedicated refclk0
Dedicated refclk1
ITB Clock Lines
CMU1 PLL
Input
Reference
Clock
CMU1 PLL
CMU1 Channel
CMU1 PLL
High-Speed
Clock
CMU1 Clock
Divider
pll_powerdown
pll_locked
Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices 1–107
Transceiver Block Architecture
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Figure 1–93 shows the functional blocks that are enabled to support the transceiver
channel functionality.
1The CMU PLL is configured as a CDR to recover data. The dedicated input reference
clock pin is configured to receive serial data.
When configured as a full-duplex or receiver-only channel, the CMU PLL performs
the functionality of the receiver CDR and recovers clock from the incoming serial
data. The high-speed serial and low-speed parallel recovered clocks are used by the
deserializer in the CMU channel and the deserialized data is forwarded directly to the
FPGA fabric.
When configured as a full-duplex or transmitter-only channel, the serializer in the
CMU channel serializes the parallel data from the FPGA fabric and drives the serial
data to the transmitter buffer.
Table 1–39 lists the pins that are used as transmit and receive serial pins.
Figure 1–93. Functional Blocks Enabled to Support Transceiver Channel Functionality
CMU PLL
CONFIGURED AS
RX CDR
serializer
deserializer
High-speed clock
from the adjacent
CMU channel
x4 clock line
From xN
top
clock line
From xN
bottom
clock line
From the
FPGA
fabric
To the
FPGA
fabric
CMU Channel
CMU Clock
divider block
(/1, /2, /4)
tx_data_out
rx_data_in
Table 1–39. Transmit and Receive Serial Pins (Part 1 of 2)
Pins (1) When a CMU Channel is Configured
as a Transceiver Channel
When a CMU Channel is
Configured for Clock
Generation
REFCLK_[L,R][0,2,4,6]P,
GXB_CMURX_[L_R][0,2,4,6]P
(2) Receive serial input for CMU
Channel0
Input reference clocks
GXB_TX_[L,R][0,2,4,6]
(2) Transmit serial output for CMU
Channel0
Not available for use
REFCLK_[L,R][1,3,5,7]P,
GXB_CMURX_[L_R][1,3,5,7]P
(3) Receive serial input for CMU
Channel1
Input reference clocks
1–108 Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Block Architecture
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Interpret the pins column as follows:
For pins
REFCLK_[L,R][0,2,4,6]P
and
GXB_CMURX_[L_R][0,2,4,6]
, the “L, R”
indicates the left and right side and the “0, 2, 4, 6” indicates the different pins.
For example, a pin on the left side with index 0 is named:
REFCLK_L0P,
GXB_CMURX_L0P.
1The receiver serial input pins are hardwired to their corresponding CMU channels.
For more information, refer to the notes to Table 1–39.
Serializer and Deserializer
The serializer and deserializer convert the serial-to-parallel data on the transmitter
and receiver side, respectively. The ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager provides
the Basic (PMA Direct) functional mode (with a none and ×N option) to configure a
transceiver channel to enable the transmitter serializer and receiver deserializer. To
configure a CMU channel as a transceiver channel, you must use this functional
mode.
The input data width options to serializer/from deserializer for a channel configured
in this mode are 8, 10, 16, and 20.
fTo understand the maximum FPGA fabric-transceiver interface clock frequency
limits, refer to the “Transmitter Channel Datapath Clocking” section in the Transceiver
Clocking in Stratix IV Devices chapter.
CMU Clock Divider
When you configure a CMU channel in Basic (PMA Direct) ×1 mode, the CMU clock
divider divides the high-speed clock from the other CMU channel (used as a clock
generation unit) within the same transceiver block and provides the high-speed serial
clock and low-speed parallel clocks to the transmitter side of the CMU channel. The
CMU clock divider can divide the high-speed clock by /1, /2, and /4.
GXB_TX_[L,R][1,3,5,7]P
(3) Transmit serial output for CMU
Channel1
Not available for use
Notes to Table 1–39:
(1) These indexes are for the Stratix IV GX and GT device with the maximum number of transceiver blocks. For exact information about how many
of these pins are available for a specific device family, refer to the Overview for the Stratix IV Device Family chapter.
(2) Pins 0,2,4,6 are hardwired to CMU
channel0
in the corresponding transceiver blocks.
(3) Pins 1,3,5,7 are hardwired to CMU
channel1
in the corresponding transceiver blocks.
Table 1–39. Transmit and Receive Serial Pins (Part 2 of 2)
Pins (1) When a CMU Channel is Configured
as a Transceiver Channel
When a CMU Channel is
Configured for Clock
Generation
Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices 1–109
Transceiver Block Architecture
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Clocks for the Transmitter Serializer
When you configure the CMU channel as a transceiver channel, the clocks for the
transmitter side is provided by one of these sources:
■The other CMU channel in the same transceiver block that is configured as a clock
multiplication unit
■From CMU
channel0
on the other transceiver block on the same side of the device
through the ×N clock line (the ×
N_Top
or ×
N_Bottom
clock line). If you configure a
CMU channel in Basic (PMA Direct) ×N mode, you can use this clocking option
■From one of the ATX PLL blocks on the same side of the device through the ×N
clock line (the ×
N_Top
or ×
N_Bottom
clock line)
Input Reference Clocks for the Receiver CDR
When you configure a CMU Channel as a transceiver channel, there are multiple
sources of input reference clocks for the receiver CDR:
■From adjacent REFCLKs within the same transceiver block, if the adjacent CMU
Channel is not used as a transceiver channel
■From the REFCLK of adjacent transceiver blocks on the same side of the device, if
the corresponding CMU channels are not used as transceiver channels. For
REFCLK connections to the CMU channel from the global clock lines and PLL
cascade network, refer to Table 1–6 on page 1–18.
fFor more information, refer to the “Input Reference Clocking” section of the
Transceiver Clocking in Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Clocks for the Receiver Deserializer
The CDR provides high-speed serial and low-speed parallel clocks to the receiver
deserializer from the recovered data.
Other CMU Channel Features
The CMU channels provide the following features:
■Analog control options—Differential output voltage (VOD), pre-emphasis,
equalization, and DC gain settings present in the regular channels are also
available in the CMU channels.
■OCT—CMU channels can have an OCT feature. The allowed termination values
are the same as regular channels (85, 100, 120, and 150 ).
■Loopback—The available loopback options are serial, reverse serial (pre-CDR),
and reverse serial (CDR) loopback.
For more information about analog controls and OCT, refer to “Transmitter Output
Buffer” on page 1–34 and “Receiver Input Buffer” on page 1–40.
For information about loopback, refer to “Loopback Modes” on page 1–190.
1–110 Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Block Architecture
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Dynamic Reconfiguration of the CMU Channel Analog Controls
fFor the dynamic reconfiguration capabilities of the CMU channels in Basic
(PMA Direct) ×1/×N configurations, refer to the Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV
Devices chapter.
Functional Modes
Table 1–40 lists the transceiver functional modes you can use to configure the
Stratix IV GX and GT devices using the ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager.
Table 1–41 lists the transceiver functional modes you can use to configure the
Stratix IV GT devices using the ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager.
Table 1–40. Functional Modes for the Stratix IV GX and GT Devices
Functional Mode Data Rate Refer To
Basic Single Width 600 Mbps to 3.75 Gbps “Basic Single-Width Mode Configurations” on
page 1–113
Basic Double Width 1 Gbps to 8.5 Gbps “Basic Double-Width Mode Configurations” on
page 1–117
PCIe
■Gen1 at 2.5 Gbps
■Gen2 at 5 Gbps “PCIe Mode Configurations” on page 1–128
XAUI 3.125 Gbps up to HiGig at 3.75 Gbps “XAUI Mode Datapath” on page 1–157
GIGE 1.25 Gbps “GIGE Mode Datapath” on page 1–167
Serial RapidIO
■1.25 Gbps
■2.5 Gbps
■3.125 Gbps
“Serial RapidIO Mode” on page 1–182
SONET/SDH
■OC-12
■OC-48 “SONET/SDH Frame Structure” on page 1–172
SDI
■HD at 1.485/1.4835 Gbps
■3G at 2.97/2.967 Gbps “SDI Mode Datapath” on page 1–180
(OIF) CEI PHY Interface >4.976 Gbps to 6.375 Gbps “(OIF) CEI PHY Interface Mode Datapath” on
page 1–182
Table 1–41. Functional Modes for the Stratix IV GT Devices (Part 1 of 2)
Functional Mode Data Rate Refer To
Basic Single Width 600 Mbps to 3.75 Gbps “Basic Single-Width Mode Configurations” on
page 1–113
Basic Double Width 1.0 to 11.3 Gbps “Basic Double-Width Mode Configurations” on
page 1–117
Basic (PMA-Direct)
single-width 600 Mbps to 3.25 Gbps “Basic (PMA Direct) ×1 Configuration” on
page 1–189
Basic (PMA-Direct)
double-width 1.0 to 6.5 Gbps “Basic (PMA Direct) ×N Configuration” on
page 1–189
XAUI 3.125 Gbps up to HiGig at 3.75 Gbps “XAUI Mode Datapath” on page 1–157
GIGE 1.25 Gbps “GIGE Mode Datapath” on page 1–167
Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices 1–111
Transceiver Block Architecture
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Basic Functional Mode
The Stratix IV GX and GT transceiver datapaths are extremely flexible in Basic
functional mode. To configure the transceivers in Basic functional mode, you must
select Basic in the Which protocol will you be using? option of the ALTGX
MegaWizard Plug-In Manager.
Basic functional mode can be further sub-divided into the following two functional
modes:
■Basic single-width mode
■Basic double-width mode
You can configure the transceiver in Basic single-width mode by selecting Single in
the What is the deserializer block width? option in the ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In
Manager. You can configure the transceiver in Basic double-width mode by selecting
Double in the What is the deserializer block width? option in the ALTGX
MegaWizard Plug-In Manager.
Table 1–42 lists the Stratix IV GX and GT PCS-PMA interface widths and data rates
supported in Basic single-width and double-width modes.
Serial RapidIO
■2.5 Gbps
■3.125 Gbps “Serial RapidIO Mode” on page 1–182
SONET/SDH
■OC-48
■OC-96 “SONET/SDH Frame Structure” on page 1–172
SDI ■3G at 2.97/2.967 Gbps “SDI Mode Datapath” on page 1–180
(OIF) CEI PHY Interface > 4.976 Gbps to 6.375 Gbps “(OIF) CEI PHY Interface Mode Datapath” on
page 1–182
Table 1–41. Functional Modes for the Stratix IV GT Devices (Part 2 of 2)
Functional Mode Data Rate Refer To
Table 1–42. PCS-PMA Interface Widths and Data Rates in Basic Single-Width and Double-Width
Modes for Stratix IV GX and GT Devices
Basic Functional Mode Supported Data Rate Range (1) PMA-PCS Interface Width
Basic single-width mode 600 Mbps to 3.75 Gbps 8 bit, 10 bit
Basic double-width mode 1 Gbps to 8.5 Gbps 16 bit, 20 bit
Note to Table 1–42:
(1) The data rate range supported in Basic single-width and double-width modes varies depending on whether or not
you use the byte serializer/deserializer. For more information, refer to “Basic Single-Width Mode Configurations”
on page 1–113 and “Basic Double-Width Mode Configurations” on page 1–117.
1–112 Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Block Architecture
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Table 1–43 lists the Stratix IV GT PCS-PMA interface widths and data rates supported
in Basic single-width and double-width modes.
Low Latency PCS Datapath
The ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager provides an Enable low latency PCS
mode option when configured in Basic single-width or Basic double-width mode. If
you select this option, the following transmitter and receiver channel PCS blocks are
bypassed to yield a low latency PCS datapath:
■8B/10B encoder and decoder
■Word aligner
■Deskew FIFO
■Rate match (clock rate compensation) FIFO
■Byte ordering
In low latency PCS modes, the transmitter and receiver phase compensation FIFOs are
always enabled. Depending on the targeted data rate, you can optionally bypass the
byte serializer and deserializer blocks. For more information, refer to “Basic Single-
Width Mode Configurations” on page 1–113 and “Basic Double-Width Mode
Configurations” on page 1–117.
1The PCS latency in Basic single-width and Basic double-width modes with and
without the low latency PCS mode option is pending characterization.
1Basic double-width mode configurations at data rates of > 6.5 Gbps are only allowed
in low-latency PCS bypass mode.
Table 1–43. PCS-PMA Interface Widths and Data Rates Supported in Basic Single-Width and
Double-Width Modes for Stratix IV GT Devices (1)
Basic Functional Mode Supported Data Rate Range PMA-PCS Interface Width
Basic single-width mode 600 Mbps to 3.75 Gbps 8-bit, 10-bit
Basic double-width mode 1.0 to 11.3 Gbps 16-bit, 20-bit
Note to Table 1–43:
(1) The data rate range supported in Basic single-width and double-width modes varies depending on whether or not
you use the byte serializer/deserializer. For more information, refer to“Basic Single-Width Mode Configurations”
on page 1–113 and “Basic Double-Width Mode Configurations” on page 1–117.
Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices 1–113
Transceiver Block Architecture
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Basic Single-Width Mode Configurations
Figure 1–94 shows Stratix IV GX transceiver configurations allowed in Basic
single-width functional mode with an 8-bit PMA-PCS interface.
Figure 1–95 shows Stratix IV GT transceiver configurations allowed in Basic
single-width functional mode with an 8-bit PMA-PCS interface.
Figure 1–94. Transceiver Configurations in Basic Single-Width Mode with an 8-Bit PMA-PCS Interface for Stratix IV GX
Devices
Note to Figure 1–94:
(1) The maximum data rate specification shown in Figure 1–94 is valid only for the -2 (fastest) speed grade devices. For data rate specifications for
other speed grades offered, refer to the DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Rate Match FIFO
Byte SerDes
Byte Ordering
Stratix IV GX Configurations
Basic
(1)
(1)
Single
Width
Double
Width
Protocol
PIPE XAUI GIGE SRIO SONET
/SDH (OIF)
CEI SDI
8-bit 10-Bit 16-Bit 20-Bit 10-Bit 10-Bit 10-Bit 10-Bit 8-Bit 16-Bit 10-Bit
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled Disabled
Enabled Disabled Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled Enabled
Disabled Enabled Disabled Disabled
FPGA Fabric-
Transceiver
Interface Frequency
Disabled Disabled
Functional
Modes
PMA-PCS
Interface Width
PMA-PCS
Interface Width
Data Rate (Gbps)
Channel Bonding
Low-Latency PCS
Word Aligner
(Pattern Length)
8B/10B
Encoder/Decoder
Data Rate (Gbps)
FPGA
Fabric-Transceiver
Interface Width
FPGA
Fabric-Transceiver
Interface Frequency
(MHz)
75 -
250
37.5 -
195.3125
37.5 -
195.3125
75 -
250
37.5 -
195.3125
8-Bit 8-Bit
16-Bit
16-Bit 16-Bit
0.6 -
2.0
0.6 -
3.125
0.6 -
2.0
0.6 -
3.125
Manual Alignment
(16-Bit)
Bit-Slip
(16-Bit)
Basic Single-Width
8-Bit PMA-PCS
Interface Width
0.6 - 3.2
x1, x4, x8
0.6 -
2.0
0.6 -
3.2
8-Bit 16-Bit
75 -
250
37.5 -
200
Deterministic
Latency
-Bit 20-Bit
10
FPGA Fabric
Transceiver
Interface Frequency
TX PCS Latency
(FPGA Fabric-Transceiver
Interface Clock Cycles)
RX PCS Latency
(FPGA Fabric-Transceiver
Interface Clock Cycles)
5 -6 4 - 5.5 4 - 5.5 5 -6 4 - 5.5 4 - 5 4 - 5.5
11-13 7 - 9 7 - 9 11 - 13 7 - 9 3 - 4 3 - 4.5
1–114 Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Block Architecture
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Figure 1–95. Transceiver Configurations in Basic Single-Width Mode with an 8-Bit PMA-PCS Interface for Stratix IV GT
Devices
Note to Figure 1–95:
(1) The maximum data rate specification shown in Figure 1–95 is valid only for the -2 (fastest) speed grade devices. For data rate specifications for
other speed grades offered, refer to the DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Word Aligner
(Pattern Length)
Basic Single Width
8-bit PMA-PCS
Interface Width
Disabled
Manual Alignment
(16-bit)
Disabled
8B/10B
Encoder/Decoder
Rate Match FIFO
Byte SerDes
Byte Ordering
Stratix IV GT Configurations
Basic
Single
Width
Double
Width
Functional
Modes
Protocol
XAUI SRIO
SONET
/SDH
(OIF)
CEI SDI
8-bit 10-bit 16-bit 20-bit 10-bit 10-bit 8-bit 16-bit 10-bit
PMA-PCS/Fabric
Interface Width
PMA-PCS/Fabric
Interface Width
Low-Latency PCS Enabled
Bit-Slip
(16-bit)
Disabled
Disabled Disabled
Enabled Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
Data Rate
Channel Bonding x1, x4, x8
Disabled Enabled Disabled
FPGA Fabric-
Transceiver
Interface Width
16-bit 16-bit 16-bit
Data Rate (Gbps)
FPGA Fabric-
Transceiver
Interface Frequency
155.5 –
195.3125
FPGA Fabric-
Transceiver
Interface Frequency
(MHz)
155.5 –
195 .3125
Disabled
16-bit
155.5 -
200
155.5 –
195.3125
(1)
(1)
PIPE
10-bit
Deterministic
Latency
10-Bit 20-Bit
FPGA Fabric
Interface Frequency
TX PCS Latency
(FPGA Fabric-Transceiver
Interface Clock Cycles)
RX PCS Latency
(FPGA Fabric-Transceiver
Interface Clock Cycles)
4 - 5.5 4 - 5.5 4 - 5.5 4 - 5.5
7 - 9 7 - 9 7 - 9 3 - 4.5
600 Mbps to 3.2 Gbps
0.6 -
3.125
0.6 -
3.125 0.6 - 3.2
Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices 1–115
Transceiver Block Architecture
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Figure 1–96 shows Stratix IV GX transceiver configurations allowed in Basic
single-width functional mode with a 10-bit PMA-PCS interface.
Figure 1–97 shows Stratix IV GT transceiver configurations allowed in Basic
single-width functional mode with a 10-bit PMA-PCS interface.
Figure 1–96. Transceiver Configurations in Basic Single-Width Mode with a 10-Bit PMA-PCS Interface for Stratix IV GX
Devices
Note to Figure 1–96:
(1) The maximum data rate specification shown in Figure 1–96 is valid only for the -2 (fastest) speed grade devices. For data rate specifications for
other speed grades offered, refer to the DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Rate Match FIFO
Byte SerDes
Byte Ordering
Stratix IV GX Configurations
Basic
Single
Width Double
Width
Protocol
PIPE XAUI GIGE SRIO
SONET
/SDH (OIF)
CEI SDI
8-Bit 10-Bit 16-Bit 20-Bit 10-Bit 10-Bit 10-Bit 10-Bit 8-Bit 16-Bit 10-Bit
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Channel Bonding
FPGA Fabric-
Transceiver
Interf ac e F requency
Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled
Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled
Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled
Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled
Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled
Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Disabled
Disabled Enabled
Disabled Disabled
Functional
Modes
PMA-PCS
Interface Width
PMA-PCS
Interface Width
Data Rate (Gbps)
Low-Latency PCS
Word Aligner
(Pattern Length)
8B/10B
Encoder/Decoder
Data Rate (Gbps)
FPGA
Fabric-Transceiver
Interface Width
FPGA
Fabric-Transceiver
Interface Frequency
(MHz)
30 -
187.5
30 -
187.5
30 -
187.5
30 -
187.5
30 -
187.5
30 -
187.5
30 -
187.5
30 -
187.5
60 -
250
60 -
250
60 -
250
60 -
250
60 -
250
60 -
250
60 -
250
10-Bit 10-Bit 10-Bit 16-Bit
16-Bit
16-Bit
16-Bit
16-Bit
8-Bit 8-Bit 8-Bit 8-Bit
20-Bit
20-Bit20-Bit
0.6 -
2.5 0.6 -
2.5
0.6 -
2.5
0.6 -
2.5
0.6 -
2.5
0.6 -
2.5
0.6 -
2.5
0.6 -
3.75
0.6 -
3.75
0.6 -
3.75
0.6 -
3.75
0.6 -
3.75
0.6 -
3.75
0.6 -
3.75
Automatic
Synchronization
State Machine
(7-Bit, 10-Bit)
Bit-Slip
(7-Bit, 10-Bit)
(1)
(1)
Manual Alignment
(7-Bit, 10-Bit)
x1, x4, x8
0.6 - 3.75
Basic Single-Width
10-Bit PMA-PCS
Interface Width
0.6 -
2.5
0.6 -
3.75
10-Bit 20-Bit
60 -
250
30 -
187.5
Deterministic
Latency
10-Bit 20-Bit
FPGA Fabric
Interf ace F requency
TX PCS Latency
(FPGA Fabric-Transceiver
Interface Clock Cycles)
RX PCS Latency
(FPGA Fabric-Transceiver
Interface Clock Cycles)
4 - 5.5
5 - 6
11.5 -
14.5
6 - 8 20 -
24
3 - 4. 5
3 - 4
5 - 6 5 - 6 5 - 64 - 5.5 4 - 5.5 4 - 5 5 - 6 4 - 5.5 5 - 6 4 - 5.5 4 - 5.5 4 - 5.5
5 - 6 4 - 5 4 - 5.5
6 - 8
9 - 11
6 - 8
9 - 11
6 - 8
9 - 11
6 - 8
9 - 11
6 - 8
9 - 11
6 - 8
9 - 11
1–116 Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Block Architecture
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Figure 1–97. Transceiver Configurations in Basic Single-Width Mode with a 10-Bit PMA-PCS Interface for Stratix IV GT
Devices
Note to Figure 1–97:
(1) The maximum data rate specification shown in Figure 1–97 is valid only for the -2 (fastest) speed grade devices. For data rate specifications for
other speed grades offered, refer to the DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Word Aligner
(Pattern Length)
Basic Single Width
10-bit PMA-PCS
Interface Width
Disabled
Manual Alignment
(7-bit, 10-bit)
Disabled
Disabled
8B/10B
Encoder/Decoder
Rate Match FIFO
Byte SerDes
Byte Ordering
Stratix IV GT Configurations
Basic
Single
Width
Double
Width
Functional
Modes
8-bit 10-bit 16-bit 20-bit
PMA-PCS/Fabric
Interface Width
PMA-PCS
Interface Width
Low-Latency PCS Enabled
Bit-Slip
(7-bit, 10-bit)
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Data Rate
Channel Bonding x1, x4, x8
FPGA Fabric-
Transceiver
Interface Width
10-bit
Data Rate (Gbps)
FPGA Fabric-
Transceiver
Interface Frequency
FPGA Fabric-
Transceiver
Interface Frequency
(MHz)
Automatic
Synchronization
State Machine
(7-bit, 10-bit)
Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled
Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled
Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled
Disabled Disabled Disabled D isabled Disabled Disabled Disabled
20-bit 8-bit 16-bit 10-bit 20-bit 8-bit 16 -bit
248 .8 -
250
124.4 –
187.5
248 .8 -
250
124 .4 –
187.5
248.8 -
250
124.4 –
187.5
248.8 -
250
124.4 –
187.5
Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled
Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Disabled
10-bit 20-bit 8-bit 16-bit 16 -bit 8- bit 16 -bit
248.8 -
250
124 .4 –
187.5
248.8 -
250
124.4 –
187 .5
124.4 –
187.5
248.8 -
250
124.4 –
187 .5
Disabled Enabled
Disabled Disabled
10-bit 20-bit
248.8 -
250
124.4 –
187.5
Protocol
XAUI SRIO
SONET
/SDH
(OIF)
CEI SDI
10-bit 10-bit 8-bit 16-bit 10-bit
8
(1)
(1)
Deterministic
Latency
10-Bit 20-Bit
PIPE
10-bit
FPGA Fabric
Interface Frequency
TX PCS Latency
(FPGA Fabric-Transceiver
Interface Clock Cycles)
RX PCS Latency
(FPGA Fabric-Transceiver
Interface Clock Cycles)
4 - 5 4 - 5.5
4 - 5 4 - 5.5
4 - 5 4 - 5.5
4 - 5.5
5 - 6 5 - 6 5 - 6
4 - 5.5
9 - 11
6 - 8
9 - 116 - 8
9 - 11
5 - 64 - 5.5 4 - 5 5 - 6 4 - 5.5
6 - 89 - 116 - 8
9 - 11
6 - 811.5 -
14.5
6 - 820 -
24 3 - 4. 53 - 4
5 - 6 4 - 5.5 4 - 5.5 4 - 5.5
5 - 6 4 - 5 4 - 5.5
6 - 8
9 - 11
600 Mbps - 3.75 Gbps
0.6 - 2.5 0.6 - 2.5 0.6 - 2.5 0.6 - 2.5 0.6 - 2.5 0.6 - 2.5 0.6 - 2.5 0.6 - 2.5 0.6 - 3.75
0.6 - 3.750.6 - 3.75
0.6 - 3.75
0.6 - 3.750.6 - 3.75
0.6 - 3.750.6 - 3.75
Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices 1–117
Transceiver Block Architecture
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Basic Double-Width Mode Configurations
Figure 1–98 shows Stratix IV GX transceiver configurations allowed in Basic
double-width functional mode with a 16-bit PMA-PCS interface.
Figure 1–99 shows Stratix IV GT transceiver configurations allowed in Basic
double-width functional mode with a 16-bit PMA-PCS interface.
Figure 1–98. Transceiver Configurations in Basic Double-Width Mode with a 16-Bit PMA-PCS Interface for Stratix IV GX
Devices
Notes to Figure 1–98:
(1) The maximum data rate specification shown in Figure 1–98 is valid only for the -2 (fastest) speed grade devices. For data rate specifications for
other speed grades offered, refer to the DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices chapter.
(2) The byte ordering block is available only if you select the word alignment pattern length of 16 or 32 bits.
Disabled
Disabled
(1)
(1)
Disabled
Rate Match FIFO
Byte SerDes
Byte Ordering
Strat i x IV GX C onfi gurat i ons
Basic
Single-
Width Double-
Width
Protocol
PIPE XAUI GIGE SRIO
SONET
/SDH (OIF)
CEI SDI
8-Bit 10-Bit 16-Bit 20-Bit 10-Bit 10-Bit 10-Bit 10-Bit 8-Bit 16-Bit 10-Bit
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled Disabled
Enabled Disabled Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled Enabled
Channel Bonding
Disabled Enabled Disabled Disabled
FPGA Fabric-
Transceiver
Interf ace F requency
Disabled Disabled
Functional
Modes
PMA-PCS
Interface Width
PMA-PCS
Interface Width
Data Rate (Gbps)
Low-Latency PCS
Word Aligner
(Pattern Length)
8B/10B
Encoder/Decoder
Data Rate (Gbps)
FPGA
Fabric-Transceiver
Interface Width
FPGA
Fabric-Transceiver
Interface Frequency
(MHz)
62.5 -
250
62.5 -
250
31.25 -
203.125
31.25 -
203.125
31.25 -
203.125
16-Bit 16-Bit
32-Bit 32-Bit 32-Bit
1.0 -
4.0
1.0 -
4.0
1.0 -
6.5
1.0 -
6.5
Manual Alignment
(8-, 16-, 32-Bit)
Bit-Slip
(8-, 16-, 32-Bit)
x1, x4, x8
1.0 - 8.5
Basic Double-Width
16-Bit PMA-PCS
Interface Width
1.0 -
4.0
1.0 -
8.5
32-Bit
16-Bit
31.25 -
265.625
62.5 -
250
(2)
Deterministic
Latency
10-Bit 20-Bit
Interf ace F requency
TX PCS Latency
(FPGA Fabric-Transceiver
Interface Clock Cycles)
RX PCS Latency
(FPGA Fabric-Transceiver
Interface Clock Cycles)
5 - 6 4 - 5.5
11 - 13 6.5 - 8.5 6.5 - 8.5
4 - 5.5 5 - 6 4 - 5.5
11 - 13 6.5 - 8.5
4 - 5 4 - 5.5
3 - 4 3 - 4.5
1–118 Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Block Architecture
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Figure 1–99. Transceiver Configurations in Basic Double-Width Mode with a 16-Bit PMA-PCS Interface for Stratix IV GT
Devices
Note to Figure 1–99:
(1) The maximum data rate specification shown in Figure 1–99 is valid only for the -2 (fastest) speed grade devices. For data rate specifications for
other speed grades offered, refer to the DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Word Aligner
(Pattern Length)
Basic Double Width
16-bit PMA-PCS
Interface Width
Disabled
Manual Alignment
(8-, 16-, 32-bit)
Disabled
Disabled
8B/10B
Encoder/Decoder
Rate Match FIFO
Byte SerDes
Byte Ordering
Stratix IV GT Configurations
Basic
Single
Width
Double
Width
Functional
Modes
8-bit 10-bit 16-bit 20-bit
PMA-PCS/Fabric
Interface Width
PMA-PCS
Interface Width
Low-Latency PCS Enabled
Bit-Slip
(8-, 16-, 32-bit)
Disabled
Disabled Disabled
Enabled Disabled Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled Enabled
Data Rate (Gbps) 1.0 – 8.5
Channel Bonding x1, x4, x8
Disabled
Enabled
(Note 1)
Disabled Disabled
FPGA Fabric-
Transceiver
Interface Width
16-bit 32-bit 32-bit 16-bit 32-bit
Data Rate (Gbps)
FPGA Fabric-
Transceiver
Interface Frequency
FPGA Fabric-
Transceiver
Interface Frequency
(MHz)
155 .5 -
250
77.75 –
203.125
Disabled Disabled
32-bit
16-bit
77.75 –
203.125
155 .5 -
250
77.75 –
203.125
155.5 -
250
77.75 –
265.625
Protocol
XAUI SRIO
SONET
/SDH
(OIF)
CEI SDI
10-bit 10-bit 8-bit 16-bit 10-bit
(1)
(1)
Deterministic
Latency
10-Bit 20-Bit
PIPE
10-bit
Interface Frequency
TX PCS Latency
(FPGA Fabric-Transceiver
Interface Clock Cycles)
RX PCS Latency
(FPGA Fabric-Transceiver
Interface Clock Cycles)
5 - 6 4 - 5.5
11 - 13 6.5 - 8.5 6.5 - 8.5
4 - 5.5 5 - 6 4 - 5.5
11 - 13 6.5 - 8.5
4 - 5 4 - 5.5
3 - 4 3 - 4.5
1.0 - 4.0 1.0 - 4.0 1.0 - 4.01.0 - 6.5 1.0 - 6.5 1.0 - 8.5
Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices 1–119
Transceiver Block Architecture
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Figure 1–100 shows Stratix IV GX transceiver configurations allowed in Basic
double-width functional mode with a 20-bit PMA-PCS interface.
Figure 1–101 shows Stratix IV GT transceiver configurations allowed in Basic
double-width functional mode with a 20-bit PMA-PCS interface.
Figure 1–100. Transceiver Configurations in Basic Double-Width Mode with a 20-Bit PMA-PCS Interface for Stratix IV GX
Devices
Notes to Figure 1–100:
(1) The maximum data rate specification shown in Figure 1–100 is valid only for the -2 (fastest) speed grade devices. For data rate specifications for
other speed grades offered, refer to the DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices chapter.
(2) The byte ordering block is available only if you select the word alignment pattern length of 20 bits.
W ord A l i gner
(Pat tern Lengt h )
Basic Double Wi dth
20-bit PMA-PCS
Interf ac e Wi dth
Disabled
Manual Ali gnm ent
(7 -, 10-, 20-b i t)
Disabled
Disabled
8B/10B
Encoder/D ec oder
Rate Match FIFO
Byte SerDes
Byte Ordering
St ratix I V GX C onfigurations
Basic
Single
Width Double
Width
Functional
Modes
Protocol
PIPE XAUI GIGE SRIO
SONET
/SDH (OIF)
CEI SDI
8-bit 10-bit 16-bit 20-bit 10-bit 10-bit 10-bit 10-bit 8-bit 16-bit 10-bit
PMA-PCS
Interf ac e Wi dth
PMA-PCS
Interf ac e Wi dth
Low -Lat ency PCS Enabled
Bit-Slip
(7-, 10-, 20-bit)
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Data R ate (Gbps
(1)
(1)
)1.0 – 8.5
C hannel Bonding x1, x4, x8
FPGA Fabric-
Transceiver
Interf ac e Wi dth
20-bit
Data R ate (Gbps)
FPGA Fabric-
Transceiver
Interf ac e F requency
FPGA Fabric -
Transceiver
Interface Frequency
(MHz)
Enabled Disabled Enabled
Disabled Disabled Disabled
Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled
1.0 –
8.5 1.0 –
5.0 1.0 –
8.5 1.0 –
8.5 1.0 –
5.0 1.0 –
8.5
Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled
40-bit 16-bit 32-bit 20-bit 40-bit 16-bit 32-bit
Disabled Enabled
1.0 –
8.5
Disabled Disabled
20-bit 40-bit
Enabled
Disabled Enabled
1.0 –
5.0 1.0 –
8.5
Enabled (2) Enabled (2)
40-bit 32-bit
Disabled Disabled
16-bit 32-bit
50 -
325
50 -
250
50 -
250
50 -
325
50 -
250
50 -
325
25 -
212.5
25 -
212.5
25 -
212.5
25 -
212.5
25 -
212.5
25 -
212.5
25 -
212.5
25 -
212.5
Deterministic
Latency
10-Bit 20-Bit
Interf ac e F requency
TX PCS Latency
(FPGA Fabric-Transceiver
Interface Clock Cycles)
RX PCS Latency
(FPGA Fabric-Transceiver
Interface Clock Cycles)
5 - 6 4 - 5.5
10 - 12 10 - 12 13 - 16
6.5 - 8. 5
6.5 - 8.5
4 - 5.5 5 - 6 4 - 5.5 4 - 5.5 5 - 6 4 - 5.5
6.5 - 8.5
6.5 - 8. 5
22 - 26
4 - 5.5 5 - 6 4 - 5.5
6.5 - 8. 5
5 - 6
10 - 12 10 - 12
6.5 - 8. 5
4 - 5 4 - 5.5
3 - 4
3 - 4.5
1.0 -
6.5 1.0 -
6.5 1.0 -
6.5
1–120 Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Block Architecture
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
fFor more information about 40G/100G transceivers, refer to:
■Enabling 40G/100G Solutions with FPGAs with 11.3-Gbps Transceivers web
cast
■Stratix IV FPGA 40G/100G IP Solutions website
■AN 570: Implementing the 40G/100G Ethernet Protocol in Stratix IV Devices
Figure 1–101. Transceiver Configurations in Basic Double-Width Mode with a 20-Bit PMA-PCS Interface for Stratix IV GT
Devices
Notes to Figure 1–101:
(1) The maximum data rate specification shown in Figure 1–101 is valid only for the -1 (fastest) speed grade devices. For data rate specifications for
other speed grades offered, refer to the DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices chapter.
(2) The circled configuration supports data rates up to 11.3 Gbps per channel to implement 40G/100G links.
W ord A l i gner
(Pat tern Lengt h )
Basic Double Width
20-bit PMA- PC S
Interf ace Width
Disabled
Manual Ali gnm ent
(7 -, 10-, 20 -bi t)
Disabled
Disabled
8B/10B
Encoder/D ecoder
Rate Match FIFO
Byte SerDes
Byte Ordering
Strat ix IV GT Conf i gurat i ons
Basic
Single
Width Double
Width
Functional
Modes
Protocol
XAUI SRIO SONET
/SDH (OIF)
CEI SDI
8-bit 10-bit 16-bit 20-bit 10-bit 10-bit 8-bit 16-bit 10-bit
PMA -PCS/Fabric
Interf ace Width
PMA-PCS
Interf ace Width
Low -Lat ency P CS Enabled
Bit-Slip
(7-, 10-, 20-bit)
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Data R ate
C hannel B ondi ng x1, x4, x8
FPGA Fabric-
Transceiver
Interf ace Width 20-bit
Data R ate (Gbps)
FPGA Fabric-
Transceiver
Interf ace Frequency
FPGA Fabric
-
Transceiver
Interface Frequency
(
MHz
)
Enabled Disabled Enabled
Disabled Disabled Disabled
Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled
Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled
40-bit 16-bit 32-bit 20-bit 40-bit 16-bit 32-bit
Disabled Enabled
Disabled Disabled
20-bit 40-bit
Enabled
Disabled Enabled
Enabled Enabl ed
40-bit 32-bit
Disabled Disabled
16-bit 32-bit
124.4 -
325
124.4 -
250
124.4 -
250
124.4 -
325
124.4 -
250
124.4 -
325
62.2 -
282.5
62.2 -
212.5
62.2 -
212.5
62.2 -
212.5
62.2 -
212.5
62.2 -
212.5
62.2 -
212.5
62.2 -
212.5
1.0 -
6.5 1.0 -
5.0
1.0 -
8.5 1.0 -
8.5 1.0 -
5.0 1.0 -
8.5 1.0 -
6.5 1.0 -
8.5 1.0 -
5.0 1.0 -
8.5 2.488 -
6.5 2.488 -
11.3
(2)
(1)
(1)
PIPE
10-bit
Deterministic
Latency
10-Bit 20-Bit
Interf ace Frequency
TX PCS Latency
(FPGA Fabric-Transceiver
Interface Clock Cycles)
RX PCS Latency
(FPGA Fabric-Transceiver
Interface Clock Cycles)
5 - 6 4 - 5.5
10 - 12 10 - 12 13 - 16
6.5 - 8. 5
6.5 - 8.5
4 - 5.5 5 - 6 4 - 5.5 4 - 5.5 5 - 6 4 - 5.5
6.5 - 8.5
6.5 - 8. 5
22 - 26
4 - 5.5 5 - 6 4 - 5.5
6.5 - 8. 5
5 - 6
10 - 12 10 - 12
6.5 - 8. 5
4 - 5 4 - 5.5
3 - 4
3 - 4.5
600 Mbps - 11.3 Gbps
Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices 1–121
Transceiver Block Architecture
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
SATA and SAS Options
Serial advanced technology attachment (SATA) and serial attached SCSI (SAS) are
computer bus standards used in computers to transfer data between a mother board
and mass storage devices. Stratix IV GX and GT devices offer options to implement a
transceiver that satisfies SATA and SAS protocols. These options are:
■Transmitter in electrical idle mode
■Receiver signal detect functionality
These options and their selections are described in the following sections.
Transmitter Buffer Electrical Idle
In Basic functional mode, you can enable the optional input signal
tx_forceelecidle
.
When this input signal of a channel is asserted high, the transmitter buffer in that
channel is placed in the electrical idle state. During electrical idle, the output of the
transmitter buffer is tri-stated.
This signal is used in applications such as SATA and SAS for generating out of band
(OOB) signals. An OOB signal is a pattern of idle times and burst times. Different
OOB signals are distinguished by their different idle times.
1Manual CDR lock mode is required because you must be in lock-to-reference mode
during OOB signaling.
1For more information about the transmitter buffer in the Electrical Idle state, refer to
the “Transmitter Buffer Electrical Idle” section in “PCIe Mode” on page 1–127.
Receiver Input Signal Detect
In Basic functional mode, you can enable the optional
rx_signaldetect
signal (used
for protocols such as SATA and SAS) only if you select the 8B/10B block. When you
select the optional
rx_signaldetect
signal, an option is available to set the desired
threshold level of the signal being received at the receiver’s input buffer. If the signal
threshold detection circuitry senses the signal level present at the receiver input buffer
to be higher than the chosen signal detect threshold, it asserts the
rx_signaldetect
signal high. Otherwise, the signal threshold detection circuitry de-asserts the
rx_signaldetect
signal low. This signal is useful in applications such as SATA and
SAS for detecting OOB signals.
fFor more information on the signal threshold detection circuitry, refer to the ““Signal
Threshold Detection Circuitry” section.
fFor information about other protocols supported using Basic functional mode, refer to
AN 577: Recommended Protocol Configurations for Stratix IV FPGAs.
1–122 Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Block Architecture
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Deterministic Latency Mode
Stratix IV GX and GT devices have a deterministic latency option available for use in
high-speed serial interfaces such as CPRI (Common Public Radio Interface) and Open
Base Station Architecture Initiative Reference Point3 (OBSAI RP3). Both CPRI and
OBSAI RP3 protocols place stringent requirements on the amount of latency variation
that is permissible through a link implementing these protocols.
Figure 1–102 shows the transceiver datapath when using deterministic latency mode.
To implement this mode, select the Deterministic Latency option under the Which
Protocol will you be using? section in the ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager.
When you select this option, the transmitter channel is automatically placed in bit-slip
mode and Enable TX Phase Comp FIFO in register mode is automatically selected as
well. The receiver’s phase compensation FIFO is automatically placed in the register
mode. In addition, an output port (
rx_bitslipboundaryselectout[4:0]
) from the
receiver’s word aligner and an input port (
tx_bitslipboundaryselect[4:0]
) for the
transmitter bit-slip circuitry are instantiated. The option for placing the transmitter
phase compensation FIFO in register mode is also available.
Transmitter Bit Slipping
The transmitter is bit slipped to achieve deterministic latency. Use the
tx_bitslipboundaryselect[4:0]
port to set the number of bits that the transmitter
block needs to slip. Table 1–44 lists the number of bits that are allowed to be slipped
under different channel widths.
Figure 1–102. Transceiver Datapath When in Deterministic Latency Mode
Byte Deserializer
Byte Serializer
8B/10 Decoder
8B/10B Encoder
Rate Match FIFO
Receiver Channel PCS Receiver Channel
PMA
Deskew FIFO
Word Aligner
rx_datain
Deserializer
CDR
Transmitter Channel PCS Transmitter Channel
PMA
tx_dataout
Serializer
wrclk wrclkrdclk rdclk
PCIe hard IP
FPGA
Fabric
PIPE Interface
Transmitter Channel Datapath
Receiver Channel Datapath
TX Phase
Compensation
FIFO
Byte Ordering
RX Phase
Compensation
FIFO
Table 1–44. Number of Transmitter Bits Allowed to be Slipped in Deterministic Latency Mode
Channel Width Slip Zero
8/10 bit 9 bits
16/20 bit 19 bits
Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices 1–123
Transceiver Block Architecture
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Receiver Bit Slipping
The number of bits slipped in the receiver’s word aligner is given out on the
rx_bitslipboundaryselectout[4:0]
output port. The information on this output
depends on your deserializer block width.
In single-width mode with 8/10-bit channel width, the number of bits slipped in the
receiver path is given out sequentially on this output. For example, if zero bits are
slipped, the output on
rx_bitslipboundaryselectout[4:0]
shows a value of
0(00000); if two bits are slipped, the output on
rx_bitslipboundaryselectout[4:0]
shows a value of 2 (00010).
In double-width mode with 16/20-bit channel width, the output is 19 minus the
number of bits slipped. For example, if zero bits are slipped, the output on
rx_bitslipboundaryselectout[4:0]
shows a value of 19 (10011); if two bits are
slipped, the output on
rx_bitslipboundaryselectout[4:0]
shows a value of 17
(10001).
The information about the
rx_bitslipboundaryselectout[4:0]
output port helps in
calculating the latency through the receiver datapath. You can use the information on
rx_bitslipboundaryselectout[4:0]
to set up the
tx_bitslipboundaryselect[4:0]
appropriately to cancel out the latency uncertainty.
Receiver Phase Comp FIFO in Register Mode
To remove the latency uncertainty through the receiver’s phase compensation FIFO,
select the Enable the RX phase comp FIFO in register mode option in the ALTGX
MegaWizard Plug-In Manager. In register mode, the phase compensation FIFO acts as
a register and thereby removes the uncertainty in latency. The latency through the
phase compensation FIFO in register mode is one clock cycle.
This mode is available in:
■Basic single-width mode with 8-bit channel width and 8B/10B Encoder enabled or
10-bit channel width with 8B/10B disabled.
■Basic double-width mode with 16-bit channel width and 8B/10B encoder enabled
or 20-bit channel width with 8B/10B disabled.
Transmitter Phase Compensation FIFO in Register Mode
In register mode, the phase compensation FIFO acts as a register and thereby removes
the uncertainty in latency. The latency through the transmitter and receiver phase
compensation FIFO in register mode is one clock cycle.
CMU PLL Feedback
To implement deterministic latency functional mode, the phase relationship between
the low-speed parallel clock and CMU PLL input reference clock must be
deterministic. You can achieve this by selecting the Enable PLL phase frequency
detector (PFD) feedback to compensate latency uncertainty in Tx dataout and Tx
clkout paths relative to the reference clock option in the ALTGX MegaWizard
Plug-In Manager. By selecting this option, a feedback path is enabled that ensures a
deterministic relationship between the low-speed parallel clock and CMU PLL input
reference clock.
1–124 Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Block Architecture
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
In order to achieve deterministic latency through the transceiver, the reference clock
to the CMU PLL must be the same as the low-speed parallel clock. For example, if you
need a data rate of 1.2288 Gbps to be implemented for the CPRI protocol that places
stringent requirements on the amount of latency variation, you must choose a
reference clock of 122.88 MHz to allow for a feedback path from the CMU PLL to be
used. This feedback path reduces the variations in latency.
When selecting this option, you must provide an input reference clock to the CMU
PLL that is of the same frequency as the low-speed parallel clock.
1In a CPRI implementation, the input reference clock to the CMU PLL must be the
same as the low-speed parallel clock. Each CPRI channel uses one CMU PLL;
therefore, each transceiver block can implement two CPRI ×1 channels only.
ATX PLLs do not have the feedback path enabled; therefore, they cannot be used for
implementing the CPRI configuration.
In the deterministic latency ×4 option, up to four CPRI TX channels can be bundled in
an ×4 group so that they all have the same TX uncertainty and just require one TX PLL
to compensate for it. This is allowed in cases where the data rates are multiples of a
single PLL output frequency; for example, 0.6144 Gbps, 1.228 Gbps, 2.4576 Gbps, and
4.9152 Gbps. For ×4 bundled channels to maintain PLL lock during auto-negotiation,
the IP must use over-sampling (sending the same bit multiple times) to output lower
auto-negotiated line rates. Do not use the hard 8B/10B for oversampled channels.
CPRI and OBSAI
You can use deterministic latency functional mode to implement protocols such as
CPRI and OBSAI.
The CPRI interface defines a digital point-to-point interface between the Radio
Equipment Control (REC) and the Radio Equipment (RE) allowing flexibility in either
co-locating the REC and the RE or remote location of the RE. Figure 1–103 shows
various CPRI topologies. In most cases, CPRI links are between REC and RE modules
or between two RE modules in a chain configuration.
Figure 1–103. CPRI Topologies
REC
Radio Equipment
Control
RE
RE
RE
Ring
RE
RE
RE
Chain
RE
Piont-to-Point
RE
RE
RE
Tree and Branch
Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices 1–125
Transceiver Block Architecture
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
If the destination for high-speed serial data leaving the REC is the first RE, it is a
single-hop connection. If serial data from the REC has to traverse through multiple
REs before reaching the destination RE, it is a multi-hop connection. Remotely
locating the RF transceiver from the main base station introduces a complexity with
overall system delay. CPRI specification requires that the accuracy of measurement of
round-trip delay on single-hop and multi-hop connections be within ±16.276 ns in
order to properly estimate the cable delay. For a single-hop system, this allows a
variation in round-trip delay of up to ±16.276 ns. For multi-hop systems however, the
allowed delay variation is divided among number of hops in the connection—
typically equal to ±16.276 ns/ (# of hops), but not always equally divided among the
hops. Deterministic latency on a CPRI link also enables highly accurate triangulation
of a caller’s location.
The OBSAI was established by several OEM’s for developing a set of specifications
that can be used for configuring and connecting common modules into base
transceiver stations (BTS). The BTS has four main modules—radio frequency (RF),
baseband, control and transport.
Figure 1–104 shows a typical BTS. The radio frequency module (RFM) receives signals
using portable devices and converts them to digital data. The baseband module
processes the encoded signal and brings it back to baseband before transmitting it to
the terrestrial network using the transport module. Coordination between these three
functions is maintained by a control module.
Figure 1–104. BTS in OSBAL
Note to Figure 1–104:
(1) “RP” means Reference Point.
Transport Module Baseband
Module RF Module
System Software
RP2 (1) RP3 (1)
SwitchInterface BB RFM
Control
Module
RP1 (1)
Control
& Clock
Proprietary
Module(s)
Power System
Clock and Sync
1–126 Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Block Architecture
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Under the deterministic latency option, CPRI data rates can be implemented in
single-width mode with 8/10-bit channel width and double-width mode with
16/20-bit channel width options only. Figure 1–105 shows the block diagram of the
deterministic latency option.
1To implement CPRI/OBSAI using deterministic latency mode, Altera recommends
using configurations with the byte serializer/deserializer disabled.
1When the byte serializer is enabled, divide the latency of the byte serializer block by 2.
Therefore, the byte serializer/deserializer latency is 0.5–1 when enabled. When the
byte serializer is disabled, the latency value is 1.
1Dividing the latency also applies to the sub-blocks after the byte serializer (8B/10B
encoder) and before the byte deserializer (word aligner, 8B/10B decoder, etc.). The
latency value of each sub-block should also be divided by 2 if they are enabled.
Figure 1–105. Block Diagram of the Deterministic Latency Option
Disabled
Rate Match FIFO
Byte SerDes
Byte Ordering
Stratix IV GX and GT Configurations
Basic
Single
Width
Double
Width
Protocol
PIPE XAUI GIGE SRIO SONET
/SDH (OIF)
CEI SDI
8-bit 10-Bit 16-Bit 20-Bit 10-Bit 10-Bit 10-Bit 10-Bit 8-Bit 16-Bit 10-Bit
Disabled
Disabled
FPGA Fabric
-
Transceiver
Interf ace F requenc y
Disabled Disabled
Functional
Modes
PMA-PCS
Interface Width
Functional
Mode
Data Rate
Channel Bonding
Low-Latency PCS
Word Aligner
(Pattern Length)
8B/10B
Encoder/Decoder
Data Rate (Gbps)
FPGA
Fabric-Transceiver
Interface Width
FPGA
Fabric-Transceiver
Interface Frequency
(MHz)
Manual Alignment
(10-Bit)
Deterministic
Latency
0.6 - 3.75 Gbps - GX
600 Mbps -3.75 Gbps - GT
x1, x4
0.6 - 2.5 GX
2.488 -2.5 GT
0.6 - 3.75 GX
2.488 - 3.75 GT
10-Bit 20-Bit
Deterministic
Latency
-Bit 20-Bit
10
Deterministic
Latency
0.6 - 8.5 Gbps - GX
600 Mbps - 8.5 Gbps - GT
x1, x4
Disabled
Manual Alignment
(10-Bit, 20-bit)
DisabledEnabled Enabled
Disabled DisabledDisabled Disabled
Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled
1.0 - 6.5 GX
2.488 - 6.5 GT
1.0 - 8.5 GX
2.488 - 8.5 GT
Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled
8-Bit 16-Bit 20-Bit 40-Bit 16-Bit 32-Bit
50 - 250 - GX
124.4 - 250 - GT
0.6 - 2.5 GX
2.488 -2.5 GT
0.6 - 3.75 GX
2.488 - 3.75 GT
1.0 - 5.0 GX
2.488 - 5.0 GT
1.0 - 8.5 GX
2.488 - 8.5 GT
25 - 212.5 - GX
62.2 - 212.5 - GT
60 - 250 - GX
248.8 - 250 - GT
30 - 187.5 - GX
124.4 - 187.5 - GT 25 - 212.5 - GX
62.2 - 212.5 - GT
30 - 187.5 - GX
124.4 - 187.5 - GT
60 - 250 - GX
248.8 - 250 - GT
50 - 325 - GX
124.4 - 325 - GT
Int erfac e F requenc y
TX PCS Latency
(FPGA Fabric-Transceiver
Interface Clock Cycles)
RX PCS Latency
(FPGA Fabric-Transceiver
Interface Clock Cycles)
2.5 - 3.5 2.5 - 3.5 2.5 - 3.5 2.5 - 3.5
5 - 6
2.5 - 3.5
5 - 6
2.5 - 3.5
5 - 6
2.5 - 3.5
5 - 6
2.5 - 3.5
5 - 65 - 6 5 - 6 5 - 6
Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices 1–127
Transceiver Block Architecture
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Table 1–45 lists the PMA-PCS interface widths, CPRI and OSBAI data rates in
deterministic latency mode.
PCIe Mode
Intel Corporation has developed a PHY interface for the PCIe Architecture
specification to enable implementation of a PCIe-compliant physical layer device. The
PCIe specification also defines a standard interface between the physical layer device
and the media access control layer (MAC). Version 2.0 of the PCIe specification
provides implementation details for a PCIe-compliant physical layer device at both
Gen1 (2.5 GT/s) and Gen2 (5 GT/s) signaling rates.
To implement a Version 2.0 PCIe-compliant PHY, you must configure the
Stratix IV GX and GT transceivers in PCIe functional mode. Stratix IV GX and GT
devices have built-in PCIe hard IP blocks that you can use to implement the
PHY-MAC layer, data link layer, and transaction layer of the PCIe protocol stack. You
can also bypass the PCIe hard IP blocks and implement the PHY-MAC layer, data link
layer, and transaction layer in the FGPA fabric using a soft IP. If you enable the PCIe
hard IP blocks, the Stratix IV transceivers interface with these hard IP blocks.
Otherwise, the Stratix IV transceivers interface with the FPGA fabric.
You can configure the Stratix IV GX and GT transceivers in PCIe functional mode
using one of the following two methods:
■ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager—if you do not use the PCIe hard IP block
■PCIe Compiler—if you use the PCIe hard IP block
1Description of PCIe hard IP architecture and PCIe mode configurations allowed when
using the PCIe hard IP block are beyond the scope of this chapter. For more
information about the PCIe hard IP block, refer to the PCI Express Compiler User Guide.
Table 1–45. PMA-PCS Interface Widths, CPRI and OSBAI Data Rates in Deterministic latency Mode
Deterministic
Latency Mode
Supported
Data Rate
Range
PMA-PCS
Interface
Width for CPRI
& OBSAI
CPRI Data Rate
(GBPS)
PCS Clock
Frequency
(MHz)
OBSAI Data
Rate
(Gbps)
PCS Clock
Frequency
(MHz)
Single-width
mode
600 Mbps to
3.75 Gbps 8 bit/10 bit
0.6144 61.44 768 76.8
1.2288 122.88 1.536 153.6
2.4576 (1) 245.76 — —
Double-width
mode > 1 Gbps
16 bit/20 bit 3.072 153.6 1.536 76.8
16 bit/20 bit 4.915 (2), (3) 245.76 3.072 (3) 153.6
32 bit/40 bit 6.144 (2), (3),
(4) 307.2 6.144 (3), (4) 307.2
Notes to Table 1–45:
(1) When configured in double-width mode for the same data rate, the core clock frequency is halved.
(2) Requires double-width mode.
(3) When configured for 32/40-bit channel width requiring byte serializer/deserializer, the core clock is halved.
(4) Requires the byte serializer/deserializer.
1–128 Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Block Architecture
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
PCIe Mode Configurations
Stratix IV GX and GT transceivers support both Gen1 (2.5 Gbps) and Gen2 (5 Gbps)
data rates in PCIe functional mode. When configured for the Gen2 (5 Gbps) data rate,
the Stratix IV GX and GT transceivers allow dynamic switching between Gen2
(5 Gbps) and Gen1 (2.5 Gbps) signaling rates. Dynamic switch capability between the
two PCIe signaling rates is critical for speed negotiation during link training.
Stratix IV GX and GT transceivers support ×1, ×4, and ×8 lane configurations in PCIe
functional mode at both 2.5 Gbps and 5 Gbps data rates. In PCIe ×1 configuration, the
PCS and PMA blocks of each channel are clocked and reset independently. PCIe ×4
and ×8 configurations support channel bonding for four-lane and eight-lane PCIe
links. In these bonded channel configurations, the PCS and PMA blocks of all bonded
channels share common clock and reset signals.
Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices 1–129
Transceiver Block Architecture
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Figure 1–106 shows the Stratix IV GX and GT transceiver configurations allowed in
PCIe functional mode.
Figure 1–106. Stratix IV GX and GT Transceivers in PCIe Functional Mode
Channel Bonding
Rate Match FIFO
Functional Mode
Data Rate
Disabled
Byte SerDes Disabled Disabled Enabled
Enabled
Enabled Disabled
Disabled Enabled
PIPE
2.5 Gbps
(Gen1)
x1, x4, x8
10-Bit
Automatic
Synchronization
State Machine
(/K28.5+/,/K28.5-/)
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
8-Bit 8-Bit 16-Bit
250 MHz 250 MHz 125 MHz
PMA-PCS
Interface Width
Word Aligner
(Pattern)
8B/10B Encoder/
Decoder
PCI Express
hardIP
PCS-hardIP or
PCS-FPGA Fabric
Interface Width
PCS-hardIP or
PCS-FPGA Fabric
Interface Frequency
500 MHz 250 MHz
8-Bit 16-Bit
Enabled
Automatic
Synchronization
State Machine
(/K28.5+/,/K28.5-/)
10-Bit
x1, x4, x8
5 Gbps
(Gen2)
St ratix I V GX and GT Configurations
Basic
Single
Width Double
Width
Functional
Modes
Protocol
PIPE XAUI GIGE SRIO
SONET
/SDH (OIF)
CEI SDI
8-bit 10-bit 16-bit 10-bit
20-bit 10-bit 10-bit 10-bit 8-bit 16-bit 10-bit
PMA-PCS
I nt erf ace W i dth
Deterministic
Latency
10-Bit 20-Bit
Interf ace Frequency
TX PCS Latency
(FPGA Fabric-Transceiver
Interface Clock Cycles)
RX PCS Latency
(FPGA Fabric-Transceiver
Interface Clock Cycles)
5 - 6 5 - 6 4 - 5.5 5 - 6 4 - 5.5
20 - 24 20 - 24 11.5 -
14.5 20 - 24 11.5 -
14.5
1–130 Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Block Architecture
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
PCIe Mode Datapath
Figure 1–107 shows the Stratix IV GX and GT transceiver datapath when configured
in PCIe functional mode.
For more information, refer to “Rate Match (Clock Rate Compensation) FIFO” on
page 1–77.
Table 1–46 lists the transceiver datapath clock frequencies in PCIe functional mode
configured using the ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager.
Figure 1–107. Stratix IV GX and GT Transceiver Datapath in PCIe ×1 Mode
tx_coreclk[0]
FPGA Fabric
Transceiver
Interface Clock
RX Phase
Compensation
FIFO
Byte Ordering
Byte Deserializer
Byte Serializer
8B/10B8B/10B8B/10B
8B/10B Decoder
8B/10B Encoder
Rate Match FIFO
Receiver Channel PCS Receiver Channel
PMA
Deskew FIFO
Word Aligner
Deserializer
CDR
Transmitter Channel PCS Transmitter Channel
PMA
Serializer
wrclk wrclkrdclk rdclk
High-Speed
Serial Clock
tx_clkout[0] Low-Speed Parallel Clock
PCIe hard IP
FPGA
Fabric
/2
PIPE Interface
/2 Low -Speed Parallel Clock
Parallel Recovery Clock
rx_coreclk[0]
Transmitter Channel Datapath
Receiver Channel Datapath
FPGA Fabric
TX Phase
Compensation
FIFO
Table 1–46. Stratix IV GX and GT Transceiver Datapath Clock Frequencies in PCIe Mode
Functional Mode Data Rate High-Speed Serial
Clock Frequency
Parallel Recovered
Clock and
Low-Speed
Parallel Clock
Frequency
FPGA Fabric-Transceiver
Interface Clock Frequency
Without Byte
Serializer/
Deserializer
(8 Bit Wide)
With Byte
Serializer/
Deserializer
(16 Bit Wide)
PCIe ×1, ×4, and ×8
(Gen1) 2.5 Gbps 1.25 GHz 250 MHz 250 MHz 125 MHz
PCIe ×1, ×4, and ×8
(Gen2) 5 Gbps 2.5 GHz 500 MHz N/A (1) 250 MHz
Note to Table 1–46:
(1) In PCIe functional mode at Gen2 (5 Gbps) data rate, the byte serializer/deserializer cannot be bypassed.
Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices 1–131
Transceiver Block Architecture
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Transceiver datapath clocking varies between non-bonded (×1) and bonded (×4 and
×8) configurations in PCIe mode.
fFor more information about transceiver datapath clocking in different PCIe
configurations, refer to the Transceiver Clocking in Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Table 1–47 lists the transmitter and receiver datapaths in PCIe mode.
Table 1–48 lists the features supported in PCIe functional mode for 2.5 Gbps and
5 Gbps data rate configurations.
For more information, refer to “Rate Match FIFO in PCIe Mode” on page 1–78.
Table 1–47. Datapaths in PCIe Mode
Transmitter Datapath Receiver Datapath
PCIe interface Y Y
Transmitter phase compensation FIFO Y —
Optional byte serializer (enabled for 16-bit and disabled for
8-bit FPGA fabric-transceiver interface Y—
8B/10B encoder Y —
10:1 serializer Y —
Transmitter buffer with receiver detect circuitry Y —
Receiver buffer with signal detect circuitry — Y
1:10 deserializer — Y
Word aligner that implements PCIe-compliant synchronization
state machine —Y
Optional rate match FIFO (clock rate compensation) that can
tolerate up to 600 PPM frequency difference —Y
8B/10B decoder — Y
Optional byte deserializer (enabled for 16-bit and disabled for
8-bit FPGA fabric-transceiver interface) —Y
Receiver phase compensation FIFO — Y
Table 1–48. Supported Features in PCIe Mode (Part 1 of 2)
Feature 2.5 Gbps
(Gen1)
5 Gbps
(Gen2)
×1, ×4, ×8 link configurations Y Y
PCIe-compliant synchronization state machine Y Y
±300 PPM (total 600 PPM) clock rate compensation Y Y
8-bit FPGA fabric-transceiver interface Y —
16-bit FPGA fabric-transceiver interface Y Y
Transmitter buffer electrical idle Y Y
Receiver Detection Y Y
8B/10B encoder disparity control when transmitting compliance
pattern YY
Power state management Y Y
1–132 Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Block Architecture
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
PCIe Interface
In PCIe mode, each channel has a PCIe interface block that transfers data, control, and
status signals between the PHY-MAC layer and the transceiver channel PCS and PMA
blocks. The PCIe interface block is compliant to version 2.0 of the PCIe specification. If
you use the PCIe hard IP block, the PHY-MAC layer is implemented in the hard IP
block. Otherwise, the PHY-MAC layer can be implemented using soft IP in the FPGA
fabric.
1The PCIe interface block is only used in PCIe mode and cannot be bypassed.
Besides transferring data, control, and status signals between the PHY-MAC layer
and the transceiver, the PCIe interface block implements the following functions
required in a PCIe-compliant physical layer device:
■Forces the transmitter buffer in electrical idle state
■Initiates the receiver detect sequence
■8B/10B encoder disparity control when transmitting compliance pattern
■Manages the PCIe power states
■Indicates the completion of various PHY functions; for example, receiver detection
and power state transitions on the
pipephydonestatus
signal
■Encodes the receiver status and error conditions on the
pipestatus[2:0]
signal as
specified in the PCIe specification
Transmitter Buffer Electrical Idle
When the input signal
tx_forceelecidle
is asserted high, the PCIe interface block
puts the transmitter buffer in that channel in the electrical idle state. During electrical
idle, the transmitter buffer differential and common mode output voltage levels are
compliant to the PCIe Base Specification 2.0 for both PCIe Gen1 and Gen2 data rates.
Figure 1–108 shows the relationship between the assertion of the
tx_forceelecidle
signal and the transmitter buffer output on the
tx_dataout
port. Time T1 taken from
the assertion of the
tx_forceelecidle
signal to the transmitter buffer reaching
electrical idle voltage levels is pending characterization. Once in the electrical idle
state, the PCIe protocol requires the transmitter buffer to stay in electrical idle for a
minimum of 20 ns for both Gen1 and Gen2 data rates.
Receiver status encoding Y Y
Dynamic switch between 2.5 Gbps and 5 Gbps signaling rate — Y
Dynamically selectable transmitter margining for differential output
voltage control —Y
Dynamically selectable transmitter buffer de-emphasis of -3.5 db and
-6 dB —Y
Table 1–48. Supported Features in PCIe Mode (Part 2 of 2)
Feature 2.5 Gbps
(Gen1)
5 Gbps
(Gen2)
Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices 1–133
Transceiver Block Architecture
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
1The minimum period of time for which the
tx_forceelecidle
signal must be asserted
high such that the transmitter buffer stays in electrical idle state for at least 20 ns is
pending characterization.
The PCIe specification requires the transmitter buffer to be in electrical idle in certain
power states. For more information about the
tx_forceelecidle
signal levels
required in different PCIe power states, refer to Table 1–50 on page 1–137.
Receiver Detection
During the detect substate of the link training and status state machine (LTSSM), the
PCIe protocol requires the transmitter channel to perform a receiver detect sequence
to detect if a receiver is present at the far end of each lane. The PCIe specification
requires the receiver detect operation to be performed during the P1 power state.
The PCIe interface block in Stratix IV GX and GT transceivers provide an input signal
tx_detectrxloopback
for the receiver detect operation. When the input signal
tx_detectrxloopback
is asserted high in the P1 power state, the PCIe interface block
sends a command signal to the transmitter buffer in that channel to initiate a receiver
detect sequence. In the P1 power state, the transmitter buffer must always be in the
electrical idle state. After receiving this command signal, the receiver detect circuitry
creates a step voltage at the output of the transmitter buffer. If an active receiver (that
complies with the PCIe input impedance requirements) is present at the far end, the
time constant of the step voltage on the trace is higher when compared with the time
constant of the step voltage when the receiver is not present. The receiver detect
circuitry monitors the time constant of the step signal seen on the trace to determine if
a receiver was detected. The receiver detect circuitry monitor requires a 125-MHz
clock for operation that you must drive on the
fixedclk
port.
1For the receiver detect circuitry to function reliably, the AC-coupling capacitor on the
serial link and the receiver termination values used in your system must be compliant
to the PCIe Base Specification 2.0.
Receiver detect circuitry communicates the status of the receiver detect operation to
the PCIe interface block. If a far-end receiver is successfully detected, the PCIe
interface block asserts
pipephydonestatus
for one clock cycle and synchronously
drives the
pipestatus[2:0]
signal to 3'b011. If a far-end receiver is not detected, the
PCIe interface block asserts
pipephydonestatus
for one clock cycle and synchronously
drives the
pipestatus[2:0]
signal to 3'b000.
Figure 1–108. Transmitter Buffer Electrical Idle State
tx_forcelecidle
tx_dataout
T1 >20 ns
1–134 Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Block Architecture
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Figure 1–109 and Figure 1–110 show the receiver detect operation where a receiver
was successfully detected and where a receiver was not detected, respectively.
Compliance Pattern Transmission Support
The LTSSM state machine can enter the polling.compliance substate where the
transmitter is required to transmit a compliance pattern as specified in the PCIe Base
Specification 2.0. The polling.compliance substate is intended to assess if the
transmitter is electrically compliant with the PCIe voltage and timing specifications.
The compliance pattern is a repeating sequence of the following four code groups:
■/K28.5/
■/D21.5/
■/K28.5/
■/D10.2/
Figure 1–109. Receiver Detect, Successfully Detected
powerdown[1:0]
tx_detectrxloopback
pipephydonestatus
pipestatus[2:0] 3'b000
2'b10(P1)
3'b011
Figure 1–110. Receiver Detect, Unsuccessfully Detected
powerdown[1:0]
tx_detectrxloopback
pipephydonestatus
pipestatus[2:0] 3'b000
2'b10 (P1)
Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices 1–135
Transceiver Block Architecture
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
The PCIe protocol requires the first /K28.5/ code group of the compliance pattern to
be encoded with negative current disparity. To satisfy this requirement, the PCIe
interface block provides the input signal
tx_forcedispcompliance
. A high level on
tx_forcedispcompliance
forces the associated parallel transmitter data on the
tx_datain
port to transmit with negative current running disparity.
■For 8-bit transceiver channel width configurations, you must drive
tx_forcedispcompliance
high in the same parallel clock cycle as the first /K28.5/
of the compliance pattern on the
tx_datain
port.
■For 16-bit transceiver channel width configurations, you must drive the
tx_forcedispcompliance
high in the same parallel clock cycle as /K28.5/D21.5/
of the compliance pattern on the
tx_datain
port.
Figure 1–111 and Figure 1–112 show the required level on the
tx_forcedispcompliance
signal while transmitting the compliance pattern in 8-bit
and 16-bit channel width configurations, respectively.
Power State Management
The PCIe specification defines four power states—P0, P0s, P1, and P2—that the
physical layer device must support to minimize power consumption.
■P0 is the normal operating state during which packet data is transferred on the
PCIe link.
■P0s, P1, and P2 are low-power states into which the physical layer must transition
as directed by the PHY-MAC layer to minimize power consumption.
Figure 1–111. Compliance Pattern Transmission Support, 8-Bit Channel Width Configurations
BC BC BC BC
tx_datain[7:0]
tx_ctrlenable
tx_forcedispcompliance
B5 4A B5 4A
K28.5 D21.5 K28.5 D10.2 K28.5 D21.5 K28.5 D10.2
Figure 1–112. Compliance Pattern Transmission Support, 16-Bit Wide Channel Configurations
01
tx_datain[15:0]
tx_ctrlenable[1:0]
tx_forcedispcompliance
B5BC
/K28.5/D21.5/ /K28.5/D10.2/
4ABC B5BC
/K28.5/D21.5/
4ABC
/K28.5/D10.2/
1–136 Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Block Architecture
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
The PCIe specification provides the mapping of these power states to the LTSSM
states specified in the PCIe Base Specification 2.0. The PHY-MAC layer is responsible
for implementing the mapping logic between the LTSSM states and the four power
states in the PCIe-compliant PHY.
The PCIe interface in Stratix IV GX and GT transceivers provides an input port,
powerdn[1:0]
, for each transceiver channel configured in PCIe mode. Table 1–49 lists
mapping between the logic levels driven on the
powerdn[1:0]
port and the resulting
power state that the PCIe interface block puts the transceiver channel into.
1When transitioning from the P0 power state to lower power states (P0s, P1, and P2),
the PCIe specification requires the physical layer device to implement power saving
measures. Stratix IV GX and GT transceivers do not implement these power saving
measures except putting the transmitter buffer in electrical idle in the lower power
states.
The PCIe interface block indicates successful power state transition by asserting the
pipephydonestatus
signal for one parallel clock cycle as specified in the PCIe
specification. The PHY-MAC layer must not request any further power state
transition until the
pipephydonestatus
signal has indicated the completion of the
current power state transition request.
Figure 1–113 shows an example waveform for a transition from the P0 to P2 power
state.
Table 1–49. Power State Functions and Descriptions
Power State powerdn Function Description
P0 2’b00 Transmits normal data, transmits electrical idle, or
enters into loopback mode Normal operation mode
P0s 2’b01 Only transmits electrical idle Low recovery time saving state
P1 2’b10 Transmitter buffer is powered down and can do a
receiver detect while in this state
High recovery time power saving
state
P2 2’b11 Transmits electrical idle or a beacon to wake up the
downstream receiver Lowest power saving state
Figure 1–113. Power State Transition from the P0 to P2 Power State
Parallel
Clock
powerdn[1:0]
pipephydonestatus
2'b00 (P0) 2'b11 (P2)
Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices 1–137
Transceiver Block Architecture
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
The PCIe specification allows the PCIe interface to perform protocol functions; for
example, receiver detect, loopback, and beacon transmission, in specified power
states only. This requires the PHY-MAC layer to drive the
tx_detectrxloopback
and
tx_forceelecidle
signals appropriately in each power state to perform these
functions. Table 1–50 lists the logic levels that the PHY-MAC layer must drive on the
tx_detectrxloopback
and
tx_forceelecidle
signals in each power state.
Receiver Status
The PCIe specification requires the PHY to encode the receiver status on a 3-bit
RxStatus[2:0]
signal. This status signal is used by the PHY-MAC layer for its
operation.
The PCIe interface block receives status signals from the transceiver channel PCS and
PMA blocks and encodes the status on the 3-bit output signal
pipestatus[2:0]
to the
FPGA fabric. The encoding of the status signals on
pipestatus[2:0]
is compliant
with the PCIe specification and is listed in Table 1–51.
Two or more of the error conditions (for example, 8B/10B decode error [code group
violation], rate match FIFO overflow or underflow, and receiver disparity error), can
occur simultaneously. The PCIe interface follows the priority listed in Table 1–51
while encoding the receiver status on the
pipestatus[2:0]
port. For example, if the
PCIe interface receives an 8B/10B decode error and disparity error for the same
symbol, it drives 3'b100 on the
pipestatus[2:0]
signal.
Table 1–50. Logic Levels for tx_detectrxloopback and tx_forceelecidle in Different Power States
Power State tx_detectrxloopback tx_forceelecidle
P0 0: normal mode
1: datapath in loopback mode
0: Must be de-asserted
1: Illegal mode
P0s Don’t care 0: Illegal mode
1: Must be asserted in this state
P1 0: Electrical Idle
1: receiver detect
0: Illegal mode
1: Must be asserted in this state
P2 Don’t care De-asserted in this state for sending
beacon. Otherwise asserted.
Table 1–51. Encoding of the Status Signals on pipestatus[2:0]
pipestatus[2:0] Description Error Condition Priority
3'b000 Received data OK N/A
3'b001 One SKP symbol added 5
3'b010 One SKP symbol deleted 6
3'b011 Receiver detected N/A
3'b100 8B/10B decode error 1
3'b101 Elastic buffer (rate match FIFO) overflow 2
3'b110 Elastic buffer (rate match FIFO) underflow 3
3'b111 Received disparity error 4
1–138 Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Block Architecture
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Fast Recovery Mode
The PCIe Base specification fast training sequences (FTS) are used for bit and byte
synchronization to transition from L0s to L0 (PCIe P0s to P0) power states. When
transitioning from the L0s to L0 power state, the PCIe Base Specification requires the
physical layer device to acquire bit and byte synchronization after receiving a
maximum of 255 FTS (~4 us at Gen1 data rate and ~2 us at Gen2 data rate).
If you have configured the Stratix IV GX and GT receiver CDR in Automatic Lock
mode, the receiver cannot meet the PCIe specification of acquiring bit and byte
synchronization within 4 s (Gen1 data rate) or 2 s (Gen2 data rate) due to the signal
detect and PPM detector time. To meet this specification, each Stratix IV GX and GT
transceiver has a built-in Fast Recovery circuitry that you can optionally enable.
1To enable the Fast Recovery circuitry, select the Enable fast recovery mode option in
the ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager.
If you enable the Fast Recovery mode option, the Fast Recovery circuitry controls the
receiver CDR
rx_locktorefclk
and
rx_locktodata
signals to force the receiver CDR
in LTR or LTD mode. It relies on the Electrical Idle Ordered Sets (EIOS), N_FTS
sequences received in the L0 power state, and the signal detect signal from the
receiver input buffer to control the receiver CDR lock mode.
1The Fast Recovery circuitry is self-operational and does not require control inputs
from you. When enabled, the
rx_locktorefclk
and
rx_locktodata
ports are not
available in the ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager.
Electrical Idle Inference
The PCIe protocol allows inferring the electrical idle condition at the receiver instead
of detecting the electrical idle condition using analog circuitry. Clause 4.2.4.3 in the
PCIe Base Specification 2.0 specifies conditions to infer electrical idle at the receiver in
various substates of the LTSSM state machine.
In all PCIe modes (×1, ×4, and ×8), each receiver channel PCS has an optional
Electrical Idle Inference module designed to implement the electrical idle inference
conditions specified in the PCIe Base Specification 2.0. You can enable the Electrical
Idle Inference module by selecting the Enable electrical idle inference functionality
option in the ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In manager.
If enabled, this module infers electrical idle depending on the logic level driven on the
rx_elecidleinfersel[2:0]
input signal. The Electrical Idle Inference module in each
receiver channel indicates whether the electrical idle condition is inferred or not on
the
pipeelecidle
signal of that channel. The Electrical Idle Interface module drives
the
pipeelecidle
signal high if it infers an electrical idle condition; otherwise, it
drives it low.
Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices 1–139
Transceiver Block Architecture
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Table 1–52 lists electrical idle inference conditions specified in the PCIe Base
Specification 2.0 and implemented in the Electrical Idle Inference module to infer
electrical idle in various substates of the LTSSM state machine. For the Electrical Idle
Inference Module to correctly infer an electrical idle condition in each LTSSM
substate, you must drive the
rx_elecidleinfersel[2:0]
signal appropriately, as
shown in Table 1–52.
In the Recovery.Speed substate of the LTSSM state machine with unsuccessful speed
negotiation (
rx_elecidleinfersel[2:0]
=
3'b110
), the PCIe Base Specification
requires the receiver to infer an electrical idle condition (
pipeelecidle
= high) if
absence of an exit from Electrical Idle is detected in a 2000 UI interval for Gen1 data
rate and 16000 UI interval for Gen2 data rate. The electrical idle inference module
detects an absence of exit from Electrical Idle if four /K28.5/ COM code groups are
not received in the specified interval.
In other words, when configured for Gen1 data rate and
rx_elecidleinfersel[2:0]
= 3'b110, the Electrical Idle Inference module asserts
pipeelecidle
high if it does not receive four /K28.5/ COM code groups in a 2000 UI
interval. When configured for Gen1 data rate and
rx_elecidleinfersel[2:0]
= 3'b111 in the Loopback.Active substate of the LTSSM
state machine, the Electrical Idle Inference module asserts
pipeelecidle
high if it
does not receive four /K28.5/ COM code groups in a 128 s interval.
When configured for Gen2 data rate and
rx_elecidleinfersel[2:0]
= 3'b110, the
Electrical Idle Inference module asserts
pipeelecidle
high if it does not receive four
/K28.5/ COM code groups in a 16000 UI interval.
1The Electrical Idle Inference module does not have the capability to detect the
electrical idle exit condition based on reception of the electrical idle exit ordered set
(EIEOS), as specified in the PCIe Base Specification.
If you select the Enable Electrical Idle Inference Functionality option in the ALTGX
MegaWizard Plug-In Manager and drive
rx_elecidleinfersel[2:0] = 3'b0xx
, the
Electrical Idle Inference block uses the EIOS detection from the Fast Recovery
circuitry to drive the
pipeelecidle
signal.
Table 1–52. Electrical Idle Inference Conditions
LTSSM State Gen1 (2.5 Gbps) Gen2 (5 Gbps) rx_elecidleinfersel[2:0]
L0 Absence of skip ordered set in
128 s window
Absence of skip ordered set in
128 s window 3'b100
Recovery.RcvrCfg Absence of TS1 or TS2
ordered set in 1280 UI interval
Absence of TS1 or TS2
ordered set in 1280 UI interval 3'b101
Recovery.Speed when
successful speed negotiation
= 1'b1
Absence of TS1 or TS2
ordered set in 1280 UI interval
Absence of TS1 or TS2
ordered set in 1280 UI window 3'b101
Recovery.Speed when
successful speed negotiation
= 1'b0
Absence of an exit from
Electrical Idle in 2000 UI
interval
Absence of an exit from
Electrical Idle in 16000 UI
interval
3'b110
Loopback.Active
(as slave)
Absence of an exit from
Electrical Idle in 128 s
window
N/A 3'b111
1–140 Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Block Architecture
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
If you do not select the Enable electrical idle inference functionality option in the
ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager, the Electrical Idle Inference module is
disabled. In this case, the
rx_signaldetect
signal from the signal detect circuitry in
the receiver buffer is inverted and driven as the
pipeelecidle
signal.
Recommendation When Using the Electrical Idle Inference Block
In a PCIe link, when operating at Gen2 data rate, the downstream device can go into
the Disable state after instruction from the upper layer. Once in the Disable state, the
downstream device must detect an Electrical Idle Exit condition to go into the Detect
state. At this same time, the upstream device can be directed by the upper layer to go
into the Detect state and start transmitting the COM symbols to the downstream
device at Gen 1 data rate.
1The Disable and Detect states are different states of the Link Training and Status State
Machine as described by the PCIe Base Specification Rev 2.0.
1The COM symbol is an 8B/10B encoded value of K28.5 and is part of the training
sequences TS1 and TS2 as described by the PCIe Base Specification Rev 2.0.
When the Stratix IV GX and GT device is operating as a downstream device at PCIe
Gen 2 data rates and if it goes into the Disable State, the Stratix IV GX and GT receiver
must receive an Electrical Idle Exit condition in order to move out of the Disable state.
For the Stratix IV GX and GT receiver, the Electrical Idle Exit condition is achieved
when COM symbols are received from the upstream device. However, after the
Disable state is achieved by the Stratix IV GX and GT receiver (the downstream
device) during Gen 2 data rate operation, and if at the same time the upstream device
is directed to transition to the Detect state, the upstream device starts to send COM
symbols at Gen 1 data rate. Consequently, the Stratix IV GX and GT receiver (the
downstream device) does not recognize the COM symbols as it is operating at Gen 2
data rate. To avoid this scenario, the Link Training Status State Machine (LTSSM) in
the FPGA fabric of Stratix IV GX and GT receiver (the downstream device) must be
implemented in such a way that whenever the downstream device goes into the
Disable state and the upstream device is directed to go into the Detect state, the
rateswitch signal must be transitioned from high to low. This allows the
Stratix IV GX and GT receiver (the downstream device) to move from Gen 2 to Gen 1
data rate. Subsequently, the Stratix IV GX and GT receiver (the downstream device)
recognizes the COM symbols being sent by the upstream device at Gen 1 data rates
and moves from the Disable state to the Detect state.
PCIe Gen2 (5 Gbps) Support
The PCIe functional mode supports the following additional features when
configured for 5 Gbps data rate:
■Dynamic switch between 2.5 Gbps and 5 Gbps signaling rate
■Dynamically selectable transmitter margining for differential output voltage
control
■Dynamically selectable transmitter buffer de-emphasis of -3.5 db and -6 dB
Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices 1–141
Transceiver Block Architecture
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Dynamic Switch Between Gen1 (2.5 Gbps) and Gen2 (5 Gbps) Signaling Rate
During link training, the upstream and downstream PCIe ports negotiate the speed
(2.5 Gbps or 5 Gbps) at which the link operates. Because the upstream and
downstream PCIe ports do not know the speed capabilities of their link partner, the
PCIe protocol requires each port to start with a Gen1 (2.5 Gbps) signaling rate. One of
the ports capable of supporting the Gen2 (5 Gbps) signaling rate might initiate a
speed change request by entering the Recovery state of the LTSSM. In the Recovery
state, each port advertises its speed capabilities by transmitting training sequences as
specified in the PCIe Base Specification 2.0. If both ports are capable of operating at
the Gen2 (5 Gbps) signaling rate, the PHY-MAC layer instructs the physical layer
device to operate at the Gen2 (5 Gbps) signaling rate.
To support speed negotiation during link training, the PCIe specification requires a
PCIe-compliant physical layer device to provide an input signal (
Rate
) to the
PHY-MAC layer. When this input signal is driven low, the physical layer device must
operate at the Gen1 (2.5 Gbps) signaling rate; when driven high, this input signal
must operate at the Gen2 (5 Gbps) signaling rate. The PCIe specification allows the
PHY-MAC layer to initiate a signaling rateswitch only in power states P0 and P1 with
the transmitter buffer in the Electrical Idle state. The PCIe specification allows the
physical layer device to implement the signaling rateswitch using either of the
following approaches:
■Change the transceiver datapath clock frequency, keeping the transceiver interface
width constant
■Change the transceiver interface width between 8 bit and 16 bit, keeping the
transceiver clock frequency constant
When configured in PCIe functional mode at Gen2 (5 Gbps) data rate, the ALTGX
MegaWizard Plug-In Manager provides the input signal
rateswitch
. The
rateswitch
signal is functionally equivalent to the
Rate
signal specified in the PCIe specification.
The PHY-MAC layer can use the
rateswitch
signal to instruct the Stratix IV GX and
GT device to operate at either Gen1 (2.5 Gbps) or Gen2 (5 Gbps) data rate, depending
on the negotiated speed between the upstream and downstream ports. A low-to-high
transition on the
rateswitch
signal initiates a data rateswitch from Gen1 (2.5 Gbps) to
Gen2 (5 Gbps). A high-to-low transition on the
rateswitch
signal initiates a data
rateswitch from Gen2 (5 Gbps) to Gen1 (2.5 Gbps). The signaling rateswitch between
Gen1 (2.5 Gbps) and Gen2 (5 Gbps) is achieved by changing the transceiver datapath
clock frequency between 250 MHz and 500 MHz, while maintaining a constant
transceiver interface width of 16-bit.
The dedicated PCIe rateswitch circuitry performs the dynamic switch between the
Gen1 (2.5 Gbps) and Gen2 (5 Gbps) signaling rate. The PCIe rateswitch circuitry
consists of:
■PCIe rateswitch controller
■PCIe clock switch circuitry
1–142 Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Block Architecture
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
PCIe Rateswitch Controller
The
rateswitch
signal serves as the input signal to the PCIe rateswitch controller.
After seeing a transition on the
rateswitch
signal from the PHY-MAC layer, the PCIe
rateswitch controller performs the following operations:
■Controls the PCIe clock switch circuitry to switch between Gen1 (2.5 Gbps) and
Gen2 (5 Gbps) signaling rate depending on the
rateswitch
signal level
■Disables and resets the transmitter and receiver phase compensation FIFO
pointers until the PCIe clock switchover circuitry indicates successful rateswitch
completion
■Communicates completion of rateswitch to the PCIe interface module, which in
turn communicates completion of the rateswitch to the PHY-MAC layer on the
pipephydonestatus
signal
PCIe rateswitch controller location:
■In PCIe ×1 mode, the PCIe rateswitch controller is located in the transceiver PCS of
each channel.
■In PCIe ×4 mode, the PCIe rateswitch controller is located in
CMU0
_
Channel
within
the transceiver block.
■In PCIe ×8 mode, the PCIe rateswitch controller is located in
CMU0_Channel
within
the master transceiver block.
1When operating at the Gen 2 data rate, asserting the
rx_digitalreset
signal causes
the PCIe rateswitch circuitry to switch the transceiver to Gen 1 data rate.
1When switching from Gen1 to Gen2 using the dynamic reconfiguration controller,
you must set the two ports of the dynamic reconfiguration controller,
tx_preemp_0t
and
tx_preemp_2t
, to zero to meet the Gen2 de-emphasis specifications. When
switching from Gen2 to Gen1, if your system requires specific settings on
tx_preemp_01
and
tx_preemp_2t
, those values must be set at the respective two ports
of the dynamic reconfiguration controller to meet your system requirements.
PCIe Clock Switch Circuitry
When the PHY-MAC layer instructs a rateswitch between the Gen1 (2.5 Gbps) and
Gen2 (5 Gbps) signaling rates, both the transmitter high-speed serial and low-speed
parallel clock and the CDR recovered clock must switch to support the instructed data
rate. Stratix IV GX and GT transceivers have dedicated PCIe clock switch circuitry
located in the following blocks:
■Local clock divider in transmitter PMA of each transceiver channel
■
CMU0
clock divider in
CMU0_Channel
of each transceiver block
■Receiver CDR in receiver PMA of each transceiver channel
Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices 1–143
Transceiver Block Architecture
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
PCIe transmitter high-speed serial and low-speed parallel clock switch occurs:
■In PCIe ×1 mode, the
CMU_PLL
clock switch occurs in the local clock divider in each
transceiver channel.
■In PCIe ×4 mode, the
CMU_PLL
clock switch occurs in the
CMU0
clock divider in the
CMU0_Channel
within the transceiver block.
■In PCIe ×8 mode, the
CMU_PLL
clock switch occurs in the
CMU0
clock divider in the
CMU0_Channel
within the master transceiver block.
In PCIe ×1, ×4, and ×8 modes, the recovered clock switch happens in the receiver CDR
of each transceiver channel.
Table 1–53 lists the locations of the PCIe rateswitch controller and the PCIe clock
switch circuitry in PCIe ×1, ×4, and ×8 modes.
Table 1–53. PCIe Rateswitch Controller and Clock Switch Circuitry
Channel
Bonding
Option
Location of PCIe Rateswitch
Controller Module
Location of PCIe Clock Switch Circuitry
Transmitter High-Speed Serial and
Low-Speed Parallel Clock Switch
Circuitry
Recovered Clock Switch Circuitry
×1 Individual channel PCS block Local clock divider in transmitter PMA
of each channel
CDR block in receiver PMA of each
channel
×4
CMU0
_
Channel
CMU0 clock divider in
CMU0_Channel
CDR block in receiver PMA of each
channel
×8
CMU0_Channel
of the master
transceiver block
CMU0 clock divider in
CMU0_Channel
of the master transceiver block
CDR block in receiver PMA of each
channel
1–144 Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Block Architecture
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Dynamic Switch Between Gen1 (2.5 Gbps) and Gen2 (5 Gbps) Signaling Rates in PCIe
x1 Mode
Figure 1–114 shows the PCIe rateswitch circuitry in PCIe ×1 mode configured at Gen2
(5 Gbps) data rate.
In PCIe ×1 mode configured at Gen2 (5 Gbps) data rate, when the PCIe rateswitch
controller sees a transition on the
rateswitch
signal, it sends control signal
pcie_gen2switch
to the PCIe clock switch circuitry in the local clock divider block and
the receiver CDR to switch to the instructed signaling rate. A low-to-high transition
on the
rateswitch
signal initiates a Gen1 (2.5 Gbps) to Gen2 (5 Gbps) signaling
rateswitch. A high-to-low transition on the
rateswitch
signal initiates a Gen2
(5 Gbps) to Gen1 (2.5 Gbps) signaling rateswitch.
Table 1–54 lists the transceiver clock frequencies when switching between 2.5 Gbps
and 5 Gbps signaling rates.
Figure 1–114. Dynamic Switch Signaling in PIPE ×1 Mode
rx_datain
rx_cruclk
rx_locktorefclk
rx_locktodata
signal detect
rx_freqlocked
Serial Recovered Clock
Parallel Recovered Clock
High-Speed Serial Clock
Low-Speed Parallel Clock
rateswitch
pipephydonestatus
reset_int
reset_int
PCI Express Clock Switch Circuitry
pcie_gen2switch
pcie_gen2switch_done
CMU0_PLL
Output Clock
CMU1_PLL
Output Clock
Receiver
Phase
Compensation
FIFO
Transmitter
Phase
Compensation
FIFO
Charge
Pump +
Loop Filter
LTR/LTD
Controller
Phase
Detector
(PD)
PIPE
Interface
FPGA
Fabric
Phase
Frequency
Detector
(PD)
V
CO
/L
pcie_gen2switch
Clock and Data Recovery (CDR) Unit
Transceiver Channel
Transceiver
PCS
Local Clock Divider
/M
/2
1
0
PCI
Express
Rate
Switch
Controller
PCI Express
Clock Switch
Circuitry
/2
/1, /2, /4
/1, /2, /4
/4, /5, /8, /10
Table 1–54. Transceiver Clock Frequencies Signaling Rates in PCIe ×1 Mode
Transceiver Clocks
Gen1 (2.5 Gbps) to Gen2 (5 Gbps)
Switch
(Low-to-High Transition on the
rateswitch Signal)
Gen2 (5 Gbps) to Gen1 (2.5 Gbps)
Switch
(High-to-Low Transition on the
rateswitch Signal)
High-Speed Serial Clock 1.25 GHz to 2.5 GHz 2.5 GHz to 1.25 GHz
Low-Speed Parallel Clock 250 MHz to 500 MHz 500 MHz to 250 MHz
Serial Recovered Clock 1.25 GHz to 2.5 GHz 2.5 GHz to 1.25 GHz
Parallel Recovered Clock 250 MHz to 500 MHz 500 MHz to 250 MHz
FPGA Fabric-Transceiver Interface Clock 125 MHz to 250 MHz 250 MHz to 125 MHz
Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices 1–145
Transceiver Block Architecture
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
The PCIe clock switch circuitry in the local clock divider block performs the clock
switch between 250 MHz and 500 MHz on the low-speed parallel clock when
switching between Gen1 (2.5 Gbps) and Gen2 (5 Gbps) signaling rates. It indicates
successful completion of clock switch on the
pcie_gen2switchdone
signal to the PCIe
rateswitch controller. The PCIe rateswitch controller forwards the clock switch
completion status to the PCIe interface block. The PCIe interface block communicates
the clock switch completion status to the PHY-MAC layer by asserting the
pipephydonestatus
signal for one parallel clock cycle.
Figure 1–115 shows the low-speed parallel clock switch between Gen1 (250 MHz) and
Gen2 (500 MHz) in response to the change in the logic level on the
rateswitch
signal.
The rateswitch completion is shown marked with a one clock cycle assertion of the
pipephydonestatus
signal.
1Time T1 from a transition on the
rateswitch
signal to the assertion of
pipephydonestatus
is pending characterization.
As a result of the signaling rateswitch between Gen1 (2.5 Gbps) and Gen2 (5 Gbps),
the FPGA fabric-transceiver interface clock switches between 125 MHz and 250 MHz.
The FPGA fabric-transceiver interface clock clocks the read side and write side of the
transmitter phase compensation FIFO and the receiver phase compensation FIFO,
respectively. It is also routed to the FPGA fabric on a global or regional clock resource
and looped back to clock the write port and read port of the transmitter phase
compensation FIFO and the receiver phase compensation FIFO, respectively. Due to
the routing delay between the write and read clock of the transmitter and receiver
phase compensation FIFOs, the write pointers and read pointers might collide during
a rateswitch between 125 MHz and 250 MHz. To avoid collision of the phase
compensation FIFO pointers, the PCIe rateswitch controller automatically disables
and resets the pointers during clock switch. When the PCIe clock switch circuitry in
the local clock divider indicates successful clock switch completion, the PCIe
rateswitch controller releases the phase compensation FIFO pointer resets.
Figure 1–115. Low-Speed Parallel Clock Switching in PCIe ×1 Mode
pipephydonestatus
Low-Speed Parallel Clock
rateswitch
250 MHz (Gen1) 500 MHz (Gen2) 250 MHz (Gen1)
T1
T1
1–146 Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Block Architecture
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Dynamic Switch Between Gen1 (2.5 Gbps) and Gen2 (5 Gbps) Signaling Rates in PCIe
×4 Mode
Figure 1–116 shows the PCIe rateswitch circuitry in PCIe ×4 mode configured at Gen2
(5 Gbps) data rate.
In PCIe ×4 mode configured at Gen2 (5 Gbps) data rate, when the PCIe rateswitch
controller sees a transition on the
rateswitch
signal, it sends the
pcie_gen2switch
control signal to the PCIe clock switch circuitry in the
CMU0
clock divider block and the
receiver CDR to switch to the instructed signaling rate. A low-to-high transition on
the
rateswitch
signal initiates a Gen1 (2.5 Gbps) to Gen2 (5 Gbps) signaling
rateswitch. A high-to-low transition on the
rateswitch
signal initiates a Gen2
(5 Gbps) to Gen1 (2.5 Gbps) signaling rateswitch.
Table 1–55 lists the transceiver clock frequencies when switching between the
2.5 Gbps and 5 Gbps signaling rates.
Figure 1–116. Dynamic Switch Signaling in PCIe ×4 Mode
pipephydonestatus[3:0]
High-Speed Serial
Clock to the
Four (PIPE x4)
Bonded Channels
Low-Speed Parallel
Clock to the Four
(PIPE x4) Bonded
Channels
rx_datain
rx_cruclk
rx_locktorefclk
rx_locktodata
signal detect
rx_freqlocked
Serial
Recovered
Clock
Parallel
Recovered
Clock
rateswitch
reset_int
reset_int
PCI Express Clock Switch Circuitry
pcie_gen2switch
pcie_gen2switch_done
Receiver
Phase
Compensation
FIFO
Transmitter
Phase
Compensation
FIFO
Charge
Pump +
Loop Filter
LTR/LTD
Controller
Phase
Detector
(PD)
PIPE
Interface
FPGA
Fabric
Phase
Frequency
Detector
(PD)
V
CO
/L
pcie_gen2switch
Clock and Data Recovery (CDR) Unit
Transceiver Block
Transceiver
PCS
CCU
CMU0_Channel
CMU1_Channel
/M
CMU0
PLL
/2
1
0
PCI
Express
Rate
Switch
Controller
PCI Express
Clock Switch
Circuitry
/2
/1, /2, /4
/1, /2, /4
/4, /5, /8, /10
CMU1 Clock Divider
CMU0 Clock Divider
CMU1
PLL /1, /2, /4 /4, /5, /8, /10
Table 1–55. Transceiver Clock Frequencies Signaling Rates in PCIe ×4 Mode (Part 1 of 2)
Transceiver Clocks
Gen1 (2.5 Gbps) to Gen2 (5 Gbps) Switch
(Low-to-High Transition on the
rateswitch Signal)
Gen2 (5 Gbps) to Gen1 (2.5 Gbps) Switch
(High-to-Low Transition on the
rateswitch Signal)
High-Speed Serial Clock 1.25 GHz to 2.5 GHz 2.5 GHz to 1.25 GHz
Low-Speed Parallel Clock 250 MHz to 500 MHz 500 MHz to 250 MHz
Serial Recovered Clock 1.25 GHz to 2.5 GHz 2.5 GHz to 1.25 GHz
Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices 1–147
Transceiver Block Architecture
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
The PCIe clock switch circuitry in the
CMU0
clock divider block performs the clock
switch between 250 MHz and 500 MHz on the low-speed parallel clock when
switching between Gen1 (2.5 Gbps) and Gen2 (5 Gbps) signaling rates. It indicates
successful completion of clock switch on the
pcie_gen2switchdone
signal to the PCIe
rateswitch controller. The PCIe rateswitch controller forwards the clock switch
completion status to the PCIe interface block. The PCIe interface block communicates
the clock switch completion status to the PHY-MAC layer by asserting the
pipephydonestatus
signal of all bonded channels for one parallel clock cycle.
Figure 1–117 shows the low-speed parallel clock switch between Gen1 (250 MHz) and
Gen2 (500 MHz) in response to the change in the logic level on the
rateswitch
signal.
The rateswitch completion is shown marked with a one clock cycle assertion of the
pipephydonestatus
signal of all bonded channels.
1Time T1 from a transition on the
rateswitch
signal to the assertion of
pipephydonestatus
is pending characterization.
As a result of the signaling rateswitch between Gen1 (2.5 Gbps) and Gen2 (5 Gbps),
the FPGA fabric-transceiver interface clock switches between 125 MHz and 250 MHz.
The FPGA fabric-transceiver interface clock clocks the read side and write side of the
transmitter phase compensation FIFO and the receiver phase compensation FIFO of
all bonded channels, respectively. It is also routed to the FPGA fabric on a global or
regional clock resource and looped back to clock the write port and read port of the
transmitter phase compensation FIFO and the receiver phase compensation FIFO,
respectively. Due to the routing delay between the write and read clock of the
transmitter and receiver phase compensation FIFOs, the write pointers and read
pointers might collide during a rateswitch between 125 MHz and 250 MHz. To avoid
Parallel Recovered Clock 250 MHz to 500 MHz 500 MHz to 250 MHz
FPGA Fabric-Transceiver Interface
Clock 125 MHz to 250 MHz 250 MHz to 125 MHz
Table 1–55. Transceiver Clock Frequencies Signaling Rates in PCIe ×4 Mode (Part 2 of 2)
Transceiver Clocks
Gen1 (2.5 Gbps) to Gen2 (5 Gbps) Switch
(Low-to-High Transition on the
rateswitch Signal)
Gen2 (5 Gbps) to Gen1 (2.5 Gbps) Switch
(High-to-Low Transition on the
rateswitch Signal)
Figure 1–117. Low-Speed Parallel Clock Switching in PCIe ×4 Mode
Low-Speed Parallel Clock
rateswitch
pipephydonestatus[3]
pipephydonestatus[0]
T1 T1
250 MHz (Gen1) 500 MHz (Gen2) 250 MHz (Gen1)
1–148 Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Block Architecture
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
collision of the phase compensation FIFO pointers, the PCIe rateswitch controller
automatically disables and resets the phase compensation FIFO pointers of all bonded
channels during clock switch. When the PCIe clock switch circuitry in the local clock
divider indicates successful clock switch completion, the PCIe rateswitch controller
releases the phase compensation FIFO pointer resets.
Dynamic Switch Between Gen1 (2.5 Gbps) and Gen2 (5 Gbps) Signaling Rates in PCIe
×8 Mode
Figure 1–118 shows the PCIe rateswitch circuitry in PCIe ×8 mode configured at Gen2
(5 Gbps) data rate.
Figure 1–118. Dynamic Switch Signaling in PCIe ×8 Mode
High-Speed Serial
Clock to the Eight
Bonded Channels
in the Master and Slave
Transceiver Blocks
Low-Speed Parallel
Clock to the Eight
Bonded Channels in
the Master and Slave
Transceiver Blocks
pipephydonestatus[3:0]
rx_datain
rx_cruclk
rx_locktorefclk
rx_locktodata
signal detect
rx_freqlocked
Serial
Recovered
Clock
Parallel
Recovered
Clock
rateswitch
reset_int
reset_int
PCI Express Clock Switch Circuitry
pcie_gen2switch
pcie_gen2switch_done
Receiver
Phase
Compensation
FIFO
Transmitter
Phase
Compensation
FIFO
Charge
Pump +
Loop Filter
LTR/LTD
Controller
Phase
Detector
(PD)
PIPE
Interface
FPGA
Fabric
Phase
Frequency
Detector
(PD)
V
CO
/L
pcie_gen2switch
pcie_gen2switch
Clock and Data Recovery (CDR) Unit
Master Transceiver Block
Transceiver
PCS
CCU
CMU0_Channel
CMU1_Channel
/M
CMU0
PLL
/2
1
0
PCI
Express
Rate
Switch
Controller
/2
/1, /2, /4
/1, /2, /4
/4, /5, /8, /10
CMU1 Clock Divider
CMU0 Clock Divider
CMU1
PLL /1, /2, /4 /4, /5, /8, /10
rx_datain
rx_cruclk
rx_locktorefclk
rx_locktodata
signal detect
rx_freqlocked
Serial
Recovered
Clock
Parallel
Recovered
Clock
reset_int
reset_int
Receiver
Phase
Compensation
FIFO
Transmitter
Phase
Compensation
FIFO
Charge
Pump +
Loop Filter
LTR/LTD
Controller
Phase
Detector
(PD)
PIPE
Interface
Phase
Frequency
Detector
(PD)
V
CO
/L
rateswitch_asn
Clock and Data Recovery (CDR) Unit
Slave Transceiver Block
Transceiver
PCS
/M
/2
1
0
/2
/1, /2, /4
rateswitch_asn
pipephydonestatus[7:4]
PCI Express
Clock Switch
Circuitry
Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices 1–149
Transceiver Block Architecture
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
In PCIe ×8 mode configured at 5 Gbps data rate, when the PCIe rateswitch controller
sees a transition on the
rateswitch
signal, it sends the
pcie_gen2switch
control signal
to the PCIe clock switch circuitry in the
CMU0
clock divider of the master transceiver
block and the receiver CDR in all eight bonded channels to switch to the instructed
signaling rate. A low-to-high transition on the
rateswitch
signal initiates a Gen1
(2.5 Gbps) to Gen2 (5 Gbps) signaling rateswitch. A high-to-low transition on the
rateswitch
signal initiates a Gen2 (5 Gbps) to Gen1 (2.5 Gbps) signaling rateswitch.
Table 1–56 lists the transceiver clock frequencies when switching between the
2.5 Gbps and 5 Gbps signaling rates.
The PCIe clock switch circuitry in the
CMU0
clock divider of the master transceiver
block performs the clock switch between 250 MHz and 500 MHz on the low-speed
parallel clock when switching between Gen1 (2.5 Gbps) and Gen2 (5 Gbps) signaling
rates. It indicates successful completion of clock switch on the
pcie_gen2switchdone
signal to the PCIe rateswitch controller. The PCIe rateswitch controller forwards the
clock switch completion status to the PCIe interface block. The PCIe interface block
communicates the clock switch completion status to the PHY-MAC layer by asserting
the
pipephydonestatus
signal of all eight bonded channels for one parallel clock
cycle.
Table 1–56. Transceiver Clock Frequencies Signaling Rates in PCIe ×8 Mode
Transceiver Clocks
Gen1 (2.5 Gbps) to Gen 2 (5 Gbps)
Switch (Low-to-High Transition on the
rateswitch Signal)
Gen2 (5 Gbps) to Gen1 (2.5 Gbps)
Switch (High-to-Low Transition on the
rateswitch Signal)
High-Speed Serial Clock 1.25 GHz to 2.5 GHz 2.5 GHz to 1.25 GHz
Low-Speed Parallel Clock 250 MHz to 500 MHz 500 MHz to 250 MHz
Serial Recovered Clock 1.25 GHz to 2.5 GHz 2.5 GHz to 1.25 GHz
Parallel Recovered Clock 250 MHz to 500 MHz 500 MHz to 250 MHz
FPGA Fabric-Transceiver Interface
Clock 125 MHz to 250 MHz 250 MHz to 125 MHz
1–150 Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Block Architecture
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Figure 1–119 shows the low-speed parallel clock switch between Gen1 (250 MHz) and
Gen2 (500 MHz) in response to the change in the logic level on the
rateswitch
signal.
The rateswitch completion is shown marked with a one clock cycle assertion of the
pipephydonestatus
signal of all eight bonded channels.
1Time T1 from a transition on the
rateswitch
signal to the assertion of
pipephydonestatus
is pending characterization.
As a result of the signaling rateswitch between Gen1 (2.5 Gbps) and Gen2 (5 Gbps),
the FPGA fabric-transceiver interface clock switches between 125 MHz and 250 MHz.
The FPGA fabric-transceiver interface clock clocks the read side and write side of the
transmitter phase compensation FIFO and the receiver phase compensation FIFO of
all eight bonded channels, respectively. It is also routed to the FPGA fabric on a global
or regional clock resource and looped back to clock the write port and read port of the
transmitter phase compensation FIFO and the receiver phase compensation FIFO,
respectively. Due to the routing delay between the write and read clock of the
transmitter and receiver phase compensation FIFOs, the write pointers and read
pointers might collide during a rateswitch between 125 MHz and 250 MHz. To avoid
collision of the phase compensation FIFO pointers, the PCIe rateswitch controller
automatically disables and resets the phase compensation FIFO pointers of all eight
bonded channels during clock switch. When the PCIe clock switch circuitry in the
local clock divider indicates successful clock switch completion, the PCIe rateswitch
controller releases the phase compensation FIFO pointer resets.
PCIe Cold Reset Requirements
The PCIe Base Specification 2.0 defines the following three types of conventional
resets to the PCIe system components:
■Cold reset—fundamental reset after power up
■Warm reset—fundamental reset without removal and re-application of power
■Hot reset—In-band conventional reset initiated by the higher layer by setting the
Hot Reset bit in the TS1 or TS2 training sequences
Figure 1–119. Low-Speed Parallel Clock Switching in PCIe ×8 Mode
T1
Low-Speed Parallel Clock
rateswitch
pipephydonestatus[7]
pipephydonestatus[0]
250 MHz (Gen1) 500 MHz (Gen2) 250 MHz (Gen1)
T1
Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices 1–151
Transceiver Block Architecture
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Fundamental reset is provided by the system to the component or adapter card using
the auxiliary signal
PERST#
. The PCIe Base Specification 2.0 specifies that
PERST#
must
be kept asserted for a minimum of 100 ms (
TPVPERL
) after the system power becomes
stable in a cold reset situation. Additionally, all system components must enter the
LTSSM Detect state within 20 ms and the link must become active within 100 ms after
de-assertion of the
PERST#
signal. This implies that each PCIe system component must
become active within 100 ms after
PERST#
is deasserted.
1The link being active is interpreted as the physical layer device coming out of
electrical idle in the L0 state of the LTSSM state machine.
Figure 1–120 lists the PCIe cold reset timing requirements.
The time taken by a PCIe port implemented using the Stratix IV GX and GT device to
go from power up to link active state is described below:
■Power on reset (POR)—begins after power rails become stable. Typically takes
12 ms
■FPGA configuration/programming—begins after POR. Configuration time
depends on the FPGA density
■Time taken from de-assertion of
PERST#
to link active—typically takes 40 ms
(pending characterization and verification of PCIe soft IP and hard IP)
To meet the PCIe specification of 200 ms from power on to link active, the
Stratix IV GX and GT device configuration time must be less than 148 ms
(200 ms –12 ms for power on reset and -40 ms for the link to become active after
PERST#
de-assertion).
Figure 1–120. PCIe Cold Reset Requirements
1243
Power Rail
PERST#
T
PVPERL
100 ms T
2-3
d" 20 ms
T
2-4
d" 100 ms
Marker 1: Power becomes stable
Marker 2: PERST# gets de-asserted
Marker 3: Maximum time for Marker 2 for
the LTSSM to enter the Detect state
Marker 4: Maximum time for Marker 2 for
the link to become active
1–152 Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Block Architecture
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Table 1–57 lists the typical configuration times for Stratix IV GX devices when
configured using the Fast Passive Parallel (FPP) configuration scheme at the
maximum frequency.
fFor more information about the FPP configuration scheme, refer to the Configuration,
Design Security, Remote System Upgrades in Stratix IV Devices chapter.
1Most flash memories available can run up to 100 MHz. To configure the
Stratix IV GX and GT device at 125 MHz, Altera recommends using a MAX II device
to convert the 16-bit flash memory output at 62.5 MHz to 8-bit configuration data
input to the Stratix IV GX and GT device at 125 MHz.
PCI Express Electrical Gold Test with Compliance Base Board (CBB)
The PCI Express Electrical Gold Test requires the v2.0 CBB to be connected to the
Device Under Test (DUT). The CBB sends out a 100 MHz signal for 1 ms to indicate
the Link Training and Status State Machine (LTSSM) of the downstream device Under
Test (DUT) to transition to several polling compliance states. Under these states, the
DUT sends out data at Gen1, Gen2 (with -3.5db de-emphasis), and Gen2 (with -6 db
de-emphasis) rates, which can be observed in the scope to confirm electrical signal
compliance. The CBB is DC-coupled to the downstream receiver.
When you use the Stratix IV GX and GT device as DUT, because of being DC-coupled
to CBB with a different common mode level, the Stratix IV GX and GT receiver does
not receive the required VCM (0.85 V) to detect the signal. The logic in the FPGA fabric
that implements LTSSM cannot transition to the multiple polling compliance states to
complete the test. Therefore, when testing with the CBB, force the LTSSM
implemented in the FPGA fabric to transfer to different polling compliance states
using an external push button or user logic.
If you use the Stratix IV GX and GT PCIe hard IP block, assert the
test_in[6]
port of
the PCIe Compiler-generated wrapper file in your design. Asserting this port forces
the LTSSM within the hard IP block to transition to these states. The
test_in[6]
port
must be asserted for a minimum of 16 ns and less than 24 ms.
fFor more information about the PCIe hard IP block, refer to the PCI Express Compiler
User Guide.
Table 1–57. Typical Configuration Times for Stratix IV GX Devices Configured with Fast Passive
Parallel
Stratix IV GX Stratix IV GT Configuration Time (ms)
EP4SGX70 — 48
EP4SGX110 — 48
EP4SGX230 EP4S(40/100)G2 95
EP4SGX290 EP4S100G3 128
EP4SGX360 EP4S100G4 128
EP4SGX530 EP4S(40/100)G5 172
Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices 1–153
Transceiver Block Architecture
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
XAUI Mode
XAUI is an optional, self-managed interface that you can insert between the
reconciliation sublayer and the PHY layer to transparently extend the physical reach
of the XGMII.
XAUI addresses several physical limitations of the XGMII. XGMII signaling is based
on the HSTL Class 1 single-ended I/O standard, which has an electrical distance
limitation of approximately 7 cm. Because XAUI uses a low-voltage differential
signaling method, the electrical limitation is increased to approximately 50 cm.
Another advantage of XAUI is simplification of backplane and board trace routing.
XGMII is composed of 32 transmit channels, 32 receive channels, 1 transmit clock,
1receive clock, 4transmitter control characters, and 4 receive control characters for a
74-pin wide interface. XAUI, on the other hand, only consists of 4 differential
transmitter channels and 4 differential receiver channels for a 16-pin wide interface.
This reduction in pin count significantly simplifies the routing process in the layout
design.
Figure 1–121 shows the relationships between the XGMII and XAUI layers.
Figure 1–121. XAUI and XGMII Layers
OSI
Reference
Model Layers
Application
Presentation
Session
Transport
Network
Data Link
Physical
PMA
PMD
Medium
10 Gb/s
Optional
XGMII
Extender
Physical Layer Device
MAC Control (Optional)
Logical Link Control (LLC)
LAN Carrier Sense Multiple
Access/Collision Detect (CSMA/CD)
Layers
Higher Layers
Reconciliation
Media Access Control (MAC)
PCS
10 Gigabit Media Independent Interface
XGMII Extender Sublayer
XGMII Extender Sublayer
10 Gigabit Attachment Unit Interface
10 Gigabit Media Independent Interface
Medium Dependent Interface
1–154 Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Block Architecture
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
The XGMII interface consists of four lanes of 8 bits. At the transmit side of the XAUI
interface, the data and control characters are converted within the XGXS into an
8B/10B encoded data stream. Each data stream is then transmitted across a single
differential pair running at 3.125 Gbps (3.75 Gbps for HiGig). At the XAUI receiver,
the incoming data is decoded and mapped back to the 32-bit XGMII format. This
provides a transparent extension of the physical reach of the XGMII and also reduces
the interface pin count.
In Stratix IV GX and GT XAUI functional mode, the interface between the transceiver
and FPGA fabric is 64 bits wide (four channels of 16 bits each) at single data rate.
XAUI functions as a self-managed interface because code group synchronization,
channel deskew, and clock domain decoupling is handled with no upper layer
support requirements. This functionality is based on the PCS code groups that are
used during the IPG time and idle periods. PCS code groups are mapped by the XGXS
to XGMII characters, as listed in Table 1–58.
Figure 1–122 shows an example of mapping between XGMII characters and the PCS
code groups that are used in XAUI. The idle characters are mapped to a
pseudo-random sequence of /A/, /R/, and /K/ code groups.
Table 1–58. XGMII Character to PCS Code-Group Mapping
XGMII TXC XGMII TXD (1) PCD Code Group Description
0 00 through FF Dxx,y Normal data transmission
1 07 K28.0 or K28.3 or K28.5 Idle in ||I||
1 07 K28.5 Idle in ||T||
1 9C K28.4 Sequence
1 FB K27.7 Start
1 FD K29.7 Terminate
1 FE K30.7 Error
1 Any other value K30.7 Invalid XGMII character
Note to Table 1–58:
(1) The values in the XGMII TXD column are in hexadecimal.
Figure 1–122. Example of Mapping XGMII Characters to PCS Code Groups
Dp
T/RxD<7..0> |SDDD
- - -
- - -
- - -
- - -
D
Dp
T/RxD<15..8> |DpDDD T
Dp
T/RxD<23..16> |DpDDD |
Dp
T/RxD<31..24> |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|Dp DDD
DDD
DDD
DDD
DDD |
Lane 0 K R SAKRR
Lane 1 K R Dp AKRR
Lane 2 K R K A KRR
Lane 3 K R K A K
K
K
K
KR
R
R
R
RR
Dp DDD
- - -
- - -
- - -
- - -
D
Dp DDD T
DpDp DD
DpDp D
D
DD
DDD
DDD
DDD
DDD
XGMII
PCS
Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices 1–155
Transceiver Block Architecture
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
PCS code groups are sent via PCS ordered sets. PCS ordered sets consist of
combinations of special and data code groups defined as a column of code groups.
These ordered sets are composed of four code groups beginning in lane 0. Table 1–59
lists the defined idle ordered sets (||I||) that are used for the self-managed
properties of XAUI.
Stratix IV GX and GT transceivers configured in XAUI mode provide the following
protocol features:
■XGMII-to-PCS code conversion at the transmitter
■PCS-to-XGMII code conversion at the receiver
■8B/10B encoding and decoding
■IEEE P802.3ae-compliant synchronization state machine
■±100 PPM clock rate compensation
■Channel deskew of four lanes of the XAUI link
Table 1–59. Defined Idle Ordered Set
Code Ordered Set Number of
Code Groups
Encoding
||I|| Idle Substitute for XGMII Idle
||K|| Synchronization column 4 /K28.5/K28.5/K28.5/K28.5/
||R|| Skip column 4 /K28.0/K28.0/K28.0/K28.0/
||A|| Align column 4 /K28.3/K28.3/K28.3/K28.3/
1–156 Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Block Architecture
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Figure 1–123 shows the XAUI mode configuration supported in Stratix IV GX and GT
devices.
Figure 1–123. Stratix IV GX and GT XAUI Mode Configuration
XAUI
Disabled
Enabled
Rate Match FIFO
Byte SerDes
Byte Ordering
Stratix IV GX and GT Configurations
Basic
Single
Width Double
Width
Functional Modes
Protocol
PIPE XAUI GIGE SRIO
SONET
/SDH (OIF)
CEI SDI
8-bit 10-bit 16-bit 20-bit 10-bit 10-bit 10-bit 10-bit 8-bit 16-bit 10-bit
Enabled
Enabled
Channel Bonding
Disabled
Deskew FIFO Enabled
PMA-PCS Interface
Width
Functional Mode
Data Rate (Gbps)
Low-Latency PCS
Word Aligner
(Pattern Length)
8B/10B
Encoder/Decoder
FPGA
Fabric-Transceiver
Interface Width
FPGA
Fabric-Transceiver
Interface Frequency
(MHz)
156.25-
187.5
16-Bit
Automatic
Synchronization
State Machine
(10-Bit/K28.5/)
x4
3.125 - 3.75
Deterministic
Latency
10-Bit 20-Bit
I nt erface F requenc y
TX PCS Latency
(FPGA Fabric-Transceiver
Interface Clock Cycles)
RX PCS Latency
(FPGA Fabric-Transceiver
Interface Clock Cycles)
4.5 - 6
14.5 -
18
Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices 1–157
Transceiver Block Architecture
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
XAUI Mode Datapath
Figure 1–124 shows the ALTGX megafunction transceiver datapath when configured
in XAUI mode.
Figure 1–124. Transceiver Datapath in XAUI Mode
RX Phase
Compensation
FIFO
Byte
De-
serializer
De-
Serializer CDR
/2
Ch0 Parallel
Recovered Clock
Low-Speed Parallel Clock from CMU 0 Clock Divider
Receiver Channel PMA
Receiver Channel PCS
FPGA
Fabric
tx_coreclk[3:2]
/2
Ch0 Parallel
Recovered Clock
Ch2 Parallel
Recovered Clock
Low-Speed Parallel Clock from CMU 0 Clock Divider
rx_coreclk[3:2]
rx_coreclk[1:0]
/2
coreclkout
CMU1_PLL
CMU0_PLL
CMU1_Channel
CMU0_Channel
CMU0
Clock
Divider
Low-Speed Parallel Clock
Input
Reference
Clock
FPGA Fabric-Transceiver
Interface Clock
Receiver Channel PMA
CMU1
Clock
Divider
Serializer
Transmitter Channel PCS Transmitter Channel PMA
/2
wrclk wrclk rdclk
rdclk
Low-Speed Parallel Clock from CMU 0 Click Divider
Receiver Channel PCS
tx_coreclk[1:0]
TX Phase
Compensation
FIFO
Byte
Serializer 8B/10B
Encoder Serializer
Transmitter Channel PCS Transmitter Channel PMA
/2
wrclk wrclk rdclk
rdclk
Low-Speed Parallel Clock from CMU 0 Clock Divider
High-Speed Serial Clock
Channel 0
Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel 3
Channel 2
Channel 3
Channel 0
Channel 1
Ch0 Parallel
Recovered Clock
Word
Aligner
Deskew
FIFO
Rate
Match
FIFO
8B/10B
Decoder
Input
Reference
Clock
RX Phase
Compensation
FIFO
Byte
De-
serializer
8B/10B
Decoder
Rate
Match
FIFO
Deskew
FIFO
Word
Aligner De-
serializer CDR
8B/10B
Encoder
Byte
Serializer
TX Phase
Compensation
FIFO
1–158 Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Block Architecture
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
XGMII-To-PCS Code Conversion at the Transmitter
In XAUI mode, the 8B/10B encoder in the Stratix IV GX and GT transmitter datapath
is controlled by a transmitter state machine that maps various 8-bit XGMII codes to
10-bit PCS code groups. This state machine complies with the IEEE P802.3ae PCS
transmit source state diagram shown in Figure 1–125.
Figure 1–125. XGMII-To-PCS Code Conversion in XAUI Mode (1)
Note to Figure 1–125:
(1) This figure is from IEEE P802.3ae.
SEND_RANDOM_K
tx_code_group<39:0> ⇐ ||K||
SEND_RANDOM_R
tx_code_group<39:0> ⇐ ||R||
SEND_RANDOM_A
tx_code_group<39:0> ⇐ ||A||
A_CNT≠0 *
cod_sel=1
A_CNT≠0 *
cod_sel=1
A_CNT≠0 *
cod_sel=1
A_CNT=0
A_CNT=0
A_CNT≠0 *
cod_sel=1
!Q_det *
cod_sel=1
Q_det
Q_det !Q_det
!Q_det *
cod_set=1
A
B
B
B
A
A
B
A
cod_set=1
cod_set=1
B
A
PUDR
SEND_K
tx_code_group<39:0> ⇐ ||K||
next_ifg ⇐ A
(next_ifg + A_CNT≠0)
next_ifg = A_CNT≠0
PUDR
SEND_A
tx_code_group<39:0> ⇐ ||A||
next_ifg ⇐ K
SEND_Q
tx_code_group<39:0> ⇐ TQMSG
Q_det ⇐ K
PUDR
PUDR
SEND_Q
IF TX=||T|| THEN cvtx_terminate
tx_code_group<39:0> ⇐
ENCODE(TX)
!reset
!(TX=||IDLE|| + TX=||Q||
PUDR
PUDR
SEND_RANDOM_Q
tx_code_group<39:0> ⇐ TQMSG
Q_det ⇐ FALSE
PUDR
reset
UCT
UCT
Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices 1–159
Transceiver Block Architecture
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Table 1–60 lists the XGMII-to-PCS code group conversion in XAUI functional mode.
The XGMII TXC control signal is equivalent to the
tx_ctrlenable
signal; the XGMII
TXD control signal is equivalent to the
tx_datain[7:0]
signal.
PCS-To-XGMII Code Conversion at the Receiver
In XAUI mode, the 8B/10B decoder in the Stratix IV GX and GT receiver datapath is
controlled by a XAUI receiver state machine that converts received PCS code groups
into specific 8-bit XGMII codes. This state machine complies with the IEEE P802.3ae
specifications.
Table 1–61 lists the PCS-to-XGMII code group conversion in XAUI functional mode.
The XGMII RXC control signal is equivalent to the
rx_ctrldetect
signal; the XGMII
RXD control signal is equivalent to the
rx_dataout[7:0]
signal.
Table 1–60. XGMII Character to PCS Code-Group Mapping
XGMII TXC XGMII TXD (1) PCD Code Group Description
0 00 through FF Dxx,y Normal data transmission
1 07 K28.0 or K28.3 or K28.5 Idle in ||I||
1 07 K28.5 Idle in ||T||
1 9C K28.4 Sequence
1 FB K27.7 Start
1 FD K29.7 Terminate
1 FE K30.7 Error
1 Any other value K30.7 Invalid XGMII character
Note to Table 1–58:
(1) The values in the XGMII TXD column are in hexadecimal.
Table 1–61. PCS Code Group to XGMII Character Mapping
XGMII RXC XGMII RXD (1) PCD Code Group Description
0 00 through FF Dxx,y Normal data transmission
1 07 K28.0 or K28.3 or K28.5 Idle in ||I||
1 07 K28.5 Idle in ||T||
1 9C K28.4 Sequence
1 FB K27.7 Start
1 FD K29.7 Terminate
1 FE K30.7 Error
1 FE Invalid code group Received code group
Note to Table 1–58:
(1) The values in the XGMII RXD column are in hexadecimal.
1–160 Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Block Architecture
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Word Aligner
The word aligner in XAUI functional mode is configured in automatic
synchronization state machine mode. The Quartus II software automatically
configures the synchronization state machine to indicate synchronization when the
receiver receives four /K28.5/ comma code groups without intermediate invalid code
groups. The synchronization state machine implemented in XAUI mode is compliant
to the PCS synchronization state diagram specified in Clause 48 of the IEEE P802.3ae
specification and is shown in Figure 1–126.
Figure 1–126. IEEE 802.3ae PCS Synchronization State Diagram (1)
Note to Figure 1–126:
(1) This figure is from IEEE P802.3ae.
power_on=TRUE+mr_main_rest=TRUE +
(signal_detectCHANGE=TRUE +
mr_loopback=FALSE +PUDI)
(signal_detect=OK+mr_loopback=TRUE)* *
PUDI([/COMMA/]
PUDI([/|DV|/]
rx_even=FALSE+PUDI([/COMMA/]
PUDI(![/COMMA/]
*∉[/INVALID/]
PUDI([/|DV|/]
cggood *good_cgs = 3
cggood *good_cgs = 3
cggood *good_cgs = 3
cggood *good_cgs = 3
cggood cggood
PUDI(![/|DV|/]
PUDI(![/|DV|/]
[PUDI * signal_detect=FAIL +
mr_loopback=FALSE] +
PUDI(![/COMMA/])
LOSS_OF_SYNC
sync_status ⇐ FAIL
rx_even ⇐ ! rx_even
SUDI
COMMA_DETECT_1
rx_even ⇐ TRUE
SUDI
SYNC_ACQUIRED_2
rx_even ⇐ ! rx_even
SUDI
good_cgs ⇐ 0
SYNC_ACQUIRED_3
SYNC_ACQUIRED_4
cgbad
cgbad
cggood
cgbad
cgbad
cggood
cgbad
cgbad
cgbad
SYNC_ACQUIRED_2A
SYNC_ACQUIRED_3A
SYNC_ACQUIRED_4A
ACQUIRE_SYNC_1
SUDI
COMMA_DETECT_2
SUDI
2
cggood *good_cgs = 3
cggood *good_cgs = 3
3
3
2
PUDI(![/COMMA/]
*∉[/INVALID/]
rx_even ⇐ TRUE
rx_even=FALSE+PUDI([/COMMA/]
cgbad
cgbad
ACQUIRE_SYNC_2
SUDI
rx_even ⇐ ! rx_even
PUDI(![/|DV|/]
COMMA_DETECT_3
SUDI
rx_even ⇐ TRUE
PUDI([/|DV|/]
SYNC_ACQUIRED_1
SUDI
sync_status ⇐ OK
rx_even ⇐ ! rx_even
rx_even ⇐ ! rx_even
rx_even ⇐ ! rx_even
SUDI
good_cgs ⇐ good_cgs + 1
rx_even ⇐ ! rx_even
SUDI
good_cgs ⇐ 0
rx_even ⇐ ! rx_even
SUDI
good_cgs ⇐ good_cgs + 1
rx_even ⇐ ! rx_even
SUDI
good_cgs ⇐ 0
rx_even ⇐ ! rx_even
SUDI
good_cgs ⇐ good_cgs + 1
Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices 1–161
Transceiver Block Architecture
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Receiver synchronization is indicated on the
rx_syncstatus
port of each channel. A
high on the
rx_syncstatus
port indicates that the lane is synchronized; a low on the
rx_syncstatus
port indicates that it has fallen out of synchronization. The receiver
loses synchronization when it detects four invalid code groups separated by less than
four valid code groups or when it is reset.
Deskew FIFO
Code groups received across four lanes in a XAUI link can be misaligned with respect
to one another because of skew in the physical medium or differences between the
independent clock recoveries per lane. The XAUI protocol allows a maximum skew of
40 UI (12.8 ns) as seen at the receiver of the four lanes.
The XAUI protocol requires the physical layer device to implement a deskew circuitry
to align all four channels. To enable the deskew circuitry at the receiver to align the
four channels, the transmitter sends a /A/ (/K28.3/) code group simultaneously on
all four channels during inter-packet gap. The skew introduced in the physical
medium and the receiver channels can be /A/ code groups to be received misaligned
with respect to each other.
The deskew operation is performed by the deskew FIFO in XAUI functional mode.
The deskew FIFO in each channel receives data from its word aligner. The deskew
operation begins only after link synchronization is achieved on all four channels as
indicated by a high on the
rx_syncstatus
signal from the word aligner in each
channel. Until the first /A/ code group is received, the deskew FIFO read and write
pointers in each channel are not incremented. After the first /A/ code group is
received, the write pointer starts incrementing for each word received but the read
pointer is frozen. If the /A/ code group is received on each of the four channels
within 10 recovered clock cycles of each other, the read pointer of all four deskew
FIFOs is released simultaneously, aligning all four channels.
Figure 1–127 shows lane skew at the receiver input and how the deskew FIFO uses the
/A/ code group to align the channels.
Figure 1–127. Receiver Input Lane Skew in XAUI Mode
Lanes are
Deskewed by
Lining up
the "Align"/A/,
Code Groups
Lane Skew at
Receiver Input
A
Lane 0 K K R A K R R K K KRR
Lane 1 K K R A K R R K K KRR
Lane 0 K K R K R R K K KRR
Lane 1 K K R A K R R K K KRR
Lane 2 K K R A K R R K K KRR
Lane 3 K K R A K R R K K KRR
Lane 2 K K R A K R R K K KRR
Lane 3 K K R A K R R K K KRR
1–162 Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Block Architecture
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
After alignment of the first ||A|| column, if three additional aligned ||A||
columns are observed at the output of the deskew FIFOs of the four channels, the
rx_channelaligned
signal is asserted high, indicating channel alignment is acquired.
After acquiring channel alignment, if four misaligned ||A|| columns are seen at the
output of the deskew FIFOs in all four channels with no aligned ||A|| columns in
between, the
rx_channelaligned
signal is de-asserted low, indicating loss-of-channel
alignment.
The deskew FIFO operation in XAUI functional mode is compliant with the PCS
deskew state machine diagram specified in clause 48 of the IEEE P802.3ae, as shown
in Figure 1–128.
Figure 1–128. Deskew FIFO in XAUI Mode (1)
Note to Figure 1–128:
(1) This figure is from IEEE P802.3ae.
reset +
(sync_status=FAIL * SUDI)
sync_status OK * SUDI(![/||A||/])
!deskew_error
* SUDI(![/||A||/])
!deskew_error
* SUDI(![/||A||/])
!deskew_error
* SUDI(![/||A||/])
SUDI(![/||A||/])
SUDI(![/||A||/])
SUDI(![/||A||/])
deskew_error * SUDI
deskew_error * SUDI
deskew_error * SUDI
deskew_error * SUDI
deskew_error * SUDI
deskew_error * SUDI
deskew_error * SUDI
SUDI(![/||A||/])
LOSS_OF_ALIGNMENT
align_status ⇐ FAIL
enable_deskew ⇐TRUE
AUDI
ALIGN_DETECT_1
enable_deskew ⇐ FALSE
AUDI
ALIGN_DETECT_2
AUDI
ALIGN_DETECT_3
AUDI
C
!deskew_error
* SUDI(![/||A||/])
!deskew_error
* SUDI(![/||A||/])
!deskew_error
* SUDI(![/||A||/])
SUDI(![/||A||/])
ALIGN_ACQUIRED_1
enable_deskew ⇐ FALSE
AUDI
ALIGN_ACQUIRED_2
AUDI
ALIGN_ACQUIRED_3
AUDI
A
B
C
!deskew_error
* SUDI(![/||A||/])
SUDI(![/||A||/])
ALIGN_ACQUIRED_4
AUDI
B
SUDI(![/||A||/])
A
SUDI(![/||A||/])
Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices 1–163
Transceiver Block Architecture
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Rate Match FIFO
In XAUI mode, the rate match FIFO is capable of compensating for up to ±100 PPM
(200 PPM total) difference between the upstream transmitter and the local receiver
reference clock. The XAUI protocol requires the transmitter to send /R/ (/K28.0/)
code groups simultaneously on all four lanes (denoted as ||R|| column) during
inter-packet gaps, adhering to rules listed in the IEEE P802.3ae specification. The rate
match FIFO operation in XAUI mode is compliant to the IEEE P802.3ae specification.
The rate match operation begins after:
■The synchronization state machine in the word aligner of all four channels
indicates synchronization has been acquired by driving the
rx_syncstatus
signal
high
■The deskew FIFO indicates alignment has been acquired by driving the
rx_channelaligned
signal high
The rate match FIFO looks for the ||R|| column (simultaneous /R/ code group on
all four channels) and deletes or inserts ||R|| column to prevent the rate match FIFO
from overflowing or under-running. The rate match FIFO can insert or delete as many
||R|| columns as necessary to perform the rate match operation.
Two flags,
rx_rmfifodatadeleted
and
rx_rmfifodatainserted
, indicating rate match
FIFO deletion and insertion events, respectively, are forwarded to the FPGA fabric. If
an ||R|| column is deleted, the
rx_rmfifodeleted
flag from each of the four
channels goes high for one clock cycle per deleted ||R|| column. If an ||R||
column is inserted, the
rx_rmfifoinserted
flag from each of the four channels goes
high for one clock cycle per inserted ||R|| column.
Figure 1–129 shows an example of rate match deletion in the case where three ||R||
columns are required to be deleted.
For more information, refer to “Rate Match FIFO in XAUI Mode” on page 1–80.
Figure 1–129. Rate Match Deletion in XAUI Mode
datain[3]
rx_rmfifodatadeleted
K28.0
K28.3 K28.5 K28.5 K28.0 K28.0 K28.0 K28.5
First ||R||
Column
Second ||R||
Column
Third ||R||
Column
Fourth ||R||
Column
K28.5
datain[2]
K28.0
K28.3 K28.5 K28.5 K28.0 K28.0 K28.0 K28.5
K28.5
datain[1]
K28.0
K28.3 K28.5 K28.5 K28.0 K28.0 K28.0 K28.5
K28.5
datain[0]
K28.0
K28.3 K28.5 K28.5 K28.0 K28.0 K28.0 K28.5
K28.5
dataout[3]
K28.5
K28.3 K28.5 K28.0 K28.5
K28.5
dataout[2]
K28.5
K28.3 K28.5 K28.0 K28.5
K28.5
dataout[1]
K28.5
K28.3 K28.5 K28.0 K28.5
K28.5
dataout[0]
K28.5
K28.3 K28.5 K28.0 K28.5
K28.5
1–164 Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Block Architecture
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Figure 1–130 shows an example of rate match insertion in the case where two ||R||
columns are required to be inserted.
For more information, refer to “Rate Match (Clock Rate Compensation) FIFO” on
page 1–77.
GIGE Mode
IEEE 802.3 defines the 1000 Base-X PHY as an intermediate, or transition, layer that
interfaces various physical media with the media access control (MAC) in a gigabit
ethernet system. It shields the MAC layer from the specific nature of the underlying
medium. The 1000 Base-X PHY is divided into three sub-layers:
■Physical coding sublayer
■Physical media attachment
■Physical medium dependent (PMD)
The PCS sublayer interfaces with the MAC through the gigabit medium independent
interface (GMII). The 1000 Base-X PHY defines a physical interface data rate of
1Gbps.
Figure 1–130. Rate Match Insertion in XAUI Mode
datain[3]
rx_rmfifodatainserted
K28.0
K28.3 K28.5 K28.0 K28.0 K28.5 K28.0
First ||R||
Column
Second ||R||
Column
K28.5
datain[2]
K28.0
K28.3 K28.5 K28.0 K28.0 K28.5 K28.0
K28.5
datain[1]
K28.0
K28.3 K28.5 K28.0 K28.0 K28.5 K28.0
K28.5
datain[0]
K28.0
K28.3 K28.5 K28.0 K28.0 K28.5 K28.0
K28.5
dataout[3]
K28.0
K28.3 K28.5 K28.5 K28.0
K28.5
dataout[2]
K28.0
K28.3 K28.5 K28.5 K28.0
K28.5
dataout[1]
K28.0
K28.3 K28.5 K28.5 K28.0
K28.5
dataout[0]
K28.0
K28.3 K28.5 K28.5 K28.0
K28.5
Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices 1–165
Transceiver Block Architecture
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Figure 1–131 shows the 1000 Base-X PHY position in a Gigabit Ethernet OSI reference
model.
Stratix IV GX and GT transceivers, when configured in GIGE functional mode, have
built-in circuitry to support the following PCS and PMA functions defined in the
IEEE 802.3 specification:
■8B/10B encoding and decoding
■Synchronization
■Clock recovery from the encoded data forwarded by the receiver PMD
■Optional
rx_recovclkout
port enables recovered clock at the pin level (use with
VCXO)
■Serialization and deserialization
1Stratix IV GX and GT transceivers do not have built-in support for other PCS
functions; for example, auto-negotiation state machine, collision-detect, and
carrier-sense. If required, you must implement these functions in a PLD logic array or
external circuits.
1If you enabled the auto-negotiation state machine in the FPGA core with the rate
match FIFO, refer to “Rate Match FIFO” on page 1–171.
Figure 1–131. 1000 Base-X PHY in a Gigabit Ethernet OSI Reference Model
OSI
Reference
Model Layers
Application
Presentation
Session
Transport
Network
Data Link
Physical
Medium
GMII
1000 Base-X
PHY
MAC (Optional)
LLC
LAN
CSMA/CD Layers
Higher Layers
Reconciliation
MAC
PMD
PCS
PMA
1–166 Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Block Architecture
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Figure 1–132 shows the GIGE mode configuration supported in Stratix IV GX devices.
Figure 1–132. GIGE Mode for Stratix IV GX Devices
GIGE
Disabled
Enabled
Rate Match FIFO
Byte SerDes
Byte Ordering
Stratix IV GX Configurations
Basic
Single
Width Double
Width
Functional Modes
Protocol
PIPE XAUI GIGE SRIO
SONET
/SDH (OIF)
CEI SDI
8-bit 10-bit 16-bit 20-bit 10-bit 10-bit 10-bit 10-bit 8-bit 16-bit 10-bit
Functional Mode
Enabled
Disabled
Channel Bonding
Disabled
125
PMA-PCS Interface
Width
Data Rate (Gbps)
Low-Latency PCS
Word Aligner
(Pattern Length)
8B/10B
Encoder/Decoder
FPGA
Fabric-Transceiver
Interface Width
FPGA
Fabric-Transceiver
Interface Frequency
(MHz)
8-Bit
1.25
x1
Automatic
Synchronization
State Machine
(7-Bit Comma,
10-Bit /K28.5/)
Deterministic
Latency
10-Bit 20-Bit
I nt erface F requency
TX PCS Latency
(FPGA Fabric-Transceiver
Interface Clock Cycles)
RX PCS Latency
(FPGA Fabric-Transceiver
Interface Clock Cycles)
5 - 6
20 - 24
Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices 1–167
Transceiver Block Architecture
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
GIGE Mode Datapath
Figure 1–133 shows the transceiver datapath when configured in GIGE functional
mode.
Table 1–62 lists the transceiver datapath clock frequencies in GIGE functional mode.
8B/10B Encoder
In GIGE mode, the 8B/10B encoder clocks in 8-bit data and 1-bit control identifiers
from the transmitter phase compensation FIFO and generates 10-bit encoded data.
The 10-bit encoded data is fed to the serializer. For more information about 8B/10B
encoder functionality, refer to “8B/10B Encoder” on page 1–23.
GIGE Protocol—Ordered Sets and Special Code Groups
Table 1–63 lists ordered sets and special code groups specified in the IEEE 802.3
specification.
Figure 1–133. GIGE Mode Datapath
TX Phase
Compensation
FIFO 8B/10B
Encoder
8B/10B
Decoder
Serializer
De-
Serializer
Transmitter Channel PCS Transmitter Channel PMA
wrclk rdclk
Low-Speed Parallel Clock
High-Speed Serial Clock
tx_coreclk[0]
RX Phase
Compensation
FIFO
Rate
Match
FIFO
Word
Aligner CDR
tx_clkout[0]
Parallel Recovered Clock
Low-Speed Parallel Clock
rx_coreclk[0]
Receiver Channel PCS Receiver Channel PMA
FPGA
Fabric-Transceiver
Interface Clock
FPGA
Fabric
Local
Clock Divider
8B/10B
Decoder
De-
Serializer
Table 1–62. Transceiver Datapath Clock Frequencies in GIGE Mode
Functional Mode Data Rate High-Speed Serial
Clock Frequency
Parallel Recovered
Clock and
Low-Speed
Parallel Clock
Frequency
FPGA Fabric-Transceiver
Interface Clock Frequency
GIGE 1.25 Gbps 625 MHz 125 MHz 125 MHz
Table 1–63. GIGE Ordered Sets (Part 1 of 2)
Code Ordered Set Number of Code
Groups Encoding
/C/ Configuration — Alternating /C1/ and /C2/
/C1/ Configuration 1 4 /K28.5/D21.5/
Config_Reg
(1)
/C2/ Configuration 2 4 /K28.5/D2.2/
Config_Reg
(1)
1–168 Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Block Architecture
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Idle Ordered-Set Generation
The IEEE 802.3 specification requires the GIGE PHY to transmit idle ordered sets (/I/)
continuously and repetitively whenever the GMII is idle. This ensures that the
receiver maintains bit and word synchronization whenever there is no active data to
be transmitted.
In GIGE functional mode, any /Dx.y/ following a /K28.5/ comma is replaced by the
transmitter with either a /D5.6/ (/I1/ ordered set) or a /D16.2/ (/I2/ ordered set),
depending on the current running disparity. The exception is when the data following
the /K28.5/ is /D21.5/ (/C1/ ordered set) or /D2.2/ (/C2/) ordered set. If the
running disparity before the /K28.5/ is positive, an /I1/ ordered set is generated. If
the running disparity is negative, a /I2/ ordered set is generated. The disparity at the
end of a /I1/ is the opposite of that at the beginning of the /I1/. The disparity at the
end of a /I2/ is the same as the beginning running disparity (right before the idle
code). This ensures a negative running disparity at the end of an idle ordered set. A
/Kx.y/ following a /K28.5/ is not replaced.
1Note that /D14.3/, /D24.0/, and /D15.8/ are replaced by /D5.6/ or /D16.2/ (for
/I1/, /I2/ ordered sets). /D21.5/ (part of the /C1/ order set) is not replaced.
Figure 1–134 shows the automatic idle ordered set generation.
/I/ IDLE — Correcting /I1/, Preserving /I2/
/I1/ IDLE 1 2 /K28.5/D5.6
/I2/ IDLE 2 2 /K28.5/D16.2
Encapsulation — —
/R/
Carrier_Extend
1 /K23.7/
/S/
Start_of_Packet
1 /K27.7/
/T/
End_of_Packet
1 /K29.7/
/V/
Error_Propagation
1 /K30.7/
Note to Table 1–63:
(1) Two data code groups representing the
Config_Reg
value.
Table 1–63. GIGE Ordered Sets (Part 2 of 2)
Code Ordered Set Number of Code
Groups Encoding
Figure 1–134. Automatic Ordered Set Generation
K28.5 D14.3 K28.5 D24.0 K28.5 D15.8 K28.5 D21.5
tx_datain [ ]
clock
Dx.y
Dx.y K28.5 D5.6 K28.5 D16.2 K28.5 D16.2 K28.5
tx_dataout
Ordered Set
D21.5
/I1/ /I2/ /I2/ /C2/
Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices 1–169
Transceiver Block Architecture
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Reset Condition
After de-assertion of
tx_digitalreset
, the GIGE transmitter automatically transmits
three /K28.5/ comma code groups before transmitting user data on the
tx_datain
port. This could affect the synchronization state machine behavior at the receiver.
Depending on when you start transmitting the synchronization sequence, there could
be an even or odd number of /Dx.y/ code groups transmitted between the last of the
three automatically sent /K28.5/ code groups and the first /K28.5/ code group of the
synchronization sequence. If there is an even number of /Dx.y/ code groups received
between these two /K28.5/ code groups, the first /K28.5/ code group of the
synchronization sequence begins at an odd code group boundary (
rx_even
= FALSE).
An IEEE802.3-compliant GIGE synchronization state machine treats this as an error
condition and goes into the loss of sync state.
Figure 1–135 shows an example of even numbers of /Dx.y/ between the last
automatically sent /K28.5/ and the first user-sent /K28.5/. The first user-sent
/K28.5/ code group received at an odd code group boundary in cycle n + 3 takes the
receiver synchronization state machine in the loss of sync state. The first
synchronization ordered set /K28.5/Dx.y/ in cycles n + 3 and n + 4 is discounted and
three additional ordered sets are required for successful synchronization.
Word Aligner
The word aligner in GIGE functional mode is configured in automatic
synchronization state machine mode. The Quartus II software automatically
configures the synchronization state machine to indicate synchronization when the
receiver receives three consecutive synchronization ordered sets. A synchronization
ordered set is a /K28.5/ code group followed by an odd number of valid /Dx.y/ code
groups. The fastest way for the receiver to achieve synchronization is to receive three
continuous {/K28.5/, /Dx.y/} ordered sets.
Receiver synchronization is indicated on the
rx_syncstatus
port of each channel. A
high on the
rx_syncstatus
port indicates that the lane is synchronized; a low on the
rx_syncstatus
port indicates that the lane has fallen out of synchronization. The
receiver loses synchronization when it detects four invalid code groups separated by
less than three valid code groups or when it is reset.
Figure 1–135. Reset Condition in GIGE Mode
clock
tx_dataout
tx_digitalreset
K28.5 K28.5 K28.5
K28.5
xxx Dx.y Dx.y K28.5 K28.5 K28.5Dx.y Dx.y Dx.y
nn + 1 n + 2 n + 3 n + 4
1–170 Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Block Architecture
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Table 1–64 lists the synchronization state machine parameters when configured in
GIGE mode.
Figure 1–136 shows the synchronization state machine implemented in GIGE mode.
Table 1–64. Synchronization State Machine Parameters in GIGE Functional Mode
Synchronization State Machine Parameters Setting
Number of valid {/K28.5/, /Dx,y/} ordered sets received to achieve synchronization 3
Number of errors received to lose synchronization 4
Number of continuous good code groups received to reduce the error count by 1 4
Figure 1–136. Synchronization State Machine in GIGE Mode (1)
Note to Figure 1–136:
(1) This figure is from IEEE P802.3ae.
power_on=TRUE+mr_main_rest=TRUE +
(signal_detectCHANGE=TRUE +
mr_loopback=FALSE +PUDI)
(signal_detect=OK+mr_loopback=TRUE)* *
PUDI([/COMMA/]
PUDI([/|DV|/]
rx_even=FALSE+PUDI([/COMMA/]
PUDI(![/COMMA/]
*∉[/INVALID/]
PUDI([/|DV|/]
cggood *good_cgs = 3
cggood *good_cgs = 3
cggood *good_cgs = 3
cggood *good_cgs = 3
cggood cggood
PUDI(![/|DV|/]
PUDI(![/|DV|/]
[PUDI * signal_detect=FAIL +
mr_loopback=FALSE] +
PUDI(![/COMMA/])
LOSS_OF_SYNC
sync_status ⇐ FAIL
rx_even ⇐ ! rx_even
SUDI
COMMA_DETECT_1
rx_even ⇐ TRUE
SUDI
SYNC_ACQUIRED_2
rx_even ⇐ ! rx_even
SUDI
good_cgs ⇐ 0
SYNC_ACQUIRED_3
SYNC_ACQUIRED_4
cgbad
cgbad
cggood
cgbad
cgbad
cggood
cgbad
cgbad
cgbad
SYNC_ACQUIRED_2A
SYNC_ACQUIRED_3A
SYNC_ACQUIRED_4A
ACQUIRE_SYNC_1
SUDI
COMMA_DETECT_2
SUDI
2
cggood *good_cgs = 3
cggood *good_cgs = 3
3
3
2
PUDI(![/COMMA/]
*∉[/INVALID/]
rx_even ⇐ TRUE
rx_even=FALSE+PUDI([/COMMA/]
cgbad
cgbad
ACQUIRE_SYNC_2
SUDI
rx_even ⇐ ! rx_even
PUDI(![/|DV|/]
COMMA_DETECT_3
SUDI
rx_even ⇐ TRUE
PUDI([/|DV|/]
SYNC_ACQUIRED_1
SUDI
sync_status ⇐ OK
rx_even ⇐ ! rx_even
rx_even ⇐ ! rx_even
rx_even ⇐ ! rx_even
SUDI
good_cgs ⇐ good_cgs + 1
rx_even ⇐ ! rx_even
SUDI
good_cgs ⇐ 0
rx_even ⇐ ! rx_even
SUDI
good_cgs ⇐ good_cgs + 1
rx_even ⇐ ! rx_even
SUDI
good_cgs ⇐ 0
rx_even ⇐ ! rx_even
SUDI
good_cgs ⇐ good_cgs + 1
Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices 1–171
Transceiver Block Architecture
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Rate Match FIFO
In GIGE mode, the rate match FIFO is capable of compensating for up to ±100 PPM
(200 PPM total) difference between the upstream transmitter and the local receiver
reference clock. The GIGE protocol requires the transmitter to send idle ordered sets
/I1/ (/K28.5/D5.6/) and /I2/ (/K28.5/D16.2/) during inter-packet gaps adhering to
the rules listed in the IEEE 802.3 specification.
The rate match operation begins after the synchronization state machine in the word
aligner indicates synchronization is acquired by driving the
rx_syncstatus
signal
high. The rate matcher deletes or inserts both symbols (/K28.5/ and /D16.2/) of the
/I2/ ordered sets even if it requires deleting only one symbol to prevent the rate
match FIFO from overflowing or under-running. It can insert or delete as many /I2/
ordered sets as necessary to perform the rate match operation.
Two flags,
rx_rmfifodatadeleted
and
rx_rmfifodatainserted
, indicating rate match
FIFO deletion and insertion events, respectively, are forwarded to the FPGA fabric.
Both the
rx_rmfifodatadeleted
and
rx_rmfifodatainserted
flags are asserted for
two clock cycles for each deleted and inserted /I2/ ordered set, respectively.
Figure 1–137 shows an example of rate match FIFO deletion where three symbols are
required to be deleted. Because the rate match FIFO can only delete /I2/ ordered set,
it deletes two /I2/ ordered sets (four symbols deleted).
Figure 1–138 shows an example of rate match FIFO insertion in the case where one
symbol is required to be inserted. Because the rate match FIFO can only delete /I2/
ordered set, it inserts one /I2/ ordered set (two symbols inserted).
For more information, refer to “Rate Match (Clock Rate Compensation) FIFO” on
page 1–77.
Figure 1–137. Rate Match Deletion in GIGE Mode
datain
dataout
rx_rmfifodatadeleted
First /I2/ Skip Ordered Set
Dx.y K28.5
K28.5
Second /I2/ Skip Ordered Set
/I2/ SKIP Symbol Deleted
D16.2 D16.2 K28.5 D16.2 Dx.y
Third /I2/ Skip Ordered Set
Dx.y K28.5 D16.2 Dx.y
Figure 1–138. Rate Match Insertion in GIGE Mode
datain
dataout
rx_rmfifodatainserted
First /I2/ Ordered Set
Dx.y K28.5
K28.5
Second /I2/ Ordered Set
D16.2 D16.2
Dx.y K28.5 D16.2 D16.2 Dx.y
K28.5 D16.2 K28.5
1–172 Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Block Architecture
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
1If you have the auto-negotiation state machine in the FPGA, note that the rate match
FIFO is capable of inserting or deleting the first two bytes (/K28.5//D2.2/) of /C2/
ordered sets during auto-negotiation. However, the insertion or deletion of the first
two bytes of /C2/ ordered sets can cause the auto-negotiation link to fail. For more
information, refer to the Altera Knowledge Base Support Solution.
SONET/SDH Mode
SONET/SDH is one of the most common serial-interconnect protocols used in
backplanes deployed in communications and telecom applications. SONET/SDH
defines various optical carrier (OC) sub-protocols for carrying signals of different
capacities through a synchronous optical hierarchy.
SONET/SDH Frame Structure
Base OC-1 frames are byte-interleaved to form SONET/SDH frames. For example, 12
OC-1 frames are byte-interleaved to form one OC-12 frame; 48 OC-1 frames are
byte-interleaved to form one OC-48 frame, and so on. SONET/SDH frame sizes are
constant, with a frame transfer rate of 125 s.
Figure 1–139 shows the SONET/SDH frame structure.
Transport overhead bytes A1 and A2 are used for restoring frame boundary from the
serial data stream. Frame sizes are fixed, so the A1 and A2 bytes appear within the
serial data stream every 125 s. In an OC-12 system, 12 A1 bytes are followed by 12
A2 bytes. Similarly, in an OC-48 system, 48 A1 bytes are followed by 48 A2 bytes.
In SONET/SDH systems, byte values of A1 and A2 are fixed as follows:
■A1 = 11110110 or 8'hF6
■A2 = 00101000 or 8'h28
You can employ Stratix IV GX and GT transceivers as physical layer devices in a
SONET/SDH system. These transceivers provide support for SONET/SDH
protocol-specific functions and electrical features; for example, alignment to A1A2 or
A1A1A2A2 pattern.
Figure 1–139. SONET/SDH Mode
NxA1 NxA2 NxJ0/Z0
9 Rows
Nx3 Bytes
Transport Overhead
Nx3 Bytes
Payload
Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices 1–173
Transceiver Block Architecture
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Stratix IV transceivers are designed to support the following three SONET/SDH
sub-protocols:
■OC-12 at 622 Mbps with 8-bit channel width (not supported in Stratix IV GT
devices)
■OC-48 at 2488.32 Mbps with 16-bit channel width
■OC-96 at 4976 Mbps with 32-bit channel width
1–174 Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Block Architecture
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Figure 1–140 shows SONET/SDH mode configurations supported in
Stratix IV GX and GT devices.
Figure 1–140. SONET/SDH Mode Configurations in Stratix IV GX and GT Devices
Note to Figure 1–41:
(1) This is not supported in Stratix IV GT devices.
Disabled
Disabled
Rate Match FIFO
Byte SerDes
Byte Ordering
Stratix IV GX and GT Configurations
Basic
Single
Width Double
Width
Functional Modes
Protocol
PIPE XAUI GIGE SRIO
SONET
/SDH (OIF)
CEI SDI
8-bit 10-bit 16-bit 20-bit 10-bit 10-bit 10-bit 10-bit 8-bit 16-bit 10-bit
Functional Mode
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled Enabled
PMA-PCS Interface
Width
Data Rate (Gbps)
Channel Bonding
Low-Latency PCS
Word Aligner
(Pattern Length)
8B/10B
Encoder/Decoder
FPGA
Fabric-Transceiver
Interface Width
FPGA
Fabric-Transceiver
Interface Frequency
(MHz)
8-Bit 16-Bit
77.75 155.5
Manual Alignment
(16-Bit A1A2,
32-Bit A1A1A2A2)
Manual Alignment
(16-Bit A1A2,
32-Bit A1A1A2A2)
x1 x1
0.622 (OC-12)
(1)
2.488 (OC-48)
SONET/
SDH
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
32-Bit
155.5
Manual Alignment
(32-Bit A1A1A2A2)
x1
4.976 (OC-96)
Deterministic
Latency
10-Bit 20-Bit
Interf ace F requenc y
TX PCS Latency
(FPGA Fabric-Transceiver
Interface Clock Cycles)
RX PCS Latency
(FPGA Fabric-Transceiver
Interface Clock Cycles)
5 - 6
11 - 13
4 - 5.5
7 - 9
4 - 5.5
6.5 -
8.5
Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices 1–175
Transceiver Block Architecture
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
SONET/SDH OC-12 Datapath
Figure 1–141 shows the transceiver datapath when configured in SONET/SDH OC-12
mode.
SONET/SDH OC-48 Datapath
Figure 1–142 shows the transceiver datapath when configured in SONET/SDH OC-48
mode.
Figure 1–141. SONET/SDH OC-12 Datapath
TX Phase
Compensation
FIFO Serializer
Transmitter Channel PCS Transmitter Channel PMA
wrclk rdclk
Low-Speed Parallel Clock
High-Speed
Serial Clock
tx_coreclk
RX Phase
Compensation
FIFO
Word
Aligner
De-
Serializer CDR
tx_clkout
Parallel Recovered Clock
rx_coreclk
Receiver Channel PCS Receiver Channel PMA
FPGA Fabric-Transmitter
Interface Clock
FPGA
Fabric
Local
Clock
Divider
FPGA Fabric-Receiver
Interface Clock
rx_clkout
Figure 1–142. SONET/SDH OC-48 Datapath
TX Phase
Compensation
FIFO
Byte
Serializer
Serializer
Transmitter Channel PCS
Transmitter Channel PMA
/2
wrclk rdclk
Low-Speed Parallel Clock
High-Speed
Serial Clock
tx_coreclk
RX Phase
Compensation
FIFO
Byte De-
serializer
Word
Aligner De-
Serializer CDR
wrclk rdclk
/2
tx_clkout
Parallel
Recovered Clock
rx_coreclk
Byte
Ordering
Receiver Channel PCS Receiver Channel PMA
FPGA Fabric-Transmitter
Interface Clock
FPGA
Fabric
FPGA Fabric-Receiver
Interface Clock
rx_clkout
Local
Clock
Divider
1–176 Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Block Architecture
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
SONET/SDH OC-96 Datapath
Figure 1–143 shows the transceiver datapath when configured in SONET/SDH OC-96
mode.
SONET/SDH Transmission Bit Order
Unlike Ethernet, where the LSB of the parallel data byte is transferred first,
SONET/SDH requires the MSB to be transferred first and the LSB to be transferred
last. To facilitate the MSB-to-LSB transfer, you must enable the following options in
the ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager:
■Flip transmitter input data bits
■Flip receiver output data bits
Depending on whether data bytes are transferred MSB-to-LSB or LSB-to-MSB, you
must select the appropriate word aligner settings in the ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In
Manager. Table 1–65 on page 1–177 lists the correct word aligner settings for each bit
transmission order.
Word Alignment
The word aligner in SONET/SDH OC-12, OC-48, and OC-96 modes is configured in
manual alignment mode, as described in “Word Aligner in Single-Width Mode with
8-Bit PMA-PCS Interface Modes” on page 1–60.
In OC-12 and OC-48 configurations, you can configure the word aligner to either align
to a 16-bit A1A2 pattern or a 32-bit A1A1A2A2 pattern. This is controlled by the
rx_a1a2size
input port to the transceiver. A low level on the
rx_a1a2size
port
configures the word aligner to align to a 16-bit A1A2 pattern; a high level on the
rx_a1a2size
port configures the word aligner to align to a 32-bit A1A1A2A2 pattern.
In OC-96 configuration, the word aligner is only allowed to align to a A1A1A2A2
pattern, so the input port
rx_ala2size
is unavailable. Barring this difference, the
OC-96 word alignment operation is similar to that of the OC-12 and OC-48
configurations.
Figure 1–143. SONET/SDH OC-96 Datapath
TX Phase
Compensation
FIFO
Byte
Serializer
Serializer
Transmitter Channel PCS
Transmitter Channel PMA
/2
wrclk rdclk
Low-Speed Parallel Clock
High-Speed
Serial Clock
tx_coreclk
RX Phase
Compensation
FIFO
Byte De-
serializer
Word
Aligner De-
Serializer CDR
wrclk rdclk
/2
tx_clkout
Parallel
Recovered Clock
rx_coreclk
Receiver Channel PCS Receiver Channel PMA
FPGA Fabric-Transmitter
Interface Clock
FPGA
Fabric
FPGA Fabric-Receiver
Interface Clock
rx_clkout
Local
Clock
Divider
Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices 1–177
Transceiver Block Architecture
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
You can configure the word aligner to flip the alignment pattern bits programmed in
the MegaWizard Plug-In Manager and compare them with the incoming data for
alignment. This feature offers flexibility to the SONET backplane system for either a
MSB-to-LSB or LSB-to-MSB data transfer. Table 1–65 lists word alignment patterns
that you must program in the ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager based on the
bit-transmission order and the word aligner bit-flip option.
The behavior of the SONET/SDH word aligner control and status signals, along with
an operational timing diagram, are explained in “Word Aligner in Single-Width Mode
with 8-Bit PMA-PCS Interface Modes” on page 1–60.
OC-48 and OC-96 Byte Serializer and Deserializer
The OC-48 and OC-96 transceiver datapath includes the byte serializer and
deserializer to allow the PLD interface to run at a lower speed. The OC-12
configuration does not use the byte serializer and deserializer blocks.
The byte serializer and deserializer blocks are explained in “Byte Serializer” on
page 1–21 and “Byte Deserializer” on page 1–92, respectively.
The OC-48 byte serializer converts 16-bit data words from the FPGA fabric and
translates the 16-bit data words into two 8-bit data bytes at twice the rate. The OC-48
byte deserializer takes in two consecutive 8-bit data bytes and translates them into a
16-bit data word to the FPGA fabric at half the rate.
The OC-96 byte serializer converts 32-bit data words from the FPGA fabric and
translates them into two 16-bit data words at twice the rate. The OC-96 byte
deserializer takes in two consecutive 16-bit data words and translates them into a
32-bit data word to the FPGA fabric at half the rate.
OC-48 Byte Ordering
Because of byte deserialization, the MSByte of a word might appear at the
rx_dataout
port along with the LSByte of the next word.
In an OC-48 configuration, the byte ordering block is built into the datapath and can
be leveraged to perform byte ordering. Byte ordering in an OC-48 configuration is
automatic, as explained in “Word-Alignment-Based Byte Ordering” on page 1–97.
In automatic mode, the byte ordering block is triggered by the rising edge of the
rx_syncstatus
signal. As soon as the byte ordering block sees the rising edge of the
rx_syncstatus
signal, it compares the LSByte coming out of the byte deserializer with
the A2 byte of the A1A2 alignment pattern. If the LSByte coming out of the byte
deserializer does not match the A2 byte set in the ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In
Manager, the byte ordering block inserts a PAD character, as seen in Figure 1–144.
Insertion of this PAD character enables the byte ordering block to restore the correct
byte order.
Table 1–65. Word Aligner Settings
Serial Bit Transmission Order Word Alignment Bit Flip Word Alignment Pattern
MSB-to-LSB On 1111011000101000 (16'hF628)
MSB-to-LSB Off 0001010001101111 (16'h146F)
LSB-to-MSB Off 0010100011110110 (16'h28F6)
1–178 Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Block Architecture
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
1The PAD character is defaulted to the A1 byte of the A1A2 alignment pattern.
SDI Mode
The Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers (SMPTE) defines various SDI
standards for transmission of uncompressed video.
The following three SMPTE standards are popular in video broadcasting applications:
■SMPTE 259M standard—more popularly known as the standard-definition (SD)
SDI, is defined to carry video data at 270 Mbps
■SMPTE 292M standard—more popularly known as the high-definition (HD) SDI,
is defined to carry video data at either 1485 Mbps or 1483.5 Mbps
■SMPTE 424M standard—more popularly known as the third-generation (3G) SDI,
is defined to carry video data at either 2970 Mbps or 2967 Mbps
You can configure Stratix IV GX and GT transceivers in HD-SDI or 3G-SDI
configuration using the ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager.
Table 1–66 lists the ALTGX configurations supported by Stratix IV transceivers in
SDI mode.
Figure 1–144. OC-48 Byte Ordering in Automatic Mode
X X
Pad
From Byte
Deserializer
rx_dataout
(MSB)
rx_dataout
(LSB)
rx_clkout
rx_syncstatus
A1 A1
A1 A1
A2 A2
A2 A2
D0 D2
D1
Byte
Ordering
Block
rx_syncstatus
rx_byteorderalignstatus
To PLD Core
A1 A1
A1
A2
A1 A2
D1
D2
D0
D3
Table 1–66. ALTGX Configurations in SDI Mode
Configuration Data Rate (Mbps) REFCLK Frequencies
(MHz)
FPGA Fabric-Transceiver
Interface Width
HD (1) 1485 74.25, 148.5 10 bit and 20 bit
1483.5 74.175, 148.35 10 bit and 20 bit
3G (2) 2970 148.5, 297 Only 20-bit interface allowed in 3G
2967 148.35, 296.7 Only 20-bit interface allowed in 3G
Notes to Table 1–66:
(1) Not supported by Stratix IV GT devices.
(2) Stratix IV GT devices only support the 3G configuration.
Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices 1–179
Transceiver Block Architecture
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Figure 1–145 shows SDI mode configurations supported in Stratix IV GX and GT
devices.
Figure 1–145. SDI Mode
Note to Figure 1–45:
(1) Not supported in Stratix IV GT devices.
SDI
Disabled
Disabled
Rate Match FIFO
Byte SerDes
Byte Ordering
Stratix IV GX and GT Configurations
Basic
Single
Width Double
Width
Functional Modes
Protocol
PIPE XAUI GIGE SRIO
SONET
/SDH (OIF)
CEI SDI
8-bit 10-bit 16-bit 20-bit 10-bit 10-bit 10-bit 10-bit 8-bit 16-bit 10-bit
Functional Mode
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
Channel Bonding
Disabled Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
PMA-PCS Interface
Width
Data Rate (Gbps)
Low-Latency PCS
Word Aligner
(Pattern Length)
8B/10B
Encoder/Decoder
FPGA
Fabric-Transceiver
Interface Width
FPGA
Fabric-Transceiver
Interface Frequency
(MHz)
148.5/
148.35
74.25/
74.175
10-Bit 20-Bit
Bit-Slip
x1
HD-SDI
(1.485/1.4835)
(1)
x1
3G-SDI
(2.97/2.967)
Bit-Slip
20-bit
148.5/
148.35
Deterministic
Latency
10-Bit 20-Bit
5 - 6
9 - 11
I nt erface F requency
TX PCS Latency
(FPGA Fabric-Transceiver
Interface Clock Cycles)
RX PCS Latency
(FPGA Fabric-Transceiver
Interface Clock Cycles)
4 - 5.5
6 - 8
4 - 5.5
6 - 8
1–180 Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Block Architecture
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
SDI Mode Datapath
Figure 1–146 shows the transceiver datapath when configured in SDI mode.
Transmitter Datapath
The transmitter datapath, in HD-SDI configuration with 10-bit wide FPGA
fabric-transceiver interface, consists of the transmitter phase compensation FIFO and
the 10:1 serializer. The transmitter datapath, in HD-SDI and 3G-SDI configurations
with 20-bit wide FPGA fabric-transceiver interface, also includes the byte serializer.
1In SDI mode, the transmitter is purely a parallel-to-serial converter. SDI transmitter
functions, such as scrambling and cyclic redundancy check (CRC) code generation,
must be implemented in the FPGA logic array.
Receiver Datapath
In the 10-bit channel width SDI configuration, the receiver datapath is comprised of
the clock recovery unit (CRU), 1:10 deserializer, word aligner in bit-slip mode, and
receiver phase compensation FIFO. In the 20-bit channel width SDI configuration, the
receiver datapath also includes the byte deserializer.
1SDI receiver functions, such as de-scrambling, framing, and CRC checker, must be
implemented in the FPGA logic array.
Receiver Word Alignment and Framing
In SDI systems, the word aligner in the receiver datapath is not useful because word
alignment and framing happens after de-scrambling. Altera recommends driving the
ALTGX megafunction
rx_bitslip
signal low to avoid having the word aligner insert
bits in the received data stream.
Figure 1–146. SDI Mode Datapath
TX Phase
Compensation
FIFO
Byte
Serializer Serializer
Transmitter Channel PCS Transmitter Channel PMA
Low-Speed Parallel Clock
High-Speed
Serial Clock
tx_coreclk
RX Phase
Compensation
FIFO
Byte De-
serializer Word
Aligner De-
Serializer CDR
tx_clkout
wrclk rdclk wrclk rdclk
Parallel
Recovered Clock
rx_coreclk
Receiver Channel PCS Receiver Channel PMA
FPGA Fabric-Transmitter
Interface Clock
FPGA
Fabric
FPGA Fabric-Receiver
Interface Clock
rx_clkout
Local
Clock
Divider
/2
/2
Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices 1–181
Transceiver Block Architecture
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
(OIF) CEI PHY Interface Mode
Stratix IV GX and GT transceivers support a data rate between 4.976 Gbps and
6.375 Gbps in (OIF) CEI PHY interface mode.
Figure 1–147 shows (OIF) CEI PHY interface mode configurations supported in
Stratix IV GX and GT devices.
Figure 1–147. (OIF) CEI PHY Interface Mode for Stratix IV GX and GT Devices
Rate Match FIFO
Byte SerDes
Byte Ordering
Stratix IV GX and GT Configurations
Basic
Single
Width Double
Width
Functional Modes
Protocol
PIPE XAUI GIGE SRIO
SONET
/SDH (OIF)
CEI SDI
8-bit 10-bit 16-bit 20-bit 10-bit 10-bit 10-bit 10-bit 8-bit 16-bit 10-bit
Functional Mode
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
Channel Bonding
Disabled
Disabled
PMA-PCS Interface
Width
Data Rate (Gbps)
Low-Latency PCS
Word Aligner
(Pattern Length)
8B/10B
Encoder/Decoder
FPGA
Fabric-Transceiver
Interface Width
FPGA
Fabric-Transceiver
Interface Frequency
(MHz)
97.65625-
199.21875
32-Bit
x1, x4 (Transmitter
PMA-Only Bonding)
3.125-6.375
(OIF) CEI PHY
Interface Mode
Deterministic
Latency
10-Bit 20-Bit
Interf ace Frequency
TX PCS Latency
(FPGA Fabric-Transceiver
Interface Clock Cycles)
RX PCS Latency
(FPGA Fabric-Transceiver
Interface Clock Cycles)
4 -5.5
6.5 -
8.5
1–182 Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Block Architecture
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
(OIF) CEI PHY Interface Mode Datapath
Figure 1–148 shows the ALTGX megafunction transceiver datapath when configured
in (OIF) CEI PHY interface mode.
Figure 1–149 shows transceiver clocking in (OIF) CEI PHY interface mode.
Serial RapidIO Mode
The RapidIO Trade Association defines a high-performance, packet-switched
interconnect standard to pass data and control information between microprocessors,
digital signal, communications, and network processors, system memories, and
peripheral devices.
Serial RapidIO physical layer specification defines three line rates:
■1.25 Gbps
■2.5 Gbps
■3.125 Gbps
Figure 1–148. (OIF) CEI PHY Interface Mode Datapath
TX Phase
Compensation
FIFO
Byte
Serializer
Transmitter Channel PCS Transmitter Channel PMA
wrclk wrclk rdclk
rdclk
Low-Speed Parallel Clock
High-Speed Serial Clock
tx_coreclk
RX Phase
Compensation
FIFO CDR
/2
/2
tx_clkout
Parallel Recovered Clock
rx_coreclk
Receiver Channel PCS Receiver Channel PMA
FPGA
Fabric-Transmitter
Interface Clock
FPGA
Fabric
FPGA
Fabric-Receiver
Interface Clock
rx_clkout
Local
Clock
Divider
Serializer
De-
Serializer
Byte
De-
Serializer
Figure 1–149. Transceiver Clocking in (OIF) CEI PHY Interface Mode
Transceiver Block Clocking with the
Use central clock divider to improve
transmitter jitter option disabled
CMU PLL
Ch 3
Local Clock Divider Block
Ch 2
Local Clock Divider Block
Ch 1
Local Clock Divider Block
Ch 0
Local Clock Divider Block
Channel 3
Channel 2
Channel 1
Channel 0
Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices 1–183
Transceiver Block Architecture
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
It also defines two link widths—single-lane (1×) and bonded four-lane (4×) at each
line rate.
Stratix IV GX and GT transceivers support only single-lane (1×) configuration at all
three line rates. Four 1× channels configured in Serial RapidIO mode can be
instantiated to achieve a 4× Serial RapidIO link. The four transmitter channels in this
4× Serial RapidIO link are not bonded. The four receiver channels in this 4× Serial
RapidIO link do not have lane alignment or deskew capability.
Figure 1–150 shows the ALTGX transceiver datapath when configured in Serial
RapidIO mode.
Stratix IV GX and GT transceivers, when configured in Serial RapidIO functional
mode, provide the following PCS and PMA functions:
■8B/10B encoding/decoding
■Word alignment
■Lane synchronization state machine
■Clock recovery from the encoded data
■Serialization/deserialization
1Stratix IV GX and GT transceivers do not have built-in support for other PCS
functions; for example, pseudo-random idle sequence generation and lane alignment
in 4× mode. Depending on your system requirements, you must implement these
functions in the logic array or external circuits.
Figure 1–150. Serial RapidIO Mode Datapath
TX Phase
Compensation
FIFO 8B/10B
Encoder
8B/10B
Decoder
Serializer
De-
Serializer
Transmitter Channel PCS Transmitter Channel PMA
wrclk rdclk
Low-Speed Parallel Clock
High-Speed Serial Clock
tx_coreclk[0]
RX Phase
Compensation
FIFO
Rate
Match
FIFO
Word
Aligner CDR
tx_clkout[0]
Parallel Recovered Clock
Low-Speed Parallel Clock
rx_coreclk[0]
Receiver Channel PCS Receiver Channel PMA
FPGA
Fabric-Transceiver
Interface Clock
FPGA
Fabric
Local
Clock Divider
Byte
Serializer
/2/2
Byte
De-
Serializer
/2
8B/10B
Decoder De-
Serializer
1–184 Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Block Architecture
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Synchronization State Machine
In Serial RapidIO mode, the ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager defaults the word
alignment pattern to K28.5. The word aligner has a synchronization state machine that
handles the receiver lane synchronization.
The ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager automatically defaults the
synchronization state machine to indicate synchronization when the receiver receives
127 K28.5 (10'b0101111100 or 10'b1010000011) synchronization code groups without
receiving an intermediate invalid code group. After synchronization, the state
machine indicates loss of synchronization when it detects three invalid code groups
separated by less than 255 valid code groups or when it is reset.
Receiver synchronization is indicated on the
rx_syncstatus
port of each channel. A
high on the
rx_syncstatus
port indicates that the lane is synchronized and a low
indicates that it has fallen out of synchronization.
Table 1–67 lists the ALTGX megafunction synchronization state machine parameters
when configured in Serial RapidIO mode.
Table 1–67. Synchronization State Machine Parameters in Serial RapidIO Mode
Parameters Number
Number of valid K28.5 code groups received to achieve synchronization. 127
Number of errors received to lose synchronization. 3
Number of continuous good code groups received to reduce the error count by one. 255
Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices 1–185
Transceiver Block Architecture
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Figure 1–151 shows a conceptual view of the synchronization state machine
implemented in Serial RapidIO functional mode.
Rate Match FIFO in Serial RapidIO Mode
In Serial RapidIO mode, the rate match FIFO is capable of compensating for up to
±100 PPM (200 PPM total) difference between the upstream transmitter and the local
receiver reference clock.
1To enable the rate match FIFO in Serial RapidIO mode, the transceiver channel must
have both the transmitter and receiver channel instantiated. You must select the
Receiver and Transmitter option in the What is the operation mode? field in the
ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager. The 8B/10B encoder/decoder is always
enabled in Serial RapidIO mode.
1Rate matcher is an optional block available for selection in SRIO functional mode.
However, this block is not fully compliant to the SRIO specification.
Figure 1–151. Synchronization State Machine in Serial RapidIO Mode
Loss of Sync
Data = Comma
Comma Detect
if Data == Comma
kcntr++
else
kcntr=kcntr
Synchronized
Data = valid;
kcntr < 127
kcntr = 127
Synchronized Error
Detect
if Data == !Valid
ecntr++
gcntr=0
else
if gcntr==255
ecntr--
gcntr=0
else
gcntr++
Data = !Valid
Data=Valid
ecntr = 0
ecntr = 3
Data = !Valid
1–186 Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Block Architecture
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Depending on your implementation, you can select two 20-bit rate match patterns in
the ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager under the What is the rate match pattern1
and What is the rate match pattern2 fields. Each of the two programmed 20-bit rate
match patterns consists of a 10-bit skip pattern and a 10-bit control pattern.
For Serial RapidIO mode in the ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager, the control
pattern1 defaults to K28.5 with positive disparity and the skip pattern1 defaults to
K29.7 with positive disparity. The control pattern2 defaults to K28.5 with negative
disparity and the skip pattern2 defaults to K29.7 with negative disparity.
The rate match FIFO operation begins after the word aligner synchronization status
rx_syncstatus
goes high. When the rate matcher receives either of the two 10-bit
control patterns followed by the respective 10-bit skip pattern, it inserts or deletes the
10-bit skip pattern as necessary to avoid the rate match FIFO from overflowing or
under-running.
In Serial RapidIO mode, the rate match FIFO can delete/insert a maximum of one
skip pattern from a cluster.
Two flags,
rx_rmfifodatadeleted
and
rx_rmfifodatainserted
, indicate that rate
match FIFO deletion and insertion events, respectively, are forwarded to the FPGA
fabric.
Figure 1–152 shows an example of rate match FIFO deletion in the case where one
skip pattern is required to be deleted. In this example, the first skip cluster has a
/K28.5/ control pattern followed by two /K29.7/ skip patterns. The second skip
cluster has a /K28.5/ control pattern followed by four /K29.7/ skip patterns. The rate
match FIFO deletes only one /K29.7/ skip pattern from the first skip cluster. One
/K29.7/ skip pattern is deleted from the second cluster.
Figure 1–152. Rate Match FIFO Deletion with One Skip Pattern Deleted
K28.5 K29.7
K28.5 K29.7 K29.7
datain
dataout
K29.7
First Skip Cluster Second Skip Cluster
K28.5 K29.7 K29.7 K29.7 K29.7
K29.7
K28.5 K29.7
rx_
rmfifodatadeleted
One Skip Pattern Deleted
Dx.y
Dx.y
K29.7
Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices 1–187
Transceiver Block Architecture
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Figure 1–153 shows an example of rate match FIFO insertion in the case where one
skip pattern is required to be inserted. In this example, the first skip cluster has a
/K28.5/ control pattern followed by three /K29.7/ skip patterns. The second skip
cluster has a /K28.5/ control pattern followed by two /K29.7/ skip patterns. The rate
match FIFO inserts only one /K29.7/ skip pattern into the first skip cluster. One
/K29.7/ skip pattern is inserted into the second cluster.
Two flags,
rx_rmfifofull
and
rx_rmfifoempty
, are forwarded to the FPGA fabric to
indicate rate match FIFO full and empty conditions. For more information about the
behavior of these two signals, refer to “Rate Match FIFO in Basic Single-Width Mode”
on page 1–84.
Basic (PMA Direct) Functional Mode
In Basic (PMA Direct) functional mode, the Stratix IV GX and GT transceiver datapath
contains only PMA blocks. Parallel data is transferred directly between the FPGA
fabric and the serializer/deserializer inside the transmitter/receiver PMA. Because all
PCS blocks are bypassed in Basic (PMA Direct) mode, you must implement the
required PCS logic in the FPGA fabric.
You can configure four regular transceiver channels inside each transceiver block in
Basic (PMA Direct) functional mode. You can configure two CMU channels inside
each transceiver block only in Basic (PMA Direct) functional mode, as they do not
support PCS circuitry.
In PMA Direct mode, you must create your own logic to support PCS functionality.
There are specific reset sequences to be followed in this mode.
Use dynamic reconfiguration to dynamically reconfigure the various PMA controls to
tailor the transceivers in PMA direct drive mode for a particular application.
fFor more information, refer to the Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices
chapter. For more information about the reset sequence to follow in PMA-Direct
mode, refer to the Reset Control and Power Down in Stratix IV Devices chapter.
The term ‘PMA-Direct’ is used to describe various configurations in this mode.
1In Basic (PMA Direct) mode, all the PCS blocks are bypassed; therefore, any PCS-type
features (for example, phase compensation FIFOs, byte serializer, 8B/10B
encoder/decoder, word aligner, deskew FIFO, rate match FIFO, byte deserializer, and
byte ordering), must be implemented in the FPGA fabric. In Basic (PMA Direct) mode,
you must create your own logic to support PCS functionality.
Figure 1–153. Rate Match FIFO Deletion with One Skip Pattern Inserted
K28.5 K29.7
K28.5 K29.7 K29.7
datain
dataout
K29.7
First Skip Cluster Second Skip Cluster
K29.7 K28.5 K29.7 K29.7 Dx.y
K29.7
K29.7 K29.7
One Skip Pattern Inserted
K28.5 K29.7K29.7 Dx.y
1–188 Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Block Architecture
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Figure 1–154 shows the Stratix IV GX and GT transceiver configured in Basic
(PMA Direct) functional mode. The grayed out blocks indicate areas that are not
active in this mode.
1The grayed out blocks shown in Figure 1–154 are not available in the CMU channels.
Therefore, the CMU channels can be configured to operate as transceiver channels in
PMA Direct mode only.
In Basic (PMA Direct) Mode, you can configure the transceiver channel in two main
configurations:
■Basic (PMA Direct) ×1 configuration
■Basic (PMA Direct) ×N configuration
You can configure the transceiver in Basic (PMA Direct) ×1/ ×N mode by setting the
appropriate sub-protocol in the Which sub protocol will you be using? field. You can
select single-width or double-width by selecting Single/Double in the What is the
deserializer block width? field in the ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager.
In single-width mode, the PMA-PLD interface is 8 bit/10 bit wide; whereas in
double-width mode, the PMA-PLD interface is 16 bit/20 bit wide.
Figure 1–154. Stratix IV GX and GT Transceiver Configured in Basic (PMA Direct) Mode
Note to Figure 1–154:
(1) The grayed out blocks shown in Figure 1–154 are not available in the CMU channels. Therefore, the CMU channels can be configured to operate
as transceiver channels in PMA direct mode only.
RX Phase
Compensation
FIFO
TX Phase
Compensation
FIFO
Byte Ordering
Byte Deserializer
Byte Serializer
8B/10B Decoder
8B/10B Encoder
Rate Match FIFO
Receiver Channel PCS Receiver Channel
PMA
Deskew FIFO
Word Aligner
Deserializer
CDR
Transmitter Channel PCS Transmitter Channel
PMA
Serializer
wrclk wrclkrdclk rdclk
PCI Express Hard IP
FPGA
Fabric
PIPE Interface
Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices 1–189
Transceiver Block Architecture
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Table 1–68 lists the Stratix IV GX and GT PLD-PMA interface widths and data rates
supported in Basic (PMA Direct) ×1/×N single-width and double-width modes.
Basic (PMA Direct) ×1 Configuration
You can configure a transceiver channel in this mode by setting the which protocol
will you be using? field to Basic (PMA Direct) and the which sub protocol will you
be using? field to none. In this configuration, the Quartus II software requires one of
the two CMU PLLs within the same transceiver block to provide high-speed clocks to
the transmitter side of the channel.
If the
CMU0
or
CMU1
channel is configured in Basic (PMA Direct) ×1 configuration, use
their local clock dividers to provide clock to their respective transmitter channels.
fFor information about clocking restrictions in Basic (PMA Direct) ×1 mode, refer to
the “Non-Bonded Basic (PMA Direct) Mode Channel Configurations” section in the
Transceiver Clocking in Stratix IV Devices chapter.
fFor information about routing the clocks to transceiver channels in Basic
(PMA Direct) ×1 mode, refer to the Transceiver Clocking in Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Basic (PMA Direct) ×N Configuration
You can configure a transceiver channel in this mode by setting the which protocol
will you be using field to Basic (PMA Direct) and the which sub protocol will you
be using field to ×N. In this mode, all the transmitter channels can receive their
high-speed clock from the
CMU0
PLL from the transceiver blocks or the ATX PLL
present on the same side of the device. These clocks are provided through the ×
N_Top
or ×
N_Bottom
clock line.
In this mode, if you use a CMU PLL to generate the transceiver channel datapath
interface clocks, only the
CMU0
central clock divider of the transceiver block containing
the CMU PLL is used.
fFor information about clocking restrictions in Basic (PMA Direct) ×N mode, refer to
the “Non-Bonded Basic (PMA Direct) Mode Channel Configurations” section in the
Transceiver Clocking in Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Table 1–68. FPGA Fabric-PMA Interface Widths and Data Rates Supported in Basic (PMA Direct) ×1/×N Single-Width and
Double-Width Modes for Stratix IV GX and GT Devices
Basic
(PMA Direct)
Functional Mode
FPGA
Fabric-PMA
Interface Width
Supported Data Rate Range
Stratix IV GX Stratix IV GT
C2 Speed Grade C3, I3, and M3
Speed Grades C4 Speed Grade I1, I2, and I3
Speed Grades
×1/×N
Single-width
mode
8 bit 0.6 Gbps to
2.6 Gbps
0.6 Gbps to
2.6 Gbps
0.6 Gbps to
2.6 Gbps
600 Mbps to
2.6 Gbps
10 bit 0.6 Gbps to
3.25 Gbps
0.6 Gbps to
3.25 Gbps
0.6 Gbps to
3.25 Gbps
600 Mbps to
3.25 Gbps
×1/×N
Double-width
mode
16 bit 1.0 Gbps to
5.2 Gbps
1.0 Gbps to
5.2 Gbps
1.0 Gbps to
5.0 Gbps
1.0 Gbps to
5.2 Gbps
20 bit 1.0 Gbps to
6.5 Gbps
1.0 Gbps to
6.5 Gbps
1.0 Gbps to
5.0 Gbps
1.0 Gbps to
6.5 Gbps
1–190 Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Block Architecture
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
fFor more information about combining multiple transceiver channels, refer to the
Configuring Multiple Protocols and Data Rates in Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Each receiver in a receiver channel has a dedicated CDR that provides a high-speed
clock.
fFor more information about timing closure in Basic (PMA Direct) mode, refer to
AN 580: Achieving Timing Closure in Basic (PMA Direct) Functional Mode.
Loopback Modes
Stratix IV GX and GT devices provide various loopback options that allow you to
verify how different functional blocks work in the transceiver channel. The available
loopback options are:
■“Serial Loopback” on page 1–190—available in all functional modes except PCIe
mode
■“Parallel Loopback” on page 1–191—available in either single-width or
double-width modes.
■“Reverse Serial Loopback” on page 1–193—available in Basic mode only
■“Reverse Serial Pre-CDR Loopback” on page 1–194—available in Basic mode only
■“PCIe Reverse Parallel Loopback” on page 1–194—available in PCIe mode
Serial Loopback
The serial loopback option is available for all functional modes except PCIe mode.
Figure 1–155 shows the datapath for serial loopback. The data from the FPGA fabric
passes through the transmitter channel and gets looped back to the receiver channel,
bypassing the receiver buffer. The received data is available to the FPGA logic for
verification. Using this option, you can check the working for all enabled PCS and
PMA functional blocks in the transmitter and receiver channel. When you enable the
serial loopback option, the ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager provides the
rx_seriallpbken
port to dynamically enable serial loopback on a channel-by-channel
basis. Set the
rx_seriallpbken
signal to logic high to enable serial loopback.
When serial loopback is enabled, the transmitter channel sends the data to both the
tx_dataout
output port and to the receiver channel. The differential output voltage on
the
tx_dataout
ports is based on the selected VOD settings. The looped back data is
received by the receiver CDR and is retimed through different clock domains. You
must provide an alignment pattern for the word aligner to enable the receiver channel
to retrieve the byte boundary.
Suppose the device is not in serial loopback mode and is receiving data from a remote
device. At this point, the receiver CDR’s recovered clock is locked to the data from
that source. If the device is placed in serial loopback mode, the data source to the
receiver changes from the remote device to local transmitter channel. This prompts
the receiver CDR to start tracking the phase of the new data source. During this time,
the receiver CDR’s recovered clock may be unstable. As the receiver PCS is running
off of this recovered clock, you must place the receiver PCS under reset by asserting
the
rx_digitalreset
signal during this time period.
Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices 1–191
Transceiver Block Architecture
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
1When moving into or out of serial loopback, you must assert
rx_digitalreset
for a
minimum of two parallel clock cycles.
Parallel Loopback
You can configure a transceiver channel in this mode by setting the which protocol
will you be using? field to Basic and the which sub protocol will you be using? field
to BIST. You can only configure a Receiver and Transmitter transceiver channel in
this functional mode. You can configure a transceiver channel in this mode in either a
single-width or double-width configuration.
The BIST pattern generator and pattern verifier are located near the FPGA fabric in
the PCS block of the transceiver channel. This placement allows for testing the
complete transmitter PCS and receiver PCS datapaths for bit errors. This mode is
primarily used for transceiver channel debugging, if needed.
Figure 1–155. Serial Loopback Datapath
Receiver Channel PCS
Transmitter Channel PCS Transmitter Channel PMA
Receiver Channel
PMA
FPGA
Fabric
TX
Phase
Compen-
sation
FIFO
Byte
Serializer
8B/10B
Encoder
BIST PRBS, High-Freq,
Low-Freg pattern
generator
Serial loop back
can be dynamically enabled
Word
Aligner
BIST PRBS verifier
Deskew
FIFO
Rate
Match
FIFO
8B/10B
Decoder
Byte
De-
serializer
Byte
Ordering
RX
Phase
Compen-
sation
FIFO
Serializer
De-
serializer
Receiver
CDR
1–192 Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Block Architecture
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
The parallel loopback mode is available only with a built-in 16-bit incremental pattern
generator and verifier. The channel width is fixed to 16 bits in this mode. Also in this
mode, the incremental pattern 00-FF is looped back to the receiver channel at the PCS
functional block boundary before the PMA and is sent to the
tx_dataout
port. The
received data is verified by the verifier. This loopback allows you to verify the
complete PCS block. The differential output voltage of the transmitted serial data on
the
tx_dataout
port is based on the selected VOD settings. The datapath for parallel
loopback is shown in Figure 1–156. The incremental data pattern is not available to
the FPGA logic for verification.
Table 1–69 lists the enabled PCS functional blocks for single-width and double-width
mode. The last column in Table 1–69 lists the supported channel width setting for
parallel loopback.
The status signals
rx_bistdone
and
rx_bisterr
indicate the status of the verifier. The
rx_bistdone
port is asserted and stays high when the verifier either receives one full
cycle of incremental pattern or it detects an error in the receiver data. The
rx_bisterr
signal is asserted and stays high when the verifier detects an error. You can reset the
incremental pattern generator and verifier by asserting the
tx_digitalreset
and
rx_digitalreset
signals, respectively.
Figure 1–156. Enabled PCS Functional Blocks in Parallel Loopback
Receiver Channel PCS
Transmitter Channel PCS Transmitter Channel PMA
Receiver Channel PMA
FPGA
Fabric
BIST incremental
pattern generator
TX
Phase
Compen-
sation
FIFO
Byte
Serializer 8B/10B
Encoder
Parallel
loopback
Word
Aligner
8B/10B
Decoder
Byte
De-
serializer
RX
Compen-
sation
FIFO
BIST incremental
pattern verifier
De-
serializer
Receiver
CDR
Serializer
Table 1–69. Enabled PCS Functional Blocks for Parallel Loopback
Configuration 8B/10B Encoder Byte Serializer Data Rate Range
Supported Channel Width
Setting in the ALTGX
MegaWizard Plug-In Manager
for Parallel Loopback
Single-width mode Enabled Enabled 600 Mbps to 3.125 Gbps 16
Double-width mode Enabled Disabled 1 Gbps to 5 Gbps 16
Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices 1–193
Transceiver Block Architecture
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Reverse Serial Loopback
The Reverse Serial Loopback can be set by selecting the radial button under the
Loopback tab in the ALTGX MegaWizard. In reverse serial loopback mode, the data is
received through the
rx_datain
port, retimed through the receiver CDR and sent out
to the
tx_dataout
port. The received data is also available to the FPGA logic. No
dynamic pin control is available to select or deselect reverse serial loopback.
Figure 1–157 shows the transceiver channel datapath for reverse serial loopback
mode.
The active block of the transmitter channel is only the transmitter buffer. You can
change the output differential voltage and the pre-emphasis first post tap values on
the transmitter buffer through the ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager or through
the dynamic reconfiguration controller. Reverse serial loopback is often implemented
when using a bit error rate tester (BERT) on the upstream transmitter.
Figure 1–157. Reverse Serial Loopback Datapath (Grayed-Out Blocks are Not Active in this Mode)
Receiver Channel PCS
Transmitter Channel PCS Transmitter Channel PMA
FPGA
Fabric
TX Phase
Compen-
sation
FIFO
Byte
Serialzier
8B/10B
Encoder Serializer
Word
Aligner
8B/10B
Decoder
Byte
De-Serializer
Byte
Ordering
RX Phase
Compen-
sation
FIFO
Receiver
CDR
De-
Serializer
Receiver Channel PMA
Reverse
Serial
Loopback
1–194 Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Block Architecture
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Reverse Serial Pre-CDR Loopback
The reverse serial pre-CDR loopback is available as a subprotocol under Basic
functional mode. In reverse serial pre-CDR loopback, the data received through the
rx_datain
port is looped back to the
tx_dataout
port before the receiver CDR. The
received data is also available to the FPGA logic. Figure 1–158 shows the transceiver
channel datapath for reverse serial pre-CDR loopback mode. The active block of the
transmitter channel is only the transmitter buffer. You can change the output
differential voltage on the transmitter buffer through the ALTGX MegaWizard
Plug-In Manager. The pre-emphasis settings for the transmitter buffer cannot be
changed in this configuration.
PCIe Reverse Parallel Loopback
PCIe reverse parallel loopback is only available in PCIe functional mode for Gen1 and
Gen2 data rates. As shown in Figure 1–159, the received serial data passes through the
receiver CDR, deserializer, word aligner, and rate matching FIFO buffer. It is then
looped back to the transmitter serializer and transmitted out through the
tx_dataout
port. The received data is also available to the FPGA fabric through the
rx_dataout
port. This loopback mode is compliant with the PCIe specification 2.0. To enable this
loopback mode, assert the
tx_detectrxloopback
port.
Figure 1–158. Reverse Serial Pre-CDR Loopback Datapath
Receiver C hannel PCS
Transmitter Channel PCS Transmitter Channel PMA
Receiver Channel PMA
FPGA
Fabric
Serializer
Reverse
Serial
Pre-CDR
Loopback
Receiver
CDR
De-
Serializer
Word
Aligner
8B/10B
Decoder
Byte
De-
Serializer
Byte
Ordering
RX Phase
Compen-
sation
FIFO
Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices 1–195
Auxiliary Transmit (ATX) PLL Block
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
In Figure 1–159, the grayed areas show the inactive paths when the PCIe reverse
parallel loopback mode is enabled.
Auxiliary Transmit (ATX) PLL Block
Stratix IV GX and GT transceivers contain the ATX PLL block that you can use to
generate high-speed clocks for the transmitter channels on the same side of the
device. Each:
■Stratix IV GX device has 6G ATX PLL
■Stratix IV GT device has 6G ATX PLL and 10G ATX PLLs
fFor data rates supported by these ATX PLLs, refer to the DC and Switching
Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices chapter.
6G ATX PLL Block
Stratix IV GX can have either two (one on each side of the device) or four (two on each
side of the device) 6G ATX PLLs, depending on the specific devices.
fFor data rates supported by 6G ATX PLLs, refer to the DC and Switching Characteristics
for Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Figure 1–159. PCIe Reverse Parallel Loopback Mode Datapath (Grayed-Out Blocks are Not Active in this Mode)
RX Phase
Compensation
FIFO
TX Phase
Compensation
FIFO
Byte Ordering
Byte Deserializer
Byte Serializer
8B/10B Decoder
8B10B Encoder
Rate Match FIFO
Receiver Channel PCS Receiver Channel
PMA
Deskew FIFO
Word Aligner
Deserializer
CDR
Transmitter Channel PCS Transmitter Channel
PMA
Serializer
wrclk wrclkrdclk rdclk
Reverse Parallel
Loopback Path
PCIe hard IP
FPGA
Fabric
PIPE Interface
1–196 Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Auxiliary Transmit (ATX) PLL Block
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
10G ATX PLL Block
Each Stratix IV GT device has two 10G ATX PLL blocks, one located on each side of
the device. The 10G ATX PLLs provide low-jitter transceiver clocks to implement
40G/100G Ethernet and SFI-S links specified by IEEE802.3ba and OIF specifications.
In EP4S40G2F40 and EP4S40G5H40 devices, you can use each 10G ATX PLL to
generate transceiver clocks for up to six channels at data rates of up to 11.3 Gbps each.
In EP4S100G2F40, EP4S100G5H40, and EP4S100G5F45 devices, you can use each 10G
ATX PLL to generate transceiver clocks for up to 12 channels at data rates of up to
11.3 Gbps each.
Figure 1–163 and Figure 1–164 show transceiver channels that support data rates up
to 11.3 Gbps in each Stratix IV GT device.
The 10G ATX PLL block consists of:
■10G ATX PLL—Synthesizes the input reference clock to generate the high-speed
serial transceiver clock at frequency of half the configured data rate
■ATX clock divider block—Divides the high-speed serial clock from the 10G ATX
PLL to generate the low-speed parallel transceiver clock
The 10G ATX PLL architecture is functionally similar to the 6G ATX PLL architecture,
except that it is optimized for the 10 Gbps data rate range.
Figure 1–160 shows the location of the ATX PLL blocks in two transceiver block
device families.
Figure 1–160. Location of ATX PLL Blocks in a Four-Transceiver Block Stratix IV GX Device (Two
on Each Side)
GXBL1 GXBR1
ATX PLL L0 (6G) ATX PLL R0 (6G)
GXBL0 GXBR0
Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices 1–197
Auxiliary Transmit (ATX) PLL Block
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Figure 1–161 shows the location of the ATX PLL blocks in three transceiver block
device families (for 230K and 530K devices and all other devices).
Figure 1–162 shows the location of the ATX PLL blocks in four transceiver block
device families.
Figure 1–161. Location of ATX PLL Blocks with a Six Transceiver Block Stratix IV GX Device
(Three on Each side)
Figure 1–162. Location of ATX PLL Blocks in an Eight-Transceiver Block Stratix IV GX Device
(Four on Each Side)
GXBL0
GXBL2
GXBL1
ATX PLL L0 (6G) ATX PLL R0 (6G)
GXBR0
GXBR1
GXBR2
In 230K and 530K Stratix IV GX Devices
GXBL2
GXBL1
GXBL0
ATX PLL L0 (6G) ATX PLL R0 (6G)
GXBR0
GXBR1
GXBR2
ATX PLL L1 (6G) ATX PLL R1 (6G)
In Stratix IV GX Devices Other than 230K and 530K
GXBL3
GXBL2
GXBL1
GXBL0
ATX PLL L1 (6G)
ATX PLL L0 (6G)
GXBR0
ATX PLL R0 (6G)
ATX PLL R1 (6G)
GXBR1
GXBR2
GXBR3
1–198 Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Auxiliary Transmit (ATX) PLL Block
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Figure 1–163 and Figure 1–164 show the locations of the 6G and 10G ATX PLLs in
each Stratix IV GT device.
Input Reference Clocks for the ATX PLL Block
The 6G ATX PLL block does not have a dedicated reference clock pin. The following
are the possible input reference clock sources:
■REFCLKs from the transceiver blocks on the same side of the device if the
corresponding CMU channels are not used as transceiver channels
■Input reference clock provided through the PLL cascade clock network
■Clock inputs connected through the global clock lines
Altera recommends using the REFCLK pins from the adjacent transceiver block below
the ATX PLL block to improve performance.
Figure 1–163. Location of Transceiver Channel and PLL in Stratix IV GT Devices (EP4S40G2F40, EP4S40G5H40,
EP4S100G2F40 and EP4S100G5H40)
ATX PLL L1 (10G)
ATX PLL L0 (6G)
Transceiver Block GXBL0
Transceiver Block GXBL1
Transceiver Block GXBL2
ATX PLL R1 (10G)
ATX PLL R0 (6G)
Transceiver Block GXBR0
Transceiver Block GXBR1
Transceiver Block GXBR2
Figure 1–164. Location of Transceiver Channel and PLL in Stratix IV GT Devices (EP4S100G5F45)
ATX PLL L2 (10G)
ATX PLL L1 (6G)
Transceiver Block GXBL1
Transceiver Block GXBL2
Transceiver Block GXBL3
ATX PLL R2 (10G)
ATX PLL R1 (6G)
Transceiver Block GXBR1
Transceiver Block GXBR2
Transceiver Block GXBR3
ATX PLL L0 (6G) ATX PLL R0 (6G)
Transceiver Block GXBL0 Transceiver Block GXBR0
Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices 1–199
Auxiliary Transmit (ATX) PLL Block
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
For the 10G ATX PLL, Stratix IV GT devices only allow driving the reference clock
source from one of the dedicated
reflck
pins on the same side of the device.
1For improved jitter performance, Altera strongly recommends using the REFCLK pins
of the transceiver block located immediately below the 10G ATX PLL block to drive
the input reference clock.
fFor more information about the input reference clocks for ATX PLLs, refer to the
Transceiver Clocking for Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Architecture of the ATX PLL Block
Figure 1–165 shows the ATX PLL block components (the ATX PLL, ATX clock divider,
and a shared control signal generation block).
The functional blocks on the ATX PLL are similar to the blocks explained in “CMU0
PLL” on page 1–102. The values of the /M and /L divider settings in the ATX PLL are
automatically selected by the Quartus II software based on the transceiver channel
configuration.
The ATX PLL high-speed clock output provides high-speed serial clocks for
non-bonded functional modes such as CEI (with the “none” subprotocol).
Figure 1–165. ATX PLL Block
Notes to Figure 1–165:
(1) In non-bonded functional modes (for example, CEI functional mode), the transmitter channel uses the transmitter local clock divider to divide this
high-speed clock output to provide clocks for its PMA and PCS blocks.
(2) This is used in Basic ×4, ×8, and PCIe ×4 and ×8 functional modes.
8
ATX PLL
high-speed
Clock (1)
ATX PLL Block
pll_powerdown
cascaded PLL clock
global clock line
ITB clock lines
PCIErateswitch
ATX PLL input
reference clock ATX PLL
high-speed serial clock
for bonded modes (2)
ATX clock
divider block
PCIE_gen2switch
PCIE_gen2switch_done
PCI Express
rate switch
controller
1–200 Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Auxiliary Transmit (ATX) PLL Block
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
ATX Clock Divider
The ATX clock divider divides the ATX PLL high-speed clock and provides
high-speed serial and low-speed parallel clock for bonded functional modes such as
PCIe (×4 and ×8), Basic ×4 and ×8, and PMA-Direct mode with ×N configuration. For
PCIe functional mode support, the ATX clock divider consists of the PCIe rateswitch
circuit to enable dynamic rateswitch between PCIe Gen1 and Gen2 data rates. For
more information on this circuit, refer to “CMU0 Channel” on page 1–101.
The clock outputs from the ATX PLL block are provided to the transmitter channels
through the ×
N_Top
or ×
N_bottom
clock lines, as shown in Figure 1–166.
fFor more information, refer to the Transceiver Clocking for Stratix IV Devices chapter.
The Differences Between 10G ATX PLL, 6G ATX PLL, and CMU PLL
Table 1–70 lists the differences between the 10G ATX PLL, 6G ATX PLL, and CMU
PLL.
Figure 1–166. ATX Clock Divider
0
1
ATX clock divider block
PCIE_gen2switch_done
PCIE_gen2switch
ATX PLL
high-speed
clock output
PCIe
clockswitch circuit
/S
(4, 5, 8, 10) /2
Low-Speed
Parallel Clocks
(for bonded modes)
coreclkout to FPGA fabric
(for bonded modes)
High-Speed
Serial Clock
(for bonded modes)
Table 1–70. Differences Between the 10G ATX PLL, 6G ATX PLL, and CMU PLL (Part 1 of 2)
Difference Category/PLLs 10G ATX PLL 6G ATX PLL CMU PLL
Available in Stratix IV GT device Stratix IV GX and GT devices Stratix IV GX and GT devices
Data rates (Gbps) 9.9 to 11.3
4.8 to 5.4 and 6.0 and 6.5
2.4 to 2.7 and 3.0 and 3.25 (1)
1.2 to 1.35 and 1.5 to 1.625 (1)
■Up to 8.5 for Stratix IV GX
devices
■Up to 11.3 for
Stratix IV GT devices
Input reference clock
options
Only dedicated
refclk
pins on the same side of
the device (2), (3)
■Clock inputs connected
through the inter transceiver
block (ITB) lines.
■Clock inputs connected
through the PLL cascade clock
network.
■Clock inputs connected
through the global clock lines.
(3)
■Clock inputs connected
through the inter
transceiver block (ITB)
lines.
■clock inputs connected
through the PLL cascade
clock network.
■Clock inputs connected
through the global clock
lines,
refclk0
and
refclk1
clock input,
dedicated
refclks
in the
transceiver block. (3)
Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices 1–201
Calibration Blocks
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Calibration Blocks
Stratix IV GX and GT devices contain calibration circuits that calibrate the OCT
resistors and the analog portions of the transceiver blocks to ensure that the
functionality is independent of process, voltage, or temperature variations.
Calibration Block Location
Figure 1–167 shows the location and number of calibration blocks available for
different Stratix IV GX and GT devices. In Figure 1–167 through Figure 1–172, the
calibration block R0 and L0 refer to the calibration blocks on the right and left side of
the devices, respectively.
Power Supply—VCCA_L/R (V)
options for PLLs 3.3 3.0 or
3.3 (4)
2.5 or
3.0 or
3.3 (4)
Phase noise Lower when compared
with the CMU PLL (5)
Lower when compared with the
CMU PLL (5)
Higher when compared with
the ATX PLLs (5)
Notes to Table 1–70:
(1) Using the L dividers available in ATX PLLs.
(2) For improved jitter performance, Altera strongly recommends using the
refclk
pins of the transceiver block located immediately below the 10G
ATX PLL block to drive the input reference clock.
(3) For more information, refer to the Input Reference Clock Source table in the Stratix IV Transceiver Clocking chapter.
(4) Option in Stratix IV GT devices.
(5) For more information about phase noise and PLL bandwidths of ATX and CMU PLLs, refer to the characterization reports.
Table 1–70. Differences Between the 10G ATX PLL, 6G ATX PLL, and CMU PLL (Part 2 of 2)
Difference Category/PLLs 10G ATX PLL 6G ATX PLL CMU PLL
Figure 1–167. Calibration Block Locations in Stratix IV GX and GT Device with Two Transceiver
Blocks (on Each Side)
Stratix IV GX and GT
Device
GXBL1
GXBL0
GXBR1
GXBR0
Calibration
Block L0
Calibration
Block R0
2K
Ω
2K
Ω
ATX PLL L0 ATX PLL R0
1–202 Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Calibration Blocks
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Figure 1–168 shows Stratix IV GX 230K and 530K devices that have three transceiver
blocks each on the left and right side and one ATX PLL block on each side.
Figure 1–168. Calibration Block Locations in Stratix IV GX 230K and 530K Devices with Three
Transceiver Blocks (on Each Side)
Stratix IV GX
Device
Calibration
Block L1
Calibration
Block R1
GXBL2 GXBR2
GXBL1 GXBR1
GXBL0 GXBR0
Calibration
Block L0
Calibration
Block R0
2K
Ω
2K
Ω
2K
Ω
2K
Ω
ATX PLL L0 ATX PLL R0
Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices 1–203
Calibration Blocks
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Figure 1–169 shows Stratix IV GX devices other than 230K and 530K that have three
transceiver blocks each on the left and right side and two ATX PLL blocks on each
side.
Figure 1–169. Calibration Block Locations in Stratix IV GX Devices Other than 230K and 530K
with Three Transceiver Blocks (on Each Side)
Stratix IV GX
Device
Calibration
Block L1
Calibration
Block R1
GXBL2 GXBR2
GXBL1 GXBR1
GXBL0 GXBR0
Calibration
Block L0
Calibration
Block R0
2K
Ω
2K
Ω
2K
Ω
2K
Ω
ATX PLL L0 ATX PLL R0
ATX PLL L1 ATX PLL R0
1–204 Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Calibration Blocks
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Figure 1–170 shows Stratix IV GX devices that have four transceiver blocks each on
the left and right side and two ATX PLL blocks on each side.
Figure 1–171 shows Stratix IV GX devices that have two transceiver blocks only on the
right side of the device.
The Quartus II software automatically selects the appropriate calibration block based
on the assignment of the transceiver
tx_dataout
and
rx_datain
pins.
Figure 1–170. Calibration Block Locations in Stratix IV GX Devices with Four Transceiver Blocks
(on Each Side)
Figure 1–171. Calibration Block Locations in Stratix IV GX Devices with Two Transceiver Blocks
(Right Side Only)
Stratix IV GX
Device
Calibration
Block L1 Calibration
Block R1
GXBL3 GXBR3
GXBL2 GXBR2
GXBL1 GXBR1
GXBL0 GXBR0
Calibration
Block L0 Calibration
Block R0
2K
Ω
2K
Ω
2K
Ω
2K
Ω
ATX PLL L1
ATX PLL L0 ATX PLL R0
ATX PLL R1
Stratix IV GX
Device
GXBR1
GXBR0
Calibration Block
R0
2K
Ω
ATX PLL R0
Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices 1–205
Calibration Blocks
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Calibration
The calibration block internally generates a constant internal reference voltage,
independent of process, voltage, or temperature variations. It uses the internal
reference voltage and external reference resistor (you must connect the resistor to the
RREF
pin) to generate constant reference currents. These reference currents are used by
the analog block calibration circuit to calibrate the transceiver blocks.
The OCT calibration circuit calibrates the OCT resistors present in the transceiver
channels. You can enable the OCT resistors in the transceiver channels through the
ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager.
You must connect a separate 2 k (tolerance max ± 1%) external resistor on each
RREF
pin in the Stratix IV GX and GT device to ground. To ensure proper operation of the
calibration block, the
RREF
resistor connection in the board must be free from external
noise.
Input Signals to the Calibration Block
The ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager provides the
cal_blk_clk
and
cal_blk_powerdown
ports to control the calibration block:
■
cal_blk_clk
—you must use the
cal_blk_clk
port to provide input clock to the
calibration clock. The frequency of
cal_blk_clk
must be within 10 MHz to
125 MHz (this range is preliminary. Final values will be available after
characterization). You can use dedicated clock routes such as the global or regional
clock. If you do not have suitable input reference clock or dedicated clock routing
resources available, use divide-down logic from the FPGA fabric to generate a
slow clock and use local clocking routing. Drive the
cal_blk_clk
port of all
ALTGX instances that are associated with the same calibration block from the
same input pin or logic.
■
cal_blk_powerdown
—you can perform calibration multiple times by using the
cal_blk_powerdown
port available through the ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In
Manager. Assert this signal for approximately 500 ns. Following de-assertion of
cal_blk_powerdown
, the calibration block restarts the calibration process. Drive the
cal_blk_powerdown
port of all ALTGX instances that are associated with the same
calibration block from the same input pin or logic.
1–206 Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Calibration Blocks
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Figure 1–172 shows the required inputs to the calibration block.
Figure 1–172. Input Signals to the Calibration Blocks
Note to Figure 1–172:
(1) The transceiver on-chip termination calibration process takes approximately 33,000
cal_blk_clk
cycles from the
de-assertion of the
cal_blk_powerdown
signal.
Calibration Block
RREF pin
cal_blk_clk
cal_blk_powerdown
(1)
Internal
Reference
Voltage
Generator
Reference
Signal
OCT Calibration
Circuit
Analog Block
Calibration Circuit
OCT Calibration
Control Analog Block
Calibration Control
Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices 1–207
Built-In Self Test Modes
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Built-In Self Test Modes
This section describes Built-In Self Test (BIST) modes.
BIST Mode Pattern Generators and Verifiers
Each transceiver channel in the Stratix IV GX and GT devices contain a different BIST
pattern generator and verifier. Using these BIST patterns, you can verify the
functionality of the functional blocks in the transceiver channel without requiring
user logic. The BIST functionality is provided as an optional mechanism for
debugging transceiver channels. Figure 1–173 shows the enabled input and output
ports when you select BIST mode (except incremental patterns).
Three types of pattern generators and verifiers are available:
■BIST incremental data generator and verifier—This is only available in parallel
loopback mode. For more information, refer to “Serial Loopback” on page 1–190.
■High frequency and low frequency pattern generator—The high frequency
patterns generate alternate ones and zeros and the low frequency patterns
generate five ones and five zeroes in single-width mode and ten ones and ten
zeroes in double-width mode. These patterns do not have a corresponding verifier.
You can enable the serial loopback option to dynamically loop the generated
pattern to the receiver channel using the
rx_seriallpbken
port. Therefore, the
8B/10B encoder/decoder blocks are bypassed in the Basic PRBS mode.
■Pseudo Random Binary Sequence (PRBS) generator and verifier—The PRBS
generator and verifier interface with the serializer and deserializer in the PMA
blocks. The advantage of using a PRBS data stream is that the randomness yields
an environment that stresses the transmission medium. In the data stream, you
can observe both random jitter and deterministic jitter using a time interval
analyzer, bit error rate tester, or oscilloscope. The PRBS repeats after completing an
iteration. The number of bits the PRBSx pattern sends before repeating the pattern
is (2 ^x -1) bits.
Figure 1–173. Input and Output Ports for BIST Modes
Notes to Figure 1–173:
(1)
rx_serilalpbken
is required in PRBS.
(2)
rx_bisterr
and
rx_bistdone
are only available in PRBS and BIST modes.
tx_datain[]
tx_digitalreset
rx_digitalreset
rx_seriallpbken[] (1)
pll_inclk
Built-In Self Test
(BIST)
tx_dataout
rx_bisterr (2)
rx_bistdone (2)
1–208 Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Built-In Self Test Modes
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Different PRBS patterns are available as a subprotocol under Basic functional mode
for single-width and double-width mode, as shown in the following sections.
You can enable the serial loopback option in Basic PRBS mode to loop the generated
pattern to the receiver channel. This creates a
rx_seriallpbken
port that you can use
to dynamically control the serial loopback. The 8B/10B encoder/decoder blocks are
bypassed in Basic PRBS mode.
Figure 1–174 shows the datapath for the PRBS patterns. The generated PRBS pattern is
sent to the transmitter serializer. The verifier checks the data from the word aligner.
PRBS in Single-Width Mode
Table 1–71 lists the various PRBS patterns and corresponding word alignment
patterns for PRBS in single-width mode configuration.
Figure 1–174. BIST PRBS, High Frequency, and Low Frequency Pattern Datapath
Receiver Channel PCS
Transmitter Channel PCS Transmitter Channel PMA
Receiver Channel
PMA
FPGA
Fabric
TX
Phase
Compen-
sation
FIFO
Byte
Serializer
8B/10B
Encoder
BIST PRBS, High-Freq,
Low-Freg pattern
generator
Serial loop back
can be dynamically enabled
Word
Aligner
BIST PRBS verifier
Deskew
FIFO
Rate
Match
FIFO
8B/10B
Decoder
Byte
De-
serializer
Byte
Ordering
RX
Phase
Compen-
sation
FIFO
Serializer
De-
serializer
Receiver
CDR
Table 1–71. Available PRBS, High Frequency, and Low Frequency Patterns in Single-Width Mode
Patterns Polynomial
Channel
Width of
8Bit (1)
Word
Alignment
Pattern with
Channel
Width 8 Bit
Maximum
Data Rate
With
Channel
Width 8 Bit
(Gbps)
Channel
Width of
10 Bit (1)
Word
Alignment
Pattern
Maximum
Data Rate
with
Channel
Width 10 Bit
(Gbps)
PRBS 7 X7 + X6 + 1 Y 16’h3040 2.5 N NA N/A
PRBS 8 X8 + X7 + 1 Y 16’hFF5A 2.5 N NA N/A
PRBS 10 X10 + X7 + 1 N NA N/A Y 10’h3FF 3.125
PRBS 23 X23 + X18 + 1 Y 16’hFFFF 2.5 N NA N/A
High
frequency (2) 1010101010 Y NA 2.5 Y NA 3.125
Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices 1–209
Built-In Self Test Modes
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
The status signals
rx_bistdone
and
rx_bisterr
indicate the status of the verifier. The
rx_bistdone
port gets asserted and stays high when the verifier either receives one
full cycle of incremental pattern or it detects an error in the receiver data. The
rx_bisterr
signal gets asserted and stays high when the verifier detects an error. You
can reset the PRBS pattern generator and verifier by asserting the
tx_digitalreset
and
rx_digitalreset
signals, respectively.
PRBS in Double-Width Mode
Table 1–72 lists the various PRBS patterns and corresponding word alignment
patterns for PRBS in double-width mode configuration.
The status signals
rx_bisterr
and
rx_bistdone
are available to indicate the status of
the verifier. For more information about the behavior of these status signals, refer to
“Single-Width Mode” on page 1–21.
Low
Frequency (2) 0000011111 N NA N/A Y NA 3.125
Notes to Table 1–71:
(1) Channel width refers to the What is the channel width? option in the General screen of the ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager. Based on the
selection, an 8 or 10 bits wide pattern is generated as indicated by a Yes (Y) or No (N).
(2) A verifier is not available for the specified patterns.
Table 1–71. Available PRBS, High Frequency, and Low Frequency Patterns in Single-Width Mode
Patterns Polynomial
Channel
Width of
8Bit (1)
Word
Alignment
Pattern with
Channel
Width 8 Bit
Maximum
Data Rate
With
Channel
Width 8 Bit
(Gbps)
Channel
Width of
10 Bit (1)
Word
Alignment
Pattern
Maximum
Data Rate
with
Channel
Width 10 Bit
(Gbps)
Table 1–72. Available PRBS, High Frequency, and Low Frequency Patterns in Double-Width Mode
Patterns Polynomial
Channel
Width of
16-Bit (1)
Word
Alignment
Pattern with
Channel
Width of
16-Bit
Maximum
Data Rate
with
Channel
Width of
16-Bit (Gbps)
Channel
Width of
20-Bit (1)
Word
Alignment
Pattern
Maximum
Data Rate
with
Channel
Width of
20-Bit (Gbps)
PRBS 7 X7 + X6 + 1 Y 16’h3040 5 Y 20’h43040 6.375
PRBS 23 X23 + X18 + 1 Y 32’h007FFFF
F5Y
40’h00007FF
FFF 6.375
High
frequency (2) 1010101010 Y NA 5 Y N/A 6.375
Low
Frequency (2) 0000011111 N NA N/A Y N/A 6.375
Notes to Table 1–72:
(1) Channel width refers to the what is the channel width? option in the General screen of the ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager. Based on the
selection, A 16 or 20 bits wide pattern is generated as indicated by a Yes (Y) or No (N).
(2) Verifier is not available for the specified patterns.
1–210 Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Port Lists
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Transceiver Port Lists
Instantiate the Stratix IV GX and GT transceivers using the ALTGX megafunction
instance in the Quartus II MegaWizard Plug-In Manager. The ALTGX megafunction
instance allows you to configure transceivers for your intended protocol and select
optional control and status ports to and from the instantiated transceiver channels.
Table 1–73 through Table 1–79 list a brief description of the ALTGX megafunction
ports.
Table 1–73 lists the ALTGX megafunction transmitter ports.
Table 1–73. Stratix IV GX and GT ALTGX Megafunction Ports: Transmitter Ports (Part 1 of 3)
Port Name Input/
Output Clock Domain Description Scope
Transmitter Phase Compensation FIFO
tx_datain
Input
Synchronous to
tx_clkout
or
coreclkout
.
tx_clkout
for
non-bonded
modes.
coreclk
for bonded
modes.
Parallel data input from the FPGA fabric to the
transmitter.
■Bus width—depends on the channel width
multiplied by the number of channels per
instance.
Channel
tx_clkout
Output Clock signal
FPGA fabric-transceiver interface clock.
■Bonded channel configurations—not
available.
■Non-bonded channel configurations—each
channel has a
tx_clkout
signal.
■Use this clock signal to clock the parallel
data
tx_datain
from the FPGA fabric into
the transmitter.
Channel
tx_coreclk
Input Clock signal
Optional write clock port for the transmitter
phase compensation FIFO.
■If not selected—the Quartus II software
automatically selects
tx_clkout/coreclkout
as the write clock
for transmitter phase compensation FIFO.
■If selected—you must drive this port with a
clock that is frequency locked to
tx_clkout/coreclkout
.
Channel
tx_phase_comp_fifo_
error
Output
Synchronous to
tx_clkout/
coreclkout
clock signal.
Transmitter phase compensation FIFO full or
empty indicator.
■A high level—the transmitter phase
compensation FIFO is either full or empty.
Channel
Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices 1–211
Transceiver Port Lists
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
8B/10B Encoder
tx_ctrlenable
Input
Synchronous to
tx_clkout/
coreclkout
clock signal.
8B/10B encoder /Kx.y/ or /Dx.y/ control.
■When asserted high—the 8B/10B encoder
encodes the data on the
tx_datain
port as
a /Kx.y/ control code group.
■When de-asserted low—it encodes the data
on the
tx_datain
port as a /Dx.y/ data code
group.
■Channel Width:
8—
tx_ctrlenable
= 1
16—
tx_ctrlenable
= 2
32—
tx_ctrlenable
= 4
Channel
tx_forcedisp
Input
Asynchronous
signal. Minimum
pulse width is one
parallel clock
cycles.
8B/10B encoder force disparity control.
■When asserted high—forces the 8B/10B
encoder to encode the data on the
tx_datain
port with a positive or negative
disparity depending on the
tx_dispval
signal level.
■When de-asserted low—the 8B/10B encoder
encodes the data on the
tx_datain
port
according to the 8B/10B running disparity
rules.
■Channel Width:
8—
tx_forcedisp
= 1
16—
tx_forcedisp
= 2
32—
tx_forcedisp
= 4
Channel
tx_dispval
Input
Asynchronous
signal. Minimum
pulse width is one
parallel clock
cycles.
8B/10B encoder force disparity value.
■A high level—when the
tx_forcedisp
signal is asserted high, it forces the 8B/10B
encoder to encode the data on the
tx_datain
port with a negative starting
running disparity.
■A low level—when the
tx_forcedisp
signal is asserted high, it forces the 8B/10B
encoder to encode the data on the
tx_datain
port with a positive starting
running disparity.
■Channel Width:
8—
tx_dispval
= 1
16—
tx_dispval
= 2
32—
tx_dispval
= 4
Channel
Table 1–73. Stratix IV GX and GT ALTGX Megafunction Ports: Transmitter Ports (Part 2 of 3)
Port Name Input/
Output Clock Domain Description Scope
1–212 Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Port Lists
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
tx_invpolarity
Input
Asynchronous
signal. Minimum
pulse width is two
parallel clock
cycles.
Transmitter polarity inversion control. This
feature is useful for correcting situations in
which the positive and negative signals of the
differential serial link are accidentally swapped
during board layout.
■When asserted high in single-width
modes—the polarity of every bit of the 8-bit
or 10-bit input data to the serializer gets
inverted.
■When asserted high in double-width
modes—the polarity of every bit of the
16-bit or 20-bit input data to the serializer
gets inverted.
Channel
Transmitter Physical Media Attachment
tx_dataout
Output N/A Transmitter serial data output port. Channel
fixedclk
Input Clock signal 125-MHz clock for receiver detect and offset
cancellation in PCIe mode. Channel
Table 1–73. Stratix IV GX and GT ALTGX Megafunction Ports: Transmitter Ports (Part 3 of 3)
Port Name Input/
Output Clock Domain Description Scope
Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices 1–213
Transceiver Port Lists
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Table 1–74 lists the ALTGX megafunction receiver ports.
Table 1–74. Stratix IV GX and GT ALTGX Megafunction Ports: Receiver Ports (Part 1 of 7)
Port Name Input/
Output Clock Domain Description Scope
rx_syncstatus
Output
Synchronous to
rx_clkout or
coreclkout
.
rx_clkout
for
non-bonded
modes.
coreclkout
for
bonded modes
Word alignment synchronization status
indicator.
■Automatic synchronization state machine
mode—this signal is driven high if the
conditions required to remain in
synchronization are met. Driven low if the
conditions required to lose synchronization
are met.
■Manual alignment mode—the behavior of
this signal depends on whether the
transceiver is configured in single-width or
double-width mode.
■Bit-Slip mode—not available.
For more information, refer to “Word Aligner in
Single-Width Mode” on page 1–60 and “Word
Aligner in Double-Width Mode” on page 1–66.
■Channel width:
8/10—
rx_syncstatus
= 1
16/20—
rx_syncstatus
= 2 32/40—
rx_syncstatus
= 4
Channel
rx_bitslip
Input
Asynchronous
signal. Minimum
pulse width is two
parallel clock
cycles.
Bit-slip control for the word aligner configured
in bit-slip mode.
At every rising edge, word aligner slips one bit
into the received data stream, effectively
shifting the word boundary by one bit.
Channel
rx_ala2size
Input
Asynchronous
Signal. Minimum
pulse width is two
parallel clock
cycles.
Available only in SONET OC-12 and OC-48
modes. Select between these options:
■0 = 16-bit A1A2
■1 = 32-bit A1A1A2A2
Channel
rx_rlv
Output
Asynchronous
signal. Driven for
a minimum of two
recovered clock
cycles in
configurations
without byte
serializer and a
minimum of three
recovered clock
cycles in
configurations
with byte
serializer.
Run-length violation indicator.
A high pulse is driven when the number of
consecutive 1s or 0s in the received data
stream exceeds the programmed run length
violation threshold.
Channel
1–214 Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Port Lists
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
rx_invpolarity
Input
Asynchronous
Signal. Minimum
pulse width is two
parallel clock
cycles.
Generic receiver polarity inversion control.
Useful feature for correcting situations where
the positive and negative signals of the
differential serial link are accidentally swapped
during board layout.
■When asserted high in single-width
modes—the polarity of every bit of the 8-bit
or 10-bit input data word to the word aligner
gets inverted.
■When asserted high in double-width
modes—the polarity of every bit of the
16-bit or 20-bit input data to the word
aligner gets inverted.
Channel
rx_revbitorderwa
Input
Asynchronous
Signal. Minimum
pulse width is two
parallel clock
cycles.
Receiver bit reversal control. This is a useful
feature where the link transmission order is
MSB to LSB.
■Available only in Basic single-width and
double-width modes with the word aligner
configured in bit-slip mode.
■When asserted high in Basic single-width
modes—the 8-bit or 10-bit data
D[7:0]
or
D[9:0]
at the output of the word aligner
gets rewired to
D[0:7]
or
D[0:9]
,
respectively.
■When asserted high in Basic double-width
modes—the 16-bit or 20-bit data
D[15:0]
or
D[19:0]
at the output of the word aligner
gets rewired to
D[0:15]
or
D[0:19]
,
respectively.
Channel
rx_revbyteorderwa
Input
Asynchronous
Signal. Minimum
pulse width is two
parallel clock
cycles.
Receiver byte reversal control. This is a useful
feature in situations where the MSByte and
LSByte of the transmitted data are erroneously
swapped.
■Available only in Basic double-width mode.
■When asserted high, the MSByte and LSByte
of the 16- and 20-bit data at the output of the
word aligner get swapped.
Channel
Table 1–74. Stratix IV GX and GT ALTGX Megafunction Ports: Receiver Ports (Part 2 of 7)
Port Name Input/
Output Clock Domain Description Scope
Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices 1–215
Transceiver Port Lists
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Deskew FIFO
rx_channelaligned
Output
Synchronous to
coreclkout
clock signal
XAUI deskew FIFO channel aligned indicator.
■Available only in XAUI mode.
■A high level—the XAUI deskew state
machine is either in
ALIGN_ACQUIRED_1
,
ALIGN_ACQUIRED_2
,
ALIGN_ACQUIRED_3
,
or
ALIGN_ACQUIRED_4
state, as specified in
the PCS deskew state diagram in the IEEE
P802.3ae specification.
■A low level—the XAUI deskew state machine
is either in
LOSS_OF_ALIGNMENT
,
ALIGN_DETECT_1
,
ALIGN_DETECT_2
, or
ALIGN_DETECT_3
state, as specified in the
PCS deskew state diagram in the IEEE
P802.3ae specification.
Transceiver
block
Rate Match (Clock Rate Compensation) FIFO
rx_
rmfifodatainserted
Output
Synchronous to
rx_clkout or
coreclkout
.
rx_clkout
for
non-bonded
modes.
coreclkout
for
bonded modes.
Rate match FIFO insertion status indicator.
■A high level—the rate match pattern byte
has inserted to compensate for the PPM
difference in reference clock frequencies
between the upstream transmitter and the
local receiver.
Channel
rx_rmfifodatadeleted
Output
Synchronous to
rx_clkout or
coreclkout
.
rx_clkout
for
non-bonded
modes.
coreclkout
for
bonded modes
Rate match FIFO deletion status indicator.
■A high level—the rate match pattern byte got
deleted to compensate for the PPM
difference in reference clock frequencies
between the upstream transmitter and the
local receiver.
Channel
rx_rmfifofull
Output
Synchronous to
rx_clkout or
coreclkout
.
rx_clkout
for
non-bonded
modes.
coreclkout
for
bonded modes
Rate match FIFO full status indicator.
■A high level indicates that the rate match
FIFO is full.
■Without byte serializer —driven a minimum
of two recovered clock cycles.
■With byte serializer—driven a minimum of
three recovered clock cycles.
Channel
rx_rmfifoempty
Output
Synchronous to
rx_clkout or
coreclkout
.
rx_clkout
for
non-bonded
modes.
coreclkout
for
bonded modes
Rate match FIFO empty status indicator.
■A high level—the rate match FIFO is empty.
■Without byte serializer—driven a minimum
of two recovered clock cycles.
■With byte serializer—driven a minimum of
three recovered clock cycles.
Channel
Table 1–74. Stratix IV GX and GT ALTGX Megafunction Ports: Receiver Ports (Part 3 of 7)
Port Name Input/
Output Clock Domain Description Scope
1–216 Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Port Lists
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
8B/10B Decoder
rx_ctrldetect
Output
Synchronous to
rx_clkout
,
tx_clkout
, and
coreclkout
clock signals
Receiver control code indicator.
■Available in configurations with 8B/10B
decoder.
■A high level—the associated received code
group is a control (/Kx.y/) code group.
■A low level—the associated received code
group is a data (/Dx.y/) code group.
■The width of this signal depends on the
following channel width:
Channel Width:
8—
rx_ctrldetect
= 1
16—
rx_ctrldetect
= 2
32—
rx_ctrldetect
= 4
Channel
rx_errdetect
Output
Synchronous to
rx_clkout or
coreclkout
.
rx_clkout
for
non-bonded
modes.
coreclkout
for
bonded modes
8B/10B code group violation or disparity error
indicator.
■Available in configurations with 8B/10B
decoder.
■A high level—a code group violation or
disparity error was detected on the
associated received code group. Use with
the
rx_disperr
signal to differentiate
between a code group violation and/or a
disparity error as follows:
■
[rx_errdetect:
rx_disperr
]
■2’b00—no error
■2’b10—code group violation
■2’b11—disparity error or both
■Channel Width:
8—
rx_errdetect
= 1
16—
rx_errdetect
= 2
32—
rx_errdetect
= 4
Channel
rx_disperr
Output
Synchronous to
rx_clkout or
coreclkout
.
rx_clkout
for
non-bonded
modes.
coreclkout
for
bonded modes
8B/10B disparity error indicator port.
■Available in configurations with 8B/10B
decoder.
■A high level—a disparity error was detected
on the associated received code group.
■Channel Width:
8—
rx_disperr
= 1
16—
rx_disperr
= 2
32—
rx_disperr
= 4
Channel
Table 1–74. Stratix IV GX and GT ALTGX Megafunction Ports: Receiver Ports (Part 4 of 7)
Port Name Input/
Output Clock Domain Description Scope
Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices 1–217
Transceiver Port Lists
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
rx_runningdisp
Output
Synchronous to
rx_clkout or
coreclkout
.
rx_clkout
for
non-bonded
modes.
coreclkout
for
bonded modes
8B/10B running disparity indicator.
■Available in configurations with the 8B/10B
decoder.
■A high level—the data on the
rx_dataout
port was received with a negative running
disparity.
■A low level—the data on the
rx_dataout
port was received with a positive running
disparity.
■Channel Width:
8—
rx_runningdisp
= 1
16—
rx_runningdisp
= 2
32—
rx_runningdisp
= 4
Channel
Byte Ordering Block
rx_enabyteord
Input Asynchronous
signal
Enable byte ordering control.
■Available in configurations with the byte
ordering block enabled. The byte ordering
block is rising-edge sensitive to this signal.
■A low-to-high transition triggers the byte
ordering block to restart the byte ordering
operation.
Channel
rx_
byteorderalignstatus
Output
Synchronous to
rx_clkout or
coreclkout
.
rx_clkout
for
non-bonded
modes.
coreclkout
for
bonded modes
Byte ordering status indicator.
■Available in configurations with the byte
ordering block enabled.
■A high level—the byte ordering block has
detected the programmed byte ordering
pattern in the LSByte of the received data
from the byte deserializer.
Channel
Receiver Phase Compensation FIFO
rx_dataout
Output
Synchronous to
rx_clkout or
coreclkout
.
rx_clkout
for
non-bonded
modes.
coreclkout
for
bonded modes
Parallel data output from the receiver to the
FPGA fabric.
■The bus width depends on the channel width
multiplied by the number of channels per
instance.
Channel
rx_clkout
Output Clock signal
Recovered clock from the receiver channel.
■Available only when the rate match FIFO is
not used in the receiver datapath.
Channel
Table 1–74. Stratix IV GX and GT ALTGX Megafunction Ports: Receiver Ports (Part 5 of 7)
Port Name Input/
Output Clock Domain Description Scope
1–218 Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Port Lists
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
rx_coreclk
Input Clock signal
Optional read clock port for the receiver phase
compensation FIFO.
■If not selected—the Quartus II software
automatically selects
rx_clkout/tx_clkout/
coreclkout
as the read clock for the
receiver phase compensation FIFO.
■If selected—drive this port with a clock that
has 0 PPM difference with respect to
rx_clkout/tx_clkout/
coreclkout
.
Channel
rx_phase_comp_fifo_
error
Output
Synchronous to
tx_clkout
or
coreclkout
.
tx_clkout
for
non-bonded
modes.
coreclkout
for
bonded modes.
Receiver phase compensation FIFO full or
empty indicator.
■A high level—the receiver phase
compensation FIFO is either full or empty.
Channel
Receiver Physical Media Attachment (PMA)
rx_datain
Input N/A Receiver serial data input port. Channel
rx_cruclk
Input Clock signal Input reference clock for the receiver clock and
data recovery. Channel
rx_pll_locked
Output Asynchronous
signal
Receiver CDR lock-to-reference indicator.
■A high level—the receiver CDR is locked to
the input reference clock.
■A low level—the receiver CDR is not locked
to the input reference clock.
Channel
rx_freqlocked
Output Asynchronous
signal
Receiver CDR lock mode indicator.
■A high level—the receiver CDR is in
lock-to-data mode.
■A low level—the receiver CDR is in
lock-to-reference mode.
Channel
rx_locktodata
Input Asynchronous
signal
Receiver CDR lock-to-data mode control signal.
■When asserted high—the receiver CDR is
forced to lock-to-data mode.
■When de-asserted low—the receiver CDR
lock mode depends on the
rx_locktorefclk
signal level.
Channel
Table 1–74. Stratix IV GX and GT ALTGX Megafunction Ports: Receiver Ports (Part 6 of 7)
Port Name Input/
Output Clock Domain Description Scope
Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices 1–219
Transceiver Port Lists
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Table 1–75 lists the ALTGX megafunction CMU ports.
rx_locktorefclk
Input Asynchronous
signal
Receiver CDR lock-to-reference mode control
signal.
The
rx_locktorefclk
signal, along with the
rx_locktodata
signal, controls whether the
receiver CDR is in automatic (0/0),
lock-to-reference (0/1), or lock-to-data (1/x)
mode.
Channel
rx_signaldetect
Output Asynchronous
signal
Signal threshold detect indicator.
■Available in Basic functional mode when the
8B/10B Encoder/Decoder is selected.
■Available in PCIe mode.
■A high level—that the signal present at the
receiver input buffer is above the
programmed signal detection threshold
value.
■If the electrical idle inference block is
disabled in PCIe mode, the
rx_signaldetect
signal is inverted and
driven on the
pipeelecidle
port.
Channel
rx_seriallpbken
Input Asynchronous
signal
Serial loopback control port.
■0–normal datapath, no serial loopback
■1–serial loopback
Channel
Table 1–74. Stratix IV GX and GT ALTGX Megafunction Ports: Receiver Ports (Part 7 of 7)
Port Name Input/
Output Clock Domain Description Scope
Table 1–75. Stratix IV GX and GT ALTGX Megafunction Ports: CMU (Part 1 of 2)
Port Name Input/
Output Clock Domain Description Scope
pll_inclk
Input Clock signal Input reference clock for the CMU phase-locked
loop.
Transceiver
block
pll_locked
Output Asynchronous
signal
CMU PLL lock indicator.
■A high level—the CMU PLL is locked to the
input reference clock.
■A low level—the CMU PLL is not locked to the
input reference clock.
Transceiver
block
1–220 Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Port Lists
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Table 1–76 lists the ALTGX megafunction dynamic reconfiguration ports.
pll_powerdown
Input
Asynchronous
signal.
For minimum
pulse width
requirements,
refer the device
DC and Switching
Characteristics
chapter.
CMU PLL power down.
■Asserted high—the CMU PLL is powered
down.
■De-asserted low—the CMU PLL is active and
locks to the input reference clock.
Note: Asserting the
pll_powerdown
signal does
not power down the REFCLK buffers.
Transceiver
block
coreclkout
Output Clock signal
FPGA fabric-transceiver interface clock.
■Generated by the
CMU0
clock divider in the
transceiver block in ×4 bonded channel
configurations.
■Generated by the
CMU0
clock divider in the
master transceiver block in ×8 bonded channel
configurations.
■Not available in non-bonded channel
configurations.
■Use to clock the write port of the transmitter
phase compensation FIFOs in all bonded
channels and to clock parallel data
tx_datain
from the FPGA fabric into the transmitter
phase compensation FIFO of all bonded
channels.
■Use to clock the read port of the receiver
phase compensation FIFOs in all bonded
channels with rate match FIFO enabled and to
clock parallel data
rx_dataout
from the
receiver phase compensation FIFOs of all
bonded channels (with rate match FIFO
enabled) into the FPGA fabric.
Transceiver
block
Table 1–75. Stratix IV GX and GT ALTGX Megafunction Ports: CMU (Part 2 of 2)
Port Name Input/
Output Clock Domain Description Scope
Table 1–76. Stratix IV GX and GT ALTGX Megafunction Ports: Dynamic Reconfiguration (Part 1 of 2)
Port Name Input/
Output Clock Domain Description Scope
reconfig_clk Input Clock signal
Dynamic reconfiguration clock.
■Also used for offset cancellation in all modes
except PCIe mode.
■If configured in Transmitter only mode—the
frequency range is 2.5 MHz to 50 MHz.
■If configured in Receiver only or Receiver
and Transceiver mode—the frequency
range of this clock is 37.5 MHz to 50 MHz.
Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices 1–221
Transceiver Port Lists
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Table 1–77 lists the ALTGX megafunction PCIe interface ports.
reconfig_togxb Input Asynchronous
signal From the dynamic reconfiguration controller.
reconfig_fromgxb Output Asynchronous
signal To the dynamic reconfiguration controller.
Table 1–76. Stratix IV GX and GT ALTGX Megafunction Ports: Dynamic Reconfiguration (Part 2 of 2)
Port Name Input/
Output Clock Domain Description Scope
Table 1–77. Stratix IV GX and GT ALTGX Megafunction Ports: PCIe Interface (Part 1 of 4)
Port Name Input/
Output Clock Domain Description Scope
PCIe Interface (Available only in PCIe functional Mode)
powerdn
Input Asynchronous
signal
PCIe power state control.
■Functionally equivalent to the
powerdown[1:0]
signal defined in the PCIe specification revision
2.0.
■The width of this signal is 2 bits and is encoded
as follows:
■2'b00: P0—Normal Operation
■2'b01: P0s—Low Recovery Time Latency,
Low Power State
■2'b10: P1—Longer Recovery Time Latency,
Lower Power State
■2'b11: P2—Lowest Power State
Channel
tx_
forcedispcompliance
Input Asynchronous
signal
Force 8B/10B encoder to encode with a negative
running disparity.
■Functionally equivalent to the
txcompliance
signal defined in PCIe specification revision 2.0.
■Must be asserted high only when transmitting
the first byte of the PCIe compliance pattern to
force the 8B/10B encode with a negative running
disparity as required by the PCIe protocol.
Channel
tx_forceelecidle
Input Asynchronous
signal
Force transmitter buffer to PCIe electrical idle
signal levels.
■Functionally equivalent to the
txelecidle
signal defined in the PCIe specification revision
2.0.
■Available in the Basic mode.
Channel
rateswitch
Input Asynchronous
signal
PCIe rateswitch control.
■1’b0—Gen1 (2.5 Gbps)
■1’b1—Gen2 (5 Gbps)
1–222 Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Port Lists
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
tx_pipemargin
Input Asynchronous
signal
Transmitter differential output voltage level control.
■Functionally equivalent to the
txmargin
signal
defined in the PCIe specification revision 2.0.
■Available only in PCIe Gen2 configuration.
■The width of this signal is 3 bits and is decoded
as follows:
■3’b000—Normal Operating Range
■3’b001—Full Swing = 800 - 1200 mV
■3’b010—TBD
■3’b011—TBD
■3’b100—If last value, full Swing = 200 to 400
mV
■3’b101—If last value, full Swing = 200 to 400
mV
■3’b110—If last value, full Swing = 200 to 400
mV
■3’b111—If last value, full Swing = 200 to 400
mV
tx_pipedeemph
Input Asynchronous
signal
Transmitter buffer de-emphasis level control.
■Functionally equivalent to the
txdeemph
signal
defined in the PCIe specification revision 2.0.
■Available only in PCIe Gen2 configuration.
■1’b0: -6 dB de-emphasis
■1’b1:-3.5 dB de-emphasis
pipe8b10binvpolarity
Input Asynchronous
signal
PCIe polarity inversion control.
■Functionally equivalent to the
rxpolarity
signal defined in the PCIe specification revision
2.0.
■Available only in PCIe mode.
■When asserted high—the polarity of every bit of
the 10-bit input data to the 8B/10B decoder gets
inverted.
Channel
Table 1–77. Stratix IV GX and GT ALTGX Megafunction Ports: PCIe Interface (Part 2 of 4)
Port Name Input/
Output Clock Domain Description Scope
Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices 1–223
Transceiver Port Lists
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
tx_detectrxloopback
Input Asynchronous
signal
Receiver detect or PCIe loopback control.
■Functionally equivalent to the
txdetectrx/loopback
signal defined in the
PCIe specification revision 2.0.
■When asserted high in the P1 power state with
the
tx_forceelecidle
signal asserted—the
transmitter buffer begins the receiver detection
operation. After the receiver detect completion
is indicated on the
pipephydonestatus
port,
this signal must be de-asserted.
■When asserted high in the P0 power state with
the
tx_forceelecidle
signal de-asserted—
the transceiver datapath gets dynamically
configured to support parallel loopback, as
described in “PCIe Reverse Parallel Loopback”
on page 1–194.
Channel
pipestatus
Output N/A
PCIe receiver status port.
■Functionally equivalent to the
rxstatus[2:0]
signal defined in the PCIe specification revision
2.0.
■Synchronized with
tx_clock
.
■The width of this signal is 3 bits per channel.
The encoding of receiver status on the
pipestatus
port is as follows:
■000—Received data OK
■001—1 skip added
■010—1 skip removed
■011—Receiver detected
■100—8B/10B decoder error
■101—Elastic buffer overflow
■110—Elastic buffer underflow
■111—Received disparity error
Channel
pipephydonestatus
Output N/A
PHY function completion indicator.
■Functionally equivalent to the
phystatus
signal
defined in the PCIe specification revision 2.0.
■Assert this signal high for one parallel clock
cycle to communicate completion of several
PHY functions, such as power state transition,
receiver detection, and signaling rate change
between Gen1 (2.5 Gbps) and Gen2 (5 Gbps).
■Synchronized with
tx_clkout
.
Channel
Table 1–77. Stratix IV GX and GT ALTGX Megafunction Ports: PCIe Interface (Part 3 of 4)
Port Name Input/
Output Clock Domain Description Scope
1–224 Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Port Lists
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Table 1–78 lists the ALTGX megafunction reset and power down ports.
rx_pipedatavalid
Output N/A
Valid data and control on the
rx_dataout
and
rx_ctrldetect
ports indicator.
■Functionally equivalent to the
rxvalid
signal
defined in the PCIe specification revision 2.0.
Channel
pipeelecidle
Output Asynchronous
signal
Electrical idle detected or inferred at the receiver
indicator.
■Functionally equivalent to the
rxelecidle
signal defined in the PCIe specification revision
2.0.
■If the electrical idle inference block is enabled—
it drives this signal high when it infers an
electrical idle condition, as described in
“Electrical Idle Inference” on page 1–138.
Otherwise, it drives this signal low.
■If the electrical idle inference block is disabled—
the
rx_signaldetect
signal from the signal
detect circuitry in the receiver buffer is inverted
and driven on this port.
Channel
Table 1–77. Stratix IV GX and GT ALTGX Megafunction Ports: PCIe Interface (Part 4 of 4)
Port Name Input/
Output Clock Domain Description Scope
Table 1–78. Stratix IV GX and GT ALTGX Megafunction Ports: Reset and Power Down (Part 1 of 2)
Port Name Input/
Output Clock Domain Description Scope
gxb_powerdown
Input
Asynchronous
signal.
For minimum
pulse width
requirements,
refer the device
DC and
Switching
Characteristics
chapter.
Transceiver block power down.
■When asserted high—all digital and analog
circuitry within the PCS, PMA, CMU channels, and
the CCU of the transceiver block, is powered down.
■Asserting the
gxb_powerdown
signal does not
power down the REFCLK buffers.
Transceiver
block
rx_digitalreset
Input
Asynchronous
signal.
Minimum
pulse width is
two parallel
clock cycles.
Receiver PCS reset.
■When asserted high—the receiver PCS blocks are
reset. Refer to Reset Control and Power Down.
Channel
Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices 1–225
Reference Information
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Table 1–79 lists the ALTGX megafunction calibration block ports.
Reference Information
Use the links listed in Table 1–80 for more information about some useful reference
terms used in this chapter.
rx_analogreset
Input
Asynchronous
signal.
Minimum
pulse width is
two parallel
clock cycles.
Receiver PMA reset.
■When asserted high—analog circuitry within the
receiver PMA gets reset. Refer to Reset Control and
Power Down.
Channel
tx_digitalreset
Input
Asynchronous
signal.
Minimum
pulse width is
two parallel
clock cycles.
Transmitter PCS reset.
■When asserted high, the transmitter PCS blocks
are reset. Refer to Reset Control and Power Down.
Channel
Table 1–78. Stratix IV GX and GT ALTGX Megafunction Ports: Reset and Power Down (Part 2 of 2)
Port Name Input/
Output Clock Domain Description Scope
Table 1–79. Stratix IV GX and GT ALTGX Megafunction Ports: Calibration Block
Port Name Input/
Output Clock Domain Description Scope
cal_blk_clk
Input Clock signal Clock for transceiver calibration blocks. Device
cal_blk_powerdown
Input Clock signal Calibration block power down control. Device
Table 1–80. Reference Information (Part 1 of 3)
Terms Used in this Chapter Useful Reference Points
(OIF) CEI PHY Interface Mode page 1–181
8B/10B Decoder page 1–89
8B/10B Encoder page 1–23
AEQ page 1–50
Auxiliary Transmit (ATX) PLL Block page 1–195
Basic (PMA Direct) Functional Mode page 1–187
Basic Functional Mode page 1–111
Built-In Self Test Modes page 1–207
Byte Ordering Block page 1–95
Byte Serializer page 1–94
Calibration Blocks page 1–201
Clock and Data Recovery Unit (CDR) page 1–53
CMU Channel Architecture page 1–100
CMU0 PLL page 1–102
CMU1 PLL page 1–102
1–226 Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Reference Information
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
CPRI and OBSAI page 1–124
Deserializer page 1–58
Deskew FIFO page 1–75
Deterministic Latency Mode page 1–122
EyeQ page 1–51
GIGE Mode page 1–164
Lock-to-Data (LTD) page 1–54
Lock-to-Reference (LTR) page 1–53
Low Latency PCS Datapath page 1–112
Offset Cancellation in the Receiver Buffer and
Receiver CDR page 1–56
Parallel loopback page 1–191
PCIe Clock Switch Circuitry page 1–55
PCIe Mode page 1–127
PCIe Reverse Parallel Loopback page 1–194
Programmable Common Mode Voltage page 1–40
Programmable Equalization and DC Gain page 1–49
Programmable Pre-Emphasis page 1–36
Programmable Differential On-Chip Termination page 1–42
Rate Match (Clock Rate Compensation) FIFO page 1–77
Receiver Bit Reversal page 1–73
Receiver Input Buffer page 1–40
Receiver Phase Compensation FIFO page 1–98
Receiver Polarity Inversion page 1–71
Reverse Serial Loopback page 1–193
Reverse serial Pre-CDR Loopback page 1–194
SATA and SAS options page 1–121
SDI Mode page 1–178
Serial Loopback page 1–190
Serial RapidIO Mode page 1–182
Signal Threshold Detection Circuitry page 1–49
SONET/SDH Mode page 1–172
Transceiver Block Architecture page 1–16
Transceiver Channel Locations page 1–4
Transceiver Port Lists page 1–210
Transmitter Bit Reversal page 1–31
Transmitter Local Clock Divider Block page 1–39
Transmitter Output Buffer page 1–34
Transmitter Polarity Inversion page 1–29
TX Phase Compensation FIFO page 1–19
Table 1–80. Reference Information (Part 2 of 3)
Terms Used in this Chapter Useful Reference Points
Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices 1–227
Reference Information
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Document Revision History
Table 1–81 lists the revision history for this chapter.
Word Aligner page 1–59
XAUI Mode page 1–153
Table 1–80. Reference Information (Part 3 of 3)
Terms Used in this Chapter Useful Reference Points
Table 1–81. Document Revision History (Part 1 of 2)
Date Version Changes
September 2015 4.7 ■Updated Figure 1–2.
January 2014 4.6
■Updated Figure 1–22, Figure 1–36, and Figure 1–105.
■Updated introduction to Table 1–57.
■Updated the “GIGE Mode”, “Rate Match FIFO”, and “Rate Match FIFO in Basic Double-
Width Mode” sections.
September 2012 4.5
■Updated Figure 1–1, Figure 1–4, Figure 1–14, Figure 1–87, and Figure 1–89 to close
FB #65098.
■Updated Figure 1–45 to match Stratix V CDR Unit (to close FB #65098).
■Updated Note 1 of Figure 1–101 to close FB #31792.
■Updated Table 1–73 to close FB #53976.
■Updated the “Reverse Serial Loopback” section to close FB #44323.
December 2011 4.4
■Updated Figure 1–9, Figure 1–10, Figure 1–112, and Figure 1–172.
■Updated Table 1–5 and Table 1–17.
■Updated the “Compliance Pattern Transmission Support” and “PCIe Cold Reset
Requirements” sections.
June 2011 4.3 ■Added military speed grade to Table 1–68.
February 2011 4.2
■Applied new template.
■Updated the “Overview”, “Transceiver Block Architecture”, “DC-Coupled Links”, “Link
Coupling for Stratix IV GX and GT Devices”, “Configuring CMU Channels for Clock
Generation”, “Configuring CMU Channels as Transceiver Channels”, “Offset Cancellation
in the Receiver Buffer and Receiver CDR”, “Modes of Operation of the AEQ”,
“Word-Alignment-Based Byte Ordering”, “SATA and SAS Options”, “GIGE Mode”.
“Loopback Modes”, “Reverse Serial Loopback”, “Input Signals to the Calibration Block”,
and “PCI Express Electrical Gold Test with Compliance Base Board (CBB)” sections.
■Updated Figure 1–1, Figure 1–2, Figure 1–3, Figure 1–4, Figure 1–5, Figure 1–6,
Figure 1–7, Figure 1–8, Figure 1–9, Figure 1–10, Figure 1–11, Figure 1–56, Figure 1–57,
Figure 1–64, Figure 1–76, Figure 1–83, Figure 1–84,Figure 1–95, Figure 1–69,
Figure 1–97, Figure 1–99, Figure 1–100, Figure 1–101, Figure 1–105, Figure 1–111,
Figure 1–112, and Figure 1–157.
■Updated Table 1–2, Table 1–3, Table 1–4, Table 1–5, Table 1–13, Table 1–14, Table 1–16,
Table 1–17, Table 1–18, Table 1–19, Table 1–21, Table 1–23, Table 1–24, Table 1–41,
Table 1–43, Table 1–45, Table 1–68, Table 1–70, Table 1–74, and Table 1–77.
■Updated chapter title.
■Applied new template.
■Minor text edits.
1–228 Chapter 1: Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
Reference Information
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
March 2010 4.1
■Added two references to the beginning of the chapter.
■Updated the “Configuring CMU Channels for Clock Generation” section.
■Updated Figure 1–101.
■Minor text edits.
November 2009 4.0
■Added “Adaptive Equalization (AEQ)”, “EyeQ”, “SATA and SAS Options”, “Deterministic
Latency Mode”, “CPRI and OBSAI”, and “Reference Information” sections.
■Added Figure 1–91, Figure 1–93, Figure 1–95, and Figure 1–97.
■Added Stratix IV GT device information.
■Updated Figures.
■Updated Tables.
■Re-organized chapter information.
■Minor text edits.
June 2009 3.1
■Updated the “Introduction”, “Auxiliary Transmit (ATX) PLL Block”, “Rate Match (Clock
Rate Compensation) FIFO”, “Transmitter Buffer Electrical Idle”, “PCIe Gen2 (5 Gbps)
Support”, “Reverse Serial Loopback”, and “Reverse Serial Pre-CDR Loopback” sections.
■Added new “PCI Express Electrical Gold Test with Compliance Base Board (CBB)”,
“Recommendation When Using the Electrical Idle Inference Block”. and “Rate Match FIFO
in Serial RapidIO Mode” sections.
■Added new Figure 1–165.
■Updated Table 1–2, Table 1–17, Table 1–32, Table 1–34, and Table 1–52.
■Updated Figure 1–7, and Figure 1–165 through Figure 1–168.
■Minor text edits.
March 2009 3.0
■Reorganized sections.
■Added the section “Link Coupling”.
■Updated the section “DC-Coupled Links”.
November 2008 2.0 Added Offset Cancellation in the Receiver Buffer and Receiver CDR to the Receiver Channel
Datapath section
May 2008 1.0 Initial release.
Table 1–81. Document Revision History (Part 2 of 2)
Date Version Changes
SIV52002-3.4
© 2012 Altera Corporation. All rights reserved. ALTERA, ARRIA, CYCLONE, HARDCOPY, MAX, MEGACORE, NIOS, QUARTUS and STRATIX words and logos
are trademarks of Altera Corporation and registered in the U.S. Patent and Trademark Office and in other countries. All other words and logos identified as
trademarks or service marks are the property of their respective holders as described at www.altera.com/common/legal.html. Altera warrants performance of its
semiconductor products to current specifications in accordance with Altera's standard warranty, but reserves the right to make changes to any products and
services at any time without notice. Altera assumes no responsibility or liability arising out of the application or use of any information, product, or service
described herein except as expressly agreed to in writing by Altera. Altera customers are advised to obtain the latest version of device specifications before relying
on any published information and before placing orders for products or services.
Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
September 2012
Feedback Subscribe
ISO
9001:2008
Registered
2. Transceiver Clocking in Stratix IV
Devices
This chapter provides detailed information about the Stratix®IV transceiver clocking
architecture. For this chapter, the term “Stratix IV devices” includes both
Stratix IV GX and GT devices. Similarly, the term “Stratix IV transceivers” includes
both Stratix IV GX and GT transceivers.
The clocking architecture chapter is divided into three main sections:
■“Input Reference Clocking” on page 2–2—describes how the reference clock is
provided to the clock multiplier unit (CMU)/auxiliary transmit phase-locked loop
(ATX PLL) to generate the clocks required for transceiver operation.
■“Transceiver Channel Datapath Clocking” on page 2–20—describes the clocking
architecture internal to the transceiver block.
■“FPGA Fabric-Transceiver Interface Clocking” on page 2–51—describes the
clocking options available when interfacing the transceiver with the FPGA fabric.
Other sections in this chapter include:
■“FPGA Fabric PLLs-Transceiver PLLs Cascading” on page 2–9
■“Using the CMU/ATX PLL for Clocking User Logic in the FPGA Fabric” on
page 2–71
■“Configuration Examples” on page 2–72
Figure 2–1 shows an overview of the clocking architecture.
Figure 2–1. Clocking Architecture Overview
CMU/ATX PLL
or CDR
Transceiver Channels
Input Reference Clocks
Transceiver Channel Datapath Clocks
FPGA Fabric-Transciever
Interface Clocks
Transceivers
FPGA
Fabric
September 2012
SIV52002-3.4
2–2 Chapter 2: Transceiver Clocking in Stratix IV Devices
Glossary of Terms
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Glossary of Terms
Table 2–1 lists the terms used in the chapter.
Input Reference Clocking
Each transceiver block has:
■Two clock multiplier unit channels—the
CMU0_Channel
and
CMU1_Channel
You can configure each as either a CMU to generate transceiver clocks or as a
PMA-Only channel.
fFor more information, refer to the “CMU Channel Architecture” section in
the Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices chapter.
■Four regular channels
When the CMU channel is configured as a CMU, the CMU PLL synthesizes the
input reference clock to generate the high-speed serial transceiver clock. When the
CMU channel is configured as a Receiver Only or Receiver and Transmitter
channel, the CMU PLL acts as a CDR and uses the input reference clock as a
training clock when it is in lock-to-reference (LTR) mode. Each of the four regular
channels also has a receiver CDR that uses the input reference clock as a training
clock when it is in LTR mode.
Each Stratix IV device also has ATX PLLs that you can use in addition to the CMU
PLLs to generate the high-speed serial transceiver clock. The ATX PLLs also need
an input reference clock for operation. 6G ATX PLLs are available in both
Stratix IV GX and Stratix IV GT devices. 10G ATX PLLs are available only in
Stratix IV GT devices.
fFor more information, refer to the “Auxiliary Transmit (ATX) PLL Block”
and the “Transmitter Channel Datapath” sections in the Transceiver
Architecture in Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Table 2–1. Glossary of Terms Used in this chapter
Convention Description
ATX PLL Auxiliary transmit PLL block. For more information, refer to the “Auxiliary Transmit (ATX) PLL
Block” section in the Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices chapter.
CDR Clock data recovery block. For more information, refer to the “Clock and Data Recovery Unit”
section in the Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices chapter.
CMU Clock multiplier unit. For more information, refer to “CMU Channel Architecture” section in the
Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices chapter.
ITB lines
The Inter-Transceiver block (ITB) clock lines provide an input reference clock path from the
refclk
pins of one transceiver block CMU PLLs and receiver CDRs of other transceiver blocks.
They also provide input reference clock to ATX PLLs. For more information, refer to “Inter-
Transceiver Block (ITB) Clock Lines” on page 2–8.
Chapter 2: Transceiver Clocking in Stratix IV Devices 2–3
Input Reference Clocking
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Input Reference Clock Source
Receiver clock data recoveries (CDRs), CMU PLLs (when the CMU channel is
configured as a CMU) and ATX PLLs can derive the input reference clock from one of
the sources listed in Table 2–2.
When a CMU channel is configured as a channel, its CMU PLL acts as a receiver CDR
and can derive the input reference clock sources 2 through 5 listed in the Table 2–2.
You can also use the
refclk
pin of the other CMU channel within the transceiver
block as a clock source as long as the other CMU channel is not configured as a
Receiver only or Receiver and Transmitter channel. For example, the
CMU0
PLL can
derive its input reference clock from the
refclk1
pin if the
CMU1
channel is not
configured as a Receiver only or Receiver and Transmitter channel.
1When a CMU channel is configured as a channel, its
refclk
pin is used to receive
serial input data. As a result, the
refclk
pin is not available to provide the input
reference clock.
Table 2–3 lists the input reference clock frequencies allowed for the 10G ATX PLL.
Table 2–2. Input Reference Clock Source
Index Clock Source CMU PLL 6G ATX PLL 10G ATX PLL CDR Jitter Performance
(4)
1
refclk0
and
refclk1
pins of the same
transceiver block Yes No (1) No (1) Yes 1
2
refclk0
and
refclk1
pins of other
transceiver blocks on the same side of
the device using the ITB clock lines (2)
Yes Yes Yes Yes 2 (3)
3
Clock output from the left and right PLLs
in the FPGA fabric with voltage
controlled oscillator (VCO) bypass mode
(5), (6)
Yes Yes No Yes 3
4Clock output from the left and right PLLs
in the FPGA fabric Yes Yes No Yes 4
5Dedicated CLK input pins on the FPGA
global clock network Yes Yes No Yes 4
Notes to Table 2–2:
(1) ATX PLLs do not have dedicated
refclk
pins.
(2) For more information, refer to “Inter-Transceiver Block (ITB) Clock Lines” on page 2–8.
(3) For better jitter performance, Altera strongly recommends using the
refclk0
and
refclk1
pins of the transceiver block located immediately
below the ATX PLL.
(4) Lowest number indicates best jitter performance.
(5) For more information, refer to “Configuration Examples” on page 2–72.
(6) When in VCO bypass mode, you can only divide the reference clock by the N integer. For more information, refer to “Left and Right, Left, or Right
PLL in VCO Bypass Mode” on page 2–17.
Table 2–3. Input Reference Clock Frequencies for the 10G ATX PLL Clock
Data Rate (Gbps) Allowed Divider Values Reference Clock Frequency
(MHz)
9.9 to 11.3 M = 16, N = 1 281.25 to 322
M = 16, N = 2 562.5 to 706.25
2–4 Chapter 2: Transceiver Clocking in Stratix IV Devices
Input Reference Clocking
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Figure 2–2 shows the input reference clock sources for CMU PLLs and receiver CDRs
within a transceiver block. One global clock line is available for each CMU PLL and
receiver CDR in a transceiver block. This allows each CMU PLL and receiver CDR to
derive its input reference clock from a separate FPGA CLK input pin.
Figure 2–2. Input Reference Clock Sources in a Transceiver Block
refclk0
refclk1
ITB Clock Lines
Global Clock Line
PLL Cascade Clock
ITB Clock Lines
Global Clock Line
PLL Cascade Clock
ITB Clock Lines
Global Clock Line
ITB Clock Lines
Global Clock Line
ITB Clock Lines
Global Clock Line
ITB Clock Lines
Global Clock Line
CDR
6
6CDR
6CMU0 PLL
CMU1 PLL
6
6CDR
6CDR
Transceiver Block
Channel 3
Channel 2
CMU1 Channel
CMU0 Channel
Channel 1
Channel 0
2
2
PLL Cascade Clock
PLL Cascade Clock
PLL Cascade Clock
PLL Cascade Clock
Chapter 2: Transceiver Clocking in Stratix IV Devices 2–5
Input Reference Clocking
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Figure 2–3 shows the input reference clock sources for CMU PLLs, ATX PLLs, and
receiver CDRs in four transceiver blocks on the right side of the EP4SGX530F45
device. In this figure, the input reference clock sources for four transceiver blocks are
located only on the right side of the device but the EP4SGX530NF45 device has similar
input reference clock resources available for the four transceiver blocks located on the
left side of the device as well.
Figure 2–3 also shows the ITB clock lines on the right side of the device. The number
of ITB clock lines available in any Stratix IV GX device is equal to the number of
refclk
pins available in that device.
Figure 2–3. Input Reference Clock Sources Across Transceiver Blocks
To FPGA Fabric
ITB[7:0]
8
6
6
refclk0
refclk0
refclk1
2
2
refclk1
2
2
refclk0
2
2
refclk1
6
refclk0
2
6
refclk1
2
Global Clock Line
PLL Cascade Clock
Transceiver Block GXBR3
Two CMU PLLs
and
Four RX CDRs
6
Transceiver Block GXBR2
Global Clock Line
PLL Cascade Clock
6
Transceiver Block GXBR1
Global Clock Line
PLL Cascade Clock
6
Transceiver Block GXBR0
Two CMU PLLs
and
Four RX CDRs
Global Clock Line
PLL Cascade Clock
6
ATX PLL R1 (6G)
8
ITB Clock Lines
Global Clock Line
PLL Cascade Clock
ATX PLL R0 (6G)
8
ITB Clock Lines
Global Clock Line
PLL Cascade Clock
Two CMU PLLs
and
Four RX CDRs
Two CMU PLLs
and
Four RX CDRs
2–6 Chapter 2: Transceiver Clocking in Stratix IV Devices
Input Reference Clocking
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Figure 2–4 shows the input reference clock sources for CMU PLLs, ATX PLLs, and
receiver CDRs in four transceiver blocks on the right side of the EP4S100G5F45
device. In this figure, the input reference clock sources for four transceiver blocks are
located only on the right side of the EP4S100G5F45 device but the device has similar
input reference clock resources available for the four transceiver blocks located on the
left side of the device as well.
Figure 2–4 also shows the ITB clock lines on the right side of the EP4S100G5F45
device. The number of ITB clock lines available in any Stratix IV GT device is equal to
the number of
refclk
pins available in that device.
Figure 2–4. Input Reference Clock Sources Across Transceiver Blocks for Stratix IV GT Devices
To FPGA Fabric
ITB[7:0]
8
6
6
refclk0
refclk0
refclk1
2
2
refclk1
2
2
refclk0
2
2
refclk1
6
refclk0
2
6
refclk1
2
Global Clock Line
PLL Cascade Clock
Transceiver Block GXBR3
Two CMU PLLs
and
Four RX CDRs
6
Transceiver Block GXBR2
Global Clock Line
PLL Cascade Clock
6
Transceiver Block GXBR1
Global Clock Line
PLL Cascade Clock
6
Transceiver Block GXBR0
Two CMU PLLs
and
Four RX CDRs
Global Clock Line
PLL Cascade Clock
6
ATX PLL R1 (6G)
8
ITB Clock Lines
ATX PLL R0 (6G)
8
ITB Clock Lines
Global Clock Line
PLL Cascade Clock
Two CMU PLLs
and
Four RX CDRs
Two CMU PLLs
and
Four RX CDRs
ATX PLL R2 (10G)
8
ITB Clock Lines
Global Clock Line
PLL Cascade Clock
Chapter 2: Transceiver Clocking in Stratix IV Devices 2–7
Input Reference Clocking
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
refclk0 and refclk1 Pins
Each transceiver block has two dedicated
refclk
pins that you can use to drive the
CMU PLL, receiver CDR, or both, input reference clocks. Each of the two CMU PLLs
and four receiver CDRs within a transceiver block can derive its input reference clock
from either the
refclk0
or
refclk1
pin.
1The
refclk
pins provide the cleanest input reference clock path to the
CMU/ATX PLLs when compared with other input reference clock sources. Altera
recommends using the
refclk
pins to drive the CMU PLL input reference clock for
improved transmitter output jitter performance.
Table 2–4 lists the electrical specifications for the input reference clock signal driven
on the
refclk
pins.
fFor specifications regarding the input frequency supported by the
refclk
pins, refer
to the DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices chapter.
1If you select the HCSL I/O standard for the PCIe reference clock, add the following
assignment to your project quartus settings file (.qsf):
set_instance_assignment -name INPUT_TERMINATION OFF -to <refclk_pin_name>
Table 2–4. Electrical Specifications for the Input Reference Clock
Protocol I/O Standard Coupling Termination
■GIGE
■XAUI
■Serial RapidIO®
■SONET/SDH
■SDI
■(OIF) CEI PHY Interface
■Basic
■1.2-V PCML, 1.4 PCML
■1.4-V PCML
■1.5-V PCML
■2.5-V PCML
■Differential LVPECL
■LVDS
AC On-chip (2)
PCI Express® (PCIe)
■1.2-V PCML, 1.4 PCML
■1.4-V PCML
■1.5-V PCML
■2.5-V PCML
■Differential LVPECL
■LVDS
AC On-chip (2)
■HCSL (1) DC Off-chip (3)
Notes to Table 2–4:
(1) In PCIe mode, you have the option of selecting the HCSL standard for the reference clock if compliance to the PCIe
protocol is required. You can select this I/O standard option only if you configured the transceiver in PCIe functional
mode. For more information, refer to Figure 2–5 on page 2–8.
(2) Termination values supported are the same as the Receiver pin differential on-chip termination resistors specified
in the DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices chapter.
(3) For an example termination scheme, refer to Figure 2–5 on page 2–8.
2–8 Chapter 2: Transceiver Clocking in Stratix IV Devices
Input Reference Clocking
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Figure 2–5 shows an example termination scheme for a reference clock signal when
configured as HCSL.
Inter-Transceiver Block (ITB) Clock Lines
The
refclk0
and
refclk1
pins of other transceiver blocks using the ITB clock lines
provide an input reference clock path from the
refclk
pins of one transceiver block to
the CMU PLLs and receiver CDRs of the other transceiver blocks. In designs that have
channels located in different transceiver blocks, the ITB clock lines eliminate the need
to connect the on-board reference clock crystal oscillator to the
refclk
pin of each
transceiver block. The ITB clock lines also drive the clock signal on the
refclk
pins to
the clock logic in the FPGA fabric.
The ITB clock lines also provide an input reference clock path from the
refclk
pins of
any transceiver block to the ATX PLLs located on the same side of the device.
Each
refclk
pin drives one ITB clock line for a total of up to eight ITB clock lines on
each of the right and left sides of the device, as shown in Figure 2–3 on page 2–5.
1The ITB clock lines provide input reference clock paths from the
refclk
pins of one
transceiver block to the CMU PLLs and receiver CDRs of other transceiver blocks
located on the same side of the device.
Dedicated CLK Input Pins on the FPGA Global Clock Network
Stratix IV devices provide up to eight differential clock input pins located in
non-transceiver I/O banks that you can use to provide up to eight input reference
clocks to the transceiver blocks. The Quartus®II software automatically chooses the
global clock network to route the input reference clock signal from the CLK pins to the
transceiver blocks.
fFor more information, refer to the “Dedicated Clock Input Pins” section in the Clock
Networks and PLLs in Stratix IV Devices chapter.
One global clock resource is available for each CMU PLL, 6G ATX PLL, and receiver
CDR. This allows each CMU PLL, 6G ATX PLL, and receiver CDR to derive its input
reference clock from a separate FPGA CLK input pin.
Figure 2–5. Termination Scheme for a Reference Clock Signal When Configured as HCSL (Note 1)
Notes to Figure 2–5:
(1) No biasing is required if the reference clock signals are generated from a clock source that conforms to the PCIe specification.
(2) Select resistor values as recommended by the PCIe clock source vendor.
PCI Express
(HCSL)
refclk
Source
refclk +
refclk -
Stratix IV
Rs
Rs
Rp =50 ΩRp =50 Ω
(2)
(2)
Chapter 2: Transceiver Clocking in Stratix IV Devices 2–9
FPGA Fabric PLLs-Transceiver PLLs Cascading
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Clock Output from Left and Right PLLs in the FPGA Fabric
You can use the synthesized clock output from one of the left or right PLLs to provide
the input reference clock to the CMU PLLs, 6G ATX PLLs, and receiver CDRs.
Stratix IV devices provide a dedicated clock path from the left PLLs (
PLL_L1
,
PLL_L2
,
PLL_L3
, and
PLL_L4
) in the FPGA fabric to the PLL cascade network located on the left
side of the device. Stratix IV devices also provide a dedicated clock path from the
right PLLs (
PLL_R1
,
PLL_R2
,
PLL_R3
, and
PLL_R4
) in the FPGA fabric to the PLL
cascade network located on the right side of the device. The additional clock
multiplication factors available in the left and right PLLs allow more options for
on-board crystal oscillator frequencies.
FPGA Fabric PLLs-Transceiver PLLs Cascading
The CMU PLL synthesizes the input reference clock to generate the high-speed serial
clock used in the transmitter PMA. The receiver CDR synthesizes the input reference
clock in lock-to-reference (LTR) mode to generate the high-speed serial clock.
This high-speed serial clock output from the CMU PLL and the receiver CDR runs at a
frequency that is half the configured data rate. The CMU PLLs and receiver CDRs
only support multiplication factors (M) of 2, 4, 5, 8, 10, 16, 20, and 25. If you use an
on-board crystal oscillator to provide the input reference clock through the dedicated
refclk
pins or ITB lines, the allowed crystal frequencies are limited by the CMU PLL
and the receiver CDR multiplication factors. The input reference clock frequencies are
also limited by the allowed phase frequency detector (PFD) frequency range.
Example 1: Channel Configuration with a 4 Gbps Data Rate
Consider a channel configured for a 4 Gbps data rate. The high-speed serial clock
output from the CMU PLL and the receiver CDR must run at 2 Gbps. Table 2–5 lists
the allowed input reference clock frequencies for Example 1.
For a 4 Gbps data rate, the Quartus II software only allows an input reference clock
frequency of 80, 100, 125, 160, 200, 250, 400, and 500 MHz. To overcome this limitation,
Stratix IV devices allow the synthesized clock output from the left and right PLLs in
the FPGA fabric to drive the CMU PLL and receiver CDR input reference clock. The
additional clock multiplication factors available in the left and right PLLs allow more
options for on-board crystal oscillator frequencies.
Table 2–5. Allowed Input Reference Clock Frequency for Example 1
Multiplication
Factor (M)
On-Board Crystal Reference Clock Frequency (MHz)
Allowed
With /N = 1 With /N = 2
2 1000 2000 No. Violates the PFD frequency limit.
4 500 1000 No. Violates the PFD frequency limit.
5 400 800 Yes but only for /N = 1.
8 250 500 Yes
10 200 400 Yes
16 125 250 Yes
20 100 200 Yes
25 80 160 Yes
2–10 Chapter 2: Transceiver Clocking in Stratix IV Devices
FPGA Fabric PLLs-Transceiver PLLs Cascading
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Dedicated Left and Right PLL Cascade Network
Stratix IV devices have a dedicated PLL cascade network on the left and right side of
the device that connects to the input reference clock selection multiplexer of the
CMU PLLs, 6G ATX PLLs, and receiver CDRs on the left and right side of the device,
respectively.
The dedicated PLL cascade networks are segmented by bidirectional tri-state buffers
located along the clock line. Segmentation of the dedicated PLL cascade network
allows two or more left and right PLLs to drive the cascade clock line simultaneously.
Because the number of left and right PLLs and transceiver blocks vary from device to
device, the capability of cascading a left and right PLL to the CMU PLLs, 6G ATX
PLLs, and receiver CDRs also varies from device to device.
The following sections describe the Stratix IV GX and GT FPGA fabric-Transceiver
PLLs cascading for the various device packages.
Chapter 2: Transceiver Clocking in Stratix IV Devices 2–11
FPGA Fabric PLLs-Transceiver PLLs Cascading
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
FPGA Fabric PLLs-Transceiver PLLs Cascading in the 780-Pin Package
Stratix IV GX devices in 780-pin packages do not support FPGA fabric
PLLs-transceiver PLLs cascading.
FPGA Fabric PLLs-Transceiver PLLs Cascading in the 1152-Pin Package
Figure 2–6 shows the FPGA fabric PLLs-Transceiver PLLs cascading options allowed
in the EP4SGX110FF35 device (red), the EP4SGX230FF35, EP4SGX290FF35 and
EP4SGX360FF35 devices (blue), and the EP4SGX530HH35 device (black).
Figure 2–6. FPGA Fabric PLLs-Transceiver PLLs Cascading Options Allowed for 1152-Pin Package Devices
CDR
CDR
CDR
CDR
PLL
Cascade
Network
PLL
Cascade
Network
PLL_L2 PLL_R2
EP4SGX110FF35
Transceiver Block GXBL1
Channel 3
Channel 2
CDR
CDR
CMU1
PLL
CMU0
PLL
CDR
CDR
Channel 1
Channel 0
Transceiver Block GXBL0
CDR
Channel 3
CDR
Channel 2
CMU0
PLL
CMU1
PLL
Channel 1
Channel 0
CDR
CDR CDR
CDR
CDR
CDR
Channel 0
Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel 3
CMU1
PLL
CMU0
PLL
Transceiver Block GXBR0
Channel 0
Channel 1
CMU0
PLL
CMU1
PLL
Transceiver Block GXBR1
Channel 2
Channel 3
ATX PLL L0 (6G) ATX PLL R0 (6G)
EP4SGX230FF35
EP4SGX290FF35
EP4SGX360FF35
EP4SGX530HH35
2–12 Chapter 2: Transceiver Clocking in Stratix IV Devices
FPGA Fabric PLLs-Transceiver PLLs Cascading
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
FPGA Fabric PLLs-Transceiver PLLs Cascading in the 1517-Pin Package
Figure 2–7 shows the FPGA fabric PLLs-Transceiver PLLs cascading options allowed
in the EP4SGX180HF40, EP4SGX230KF40, EP4SGX290KF40, EP4SGX360KF40, and
EP4SGX530KF40 devices.
1For Stratix IV GT devices, FPGA fabric PLLs-Transceiver PLLs cascading is not
supported for the 10G ATX PLLs. For the EP4S40G2KF40, EP4S40G5KF40,
EP4S100G2KF40, and EP4S100G5KF40 devices, FPGA fabric PLLs-Transceiver PLLs
cascading for the 6G ATX PLLs and CMU PLLs is the same as the Stratix IV GX
devices in the 1517-pin package.
Figure 2–7. FPGA Fabric PLLs-Transceiver PLLs Cascading Options Allowed in the 1517-Pin Package Devices
Note to Figure 2–7:
(1) ATX PLL L1 and ATX PLL R1 are not present in the EP4SGX230KF40 device.
CDR
PLL
Cascade
Network
PLL
Cascade
Network
EP4SGX180HF40
EP4SGX230KF40
EP4SGX290KF40
EP4SGX360KF40
EP4SGX530KF40
Transceiver Block GXBL2
Channel 3
Channel 2
Channel 1
Channel 0 CDR
CDR
CDR
CDR
CMU1
PLL
CMU0
PLL
Transceiver Block GXBL1
Channel 2
Channel 3
CMU0
PLL
CMU1
PLL
CDR
CDR
CDR
CDR
Channel 1
Channel 0
Transceiver Block GXBR1
Channel 0
Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel 3
CDR
CDR
CDR
CMU1
PLL
CMU0
PLL
Transceiver Block GXBR2
Channel 3
Channel 2
Channel 1
Channel 0
CDR
CDR
CDR
CDR
CMU1
PLL
CMU0
PLL
PLL_L2
PLL_L3
Transceiver Block GXBL0
Channel 3
Channel 2
Channel 1
Channel 0 CDR
CDR
CDR
CDR
CMU1
PLL
CMU0
PLL
PLL_R2
PLL_R3
Transceiver Block GXBR0
Channel 3
Channel 2
Channel 1
Channel 0
CDR
CDR
CDR
CDR
CMU1
PLL
CMU0
PLL
ATX PLL L1 (6G)
(1)
ATX PLL L0 (6G) ATX PLL R0 (6G)
ATX PLL R1 (6G)
(1)
Chapter 2: Transceiver Clocking in Stratix IV Devices 2–13
FPGA Fabric PLLs-Transceiver PLLs Cascading
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
FPGA Fabric PLLs-Transceiver PLLs Cascading in the 1932-Pin Package
Figure 2–8 shows the FPGA fabric PLLs-Transceiver PLLs cascading options allowed
in the EP4SGX530NF45, EP4SGX360NF45, and EP4SGX290NF45 devices.
1For Stratix IV GT devices, FPGA fabric PLLs-Transceiver PLLs cascading is not
supported for the 10G ATX PLLs. For the EP4S100G3NF45, EP4S100G4N45, and
EP4S100G5NF45 devices, FPGA fabric PLLs-Transceiver PLLs cascading for the
6G ATX PLLs and CMU PLLs is the same as the Stratix IV GX devices in the 1932-pin
package.
Figure 2–8. FPGA Fabric PLLs-Transceiver PLLs Cascading Options Allowed in the 1932-Pin Package Device
CDR
CDR
CDR
CDR
CDR
CDR
CDR
CDR
CDR
CDR
CDR
CDR
Channel 1
CDR
CDR
CDR
CDR
CDR
CDR
CDR
CDR
CDR
CDR
CDR
CDR
Channel 2
CDR
CDR
CDR
CDR
CDR
CDR
CDR
CDR
Transceiver Block GXBR0
Transceiver Block GXBL3
EP4SGX530NF45
EP4SGX360NF45
EP4SGX290NF45
PLL
Cascade
Network
PLL
Cascade
Network
PLL_L1
Channel 3
Channel 1
Channel 0
CMU1
PLL
CMU0
PLL
PLL_L2
Transceiver Block GXBL2
Channel 2
Channel 3
CMU1
PLL
CMU0
PLL
Channel 1
Channel 0
PLL_L3
Transceiver Block GXBL1
Channel 2
Channel 3
CMU1
PLL
CMU0
PLL
Channel 1
Channel 0
Transceiver Block GXBL0
Channel 2
Channel 3
CMU1
PLL
CMU0
PLL
PLL_L4
Channel 1
Channel 0
PLL_R4
Channel 0
CMU1
PLL
CMU0
PLL
Channel 3
Channel 2
Transceiver Block GXBR1
CMU1
PLL
CMU0
PLL
Channel 3
Channel 2
Channel 1
Channel 0
PLL_R2
PLL_R3
Transceiver Block GXBR2
Channel 3
Channel 2
Channel 1
Channel 0
CMU1
PLL
CMU0
PLL
Channel 1
Channel 0
CMU1
PLL
CMU0
PLL
Transceiver Block GXBR3
Channel 3
Channel 2
PLL_R1
ATX PLL L0 (6G)
ATX PLL L1 (6G)
ATX PLL R0 (6G)
ATX PLL R1 (6G)
2–14 Chapter 2: Transceiver Clocking in Stratix IV Devices
FPGA Fabric PLLs-Transceiver PLLs Cascading
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
FPGA Fabric PLLs-Transceiver PLLs Cascading Rules
You can only cascade the left PLLs (
PLL_L1
,
PLL_L2
,
PLL_L3
, and
PLL_L4
) to the
transceiver blocks located on the left side of the device. Similarly, you can only
cascade the right PLLs (
PLL_R1
,
PLL_R2
,
PLL_R3
, and
PLL_R4
) to the transceiver blocks
located on the right side of the device.
The PLL cascade networks are single clock lines segmented by bidirectional tri-state
buffers located along the clock line. Segmentation of the PLL cascade network allows
two left and right PLLs to drive the cascade clock line simultaneously and provides
the input reference clock to the CMU PLLs and receiver CDRs in different transceiver
blocks. When cascading two or more FPGA fabric PLLs to the CMU PLLs and receiver
CDRs, there must be no crossover in the cascaded clock paths on the PLL cascade
network (Figure 2–9).
1For better noise rejection, ensure the bandwidth setting of the FPGA fabric PLL (the
upstream PLL) is lower than the transceiver PLL (the downstream PLL).
Example 2: Design Target—EP4SGX530NF45 Device
If your design is targeted for a EP4SGX530NF45 device, it requires providing input
reference clocks to the following CMU PLLs and receiver CDRs from two right PLLs
in the FPGA fabric:
■
CMU0
PLL in Transceiver Block
GXBR1
■Receiver CDRs in channel 2 and channel 3 in Transceiver Block
GXBR1
Case 1: use
PLL_R4
to provide the input reference clock to the receiver CDRs in
channel 2 and channel 3 (shown in GREEN) and use
PLL_R1
to provide the input
reference clock to the
CMU0
PLL (shown in BLUE) in transceiver block
GXBR1
.
Chapter 2: Transceiver Clocking in Stratix IV Devices 2–15
FPGA Fabric PLLs-Transceiver PLLs Cascading
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Figure 2–9 shows that this FPGA fabric-Transceiver PLL cascading configuration is
illegal due to crossover (shown in RED) of the cascade clock paths on the PLL cascade
network.
Figure 2–9. Illegal FPGA Fabric-Transceiver PLL Cascading Configuration
CDR
CDR
CDR
CDR
CDR
CDR
CDR
CDR
CDR
CDR
CDR
CDR
CDR
CDR
CDR
CDR
CDR
CDR
CDR
CDR
CDR
CDR
CDR
CDR
CDR
CDR
CDR
CDR
CDR
CDR
CDR
CDR
EP4SGX530NF45
PLL
Cascade
Network
PLL
Cascade
Network
PLL_L1 PLL_R1
Transceiver Block GXBL3
Channel 3
Channel 2
Channel 1
Channel 0
CMU1
PLL
CMU0
PLL
Transceiver Block GXBL2
Channel 3
Channel 2
CMU1
PLL
CMU0
PLL
Channel 1
Channel 0
Transceiver Block GXBL1
Channel 3
Channel 2
PLL_L2
PLL_L3
Channel 1
Channel 0
CMU1
PLL
CMU0
PLL
Transceiver Block GXBL0
Channel 3
Channel 2
CMU1
PLL
CMU0
PLL
Channel 1
Channel 0 PLL_L4
Transceiver Block GXBR0
PLL_R4
Channel 3
Channel 2
Channel 1
Channel 0
CMU1
PLL
CMU0
PLL
Transceiver Block GXBR1
Channel 3
Channel 2
Channel 1
Channel 0
CMU1
PLL
CMU0
PLL
PLL_R3
Transceiver Block GXBR2
PLL_R2
CMU1
PLL
CMU0
PLL
Transceiver Block GXBR3
Channel 3
Channel 2
Channel 3
Channel 2
Channel 1
Channel 0
Channel 1
Channel 0
CMU1
PLL
CMU0
PLL
ATX PLL L0 (6G)
ATX PLL L1 (6G)
ATX PLL R0 (6G)
ATX PLL R1 (6G)
X
2–16 Chapter 2: Transceiver Clocking in Stratix IV Devices
FPGA Fabric PLLs-Transceiver PLLs Cascading
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Case 2: use
PLL_R1
to provide the input reference clock to the receiver CDRs in
channel 2 and channel 3 (shown in BLUE) and use
PLL_R4
to provide the input
reference clock to the
CMU0
PLL (shown in GREEN) in transceiver block
GXBR1
.
Figure 2–10 shows that this FPGA fabric-Transceiver PLL cascading configuration is
legal as there is no crossover of the cascade clock paths on the PLL cascade network.
Figure 2–10. Legal FPGA Fabric-Transceiver PLL Cascading Configuration
CDR
CDR
CDR
CDR
CDR
CDR
CDR
CDR
CDR
CDR
CDR
CDR
CDR
CDR
CDR
CDR
CDR
CDR
CDR
CDR
CDR
CDR
CDR
CDR
CDR
CDR
CDR
CDR
CDR
CDR
CDR
CDR
EP4SGX530NF45
PLL
Cascade
Network
PLL
Cascade
Network
PLL_L1
Transceiver Block GXBL3
Channel 3
Channel 2
CMU1
PLL
CMU0
PLL
Transceiver Block GXBL2
Channel 3
Channel 2
Channel 1
Channel 0
Channel 1
Channel 0
CMU1
PLL
CMU0
PLL
PLL_L2
PLL_L3
Transceiver Block GXBL1
Channel 3
Channel 2
Channel 1
Channel 0
CMU1
PLL
CMU0
PLL
Transceiver Block GXBL0
Channel 3
Channel 2
Channel 1
Channel 0
CMU1
PLL
CMU0
PLL
PLL_L4 PLL_R4
Transceiver Block GXBR0
Channel 3
Channel 2
Channel 1
Channel 0
CMU1
PLL
CMU0
PLL
Transceiver Block GXBR1
Channel 3
Channel 2
Channel 1
Channel 0
CMU1
PLL
CMU0
PLL
PLL_R3
PLL_R2
Transceiver Block GXBR2
Channel 1
Channel 0
Channel 3
Channel 2
Transceiver Block GXBR2
PLL_R1
Channel 3
Channel 2
Channel 1
Channel 0
CMU1
PLL
CMU0
PLL
CMU1
PLL
CMU0
PLL
ATX PLL L0 (6G)
ATX PLL L1 (6G)
ATX PLL R0 (6G)
ATX PLL R1 (6G)
Chapter 2: Transceiver Clocking in Stratix IV Devices 2–17
FPGA Fabric PLLs-Transceiver PLLs Cascading
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Left and Right, Left, or Right PLL in VCO Bypass Mode
If all CMU channels on the same side of the device are configured as channels, all
refclk
pins are used as receiver serial input data pins. All CMU PLLs are also used as
receiver CDRs. In such designs, you must use the 6G ATX PLLs to generate the
high-speed serial and low-speed parallel transceiver clocks provided that the
configured data rate is supported by the 6G ATX PLLs. Additionally, Altera
recommends providing the input reference clock to the 6G ATX PLL using the left or
right PLL cascade clock line because none of the
refclk
pins are available. To avoid
jitter amplification because of cascading of the left or right PLL to the 6G ATX PLL,
you must place the left or right PLL in VCO bypass mode. When in VCO bypass
mode, you can only divide the reference clock by the N integer.
fFor more information about CMU PLLs, refer to “Configuring CMU Channels as
Transceiver Channels” in the Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Figure 2–11 shows that in VCO bypass mode, the input reference clock from the
dedicated FPGA CLK pins to the
inclk
port of the left and right, left, or right PLL
bypasses the PLL loop and is driven directly on the PLL output clock port.
Figure 2–11. Left and Right, Left, or Right PLL in VCO Bypass Mode
/N
/M
Left and Right PLL
Reference clock
from the dedicated
CLK pin
Phase
Frequency
Detector
Charge Pump
+
Loop Filter
Voltage
Controlled
Oscillator C1
Input reference
clock to the
6G ATX PLL
2–18 Chapter 2: Transceiver Clocking in Stratix IV Devices
FPGA Fabric PLLs-Transceiver PLLs Cascading
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Figure 2–12 shows 24 channels on the right side of the EP4SGX530NF45 device
configured in Basic (PMA Direct) ×N mode running at 6.5 Gbps with a 20-bit FPGA
fabric-PMA interface width. Because all 24 channels on the right side of the device are
configured in Basic (PMA Direct) ×N mode, use the right
PLL_R1
configured in VCO
bypass mode to provide the input reference clock to the 6G ATX PLL.
Because the data rate of 6.5 Gbps requires a left and right, left, or right PLL to meet
FPGA fabric-Transmitter PMA interface timing, the
tx_clkout
from one of the 24
channels is phase shifted using
PLL_R2
. Use the phase-shifted output clock from
PLL_R2
to clock the FPGA fabric logic that generates the transmitter parallel data and
control signals.
Chapter 2: Transceiver Clocking in Stratix IV Devices 2–19
FPGA Fabric PLLs-Transceiver PLLs Cascading
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
For more information about configuring left or right PLLs in VCO bypass mode, refer
to “Configuration Example 4: Configuring Left and Right, Left, or Right PLL in VCO
Bypass Mode” on page 2–78.
Figure 2–12. Input Reference Clocking Using Left and Right, Left, or Right PLL in VCO Bypass Mode (3)
Notes to Figure 2–12:
(1) For more information, refer to “Transceiver Channel Datapath Clocking” on page 2–20.
(2) For more information, refer to AN 580: Achieving Timing Closure in Basic (PMA Direct) Functional Mode.
(3) The green line represents the PLL cascade clock line and the blue lines represent 6G ATX PLL R1.
Channel 3
Channel 2
CMU1 Channel
CMU0 Channel
Channel 1
Channel 0
ATX PLL Block R1 (6G)
Channel 3
Channel 2
CMU1 Channel
CMU0 Channel
Channel 1
Channel 0
ATX PLL Block R1 (6G)
Channel 3
Channel 2
CMU1 Channel
CMU0 Channel
Channel 1
Channel 0
xN_Bottom (1)
xN_Top (1)
Transceiver Block GXBR0
Transceiver Block GXBR1
Transceiver Block GXBR 2
Channel 3
Channel 2
CMU1 Channel
Channel 1
Channel 0
Transceiver Block GXBR 3
PLL_R1
(VCO Bypass Mode)
PLL_R2
(Phase Shift 45º to
meet interface timing)
Dedicated
FPGA CLK Pin
PLL Cascade
Clock Line
Reference
Clock
tx_clkout
FPGA Fabric
(Transmitter Data
Generation Logic)
FPGA Fabric
(Transmitter Data
Generation Logic)
CMU0 Channel
(2)
2–20 Chapter 2: Transceiver Clocking in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Channel Datapath Clocking
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Transceiver Channel Datapath Clocking
This section describes the transmitter channel and receiver channel datapath clocking
in various configurations. Datapath clocking varies with physical coding sublayer
(PCS) configurations in different functional modes as well as channel bonding
options. This section contains:
■“Transmitter Channel Datapath Clocking” on page 2–20
■“Receiver Channel Datapath Clocking” on page 2–39
1Clocking described in this section is internal to the transceiver and clock routing is
primarily performed by the Quartus II software.
fFor more information about manually picking and placing CMU and ATX PLLs, refer
to AN 578: Manual Placement of CMU PLLs and ATX PLLs in Stratix IV GX and GT
Devices.
Transmitter Channel Datapath Clocking
This section describes the transmitter channel PMA and PCS datapath clocking in
non-bonded and bonded channel configurations:
■“Non-Bonded Channel Configurations” on page 2–24
■“Bonded Channel Configurations” on page 2–27
■“Non-Bonded Basic (PMA Direct) Mode Channel Configurations” on page 2–34
■“Bonded Basic (PMA Direct) ×N Mode Channel Configurations” on page 2–36
Chapter 2: Transceiver Clocking in Stratix IV Devices 2–21
Transceiver Channel Datapath Clocking
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Transmitter Channel-to-Channel Skew Optimization for Modes Other than
Basic (PMA Direct) Mode
High-speed serial clock and low-speed parallel clock skew between channels and
unequal latency in the transmitter phase compensation FIFO contribute to transmitter
channel-to-channel skew. Transmitter datapath clocking is set up to provide low
channel-to-channel skew when compared with non-bonded channel configurations.
■In bonded channel configurations—the high-speed serial clock and low-speed
parallel clock for all bonded channels are generated by the
CMU0
clock divider or
the ATX clock divider block, resulting in lower channel-to-channel clock skew.
The transmitter phase compensation FIFO in all bonded channels (except in Basic
[PMA Direct] ×N mode) share common pointers and control logic generated in the
central control unit (CCU), resulting in equal latency in the transmitter phase
compensation FIFO of all bonded channels. The lower transceiver clock skew and
equal latency in the transmitter phase compensation FIFOs in all channels
provides lower channel-to-channel skew in bonded channel configurations.
■In non-bonded channel configurations—the high-speed serial clock and low-speed
parallel clock in each channel are generated independently by its local clock
divider. This results in higher channel-to-channel clock skew.
The transmitter phase compensation FIFO in each non-bonded channel (except in
Basic [PMA Direct] mode) has its own pointers and control logic that can result in
unequal latency in the transmitter phase compensation FIFO of each channel. The
higher transceiver clock skew and unequal latency in the transmitter phase
compensation FIFO in each channel can result in higher channel-to-channel skew.
2–22 Chapter 2: Transceiver Clocking in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Channel Datapath Clocking
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Transmitter Channel Datapath Clocking Resources
The Stratix IV transceivers support various non-bonded and bonded transceiver
clocking configurations through the dedicated ×1, ×4, and ×N high-speed serial and
low-speed parallel clock lines.
Figure 2–13 shows the transceiver clock distribution in ×1, ×4, ×8, and ×N bonded
modes.
Figure 2–13. Transceiver Clock Distribution in the Stratix IV GT EP4S100G5F45 and Stratix IV GX
EP4SGX530KF40 Devices
Note to Table 2–14:
(1) The 10G ATX PLL block is not available for the EP4SGX530KF40 device.
Transceiver Block GXBR3
Channel 3
Channel 2
Channel 1
Channel 0
CMU1 Channel
CMU0 Channel
ATX PLL Block (10G) (1)
Transceiver Block GXBR2
Channel 3
Channel 2
Channel 1
Channel 0
CMU1 Channel
CMU0 Channel
ATX PLL Block (6G)
Transceiver Block GXBR1
Channel 3
Channel 2
Channel 1
Channel 0
CMU1 Channel
CMU0 Channel
ATX PLL Block (6G)
Transceiver Block GXBR0
Channel 3
Channel 2
Channel 1
Channel 0
CMU1 Channel
CMU0 Channel
xN_Top
x1
CMU1 GXBR3 x4 GXBR3 xN_Bottom
x1
CMU0 GXBR3
x1
CMU1 GXBR2
x1
CMU0 GXBR2
x4 GXBR2
x4 GXBR1
x4 GXBR0
x1
CMU0 GXBR1
x1
CMU1 GXBR1
x1
CMU1 GXBR0
x1
CMU0 GXBR0
Chapter 2: Transceiver Clocking in Stratix IV Devices 2–23
Transceiver Channel Datapath Clocking
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Non-bonded and bonded configurations use the following:
■×1 non-bonded configurations use the ×1 clock lines to distribute only the
high-speed serial transceiver clock synthesized by the
CMU0
PLL or
CMU1
PLL to the
clock transmitter channels located in the same transceiver block. The low-speed
parallel transceiver clock is generated in the transceiver channels using the local
clock dividers.
■×4 bonded configurations use the ×
4_GXB
clock lines to distribute both the
high-speed serial and low-speed parallel transceiver clocks generated by the
CMU0_Channel
to clock the bonded transmitter channels located in the same
transceiver block.
■×8 and ×N bonded configurations use the ×
N_Top
or ×
N_Bottom
clock lines to
distribute both the high-speed serial and low-speed parallel transceiver clocks
generated by the
CMU0
channel block to all bonded transmitter channels located
across transceiver blocks.
ATX PLLs always use ×N lines to distribute the high-speed serial and low-speed
parallel transceiver clocks. Use the
×N_Top
line if the
CMU0
PLL or ATX PLL that
generates the transceiver clocks is located at the top of the transmitter channel. Use
the
×N_Bottom
line if the
CMU0
PLL or ATX PLL is located at the bottom of the
transmitter channel. Because there is only one
×N_Top
and
×N_Bottom
line on each side
of the device, using an ATX PLL limits the use of the ×N clock lines to distribute the
transceiver clocks to other transmitter channels in the design.
Transmitter Channel Clocking Configurations
Figure 2–14 shows various transmitter channel clocking configurations.
Transmitter channels configured in modes other than Basic (PMA Direct) mode use
both the transmitter channel PCS and PMA blocks. As a result, Stratix IV devices
allow placing these transmitter channels only in the four regular channels of a
transceiver block. Stratix IV devices do not allow configuring the CMU channels in
any mode other than Basic (PMA Direct) mode because of the absence of PCS blocks
in the CMU channels.
Figure 2–14. Transmitter Channel Clocking Configurations
Transmitter Channel Clocking
Configurations
Non-Bonded
Basic (PMA Direct)
Bonded
Basic (PMA Direct) xN
Non-Bonded Bonded
x4
Bonded
x8
Bonded
2–24 Chapter 2: Transceiver Clocking in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Channel Datapath Clocking
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
The transmitter channel datapath clocking in modes other than Basic (PMA Direct)
mode depends on whether the transmitter channel is configured in non-bonded or
bonded mode.
Non-Bonded Channel Configurations
The following modes other than Basic (PMA Direct) functional mode have a
non-bonded transmitter channel configuration:
■PCIe ×1—Gen1 and Gen2
■Gigabit Ethernet (GIGE)
■Serial RapidIO
■SONET/SDH
■SDI
■(OIF) CEI PHY Interface
■Basic (except Basic ×4 and Basic ×8 modes)
■Deterministic Latency
Use the CMU channels to generate transceiver clocks for all the non-bonded
functional modes listed above. Additionally, you may use the ATX PLLs if the
configured data rate falls within the ATX PLL data rate range specified in the DC and
Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Chapter 2: Transceiver Clocking in Stratix IV Devices 2–25
Transceiver Channel Datapath Clocking
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Figure 2–15 shows transmitter channel datapath clocking in non-bonded channel
configurations when clocked using the CMU PLLs.
Figure 2–15. Transmitter Datapath Clocking in a Non-Bonded Configuration Clocked by CMU PLLs (1)
Note to Figure 2–15:
(1) The red lines represent the FPGA fabric-Transceiver interface clock, the green lines represent the low-speed parallel clock, and the blue lines
represent the ×1 high-speed serial clock.
FPGA
Fabric
Transmitter Channel PCS Transmitter Channel PMA
/
2
Transmitter Channel PCS Transmitter Channel PMA
/
2
wrclk wrclk rdclk
rdclk
Transmitter Channel PCS Transmitter Channel PMA
/
2
wrclk wrclk rdclk
rdclk
Serializer
Transmitter Channel PCS Transmitter Channel PMA
/
2
wrclk wrclk rdclk
rdclk
PCIe
hard IP PIPE
Interface
TX Phase
Compensation
FIFO
wrclk rdclk
Byte
Serializer
wrclk rdclk
Channel 3
Serializer
x1 High-Speed Serial Clock
Local Clock
Divider Block
Low-Speed Parallel Clock
tx_clkout[3]
FPGA Fabric-Transciever
Interface Clock
tx_coreclk[3]
PCIe
hard IP PIPE
Interface
TX Phase
Compensation
FIFO
Byte
Serializer
Channel 2
Serializer
x1 High-Speed Serial Clock
Local Clock
Divider Block
Low-Speed Parallel Clock
tx_clkout[2]
FPGA Fabric-Transciever
Interface Clock
tx_coreclk[2]
PCIe
hard IP PIPE
Interface
Input
Reference
Clock
CMU1 PLL
CMU1
Clock
Divider
CMU1 Channel
CMU0 Channel
CMU0
Clock
Divider
CMU0 PLL
Input
Reference
Clock
TX Phase
Compensation
FIFO
Byte
Serializer
Channel 1
Serializer
x1 High-Speed Serial Clock
Local Clock
Divider Block
Low-Speed Parallel Clock
tx_clkout[1]
FPGA Fabric-Transceiver
Interface Clock
tx_coreclk[1]
PCIe
hard IP PIPE
Interface
TX Phase
Compensation
FIFO
Byte
Serializer
Channel 0
8B/10B
Encoder
x1 High-Speed Serial Clock
Local Clock
Divider Block
Low-Speed Parallel Clock
tx_clkout[0]
FPGA Fabric-Transceiver
Interface Clock
tx_coreclk[0]
8B/10B
Encoder
8B/10B
Encoder
8B/10B
Encoder
2–26 Chapter 2: Transceiver Clocking in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Channel Datapath Clocking
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
In non-bonded channel configurations clocked by the CMU PLL, each channel can
derive its clock independently from either
CMU0
PLL or
CMU1
PLL within the same
transceiver block. The CMU PLL synthesizes the input reference clock to generate a
clock that is distributed to the local clock divider block in each channel using the ×1
high-speed serial clock line. Depending on the configured functional mode, the local
clock divider block in each channel generates the low-speed parallel clock and
high-speed serial clock. The serializer in the transmitter channel PMA uses both the
low-speed parallel clock and high-speed serial clock for its parallel-in-serial-out
operation. The low-speed parallel clock clocks the 8B/10B encoder (if enabled) and
the read port of the byte serializer (if enabled) in the transmitter channel PCS.
Depending on whether you use the byte serializer or not, the low-speed parallel clock
(when you do not use the byte serializer) or a divide-by-two version of the low-speed
parallel clock (when you use the byte serializer) from the local clock divider block
clocks the read port of the transmitter phase compensation FIFO in all four bonded
channels. This clock is driven directly on the
tx_clkout
port as the FPGA
fabric-Transceiver interface clock. You can use the
coreclkout
signal to clock the
transmitter data and control logic in the FPGA fabric for all four bonded channels.
1If you configure the ATX PLL to clock the transmitter channel, the ATX PLL block
drives the high-speed serial clock and low-speed parallel clock to the transmitter
channel on the
×N_Top
or ×
N_Bottom
lines.
fFor more information, refer to the Configuring Multiple Protocols and Data Rates in
Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Table 2–2 lists the transmitter channel datapath clock frequencies in non-bonded
functional modes that have a fixed data rate.
Table 2–6. Transmitter Channel Datapath Clock Frequencies in Non-Bonded Functional Modes
Functional Mode Data Rate High-Speed Serial
Clock Frequency
Low-Speed
Parallel Clock
Frequency (MHz)
FPGA Fabric-Transceiver
Interface Clock Frequency
Without Byte
Serializer
(MHz)
With Byte
Serializer
(MHz)
PCIe ×1 (Gen 1) 2.5 Gbps 1.25 GHz 250 250 125
PCIe ×1 (Gen 2) 5 Gbps 2.5 GHz 500 N/A 250
GIGE 1.25 Gbps 625 MHz 125 125 N/A
Serial RapidIO
1.25 Gbps 625 MHz 125 N/A 62.5
2.5 Gbps 1.25 GHz 250 N/A 125
3.125 Gbps 1.5625 GHz 312.5 N/A 156.25
SONET/SDH OC12 622 Mbps 311 MHz 77.75 77.75 N/A
SONET/SDH OC48 2.488 Gbps 1.244 GHz 311 N/A 155.5
HD-SDI 1.485 Gbps 742.5 MHz 148.5 148.5 74.25
1.4835 Gbps 741.75 MHz 148.35 148.35 74.175
3G-SDI 2.97 Gbps 1.485 GHz 297 N/A 148.5
2.967 Gbps 1.4835 GHz 296.7 N/A 148.35
Chapter 2: Transceiver Clocking in Stratix IV Devices 2–27
Transceiver Channel Datapath Clocking
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Bonded Channel Configurations
In PCS and PMA bonded channel configurations, the PCS and PMA blocks of all
bonded channels are clocked by the same low-speed parallel clock and high-speed
serial clock from the
CMU0
clock divider or the ATX PLL block. The phase
compensation FIFOs of all bonded channels also share common read and write
pointers and enable signals generated in the CCU.
Stratix IV devices support ×4 PCS and PMA channel bonding that allows bonding of
four channels within the same transceiver block. Stratix IV devices also support ×8
channel bonding that allows bonding of eight PCS and PMA channels across two
transceiver blocks on the same side of the device.
×4 PCS and PMA Bonded Channel Configuration
The following functional modes support ×4 PCS and PMA bonded transmitter
channel configuration:
■PCIe ×4—Gen1 and Gen2
■XAUI
■Basic ×4
Use the CMU channels to generate the transceiver clocks for all ×4 bonded functional
modes listed above. Additionally, you may use the ATX PLLs to generate the
transceiver clocks for PCIe ×4 Gen 2 and Basic ×4 functional mode.
1You must assign
tx_dataout[0]
of the ×4 bonded link (XAUI or PCIe ×4) to physical
channel 0 of the transceiver block,
tx_dataout[1]
to physical channel 1 of the
transceiver block,
tx_dataout[2]
to physical channel 2 of the transceiver block, and
tx_dataout[3]
to physical channel 3 of the transceiver block. Otherwise, the
Quartus II compilation errors out.
2–28 Chapter 2: Transceiver Clocking in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Channel Datapath Clocking
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Figure 2–16 shows the transmitter channel datapath clocking in ×4 channel bonding
configurations when clocked using the
CMU0
channel.
Figure 2–16. Transmitter Datapath Clocking in x4 Bonded Configurations (1)
Note to Figure 2–16:
(1) The red lines represent the FPGA fabric-Transceiver interface clock, the green lines represent the low-speed parallel clock, and the blue lines
represent the high-speed serial clock.
Serializer
Transmitter Channel PCS Transmitter Channel PMA
/
2
wrclk wrclk rdclk
rdclk
Serializer
Transmitter Channel PCS Transmitter Channel PMA
/
2
wrclk wrclk rdclk
rdclk
Serializer
Transmitter Channel PCS Transmitter Channel PMA
/2
wrclk wrclk rdclk
rdclk
Serializer
Transmitter Channel PCS Transmitter Channel PMA
/
2
wrclk wrclk rdclk
rdclk
Channel 1
/
2
PCIe
hard IP PIPE
Interface
TX Phase
Compensation
FIFO
Byte
Serializer
Channel 3
x4 High-Speed Serial Clock
x4 Low-Speed Parallel Clock
tx_coreclk[3]
PCIe
hard IP PIPE
Interface
TX Phase
Compensation
FIFO
Byte
Serializer
Channel 2
x4 High-Speed Serial Clock
x4 Low-SPeed Parallel Clock
tx_coreclk[2]
coreclkout
FPGA Fabric-Transceiver
Interface Clock
Input
Reference
Clock
CMU1 PLL
CMU1 Channel
CMU0 Channel x4 Low-Speed Parallel Clock
x4 High-Speed Serial Clock
CMU0
Clock
Divider
CMU0 PLL
Input
Reference
Clock
FPGA
Fabric
PCIe
hard IP PIPE
Interface
TX Phase
Compensation
FIFO
Byte
Serializer
x4 High-Speed Serial Clock
x4 High-Speed Serial Clock
x4 Low-Speed Parallel Clock
Byte
Serializer
TX Phase
Compensation
FIFO
PIPE
Interface
PCIe
hard IP
tx_coreclk[0]
tx_coreclk[1]
x4 Low-Speed Parallel Clock
Channel 0
8B/10B
Encoder
8B/10B
Encoder
8B/10B
Encoder
8B/10B
Encoder
FPGA Fabric-Transceiver
Interface Clock
FPGA Fabric-Transceiver
Interface Clock
FPGA Fabric-Transceiver
Interface Clock
Chapter 2: Transceiver Clocking in Stratix IV Devices 2–29
Transceiver Channel Datapath Clocking
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
The transceiver clocks are distributed to the four bonded channels on the ×4
high-speed serial and ×4 low-speed parallel clock lines. The serializer in the
transmitter channel PMA of the four bonded channels uses the same low-speed
parallel clock and high-speed serial clock from
CMU0 Channel
for their
parallel-in-serial-out operation. The low-speed parallel clock clocks the 8B/10B
encoder and the write port of the byte serializer (if enabled) in the transmitter channel
PCS.
Depending on whether the you use the byte serializer or not, the low-speed parallel
clock (when you do not use the byte serializer) or a divide-by-two version of the
low-speed parallel clock (when you use the byte serializer) from the
CMU0
clock
divider block clocks the read port of the transmitter phase compensation FIFO in all
four bonded channels. This clock is driven directly on the
coreclkout
port as the
FPGA fabric-Transceiver interface clock. You can use the
coreclkout
signal to clock
the transmitter data and control logic in the FPGA fabric for all four bonded channels.
1The ATX PLL block drives the high-speed serial clock and low-speed parallel clock to
the transmitter channels on the ×
N_Top
or ×
N_Bottom
lines.
fFor more information, refer to the Configuring Multiple Protocols and Data Rates in
Stratix IV Devices chapter.
In ×4 PCS and PMA bonded channel configurations, the transmitter phase
compensation FIFOs in all four bonded channels share common read and write
pointers and enable signals generated in the
CMU0
channel of the transceiver block.
This ensures equal transmitter phase compensation FIFO latency across all four
bonded channels, resulting in low transmitter channel-to-channel skew.
Table 2–3 lists the transmitter datapath clock frequencies in ×4 bonded functional
modes that have a fixed data rate.
×8 PCS and PMA Bonded Channel Configuration
The following functional modes support ×8 PCS and PMA bonded transmitter
channel configuration:
■PCIe ×8—Gen1 and Gen2
■Basic ×8
Use either the CMU PLL or the ATX PLL to generate the transceiver clocks in Basic ×8
functional modes. Use the ATX PLL in PCIe ×8 Gen2 mode in order to meet the
transmitter jitter compliance.
Table 2–7. Transmitter Datapath Clock Frequencies in ×4 Bonded Functional Modes
Functional Mode Data Rate (Gbps)
High-Speed Serial
Clock Frequency
(GHz)
Low-Speed
Parallel Clock
Frequency (MHz)
FPGA Fabric-Transceiver
Interface Clock Frequency
Without Byte
Serializer
(MHz)
With Byte
Serializer
(MHz)
PCIe ×4 (Gen 1) 2.5 1.25 250 250 125
PCIe ×4 (Gen 2) 5 2.5 500 N/A 250
XAUI 3.125 1.5625 312.5 N/A 156.25
2–30 Chapter 2: Transceiver Clocking in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Channel Datapath Clocking
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
The eight bonded channels are located in two transceiver blocks, referred to as the
master transceiver block and the slave transceiver block, with four channels each.
When clocked using a CMU PLL, the
CMU0
clock divider in
CMU0
channel of the master
transceiver block drives the high-speed serial clock and low-speed parallel clock on
the
xN_Top
clock line. The serializer in the transmitter channel PMA of all eight
bonded channels uses the same low-speed parallel clock and high-speed serial clock
driven by the
CMU0
channel of the master transceiver block on the
xN_Top
clock line.
The low-speed parallel clock from
CMU0
channel of the master transceiver block clocks
the 8B/10B encoder and the write port of the byte serializer (if enabled) in the
transmitter channel PCS of all eight channels.
Depending on whether you use the byte serializer or not, the low-speed parallel clock
(when you do not use the byte serializer) or a divide-by-two version of the low-speed
parallel clock (when you use the byte serializer) from the
CMU0
clock divider block
clocks the read port of the transmitter phase compensation FIFO in all eight bonded
channels. This clock is driven directly on the
coreclkout
port as the FPGA
fabric-Transceiver interface clock. You can use the
coreclkout
signal to clock the
transmitter data and control logic in the FPGA fabric for all eight bonded channels.
1If you choose the ATX PLL to generate the transceiver clocks for the ×8 bonded
channels, Altera recommends placing the ATX PLL between the master and slave
transceiver block to minimize transmitter channel-to-channel skew. In this
configuration, the ATX PLL block drives the high-speed serial clock and low-speed
parallel clock to the master transceiver block on the ×
N_Bottom
lines. It drives the
high-speed serial clock and low-speed parallel clock to the slave transceiver block on
the ×
N_Top
lines.
fFor more information, refer to the Configuring Multiple Protocols and Data Rates in
Stratix IV Devices chapter.
In PCIe ×8 and Basic ×8 bonded channel configurations, the transmitter phase
compensation FIFOs in all eight bonded channels share common read and write
pointers and enable signals generated in the CCU of the master transceiver block. This
ensures equal transmitter phase compensation FIFO latency across all eight bonded
channels, resulting in low transmitter channel-to-channel skew.
1The difference in clock routing delays between the ×4 clock lines and the ×N clock
lines can result in higher transmitter channel-to-channel skew. To compensate for this
difference in clock routing delays between the ×4 and the ×N clock lines, the Stratix IV
transceivers introduce a fixed amount of delay in the ×4 clock lines of the transceiver
block whose
CMU0
channel generates the transceiver clocks in Basic ×8 bonded channel
configuration.
Chapter 2: Transceiver Clocking in Stratix IV Devices 2–31
Transceiver Channel Datapath Clocking
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Figure 2–17 shows the transmitter datapath clocking in PCIe ×8 channel bonding
configurations when clocked using the CMU channel in the master transceiver block.
Figure 2–18 through Figure 2–20 show the allowed master and slave transceiver block
locations and PCIe logical lane to physical transceiver channel mapping in all
Stratix IV devices.
1The Quartus II compilation errors out if you do not map the PCIe logical lanes to the
physical transceiver channels, as shown in Figure 2–18 through Figure 2–20.
Figure 2–17. Transmitter Datapath Clocking in x8 Bonded Configuration (1)
Note to Figure 2–17:
(1) The red lines represent the FPGA fabric-Transceiver interface clock, the green lines represent the low-speed parallel clock, and the blue lines
represent the high-speed serial clock.
PIPE
Interface
Transmitter Channel PCS
/2
wrclk wrclk rdclk
rdclk
CMU0 Clock
Divider
/2
Transmitter Channel PCS Transmitter Channel PMA
/2
wrclk wrclk rdclk
rdclk
Master Transceiver Block
Slave Transc eiver Block
PCIe
hard IP
PIPE
Interface
TX Phase
Compensation
FIFO
Byte
Serializer
Serializer
Low-Speed Parallel Clock
from CMU0 of the Master
Transceiver Block
tx_coreclk[7:4]
CMU1 PLL CMU1 Clock
Divider
CMU1 Channel
CMU0 Channel
CMU0 Clock
Divider
CMU0 PLL
FPGA
Fabric
PCIe
hard IP
TX Phase
Compensation
FIFO
Byte
Serializer Serializer
tx_coreclk[3:0]
coreclkout
FPGA Fabric-Transceiver
Interface Clock
Input
Reference
Clock
CMU1 PLL
CMU1 Channel
CMU0 Channel
CMU1 Clock
Divider
Low-Speed Parallel Clock
High-Speed Serial Clock
CMU0 PLL
Input
Reference
Clock
Transmitter Channel PMA
8B/10B
Encoder
8B/10B
Encoder
Low-Speed Parallel Clock
from CMU0 of the Master
Transceiver Block
FPGA Fabric-Transceiver
Interface Clock
2–32 Chapter 2: Transceiver Clocking in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Channel Datapath Clocking
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Figure 2–18 shows one PCIe ×8 link in two transceiver block devices and two PCIe ×8
links in four transceiver block devices.
Figure 2–18. One PCIe x8 Link in Two Transceiver Block Devices and Two PCIe x8 Links in Four Transceiver Block
Devices (1)
Note to Figure 2–18:
(1) You can use a ×4 PCIe configuration in either a master or slave block.
EP4SGX290FH29, EP4SGX360FH29, EP4SGX110FF35, EP4SGX230FF35,
EP4SGX290FF35, EP4SGX360FF35, EP4SGX230HF35, EP4SGX290HF35,
EP4SGX360HF35, EP4SGX530HH35
PCIe Lane 7
PCIe Lane 6
PCIe Lane 5
PCIe Lane 4
PCIe Lane 3
PCIe Lane 2
PCIe Lane 1
PCIe Lane 0
Transceiver Block GXBL1
(Slave)
Channel3
Channel2
Channel1
Channel0
Transceiver Block GXBL0
(Master)
Second PCIe
x8 Link
First PCIe
x8 Link
Transceiver Block GXBR1
(Slave)
Transceiver Block GXBR0
(Master)
Channel3
Channel2
Channel1
Channel0
Channel3
Channel2
Channel1
Channel0
Channel3
Channel2
Channel1
Channel0
PCIe Lane 7
PCIe Lane 6
PCIe Lane 5
PCIe Lane 4
PCIe Lane 3
PCIe Lane 2
PCIe Lane 1
PCIe Lane 0
EP4SGX70DF29
EP4SGX110DF29
EP4SGX230DF29
Two PCIe x8 Links in Four Transceiver Block Devices
One PCIe x8 Link in Two Transceiver Block Devices
Chapter 2: Transceiver Clocking in Stratix IV Devices 2–33
Transceiver Channel Datapath Clocking
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Figure 2–19 shows two PCIe ×8 links in six transceiver block devices.
Figure 2–19. Two PCIe ×8 Links in Six Transceiver Block Devices (Note 1), (2)
Notes to Figure 2–19:
(1) Stratix IV devices with six transceiver blocks allow a maximum of two PCIe ×8 links occupying four transceiver blocks. You can configure the
other two transceiver blocks to implement other functional modes.
(2) You can use a ×4 PCIe configuration in either a master or slave block.
EP4SGX230KF40, EP4SGX290KF40, EP4SGX360KF40, EP4SGX530KF40
Transceiver Block
GXBL2
Channel3
Channel2
Channel1
Channel0
Transceiver Block
GXBL1 (Slave)
Channel3
Channel2
Channel1
Channel0 Second PCIe
x8 Link
Transceiver Block
GXBL0(Master)
Channel3
Channel2
Channel1
Channel0
PCIe Lane 7
PCIe Lane 6
PCIe Lane 5
PCIe Lane 4
PCIe Lane 3
PCIe Lane 2
PCIe Lane 1
PCIe Lane 0
First PCIe
x8 Link
Channel3
Channel2
Channel1
Channel0
Channel3
Channel2
Channel1
Channel0
Channel3
Channel2
Channel1
Channel0
PCIe Lane 7
PCIe Lane 6
PCIe Lane 5
PCIe Lane 4
PCIe Lane 3
PCIe Lane 2
PCIe Lane 1
PCIe Lane 0
Transceiver Block
GXBR2
Transceiver Block
GXBR1 (Slave)
Transceiver Block
GXBR0 (Master)
2–34 Chapter 2: Transceiver Clocking in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Channel Datapath Clocking
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Figure 2–20 shows four PCIe ×8 links in eight transceiver block devices.
Non-Bonded Basic (PMA Direct) Mode Channel Configurations
Figure 2–21 shows four regular channels and the
CMU1
channel in a transceiver block
configured in non-bonded Basic (PMA Direct) mode. Each channel derives its clock
independently from either the
CMU0
PLL or
CMU1
PLL within the same transceiver
block if the CMU channel is configured as a CMU PLL.
Figure 2–20. Four PCIe ×8 Links in Eight Transceiver Block Devices (1)
Note to Figure 2–20:
(1) You can use a ×4 PCIe configuration in either a master or slave block.
EP4SGX530NF45
Transceiver Block
GXBL3 (Slave)
PCIe Lane 7
PCIe Lane 6
PCIe Lane 5
PCIe Lane 4
PCIe Lane 3
PCIe Lane 2
PCIe Lane 1
PCIe Lane 0
Channel3
Channel2
Channel1
Channel0
Fourth PCIe
x8 Link
Transceiver Block
GXBL2 (Master)
Channel3
Channel2
Channel1
Channel0
Third PCIe
x8 Link
PCIe Lane 7
PCIe Lane 6
PCIe Lane 5
PCIe Lane 4
PCIe Lane 3
PCIe Lane 2
PCIe Lane 1
PCIe Lane 0
Transceiver Block
GXBL1 (Slave)
Transceiver Block
GXBL0 (Master)
Channel3
Channel2
Channel1
Channel0
Channel3
Channel2
Channel1
Channel0
First PCIe
x8 Link
Second PCIe
x8 Link
PCIe Lane 7
PCIe Lane 6
PCIe Lane 5
PCIe Lane 4
PCIe Lane 3
PCIe Lane 2
PCIe Lane 1
PCIe Lane 0
PCIe Lane 7
PCIe Lane 6
PCIe Lane 5
PCIe Lane 4
PCIe Lane 3
PCIe Lane 2
PCIe Lane 1
PCIe Lane 0
Transceiver Block
GXBR3 (Slave)
Transceiver Block
GXBR2 (Master)
Transceiver Block
GXBR1 (Slave)
Transceiver Block
GXBR0 (Master)
Channel3
Channel2
Channel1
Channel0
Channel3
Channel2
Channel1
Channel0
Channel3
Channel2
Channel1
Channel0
Channel3
Channel2
Channel1
Channel0
Chapter 2: Transceiver Clocking in Stratix IV Devices 2–35
Transceiver Channel Datapath Clocking
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
fFor more information about Basic (PMA Direct) mode, refer to the Transceiver
Architecture in Stratix IV Devices chapter.
1Stratix IV devices do not allow the 6G ATX PLL to generate transceiver clocks in
non-bonded Basic (PMA Direct) mode. The transmitter clock for channels configured
in non-bonded Basic (PMA Direct) mode must be generated by one of the CMU PLLs
in the transceiver block containing the channels.
Figure 2–21. Transmitter Channel PMA Directly Interfacing to the User Logic in the FPGA Fabric (1)
Note to Figure 2–21:
(1) The green lines represent the low-speed parallel clock and the blue lines represent the high-speed serial clock.
FPGA
Fabric
Serializer
Transmitter Channel PCS Transmitter Channel PMA
Local Clock
Divider Block
tx_clkout[3]
Serializer
Local Clock
Divider Block
Serializer
Transmitter Channel PCS
Local Clock
Divider Block
Serializer
Local Clock
Divider Block
CMU0_PLL
Channel 3
Channel 2
Channel 1
Channel 0
Transmitter Channel PCS
tx_clkout[2]
tx_clkout[1]
Transmitter Channel PCS
tx_clkout[0]
Serializer
Low-Speed Parallel Clock
Low-Speed Parallel Clock
x1 High-Speed Serial Clock
Transmitter Channel PMA
x1 High-Speed Serial Clock
Transmitter Channel PMA
CMU0_Channel
Low-Speed Parallel Clock
Transmitter Channel PCS
Transmitter Channel PCS
Low-Speed Parallel Clock
Transmitter Channel PMA
Transmitter Channel PMA
x1 High-Speed Serial Clock
x1 High-Speed Serial Clock
CMU1_Channel
CMU1
Clock
Divider
CMU0
Clock
Divider
2–36 Chapter 2: Transceiver Clocking in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Channel Datapath Clocking
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
The
CMU0
PLL synthesizes the input reference clock to generate a clock that is
distributed to the local clock divider block in each of the four regular channels using
the ×1 high-speed serial clock line. It is also forwarded to the
CMU1
clock divider in the
CMU1
channel configured as a non-bonded Basic (PMA-Direct) channel. The local clock
divider block in each regular channel and the
CMU1
clock divider in the
CMU1
channel
generate the low-speed parallel clock and high-speed serial clock. The serializer in the
transmitter channel PMA of each channel uses both the low-speed parallel clock and
high-speed serial clock for its parallel-in-serial-out operation.
The low-speed parallel clock is also driven directly on the
tx_clkout
port as the FPGA
fabric-Transceiver interface clock. You can use the
tx_clkout
port to clock transmitter
data and control logic in the FPGA fabric.
Bonded Basic (PMA Direct) ×N Mode Channel Configurations
Bonded Basic (PMA Direct) ×N mode offers low transmitter channel-to-channel skew
in addition to the flexibility of implementing custom PCS logic in the FPGA fabric.
Stratix IV devices allow bonding all regular channels and CMU channels on one side
of the device in Basic (PMA Direct) ×N mode. For example, devices such as
EP4SGX530NF45 or EP4S100G5F45 allow bonding of up to 24 channels placed in four
transceiver blocks on each side of the device.
1The
coreclkout
port is not available in Basic (PMA Direct) ×N mode.
In bonded channel configurations, the
CMU0
clock divider of all the transceiver blocks
is used, as shown in Figure 2–17. Unlike bonded channel configurations, in Basic
(PMA Direct) ×N configuration:
■If you use the ATX PLL to generate the transceiver datapath interface clocks, only
the clock divider of the ATX PLL is used.
■If you use the CMU PLL to generate the transceiver datapath interface clocks, only
the
CMU0
clock divider block of the transceiver block containing the CMU PLL is
used.
Chapter 2: Transceiver Clocking in Stratix IV Devices 2–37
Transceiver Channel Datapath Clocking
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Figure 2–22 shows transmitter channel clocking for 17 channels configured in Basic
(PMA Direct) ×N mode.
Figure 2–22 shows 17 channels configured in Basic (PMA Direct) ×N mode and
located across three transceiver blocks on the right side of the Stratix IV device. Each
of the two transceiver blocks,
GXBR0
and
GXBR2
, contain six of the 17 ×N bonded
channels located in four regular channels and two CMU channels. The remaining five
of the 17 ×N bonded channels are located in four regular channels and the
CMU1
channel of the transceiver block
GXBR1
.
1Stratix IV devices allow both CMU channels and 6G ATX PLL blocks to generate the
high-speed serial and low-speed parallel transceiver clocks when configured in Basic
(PMA Direct) ×N mode.
Figure 2–22. Transmitter Channel Clocking for 17 Channels Configured in Basic (PMA Direct) ×N Mode
FPGA
Fabric
Serializer
CMU1_Channel Transmitter Channel PMA
Serializer
Serializer
Serializer
CMU0_PLL
CMU0
Clock
Divider
Serializer
Serializer
Transceiver Block GXBR1
Transceiver Block GXBR0
Transceiver Block GXBR2
xN_Bottom
High-Speed Serial and
Low-Speed Parallel clock
x4
High-Speed Serial and
Low-Speed Parallel clock
xN_Top
High-Speed Serial and
Low-Speed Parallel clock
Regular Channel TX PMA
CMU0 Channel TX PMA
Regular Channel TX PMA
CMU1 Channel TX PMA
Regular Channel TX PCS
Regular Channel TX PCS
Regular Channel TX PMA
Regular Channel TX PCS
CMU0 Channel TX PMA
2–38 Chapter 2: Transceiver Clocking in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Channel Datapath Clocking
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
fFor more examples regarding this clocking scheme, refer to:
■“Example 1: Channel Configuration with a 4 Gbps Data Rate” on page 2–9
■AN 571: Implementing the SERDES Framer Interface Level 5 (SFI-5.1) Protocol in
Stratix IV Devices
■AN 572: Implementing the Scalable SERDES Framer Interface (SFI-S) Protocol in
Stratix IV GT Devices
Transmitter Channel-to-Channel Skew Optimization in Basic (PMA Direct) ×N Mode
In Basic (PMA-Direct) ×N mode, the
CMU0
channel distributes the transceiver clocks to
the channels placed in the same transceiver block using the ×4 clock lines. The ×4
clock lines drive the ×
N_Top
and ×
N_Bottom
clock lines to distribute the transceiver
clocks to the transmitter channels located in transceiver blocks on the bottom and top.
The difference in clock routing delays between the ×4 clock lines and the ×N clock
lines can result in higher transmitter channel-to-channel skew. To compensate for this
difference in clock routing delays between the ×4 and the ×N clock lines, the Stratix IV
transceivers introduce a fixed amount of delay in the ×4 clock lines of the transceiver
block whose
CMU0
channel generates the transceiver clocks.
1The delay compensation mechanism engaged in Basic (PMA Direct) mode only
compensates for the clock routing delays between the transceiver block whose
CMU0
channel generates the transceiver clocks and its adjacent transceiver block located
above and below.
To minimize transmitter channel-to-channel skew in ×N bonded channels, use the
recommended placement shown in Table 2–8.
1If you use the ATX PLL to generate the transceiver clocks, Altera recommends placing
the channels in the transceiver blocks adjacent to the ATX PLL on both sides of the
ATX PLL.
fFor manual placement of the CMU and ATX PLLs, if the Quartus II software does not
automatically pick the most optimal location for skew, refer to AN 578: Manual
Placement of CMU PLLs and ATX PLLs in Stratix IV GX and GT Devices.
Table 2–8. Recommended Placement of Channels and CMU in Bonded Modes
Channel Placement CMU Placement
2 adjacent transceiver blocks In either of the two transceiver blocks.
3 adjacent transceiver blocks In the middle transceiver block.
4 adjacent transceiver blocks In either of the middle transceiver blocks.
Chapter 2: Transceiver Clocking in Stratix IV Devices 2–39
Transceiver Channel Datapath Clocking
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Meeting Timing in Basic (PMA Direct) Mode
Timing may not be met for higher data rates when transceiver channels are
configured in Basic (PMA Direct) functional mode. To meet FPGA fabric-Transmitter
PMA interface timing above certain data rates, you may need to phase shift the
interface clock
tx_clkout
used to clock the transmitter user logic. To meet FPGA
fabric-Receiver hold time violations, you may have to modify the way data is
captured in the FPGA fabric.
fFor more information, refer to AN 580: Achieving Timing Closure in Basic (PMA Direct)
Functional Mode.
Receiver Channel Datapath Clocking
This section describes the receiver PMA and PCS datapath clocking in supported
configurations. Receiver datapath clocking varies between non-bonded and bonded
channel configurations. It also varies with the use of PCS blocks, such as deskew FIFO
and rate matcher. This section describes the following:
■“Non-Bonded Channel Configurations”
■“Bonded Channel Configurations” on page 2–43
■“Basic (PMA Direct) Mode Channel Configurations” on page 2–49
Non-Bonded Channel Configurations
In non-bonded channel configurations, receiver PCS blocks of each channel are
clocked independently. Each non-bonded channel also has separate
rx_analogreset
and
rx_digitalreset
signals that allow independent reset of the receiver PCS logic in
each channel.
1For more information about transceiver reset and power down signals, refer to the
Reset Control and Power Down in Stratix IV Devices chapter.
In non-bonded channel configurations, receiver channel datapath clocking has two
scenarios:
■“Non-Bonded Receiver Clocking Without Rate Matcher”
■“Non-Bonded Receiver Clocking with Rate Matcher” on page 2–41
Non-Bonded Receiver Clocking Without Rate Matcher
The following functional modes have non-bonded receiver channel configuration
without rate matcher:
■SONET/SDH
■SDI
■(OIF) CEI PHY Interface
■Basic without rate matcher
2–40 Chapter 2: Transceiver Clocking in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Channel Datapath Clocking
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Figure 2–23 shows receiver datapath clocking in non-bonded channel configurations
without rate matcher.
In non-bonded configurations without rate matcher, the CDR in each receiver channel
recovers the serial clock from the received data. The serial recovered clock is divided
within the receiver PMA to generate the parallel recovered clock. The deserializer
uses the serial recovered clock in the receiver PMA. The parallel recovered clock and
deserialized data is forwarded to the receiver PCS. The parallel recovered clock in
each channel clocks the word aligner and 8B/10B decoder (if enabled).
Figure 2–23. Receiver Datapath Clocking in Non-Bonded Configurations Without Rate Matcher (1)
Note to Figure 2–23:
(1) The red lines represent the FPGA fabric-Transceiver interface clock, the green lines represent the parallel recovered clock, and the blue lines
represent the serial recovered clock.
Receiver Channel PCS Receiver Channel PMA
/2
/2
/2
/2
Receiver Channel PCS
Receiver Channel PCS
Receiver Channel PCS
Receiver Channel PMA
Receiver Chan nel PMA
rx_coreclk[3]
PCIe
hard IP PIPE
Interface
RX Phase
Compensation
FIFO
rx_clkout[3]
FPGA Fabric-Transceiver
Interface Clock
Byte
Ordering
Byte
De-Serializer
Channel 3
Ch3 Parallel Recovered Clock
De-
Serializer CDR
Channel 2
Receiver Channel PMA
De-
Serializer CDR
Word
Aligner
8B/10B
Decoder
Ch2 Parallel Recovered Clock
Byte
De-Serializer
Byte
Ordering
RX Phase
Compensation
FIFO
PIPE
Interface
PCIe
hard IP
rx_clkout[2]
FPGA Fabric-Transceiver
Interface Clock
rx_coreclk[2]
FPGA
Fabric
PCIe
hard IP PIPE
Interface
RX Phase
Compensation
FIFO
Byte
Ordering
Byte
De-Serializer
Ch1 Parallel Recovered Clock
Channel 1
CDR
De-
Serializer
rx_clkout[1]
FPGA Fabric-Transceiver
Interface Clock
rx_coreclk[1]
PCIe
hard IP
PIPE
Interface
RX Phase
Compensation
FIFO
Byte
Ordering
Byte
De-Serializer
De-
Serializer CDR
Channel 0
Ch0 Parallel Recovered Clock
rx_clkout[0]
FPGA Fabric-Transceiver
Interface Clock
rx_coreclk[0]
Word
Aligner
8B/10B
Decoder
Word
Aligner
8B/10B
Decoder
Word
Aligner
8B/10B
Decoder
Input Reference Clock
Input Reference Clock
Input Reference Clock
Input Reference Clock
Serial Recovered Clock
Serial Recovered Clock
Serial Recovered Clock
Serial Recovered Clock
Chapter 2: Transceiver Clocking in Stratix IV Devices 2–41
Transceiver Channel Datapath Clocking
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Depending on whether you use the byte deserializer or not, the parallel recovered
clock (when you do not use the byte deserializer) or a divide-by-two version of the
parallel recovered clock (when you use the byte deserializer) clocks the write port of
the receiver phase compensation FIFO. This clock is driven directly on the
rx_clkout
port as the FPGA fabric-Transceiver interface clock. You can use the
rx_clkout
signal
to capture the receiver data and status signals in the FPGA fabric.
Table 2–9 lists the receiver datapath clock frequencies in non-bonded functional
modes without rate matcher.
Non-Bonded Receiver Clocking with Rate Matcher
The following functional modes have non-bonded receiver channel configuration
with rate-matcher:
■PCIe ×1
■GIGE
■Serial RapidIO
■Basic with rate matcher
Table 2–9. Receiver Datapath Clock Frequencies in Non-Bonded Functional Modes Without Rate Matcher
Functional Mode Data Rate Serial Recovered
Clock Frequency
Parallel Recovered
Clock Frequency (MHz)
FPGA Fabric-Transceiver
Interface Clock Frequency
Without Byte
Deserializer
(MHz)
With Byte
Deserializer
(MHz)
SONET/SDH OC12 622 Mbps 311 MHz 77.75 77.75 N/A
SONET/SDH OC48 2.488 Gbps 1.244 GHz 311 N/A 155.5
HD-SDI 1.485 Gbps 742.5 MHz 148.5 148.5 74.25
1.4835 Gbps 741.75 MHz 148.35 148.35 74.175
3G-SDI 2.97 Gbps 1.485 GHz 297 N/A 148.5
2.967 Gbps 1.4835 GHz 296.7 N/A 148.35
2–42 Chapter 2: Transceiver Clocking in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Channel Datapath Clocking
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Figure 2–24 shows the receiver datapath clocking in non-bonded channel
configurations with rate matcher.
In non-bonded configurations with rate matcher, the CDR in each receiver channel
recovers the serial clock from the received data. The serial recovered clock is divided
within the receiver PMA to generate the parallel recovered clock. The deserializer
uses the serial recovered clock in the receiver PMA. The parallel recovered clock and
deserialized data are forwarded to the receiver PCS.
Figure 2–24. Receiver Datapath Clocking in Non-Bonded Configurations with Rate Matcher (1)
Note to Figure 2–24:
(1) The red lines represent the FPGA fabric-Transceiver interface clock, the green lines represent the low-speed parallel clock, the dark red lines
represent the parallel recovered clock, and the blue lines represent the serial recovered clock.
Receiver Channel PCS Receiver Channel PMA
/2
Transmitter Channel PMA
/2
/2
/2
Receiver Channel PCS
Receiver Channel PCS
Receiver Channel PCS
Receiver Channel PMA
Receiver Channel PMA
Transmitter Channel PMA
Transmitter Channel PMA
rx_coreclk[3]
PCIe
hard IP
PIPE
Interface
RX Phase
Compensation
FIFO
Byte
Ordering
Byte
De-
Serializer
8B/10B
Decoder
Channel 3
Word
Aligner
Rate
Match
FIFO
Ch3 Parallel
Recovered Clock
De-
Serializer CDR
Local
Clock
Divider
From CMU0 PLL
From CMU1 PLL
Channel 2
Receiver Channel PMA
Transmitter Channel PMA
De-
Serializer CDR
Local
Clock
Divider
From CMU0 PLL
From CMU1 PLL
Ch2 Parallel
Recovered Clock
Word
Aligner
Rate
Match
FIFO
8B/10B
Decoder
Low-Speed Parallel Clock
Low-Speed Parallel Clock
Byte
De-
Serializer
Byte
Ordering
RX Phase
Compensation
FIFO
PIPE
Interface
tx_clkout[3]
tx_clkout[2]
FPGA Fabric_Transceiver
Interface Clock
FPGA Fabric_Transceiver
Interface Clock
rx_coreclk[2]
PCIe
hard IP
FPGA
Fabric
PCIe
hard IP PIPE
Interface
FPGA Fabric_Transceiver
Interface Clock tx_clkout[1]
RX Phase
Compensation
FIFO
Byte
Ordering
Byte
De-
Serializer
8B/10B
Decoder
Rate
Match
FIFO
Word
Aligner
Ch1 Parallel
Recovered Clock
Low-Speed Parallel Clock
Channel 1
De-
Serializer CDR
Local
Clock
Divider
From CMU0 PLL
From CMU1 PLL
Channel 0
CDR
De-
Serializer
Local
Clock
Divider
From CMU0 PLL
From CMU1 PLL
Ch0 Parallel
Recovered Clock
Low-Speed Parallel Clock
Word
Aligner
Rate
Match
FIFO
8B/10B
Decoder
Byte
De-
Serializer
Byte
Ordering
RX Phase
Compensation
FIFO
PIPE
Interface
PCIe
hard IP
tx_clkout[0]
FPGA Fabric_Transceiver
Interface Clock
rx_coreclk[1]
rx_coreclk[0]
Serial Recovered Clock
Serial Recovered Clock
Serial Recovered Clock
Serial Recovered Clock
Input Reference Clock
Input Reference Clock
Input Reference Clock
Input Reference Clock
Chapter 2: Transceiver Clocking in Stratix IV Devices 2–43
Transceiver Channel Datapath Clocking
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
The parallel recovered clock from the receiver PMA in each channel clocks the word
aligner and the write port of the rate match FIFO. The low-speed parallel clock from
the transmitter local clock divider block in each channel clocks the read port of the
rate match FIFO, the 8B/10B decoder, and the write port of the byte deserializer (if
enabled). The parallel transmitter PCS clock or its divide-by-two version (if byte
deserializer is enabled) clocks the write port of the receiver phase compensation FIFO.
It is also driven on the
tx_clkout
port as the FPGA fabric-Transceiver interface clock.
You can use the
tx_clkout
signal to latch the receiver data and status signals in the
FPGA fabric.
Table 2–10 lists the receiver datapath clock frequencies in non-bonded functional
modes with rate matcher.
Bonded Channel Configurations
The Stratix IV device supports ×4 channel bonding that allows bonding of four
channels within the same transceiver block. It also supports ×8 channel bonding that
allows bonding of eight channels across two transceiver blocks on the same side of the
device.
In bonded channel configurations, the low-speed parallel clock for all bonded
channels are generated by the same
CMU0
clock divider or the ATX clock divider block,
resulting in lower channel-to-channel clock skew. The receiver phase compensation
FIFO in all bonded channels (except in Basic [PMA Direct] ×N mode) share common
pointers and control logic generated in the CCU, resulting in equal latency in the
receiver phase compensation FIFO of all bonded channels.
1Bonding is not supported on the receive side for Basic ×4 and Basic ×8 functional
modes. If you use rate matcher, the clocking scheme for Basic ×4 and Basic ×8
functional modes, the clocking is similar to PCIe ×4 mode, as shown in Figure 2–26 on
page 2–46 and PCIe ×8 mode, as shown in Figure 2–27 on page 2–48.
×4 Bonded Channel Configuration
The following functional modes support ×4 receiver channel bonded configuration:
■XAUI (“x4 Bonded Channel Configuration with Deskew FIFO” on page 2–44)
■PCIe (“x4 Bonded Channel Configuration Without Deskew FIFO” on page 2–46)
Table 2–10. Receiver Datapath Clock Frequencies in Non-Bonded Functional Modes with Rate Matcher
Functional Mode Data Rate
(Gbps)
Serial Recovered
Clock Frequency
Parallel Recovered
Clock and Parallel
Transmitter PCS Clock
Frequency (MHz)
FPGA Fabric-Transceiver
Interface Clock Frequency
Without Byte
Deserializer
(MHz)
With Byte
Deserializer
(MHz)
PCIe ×1 (Gen 1) 2.5 1.25 GHz 250 250 125
PCIe ×1 (Gen 2) 5 2.5 GHz 500 N/A 250
GIGE 1.25 625 MHz 125 125 N/A
Serial RapidIO
1.25 625 MHz 125 N/A 62.5
2.5 1.25 GHz 250 N/A 125
3.125 1.5625 GHz 312.5 N/A 156.25
2–44 Chapter 2: Transceiver Clocking in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Channel Datapath Clocking
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
x4 Bonded Channel Configuration with Deskew FIFO
XAUI functional mode has ×4 bonded channel configuration with deskew FIFO.
Figure 2–25 shows the receiver datapath clocking in ×4 channel bonding
configurations with deskew FIFO.
In ×4 bonded channel configurations with deskew FIFO, the CDR in each receiver
channel recovers the serial clock from the received data. The serial recovered clock is
divided within each channel’s receiver PMA to generate the parallel recovered clock.
The deserializer uses the serial recovered clock in the receiver PMA. The parallel
recovered clock and deserialized data is forwarded to the receiver PCS in each
channel.
Figure 2–25. Receiver Datapath Clocking in x4 Bonded Channel Configuration with Deskew FIFO (1)
Note to Figure 2–25:
(1) The red lines represent the FPGA fabric-Transceiver interface clock, the green lines represent the low-speed parallel clock, the dark red lines
represent the Ch0 parallel recovered clock, and the blue lines represent the serial recovered clock.
FPGA
Fabric
Receiver Channel PCS Receiver Channel PMA
/2
/2
/2
/2
/2
Receiver Channel PCS
Receiver Channel PCS
Receiver Channel PCS
Receiver Channel PMA
Receiver Channel PMA
Receiver Channel PMA
rx_coreclk[3]
PCIe
hard IP
PIPE
Interface
RX Phase
Compensation
FIFO
Byte
Ordering
Byte
De-
Serializer
8B/10B
Decoder
Rate
Match
FIFO
Word
Aligner
Channel 3
Channel 2
De-
Serializer CDR
Ch3 Parallel
Recovered Clock
Ch0 Parallel
Recovered Clock
Low-Speed Parallel Clock from CMU0 Clock Divider
rx_coreclk[2]
PCIe
hard IP PIPE
Interface
RX Phase
Compensation
FIFO
Byte
Ordering
Byte
De-
Serializer
8B/10B
Decoder
Rate
Match
FIFO
Word
Aligner
De-
Serializer CDR
Ch2 Parallel
Recovered Clock
Ch0 Parallel
Recovered Clock
Low-Speed Parallel Clock from CMU0 Clock Divider
coreclkout
FPGA Fabric-Transceiver
Interface Clock Input
Reference
Clock
Input
Reference
Clock
CMU1 Channel
CMU0 Channel
CMU0
Clock
Divider
CMU1
Clock
Divider
Low-Speed Parallel Clock
rx_coreclk[1]
PCIe
hard IP
PIPE
Interface
RX Phase
Compensation
FIFO
Byte
Ordering
Byte
De-
Serializer
8B/10B
Decoder
Rate
Match
FIFO
Channel 1
Word
Aligner
De-
Serializer CDR
Ch1 Parallel
Recovered Clock
Low-Speed Parallel Clock from CMU0 Clock Divider
Ch0 Parallel
Recovered Clock
rx_coreclk[0]
PCIe
hard IP
PIPE
Interface
RX Phase
Compensation
FIFO
Byte
De-
Serializer
Byte
Ordering
8B/10B
Decoder
Rate
Match
FIFO
Word
Aligner
Deskew
FIFO
Low-Speed Parallel Clock from CMU0 Clock Divider
Channel 0
De-
Serializer CDR
Ch0 Parallel
Recovered Clock
CMU1 PLL
CMU0 PLL
Input Reference Clock
Input Reference Cloc
k
Input Reference Clock
Input Reference Clock
Serial Recovered Clock
Deskew
FIFO
Deskew
FIFO
Deskew
FIFO
Serial Recovered Clock
Serial Recovered Clock
Serial Recovered Clock
Chapter 2: Transceiver Clocking in Stratix IV Devices 2–45
Transceiver Channel Datapath Clocking
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
The parallel recovered clock from the receiver PMA in each channel clocks the word
aligner in that channel. The parallel recovered clock from
Channel 0
clocks the
deskew FIFO and the write port of the rate match FIFO in all four bonded channels.
The low-speed parallel clock from the
CMU0
clock divider block in
CMU0_Channel
clocks
the read port of the rate match FIFO, the 8B/10B decoder, and the write port of the
byte deserializer (if enabled) in all four bonded channels. The low-speed parallel clock
or its divide-by-two version (if byte deserializer is enabled) clocks the write port of
the receiver phase compensation FIFO. It is also driven on the
coreclkout
port as the
FPGA fabric-Transceiver interface clock. You can use the
coreclkout
signal to latch
the receiver data and status signals in the FPGA fabric for all four bonded channels.
Table 2–11 lists the receiver datapath clock frequencies in ×4 bonded functional modes
with deskew FIFO.
Table 2–11. Receiver Datapath Clock Frequencies in x4 Bonded Functional Modes with Deskew FIFO
Functional Mode Data Rate
(Gbps)
Serial Recovered
Clock Frequency
Parallel Recovered
Clock and Parallel
Transmitter PCS Clock
Frequency (MHz)
FPGA-Fabric Transceiver
Interface Clock Frequency
Without Byte
Deserializer
(MHz)
With Byte
Deserializer
(MHz)
PCIe ×4 (Gen 1) 2.5 1.25 GHz 250 250 125
PCIe ×4 (Gen 2) 5 2.5 GHz 500 N/A 250
XAUI 3.125 1.5625 MHz 312.5 N/A 156.25
2–46 Chapter 2: Transceiver Clocking in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Channel Datapath Clocking
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
x4 Bonded Channel Configuration Without Deskew FIFO
PCIe ×4 functional modes supports the ×4 bonded channel configuration without
deskew FIFO.
Figure 2–26 shows the receiver datapath clocking in ×4 channel bonding
configurations without deskew FIFO.
Figure 2–26. Receiver Datapath Clocking in x4 Bonded Channel Configuration Without Deskew FIFO (1)
Note to Figure 2–26:
(1) The red lines represent the FPGA fabric-Transceiver interface clock, the green lines represent the low-speed parallel clock, the dark red lines
represent the parallel recovered clock, and the blue lines represent the serial recovered clock.
Receiver Channel PCS Receiver Channel PMA
/2
/2
/2
/2
/2
Receiver Channel PCS
Receiver Channel PCS
Receiver Channel PCS
Receiver Channel PMA
Receiver Channel PMA
Receiver Channel PMA
rx_coreclk[3]
PCIe
hard IP PIPE
Interface
RX Phase
Compensation
FIFO
Byte
Ordering
Byte
De-
Serializer
8B/10B
Decoder
Rate
Match
FIFO
Word
Aligner
Channel 3
De-
Serializer CDR
Ch3 Parallel Recovered Clock
Low-Speed Parallel Clock from CMU0 Clock Divider
rx_coreclk[2]
PCIe
hard IP
PIPE
Interface
RX Phase
Compensation
FIFO
Byte
Ordering
Byte
De-
Serializer
8B/10B
Decoder
Rate
Match
FIFO
Word
Aligner
Channel 2
De-
Serializer CDR
Ch2 Parallel Recovered Clock
Low-Speed Parallel Clock from CMU0 Clock Divider
coreclkout
FPGA Fabric_Transceiver
Interface Clock Input
Reference
Clock
Input
Reference
Clock
CMU0
Clock
Divider
CMU0 Channel
CMU1 Channel
CMU1
Clock
Divider
Low-Speed Parallel Clock
Channel 1
FPGA
Fabric
rx_coreclk[1]
PCIe
hard IP PIPE
Interface
RX Phase
Compensation
FIFO
Byte
Ordering
Byte
De-
Serializer
8B/10B
Decoder
Rate
Match
FIFO
Ch1 Parallel Recovered Clock
Low-Speed Parallel Clock from CMU0 Clock Divider
Word
Aligner De-
Serializer CDR
rx_coreclk[0]
PCIe
hard IP PIPE
Interface
RX Phase
Compensation
FIFO
Byte
Ordering
Byte
De-
Serializer
8B/10B
Decoder
Rate
Match
FIFO
Word
Aligner
Channel 0
De-
Serializer CDR
Ch0 Parallel Recovered Clock
Low-Speed Parallel Clock from CMU0 Clock Divider
CMU1 PLLCMU1 PLL
CMU0 PLL
Serial Recovered Clock
Input Reference Clock
Serial Recovered Clock
Input Reference Clock
Serial Recovered Clock
Input Reference Clock
Serial Recovered Clock
Input Reference Clock
Chapter 2: Transceiver Clocking in Stratix IV Devices 2–47
Transceiver Channel Datapath Clocking
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
In ×4 bonded channel configurations without deskew FIFO, the CDR in each receiver
channel recovers the serial clock from the received data. The serial recovered clock is
divided within each channel’s receiver PMA to generate the parallel recovered clock.
The deserializer uses the serial recovered clock in the receiver PMA. The parallel
recovered clock and deserialized data is forwarded to the receiver PCS in each
channel.
The parallel recovered clock from the receiver PMA in each channel clocks the word
aligner and the write side of the rate matcher FIFO in that channel. The low-speed
parallel clock from the
CMU0
clock divider block in
CMU0_Channel
clocks the read port
of the rate match FIFO, the 8B/10B decoder, and the write port of the byte deserializer
(if enabled). The low-speed parallel clock or its divide-by-two version (if byte
deserializer is enabled) clocks the receiver phase compensation FIFO. It is also driven
on the
coreclkout
port as the FPGA fabric-Transceiver interface clock. You can use
the
coreclkout
signal to latch the receiver data and status signals in the FPGA fabric
for all four bonded channels.
Table 2–12 lists the receiver datapath clock frequencies in ×4 bonded functional modes
without deskew FIFO.
Table 2–12. Receiver Datapath Clock Frequencies in x4 Bonded Functional Modes without Deskew FIFO
Functional Mode Data Rate
(Gbps)
Serial Recovered
Clock Frequency
(GHz)
Parallel Recovered
Clock and Parallel
Transmitter PCS Clock
Frequency (MHz)
FPGA Fabric-Transceiver
Interface Clock Frequency
Without Byte
Deserializer
(MHz)
With Byte
Deserializer
(MHz)
PCIe ×4 (Gen 1) 2.5 1.25 250 250 125
PCIe ×4 (Gen 2) 5 2.5 500 N/A 250
2–48 Chapter 2: Transceiver Clocking in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Channel Datapath Clocking
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
x8 Bonded Channel Configuration
PCIe ×8 functional mode supports the ×8 receiver channel bonding configuration. The
eight bonded channels are located in two transceiver blocks, referred to as the master
transceiver block and slave transceiver block, with four channels each.
Figure 2–27 shows the receiver datapath clocking in PCIe ×8 bonded channel
configuration.
Figure 2–27. Receiver Datapath Clocking in x8 Bonded Channel Configuration (1)
Note to Figure 2–27:
(1) The red lines represent the FPGA fabric-Transceiver interface clock, the green lines represent the low-speed parallel clock, the dark red lines
represent the parallel recovered clock, and the blue lines represent the serial recovered clock.
Master Transceiver Block
Slave Transceiver Block
/2
/2
Receiver Channel PCS
/2
Receiver Channel PCS Receiver Channel PMA
rx_coreclk[7:4]
PCIe
hard IP
PIPE
Interface
RX Phase
Compensation
FIFO
Byte
Ordering
Byte
De-
Serializer
8B/10B
Decoder
Rate
Match
FIFO
Word
Aligner
Receiver Channel PMA
De-
Serializer CDR
Parallel Recovered Clock
Low-Speed Parallel Clock from CMU0 Clock Divider
FPGA
Fabric
CMU1 Channel
CMU0 Channel
CMU1 PLL
CMU0 PLL
CMU1 Clock
Divider
CMU0 Clock
Divider
rx_coreclk[3:0]
PCIe
hard IP PIPE
Interface
RX Phase
Compensation
FIFO
Byte
Ordering
Byte
De-
Serializer
8B/10B
Decoder
Rate
Match
FIFO
Word
Aligner
De-
Serializer CDR
Parallel Recovered Clock
Low-Speed Parallel Clock from CMU0 Clock Divider
coreclkout
FPGA Fabric_Transceiver
Interface Clock Input
Reference
Clock
Input
Reference
Clock
CMU1 Channel
CMU0 Channel
CMU0 Clock
Divider
CMU1 Clock
Divider
CMU1 PLL
CMU0 PLL
Serial Recovered Clock
Input Reference Cloc
k
Serial Recovered Clock
Input Reference Clock
Chapter 2: Transceiver Clocking in Stratix IV Devices 2–49
Transceiver Channel Datapath Clocking
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
The CDR in each of the eight receiver channels recovers the serial clock from the
received data on that channel. The serial recovered clock is divided within each
channel’s receiver PMA to generate the parallel recovered clock. The deserializer uses
the serial recovered clock in the receiver PMA. The parallel recovered clock and
deserialized data from the receiver PMA in each channel is forwarded to the receiver
PCS in that channel.
The parallel recovered clock from the receiver PMA in each channel clocks the word
aligner and the write side of the rate matcher FIFO in that channel. The low-speed
parallel clock from the
CMU0
clock divider of the master transceiver block clocks the
read port of the rate match FIFO, the 8B/10B decoder, and the write port of the byte
deserializer (if enabled) in all eight channels. The low-speed parallel clock or its
divide-by-two version (if byte deserializer is enabled) clocks the write port of the
receiver phase compensation FIFO in all eight channels. It is also driven on the
coreclkout
port as the FPGA fabric-Transceiver interface clock. You can use the
coreclkout
signal to latch the receiver data and status signals in the FPGA fabric for
all eight bonded channels.
Table 2–13 lists the receiver datapath clock frequencies in PCIe ×8 functional mode.
Basic (PMA Direct) Mode Channel Configurations
Figure 2–28 shows six channels in a transceiver block configured in Basic (PMA
Direct) functional mode with two of the channels being CMU channels. The receiver
channel PMA directly interfaces to the user logic in the FPGA fabric. The CDR
recovers the high-speed serial clock and low-speed parallel clock for the deserializer.
The low-speed parallel clock is forwarded to the FPGA fabric as
rx_clkout
.
1Bonded mode is not available for receivers configured in Basic (PMA Direct)
functional mode. Data registers to capture the receiver data in the FPGA fabric for
each channel must be clocked by
rx_clkout
forwarded by that channel’s CDR.
Table 2–13. Receiver Datapath Clock Frequencies PCIe x8 Functional Mode
Functional Mode Data Rate
(Gbps)
Serial Recovered
Clock Frequency
(GHz)
Parallel Recovered
Clock and Parallel
Transmitter PCS Clock
Frequency (MHz)
FPGA Fabric-Transceiver
Interface Clock Frequency
Without Byte
Deserializer
(MHz)
With Byte
Deserializer
(MHz)
PCIe ×8 (Gen 1) 2.5 1.25 250 250 125
PCIe ×8 (Gen 2) 5 2.5 500 N/A 250
2–50 Chapter 2: Transceiver Clocking in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Channel Datapath Clocking
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Figure 2–28. Receiver Channel PMA Directly Interfacing to the User Logic in the FPGA Fabric (1)
Note to Figure 2–28:
(1) The green lines represent the low-speed parallel clock and the blue lines represent the serial recovered clock.
De-
Serializer CDR
FPGA
Fabric
rx_clkout[5]
Channel 3
De-
Serializer CDR
rx_clkout[4]
Channel 2
De-
Serializer CDR
rx_clkout[3]
CMU1_Channel
De-
Serializer CDR
rx_clkout[2]
CMU0_Channel
De-
Serializer CDR
rx_clkout[1]
Channel 1
De-
Serializer CDR
rx_clkout[0]
Channel 0
Low-Speed Parallel Clock
Low-Speed Parallel Clock
Low-Speed Parallel Clock
Low-Speed Parallel Clock
Low-Speed Parallel Clock
Low-Speed Parallel Clock
Receiver Channel PCS
Receiver Channel PCS
Receiver Channel PCS
Receiver Channel PCS
Receiver Channel PMA
Receiver Channel PMA
Receiver Channel PMA
Receiver Channel PMA
Receiver Channel PMA
Receiver Channel PMA
High-Speed Serial Cloc
k
High-Speed Serial Clock
High-Speed Serial Cloc
k
High-Speed Serial Clock
High-Speed Serial Clock
High-Speed Serial Cloc
k
Chapter 2: Transceiver Clocking in Stratix IV Devices 2–51
FPGA Fabric-Transceiver Interface Clocking
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
FPGA Fabric-Transceiver Interface Clocking
The FPGA fabric-Transceiver interface clocks consist of clock signals from the FPGA
fabric to the transceiver blocks and clock signals from the transceiver blocks to the
FPGA fabric. These clock resources use the clock networks in the FPGA core that
include the global, regional, and periphery clock networks.
The FPGA fabric-Transceiver interface clocks can be subdivided into the following
three categories:
■Input Reference Clocks—Refer to “Input Reference Clock Source” on page 2–3.
■Transceiver Datapath Interface Clocks—are used to transfer data, control, and
status signals between the FPGA fabric and the transceiver channels. The
transceiver channel forwards the
tx_clkout
signal (in non-bonded modes) or the
coreclkout
signal (in bonded channel modes) to the FPGA fabric to clock the data
and control signals into the transmitter. The transceiver channel also forwards the
recovered
rx_clkout
clock (in configurations without rate matcher) or
tx_clkout/coreclkout
(in configurations with rate matcher) to the FPGA fabric to
clock the data and status signals from the receiver into the FPGA fabric.
■Other Transceiver Clocks—The following transceiver clocks form a part of the
FPGA fabric-Transceiver interface clocks:
■
cal_blk_clk
—calibration block clock
■
fixed_clk
—125 MHz fixed-rate clock used in the PCIe receiver detect circuitry
and for the adaptive equalization (AEQ) block
■
reconfig_clk
—clock used for transceiver dynamic reconfiguration (for more
information, refer to Table 2–5 on page 2–9)
1In Basic (PMA Direct) functional mode, only
tx_clkout
and
rx_clkout
are available
to clock the logic in the core. In bonded mode, you may use
tx_clkout
of one of the
channels to clock all of the channels. For receivers in bonded mode, you must use
separate
rx_clkout
for each channel.
Table 2–14 lists the FPGA fabric-Transceiver interface clocks.
Table 2–14. FPGA Fabric-Transceiver Interface Clocks (Note 1) (Part 1 of 2)
Clock Name Clock Description Interface Direction FPGA Fabric Clock
Resource Utilization (1)
pll_inclk
CMU PLL input reference clock when
driven from an FPGA CLK input pin FPGA fabric-to-transceiver Global clock
rx_cruclk
Receiver CDR input reference clock when
driven from an FPGA CLK input pin FPGA fabric-to-transceiver Global clock, Regional
clock
tx_clkout
Phase compensation FIFO clock Transceiver-to-FPGA fabric Global clock, Regional
clock, Periphery clock
coreclkout
Phase compensation FIFO clock Transceiver-to-FPGA fabric Global clock, Regional
clock, Periphery clock
rx_clkout
Phase compensation FIFO clock Transceiver-to-FPGA fabric Global clock, Regional
clock, Periphery clock
fixed_clk
PCIe receiver detect clock FPGA fabric-to-transceiver Global clock, Regional
clock
2–52 Chapter 2: Transceiver Clocking in Stratix IV Devices
FPGA Fabric-Transceiver Interface Clocking
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
“FPGA Fabric-Transmitter Interface Clocking” on page 2–52 and “FPGA
Fabric-Receiver Interface Clocking” on page 2–61 describe the criteria and
methodology to share transmitter and receiver phase compensation FIFO clocks in
order to reduce the global, regional, and periphery clock resource usage in your
design.
FPGA Fabric-Transmitter Interface Clocking
The transmitter phase compensation FIFO compensates for the phase difference
between the FPGA fabric clock (phase compensation FIFO write clock) and the
parallel transmitter PCS clock (phase compensation FIFO read clock). The transmitter
phase compensation FIFO write clock forms the FPGA fabric-Transmitter interface
clock. The phase compensation FIFO write clock and read clocks must have exactly
the same frequency (0 parts-per-million [PPM] frequency difference).
Stratix IV transceivers provide the following two options for selecting the transmitter
phase compensation FIFO write clock:
■“Quartus II-Selected Transmitter Phase Compensation FIFO Write Clock”
■“User-Selected Transmitter Phase Compensation FIFO Write Clock” on page 2–58
1User-selection is provided to share transceiver datapath interface clocks in order to
reduce the global, regional, and periphery clock resource usage in your design.
Quartus II-Selected Transmitter Phase Compensation FIFO Write Clock
If you do not select the
tx_coreclk
port in the ALTGX MegaWizard™ Plug-In
Manager, the Quartus II software automatically selects the transmitter phase
compensation FIFO write clock for each channel in that ALTGX instance. The
Quartus II software selects the FIFO write clock depending on the channel
configuration.
Non-Bonded Channel Configuration
In a non-bonded channel configuration, the transmitter channels may or may not be
identical. Identical transmitter channels are defined as channels that have exactly the
same CMU PLL input reference clock source, exactly the same CMU PLL
configuration, and exactly the same transmitter PMA and PCS configuration.
1Identical transmitter channels may have different transmitter voltage output
differential (VOD), transmitter common mode voltage (VCM), or pre-emphasis setting.
reconfig_clk (2) Transceiver dynamic reconfiguration
clock FPGA fabric-to-transceiver Global clock
cal_blk_clk Transceiver calibration block clock FPGA fabric-to-transceiver Global clock, Regional
clock
Notes to Table 2–11:
(1) For more information about global, regional, and periphery clock resources available in each device, refer to the Clock Networks and PLLs in
Stratix IV Devices chapter.
(2) Ensure that the
reconfig_clk
is a free-running clock that is not derived from the transceiver blocks.
Table 2–14. FPGA Fabric-Transceiver Interface Clocks (Note 1) (Part 2 of 2)
Clock Name Clock Description Interface Direction FPGA Fabric Clock
Resource Utilization (1)
Chapter 2: Transceiver Clocking in Stratix IV Devices 2–53
FPGA Fabric-Transceiver Interface Clocking
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Example 3: Two Groups of Two Identical Channels in a Transceiver Block
Example 3 assumes channels 0 and 1, driven by
CMU0_PLL
in a transceiver block, are
identical. Also, channels 2 and 3, driven by
CMU1_PLL
in the same transceiver block,
are identical. In this case, the Quartus II software automatically drives the write port
of the transmitter phase compensation FIFO in channels 0 and 1 with the
tx_clkout[0]
signal. It also drives the write port of the transmitter phase
compensation FIFO in channels 2 and 3 with the
tx_clkout[2]
signal. Use the
tx_clkout[0]
signal to clock the transmitter data and control logic for channels 0
and 1 in the FPGA fabric. Use the
tx_clkout[2]
signal to clock the transmitter data
and control logic for channels 2 and 3 in the FPGA fabric.
1This configuration uses two FPGA global and/or regional clock resources, one for the
tx_clkout[0]
signal and the other for the
tx_clkout[2]
signal.
2–54 Chapter 2: Transceiver Clocking in Stratix IV Devices
FPGA Fabric-Transceiver Interface Clocking
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Figure 2–29 shows the FPGA fabric-Transmitter interface clocking for Example 3.
Figure 2–29. FPGA Fabric-Transmitter Interface Clocking for Example 3 (1)
Note to Figure 2–29:
(1) The green lines represent the low-speed parallel clock and the blue lines represent the high-speed serial clock.
/2
wrclk rdclk
Transmitter Channel PCS Transmitter Channel PMA
/2
wrclk rdclk
/2
wrclk rdclk
/2
wrclk rdclk
Transmitter Channel PCS Transmitter Channel PMA
Transmitter Channel PCS Transmitter Channel PMA
Transmitter Channel PMA
Transmitter Channel PCS
Channel 3
TX Data
and Control
Logic
tx_coreclk[3]
Channel 2
TX Data
and Control
Logic
TX Phase
Compensation
FIFO
TX Phase
Compensation
FIFO
Channel 3
Channel 2
Local Clock
Divider Block
Local Clock
Divider Block
tx_clkout[2]
tx_coreclk[2]
FPGA
Fabric
Input
Reference
Clock
Input
Reference
Clock
CMU1 PLL
CMU0 PLL
CMU1
Clock
DIvider
CMU0
Clock
DIvider
CMU1 Channel
CMU0 Channel
Channel 1
Channel 1
TX Data
and Control
Logic
tx_coreclk[1]
TX Phase
Compensation
FIFO
Local Clock
Divider Block
Channel 0
Local Clock
Divider Block
Low-Speed Parallel Clock
TX Phase
Compensation
FIFO
Channel 0
TX Data
and Control
Logic
tx_coreclk[0]
tx_clkout[0]
Low-Speed Parallel Clock
Low-Speed Parallel Clock
Low-Speed Parallel Clock
High-Speed Serial Clock
Chapter 2: Transceiver Clocking in Stratix IV Devices 2–55
FPGA Fabric-Transceiver Interface Clocking
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Bonded Channel Configuration
In ×4 and ×8 bonded channel configurations, all channels within the transceiver block
are identical. The Quartus II software automatically drives the write port of the
transmitter phase compensation FIFO in all channels with the
coreclkout
signal. Use
the
coreclkout
signal to clock the transmitter data and control logic for all four
channels in the FPGA fabric.
Figure 2–30 shows the FPGA fabric-Transmitter interface clocking in a ×4 bonded
channel configuration.
Figure 2–30. FPGA Fabric-Transmitter Interface Clocking in a x4 Bonded Channel Configuration (1)
Note to Figure 2–30:
(1) The green lines represent the parallel PCS clock.
/2
wrclk rdclk
Transmitter Channel PCS
/2
wrclk rdclk
/2
wrclk rdclk
Parallel PCS Clock
/2
wrclk rdclk
/2
Transmitter Channel PCS
Transmitter Channel PCS
Transmitter Channel PCS
Channel 3
TX Data
and Control
Logic
tx_coreclk[3]
TX Phase
Compensation
FIFO
Channel 3
Channel 2
Parallel PCS Clock
Parallel PCS Clock
TX Phase
Compensation
FIFO
Channel 2
TX Data
and Control
Logic
tx_coreclk[2]
coreclkout
FPGA
Fabric
Input
Reference
Clock
CMU1 PLL
CMU0 PLL
CMU0
Clock
Divider
CMU1 Channel
CMU0 Channel
Channel 1
Channel 0
Parallel PCS Clock
TX Phase
Compensation
FIFO
TX Phase
Compensation
FIFO
Channel 1
TX Data
and Control
Logic
Channel 0
TX Data
and Control
Logic
tx_coreclk[1]
tx_coreclk[0]
2–56 Chapter 2: Transceiver Clocking in Stratix IV Devices
FPGA Fabric-Transceiver Interface Clocking
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Limitations of the Quartus II Software-Selected Transmitter Phase Compensation FIFO Write
Clock
The Quartus II software uses a single
tx_clkout
signal to clock the transmitter phase
compensation FIFO write port of all identical channels within a transceiver block.
This results in one global and/or regional clock resource being used for each group of
identical channels within a transceiver block.
For identical channels located across the transceiver blocks, the Quartus II software
does not use a single
tx_clkout
signal to clock the write port of the transmitter phase
compensation FIFOs for all channels. It uses one
tx_clkout
signal for each group of
identical channels per transceiver block. This results in higher global and regional
clock resource usage.
Example 4: Sixteen Identical Channels Across Four Transceiver Blocks
Figure 2–31 shows 16 identical transmitter channels located across four transceiver
blocks. The Quartus II software uses
tx_clkout
from Channel 0 in each transceiver
block to clock the write port of the transmitter phase compensation FIFO in all four
channels in that transceiver block. This results in four global and/or regional clock
resources being used, one for each transceiver block.
Chapter 2: Transceiver Clocking in Stratix IV Devices 2–57
FPGA Fabric-Transceiver Interface Clocking
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Figure 2–31. Sixteen Identical Channels Across Four Transceiver Blocks for Example 4 (1)
Note to Figure 2–31:
(1) The red lines represent
tx_clkout[12]
, the blue lines represent
tx_clkout[8]
, the green lines represent
tx_clkout[4]
, and the brown lines
represent
tx_clkout[0]
.
Channel [15:12]
TX Data
and Control
Logic
tx_coreclk[15:12]
tx_clkout[12]
Transceiver Block GXBR3
Channel 3
Channel 2
Channel 1
Channel 0
Channel 3
Channel 2
Channel 1
Channel 0
Transceiver Block GXBR2
t
x_clkout
[
8
]
tx_clkout[8]
tx_coreclk[11:8]
Channel [11:8]
TX Data
and Control
Logic
FPGA
Fabric
Channel [7:4]
TX Data
and Control
Logic
tx_coreclk[7:4]
Channel 3
Channel 2
Channel 1
Channel 0
Transceiver Block GXBR1
tx_clkout[4]
Transceiver Block GXBR0
Channel 3
Channel 2
Channel 1
Channel 0
tx_clkout[0]
tx_coreclk[3:0]
Channel [3:0]
TX Data
and Control
Logic
2–58 Chapter 2: Transceiver Clocking in Stratix IV Devices
FPGA Fabric-Transceiver Interface Clocking
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Because all 16 channels are identical, using a single
tx_clkout
to clock the transmitter
phase compensation FIFO in all 16 channels results in only one global or regional
clock resource being used instead of four. To achieve this, you must choose the
transmitter phase compensation FIFO write clocks instead of the Quartus II software
automatic selection, as described in “User-Selected Transmitter Phase Compensation
FIFO Write Clock” on page 2–58.
User-Selected Transmitter Phase Compensation FIFO Write Clock
The ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager provides an optional port named
tx_coreclk
for each instantiated transmitter channel. If you enable this port, the
Quartus II software does not automatically select the transmitter phase compensation
FIFO write clock source. Instead, the signal that you drive on the
tx_coreclk
port of
the channel clocks the write side of its transmitter phase compensation FIFO.
Use the flexibility of selecting the transmitter phase compensation FIFO write clock to
reduce global and regional clock resource usage. You can connect the
tx_coreclk
ports of all identical channels in your design and drive them using a common clock
driver that has 0 PPM frequency difference with respect to the FIFO read clocks of
these channels. Use the common clock driver to clock the transmitter data and control
logic in the FPGA fabric for all identical channels. This FPGA fabric-Transceiver
interface clocking scheme uses only one global or regional clock resource for all
identical channels in your design.
Example 5: Sixteen Identical Channels Across Four Transceiver Blocks
Figure 2–32 shows 16 identical transmitter channels located across four transceiver
blocks. The
tx_coreclk
ports of all 16 transmitter channels are connected together
and driven by a common clock driver. This common clock driver also drives the
transmitter data and control logic of all 16 transmitter channels in the FPGA fabric.
You use only one global or regional clock resource with this clocking scheme,
compared to four global and regional clock resources needed without the
tx_coreclk
ports (the Quartus II software-selected transmitter phase compensation FIFO write
clock).
Chapter 2: Transceiver Clocking in Stratix IV Devices 2–59
FPGA Fabric-Transceiver Interface Clocking
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Common Clock Driver Selection Rules
The common clock driver driving the
tx_coreclk
ports of all identical channels must
have 0 PPM frequency difference with respect to the transmitter phase compensation
FIFO read clocks of these channels. If there is any frequency difference between the
FIFO write clock (
tx_coreclk
) and the FIFO read clock, the FIFO overflows or
under-runs, resulting in corrupted data transfer between the FPGA fabric and the
transmitter.
Figure 2–32. Sixteen Identical Channels Across Four Transceiver Blocks for Example 5
Channel [15:12]
TX Data
and Control
Logic
Common
Clock Driver
tx_coreclk[15:12]
tx_clkout[12]
Transceiver Block
GXBR3
Channel 3
Channel 2
Channel 1
Channel 0
Transceiver Block
GXBR
2
Channel 3
Channel 2
Channel 1
Channel 0
tx_clkout[8]
tx_coreclk[11:8]
Channel [11:8]
TX Data
and Control
Logic
FPGA
Fabric
Channel [7:4]
TX Data
and Control
Logic
tx_coreclk[7:4]
tx_clkout[4]
Transceiver Block
GXBR
1
Channel 3
Channel 2
Channel 1
Channel 0
Transceiver Block
GXBR
0
Channel 3
Channel 2
Channel 1
Channel 0
tx_clkout[0]
tx_coreclk[3:0]
Channel [3:0]
TX Data
and Control
Logic
2–60 Chapter 2: Transceiver Clocking in Stratix IV Devices
FPGA Fabric-Transceiver Interface Clocking
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Table 2–15 lists the transmitter phase compensation FIFO read clocks that the
Quartus II software selects in various configurations.
To ensure that you understand the 0 PPM clock driver rule, the Quartus II software
expects the following set of user assignments whenever you use the
tx_coreclk
port
to drive the transmitter phase compensation FIFO write clock:
■GXB 0 PPM Core Clock Setting
1Failing to make this assignment correctly when using the
tx_coreclk
port results in a
Quartus II compilation error.
The GXB 0 PPM core clock setting allows the following clock drivers to drive the
tx_coreclk
ports:
■
tx_clkout
in non-bonded channel configurations
■
coreclkout
in bonded channel configurations
■
FPGA_CLK
input pins
■Transceiver
refclk
pins
■Clock output from left and right and top and bottom PLLs (
PLL_L
,
PLL_R
, and
PLL_T
,
PLL_B
)
1The Quartus II software does not allow gated clocks or clocks generated in FPGA
logic to drive the
tx_coreclk
ports.
Because the GXB 0 PPM core clock setting allows the FPGA CLK input pins and
transceiver
refclk
pins as the clock driver, the Quartus II compiler cannot determine
if there is a 0 PPM difference between the FIFO write clock and read clock for each
channel.
1You must ensure that the clock driver for all connected
tx_coreclk
ports has a 0 PPM
difference with respect to the FIFO read clock in those channels.
Table 2–15. Transmitter Phase Compensation FIFO Read Clocks
Configuration
Transmitter Phase Compensation FIFO Read Clock
Without Byte Serializer With Byte Serializer
Non-Bonded Channel
Configuration
Parallel transmitter PCS clock from the local
clock divider in the associated channel
(
tx_clkout
)
Divide-by-two version of the parallel transmitter PCS
clock from the local clock divider in the associated
channel (
tx_clkout
)
×4 Bonded Channel
Configuration
Low-speed parallel clock from the
CMU0
clock divider of the associated transceiver
block (
coreclkout
)
Divide-by-two version of the low-speed parallel
clock from the
CMU0
clock divider of the associated
transceiver block (
coreclkout
)
×8 Bonded Channel
Configuration
Low-speed parallel clock from the
CMU0
clock divider of the master transceiver block
(
coreclkout
from master transceiver block)
Divide-by-two version of the low-speed parallel
clock from the
CMU0
clock divider of the master
transceiver block (
coreclkout
from master
transceiver block)
Chapter 2: Transceiver Clocking in Stratix IV Devices 2–61
FPGA Fabric-Transceiver Interface Clocking
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Table 2–16 lists the Quartus II assignments that you must make in the assignment
editor.
For more implementation information, refer to “Configuration Example 2:
Configuring Sixteen Identical Channels Across Four Transceiver Blocks” on
page 2–75.
Basic (PMA Direct) mode
In Basic (PMA Direct) mode, each channel must be clocked by its own
tx_clkout
. As a
result, the number of global and/or regional clock resources required is significantly
higher. In Basic (PMA Direct) ×N mode, to save on global and/or regional clock
resources, you may use
tx_clkout
from centrally located channels to clock all the
channels. The
coreclkout
port is not available in Basic (PMA Direct) ×N mode.
FPGA Fabric-Receiver Interface Clocking
The receiver phase compensation FIFO compensates for the phase difference between
the parallel receiver PCS clock (FIFO write clock) and the FPGA fabric clock (FIFO
read clock). The receiver phase compensation FIFO read clock forms the FPGA
fabric-Receiver interface clock. The FIFO write clock and read clock must have exactly
the same frequency (0 PPM frequency difference).
Stratix IV transceivers provide the following two options for selecting the receiver
phase compensation FIFO read clock:
■“Quartus II Software-Selected Receiver Phase Compensation FIFO Read Clock” on
page 2–62
■“User-Selected Receiver Phase Compensation FIFO Read Clock” on page 2–68
1User-selection is provided to share transceiver datapath interface clocks in order to
reduce the global, regional, and periphery clock resource usage in your design.
Table 2–16. Quartus II Assignments
From
Full design hierarchy name of one of the following clock drivers that you choose to drive the
tx_coreclk
ports of all identical channels (1):
■
tx_clkout
■
coreclkout
■FPGA CLK input pins
■Transceiver
refclk
pins
■Clock output from the left and right or top and bottom PLLs
■
tx_dataout
port of one of the identical channels
To
tx_dataout
pins of all identical channels whose
tx_coreclk
ports are connected together and
driven by the 0 PPM clock driver.
Assignment Name GXB 0 PPM Core Clock Setting
Value ON
Note to Table 2–13:
(1) You can find the full hierarchy name of the 0 PPM clock driver using the Node Finder feature in the Quartus II Assignment Editor.
2–62 Chapter 2: Transceiver Clocking in Stratix IV Devices
FPGA Fabric-Transceiver Interface Clocking
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Quartus II Software-Selected Receiver Phase Compensation FIFO Read Clock
If you do not select the
rx_coreclk
port in the ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager,
the Quartus II software automatically selects the receiver phase compensation FIFO
read clock for each channel in that ALTGX instance. The Quartus II software selects
the FIFO read clock depending on the channel configuration. In non-bonded channel
configurations, the FPGA fabric-receiver interface clocking has two scenarios:
■Receivers that do not use a rate matcher block (refer to “Non-Bonded Receiver
Clocking Without Rate Matcher” on page 2–39)
■Receivers that use a rate matcher block (refer to “Non-Bonded Receiver Clocking
with Rate Matcher” on page 2–41)
Non-Bonded Channel Configuration with Rate Matcher
In non-bonded channel configuration, the transceiver channels may or may not be
identical. Identical transceiver channels are defined as channels that have exactly the
same CMU PLL and receiver CDR input reference clock sources, exactly the same
CMU PLL and receiver CDR configuration, and exactly the same PMA and PCS
configuration.
Example 6: Two Groups of Two Identical Channels in a Transceiver Block
Example 6 assumes channels 0 and 1, driven by the
CMU0
PLL in a transceiver block,
are identical. Also, channels 2 and 3, driven by the
CMU1
PLL in the same transceiver
block, are identical. In this case, the Quartus II software automatically drives the read
port of the receiver phase compensation FIFO in channels 0 and 1 with the
tx_clkout[0]
signal. It also drives the read port of the receiver phase compensation
FIFO in channels 2 and 3 with the
tx_clkout[2]
signal. Use the
tx_clkout[0]
signal
to latch the receiver data and status signals from channels 0 and 1 in the FPGA fabric.
Use the
tx_clkout[2]
signal to latch the receiver data and status signals from
channels 2 and 3 in the FPGA fabric.
1This configuration uses two FPGA global and/or regional clock resources, one for the
tx_clkout[0]
signal and the other for the
tx_clkout[2]
signal.
Chapter 2: Transceiver Clocking in Stratix IV Devices 2–63
FPGA Fabric-Transceiver Interface Clocking
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Figure 2–33 shows the FPGA fabric-Receiver interface clocking for Example 6.
Figure 2–33. FPGA Fabric-Receiver Interface Clocking for Example 6 (1)
Note to Figure 2–33:
(1) The green lines represent the low-speed parallel clock and the blue lines represent the high-speed serial clock.
/2
rdclk wrclk
Receiver Channel PCS
Transmitter Channel PMA
/2
rdclk wrclk
Receiver Channel PCS
/2
rdclk wrclk
Receiver Channel PCS
RX Phase
Compensation
FIFO
/2
rdclk wrclk
Channel 0
Receiver Channel PCS
CMU1
PLL
CMU0
PLL
Receiver Channel PMA
Transmitter Channel PMA
Receiver Channel PMA
Transmitter Channel PMA
Receiver Channel PMA
Transmitter Channel PMA
Receiver Channel PMA
Channel 3
RX Data
and Status
Logic
rx_coreclk[3]
RX Phase
Compensation
FIFO
Low-Speed Parallel Clock
Channel 3
Local Clock
Divider Block
Channel 2
Local Clock
Divider Block
Low-Speed Parallel Clock
RX Phase
Compensation
FIFO
Channel 2
RX Data
and Status
Logic
rx_coreclk[2]
tx_clkout[2]
FPGA
Fabric
Reference
Clock
Reference
Clock
CMU1 Channel
CMU0 Channel
Channel 1
Low-Speed Parallel Clock
RX Phase
Compensation
FIFO
Channel 1
RX Data
and Status
Logic
rx_coreclk[1]
tx_clkout[0]
Channel 0
RX Data
and Status
Logic
Low-Speed Parallel Clock
Local Clock
Divider Block
Local Clock
Divider Block
rx_coreclk[0]
High-Speed Serial Clock
2–64 Chapter 2: Transceiver Clocking in Stratix IV Devices
FPGA Fabric-Transceiver Interface Clocking
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Non-Bonded Channel Configuration Without Rate Matcher
In non-bonded channel configuration without rate matcher, the Quartus II software
cannot determine if the incoming serial data in all channels have a 0 PPM frequency
difference. The Quartus II software automatically drives the read port of the receiver
phase compensation FIFO in each channel with the recovered clock driven on the
rx_clkout
port of that channel. Use the
rx_clkout
signal from each channel to latch
its receiver data and status signals in the FPGA fabric.
1This configuration uses one FPGA global, regional clock, or both, resource per
channel for the
rx_clkout
signal.
Chapter 2: Transceiver Clocking in Stratix IV Devices 2–65
FPGA Fabric-Transceiver Interface Clocking
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Figure 2–34 shows the FPGA fabric-Receiver interface clocking for non-bonded
channel configurations without rate matcher.
Bonded Channel Configuration
All bonded transceiver channel configurations have rate matcher in the receiver data
path. In ×4 and ×8 bonded channel configurations, the Quartus II software
automatically drives the read port of the receiver phase compensation FIFO in all
channels with the
coreclkout
signal (from the master transceiver block in the case of
×8 bonded mode). Use the
coreclkout
signal to latch the receiver data and status
signals from all channels in the FPGA fabric.
Figure 2–34. FPGA Fabric-Receiver Interface Clocking for Non-Bonded Channel Configurations Without Rate Matcher (1)
Note to Figure 2–34:
(1) The red lines represent
rx_clkout[3]
, the blue lines represent
rx_clkout[2]
, the green lines represent
rx_clkout[1]
, and the brown lines
represent
rx_clkout[0]
.
/2
rdclk wrclk
Parallel Recovered Clock
Receiver Channel PCS
Receiver Channel PMA
/2
rdclk wrclk
Receiver Channel PCS
/2
Receiver Channel PCS
/2
Receiver Channel PCS
Receiver PMA
Receiver Channel PMA
Receiver PMA
Receiver Channel PMA
Receiver PMA
CDR
Receiver Channel PMA
Channel 3
RX Data
and Status
Logic
rx_coreclk[3]
RX Phase
Compensation
FIFO
rx_clkout[3]
Channel 3
CDR rx_datain[3]
Channel 2
RX Data
and Status
Logic
rx_coreclk[2]
RX Phase
Compensation
FIFO
Parallel Recovered Clock
Channel 2
CDR rx_datain[2]
Channel 1
rx_datain[1]
CDR
Parallel Recovered Clock
FPGA
Fabric
Channel 1
RX Data
and Status
Logic
rx_coreclk[1]
rx_clkout[2]
rx_clkout[1]
Channel 0
RX Data
and Status
Logic
rx_coreclk[0]
rx_clkout[0]
Channel 0
Parallel Recovered Clock rx_datain[0]
Input Reference Clock
Input Reference Clock
Input Reference Clock
rdclk wrclk
RX Phase
Compensation
FIFO
rdclk wrclk
RX Phase
Compensation
FIFO
2–66 Chapter 2: Transceiver Clocking in Stratix IV Devices
FPGA Fabric-Transceiver Interface Clocking
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
1This configuration uses one FPGA global and/or regional clock resource per bonded
link for the
coreclkout
signal.
Figure 2–35 shows the FPGA fabric-Receiver interface clocking in ×4 bonded channel
configuration.
Limitations of the Quartus II Software-Selected Receiver Phase Compensation FIFO Read
Clock
In non-bonded channel configurations without rate matcher, the Quartus II software
cannot determine if the incoming serial data in all channels has a 0 PPM frequency
difference. The Quartus II software uses the recovered clock
rx_clkout
signal from
each channel to clock the read port of its receiver phase compensation FIFO. This
results in one global, regional, or global and regional clock resource being used per
channel for the
rx_clkout
signal.
Figure 2–35. FPGA Fabric-Receiver Interface Clocking in a x4 Bonded Channel Configuration (1)
Note to Figure 2–35:
(1) The green lines represent low-speed parallel clock from the
CMU0
clock divider.
/2
rdclk wrclk
Transmitter Channel PCS
/2
Transmitter Channel PCS
/2
rdclk wrclk
Transmitter Channel PCS
/2
/2
Channel 3
RX Data
and Status
Logic
rx_coreclk[3]
RX Phase
Compensation
FIFO
Channel 3
Channel 2
Channel 2
RX Data
and Status
Logic
rx_coreclk[2]
FPGA
Fabric
coreclkout
Reference
Clock
CMU1
PLL
CMU0
PLL
CMU0
Clock
Divider
CMU1 Channel
CMU0 Channel
Channel 1
Channel 0
Transmitter Channel PCS
RX Phase
Compensation
FIFO
Channel 1
RX Data
and Status
Logic
Channel 0
RX Data
and Status
Logic
rx_coreclk[1]
rx_coreclk[0]
Low-Speed Parallel Clock
from CMU0 Clock Divider
Low-Speed Parallel Clock
from CMU0 Clock Divider
Low-Speed Parallel Clock
from CMU0 Clock Divider
Low-Speed Parallel Clock
from CMU0 Clock Divider
rdclk wrclk
RX Phase
Compensation
FIFO
rdclk wrclk
RX Phase
Compensation
FIFO
rdclk wrclk
RX Phase
Compensation
FIFO
Chapter 2: Transceiver Clocking in Stratix IV Devices 2–67
FPGA Fabric-Transceiver Interface Clocking
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Example 7: Sixteen Channels Across Four Transceiver Blocks
Figure 2–36 shows 16 non-bonded receiver channels without rate matcher, located
across four transceiver blocks. The incoming serial data to all 16 channels have a
0 PPM frequency difference with respect to each other. The Quartus II software uses
rx_clkout
from each channel to clock the read port of its receiver phase compensation
FIFO. This results in 16 global, regional, or global and regional clock resources being
used, one for each channel.
Figure 2–36. Sixteen Non-Bonded Receiver Channels without Rate Match for Example 7
Channel [15:12]
RX Data
and Status
Logic
rx_coreclk[15]
rx_coreclk[14]
rx_coreclk[13]
rx_coreclk[12]
rx_clkout[15]
rx_clkout[14]
rx_clkout[13]
rx_clkout[12]
Transceiver Block GXBR3
Channel 3
Channel 2
Channel 1
Channel 0
Channel [11:8]
RX Data
and Status
Logic
rx_clkout[11]
rx_clkout[10]
rx_clkout[9]
rx_clkout[8]
rx_coreclk[11]
rx_coreclk[10]
rx_coreclk[9]
rx_coreclk[8]
Transceiver Block GXBR2
Channel 3
Channel 2
Channel 1
Channel 0
FPGA
Fabric
Channel [7:4]
RX Data
and Status
Logic
rx_coreclk[7]
rx_coreclk[6]
rx_coreclk[5]
rx_coreclk[4]
rx_clkout[7]
rx_clkout[6]
rx_clkout[5]
rx_clkout[4]
Transceiver Block GXBR1
Channel 3
Channel 2
Channel 1
Channel 0
Channel 3
Channel 2
Channel 1
Channel 0
Transceiver Block GXBR0
Channel [3:0]
RX Data
and Status
Logic
rx_coreclk[3]
rx_coreclk[2]
rx_coreclk[1]
rx_coreclk[0]
rx_clkout[3]
rx_clkout[2]
rx_clkout[1]
rx_clkout[0]
2–68 Chapter 2: Transceiver Clocking in Stratix IV Devices
FPGA Fabric-Transceiver Interface Clocking
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Because the recovered clock
rx_clkout
signals from all 16 channels have a 0 PPM
frequency difference, you can use a single
rx_clkout
to clock the receiver phase
compensation FIFO in all 16 channels. This results in only one global, regional, or
global and regional clock resource being used instead of 16. To achieve this, you must
select the receiver phase compensation FIFO read clocks instead of the Quartus II
software default selection, as described in “User-Selected Receiver Phase
Compensation FIFO Read Clock” on page 2–68.
User-Selected Receiver Phase Compensation FIFO Read Clock
The ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager provides an optional port named
rx_coreclk
for each instantiated receiver channel. If you enable this port, the
Quartus II software does not automatically select the receiver phase compensation
FIFO read clock source. Instead, the signal that you drive on the
rx_coreclk
port of
the channel clocks the read side of its receiver phase compensation FIFO.
You can use the flexibility of selecting the receiver phase compensation FIFO read
clock to reduce the global, regional, or global and regional clock resource usage. You
can connect the
rx_coreclk
ports of all the receiver channels in your design and drive
them using a common clock driver that has a 0 PPM frequency difference with respect
to the FIFO write clocks of these channels. Use this common clock driver to latch the
receiver data and status signals in the FPGA fabric for these channels. This FPGA
fabric-Transceiver interface clocking scheme uses only one global, regional, or global
and regional clock resource for all channels.
Example 8: Sixteen Identical Channels Across Four Transceiver Blocks
Figure 2–37 shows 16 channels located across four transceiver blocks. The incoming
serial data to all 16 channels has a 0 PPM frequency difference with respect to each
other. The
rx_coreclk
ports of all 16 channels are connected together and driven by a
common clock driver. This common clock driver also latches the receiver data and
status logic of all 16 receiver channels in the FPGA fabric. Only one global, regional, or
global and regional clock resource is used with this clocking scheme, compared to 16
global, regional, or global and regional clock resources needed without the
rx_coreclk
ports (the Quartus II software-selected receiver phase compensation FIFO
read clock).
Chapter 2: Transceiver Clocking in Stratix IV Devices 2–69
FPGA Fabric-Transceiver Interface Clocking
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Common Clock Driver Selection Rules
The common clock driver driving the
rx_coreclk
ports of all channels must have a
0 PPM frequency difference with respect to the receiver phase compensation FIFO
write clocks of these channels. If there is any frequency difference between the FIFO
read clock (
rx_coreclk
) and the FIFO write clock, the FIFO overflows or under-runs,
resulting in corrupted data transfer between the FPGA fabric and the receiver.
Figure 2–37. Sixteen Identical Channels Across Four Transceiver Blocks for Example 8
Common
Clock Driver
Channel [15:12]
RX Data
and Status
Logic
rx_coreclk[15:12]
rx_clkout[15:12]
Transceiver Block GXBR3
Channel 3
Channel 2
Channel 1
Channel 0
Channel 3
Channel 2
Channel 1
Channel 0
Transceiver Block GXBR2
rx_clkout[11:8]
rx_coreclk[11:8]
Channel [11:8]
RX Data
and Status
Logic
FPGA
Fabric
Channel [7:4]
RX Data
and Status
Logic
Transceiver Block GXBR1
Channel 3
Channel 2
Channel 1
Channel 0
rx_clkout[7:4]
rx_coreclk[7:4]
Channel [3:0]
RX Data
and Status
Logic
rx_coreclk[3:0]
rx_clkout[3:0]
Transceiver Block GXBR0
Channel 3
Channel 2
Channel 1
Channel 0
2–70 Chapter 2: Transceiver Clocking in Stratix IV Devices
FPGA Fabric-Transceiver Interface Clocking
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Table 2–17 lists the receiver phase compensation FIFO write clocks that the Quartus II
software selects in various configurations.
To ensure that you understand the 0 PPM clock driver rule, the Quartus II software
expects the following user assignment whenever you use the
rx_coreclk
port to drive
the receiver phase compensation FIFO read clock:
■GXB 0 PPM Core Clock Setting
1Failing to make this assignment correctly when using the
rx_coreclk
port results in a
Quartus II compilation error.
The GXB 0 PPM core clock setting user assignment allows the following clock
drivers to drive the
rx_coreclk
ports:
■
tx_clkout
in non-bonded channel configurations with rate matcher
■
tx_clkout
and
rx_clkout
in non-bonded configurations without rate matcher
■
coreclkout
in bonded channel configurations
■FPGA CLK input pins
■Transceiver
refclk
pins
■Clock output from left and right and top and bottom PLLs (
PLL_L
,
PLL_R
, and
PLL_T
,
PLL_B
)
1The Quartus II software does not allow gated clocks or clocks generated in FPGA
logic to drive the
tx_coreclk
ports.
Because the 0 PPM clock group assignment allows the FPGA CLK input pins and
transceiver
refclk
pins as the clock driver, the Quartus II compiler cannot determine
if there is a 0 PPM difference between the FIFO write clock and read clock for each
channel.
Table 2–17. Receiver Phase Compensation FIFO Write Clocks
Configuration
Receiver Phase Compensation FIFO Write Clock
Without Byte Serializer With Byte Serializer
Non-Bonded Channel
Configuration with rate
matcher
Low-speed parallel clock from the local
clock divider in the associated channel
(
tx_clkout
)
Divide-by-two version of the low-speed
parallel clock from the local clock divider in
the associated channel (
tx_clkout
)
Non-Bonded Channel
Configuration without rate
matcher
Parallel recovered clock from the receiver
PMA in the associated channel
(
rx_clkout
)
Divide-by-two version of the parallel
recovered clock from the receiver PMA in the
associated channel (
rx_clkout
)
×4-Bonded Channel
Configuration
Low-speed parallel clock from the
CMU0
clock divider of the associated transceiver
block (
coreclkout
)
Divide-by-two version of the low-speed
parallel clock from the
CMU0
clock divider of
the associated transceiver block
(
coreclkout
)
×8-Bonded Channel
Configuration
Low-speed parallel clock from the
CMU0
clock divider of the master transceiver
block (
coreclkout
from the master
transceiver block)
Divide-by-two version of the low-speed
parallel clock from the
CMU0
clock divider of
the master transceiver block (
coreclkout
from the master transceiver block)
Chapter 2: Transceiver Clocking in Stratix IV Devices 2–71
Using the CMU/ATX PLL for Clocking User Logic in the FPGA Fabric
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
1You must ensure that the clock driver for all the connected
rx_coreclk
ports has a
0 PPM difference with respect to the FIFO write clock in those channels.
Table 2–18 lists the Quartus II assignments that you must make.
For more implementation details, refer to “Configuration Example 3: Configuring
Sixteen Channels Across Four Transceiver Blocks” on page 2–76.
Basic (PMA Direct) Mode
In Basic (PMA Direct) mode, each channel must be clocked by its own
rx_clkout
. As a
result, the number of global and/or regional clock resources required is significantly
higher. Bonding is not supported for receivers configured in Basic (PMA Direct)
functional mode.
Using the CMU/ATX PLL for Clocking User Logic in the FPGA Fabric
Some designs that use multiple clock domains may run out of PLLs in the FPGA
fabric. In such a scenario, if your design has CMU or ATX PLLs that are not being
used, it may be possible to use them for clocking user logic in the FPGA fabric.
However, the CMU PLLs and ATX PLLs do not have many features that are
supported by the PLLs in the FPGA fabric.
The following are the supported features on CMU PLLs and ATX PLLs used as PLLs
for clocking user logic in the FPGA fabric:
■Single clock output
■Programmable PLL bandwidth
■PLL PFD power down control
■Lock status signal
Table 2–18. Quartus II Assignments
From
Full design hierarchy name of one of the following clock drivers that you choose to drive the
rx_coreclk
ports of all identical channels (1):
■
tx_clkout
■
rx_clkout
■
coreclkout
■FPGA CLK input pins
■Transceiver
refclk
pins
■Clock output from the left and right or top and bottom PLLs
■
tx_dataout
port of one of the identical channels
To
rx_datain
pins of all channels whose
rx_coreclk
ports are connected together and driven by
the 0 PPM clock driver.
Assignment Name GXB 0 PPM Core Clock Setting
Value ON
Note to Table 2–18:
(1) You can find the full hierarchy name of the 0 PPM clock driver using the Node Finder feature in the Quartus II Assignment Editor.
2–72 Chapter 2: Transceiver Clocking in Stratix IV Devices
Configuration Examples
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
To use this feature, you must create an ALTGX instance with a single channel in
Transmitter Only mode that uses the required CMU PLL or ATX PLL. To create the
ALTGX instance, follow these steps:
1. Choose Basic (PMA Direct) ×N mode as the protocol.
2. Select Transmitter Only operation mode.
3. Select the input clock frequency.
4. Select the appropriate values of data rate and channel width based on the desired
output clock frequency. To generate a 250 MHz clock using an input clock
frequency of 50 MHz, select a channel width of 10 and a data rate of 2500 Mbps
(Equation 2–1).
5. You can select the PLL bandwidth by choosing Tx PLL bandwidth mode.
6. You can instantiate the
pll_locked
port to indicate the PLL lock status.
7. You can instantiate
pll_powerdown
or
gxb_powerdown
to enable the PLL PFD power
down control.
8. Use
tx_clkout
of the ALTGX instance as the clock source for clocking user logic in
the FPGA fabric.
Configuration Examples
This section describes the following examples:
■“Configuration Example 1: Configuring 24 Channels in Basic (PMA Direct) ×N
Mode in the EP4S100G5F45 Device” on page 2–73
■“Configuration Example 2: Configuring Sixteen Identical Channels Across Four
Transceiver Blocks” on page 2–75
■“Configuration Example 3: Configuring Sixteen Channels Across Four Transceiver
Blocks” on page 2–76
■“Configuration Example 4: Configuring Left and Right, Left, or Right PLL in VCO
Bypass Mode” on page 2–78
Equation 2–1.
channel width
data rate
fout=
Chapter 2: Transceiver Clocking in Stratix IV Devices 2–73
Configuration Examples
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Configuration Example 1: Configuring 24 Channels in Basic (PMA Direct)
×N Mode in the EP4S100G5F45 Device
Each transceiver block has four regular channels and two CMU channels that you can
configure in Basic (PMA Direct) ×N mode. The EP4S100G5F45 device has four
transceiver blocks located on each side of the device allowing configuration of up to
24 channels in Basic (PMA Direct) ×N mode.
When all 24 channels on one side of the device are configured in Basic (PMA Direct)
×N mode, all eight CMU channels (two in each transceiver block) are configured as
PMA-Only channels.
Use the
refclk
pins in each of the four transceiver blocks as receiver serial data input
pins and configure the CMU PLLs as receiver CDRs when the CMU channel is
configured as a PMA-Only channel. Due to the non-availability of CMU PLLs, you
must use the 6G ATX PLL to generate the high-speed serial and low-speed parallel
transceiver clocks for all 24 channels. Due to the non-availability of a
refclk
pin, you
must use the left and right, or left or right PLL in VCO bypass mode to provide the
reference clock through the PLL cascade clock line.
For more information about left and right PLL VCO bypass mode, refer to
“Configuration Example 4: Configuring Left and Right, Left, or Right PLL in VCO
Bypass Mode” on page 2–78.
Figure 2–38 shows 24 channels on the right side of the EP4S100G5F45 device
configured in Basic (PMA Direct) ×N mode running at 6.5 Gbps with a 20-bit FPGA
fabric-PMA interface width. Because all 24 channels on the right side of the device are
configured in Basic (PMA Direct) ×N mode, the right
PLL_R1
configured in
VCO bypass mode is used to provide the input reference clock to the 6G ATX PLL.
The 6G ATX PLL generates the high-speed serial and low-speed parallel transceiver
clocks that are distributed to the 24 channels though the ×
N_Top
and ×
N_Bottom
clock
network. Because the data rate of 6.5 Gbps requires a left and right, or left or right PLL
to meet FPGA fabric-Transmitter PMA interface timing,
tx_clkout
from one of the 24
channels is phase shifted by 315° using
PLL_R2
. The phase shifted output clock from
PLL_R2
is used to clock the FPGA fabric logic that generates the transmitter parallel
data and control signals.
2–74 Chapter 2: Transceiver Clocking in Stratix IV Devices
Configuration Examples
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Figure 2–38. Twenty-Four Channels on the Right Side of the EP4S100G5F45 Device Configured in
Basic (PMA Direct) ×N Mode for Configuration Example 1 (1)
Note to Figure 2–38:
(1) The green line represents the PLL cascade clock line and the blue lines represent the 6G ATX PLL block.
Channel 3
Channel 2
CMU1 Channel
CMU0 Channel
Channel 1
Channel 0
ATX PLL R0 (6G)
Channel 3
Channel 2
CMU1 Channel
CMU0 Channel
Channel 1
Channel 0
ATX PLL R1 (6G)
Channel 3
Channel 2
CMU1 Channel
CMU0 Channel
Channel 1
Channel 0
xN_Bottom
xN_Top
Transceiver Block GXBR 0
Transceiver Block GXBR 1
Transceiver Block GXBR 2
Channel 3
Channel 2
CMU1 Channel
CMU0 Channel
Channel 1
Channel 0
Transceiver Block GXBR 3
ATX PLL R2 (10G)
PLL_R1
(VCO Bypass Mode)
PLL_R2
(Phase Shift 315º to
meet interface timing)
Dedicated
FPGA CLK Pin
PLL Cascade
Clock Line
Reference
Clock
tx_clkout
FPGA Fabric
(Transmitter Data
Generation Logic)
FPGA Fabric
(Transmitter Data
Generation Logic)
Chapter 2: Transceiver Clocking in Stratix IV Devices 2–75
Configuration Examples
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Configuration Example 2: Configuring Sixteen Identical Channels Across
Four Transceiver Blocks
1This example relates to “User-Selected Receiver Phase Compensation FIFO Read
Clock” on page 2–68.
Figure 2–39 shows 16 identical transmitter channels located across four transceiver
blocks. The
tx_coreclk
ports of all 16 transmitter channels are connected together
and driven by the
tx_clkout[4]
signal from channel 0 in transceiver block
GXBR1
. The
tx_clkout[4]
signal also drives the transmitter data and control logic of all 16
transmitter channels in the FPGA fabric. With this clocking scheme, only one global
clock resource is used by the
tx_clkout[4]
signal.
Figure 2–39. Sixteen Identical Channels Across Four Transceiver Blocks for Configuration Example 2
Channel [15:12]
TX Data
and Control
Logic
tx_coreclk[15:12]
Transceiver Block GXBR3
Channel 3
Channel 2
Channel 1
Channel 0
tx_clkout[12]
Transceiver Block GXBR2
Channel 3
Channel 2
Channel 1
Channel 0
tx_clkout[8]
tx_coreclk[11:8]
Channel [11:8]
TX Data
and Control
Logic
FPGA
Fabric
tx_coreclk[7:4]
Transceiver Block GXBR1
Channel 3
Channel 2
Channel 1
Channel 0
Transceiver Block GXBR0
Channel 3
Channel 2
Channel 1
Channel 0
tx_clkout[0]
tx_coreclk[3:0]
Channel [3:0]
TX Data
and Control
Logic
tx_clkout[4]
Channel [7:4]
TX Data
and Control
Logic
2–76 Chapter 2: Transceiver Clocking in Stratix IV Devices
Configuration Examples
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Table 2–19 lists the Quartus II assignments that you must make for the clocking
scheme shown in Figure 2–38.
Configuration Example 3: Configuring Sixteen Channels Across Four
Transceiver Blocks
1This example relates to “User-Selected Receiver Phase Compensation FIFO Read
Clock” on page 2–68.
Figure 2–40 shows 16 non-bonded channels without rate matcher located across four
transceiver blocks. The incoming serial data to all 16 channels has a 0 PPM frequency
difference with respect to each other. The
rx_coreclk
ports of all 16 channels are
connected together and driven by
rx_clkout[9]
in transceiver block
GXBR2
.
rx_clkout[9]
also clocks the receiver data and status signals of all 16 channels in the
FPGA fabric. With this clocking scheme, only one global, regional, or global and
regional clock resource is used by
rx_clkout[9]
.
Table 2–19. Quartus II Assignments
From
top_level/top_xcvr_instance1/altgx_component/tx_clkout[4]
(1)
To
tx_dataout[15..0]
Assignment Name GXB 0 PPM Core Clock Setting
Value ON
Note to Table 2–19:
(1) This is an example design hierarchy path for the
tx_clkout[4]
signal.
Chapter 2: Transceiver Clocking in Stratix IV Devices 2–77
Configuration Examples
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Figure 2–40. Sixteen Channels Across Four Transceiver Blocks for Configuration Example 3
Channel [15:12]
RX Data
and Status
Logic
rx_coreclk[15:12]
Transceiver Block GXBR3
Channel 3
Channel 2
Channel 1
Channel 0
Transceiver Block GXBR2
Channel 3
Channel 2
Channel 1
Channel 0
rx_clkout[11:8]
rx_coreclk[11:8]
Channel [11:8]
RX Data
and Status
Logic
FPGA
Fabric
Channel [7:4]
RX Data
and Status
Logic
rx_coreclk[7:4]
rx_clkout[7:4]
Transceiver Block GXBR1
Channel 3
Channel 2
Channel 1
Channel 0
Transceiver Block GXBR0
Channel 3
Channel 2
Channel 1
Channel 0
rx_clkout[3:0]
rx_coreclk[3:0]
Channel [3:0]
RX Data
and Status
Logic
rx_clkout[15:12]
rx_clkout[9]
2–78 Chapter 2: Transceiver Clocking in Stratix IV Devices
Configuration Examples
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Table 2–20 lists the Quartus II assignments that you must make for the clocking
scheme shown in Figure 2–40.
Configuration Example 4: Configuring Left and Right, Left, or Right PLL in
VCO Bypass Mode
1This example relates to “Left and Right, Left, or Right PLL in VCO Bypass Mode” on
page 2–17.
To configure the left and right, left, or right PLL in VCO bypass mode, follow these
steps:
1. Under the General/Modes tab, enter the desired input reference clock frequency.
a. Under PLL Type, select Left_Right_PLL.
b. Under Operation mode, select the With no compensation option
(Figure 2–41).
Table 2–20. Quartus II Assignments for Appendix Example 4
From
top_level/top_xcvr_instance1/altgx_component/rx_clkout[9]
(1)
To
rx_datain[15..0]
Assignment Name GXB 0 PPM Core Clock Setting
Value ON
Note to Table 2–20:
(1) This is an example design hierarchy path for the
rx_clkout[9]
signal.
Figure 2–41. No Compensation Option Used for Configuration Example 4
Chapter 2: Transceiver Clocking in Stratix IV Devices 2–79
Configuration Examples
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
2. Under the Inputs/Lock tab, select Create output file(s) using the 'Advanced' PLL
parameters (Figure 2–42).
Figure 2–42. Create Output File(s) Using the ‘Advanced’ PLL Parameters Option Use for
Configuration Example 4
2–80 Chapter 2: Transceiver Clocking in Stratix IV Devices
Configuration Examples
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
3. Under the Output Clocks tab turn off Use this clock for clk c0.
4. Turn on Use this clock for clk c1 (Figure 2–43).
1The VCO bypass option is only enabled for clock output c1.
5. Click Finish for the MegaWizard Plug-In Manager to generate the verilog .v file
for the ALTPLL instantiation.
6. Next, from the command line, go to the directory where you have the ALTPLL
instance files (.v or .vhdl) and type the following command:
qmegawiz -silent -wiz_override="c1_test_source=1,c1_mode=BYPASS,clk1_counter=C1" pll0.v
This command places your ALTPLL instance in VCO bypass mode. Revisit the .v
or .vhdl file associated with the ALTPLL instance. Examine the file which is
automatically updated to incorporate the PLL in a VCO bypass mode.
1VCO bypass mode is not supported in the .mif file. Therefore, you can not manually
modify the .mif file to set the PLL in VCO bypass mode.
7. Finally, connect
clk c1output
of the left and right, left, or right PLL to the input
reference clock port of the ATX PLL used to generate the transceiver clocks.
Figure 2–43. Use This Clock Option Used for Configuration Example 4
Chapter 2: Transceiver Clocking in Stratix IV Devices 2–81
Configuration Examples
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Document Revision History
Table 2–21 lists the revision history for this chapter.
Table 2–21. Document Revision History
Date Version Changes
September 2012 3.4 ■Updated the “Non-Bonded Channel Configurations” section to close FB #65105.
December 2011 3.3
■Updated Table 2–2.
■Updated the “Left and Right, Left, or Right PLL in VCO Bypass Mode” section.
February 2011 3.2
■Updated Table 2–4.
■Updated Figure 2–7, Figure 2–18, Figure 2–19, Figure 2–20.
■Updated the “Configuration Example 4: Configuring Left and Right, Left, or Right PLL in
VCO Bypass Mode” section.
■Applied new template.
■Updated chapter title.
■Applied new template.
March 2010 3.1
■Updated Table 2–4.
■Updated Figure 2–7, Figure 2–8, Figure 2–16, and Figure 2–21.
■Updated the “Transceiver Channel Datapath Clocking” and “Configuration Example 3:
Configuring Sixteen Channels Across Four Transceiver Blocks” sections.
■Added a note to the “refclk0 and refclk1 Pins” section.
■Changed “datapath clocks” to “datapath interface clocks”.
■Minor text edits.
November 2009 3.0
■Added Figure 2–1, Figure 2–12,and Figure 2–13.
■Added Table 2–1, Table 2–2, Table 2–8, and Table 2–2.
■Updated Table 2–5 and Table 2–14.
■Updated all graphics.
■Updated all sections.
■Added Stratix IV GT information.
■Re-organized information.
■Minor text edits.
June 2009 2.2
■Updated Figure 2–5 and Figure 2–7.
■Updated the “Transceiver Data Rates Supported in Basic (PMA Direct) Mode”,
■“FPGA Fabric PLLs-Transceiver PLLs Cascading in the 780-Pin Package”, “FPGA Fabric
PLLs-Transceiver PLLs Cascading in the 1152-Pin Package”, sections.
■Removed Table 2-5, Table 2-6, Table 2-7
■Removed Figure 2-17 and Figure 2-18.
■Minor text edits.
March 2009 2.1 Minor updates.
November 2008 20 Update to chapter.
May 2008 1.0 Initial release.
2–82 Chapter 2: Transceiver Clocking in Stratix IV Devices
Configuration Examples
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
SIV52003-4.2
© 2012 Altera Corporation. All rights reserved. ALTERA, ARRIA, CYCLONE, HARDCOPY, MAX, MEGACORE, NIOS, QUARTUS and STRATIX words and logos
are trademarks of Altera Corporation and registered in the U.S. Patent and Trademark Office and in other countries. All other words and logos identified as
trademarks or service marks are the property of their respective holders as described at www.altera.com/common/legal.html. Altera warrants performance of its
semiconductor products to current specifications in accordance with Altera's standard warranty, but reserves the right to make changes to any products and
services at any time without notice. Altera assumes no responsibility or liability arising out of the application or use of any information, product, or service
described herein except as expressly agreed to in writing by Altera. Altera customers are advised to obtain the latest version of device specifications before relying
on any published information and before placing orders for products or services.
Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
September 2012
Feedback Subscribe
ISO
9001:2008
Registered
3. Configuring Multiple Protocols and
Data Rates in Stratix IV Devices
This chapter describes the procedure for merging; for example, when combining
multiple protocols and data rates within a transceiver block. The instances you can
combine include Receiver Only and Transmitter and Receiver channels as well as
channels configured in Protocol Functional modes, channels using PLL cascade
clocks, channels in multiple transceiver blocks, and channels with a Basic (PMA
Direct) configuration. This chapter also offers several examples of sharing the clock
multiplier unit phase-locked loops (CMU PLLs).
fFor information about the supported data rate range for the auxiliary transmit
(ATX) PLL, refer to the “Transceiver Performance Specifications” section in the DC
and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Overview
Each transceiver channel in a Stratix®IV GX and GT device can run at an independent
data rate or in an independent protocol mode. Within each transceiver channel, the
transmitter and receiver channels can run at different data rates. Each transceiver
block consists of two CMU PLLs that provide clocks to all the transmitter channels
within the transceiver block. Each receiver channel contains a dedicated clock data
recovery (CDR) unit.
In addition to the CMU PLLs, the ATX PLLs are available to provide clocks to the
transmitter channels that are configured for a specific data rate range.
This chapter includes the following sections:
■“Glossary of Terms” on page 3–2
■“Creating Transceiver Channel Instances” on page 3–3
■“General Requirements to Combine Channels” on page 3–3
■“Sharing CMU PLLs” on page 3–5
■“Sharing ATX PLLs” on page 3–10
■“Combining Receiver Only Channels” on page 3–10
■“Combining Transmitter Channel and Receiver Channel Instances” on page 3–11
■“Combining Transceiver Instances in Multiple Transceiver Blocks” on page 3–13
■“Combining Transceiver Instances Using PLL Cascade Clocks” on page 3–16
■“Combining Channels Configured in Protocol Functional Modes” on page 3–17
■“Combining Transceiver Channels in Basic (PMA Direct) Configurations” on
page 3–25
September 2012
SIV52003-4.2
3–2 Chapter 3: Configuring Multiple Protocols and Data Rates in Stratix IV Devices
Glossary of Terms
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
■“Combination Requirements When You Enable Channel Reconfiguration” on
page 3–42
■“Combining Transceiver Channels When You Enable the Adaptive Equalization
(AEQ) Feature” on page 3–47
■“Combination Requirements for Stratix IV Devices” on page 3–49
■“Summary” on page 3–49
Each transmitter channel has a local divider (/1, /2, or /4) that divides the high-speed
clock output of the CMU PLL to provide high-speed serial and low-speed parallel
clocks for its physical coding sublayer (PCS) and physical medium attachment (PMA)
functional blocks.
You can configure the RX CDR present in the receiver channel to a distinct data rate
and provide separate input reference clocks. Each receiver channel also contains a
local divider that divides the high-speed clock output of the RX CDR and provides
clocks for its PCS and PMA functional blocks. To enable transceiver channel settings,
the Quartus®II software provides the ALTGX MegaWizardTM Plug-In Manager
interface. The ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager allows you to instantiate a single
transceiver channel or multiple transceiver channels in Receiver and Transmitter,
Receiver only, and Transmitter only configurations.
Glossary of Terms
Table 3–1 lists the terms used in the chapter.
fFor more information about transceiver channel set up using a Basic (PMA Direct) ×N
configuration, refer to the Transceiver Clocking in Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Table 3–1. Glossary of Terms Used in this Chapter
Configuration Description
Regular Channels This refers to the four transceiver channels in each transceiver block that contain PCS.
Basic (PMA Direct)
This refers to the Basic (PMA Direct) configuration that you can use for both regular and CMU
channels. Basic (PMA Direct) mode has two variations, ×1 and ×N. The term “Basic (PMA Direct)”
used in this chapter refers to both ×1 and ×N and to regular/CMU Channels. Any specific reference
to ×1 and ×N or regular/CMU channels is stated explicitly.
Non-Basic (PMA
Direct)
This term refers to all single channel non-bonded configurations (for example, GIGE, PCI Express®
[PCIe] ×1) or bonded channel configurations that have PCS enabled (for example, Basic ×4 and ×8,
XAUI, PCIe ×4 and ×8). Also, any reference to a channel in non-Basic (PMA Direct) mode indicates
that the channel is a regular transceiver channel.
Basic (PMA Direct) ×1
A transceiver channel set up in this configuration uses the high-speed serial clock from the CMU
PLL that is present within the same transceiver block. You can select this configuration by setting
the Which protocol you will be using? option to Basic (PMA Direct) and the Which sub protocol
you will be using? option to none.
Basic (PMA Direct) ×N
A transceiver channel set up in this configuration uses the ×N high-speed clock lines. You can
select this configuration by setting the Which protocol you will be using? option to Basic (PMA
direct) and the Which sub protocol you will be using? option to ×N.
Chapter 3: Configuring Multiple Protocols and Data Rates in Stratix IV Devices 3–3
Creating Transceiver Channel Instances
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Creating Transceiver Channel Instances
The two ways you can instantiate multiple transceiver channels in the General screen
of the ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager are:
■In the What is the number of channels? option, select the required value. This
method creates all the transceiver channels with identical configurations. For an
example, refer to “Combining Transceiver Instances in Multiple Transceiver
Blocks” on page 3–13.
■In the What is the number of channels? option, select 1 and create a single
channel transceiver instance. To instantiate additional transceiver channels with
an identical configuration, select the created ALTGX instance multiple times. If
you need additional transceiver channels with different configurations, create
separate ALTGX megafunction instances with different settings and use them in
your design.
When you create instances using the above methods, you can force the placement of
up to four transceiver channels within the same transceiver block. Do this by
assigning the
tx_dataout
and
rx_datain
ports of the channel instances to a single
transceiver bank. If you do not assign pins to the
tx_dataout
and
rx_datain
ports, the
Quartus II software chooses default pin assignments. When you compile the design,
the Quartus II software combines multiple channel instances within the same
transceiver block if the instances meet specific requirements. The following sections
explain these requirements for different transceiver configurations.
General Requirements to Combine Channels
When you create multiple ALTGX instances, the Quartus II software requires that you
to set identical values for the following parameters and signals to combine the ALTGX
instances within the same transceiver block or in transceiver blocks on the same side
of the device. The following sections describe these requirements.
Transmitter Buffer Voltage (VCCH)
The Stratix IV GX device provides you the option to select 1.4 V or 1.5 V for the VCCH
supply through the ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager. The Stratix IV GT device
only allows 1.4 V for the VCCH supply. To combine the channel instances within the
same transceiver block, the Quartus II software requires that you to set the same VCCH
value in all the channel instances.
1The data rate of the transmitter channel is limited based on the VCCH value selected.
fFor the data rate restrictions, refer to the DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV
Devices chapter.
Transceiver Analog Power (VCCA_L/R)
The Stratix IV GX and GT device contains two different power supply pins,
VCCA_L
and
VCCA_R
that provide power to the PMA blocks in all the transceiver channels on
the left and right sides of the device, respectively.
3–4 Chapter 3: Configuring Multiple Protocols and Data Rates in Stratix IV Devices
General Requirements to Combine Channels
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
The Stratix IV GX and GT device provides you the option to select 2.5 V or 3.0 V for
the
VCCA_L/R
supply through the ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager. The
Stratix IV GT device only allows 3.3 V for the VCCA_L/R supply. You must set the same
VCCA_L/R
value for all the transceiver channel instances to enable the Quartus II
software to place them in the transceiver blocks on the same side of the device. For
example, if you have two ALTGX instances that you would like to place on the left
side transceiver banks
GXBL0
and
GXBL1
, the
VCCA_L/R
values in the two ALTGX
instances must be the same.
1The data rate of the transceiver channel is limited based on the VCCA_L/R value
selected.
fFor the data rate restrictions, refer to the DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV
Devices chapter.
Control Signals
This section contains information about the
gxb_powerdown
,
reconfig_fromgxb
, and
reconfig_togxb
ports.
gxb_powerdown Port
The
gxb_powerdown
port is an optional port that you can enable in the ALTGX
MegaWizard Plug-In Manager. If enabled, you must drive the
gxb_powerdown
port in
the ALTGX instances from the same logic or the same input pin to enable the
Quartus II software to assign them in the same transceiver block.
reconfig_fromgxb and reconfig_togxb Ports
In the ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager, the
reconfig_fromgxb
and
reconfig_togxb
ports are enabled if you select one of the following options in the
Reconfig screen:
■Analog Controls (VOD, Pre-emphasis, Manual Equalization, and EyeQ)
■Enable Channel and Transmitter PLL reconfiguration
■Offset cancellation for receiver channels (always enabled if the configuration is
Transmitter and Receiver or Receiver only)
1To combine multiple instances within the same transceiver block:
■The
reconfig_fromgxb
ports must be enabled in each instance AND
■These ports must be connected to the same reconfig controller
For example, consider that you want to place a Receiver only and Transmitter only
instance in the same transceiver block. For the Receiver only instance, the Quartus II
software automatically enables the
reconfig_fromgxb
port. For the Transmitter only
instance, you must select the options in the Reconfig screen (mentioned above) to
enable the
reconfig_fromgxb
port. In the design, connect these ports from the
Transmitter only and Receiver only instance to the same reconfig controller.
Chapter 3: Configuring Multiple Protocols and Data Rates in Stratix IV Devices 3–5
Sharing CMU PLLs
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
fFor more information about connecting these ports to the dynamic reconfiguration
controller, refer to the “Connecting the ALTGX and ALTGX_RECONFIG Instances”
section of the Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Calibration Clock and Power Down
Each calibration block in a Stratix IV GX and GT device is shared by multiple
transceiver blocks.
If your design uses multiple transceiver blocks, depending on the transceiver banks
selected, you must connect the
cal_blk_clk
and
cal_blk_powerdown
ports of all
channel instances to the same input pin or logic.
fFor more information about the calibration block and transceiver banks that are
connected to a specific calibration block, refer to the “Calibration Blocks” section in
the Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices chapter.
1Asserting the
cal_blk_powerdown
port affects calibration on all transceiver channels
connected to the calibration block.
Sharing CMU PLLs
When you create multiple transceiver channel instances using CMU PLLs and intend
to combine these instances in the same transceiver block, the Quartus II software
checks whether a single CMU PLL can be used to provide clock outputs for the
transmitter side of the channel instances. If a single CMU PLL is not sufficient, the
Quartus II software attempts to combine the channel instances using two CMU PLLs.
Otherwise, the Quartus II software issues a Fitter error.
The following two sections describes the ALTGX instance requirements to enable the
Quartus II software to share the CMU PLL.
Multiple Channels Sharing a CMU PLL
To enable the Quartus II software to share the same CMU PLL for multiple channels,
the following parameters in the channel instantiations must be identical:
■“Base data rate” (the CMU PLL is configured for this data rate)
■CMU PLL bandwidth setting
■Reference clock frequency
■Input reference clock pin
■
pll_powerdown
port of the ALTGX instances must be driven from the same logic
■
GXB_TX_PLL_Reconfig_Group
assignment (refer to Table 3–14 on page 3–42)
■If the selected functional mode in one instance is (OIF) CEI Phy Interface or PCIe,
the other instance must have the same functional mode to share the CMU PLL. For
example, if you have two channels, one configured in Basic mode and the other
configured in (OIF) CEI Phy Interface mode at the same data rate, the Quartus II
software does not share the same PLL because the internal parameters for these
two functional modes are different.
3–6 Chapter 3: Configuring Multiple Protocols and Data Rates in Stratix IV Devices
Sharing CMU PLLs
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Each channel instance can have a different local divider setting. This is a useful option
when you intend to run each channel within the transceiver block at different data
rates that are derived from the same base data rate using the local divider values /1,
/2, and /4. Example 1 shows this design configuration.
Example 1
Consider an example design with four instances of a Receiver and Transmitter
configuration in the same transceiver block at various serial data rates. Assume that
each instance contains a channel and is driven from the same clock source and has the
same CMU PLL bandwidth settings. Table 3–2 lists the configuration for Example 1.
For Example 1, you can share a single CMU PLL for all four channels because:
■One CMU PLL can be configured to run at 4.25 Gbps.
■Each channel can divide the CMU PLL clock output using the local divider and
achieve the required data rates of 4.25 Gbps, 2.125 Gbps, and 1.0625 Gbps. Because
each receiver channel has a dedicated CDR, the receiver side in each instance can
be set up for these three data rates without any restrictions.
To enable the Quartus II software to share a single CMU PLL for all four channels, set
the values listed in Table 3–3 in the General screen of the ALTGX MegaWizard
Plug-In Manager.
Table 3–2. Configuration for Example 1
User-Created
Instance Name
ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager Settings
Number of Channels Configuration Effective Data Rate
(Gbps)
inst0
1Receiver and
Transmitter 4.25
inst1
1Receiver and
Transmitter 2.125
inst2
1Receiver and
Transmitter 1.0625
inst3
1Receiver and
Transmitter 4.25
Table 3–3. ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager Settings for Example 1
Instance General Screen Option Setting (Gbps)
inst0
What is the effective data rate? 4.25
Specify base data rate 4.25 (1)
inst1
What is the effective data rate? 2.125
Specify base data rate 4.25 (1)
inst2
What is the effective data rate? 1.0625
Specify base data rate 4.25 (1)
Chapter 3: Configuring Multiple Protocols and Data Rates in Stratix IV Devices 3–7
Sharing CMU PLLs
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
You can force the placement of the transceiver channels to a specific transceiver block
by assigning pins to
tx_dataout
and
rx_datain
. Otherwise, the Quartus II software
selects a transceiver bank.
Figure 3–1 and Figure 3–2 show the scenario before and after the Quartus II software
combines the transceiver channel instances. Because the RX CDR is not shared
between channels, only the CMU PLL is shown.
inst3
What is the effective data rate? 4.25
Specify base data rate 4.25 (1)
Note to Table 3–3:
(1) The Specify base data rate option is 4.25 Gbps for all four instances. Given that the CMU PLL bandwidth setting
and input reference clock are the same and that the
pll_powerdown
ports are driven from the same logic or pin,
the Quartus II software shares a single CMU PLL that runs at 4.25 Gbps.
Table 3–3. ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager Settings for Example 1
Instance General Screen Option Setting (Gbps)
3–8 Chapter 3: Configuring Multiple Protocols and Data Rates in Stratix IV Devices
Sharing CMU PLLs
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
1Each of the ALTGX instances has a
pll_powerdown
port. You must drive the
pll_powerdown
ports for all the instances from the same logic to enable the Quartus II
software to share the same CMU PLL.
Figure 3–1. ALTGX Instances Before Compilation for Example 1
ALTGX
Effective Data Rate: 4.25 Gbps
CMU PLL
Base Data Rate:
4.25 Gbps
Inst 0
ALTGX
Effective Data Rate: 2.125 Gbps
CMU PLL
Base Data Rate:
4.25 Gbps
Inst 1
ALTGX
Effective Data Rate: 1.0625 Gbps
CMU PLL
Base Data Rate:
4.25 Gbps
Inst 2
ALTGX
Effective Data Rate: 4.25 Gbps
CMU PLL
Base Data Rate:
4.25 Gbps
Inst 3
Chapter 3: Configuring Multiple Protocols and Data Rates in Stratix IV Devices 3–9
Sharing CMU PLLs
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Figure 3–2 shows the scenario after the Quartus II software combines the transceiver
channel instances.
Example 2
Consider the example design listed in Table 3–4. When you have two instances with
the same serial data rate but with different CMU PLL data rates, the Quartus II
software creates a separate CMU PLL for the two instances.
1Even though the effective data rate of
inst1
is 2.5 Gbps (5 Gbps/2 = 2.5 Gbps), the
same as
inst0
, when you compile the design, the Quartus II software requires two
CMU PLLs to provide clocks for the transmitter side of the two instances because
their base data rates are different. In this example, you have the third instance,
inst2
,
that requires a third CMU PLL. Therefore, the Quartus II software cannot combine the
above three instances within the same transceiver block.
Figure 3–2. Combined Instances after Compilation for Example 1
Transceiver Block
Inst 0
Effective Data Rate: 4.25 Gbps
TX Loc Div: /1
Inst 1
Inst 2
Inst 3
Effective Data Rate: 2.125 Gbps
TX Loc Div: /2
Effective Data Rate: 1.0625 Gbps
TX Loc Div: /4
Effective Data Rate: 4.25 Gbps
TX Loc Div: /1
CMU PLL
Base Data Rate:
4.25 Gbps
Table 3–4. Configuration for Example 2
User-Created
Instance Name
ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager Settings
Number of Channels Configuration Effective Data Rate (Gbps) Base Data Rate (Gbps)
inst0
1Receiver and
Transmitter 2.5 2.5
inst1
1Receiver and
Transmitter 2.5 5
inst2
1Receiver and
Transmitter 11
3–10 Chapter 3: Configuring Multiple Protocols and Data Rates in Stratix IV Devices
Sharing ATX PLLs
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Sharing ATX PLLs
The Quartus II software allows you to share the same ATX PLL for multiple
transceiver instances if the following requirements are met:
■The ATX PLL bandwidth in both instances are the same
■If the selected functional mode in one instance is (OIF) CEI Phy Interface or PCIe,
the other functional modes must be the same to share the ATX PLL. For example, if
you have two channels, one configured in Basic mode and the other configured in
(OIF) CEI Phy Interface mode at the same data rate, the Quartus II software does
not share the same PLL because the internal parameters for these two functional
modes are different.
■The base data rate and effective data rate values are the same.
■The
pll_powerdown
port in the instances are connected to the same logic.
■The instances are placed on the same side of the device.
■There is no contention on the ×N clock lines from the ATX PLL and the two
instances.
1For more information about ×N clocking, refer to the “Transmitter Channel
Data Path Clocking” section in the Transceiver Clocking in Stratix IV Devices
chapter.
Combining Receiver Only Channels
You can selectively use the receiver in the transceiver channel by selecting the
Receiver only configuration in the What is the Operating Mode? option on the
General screen of the ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager.
You can combine Receiver only channel instances of different configurations and data
rates into the same transceiver block. Because each receiver channel contains its own
dedicated CDR, each Receiver only instance (assuming one receiver channel per
instance) can have a different data rate.
1For the Quartus II software to combine the Receiver only instances within the same
transceiver block, you must connect
gxb_powerdown
(if used) for all the channel
instances to the same logic or input pin. For more information, refer to “General
Requirements to Combine Channels” on page 3–3.
1If your design contains a Receiver only instance, the Quartus II software disables all
the settings for the unused transmitter channel present in the same physical
transceiver channel. Therefore, the unused transmitter channel is always powered
down in the hardware.
Chapter 3: Configuring Multiple Protocols and Data Rates in Stratix IV Devices 3–11
Combining Transmitter Channel and Receiver Channel Instances
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Combining Transmitter Channel and Receiver Channel Instances
You can create separate transmitter and receiver channel instances and assign the
tx_dataout
and
rx_datain
pins of the transmitter and receiver instances, respectively,
to the same physical transceiver channel. This configuration is useful when you
intend to run the transmitter and receiver channel at different serial data rates. To
create separate transmitter and receiver channel instances, select the Transmitter only
and Receiver only options in the operating mode (General screen) of the ALTGX
MegaWizard Plug-In Manager.
Multiple Transmitter Channel and Receiver Channel Instances
The Quartus II software allows you to combine multiple Transmitter only and
Receiver only channel instances within the same transceiver block. Based on the pin
assignments, the Quartus II software combines the corresponding Transmitter only
and Receiver only channels in the same physical channel. To enable the Quartus II
software to combine the transmitter channel and receiver channel instances in the
same transceiver block, follow the rules and requirements outlined in:
■“General Requirements to Combine Channels” on page 3–3
■“Multiple Channels Sharing a CMU PLL” on page 3–5
■“Combining Receiver Only Channels” on page 3–10
Example 3
Consider the example design listed in Table 3–5 with four ALTGX instances.
After you create the above instances, if you force the placement of the instances, as
listed in Table 3–6, the Quartus II software combines
inst0
and
inst1
to physical
channel 0, and
inst2
and
inst3
to physical channel 1.
Table 3–5. Four ALTGX Instances for Example 3
Instance Name Configuration Serial Data Rate
(Gbps)
Input Reference Clock Frequency
(MHz)
inst0
Transmitter only 3.125 156.25
inst1
Receiver only 2.5 156.25
inst2
Transmitter only 1.25 125
inst3
Receiver only 2 125
Table 3–6. Forced Placement of the Instances for Example 3
Instance Name Physical Channel Pin Assignments in the Same
Transceiver Block
inst0
TX pin of channel 0
inst1
RX pin of channel 0
inst2
TX pin of channel 1
inst3
RX pin of channel 1
3–12 Chapter 3: Configuring Multiple Protocols and Data Rates in Stratix IV Devices
Combining Transmitter Channel and Receiver Channel Instances
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Figure 3–3 and Figure 3–4 show the transceiver channel instances before and after
compilation.
Figure 3–3. ALTGX Transceiver Channel Instances Before Compilation for Example 3
ALTGX
Effective Data Rate: 3.125 Gbps
CMU PLL
Base Data Rate:
3.125 Gbps
Inst 0
ALTGX
RX CDR
Base Data Rate:
2.5 Gbps
Inst 1
ALTGX
Effective Data Rate: 1.25 Gbps
CMU PLL
Base Data Rate:
1.25 Gbps
Inst 2
ALTGX
RX CDR
Base Data Rate:
2 Gbps
Inst 3
Chapter 3: Configuring Multiple Protocols and Data Rates in Stratix IV Devices 3–13
Combining Transceiver Instances in Multiple Transceiver Blocks
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Figure 3–4 shows the transceiver channel instances after compilation.
Combining Transceiver Instances in Multiple Transceiver Blocks
The method to instantiate multiple transceiver channels using a single ALTGX
instance is described in “Creating Transceiver Channel Instances” on page 3–3. The
following section describes the method to instantiate multiple transceiver channels
using multiple transceiver blocks.
When you create a transceiver instance that has more than four transceiver channels
(assuming that the instance is created in non-Basic (PMA Direct) functional mode
which requires regular channels), the Quartus II software attempts to combine the
transceiver channels in multiple transceiver blocks. This is shown in the following
examples.
Figure 3–4. Combined Transceiver Instances After Compilation for Example 3
Transceiver Block
Inst 0
Effective Data Rate: 3.25 Gbps
TX Loc Div: /1
Inst 1
Effective Data Rate: 2.5 Gbps
CMU PLL
Base Data Rate:
3.125 Gbps
CMU PLL
Base Data Rate:
1.25 Gbps
Transceiver Channel0
Inst 2
TX Channel
Effective Data Rate: 1.25 Gbps
TX Loc Div: /1
Inst 3
Effective Data Rate: 2 Gbps
Transceiver Channel1
TX Channel
RX Channel
RX Channel
3–14 Chapter 3: Configuring Multiple Protocols and Data Rates in Stratix IV Devices
Combining Transceiver Instances in Multiple Transceiver Blocks
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Example 4
Consider the design example configuration listed in Table 3–7 with two ALTGX
instances.
In this case, assuming that all the required parameters specified in “Multiple
Channels Sharing a CMU PLL” on page 3–5 are identical for
inst0
and
inst1
, the
Quartus II software fits
inst0
and
inst1
in two transceiver blocks.
Figure 3–5 and Figure 3–6 show the transceiver instances before and after
compilation.
Table 3–7. Two ALTGX Instances for Example 4
Instance Name
Number of
Transceiver
Channels
Configuration Serial Data Rate (Gbps) Input Reference Clock (MHz)
inst0
7Receiver and
Transmitter 4.25 125
from
refclk0
inst1
1Receiver and
Transmitter 4.25
125
from
refclk0
(same as
inst0
)
Figure 3–5. Transceiver Channel Instances Before Compilation for Example 4
Inst0
Effective Data Rate: 4.25 Gbps
Input Clock Frequency: 125 MHz
Number of Channels: 7
Inst1
Effective Data Rate: 4.25 Gbps
Input Clock Frequency: 125 MHz
Number of Channels: 1
Chapter 3: Configuring Multiple Protocols and Data Rates in Stratix IV Devices 3–15
Combining Transceiver Instances in Multiple Transceiver Blocks
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Figure 3–6 shows the transceiver instances after compilation.
You can force the placement of the transceiver channels in specific transceiver banks
by assigning pins to the
tx_dataout
and
rx_datain
ports of
inst0
and
inst1
.
Even though
inst0
instantiates seven transceiver channels, the ALTGX MegaWizard
Plug-In Manager provides only a one-bit wide
pll_inclk
port for
inst0
. In your
design, provide only one clock input for the
pll_inclk
port. The Quartus II software
uses two transceiver blocks to fit the seven channels and internally connects the input
reference clock (connected to the
pll_inclk
port in your design) to the CMU PLLs of
two transceiver blocks.
Figure 3–6. Combined Transceiver Instances After Compilation for Example 4
Transceiver Block 0
Ch3 of inst0
Effective Data Rate: 4.25 Gbps
Ch2 of inst0
Effective Data Rate: 4.25 Gbps
CMU PLL
Base Data Rate:
4.25 Gbps
Effective Data Rate: 4.25 Gbps
Ch1 of inst0
Ch0 of inst0
Effective Data Rate: 4.25 Gbps
Transceiver Block 1
Effective Data Rate: 4.25 Gbps
Ch0 of inst1
Effective Data Rate: 4.25 Gbps
Ch6 of inst0
CMU PLL
Base Data Rate:
4.25 Gbps
Effective Data Rate: 4.25 Gbps
Ch5 of inst0
Effective Data Rate: 4.25 Gbps
Ch4 of inst0
3–16 Chapter 3: Configuring Multiple Protocols and Data Rates in Stratix IV Devices
Combining Transceiver Instances Using PLL Cascade Clocks
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
1For
inst1
, the ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager provides a
pll_inclk
port. In
this example, it is assumed that a single reference clock is provided for
inst0
and
inst1
. Therefore, connect the
pll_inclk
port of
inst0
and
inst1
to the same input
reference clock pin. This enables the Quartus II software to share a single CMU PLL in
transceiver block 1 that has three channels of
inst0
and one channel of
inst1
(shown
as ch4, ch5, and ch6 in transceiver block 1 in Figure 3–6).
For the RX CDRs in
inst0
, the ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager provides seven
bits for the
rx_cruclk
port (if you do not select the Train Receiver CDR from
pll_inclk option in the PLL/Ports screen). This allows separate input reference clocks
to the RX CDRs of each channel.
Combining Transceiver Instances Using PLL Cascade Clocks
The Stratix IV GX and GT transceiver has the ability to cascade the output of the
general purpose PLLs (
PLL_L
and
PLL_R
) to the CMU PLLs, ATX PLLs, and receiver
CDRs. The left side PLLs can only be cascaded with the transceivers on the left side of
the device. Similarly, the right side PLLs can only be cascaded with the transceivers on
the right side of the device. Each side of the Stratix IV GX and GT device contains a
PLL cascade clock network; a single line network that connects the PLL cascade clock
to the transceiver block. This clock line is segmented to allow different PLL cascade
clocks to drive the transceiver CMU PLLs, ATX PLLs, and RX CDRs. Within the same
segment, only a single
PLL_L/PLL_R
can drive these transceiver PLLs/CDRs.
Therefore, if you create two instances that use different PLLs for cascading, you
cannot place these instances within the transceiver block.
The segmentation locations differ based on the device family.
fFor more information about using the PLL cascade clock and segmentation, refer to
the “Dedicated Left and Right PLL Cascade Lines Network” section in the Transceiver
Clocking in Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Chapter 3: Configuring Multiple Protocols and Data Rates in Stratix IV Devices 3–17
Combining Channels Configured in Protocol Functional Modes
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Combining Channels Configured in Protocol Functional Modes
This section describes how to combine channels for various protocol functional
modes.
Combining Channels in Bonded Functional Modes
This section describes the combination requirements in the two variations of bonded
functional modes using transceiver PCS blocks. The two bonded functional modes
are:
■“Bonded ×4 Functional Mode”—Examples of bonded ×4 mode:
■Basic mode with the sub protocol set to ×4
■XAUI
■PCIe mode with the sub protocol set to Gen1 ×4 or Gen2 ×4.
■“Bonded x8 Functional Mode” on page 3–20—Examples of bonded ×8 mode:
■Basic mode with the sub protocol ×8
■PCIe mode with the sub protocol ×8
Bonded ×4 Functional Mode
The combination requirements for Basic x4, Deterministic Latency ×4, and PCIe x4
functional modes (if you do not use the PCIe hard IP block) are similar.
In this mode, the transmitter channels are synchronized to reduce skew. The
Quartus II software shares the control from physical transmitter channel 0 with the
other transmitter channels in the transceiver block. Therefore, when you an create an
instance in this mode, the logical transmit channel 0 (
tx_dataout[0]
in the instance)
must be assigned by the physical channel location 0 in the transceiver block.
The central clock divider block in the
CMU0
channel forwards the high-speed serial and
low-speed parallel clocks to the transmitter channels.
fThis clocking scheme is described in the “Bonded Channel Configurations” section of
the Transceiver Clocking in Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Because you used the central clock divider, the are two restrictions on the channel
combinations:
1. If you configure channels in bonded ×4 functional mode, the remaining
transmitter channels (regular or CMU channels) within the transceiver block can
be used only in Basic (PMA Direct) ×1 or ×N mode.
1If PCIe functional mode uses the PCIe hard IP block, the combination
requirements are different. For more information, refer to “Combining
Channels Using the PCIe hard IP Block with Other Channels” on page 3–24.
The receiver channels are clocked independently. Therefore, you can configure the
unused receiver channels within a transceiver block in any allowed configuration.
3–18 Chapter 3: Configuring Multiple Protocols and Data Rates in Stratix IV Devices
Combining Channels Configured in Protocol Functional Modes
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Figure 3–7 shows examples of supported and unsupported combinations.
The
CMU0
PLL or
CMU1
PLL can drive the central clock divider block in the
CMU0
channel. In cases where you use
CMU1
PLL for bonded ×4 mode, the Quartus II
software does not allow you to use
CMU0
PLL for any other configuration because part
of the
CMU0
channel (the central clock divider) is already used by the bonded ×4
functional mode.
Using the remaining channels in Basic (PMA Direct) ×1 or ×N mode depends on the
following conditions.
1. If
CMU1
PLL is available for clock generation, you can use the remaining transmitter
channels in the transceiver block in Basic (PMA Direct) ×1 configuration.
2. If you want to configure the remaining transmitter channels at the same data rate
as the bonded ×4 functional mode, you can configure the remaining transmitter
channels in Basic (PMA Direct) ×1 mode. The requirements are specified in
“Sharing CMU PLLs” on page 3–5 and “General Requirements to Combine
Channels” on page 3–3.
3. If all the regular channels are configured in bonded ×4 functional mode, you can
configure the transmitter side of the
CMU0
channel in Basic (PMA Direct) ×N mode
in single-width configuration only (double-width configuration is not supported).
You can use the
CMU1
channel in Basic (PMA Direct) ×N single-width or
double-width configuration.
1This only applies to the transmitter side and not the receiver side of the
CMU channel.
Figure 3–7. Examples of Supported and Unsupported Configurations to Combine Instances in Basic ×4 Mode
Transceiver Block Transceiver Block
Instance 0
2 Regular Channels
Receiver and Transmitter
Basic mode and ×4 sub-protocol
Instance 1
2 Regular Channels
Receiver only
(any functional mode)
Supported
Configuration
Instance 0
3 Regular Channels
Receiver and Transmitter
Basic mode and ×4 sub-protocol
Instance 1
1 CMU Channel
Transmitter and Receiver
(Basic [PMA Direct] xN
Functional mode)
Supported
Configuration
Transceiver Block
Instance 0
2 Regular Channels
Receiver and Transmitter
Basic mode and ×4 sub-protocol
Instance 1
2 Regular Channels
Transmitter only
(any mode other than
Basic [PMA Direct] mode)
Red: Unsupported
Unsupported
Configuration
Chapter 3: Configuring Multiple Protocols and Data Rates in Stratix IV Devices 3–19
Combining Channels Configured in Protocol Functional Modes
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
4. Using the receiver side of the CMU channels depends on whether you use
CMU1
PLL or
CMU0
PLL to generate clocks for the bonded ×4 functional mode. If the
CMU PLL within the corresponding CMU channel is not available to perform
CDR functionality, you cannot configure it as a receiver.
5. If you use ATX PLL to generate clocks for the ×4 bonded functional mode, you can
use both the Transmitter and Receiver side of the
CMU0
and
CMU1
channels. You
must satisfy the requirements specified in number 3.
Figure 3–8 shows a configuration in which all the transmitter channels in the
transceiver block are used.
1For XAUI, the option to select ATX PLL is not available.
Figure 3–8 shows the combination of Basic/PCIe x4 functional mode with Basic
(PMA Direct) xN mode within the same transceiver block.
Figure 3–8. Basic ×4 Functional Mode Configuration when Combining Channels (4)
Notes to Figure 3–8:
(1) You can configure this channel in Basic (PMA Direct) single-width or double-width mode.
(2) You can configure this channel only in Basic (PMA Direct) single-width mode.
(3) The red lines represent the ×N top clock line, the blue lines represent the ×4 clock line, and the black line represents the ×N bottom clock line.
(4) To simplify the illustration, only the transmitter side is shown. PCIe ×4 refers to PCIe with the sub protocol set to Gen1 x4 and Gen2 x4.
ATX PLL
ATX PLL
TX3 - Basic x4/
PCIe x4
TX2 - Basic x4/
PCIe x4
TX1 - Basic x4/
PCIe x4
TX0 - Basic x4/
PCIe x4
CMU1 Channel
(PMA Direct xN mode) (1)
CMU0 Channel
TX - Basic
(Basic [PMA Direct] xN mdoe) (2)Central Clock
Divider x4 Clock Line (3)
xN Top Clock Line (3)
xN Bottom Clock Line
3–20 Chapter 3: Configuring Multiple Protocols and Data Rates in Stratix IV Devices
Combining Channels Configured in Protocol Functional Modes
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Bonded x8 Functional Mode
Bonded ×8 functional mode is similar to bonded ×4 functional mode except that the
controls are shared from the physical channel 0 of the master transceiver block. The
master is the lower of the two adjacent transceiver blocks selected for the ×8
configuration. Therefore, when you an create an instance in this mode, you must
assign the logical transmit channel 0 (
tx_dataout[0]
in the instance to the physical
channel location 0 in the master transceiver block.
fThere are specific transceiver blocks that can be paired as master-slave in the ×8
configuration.
fThe master is the adjacent lower transceiver block. For more information about
location requirements, refer to the “Bonded Channel Configurations” section of the
Transceiver Clocking in Stratix IV Devices chapter.
In Basic ×8 functional mode, you can select the number of channels to be less than 8
by setting the What is the number of channels? option on the General screen. In this
instance, you can use the remaining transmitter channels only in Basic (PMA Direct)
×1 or ×N mode. In PCIe Gen1 ×8 and Gen2 ×8 functional modes, the number of
regular channels used is always 8.
The number of remaining transmitter channels (CMU channels or regular channels) in
the two transceiver blocks available for use in Basic (PMA Direct) ×1 or ×N mode
depends on whether the ×8 functional mode uses CMU PLL or ATX PLL, as described
below.
1If PCIe functional mode uses the PCIe hard IP block, the combination requirements
are different. For more information, refer to “Combining Channels Using the PCIe
hard IP Block with Other Channels” on page 3–24.
Chapter 3: Configuring Multiple Protocols and Data Rates in Stratix IV Devices 3–21
Combining Channels Configured in Protocol Functional Modes
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
1Each receiver channel configured in Basic ×8 functional mode is clocked
independently by the recovered clock from its receiver CDR. You can use the available
receiver channels in any configuration. Figure 3–9 shows examples of supported and
unsupported configuration in Basic ×8 mode.
When the eight regular channels are used up in bonded ×8 functional mode:
■If the ATX PLL is used to generate clocks for the ×8 functional mode shown in
Figure 3–10, you can use the four CMU channels (two from the master and slave
transceiver block) in Basic (PMA Direct) ×N mode. Within Basic (PMA Direct) ×N
mode, you can configure the
CMU0
channels in the master and slave transceiver
block only in single-width mode (use the single-width mode option in the
General screen). If a
CMU1
channel or regular channels are available for use, you
can use them in Basic (PMA Direct) ×N mode in single-width or double-width
configuration.
Figure 3–9. Examples of Supported and Unsupported Configurations to Combine Instances in Basic ×8 Mode
Two Adjacent Transceiver Blocks Two Adjacent Transceiver Blocks
Instance 0
6 Channels
Receiver and Transmitter
Basic mode and ×8 sub-protocol
Instance 1
2 Channels
Receiver only
(any functional mode)
Supported
Configuration
Instance 0
6 Channels
Receiver and Transmitter
Basic mode and ×8 sub-protocol
Instance 1
2 Channels
Transmitter only (any mode other than
Basic [PMA Direct] function mode)
Unsupported
Configuration
Red: Unsupported
Two Adjacent Transceiver Blocks
Instance 0
6 Channels
Receiver and Transmitter
Basic mode and ×4 sub-protocol
Instance 1
1 Channel
Transmitter and Receiver
(Basic [PMA Direct] xN
Functional mode)
Supported
Configuration
3–22 Chapter 3: Configuring Multiple Protocols and Data Rates in Stratix IV Devices
Combining Channels Configured in Protocol Functional Modes
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Figure 3–10. Basic ×8/PCIe ×8 Functional Mode Configuration when Combining Channels (ATX PLL) (4)
Notes to Figure 3–10:
(1) You can configure this channel in Basic (PMA Direct) single-width or double-width mode.
(2) You can configure this channel only in Basic (PMA Direct) single-width mode.
(3) The red lines represent the ×N top clock line, the blue lines represent the ×4 clock line, and the black line represents the ×N bottom clock line.
(4) To simplify the illustration, only the transmitter side is shown. PCIe ×8 refers to PCIe with the sub protocol set to Gen1 ×8 and Gen2 ×8.
ATX PLL
ATX PLL
Slave Transceiver Block
Master Transceiver Block
TX0 - Basic x8/
PCIe x8
TX1 - Basic x8/
PCIe x8
TX2 - Basic x8/
PCIe x8
TX3 - Basic x8/
PCIe x8
CMU1 Channel
(Basic [PMA Direct] xN mode) (1)
CMU0 Channel
TX - (Basic
[PMA Direct] xN mode) (2) Central Clock
Divider
TX4 - Basic x8/
PCIe x8
TX5 - Basic x8/
PCIe x8
TX6 - Basic x8/
PCIe x8
TX7 - Basic x8/
PCIe x8
CMU1 Channel
(PMA Direct xN mode) (1)
CMU0 Channel
TX - (Basic
[PMA Direct] xN mode) (2) Central Clock
Divider
xN Top Clock Line (3)
x4 Clock Line (3)
xN Bottom Clock Line (3)
x4 Clock Line (3)
xN Bottom Clock Line (3
)
Chapter 3: Configuring Multiple Protocols and Data Rates in Stratix IV Devices 3–23
Combining Channels Configured in Protocol Functional Modes
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
■If the CMU PLL is used to generate clocks for the ×8 bonded functional mode, you
can use the
CMU0
channel in the slave transceiver block only in Basic (PMA Direct)
×N mode in the single-width configuration. You can use the
CMU1
channels in both
the master and slave transceiver blocks in Basic (PMA Direct) ×N mode in
single-width or double-width configuration.
Figure 3–11 shows the Basic ×8 functional mode configuration for these combination
restrictions when using CMU PLL.
Figure 3–11. Basic ×8/PCIe ×8 Functional Mode Configuration when Combining Channels (CMU PLL) (4)
Notes to Figure 3–11:
(1) You can configure this channel in Basic (PMA Direct) single-width or double-width mode.
(2) You can configure this channel only in Basic (PMA Direct) single-width mode.
(3) The red lines represent the ×N top clock line, the blue lines represent the ×4 clock line, and the black line represents the ×N bottom clock line.
(4) To simplify the illustration, only the transmitter side is shown. PCIe ×8 refers to PCIe with the sub protocol set to Gen1 ×8 and Gen2 ×8.
ATX PLL
Slave Transceiver Block
Master Transceiver Block
TX1 - Basic x8/
PCIe x8
TX0 - Basic x8/
PCIe x8
TX2 - Basic x8/
PCIe x8
TX3 - Basic x8/
PCIe x8
CMU1 Channel
(Basic [PMA Direct] xN mode) (1)
CMU0 Channel
(Used for clock generation) Central Clock
Divider
TX4 - Basic x8/
PCIe x8
TX5 - Basic x8/
PCIe x8
TX6 - Basic x8/
PCIe x8
TX7 - Basic x8/
PCIe x8
CMU1 Channel
(Basic [PMA Direct] xN mode) (1)
CMU0 Channel
TX - (Basic
[PMA Direct] xN mode) (2) Central Clock
Divider
xN Top Clock Line (3)
x4 Clock Line (3)
xN Bottom Clock Line (3)
x4 Clock Line (3)
3–24 Chapter 3: Configuring Multiple Protocols and Data Rates in Stratix IV Devices
Combining Channels Configured in Protocol Functional Modes
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Combining Channels Configured in Deterministic Latency Mode
The ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager provides Deterministic Latency mode
with two variations (×1 and ×4) to eliminate uncertainty in the transceiver data path.
This functional mode provides the Enable Phase Frequency Detector (PFD) feed
back … option in the PLL/Ports screen. If you select this option for ×1, the low-speed
parallel clock from the transmitter serializer is fed back to the PFD input of the CMU
PLL; for ×4, the output of the low-speed parallel clock from the central clock divider is
provided as feed back.
For the ×1 variation, one CMU PLL is required for each transmitter channel in the
instance. As a result, in ×1 mode, you can configure only two channels within the
transceiver block in this mode. The restrictions for Deterministic Latency mode in ×4
mode are the same as that of the bonded x4 functional mode. For more information,
refer to “Bonded ×4 Functional Mode” on page 3–17.
Combining Channels Using the PCIe hard IP Block with Other Channels
The Stratix IV GX and GT device contains an embedded PCIe hard IP block that
performs the phyMAC, datalink, and transaction layer functionality specified by PCIe
base specification 2.0. Each PCIe hard IP block is shared by two transceiver blocks.
The PCI Express Compiler Wizard provides you the options to configure the PCIe
hard IP block. When enabled, the transceiver channels associated with this block are
also enabled.
There are restrictions on combining transceiver channels with different functional
and/or protocol modes (for example, Basic mode) within two contiguous transceiver
blocks with the channels that use the PCIe hard IP block. The restrictions depend on
the number of channels used (×1 or ×4) and the number of virtual channels (VCs)
selected in the PCI Express Compiler MegaWizard Plug-In Manager. Table 3–8 lists
the restrictions.
1When you use the PCIe hard IP block, there are placement restrictions on the locations
of the transceiver channels.
fFor these channel placement restrictions, refer to the PCI Express Compiler User Guide.
Table 3–8. PCIe Hard IP Block Restrictions When Combining Transceiver Channels with Different Functional and/or
Protocol Modes (Part 1 of 2) (1), (2), (7)
PCIe Configuration (PCIe hard IP
Options Enabled in the PCI Express
Compiler MegaWizard Plug-In Manager)
(3)
Transceiver Block 0 (4) Transceiver Block 1 (5)
Link
Width
Lane
(Data Interface
Width)
Virtual
Channel
(VC)
Ch0 (6) Ch1 Ch2 Ch3 Ch4 Ch5 Ch6 Ch7
×1 64-bit 1 PCIe ×1 Avail. Avail. Avail. Avail. Avail. Avail. Avail.
2 PCIe ×1 — — — Avail. Avail. Avail. Avail.
×4 64-bit 1 PCIe ×4 Avail. Avail. Avail. Avail.
2 PCIe ×4 Avail. Avail. Avail. Avail.
Chapter 3: Configuring Multiple Protocols and Data Rates in Stratix IV Devices 3–25
Combining Transceiver Channels in Basic (PMA Direct) Configurations
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
fFor more information about the PCI Express Compiler MegaCore functions and hard IP
implementation, refer to the PCI Express Compiler User Guide.
If you configure a transceiver channel in PCIe configuration and if an ATX PLL is
used to provide clocks for the transmitter side of the channel, you can use the
remaining transmitter channels within the same transceiver block only in Basic (PMA
Direct) ×1 or ×N mode.
Combining Transceiver Channels in Basic (PMA Direct) Configurations
In this configuration, the transmitter and receiver PCS blocks of a transceiver channel
are bypassed and the transceiver channel can run at a maximum of 6.5 Gbps.
fFor the data rate restrictions in Basic (PMA Direct) mode, refer to the “Transceiver
Performance Specifications” section in the DC and Switching Characteristics for
Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Using the Quartus II software, you can configure the two CMU channels and regular
transceiver channels in Basic (PMA Direct) mode. The following sections describes the
different scenarios for combining Basic (PMA Direct) mode with other transceiver
configurations.
fFor information about the FPGA fabric-transceiver interface, refer to the
“Non-Bonded Basic (PMA Direct) Mode Channel Configurations” section in the
Transceiver Clocking in Stratix IV Devices chapter.
×4 128-bit 1 PCIe ×4 Avail. Avail. Avail. Avail.
2 PCIe ×4 — — Avail. Avail.
×8 — — PCIe ×8
Notes to Table 3–8:
(1) Avail. indicates that the channels can be used in other configurations.
(2) An em-dash (—) indicates that the channels are NOT available for use.
(3) The CMU PLL is used for the transmitter side of the channels in this table.
(4) Transceiver block 0—the master transceiver block that provides high-speed serial and low-speed parallel clocks in a PCIe ×4 or ×8
configuration.
(5) Transceiver block 1—the adjacent transceiver block that shares the same PCIe hard IP block with transceiver block 0.
(6) The physical channel 0 in the transceiver block. For more information about physical-to-logical channel mapping in PCIe functional mode, refer
to the “×8 Channel Configuration” section in the Transceiver Clocking in Stratix IV Devices chapter.
(7) When you the use PCIe hard IP Block, you cannot configure the CMU channels within the transceiver block as transceiver channels.
Table 3–8. PCIe Hard IP Block Restrictions When Combining Transceiver Channels with Different Functional and/or
Protocol Modes (Part 2 of 2) (1), (2), (7)
PCIe Configuration (PCIe hard IP
Options Enabled in the PCI Express
Compiler MegaWizard Plug-In Manager)
(3)
Transceiver Block 0 (4) Transceiver Block 1 (5)
Link
Width
Lane
(Data Interface
Width)
Virtual
Channel
(VC)
Ch0 (6) Ch1 Ch2 Ch3 Ch4 Ch5 Ch6 Ch7
3–26 Chapter 3: Configuring Multiple Protocols and Data Rates in Stratix IV Devices
Combining Transceiver Channels in Basic (PMA Direct) Configurations
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Combining Multiple Channels Configured in Basic (PMA Direct) ×1
Configurations
When you configure a transceiver channel in Basic (PMA Direct) ×1 configuration, the
Quartus II software requires one of the two CMU PLLs within the same transceiver
block to provide high-speed clocks to the transmitter side of the channel (you cannot
use the ATX PLL). Therefore, within a transceiver block, you can only combine a
maximum of five transceiver channels (using both the Transmitter and Receiver)
configured in Basic (PMA Direct) ×1 mode (one CMU channel to perform the clock
multiplication unit functionality).
You can configure the transmitter side of the CMU channel that uses its CMU PLL for
clock generation in Basic (PMA Direct) x1 in single-width or double-width
configuration, as shown in Figure 3–17 on page 3–32.
There are multiple ways you can combine channels in Basic (PMA Direct) ×1 mode
within the same transceiver block:
■“Multiple Basic (PMA Direct) ×1 Configuration Instances with One Channel per
Instance” on page 3–26
■“One Instance in a Basic (PMA Direct) ×1 Configuration with Multiple Transceiver
Channels” on page 3–26
■“Combining Multiple Instances of Transmitter Only and Receiver Only
Configurations in Basic (PMA Direct) ×1 Mode” on page 3–29
■“Combining Channels Configured in Basic (PMA Direct) ×1 with Non-Basic (PMA
Direct) Modes” on page 3–29
Multiple Basic (PMA Direct) ×1 Configuration Instances with One Channel
per Instance
If you create multiple instances of Basic (PMA Direct) ×1 with one channel per
instance, you can combine them within the same transceiver block. To achieve this
combination, refer to the requirements specified in “Multiple Channels Sharing a
CMU PLL” on page 3–5 and “General Requirements to Combine Channels” on
page 3–3. Note that one CMU PLL within the transceiver block must provide a
high-speed clock for the transmitter side of the channels. Therefore, at least one CMU
channel (that contains the CMU PLL) within the transceiver block must be available to
generate high-speed serial and low-speed parallel clocks for the channels configured
in this mode. You can also place the individual instances in this configuration in
separate transceiver blocks. For this placement, the Quartus II software enables one
CMU PLL per instance.
One Instance in a Basic (PMA Direct) ×1 Configuration with Multiple
Transceiver Channels
In this case, if the number of channels selected in the instance is less than six, the
Quartus II software, by default, combines these channels within the same transceiver
block and uses one CMU PLL to provide the high-speed clocks. If the number of
channels is six or more, the Quartus II software requires two transceiver blocks and
two CMU PLLs, one from each transceiver block.
The following two examples show the combinations of channels under two different
conditions.
Chapter 3: Configuring Multiple Protocols and Data Rates in Stratix IV Devices 3–27
Combining Transceiver Channels in Basic (PMA Direct) Configurations
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Example 5
Consider a design example configuration with a Basic (PMA Direct) ×1 instance with
the number of channels set to 7 in the ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager. With
this setting, the ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager provides 7 bits of
gxb_powerdown
,
rx_analogreset
, and
pll_powerdown
ports.
In this case, the Quartus II software attempts to combine the five channels in the
instance to one transceiver block and the remaining two channels to the second
transceiver block, assuming that the
gxb_powerdown
and
pll_powerdown
ports for the
five channels are driven from the same logic. Figure 3–12 and Figure 3–13 show the
conditions before and after compilation.
Figure 3–12. Logical View of the Instance with Seven Channels Before Compilation for
Example 5
CMU PLL
Inst0
Number of channels = 7
Receiver and Transmitter configuration:
Basic (PMA Direct) x1 mode
3–28 Chapter 3: Configuring Multiple Protocols and Data Rates in Stratix IV Devices
Combining Transceiver Channels in Basic (PMA Direct) Configurations
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Figure 3–13 shows the conditions after compilation. In this example, the
gxb_powerdown
and
pll_powerdown
ports for channels 0 to 4 and channels 5 and 6 are
driven from the same logic.
If you connect each of the seven bits of the
gxb_powerdown
and
pll_powerdown
ports to
different reset control logic, the Quartus II software requires seven transceiver blocks
to combine the seven channels in the instance.
Figure 3–13. Combined Channels After Compilation for Example 5
Transceiver Block0
Transceiver Block1
CMU PLL
Inst0: Channel 0
Inst0: Channel 1
Inst0: Channel 2
Inst0: Channel 3
Inst0: Channel 4
Inst0: Channel 5
Inst0: Channel 6
RX TX
RX TX
RX TX
RX TX
RX TX
RX TX
RX TX
CMU PLL
Chapter 3: Configuring Multiple Protocols and Data Rates in Stratix IV Devices 3–29
Combining Transceiver Channels in Basic (PMA Direct) Configurations
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Combining Multiple Instances of Transmitter Only and Receiver Only
Configurations in Basic (PMA Direct) ×1 Mode
The Quartus II software allows you to combine instances of Transmitter Only and
Receiver Only configurations in Basic (PMA Direct) ×1 mode.
You can also combine Transmitter Only instances in non-Basic (PMA Direct) ×1
configuration (non-bonded only) and the Receiver Only instance in Basic (PMA
Direct) configurations (and vice versa) in the same physical channel. The combination
requirements of the instances in Basic (PMA Direct) ×1 configuration are similar to
that of non-Basic (PMA Direct) configuration. For more information, refer to the
“Combining Transmitter Channel and Receiver Channel Instances” on page 3–11.
Combining Channels Configured in Basic (PMA Direct) ×1 with Non-Basic
(PMA Direct) Modes
You can combine a transceiver channel instance configured in Basic (PMA Direct) ×1
configuration with instances set up in non-Basic (PMA Direct) configurations (for
example, GIGE and SDI within the same transceiver block).
If the CMU PLL configuration for the Basic (PMA Direct) ×1 configuration and the
non-Basic (PMA Direct) configuration instances meet the requirements specified in
“Multiple Channels Sharing a CMU PLL” on page 3–5 and “General Requirements to
Combine Channels” on page 3–3, the Quartus II software uses a single CMU PLL for
these two instances. In addition, to share the same CMU PLL between the two
instances, you cannot enable the channel reconfiguration option in the instance setup
in non-Basic (PMA Direct) configuration.
Example 6
Consider the example design listed in Table 3–9 for Basic (PMA Direct) ×1 and
non-Basic (PMA Direct) configurations at the same data rate.
Table 3–9. Basic (PMA Direct) ×1 and Non-Basic (PMA Direct) Configurations at the Same Data Rate for Example 6
Instances Configuration CMU PLL Base
Data Rate (Gbps)
Transmitter Channel
Effective Data Rate (Gbps)
Input Reference Clock
Frequency (MHz)
inst0
GIGE 1.25 1.25 125
(assume
refclk0
)
inst1
Basic (PMA Direct) ×1
(four channels) 1.25 1.25 Same as
inst0
3–30 Chapter 3: Configuring Multiple Protocols and Data Rates in Stratix IV Devices
Combining Transceiver Channels in Basic (PMA Direct) Configurations
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Figure 3–14 shows Basic (PMA Direct) ×1 and non-Basic (PMA Direct) configurations
before compilation.
Figure 3–15 shows Basic (PMA Direct) ×1 and non-Basic (PMA Direct) configurations
after compilation.
Figure 3–14. Logical View of the Instances in Basic (PMA Direct) ×1 and Non-Basic (PMA Direct)
Configurations Before Compilation for Example 6
Figure 3–15. Combining Basic (PMA-Direct) ×1 and Non-Basic (PMA Direct) Configurations After
Compilation for Example 6
CMU PLL
(1.25 G)
CMU PLL
(1.25 G)
Inst0: GIGE functional mode
Number of channels = 1
Inst1: Basic (PMA Direct) x1 mode
Number of channels = 4
Transceiver Block
CMU PLL
(1.25 Gbps)
Inst0: GIGE channel
Inst1: Channel 0
Inst1: Channel 1
Inst1: Channel 2
Inst1: Channel 3
RX TX
RX TX
RX TX
RX TX
RX TX
Chapter 3: Configuring Multiple Protocols and Data Rates in Stratix IV Devices 3–31
Combining Transceiver Channels in Basic (PMA Direct) Configurations
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Example 7
Consider the example design listed in Table 3–10 for Basic (PMA Direct) ×1 and
non-Basic (PMA Direct) configurations at different data rates.
Figure 3–16 shows Basic (PMA Direct) ×1 and non-Basic (PMA Direct) configurations
before compilation.
1The data rate configurations of the two CMU PLLs are different.
Table 3–10. Basic (PMA Direct) ×1 and Non-Basic (PMA Direct) Configurations at Different Data Rates for Example 7
Instances Configuration CMU PLL Base
Data Rate (Gbps)
Transmitter Channel
Effective Data Rate (Gbps)
Input Reference
Clock Frequency
(MHz)
inst0
GIGE 1.25 1.25 125
(assume
refclk0
)
inst1
Basic (PMA Direct) ×1
(three channels in Receiver
and Transmitter
configuration)
22
refclk1
inst2
Basic (PMA Direct) ×1
(one channel in Transmitter
Only configuration)
22refclk1
Figure 3–16. Logical View of the Basic (PMA Direct) ×1 and Non-Basic (PMA Direct)
Configurations Before Compilation for Example 7
CMU PLL
(1.25 Gbps)
CMU PLL
(2 Gbps)
Inst0: GIGE functional mode
Number of channels = 1
Inst1: Basic (PMA Direct) x1 mode
Number of channels = 3
CMU PLL
(2 Gbps)
Inst2: Basic (PMA Direct) x1 mode
Number of channels = 1
3–32 Chapter 3: Configuring Multiple Protocols and Data Rates in Stratix IV Devices
Combining Transceiver Channels in Basic (PMA Direct) Configurations
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Figure 3–17 shows Basic (PMA Direct) ×1 and non-Basic (PMA Direct) configurations
after compilation.
Key Observations
1To combine the these instances, two CMU PLLs are required due to the different data
rates. Therefore, two CMU channels must be available to enable their respective CMU
PLLs. Note that
inst3
uses the transmit side of the CMU channel that uses the CMU
PLL for clock generation.
Figure 3–17. Combining Basic (PMA Direct) ×1 and Non-Basic (PMA Direct) Instances in a
Transceiver Block After Compilation for Example 7
GXBR
Inst0: Channel (GIGE)
Inst1: Channel 0
Inst1: Channel 1
Inst1: Channel 2
RX TX
RX TX
RX TX
RX TX
inst3: TX
CMU PLL
(2 Gbps)
CMU PLL
(1.25 Gbps)
Chapter 3: Configuring Multiple Protocols and Data Rates in Stratix IV Devices 3–33
Combining Transceiver Channels in Basic (PMA Direct) Configurations
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Basic (PMA Direct) ×N Configurations
When you configure a transceiver channel in Basic (PMA Direct) ×N configuration,
you can enable the Quartus II software to use the ×N lines to provide clocks to the
transmitter channels, as shown in Figure 3–18.
The following are the possible sources driving the ×N clock lines:
■The
CMU0
central divider within the
CMU0
channel. Only the
CMU0
clock divider
block can drive the ×N clock lines. Either the
CMU0
PLL or
CMU1
PLL can drive the
central clock divider block.
fTo understand the input clock connections to the central clock divider
block, refer to the “CMU0 Channel” section in the Transceiver Architecture in
Stratix IV Devices chapter.
■The ATX PLL block.
Channel Placement in a Basic (PMA Direct) ×N Mode Instance
If you compile a design with a transceiver instance configured in Basic (PMA Direct)
xN mode, the Quartus II software, by default, places these channels contiguously.
You can force the placement of the transceiver channels across multiple transceiver
blocks on the same side of the device by assigning pins to the transmitter and receiver
serial ports.
The logical channel 0 of the Basic (PMA Direct) ×N mode instance does not have to be
assigned to the physical channel 0 of a transceiver block. The logical channel 0 of an
instance with multiple channels is
tx_dataout[0]
or
rx_datain[0]
, which are the
serial transmit and receive ports provided by the ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In
Manager. When you assign pins, you are not required to assign
tx_dataout[0]
to the
location of physical channel 0 in the transceiver block to compile your design.
This is not the case if you have a PCIe ×4 configuration where
tx_dataout[0]
and
rx_datain[0]
must be assigned to physical channel 0 of the transceiver block.
3–34 Chapter 3: Configuring Multiple Protocols and Data Rates in Stratix IV Devices
Combining Transceiver Channels in Basic (PMA Direct) Configurations
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Figure 3–18 shows the different drivers of the ×
N_Top
and ×
N_Bottom
clock lines.
Figure 3–18. The ×N_Top and ×N_Bottom Clock Line Connections
xN_Top
Transceiver Block GXBR2
Channel 3
Channel 2
Channel 1
Channel 0
CMU1 Channel
CMU0 Channel
ATX R1 PLL Block
Transceiver Block GXBR1
Channel 3
Channel 2
Channel 1
Channel 0
CMU1 Channel
CMU0 Channel
ATX R0 PLL Block
Transceiver Block GXBR0
Channel 3
Channel 2
Channel 1
Channel 0
CMU1 Channel
CMU0 Channel
x1
CMU0 GXBR2
x1
CMU1 GXBR2 x4_GXBR2
x4_GXBR1
x4_GXBR0
xN_Bottom
x1
CMU1 GXBR1
x1
CMU1 GXBR0
x1
CMU0 GXBR1
x1
CMU0 GXBR0
Chapter 3: Configuring Multiple Protocols and Data Rates in Stratix IV Devices 3–35
Combining Transceiver Channels in Basic (PMA Direct) Configurations
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Examples of Combining Multiple Instances of Basic (PMA Direct) ×N Modes
The following section describes combining multiple transceiver channel instances in
Basic (PMA Direct) ×N mode. Configuration examples include transceiver channels
with different data rates, configurations in Basic (PMA Direct) ×N mode with
non-Basic (PMA Direct) and ATX PLL, and unsupported configurations.
Example 8
Consider the configuration for the two instances listed in Table 3–11 when combining
transceiver channels in Basic (PMA Direct) ×N mode with different data rates.
Table 3–11. Combining Transceiver Channels in Basic (PMA Direct) ×N Configuration with Different Data Rates for
Example 8
User Defined Instance Name Number of Channels Effective Data Rate (Gbps) Configuration
inst0
61.5Receiver and transmitter
inst1
51.25Receiver and transmitter
3–36 Chapter 3: Configuring Multiple Protocols and Data Rates in Stratix IV Devices
Combining Transceiver Channels in Basic (PMA Direct) Configurations
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
You can place channels within a given instance non-contiguously, as shown in
Figure 3–19.
Figure 3–19. Non-Contiguous Placements of Channels Using Different CMU PLLs for Example 8
Note to Figure 3–19:
(1) The red lines represent the ×N top clock line, the blue lines represent the ×4 clock line, and the black lines represent
the ×N bottom clock line.
TXRX
TXRX
TXRX
TXRX
TXRX
TXRX
TXRX
TXRX
TXRX
TXRX
TXRX
GXBR1
x4 Clock Line (1)
xN Bottom Clock Line (1)
xN Top Clock Line (1)
Inst0: Channel 0
Inst0: Channel 1
Inst0: Channel 2
Inst0: Channel 3
Inst0: Channel 4
GXBR0
Inst1: Channel 0
Inst1: Channel 1
Inst1: Channel 2
Inst0: Channel 5
Inst1: Channel 3
Inst1: Channel 4
Transceiver Block 2
CMU0 PLL
Base data rate
1.25 Gbps
CMU0 Channel
Central
Clock
Divider
CMU0 PLL
Base data rate
1.5 Gbps
CMU0 Channel
Central
Clock
Divider
Chapter 3: Configuring Multiple Protocols and Data Rates in Stratix IV Devices 3–37
Combining Transceiver Channels in Basic (PMA Direct) Configurations
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Key Observations
■Note that channel 5 in
inst0
is placed in transceiver block 1 and receives the
high-speed clock through the ×
N_Top
clock line.
■Some of the channels in transceiver block 1 receive their high-speed clock from the
×
N_Bottom
clock line. Because the ×
N_Top
and ×
N_Bottom
lines are separate, this
scenario is allowed. To understand the clock multiplexer on the ×N clock lines,
refer to Figure 3–18 on page 3–34.
Combining Channels Configured in Basic (PMA Direct) ×N Configuration with Non-Basic
(PMA Direct) Configurations
The Quartus II software only allows a combination of a transceiver channel instances
configured in Basic (PMA Direct) ×N mode with instances in non-Basic (PMA Direct)
configurations; for example, GIGE and SDI.
Example 9
Consider the example design listed in Table 3–12 for the two instances when
combining a Basic (PMA Direct) ×N configuration with a non-Basic (PMA Direct)
configuration using a CMU PLL.
Table 3–12. Combining Basic (PMA Direct) ×N Configuration with Non-Basic (PMA Direct) Configuration Using CMU PLL
for Example 9
User Defined
Instance Name Number of Channels Effective Data Rate (Gbps) Configuration Functional Mode
inst0
91.5
Receiver and
Transmitter Basic (PMA Direct) ×N
inst1
11.25
Receiver and
Transmitter GIGE
3–38 Chapter 3: Configuring Multiple Protocols and Data Rates in Stratix IV Devices
Combining Transceiver Channels in Basic (PMA Direct) Configurations
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
You can place these two instances in two transceiver blocks, as shown in Figure 3–20.
Figure 3–20. Combining Basic (PMA Direct) ×N Configuration with Non-Basic (PMA Direct)
Configuration Using CMU PLL in Two Transceiver Blocks For Example 9
Note to Figure 3–20:
(1) The red lines represent the ×N top clock line, the blue lines represent the ×4 clock line, and the black line represents
the ×N bottom clock line.
GXBR1
Inst0:Channel 1
Inst0:Channel 0
RX TX
Inst0:Channel 1
RX TX
Inst0:Channel 2
RX TX
Inst0:Channel 3
RX TX
Inst0:Channel 4
RX TX
GXBR0
Inst0:Channel 1
Inst0:Channel 5
RX TX
Inst0:Channel 6
RX TX
Inst0:Channel 7
RX TX
Inst0:Channel 8
RX TX
Inst1:Channel 0
RX TX
CMU PLL
(1.25 Gbps)
xN Top Clock Line (1
)
x4 Clock Line (1)
x1 Clock Line
CMU0
PLL
CMU0 Channel
Central
Clock
Divider
Chapter 3: Configuring Multiple Protocols and Data Rates in Stratix IV Devices 3–39
Combining Transceiver Channels in Basic (PMA Direct) Configurations
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Example 10
Consider the example design listed in Table 3–13 when combining a Basic (PMA
Direct) ×N configuration with a non-Basic (PMA Direct) configuration using an ATX
PLL.
Table 3–13. Combining Basic (PMA Direct) ×N Configuration with Non-Basic (PMA Direct) Configuration Using ATX PLL
for Example 10
User Defined
Instance Name Number of Channels Effective Data Rate (Gbps) Configuration Functional Mode
inst0
10 1.5 Receiver and
Transmitter
Basic (PMA Direct) ×N
configuration
inst1
15
Receiver and
Transmitter
Basic mode
(PCS+PMA) using
ATX PLL
3–40 Chapter 3: Configuring Multiple Protocols and Data Rates in Stratix IV Devices
Combining Transceiver Channels in Basic (PMA Direct) Configurations
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
In this case, the ATX PLL provides the high-speed clock to the transmitter channel of
inst1
. Therefore, you can combine 10 channels of
inst0
and one channel of
inst1
in
two transceiver blocks, as shown in Figure 3–21.
Figure 3–21. Combining Basic (PMA Direct) ×N Configuration with Non-Basic (PMA Direct)
Configuration Using an ATX PLL for Example 10 (1)
Notes to Figure 3–21:
(1) The ATX PLL provides the high-speed clock to channel 0 of
inst1
.
(2) The red lines represent the ×N top clock line, the blue lines represent the ×4 clock line, and the black line represents
the ×N bottom clock line.
TXRX
TXRX
TXRX
TXRX
TXRX
TXRX
TXRX
TXRX
TXRX
TXRX
x4 Clock Line (2)
TXRX
xN Bottom Clock Line (2)
GXBR1
Inst0: Channel 0
Inst0: Channel 1
Inst0: Channel 2
Inst0: Channel 3
Inst0: Channel 4
GXBR0
Inst0: Channel 5
Inst0: Channel 6
Inst0: Channel 7
Inst0: Channel 8
Inst0: Channel 9
Inst1: Channel 0
xN Top Clock Line (2
)
CMU0
PLL
CMU0 Channel
Central
Clock
Divider
ATX PLL
Base data rate
5 Gbps
ATX PLL block
Central
Clock
Divider
Chapter 3: Configuring Multiple Protocols and Data Rates in Stratix IV Devices 3–41
Combining Transceiver Channels in Basic (PMA Direct) Configurations
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
You can also combine channels configured in Basic (PMA Direct) ×N mode with
bonded ×4 and ×8 functional modes. For example scenarios, refer to Figure 3–8 on
page 3–19 and Figure 3–10 on page 3–22.
Example 11
Consider the unsupported placement design example shown Figure 3–22. The
placement is unsupported because of the ×
N_Top
clock line contention between the
ATX PLL and the
CMU0
PLL in transceiver block 0.
Figure 3–22. Unsupported Placement Due to ×N Clock Line Contention for Example 11
Note to Figure 3–22:
(1) The red lines represent the ×N top clock line and the blue lines represent the ×4 clock line.
GXBR1
Inst0:Channel 1
Inst0:Channel 0
RX TX
Inst0:Channel 1
RX TX
Inst0:Channel 2
RX TX
Inst0:Channel 3
RX TX
Inst0:Channel 4
RX TX
GXBR0
Inst0:Channel 1
Inst0:Channel 5
RX TX
Inst0:Channel 6
RX TX
Inst0:Channel 8
RX TX
Inst0:Channel 7
RX TX
Inst1:Channel 0
RX TX
Inst0:Channel 9
RX TX
xN Top Clock Line (1)
ATX PLL R1
(5 Gbps)
x4 Clock Line (1)
Contention in
using the clock
line
This channel cannot get its clock from the
ATX PLL due to clock contention
CMU0
PLL
CMU0 Channel
Central
Clock
Divider
3–42 Chapter 3: Configuring Multiple Protocols and Data Rates in Stratix IV Devices
Combination Requirements When You Enable Channel Reconfiguration
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Combination Requirements When You Enable Channel Reconfiguration
You can configure a transmitter channel to:
■Switch to an alternate CMU PLL present within the same transceiver block.
■Switch to multiple TX PLLs (CMU or ATX PLLs) that are present outside the
transceiver block.
fFor more information about setting up the transceiver to enable one of these three
options, refer to the Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices chapter.
The section describes the combination requirements for an instance that is configured
in one of the three options mentioned above with other instances.
Combination Requirements When You Enable the Use Alternate CMU PLL
Option
If you create a transceiver instance by selecting the use alternate CMU PLL option,
the Quartus II software uses two CMU PLLs. If you intend to combine other
transmitter instances within the same transceiver block, the CMU PLLs must be
shared between multiple instances. To enable the Quartus II software to share the
CMU PLLs between these instances, you must:
1. Select the user alternate CMU PLL option in all the instances.
2. Set the same PLL logical reference index value for the similar PLLs between the
two instances (similar PLLs are the ones that have the same data rate, input clock
frequency, and bandwidth setting).
3. Create a GXB TX PLL Reconfiguration group setting in the assignment editor and
assign the same value for both instances. This setting is required for all instances
and channels controlled by the shared
ALT_GX_Reconfig
.
Table 3–14 lists the assignment for the first instance (Instance 1).
Table 3–15 lists the assignment for the second instance (Instance 2).
1Ensure that the requirements specified in the “General Requirements to Combine
Channels” on page 3–3 and “Sharing CMU PLLs” on page 3–5 sections are met.
Table 3–14. Assignment for the First Instance—Instance 1
Assignment Setting
To
<provide the tx_dataout port name of first instance>
Assignment Name GXB TX PLL Reconfiguration group setting
Value <any number>
Table 3–15. Assignment for the Second Instance—Instance 2
Assignment Setting
To
<provide the tx_dataout port name of second instance>
Assignment Name GXB TX PLL Reconfiguration group setting
Value <same number as that of the first instance>
Chapter 3: Configuring Multiple Protocols and Data Rates in Stratix IV Devices 3–43
Combination Requirements When You Enable Channel Reconfiguration
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Example 12 shows the requirements.
Example 12
Consider that you intend to run four channels within the transceiver block to switch
between GIGE and SONET OC48 data rates. Assume that by default two channels run
at GIGE data rates and the other two channels run at SONET OC48 data rates.
Assume that Instance1 with two channels running at GIGE data rate is created with
the configuration, as listed in Table 3–16.
Create Instance 2 with the following parameters to enable the Quartus II software to
share CMU PLLs between the two instances.
Table 3–17 lists the required parameters to be set for Instance 2.
Table 3–18 lists the assignment for the GXB TX PLL Reconfiguration group for
Instance 1 when you compile the design.
Table 3–16. Combining Requirements with the Use Alternate CMU PLL Option Enabled—
Instance 1 for Example 12
PLL Data Rate (Gbps) Input Reference Clock (MHz) PLL Logical Reference
Index
Main PLL 1.25 125 0
Alternate PLL 2.488 155.5 1
Table 3–17. Combining Requirements with the Use Alternate CMU PLL Option Enabled—
Instance 2 for Example 12
PLL Data Rate (Gbps) Input Reference Clock (MHz) PLL Logical Reference
Index
Main PLL 2.488 155.5 1
Alternate PLL 1.25 125 0
Table 3–18. Assignment for the GXB TX PLL Reconfiguration Group for Instance 1
Assignment Setting
To
tx_dataout_instance1[0]
Note that the number of channels in this instance is 2. You can use any
one of the channel port names within this instance for this assignment.
Assignment Name GXB TX PLL Reconfiguration group setting
Value 6
3–44 Chapter 3: Configuring Multiple Protocols and Data Rates in Stratix IV Devices
Combination Requirements When You Enable Channel Reconfiguration
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Table 3–19 lists the assignment for the GXB TX PLL Reconfiguration group for
Instance 2 when you compile the design.
Key Observations
■The Main PLL in Instance 1 is configured for GIGE data rates because this is the
data rate that you intend to run the first instance.
■The main PLL in Instance 2 is configured for SONET OC48 data rates because this
is the data rate that you intend to run the second channel.
■Note that the PLL logical reference index values for similar PLLs in Instance 1 and
Instance 2 are the same.
■The GXB TX PLL Reconfiguration group setting value for
tx_dataout
of
Instance 1 and Instance 2 are the same.
Combination Requirements When You Use Multiple TX PLLs
This scenario describes transceiver configurations that have the use additional
CMU/ATX Transmitter PLLs from outside the transceiver block option in the
reconfig screen enabled.
If you create a transceiver instance using the above option and would like to share the
CMU PLLs or ATX PLL with other instances, ensure that you have met the following
requirements:
■Select the use additional CMU/ATX Transmitter PLLs from outside the
transceiver block option in other instances.
1The number of additional PLLs selected (in the How many additional PLLs
are used option) can be different between instances.
■The PLL logical reference index value of the similar PLLs that you intend to
combine must be the same in all the instances considered.
1Similar PLLs are the ones that have the same data rate, input clock
frequency, and bandwidth setting.
Table 3–19. Assignment for the GXB TX PLL Reconfiguration Group for Instance 2
Assignment Setting
To
tx_dataout_instance2[1]
You can use any one of the channel port names within this Instance for
this assignment.
Assignment Name GXB TX PLL Reconfiguration group setting
Value 6
Chapter 3: Configuring Multiple Protocols and Data Rates in Stratix IV Devices 3–45
Combination Requirements When You Enable Channel Reconfiguration
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
■Assign the same GXB TX PLL Reconfiguration group setting value for the
tx_dataout
ports of all the instances. This is explained in “Combination
Requirements When You Enable the Use Alternate CMU PLL Option” on
page 3–42.
■Ensure that the requirements specified in “General Requirements to Combine
Channels” on page 3–3, “Sharing CMU PLLs” on page 3–5, and “Sharing ATX
PLLs” on page 3–10 are met.
If you create an instance using the use additional CMU/ATX Transmitter PLLs from
outside the transceiver block option and place your transmitter channels in one
transceiver block (for example, QL1) and you use a CMU/ATX PLL from another
transceiver block (for example, QL0), the channels (if used) in QL0 must be connected
to the same reconfiguration controller as that of QL1. Example 13 shows an instance
using multiple PLLs.
Example 13
Consider that the following 12-channel design is targeted for a THREE transceiver
block per side device. The requirements for this design are:
1. Four transceiver channels to switch independently between four protocol data
rates (SONET OC48, FC 2G, GIGE, and OTU1).
2. Four transceiver channels to operate in SONET OC48 data rate.
3. Four transceiver channels to operate in GIGE data rate.
To implement step 1, you need four TX PLLs. Place the four channels in the middle
transceiver block (QL1—the left side was chosen for illustration purposes), and
provide one CMU PLL from QL0 for the SONET OC48 data rate and one CMU PLL
from QL2 for the GIGE data rate. Use the two CMU PLLs from QL1 for the FC 2G and
OTU1 data rates.
To implement step 2, note that the CMU PLL in QL0 already provides the SONET
OC48 data rate. Therefore, use the four channels in QL0 to run the SONET OC48 data
rate.
To implement step 3, note that the CMU PLL in QL2 already provides the GIGE data
rate. Therefore, use the four channels in QL2 to run the GIGE data rate.
3–46 Chapter 3: Configuring Multiple Protocols and Data Rates in Stratix IV Devices
Combination Requirements When You Enable Channel Reconfiguration
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Figure 3–23 shows the configuration for Example 13.
Figure 3–23. Three Transceiver Block Configuration for Example 13
Notes to Figure 3–23:
(1) CMU channels are used for clock generation.
(2) The red lines represent the ×N top clock line, the blue lines represent the ×1 clock line, the black lines represent ×N bottom clock, the green lines
represents the
CMU1
channel, and the brown lines represent the
CMU0
channel.
TX3: GIGE
TX2: GIGE
CMU0 Channel
(GIGE) (1)
TX1: GIGE
TX0: GIGE
TX3: four data rates
TX2: four data rates
CMU0 Channel
(FC 2G) (1)
CMU1 Channel
(OTU1) (1)
TX1: four data rates
TX0: four data rates
TX3: SONET OC48
TX2: SONET OC48
TX1: SONET OC48
TX0: SONET OC48
CMU0 Channel
(SONET OC 48) (1)
QL2
QL1
QL0
x1 Clock Line (2)
x1 Clock Line (2)
xN_Top Clock Li
xN_Bottom
Clock Line (2
Chapter 3: Configuring Multiple Protocols and Data Rates in Stratix IV Devices 3–47
Combining Transceiver Channels When You Enable the Adaptive Equalization (AEQ) Feature
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Create three Instances for steps 1, 2, and 3 with the following parameters:
Instance 1
■Select the use additional CMU/ATX Transmitter PLLs from outside the
transceiver block option.
■Number of additional PLLs: 3 (Table 3–20)
Instance 2
■Select the use additional CMU/ATX Transmitter PLLs from outside the
transceiver block option.
■Number of additional PLLs: 0 (Table 3–21)
Instance 3
■Select the use additional CMU/ATX Transmitter PLLs from outside the
transceiver block option.
■Number of additional PLLs: 0 (Table 3–22)
For more information, refer to “Combination Requirements When You Enable the Use
Alternate CMU PLL Option” on page 3–42.
Combining Transceiver Channels When You Enable the Adaptive
Equalization (AEQ) Feature
To enable the AEQ feature in a transceiver channel, select the Enable Adaptive
Equalization option in the Reconfig screen of the ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In
Manager. When you select this option, the
aeq_fromgxb
and
aeq_togxb
ports are
enabled.
fFor more information about initiating the AEQ feature, refer to the “Adaptive
Equalization (AEQ)” section in the Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices
chapter.
Table 3–20. Instance 1 for Example 13
PLL Data Rate PLL Logical Reference Index
Main PLL FC 2G 0
PLL1 OTU1 1
PLL2 GIGE 2
PLL3 SONET OC48 3
Table 3–21. Instance 2 for Example 13
PLL Data Rate PLL Logical Reference Index
Main PLL SONET OC48 3
Table 3–22. Instance 3 for Example 13
PLL Data Rate PLL Logical Reference Index
Main PLL GIGE 2
3–48 Chapter 3: Configuring Multiple Protocols and Data Rates in Stratix IV Devices
Combining Transceiver Channels When You Enable the Adaptive Equalization (AEQ) Feature
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
This section describes the requirements to combine transceiver channels when you
enable the AEQ feature.
You are not required to enable AEQ in all instances to combine them within the same
transceiver block. When you instantiate the reconfiguration controller
(
ALTGX_Reconfig
), the
aeq_fromgxb
and
aeq_togxb
ports available depend on the
setting in the what is the number of channels controlled by the reconfig controller
option. In configurations where AEQ is enabled on some of the transceiver channels
that are connected to the same reconfiguration controller, the reconfiguration
controller instance has additional
aeq_fromgxb
ports. To compile the design
successfully, connect the unused
aeq_fromgxb
ports to 0. Example 14 shows the
configuration.
Example 14
Consider that you have two ALTGX instances, Instance 1 and Instance 2 with one
channel each. Assume that only Instance 1 has the Enable adaptive equalization
option enabled.
Because there are two instances, the starting channel numbers of Instance 1 and
Instance 2 are spaced four apart (0 and 4, respectively).
In the ALTGX_Reconfig Instance, set the what is the number of channels controlled
by the reconfig controller option to 8. The ALTGX_Reconfig Instance has 48 bits for
the
aeq_fromgxb
port (24 bits per 4 channels). Instance 1 has the
aeq_fromgxb[23:0]
port because AEQ is enabled. Instance 2 does not have this port. Because Instance 1
has the starting channel number of 0, connect
aeq_fromgxb
of instance 1 to
aeq_fromgxb[23:0]
of the ALTGX_Reconfig Instance and tie
aeq_fromgxb[47:24]
to 0.
fFor more information about setting this parameter, refer to the Dynamic
Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Figure 3–24 shows the required connection for the
aeq_fromgxb
port.
1The top 24 bits of
aeq_fromgxb
are tied to 0. This is because the logical channel address
of Instance 1 starts at 4. Therefore, the top 24 bits of
aeq_fromgxb
corresponds to
Instance 2.
Figure 3–24. Required Connection for the aeq_fromgxb Port
reconfig_fromgxb[33:0]
aeq_fromgxb[47:0]
Reconfiguration Controller
24’h0
reconfig_fromgxb[16:0]
aeq_fromgxb[23:0]
reconfig_fromgxb[33:17]
Instance 1
Instance 2
Chapter 3: Configuring Multiple Protocols and Data Rates in Stratix IV Devices 3–49
Combination Requirements for Stratix IV Devices
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Combination Requirements for Stratix IV Devices
Stratix IV GT devices allow configuring multiple protocols or data rates in the same
transceiver block. For common protocols supported by both Stratix IV GX and GT
devices, as well as for Basic functional mode at data rates between 2.488 Gbps and
8.5 Gbps, Stratix IV GT devices follow the same transceiver channel placement rules
as Stratix IV GX devices.
Placement Rules for Transceiver Channels at 9.9 Gbps to 11.3 Gbps
You can use either the CMU PLL or the 10G ATX PLL to generate transceiver clocks
for channels configured at data rates between 9.9 Gbps and 10.3125 Gbps.
If you use a 10G ATX PLL to generate transceiver clocks for any channel configured
between 9.9 Gbps and 10.3125 Gbps within a transceiver block, the remaining
channels in the same transceiver block must either be unused or must be configured
at the same data rate and clocked by the same 10G ATX PLL.
If you use a CMU PLL to generate transceiver clocks for any channel configured
between 8.5 Gbps and 11.3 Gbps within a transceiver block, the remaining channels in
the same transceiver block may be configured at a different data rate and clocked by
another CMU PLL or 6G ATX PLL. In this case, Stratix IV GT devices follow the same
transceiver channel placement rules as Stratix IV GX devices.
Placing transceiver channels clocked by another PLL in the same transceiver block as
a 10G channel can result in higher transmitter output jitter on the 10G channel. The
amount of additional jitter is pending characterization.
Summary
The following is a summary for configuring multiple protocols and data rates in a
transceiver block:
■You can run each transceiver channel at independent data rates or in independent
protocol functional modes.
■Each transceiver block consists of two CMU PLLs that provide clocks to run the
transmitter channels within the transceiver block.
■To enable the Quartus II software to combine multiple instances of transceiver
channels within a transceiver block, follow the rules specified in “General
Requirements to Combine Channels” on page 3–3 and “Sharing CMU PLLs” on
page 3–5.
■You can reset each CMU PLL within a transceiver block using a
pll_powerdown
signal. For each transceiver instance, the ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager
provides an option to select the
pll_powerdown
port. If you want to share the same
CMU PLL between multiple transceiver channels, connect the
pll_powerdown
ports of the instances and drive the signal from the same logic.
3–50 Chapter 3: Configuring Multiple Protocols and Data Rates in Stratix IV Devices
Summary
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
■If you enable the PCIe hard IP block using the PCI Express Compiler, the
Quartus II software has certain requirements for using the remaining transceiver
channels within the transceiver block in the other configurations. For more
information, refer to “Combining Channels Using the PCIe hard IP Block with
Other Channels” on page 3–24.
■The Quartus II software supports two kinds of Basic (PMA Direct) configurations
(×1 and ×N).
■If you use Basic (PMA Direct) ×1 configuration, you must use the CMU PLL
within the same transceiver block.
Document Revision History
Table 3–23 lists the revision history for this chapter.
Table 3–23. Document Revision History (Part 1 of 2)
Date Version Changes
September 2012 4.2 Updated the “Overview” section to close FB #65273.
February 2011 4.1
■Updated Table 3–15.
■Updated the “Multiple Channels Sharing a CMU PLL”, “Transmitter Buffer Voltage
(VCCH)”, “Transceiver Analog Power (VCCA_L/R)”, “Calibration Clock and Power Down”,
“Combining Transceiver Instances Using PLL Cascade Clocks”, “Combining Channels
Using the PCIe hard IP Block with Other Channels”, “Combination Requirements When
You Enable the Use Alternate CMU PLL Option”, and “Placement Rules for Transceiver
Channels at 9.9 Gbps to 11.3 Gbps” sections.
■Updated chapter title.
■Applied new template.
■Minor text edits.
November 2009 4.0
■Added “Sharing ATX PLLs” on page 3–9, “Combination Requirements When Channel
Reconfiguration is Enabled” on page 3–42, “Combining Transceiver Channels When the
Adaptive Equalization (AEQ) is Enabled” on page 3–47, and “Combination Requirements
for Stratix IV GT Devices” on page 3–49.
■Added Figure 3–8, Figure 3–10, Figure 3–11, Figure 3–23, and Figure 3–24.
■Updated all other sections.
■Added Stratix IV GT information.
■Updated graphics.
■Minor text edits.
June 2009 3.1
■Updated Table 3–7.
■Minor text edits.
March 2009 3.0
■Updated sections “Combining Channels Using the PCI Express Hard IP Block with Other
Channels” on page 3–17, “Convention Used” on page 3–21, “PMA Direct Mode
Restrictions” on page 3–22, “Multiple ‘PMA Direct x1’ Configuration Instances with One
Channel per Instance” on page 3–22, “Combining Multiple Instances of TX Only and RX
Only PMA-Direct x1 Configurations” on page 3–26, “Combining Transceiver Channels
with PMA Direct Configuration” on page 3–21.
■Updated Table 3–7.
■Updated Figure 3–19.
Chapter 3: Configuring Multiple Protocols and Data Rates in Stratix IV Devices 3–51
Summary
September 2012 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
November 2008 2.0
■Updated “Transmitter Buffer Voltage (VCCH)” on page 3–2
■Added “reconfig_fromgxb and reconfig_togxb Ports” on page 3–3
■Updated Figure 3–7
■Added “Basic x8 Mode” on page 3–15
■Added Figure 3–8
■Updated Table 3–7
May 2008 1.0 Initial release.
Table 3–23. Document Revision History (Part 2 of 2)
Date Version Changes
3–52 Chapter 3: Configuring Multiple Protocols and Data Rates in Stratix IV Devices
Summary
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2012 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
SIV52004-4.4
© 2014 Altera Corporation. All rights reserved. ALTERA, ARRIA, CYCLONE, HARDCOPY, MAX, MEGACORE, NIOS, QUARTUS and STRATIX words and logos
are trademarks of Altera Corporation and registered in the U.S. Patent and Trademark Office and in other countries. All other words and logos identified as
trademarks or service marks are the property of their respective holders as described at www.altera.com/common/legal.html. Altera warrants performance of its
semiconductor products to current specifications in accordance with Altera's standard warranty, but reserves the right to make changes to any products and
services at any time without notice. Altera assumes no responsibility or liability arising out of the application or use of any information, product, or service
described herein except as expressly agreed to in writing by Altera. Altera customers are advised to obtain the latest version of device specifications before relying
on any published information and before placing orders for products or services.
Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
January 2014
Feedback Subscribe
ISO
9001:2008
Registered
4. Reset Control and Power Down in
Stratix IV Devices
Stratix®IV devices offer multiple reset signals to control the transceiver channels and
clock multiplier unit (CMU) phase-locked loops (PLLs) independently. The ALTGX
Transceiver MegaWizard™ Plug-In Manager provides individual reset signals for each
channel instantiated in your design. It also provides one power-down signal for each
transceiver block.
This chapter includes the following sections:
■“User Reset and Power-Down Signals” on page 4–2
■“Transceiver Reset Sequences” on page 4–4
■“PMA Direct Drive Mode Reset Sequences” on page 4–24
■“Dynamic Reconfiguration Reset Sequences” on page 4–36
■“Power Down” on page 4–38
■“Simulation Requirements” on page 4–39
■“Reference Information” on page 4–39
Figure 4–1 shows the reset control and power-down block for a Stratix IV device.
Figure 4–1. Reset Control and Power-Down Block
Reset Controller
tx_digitalreset
rx_digitalreset
rx_analogreset
pll_powerdown
gxb_powerdown
January 2014
SIV52004-4.4
4–2 Chapter 4: Reset Control and Power Down in Stratix IV Devices
User Reset and Power-Down Signals
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
User Reset and Power-Down Signals
Each transceiver channel in the Stratix IV device has individual reset signals to reset
its physical coding sublayer (PCS) and physical medium attachment (PMA) blocks.
Each CMU PLL in the transceiver block has a dedicated reset signal. The transceiver
block also has a power-down signal that affects all the channels and CMU PLLs in the
transceiver block.
1All reset and power-down signals are asynchronous.
Table 4–1 lists the reset signals available for each transceiver channel.
Table 4–1. Transceiver Channel Reset Signals
Signal ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In
Manager Configurations Description
tx_digitalreset
(1) ■Transmitter Only
■Receiver and Transmitter
Provides asynchronous reset to all digital logic in
the transmitter PCS, including the XAUI transmit
state machine.
The minimum pulse width for this signal is two
parallel clock cycles.
rx_digitalreset
(1) ■Receiver Only
■Receiver and Transmitter
Resets all digital logic in the receiver PCS,
including:
■XAUI receiver state machines
■GIGE receiver state machines
■XAUI channel alignment state machine
■BIST-PRBS verifier
■BIST-incremental verifier
The minimum pulse width for this signal is two
parallel clock cycles.
rx_analogreset
■Receiver Only
■Receiver and Transmitter
Resets the receiver CDR present in the receiver
channel.
The minimum pulse width is two parallel clock
cycles.
Note to Table 4–1:
(1) Assert this signal until the clocks coming out of the transmitter PLL and receiver CDR are stabilized. Stable parallel clocks are essential for
proper operation of the transmitter and receiver phase-compensation FIFOs in the PCS.
Chapter 4: Reset Control and Power Down in Stratix IV Devices 4–3
User Reset and Power-Down Signals
January 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Table 4–2 lists the power-down signals available for each CMU PLL transceiver block.
fFor more information about offset cancellation, refer to the Dynamic Reconfiguration in
Stratix IV Devices chapter.
1If none of the channels is instantiated in a transceiver block, the Quartus® II software
automatically powers down the entire transceiver block.
Blocks Affected by the Reset and Power-Down Signals
Table 4–3 lists the blocks that are affected by specific reset and power-down signals.
Table 4–2. Transceiver Block Power-Down Signals
Signal Description
pll_powerdown (1)
Each transceiver block has two CMU PLLs. Each CMU PLL has this dedicated power-down
signal. This signal powers down the CMU PLLs that provide high-speed serial and
low-speed parallel clocks to the transceiver channels.
gxb_powerdown (1)
Powers down the entire transceiver block. When this signal is asserted, it powers down:
■the PCS and PMA in all the transceiver channels
■the CMU PLLs
This signal operates independently from the other reset signals and is common to the
transceiver block.
pll_locked
A status signal. Indicates the status of the transmitter PLL.
■A high level—the transmitter PLL is locked to the incoming reference clock frequency.
When
pll_locked
is low,
tx_digitalreset
must always be asserted. To de-assert
tx_digitalreset
, follow the initialization reset sequence for your specific mode.
rx_pll_locked A status signal.
■A high level—the receiver CDR is locked to the incoming reference clock frequency.
rx_freqlocked
A status signal. Indicates the status of the receiver CDR lock mode.
■A high level—the receiver is in lock-to-data (LTD) mode.
■A low level—the receiver CDR is in lock-to-reference (LTR) mode. In automatic lock
mode, when
rx_freqlocked
is low,
rx_digitalreset
must always be asserted. To
de-assert
rx_digitalreset
, follow the initialization reset sequence for your specific
mode.
busy
A status signal. An output from the ALTGX_RECONFIG block indicates the status of the
dynamic reconfiguration controller. This signal remains low for the first
reconfig_clk
clock cycle after power up. It then is asserted from the second
reconfig_clk
clock cycle.
Assertion on this signal indicates that the offset cancellation process is being executed on
the receiver buffer as well as the receiver CDR. When this signal is de-asserted, it indicates
that offset cancellation is complete.
Note to Table 4–2:
(1) The refclk (
refclk0
or
refclk1
) buffer is not powered down by this signal.
Table 4–3. Blocks Affected by Reset and Power-Down Signals (Part 1 of 2)
Transceiver Block rx_digitalreset rx_analogreset tx_digitalreset pll_powerdown gxb_powerdown
CMU PLLs — — — Y Y
Transmitter Phase
Compensation FIFO —— Y— Y
4–4 Chapter 4: Reset Control and Power Down in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Reset Sequences
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Transceiver Reset Sequences
You can configure transceiver channels in Stratix IV devices in various configurations.
In all functional modes except XAUI functional mode, transceiver channels can be
either bonded or non-bonded. In XAUI functional mode, transceiver channels must be
bonded. In PCI Express® (PCIe) functional mode, transceiver channels can be either
bonded or non-bonded and need to follow a specific reset sequence.
The two categories of reset sequences for Stratix IV devices described in this chapter
are:
■“All Supported Functional Modes Except PCIe Functional Mode” on page 4–6—
describes the reset sequences in bonded and non-bonded configurations.
■“PCIe Functional Mode” on page 4–22—describes the reset sequence for the
initialization/compliance phase and the normal operation phase in PCIe
functional modes.
Byte Serializer — — Y — Y
8B/10B Encoder — — Y — Y
Serializer — — Y — Y
Transmitter Buffer — — — — Y
Transmitter XAUI State
Machine —— Y— Y
Receiver Buffer — — — — Y
Receiver CDR — Y — — Y
Receiver Deserializer — — — — Y
Receiver Word Aligner Y — — — Y
Receiver Deskew FIFO Y — — — Y
Receiver Clock Rate
Compensation FIFO Y——— Y
Receiver 8B/10B
Decoder Y——— Y
Receiver Byte
Deserializer Y——— Y
Receiver Byte Ordering Y — — — Y
Receiver Phase
Compensation FIFO Y——— Y
Receiver XAUI State
Machine Y——— Y
BIST Verifiers Y — — — Y
Table 4–3. Blocks Affected by Reset and Power-Down Signals (Part 2 of 2)
Transceiver Block rx_digitalreset rx_analogreset tx_digitalreset pll_powerdown gxb_powerdown
Chapter 4: Reset Control and Power Down in Stratix IV Devices 4–5
Transceiver Reset Sequences
January 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
1The
busy
signal remains low for the first
reconfig_clk
clock cycle. It then is asserted
from the second
reconfig_clk
clock cycle. Subsequent de-assertion of the
busy
signal
indicates the completion of the offset cancellation process. This
busy
signal is required
in transceiver reset sequences except for Transmitter Only channel configurations.
For more information, refer to the reset sequences shown in Figure 4–2 and the
associated references listed in the figure notes.
1Altera strongly recommends adhering to these reset sequences for proper operation of
the Stratix IV transceiver.
Figure 4–2 shows the transceiver reset sequences for Stratix IV devices.
Figure 4–2. Transceiver Reset Sequences Chart
Notes to Figure 4–2:
(1) Refer to the Timing Diagram in Figure 4–12.
(2) Refer to the Timing Diagram in Figure 4–3.
(3) Refer to the Timing Diagram in Figure 4–4.
(4) Refer to the Timing Diagram in Figure 4–5.
(5) Refer to the Timing Diagram in Figure 4–6.
(6) Refer to the Timing Diagram in Figure 4–7.
(7) Refer to the Timing Diagram in Figure 4–8.
(8) Refer to the Timing Diagram in Figure 4–9.
(9) Refer to the Timing Diagram in Figure 4–10.
(10) Refer to the Timing Diagram in Figure 4–11.
(11) Refer to the Timing Diagram in Figure 4–13.
(12) Refer to the Timing Diagram in Figure 4–16.
(13) Refer to the Timing Diagram in Figure 4–17.
(14) Refer to the Timing Diagram in Figure 4–18.
(15) Refer to the Timing Diagram in Figure 4–19.
Transceiver
initialization reset
sequences
All supported
functional modes
except PCI Express (PIPE)
and PMA Direct Drive Mode
PCI Express
(PIPE)
PMA Direct
Drive
Initialization/
Compliance and
Normal Operation
Phases (1)
xN x1
‘Transmitter Only’
channel (11)
‘Receiver and
Transmitter’
channel
‘Receiver and
Transmitter’
channel
Receiver CDR in
manual lock
mode (15)
Receiver CDR in
automatic lock
mode (14)
Receiver CDR in
manual lock
mode (13)
Receiver CDR in
automatic lock
mode (12)
Receiver CDR
in automatic
lock mode
(9)
Receiver CDR
in manual
lock mode
(10)
Receiver CDR
in manual
lock mode
(8)
Receiver CDR
in automatic
lock mode
(7)
‘Receiver Only’
channel
‘Receiver and
Transmitter’
channel
Non-Bonded
Bonded
‘Transmitter Only’
channel (2)
‘Transmitter Only’
channel (2)
‘Receiver and
Transmitter’
channel
Receiver CDR
in automatic
lock mode
(3)
Receiver CDR
in manual
lock mode
(4)
Receiver CDR
in manual
lock mode
(6)
Receiver CDR
in automatic
lock mode
(5)
Dynamic Reconfiguration
Reset Sequence
to change
the data rate of
the transceiver
channel
Reset Sequence
to change
the TX PLL settings
the transceiver
channel
4–6 Chapter 4: Reset Control and Power Down in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Reset Sequences
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
All Supported Functional Modes Except PCIe Functional Mode
This section describes reset sequences for transceiver channels in bonded and
non-bonded configurations. Timing diagrams of some typical configurations are
shown to facilitate proper reset sequence implementation. In these functional modes,
you can set the receiver CDR either in automatic lock or manual lock mode.
1In manual lock mode, the receiver CDR locks to the reference clock (lock-to-reference)
or the incoming serial data (lock-to-data), depending on the logic levels on the
rx_locktorefclk
and
rx_locktodata
signals. With the receiver CDR in manual lock
mode, you can either configure the transceiver channels in the Stratix IV device in a
non-bonded configuration or a bonded configuration. In a bonded configuration, for
example in XAUI mode, four channels are bonded together.
Table 4–4 lists the lock-to-reference (LTR) and lock-to-data (LTD) controller lock
modes for the
rx_locktorefclk
and
rx_locktodata
signals.
Bonded Channel Configuration
In a bonded channel configuration, you can reset all the bonded channels
simultaneously. Examples of bonded channel configurations are XAUI, PCIe, and
Basic ×4 functional modes. In Basic ×4 functional mode, you can bond Transmitter
Only channels together.
In XAUI mode, the receiver and transmitter channels are bonded. Each of the receiver
channels in this mode has its own output status signals,
rx_pll_locked
and
rx_freqlocked
. You must consider the timing of these signals in the reset sequence.
Table 4–5 lists the reset and power-down sequences for bonded configurations under
the stated functional modes.
Table 4–4. Lock-To-Reference and Lock-To-Data Modes
rx_locktorefclk rx_locktodata LTR/LTD Controller Lock Mode
1 0 Manual, LTR Mode
— 1 Manual, LTD Mode
0 0 Automatic Lock Mode
Table 4–5. Reset and Power-Down Sequences for Bonded Channel Configurations
Channel Set Up Receiver CDR Mode Refer to
Transmitter Only Basic ×4 “Transmitter Only Channel” on page 4–7
Receiver and Transmitter Automatic lock mode for XAUI
functional mode
“Receiver and Transmitter Channel—Receiver
CDR in Automatic Lock Mode” on page 4–8
Receiver and Transmitter Manual lock mode for XAUI functional
mode
“Receiver and Transmitter Channel—Receiver
CDR in Manual Lock Mode” on page 4–10
Receiver and Transmitter Automatic lock mode for Basic ×8
functional mode
“Receiver and Transmitter Channel—Receiver
CDR in Automatic Lock Mode” on page 4–12
Receiver and Transmitter Manual lock mode for Basic ×8
functional mode
“Receiver and Transmitter Channel—Receiver
CDR in Manual Lock Mode” on page 4–14
Chapter 4: Reset Control and Power Down in Stratix IV Devices 4–7
Transceiver Reset Sequences
January 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Transmitter Only Channel
This configuration contains only a transmitter channel. If you create a Transmitter
Only instance in the ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager in Basic ×4 functional
mode, use the reset sequence shown in Figure 4–3.
As shown in Figure 4–3, for the Transmitter Only channel configuration, follow these
reset steps:
1. After power up, assert
pll_powerdown
for a minimum period of tpll_powerdown (the
time between markers 1 and 2).
2. Keep the
tx_digitalreset
signal asserted during this time period. After you
de-assert the
pll_powerdown
signal, the transmitter PLL starts locking to the
transmitter input reference clock.
3. When the transmitter PLL locks, as indicated by the
pll_locked
signal going high
(marker 3), de-assert the
tx_digitalreset
signal (marker 4). At this point, the
transmitter is ready for transmitting data.
Figure 4–3. Sample Reset Sequence for Four Transmitter Only Channels
Note to Figure 4–3:
(1) For tpll_powerdown duration, refer to the DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Reset and Power-Down Signals
12
4
Output Status Signals
3
pll_powerdown
tx_digitalreset
pll_locked
pll_powerdown
(1)
t
4–8 Chapter 4: Reset Control and Power Down in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Reset Sequences
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Receiver and Transmitter Channel—Receiver CDR in Automatic Lock Mode
This configuration contains both a transmitter and receiver channel. For XAUI
functional mode, with the receiver CDR in automatic lock mode, use the reset
sequence shown in Figure 4–4.
Figure 4–4. Sample Reset Sequence for Four Receiver and Transmitter Channels—Receiver CDR in Automatic Lock
Mode
Notes to Figure 4–4:
(1) For tpll_powerdown duration, refer to the DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices chapter.
(2) For tLTD_Auto duration, refer to the DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices chapter.
pll _ powerdown
tx _digitalreset
Reset Signals
Output Status Signals
pll _locked
12
3
4
7
7
rx _analogreset
6
rx _digitalreset
8
busy 5
Minimum of Two Parallel System Clock Cycles
rx_freqlocked[0]
rx_freqlocked[3]
pll_powerdown (1)
t
LTD_Auto (2)
t
Chapter 4: Reset Control and Power Down in Stratix IV Devices 4–9
Transceiver Reset Sequences
January 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
As shown in Figure 4–4, for the receiver CDR in automatic lock mode configuration,
follow these reset steps:
1. After power up, assert
pll_powerdown
for a minimum period of tpll_powerdown (the
time between markers 1 and 2).
2. Keep the
tx_digitalreset
,
rx_analogreset
, and
rx_digitalreset
signals
asserted during this time period. After you de-assert the
pll_powerdown
signal, the
transmitter PLL starts locking to the transmitter input reference clock.
3. After the transmitter PLL locks, as indicated by the
pll_locked
signal going high,
de-assert the
tx_digitalreset
signal. At this point, the transmitter is ready for
data traffic.
4. For the receiver operation, after de-assertion of
busy
signal, wait for a minimum of
two parallel clock cycles to de-assert the
rx_analogreset
signal. After
rx_analogreset
is de-asserted, the receiver CDR of each channel starts locking to
the receiver input reference clock.
5. Wait for the
rx_freqlocked
signal from each channel to go high. The
rx_freqlocked
signal of each channel may go high at different times (indicated by
the slashed pattern at marker 7).
6. In a bonded channel group, when the
rx_freqlocked
signals of all the channels
has gone high, from that point onwards, wait for at least tLTD_Auto for the receiver
parallel clock to be stable, then de-assert the
rx_digitalreset
signal (marker 8).
At this point, all the receivers are ready for data traffic. Note that
rx_digitalreset
must not be released if there is no data present at the receiver pins to avoid
overflow/underflow of the phase compensation FIFOs.
4–10 Chapter 4: Reset Control and Power Down in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Reset Sequences
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Receiver and Transmitter Channel—Receiver CDR in Manual Lock Mode
This configuration contains both a transmitter and receiver channel. For XAUI
functional mode, with the receiver CDR in manual lock mode, use the reset sequence
shown in Figure 4–5.
Figure 4–5. Sample Reset Sequence for Four Receiver and Transmitter Channels—Receiver CDR in Manual Lock Mode
Notes to Figure 4–5:
(1) For tpll_powerdown duration, refer to the DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices chapter.
(2) For tLTR_LTD_Manual duration, refer to the DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices chapter.
(3) For tLTD_Manual duration, refer to the DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices chapter.
pll _ powerdown
tx _digitalreset
rx _analogreset
rx _digitalreset
Reset Signals
Output Status Signals
pll _ locked
1
2
3
4
7
8
9
CDR Control Signals
8
6
7
8
8
busy
5
Minimum of Two Parallel Clock Cycles
rx_locktorefclk[0]
rx_locktorefclk[3]
rx_locktodata[0]
rx_locktodata[3]
rx_pll_locked[0]
rx_pll_locked[3]
pll_powerdown (1)
t
LTD_Manual (3)
t
LTR_LTD_Manual (2)
t
Chapter 4: Reset Control and Power Down in Stratix IV Devices 4–11
Transceiver Reset Sequences
January 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
As shown in Figure 4–5, for the receiver CDR in manual lock mode configuration,
follow these reset steps:
1. After power up, assert
pll_powerdown
for a minimum period of tpll_powerdown (the
time between markers 1 and 2).
2. Keep the
tx_digitalreset
,
rx_analogreset
,
rx_digitalreset
, and
rx_locktorefclk
signals asserted and the
rx_locktodata
signal de-asserted
during this time period. After you de-assert the
pll_powerdown
signal, the
transmitter PLL starts locking to the transmitter input reference clock.
3. After the transmitter PLL locks, as indicated by the
pll_locked
signal going high
(marker 3), de-assert the
tx_digitalreset
signal (marker 4). For the receiver
operation, after de-assertion of the
busy
signal, wait for a minimum of two parallel
clock cycles to de-assert the
rx_analogreset
signal. After the
rx_analogreset
signal is de-asserted, the receiver CDR of each channel starts locking to the
receiver input reference clock because
rx_locktorefclk
is asserted.
4. Wait for the
rx_pll_locked
signal from each channel to go high. The
rx_pll_locked
signal of each channel may go high at different times with respect
to each other (indicated by the slashed pattern at marker 7).
5. In a bonded channel group, when the
rx_pll_locked
signal of all the channels
have gone high, from that point onwards, wait for at least tLTR_LTD_Manual, then
de-assert
rx_locktorefclk
and assert
rx_locktodata
(marker 8). At this point, the
receiver CDR of all the channels enters into lock-to-data mode and starts locking to
the received data.
6. After asserting the
rx_locktodata
signal, wait for at least tLTD_Manual before
de-asserting
rx_digitalreset
(the time between markers 8 and 9).
4–12 Chapter 4: Reset Control and Power Down in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Reset Sequences
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Receiver and Transmitter Channel—Receiver CDR in Automatic Lock Mode
This configuration contains both a transmitter and a receiver channel. For Basic ×8
functional mode, with the receiver CDR in automatic lock mode, use the reset
sequence shown in Figure 4–6.
Figure 4–6. Sample Reset Sequence for Eight Receiver and Transmitter Channels—Receiver CDR in Automatic Lock
Mode
Notes to Figure 4–6:
(1) For tpll_powerdown duration, refer to the DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices chapter.
(2) For tLTD_Auto duration, refer to the DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices chapter.
pll_ powerdown
tx_digitalreset
Reset Signals
Output Status Signals
pll _ locked
12
3
4
7
7
rx_analogreset
6
rx _digitalreset
8
busy
5
Minimum of Two Parallel Clock Cycles
rx_freqlocked[0]
rx_freqlocked[8]
pll_powerdown (1)
t
LTD_Auto (2)
t
Chapter 4: Reset Control and Power Down in Stratix IV Devices 4–13
Transceiver Reset Sequences
January 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
As shown in Figure 4–6, for the receiver CDR in automatic lock mode, follow these
reset steps:
1. After power up, assert
pll_powerdown
for a minimum period of tpll_powerdown (the
time between markers 1 and 2).
2. Keep the
tx_digitalreset
,
rx_analogreset
, and
rx_digitalreset
signals
asserted during this time period. After you de-assert the
pll_powerdown
signal, the
transmitter PLL starts locking to the transmitter input reference clock.
3. After the transmitter PLL locks, as indicated by the
pll_locked
signal going high,
de-assert the
tx_digitalreset
signal. At this point, the transmitter is ready for
data traffic.
4. For the receiver operation, after de-assertion of the
busy
signal, wait for a
minimum of two parallel clock cycles to de-assert the
rx_analogreset
signal.
After
rx_analogreset
is de-asserted, the receiver CDR of each channel starts
locking to the receiver input reference clock.
5. Wait for the
rx_freqlocked
signal from each channel to go high. The
rx_freqlocked
signal of each channel may go high at different times (indicated by
the slashed pattern at marker 7).
6. In a bonded channel group, when the
rx_freqlocked
signals of all the channels
have gone high, from that point onwards, wait for at least tLTD_Auto for the
receiver parallel clock to stabilize, then de-assert the
rx_digitalreset
signal
(marker 8). At this point, all the receivers are ready for data traffic. Note that
rx_digitalreset
must not be released if there is no data present at the receiver
pins to avoid overflow/underflow of the phase compensation FIFOs.
4–14 Chapter 4: Reset Control and Power Down in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Reset Sequences
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Receiver and Transmitter Channel—Receiver CDR in Manual Lock Mode
This configuration contains both a transmitter and receiver channel. For Basic ×8
functional mode, with the receiver CDR in manual lock mode, use the reset sequence
shown in Figure 4–7.
Figure 4–7. Sample Reset Sequence for Eight Receiver and Transmitter Channels—Receiver CDR in Manual Lock Mode
Notes to Figure 4–7:
(1) For tpll_powerdown duration, refer to the DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices chapter.
(2) For tLTR_LTD_Manual duration, refer to the DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices chapter.
(3) For tLTD_Manual duration, refer to the DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices chapter.
pll _ powerdown
tx _digitalreset
rx _analogreset
rx _digitalreset
Reset Signals
Output Status Signals
pll _ locked
12
3
4
7
8
9
CDR Control Signals
8
6
7
8
8
busy
5
Minimum of
Two Parallel Clock Cycles
rx_locktorefclk[0]
rx_locktorefclk[3]
rx_locktodata[0]
rx_locktodata[3]
rx_pll_locked[0]
rx_pll_locked[7]
pll_powerdown (1)
t
LTD_Manual (3)
t
LTR_LTD_Manual (2)
t
Chapter 4: Reset Control and Power Down in Stratix IV Devices 4–15
Transceiver Reset Sequences
January 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
As shown in Figure 4–7, for the receiver CDR in manual lock mode, follow these reset
steps:
1. After power up, assert
pll_powerdown
for a minimum period of tpll_powerdown (the
time between markers 1 and 2).
2. Keep the
tx_digitalreset
,
rx_analogreset
,
rx_digitalreset
, and
rx_locktorefclk
signals asserted and the
rx_locktodata
signal de-asserted
during this time period. After you de-assert the
pll_powerdown
signal, the
transmitter PLL starts locking to the transmitter input reference clock.
3. After the transmitter PLL locks, as indicated by the
pll_locked
signal going high
(marker 3), de-assert the
tx_digitalreset
signal (marker 4). For the receiver
operation, after de-assertion of the
busy
signal, wait for a minimum of two parallel
clock cycles to de-assert the
rx_analogreset
signal. After the
rx_analogreset
signal is de-asserted, the receiver CDR of each channel starts locking to the
receiver input reference clock because
rx_locktorefclk
is asserted.
4. Wait for the
rx_pll_locked
signal from each channel to go high. The
rx_pll_locked
signal of each channel may go high at different times with respect
to each other (indicated by the slashed pattern at marker 7).
5. In a bonded channel group, when the
rx_pll_locked
signal of all the channels has
gone high, from that point onwards, wait for at least tLTR_LTD_Manual, then
de-assert
rx_locktorefclk
and assert
rx_locktodata
(marker 8). At this point, the
receiver CDR of all the channels enters into lock-to-data mode and starts locking to
the received data.
6. De-assert
rx_digitalreset
at least tLTD_Manual (the time between markers 8 and 9)
after asserting the
rx_locktodata
signal.
Non-Bonded Channel Configuration
In non-bonded channels, each channel in the ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager
instance contains its own
tx_digitalreset
,
rx_analogreset
,
rx_digitalreset
,
rx_pll_locked
, and
rx_freqlocked
signals.
You can reset each channel independently. For example, if there are four non-bonded
channels, the ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager provides four each of the
following signals:
tx_digitalreset
,
rx_analogreset
,
rx_digitalreset
,
rx_pll_locked
, and
rx_freqlocked
.
Table 4–6 lists the reset and power-down sequences for one channel in a non-bonded
configuration under the stated functional modes.
Table 4–6. Reset and Power-Down Sequences for Bonded Channel Configurations (Part 1 of 2)
Channel Set Up Receiver CDR Mode Refer to
Transmitter Only Basic ×4 “Transmitter Only Channel” on page 4–16
Receiver Only Automatic lock mode “Receiver Only Channel—Receiver CDR in Automatic
Lock Mode” on page 4–16
Receiver Only Manual lock mode “Receiver Only Channel—Receiver CDR in Manual Lock
Mode” on page 4–17
4–16 Chapter 4: Reset Control and Power Down in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Reset Sequences
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
1Follow the same reset sequence for all the other channels in the non-bonded
configuration.
Transmitter Only Channel
This configuration contains only a transmitter channel. If you create a Transmitter
Only instance in the ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager, use the same reset
sequence shown in Figure 4–3 on page 4–7.
Receiver Only Channel—Receiver CDR in Automatic Lock Mode
This configuration contains only a receiver channel. If you create a Receiver Only
instance in the ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager with the receiver CDR in
automatic lock mode, use the reset sequence shown in Figure 4–8.
Receiver and Transmitter Automatic lock mode “Receiver and Transmitter Channel—Receiver CDR in
Automatic Lock Mode” on page 4–18
Receiver and Transmitter Manual lock mode “Receiver and Transmitter Channel—Receiver CDR in
Manual Lock Mode” on page 4–20
Table 4–6. Reset and Power-Down Sequences for Bonded Channel Configurations (Part 2 of 2)
Channel Set Up Receiver CDR Mode Refer to
Figure 4–8. Sample Reset Sequence of Receiver Only Channel—Receiver CDR in Automatic Lock Mode
Note to Figure 4–8:
(1) For tLTD_Auto duration, refer to the DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Reset Signals
rx _analogreset
2
Output Status Signals
rx _freqlocked
3
rx _ digitalreset
4
busy
1
Two parallel clock cycles
LTD_Auto (1)
t
Chapter 4: Reset Control and Power Down in Stratix IV Devices 4–17
Transceiver Reset Sequences
January 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
As shown in Figure 4–8, for the receiver in CDR automatic lock mode, follow these
reset steps:
1. After power up, wait for the
busy
signal to be de-asserted.
2. De-assert the
rx_analogreset
signal.
3. Keep the
rx_digitalreset
signal asserted during this time period. After you
de-assert the
rx_analogreset
signal, the receiver CDR starts locking to the
receiver input reference clock.
4. Wait for the
rx_freqlocked
signal to go high.
5. When
rx_freqlocked
goes high (marker 3), from that point onwards, wait for
at least tLTD_Auto, then de-assert the
rx_digitalreset
signal (marker 4). At this
point, the receiver is ready to receive data.
Receiver Only Channel—Receiver CDR in Manual Lock Mode
This configuration contains only a receiver channel. If you create a Receiver Only
instance in the ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager with receiver CDR in manual
lock mode, use the reset sequence shown in Figure 4–9.
Figure 4–9. Sample Reset Sequence of Receiver Only Channel—Receiver CDR in Manual Lock Mode
Notes to Figure 4–9:
(1) For tLTR_LTD duration, refer to the DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices chapter.
(2) For tLTD_Manual duration, refer to the DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices chapter.
rx _analogreset
rx _ digitalreset
Reset Signals
Output Status Signals
rx _locktorefclk
2
4
5
CDR Control Signals
rx_pll_locked
3
rx _locktodata
4
busy
1
Two parallel clock cycles
LTD_Manual (2)
t
LTR_LTD_Manual (1)
t
4–18 Chapter 4: Reset Control and Power Down in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Reset Sequences
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
As shown in Figure 4–9, for the receiver CDR in manual lock mode, follow these reset
steps:
1. After power up, wait for the
busy
signal to be asserted.
2. Keep the
rx_digitalreset
and
rx_locktorefclk
signals asserted and the
rx_locktodata
signal de-asserted during this time period.
3. After de-assertion of the
busy
signal, de-assert the
rx_analogreset
signal. The
receiver CDR then starts locking to the receiver input reference clock because the
rx_locktorefclk
signal is asserted.
4. Wait for at least tLTR_LTD_Manual time (the time between markers 3 and 4) after the
rx_pll_locked
signal goes high and then de-assert the
rx_locktorefclk
signal. At
the same time, assert the
rx_locktodata
signal (marker 4). At this point, the
receiver CDR enters lock-to-data mode and the receiver PLL starts locking to the
received data.
5. De-assert
rx_digitalreset
at least
t
LTD_Manual (the time between markers 4 and
5) after asserting the rx_locktodata signal.
Receiver and Transmitter Channel—Receiver CDR in Automatic Lock Mode
This configuration contains both a transmitter and a receiver channel. If you create a
Receiver and Transmitter instance in the ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager with
the receiver CDR in automatic lock mode, use the reset sequence shown in
Figure 4–10.
Figure 4–10. Sample Reset Sequence of Receiver and Transmitter Channel—Receiver CDR in Automatic Lock Mode
Notes to Figure 4–10:
(1) For tpll_powerdown duration, refer to the DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices chapter.
(2) For tLTD_Auto duration, refer to the DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices chapter.
pll _ powerdown
tx _ digitalreset
rx _analogreset
Reset Signals
Output Status Signals
pll _locked
12
3
4
6
rx _freqlocked
7
rx _ digitalreset
8
busy
5
Two parallel clock cycles
pll_powerdown (1)
t
LTD_Auto (2)
t
Chapter 4: Reset Control and Power Down in Stratix IV Devices 4–19
Transceiver Reset Sequences
January 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
As shown in Figure 4–10, for the receiver in CDR automatic lock mode, follow these
reset steps:
1. After power up, assert
pll_powerdown
for a minimum period of tpll_powerdown (the
time between markers 1 and 2).
2. Keep the
tx_digitalreset
,
rx_analogreset
, and
rx_digitalreset
signals
asserted during this time period. After you de-assert the
pll_powerdown
signal, the
transmitter PLL starts locking to the transmitter input reference clock.
3. After the transmitter PLL locks, as indicated by the
pll_locked
signal going high
(marker 3), de-assert
tx_digitalreset
. For receiver operation, wait for the
busy
signal to be de-asserted, after which
rx_analogreset
is de-asserted. After you
de-assert
rx_analogreset
, the receiver CDR starts locking to the receiver input
reference clock.
4. Wait for the
rx_freqlocked
signal to go high (marker 7).
5. After the
rx_freqlocked
signal goes high, wait for at least tLTD_Auto, then de-assert
the
rx_digitalreset
signal (marker 8). Note that
rx_digitalreset
must not be
released if there is no data present at the receiver pins to avoid
overflow/underflow of the phase compensation FIFOs. At this point, the
transmitter and receiver are ready for data traffic.
4–20 Chapter 4: Reset Control and Power Down in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Reset Sequences
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Receiver and Transmitter Channel—Receiver CDR in Manual Lock Mode
This configuration contains both a transmitter and receiver channel. If you create a
Receiver and Transmitter instance in the ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager with
the receiver CDR in manual lock mode, use the reset sequence shown in Figure 4–11.
Figure 4–11. Sample Reset Sequence of Receiver and Transmitter Channel—Receiver CDR in Manual Lock Mode
Notes to Figure 4–11:
(1) For tpll_powerdown duration, refer to the DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices chapter.
(2) For tLTR_LTD_Manual duration, refer to the DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices chapter.
(3) For tLTD_Manual duration, refer to the DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices chapter.
pll _ powerdown
tx _digitalreset
rx _analogreset
rx _digitalreset
Reset Signals
Output Status Signals
pll _ locked
rx_pll_locked
rx _locktorefclk
12
3
4
6
7
8
9
CDR Control Signals
rx _locktodata
8
busy
5
Two parallel clock cycles
pll_powerdown (1)
t
LTD_Manual (3)
t
LTR_LTD_Manual (2)
t
Chapter 4: Reset Control and Power Down in Stratix IV Devices 4–21
Transceiver Reset Sequences
January 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
As shown in Figure 4–11, perform the following reset procedure for the receiver in
manual lock mode:
1. After power up, assert
pll_powerdown
for a minimum period of tpll_powerdown (the
time between markers 1 and 2).
2. Keep the
tx_digitalreset
,
rx_analogreset
,
rx_digitalreset
, and
rx_locktorefclk
signals asserted and the
rx_locktodata
signal de-asserted
during this time period. After you de-assert the
pll_powerdown
signal, the
transmitter PLL starts locking to the transmitter input reference clock.
3. After the transmitter PLL locks, as indicated by the
pll_locked
signal going high
(marker 3), de-assert
tx_digitalreset
. For receiver operation, wait for the
busy
signal to be de-asserted. At this point
rx_analogreset
is de-asserted. When
rx_analogreset
is de-asserted, the receiver CDR starts locking to the receiver
input reference clock because
rx_locktorefclk
is asserted.
4. Wait for at least tLTR_LTD_Manual (the time between markers 7 and 8) after the
rx_pll_locked
signal goes high, then de-assert the
rx_locktorefclk
signal. At the
same time, assert the
rx_locktodata
signal (marker 8). At this point, the receiver
CDR enters lock-to-data mode and the receiver CDR starts locking to the received
data.
5. De-assert
rx_digitalreset
at least tLTD_Manual (the time between markers 8 and 9)
after asserting the
rx_locktodata
signal.
4–22 Chapter 4: Reset Control and Power Down in Stratix IV Devices
Transceiver Reset Sequences
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
PCIe Functional Mode
You can configure PCIe functional mode with or without the receiver clock rate
compensation FIFO in the Stratix IV device. The reset sequence remains the same
whether or not you use the receiver clock rate compensation FIFO.
PCIe Reset Sequence
The PCIe protocol consists of an initialization/compliance phase and a normal
operation phase. The reset sequences for these two phases are described based on the
timing diagram in Figure 4–12.
Figure 4–12. Reset Sequence of PCIe Functional Mode
Notes to Figure 4–12:
(1) For tpll_powerdown duration, refer to the DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices chapter.
(2) The minimum T1 and T2 period is 4 s.
(3) The minimum T3 period is two parallel clock cycles.
pll _ powerdown
tx _ digitalreset
rx _analogreset
rx _ digitalreset
Reset / Power Down Signals
Output Status Signals
pll _locked
rx _pll _locked
12
3
4
6
7
8
T1 (2)
rx _freqlocked
9
Initialization / Compliance Phase Normal Operation Phase
T2 (2)
Ignore receive data
10 11
12 13
T3 (3)
busy
5
Two parallel clock cycles
pll_powerdown (1)
t
Chapter 4: Reset Control and Power Down in Stratix IV Devices 4–23
Transceiver Reset Sequences
January 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
PCIe Initialization/Compliance Phase
After the device is powered up, a PCIe-compliant device goes through the compliance
phase during initialization. In this phase, the PCIe protocol requires the system to be
operating at the Gen 1 data rate. The
rx_digitalreset
signal must be de-asserted
during this compliance phase to achieve transitions on the
pipephydonestatus
signal,
as expected by the link layer. The
rx_digitalreset
signal is de-asserted based on the
assertion of the
rx_freqlocked
signal.
During the initialization/compliance phase, do not use the
rx_freqlocked
signal to
trigger a de-assertion of the
rx_digitalreset
signal. Instead, follow these reset steps:
1. After power up, assert
pll_powerdown
for a minimum period of tpll_powerdown (the
time between markers 1 and 2). Keep the
tx_digitalreset
,
rx_analogreset
, and
rx_digitalreset
signals asserted during this time period. After you de-assert the
pll_powerdown
signal, the transmitter PLL starts locking to the transmitter input
reference clock.
2. When the transmitter PLL locks, as indicated by the
pll_locked
signal going high
(marker 3), de-assert
tx_digitalreset
. For a receiver operation, wait for the
busy
signal to be de-asserted.
rx_analogreset
is then de-asserted. After
rx_analogreset
is de-asserted, the receiver CDR starts locking to the receiver
input reference clock.
3. When the receiver CDR locks to the input reference clock, as indicated by the
rx_pll_locked
signal going high at marker 7 in Figure 4–12, de-assert the
rx_digitalreset
signal (marker 8). After de-asserting
rx_digitalreset
, the
pipephydonestatus
signal transitions from the transceiver channel to indicate the
status to the link layer. Depending on its status,
pipephydonestatus
helps with the
continuation of the compliance phase. After successful completion of this phase,
the device enters into the normal operation phase.
PCIe Normal Phase
For the normal PCIe phase, follow these steps:
1. After completion of the Initialization/Compliance phase, during the normal
operation phase at the Gen 1 data rate, when the
rx_freqlocked
signal is
de-asserted (marker 10 in Figure 4–12), wait for the
rx_pll_locked
signal assertion
signifying the lock-to-reference clock.
2. Wait for the
rx_freqlocked
signal to go high again. In this phase, the received data
is valid (not electrical idle) and the receiver CDR locks to the incoming data.
Proceed with the reset sequence after assertion of the
rx_freqlocked
signal.
3. After the
rx_freqlocked
signal goes high, wait for at least 4 s before asserting
rx_digitalreset
(marker 12 in Figure 4–12) for two parallel receive clock cycles so
that the receiver phase compensation FIFO is initialized.
4. During normal operation, after you speed-negotiate to the Gen 2 data rate,
asserting the
rx_digitalreset
signal causes the PCIe rate switch circuitry to
switch the transceiver to the Gen 1 data rate.
Data from the transceiver block is not valid from the time the
rx_freqlocked
signal goes low (marker 10 in Figure 4–12) to the time
rx_digitalreset
is
de-asserted (marker 13 in Figure 4–12). The PLD logic ignores the data during this
period (between markers 10 and 13 in Figure 4–12).
4–24 Chapter 4: Reset Control and Power Down in Stratix IV Devices
PMA Direct Drive Mode Reset Sequences
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
1You can configure the Stratix IV device in ×1, ×4, and ×8 PCIe configurations. The
reset sequence described in “PCIe Reset Sequence” on page 4–22 applies to all these
multi-lane configurations.
PMA Direct Drive Mode Reset Sequences
Stratix IV devices provide a PMA Direct mode in which all PCS blocks, including the
phase compensation FIFOs, are bypassed in both the transmitter and receiver channel
data paths. In this mode, the PMA block in the transmitter and receiver channels
directly interface with the FPGA fabric.
In PMA Direct drive mode, you can configure the transceiver channels as a single
channel or in bonded configurations. Basic single- and double-width functional
modes support bonding of PMA functional blocks across all transceiver channels on
the same side of the device.
1The
tx_digitalreset
and
rx_digitalreset
signals are not available because there
are no PCS blocks available in this mode.
Table 4–7 lists the reset and power-down sequences for PMA Direct drive ×N
functional mode.
Table 4–7. Reset and Power-Down Sequences for PMA Direct Drive ×N Configurations
Channel Set Up Functional Mode Refer to
Transmitter Only with no PLL_L/R Basic (PMA Direct) drive ×4 “Transmitter Only Channel with No PLL_L/R” on
page 4–25
Transmitter Only with a PLL_L/R Manual lock mode “Transmitter Only Channel with a PLL_L/R” on
page 4–26
Receiver and Transmitter Automatic lock mode for Basic
(PMA Direct) drive ×N mode
“Receiver and Transmitter Channel Set-up—
Receiver CDR in Automatic Lock Mode” on
page 4–28
Receiver and Transmitter Manual lock mode for Basic
(PMA Direct) drive ×N mode
“Receiver and Transmitter Channel Set-up—
Receiver CDR in Manual Lock Mode” on
page 4–30
Chapter 4: Reset Control and Power Down in Stratix IV Devices 4–25
PMA Direct Drive Mode Reset Sequences
January 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Basic (PMA Direct) Drive ×N Mode
When bonding ×N channels in a Basic (PMA Direct) drive mode configuration, you
can reset all bonded channels simultaneously.
Transmitter Only Channel with No PLL_L/R
Figure 4–13 shows an example reset sequence timing diagram of four Transmitter
Only channels in Basic (PMA Direct) drive ×4 functional mode with no PLL_L/R.
As shown in Figure 4–13, for the Transmitter Only channel in Basic (PMA Direct)
drive functional ×4 mode with no PLL_L/R, follow these reset steps:
1. After power up, assert
pll_powerdown
for a minimum of tpll_powerdown (the time
between markers 1 and 2).
2. When the transmitter PLL locks, as indicated by the
pll_locked
signal going high
(marker 3), the transmitter is ready to accept parallel data from the FPGA fabric
and subsequently transmitting serial data reliably.
Figure 4–13. Reset Sequence Timing in Basic (PMA Direct) Drive ×4 Mode
Note to Figure 4–13:
(1) For tpll_powerdown duration, refer to the DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices chapter.
12
Ouput Status Signals
3
pll_powerdown
pll_locked
Reset and Power-Down Signals
pll_powerdown (1)
t
4–26 Chapter 4: Reset Control and Power Down in Stratix IV Devices
PMA Direct Drive Mode Reset Sequences
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Transmitter Only Channel with a PLL_L/R
The Basic (PMA Direct) mode configuration that requires a PLL_L/R is one where
each channel in PMA-Direct mode is identical. Figure 4–14 shows a simple set up of
identical channels.
Identical channels have the following same configuration:
■Same effective data rate
■Same transmitter local clock divider settings in each channel
■Same FPGA fabric-to-transceiver interface data path width
■The transmitter channels must receive the high-speed clock from the same PLL
(either CMU PLL or ATX PLL).
Figure 4–15 shows an example reset sequence timing diagram of four Transmitter
Only channels in Basic (PMA Direct) Drive x4 functional mode with a PLL_L/R.
As shown in Figure 4–15, for the Transmitter Only channel in Basic (PMA Direct)
Drive functional mode with a PLL_L/R configuration, follow these reset steps:
1. After power up, assert
pll_powerdown
for a minimum of tpll_powerdown (the time
between markers 1 and 2).
2. After the transmitter PLL locks, as indicated by the
pll_locked
signal going high
(marker 3), wait for the locked signal to be asserted. The locked signal is an output
of the PLL_L/R.
Figure 4–14. Identical Channels
Transmitter Channels in Basic
(PMA Direct) Mode
CH0 (2.5 Gbps)
CH1 (2.5 Gbps)
CH2 (2.5 Gbps)
CH3 (2.5 Gbps)
Transmitter Side User Logic
in the FPGA Fabric
Left and Right PLL
(ALTPLL)
locked
c0
tx_datain[9:0]
pll_locked
tx_clkout
inclk0
refclk CMU Channel configured
for clock generation
(2.5 Gbps)
High-Speed
Serial Clock
Chapter 4: Reset Control and Power Down in Stratix IV Devices 4–27
PMA Direct Drive Mode Reset Sequences
January 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
3. After the PLL_L/R locks, as indicated by the locked signal going high (marker 4),
the transmitter is ready to accept parallel data from the FPGA fabric and
subsequently transmitting serial data reliably.
Figure 4–15. Reset Sequence Timing Diagram of Four Transmitter-Only Channels in Basic (PMA Direct) Drive ×4
Functional Mode
Note to Figure 4–15:
(1) For tpll_powerdown duration, refer to the DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices chapter.
12
3
4
Reset and Power-Down Signals
pll_powerdown
Output Status Signals
pll_locked
Locked (output of PLL_L/R)
Keep the TX side user logic
under reset until this point
pll_powerdown (1)
t
4–28 Chapter 4: Reset Control and Power Down in Stratix IV Devices
PMA Direct Drive Mode Reset Sequences
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Receiver and Transmitter Channel Set-up—Receiver CDR in Automatic Lock Mode
This configuration contains both a transmitter and receiver channel. For PMA Direct
drive ×N mode, with the receiver CDR in automatic lock mode, use the reset sequence
shown in Figure 4–16. In this example, N = 4.
Figure 4–16. Reset Sequence with CDR in Automatic Lock Mode
Notes to Figure 4–16:
(1) For tpll_powerdown duration, refer to the DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices chapter.
(2) For tLTD_Auto duration, refer to the DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Reset and Power Down Signals
Ouput Status Signals
12
3
6
6
5
4
Minimum of Two Parallel Clock Cycles
5
valid parallel data into FPGA fabric
7
busy
pll_locked
pll_powerdown
rx_analogreset[0]
rx_analogreset[3]
rx_freqlocked[0]
rx_freqlocked[3]
rx_dataout[63:0]
pll_powerdown (1)
t
LTD_Auto (2)
t
Chapter 4: Reset Control and Power Down in Stratix IV Devices 4–29
PMA Direct Drive Mode Reset Sequences
January 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
As shown in Figure 4–16, for the receiver and transmitter channel in PMA Direct drive
×4 double-width configuration with CDR in automatic lock mode, follow these reset
steps:
1. After power up, assert
pll_powerdown
for a minimum period of tpll_powerdown(the
time between markers 1 and 2).
2. Keep the
rx_analogreset
signal asserted during this time period. After you
de-assert the
pll_powerdown
signal, the transmitter PLL starts locking to the
transmitter input reference clock.
3. When the transmitter PLL locks, as indicated by the
pll_locked
signal going high
(marker 3), the transmitter is ready to accept parallel data from the FPGA fabric
and transmitting serial data reliably.
4. For the receiver operation, after de-assertion of the
busy
signal, wait for a
minimum of two parallel clock cycles to de-assert the
rx_analogreset
signals of
each channel. After
rx_analogreset
is de-asserted, the receiver CDR of each
channel starts locking to the receiver input reference clock.
5. Wait for the
rx_freqlocked
signal from each channel to go high. The
rx_freqlocked
signal of each channel may go high at different times (as indicated
by the slashed pattern at marker 6).
6. In a PMA Direct drive ×4 double-width configuration, when the
rx_freqlocked
signals of all the channels has gone high (marker 6), from that point onwards, wait
for at least tLTD_Auto (marker 7) for the receiver parallel clock to become stable. At
this point, all the receivers are ready for transferring valid parallel data into the
FPGA fabric (until this time, Altera recommends that the user logic that processes
this data be under reset).
4–30 Chapter 4: Reset Control and Power Down in Stratix IV Devices
PMA Direct Drive Mode Reset Sequences
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Receiver and Transmitter Channel Set-up—Receiver CDR in Manual Lock Mode
This configuration contains both a transmitter and receiver channel. For PMA Direct
drive ×N mode, with receiver CDR in manual lock mode, use the reset sequence
shown in Figure 4–17. In this example, N = 4.
Figure 4–17. Reset Sequence with CDR in Manual Lock Mode
Notes to Figure 4–17:
(1) For tpll_powerdown duration, refer to the DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices chapter.
(2) For tLTR_LTD_Manual duration, refer to the DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices chapter.
(3) For tLTD_Manual duration, refer to the DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Reset and Po wer Down Signals
Ouput Status Signals
12
3
6
7
CDR Control Signals
7
5
6
7
7
4
Minimum of Two Parallel Clock Cycles
5
valid parallel data into FPGA fabric
8
pll_powerdown
pll_locked
busy
rx_analogreset[3]
rx_analogreset[0]
rx_locktorefclk[0]
rx_locktorefclk[3]
rx_locktodata[0]
rx_locktodata[3]
rx_pll_locked[0]
rx_pll_locked[3]
rx_dataout[63:0]
pll_powerdown (1)
t
LTR_LTD_Manual (2)
t
LTD_Manual (3)
t
Chapter 4: Reset Control and Power Down in Stratix IV Devices 4–31
PMA Direct Drive Mode Reset Sequences
January 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
As shown in Figure 4–17, for the receiver and transmitter channel in PMA Direct drive
×4 double-width configuration with CDR in manual lock mode, follow these reset
steps:
1. After power up, assert
pll_powerdown
for a minimum period of tpll_powerdown (the
time between markers 1 and 2).
2. Keep the
rx_analogreset
and
rx_locktorefclk
signals asserted and the
rx_locktodata
signal de-asserted during this time period. After you de-assert the
pll_powerdown
signal, the transmitter PLL starts locking to the transmitter input
reference clock.
3. When the transmitter PLL locks, as indicated by the
pll_locked
signal going high
(marker 3), the transmitter is ready to accept parallel data from the FPGA fabric
and transmitting serial data reliably.
4. For the receiver operation, after de-assertion of the
busy
signal (marker 4), wait for
a minimum of two parallel clock cycles to de-assert the
rx_analogreset
signal.
After the
rx_analogreset
signal is de-asserted, the receiver CDR of each channel
starts locking to the receiver input reference clock because
rx_locktorefclk
is
asserted.
5. Wait for the
rx_pll_locked
signal from each channel to go high. The
rx_pll_locked
signal of each channel may go high at different times with respect
to each other (indicated by the slashed pattern at marker 6).
6. In a PMA Direct drive ×4 double-width configuration, when the
rx_pll_locked
signal of all the channels has gone high, from that point onwards, wait for at least
tLTR_LTD_Manual, then de-assert
rx_locktorefclk
and assert
rx_locktodata
(marker 7). At this point, the receiver CDR of all the channels enters into
lock-to-data mode and starts locking to the received data.
7. After assertion of the
rx_locktodata
signal, from that point onwards, wait for at
least tLTD_Manual (marker 8) for the receiver parallel clock to become stable. At this
point, all the receivers are ready for transferring valid parallel data into the FPGA
fabric (until this time, Altera recommends that the user logic that processes this
data be under reset).
Basic (PMA Direct) Drive x1 Mode
The following timing diagram examples are used to describe the reset and power
down sequences for Basic (PMA Direct) drive mode without bonding between the
transceiver channels.
Table 4–8 lists the reset and power-down sequences for Basic (PMA Direct) drive ×1
functional mode.
Table 4–8. Reset and Power-Down Sequences for Basic (PMA Direct) Drive ×1 Configurations
Channel Set Up Functional Mode Refer to
Receiver and Transmitter Automatic lock mode for Basic
(PMA Direct) drive ×1 mode
“Receiver and Transmitter Channel Set-Up—Receiver
CDR in Automatic Lock Mode” on page 4–32
Receiver and Transmitter Manual lock mode for Basic
(PMA Direct) drive ×1 mode
“Receiver and Transmitter Channel Set-up—Receiver
CDR in Manual Lock Mode” on page 4–34
4–32 Chapter 4: Reset Control and Power Down in Stratix IV Devices
PMA Direct Drive Mode Reset Sequences
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Receiver and Transmitter Channel Set-Up—Receiver CDR in Automatic Lock
Mode
This configuration contains both a transmitter and receiver channel. For Basic (PMA
Direct) drive ×1 mode, with receiver CDR in automatic lock mode, use the reset
sequence shown in Figure 4–18. In this example, four channels are configured in this
mode.
Figure 4–18. Reset Sequence with CDR in Automatic Lock Mode
Notes to Figure 4–18:
(1) For tpll_powerdown duration, refer to the DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices chapter.
(2) For tLTD_Auto duration, refer to the DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Reset and Power Down Signals
Ouput Status Signals
12
3
4
6
busy
5
Minimum of Two Parallel Clock Cycles
6
5
3
valid parallel data into FPGA fabric
7
pll_powerdown[0]
pll_powerdown[3]
rx_analogreset[0]
rx_analogreset[3]
pll_locked[0]
pll_locked[3]
rx_freqlocked[0]
rx_freqlocked[3]
rx_dataout[63:0]
pll_powerdown (1)
t
TLD_Auto (2)
t
Chapter 4: Reset Control and Power Down in Stratix IV Devices 4–33
PMA Direct Drive Mode Reset Sequences
January 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
As shown in Figure 4–18, for the receiver and transmitter channel in Basic (PMA
Direct) drive double-width configuration, non-bonded with CDR in automatic lock
mode, follow these reset steps:
1. After power up, assert
pll_powerdown
of each channel for a minimum period of
tpll_powerdown (the time between markers 1 and 2).
2. Keep the
rx_analogreset
signal of each channel asserted during this time period.
After you de-assert the
pll_powerdown
signal on all channels, the transmitter PLL
of each channel starts locking to the transmitter input reference clock.
3. When the transmitter PLL locks, as indicated by the
pll_locked
signal going high
(marker 3), the transmitters are ready for accepting parallel data from the FPGA
fabric and subsequently transmitting serial data reliably.
4. For the receiver operation, after de-assertion of the
busy
signal, wait for a
minimum of two parallel clock cycles to de-assert the
rx_analogreset
signals of
each channel. After
rx_analogreset
is de-asserted, the receiver CDR of each
channel starts locking to the receiver input reference clock.
5. Wait for the
rx_freqlocked
signal from each channel to go high. The
rx_freqlocked
signal of each channel may go high at different times (indicated by
the slashed pattern at marker 6).
6. In a Basic (PMA Direct) drive double-width configuration without bonding
between channels, when the
rx_freqlocked
signals of all the channels have gone
high (marker 6), from that point onwards, wait for at least tLTD_Auto (marker 7) for
the receiver parallel clock to become stable. At this point, all the receivers are
ready for transferring valid parallel data into the FPGA fabric (until this time,
Altera recommends that the user logic that processes this data be under reset).
4–34 Chapter 4: Reset Control and Power Down in Stratix IV Devices
PMA Direct Drive Mode Reset Sequences
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Receiver and Transmitter Channel Set-up—Receiver CDR in Manual Lock
Mode
This configuration contains both a transmitter and receiver channel. For Basic (PMA
Direct) drive ×1 mode, with receiver CDR in manual lock mode, use the reset
sequence shown in Figure 4–19. In this example, four channels are configured in this
mode.
Figure 4–19. Reset Sequence with CDR in Manual Lock Mode
Notes to Figure 4–19
(1) For tpll_powerdown duration, refer to the DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices chapter.
(2) For tLTR_LTD_Manual duration, refer to the DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices chapter.
(3) For tLTD_Manual duration, refer to the DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Reset and Power Down Signals
Ouput Status Signals
12
3
6
7
CDR Control Signals
7
5
6
7
7
busy
4
Minimum of Two Parallel Clock Cycles
5
valid parallel data into FPGA fabric
8
pll_locked
pll_powerdown[0]
pll_powerdown[3]
rx_analogreset[0]
rx_analogreset[3]
rx_locktorefclk[0]
rx_locktorefclk[3]
rx_locktodata[0]
rx_locktodata[3]
rx_pll_locked[0]
rx_pll_locked[3]
rx_dataout[63:0]
pll_powerdown (1)
t
LTR_LTD_Manual (2)
t
LTD_Manual (3)
t
Chapter 4: Reset Control and Power Down in Stratix IV Devices 4–35
PMA Direct Drive Mode Reset Sequences
January 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
As shown in Figure 4–19, for the receiver and transmitter channel in Basic (PMA
Direct) drive double-width configuration, non-bonded with CDR in manual lock
mode, follow these reset steps:
1. After power up, assert
pll_powerdown
of each channel for a minimum period of
tpll_powerdown (the time between markers 1 and 2).
2. Keep the
rx_analogreset
and
rx_locktorefclk
signals of each channel asserted
and the
rx_locktodata
signals de-asserted during this time period. After you
de-assert the
pll_powerdown
signal, the transmitter PLL starts locking to the
transmitter input reference clock.
3. When the transmitter PLL locks, as indicated by the
pll_locked
signal going high
(marker 3), the transmitters are ready to accept parallel data from the FPGA fabric
and subsequently transmitting serial data reliably.
4. For the receiver operation, after de-assertion of the
busy
signal (marker 4), wait for
a minimum of two parallel clock cycles to de-assert the
rx_analogreset
signal of
each channel. After the
rx_analogreset
signal is de-asserted, the receiver CDR of
each channel starts locking to the receiver input reference clock because
rx_locktorefclk
is asserted.
5. Wait for the
rx_pll_locked
signal from each channel to go high. The
rx_pll_locked
signal of each channel may go high at different times with respect
to each other (indicated by the slashed pattern at marker 6).
6. In a Basic (PMA Direct) drive double-width configuration without bonding
between channels, when the
rx_pll_locked
signal of all the channels has gone
high, from that point onwards, wait for at least tLTR_LTD_Manual, then de-assert
rx_locktorefclk
and assert
rx_locktodata
(marker 7). At this point, the receiver
CDR of all the channels enters into lock-to-data mode and starts locking to the
received data.
7. After assertion of the
rx_locktodata
signal, from that point onwards, wait for at
least tLTD_Manual (marker 8) for the receiver parallel clock to be stable. At this
point, all the receivers are ready for transferring valid parallel data into the FPGA
fabric (until this time, Altera recommends that the user logic that processes this
data be reset).
4–36 Chapter 4: Reset Control and Power Down in Stratix IV Devices
Dynamic Reconfiguration Reset Sequences
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Dynamic Reconfiguration Reset Sequences
When using dynamic reconfiguration in data rate divisions in TX or channel and TX
CMU PLL select/reconfig modes, use the following reset sequences.
Reset Sequence when Using Dynamic Reconfiguration with the ‘data rate
division in TX’ Option
Use the example reset sequence shown in Figure 4–20 when you use the dynamic
reconfiguration controller to change the data rate of the transceiver channel. In this
example, dynamic reconfiguration is used to dynamically reconfigure the data rate of
the transceiver channel configured in Basic ×1 mode with the receiver CDR in
automatic lock mode.
As shown in Figure 4–20, when using the dynamic reconfiguration controller to
change the configuration of the transmitter channel, follow these reset steps:
1. After power up and properly establishing that the transmitter is operating as
desired, write the desired new value for the data rate in the appropriate register (in
this example,
rate_switch_ctrl[1:0]
) and subsequently assert the
write_all
signal (marker 1) to initiate the dynamic reconfiguration.
fFor more information, refer to the Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV
Devices chapter.
2. Assert the
tx_digitalreset
signal.
3. As soon as
write_all
is asserted, the dynamic reconfiguration controller starts to
execute its operation. This is indicated by the assertion of the
busy
signal
(marker 2).
4. After the completion of dynamic reconfiguration, the
busy
signal is de-asserted
(marker 3).
5. Lastly,
tx_digitalreset
can be de-asserted to continue with the transmitter
operation (marker 4).
Figure 4–20. Reset Sequence When Using the Dynamic Reconfiguration Controller to Change the
Data Rate of the Transceiver Channel
Reset and Control Signals
Ouput Status Signals
busy
2
1
New value
3
41
tx_digitalreset
rate_switch_ctrl[1:0]
write_all
Chapter 4: Reset Control and Power Down in Stratix IV Devices 4–37
Dynamic Reconfiguration Reset Sequences
January 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Reset Sequence when Using Dynamic Reconfiguration with the ‘Channel
and TX PLL select/reconfig’ Option
Use the example reset sequence shown in Figure 4–21 when you are using the
dynamic reconfiguration controller to change the TX PLL settings of the transceiver
channel. In this example, the dynamic reconfiguration is used to dynamically
reconfigure the data rate of the transceiver channel configured in Basic ×1 mode with
receiver CDR in automatic lock mode.
As shown in Figure 4–21, when using the dynamic reconfiguration controller to
change the configuration of the transceiver channel, follow these reset steps:
1. After power up and establishing that the transceiver is operating as desired, write
the desired new value in the appropriate registers (including
reconfig_mode_sel[2:0]
) and subsequently assert the
write_all
signal
(marker 1) to initiate the dynamic reconfiguration.
fFor more information, refer to the Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV
Devices chapter.
2. Assert the
tx_digitalreset
,
rx_analogreset
, and
rx_digitalreset
signals.
3. As soon as
write_all
is asserted, the dynamic reconfiguration controller starts to
execute its operation. This is indicated by the assertion of the
busy
signal
(marker 2).
4. Wait for the assertion of the
channel_reconfig_done
signal (marker 4) that
indicates the completion of dynamic reconfiguration in this mode.
Figure 4–21. Reset Sequence When Using the Dynamic Reconfiguration Controller to Change the
TX PLL Settings of the Transceiver Channel
Note to Figure 4–21:
(1) For tLTD_Auto duration, refer to the DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Reset and Control Signals
4
Ouput Status Signals
7
8
busy
2
Five parallel clock cycles
1
New value
3
6
1
1
1
5
tx_digitalreset
rx_analogreset
rx_digitalreset
reconfig_mode_sel[2:0]
write_all
channel_reconfig_done
rx_freqlocked
LTD_Auto (1)
t
4–38 Chapter 4: Reset Control and Power Down in Stratix IV Devices
Power Down
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
5. After assertion of the
channel_reconfig_done
signal, de-assert
tx_digitalreset
(marker 5) and wait for at least five parallel clock cycles to de-assert the
rx_analogreset
signal (marker 6).
6. Lastly, wait for the
rx_freqlocked
signal to go high. After
rx_freqlocked
goes
high (marker 7), wait for tLTD_Auto to de-assert the
rx_digitalreset
signal
(marker 8). At this point, the receiver is ready for data traffic.
Power Down
The Quartus II software automatically selects the power-down channel feature, which
takes effect when you configure the Stratix IV device. All unused transceiver channels
and blocks are powered down to reduce overall power consumption. The
gxb_powerdown
signal is an optional transceiver block signal. It powers down all
transceiver channels and all functional blocks in the transceiver block. The minimum
pulse width for this signal is 1 s. After power up, if you use the
gxb_powerdown
signal, wait for de-assertion of the
busy
signal, then assert the
gxb_powerdown
signal
for a minimum of 1 s. Lastly, follow the sequence shown in Figure 4–22.
The de-assertion of the
busy
signal indicates proper completion of the offset
cancellation process on the receiver channel.
Figure 4–22. Sample Reset Sequence of Four Receiver and Transmitter Channels-Receiver CDR in Automatic Lock Mode
with the Optional gxb_powerdown Signal
Notes to Figure 4–22:
(1) For tgxb_powerdown duration, refer to the DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices chapter.
(2) For tLTD_Auto duration, refer to the DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Output Status Signals
4
5
6
7
8
32
busy
1
gxb_powerdown (1)
t
LTD_Auto (2)
t
Reset/Power Down Signals
gxb_powerdown
pll_powerdown
tx_digitalreset
rx_analogreset
rx_digitalreset
pll_locked
rx_freqlocked
Chapter 4: Reset Control and Power Down in Stratix IV Devices 4–39
Simulation Requirements
January 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Simulation Requirements
The following are simulation requirements:
■The
gxb_powerdown
port is optional. In simulation, if the
gxb_powerdown
port is not
instantiated, you must assert the
tx_digitalreset
,
rx_digitalreset
, and
rx_analogreset
signals appropriately for correct simulation behavior.
■If the
gxb_powerdown
port is instantiated, and the other reset signals are not used,
you must assert the
gxb_powerdown
signal for at least one parallel clock cycle for
correct simulation behavior.
■You can de-assert the
rx_digitalreset
signal immediately after the
rx_freqlocked
signal goes high to reduce the simulation run time. It is not
necessary to wait for tLTD_Auto (as suggested in the actual reset sequence).
■The
busy
signal is de-asserted after about 20 parallel
reconfig_clk
clock cycles in
order to reduce simulation run time. For silicon behavior in hardware, you can
follow the reset sequences described in the previous pages.
■In PCIe mode simulation, you must assert the
tx_forceelecidle
signal for at least
one parallel clock cycle before transmitting normal data for correct simulation
behavior.
Reference Information
For more information about some useful reference terms used in this chapter, refer to
the links listed in Table 4–9.
Table 4–9. Reference Information (Part 1 of 2)
Terms Used in this Chapter Useful Reference Points
Automatic Lock Mode page 4–8
Basic (PMA Direct) Drive x1 Mode page 4–31
Basic (PMA Direct) Drive xN Mode page 4–25
Bonded channel configuration page 4–6
busy
page 4–3
Dynamic Reconfiguration Reset Sequences page 4–36
gxb_powerdown
page 4–3
LTD page 4–6
LTR page 4–6
Manual Lock Mode page 4–10
Non-Bonded channel configuration page 4–15
PCIe page 4–22
pll_locked
page 4–3
pll_powerdown
page 4–3
rx_analogreset
page 4–2
rx_digitalreset
page 4–2
rx_freqlocked
page 4–3
4–40 Chapter 4: Reset Control and Power Down in Stratix IV Devices
Reference Information
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Document Revision History
Table 4–10 lists the revision history for this chapter.
rx_pll_locked
page 4–3
tx_digitalreset
page 4–2
Table 4–9. Reference Information (Part 2 of 2)
Terms Used in this Chapter Useful Reference Points
Table 4–10. Document Revision History
Date Version Changes
January 2014 4.4 Updated Figure 4–4.
September 2012 4.3 Updated Table 4–2 to close FB #65274.
December 2011 4.2 Updated Table 4–2.
February 2010 4.1
■Updated the “Receiver and Transmitter Channel—Receiver CDR in Automatic Lock
Mode”, “Receiver and Transmitter Channel—Receiver CDR in Manual Lock Mode”,
“Receiver and Transmitter Channel—Receiver CDR in Automatic Lock Mode”, “Receiver
and Transmitter Channel—Receiver CDR in Manual Lock Mode”, “Receiver and
Transmitter Channel—Receiver CDR in Automatic Lock Mode”, “Receiver and Transmitter
Channel—Receiver CDR in Manual Lock Mode”, “Receiver and Transmitter Channel
Set-up—Receiver CDR in Automatic Lock Mode”, “Receiver and Transmitter Channel
Set-up—Receiver CDR in Manual Lock Mode”
■Updated Figure 4–4, Figure 4–5, Figure 4–6, Figure 4–7, Figure 4–16, Figure 4–17,
Figure 4–18, and Figure 4–19.
■Updated Table 4–2.
■Updated chapter title.
■Applied new template.
■Minor text edits.
November 2009 4.0
■Updated all figures (except Figure 1, Figure 2, and Figure 14) and all sections so they use
the same terms that are found in the DC and Switching Characteristics chapter in the
Stratix IV Device Datasheet section.
■Added Table 4–1, Table 4–2, Table 4–5, Table 4–6, Table 4–7, and Table 4–8.
■Added the “Reference Information” section.
■Updated all figures (except Figure 1).
■Changed “PLL_powerdown” to “pll_powerdown” throughout.
■Minor text edits.
June 2009 3.1
■Added new “Transmitter Only Channel with a PLL_L/R” section.
■Updated the “Transmitter Only Channel with no PLL_L/R” and “Transmitter Only Channel”
sections.
■Minor text edits.
March 2009 3.0
Added:
■“PMA Direct Drive Mode Reset Sequences”
■“Dynamic Reconfiguration Reset Sequences”
November 2008 2.0 Added chapter to the Stratix IV Device Handbook.
SIV52005-3.6
© 2014 Altera Corporation. All rights reserved. ALTERA, ARRIA, CYCLONE, HARDCOPY, MAX, MEGACORE, NIOS, QUARTUS and STRATIX words and logos
are trademarks of Altera Corporation and registered in the U.S. Patent and Trademark Office and in other countries. All other words and logos identified as
trademarks or service marks are the property of their respective holders as described at www.altera.com/common/legal.html. Altera warrants performance of its
semiconductor products to current specifications in accordance with Altera's standard warranty, but reserves the right to make changes to any products and
services at any time without notice. Altera assumes no responsibility or liability arising out of the application or use of any information, product, or service
described herein except as expressly agreed to in writing by Altera. Altera customers are advised to obtain the latest version of device specifications before relying
on any published information and before placing orders for products or services.
Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
January 2014
Feedback Subscribe
ISO
9001:2008
Registered
5. Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV
Devices
Stratix® IV GX and GT transceivers allow you to dynamically reconfigure different
portions of the transceivers without powering down any part of the device. This
chapter describes and provides examples about the different modes available for
dynamic reconfiguration.
You can use the ALTGX_RECONFIG instance to reconfigure the physical medium
attachment (PMA) controls, functional blocks, clock multiplier unit (CMU)
phase-locked loops (PLLs), receiver clock data recovery (CDR), and input reference
clocks of a transceiver channel.
Additionally, you can monitor the receiver eye width, implement decision feedback
control, and achieve adaptive equalization (AEQ) control with dynamic
reconfiguration.
This chapter contains the following sections:
■“Glossary of Terms” on page 5–1
■“Dynamic Reconfiguration Controller Architecture” on page 5–3
■“Quartus II MegaWizard Plug-In Manager Interfaces to Support Dynamic
Reconfiguration” on page 5–4
■“Dynamic Reconfiguration Modes Implementation” on page 5–12
■“Dynamic Reconfiguration Controller Port List” on page 5–78
■“Error Indication During Dynamic Reconfiguration” on page 5–90
■“Dynamic Reconfiguration Duration” on page 5–91
■“Dynamic Reconfiguration (ALTGX_RECONFIG Instance) Resource Utilization”
on page 5–94
■“Functional Simulation of the Dynamic Reconfiguration Process” on page 5–95
■“Dynamic Reconfiguration Examples” on page 5–96
Glossary of Terms
Table 5–1 lists the terms used in this chapter:
Table 5–1. Glossary of Terms Used in this Chapter (Part 1 of 2)
Term Description
AEQ Control Logic AEQ control logic is soft IP that you can enable in the dynamic reconfiguration controller.
AEQ Hardware AEQ hardware is circuitry that you can enable in the receiver portion of the transceivers.
January 2014
SIV52005-3.6
5–2 Chapter 5: Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices
Glossary of Terms
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
ALTGX_RECONFIG Instance Dynamic reconfiguration controller instance generated by the ALTGX_RECONFIG
MegaWizard™ Plug-In Manager.
ALTGX Instance Transceiver instance generated by the ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager.
Alternate CMU Transmitter
PLL Refers to one of the two CMU PLLs within a transceiver block.
Channel and Transmitter PLL
Select/reconfig Mode
Refers to the following dynamic reconfiguration modes:
■CMU PLL reconfiguration
■Channel and CMU PLL reconfiguration
■Channel reconfiguration with transmitter PLL select
■Central control unit reconfiguration
Logical Channel Addressing
Used whenever the concept of logical channel addressing is explained. This term does not
refer to the
logical_channel_address
port available in the ALTGX_RECONFIG
MegaWizard Plug-In Manager.
Logical Reference Index
Refers to the logical identification value that you must set up for the transmitter PLLs used
in the design. You can use a set up value of 0, 1, 2 or 3 in the Reconfiguration Settings
screen of the ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager.
Logical tx pll Refers to the logical reference index value of the transmitter PLLs stored in the memory
initialization file (.mif).
Main PLL Refers to the transmitter PLL configured in the General screen of the ALTGX MegaWizard
Plug-In Manager.
Memory Initialization File,
also known as .mif
When you enable .mif generation in your design, a file with the .mif extension is generated.
This file contains information about the various ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager
options that you set. Each word in the .mif is 16 bits wide. The dynamic reconfiguration
controller writes information from the .mif into the transceiver channel, but only when you
use a reconfiguration mode that supports .mif-based reconfiguration.
PMA Controls
Represents analog controls (Voltage Output Differential [VOD], Pre-emphasis, and
Manual Equalization) as displayed in both the ALTGX and ALTGX_RECONFIG MegaWizard
Plug-In Managers.
PMA-Only Channels Channels configured in Basic (PMA Direct) functional mode.
Regular Transceiver Channel Refers to a transmitter channel, a receiver channel, or a duplex channel that has both PMA
and physical coding sublayer (PCS) blocks.
Table 5–1. Glossary of Terms Used in this Chapter (Part 2 of 2)
Term Description
Chapter 5: Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices 5–3
Dynamic Reconfiguration Controller Architecture
January 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Dynamic Reconfiguration Controller Architecture
The dynamic reconfiguration controller is a soft IP that utilizes FPGA-fabric
resources. You can use only one controller per transceiver block. You cannot use the
dynamic reconfiguration controller to control multiple Stratix IV devices or any
off-chip interfaces. Figure 5–1 shows a conceptual view of the dynamic
reconfiguration controller architecture. For a detailed description of the inputs and
outputs of the ALTGX_RECONFIG instance, refer to “Dynamic Reconfiguration
Controller Port List” on page 5–78.
1You can use only one ALTGX_RECONFIG instance per transceiver block. You may
use a single ALTGX_RECONFIG instance with multiple transceiver blocks.
Figure 5–1. Dynamic Reconfiguration Controller
Notes to Figure 5–1:
(1) The PMA control ports consist of the VOD, pre-emphasis, DC gain, and manual equalization controls.
(2) For more information, refer to Table 5–16 on page 5–78.
CMU PLL
Reconfig
control logic
Data Rate
Switch
control logic
Offset
Cancellation
control logic
Channel
reconfig with
TX PLL
select
control logic
Channel
and
CMU PLL
reconfig
control logic
rate_switch_ctrl[1:0](TX only)
reconfig_data[15:0]
logical_tx_pll_sel
reconfig_address_out[6:0]
rate_switch_out_[1:0]
(TX only)
reset_reconfig_address
EyeQ
control logic
AEQ
control logic
Central
Control Unit
reconfig
logic
ctrl_write
ctrl_waitrequest
aeq_fromgxb[]
ALTGX_RECONFIG MegaWizard Plug-In Manager
ALTGX_RECONFIG Instance
(Dynamic Reconfiguration Controller)
reconfig_clk
read
write_all
PMA control ports (1)
logical_tx_pll_sel_en
logical_channel_address[]
rx_tx_duplex_sel[]
ctrl_read
ctrl_address[15:0]
ctrl_writedata[15:0]
reconfig_mode_sel[]
aeq_togxb[]
ctrl_readdata[15:0]
reconfig_address_en
channel_reconfig_done
error
busy
data valid
reconfig_togxb[3:0]
reconfig_fromgxb[]
ALTGX MegaWizard
Plug-In Manager
ALTGX Instances
Parallel
to
Serial
Converter
addr
data
Address
Translation
PMA controls
reconfig logic
reconfig_address[5:0] (2)
reconfig_reset
5–4 Chapter 5: Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices
Quartus II MegaWizard Plug-In Manager Interfaces to Support Dynamic Reconfiguration
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Quartus II MegaWizard Plug-In Manager Interfaces to Support Dynamic
Reconfiguration
Stratix IV GX devices provide two MegaWizard Plug-In Manager interfaces to
support dynamic reconfiguration—ALTGX and ALTGX_RECONFIG.
ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager
Use the ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In manager to enable the dynamic reconfiguration
settings for the transceiver instances.
fFor more information, refer to the “Reconfiguration Settings” section of the ALTGX
Transceiver Setup Guide for Stratix IV Devices chapter.
The reconfig_clk Clock Requirements for the ALTGX Instance
You must connect the
reconfig_clk
port to the ALTGX instance in all the
configurations using the dynamic reconfiguration feature.
Table 5–2 lists the source clock for the offset cancellation circuit in the ALTGX
instance, based on its configuration.
Select the
reconfig_clk
frequency based on the ALTGX configuration shown in
Table 5–3. This clock must be a free-running clock sourced from an I/O clock pin. Do
not use dedicated transceiver
REFCLK
pins or any clocks generated by transceivers.
1Altera recommends driving the
reconfig_clk
signal on a global clock resource. This
clock must be a free-running clock sourced from an I/O clock pin. Do not use
dedicated transceiver
refclk
pins or any clocks generated by transceivers.
Table 5–2. Source Clock for the Offset Cancellation Circuit in the ALTGX Instance
Source Clock for the Offset Cancellation Circuit (1) ALTGX Configurations
reconfig_clk
Receiver only and Transmitter only
reconfig_clk
Receiver and Transmitter
fixedclk
PCI Express® (PCIe)
Note to Figure 5–2:
(1) The clock source used for offset cancellation must be a free running clock that is not derived from the PLL as this
clock is required for offset cancellation at power up.
Table 5–3. reconfig_clk Settings for the ALTGX Instance
ALTGX Instance Configuration reconfig_clk Frequency Range (MHz)
Receiver and Transmitter 37.5 to 50
Receiver only 37.5 to 50
Transmitter only and PCIe 2.5 (1) to 50
Note to Figure 5–3:
(1) The source clock for the offset cancellation circuit in the ALTGX instance must be faster than 37.5 MHz. Offset
cancellation is not required for transmitters and is accomplished using a fixed clock in PCIe mode.
Chapter 5: Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices 5–5
Quartus II MegaWizard Plug-In Manager Interfaces to Support Dynamic Reconfiguration
January 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
ALTGX_RECONFIG MegaWizard Plug-In Manager
Use the ALTGX_RECONFIG MegaWizard Plug-In Manager to instantiate the
dynamic reconfiguration controller.
fFor more information, refer to the Stratix IV ALTGX_RECONFIG Megafunction User
Guide.
The reconfig_clk Clock Requirements for the ALTGX_RECONFIG Instance
You must connect the
reconfig_clk
input port of the ALTGX_RECONFIG instance to
the same clock that is connected to the
reconfig_clk
input port of the ALTGX
instance.
Table 5–3 on page 5–4 lists the range of frequency values allowed for the
reconfig_clk
input port for the Receiver only, Receiver and Transmitter, and
Transmitter only configuration modes of the ALTGX instance.
Based on the ALTGX configurations (Receiver only, Transmitter only, and Receiver
and Transmitter) controlled by the ALTGX_RECONFIG instance, select the fastest
reconfig_clk
frequency value. This satisfies both the offset cancellation control for
the receiver channels and the dynamic reconfiguration of the transmitter and receiver
channels.
Interfacing ALTGX and ALTGX_RECONFIG Instances
To dynamically reconfigure the transceiver channel, you must understand the
concepts related to interfacing the transceivers with the dynamic reconfiguration
controller. These concepts are:
■“Logical Channel Addressing” on page 5–5
■“Total Number of Channels Option in the ALTGX_RECONFIG Instance” on
page 5–10
■“Connecting the ALTGX and ALTGX_RECONFIG Instances” on page 5–11
Logical Channel Addressing
The dynamic reconfiguration controller identifies a transceiver channel by using the
logical channel address. The What is the starting channel number? option in the
ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager allows you to set the logical channel address of
all the channels within the ALTGX instance.
For channel reconfiguration with transmitter PLL select mode, the logical channel
addressing concept extends to transmitter PLLs. For more information, refer to
“Logical Channel Addressing When Using Additional PLLs” on page 5–52.
The following sections describe the concept of logical channel addressing for ALTGX
instances configured with:
■Regular transceiver channels (PCS and PMA channels)
■PMA-only channels
■A combination of PMA-only channels and regular transceiver channels
5–6 Chapter 5: Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices
Quartus II MegaWizard Plug-In Manager Interfaces to Support Dynamic Reconfiguration
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Logical Channel Addressing of Regular Transceiver Channels
For a single ALTGX instance connected to the dynamic reconfiguration controller, set
the starting channel number to 0. The logical channel addresses of the first channel
within the ALTGX instance is 0. The logical channel addresses of the remaining
channels increment by one.
For multiple ALTGX instances connected to the dynamic reconfiguration controller,
set the starting channel number of the first instance to 0. For the starting channel
number for the following ALTGX instances, you must set the next multiple of four.
The logical channel address of channels within each ALTGX instance increment
by one.
Figure 5–2 shows how to set the starting channel number for multiple ALTGX
instances controlled by a single dynamic reconfiguration controller, where both
ALTGX instances have regular transceiver channels.
Figure 5–2. Logical Channel Addressing of Regular Transceiver Channels
Notes to Figure 5–2:
(1) For more information, refer to “Total Number of Channels Option in the ALTGX_RECONFIG Instance” on page 5–10.
(2)
reconfig_fromgxb[50:0]
= {
reconfig_fromgxb 2[16:0]
,
reconfig_fromgxb 1[33:0]
}.
ALTGX instance 1
Five regular transceiver channels
Basic Functional Mode
Starting channel number = 0
ALTGX instance 2
Two regular transceiver channels
Basic Functional Mode
Starting channel number = 8
Channel 1
(logical channel address = 9)
reconfig_togx
Channel 0
(logical channel address = 0)
Channel 1
(logical channel address = 1)
Channel 2
(logical channel address = 2
Channel 3
(logical channel address = 3)
Channel 4
(logical channel address = 4)
Channel 0
(logical channel address = 8)
reconfig_fromgxb 1[33:0]
reconfig_fromgxb 2[16:0]
Set the What is the number of
channels controlled by the
reconfig controller? option to 12 (1)
reconfig_fromgxb[50:0] (2)
ALTGX_RECONFIG Instance 1
Chapter 5: Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices 5–7
Quartus II MegaWizard Plug-In Manager Interfaces to Support Dynamic Reconfiguration
January 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Logical Channel Addressing of PMA-Only Channels
1CMU channels are always PMA-only channels. The regular transceiver channels can
be optionally configured as PMA-only channels.
Set the starting channel number for the PMA-only channels in the What is the
starting channel number? option in the ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager.
For a single ALTGX instance connected to the dynamic reconfiguration controller, set
the starting channel number to 0. The logical channel address of the first channel in
the ALTGX instance is 0. The logical channel addresses of the PMA-only channels
within the same ALTGX instance increment in multiples of four (unlike the logical
channel addressing of regular transceiver channels that are not configured in Basic
[PMA Direct] functional mode, where the logical channel address increments in steps
of one within the same ALTGX instance).
For multiple ALTGX instances connected to the dynamic reconfiguration controller,
set the starting channel number of the first instance to 0. You must set the next
multiple of four as the starting channel number for the remaining ALTGX instances.
1When PMA-only channel reconfiguration involves a transmitter PLL, you also must
account for the logical channel address of the PLL used. If there are four channels in
Basic [PMA Direct] ×N functional mode, each channel requires a logical channel
address (0, 4, 8, 12), and the transmitter PLL used requires an address (16).
Figure 5–3 shows how to set the starting channel number for multiple ALTGX
instances controlled by a single dynamic reconfiguration controller, where both
ALTGX instances have PMA-only channels. For more information about the What is
the number of channels controlled by the reconfig controller? option, refer to “Total
Number of Channels Option in the ALTGX_RECONFIG Instance” on page 5–10.
5–8 Chapter 5: Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices
Quartus II MegaWizard Plug-In Manager Interfaces to Support Dynamic Reconfiguration
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
For example, if you a transceiver configuration with Instance 1 (Inst1) with two
channels that use Basic (PMA Direct) mode. Instance 2 (Inst2) has two channels and
uses Basic mode, which uses the PCS block in the transceiver. In order to leave the
needed gap in the reconfiguration controller signals, follow these steps:
1. Set Inst1 to have a starting channel number 0. The logical channel addresses 0 and
4 are then allocated to the two channels of Inst1.
2. Reserve logical channel address 8—do not use this address.
3. Set Inst2 to have a starting channel number 12.
Figure 5–3. Logical Channel Addressing of PMA-Only Channels
Note to Figure 5–3:
(1)
reconfig_fromgxb[203:0]
=
{ reconfig_fromgxb 2[67:0]
,
reconfig_fromgxb 1[135:0]
}.
Starting channel number = 0
ALTGX_RECONFIG
Instance 1
reconfig_togxb[3:0]
Channel 0
(logical channel address = 0)
Set the What is the number of
channels controlled by the
reconfig controller? option to 48
reconfig_fromgxb 1[135:0]
reconfig_fromgxb 2[67:0]
reconfig_fromgxb[203:0]
(1)
ALTGX Instance 1
Basic (PMA Direct) Configuration
Channel 1
(logical channel address = 4)
Channel 2
(logical channel address = 8)
Channel 3
(logical channel address = 12)
Channel 4
(logical channel address = 16)
Channel 5
(logical channel address = 20)
Channel 6
(logical channel address = 24)
Channel 7
(logical channel address = 28)
Starting channel number = 32
ALTGX Instance 2
Basic (PMA Direct) Configuration
Channel 0
(logical channel address = 32)
Channel 1
(logical channel address = 36
Channel 2
(logical channel address = 40)
Channel 3
(logical channel address = 44)
Chapter 5: Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices 5–9
Quartus II MegaWizard Plug-In Manager Interfaces to Support Dynamic Reconfiguration
January 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
4. Set the Number of channels option in the ALTGX_RECONFIG controller
megafunction to the nearest multiple of four from the highest logical channel
address. In this example, set the Number of channels option to 16.
5. When connecting the reconfig_fromgxb bus of the ALTGX_RECONFIG controller,
connect the bits corresponding to the reserved address to 0. In this example, the
ALTGX_RECONFIG controller provides 4*([16:0]) bits.
6. Connect the reconfig_fromgxb bus of the ALTGX_RECONIF controller and the
ALTGX transceiver instances as follows:
a.
reconfig_fromgxb[33:0]
of the ALTGX_RECONFIG instance -
reconfig_fromgxb[33:0]
of Inst1.
b.
reconfig_fromgxb[50:34]
of the ALTGX_RECONFIG instance - 17’h00000
c.
reconfig_fromgxb[67:51]
of the ALTGX_RECONFIG instance -
reconfig_fromgxb[17:0]
of Inst2
Logical Channel Addressing—Combination of Regular Transceiver Channels and PMA-Only
Channels
For a combination of regular transceiver channels and PMA-only channels, there must
be at least two different ALTGX instances connected to the same dynamic
reconfiguration controller. This is because you cannot have a combination of regular
transceiver channels and PMA-only channels within the same ALTGX instance.
Set the starting channel number in the first ALTGX Instance 1 to 0. If you have
configured ALTGX Instance 1 with regular transceiver channels, the logical channel
addresses of the remaining channels increment in steps of one.
Set the starting channel number of the following ALTGX Instance 2 as the next
multiple of four. If you have configured ALTGX Instance 2 with PMA-only channels,
the logical channel addresses of the remaining channels increment in steps of four.
Figure 5–41 in “Example 1” on page 5–96 shows how to set the starting channel
number for multiple ALTGX instances controlled by a single dynamic reconfiguration
controller, where one ALTGX instance has PMA-only channels and the other ALTGX
instance has regular transceiver channels.
Table 5–18 in “Example 1” on page 5–96 lists an example scenario where the logical
channel address of both the PMA-only channels and regular transceiver channels is
set based on the starting channel number.
For more information, refer to “Example 1” on page 5–96.
Highest Possible Logical Channel Address
Table 5–4 lists the highest possible logical channel address assigned to a transceiver
channel in a Stratix IV device.
The maximum number of transceiver channels in the largest Stratix IV device is 48
(24 transceiver channels located in four transceiver blocks on the right side of the
device and 24 transceiver channels located in four transceiver blocks on the left side of
the device).
You can individually configure these 48 transceiver channels as 48 Transmitter only
and 48 Receiver only channels. You achieve this by using 48 Transmitter only ALTGX
instances and 48 Receiver only ALTGX instances in your design.
5–10 Chapter 5: Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices
Quartus II MegaWizard Plug-In Manager Interfaces to Support Dynamic Reconfiguration
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
The highest logical channel address is assigned to the Receiver only channel in the
96th ALTGX instance; therefore, the setting is 380.
1The highest possible logical channel address assigned to a transceiver channel in a
Stratix IV device is the same whether the channel is a regular transceiver channel or a
PMA-only channel.
Total Number of Channels Option in the ALTGX_RECONFIG Instance
You can connect every dynamic reconfiguration controller in a design to either a
single ALTGX instance or to multiple ALTGX instances. Depending on the number of
channels within each of these ALTGX instances, you must set the total number of
channels controlled by the dynamic reconfiguration controller in the
ALTGX_RECONFIG MegaWizard Plug-In Manager. Based on this information, the
reconfig_fromgxb
and
logical_channel_address
input ports vary in width.
Use the following steps to determine the number of channels:
1. Determine the highest logical channel address among all the transceiver instances
connected to the same dynamic reconfiguration controller. For more information,
refer to “Logical Channel Addressing” on page 5–5.
2. Round the logical channel address value to the next higher multiple of four.
3. Use this value to set the What is the number of channels controlled by the
reconfig controller? option.
For more information, refer to “Example 1” on page 5–96.
Table 5–4. Highest Possible Logical Channel Address
96 ALTGX Instances ALTGX_RECONFIG Instance
ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In
Manager Setting ALTGX instance 1 ALTGX instance 2
ALTGX_RECONFIG instance 1:
Controls all 96 ALTGX instances.
What is the number of
channels? in the General
screen
48 48
What is the starting channel
number? in the Reconfig
screen
TX instance 1: 0
TX instance 2: 4
.
.
.
.
.
.
TX instance 48: 188
RX instance 1: 192
RX instance 2: 196
.
.
.
.
.
.
RX instance 48: 380
Chapter 5: Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices 5–11
Quartus II MegaWizard Plug-In Manager Interfaces to Support Dynamic Reconfiguration
January 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Connecting the ALTGX and ALTGX_RECONFIG Instances
There are two ways to connect the ALTGX_RECONFIG instance to the ALTGX
instance in your design:
■Single dynamic reconfiguration controller—You can use a single
ALTGX_RECONFIG instance to control all the ALTGX instances in your design.
Figure 5–2 on page 5–6 shows a block diagram of a single dynamic reconfiguration
controller in a design.
■Multiple dynamic reconfiguration controllers—Your design can have multiple
ALTGX_RECONFIG instances but you can use only one ALTGX_RECONFIG
instance per transceiver block, as shown in Figure 5–4.
In the dynamic reconfiguration interface, you must connect the
reconfig_fromgxb
and
reconfig_togxb
signals between the ALTGX_RECONFIG instance and the
ALTGX instance to successfully complete the dynamic reconfiguration process. Make
the following connections:
■Connect the
reconfig_fromgxb
input port of the ALTGX_RECONFIG instance to
the
reconfig_fromgxb
output ports of all the ALTGX instances controlled by the
ALTGX_RECONFIG instance.
■Connect the
reconfig_fromgxb
port of the ALTGX instance whose starting channel
number is 0, to the lowest significant bit of the
reconfig_fromgxb
input port of the
ALTGX_RECONFIG instance.
■Connect the
reconfig_fromgxb
port of the ALTGX instance with the next highest
starting channel number to the following bits of the
reconfig_fromgxb
of the
ALTGX_RECONFIG instance, and so on.
■Connect the same
reconfig_togxb
ports of all the ALTGX instances controlled by
the ALTGX_RECONFIG instance to the
reconfig_togxb
output port of the
ALTGX_RECONFIG instance. The
reconfig_togxb
output port is fixed to 4 bits.
Figure 5–4. Multiple Dynamic Reconfiguration Controllers in a Design
ALTGX Instance 1ALTGX_RECONFIG Instance 1
reconfig_fromgxb [n:0]
reconfig_togxb [3:0]
ALTGX Instance 2ALTGX_RECONFIG Instance 2
reconfig_fromgxb [n:0]
reconfig_togxb [3:0]
5–12 Chapter 5: Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices
Dynamic Reconfiguration Modes Implementation
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Connecting reconfig_fromgxb for the Regular Transceiver Channels
Figure 5–3 on page 5–8 shows how to connect the
reconfig_fromgxb
output port of
the ALTGX instance to the
reconfig_fromgxb
input port of the ALTGX_RECONFIG
instance for regular transceiver channels.
Table 5–18 in “Example 1” on page 5–96 describes how to connect the
reconfig_fromgxb
port for regular transceiver channels.
Connecting reconfig_fromgxb for the PMA-Only Channels
Figure 5–3 on page 5–8 shows how to connect the
reconfig_fromgxb
output port of
the ALTGX instance to the
reconfig_fromgxb
input port of the ALTGX_RECONFIG
instance for PMA-only channels.
Table 5–18 in “Example 1” on page 5–96 describes how to connect the
reconfig_fromgxb
port for PMA-Only channels.
Dynamic Reconfiguration Modes Implementation
The modes available for dynamically reconfiguring the Stratix IV transceivers are:
■“PMA Controls Reconfiguration Mode Details” on page 5–12
■“Transceiver Channel Reconfiguration Mode Details” on page 5–19
■Channel and CMU PLL reconfiguration (.mif based)
■Channel reconfiguration with transmitter PLL select (.mif based)
■CMU PLL reconfiguration (.mif based)
■Central control unit reconfiguration (.mif based)
■Data rate division in transmitter
■“Offset Cancellation Feature” on page 5–67
■“EyeQ” on page 5–69
■“Adaptive Equalization (AEQ)” on page 5–75
■“Dynamic Reconfiguration Controller Port List” on page 5–78
The following sections describe each of these modes in detail.
PMA Controls Reconfiguration Mode Details
You can dynamically reconfigure the following PMA controls:
■Pre-emphasis settings
■DC gain settings
■Voltage output differential (VOD) settings
■Equalization settings (channel reconfiguration mode does not support
equalization settings)
The following section describes how to connect the transceiver channels (the ALTGX
instance) to the dynamic reconfiguration controller (the ALTGX_RECONFIG instance)
to dynamically reconfigure the PMA controls.
Chapter 5: Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices 5–13
Dynamic Reconfiguration Modes Implementation
January 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
The PMA control ports for the ALTGX_RECONFIG MegaWizard Plug-In Manager are
available in the Analog controls screen. You can select the PMA control ports you
want to reconfigure. For example, to use
tx_vodctrl
to write new VOD settings or to
use
tx_vodctrl_out
to read the existing VOD settings.
Dynamically Reconfiguring PMA Controls
You can dynamically reconfigure the PMA controls of a transceiver channel using
three methods:
■Reconfiguring the PMA controls of a specific transceiver channel. For more
information, refer to “Method 1—Using the logical_channel_address Port”.
■Dynamically reconfiguring the PMA controls of the transceiver channels without
using the
logical_channel_address
port (where all transceiver channels are
reconfigured). If you use this method, the PMA controls of all the transceiver
channels connected to the dynamic reconfiguration controller are reconfigured.
For more information, refer to “Method 2—Using the Same Control Signals for All
Channels” on page 5–15.
■Dynamically reconfiguring the PMA controls of the transceiver channels without
using the
logical_channel_address
port (where only the PMA controls of the
transceiver channels are reconfigured). If you use this method, each channel has its
own PMA control port. Based on the value set at the ports, the PMA controls of the
corresponding transceiver channels are reconfigured. For more information, refer
to “Method 3—Using Individual Control Signals for Each Channel” on page 5–17.
For the above three methods, you can additionally use the
rx_tx_duplex_sel[1:0]
port transmitter and receiver parameters. For more information, refer to “Dynamic
Reconfiguration Controller Port List” on page 5–78.
Method 1—Using the logical_channel_address Port
Using Method 1, you can dynamically reconfigure the PMA controls of a transceiver
channel by using the
logical_channel_address
port without affecting the remaining
active channels. Enable the
logical_channel_address
port by selecting the Use
'logical_channel_address' port for Analog controls reconfiguration option in the
Analog controls screen of the ALTGX_RECONFIG MegaWizard Plug-In Manager.
1This method is applicable only for a design where the dynamic reconfiguration
controller controls more than one channel.
When using Method 1, the selected PMA control write and read ports remain fixed in
width, regardless of the number of channels controlled by the ALTGX_RECONFIG
instance.
To observe the width of the PMA control ports, refer to the ALTGX_RECONFIG
MegaWizard Plug-In Manager.
The value you set at the PMA control ports is only written into the specified
transceiver channel.
1Ensure that the
busy
signal is low before you start a write or read transaction. The
busy
output status signal is asserted high when the dynamic reconfiguration
controller is occupied writing or reading the PMA control values. When the write or
read transaction has completed, the
busy
signal goes low.
5–14 Chapter 5: Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices
Dynamic Reconfiguration Modes Implementation
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Write Transaction
Figure 5–5 shows the write transaction waveform when using Method 1. In this
example, the number of channels connected to the dynamic reconfiguration controller
is four. Therefore, the
logical_channel_address
port is 2 bits wide. Also, to initiate
the write transaction, you must assert the
write_all
signal for one
reconfig_clk
cycle.
Figure 5–5. Method 1—Write Transaction Waveform
reconfig_clk
rx_tx_duplex_sel [1:0]
write_all
2’b00 2’b10 (transmitter portion only)
2’b01 (second channel of the ALTGX instance)
2’b00
3’b00 3’b11
busy
tx_vodctrl [2:0]
logical_address_channel [1:0]
Chapter 5: Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices 5–15
Dynamic Reconfiguration Modes Implementation
January 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Read Transaction
In this example, you want to read the existing VOD values from the transmit VOD
control registers of the transmitter portion of a specific channel controlled by the
ALTGX_RECONFIG instance. For this example, the number of channels connected to
the dynamic reconfiguration controller is four. Therefore, the
logical_channel_address
port is 2 bits wide. Also, to initiate the read transaction,
assert the read signal for one
reconfig_clk
clock cycle. After the read transaction has
completed, the
data_valid
signal is asserted. Figure 5–6 shows the read transaction
waveform.
1Simultaneous write and read transactions are not allowed.
Method 2—Using the Same Control Signals for All Channels
To use Method 2, enable the Use the same control signal for all channels option in
the Analog controls screen of the ALTGX_RECONFIG MegaWizard Plug-In Manager.
Using Method 2, you can write the same PMA control value into all the transceiver
channels connected to the dynamic reconfiguration controller.
The PMA control
write
ports remain fixed in width irrespective of the number of
channels controlled by the ALTGX_RECONFIG instance. The PMA control
read
ports
increase in width based on the number of channels controlled by the
ALTGX_RECONFIG instance.
Figure 5–6. Method 1—Read Transaction Waveform
reconfig_clk
rx_tx_duplex_sel [1:0]
read
2’b00 2’b10 (transmitter portion only)
2’b01 (second channel of the ALTGX instance)2’b00
3’b000 3’b0013’bXXX
busy
tx_vodctrl_out [2:0]
logical_address_channel [1:0]
data_valid
5–16 Chapter 5: Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices
Dynamic Reconfiguration Modes Implementation
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Write Transaction
Assume that you have enabled
tx_vodctrl
in the ALTGX_RECONFIG MegaWizard
Plug-In Manager to reconfigure the VOD of the transceiver channels. Figure 5–7 shows
the write transaction to reconfigure the VOD.
Read Transaction
If you want to read the existing values from a specific channel connected to the
ALTGX_RECONFIG instance, observe the corresponding byte positions of the PMA
control output port after the read transaction is complete.
For example, if the number of channels controlled by the ALTGX_RECONFIG
instance is two,
tx_vodctrl_out
is 6 bits wide (
tx_vodctrl_out[2:0]
corresponds to
channel 1 and
tx_vodctrl_out[5:3]
corresponds to channel 2). Figure 5–8 shows how
to read the VOD values of the second channel.
Figure 5–7. Method 2—Write Transaction Waveform
reconfig_clk
rx_tx_duplex_sel [1:0]
write_all
2’b00 2’b10 (transmitter portion only)
3’b00 3’b11
busy
tx_vodctrl [2:0]
Chapter 5: Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices 5–17
Dynamic Reconfiguration Modes Implementation
January 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Figure 5–8 shows the read transaction waveform. The transmit VOD settings written in
channels 1 and 2 prior to the read transaction are 3'b001 and 3'b010, respectively.
1Simultaneous write and read transactions are not allowed.
Method 3—Using Individual Control Signals for Each Channel
You can optionally use Method 3 to individually reconfigure the PMA controls of each
transceiver channel.
When you disable the Use the same control signal for all channels option, the PMA
control ports for the write transaction are also separate for each channel. For example,
if you have two channels,
tx_vodctrl
is 6 bits wide (
tx_vodctrl[2:0]
corresponds to
channel 1 and
tx_vodctrl[5:3]
corresponds to channel 2).
The width of the PMA control ports for a read transaction are always separate for each
channel (the same as the PMA control ports, as explained in “Method 2—Using the
Same Control Signals for All Channels” on page 5–15.)
Figure 5–8. Method 2—Read Transaction Waveform
Note to Figure 5–8:
(1) To read the current VOD values in channel 2, observe the values in
tx_vodctrl_out[5:3]
.
reconfig_clk
rx_tx_duplex_sel [1:0]
read
2’b00 2’b10 (transmitter portion only)
6’bXXXXXX 6’b0100016’b000000
busy
tx_vodctrl [5:0]
(1)
data_valid
5–18 Chapter 5: Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices
Dynamic Reconfiguration Modes Implementation
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Write Transaction
In this method, the PMA controls are written into all the channels connected to the
dynamic reconfiguration controller. Therefore, to write to a specific channel:
1. Retain the stored values of the other active channels using a read transaction.
2. Set the new value at the bits corresponding to the specific channel.
3. Perform a write transaction.
For example, assume that the number of channels controlled by the
ALTGX_RECONFIG instance is two,
tx_vodctrl
in this case is 6 bits wide
(
tx_vodctrl[2:0]
corresponds to channel 1 and
tx_vodctrl[5:3]
corresponds to
channel 2). Follow these steps:
1. If you want to dynamically reconfigure the PMA controls of only channel 2 with a
new value, first perform a read transaction to retrieve the existing PMA control
values from
tx_vodctrl_out[5:0]
. Take
tx_vodctrl_out[2:0]
and provide this
value in
tx_vodctrl[2:0]
to the write in channel 1. By doing so, channel 1 is
overwritten with the same value.
2. Perform a write transaction. This ensures that the new values are written only to
channel 2, while channel 1 remains unchanged.
Figure 5–9 shows a write transaction waveform using Method 3.
1Simultaneous write and read transactions are not allowed.
Figure 5–9. Method 3—Write Transaction Waveform
Note to Figure 5–9:
(1) For this example, the number of channels controlled by the dynamic reconfiguration controller (ALTGX_RECONFIG instance) is two and the
tx_vodctrl
control port is enabled.
reconfig_clk
(1)
rx_tx_duplex_sel [1:0]
write_all
2’b00 2’b10 (transmitter portion only)
6’b0000116’b000000
busy
tx_vodctrl [5:0]
Chapter 5: Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices 5–19
Dynamic Reconfiguration Modes Implementation
January 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Read Transaction
The read transaction in Method 3 is identical to that in Method 2. Refer to “Read
Transaction” on page 5–16.
Transceiver Channel Reconfiguration Mode Details
Table 5–5 lists the supported configurations for the various transceiver channel
reconfiguration modes available in the ALTGX_RECONFIG MegaWizard Plug-In
Manager.
1You cannot dynamically reconfigure from Deterministic Latency mode to any other
functional mode and vice-versa. Within Deterministic Latency mode, the following
reconfigurations are not allowed:
■Phase Compensation FIFO register mode and a non-register mode
■PFD feedback mode and a non-PFD feedback mode
For instance, you can dynamically reconfigure the data rate for CPRI mode.
However, you cannot dynamically reconfigure from CPRI mode to a non-CPRI
mode.
Table 5–5. Transceiver Channel Reconfiguration Modes and .mif Requirements
Dynamic Reconfiguration
Mode
Supported Configurations
.mif Requirements
To From
Channel and CMU PLL
reconfiguration
All configurations of regular
transceiver channels
All configurations of regular
transceiver channels Y
Basic (PMA Direct) ×1
configuration
Basic (PMA Direct) ×1
configuration Y
Basic (PMA Direct) ×N
configuration
Basic (PMA Direct) ×N
configuration Y
Channel reconfiguration with
transmitter PLL select
Non-bonded configurations of
regular transceiver channels
Non-bonded configurations of
regular transceiver channels Y
Basic (PMA Direct) ×1
configuration
Basic (PMA Direct) ×1
configuration Y
Basic (PMA Direct) ×N
configuration
Basic (PMA Direct) ×N
configuration Y
Central control unit
reconfiguration (2)
×4 bonded mode ×4 bonded mode Y
×8 bonded mode ×8 bonded mode Y
Data rate division in transmitter
All Transmitter only
configurations of regular
transceiver channels
All Transmitter only
configurations of regular
transceiver channels (1)
—
Note to Table 5–5:
(1) Because the transmitter local divider is not available for bonded mode channels, data rate division is supported for non-bonded channels only.
(2) Dynamic reconfiguration from a bonded mode with rate matcher to another bonded mode without rate matcher is not allowed.
5–20 Chapter 5: Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices
Dynamic Reconfiguration Modes Implementation
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Memory Initialization File (.mif)
As listed in Table 5–5, all the dynamic reconfiguration modes with a check mark in the
“.mif Requirement” column use memory initialization files to reconfigure the
transceivers. These .mifs contain the valid settings, in the form of words, required to
reconfigure the transceivers. To understand using .mifs, it is helpful to understand
these two concepts:
■How to generate a .mif?—The Quartus® II software generates .mifs when you
provide the appropriate project settings and then compiles an ALTGX instance.
For more information, refer to “Quartus II Settings to Enable .mif Generation” on
page 5–20.
■How is a .mif used between the ALTGX_RECONFIG instance and the ALTGX
instance?—The Quartus II software provides a design flow called the user
memory initialization file flow. For more information, refer to “.mif-Based Design
Flow” on page 5–22.
Quartus II Settings to Enable .mif Generation
The .mif is not generated by default in a Quartus II compilation. To generate a .mif,
you must enable the following Quartus II software settings:
1. On the Assignments menu, select Settings (Figure 5–10).
Figure 5–10. Step 1 to Enable .mif Generation
Chapter 5: Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices 5–21
Dynamic Reconfiguration Modes Implementation
January 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
2. Select Fitter settings, then choose More Settings (Figure 5–11).
3. In the Option box of the More Fitter Settings page, set the Generate GXB
Reconfig MIF option to On (Figure 5–12).
The .mif is generated in the Assembler stage of the compilation process. However, for
any change in the design or the above settings, the Quartus II software runs through
the fitter stage before starting the Assembler stage.
Figure 5–11. Step 2 to Enable .mif Generation
Figure 5–12. Step 3 to Enable .mif Generation
5–22 Chapter 5: Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices
Dynamic Reconfiguration Modes Implementation
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
A .mif is generated for every ALTGX instance defined in the top-level RTL file.
The Quartus II software creates the .mif under the <Project_DIR>/reconfig_mif folder.
The file name is based on the ALTGX instance name (<instance name>.mif); for
example, basic_gxb.mif. One design can have multiple .mifs (there is no limit) and
you can use one .mif to reconfigure multiple channels.
To generate a .mif, create a top-level design and connect the clock inputs in the
RTL/schematic. Specifically, for the transceiver clock inputs
pll_inclk_cruclk
.
1If you do not specify pins for
tx_dataout
and
rx_datain
for the transceiver channel,
the Quartus II software selects a channel and generates a .mif for that channel.
However, the .mif can still be used for any transceiver channel.
You can generate multiple .mifs in the following two ways:
Method 1:
1. Compile the design created and generate the first .mif.
2. Update the ALTGX instance with the alternate configuration.
3. Compile the design to get the second .mif.
1If you have to generate .mifs for many configurations, Method 1 takes more time to
complete.
Method 2:
1. In the top-level design, instantiate all the different configurations of the ALTGX
instantiation for which the .mif is required.
2. Connect the appropriate clock inputs of all the ALTGX instantiations.
3. Generate the .mif. The .mifs are generated for all the ALTGX configurations.
1This method requires special attention when generating the .mif. Refer to the
following:
■The different ALTGX instantiations must have the appropriate logical
reference clock index option values.
■The clock inputs for each instance must be connected to the appropriate clock
source.
■When you generate the .mif, use the proper naming convention for the files so
you know the configuration supported by the .mif.
.mif-Based Design Flow
The .mif-based design flow involves writing the contents of the .mif to the transceiver
channel or CMU PLL.
Chapter 5: Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices 5–23
Dynamic Reconfiguration Modes Implementation
January 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
To reconfigure the transceiver channel or CMU PLL, you must configure the required
settings for the transceiver channel or CMU PLL in the ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In
Manager and compile the ALTGX instance. The dynamic reconfiguration controller
requires that you write these configured settings through the .mif into the transceiver
channel or CMU PLL (using the
write_all
and
reconfig_data[15:0]
signals). The
maximum possible size of the .mif is 59 words. Each word contains legal register
settings of the transceiver channel stored in 16 bits.
reconfig_address_out[5:0]
provides the address (location) of the 16-bit word in the .mif.
Table 5–6 lists the .mif size depending on the ALTGX configuration.
You can store these .mifs in on-chip or off-chip memory.
Applying a .mif in the User Design
Store the .mif in on-chip or off-chip memory and connect it to the dynamic
reconfiguration controller, as shown in Figure 5–13.
When applying a .mif in the user design, be sure to:
■Use the RAM: 1-PORT megafunction to instantiate a memory block.
■Choose the size of the memory block based on the size of the .mif generated.
■Instantiate the .mif in the memory block.
Table 5–6. .mif Size for the ALTGX Configuration
ALTGX Configuration .mif Size in Words (1) PMA Direct Mode
Duplex (Receiver and Transmitter) + Central
control unit 60 33
Duplex (Receiver and Transmitter)55 28
Receiver only 38 14
Transmitter only 19 15
Note to Table 5–6:
(1) Each word in the .mif is 16 bits wide.
Figure 5–13. .mif Instantiation in the User Design
GIGE .mif
SONET OC48 RAM
SONET OC48
.mif
Reconfiguration
User Logic
ALTGX_RECONFIG
Instance
ALTGX Instances
GIGE channel
SONET OC48 channel
GIGE RAM
5–24 Chapter 5: Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices
Dynamic Reconfiguration Modes Implementation
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
1Whenever a .mif is applied to a channel, the PMA controls for that channel are set to
the default settings chosen in the ALTGX instance used for .mif generation.
1The equalization settings of the receiver cannot be modified by a .mif.
Reduced .mif Reconfiguration
This mode is available only for the .mif-based transceiver channel reconfiguration
modes.
This is an optional feature that allows faster reconfiguration and faster simulation
time. For example, if you intend to make minor changes to the transceiver channel,
this might involve a change of only a few words in the .mif.
Here is an example of changing only the termination setting:
■Assume that the only word difference is word address 32.
■Instead of loading the entire .mif, you can use altgx_diffmifgen.exe to generate a
new .mif. This new .mif only has the modified words.
■The new .mif is 22 bits wide, compared with the 16 bits wide in the regular .mif.
There are 6 bits of address in addition to 16 bits of data.
<addr 6 bits> <data 16 bits>
■Enable the Use 'reconfig_address' to input address from the MIF in reduced MIF
reconfiguration option in the Channel and TX PLL Reconfiguration screen of the
ALTGX_RECONFIG MegaWizard Plug-In Manager.
■Use the
reconfig_data[15:0]
port to connect the 16 bits of data from the new
.mif.
■Use the
reconfig_address[5:0]
port to connect the 6 bits of address from the new
.mif.
Using altgx_diffmifgen.exe
Browse to the project directory where you have the Quartus II software installed. For
example, altgx_diffmifgen.exe is available in the following path:
\altera\91\quartus\bin
The syntax for using this .exe is as follows:
\altera\91\quartus\bin\altgx_diffmifgen.exe <a.mif> <b.mif>
That is executed in the project directory with the .mifs. The altgx_diffmifgen.exe
requires two or more ALTGX .mifs.
Channel and CMU PLL Reconfiguration Mode Details
Use this dynamic reconfiguration mode to reconfigure a transceiver channel to a
different functional mode and data rate. To reconfigure a channel successfully, select
the appropriate options in the ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager (described in
the following sections) and generate a .mif. Connect the ALTGX_RECONFIG instance
to the ALTGX instance. The dynamic reconfiguration controller reconfigures the
transceiver channel by writing the .mif contents into the channel.
Chapter 5: Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices 5–25
Dynamic Reconfiguration Modes Implementation
January 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
1Channel and CMU PLL reconfiguration mode only affects the channel involved in the
reconfiguration (the transceiver channel specified by the
logical_channel_address
port), without affecting the remaining transceiver channels controlled by the dynamic
reconfiguration controller.
1You cannot reconfigure the auxiliary transmit (ATX) PLLs in Stratix IV transceivers.
Channel Reconfiguration Classifications
Table 5–7 lists the classification for channel and CMU PLL reconfiguration mode.
1In addition to the categories mentioned, you can also choose to reconfigure both the
data rate and functional mode of a transceiver channel.
1For the following sections, assume that the transceiver channel has the Receiver and
Transmitter configuration in the ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager, unless
specified as Transmitter only or Receiver only.
Blocks Reconfigured in Channel and CMU PLL Reconfiguration Mode
The blocks that are reconfigured by this dynamic reconfiguration mode are the PCS
and PMA blocks of a transceiver channel, the local divider settings of the transmitter
and receiver channel, and the CMU PLL.
Table 5–7. Channel Reconfiguration Classifications
Data Rate Reconfiguration Functional Mode Reconfiguration
■By reconfiguring the CMU PLL connected to the
transceiver channel.
■By selecting the alternate CMU PLL in the transceiver
block to supply clocks to the transceiver channel.
■Every transmitter channel has one local clock divider.
Similarly, every receiver channel has one local clock
divider. You can reconfigure the data rate of a transceiver
channel by reconfiguring these local clock dividers to 1,
2, or 4. When you reconfigure these local clock dividers,
ensure that the functional mode of the transceiver
channel supports the reconfigured data rate.
■Use this feature to reconfigure the existing functional
mode of the transceiver channel to a totally different
functional mode.
■There is no limit to the number of functional modes you
can reconfigure the transceiver channel to if the various
clocks involved support the transition. For more
information about core clocks, refer to
“Clocking/Interface Options” on page 5–30.
5–26 Chapter 5: Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices
Dynamic Reconfiguration Modes Implementation
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Figure 5–14 shows the functional blocks that you can dynamically reconfigure using
channel and CMU PLL reconfiguration mode.
1Channel reconfiguration from either a Transmitter only configuration to a Receiver
only configuration or vice versa is not allowed.
ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager Setup for Channel and CMU PLL Reconfiguration Mode
To reconfigure the transceiver channel and CMU PLL, set up the ALTGX MegaWizard
Plug-In Manager using the following steps:
1. Select the Channel and Transmitter PLL reconfiguration option in the Modes
screen under the Reconfiguration Settings tab.
2. If you want to reconfigure the data rate of the transceiver channel by reconfiguring
the CMU PLL, provide the new data rate you want the CMU PLL to run at in the
General screen.
3. If you want to reconfigure the data rate of the transceiver channel by switching to
the alternate CMU PLL within the same transceiver block, select the Use alternate
CMU transmitter PLL option in the Modes screen. For more information, refer to
the “Using the Alternate CMU Transmitter PLL” on page 5–27.
4. Provide the number of input reference clocks available for the CMU PLL in the
How many input clocks? option of the corresponding PLL screen. The maximum
number of input reference clocks allowed is 10. For more information, refer to
“Guidelines for Specifying the Input Reference Clocks” on page 5–61.
Figure 5–14. Channel and CMU PLL Reconfiguration in a Transceiver Block
Full Duplex Transceiver Channel
TX CHANNEL
RX CHANNEL
refclk0
refclk1
CMU Channel
CMU0 PLL
CMU1 PLL
LOCAL
DIVIDER TX PMA + TX PCS
RX PMA + RX PCS
RX CDR
Blocks that can be reconfigured in Channel and CMU PLL
Reconfiguration mode
clock
mux
Logical
TX PLL
select
clock
mux
clock
mux
Chapter 5: Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices 5–27
Dynamic Reconfiguration Modes Implementation
January 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
5. Provide the starting channel number in the Modes screen. For more information,
refer to “Logical Channel Addressing” on page 5–5.
6. Provide the logical reference index of the CMU PLL in the What is the PLL logical
reference index? option in the corresponding PLL screen. For more information,
refer to “Selecting the Logical Reference Index of the CMU PLL” on page 5–29.
7. Provide the identification of the input reference clock used by the CMU PLL in the
corresponding PLL screens.
8. Set up the Clocking/Interface options. For more information, refer to
“Clocking/Interface Options” on page 5–30.
9. Set up the Channel Interface options. For more information, refer to “FPGA
Fabric-Transceiver Channel Interface Selection” on page 5–36.
Using the Alternate CMU Transmitter PLL
To reconfigure the CMU PLL during run time, you need the flexibility to select one of
the two CMU PLLs of a transceiver block.
Consider that the transceiver channel is listening to
CMU0
PLL and that you want to
reconfigure
CMU0
PLL, as shown in Figure 5–15.
Figure 5–15. Reconfiguring the CMU0 PLL
Full Duplex Transceiver Channel
TX CHANNEL
RX CHANNEL
LOCAL
DIVIDER
Active Connections
Main PLL
logical_tx_pll value = 1
Alternate PLL
logical_tx_pll value = 0
1
0
Unused Connections
CMU Channels
refclk0
refclk1
156.25 MHz
125 MHz
6.25 Gbps
CMU0 PLL
2.5 Gbps
CMU1 PLL
Logical
TX PLL
select
clock
mux
6.25 Gbps
RX CDR
6.25 Gbps
TX PMA + TX PCS
6.25 Gbps
RX PMA + RX PCS
clock
mux
clock
mux
5–28 Chapter 5: Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices
Dynamic Reconfiguration Modes Implementation
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
You can select
CMU0
PLL by specifying its identity in the ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In
Manager. This identification is referred to as the
logical tx pll
value. This value
provides a logical identification to
CMU0
PLL and associates it with a transceiver
channel without requiring the knowledge of its physical location.
In the ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager, the transmitter PLL configuration set in
the General screen is called the main PLL. When you provide the alternate PLL with a
logical tx pll
value (for example, 0), the main PLL automatically takes the
complement value 1. The
logical tx pll
value for the main PLL is stored along with
the other transceiver channel information in the generated .mif.
1The main PLL corresponds to the CMU PLL configuration set in the General screen of
the ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager. The alternate PLL corresponds to the
CMU PLL configuration set in the Alt PLL screen.
Chapter 5: Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices 5–29
Dynamic Reconfiguration Modes Implementation
January 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Selecting the Logical Reference Index of the CMU PLL
In Figure 5–16, transceiver channel 1 listens to
CMU0
PLL of the transceiver block.
Similarly, transceiver channel 2 listens to
CMU1
PLL of the transceiver block.
To direct the ALTGX_RECONFIG instance to dynamically reconfigure
CMU0
PLL,
specify its logical reference index (the identity of a transmitter PLL). Similarly, to
direct the ALTGX_RECONFIG instance to dynamically reconfigure
CMU1
PLL instead,
provide the logical reference index of
CMU1
PLL. The allowed values for the logical
reference index of the CMU PLLs within a transceiver block are 0 or 1. Similarly, the
transmitter PLLs outside the transceiver block can also be assigned a logical reference
index value. For more information, refer to “Selecting the PLL Logical Reference
Index for Additional PLLs” on page 5–53.
Figure 5–16. Logical Reference Index of CMU PLLs in a Transceiver Block (1)
Note to Figure 5–16:
(1) After the device powers up, the
busy
signal remains low for the first
reconfig_clk
cycle.
Full Duplex Transceiver Channel 1
TX CHANNEL 1
CMU Channels
Full Duplex Transceiver Channel 2
RX CDR
TX PMA + TX PCS
TX CHANNEL 2
Logical
TX PLL
select
RX CHANNEL 2
2.5 Gbps
2.5 Gbps 2.5 Gbps
LOCAL
DIVIDER
clock
mux
refclk0
refclk1
156.25 MHz
125 MHz
6.25 Gbps
CMU0 PLL
2.5 Gbps
CMU1 PLL
RX CHANNEL 1
Logical
TX PLL
select
clock
mux
6.25 Gbps
RX CDR
6.25 Gbps
RX PMA + RX PCS
6.25 Gbps
TX PMA + TX PCS
LOCAL
DIVIDER
clock
mux
clock
mux
RX PMA + RX PCS
5–30 Chapter 5: Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices
Dynamic Reconfiguration Modes Implementation
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
1The logical reference index of the
CMU0
PLL within a transceiver block is always the
complement of the logical reference index of the
CMU1
PLL within the same transceiver
block.
1This logical reference index value is stored as
logical tx pll
, along with the other
transceiver channel settings in the .mif.
Clocking/Interface Options
The following describes the Clocking/Interface options. The core clocking setup
describes the transceiver core clocks that are the write and read clocks of the transmit
(TX) phase compensation FIFO and the receive (RX) phase compensation FIFO,
respectively. Core clocking is classified as transmitter core clocking and receiver core
clocking.
Transmitter core clocking refers to the clock that is used to write the parallel data from
the FPGA fabric into the Transmit Phase Compensation FIFO. You can use one of the
following clocks to write into the Transmit Phase Compensation FIFO:
■
tx_coreclk
—You can use a clock of the same frequency as
tx_clkout
from the
FPGA fabric to provide the write clock to the Transmit Phase Compensation FIFO.
If you use
tx_coreclk
, it overrides the
tx_clkout
options in the ALTGX
MegaWizard Plug-In Manager.
■
tx_clkout
—The Quartus II software automatically routes
tx_clkout
to the FPGA
fabric and back into the TX phase compensation FIFO.
1The Clocking/Interface screen is not available for PMA-only channels.
Option 1: Share a Single Transmitter Core Clock Between Transmitters
■Enable this option if you want
tx_clkout
of the first channel (channel 0) of the
transceiver block to provide the write clock to the TX phase compensation FIFOs
of the remaining channels in the transceiver block.
■This option is typically enabled when all the channels of a transceiver block are of
the same functional mode and data rate, and are reconfigured to the identical
functional mode and data rate.
Consider the following scenario:
■Four regular transceiver channels configured at 3 Gbps and in the same functional
mode.
■Channel and CMU PLL reconfiguration mode is enabled in the
ALTGX_RECONFIG MegaWizard Plug-In Manager.
■You want to reconfigure all four regular transceiver channels to 1.5 Gbps and vice
versa.
Option 1 is applicable in this scenario because it saves clock resources.
Chapter 5: Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices 5–31
Dynamic Reconfiguration Modes Implementation
January 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Figure 5–17 shows the sharing of channel 0’s
tx_clkout
between all four regular
channels of a transceiver block.
Option 2: Use the Respective Channel Transmitter Core Clocks
■Enable this option if you want the individual transmitter channel
tx_clkout
signals to provide the write clock to their respective Transmit Phase Compensation
FIFOs.
■This option is typically enabled when each transceiver channel is reconfigured to a
different functional mode using channel reconfiguration.
Consider the following scenario:
■Four regular transceiver channels configured at 3 Gbps and different functional
modes.
■Channel and CMU PLL reconfiguration mode is enabled in the
ALTGX_RECONFIG MegaWizard Plug-In Manager.
■You want to reconfigure each of the four regular transceiver channels to different
data rates and different functional modes.
Option 2 is applicable in this scenario because the design requires all four regular
transceiver channels to be reconfigured to different data rates and functional modes.
Each channel can be reconfigured to a different functional mode using the channel
and CMU PLL reconfiguration mode.
Figure 5–17. Option 1 for Transmitter Core Clocking (Channel and CMU PLL Reconfiguration Mode)
TX0 (3 Gbps/1.5 Gbps)
TX1 (3 Gbps/1.5 Gbps)
TX2 (3 Gbps/1.5 Gbps)
TX3 (3 Gbps/1.5 Gbps)
RX3
RX2
RX1
RX0
CMU1 PLL
CMU0 PLL
FPGA Fabric Transceiver Block
tx_clkout[0]
Low-speed parallel clock generated by the TX0 local divider (tx_clkout[0])
High-speed serial clock generated by the CMU0 PLL
5–32 Chapter 5: Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices
Dynamic Reconfiguration Modes Implementation
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Figure 5–18 shows how each transmitter channel’s
tx_clkout
signal provides a clock
to the Transmit Phase Compensation FIFOs of the respective transceiver channels.
Receiver core clocking refers to the clock that is used to read the parallel data from the
Receiver Phase Compensation FIFO into the FPGA fabric. You can use one of the
following clocks to read from the Receive Phase Compensation FIFO:
■
rx_coreclk
—You can use a clock of the same frequency as
rx_clkout
from the
FPGA fabric to provide the read clock to the Receive Phase Compensation FIFO. If
you use
rx_coreclk
, it overrides the
rx_clkout
options in the ALTGX
MegaWizard Plug-In Manager.
■
rx_clkout
—The Quartus II software automatically routes
rx_clkout
to the FPGA
fabric and back into the Receive Phase Compensation FIFO.
1The Clocking/Interface screen is not available for PMA-only channels.
Figure 5–18. Option 2 for Transmitter Core Clocking (Channel and CMU PLL Reconfiguration Mode)
TX0 (3 Gbps/1.5 Gbps)
TX1 (3 Gbps/6 Gbps)
TX2 (3 Gbps/1.5 Gbps)
TX3 (3 Gbps)
RX0
RX1
RX2
RX3
CMU1 PLL
CMU0 PLL
FPGA Fabric Transciever Block
High-speed serial clock generated by the CMU0 PLL
tx_clkout[0]
tx_clkout[1]
tx_clkout[2]
tx_clkout[3]
Low-speed parallel clock generated by the local divider of the transceiver
Chapter 5: Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices 5–33
Dynamic Reconfiguration Modes Implementation
January 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Option 1: Share a Single Transmitter Core Clock Between Receivers
■Enable this option if you want
tx_clkout
of the first channel (channel 0) of the
transceiver block to provide the read clock to the Receive Phase Compensation
FIFOs of the remaining receiver channels in the transceiver block.
■This option is typically enabled when all the channels of a transceiver block are in
a Basic or Protocol configuration with rate matching enabled and are reconfigured
to another Basic or Protocol configuration with rate matching enabled.
Consider the following scenario:
■Four regular transceiver channels configured to the Basic 2 Gbps functional mode
with rate matching enabled.
■Channel and CMU PLL reconfiguration mode is enabled in the
ALTGX_RECONFIG MegaWizard Plug-In Manager.
■You want to reconfigure all four regular transceiver channels to 3.125 Gbps
configuration with rate matching enabled.
Option 1 is applicable in this scenario.
Figure 5–19 shows the sharing of channel 0’s
tx_clkout
between all four channels of a
transceiver block.
Figure 5–19. Option 1 for Receiver Core Clocking (Channel and CMU PLL Reconfiguration Mode)
High-speed serial clock generated by the CMU0 PLL
Low-speed parallel clock generated by the TX0 local divider (tx_clkout[0])
High-speed serial clock generated by the CMU1 PLL
FPGA Fabric Transceiver Block
tx_clkout[0]
TX0 (2 Gbps)
RX0
TX1 (2 Gbps)
TX2 (2 Gbps)
TX3 (2 Gbps)
RX1
RX2
RX3
CMU1 PLL
CMU0 PLL
Four regular transceiver channels
configured at Basic 2G with
Rate Matching and set up to
switch to 3.125 Gbps with Rate Matching
5–34 Chapter 5: Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices
Dynamic Reconfiguration Modes Implementation
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Option 2: Use the Respective Channel Transmitter Core Clocks
■Enable this option if you want the individual transmitter channel’s
tx_clkout
signal to provide the read clock to its respective Receive Phase Compensation
FIFO.
■This option is typically enabled when all the transceiver channels have rate
matching enabled with different data rates and are reconfigured to another Basic
or Protocol functional mode with rate matching enabled.
Consider the following scenario:
■TX0/RX0: You want to dynamically reconfigure the Basic 1 Gbps configuration
with rate matching enabled to the Basic 2 Gbps configuration with rate matching
enabled.
■TX1/RX1: You want to dynamically reconfigure the Basic 4 Gbps configuration
with rate matching enabled to the Basic 1 Gbps configuration with rate matching
enabled.
■TX2/RX2 and TX3/RX3: You want to dynamically reconfigure the Basic
3.125 Gbps configuration with rate matching enabled to the 1 Gbps configuration
with rate matching and vice versa.
■Channel and CMU PLL reconfiguration mode is enabled in the
ALTGX_RECONFIG MegaWizard Plug-In Manager.
Option 2 is applicable because the design requires the individual transceiver channels
to be reconfigured with different data rates to another Basic or Protocol functional
mode with rate matching. Therefore, each channel can be reconfigured to another
Basic or Protocol functional mode with rate matching enabled and a different data
rate.
Chapter 5: Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices 5–35
Dynamic Reconfiguration Modes Implementation
January 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Figure 5–20 shows the respective
tx_clkout
of each channel clocking the respective
channels of a transceiver block.
Option 3: Use the Respective Channel Receiver Core Clocks
■Enable this option if you want the individual channel’s
rx_clkout
signal to
provide the read clock to its respective Receive Phase Compensation FIFO.
■This option is typically enabled when the channel is reconfigured from a Basic or
Protocol configuration with or without rate matching to another Basic or Protocol
configuration with or without rate matching.
Consider the following scenario:
■TX1/RX1: GIGE configuration to SONET/SDH OC48 configuration.
■TX2/RX2: Basic 2.5 Gbps configuration with rate matching disabled to Basic
1.244 Gbps configuration with rate matching disabled.
■Channel and CMU PLL reconfiguration mode is enabled in the
ALTGX_RECONFIG MegaWizard Plug-In Manager.
Option 3 is applicable in this scenario.
Figure 5–20. Option 2 for Receiver Core Clocking (Channel and CMU PLL Reconfiguration Mode)
High-speed serial clock generated by the CMU0 PLL
High-speed serial clock generated by the CMU1 PLL
FPGA Fabric Transceiver Block
tx_clkout[0]
tx_clkout[1]
tx_clkout[2]
RX0
RX1
RX2
RX3
TX0 (2 Gbps/1 Gbps)
TX1 (4 Gbps/1 Gbps)
TX2 (3.125 Gbps/1 Gbps)
TX3 (2 Gbps)
CMU1 PLL
CMU0 PLL
Low-speed parallel clock generated by the local divider of the transceiver
5–36 Chapter 5: Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices
Dynamic Reconfiguration Modes Implementation
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Figure 5–21 shows the respective
rx_clkout
of each channel clocking the respective
receiver channels of a transceiver block.
FPGA Fabric-Transceiver Channel Interface Selection
This section describes the ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager settings related to
the FPGA fabric-transceiver channel interface data width when you select and
activate channel and CMU PLL reconfiguration mode. You must set up the FPGA
fabric-transceiver channel interface data width when functional mode reconfiguration
involves:
■changes in the FPGA fabric-transceiver channel data width
OR
■enables and disables the static PCS blocks of the transceiver channel
You can set up the FPGA fabric-transceiver channel interface data width by enabling
the Channel Interface option in the Modes screen.
Enable the Channel Interface option if the reconfiguration channel has:
■changed the FPGA fabric-transceiver channel interface data width
OR
■changed the input control signals and output status signals
Figure 5–21. Option 3 for Receiver Core Clocking (Channel and CMU PLL Reconfiguration Mode)
High-speed serial clock generated by the CMU0 PLL
High-speed serial clock generated by the CMU1 PLL
FPGA Fabric Transceiver Block
rx_clkout[0]
rx_clkout[1] RX1
RX0
TX0 (2 Gbps)
TX1 (2 Gbps)
CMU1 PLL
CMU0 PLL
Low-speed parallel clock generated by the local divider of the transceiver
Chapter 5: Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices 5–37
Dynamic Reconfiguration Modes Implementation
January 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
There are two signals available when you enable the Channel Interface option:
■
tx_datainfull
—The width of this input signal depends on the number of
channels you set up in the General screen. It is 44 bits wide per channel. This
signal is available only for Transmitter only and Receiver and Transmitter
configurations. This port replaces the existing
tx_datain
port.
■
rx_dataoutfull
—The width of this output signal depends on the number of
channels you set up in the General screen. It is 64 bits wide per channel. This
signal is available only for Receiver only and Receiver and Transmitter
configurations. This port replaces the existing
rx_dataout
port.
1In addition to these two ports, you can select the necessary control and status signals
for the reconfigured channel in the Clocking/Interface screen.
fFor more information about control and status signals, refer to the “Transceiver Port
Lists” section in the Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices chapter.
These control and status signals are not applicable in Basic (PMA Direct) functional
mode. Table 5–8 lists the signals not available when you enable the Channel Interface
option.
The Quartus II software has legal checks for the connectivity of
tx_datainfull
and
rx_dataoutfull
and the various control and status signals you enable in the
Clocking/Interface screen.
For example, the Quartus II software allows you to select and connect the
pipestatus
and
powerdn
signals. It assumes that you are planning to switch to and from PCIe
functional mode. Table 5–9 lists the
tx_datainfull[43:0]
FPGA fabric-transceiver
channel interface signals.
Table 5–8. Control and Status Signals Not Applicable in Basic (PMA Direct) Mode with the
Channel Interface Option Enabled
FPGA Fabric-Receiver Interface FPGA Fabric-Transmitter Interface
rx_dataout tx_datain
rx_syncstatus tx_ctrlenable
rx_patterndetect tx_forcedisp
rx_a1a2sizeout tx_dispval
rx_ctrldetect
rx_errdetect
rx_disperr
5–38 Chapter 5: Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices
Dynamic Reconfiguration Modes Implementation
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Table 5–9. tx_datainfull[43:0] FPGA Fabric-Transceiver Channel Interface Signal Descriptions (Part 1 of 3) (1)
FPGA Fabric-Transceiver Channel
Interface Description
Transmit Signal Description (Based on Stratix IV GX Supported FPGA
Fabric-Transceiver Channel Interface Widths)
8-bit FPGA fabric-transceiver Channel
Interface
tx_datainfull[7:0]
: 8-bit data (
tx_datain
)
The following signals are used only in 8B/10B modes:
tx_datainfull[8]
: Control bit (
tx_ctrlenable
)
tx_datainfull[9]
Transmitter force disparity Compliance (PCIe) (
tx_forcedisp
) in all modes
except PCIe. For PCIe mode, (
tx_forcedispcompliance
) is used.
tx_datainfull[10]
: Forced disparity value (
tx_dispval
)
10-bit FPGA fabric-transceiver
Channel Interface
For Non-PIPE:
tx_datainfull[10]
: Forced disparity value
(tx_dispval)
For PCIe:
tx_datainfull[10]
: Forced electrical idle
(tx_forceelecidle)
16-bit FPGA fabric-transceiver
Channel Interface with PCS-PMA set
to 16/20 bits
Two 8-bit Data (
tx_datain
)
tx_datainfull[7:0]
-
tx_datain
(LSByte) and
tx_datainfull[18:11]
-
tx_datain
(MSByte)
The following signals are used only in 8B/10B modes:
tx_datainfull[8]
-
tx_ctrlenable
(LSB) and
tx_datainfull[19]
-
tx_ctrlenable
(MSB)
Force Disparity Enable
tx_datainfull[9]
-
tx_forcedisp
(LSB) and
tx_datainfull[20]
-
tx_forcedisp
(MSB)
Force Disparity Value
tx_datainfull[10]
-
tx_dispval
(LSB) and
tx_datainfull[21]
-
tx_dispval
(MSB)
Chapter 5: Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices 5–39
Dynamic Reconfiguration Modes Implementation
January 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
16-bit FPGA fabric-transceiver
Channel Interface with PCS-PMA set
to 8/10 bits
Two 8-bit Data (
tx_datain
)
tx_datainfull[7:0]
-
tx_datain
(LSByte) and
tx_datainfull[29:22]
-
tx_datain
(MSByte)
The following signals are used only in 8B/10B modes:
Two Control Bits (
tx_ctrlenable
)
tx_datainfull
[8] -
tx_ctrlenable
(LSB) and
tx_datainfull
[30] -
tx_ctrlenable
(MSB)
Force Disparity Enable
For non-PIPE:
tx_datainfull[9]
-
tx_forcedisp
(LSB) and
tx_datainfull[31]
-
tx_forcedisp
(MSB)
For PCIe:
tx_datainfull[9]
-
tx_forcedispcompliance
and
tx_datainfull[31]
- 0
Force Disparity Value
For non-PIPE:
tx_datainfull[10]
:
tx_dispval
(LSB) and
tx_datainfull[32] -tx_dispval
(MSB)
For PCIe:
tx_datainfull[10]
-
tx_forceelecidle
and
tx_datainfull[32] - tx_forceelecidle
20-bit FPGA fabric-transceiver
Channel Interface with PCS-PMA set
to 20 bits
Two 10-bit Data (
tx_datain
)
tx_datainfull[9:0]
-
tx_datain
(LSByte) and
tx_datainfull[20:11]
-
tx_datain
(MSByte)
20-bit FPGA fabric-transceiver
Channel Interface with PCS-PMA set
to 10 bits
Two 10-bit Data (
tx_datain
)
tx_datainfull[9:0]
-
tx_datain
(LSByte) and
tx_datainfull[31:22]
-
tx_datain
(MSByte)
Table 5–9. tx_datainfull[43:0] FPGA Fabric-Transceiver Channel Interface Signal Descriptions (Part 2 of 3) (1)
FPGA Fabric-Transceiver Channel
Interface Description
Transmit Signal Description (Based on Stratix IV GX Supported FPGA
Fabric-Transceiver Channel Interface Widths)
5–40 Chapter 5: Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices
Dynamic Reconfiguration Modes Implementation
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
32-bit FPGA fabric-transceiver
Channel Interface with PCS-PMA set
to 16/20 bits
Four 8-bit Data (
tx_datain
)
tx_datainfull[7:0]
-
tx_datain
(LSByte) and
tx_datainfull[18:11]
tx_datainfull[29:22]
tx_datainfull[40:33]
-
tx_datain
(MSByte)
The following signals are used only in 8B/10B modes:
Four Control Bits (
tx_ctrlenable
)
tx_datainfull[8]
-
tx_ctrlenable
(LSB) and
tx_datainfull[19]
tx_datainfull[30]
tx_datainfull[41]
-
tx_ctrlenable
(MSB)
Force Disparity Enable (
tx_forcedisp
)
tx_datainfull
[9]-
tx_forcedisp
(LSB) and
tx_datainfull[20]
tx_datainfull[31]
tx_datainfull[42]
-
tx_forcedisp
(MSB)
Force Disparity Value (
tx_dispval
)
tx_datainfull[10]
-
tx_dispval
(LSB) and
tx_datainfull[21]
tx_datainfull[32]
tx_datainfull[43]
-
tx_dispval
(MSB)
40-bit FPGA fabric-transceiver
Channel Interface with PCS-PMA set
to 20 bits
Four 10-bit Data (
tx_datain
)
tx_datainfull[9:0]
-
tx_datain
(LSByte) and
tx_datainfull[20:11]
tx_datainfull[31:22]
tx_datainfull[42:33]
-
tx_datain
(MSByte)
Note to Table 5–9:
(1) For all transceiver-related ports, refer to the “Transceiver Port Lists” section in the Transceiver Architecture for Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Table 5–9. tx_datainfull[43:0] FPGA Fabric-Transceiver Channel Interface Signal Descriptions (Part 3 of 3) (1)
FPGA Fabric-Transceiver Channel
Interface Description
Transmit Signal Description (Based on Stratix IV GX Supported FPGA
Fabric-Transceiver Channel Interface Widths)
Chapter 5: Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices 5–41
Dynamic Reconfiguration Modes Implementation
January 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Table 5–10 lists the
tx_dataoutfull[63:0]
FPGA fabric-transceiver channel interface
signals.
Table 5–10. rx_dataoutfull[63:0] FPGA Fabric-Transceiver Channel Interface Signal Descriptions (Part 1 of 6)
FPGA Fabric-Transceiver
Channel Interface Description
Receive Signal Description (Based on Stratix IV GX Supported FPGA
Fabric-Transceiver Channel Interface Widths)
8-bit FPGA fabric-transceiver
Channel Interface
The following signals are used in 8-bit 8B/10B modes:
rx_dataoutfull[7:0]
: 8-bit decoded data (
rx_dataout
)
rx_dataoutfull[8]
: Control bit (
rx_ctrldetect
)
rx_dataoutfull[9]
: Code violation status signal (
rx_errdetect
)
rx_dataoutfull
[10]:
rx_syncstatus
rx_dataoutfull[11]
: Disparity error status signal (
rx_disperr
)
rx_dataoutfull[12]
: Pattern detect status signal (
rx_patterndetect
)
rx_dataoutfull[13]
: Rate Match FIFO deletion status indicator
(
rx_rmfifodatadeleted
) in non-PCIe/PCIe modes.
rx_dataoutfull[14]
: Rate Match FIFO insertion status indicator
(
rx_rmfifodatainserted
) in non-PCIe/PCIe modes.
rx_dataoutfull[14:13]
: non-PCIe/PCIe mode (
rx_pipestatus
)
rx_dataoutfull[15]
: 8B/10B running disparity indicator (
rx_runningdisp
)
The following signals are used in 8-bit SONET/SDH mode:
rx_dataoutfull[7:0]
: 8-bit un-encoded data (
rx_dataout
)
rx_dataoutfull[8]
:
rx_a1a2sizeout
rx_dataoutfull[10]
:
rx_syncstatus
rx_dataoutfull[11]
: Reserved
rx_dataoutfull[12]
:
rx_patterndetect
10-bit FPGA fabric-transceiver
Channel Interface
rx_dataoutfull[9:0]
: 10-bit un-encoded data (
rx_dataout
)
rx_dataoutfull[10]
:
rx_syncstatus
rx_dataoutfull[11]
: 8B/10B disparity error indicator (
rx_disperr
)
rx_dataoutfull[12]
:
rx_patterndetect
rx_dataoutfull[13]
: Rate Match FIFO deletion status indicator
(
rx_rmfifodatadeleted
) in non-PCIe/PCIe modes
rx_dataoutfull[14]
: Rate Match FIFO insertion status indicator
(rx_rmfifodatainserted) in non-PCIe/PCIe modes
rx_dataoutfull[15]
: 8B/10B running disparity indicator (
rx_runningdisp
)
5–42 Chapter 5: Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices
Dynamic Reconfiguration Modes Implementation
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
16-bit FPGA fabric-transceiver
Channel Interface with PCS-PMA
set to 16/20 bits
Two 8-bit unencoded Data (
rx_dataout
)
rx_dataoutfull[7:0]
-
rx_dataout
(LSByte) and
rx_dataoutfull[23:16]
-
rx_dataout
(MSByte)
The following signals are used in 16-bit 8B/10B modes:
Two Control Bits
rx_dataoutfull[8]
-
rx_ctrldetect
(LSB) and
rx_dataoutfull[24]
-
rx_ctrldetect
(MSB)
Two Receiver Error Detect Bits
rx_dataoutfull[9]
-
rx_errdetect
(LSB) and
rx_dataoutfull[25]
-
rx_errdetect
(MSB)
Two Receiver Sync Status Bits
rx_dataoutfull [10]
-
rx_syncstatus
(LSB) and
rx_dataoutfull[26]
-
rx_syncstatus
(MSB)
Two Receiver Disparity Error Bits
rx_dataoutfull [11]
-
rx_disperr
(LSB) and
rx_dataoutfull[27]
-
rx_disperr
(MSB)
Two Receiver Pattern Detect Bits
rx_dataoutfull[12]
-
rx_patterndetect
(LSB) and
rx_dataoutfull[28]
-
rx_patterndetect
(MSB)
rx_dataoutfull[13]
and
rx_dataoutfull
[45]: Rate Match FIFO deletion status
indicator (
rx_rmfifodatadeleted
) in non-PCIe/PCIe modes
rx_dataoutfull[14]
and
rx_dataoutfull
[46]: Rate Match FIFO insertion status
indicator (
rx_rmfifodatainserted
) in non-PCIe/PCIe modes
Two 2-bit PCIe Status Bits
rx_dataoutfull[14:13]
-
rx_pipestatus
(LSB) and
rx_dataoutfull[30:29]
-
rx_pipestatus
(MSB)
rx_dataoutfull[15]
and
rx_dataoutfull[47]
: 8B/10B running disparity
indicator (
rx_runningdisp
)
Table 5–10. rx_dataoutfull[63:0] FPGA Fabric-Transceiver Channel Interface Signal Descriptions (Part 2 of 6)
FPGA Fabric-Transceiver
Channel Interface Description
Receive Signal Description (Based on Stratix IV GX Supported FPGA
Fabric-Transceiver Channel Interface Widths)
Chapter 5: Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices 5–43
Dynamic Reconfiguration Modes Implementation
January 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
16-bit FPGA fabric-transceiver
Channel Interface with PCS-PMA
set to 8/10 bits
Two 8-bit Data
rx_dataoutfull[7:0]
-
rx_dataout
(LSByte) and
rx_dataoutfull[39:32]
-
rx_dataout
(MSByte)
The following signals are used in 16-bit 8B/10B mode:
Two Control Bits
rx_dataoutfull[8]
-
rx_ctrldetect
(LSB) and
rx_dataoutfull[40]
-
rx_ctrldetect
(MSB)
Two Receiver Error Detect Bits
rx_dataoutfull[9]
-
rx_errdetect
(LSB) and
rx_dataoutfull[41]
-
rx_errdetect
(MSB)
Two Receiver Sync Status Bits
rx_dataoutfull[10]
-
rx_syncstatus
(LSB) and
rx_dataoutfull[42]
-
rx_syncstatus
(MSB)
Two Receiver Disparity Error Bits
rx_dataoutfull[11]
-
rx_disperr
(LSB) and
rx_dataoutfull[43]
-
rx_disperr
(MSB)
Two Receiver Pattern Detect Bits
rx_dataoutfull[12]
-
rx_patterndetect
(LSB) and
rx_dataoutfull[44]
-
rx_patterndetect
(MSB)
rx_dataoutfull[13]
and
rx_dataoutfull[45]
: Rate Match FIFO deletion status
indicator (
rx_rmfifodatadeleted
) in non-PCIe/PCIe modes
rx_dataoutfull[14]
and
rx_dataoutfull[46]
: Rate Match FIFO insertion status
indicator (
rx_rmfifodatainserted
) in non-PCIe/PCIe modes
Two 2-bit PCIe Status Bits
rx_dataoutfull[14:13]
-
rx_pipestatus
(LSB) and
rx_dataoutfull[46:45]
-
rx_pipestatus
(MSB)
rx_dataoutfull
[15] and
rx_dataoutfull[47]
: 8B/10B running disparity indicator
(
rx_runningdisp
)
16-bit FPGA fabric-transceiver
Channel Interface with PCS-PMA
set to 8/10 bits (continued)
The following signals are used in 16-bit SONET/SDH mode:
Two 8-bit Data
rx_dataoutfull[7:0]
-
rx_dataout
(LSByte) and
rx_dataoutfull[39:32]
-
rx_dataout
(MSByte)
Two Receiver Alignment Pattern Length Bits
rx_dataoutfull[8]
-
rx_a1a2sizeout
(LSB) and
rx_dataoutfull[40]
-
rx_a1a2sizeout
(MSB)
Two Receiver Sync Status Bits
rx_dataoutfull[10]
-
rx_syncstatus
(LSB) and
rx_dataoutfull[42]
-
rx_syncstatus
(MSB)
Two Receiver Pattern Detect Bits
rx_dataoutfull[12]
-
rx_patterndetect
(LSB) and
rx_dataoutfull[44]
-
rx_patterndetect
(MSB)
Table 5–10. rx_dataoutfull[63:0] FPGA Fabric-Transceiver Channel Interface Signal Descriptions (Part 3 of 6)
FPGA Fabric-Transceiver
Channel Interface Description
Receive Signal Description (Based on Stratix IV GX Supported FPGA
Fabric-Transceiver Channel Interface Widths)
5–44 Chapter 5: Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices
Dynamic Reconfiguration Modes Implementation
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
20-bit FPGA fabric-transceiver
Channel Interface with PCS-PMA
set to 20 bits
Two 10-bit Data (
rx_dataout
)
rx_dataoutfull[9:0]
-
rx_dataout
(LSByte) and
rx_dataoutfull[25:16]
-
rx_dataout
(MSByte)
wo Receiver Sync Status Bits
rx_dataoutfull[10]
-
rx_syncstatus
(LSB) and
rx_dataoutfull[26]
-
rx_syncstatus
(MSB)
rx_dataoutfull[11]
and
rx_dataoutfull
[27]: 8B/10B disparity error indicator
(
rx_disperr
)
Two Receiver Pattern Detect Bits
rx_dataoutfull[12]
-
rx_patterndetect
(LSB) and
rx_dataoutfull[28]
-
rx_patterndetect
(MSB)
rx_dataoutfull[13]
and
rx_dataoutfull[29]
: Rate Match FIFO deletion status
indicator (
rx_rmfifodatadeleted
) in non-PCIe/PCIe modes
rx_dataoutfull[14]
and
rx_dataoutfull[30]
: Rate Match FIFO insertion status
indicator (
rx_rmfifodatainserted
) in non-PCIe/PCIe modes
rx_dataoutfull[15]
and
rx_dataoutfull[31]
: 8B/10B running disparity
indicator (
rx_runningdisp
)
20-bit FPGA fabric-transceiver
Channel Interface with PCS-PMA
set to 10 bits
Two 10-bit Data
rx_dataoutfull[9:0]
-
rx_dataout
(LSByte) and
rx_dataoutfull[41:32]
-
rx_dataout
(MSByte)
Two Receiver Sync Status Bits
rx_dataoutfull[10]
-
rx_syncstatus
(LSB) and
rx_dataoutfull[42]
-
rx_syncstatus
(MSB)
rx_dataoutfull[11]
and
rx_dataoutfull[43]
: 8B/10B disparity error indicator
(
rx_disperr
)
Two Receiver Pattern Detect Bits
rx_dataoutfull[12]
-
rx_patterndetect
(LSB) and
rx_dataoutfull[44]
-
rx_patterndetect
(MSB)
rx_dataoutfull[13]
and
rx_dataoutfull[45]
: Rate Match FIFO deletion status
indicator (
rx_rmfifodatadeleted
) in non-PCIe/PCIe modes
rx_dataoutfull[14]
and
rx_dataoutfull[46]
: Rate Match FIFO insertion status
indicator (
rx_rmfifodatainserted
) in non-PCIe/PCIe modes
rx_dataoutfull[15]
and
rx_dataoutfull[47]
: 8B/10B running disparity
indicator (
rx_runningdisp
)
Table 5–10. rx_dataoutfull[63:0] FPGA Fabric-Transceiver Channel Interface Signal Descriptions (Part 4 of 6)
FPGA Fabric-Transceiver
Channel Interface Description
Receive Signal Description (Based on Stratix IV GX Supported FPGA
Fabric-Transceiver Channel Interface Widths)
Chapter 5: Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices 5–45
Dynamic Reconfiguration Modes Implementation
January 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
32-bit mode
Four 8-bit un-encoded Data (
rx_dataout
)
rx_dataoutfull[7:0]
-
rx_dataout
(LSByte)
rx_dataoutfull[23:16]
rx_dataoutfull[39:32]
rx_dataoutfull[55:48]
-
rx_dataout
(MSByte)
The following signals are used in 32-bit 8B/10B mode:
Four Control Data Bits (
rx_dataout
)
rx_dataoutfull[8]
-
rx_ctrldetect
(LSB)
rx_dataoutfull[24]
rx_dataoutfull[40]
rx_dataoutfull[56]
-
rx_ctrldetect
(MSB)
Four Receiver Error Detect Bits
rx_dataoutfull[9]
-
rx_errdetect
(LSB)
rx_dataoutfull[25]
rx_dataoutfull[41]
rx_dataoutfull[57]
-
rx_errdetect
(MSB)
Four Receiver Pattern Detect Bits
rx_dataoutfull
[10]-
rx_syncstatus
(LSB) and
rx_dataoutfull[26]
rx_dataoutfull[42]
rx_dataoutfull[58]
-
rx_syncstatus
(MSB)
Four Receiver Disparity Error Bits
rx_dataoutfull[11]
-
rx_disperr
(LSB)
rx_dataoutfull[27]
rx_dataoutfull[43]
rx_dataoutfull[59]
-
rx_disperr
(MSB)
Four Receiver Pattern Detect Bits
rx_dataoutfull[12]
-
rx_patterndetect
(LSB)
rx_dataoutfull[28]
rx_dataoutfull[44]
rx_dataoutfull[60]
-
rx_patterndetect
(MSB)
rx_dataoutfull[13]
,
rx_dataoutfull[29]
,
rx_dataoutfull[45]
and
rx_dataoutfull[61]
: Rate Match FIFO deletion status indicator
(
rx_rmfifodatadeleted
) in non-PCIe/PCIe modes
rx_dataoutfull[14]
,
rx_dataoutfull[30]
,
rx_dataoutfull[46]
, and
rx_dataoutfull[62]
: Rate Match FIFO insertion status indicator
(
rx_rmfifodatainserted
) in non-PCIe/PCIe modes
Table 5–10. rx_dataoutfull[63:0] FPGA Fabric-Transceiver Channel Interface Signal Descriptions (Part 5 of 6)
FPGA Fabric-Transceiver
Channel Interface Description
Receive Signal Description (Based on Stratix IV GX Supported FPGA
Fabric-Transceiver Channel Interface Widths)
5–46 Chapter 5: Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices
Dynamic Reconfiguration Modes Implementation
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
32-bit mode (continued)
rx_dataoutfull[15]
,
rx_dataoutfull[31]
,
rx_dataoutfull[47]
, and
rx_dataoutfull[63]
: 8B/10B running disparity indicator (
rx_runningdisp
)
The following signals are used in 32-bit SONET/SDH scrambled backplane mode:
Four Control Data Bits (
rx_dataout
)
rx_dataoutfull[7:0]
-
rx_dataout
(LSByte)
rx_dataoutfull[23:16]
rx_dataoutfull[39:32]
rx_dataoutfull[55:48]
-
rx_dataout
(MSByte)
rx_dataoutfull[8]
,
rx_dataoutfull[24]
,
rx_dataoutfull[40]
, and
rx_dataoutfull[56]
: four
rx_a1a2sizeout
Four Receiver Sync Status Bits
rx_dataoutfull[10]
-
rx_syncstatus
(LSB)
rx_dataoutfull[26]
rx_dataoutfull[42]
rx_dataoutfull[58]
-
rx_syncstatus
(MSB)
Four Receiver Pattern Detect Bits
rx_dataoutfull[12]
-
rx_patterndetect
(LSB)
rx_dataoutfull[28]
rx_dataoutfull[44]
rx_dataoutfull[60]
-
rx_patterndetect
(MSB)
40-bit mode
Four 10-bit Control Data Bits (
rx_dataout
)
rx_dataoutfull[9:0]
-
rx_dataout
(LSByte)
r
x_dataoutfull[25:16]
rx_dataoutfull[41:32]
rx_dataoutfull[57:48]
-
rx_dataout
(MSByte)
Four Receiver Sync Status Bits
rx_dataoutfull[10]
-
rx_syncstatus
(LSB)
rx_dataoutfull[26]
rx_dataoutfull[42]
rx_dataoutfull[58]
-
rx_syncstatus
(MSB)
Four Receiver Pattern Detect Bits
rx_dataoutfull[12]
-
rx_patterndetect
(LSB)
rx_dataoutfull[28]
rx_dataoutfull[44]
rx_dataoutfull[60]
-
rx_patterndetect
(MSB)
Table 5–10. rx_dataoutfull[63:0] FPGA Fabric-Transceiver Channel Interface Signal Descriptions (Part 6 of 6)
FPGA Fabric-Transceiver
Channel Interface Description
Receive Signal Description (Based on Stratix IV GX Supported FPGA
Fabric-Transceiver Channel Interface Widths)
Chapter 5: Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices 5–47
Dynamic Reconfiguration Modes Implementation
January 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
ALTGX_RECONFIG MegaWizard Plug-In Manager Setup for Channel and CMU PLL
Reconfiguration Mode
To setup channel and CMU PLL reconfiguration mode in the ALTGX_RECONFIG
MegaWizard Plug-In Manager, follow these steps:
1. In the Reconfiguration settings screen, set the What is the number of channels
controlled by the reconfig controller? option. For more information, refer to
“Total Number of Channels Option in the ALTGX_RECONFIG Instance” on
page 5–10.
2. In the Reconfiguration settings screen, select the Channel and TX PLL
select/reconfig option.
The following control signals are always available when you enable the Channel and
TX PLL select/reconfig option:
■
channel_reconfig_done
■
reconfig_address_out[5:0]
The following ports are optional and available for selection in the Channel and TX
PLL Reconfiguration screen:
■
reset_reconfig_address
■
reconfig_address_en
■
logical_tx_pll_sel
and
logical_tx_pll_sel_en
—For more information about
these two ports, refer to “Guidelines for logical_tx_pll_sel and
logical_tx_pll_sel_en Ports” on page 5–59.
■
rx_tx_duplex_sel[1:0]
Channel and CMU PLL Reconfiguration Operation
In channel reconfiguration, only a write transaction can occur; no read transactions
are allowed. In the example shown in Figure 5–22, the ALTGX_RECONFIG controls
two channels. Therefore, the
logical_channel_address
signal is 2 bits wide. Also, the
transceiver channel is configured in Basic mode with the Receiver and Transmitter
configuration.
You can optionally choose to trigger
write_all
once by selecting the continuous write
operation in the ALTGX_RECONFIG MegaWizard Plug-In Manager. The Quartus II
software then continuously writes all the words required for reconfiguration.
5–48 Chapter 5: Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices
Dynamic Reconfiguration Modes Implementation
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Figure 5–22 shows a .mif write transaction when using channel and CMU PLL
reconfiguration mode.
For guidelines regarding re-using .mifs, specifying input reference clocks, or using
logical_tx_pll_sel
ports, refer to “Special Guidelines” on page 5–57.
fFor more information about reset, refer to the “Reset Sequence when Using Dynamic
Reconfiguration with the Channel and TX PLL select/reconfig Option” section in the
Reset Control and Power Down in Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Channel Reconfiguration with Transmitter PLL Select Mode Details
You can reconfigure the data rate of a transceiver channel by switching between a
maximum of four transmitter PLLs.
You can select between the following transmitter PLLs:
■CMU PLLs present in a transceiver block
■CMU PLLs present in other transceiver blocks
■ATX PLLs outside the transceiver block
Figure 5–22. .mif Write Transaction in Channel and CMU PLL Reconfiguration Mode
Notes to Figure 5–22:
(1) The
logical_channel_address
port is set to 2’b01 to reconfigure the second transceiver channel.
(2) The
rx_tx_duplex_sel[1:0]
port is set to 2’b00 to match the Receiver and Transmitter configuration of the specified transceiver channel.
Addr0 Addr1
1st 16 bits Don’t care
Addr0
Addr54
Don’t care
3’b101
2’b00
2’b01
reconfig_mode_sel[2:0]
logical_channel_address[1:0]
rx_tx_duplex_sel[1:0]
reconfig_clk
write_all
busy
reconfig_address_out[5:0]
reconfig_address_en
reconfig_data[15:0]
channel_reconfig_done
2nd 16 bits 55th 16 bits
Chapter 5: Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices 5–49
Dynamic Reconfiguration Modes Implementation
January 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
You can use the channel reconfiguration with transmitter PLL select mode along with
the CMU PLL reconfiguration mode only if it is a CMU PLL and not an ATX PLL. You
can first reconfigure the second CMU PLL to the desired data rate using CMU PLL
reconfiguration mode. Then use channel reconfiguration with transmitter PLL select
mode to reconfigure the transceiver channel to listen to the second CMU PLL.
For more information about supported configurations, refer to “Transceiver Channel
Reconfiguration Mode Details” on page 5–19 and “Memory Initialization File (.mif)”
on page 5–20.
1Channel reconfiguration with transmitter PLL select mode is not applicable to regular
transceiver channels in ×4 and ×8 bonded mode configurations.
For guidelines regarding re-using .mifs, specifying input reference clocks, or using
the
logical_tx_pll_sel
ports, refer to “Special Guidelines” on page 5–57.
fFor more information about reset, refer to the “Reset Sequence when Using Dynamic
Reconfiguration with the Channel and TX PLL select/reconfig Option” section in the
Reset Control and Power Down in Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Blocks Reconfigured in the Channel Reconfiguration with Transmitter PLL Select Mode
The blocks reconfigured in this mode have two types of multiplexers. When you
switch between the CMU PLLs within the same transceiver block, the multiplexer that
is reconfigured is within the transceiver block. It is located in the transmitter channel
path.
5–50 Chapter 5: Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices
Dynamic Reconfiguration Modes Implementation
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Figure 5–23 shows the multiplexers that you can dynamically reconfigure using
channel reconfiguration with transmitter PLL select mode.
Figure 5–23. Channel Reconfiguration with Transmitter PLL Select in a Transceiver Block
Note to Figure 5–23:
(1) Depending on the mode you select, PCS may or may not be present.
Full Duplex Transceiver Channel
TX CHANNEL
RX CHANNEL
CMU Channels
refclk0
refclk1
CMU0 PLL
CMU1 PLL
Logical
TX PLL
select
clock
mux
LOCAL
DIVIDER
RX CDR
TX PMA + TX PCS
clock
mux
clock
mux
clock
mux
RX PMA + RX PCS
(1)
Chapter 5: Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices 5–51
Dynamic Reconfiguration Modes Implementation
January 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Figure 5–24 shows the multiplexers that are reconfigured when you switch to an
additional PLL that is outside the transceiver block.
Figure 5–24. Multiplexers that are Reconfigured When you Switch to an Additional PLL
Channel 3
Channel 2
CMU1 Channel
CMU0 Channel
Channel 1
Channel 0
ATX R0 PLL Block
Channel 3
Channel 2
CMU1 Channel
CMU0 Channel
Channel 1
Channel 0
ATX R1 PLL Block
Channel 3
Channel 2
CMU1 Channel
CMU0 Channel
Channel 1
Channel 0
Transceiver Block GXBR0
Transceiver Block GXBR1
Transceiver Block GXBR2
xN_Top
x1
CMU0 GXBR0
x1
CMU1 GXBR0 x4_GXBR0
x1
CMU0 GXBR1
x1
CMU1 GXBR1 x4_GXBR1
x1
CMU0 GXBR2
x1
CMU1 GXBR2 x4_GXBR2 xN_Bottom
5–52 Chapter 5: Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices
Dynamic Reconfiguration Modes Implementation
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager Setup for Channel Reconfiguration with Transmitter PLL
Select Mode
Follow steps 1, 2, 4, 7, 8, and 9 described in “ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager
Setup for Channel and CMU PLL Reconfiguration Mode” on page 5–26. In addition to
these steps, you must also set up the following:
Multi-PLL Settings
The Use additional CMU/ATX Transmitter PLLs from outside the transceiver block
option allows you select a maximum of four transmitter PLLs.
Specify the number of additional PLLs required for the ALTGX instance in the Modes
screen. Based on this number, the Quartus II software opens up the corresponding
PLL screens (for example, PLL 1 and PLL 2).
The PLL set up in the General screen is always the Main PLL and the settings are
available in the Main PLL screen. Similarly, the PLL settings for the additional PLLs
are available in the corresponding PLL1 screen, PLL 2 screen, and so on.
Additional PLLs also include the CMU PLLs within the same transceiver block.
For example, you can select the ATX PLL as the main PLL, and three additional PLLs
as follows:
■PLL 1—
CMU0
PLL of the same transceiver block
■PLL 2—
CMU1
PLL of the same transceiver block
■PLL 3—
CMU0
PLL/
CMU1
PLL of another transceiver block.
The Quartus II software differentiates between the CMU PLLs of the same transceiver
block and the transmitter PLLs outside the transceiver block based on the Use central
clock divider to drive the transmitter channels using ×4/×N lines option.
If you enable this option, the transmitter PLL is outside the transceiver block.
Similarly, if you disable option, the transmitter PLL is one of the CMU PLLs within
the same transceiver block.
Logical Channel Addressing When Using Additional PLLs
The logical channel addressing of the transceiver channel is the same as described in
“Logical Channel Addressing” on page 5–5 so long as you are ONLY using the
CMU PLLs within the same transceiver block.
In the case of additional PLLs (when transmitter PLLs are outside the transceiver
block), the additional PLLs also have their own logical channel address. This affects
the starting channel number of the following ALTGX instances connected to the
dynamic reconfiguration controller, if any. Therefore, you must take into account the
logical channel address of transmitter PLLs outside the transceiver block when setting
the Total number of channels controlled by the reconfig controller option in the
ALTGX_RECONFIG instance.
When you select the Use central clock divider to drive the transmitter channels
using ×4/×N lines option for an additional PLL, you can see its logical channel
address value at the bottom of the corresponding PLL screen.
Chapter 5: Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices 5–53
Dynamic Reconfiguration Modes Implementation
January 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Selecting the PLL Logical Reference Index for Additional PLLs
The PLL logical reference index of additional PLLs outside the transceiver block can
only be 2 or 3.
■When you enable the Use central clock divider to drive the transmitter channels
using ×4/×N lines option for an additional PLL, you can only select between 2 or 3
as the PLL logical reference index.
■When you disable the Use central clock divider to drive the transmitter channels
using ×4/×N lines option for an additional PLL, the additional PLL is one of the
CMU PLLs within the same transceiver block. Therefore, the PLL logical reference
index is either 0 or 1.
For more information about the PLL logical reference index of CMU PLLs within the
same transceiver block, refer to “Selecting the Logical Reference Index of the CMU
PLL” on page 5–29.
ALTGX_RECONFIG MegaWizard Plug-In Manager Setup for Channel Reconfiguration with
Transmitter PLL Select Mode
For more information, refer to the “ALTGX_RECONFIG MegaWizard Plug-In
Manager Setup for Channel and CMU PLL Reconfiguration Mode” on page 5–47.
Channel Reconfiguration with Transmitter PLL Select Operation
Read transactions are not allowed in this mode.
Figure 5–25 shows a .mif write transaction when dynamically reconfiguring a
transceiver channel. The .mif write transaction in channel reconfiguration with
transmitter PLL select mode remains the same except for the
reconfig_mode_sel[2:0]
value and the difference in the number of .mif words used.
In this example, the transceiver channel is configured in Receiver and Transmitter
configuration. Therefore, the .mif size is 8.
You can optionally choose to trigger
write_all
once by selecting the continuous write
operation in the ALTGX_RECONFIG MegaWizard Plug-In Manager. The Quartus II
software then continuously writes all the words required for reconfiguration.
5–54 Chapter 5: Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices
Dynamic Reconfiguration Modes Implementation
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
For guidelines regarding re-using .mifs, specifying input reference clocks, or using
logical_tx_pll_sel
ports, refer to “Special Guidelines” on page 5–57.
fFor more information about reset, refer to the “Reset Sequence when Using Dynamic
Reconfiguration with the Channel and TX PLL select/reconfig Option” section in the
Reset Control and Power Down in Stratix IV Devices chapter.
CMU PLL Reconfiguration Mode Details
Use this mode to reconfigure only the CMU PLL without affecting the remaining
blocks of the transceiver channel. When you reconfigure the CMU PLL of a
transceiver block to run at a different data rate, all the transceiver channels listening to
this CMU PLL also are reconfigured to the new data rate.
You must set location assignments using a central clock divider at location CMU0 PLL
to place the CMU PLL that drives a transceiver channel if:
■The transceiver channel is in bonded mode configuration
■The Use central clock divider to drive the transmitter channels using X4/XN
lines option on the Main PLL page of the Reconfiguration Settings tab is on
1You cannot dynamically reconfigure a CMU PLL into a CMU channel and vice versa.
For more information about the supported configurations in CMU PLL
reconfiguration mode, refer to Table 5–5 on page 5–19.
Figure 5–25. .mif write transaction in Channel and CMU PLL Reconfiguration Mode
Addr0 Addr1
1st 16 bits Don’t care
Addr0
Addr54
Don’t care
3’b101
2’b00
2’b01
reconfig_mode_sel[2:0]
logical_channel_address[1:0]
rx_tx_duplex_sel[1:0]
reconfig_clk
write_all
busy
reconfig_address_out[5:0]
reconfig_address_en
reconfig_data[15:0]
channel_reconfig_done
2nd 16 bits 55th 16 bits
Chapter 5: Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices 5–55
Dynamic Reconfiguration Modes Implementation
January 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Transmitter PLL Powerdown
During CMU PLL reconfiguration mode, the dynamic reconfiguration controller
automatically powers down the selected CMU PLL until it completes reconfiguration.
The ALTGX_RECONFIG instance does not provide external ports to control the
CMU PLL power down. When you reconfigure the CMU PLL, the
pll_locked
signal
goes low. Therefore, after reconfiguring the transceiver, wait for the
pll_locked
signal
from the ALTGX instance before continuing normal operation.
The dynamic reconfiguration controller powers down only the selected CMU PLL.
The other CMU PLL is not affected.
Blocks Reconfigured in CMU PLL Reconfiguration Mode
Each transceiver block has two CMU PLLs—
CMU0
PLL and
CMU1
PLL.You can
reconfigure each of these CMU PLLs to a different data rate in this mode. Figure 5–26
shows a view of the reconfigurable blocks using CMU PLL reconfiguration mode.
ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager Setup for CMU PLL Reconfiguration Mode
If you want to reconfigure the CMU PLL to another data rate, enable .mif generation
and set up the ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager, as described in the following
steps. The dynamic reconfiguration controller reconfigures the CMU PLL with the
new information stored in the .mif.
1. Select the Channel and Transmitter PLL reconfiguration option in the Modes
screen.
2. Provide the new data rate you want the CMU PLL to run at in the General screen.
Figure 5–26. CMU PLLs in a Transceiver Block in CMU PLL Reconfiguration Mode
Note to Figure 5–26:
(1) Depending on the mode you select, PCS may or may not be present.
Full Duplex Transceiver Channel
RX CDR
TX CHANNEL
RX CHANNEL
CMU Channels
refclk0
refclk1
CMU0 PLL
CMU1 PLL
LOCAL
DIVIDER
TX PMA + TX PCS
Logical
TX PLL
select
clock
mux
clock
mux
clock
mux
RX PMA + RX PCS
(1)
5–56 Chapter 5: Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices
Dynamic Reconfiguration Modes Implementation
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
1The logical reference index of
CMU0
PLL within a transceiver block is always the
complement of the logical reference index of
CMU1
PLL.
ALTGX_RECONFIG Plug-In Manager Setup for CMU PLL Reconfiguration Mode
For more information, refer to “ALTGX_RECONFIG MegaWizard Plug-In Manager
Setup for Channel and CMU PLL Reconfiguration Mode” on page 5–47.
CMU PLL Reconfiguration Operation
Set the
reconfig_mode_sel[2:0]
signal to 3’ b100 to activate this mode.
Figure 5–27 shows a .mif write transaction in CMU PLL reconfiguration mode. The
dynamic reconfiguration controller asserts the
channel_reconfig_done
signal to
indicate that the CMU PLL reconfiguration is complete. In this example, the
transceiver channel is configured in Receiver and Transmitter configuration.
Therefore, the .mif size is 8.
You can optionally choose to trigger
write_all
once by selecting the continuous write
operation in the ALTGX_RECONFIG MegaWizard Plug-In Manager. The Quartus II
software then continuously writes all the words required for reconfiguration.
For guidelines regarding re-using .mifs, specifying input reference clocks, or using
logical_tx_pll_sel
ports, refer to “Special Guidelines” on page 5–57.
fFor more information about reset, refer to the “Reset Sequence when Using Dynamic
Reconfiguration with the Channel and TX PLL select/reconfig Option” section in the
Reset Control and Power Down in Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Figure 5–27. CMU PLL Reconfiguration .mif Write Transaction
Addr0 Addr1
Don’t care
Addr0
Addr7
8th 16 bits Don’t care
3’b100
reconfig_mode_sel[2:0]
reconfig_clk
write_all
busy
reconfig_address_out[5:0]
reconfig_address_en
reconfig_data[15:0]
channel_reconfig_done
2nd 16 bits
1st 16 bits
Chapter 5: Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices 5–57
Dynamic Reconfiguration Modes Implementation
January 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Central Control Unit Reconfiguration Mode Details
Central control unit reconfiguration mode is a .mif-based mode used to reconfigure
the central control unit (CCU) of the transceiver. Use
reconfig_mode_sel[]
to activate
this mode. Central control unit reconfiguration mode is applicable for bonded PCS
configurations such as Basic ×4 and ×8, XAUI, and PCIe ×4 and ×8. For the allowed
configurations, refer to Table 5–5 on page 5–19.
For instance, to dynamically reconfigure an ALTGX instance in Basic ×4 configuration
to a XAUI configuration, you must first configure:
1. The transceiver channel and CMU PLL to run at the XAUI data rate and functional
mode (use channel and CMU PLL reconfiguration mode).
2. Reconfigure the central control unit portion of the transceiver from Basic to XAUI
functional mode (use central control unit reconfiguration mode). For more
information about the central control unit reconfiguration mode, refer to “Example
2” on page 5–100.
1Dynamic reconfiguration is not available if hard IP is used in PCIe mode.
1To switch between one bonded PCS configuration and another, always use:
1) Channel and CMU PLL reconfiguration mode followed by
2) Central control unit reconfiguration mode
Use the same .mif for both the these steps. In step 1, a partial .mif is written and
the remaining contents of the .mif is written in step 2. In step 1, reconfigure all the
channels one-by-one. In step-2, reconfiguration of the central control unit is
transceiver-block based. Reconfigure any one of the four channels in the
transceiver block.
Special Guidelines
The following section describes the special guidelines required for the transceiver
channel reconfiguration modes previously described. This section includes the
following:
■“Guidelines for Re-Using .mifs” on page 5–57
■“Guidelines for logical_tx_pll_sel and logical_tx_pll_sel_en Ports” on page 5–59
■“Guidelines for Specifying the Input Reference Clocks” on page 5–61
Guidelines for Re-Using .mifs
To configure the transceiver PLLs and receiver CDRs for multiple data rates, it is
important to understand the input reference clock requirements. This helps you to
efficiently create the clocking scheme for reconfiguration and to reuse the .mifs across
all channels in the device. This section describes the clocking enhancements and the
implications of using input clocks from various clock sources.
The available clock inputs appear as a
pll_inclk_rx_cruclk[]
port and can be
provided from the inter-transceiver block lines (also known as ITB lines), from the
global clock networks that are driven by an input pin or by a PLL cascade clock.
5–58 Chapter 5: Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices
Dynamic Reconfiguration Modes Implementation
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
fFor more information about input reference clocking, refer to the “Input Reference
Clocking” section of the Transceiver Clocking in Stratix IV Devices chapter.
The following section describes the clocking requirements to re-use .mifs.
The .mif contains information about the input clock multiplexer settings and the
functional blocks that you selected during the ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager
instantiation. You can use a .mif to dynamically reconfigure any of the other
transceiver channels in the device as long as the order of the clock inputs is consistent.
For example, assume that a .mif is generated for a transceiver channel in transceiver
block 0 and the input clock source is connected to the
pll_inclk_rx_cruclk[0]
port.
When you use the generated .mif for a channel in other transceiver blocks (for
example, transceiver block 1), the same clock source must be connected to the
pll_inclk_rx_cruclk[0]
port. Figure 5–28 and Figure 5–29 show the incorrect and
correct order of input reference clocks, respectively.
In Figure 5–28, the clocking is incorrect when re-using the .mif because the input
reference clock is not connected to the corresponding
pll_inclk_rx_cruclk[]
ports in
the two instances.
Figure 5–28. Incorrect Input Reference Clock Connections When Reusing a .mif
Note to Figure 5–28:
(1) The red lines represent the alternate source of REFCLK.
ALTGX
Instance 1
Stratix IV GX Device
156.25 MHz
125 MHz
Transceiver Block 0
Transceiver Block 1
ALTGX
Instance 2
pll_inclk_rx_cruclk[0]
pll_inclk_rx_cruclk[1]
pll_inclk_rx_cruclk[0]
pll_inclk_rx_cruclk[1]
(1)
(1)
Chapter 5: Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices 5–59
Dynamic Reconfiguration Modes Implementation
January 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Figure 5–29 shows the correct input reference clock connections when re-using a .mif.
1You can re-use the .mif generated for a transceiver channel on one side of the device
for a transceiver channel on the other side of the device, only if the input reference
clock frequencies and order of the
pll_inclk_rx_cruclk[]
ports in the ALTGX
instances on both sides are identical.
In addition to the input reference clock requirements when re-using a .mif, refer to
“Guidelines for logical_tx_pll_sel and logical_tx_pll_sel_en Ports” on page 5–59 for
additional ways to re-use a .mif.
Guidelines for logical_tx_pll_sel and logical_tx_pll_sel_en Ports
This section describes when to enable the
logical_tx_pll_sel
and
logical_tx_pll_sel_en
ports and how to use them in the following dynamic
reconfiguration modes:
■Channel and CMU PLL reconfiguration mode
■Channel reconfiguration with transmitter PLL select mode
■CMU PLL reconfiguration mode
These are optional input ports to the ALTGX_RECONFIG instance.
Figure 5–29. Correct Input Reference Clock Connections When Reusing a .mif
Note to Figure 5–29:
(1) The red lines represent the alternate source of REFCLK.
Stratix IV GX Device
156.25 MHz
125 MHz
Transceiver Block 0
Transceiver Block 1
ALTGX
Instance 1
ALTGX
Instance 2
pll_inclk_rx_cruclk[0]
pll_inclk_rx_cruclk[1]
pll_inclk_rx_cruclk[1]
pll_inclk_rx_cruclk[0]
(1)
(1)
5–60 Chapter 5: Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices
Dynamic Reconfiguration Modes Implementation
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Table 5–11 shows the conditions under which the dynamic reconfiguration controller
uses either the
logical_tx_pll_sel
port value or the logical reference index value
stored in the .mif.
Figure 5–30 shows the
logical_tx_pll_sel
and
logical_tx_pll_sel_en
ports.
Table 5–11 lists how the dynamic reconfiguration controller selects between the logical
reference index stored in the .mif (logical tx pll) and the logical reference index
specified at the
logical_tx_pll_sel
port.
Altera recommends keeping track of the transmitter PLL that drives the channel when
you configure a transceiver channel in the ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager.
1The
logical_tx_pll_sel
port does not modify transceiver settings on the receiver
side.
If both the
logical_tx_pll_sel
and
logical_tx_pll_sel_en
ports are enabled,
reconfigure the transmitter PLL. Keep the
logical_tx_pll_sel
and
logical_tx_pll_sel_en
signals at a constant logic level until the dynamic
reconfiguration controller asserts the
channel_reconfig_done
signal.
Figure 5–30. Using logical_tx_pll_sel and logical_tx_pll_sel_en Ports
logical tx pll
(logical reference
index value stored
in the .mif)
logical_tx_pll_sel
(logical reference index
specified on the port)
logical_tx_pll_sel_en
ALTGX_RECONFIG
instance
selected
logical reference index
value
0
1
Table 5–11. Various Combinations of the logical_tx_pll_sel and logical_tx_pll_sel_en Ports
logical_tx_pll_sel logical_tx_pll_sel_en Logical Reference Index Value Selected by the
ALTGX_RECONFIG Instance
enabled enabled and value is 1 Value on the
logical_tx_pll_sel
port
enabled enabled and value is 0 logical reference index value stored in the .mif (logical tx pll)
enabled disabled Value on the
logical_tx_pll_sel
port
disabled disabled logical reference index value stored in the .mif (logical tx pll)
Chapter 5: Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices 5–61
Dynamic Reconfiguration Modes Implementation
January 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Table 5–12 lists the two conditions under which you can re-use .mifs when using the
logical_tx_pll_sel
and
logical_tx_pll_sel_en
ports.
Guidelines for Specifying the Input Reference Clocks
The following are guidelines for setting up the input reference clocks in the
Reconfiguration Settings screen of the ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager.
■Assign the identification numbers to all input reference clocks that are used by the
transmitter PLLs in their corresponding PLL screens. You can set up a maximum
of 10 input reference clocks and assign identification numbers from 1 to 10.
■Keep the identification numbers consistent for all the .mifs generated in the
design.
■Maintain the input reference clock frequencies settings for all the .mifs.
Table 5–12. Two Conditions Under Which You can Re-Use .mifs (logical_tx_pll_sel and logical_tx_pll_sel_en)
Condition 1: Re-use the .mif created for one CMU PLL on
the other CMU PLL of the same transceiver block.
Condition 2: Re-use the .mif created for one transmitter PLL on
the transmitter PLL of another transceiver block.
Channel and CMU PLL
Reconfiguration and CMU
PLL Reconfiguration
Channel Reconfiguration
with Transmitter PLL
Select
Channel and CMU PLL
Reconfiguration and CMU
PLL Reconfiguration
Channel Reconfiguration with
Transmitter PLL Select
Consider that you create a
.mif containing the desired
ALTGX settings to
reconfigure the
CMU0
PLL.
Assume that the logical
reference index you
assigned to
CMU0
PLL is 0.
■You can re-use this .mif
created for
CMU0
PLL on
CMU1
PLL of the same
transceiver block if you
want to reconfigure
CMU1
PLL to the new
data rate information
stored in the .mif.
■You must set
logical_tx_pll_
sel
to the logical
reference index of
CMU1
PLL (1'b1) and
l
ogical_tx_pll_
sel_en
to 1'b1 and then
write this .mif into the
transceiver channel. By
doing so, the dynamic
reconfiguration
controller overwrites the
logical tx pll value stored
in the .mif with the
logical reference index of
CMU1
PLL.
Assume that the transceiver
channel listens to
CMU1
PLL
and the logical reference
index assigned to it is 0.
■Generate a .mif for these
settings.
■When you use channel
reconfiguration with
transmitter PLL select
mode and reconfigure
the transceiver channel
with this .mif, the
transceiver channel is
reconfigured to listen to
CMU1
PLL.
■If you want to
reconfigure the
transceiver channel to
listen to
CMU0
PLL
instead, you can re-use
this .mif.
■You must set
logical_tx_pll_
sel
to the logical
reference index of
CMU0
PLL (1'b1) and
logical_tx_pll_
sel_en
to 1'b1 and then
write this .mif into the
transceiver channel.
Consider that you create a .mif
containing the desired ALTGX
settings to reconfigure the
transmitter PLL of a
transceiver block. Assume that
the logical reference of the
transmitter PLL is 1.
■You can re-use this .mif
created to reconfigure the
transmitter PLL of another
transceiver block under the
following condition:
■You want to reconfigure
the transmitter PLL of
the other transceiver
block to exactly the same
data rate information
stored in the .mif.
■You must set
logical_channel_
address
to the logical
channel address of the
transmitter PLL you intend
to reconfigure.
Consider that you create a .mif
containing the logical
reference index of the
transmitter PLL that the
reconfigured transceiver
channel needs to listen to.
■Assume that the transmitter
PLL used is
CMU0
PLL and
the logical reference index
assigned is 0.
■When you use channel
reconfiguration with
transmitter PLL select
mode and reconfigure the
transceiver channel with
this .mif, the transceiver
channel is reconfigured to
listen to
CMU0
PLL.
■If you want to reconfigure
this transceiver channel to
listen to another transmitter
PLL outside the transceiver
block, you can reuse this
.mif, provided the intended
data rate is the same.
5–62 Chapter 5: Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices
Dynamic Reconfiguration Modes Implementation
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Figure 5–31 shows an example scenario where the input reference clock connections
to the transceiver channels are based on what you set as the input clock source for
each of the CMU transmitter PLLs within a transceiver block.
Figure 5–31. Input Reference Clocks Connections to the Transceiver Channels
Note to Figure 5–31:
(1) Depending on the mode you select, the PCS unit may or may not be present.
Full Duplex Transceiver Channel 1
CMU0 PLL
RX CDR
CMU1 PLL
TX CHANNEL 1
Logical
TX PLL
select
RX CHANNEL 1
156 .25 MHz
125MHz
Refclk0
(Identification
number = 2)
Refclk1
(Identification
number = 1)
3.125 Gbps
3.125 Gbps 3.125 Gbps
LOCAL
DIVIDER
3.125 Gbps
1 Gbps
CMU Channels
clock
mux
Full Duplex Transceiver Channel 2
RX CDR
TX CHANNEL 2
Logical
TX PLL
select
RX CHANNEL 2
1 Gbps
1 Gbps 1 Gbps
LOCAL
DIVIDER
clock
mux
Based on what you have set up
as the input clock source for
CMU1 PLL, this clock mux
selects the corresponding input
clock source for CMU1 PLL.
Based on what you have set up
as the input clock source for
CMU0 PLL, this clock mux
selects the corresponding input
clock source for CMU0 PLL.
clock
mux
clock
mux
TX PMA + TX PCS
(1)
TX PMA + TX PCS
(1)
RX PMA + RX PCS
RX PMA + RX PCS
Chapter 5: Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices 5–63
Dynamic Reconfiguration Modes Implementation
January 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Data Rate Division in Transmitter Mode Details
You can use data rate division in transmitter mode to modify the data rate of the
transmitter channel in multiples of 1, 2, and 4. This dynamic reconfiguration mode is
available only for the transmit side and not for the receive side.
Blocks Reconfigured in the Data Rate Division in Transmitter Mode
The only block that is reconfigured by the data rate division in transmitter mode is the
transmitter local divider block of a transmitter channel. You can set the transmitter
local divider to a divide by value of /1, /2, or /4, as shown in Figure 5–32.
You must be aware of the device operating range before you enable and use this
feature. There are no legal checks that are imposed by the Quartus II software because
it is an on-the-fly control feature. You must ensure that a specific functional mode
supports the data rate range before dividing the clock when using this rate switch
option.
1Data rate division in transmitter mode is applicable only to channels configured in
non-bonded mode clocked by the CMU0/CMU1 located within the same transceiver
block.
ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager Setup for Data Rate Division in Transmitter Mode
Enable the following settings in the ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager:
1. Select the Channel and Transmitter PLL Reconfiguration option in the Reconfig
screen to enable the ALTGX_RECONFIG instance to modify the transmitter
channel local divider values dynamically.
2. Set the What is the starting channel number? option in the Reconfig screen. For
more information, refer to “Logical Channel Addressing” on page 5–5.
The alternate reference clock is not required because a single clock source is used. The
/1, /2, or /4 data rates can be derived from the single input reference clock.
Figure 5–32. Local Divider of a Transmitter Channel
High-Speed clock
from TX PLL0
High-Speed clock
from TX PLL1
/n
/1, /2, or /4
/4, /5, /8, or /10
High-Speed Serial Clock
Low-Speed Parallel Clock
5–64 Chapter 5: Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices
Dynamic Reconfiguration Modes Implementation
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
ALTGX_RECONFIG MegaWizard Plug-In Manager Setup for Data Rate Division in Transmitter
Mode
Enable the following settings in the ALTGX_RECONFIG MegaWizard Plug-In
Manager for data rate division in transmitter mode:
1. In the Reconfiguration settings screen, set the What is the number of channels
controlled by the reconfig controller? option. For more information, refer to
“Total Number of Channels Option in the ALTGX_RECONFIG Instance” on
page 5–10.
2. Specify the logical channel address of the transmitter channel at the
logical_channel_address
input port.
3. In the Reconfiguration settings screen, select the Data rate division in TX option.
The
rate_switch_ctrl[1:0]
input port is available when you enable the Data rate
division in TX option. The value you set at the
rate_switch_ctrl[1:0]
signal
determines the transmitter local divider settings, as explained in “Dynamic
Reconfiguration Controller Port List” on page 5–78.
To read the existing local divider settings of the transmitter channel, select the Use
'rate_switch_out' port to read out the current data rate division option in the Error
checks/Data rate switch screen.
Decoding for the
rate_switch_out[1:0]
output signal is the same as the
rate_switch_ctrl[1:0]
input signal.
1Dynamic rate switch has no effect on the dividers on the receive side of the transceiver
channel. It can be used only for the transmitter.
1Data rate division in transmitter mode does not require a .mif.
Data Rate Division in Transmitter Operation
The following sections describe the steps involved in write and read transactions for
the data rate division in transmitter mode.
Chapter 5: Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices 5–65
Dynamic Reconfiguration Modes Implementation
January 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
For this example, the value set in the What is the number of channels controlled by
the reconfig controller? option of the ALTGX_RECONFIG MegaWizard Plug-In
Manager is 4. Therefore, the
logical_channel_address
input is 2 bits wide. Also, you
must reconfigure the local divider settings of the transmitter channel whose logical
channel address is 2'b01. Figure 5–33 shows a write transaction in data rate division in
transmitter mode.
Figure 5–33. Write Transaction in Data Rate Division in Transmitter Mode
Note to Figure 5–33:
(1) For this example, you want to reconfigure the local divider settings of the transmitter channel to Divide by 4. Therefore, the value set at
rate_switch_ctrl[1:0
] is 2'b10.
busy
2'bXX 2'b01
2'bXX 2'b10 2'bXX
2'bXX
3'b011
3'bXXX
reconfig_mode_sel[2:0]
reconfig_clk
rate_switch_ctrl[1:0] (1)
logical_channel_address
write_all
5–66 Chapter 5: Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices
Dynamic Reconfiguration Modes Implementation
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
For this example, the value set in the What is the number of channels controlled by
the reconfig controller? option of the ALTGX_RECONFIG MegaWizard Plug-In
Manager is 4. Therefore, the
logical_channel_address
input is 2 bits wide. Also, you
must read the existing local divider settings of the transmitter channel whose logical
channel address is 2'b01. Figure 5–34 shows a read transaction waveform in data rate
division in transmitter mode.
1Do not perform a read transaction in date rate division in transmitter mode if
rate_switch_out[1:0]
is not selected in the ALTGX_RECONFIG MegaWizard
Plug-In Manager.
fFor more information about reset, refer to the “Reset Sequence when Using Dynamic
Reconfiguration with the Channel and TX PLL select/reconfig Option” section in the
Reset Control and Power Down in Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Figure 5–34. Read Transaction in Data Rate Division in Transmitter Mode
Note to Figure 5–34:
(1) For this example, the existing local divider settings of the transmitter channel are Divide by 2. Therefore, the value read out at
rate_switch_out[1:0]
is 2'b01.
read
busy
2'bXX 2'b01
2'bXX Invalid output 2'b01
2'bXX
3'b011
3'bXXX
reconfig_mode_sel[2:0]
reconfig_clk
logical_channel_address (1)
rate_switch_out[1:0]
data_valid
Chapter 5: Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices 5–67
Dynamic Reconfiguration Modes Implementation
January 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Offset Cancellation Feature
The Stratix IV GX and GT devices provide an offset cancellation circuit per receiver
channel to counter the offset variations due to process, voltage, and temperature
(PVT). These variations create an offset in the analog circuit voltages, pushing them
out of the expected range. In addition to reconfiguring the transceiver channel, the
dynamic reconfiguration controller performs offset cancellation on all receiver
channels connected to it on power up.
The Offset cancellation for Receiver channels option is automatically enabled in
both the ALTGX and ALTGX_RECONFIG MegaWizard Plug-In Managers for
Receiver and Transmitter and Receiver only configurations. It is not available for
Transmitter only configurations. For Receiver and Transmitter and Receiver only
configurations, you must connect the necessary interface signals between the
ALTGX_RECONFIG and ALTGX (with receiver channels) instances. For the
Transmitter only configuration, the ALTGX_RECONFIG must also be connected to
the ALTGX by either selecting a dynamic reconfiguration mode or instantiating a
dummy Receiver only ALTGX instance in each side of the device.
Offset cancellation is automatically executed once every time the device is powered
on. The control logic for offset cancellation is integrated into the dynamic
reconfiguration controller. You must connect the ALTGX_RECONFIG instance to the
ALTGX instances (with receiver channels) in your design. You must connect the
reconfig_fromgxb
,
reconfig_togxb
, and necessary clock signals to both the
ALTGX_RECONFIG and ALTGX (with receiver channels) instances.
1The offset cancellation control functionality remains the same for both regular
transceiver channels and PMA-only channels.
Operation
Every ALTGX instance for Receiver and Transmitter or Receiver only configurations
require that the Offset cancellation for Receiver channels option is enabled in the
Reconfig screen of the ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager. This option is enabled
by default for the above two configurations. It is disabled for the Transmitter only
configuration. However, for Transmitter only, the ALTGX instance still needs to be
connected to ALTGX_RECONFIG. For Transmitter only, the
reconfig_from_gxb
,
reconfig_to_gxb
,
busy
, and
reconfig_clk
signals can be enabled by selecting a
dynamic reconfiguration mode. The other method to connect the ALTGX_RECONFIG
for Transmitter only configuration is to instantiate a dummy Receiver only ALTGX
instance in each side of the device.
Because this option is enabled by default, the ALTGX instance must be connected to
an ALTGX_RECONFIG instance (dynamic reconfiguration controller). The offset
cancellation controls are also enabled by default in the Reconfiguration settings
screen of the ALTGX_RECONFIG instance.
You must also set the starting channel number in the What is the starting channel
number? option for every ALTGX instance connected to the ALTGX_RECONFIG
instance. For more information, refer to:
■“Logical Channel Addressing of Regular Transceiver Channels” on page 5–6
■“Logical Channel Addressing of PMA-Only Channels” on page 5–7
5–68 Chapter 5: Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices
Dynamic Reconfiguration Modes Implementation
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
■“Logical Channel Addressing—Combination of Regular Transceiver Channels and
PMA-Only Channels” on page 5–9
When the device powers up, the dynamic reconfiguration controller initiates offset
cancellation on the receiver channel by disconnecting the receiver input pins from the
receiver data path. It also sets the receiver CDR into a fixed set of dividers to
guarantee a voltage controlled oscillator (VCO) clock rate within the range necessary
to provide proper offset cancellation. Subsequently, the offset cancellation process
goes through different states and culminates in the offset cancellation of the receiver
buffer and receiver CDR. After offset cancellation is complete, the user divider
settings are restored.
The dynamic reconfiguration controller sends and receives data to the transceiver
channel through the
reconfig_togxb
and
reconfig_fromgxb
signals. You must
connect these signals between the ALTGX_RECONFIG instance and the ALTGX
instance. You must also set the What is the number of channels controlled by the
reconfig controller? option in the Reconfiguration settings screen of the
ALTGX_RECONFIG MegaWizard Plug-In Manager. For more information, refer to
“Total Number of Channels Option in the ALTGX_RECONFIG Instance” on
page 5–10.
The Use 'logical_channel_address' port for Analog controls reconfiguration option
in the Analog controls screen of the ALTGX_RECONFIG MegaWizard Plug-In
Manager is not applicable for the receiver offset cancellation process.
1If the design does not require PMA controls reconfiguration and uses optimum logic
element (LE) resources, you can connect all the ALTGX instances in the design to a
single dynamic reconfiguration controller (ALTGX_RECONFIG instance).
1The
gxb_powerdown
signal must not be asserted during the offset cancellation
sequence.
To understand the impact on system start-up when you control all the transceiver
channels using a single dynamic reconfiguration controller, refer to “PMA Controls
Reconfiguration Duration” on page 5–91.
ALTGX_RECONFIG Instance Signals Transition during Offset Cancellation
Consider that the design has ALTGX instances with channels of both Transmitter
only and Receiver only configurations. You must include the Transmitter only
channels while setting the What is the starting channel number? option in the
ALTGX instance and setting the What is the number of channels controlled by the
reconfig controller? option in the ALTGX_RECONFIG instance for receiver offset
cancellation.
■After the device powers up, the
busy
signal remains low for the first
reconfig_clk
clock cycle.
■The
busy
signal then gets asserted for the second
reconfig_clk
clock cycle when
the dynamic reconfiguration controller initiates the offset cancellation process.
■The de-assertion of the
busy
signal indicates the successful completion of the offset
cancellation process.
Chapter 5: Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices 5–69
Dynamic Reconfiguration Modes Implementation
January 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Figure 5–35 shows the dynamic reconfiguration signals transition during offset
cancellation on the receiver channels.
1Due to the offset cancellation process, the transceiver reset sequence has changed. For
more information, refer to the Reset Control and Power Down in Stratix IV Devices
chapter.
EyeQ
EyeQ hardware is available in Stratix IV transceivers to analyze and debug the
receiver data recovery path (receiver gain, clock jitter, and noise level). You can use it
to monitor the eye width and assess the quality of the incoming signal.
Normally, the receiver CDR samples the incoming signal at the center of the eye.
When you enable the EyeQ hardware, it allows the CDR to sample across 32 different
positions across one unit interval (UI) of the incoming data. You can manually control
the sampling points and check the bit-error rate (BER) at each of these 32 sampling
points. These sampling points are also known as phase steps.
The BER increases at the edge of the eye-opening. By observing the number of
sampling points results in a desired BER value, you can determine the eye width.
1The EyeQ hardware is available for both regular transceiver channels and CMU
channels.
fFor more information about the supported data rates, phase step translation, and
other specifications, refer to the DC and Switching Characterization for Stratix IV Devices
chapter.
Figure 5–35. Dynamic Reconfiguration Signals Transition during Offset Cancellation on Receiver Channels
Note to Figure 5–35:
(1) After device power up, the
busy
signal remains low for the first
reconfig_clk
cycle.
reconfig_clk
busy
(1)
5–70 Chapter 5: Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices
Dynamic Reconfiguration Modes Implementation
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Enabling the EyeQ Control Logic and the EyeQ Hardware
You must enable the EyeQ hardware in the ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager
and the EyeQ control block in the ALTGX_RECONIG MegaWizard Plug-In Manager.
■EyeQ hardware is available for each transceiver channel in the receiver data path.
Select the Analog Controls option in the Reconfiguration Settings screen of the
ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager to enable the EyeQ hardware.
■EyeQ control logic is available in the dynamic reconfiguration controller. Select the
EyeQ control option in the ALTGX_RECONFIG MegaWizard Plug-In Manager to
enable the EyeQ control logic.
fEyeQ uses an Avalon Memory Mapped interface. For more information about this
interface, refer to the Avalon Interface Specification.
Connections Between the ALTGX and ALTGX_RECONFIG Instances
To enable the EyeQ options, follow these steps:
1. Enable the EyeQ options in the ALTGX and ALTGX_RECONFIG MegaWizard
Plug-In Managers as explained in “Enabling the EyeQ Control Logic and the EyeQ
Hardware” on page 5–70.
2. Connect the
reconfig_{to/from}gxb
ports between the ALTGX and
ALTGX_RECONFIG instances.
EyeQ control logic in the dynamic reconfiguration controller allows you to write to
the registers in the EyeQ hardware. Therefore, you must have a state machine in the
user design that communicates to the EyeQ control block of the ALTGX_RECONFIG
instance. You can then access the internal registers of the EyeQ hardware indirectly
through the EyeQ control logic.
1Altera recommends having an input pattern generator and checker to monitor the
BER of the received data.
Chapter 5: Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices 5–71
Dynamic Reconfiguration Modes Implementation
January 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Figure 5–36 shows the connections between the EyeQ hardware in the ALTGX
instances and the EyeQ control logic in the dynamic reconfiguration controller.
Controlling the EyeQ Hardware
The EyeQ hardware is controlled by writing to the EyeQ registers using EyeQ
interface registers in the ALTGX_RECONFIG instance. Table 5–13 lists the register
memory of the 16-bit EyeQ registers.
Figure 5–36. Connecting ALTGX and ALTGX_RECONFIG Instances with EyeQ Enabled
busy
error
ctrl_writedata[15:0]
ctrl_address[15:0]
ctrl_write
ctrl_read
reconfig_fromgxb[17:0]
reconfig_togxb[3:0]
rx_datain[0]
ALTGX Instance
EyeQ Hardware
Receiver Channel 0
ALTGX_RECONFIG Instance
EyeQ Control
Block
ctrl_waitrequest
ctrl_readdata[15:0]
reconfig_mode_sel[3:0]
Table 5–13. EyeQ Register Address Mapping
Address Description
0×0
■Bit[0]—0/1: Disable/Enable EyeQ feature
■Bit [15:1]—15'b000000000000000
0×1
■Bits [5:0]—EyeQ phase step value. Refer to Table 5–14 for the EyeQ
phase step encoding.
■Bits [15:6]—10'b0000000000
5–72 Chapter 5: Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices
Dynamic Reconfiguration Modes Implementation
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Table 5–14 lists the EyeQ phase step encoding for the 32 phase steps spanning one
unit interval (UI).
Table 5–14. EyeQ Phase Step Encoding
Desired Phase Step
Setting EyeQ Phase Step Encoding
0 6'b111111
1 6'b111110
2 6'b111101
3 6'b111100
4 6'b111011
5 6'b111010
6 6'b111001
7 6'b111000
8 6'b110111
9 6'b110110
10 6'b110101
11 6'b110100
12 6'b110011
13 6'b110010
14 6'b110001
15 6'b110000
16 6'b010000
17 6'b010001
18 6'b010010
19 6'b010011
20 6'b010100
21 6'b010101
22 6'b010110
23 6'b010111
24 6'b011000
25 6'b011001
26 6'b011010
27 6'b011011
28 6'b011100
29 6'b011101
30 6'b011110
31 6'b011111
Chapter 5: Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices 5–73
Dynamic Reconfiguration Modes Implementation
January 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Table 5–15 lists the register memory of the 16-bit EyeQ interface registers.
To control the EyeQ hardware, follow these steps:
1. Read the EyeQ interface register 0×0 (the control and status register) to check the
busy status. The clear status bit indicates an idle status.
2. Issue a
write
to the EyeQ interface register 0×1 (the channel address register) to
select the desired channel.
3. Issue a
write
to the EyeQ interface register 0×2 (the eye monitor register address)
to select the desired EyeQ register.
4. Issue a
write
to the EyeQ interface register 0×3 (the data register) to provide the
data to be written to the target EyeQ register.
5. Issue a
write
to EyeQ interface register 0×0 (the control and status register) to
specify read/~write and to issue the start command.
Table 5–15. EyeQ Interface Register Mapping
Address Description
0×0
Control/Status register (EyeQ CSR)
■Bit [0]—Start: Writing a 1 to this bit instructs the ALTGX_RECONFIG instance to program the
EyeQ hardware. Writing to this bit automatically clears any error bits.
■Bit [1]—Read/Write: Writing a 0 to this bit writes the contents of the data register to one of the
EyeQ registers depending on the address stored in the EyeQ register address register. Writing a
1 reads the contents of the EyeQ register.
■Bit [12:2]—11'b00000000000
■Bit [13]—Channel address error: This bit is set to 1 if the programmed channel address is
invalid. Writing a 1 to this bit clears the error.
■Bit [14]—EyeQ register address error: this bit is set to 1 if the programmed word address is
invalid. Writing a 1 to this bit clears the error.
■Bit [15]—Busy status: The value of this bit can be polled to determine if the ALTGX_RECONFIG
read/write request has completed. When this active-high bit is asserted, all registers become
read only until this bit is de-asserted.
0×1 Channel address [15:0]—Specifies the transceiver channel for the desired EyeQ operation. This
must match the
logical_channel_address
input port.
0×2 EyeQ register address [15:0]—Specifies the address EyeQ register to be read from or written to.
The values supported are 0×0 or 0×1.
0×3
Data [15:0]—
■For a write operation, the data in this register is written to the EyeQ register selected.
■For a read operation, this register contains the contents of the EyeQ register selected. The data
in this register is only valid when the busy status is low. A read operation overwrites the current
contents of this register.
5–74 Chapter 5: Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices
Dynamic Reconfiguration Modes Implementation
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
6. Poll the EyeQ interface register 0×0 (the control and status register) and wait for
the busy status to be de-asserted. After the status is no longer busy, the data is
considered successfully written for write transactions. For read transactions, this
indicates that the contents of the data register has been updated and can be read
out. Note that all
writes
that occur when the busy status is asserted are ignored;
all registers become read only.
7. If the next operation is to the same EyeQ register and same channel, you do not
need to repeat steps 2 and 3.
Example of Using the EyeQ Feature
Consider a design with one regular transceiver channel configured in Basic functional
mode. The channel has a data rate of 2.5 Gbps with the EyeQ feature enabled in both
the ALTGX and ALTGX_RECONFIG instances. Figure 5–37 shows how the EyeQ
mode is first enabled by writing into the EyeQ registers using the EyeQ interface
registers. A phase step value of 25 is written to the EyeQ register. Before performing
any operation, the following conditions must be met:
■
busy
is 0 in the EyeQ CSR
■
ctrl_waitrequest
is low
Figure 5–37. Enabling EyeQ Mode
Note to Figure 5–37:
(1) Writing a '1' here instructs the ALTGX_RECONFIG instance to program the EyeQ hardware.
0
x
0
…
…
…
…
4 0
1 25 1
0 1 2 3 0 2 3
0
reconfig_mode_sel[3:0]
reconfig_clk
ctrl_address[15:0]
ctrl_read
ctrl_write
ctrl_waitrequest
ctrl_readdata[15:0]
ctrl_writedata[15:0]
busy
Enable EyeQ Set EyeQ Phase Step Value to 25
4’b1011
(1)(1)
Chapter 5: Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices 5–75
Dynamic Reconfiguration Modes Implementation
January 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Adaptive Equalization (AEQ)
High-speed interface systems require different equalization settings to compensate for
changing data rates and backplane losses. Manual tuning of the receiver channel’s
equalization stages involves finding the optimal settings through trial and error, and
then locking in those values at compile time. This manual method is cumbersome
under varying system characteristics. The AEQ feature solves this problem by
automatically tuning an active receiver channel’s equalization filters based on a
frequency content comparison between the incoming signal and internally generated
reference signals.
User logic can dynamically control the AEQ hardware in the receiver through the
dynamic reconfiguration controller. This section describes how to enable different
options and use them to control the AEQ hardware.
Adaptive Equalization Limitations
The following are the AEQ feature requirements and limitations:
■The receive data must be 8B/10B encoded
■Not available in PCIe functional mode (because the AEQ hardware cannot
perform the equalization process when the receive link is under the electrical idle
condition)
■The receiver input signal must have a minimum envelope of 400 mv (differential
peak-to-peak). The Quartus II software does not check for this requirement
■The AEQ hardware is not present in the CMU channels
fFor more information about speed grade, data rates, receiver input signal level, and
other specifications that support the AEQ feature, refer to the DC and Switching
Characterization for Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Enabling the AEQ Control Logic and AEQ Hardware
To use the AEQ feature, enable the AEQ hardware in the ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In
Manager and the AEQ control block in the ALTGX_RECONIG MegaWizard Plug-In
Manager. To enable the AEQ hardware and the AEQ control logic:
■Select the Enable adaptive equalizer control option in the Reconfiguration
Settings screen of the ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager. The AEQ hardware
is available for each transceiver channel in the receiver data path.
■Select the Enable adaptive equalizer control option in the ALTGX_RECONFIG
MegaWizard Plug-In Manager. The AEQ control logic is available in the dynamic
reconfiguration controller.
When you select the above two options, the ALTGX and ALTGX_RECONFIG
MegaWizard Plug-In Managers provide the following additional ports:
■
aeq_fromgxb[]
■
aeq_togxb[]
The
aeq_fromgxb[]
and
aeq_togxb[]
ports provide the interface between the receiver
channel and the dynamic reconfiguration controller.
5–76 Chapter 5: Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices
Dynamic Reconfiguration Modes Implementation
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
The following section describes the connections between the AEQ control block of the
ALTGX_RECONFIG instance and the AEQ hardware of the ALTGX instance.
Connections Between the ALTGX and ALTGX_RECONFIG Instances
Enable the adaptive equalization options in the ALTGX and ALTGX_RECONFIG
MegaWizard Plug-In Managers, as explained in the previous section. To use the AEQ
control block and AEQ hardware, you must connect the ALTGX receivers to the
ALTGX_RECONFIG instance using the
reconfig_{to/from}gxb
and
aeq_{to/from}gxb
ports. You must also connect the ALTGX_RECONFIG instance to
your design.
If you have multiple transceiver instances and a single ALTGX_RECONFIG instance,
connect the LSB of the
aeq_togxb[]
and
aeq_fromgxb[]
ports of the
ALTGX_RECONFIG instance to the transceiver channel with a
logical_channel_address
value of 0.
Chapter 5: Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices 5–77
Dynamic Reconfiguration Modes Implementation
January 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Figure 5–38 shows the
aeq_fromgxb[]
and
aeq_togxb[]
connections between multiple
ALTGX instances and the dynamic reconfiguration controller.
Figure 5–38. Connecting the ALTGX and ALTGX_RECONFIG Instances with AEQ Enabled
Receiver Channel 0
AEQ Hardware
busy
error
User Logic
ALTGX Instance 1
aeq_togxb[23:0]
aeq_fromgxb[7:0]
logical_channel_address = 0
rx_datain[0]
ALTGX Instance 2
Receiver Channel 1
logical_channel_address = 4
AEQ Hardware
rx_datain[1]
ALTGX_RECONFIG
AEQ Control
Block
aeq_fromgxb[15:8]
aeq_togxb[47:24]
reconfig_mode_sel[3:0]
ALTGX Instance 3
Receiver Channel 2 to 4
logical_channel_address = 8
AEQ Hardware
aeq_fromgxb[23:16]
aeq_togxb[63:48]
rx_datain[2]
5–78 Chapter 5: Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices
Dynamic Reconfiguration Controller Port List
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
One Time Mode for a Single Channel
Stratix IV GX and GT devices only support one-time adaptation mode for the AEQ
feature. Figure 5–39 shows the AEQ timing diagram in this mode.
After assertion of the
write_all
signals, the dynamic reconfiguration controller
performs the following steps sequentially:
1. Powers down the receiver buffer and performs offset calibration for the target
channel.
2. Powers up the receiver buffer and runs the convergence algorithm to set the
appropriate equalization settings.
3. Puts the AEQ circuitry in stand-by mode maintaining the converged equalization
setting. In standby mode, no further adaptation occurs.
If you observe bit errors over time with the converged equalization settings, you can
re-initiate one-time adaptation by following the timing diagram shown in
Figure 5–39. Each time you re-initiate one-time adaptation, the receiver buffer is
powered down for offset calibration, thereby interrupting the link during this time.
Dynamic Reconfiguration Controller Port List
Table 5–16 lists the input control ports and output status ports of the dynamic
reconfiguration controller.
Figure 5–39. AEQ Timing Diagram in One-Time Adaptation Mode
write_all
reconfig_mode_sel[3:0]
logical_channel_address[]
busy
4 (logical channel 4)
4’b1001
indicates AEQ convergence
and entry into stand-by mode
Offset calibration and AEQ convergence
Table 5–16. Dynamic Reconfiguration Controller Port List (ALTGX_RECONFIG Instance) (Part 1 of 13) (3), (4)
Port Name Input/
Output Description
Clock Inputs to the ALTGX_RECONFIG Instance
reconfig_clk
Input
The frequency range of this clock depends on the following
transceiver channel configuration modes:
■Receiver only (37.5 MHz to 50 MHz)
■Receiver and Transmitter (37.5 MHz to 50 MHz)
■Transmitter only (2.5 MHz to 50 MHz)
By default, the Quartus II software assigns a global clock resource
to this port. This clock must be a free-running clock sourced from
an I/O clock pin. Do not use dedicated transceiver
REFCLK
pins or
any clocks generated by transceivers.
Chapter 5: Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices 5–79
Dynamic Reconfiguration Controller Port List
January 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
ALTGX and ALTGX_RECONFIG Interface Signals
reconfig_fromgxb
Input
An output port in the ALTGX instance and an input port in the
ALTGX_RECONFIG instance. This signal is transceiver-block based.
Therefore, the width of this signal increases in steps of 17 bits per
transceiver block.
In the ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager, the width of this signal
depends on the following:
■Whether the channels configured in the ALTGX instance are
regular transceiver channels or PMA-only channels.
■The number of channels you select in the What is the number of
channels? option in the General screen.
For example, if the channels in the ALTGX instance are regular
transceiver channels and if you select the number of channels as
follows:
1 Channels 4, then the output port
reconfig_fromgxb
=
17 bits
5 Channels 8, then the output port
reconfig_fromgxb
=
34 bits
9 Channels 12, then the output port
reconfig_fromgxb
= 51
bits
However, if the channels in the ALTGX instance are PMA-only
channels and if you select the number of channels as follows:
Number of PMA-only channels = n, then the output port
reconfig_fromgxb
= n*17 bits
For example,
reconfig_fromgxb
= 6 * 17 bits for 6 PMA-only
channels.
In the ALTGX_RECONFIG MegaWizard Plug-In Manager, the width
of this signal depends on the value you select in the What is the
number of channels controlled by the reconfig controller? option
in the Reconfiguration settings screen.
For example, if you select the total number of channels controlled
by ALTGX_RECONFIG instance as follows:
1 Channels 4, then the input port
reconfig_fromgxb
=
17 bits
5 Channels 8, then the input port
reconfig_fromgxb
=
34 bits
9 Channels 12, then the input port
reconfig_fromgxb
= 51
bits
Table 5–16. Dynamic Reconfiguration Controller Port List (ALTGX_RECONFIG Instance) (Part 2 of 13) (3), (4)
Port Name Input/
Output Description
5–80 Chapter 5: Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices
Dynamic Reconfiguration Controller Port List
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
reconfig_fromgxb
(continued) Input
To connect the
reconfig_fromgxb
port between the
ALTGX_RECONFIG instance and multiple ALTGX instances, follow
these rules:
■Connect the
reconfig_fromgxb[16:0]
of ALTGX Instance 1 to
the
reconfig_fromgxb[16:0]
of the ALTGX_RECONFIG
instance. Connect the
reconfig_fromgxb[]
port of the next
ALTGX instance to the next available bits of the
ALTGX_RECONFIG instance, and so on.
■Connect the
reconfig_fromgxb
port of the ALTGX instance,
which has the highest What is the starting channel number?
option, to the MSB of the
reconfig_fromgxb
port of the
ALTGX_RECONFIG instance.
The Quartus II Fitter produces an error if the dynamic
reconfiguration option is enabled in the ALTGX instance but the
reconfig_fromgxb
and
reconfig_togxb
ports are not
connected to the ALTGX_RECONFIG instance.
For more information, refer to “Connecting the ALTGX and
ALTGX_RECONFIG Instances” on page 5–11.
reconfig_togxb[3:0]
Output
An input port of the ALTGX instance and an output port of the
ALTGX_RECONFIG instance. You must connect the
reconfig_togxb[3:0]
input port of every ALTGX instance
controlled by the dynamic reconfiguration controller to the
reconfig_togxb[3:0]
output port of the ALTGX_RECONFIG
instance.
The width of this port is always fixed to 3 bits.
For more information, refer to “Connecting the ALTGX and
ALTGX_RECONFIG Instances” on page 5–11.
FPGA Fabric and ALTGX_RECONFIG Interface Signals
write_all
Input
Assert this signal for one
reconfig_clk
clock cycle to initiate a
write transaction from the ALTGX_RECONFIG instance to the
ALTGX instance.
You can use this signal in two ways for .mif-based modes:
■Continuous write operation—Select the Enable continuous
write of all the words needed for reconfiguration option to
pulse the
write_all
signal only once for writing a whole .mif.
The What is the read latency of the MIF contents option is
available for selection in this case only. Enter the desired latency
in terms of the
reconfig_clk
cycles.
■Regular write operation—When the Enable continuous write of
all the words needed for reconfiguration option is disabled,
every word of the .mif requires its own write cycle.
Table 5–16. Dynamic Reconfiguration Controller Port List (ALTGX_RECONFIG Instance) (Part 3 of 13) (3), (4)
Port Name Input/
Output Description
Chapter 5: Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices 5–81
Dynamic Reconfiguration Controller Port List
January 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
busy
Output
Used to indicate the busy status of the dynamic reconfiguration
controller during offset cancellation. After the device powers up,
this signal remains low for the first
reconfig_clk
clock cycle. It
then is asserted and remains high when the dynamic
reconfiguration controller performs offset cancellation on all the
receiver channels connected to the ALTGX_RECONFIG instance.
De-assertion of the
busy
signal indicates the successful
completion of the offset cancellation process.
For more information, refer to “Operation” on page 5–67.
■PMA controls reconfiguration mode—This signal is high when
the dynamic reconfiguration controller performs a read or write
transaction.
■All other dynamic reconfiguration modes—This signal is high
when the dynamic reconfiguration controller writes the .mif into
the transceiver channel.
read
Input
Assert this signal for one
reconfig_clk
clock cycle to initiate a
read transaction. The
read
port is applicable only to the PMA
controls reconfiguration mode and data rate division in transmitter
mode. The
read
port is available when you select Analog controls
in the Reconfiguration settings screen and select at least one of
the PMA control ports in the Analog controls screen.
For more information, refer to “Dynamically Reconfiguring PMA
Controls” on page 5–13.
data_valid
Output
Applicable only to PMA controls reconfiguration mode. This port
indicates the validity of the data read from the transceiver by the
dynamic reconfiguration controller.
The current data on the output read ports is the valid data ONLY if
data_valid
is high.
This signal is enabled when you enable at least one PMA control
port used in read transactions, for example
tx_vodctrl_out
.
error
Output
Indicates that an unsupported operation is attempted. You can
select this in the Error checks/Data rate switch screen. The
dynamic reconfiguration controller de-asserts the
busy
signal and
asserts the
error
signal for two
reconfig_clk
cycles when you
attempt an unsupported operation.
For more information, refer to the “Error Indication During Dynamic
Reconfiguration” on page 5–90.
Table 5–16. Dynamic Reconfiguration Controller Port List (ALTGX_RECONFIG Instance) (Part 4 of 13) (3), (4)
Port Name Input/
Output Description
5–82 Chapter 5: Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices
Dynamic Reconfiguration Controller Port List
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
logical_channel_address [8:0]
Input
Enabled by the ALTGX_RECONFIG MegaWizard Plug-In Manager
when you enable the Use 'logical_channel_address' port for
Analog controls reconfiguration option in the Analog controls
screen.
The width of the
logical_channel_address
port depends on the
value you set in the What is the number of channels controlled by
the reconfig controller? option in the Reconfiguration settings
screen. This port can be enabled only when the number of channels
controlled by the dynamic reconfiguration controller is more than
one.
For more information, refer to “Logical Channel Addressing of
Regular Transceiver Channels” on page 5–6 and “Logical Channel
Addressing of PMA-Only Channels” on page 5–7.
rx_tx_duplex_sel[1:0]
Input
A 2 bit wide signal. You can select this in the Error checks/Data
rate switch screen.
The advantage of using this optional port is that it allows you to
reconfigure only the transmitter portion of a channel, even if the
channel configuration is duplex.
For a setting of:
■
rx_tx_duplex_sel[1:0]
= 2'b00—the transmitter and
receiver portion of the channel is reconfigured.
■
rx_tx_duplex_sel[1:0]
= 2'b01—the receiver portion of the
channel is reconfigured.
■
rx_tx_duplex_sel[1:0]
= 2'b10—the transmitter portion of
the channel is reconfigured.
Table 5–16. Dynamic Reconfiguration Controller Port List (ALTGX_RECONFIG Instance) (Part 5 of 13) (3), (4)
Port Name Input/
Output Description
Chapter 5: Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices 5–83
Dynamic Reconfiguration Controller Port List
January 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Analog Settings Control/Status Signals
tx_vodctrl[2:0]
(1) Input
An optional transmit buffer VOD control signal. It is 3 bits per
transmitter channel. The number of settings varies based on the
transmit buffer supply setting and the termination resistor setting
on the TX Analog screen of the ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In
Manager.
The width of this signal is fixed to 3 bits if you enable either the Use
'logical_channel_address' port for Analog controls
reconfiguration option or the Use same control signal for all the
channels option in the Analog controls screen. Otherwise, the
width of this signal is 3 bits per channel.
For more information, refer to “Dynamically Reconfiguring PMA
Controls” on page 5–13.
The following shows the VOD values corresponding to the
tx_vodctrl
settings for 100- termination.
For more information, refer to the “Programmable Output
Differential Voltage” section of the Transceiver Architecture in
Stratix IV Devices chapter.
tx_vodctrl[2:0]
VOD (mV) for 1.4 V VCCH
3’b000 200
3’b001 400
3’b010 600
3’b011 700
3’b100 800
3’b101 900
3’b110 1000
3’b111 1200
tx_vodctrla[2:0]
Input
An optional transmit buffer VOD control signal for Gen2. The signal
is 3 bits per transmitter channel.
The following shows the VOD values corresponding to the
tx_vodctrla
port for 100 termination:
tx_vodctrla
VOD (mV) Value
0 200
1 400
2 600
3 800
4 1000
5 1200
6 700
7 900
tx_vodctrla_out[2:0]
Output
An optional transmit VOD read control signal. The
tx_vodctrla_out[2:0]
signal reads out the Gen2 VOD value
written in the control register.
Table 5–16. Dynamic Reconfiguration Controller Port List (ALTGX_RECONFIG Instance) (Part 6 of 13) (3), (4)
Port Name Input/
Output Description
5–84 Chapter 5: Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices
Dynamic Reconfiguration Controller Port List
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
tx_preemp_0t[4:0]
(1) Input
An optional pre-emphasis control for pre-tap for the transmit
buffer. Depending on what value you set at this input, the controller
dynamically writes the value to the pre-emphasis control register of
the transmit buffer. This signal controls both pre-emphasis positive
and its inversion.
The width of this signal is fixed to 5 bits if you enable either the Use
'logical_channel_address' port for Analog controls
reconfiguration option or the Use same control signal for all the
channels option in the Analog controls screen. Otherwise, the
width of this signal is 5 bits per channel.
For more information, refer to “Dynamically Reconfiguring PMA
Controls” on page 5–13.
The following values are the legal settings allowed for this signal:
0 represents 0
1-15 represents -15 to -1
16 represents 0
17 - 31 represents 1 to 15
In the PCIe configuration, set
tx_preemp_0t[4:0]
to 5'b00000
when you do a rate switch from Gen 1 mode to Gen 2 mode. This is
to ensure that
tx_preemp_0t[4:0]
does not add to the signal
boost when
tx_pipemargin
and
tx_pipedeemph
take affect in
PCIe Gen 2 mode.
For more information, refer to the “Programmable Pre-Emphasis”
section of the Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices chapter.
tx_preemp_1t[4:0]
(1) Input
An optional pre-emphasis write control for the first post-tap for the
transmit buffer. Depending on what value you set at this input, the
controller dynamically writes the value to the first post-tap control
register of the transmit buffer.
The width of this signal is fixed to 5 bits if you enable either the Use
'logical_channel_address' port for Analog controls
reconfiguration option or the Use same control signal for all the
channels option in the Analog controls screen. Otherwise, the
width of this signal is 5 bits per channel.
For more information, refer to “Dynamically Reconfiguring PMA
Controls” on page 5–13 and the “Programmable Pre-Emphasis”
section of the Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices chapter.
tx_preemp_1ta[4:0]
Input
An optional pre-emphasis control for the first post-tap for the
transmit buffer in Gen2 mode. Depending on what value you set at
this input, the controller dynamically writes the value to the
pre-emphasis control register of the transmit buffer.
tx_preemp_1ta_out[4:0]
Output
An optional first post-tap, pre-emphasis read control signal for
Gen2. The
tx_preemp_1ta_out[4:0]
signal reads out the value
written by its input control signal.
tx_preemp_1tb[4:0]
Input
An optional de-emphasis control for the first post-tap for the
transmit buffer in Gen2 mode. Depending on what value you set at
this input, the controller dynamically writes the value to the
de-emphasis control register of the transmit buffer.
Table 5–16. Dynamic Reconfiguration Controller Port List (ALTGX_RECONFIG Instance) (Part 7 of 13) (3), (4)
Port Name Input/
Output Description
Chapter 5: Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices 5–85
Dynamic Reconfiguration Controller Port List
January 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
tx_preemp_1tb_out[4:0]
Output
An optional first post-tap, de-emphasis read control signal for
Gen2. The
tx_preemp_1tb_out[4:0]
signal reads out the value
written by its input control signal.
tx_preemp_2t[4:0]
(1) Input
An optional pre-emphasis write control for the second post-tap for
the transmit buffer. This signal controls both pre-emphasis positive
and its inversion. Depending on what value you set at this input, the
controller dynamically writes the value to the pre-emphasis control
register of the transmit buffer.
The width of this signal is fixed to 5 bits if you enable either the Use
'logical_channel_address' port for Analog controls
reconfiguration option or the Use same control signal for all the
channels option in the Analog controls screen. Otherwise, the
width of this signal is 5 bits per channel.
For more information, refer to “Dynamically Reconfiguring PMA
Controls” on page 5–13.
The following values are the legal settings allowed for this signal:
0 represents 0
1-15 represents -15 to -1
16 represents 0
17-31 represents 1 to 15
In the PCIe configuration, set
tx_preemp_2t[4:0]
to 5'b00000
when you do a rate switch from Gen 1 mode to Gen 2 mode. This is
to ensure that
tx_preemp_2t[4:0]
does not add to the signal
boost when
tx_pipemargin
and
tx_pipedeemph
take affect in
PCIe Gen 2 mode.
For more information, refer to the “Programmable Pre-Emphasis”
section of the Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices chapter.
rx_eqctrl[3:0]
(1) Input
An optional write control to write an equalization control value for
the receive side of the PMA.
The width of this signal is fixed to 4 bits if you enable either the Use
'logical_channel_address' port for Analog controls
reconfiguration option or the Use same control signal for all the
channels option in the Analog controls screen. Otherwise, the
width of this signal is 4 bits per channel.
For more information, refer to “Dynamically Reconfiguring PMA
Controls” on page 5–13 and the “Programmable Equalization and
DC Gain” section of the Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV
Devices chapter.
Table 5–16. Dynamic Reconfiguration Controller Port List (ALTGX_RECONFIG Instance) (Part 8 of 13) (3), (4)
Port Name Input/
Output Description
5–86 Chapter 5: Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices
Dynamic Reconfiguration Controller Port List
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
rx_eqdcgain[2:0]
(1), (2) Input
An optional equalizer DC gain write control.
The width of this signal is fixed to 3 bits if you enable either the Use
'logical_channel_address' port for Analog controls
reconfiguration option or the Use same control signal for all the
channels option in the Analog controls screen. Otherwise, the
width of this signal is 3 bits per channel.
For more information, refer to “Dynamically Reconfiguring PMA
Controls” on page 5–13.
The following values are the legal settings allowed for this signal:
3’b000 => 0 dB
3’b001 => 3 dB
3’b010 => 6 dB
3’b011 => 9 dB
3’b100 => 12 dB
All other values => N/A
For more information, refer to the “Programmable Equalization and
DC Gain” section of the Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV
Devices chapter.
tx_vodctrl_out[2:0]
Output
An optional transmit VOD read control signal. This signal reads out
the value written into the VOD control register. The width of this
output signal depends on the number of channels controlled by the
dynamic reconfiguration controller.
tx_preemp_0t_out[4:0]
Output
An optional pre-tap, pre-emphasis read control signal. This signal
reads out the value written by its input control signal. The width of
this output signal depends on the number of channels controlled by
the dynamic reconfiguration controller.
tx_preemp_1t_out[4:0]
Output
An optional first post-tap, pre-emphasis read control signal. This
signal reads out the value written by its input control signal. The
width of this output signal depends on the number of channels
controlled by the dynamic reconfiguration controller.
tx_preemp_2t_out[4:0]
Output
An optional second post-tap pre-emphasis read control signal. This
signal reads out the value written by its input control signal. The
width of this output signal depends on the number of channels
controlled by the dynamic reconfiguration controller.
rx_eqctrl_out[3:0]
Output
An optional read control signal to read the equalization setting of
the ALTGX instance. The width of this output signal depends on the
number of channels controlled by the dynamic reconfiguration
controller.
rx_eqdcgain_out[2:0]
Output
An optional equalizer DC gain read control signal. This signal reads
out the settings of the ALTGX instance DC gain. The width of this
output signal depends on the number of channels controlled by the
dynamic reconfiguration controller.
Table 5–16. Dynamic Reconfiguration Controller Port List (ALTGX_RECONFIG Instance) (Part 9 of 13) (3), (4)
Port Name Input/
Output Description
Chapter 5: Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices 5–87
Dynamic Reconfiguration Controller Port List
January 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Transceiver Channel Reconfiguration Control/Status Signals
reconfig_mode_sel[3:0]
Input
Set the following values at this signal to activate the appropriate
dynamic reconfiguration mode:
3’b000 = PMA controls reconfiguration mode. This is the default
value.
3’b011 = data rate division in transmitter mode
3’b100 = CMU PLL reconfiguration mode
3’b101 = channel and CMU PLL reconfiguration mode
3’b110 = channel reconfiguration with transmitter PLL select mode
3’b111 = central control unit reconfiguration mode
The
reconfig_mode_sel
signal is 4 bits wide when you enable
Adaptive Equalization control or EyeQ control:
4'b1000 = AEQ control (continuous mode for a single channel)
4'b1001 = AEQ control (one time mode for a single channel)
4'b1010 = AEQ control (power down for a single channel)
4'b1011 = EyeQ control
reconfig_mode_sel[]
is available as an input only when you
enable more than one dynamic reconfiguration mode.
reconfig_address_out[5:0]
Output
Always available for you to select in the Channel and TX PLL
reconfiguration screen. This signal is applicable only in the
dynamic reconfiguration modes grouped under the Channel and
TX PLL select/reconfig option.
This signal represents the current address used by the
ALTGX_RECONFIG instance when writing the .mif into the
transceiver channel. This signal increments by 1, from 0 to the last
address, then starts at 0 again. You can use this signal to indicate
the end of all the .mif write transactions
(
reconfig_address_out[5:0]
changes from the last address to
0 at the end of all the .mif write transactions).
reconfig_address_en
Output
An optional signal you can select in the Channel and TX PLL
reconfiguration screen. This signal is applicable only in dynamic
reconfiguration modes grouped under the Channel and TX PLL
select/reconfig option.
The dynamic reconfiguration controller asserts
reconfig_address_en
to indicate that
reconfig_address_out[5:0]
has changed. This signal is
asserted only after the dynamic reconfiguration controller
completes writing one 16-bit word of the .mif.
reset_reconfig_address
Input
An optional signal you can select in the Channel and TX PLL
reconfiguration screen. This signal is applicable only in dynamic
reconfiguration modes grouped under the Channel and TX PLL
select/reconfig option.
Enable this signal and assert it for one
reconfig_clk
clock cycle if
you want to reset the reconfiguration address used by the
ALTGX_RECONFIG instance during reconfiguration.
Table 5–16. Dynamic Reconfiguration Controller Port List (ALTGX_RECONFIG Instance) (Part 10 of 13) (3), (4)
Port Name Input/
Output Description
5–88 Chapter 5: Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices
Dynamic Reconfiguration Controller Port List
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
reconfig_data[15:0]
Input
Applicable only in the dynamic reconfiguration modes grouped
under the Channel and TX PLL select/reconfig option. This is a 16-
bit word carrying the reconfiguration information. It is stored in a
.mif that you must generate. The ALTGX_RECONFIG instance
requires that you provide
reconfig_data
[15:0]
on every .mif
write transaction using the
write_all
signal.
reconfig_address[5:0]
Input
Available for selection only in .mif-based transceiver channel
reconfiguration modes.
For more information, refer to “Reduced .mif Reconfiguration” on
page 5–24.
rate_switch_ctrl[1:0]
Input
Available when you select data rate division in transmitter mode.
Based on the value you set here, the divide-by setting of the local
divider in the transmitter channel gets modified. The legal values
for this port are:
2’b00 = Divide by 1
2’b01 = Divide by 2
2’b10 = Divide by 4
2’b11 = Not supported
rate_switch_out[1:0]
Input
Available when you select data rate division in transmitter mode.
You can read the existing local divider settings of a transmitter
channel at this port. The decoding for this signal is listed below:
2’b00 = Division of 1
2’b01 = Division of 2
2’b10 = Division of 4
2’b11= Not supported
logical_tx_pll_sel
Input
Specify the identity of the transmitter PLL you want to reconfigure.
You can also specify the identity of the transmitter PLL that you
want the transceiver channel to listen to. When you enable this
signal, the value set at this signal overwrites the
logical_tx_pll
value contained in the .mif. The value at this port must be held at a
constant logic level until reconfiguration is done.
logical_tx_pll_sel_en
Input
If you want to use the
logical_tx_pll_sel
port only under
some conditions and use the
logical_tx_pll
value contained in
the .mif otherwise, enable this optional
logical_tx_pll_sel_en
port. Only when
logical_tx_pll_sel_en
is enabled and set to 1
does the dynamic reconfiguration controller use
logical_tx_pll_sel
to identify the transmitter PLL. The value at
this port must be held at a constant logic level until reconfiguration
is done.
channel_reconfig_done
Output
The
channel_reconfig_done
signal goes high to indicate that
the dynamic reconfiguration controller has finished writing all the
words of the .mif. The
channel_reconfig_done
signal is
automatically de-asserted at the start of a new dynamic
reconfiguration write sequence. This signal is applicable only in
channel and CMU PLL reconfiguration and channel reconfiguration
with transmitter PLL select modes.
Table 5–16. Dynamic Reconfiguration Controller Port List (ALTGX_RECONFIG Instance) (Part 11 of 13) (3), (4)
Port Name Input/
Output Description
Chapter 5: Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices 5–89
Dynamic Reconfiguration Controller Port List
January 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
reconfig_reset
Input
An optional signal that you can use to reset the ALTGX_RECONFIG
instance.
reconfig_reset
must be held high for at least one clock
cycle to take effect.
When feeding into the
reconfig_reset
port, the reset signal must
be synchronized to the
reconfig_clk
domain.
aeq_fromgxb[7:0]
Input
The width of the
aeq_fromgxb[7:0]
signal depends on the
number of channels controlled by the ALTGX_RECONFIG instance.
For example, if you select the total number of channels controlled
by the ALTGX_RECONFIG instance as follows:
1 Channels 4, then the input port
reconfig_fromgxb
= 8 bits
5 Channels 8, then the input port
reconfig_fromgxb
=
16 bits
9 Channels 12, then the input port
reconfig_fromgxb
=
24 bits
This signal is available only when you enable the AEQ control
option. You must connect this signal between the
ALTGX_RECONFIG and ALTGX instances when using AEQ control.
aeq_togxb
Output
The width of the
aeq_togxb
signal depends on the number of
channels controlled by the ALTGX_RECONFIG instance. For
example, if you select the total number of channels controlled by
the ALTGX_RECONFIG instance as follows:
1 Channels 4, then the input port
reconfig_fromgxb
=
24 bits
5 Channels 8, then the input port
reconfig_fromgxb
=
48 bits
9 Channels 12, then the input port
reconfig_fromgxb
=
64 bits
This signal is available only when you enable the AEQ control
option. You must connect this signal between the
ALTGX_RECONFIG and ALTGX instances when using AEQ control.
ctrl_address[15:0]
Input Used for EyeQ control. This port is used to specify the address of
the EyeQ interface register for read and write operations.
ctrl_writedata[15:0]
Input Used for EyeQ control. Data present on this port is written to the
EyeQ interface register selected using the
ctrl_address
port.
ctrl_readdata[15:0]
Output
Used for EyeQ control. Contents of the EyeQ interface register
selected using the
ctrl_address
port are available on this port
after a read operation.
ctrl_write
Input
Used for EyeQ control. Assert this signal high to write the data
present on the
ctrl_writedata
port to the EyeQ interface
registers.
ctrl_read
Input Used for EyeQ control. Assert this signal high to read the contents
of the EyeQ interface registers to the
ctrl_readdata
port.
Table 5–16. Dynamic Reconfiguration Controller Port List (ALTGX_RECONFIG Instance) (Part 12 of 13) (3), (4)
Port Name Input/
Output Description
5–90 Chapter 5: Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices
Error Indication During Dynamic Reconfiguration
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Error Indication During Dynamic Reconfiguration
The ALTGX_RECONFIG MegaWizard Plug-In Manager provides an error status
signal when you select the Enable illegal mode checking option or the Enable self
recovery option in the Error checks/data rate switch screen. The conditions under
which the error signal is asserted are:
■Enable illegal mode checking option—When you select this option, the dynamic
reconfiguration controller checks whether an attempted operation falls under one
of the conditions listed below. The dynamic reconfiguration controller detects
these conditions within two
reconfig_clk
cycles, de-asserts the
busy
signal, and
asserts the error signal for two
reconfig_clk
cycles.
■PMA controls, read operation—None of the output ports (
rx_eqctrl_out
,
rx_eqdcgain_out
,
tx_vodctrl_out
,
tx_preemp_0t_out
,
tx_preemp_1t_out
, and
tx_preemp_2t_out
) are selected in the ALTGX_RECONFIG instance and the
read
signal is asserted.
■PMA controls, write operation—None of the input ports (
rx_eqctrl
,
rx_eqdcgain
,
tx_vodctrl
,
tx_preemp_0t
,
tx_preemp_1t
, and
tx_preemp_2t
) are
selected in the ALTGX_RECONFIG instance and the
write_all
signal is
asserted.
■TX Data Rate Switch using Local Divider-read operation option—The read
transaction is valid only for data rate division in transmitter mode
■TX Data Rate Switch using Local Divider-write operation with unsupported
value option:
■The
rate_switch_ctrl
input port is set to 11
■The
reconfig_mode_sel
input port is set to 3 (if other reconfiguration mode
options are selected in the Reconfiguration settings screen)
■The
write_all
signal is asserted
ctrl_waitrequest
Output
Used for EyeQ control. If asserted, this port indicates that the EyeQ
controller is busy with a read or write operation. You must wait
until this signal goes low before you perform the next operation.
Ensure that the values on the
ctrl_read
,
ctrl_write
,
ctrl_readdata
, and
ctrl_writedata
ports are constant when
ctrl_waitrequest
is asserted.
Notes to Table 5–16:
(1) Not all combinations of the input bits are legal values.
(2) In PCIe mode, this input must be tied to 001 to be PCIe-compliant.
(3) For the various dynamic reconfiguration controller input and output ports and the software settings, refer to the ALTGX_RECONFIG
Megafunction User Guide for Stratix IV Devices chapter.
(4) For the various transceiver input and output ports and the software settings, refer to the ALTGX Transceiver Setup Guide for Stratix IV Devices
chapter.
Table 5–16. Dynamic Reconfiguration Controller Port List (ALTGX_RECONFIG Instance) (Part 13 of 13) (3), (4)
Port Name Input/
Output Description
Chapter 5: Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices 5–91
Dynamic Reconfiguration Duration
January 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
■TX Data Rate Switch using Local Divider-write operation without input port
option:
■The
rate_switch_ctrl
input port is not used
■The
reconfig_mode_sel
port is set to 3 (if other reconfiguration mode
options are selected in the Reconfiguration settings screen)
■The
write_all
signal is asserted
■TX Data Rate Switch using Local Divider- read operation without output
port option:
■The
rate_switch_out
output port is not used
■The
reconfig_mode_sel
port is set to 3 (if other reconfiguration mode
options are selected in the Reconfiguration settings screen)
■The
read
signal is asserted
■Channel and/or TX PLL reconfig/select-read operation option:
■The
reconfig_mode_sel
input port is set to 4, 5, 6, or 7
■The
read
signal is asserted
■Adaptive Equalization option—read operation:
■The
reconfig_mode_sel
input port is set to 7, 8, 9, or 10
■The
read
signal is asserted
■EyeQ option—read operation:
■The
reconfig_mode_sel
input port is set to 11
■The read signal is asserted
■Enable self recovery option—When you select this option, the controller
automatically recovers if the operation did not complete within the expected time.
The error signal is driven high whenever the controller performs a self recovery.
Dynamic Reconfiguration Duration
Dynamic reconfiguration duration is the number of cycles the
busy
signal is asserted
when the dynamic reconfiguration controller performs write transactions, read
transactions, or offset cancellation of the receiver channels.
PMA Controls Reconfiguration Duration
The following section contains an estimate of the number of
reconfig_clk
clock
cycles the
busy
signal is asserted during PMA controls reconfiguration using
Method 1, Method 2, or Method 3. For more information, refer to “Dynamically
Reconfiguring PMA Controls” on page 5–13.
5–92 Chapter 5: Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices
Dynamic Reconfiguration Duration
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
PMA Controls Reconfiguration Duration When Using Method 1
The
logical_channel_address
port is used in Method 1. The write transaction and
read transaction duration is as follows:
Write Transaction Duration
For writing values to the following PMA controls, the
busy
signal is asserted for 260
reconfig_clk
clock cycles for each of these controls:
■
tx_preemp_1t
(pre-emphasis control first post-tap)
■
tx_vodctrl
(voltage output differential)
■
rx_eqctrl
(equalizer control)
■
rx_eqdcgain
(equalizer DC gain)
For writing values to the following PMA controls, the
busy
signal is asserted for 520
reconfig_clk
clock cycles for each of these controls:
■
tx_preemp_0t
(pre-emphasis control pre-tap)
■
tx_preemp_2t
(pre-emphasis control second post-tap)
Read Transaction Duration
For reading the existing values of the following PMA controls, the
busy
signal is
asserted for 130
reconfig_clk
clock cycles for each of these controls. The
data_valid
signal is then asserted after the
busy
signal goes low.
■
tx_preemp_1t_out
(pre-emphasis control first post-tap)
■
tx_vodctrl_out
(voltage output differential)
■
rx_eqctrl_out
(equalizer control)
■
rx_eqdcgain_out
(equalizer DC gain)
For reading the existing values of the following PMA controls, the
busy
signal is
asserted for 260
reconfig_clk
clock cycles for each of these controls. The
data_valid
signal is then asserted after the
busy
signal goes low.
■
tx_preemp_0t_out
(pre-emphasis control pre-tap)
■
tx_preemp_2t_out
(pre-emphasis control second post-tap)
PMA Controls Reconfiguration Duration When Using Method 2 or Method 3
The
logical_channel_address
port is not used in Method 2 and Method 3. The write
transaction duration and read transaction duration are as follows:
Write Transaction Duration
For writing values to the following PMA controls, the
busy
signal is asserted for 260
reconfig_clk
clock cycles per channel for each of these controls:
■
tx_preemp_1t
(pre-emphasis control first post-tap)
■
tx_vodctrl
(voltage output differential)
■
rx_eqctrl
(equalizer control)
■
rx_eqdcgain
(equalizer DC gain)
Chapter 5: Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices 5–93
Dynamic Reconfiguration Duration
January 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
For writing values to the following PMA controls, the
busy
signal is asserted for 520
reconfig_clk
clock cycles per channel for each of these controls:
■
tx_preemp_0t
(pre-emphasis control pre-tap)
■
tx_preemp_2t
(pre-emphasis control second post-tap)
Read Transaction Duration
For reading the existing values of the following PMA controls, the
busy
signal is
asserted for 130
reconfig_clk
clock cycles per channel for each of these controls. The
data_valid
signal is then asserted after the
busy
signal goes low.
■
tx_preemp_1t_out
(pre-emphasis control first post-tap)
■
tx_vodctrl_out
(voltage output differential)
■
rx_eqctrl_out
(equalizer control)
■
rx_eqdcgain_out
(equalizer DC gain)
For reading the existing values of the following PMA controls, the
busy
signal is
asserted for 260
reconfig_clk
clock cycles per channel for each of these controls. The
data_valid
signal is then asserted after the
busy
signal goes low.
■
tx_preemp_0t_out
(pre-emphasis control pre-tap)
■
tx_preemp_2t_out
(pre-emphasis control second post-tap)
Offset Cancellation Duration
When the device powers up, the
busy
signal remains low for the first
reconfig_clk
clock cycle. Offset cancellation control is only for the receiver channels. The
ALTGX_RECONFIG instance takes 18500
reconfig_clk
clock cycles per channel for
Receiver only and Receiver and Transmitter channels. It takes 900
reconfig_clk
clock cycles per channel for Tra nsmitt er only channels to determine if the channel
under reconfiguration is a receiver channel or not. The ATLGX_RECONFIG requires
an additional 130,000 clock cycles for these values to take effect. The
ALTGX_RECONFIG instance takes approximately two
reconfig_clk
clock cycles per
channel for the unused logical channels.
To demonstrate offset cancellation duration, consider the following example:
■One ALTGX_RECONFIG instance is connected to two ALTGX instances.
■ALTGX Instance 1 has one Transmitter only channel (logical_channel_address = 0)
■ALTGX Instance 2 has one Receiver only channel (logical_channel_address = 4)
For this example, the ALTGX_RECONFIG instance consumes the following number
of
reconfig_clk
clock cycles for offset cancellation:
■900 cycles for the Transmitter only channel
■18,500 cycles for the Receiver only channel
■2 cycles each for non-existent channels with logical_channel_addresses = 1, 2,
and 3 and 130,000 cycles as a baseline for the values to take affect.
The offset cancellation duration for the ALTGX_RECONFIG instance to reconfigure
the Transmitter only channel, Receiver only channel, non-existent logical channels 1,
2, and 3 = 149,406 cycles (900 +18,500 +6 + 130,000).
5–94 Chapter 5: Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices
Dynamic Reconfiguration (ALTGX_RECONFIG Instance) Resource Utilization
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Dynamic Reconfiguration Duration for Channel and Transmitter PLL
Select/Reconfig Modes
Table 5–17 lists the number of
reconfig_clk
clock cycles it takes for the dynamic
reconfiguration controller to reconfigure various parts of the transceiver channel and
CMU PLL.
Dynamic Reconfiguration (ALTGX_RECONFIG Instance) Resource
Utilization
You can observe the resources used during dynamic reconfiguration in the
ALTGX_RECONFIG MegaWizard Plug-In Manager. This section contains an estimate
of the LE resources used during dynamic reconfiguration.
You can obtain resource utilization for all other PMA controls from the
ALTGX_RECONFIG MegaWizard Plug-In Manager.
For example, the number of LEs used by one dynamic reconfiguration controller is 43
with only
tx_vodctrl
selected and the number of registers is 130.
Table 5–17. Dynamic Reconfiguration Duration for Transceiver Channel and CMU PLL
Reconfiguration
Transceiver Portion Under Reconfiguration Number of reconfig_clk Clock Cycles
Transmitter channel reconfiguration 1,518
Receiver channel reconfiguration 5,255
Transmitter and receiver channel reconfiguration 6,762
CMU PLL only reconfiguration 863
Transmitter channel and CMU PLL reconfiguration 2,370
Transceiver channel and CMU PLL reconfiguration 7,614
Central control unit reconfiguration 925
Chapter 5: Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices 5–95
Functional Simulation of the Dynamic Reconfiguration Process
January 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Figure 5–40 shows resource utilization in the ALTGX_RECONFIG MegaWizard
Plug-In Manager.
Functional Simulation of the Dynamic Reconfiguration Process
This section describes the points to be considered during functional simulation of the
dynamic reconfiguration process.
■You must connect the ALTGX_RECONFIG instance to the
ALTGX_instance/ALTGX instances in your design for functional simulation.
■The functional simulation uses a reduced timing model for offset cancellation.
Therefore, the duration of the offset cancellation process is 16
reconfig_clk
clock
cycles for functional simulation only.
■The
gxb_powerdown
signal must not be asserted during the offset cancellation
sequence (for functional simulation and silicon).
Figure 5–40. Resource Utilization in the ALTGX_RECONFIG MegaWizard Plug-In Manager
5–96 Chapter 5: Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices
Dynamic Reconfiguration Examples
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Dynamic Reconfiguration Examples
The following examples help to describe the dynamic reconfiguration feature.
Example 1
Consider a design with the following configuration:
■Seven regular transceiver channels in Basic functional mode. You can configure
the seven regular transceiver channels from 2.5 Gbps to 5 Gbps and vice versa
using a single CMU.
■Four channels in Basic (PMA Direct) functional mode. You can reconfigure the
four PMA-only channels from 3.125 Gbps to 5 Gbps and vice versa.
■You can reconfigure the PMA controls for any one of these channels.
Figure 5–41 shows the arrangement of these channels in the S4GX230 device.
Figure 5–41. Dynamic Reconfiguration Configuration for the S4GX230 Device (Example 1)
Transceiver Block GXBR2
Channel 3
Channel 2
CMU1 Channel
CMU0 Channel
Channel 1
Channel 0
Transceiver Block GXBR1
Channel 3
Channel 2
CMU1 Channel
CMU0 Channel
Channel 1
Channel 0
ATX R0 PLL Block
Transceiver Block GXBR0
Channel 3
Channel 2
CMU1 Channel
CMU0 Channel
Channel 1
Channel 0
Regular Transceiver Channels
PMA-Only Channels
Four PMA-Only channels use a
single CMU0 PLL (GXBR0)
in the design
Seven regular transceiver channels
use a single CMU0 PLL (GXBR2)
in the design
Chapter 5: Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices 5–97
Dynamic Reconfiguration Examples
January 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Because this example does not require the use of the alternate CMU transmitter PLL
or additional transmitter PLLs, the logical channel addressing remains the same as
explained in “Logical Channel Addressing” on page 5–5.
Table 5–18 lists how to set the starting channel number in the ALTGX MegaWizard
Plug-In Manager, the total number of channels in the ALTGX_RECONFIG
MegaWizard Plug-In Manager, and how to connect the ALTGX instances to the
ALTGX_RECONFIG instance.
Table 5–18. Logical Channel Addressing Combination of Regular Transceiver Channels and PMA-Only Channels
(Example 1)
ALTGX Settings and Instances ALTGX_RECONFIG Setting and Instance
ALTGX Setting
ALTGX Instance 1
(Basic Functional
Mode)
ALTGX Instance 2
(Basic [PMA Direct]
Functional Mode)
ALTGX_RECONFIG
Setting
ALTGX_RECONFIG
Instance 1
What is the number of
channels? option in
the General screen
7
(Regular Transceiver
Channels)
4
(PMA-only Channels)
What is the number of
channels controlled
by the reconfig
controller? option in
the Reconfiguration
settings screen.
■Determine the
highest logical
channel address
(20).
■Round it up to the
next multiple of 4.
■Set this option to
24.
What is the starting
channel number?
option in the Reconfig
screen
■Set this option to 0.
■The logical channel
addresses of the
first to sixth
channels are 0, 1, 2,
3, 4, 5, and 6,
respectively.
■Set this option to 8.
This is because the
starting channel
numbers 0 and 4
have already been
used in ALTGX
instance 1.
■The logical channel
addresses of the
first to fourth
channels are 8, 12,
16, and 20,
respectively.
——
reconfig_
fromgxb1
and
reconfig_
fromgxb2
outputs
reconfig_
fromgxb1
is 34 bits
wide
(2 * 17)
reconfig_
fromgxb2
is 68 bits
wide
(4 * 17)
reconfig_
fromgxb
input
reconfig_
fromgxb
is 102 bits
wide
(24 regular transceiver
channels can logically
fit into 6 transceiver
blocks; 6 * 17 = 102)
5–98 Chapter 5: Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices
Dynamic Reconfiguration Examples
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Figure 5–42 shows how the logical channel addresses of all the channels are set based
on what you set as the starting channel number.
Figure 5–42. Logical Channel Addresses for Example 1
Notes to Figure 5–42:
(1) For more information, refer to “Total Number of Channels Option in the ALTGX_RECONFIG Instance” on page 5–10.
(2)
reconfig_fromgxb[101:0]
= {
reconfig_fromgxb2[67:0]
,
reconfig_fromgxb1[33:0]}
ALTGX instance 1
Basic Functional Mode
Starting channel number = 0
ALTGX_RECONFIG instance 1
Set the What is the number of
channels controlled by the
reconfig controller? option = 24 (1)
ALTGX instance 2
Basic (PMA Direct) Configuration
Starting channel number = 8
reconfig_fromgxb1[33:0]
reconfig_fromgxb2[67:0]
reconfig_fromgxb[101:0] (2)
reconfig_togxb[3:0]
Channel 0
(logical channel address = 0)
Channel 1
(logical channel address = 1)
Channel 2
(logical channel address = 2)
Channel 3
(logical channel address = 3)
Channel 4
(logical channel address = 4)
Channel 5
(logical channel address = 5)
Channel 6
(logical channel address = 6)
Channel 0
(logical channel address = 8)
Channel 1
(logical channel address = 12)
Channel 2
(logical channel address = 16)
Channel 3
(logical channel address = 20)
Chapter 5: Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices 5–99
Dynamic Reconfiguration Examples
January 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Different Dynamic Reconfiguration Modes Involved
1. Channel and CMU PLL reconfiguration mode:
■is used for reconfiguring the seven regular transceiver channels from one data
rate to another using the same
CMU0
PLL (in GXBR2)
1This mode is chosen because both the receiver and transmitter of the
regular channels must be re-configured using a single CMU.
2. Channel and CMU PLL select reconfiguration mode:
■is used for reconfiguring the four PMA-only channels from one data rate to
another using the
CMU0
PLL (in GXBR0) and
CMU1
PLL (GXBR0)
1This mode is chosen because both the receiver and transmitter of the
regular channels must be re-configured and more than one CMU can be
used.
3. The
rx_tx_duplex_sel[1:0]
port allows you to reconfigure the transmitter and
receiver channels to operate at the different data rates.
4. PMA controls reconfiguration mode used to configure the PMA settings for all the
channels.
For more information, refer to “Transceiver Channel Reconfiguration Mode Details”
on page 5–19.
.mif Generation
The following .mifs are required for this example:
■For the seven regular transceiver channels, you must generate two .mifs. Use one
to move from a data rate of 2.5 Gbps to 5 Gbps and the other to revert back to
2.5 Gbps.
■For the for PMA-only channels, you must generate two .mifs. Use one to move
from a data rate of 3.125 Gbps to 5 Gbps and the other to revert back to 3.125 Gbps.
For more information, refer to “Memory Initialization File (.mif)” on page 5–20.
Various Dynamic Reconfiguration Transactions
The following dynamic reconfiguration transactions are required “Example 1” on
page 5–96:
■.mif write transaction—for more information, refer to “Channel and CMU PLL
Reconfiguration Mode Details” on page 5–24 and “Channel Reconfiguration with
Transmitter PLL Select Mode Details” on page 5–48.
■Reconfiguring PMA controls—for more information, refer to “Dynamically
Reconfiguring PMA Controls” on page 5–13.
5–100 Chapter 5: Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices
Dynamic Reconfiguration Examples
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Example 2
Consider a design with the following configuration:
■Four regular transceiver channels in XAUI configuration.
■You can configure these channels from the XAUI configuration (the primary
configuration) to the PCIe Gen2 ×4 configuration (the secondary configuration)
and vice versa.
Figure 5–43 shows the arrangement of these channels in the S4GX230 device.
Because this example does not require the use of the alternate CMU transmitter PLL
or additional transmitter PLLs, the logical channel addressing remains the same as
explained in “Logical Channel Addressing” on page 5–5.
Table 5–19 lists how to set the starting channel number in the ALTGX MegaWizard
Plug-In Manager, the total number of channels in the ALTGX_RECONFIG
MegaWizard Plug-In Manager, and how to connect the ALTGX instances to the
ALTGX_RECONFIG instance.
Figure 5–43. Dynamic Reconfiguration Configuration for the S4GX230 Device (Example 2)
Transceiver Block GXBR0
Channel 3
Channel 2
CMU1 Channel
CMU0 Channel
Channel 1
Channel 0
Four regular channels
using the CMU0 PLL
in the design
1
0156.25 MHz for XAUI
100 MHz for PIPE
Gen2 x4 mode
Table 5–19. Logical Channel Addressing Combination ×4 Bonded Channels (Example 2) (Part 1 of 2)
ALTGX Settings and Instances ALTGX_RECONFIG Setting and Instance
ALTGX Setting ALTGX Instance 1
(XAUI Mode) ALTGX_RECONFIG Setting ALTGX_RECONFIG
Instance 1
What is the number of
channels? option in the
General screen
4
(Regular transceiver
channels)
What is the number of
channels controlled by the
reconfig controller? option
in the Reconfiguration
settings screen.
■Determine the highest
logical channel address
(3).
■Round it up to the next
multiple of 4.
■Set this option to 4.
What is the starting channel
number? option in the
Reconfig screen
■Set this option to 0.
■The logical channel
addresses of the first to
sixth channels are 0, 1, 2,
and 3, respectively.
——
Chapter 5: Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices 5–101
Dynamic Reconfiguration Examples
January 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Figure 5–44 shows how the logical channel addresses of all the channels are set based
on what you set as the starting channel number.
Settings in Reconfiguration
settings page
■Enable Channel and
Transmitter PLL
reconfiguration
■Enable Channel interface
■Set 2 for the How many
clock inputs are used?
option.
■Set 0 for the XAUI ALTGX
instance.
■Set 1 for the PCIe s ×4
ALTGX instance for the
What is the selected
input clock source for
Tx/Rx PLLs? option.
——
reconfig_fromgxb1
and
reconfig_fromgxb2
outputs
reconfig_fromgxb1
is
17 bits wide
reconfig_fromgxb
input
reconfig_fromgxb
is
17 bits wide
(4 regular transceiver
channels can logically fit into
1 transceiver blocks;
1 * 17 = 17)
Table 5–19. Logical Channel Addressing Combination ×4 Bonded Channels (Example 2) (Part 2 of 2)
ALTGX Settings and Instances ALTGX_RECONFIG Setting and Instance
ALTGX Setting ALTGX Instance 1
(XAUI Mode) ALTGX_RECONFIG Setting ALTGX_RECONFIG
Instance 1
Figure 5–44. Logical Channel Addresses for Example 2
Set the What is the number of channels
controlled by the reconfig controller?
option = 4
reconfig_fromgxb[16:0] *
ALTGX_RECONFIG Instance
reconfig_fromgxb[16:0]
ALTGX Instance 1
Four regular transceiver channels
XAUI/PCI Express (PIPE) Gen2 x4 Functional Mode
Starting channel number = 0
reconfig_togxb[3:0]
Channel 0
(logical channel address = 0)
Channel 1
(logical channel address = 1)
Channel 2
(logical channel address = 2)
Channel 3
(logical channel address = 3)
5–102 Chapter 5: Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices
Dynamic Reconfiguration Examples
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Different Dynamic Reconfiguration Modes Involved
1. Channel and CMU PLL reconfiguration mode—used for reconfiguring four
regular transceiver channels and the
CMU0
PLL (in GXBR0) from XAUI mode to
PCIe ×4 mode and vice versa.
1Use this mode instead of channel reconfiguration with transmitter PLL
select mode because the central clock divider used for bonded modes is
only available in
CMU0
; therefore, you cannot use the
CMU1 PLL
as an
alternate TX PLL.
2. Central control unit reconfiguration mode—used for reconfiguring central control
unit logic used in bonded modes from XAUI mode to PCIe ×4 mode.
For more information, refer to “Transceiver Channel Reconfiguration Mode Details”
on page 5–19.
.mif Generation
The following .mifs are required for this example:
■One .mif is required to move from XAUI mode to PCIe ×4 mode
■Another .mif is required to revert back to XAUI mode from PCIe ×4 mode
For more information, refer to “Memory Initialization File (.mif)” on page 5–20.
Various Dynamic Reconfiguration Transactions
The following dynamic reconfiguration transactions are required for this example:
■.mif write transaction—for more information, refer to “Channel and CMU PLL
Reconfiguration Mode Details” on page 5–24.
■Alternatively, you may use reduced .mif reconfiguration. Reduced .mifs are
generated using the altgx_diffmifgen.exe command. For more information, refer
to “Reduced .mif Reconfiguration” on page 5–24.
Document Revision History
Table 5–20 lists the revision history for this chapter.
Table 5–20. Document Revision History (Part 1 of 2)
Date Version Changes
January 2014 3.6 ■Updated the “Logical Channel Addressing of PMA-Only Channels” section.
November 2013 3.5 ■Updated the “CMU PLL Reconfiguration Mode Details” section.
September 2012 3.4
■Updated Table 5–13 title.
■Updated Figure 5–6.
■Updated Figure 5–37.
December 2011 3.3
■Updated the “Logical Channel Addressing of PMA-Only Channels” and “Transceiver
Channel Reconfiguration Mode Details” sections.
■Updated Table 5–6, Table 5–9, and Table 5–16.
Chapter 5: Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices 5–103
Dynamic Reconfiguration Examples
January 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
February 2011 3.2
■Updated Table 5–5, Table 5–6, and Table 5–16.
■Updated Figure 5–1.
■Updated the “Transceiver Channel Reconfiguration Mode Details”. “PMA Controls
Reconfiguration Mode Details”, “Connecting the ALTGX and ALTGX_RECONFIG
Instances”, “One Time Mode for a Single Channel”, “Applying a .mif in the User Design”,
and “Functional Simulation of the Dynamic Reconfiguration Process” sections.
■Removed the “Continuous Mode for a Single Channel” and “Powerdown for a Single
Channel” sections.
■Updated chapter title.
■Applied new template.
■Minor text edits.
March 2010 3.1
■Updated Table 5–5, Table 5–6, Table 5–15, Table 5–16, and Table 5–17.
■Updated Figure 5–1, Figure 5–14, Figure 5–16, Figure 5–26, and Figure 5–37.
■Updated the “Blocks Reconfigured in the Data Rate Division in Transmitter Mode”,
“Logical Channel Addressing of PMA-Only Channels”, “Central Control Unit
Reconfiguration Mode Details”, “EyeQ”, “Error Indication During Dynamic
Reconfiguration”, and “Functional Simulation of the Dynamic Reconfiguration Process”
sections.
■Added a note to the “Central Control Unit Reconfiguration Mode Details” section.
■Minor text edits.
November 2009 3.0
■Completely re-wrote and re-organized chapter.
■Updated all graphics and tables.
June 2009 2.1
■Updated Figure 5–4, Figure 5–8, Figure 5–9, Figure 5–10, Figure 5–11, Figure 5–15,
Figure 5–22, Table 5–37, Table 5–38, Figure 5–44, Figure 5–47, Figure 5–48,
Figure 5–49, Figure 5–50, Figure 5–51, Figure 5–52, Figure 5–53, and Figure 5–54
■Updated Table 5–2 and Table 5–31
■Changed “logical_tx_pll_sel[1:0]” to “logical_tx_pll_sel” throughout
■Updated “The reconfig_clk Clock Requirements for the ALTGX Instance and
ALTGX_RECONFIG Instance”, “The logical_tx_pll_sel and logical_tx_pll_sel_en Ports”,
“How to Use the logical_tx_pll_sel Port?”, and “When Can the logical_tx_pll_sel and
logical_tx_pll_sel_en Ports be Used?”
■Minor text edits
March 2009 2.0
Complete re-write and re-organization of the chapter.
Added or revised:
■Offset Cancellation Control for Receiver Channels
■PMA Controls Reconfiguration
■Channel and CMU PLL Reconfiguration Mode
■Data Rate Division in Transmitter: Operation
■Channel Reconfiguration with Transmitter PLL Select Mode
■CMU PLL Reconfiguration Mode
November 2008 1.0 Initial release.
Table 5–20. Document Revision History (Part 2 of 2)
Date Version Changes
5–104 Chapter 5: Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices
Dynamic Reconfiguration Examples
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
September 2015 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 2: Transceivers
Additional Information
This chapter provides additional information about the document and Altera.
How to Contact Altera
To locate the most up-to-date information about Altera products, refer to the
following table.
Typographic Conventions
The following table shows the typographic conventions this document uses.
Contact (1) Contact Method Address
Technical support Website www.altera.com/support
Technical training Website www.altera.com/training
Email custrain@altera.com
Product literature Website www.altera.com/literature
Nontechnical support (general) Email nacomp@altera.com
(software licensing) Email authorization@altera.com
Note to Table:
(1) You can also contact your local Altera sales office or sales representative.
Visual Cue Meaning
Bold Type with Initial Capital
Letters
Indicate command names, dialog box titles, dialog box options, and other GUI
labels. For example, Save As dialog box. For GUI elements, capitalization matches
the GUI.
bold type
Indicates directory names, project names, disk drive names, file names, file name
extensions, software utility names, and GUI labels. For example, \qdesigns
directory, D: drive, and chiptrip.gdf file.
Italic Type with Initial Capital Letters Indicate document titles. For example, Stratix IV Design Guidelines.
italic type
Indicates variables. For example, n + 1.
Variable names are enclosed in angle brackets (< >). For example, <file name> and
<project name>.pof file.
Initial Capital Letters Indicate keyboard keys and menu names. For example, the Delete key and the
Options menu.
“Subheading Title” Quotation marks indicate references to sections in a document and titles of
Quartus II Help topics. For example, “Typographic Conventions.”
Info–2 Additional Information
Typographic Conventions
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2015 Altera Corporation
Volume 2: Transceivers
Courier type
Indicates signal, port, register, bit, block, and primitive names. For example,
data1
,
tdi
, and
input
. The suffix
n
denotes an active-low signal. For example,
resetn
.
Indicates command line commands and anything that must be typed exactly as it
appears. For example,
c:\qdesigns\tutorial\chiptrip.gdf
.
Also indicates sections of an actual file, such as a Report File, references to parts of
files (for example, the AHDL keyword
SUBDESIGN
), and logic function names (for
example,
TRI
).
r An angled arrow instructs you to press the Enter key.
1., 2., 3., and
a., b., c., and so on
Numbered steps indicate a list of items when the sequence of the items is important,
such as the steps listed in a procedure.
■■■Bullets indicate a list of items when the sequence of the items is not important.
1The hand points to information that requires special attention.
h The question mark directs you to a software help system with related information.
f The feet direct you to another document or website with related information.
m The multimedia icon directs you to a related multimedia presentation.
cA caution calls attention to a condition or possible situation that can damage or
destroy the product or your work.
w A warning calls attention to a condition or possible situation that can cause you
injury.
The envelope links to the Email Subscription Management Center page of the Altera
website, where you can sign up to receive update notifications for Altera documents.
Visual Cue Meaning
101 Innovation Drive
San Jose, CA 95134
www.altera.com
SIV5V3-4.4
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
Stratix IV Device Handbook
© 2014 Altera Corporation. All rights reserved. ALTERA, ARRIA, CYCLONE, HARDCOPY, MAX, MEGACORE, NIOS, QUARTUS and STRATIX words and logos
are trademarks of Altera Corporation and registered in the U.S. Patent and Trademark Office and in other countries. All other words and logos identified as
trademarks or service marks are the property of their respective holders as described at www.altera.com/common/legal.html. Altera warrants performance of its
semiconductor products to current specifications in accordance with Altera's standard warranty, but reserves the right to make changes to any products and
services at any time without notice. Altera assumes no responsibility or liability arising out of the application or use of any information, product, or service
described herein except as expressly agreed to in writing by Altera. Altera customers are advised to obtain the latest version of device specifications before relying
on any published information and before placing orders for products or services.
January 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
ISO
9001:2008
Registered
January 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
Contents
Chapter Revision Dates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v
Section I. Transceiver Configuration Guide
Chapter 1. ALTGX Transceiver Setup Guide for Stratix IV Devices
Parameter Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–4
General Screen for the Parameter Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–4
PLL/Ports Screen for the Parameter Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–16
Ports/Calibration Screen for the Parameter Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–19
Loopback Screen for the Parameter Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–22
RX Analog Screen for the Parameter Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–24
TX Analog Screen for the Parameter Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–26
Reconfiguration Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–28
Modes Screen for the Reconfiguration Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–29
Transmitter PLL Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–31
Clocking/Interface Screen for the Reconfiguration Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–35
Protocol Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–36
8B10B Screen for the Protocol Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–37
Word Aligner Screen for the Protocol Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–40
Rate Match/Byte Order Screen for the Protocol Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–45
Protocol Settings Screen for GIGE and XAUI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–48
Protocol Settings Screen for the (OIF) CEI Phy Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–51
Protocol Settings Screen for PCIe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–52
Protocol Settings Screen for SONET/SDH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–57
EDA Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–60
Summary Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–61
Chapter 2. Transceiver Design Flow Guide for Stratix IV Devices
Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3
Device Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3
Transceiver Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3
Dynamic Reconfiguration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–4
Clocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–5
Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–6
Board Design Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–6
Implementation and Integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–6
Create Transceiver Instances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–7
Reset and Status Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–7
Create Dynamic Reconfiguration Controller Instances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–7
Create Reset and Control Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–8
Create Data Processing and Other User Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–8
PPM Detector When the Receiver CDR Is Used in Manual Lock Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–8
Synchronization State Machine in Manual Word Alignment Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–8
Gear Boxing Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–9
Integrate the Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–9
Compilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–10
Report Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–11
Fitter Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–11
iv Contents
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
Pin-Out File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–11
Resource Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–11
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–11
Functional Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–12
Guidelines to Debug Transceiver-Based Designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–14
Guidelines to Debug the FPGA Logic and the Transceiver Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–14
Guidelines to Debug System Level Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–15
Example 1: Fibre Channel Protocol Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–17
Phase 1—Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–17
Device Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–17
Transceiver Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–18
Dynamic Reconfiguration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–18
Clocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–19
Phase 2—Implementation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–20
Create the Transceiver Instance for an FC4G Configuration (Channel 0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–21
Create the Transceiver Instance for an FC1G Configuration (Channel 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–30
Create the Instance for an FC4G Configuration—Transmitter Only Mode (Channel 2) . . . . . . 2–31
Create the Dynamic Reconfiguration Controller (ALTGX_Reconfig) Instance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–33
Create Reset Logic to Control the FPGA Fabric and Transceivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–34
Create Data Processing and Other User Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–36
Phase 3—Compilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–36
Phase 4—Simulating the Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–36
Chapter 3. ALTGX_RECONFIG Megafunction User Guide for Stratix IV Devices
Dynamic Reconfiguration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1
Additional Information
How to Contact Altera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Info–1
Typographic Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Info–1
January 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
Chapter Revision Dates
The chapters in this document, Stratix IV Device Handbook Volume 3, were revised on
the following dates. Where chapters or groups of chapters are available separately,
part numbers are listed.
Chapter 1. ALTGX Transceiver Setup Guide for Stratix IV Devices
Revised: January 2014
Part Number: SIV53001-4.4
Chapter 2. Transceiver Design Flow Guide for Stratix IV Devices
Revised: February 2011
Part Number: SIV53002-4.1
Chapter 3. ALTGX_RECONFIG Megafunction User Guide for Stratix IV Devices
Revised: February 2011
Part Number: SIV53004-3.1
vi Chapter Revision Dates
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
January 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
Section I. Transceiver Configuration
Guide
This section includes the following chapters:
■Chapter 1, ALTGX Transceiver Setup Guide for Stratix IV Devices
■Chapter 2, Transceiver Design Flow Guide for Stratix IV Devices
■Chapter 3, ALTGX_RECONFIG Megafunction User Guide for Stratix IV Devices
Revision History
Refer to each chapter for its own specific revision history. For information on when
each chapter was updated, refer to the Chapter Revision Dates section, which appears
in the full handbook.
I–2 Section I: Transceiver Configuration Guide
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
SIV53001-4.4
© 2014 Altera Corporation. All rights reserved. ALTERA, ARRIA, CYCLONE, HARDCOPY, MAX, MEGACORE, NIOS, QUARTUS and STRATIX words and logos
are trademarks of Altera Corporation and registered in the U.S. Patent and Trademark Office and in other countries. All other words and logos identified as
trademarks or service marks are the property of their respective holders as described at www.altera.com/common/legal.html. Altera warrants performance of its
semiconductor products to current specifications in accordance with Altera's standard warranty, but reserves the right to make changes to any products and
services at any time without notice. Altera assumes no responsibility or liability arising out of the application or use of any information, product, or service
described herein except as expressly agreed to in writing by Altera. Altera customers are advised to obtain the latest version of device specifications before relying
on any published information and before placing orders for products or services.
Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
January 2014
Feedback Subscribe
ISO
9001:2008
Registered
1. ALTGX Transceiver Setup Guide for
Stratix IV Devices
This chapter describes the options you can choose in the ALTGX MegaWizard™
Plug-In Manager in the Quartus® II software to configure Stratix® IV GX and GT
devices in different functional modes.
The MegaWizard Plug-In Manager in the Quartus II software creates or modifies
design files that contain custom megafunction variations that can then be instantiated
in a design file. You can use the MegaWizard Plug-In Manager to set the ALTGX
megafunction features in the design. The ALTGX megafunction allows you to
configure one or more transceiver channels. You can select the physical coding
sublayer (PCS) and physical medium attachment (PMA) functional blocks depending
on your transceiver configuration.
This chapter contains the following sections:
■“Parameter Settings” on page 1–4
■“Reconfiguration Settings” on page 1–28
■“Protocol Settings” on page 1–36
Start the MegaWizard Plug-In Manager using one of the following methods:
■From the Tools menu, select MegaWizard Plug-In Manager.
■When working in the Block Editor, click MegaWizard Plug-In Manager in the
Symbol dialog box (Edit menu).
■Start the standalone version of the MegaWizard Plug-In Manager by typing the
following command at the command prompt:
qmegawiz
.
January 2014
SIV53001-4.4
1–2 Chapter 1: ALTGX Transceiver Setup Guide for Stratix IV Devices
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
Figure 1–1 shows the first page of the MegaWizard Plug-In Manager. To generate an
ALTGX custom megafunction variation, select Create a new custom megafunction
variation.
Figure 1–2 shows the second page of the MegaWizard Plug-In Manager.
To use the MegaWizard Plug-In Manager to configure a Stratix IV device, follow these
steps:
1. Select Stratix IV as the device family.
2. Select either VHDL or Verilo g H D L depending on the type of output files you
want to create.
3. Select the ALTGX megafunction under the I/O section of the available
megafunctions.
Figure 1–1. MegaWizard Plug-In Manager (Page 1)
Chapter 1: ALTGX Transceiver Setup Guide for Stratix IV Devices 1–3
January 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
4. Name the output file, then Browse to the folder you want to save your file in and
click Next. The General screen of the ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager opens
(Figure 1–3).
1All reset and control signals are active high unless otherwise mentioned.
1All output ports are synchronous to the data path unless otherwise specified.
1Throughout this chapter, the various functional modes and their settings are
explained for Stratix IV GX and GT devices.
Figure 1–2. MegaWizard Plug-In Manager (Page 2)
1–4 Chapter 1: ALTGX Transceiver Setup Guide for Stratix IV Devices
Parameter Settings
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
Parameter Settings
This section describes the options available on the individual pages of the ALTGX
MegaWizard Plug-In Manager for the Parameter Settings. The MegaWizard Plug-In
Manager provides a warning if any of the settings you choose are illegal.
General Screen for the Parameter Settings
Figure 1–3 shows the General screen of the ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager for
the Parameter Settings.
Figure 1–3. MegaWizard Plug-In Manager—ALTGX (General Screen for the Parameter Settings)
Chapter 1: ALTGX Transceiver Setup Guide for Stratix IV Devices 1–5
Parameter Settings
January 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
Table 1–1 lists the available functional modes and their options on the General screen
of the MegaWizard Plug-In Manager. Depending on your configuration, you will
select one of the following functional modes:
■Basic
■Basic (PMA Direct)
■Deterministic Latency
■GIGE
■(OIF) CEI Phy Interface
■PCI Express® (PCIe)
■SDI
■Serial RapidIO®
■SONET/SDH
■XAUI
If you select Basic (PMA Direct) mode, all the channels are configured with only the
PMA blocks. These channels are called PMA-only channels throughout this chapter.
The PMA-only channels include:
■Regular transceiver channels with PMA blocks only
■CMU channels (clock multiplier unit phase-locked loops [CMU PLLs]
configured as additional transceiver channels with PMA blocks only)
Table 1–1. MegaWizard Plug-In Manager Options (General Screen for Basic Mode) (Part 1 of 11)
ALTGX Setting Description Reference
Which device variation will you
be using?
Select GX or GT based on the Stratix IV device used in
your design.
Select the speed grade of your device. The available
speed grades for the Stratix IV GX device are 2, 2×, 3,
and 4. The available speed grades for the Stratix IV GT
device are 1, 2 and 3.
DC and Switching
Characteristics for Stratix IV
Devices chapter.
Which protocol will you be
using?
Determines the specific protocol under which the
transceiver operates. For a specific mode, you must
select the desired protocol from the following list:
■(OIF) CEI PHY Interface
■SDI
■SONET/SDH
■XAUI
■Basic
■Basic (PMA Direct)
■Deterministic Latency
■GIGE
■PCIe
■Serial RapidIO
Transceiver Architecture in
Stratix IV Devices chapter.
1–6 Chapter 1: ALTGX Transceiver Setup Guide for Stratix IV Devices
Parameter Settings
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
Which subprotocol will you be
using?
Basic
In Basic mode, the subprotocols are diagnostic modes.
The available options are as follows:
■None—This is the normal operation of the transceiver.
■×4—In this mode, all four channels within the
transceiver block are clocked from its central clock
divider block to minimize transmitter
channel-to-channel skew.
■×8—In this mode, all eight channels in two
transceiver blocks are clocked from the central clock
divider of the master transceiver block to minimize
transmitter channel-to-channel skew.
■BIST—This subprotocol is applicable only for
Receiver and Transmitter operation mode. This mode
loops the parallel data from the built-in self test (BIST)
(non-PRBS) back to the BIST verifier in the receiver
path. Parallel loopback is allowed only in Basic
double-width mode.
■PRBS—This subprotocol is applicable only for
Receiver and Transmitter operation mode.This is
another Serial Loopback mode but with the
pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) BIST block
active. The PRBS pattern depends on the
serializer/deserializer (SERDES) factor.
“Basic Functional Mode”
section in the Transceiver
Architecture in Stratix IV
Devices chapter.
Basic (PMA Direct)
■None—This is the normal mode of operation in which
each channel is treated independently.
■XN—In this mode, the “N” in XN represents the
number of channels in the bonded configuration. All
N channels are clocked by the same transmit clock
from the central clock divider block to minimize
transmitter channel-to-channel skew.
“Basic PMA Direct Functional
Mode” section in the
Transceiver Architecture in
Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Deterministic Latency
■×1—In this mode, you can have up to two configured
channels per transceiver block. Each channel uses one
CMU PLL and its feedback path to compensate for the
uncertain latency.
■×4—In this mode, you can have up to four configured
channels per transceiver block. All channels use one
CMU PLL per block and its feedback path to
compensate for the uncertain latency.
“Deterministic Latency Mode”
section in the Transceiver
Architecture in Stratix IV
Devices chapter.
Table 1–1. MegaWizard Plug-In Manager Options (General Screen for Basic Mode) (Part 2 of 11)
ALTGX Setting Description Reference
Chapter 1: ALTGX Transceiver Setup Guide for Stratix IV Devices 1–7
Parameter Settings
January 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
Which subprotocol will you be
using?
PCIe
In PCIe mode, there are six subprotocols:
■Gen1 ×1—The transceiver is configured as a
single-lane PCIe link for a 2.5 Gbps data rate.
■Gen1 ×4—The transceiver is configured as a four-lane
PCIe link for a data rate of 2.5 Gbps.
■Gen1 ×8—The transceiver is configured as an
eight-lane PCIe link for a data rate of 2.5 Gbps.
■Gen2 ×1—The transceiver is configured as a
single-lane PCIe link for a 5.0 Gbps data rate.
■Gen2 ×4—The transceiver is configured as a four-lane
PCIe link for a data rate of 5.0 Gbps.
■Gen2 ×8—The transceiver is configured as an
eight-lane PCIe link for a data rate of 5.0 Gbps.
“PCIe Mode” in the
Transceiver Architecture in
Stratix IV Devices chapter.
SDI
In SDI mode, the two available subprotocols are:
■3G—third-generation (3 Gbps) SDI at 2967 Mbps or
2970 Mbps.
■HD—high-definition SDI at 1483.5 Mbps or
1485 Mbps.
“SDI Mode” in the Transceiver
Architecture in Stratix IV
Devices chapter.
SONET/SDH
In SONET/SDH mode, the three available subprotocols
and their data rates are:
■OC-12—622 Mbps
■OC-48—2488.32 Mbps
■OC-96—4976.64 Mbps
“SONET/SDH Mode” in the
Transceiver Architecture in
Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Enforce default settings for
this protocol.
Deterministic Latency
GIGE
(OIF) CEI PHY Interface
PCIe
SONET/SDH
XAUI
If you select this option, all mode-specific ports and
settings are used.
—
Table 1–1. MegaWizard Plug-In Manager Options (General Screen for Basic Mode) (Part 3 of 11)
ALTGX Setting Description Reference
1–8 Chapter 1: ALTGX Transceiver Setup Guide for Stratix IV Devices
Parameter Settings
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
What is the operation mode?
Basic
Basic (PMA Direct)
Deterministic Latency
SDI
Serial RapidIO
SONET/SDH
The available operation modes are Receiver only,
Transmitter only, and Receiver and Transmitter.
For Basic (PMA Direct) xN mode, the available operation
modes are Transmitter only and Receiver and
Transmitter. However, if you set the subprotocol to None,
the available operation modes are Receiver only,
Transmitter only, and Receiver and Transmitter.
—
GIGE
The available operation modes are Transmitter only, and
Receiver and Transmitter.
—
PCIe
XAUI
Only Receiver and Transmitter mode is allowed.
—
Table 1–1. MegaWizard Plug-In Manager Options (General Screen for Basic Mode) (Part 4 of 11)
ALTGX Setting Description Reference
Chapter 1: ALTGX Transceiver Setup Guide for Stratix IV Devices 1–9
Parameter Settings
January 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
What is the number of
channels?
Basic
Basic (PMA Direct)
Deterministic Latency
SDI
Serial RapidIO
The number of channels required with the same
configuration. This option determines how many
identical channels this ALTGX instance contains.
—
GIGE
(OIF) CEI PHY Interface
SONET/SDH
This option allows you to select how many channels this
ALTGX instance contains. In these modes, the number of
channels increments by one.
—
PCIe
This is the number of channels required with the same
configuration.
■In a ×4 subprotocol, the number of channels
increments by 4.
■In a ×8 subprotocol, the number of channels
increment by 8.
—
XAUI
This option allows you to select how many identical
channels this ALTGX instance contains. In XAUI mode,
the number of channels increments by 4.
—
Table 1–1. MegaWizard Plug-In Manager Options (General Screen for Basic Mode) (Part 5 of 11)
ALTGX Setting Description Reference
1–10 Chapter 1: ALTGX Transceiver Setup Guide for Stratix IV Devices
Parameter Settings
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
What is the deserializer block
width?
Basic
Basic (PMA Direct)
Deterministic Latency
This option sets the transceiver data path width.
■Single-width—This mode operates from 600 Mbps to
3.75 Gbps.
■Double-width—This mode operates from 1 Gbps to
8.5 Gbps.
“Basic Single-Width Mode
Configurations” and “Basic
Double-Width Mode
Configurations” sections in the
Transceiver Architecture in
Stratix IV Devices chapter.
GIGE
PCIe
SDI
Serial RapidIO
XAUI
These modes only operate in single-width mode.
Double-width mode is not allowed.
—
(OIF) CEI PHY Interface
The (OIF) CEI PHY Interface mode only operates in
double-width mode. Single-width mode is not allowed.
—
SONET/SDH
This option allows you to set the transceiver data path
width.
■Single-width—Selected automatically in OC-12 and
OC-48 configurations. The transceiver data path width
is 8 bits.
■Double-width—Selected automatically in OC-96
configurations. The transceiver data path width is
16 bits.
—
Table 1–1. MegaWizard Plug-In Manager Options (General Screen for Basic Mode) (Part 6 of 11)
ALTGX Setting Description Reference
Chapter 1: ALTGX Transceiver Setup Guide for Stratix IV Devices 1–11
Parameter Settings
January 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
What is the channel width?
Basic
Deterministic Latency
This option determines the FPGA fabric-Transceiver
interface width.
■Single-width mode—Selecting 8 or 10 bits bypasses
the byte serializer/deserializer. Selecting 16 or 20 bits
uses the byte serializer/deserializer.
■Double-width mode—Selecting 16 or 20 bits
bypasses the byte serializer/deserializer. Selecting 32
or 40 bits uses the byte serializer/deserializer.
“Byte Serializer” and “Byte
Deserializer” sections in the
Transceiver Architecture in
Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Basic (PMA Direct)
This option determines the FPGA fabric-Transceiver
interface width.
■Single-width mode—You can select 8 or 10 bits.
■Double-width mode— You can select 16 or 20 bits.
GIGE
This option determines the FPGA fabric-Transceiver
interface width. In GIGE mode, only 8 bits are allowed.
(OIF) CEI PHY Interface
This option selects the FPGA fabric-Transceiver width. In
(OIF) CEI PHY Interface mode, only 32 bits are allowed.
PCIe
This option determines the FPGA fabric-Transceiver
interface width.
■In PCIe Gen1 (2.5 Gbps) mode, 8 and 16 bits are
allowed.
■In PCIe Gen2 (5 Gbps) mode, only 16 bits are allowed.
SDI
This option determines the FPGA fabric-Transceiver
interface width:
■HD mode—10-bit and 20-bit channel widths are
allowed.
■3G mode—only 20-bit channel width is allowed.
■10-bit configuration—the byte serializer is not used.
■20-bit configuration—the byte serializer is used.
Serial RapidIO
The channel width is fixed to 16 in Serial RapidIO mode.
Table 1–1. MegaWizard Plug-In Manager Options (General Screen for Basic Mode) (Part 7 of 11)
ALTGX Setting Description Reference
1–12 Chapter 1: ALTGX Transceiver Setup Guide for Stratix IV Devices
Parameter Settings
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
What is the channel width?
SONET/SDH
This option selects the FPGA fabric-Transceiver interface
width. Depending on your subprotocol selection, choose
one of the following:
■8 bits for OC-12 mode
■16 bits for OC-48 mode
■32 bits for OC-96 mode
“Byte Serializer” and “Byte
Deserializer” sections in the
Transceiver Architecture in
Stratix IV Devices chapter.
XAUI
XAUI mode only operates in single-width mode.
What would you like to base
the setting on?
Basic
Basic (PMA Direct)
You can select one of the following options:
■Data rate—Selecting this option allows you to enter
the transceiver channel serial data rate. Based on the
value you enter, the ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In
Manager populates the input reference clock
frequency options in the What is the input clock
frequency? field. The ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In
Manager determines these input reference clock
frequencies depending on the available multiplier
settings.
■Input clock frequency—Selecting this option allows
you to enter your input clock frequency. Based on the
value you enter, the ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In
Manager populates the data rate options in the What
is the effective data rate? field. The ALTGX
MegaWizard Plug-In Manager determines these data
rate options depending on the available multipler
settings.
—
Table 1–1. MegaWizard Plug-In Manager Options (General Screen for Basic Mode) (Part 8 of 11)
ALTGX Setting Description Reference
Chapter 1: ALTGX Transceiver Setup Guide for Stratix IV Devices 1–13
Parameter Settings
January 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
What is the effective data rate?
Basic
Basic (PMA Direct)
Deterministic Latency
■If you select the Data Rate option in the What would
you like to base the setting on? field, the ALTGX
MegaWizard Plug-In Manager allows you to specify
the effective serial data rate value in this field.
■If you select the Input Clock Frequency option in the
What would you like to base the setting on? field, the
ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager displays the list
of effective serial data rates in this field.
—
GIGE
This option is not available in GIGE mode. The
transceiver channel serial data rate is fixed to 1250 Mbps
in this mode.
—
(OIF) CEI PHY Interface
The allowed effective data rate is between 3125 Mbps
and 6500 Mbps. Enter the transceiver channel’s serial
data rate in this field.
—
PCIe
This option is not available in PCIe mode. The defaults
are:
■2500 Mbps for PCIe Gen1 mode.
■5000 Mbps for PCIe Gen 2 mode.
—
SDI
The effective data rate is fixed at:
■2967 Mbps or 2970 Mbps in 3G mode.
■1483.5 Mbps or 1485 Mbps in HD mode.
—
Serial RapidIO
Enter one of these three data rates in this option:
■1250 Mbps.
■2500 Mbps.
■3125 Mbps.
—
SONET/SDH
The effective data rate is fixed at:
■622 Mbps in OC-12 mode.
■2488.32 Mbps in OC-48 mode.
■ 4976 Mbps in OC-96 mode.
—
XAUI
The effective data rate can be from 3125 Mbps to
3750 Mbps.
—
Table 1–1. MegaWizard Plug-In Manager Options (General Screen for Basic Mode) (Part 9 of 11)
ALTGX Setting Description Reference
1–14 Chapter 1: ALTGX Transceiver Setup Guide for Stratix IV Devices
Parameter Settings
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
What is the input clock
frequency?
Basic
Basic (PMA Direct)
■If you select the Input Clock Frequency option in the
What would you like to base the setting on? field, the
ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager allows you to
specify the input reference clock frequency in this
field.
■If you select the Data Rate option in the What would
you like to base the setting on? field, the ALTGX
MegaWizard Plug-In Manager displays the list of input
reference clock frequencies in this field.
“Input Reference Clocking”
section in the Transceiver
Clocking in Stratix IV Devices
chapter.
Deterministic Latency
GIGE
(OIF) CEI PHY Interface
SDI
SONET/SDH
Based on the effective data rate value in the What is the
effective data rate? field, the ALTGX MegaWizard
Plug-In Manager determines the input reference clock
frequencies depending on the available multiplier
settings.
PCIe
This option is not available in PCIe mode. The input
reference clock frequency is fixed to 100 MHz in PCIe
mode.
Serial RapidIO
This option provides the available input reference clock
frequencies depending on whether your effective serial
data rate is 1250 Mbps, 2500 Mbps, or 3125 Mbps and
the available multiplier settings.
XAUI
This option provides the available input reference clock
frequencies depending on whether your effective serial
data rate is 3125 Mbps or 3750 Mbps and the available
multiplier settings.
Table 1–1. MegaWizard Plug-In Manager Options (General Screen for Basic Mode) (Part 10 of 11)
ALTGX Setting Description Reference
Chapter 1: ALTGX Transceiver Setup Guide for Stratix IV Devices 1–15
Parameter Settings
January 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
Specify base data rate.
Basic
Basic (PMA Direct)
The ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager provides you
the base data rate options for the CMU/advanced
technology extended (ATX) PLL and receiver clock data
recovery (CDR).
If you select a value in this field that is greater than the
value in the What is the effective data rate? field, the
ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager enables the
appropriate local clock divider values. The local divider is
present in the receiver channels.
—
GIGE
This option is not available in this mode because the data
rate is fixed. The ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager
provides you the base data rate options for the CMU PLL
and receiver CDR.
—
(OIF) CEI PHY Interface
Serial RapidIO
XAUI
This option is not available in these modes. The ALTGX
MegaWizard Plug-In Manager provides you the base data
rate options for the CMU PLL and receiver CDR.
—
PCIe
For Gen1 ×1, an optional base data rate of either 2500 or
5000 Mbps is available.
—
SDI
This option is not available this mode as the data rate is
fixed in 3G and HD modes. The ALTGX MegaWizard
Plug-In Manager provides you the base data rate options
for the CMU PLL and receiver CDR.
—
SONET/SDH
This option is not available in this mode as the data rates
are fixed in OC-12, OC-48, and OC-96 modes. The ALTGX
MegaWizard Plug-In Manager provides you the base data
rate options for the CMU PLL and receiver CDR in this
option.
—
Table 1–1. MegaWizard Plug-In Manager Options (General Screen for Basic Mode) (Part 11 of 11)
ALTGX Setting Description Reference
1–16 Chapter 1: ALTGX Transceiver Setup Guide for Stratix IV Devices
Parameter Settings
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
PLL/Ports Screen for the Parameter Settings
Figure 1–4 shows the PLL/Ports screen of the ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager
for the Parameter Settings.
Table 1–2 lists the available options on the PLL/ports screen of the MegaWizard
Plug-In Manager for your ALTGX custom megafunction variation.
Figure 1–4. MegaWizard Plug-In Manager—ALTGX (PLL/Ports Screen)
Table 1–2. MegaWizard Plug-In Manager Options (PLL/Ports Screen) (Part 1 of 3)
ALTGX Setting Description Reference
Train receiver clock and data
recovery (CDR) from
pll_inclk
.
If you select this option, the input reference clock to
the CMU PLL trains the receiver CDR.
Table 1-77 in the Transceiver
Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
chapter.
Use ATX Transmitter PLL
This option is only available for certain data rates.
Refer to the DC and Switching Characteristics for
Stratix IV Devices chapter for the supported data
rates.
This option enables the auxiliary transmitter PLL.
This is a low-jitter PLL that resides between the
transceiver blocks and can be used as a transmitter
PLL.
“Auxiliary Transmit (ATX) PLL Block”
section in the Transceiver Architecture
in Stratix IV Devices, the Transceiver
Clocking in Stratix IV Devices chapter,
and the DC and Switching
Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices
section.
Chapter 1: ALTGX Transceiver Setup Guide for Stratix IV Devices 1–17
Parameter Settings
January 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
Enable PLL phase frequency
detector (PFD) feedback to
compensate latency
uncertainty in
tx_dataout
and
tx_clkout
paths
relative to the reference
clock.
This option applies only when you select
Deterministic Latency functional mode.
“CMU PLL Feedback” section in the
Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV
Devices chapter.
What is the TX PLL
bandwidth mode?
The available options are Auto, Low, Medium, and
High. Select the appropriate option based on your
system requirements.
“PLL Bandwidth Setting” section in
the Transceiver Architecture in Stratix
IV Devices chapter and the DC and
Switching Characteristics for Stratix
IV Devices section.
What is the receiver CDR
bandwidth mode?
The available options are Auto, Low, Medium, and
High. Select the appropriate option based on your
system requirements.
“Clock and Data Recovery Unit”
section in the Transceiver Architecture
in Stratix IV Devices chapter and the
DC and Switching Characteristics for
Stratix IV Devices section.
What is the acceptable PPM
threshold between the
receiver CDR VCO and the
receiver input reference
clock?
In Automatic Lock mode, the CDR remains in
Lock-to-Data (LTD) mode as long as the parts per
million (PPM) difference between the CDR VCO
output clock and the input reference clock is less
than the PPM value that you set in this option. If the
PPM difference is greater than the PPM value that
you set in this option, the CDR switches to
Lock-to-Reference (LTR) mode.
The range of values available in this option is
±62.5 ppm to ±1000 ppm. (1)
“Automatic Lock Mode” section in the
Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV
Devices chapter.
Optional Ports
Create a
gxb_powerdown
port to power down the
transceiver block.
When asserted, this signal powers down the entire
transceiver block. If none of the channels are
instantiated in a transceiver block, the Quartus II
software automatically powers down the entire
transceiver block.
“User Reset and Power Down
Signals” section in the Reset Control
and Power Down in Stratix IV Devices
chapter.
Create a
pll_powerdown
port to power down the TX
PLL.
Each transceiver block has two CMU PLLs. Each
CMU/ATX PLL has a dedicated power down signal
called
pll_powerdown
. This signal powers down
the CMU/ATX PLL.
“User Reset and Power Down
Signals” section in the Reset Control
and Power Down in Stratix IV Devices
chapter.
Create a
rx_analogreset
port for the analog portion of
the receiver.
The receiver analog reset port is available in
Receiver only and Receiver and Transmitter
operation modes. This resets part of the analog
portion of the receiver CDR in the receiver channel.
Altera recommends using this port to implement
the recommended reset sequence. The minimum
pulse width is two parallel clock cycles.
“User Reset and Power Down
Signals” in the Reset Control and
Power Down in Stratix IV Devices
chapter.
Table 1–2. MegaWizard Plug-In Manager Options (PLL/Ports Screen) (Part 2 of 3)
ALTGX Setting Description Reference
1–18 Chapter 1: ALTGX Transceiver Setup Guide for Stratix IV Devices
Parameter Settings
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
Create a
rx_digitalreset
port for the digital portion of
the receiver.
The receiver digital reset port is available in
Receiver only and Receiver and Transmitter
operation modes. This resets the PCS portion of the
receiver channel.
Altera recommends using this port to implement
the recommended reset sequence. The minimum
pulse width is two parallel clock cycles.
“User Reset and Power Down
Signals” section in the Reset Control
and Power Down in Stratix IV Devices
chapter.
Create a
tx_digitalreset
port for the digital portion of
the transmitter.
The transmitter digital reset port is available in
Transmitter only and Receiver and Transmitter
operation modes. This resets the PCS portion of the
transmitter channel.
Altera recommends using this port to implement
the recommended reset sequence. The minimum
pulse width is two parallel clock cycles.
“User Reset and Power Down
Signals” section in the Reset Control
and Power Down in Stratix IV Devices
chapter.
Create a
pll_locked
port to
indicate PLL is in lock with
the reference input clock.
Each CMU/ATX PLL has a dedicated
pll_locked
signal that is fed to the FPGA fabric to indicate
when the PLL is locked to the input reference clock.
“Transceiver Reset Sequences”
section in the Reset Control and
Power Down in Stratix IV Devices
chapter.
Create an
rx_locktorefclk
port to
lock the RX CDR to the
reference clock.
When this signal is asserted high, the LTR/LTD
controller forces the receiver CDR to lock to the
phase and frequency of the input reference clock.
(1), (2)
“LTR/LTD Controller” section in the
Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV
Devices chapter.
Create an
rx_locktodata
port to lock the RX CDR to
the received data.
When this signal is asserted high, the LTR/LTD
controller forces the receiver CDR to lock to the
received data. (1), (2)
“LTR/LTD Controller” section in the
Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV
Devices chapter.
Create an
rx_pll_locked
port to indicate RX CDR is
locked to the input reference
clock.
■In LTR mode, this signal is asserted high to
indicate that the receiver CDR has locked to the
phase and frequency of the input reference
clock.
■In LTD mode, this signal has no significance. (1)
“Lock-to-Reference (LTR) Mode”
section in the Transceiver Architecture
in Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Create an
rx_freqlocked
port to indicate RX CDR is
locked to the received data.
This signal is asserted high to indicate that the
receiver CDR has switched from LTR to LTD mode.
This signal has relevance only in Automatic Lock
mode and may be required to control the
transceiver resets, as described in the User Reset
and Power Down Signals section in the Reset
Control and Power Down in Stratix IV Devices
chapter. (1)
“LTR/LTD Controller” section in the
Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV
Devices chapter.
Notes to Table 1–2:
(1) LTR mode is lock-to-reference mode and LTD mode is lock-to-data mode.
(2) When
rx_locktorefclk
and
rx_locktodata
are both asserted high,
rx_locktodata
takes precedence over
rx_locktorefclk
, forcing
the CDR to lock to the received data. When both these signals are de-asserted, the LTR/LTD controller is configured in Automatic Lock mode.
Table 1–2. MegaWizard Plug-In Manager Options (PLL/Ports Screen) (Part 3 of 3)
ALTGX Setting Description Reference
Chapter 1: ALTGX Transceiver Setup Guide for Stratix IV Devices 1–19
Parameter Settings
January 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
Ports/Calibration Screen for the Parameter Settings
Figure 1–5 shows the Ports/Calibration screen of the ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In
Manager for the Parameter Settings.
Table 1–3 lists the available options on the Ports/Calibration screen of the
MegaWizard Plug-In Manager for your ALTGX custom megafunction variation.
Unless indicated otherwise, the options apply to all functional modes.
Figure 1–5. MegaWizard Plug-In Manager—ALTGX (Ports/Calibration Screen)
Table 1–3. MegaWizard Plug-In Manager Options (Ports/Calibration Screen) (Part 1 of 3)
ALTGX Setting Description Reference
Optional Ports/Controls
Create an
rx_signaldetect
port to
indicate data input signal detection.
This port is only available in Basic
and PCIe mode.
“Signal Threshold Detection Circuitry”
section in the Transceiver Architecture in
Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Enable TX Phase Comp FIFO in register
mode.
This option is only available in
Deterministic Latency mode.
“Deterministic Latency” section in the
Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV
Devices chapter.
Create an
rx_phase_comp_fifo_error
output
port.
This output port indicates a Receiver
Phase Compensation FIFO overflow
or under-run condition.
“Receiver Phase Compensation FIFO Error
Flag” section in the Transceiver
Architecture in Stratix IV Devices chapter.
1–20 Chapter 1: ALTGX Transceiver Setup Guide for Stratix IV Devices
Parameter Settings
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
Create a
tx_phase_comp_fifo_error
output
port.
This output port indicates a
Transmitter Phase Compensation
FIFO overflow or under-run
condition.
“TX Phase Compensation FIFO Status
Signal” section in the Transceiver
Architecture in Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Create an
rx_coreclk
port to connect
to the read clock of the RX phase
compensation FIFO.
You can clock the parallel output data
from the receiver using this optional
input port. This port allows you to
clock the read side of the Receiver
Phase Compensation FIFO with a
user-provided clock (FPGA fabric
clock, FPGA fabric-Transceiver
interface clock, or input reference
clock).
“FPGA Fabric-Transceiver Interface
Clocking” section in the Transceiver
Clocking in Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Create a
tx_coreclk
port to connect
to the write clock of the TX phase
compensation FIFO.
You can clock the parallel transmitter
data generated in the FPGA fabric
using this optional input port. This
port allows you to clock the write
side of the Transmitter Phase
Compensation FIFO with a
user-provided clock (FPGA fabric
clock, FPGA fabric-Transceiver
interface clock, or input reference
clock).
“FPGA Fabric-Transceiver Interface
Clocking” section in the Transceiver
Clocking in Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Create a
tx_forceelecidle
input
port
In Basic and PCIe modes, this
optional input signal places the
transmitter buffer in the electrical
idle state.
“Transceiver Channel Architecture” section
in the Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV
Devices chapter.
Use calibration block. The calibration block is always
enabled.
“Calibration Blocks” section in the
Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV
Devices chapter.
Table 1–3. MegaWizard Plug-In Manager Options (Ports/Calibration Screen) (Part 2 of 3)
ALTGX Setting Description Reference
Chapter 1: ALTGX Transceiver Setup Guide for Stratix IV Devices 1–21
Parameter Settings
January 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
Create an active high
cal_blk_powerdown
to power down
the calibration block.
Asserting this signal high powers
down the calibration block. A
high-to-low transition on this signal
restarts calibration.
“Input Signals to the Calibration Block”
section in the Transceiver Architecture in
Stratix IV Devices chapter.
What is the Analog Power (VCCA_L/R)?
The options available for selection
are based on what you specify in the
Specify base data rate option:
■3.3 V—Available up to 11.3 Gbps
for Stratix IV GT devices only.
■3.0 V—Available up to 8.5 Gbps.
■2.5 V—Available up to 4.25 Gbps.
■AUTO—The ALTGX MegaWizard
Plug-In Manager automatically
sets VCCA_L/R to 2.5 V for the VCO
data rates less than 4.25 Gbps.
or
VCCA_L/R to 3.0 V for the VCO data
rates greater than 4.25 Gbps.
It is up to you to connect the correct
voltage supply to the
V
CCA_L/R
pins on
the board.
“General Requirements to Combine
Channels” section in the Configuring
Multiple Protocols and Data Rates in
Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Table 1–3. MegaWizard Plug-In Manager Options (Ports/Calibration Screen) (Part 3 of 3)
ALTGX Setting Description Reference
1–22 Chapter 1: ALTGX Transceiver Setup Guide for Stratix IV Devices
Parameter Settings
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
Loopback Screen for the Parameter Settings
Figure 1–6 shows the Loopback screen of the ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager
for the Parameter Settings.
Figure 1–6. MegaWizard Plug-In Manager—ALTGX (Loopback Screen)
Chapter 1: ALTGX Transceiver Setup Guide for Stratix IV Devices 1–23
Parameter Settings
January 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
Table 1–4 lists the available options on the Loopback screen of the MegaWizard
Plug-In Manager for your ALTGX custom megafunction variation.
Table 1–4. MegaWizard Plug-In Manager Options (Lpbk Screen)
ALTGX Setting Description Reference
Which loopback option
would you like?
There are two options available:
■No loopback—This is the default mode.
■Serial loopback—If you select serial loopback, the
rx_seriallpbken
port is available to control the serial
loopback feature dynamically.
■1'b1—enables serial loopback
■1'b0—disables serial loopback
This signal is asynchronous to the receiver datapath.
“Serial Loopback” section in
the Transceiver Architecture
in Stratix IV Devices
chapter.
Which reverse loopback
option would you like?
There are three options available:
■No reverse loopback—This is the default mode.
■Reverse Serial loopback (pre-CDR)—This is the
loopback before the receiver’s CDR block to the
transmitter buffer. The receiver path in PCS is active but
the transmitter side is not.
■Reverse Serial loopback—This is a loopback after the
receiver’s CDR block to the transmitter buffer. The receiver
path in PCS is active but the transmitter side is not.
“Loopback Modes” section
in the Transceiver
Architecture in Stratix IV
Devices chapter.
1–24 Chapter 1: ALTGX Transceiver Setup Guide for Stratix IV Devices
Parameter Settings
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
RX Analog Screen for the Parameter Settings
Figure 1–7 shows the RX Analog screen of the ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager
for the Parameter Settings.
Table 1–5 lists the available options on the RX Analog screen of the MegaWizard
Plug-In Manager for your ALTGX custom megafunction variation.
Figure 1–7. MegaWizard Plug-In Manager—ALTGX (RX Analog Screen)
Table 1–5. MegaWizard Plug-In Manager Options (RX Analog Screen) (Part 1 of 2)
ALTGX Setting Description Reference
Enable static equalizer
control.
This option enables the static equalizer
settings.
“Programmable Equalization and DC Gain”
section in the Transceiver Architecture in Stratix
IV Devices chapter and the DC and Switching
Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices section.
What is the DC gain?
This DC gain option has five settings:
■0 – 0 dB
■1 – 3 dB
■2 – 6 dB
■3 – 9 dB
■4 – 12 dB
“Programmable Equalization and DC Gain”
section in the Transceiver Architecture in Stratix
IV Devices chapter.
Chapter 1: ALTGX Transceiver Setup Guide for Stratix IV Devices 1–25
Parameter Settings
January 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
What is the receiver common
mode voltage (RX VCM)?
The receiver common mode voltage is
programmable to 0.82 V or 1.1 V.
“Receiver Channel Datapath” section in the
Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
chapter.
Force signal detection.
In PCIe mode, this option disables the
signal threshold detect circuit for the
receiver CDR. The receiver CDR no
longer depends on the signal detect
criterion to switch from LTR to LTD
mode.
“Signal Threshold Detection Circuitry” section
in the Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV
Devices chapter.
What is the signal detect
threshold?
Use this option in PCIe or Basic mode
with the 8B/10B block enabled and the
rx_signaldetect
port selected to
determine the threshold level for the
signal detect circuit.
■PIPE mode—The levels are fixed.
■Basic mode—A range of values
depending on the data rate are
available. The levels will be
determined after characterization.
The ALTGX settings have the following
threshold voltages (Vth):
setting 8: 50 mV
setting 7: 45 mV
setting 6: 40 mV
setting 5: 35 mV
setting 4: 30 mV
setting 3: 25 mV
setting 2: 20 mV
setting 1: 15 mV
The
rx_signaldetect
status signal is
asserted when the receiver peak-to-peak
differential input voltage VID (diff p-p) is
higher than Vth multiplied by 4.
“Signal Threshold Detection Circuitry” section
in the Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV
Devices chapter.
Use external receiver
termination.
Select this option if you want to use an
external termination resistor instead of
differential on-chip termination (OCT). If
checked, this option turns off the
receiver OCT.
“Programmable Differential On-Chip
Termination” section in the Transceiver
Architecture in Stratix IV Devices chapter.
What is the receiver
termination resistance?
This option allows you to select the
receiver differential termination value.
The settings allowed are:
■85
■100
■120
■150.
“Programmable Differential On-Chip
Termination” section in the Transceiver
Architecture in Stratix IV Devices chapter, and
the DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix
IV Devices section.
Table 1–5. MegaWizard Plug-In Manager Options (RX Analog Screen) (Part 2 of 2)
ALTGX Setting Description Reference
1–26 Chapter 1: ALTGX Transceiver Setup Guide for Stratix IV Devices
Parameter Settings
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
TX Analog Screen for the Parameter Settings
Figure 1–8 shows the TX Analog screen of the ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager
for the Parameter Settings.
Figure 1–8. MegaWizard Plug-In Manager—ALTGX (TX Analog Screen)
Chapter 1: ALTGX Transceiver Setup Guide for Stratix IV Devices 1–27
Parameter Settings
January 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
Table 1–6 lists the available options on the TX Analog screen of the MegaWizard
Plug-In Manager for your ALTGX custom megafunction variation.
Table 1–6. MegaWizard Plug-In Manager Options (TX Analog Screen) (Part 1 of 2)
ALTGX Setting Description Reference
What is the transmitter buffer
power (VCCH)?
The options available for selection are based on
what you enter in the What is the effective data
rate? option.
■1.4 V—Available up to 8.5 Gbps.
■1.5 V is available up to 6.5 Gbps (not available
for Stratix IV GT).
■AUTO—The ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In
Manager automatically sets VCCH to 1.5 V for
the effective data rates less than 6.5 Gbps
or
VCCH to 1.4 V for effective data rates greater
than 6.5 Gbps.
It is up to you to connect the correct voltage
supply to the
V
CCH
pins on the board.
“Programmable Transmit Output
Buffer Power (VCCH)” section in the
Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV
Devices chapter.
What is the transmitter
common mode voltage (VCM)?
The transmitter common mode voltage is fixed to
0.65 V.
“Transmitter Output Buffer” in the
Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV
Devices chapter and the DC and
Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV
Devices section.
Use external transmitter
termination.
This option is available if you want to use an
external termination resistor instead of the
differential OCT. Checking this option turns off the
transmitter differential OCT.
“Programmable Transmitter
Termination” section in the Transceiver
Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
chapter and the DC and Switching
Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices
section.
Select the transmitter
termination resistance.
This option selects the transmitter differential
termination value. The settings allowed are 85 
100 , 120 , and 150 .
“Programmable Transmitter
Termination” section in the Transceiver
Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
chapter and the DC and Switching
Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices
section.
What is the voltage output
differential (VOD) control
setting?
This option selects the VOD of the transmitter
buffer. The available VOD settings change based
on the transmitter termination resistance value.
“Programmable Output Differential
Voltage” section in the Transceiver
Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
chapter and the DC and Switching
Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices
section.
What is the pre-emphasis first
post-tap setting (% of VOD)?
This option sets the amount of pre-emphasis on
the transmitter buffer using first post-tap.
“Programmable Pre-Emphasis”
section in the Transceiver Architecture
in Stratix IV Devices chapter.
1–28 Chapter 1: ALTGX Transceiver Setup Guide for Stratix IV Devices
Reconfiguration Settings
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
Reconfiguration Settings
This section describes the various dynamic reconfiguration modes and settings for
Stratix IV GX and GT transceivers.
In Reconfiguration Settings, when you enable the Enable Channel and Transmitter
PLL reconfiguration option, the following screens become available:
■Modes
■Transmitter PLLs
■Clocking/Interface
The following sections describe these screens and their corresponding settings.
What is the pre-emphasis
pre-tap setting (% of VOD)?
This option sets the amount of pre-emphasis on
the transmitter buffer using pre-tap.
“Programmable Pre-Emphasis”
section in the Transceiver Architecture
in Stratix IV Devices chapter.
What is the pre-emphasis
second post-tap setting (% of
VOD)?
This option sets the amount of pre-emphasis on
the transmitter buffer using second post-tap.
“Programmable Pre-Emphasis”
section in the Transceiver Architecture
in Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Table 1–6. MegaWizard Plug-In Manager Options (TX Analog Screen) (Part 2 of 2)
ALTGX Setting Description Reference
Chapter 1: ALTGX Transceiver Setup Guide for Stratix IV Devices 1–29
Reconfiguration Settings
January 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
Modes Screen for the Reconfiguration Settings
Figure 1–9 shows the Modes screen, listing the various dynamic reconfiguration
modes available.
Figure 1–9. MegaWizard Plug-In Manager—Reconfiguration Settings
1–30 Chapter 1: ALTGX Transceiver Setup Guide for Stratix IV Devices
Reconfiguration Settings
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
Table 1–7 lists the different options available in the Modes screen of the MegaWizard
Plug-In Manager for your ALTGX custom megafunction variation.
Table 1–7. MegaWizard Plug-In Manager Options (Modes Screen) (Part 1 of 2)
ALTGX Setting Description Reference
Dynamic Reconfiguration Settings
What do you want to be able
to dynamically reconfigure in
the transceiver?
The different dynamic reconfiguration modes available are
listed in the Reconfiguration Settings screen. Based on
which portion of the transceiver you want to reconfigure,
select the corresponding options and connect the
ALTGX_RECONFIG instance to the ALTGX instance.
■Analog controls (VOD, Pre-emphasis, and Manual
Equalization and EyeQ)—Enable this option to dynamically
reconfigure the PMA control settings similar to VOD,
pre-emphasis, manual equalization, DC gain, and EyeQ.
■Enable adaptive equalizer control—Selecting this option
enables the Adaptive Equalization (AEQ) hardware and
provides the following additional ports:
■
aeq_togxb[]
■
aeq_fromgxb[]
These ports provide the interface between the receiver
channel and the dynamic reconfiguration controller.
■Offset cancellation for receiver channels—This option is
enabled by default for Receiver only and Receiver and
Transmitter configurations. It is not available for
Transmitter only configurations.
Ensure that you connect a dynamic reconfiguration
controller to all the transceiver channels in the design.
“Dynamic Reconfiguration
Modes Implementation”
section, “PMA Controls
Reconfiguration Mode
Details” section, “Enabling
the AEQ Control Logic and
AEQ Hardware” section, and
the “Offset Cancellation
Feature” section in the
Dynamic Reconfiguration in
Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Enable Channel and
Transmitter PLL
Reconfiguration
You must enable this option to reconfigure one of the
following: Transmitter local divider block, CMU PLL,
Transceiver channel, or Both the CMU PLL and transceiver
channel.
■Channel Interface—This option allows channel interface
reconfiguration.
■Use alternate CMU Transmitter PLL—This option sets up
the alternate PLL so that the transceiver channel can
optionally select between the output of the main and
alternate transmitter PLL.
Use additional CMU/ATX Transmitter PLLs from outside
the Transceiver Block—This option allows you to select a
maximum of four transmitter PLLs. For example, you can
select the ATX PLL as the main PLL and three additional
PLLs.
■How many additional PLLs are used?—You can have a
maximum of two PLLs outside the transceiver block.
“Transceiver Channel
Reconfiguration Modes
Details” section, “FPGA
Fabric-Transceiver Channel
Interface Selection” section,
“Transceiver Channel
Reconfiguration Modes
Details” section. and the
“Multi-PLL Settings”
section in the Transceiver
Architecture in Stratix IV
Devices chapter.
Chapter 1: ALTGX Transceiver Setup Guide for Stratix IV Devices 1–31
Reconfiguration Settings
January 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
Transmitter PLL Settings
Depending on the number of additional PLLs you select in the How many additional
PLLs are used? option in Reconfiguration Settings, the corresponding PLL screens
become available.
Each of these PLL screens have the same settings available for selection. Table 1–8 lists
each of these settings.
1The Main PLL is the PLL you configure in the General screen. Therefore, some of the
options are already enabled or disabled for this PLL. Some of the options differ when
compared with the additional transmitter PLLs.
How many input clocks are
used?
Enter the number of input clocks available for selection for
the transmitter PLLs and receiver PLL. You have a choice of
up to 10 input clock sources (clock 1, clock 2, and so on).
“Guidelines for Specifying
the Input Reference Clocks”
section in the Dynamic
Reconfiguration in Stratix
IV Devices chapter.
What is the starting channel
number?
You must set the starting channel number of the first ALTGX
instance controlled by the dynamic reconfiguration controller
to 0. Set the starting channel number of the consecutive
ALTGX instances controlled by the same dynamic
reconfiguration controller, if any, in the next available
multiples of 4.
“Logical Channel
Addressing while
Reconfiguring the PMA
Controls” section in the
Dynamic Reconfiguration in
Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Table 1–7. MegaWizard Plug-In Manager Options (Modes Screen) (Part 2 of 2)
ALTGX Setting Description Reference
1–32 Chapter 1: ALTGX Transceiver Setup Guide for Stratix IV Devices
Reconfiguration Settings
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
Figure 1–10 shows the options available on the Main PLL screen of the ALTGX
MegaWizard Plug-In Manager.
Table 1–8 lists the available options on the Main PLL screen of the MegaWizard
Plug-In Manager for your ALTGX custom megafunction variation.
Figure 1–10. MegaWizard Plug-In Manager Options—Main PLL Screen
Table 1–8. MegaWizard Plug-In Manager Options (Main PLL Screen) (Part 1 of 3)
ALTGX Setting Description Reference
Main Tx PLL/Rx PLL Settings
Use central clock divider to
drive the transmitter
channels using ×4/×N lines
If this option is enabled, the transmitter PLL is outside the
transceiver block. If this option is disabled, the transmitter
PLL is one of the CMU PLLs within the same transceiver
block.
“Selecting the PLL Logical
Reference Index for
Additional PLLs” and the
“Multi-PLL Settings”
sections in the Dynamic
Reconfiguration in Stratix
IV Devices chapter.
What is the PLL logical
reference index (used in
reconfiguration)?
The PLL logical reference index is selected based on the
location of the alternate PLL. If the Use central clock divider
to drive the transmitter channels using ×4/×N lines option is
unchecked this must be 0 or 1, otherwise this must be 2 or 3.
“Selecting the PLL Logical
Reference Index for
Additional PLLs” and
“Selecting the Logical
Reference Index of the CMU
PLL” sections in the
Dynamic Reconfiguration in
Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Chapter 1: ALTGX Transceiver Setup Guide for Stratix IV Devices 1–33
Reconfiguration Settings
January 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
What is the selected input
clock source for the Rx/Tx
PLLs?
Assign identification numbers to all input reference clocks
that are used by the transmitter PLLs in their corresponding
PLL screens. You can set up a maximum of 10 input
reference clocks and assign identification numbers from 1 to
10.
“Guidelines for Specifying
the Input Reference Clocks”
section in the Dynamic
Reconfiguration in Stratix
IV Devices chapter.
What is the protocol to be
reconfigured to?
Select the desired functional mode here, if you intend to
dynamically reconfigure the transceiver channel to a different
functional mode using the alternate transmitter PLL.
“Channel Reconfiguration
with Transmitter PLL Select
Mode Details” in the
Dynamic Reconfiguration in
Stratix IV Devices chapter.
What is the subprotocol to be
reconfigured to?
This option is not available for Basic, (OIF) CEI PHY
Interface, Serial RapidIO, GIGE, and XAUI functional modes.
This option is available for the following protocols and
subprotocols:
■Protocol = PCIe; Subprotocols = Gen 1 and Gen 2
■Protocol = SDI; Subprotocols = 3G and HD
■Protocol = SONET/SDH; Subprotocols = OC12, OC48, and
OC96
—
What would you like to base
the setting on?
This option is available only for Basic mode.You can select
one of the following options for the alternate transmitter PLL:
■Input clock frequency—Selecting this option allows you
to enter your input clock frequency. Based on the value
you enter, the ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager
populates the data rate options in the What is the effective
data rate? field. The ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager
determines these data rate options depending on the
available multiplier settings.
■Data rate—Selecting this option allows you to enter the
transceiver channel serial data rate. Based on the value
you enter, the ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager
populates the input reference clock frequency options in
the What is the input clock frequency? field. The ALTGX
MegaWizard Plug-In Manager determines these input
reference clock frequencies depending on the available
multiplier settings.
—
What is the data rate?
These settings are to dynamically reconfigure the transceiver
channel to listen to the alternate transmitter PLL.
■If you select the data rate option in the What would you
like to base the setting on? field, the ALTGX MegaWizard
Plug-In Manager allows you to specify the effective serial
data rate value in this field.
■If you select the input clock frequency option in the What
would you like to base the setting on? field, the ALTGX
MegaWizard Plug-In Manager displays the list of effective
serial data rates in this field.
—
Table 1–8. MegaWizard Plug-In Manager Options (Main PLL Screen) (Part 2 of 3)
ALTGX Setting Description Reference
1–34 Chapter 1: ALTGX Transceiver Setup Guide for Stratix IV Devices
Reconfiguration Settings
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
What is the input clock
frequency?
These settings are to dynamically reconfigure the transceiver
channel to listen to the alternate transmitter PLL.
■If you select the input clock frequency option in the What
would you like to base the setting on? field, the ALTGX
MegaWizard Plug-In Manager displays the list of effective
serial data rates in this field.
■If you select the data rate option in the What would you
like to base the setting on? field, the ALTGX MegaWizard
Plug-In Manager allows you to specify the effective serial
data rate value in this field.
“CMU PLL Reconfiguration
Mode Details” section in the
Dynamic Reconfiguration in
Stratix IV Devices chapter.
What is the PLL bandwith
mode?
The available options are Auto, Low, Medium, and High.
Select the appropriate option based on your system
requirements.
“PLL Bandwidth Setting”
section in the Transceiver
Architecture in Stratix IV
Devices chapter.
Create powerdown port to
power down the PLL.
Each transceiver block has two CMU PLLs. Each CMU/ATX
PLL has a dedicated power down signal called
pll_powerdown
. This signal powers down the CMU PLL.
“User Reset and
Power-Down Signals”
section in the Reset Control
and Power Down in Stratix
IV Devices chapter.
Create locked port to indicate
that the PLL is in lock with
the reference clock.
Each CMU/ATX PLL has a dedicated
pll_locked
signal that
is fed to the FPGA fabric to indicate when the PLL is locked to
the input reference clock.
“User Reset and
Power-Down Signals”
section in the Reset Control
and Power Down in Stratix
IV Devices chapter.
Use Auxiliary Transmitter
(ATX) PLL (available only if
central clock divider is used)
This option is only available for certain data rates. Refer to the
DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices
chapter for the supported data rates.
This option enables the auxiliary transmitter PLL. This is a
low-jitter PLL that resides between the transceiver blocks and
can be used as a transmitter PLL.
“Auxiliary Transmit (ATX)
PLL Block” section in the
Transceiver Architecture in
Stratix IV Devices chapter
and the DC and Switching
Characteristics for Stratix IV
Devices section.
Table 1–8. MegaWizard Plug-In Manager Options (Main PLL Screen) (Part 3 of 3)
ALTGX Setting Description Reference
Chapter 1: ALTGX Transceiver Setup Guide for Stratix IV Devices 1–35
Reconfiguration Settings
January 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
Clocking/Interface Screen for the Reconfiguration Settings
Figure 1–11 shows the Clocking/Interface screen of the ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In
Manager for the Reconfiguration settings.
Table 1–9 lists the available options on the Clocking/Interface screen of the
MegaWizard Plug-In Manager for your ALTGX custom megafunction variation.
1This screen is not available for Basic (PMA Direct) ×1 and xN configurations.
Figure 1–11. MegaWizard Plug-In Manager Options (Clocking/Interface Screen)
Table 1–9. MegaWizard Plug-In Manager Options (Clocking/Interface Screen) (Part 1 of 2)
ALTGX Setting Description Reference
Dynamic Reconfiguration Channel Internal and Interface Settings
How should the receivers be
clocked?
Select one of the following available options:
■Share a single transmitter core clock between receivers
■Use the respective channel transmitter core clocks
■Use the respective channel receiver core clocks
“Clocking/Interface
Options” section in the
Dynamic Reconfiguration in
Stratix IV Devices chapter.
1–36 Chapter 1: ALTGX Transceiver Setup Guide for Stratix IV Devices
Protocol Settings
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
Protocol Settings
This section describes the various screens available to set up the PCS blocks of the
Stratix IV transceiver.
1Protocol Settings are not available for Basic (PMA Direct) functional mode.
Based on the protocol you select in the General screen of Parameter Settings, the
screens listed in Table 1–10 become available.
The following sections describe these screens and the available settings for each of
them.
How should the transmitters
be clocked?
Select one of the following available options:
■Share a single transmitter core clock between
transmitters
■Use the respective channel transmitter core clocks
“Clocking/Interface
Options” section in the
Dynamic Reconfiguration in
Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Create an 'rx_revbitorderwa'
input port to use receiver
enable bit reversal
This optional input port allows you to dynamically reverse the
bit order at the output of the receiver word aligner.
“Word Aligner” section in
the Transceiver Architecture
in Stratix IV Devices
chapter.
Check a control box to use
the corresponding control
port.
You can select various control and status signals depending
on what protocol(s) you intend to dynamically reconfigure
the transceiver channel to.
“FPGA Fabric-Transceiver
Channel Interface
Selection” section in the
Dynamic Reconfiguration in
Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Table 1–9. MegaWizard Plug-In Manager Options (Clocking/Interface Screen) (Part 2 of 2)
ALTGX Setting Description Reference
Table 1–10. Protocol Settings
Protocols
Protocol Settings Screens
8B/10B Word Aligner Rate match/Byte order
Basic Y(Basic/8B10B) Y Y
Deterministic Latency Y Det. Latency/8B10B) Y —
SDI Y SDI/8B10B) Y —
Serial RapidIO Y Serial RapidIO/8B10B) Y Y
Chapter 1: ALTGX Transceiver Setup Guide for Stratix IV Devices 1–37
Protocol Settings
January 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
8B10B Screen for the Protocol Settings
Figure 1–12 shows the 8B10B screen of the MegaWizard Plug-In Manager for the
Protocol Settings.
Table 1–11 lists the available options on the 8B10B screen of the MegaWizard Plug-In
Manager for your ALTGX custom megafunction variation.
Figure 1–12. MegaWizard Plug-In Manager—ALTGX (8B10B Screen)
Table 1–11. MegaWizard Plug-In Manager Options (8B10B Screen) (Part 1 of 3)
ALTGX Setting Description Reference
Enable low latency PCS mode.
This option disables all the PCS blocks except the
Transmitter/Receiver Phase Comp FIFO and optional
byte serializer/de-serializer.
“Low Latency PCS Datapath”
section in the Transceiver
Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
chapter.
Enable 8B/10B
decoder/encoder.
This option is available if the channel width is 8-bits,
16-bits, or 32-bits.
“8B/10B Decoder” section in the
Transceiver Architecture in Stratix
IV Devices chapter.
Create a
tx_forcedisp
to
enable Force disparity and use
tx_dispval
to code up the
incoming word using positive
or negative disparity.
8B/10B encoder force disparity control:
■When asserted high—forces the 8B/10B encoder to
encode the data on the
tx_datain
port with a
positive or negative disparity depending on the
tx_dispval
signal level.
■When de-asserted low—the 8B/10B encoder
encodes the data on the
tx_datain
port according
to the 8B/10B running disparity rules.
“8B/10B Encoder” and
“Transceiver Port Lists” sections
in the Transceiver Architecture in
Stratix IV Devices chapter.
1–38 Chapter 1: ALTGX Transceiver Setup Guide for Stratix IV Devices
Protocol Settings
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
Create an
rx_ctrldetect
port to indicate 8B/10B
decoder has detected a control
code.
This is an output status signal that the 8B/10B
decoder forwards to the FPGA fabric. This signal
indicates whether the decoded 8-bit code group is a
data or control code group on this port.
If the received 10-bit code group is one of the 12
control code groups (/Kx.y/) specified in the
IEEE802.3 specification, this signal is driven high.
If the received 10-bit code group is a data code group
(/Dx.y/), this signal is driven low.
The signal width is 1, 2, and 4 bits for a channel width
of 8 bits, 16 bits, and 32 bits, respectively.
“8B/10B Decoder” section in the
Transceiver Architecture in Stratix
IV Devices chapter.
Create an
rx_errdetect
port
to indicate 8B/10B decoder
has detected an error code.
This is an output status signal that the 8B/10B
decoder forwards to the FPGA fabric and indicates an
8B/10B code group violation.
This signal is asserted high if the received 10-bit code
group has a code violation or disparity error. It is used
along with the
rx_disperr
signal to differentiate
between a code violation error and/or a disparity error.
The signal width is 1, 2 and 4 bits for a channel width
of 8 bits, 16 bits, and 32 bits, respectively.
“8B/10B Decoder” section in the
Transceiver Architecture in Stratix
IV Devices chapter.
Create an
rx_disperr
port to
indicate 8B/10B decoder has
detected a disparity error.
This is an output status signal that the 8B/10B
decoder forwards to the FPGA fabric.
This signal is asserted high if the received 10-bit code
or data group has a disparity error. When this signal
goes high,
rx_errdetect
is also asserted high.
The signal width is 1, 2, and 4 bits for a channel width
of 8 bits, 16 bits, and 32 bits, respectively.
“8B/10B Decoder” section in the
Transceiver Architecture in Stratix
IV Devices chapter.
Create an
rx_runningdisp
port to indicate the current
running disparity of the 8B10B
decoded byte.
This is an output status signal that the 8B/10B
decoder forwards to the FPGA fabric to indicate the
current running disparity of the 8B/10B decoded byte.
“8B/10B Decoder” section of
Table 1-77 in the Transceiver
Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
chapter.
Flip receiver output data bits.
This option reverses the bit order of the parallel
receiver data at a byte level at the output of the
receiver phase compensation FIFO. For example, if the
16-bit parallel receiver data at the output of the
receiver phase compensation FIFO is
'10111100 10101101' (16'hBCAD), enabling this
option reverses the data on
rx_dataout
port to
'00111101 10110101' (16'h3DB5).
—
Flip transmitter input data bits.
This option reverses the bit order of the parallel
transmitter data at a byte level at the input of the
transmitter phase compensation FIFO. For example, if
the 16-bit parallel transmitter data at the
tx_datain
port is '10111100 10101101' (16'hBCAD), enabling
this option reverses the input data to the transmitter
phase compensation FIFO to
'00111101 10110101' (16'h3DB5).
—
Table 1–11. MegaWizard Plug-In Manager Options (8B10B Screen) (Part 2 of 3)
ALTGX Setting Description Reference
Chapter 1: ALTGX Transceiver Setup Guide for Stratix IV Devices 1–39
Protocol Settings
January 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
Enable transmitter bit reversal.
Enabling this option in:
■Single-width mode—the 8-bit
D[7:0]
or 10-bit
D[9:0]
data at the input of the serializer gets
rewired to
D[0:7]
or
D[0:9]
, respectively.
■Double-width mode—the 16-bit
D[15:0]
or 20-bit
D[19:0]
data at the input of the serializer gets
rewired to
D[0:15
] or
D[0:19]
, respectively.
For example, if the 8-bit parallel data at the input of the
serializer is '00111101', enabling this option reverses
this serializer input data to '10111100.'
“Transmitter Bit Reversal” section
in the Transceiver Architecture in
Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Create a
tx_invpolarity
port to allow Transmitter
polarity inversion.
This optional port allows you to dynamically reverse
the polarity of every bit of the data word fed to the
serializer in the transmitter data path. Use this option
when the positive and negative signals of the
differential output from the transmitter (
tx_dataout
)
are erroneously swapped on the board.
“Transmitter Polarity Inversion”
section in the Transceiver
Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
chapter.
Create
tx_bitslipboundary
select
port to control the
number of words slipped in
the TX bitslipper.
You can only select this option when you use the
Transmitter only or Receiver and Transmitter
operation mode. This option enables the
tx_bitslipboundaryselect
input to control the
number of bits slipped in the TX bitslipper.
—
Table 1–11. MegaWizard Plug-In Manager Options (8B10B Screen) (Part 3 of 3)
ALTGX Setting Description Reference
1–40 Chapter 1: ALTGX Transceiver Setup Guide for Stratix IV Devices
Protocol Settings
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
Word Aligner Screen for the Protocol Settings
Figure 1–13 shows the Word Aligner screen of the MegaWizard Plug-In Manager for
the Protocol Settings.
Figure 1–13. MegaWizard Plug-In Manager—ALTGX (Word Aligner Screen)
Chapter 1: ALTGX Transceiver Setup Guide for Stratix IV Devices 1–41
Protocol Settings
January 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
Table 1–12 lists the available options on the Word Aligner screen of the MegaWizard
Plug-In Manager for your ALTGX custom megafunction variation.
1The word aligner and rate matcher operations and patterns are pre-configured for
PCIe, GIGE, and XAUI modes, and cannot be altered.
Table 1–12. MegaWizard Plug-In Manager Options (Word Aligner Screen) (Part 1 of 4)
ALTGX Setting Description Reference
Use manual word alignment
mode.
Enabling this option sets the word aligner in Manual
Alignment mode. In Manual Alignment mode, the
word aligner operation is controlled by the input signal
rx_enapatternalign
.
“Manual Alignment Mode Word
Aligner with 8-bit PMA-PCS
Interface Modes” and “Manual
Alignment Mode Word Aligner
with 10-bit PMA-PCS Interface
Modes” sections in the
Transceiver Architecture in Stratix
IV Devices chapter.
When should the word aligner
realign?
Two options are available in manual mode:
■Realign continuously while the
rx_enapatternalign
signal is high.
■Realign at the rising edge of the
rx_enapatternalign
signal.
“Manual Alignment Mode Word
Aligner with 8-bit PMA-PCS
Interface Modes” and “Manual
Alignment Mode Word Aligner
with 10-bit PMA-PCS Interface
Modes” sections in the
Transceiver Architecture in Stratix
IV Devices chapter.
Use manual bitslipping mode.
This option sets the word aligner in Bit-Slip mode.
Enabling this option creates an input signal
rx_bitslip
to control the word aligner. At every
rising edge of the
rx_bitslip
signal, the bit slip
circuitry slips one bit into the received data stream,
effectively shifting the word boundary by one bit.
SDI
Because word alignment and framing occur after
de-scrambling, the word aligner in the receiver data
path is not useful in SDI systems. Altera recommends
driving the ALTGX
rx_bitslip
signal low to prevent
the word aligner from inserting bits in the received
data stream.
“Word Aligner” section in the
Transceiver Architecture in Stratix
IV Devices chapter.
Use the Automatic
synchronization state machine
mode.
This option sets the word aligner in Automatic
Synchronization State Machine mode. This mode is
available only in Single-width mode for 8B/10B
encoded data:
■10-bit PCS-PMA Interface where the 8B/10B
encoder is enabled
or
■10-bit PCS-PMA Interface where the 8B/10B is
disabled but the data is already 8B/10B encoded
“Automatic Synchronization State
Machine Mode Word Aligner with
10-bit PMA-PCS Interface Mode”
section in the Transceiver
Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
chapter.
1–42 Chapter 1: ALTGX Transceiver Setup Guide for Stratix IV Devices
Protocol Settings
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
Number of consecutive valid
words before synch state is
reached.
Use this option in Automatic Synchronization State
Machine mode to indicate the number of consecutive
valid words that it must receive between erroneous
words to reduce the error count by one. The
rx_syncstatus
stays high as long as the error count
is less than the programmed error count.
“Automatic Synchronization State
Machine Mode Word Aligner with
10-bit PMA-PCS Interface Mode”
section in the Transceiver
Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
chapter.
Number of bad data words
before loss of synch state.
Use this option in Automatic Synchronization State
Machine mode to indicate the number of bad data
words (error count) that it must receive to lose
synchronization. The loss-of-synch is indicated by the
rx_syncstatus
signal going low.
“Automatic Synchronization State
Machine Mode Word Aligner with
10-bit PMA-PCS Interface Mode”
section in the Transceiver
Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
chapter.
Number of valid patterns
before synch state is reached.
Use this option in Automatic Synchronization State
Machine mode to indicate the number of word
alignment patterns that it must receive without
intermediate erroneous code groups to achieve
synchronization. The
rx_syncstatus
signal is driven
high to indicate that synchronization has been
achieved.
“Automatic Synchronization State
Machine Mode Word Aligner with
10-bit PMA-PCS Interface Mode”
section in the Transceiver
Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
chapter.
What is the word alignment
pattern length?
This option sets the word alignment pattern length.
The available choices depend on the following
conditions:
■Whether the data is 8B/10B encoded or not
■Which mode is used in Single-width mode:
■for 8-bit PCS-PMA Interface (8B/10B encoder
disabled), only 16 bits are allowed.
■for 10-bit PCS-PMA, 7 and 10 bits are allowed.
■Which mode is used in Double-width mode:
■for 16-bit PCS-PMA Interface (8B/10B encoder
disabled), 8, 16, and 32 bits are allowed.
■for 20-bit PCS-PMA Interface, 7, 10, and 20 bits
are allowed.
“Word Aligner in Single-Width
Mode” and “Word Aligner in
Double-Width Mode” sections in
the Transceiver Architecture in
Stratix IV Devices chapter.
What is the word alignment
pattern?
Enter the word alignment pattern in MSB to LSB order
with MSB at the left most bit position. The length of
the alignment pattern is based on the What is the
word alignment pattern length? option. The word
aligner restores the word boundary by looking for the
pattern that you enter here. For example, if you want to
set the word alignment pattern to /K28.5/:
■You must enter the word alignment pattern
length: 10.
■You must enter the word alignment pattern:
0101111100 (17C).
“Word Aligner in Single-Width
Mode” and “Word Aligner in
Double-Width Mode” sections in
the Transceiver Architecture in
Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Table 1–12. MegaWizard Plug-In Manager Options (Word Aligner Screen) (Part 2 of 4)
ALTGX Setting Description Reference
Chapter 1: ALTGX Transceiver Setup Guide for Stratix IV Devices 1–43
Protocol Settings
January 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
Flip word alignment pattern
bits.
When this option is enabled, the ALTGX MegaWizard
Plug-In Manager flips the bit order of the pattern that
you enter in the What is the word alignment pattern?
option and uses the flipped version as the word
alignment pattern. For example, if you enter
'0101111100' (17C) as the word alignment pattern
and enable this option, the word aligner uses
'0011111010' as the word alignment pattern.
—
Enable run-length violation
checking with a run length of:
This option creates the output signal
rx_rlv
. Enabling
this option also activates the run-length violation
circuit. If the number of continuous 1s and 0s exceeds
the number that you set in this option, the run-length
violation circuit asserts the
rx_rlv
signal. The
rx_rlv
signal is asynchronous to the receiver data
path and is asserted for a minimum of two recovered
clock cycles in Single-width mode. Similarly, it is
asserted for a minimum of three recovered clock
cycles in Double-width mode.
The run length limits are as follows:
■Single-width mode:
■8-bit and 16-bit channel width: 4 to 128 in
increments of four
■10-bit and 20-bit channel width: 5 to 160 in
increments of five
■Double-width mode:
■16-bit and 32-bit channel width: 8 to 512 in
increments of eight
■20-bit and 40-bit channel width: 10 to 640 in
increments of 10
“Programmable Run Length
Violation Detection” section in the
Transceiver Architecture in Stratix
IV Devices chapter.
Enable word aligner output
reverse bit ordering.
In manual bit-slip mode, this option creates an input
port
rx_revbitorderwa
to dynamically reverse the
bit order at the output of the receiver word aligner.
“Receiver Bit Reversal” section in
the Transceiver Architecture in
Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Create an
rx_syncstatus
output port for pattern
detector and word aligner.
This is an output status signal that the word aligner
forwards to the FPGA fabric to indicate that
synchronization has been achieved. This signal is
synchronous with the parallel receiver data on the
rx_dataout
port. This signal is not available in
bit-slip mode. Signal width is 1, 2, and 4 bits for a
channel width of 8-bits/10-bits, 16-bits/20-bits, and
32-bits/40-bits, respectively.
Table 1-77, “Word Aligner in
Single-Width Mode” and “Word
Aligner in Double-Width Mode”
sections in the Transceiver
Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
chapter.
Create an
rx_patterndetect
port to
indicate pattern detected.
This is an output status signal that the word aligner
forwards to the FPGA fabric to indicate that the word
alignment pattern programmed has been detected in
the current word boundary. Signal width is 1, 2, and 4
bits for a channel width of 8-bits/10-bits,
16-bits/20-bits, and 32-bits/40-bits, respectively.
Table 1-77 and “Word Aligner in
Single-Width Mode” and “Word
Aligner in Double-Width Mode”
sections in the Transceiver
Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
chapter.
Table 1–12. MegaWizard Plug-In Manager Options (Word Aligner Screen) (Part 3 of 4)
ALTGX Setting Description Reference
1–44 Chapter 1: ALTGX Transceiver Setup Guide for Stratix IV Devices
Protocol Settings
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
Create an
rx_invpolarity
port to enable word aligner
polarity inversion.
This optional port allows you to dynamically reverse
the polarity of every bit of the received data at the
input of the word aligner. Use this option when the
positive and negative signals of the differential input to
the receiver (
rx_datain
) are erroneously swapped on
the board.
“Receiver Polarity Inversion”
section in the Transceiver
Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
chapter.
Create an
rx_revbyteorderwa
to
enable Receiver symbol swap.
This is an optional input port that is available only in
the double-width mode. It creates an
rx_revbyteorderwa
port to dynamically swap the
MSByte and LSByte of the data at the output of the
word aligner in the receiver data path. Enabling this
option compensates for the erroneous swapping of
bytes at the upstream transmitter and corrects the
data received by the downstream systems.
For example, if the 16-bit output of the word aligner is
0B0A, asserting the
rx_revbyteorderwa
signal
swaps the two bytes so the output becomes 0A0B.
“Receiver Byte Reversal in Basic
Double-Width Modes” section in
the Transceiver Architecture in
Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Create
rx_bitslipboundaryselec
tout
port to indicate the
number of bits slipped in the
word aligner.
This option is available for selection only when you are
in Receiver only or Receiver and Transmitter
operation mode. This option enables the
rx_bitslipboundaryselectout
output to indicate
the number of bits slipped in the word aligner.
—
Table 1–12. MegaWizard Plug-In Manager Options (Word Aligner Screen) (Part 4 of 4)
ALTGX Setting Description Reference
Chapter 1: ALTGX Transceiver Setup Guide for Stratix IV Devices 1–45
Protocol Settings
January 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
Rate Match/Byte Order Screen for the Protocol Settings
Figure 1–14 shows the Rate Match/Byte Order screen of the MegaWizard Plug-In
Manager for the Protocol Settings.
Figure 1–14. MegaWizard Plug-In Manager—ALTGX (Rate Match/Byte Order Screen)
1–46 Chapter 1: ALTGX Transceiver Setup Guide for Stratix IV Devices
Protocol Settings
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
Table 1–13 lists the available options on the Rate Match/Byte Order screen of the
MegaWizard Plug-In Manager for your ALTGX custom megafunction variation.
Table 1–13. MegaWizard Plug-In Manager Options (Rate Match/Byte Order Screen) (Part 1 of 3)
ALTGX Setting Description Reference
Enable rate match FIFO.
This option enables the rate match (clock rate
compensation) FIFO. The rate match block consists
of a 20-word deep FIFO. Depending on the PPM
difference, the rate match FIFO controls insertion and
deletion of skip characters based on the 20-bit rate
match pattern you enter in the What is the 20-bit rate
match pattern1? and What is the 20-bit rate match
pattern2? options.
To enable this block:
■The transceiver channel must have both the
transmitter and the receiver channels instantiated.
You must select the Receiver and Transmitter
option in the What is the operation mode? field in
the General screen.
■You must also enable the 8B/10B encoder/decoder
in the 8B10B screen.
The rate match block is capable of compensating up
to ±300 PPM difference between the upstream
transmitter clock and the local receiver’s input
reference clock.
“Rate Match FIFO in Basic
Single-Width Mode” and
“Rate Match FIFO in Basic
Double-Width Mode”
sections in the Transceiver
Architecture in Stratix IV
Devices chapter.
What is the 20-bit rate match
pattern1? (usually used for +ve
disparity pattern)
Enter a 10-bit skip pattern and a 10-bit control
pattern. In the skip pattern field, you must choose a
10-bit code group that has neutral disparity. When
the rate matcher receives the 10-bit control pattern
followed by the 10-bit skip pattern, it inserts or
deletes the 10-bit skip pattern as necessary to avoid
rate match FIFO overflow or underflow conditions. (1)
“Rate Match FIFO in Basic
Single-Width Mode” and
“Rate Match FIFO in Basic
Double-Width Mode”
sections in the Transceiver
Architecture in Stratix IV
Devices chapter.
What is the 20-bit rate match
pattern2? (usually used for -ve
disparity pattern)
Enter a 10-bit skip pattern and a 10-bit control
pattern. In the skip pattern field, you must choose a
10-bit code group that has neutral disparity. When
the rate matcher receives the 10-bit control pattern
followed by the 10-bit skip pattern, it inserts or
deletes the 10-bit skip pattern as necessary to avoid
rate match FIFO overflow or underflow conditions. (1)
“Rate Match FIFO in Basic
Single-Width Mode” and
“Rate Match FIFO in Basic
Double-Width Mode”
sections in the Transceiver
Architecture in Stratix IV
Devices chapter.
Create the
rx_rmfifofull
port to
indicate when the rate match FIFO is
full.
This option creates the output port
rx_rmfifofull
when you enable the Enable Rate Match FIFO option.
It is a status flag that the rate match block forwards
to the FPGA fabric. It indicates when the rate match
FIFO block is full (20 words). This signal remains
high as long as the FIFO is full. It is asynchronous to
the receiver data path.
“Rate Match FIFO in Basic
Single-Width Mode” and
“Rate Match FIFO in Basic
Double-Width Mode”
sections in the Transceiver
Architecture in Stratix IV
Devices chapter.
Chapter 1: ALTGX Transceiver Setup Guide for Stratix IV Devices 1–47
Protocol Settings
January 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
Create the
rx_rmfifoempty
port to
indicate when the rate match FIFO is
empty.
This option creates the output port
rx_rmfifoempty
when you enable the Enable Rate Match FIFO option.
It is a status flag that the rate match block forwards
to the FPGA fabric. It indicates when the rate match
FIFO block is empty (5 words full). This signal
remains high as long as the FIFO is empty. It is
asynchronous to the receiver data path.
“Rate Match FIFO in Basic
Single-Width Mode” and
“Rate Match FIFO in Basic
Double-Width Mode”
sections in the Transceiver
Architecture in Stratix IV
Devices chapter.
Create the
rx_rmfifodatainserted
port to
indicate when data is inserted in the
rate match FIFO.
This option creates the output port
rx_rmfifodatainserted
flag when you enable the
Enable Rate Match FIFO option. It is a status flag
that the rate match block forwards to the FPGA fabric.
This indicates the insertion of skip patterns. For every
deletion, this signal is high for one parallel clock
cycle.
“Rate Match FIFO in Basic
Single-Width Mode” and
“Rate Match FIFO in Basic
Double-Width Mode”
sections in the Transceiver
Architecture in Stratix IV
Devices chapter.
Create the
rx_rmfifodatadeleted
port to indicate when data is deleted
in the rate match FIFO.
This option creates the output port
rx_rmfifodatadeleted
flag when you enable the
Enable Rate Match FIFO option. It is a status flag
that the rate match block forwards to the FPGA fabric.
This indicates the deletion of skip patterns. For every
insertion, this signal is high for one parallel clock
cycle.
“Rate Match FIFO in Basic
Single-Width Mode” and
“Rate Match FIFO in Basic
Double-Width Mode”
sections in the Transceiver
Architecture in Stratix IV
Devices chapter.
Enable insertion or deletion of
consecutive characters or ordered
sets
This option enables the back-to-back insertion or
deletion of skip characters in the rate match FIFO.
This option is available for selection in Single-width
mode. It is enabled by default in Double-width mode.
—
Enable byte ordering block.
This option enables the byte ordering block. It is
available in both Single-width and Double-width
modes. It is available only when the channel width is:
■16-bits/20-bits in Single-width mode
■32-bits/40-bits in Double-width mode
As soon as the byte ordering block sees the rising
edge of the appropriate signal, it compares the
LSByte coming out of the byte deserializer with the
byte ordering pattern. If they do not match, the byte
ordering block inserts the pad character that you
enter in the What is the byte ordering pad pattern?
option such that the byte ordering pattern is seen in
the LSByte position. Inserting this pad character
enables the byte ordering block to restore the correct
byte order.
“Byte Ordering Block”
section in the Transceiver
Architecture in Stratix IV
Devices chapter.
What do you want the byte ordering
to be based on?
This option is available only when the byte ordering
block is enabled. This option allows you to trigger the
byte ordering block on the rising edge of either the
rx_syncstatus
signal or the user-controlled
rx_enabyteord
signal from the FPGA fabric.
“Byte Ordering Block”
section in the Transceiver
Architecture in Stratix IV
Devices chapter.
What is the byte ordering pattern?
This option is available only when the byte ordering
block is enabled. Enter the 10-bit pattern that the byte
ordering block must place in the LSByte position of
the receiver parallel data on the
rx_dataout
port.
“Byte Ordering Block”
section in the Transceiver
Architecture in Stratix IV
Devices chapter.
Table 1–13. MegaWizard Plug-In Manager Options (Rate Match/Byte Order Screen) (Part 2 of 3)
ALTGX Setting Description Reference
1–48 Chapter 1: ALTGX Transceiver Setup Guide for Stratix IV Devices
Protocol Settings
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
Protocol Settings Screen for GIGE and XAUI
Figure 1–15 shows the Protocol Settings screen for the GIGE and XAUI modes of the
MegaWizard Plug-In Manager.
What is the byte ordering pad
pattern?
When the byte ordering block does not find the byte
ordering pattern in the LSByte position of the data
coming out of the byte deseriazlier, it inserts this byte
ordering pad pattern such that the byte ordering
pattern is seen in the LSByte position of the receiver
parallel data on the
rx_dataout
port. Inserting this
pad character enables the byte ordering block to
restore the correct byte order.
“Byte Ordering Block”
section in the Transceiver
Architecture in Stratix IV
Devices chapter.
Note to Table 1–13:
(1) If you want the rate matcher to insert or delete both the positive and negative disparities of the 20-bit rate matching pattern, enter the positive
disparity as pattern1 and negative disparity as pattern2.
Table 1–13. MegaWizard Plug-In Manager Options (Rate Match/Byte Order Screen) (Part 3 of 3)
ALTGX Setting Description Reference
Figure 1–15. MegaWizard Plug-In Manager—ALTGX (Protocol Settings Screen—GIGE and XAUI)
Chapter 1: ALTGX Transceiver Setup Guide for Stratix IV Devices 1–49
Protocol Settings
January 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
Table 1–14 lists the available options for the GIGE and XAUI modes in the Protocol
Settings screen of the MegaWizard Plug-In Manager for your ALTGX custom
megafunction variation.
Table 1–14. MegaWizard Plug-In Manager Options (Protocol Settings —GIGE and XAUI) (Part 1 of 3)
ALTGX Setting Description Reference
Enable run-length violation
checking with a run length of __.
This option creates the output signal
rx_rlv
.
Enabling this option also activates the run-length
violation circuit. If the number of continuous 1s
and 0s exceeds the number that you set in this
option, the run-length violation circuit asserts the
rx_rlv
signal. The
rx_rlv
signal is
asynchronous to the receiver data path and is
asserted for a minimum of two recovered clock
cycles.
The run length limits are five to 160 in increments
of five.
“Programmable Run Length
Violation Detection” section in
the Transceiver Architecture in
Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Create an
rx_syncstatus
output
port for pattern detector and word
aligner.
This is an output status signal that the word
aligner forwards to the FPGA fabric to indicate
that synchronization has been achieved. This
signal is synchronous with the parallel receiver
data on the
rx_dataout
port. Receiver
synchronization is indicated on the
rx_syncstatus
port of each channel.
Table 1-33 and the “Word
Aligner” section in the
Transceiver Architecture in
Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Create an
rx_patterndetect
port
to indicate pattern detected.
This is an output status signal that the word
aligner forwards to the FPGA fabric to indicate
that the word alignment pattern programmed has
been detected in the current word boundary.
Table 1-33 and the “Word
Aligner” section in the
Transceiver Architecture in
Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Create an
rx_invpolarity
port to
enable word aligner polarity
inversion.
This optional port allows you to dynamically
reverse the polarity of every bit of the received
data at the input of the word aligner. Use this
option when the positive and negative signals of
the differential input to the receiver (
rx_datain
)
are erroneously swapped on the board.
“Receiver Polarity Inversion”
section in the Transceiver
Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
chapter.
Create an
rx_ctrldetect
port to
indicate 8B/10B decoder has
detected a control code.
This is an output status signal that the 8B/10B
decoder forwards to the FPGA fabric. This signal
indicates whether the decoded 8-bit code group is
a data or control code group on this port. If the
received 10-bit code group is one of the 12
control code groups (/Kx.y/) specified in
IEEE802.3 specification, this signal is driven high.
If the received 10-bit code group is a data code
group (/Dx.y/), this signal is driven low.
“8B/10B Decoder” section in the
Transceiver Architecture in
Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Create an
rx_errdetect
port to
indicate 8B/10B decoder has
detected an error code.
This is an output status signal that the 8B/10B
decoder forwards to the FPGA fabric. This signal
indicates an 8B/10B code group violation. It is
asserted high if the received 10-bit code group
has a code violation or disparity error. It is used
along with the
rx_disperr
signal to differentiate
between a code violation error and/or a disparity
error.
“8B/10B Decoder” section in the
Transceiver Architecture in
Stratix IV Devices chapter.
1–50 Chapter 1: ALTGX Transceiver Setup Guide for Stratix IV Devices
Protocol Settings
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
Create an
rx_disperr
port to
indicate 8B/10B decoder has
detected a disparity error.
This is an output status signal that the 8B/10B
decoder forwards to the FPGA fabric.This signal is
asserted high if the received 10-bit code or data
group has a disparity error. When this signal goes
high,
rx_errdetect
also is asserted high.
“8B/10B Decoder” section in the
Transceiver Architecture in
Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Create a
tx_invpolarity
port to
allow Transmitter polarity inversion.
This optional port allows you to dynamically
reverse the polarity of every bit of the data word
fed to the serializer in the transmitter data path.
Use this option when the positive and negative
signals of the differential output from the
transmitter (
tx_dataout
) are erroneously
swapped on the board.
“Transmitter Polarity Inversion”
section in the Transceiver
Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
chapter.
Create an
rx_runningdisp
port to
indicate the current running
disparity of the 8B/10B decoded
byte.
This is an output status signal that the 8B/10B
decoder forwards to the FPGA fabric. This signal
is asserted high when the current running
disparity of the 8B/10B decoded byte is negative.
This signal is low when the current running
disparity of the 8B/10B decoded byte is positive.
—
Create an
rx_rmfifofull
port to
indicate when the rate match FIFO
is full.
This option creates the output port
rx_rmfifofull
. It is a status flag that the rate
match block forwards to the FPGA fabric. This
indicates when the rate match FIFO block is full
(20 words). This signal remains high as long as
the FIFO is full and is asynchronous to the
receiver data path.
“Rate Match (Clock Rate
Compensation) FIFO” section in
the Transceiver Architecture in
Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Create an
rx_rmfifoempty
port to
indicate when the rate match FIFO
is empty.
This option creates the output port
rx_rmfifoempty
. It is a status flag that the rate
match block forwards to the FPGA fabric. This
indicates when the rate match FIFO block is empty
(five words). This signal remains high as long as
the FIFO is empty and is asynchronous to the
receiver data path.
“Rate Match (Clock Rate
Compensation) FIFO” section in
the Transceiver Architecture in
Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Create an
rx_rmfifodatainserted
port to
indicate when data is inserted in the
rate match FIFO.
This option creates the output port
rx_rmfifodatainserted
flag. It is a status flag
that the rate match block forwards to the FPGA
fabric. The
rx_rmfifodatainserted
flag is
asserted when a rate match pattern byte is
inserted to compensate for the PPM difference in
reference clock frequencies between the
upstream transmitter and the local receiver.
“Rate Match (Clock Rate
Compensation) FIFO” section in
the Transceiver Architecture in
Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Create an
rx_rmfifodatadeleted
port to indicate when data is deleted
in the rate match FIFO.
This option creates the output port
rx_rmfifodatadeleted
. It is a status flag that
the rate match block forwards to the FPGA fabric.
The
rx_rmfifodatadeleted
flag is asserted
when a rate match pattern byte is deleted to
compensate for the PPM difference in reference
clock frequencies between the upstream
transmitter and the local receiver.
“Rate Match (Clock Rate
Compensation) FIFO” section in
the Transceiver Architecture in
Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Table 1–14. MegaWizard Plug-In Manager Options (Protocol Settings —GIGE and XAUI) (Part 2 of 3)
ALTGX Setting Description Reference
Chapter 1: ALTGX Transceiver Setup Guide for Stratix IV Devices 1–51
Protocol Settings
January 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
Protocol Settings Screen for the (OIF) CEI Phy Interface
Table 1–15 lists the available options for the (OIF) CEI Phy Interface mode in the
Protocol Settings screen of the MegaWizard Plug-In Manager for your ALTGX custom
megafunction variation.
Enable transmitter bit reversal.
Enabling this option reverses every bit of the
10-bit parallel data at the input of the serializer.
The 10-bit input to the serializer
D[9:0]
is
reversed to
D[0:9]
.
“8B/10B Encoder” section in the
Transceiver Architecture in
Stratix IV Devices chapter.
What is the word alignment pattern
length?
This option sets the word alignment pattern
length. The available choices are 7 and 10 for the
GIGE and XAUI modes. The default setting for this
option is 10.
“Rate Match (Clock Rate
Compensation) FIFO” section in
the Transceiver Architecture in
Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Table 1–14. MegaWizard Plug-In Manager Options (Protocol Settings —GIGE and XAUI) (Part 3 of 3)
ALTGX Setting Description Reference
Table 1–15. MegaWizard Plug-In Manager Options (Protocol Settings - [OIF] CEI PHY Interface)
ALTGX Setting Description Reference
Enable run-length violation checking
with a run length of __.
This option creates the output signal
rx_rlv
.
Enabling this option also activates the run-length
violation circuit. If the number of continuous 1s and
0s exceeds the number that you set in this option,
the run-length violation circuit asserts the
rx_rlv
signal. The
rx_rlv
signal is asynchronous to the
receiver data path and is asserted for a minimum of
two recovered clock cycles.
For a 32-bit channel width, the run length limits are
8 to 512 in increments of eight.
“Programmable Run Length
Violation Detection” section in
the Transceiver Architecture
in Stratix IV Devices chapter.
1–52 Chapter 1: ALTGX Transceiver Setup Guide for Stratix IV Devices
Protocol Settings
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
Protocol Settings Screen for PCIe
Figure 1–16 shows the PCIe 1 screen for Protocol Settings of the MegaWizard Plug-In
Manager.
Figure 1–16. MegaWizard Plug-In Manager—ALTGX (PCIe 1 Screen)
Chapter 1: ALTGX Transceiver Setup Guide for Stratix IV Devices 1–53
Protocol Settings
January 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
Table 1–16 lists the available options on the PCIe 1 screen of the MegaWizard Plug-In
Manager for your ALTGX custom megafunction variation.
Table 1–16. MegaWizard Plug-In Manager Options (PCIe 1) (Part 1 of 2)
ALTGX Setting Description Reference
Enable low latency synchronous
PCIe.
This option puts the rate match FIFO into low latency
mode, which forces the system into a 0 ppm mode.
Ensure that there is a 0 ppm difference between the
upstream transmitter’s and the local receiver’s input
reference clocks.
“Rate Match (Clock Rate
Compensation) FIFO” section
in the Transceiver
Architecture in Stratix IV
Devices chapter.
Enable run-length violation checking
with a run length of __.
This option creates the output signal
rx_rlv
.
Enabling this option also activates the run-length
violation circuit. If the number of continuous 1s and
0s exceeds the number that you set in this option,
the run-length violation circuit asserts the
rx_rlv
signal. The
rx_rlv
signal is asynchronous to the
receiver data path.
For both 8-bit and 16-bit channel widths, the run
length limits are 5 to 160 in increments of five.
“Programmable Run Length
Violation Detection” section in
the Transceiver Architecture
in Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Enable fast recovery mode.
This option enables the CDR control block. When
this block is enabled, the
rx_locktodata
and
rx_locktorefclk
signals are disabled.
“Fast Recovery Mode” section
in the Transceiver
Architecture in Stratix IV
Devices chapter.
Enable electrical idle inference
functionality.
Enable the electrical idle inference module by
selecting this option. In PCIe mode, the PCS has an
optional electrical idle inference module designed to
implement the electrical idle inference conditions
specified in PCIe base specification 2.0.
Enabling this option creates the
rx_elecidleinfersel[2:0]
input signal. The
electrical idle Inference module infers electrical idle
depending on the logic level driven on the
rx_elecidleinfersel[2:0]
input signal. For the
electrical idle Inference module to correctly infer an
electrical idle condition in each LTSSM sub-state,
you must drive the
rx_elecidleinfersel[2:0]
signal appropriately.
“Electrical Idle Inference”
section in the Transceiver
Architecture in Stratix IV
Devices chapter.
Create an
rx_syncstatus
output
port for pattern detector and word
aligner.
The ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager
automatically configures the word aligner in
Automatic Synchronization State Machine mode for
PCIe mode. This is an output status signal that the
word aligner forwards to the FPGA fabric to indicate
that synchronization has been achieved. This signal
is synchronous with the parallel receiver data on the
rx_dataout
port. The signal width is 1 and 2 bits
for a channel width of 8 bits and 16 bits,
respectively.
Table 1-29 and “Automatic
Synchronization State
Machine Mode Word Aligner
with 10-bit PMA-PCS
Interface Mode” section in the
Transceiver Architecture in
Stratix IV Devices chapter.
1–54 Chapter 1: ALTGX Transceiver Setup Guide for Stratix IV Devices
Protocol Settings
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
Create an
rx_patterndetect
output port to indicate pattern
detected.
This is an output status signal that the word aligner
forwards to the FPGA fabric to indicate that the word
alignment pattern programmed has been detected in
the current word boundary. The signal width is 1 and
2 bits for a channel width of 8 bits and 16 bits,
respectively.
“Automatic Synchronization
State Machine Mode Word
Aligner with 10-bit PMA-PCS
Interface Mode” section in the
Transceiver Architecture in
Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Create an
rx_ctrldetect
port to
indicate 8B/10B decoder has
detected a control code.
This is an output status signal that the 8B/10B
decoder forwards to the FPGA fabric. This signal
indicates whether the decoded 8-bit code group is a
data or control code group on this port.
If the received 10-bit code group is one of the 12
control code groups (/Kx.y/) specified in the
IEEE802.3 specification, this signal is driven high. If
the received 10-bit code group is a data code group
(/Dx.y/), this signal is driven low. The signal width is
1 and 2 bits for a channel width of 8 bits and 16 bits,
respectively.
“8B/10B Decoder” section in
the Transceiver Architecture
in Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Create a
tx_detectrxloop
input
port as Receiver detect or loopback
enable, depending on the power
state.
Depending on the power-down mode, asserting this
signal enables either the receiver detect operation or
Loopback mode. (1)
“Receiver Detection” and
“PCIe Reverse Parallel
Loopback” section in the
Transceiver Architecture in
Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Create a
tx_forceelecidle
input
port to force the Transmitter to send
Electrical Idle signals.
Enabling this port sets the transmitter buffer in
electrical idle mode. This port is available in all PCIe
power-down modes and has a specific use in each
mode. (1)
“Transmitter Buffer Electrical
Idle” section in the
Transceiver Architecture in
Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Create a
tx_forcedispcompliance
input
port to force negative running
disparity.
A high level on this port forces the associated
parallel transmitter data on the
tx_datain
port to
be transmitted with negative current running
disparity.
■For 8-bit transceiver channel width
configurations, you must drive
tx_forcedispcompliance[1:0]
high in the
same parallel clock cycle as the first /K28.5/ of
the compliance pattern on the
tx_datain
port.
■For 16-bit transceiver channel width
configurations, you must drive only the LSB of
tx_forcedispcompliance[1:0]
high in the
same parallel clock cycle as /K28.5/D21.5/ of the
compliance pattern on the
tx_datain
port.
“Compliance Pattern
Transmission Support”
section in the Transceiver
Architecture in Stratix IV
Devices chapter.
Create a
tx_invpolarity
port to
allow Transmitter polarity inversion.
This optional port allows you to dynamically reverse
the polarity of every bit of the data word fed to the
serializer in the transmitter data path. Use this option
when the positive and negative signals of the
differential output from the transmitter
(
tx_dataout
) are erroneously swapped on the
board.
“Transmitter Polarity
Inversion” section in the
Transceiver Architecture in
Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Note to Table 1–16:
(1) Refer to the table 'Power States and Functions Allowed in Each Power State' in the PIPE Interface section in the Transceiver Architecture in
Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Table 1–16. MegaWizard Plug-In Manager Options (PCIe 1) (Part 2 of 2)
ALTGX Setting Description Reference
Chapter 1: ALTGX Transceiver Setup Guide for Stratix IV Devices 1–55
Protocol Settings
January 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
Figure 1–17 shows the PCIe 2 screen of Protocol Settings for the MegaWizard Plug-In
Manager.
Table 1–17 lists the available options on the PCIe 2 screen of the MegaWizard Plug-In
Manager for your ALTGX custom megafunction variation.
Figure 1–17. MegaWizard Plug-In Manager—ALTGX (PCIe 2 Screen)
Table 1–17. MegaWizard Plug-In Manager Options (PCIe 2 Screen) (Part 1 of 2)
ALTGX Setting Description Reference
Create a
pipestatus
output port
for PIPE interface status signal.
The PCIe interface block receives status signals
from the transceiver channel PCS and PMA blocks
and encodes the status on a 3-bit output signal
(
pipestatus[2:0]
) that is forwarded to the FPGA
fabric.
“Receiver Status” section and
Table 1-53 in the Transceiver
Architecture in Stratix IV
Devices chapter.
Create a
pipedatavalid
output
port to indicate valid data from the
receiver.
This is an output status port that indicates the
receiver parallel data on the
rx_dataout
port is
valid.
—
1–56 Chapter 1: ALTGX Transceiver Setup Guide for Stratix IV Devices
Protocol Settings
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
Create a
pipeelecidle
output port
for Electrical Idle detect status
signal.
Enabling this option creates the
pipeelecidle
output status port that is forwarded to the FPGA
fabric.
■If you select Enable Electrical Idle Inference
Module, the
pipeelecidle
signal is driven high
when the electrical idle inference module infers
an electrical idle condition depending on the logic
driven on the
rx_elecidleinfersel[2:0]
port. Otherwise, it is driven low.
■If you do not select Enable Electrical Idle
Inference Module, the
rx_signaldetect
output signal from the signal threshold detection
circuitry is inverted and driven on the
pipeelecidle
port.
The
pipeelecidle
signal is asynchronous to the
receiver data path.
“Electrical Idle Inference”
section in the Transceiver
Architecture in Stratix IV
Devices chapter.
Create a
pipephydonestatus
output port to indicate PIPE
completed power state transitions.
This is an output status signal forwarded to the
FPGA fabric. The completion of various PHY
functions; for example, receiver detection, power
state transition, clock switch, and rate switch, are
indicated on this
pipephydonestatus
signal by
driving this signal high for one parallel clock cycle.
“PCIe Mode” section in the
Transceiver Architecture in
Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Create a
pipe8b10binvpolarity
port to enable polarity inversion in
PIPE.
This optional port allows you to dynamically reverse
every bit of the received data at the input of the
8B/10B decoder.
“PCIe Mode” section in the
Transceiver Architecture in
Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Create a
powerdn
input port for
PIPE powerdown directive.
Enabling this option creates an input control port
powerdn[1:0]
for each transceiver channel.
“Power State Management”
section and Table 1-51 in the
Transceiver Architecture in
Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Table 1–17. MegaWizard Plug-In Manager Options (PCIe 2 Screen) (Part 2 of 2)
ALTGX Setting Description Reference
Chapter 1: ALTGX Transceiver Setup Guide for Stratix IV Devices 1–57
Protocol Settings
January 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
Protocol Settings Screen for SONET/SDH
Figure 1–18 shows the SONET/SDH screen for Protocol Settings of the MegaWizard
Plug-In Manager.
Table 1–18 lists the available options on the SONET/SDH screen for Protocol Settings
of the MegaWizard Plug-In Manager for your ALTGX custom megafunction variation.
Figure 1–18. MegaWizard Plug-In Manager—ALTGX (Protocol Settings—SONET/SDH)
Table 1–18. MegaWizard Plug-In Manager Options (SONET/SDH Screen) (Part 1 of 3)
ALTGX Setting Description Reference
When should the word aligner
realign?
This option is not available in SONET/SDH mode. In
SONET/SDH mode, the word aligner operates in
Manual Alignment mode. By default, the ALTGX
MegaWizard Plug-In Manager sets the behavior of
the word aligner such that re-alignment occurs when
there is a rising edge of the
rx_enapatternalign
input signal in this mode.
“Word Aligner” section in the
Transceiver Architecture in
Stratix IV Devices chapter.
What is the word alignment
pattern length?
This option sets the length of the word alignment
pattern. The following options are available:
■OC-12—only 16-bit pattern is allowed.
■OC-48—only 16-bit pattern is allowed.
■OC-96—16-bit and 32-bit patterns are allowed.
“SONET/SDH Mode” (OC-12,
OC-48, and OC-96) section in
the Transceiver Architecture in
Stratix IV Devices chapter.
1–58 Chapter 1: ALTGX Transceiver Setup Guide for Stratix IV Devices
Protocol Settings
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
What is the word alignment
pattern?
Enter the word alignment pattern. By default, the
pattern that appears in the MegaWizard Plug-In
Manager is '0001010001101111' (16'h146F).
“SONET/SDH Mode” (OC-12,
OC-48, and OC-96) section in
the Transceiver Architecture in
Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Flip word alignment pattern bits.
This option is enabled in the MegaWizard Plug-In
Manager by default. This option reverses the order
of the alignment pattern at a bit level to support
MSB-to-LSB transmission in SONET/SDH mode.
The ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager flips the
bit order of the default word alignment pattern
'0001010001101111 '(16'h146F) and uses the
flipped version '1111011000101000' (16'hF628) as
the word alignment pattern.
—
What do you want the byte
ordering to be based on?
This option allows you to trigger the byte ordering
block either on the rising edge of the
rx_syncstatus
signal or the user-controlled
rx_enabyteord
signal from the FPGA fabric. The
byte ordering block is enabled only in OC-48 mode.
“Byte Ordering Block” section
in the Transceiver Architecture
in Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Enable run-length violation
checking with a run length of.
This option creates the output signal
rx_rlv
.
Enabling this option also activates the run-length
violation circuit. If the number of continuous 1s and
0s exceeds the number that you set in this option,
the run-length violation circuit asserts the
rx_rlv
signal. The
rx_rlv
signal is asynchronous to the
receiver data path and is asserted for a minimum of
two recovered clock cycles in OC-12 and OC-48
modes. Similarly, it is asserted for a minimum of
three recovered clock cycles in the OC-96 mode.
For the OC-12 and OC-48 modes, the run length
limits are 4 to 128 in increments of four. For the
OC-96 mode, the run length limits are 5 to 160 in
increments of five.
“Programmable Run Length
Violation Detection” section in
the Transceiver Architecture in
Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Create an
rx_syncstatus
output
port for pattern detector and word
aligner.
This is an output status signal that the word aligner
forwards to the FPGA fabric to indicate that
synchronization has been achieved. This signal is
synchronous with the parallel receiver data on the
rx_dataout
port. The signal width is 1 bit, 2 bits,
and 4 bits for a channel width of 8 bits, 16 bits, and
32 bits, respectively.
Table 1-77 and “Word Aligner”
section in the Transceiver
Architecture in Stratix IV
Devices chapter.
Create an
rx_patterndetect
port to indicate pattern detected.
This is an output status signal that the word aligner
forwards to the FPGA fabric to indicate that the word
alignment pattern programmed has been detected in
the current word boundary. The signal width is 1 bit,
2 bits, and 4 bits for a channel width of 8 bits,
16 bits, and 32 bits, respectively.
Table 1-33 and “Word Aligner”
section in the Transceiver
Architecture in Stratix IV
Devices chapter.
Table 1–18. MegaWizard Plug-In Manager Options (SONET/SDH Screen) (Part 2 of 3)
ALTGX Setting Description Reference
Chapter 1: ALTGX Transceiver Setup Guide for Stratix IV Devices 1–59
Protocol Settings
January 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
Create a
rx_invpolarity
port to
enable word aligner polarity
inversion.
This optional port allows you to dynamically reverse
the polarity of every bit of the received data at the
input of the word aligner. Use this option when the
positive and negative signals of the differential input
to the receiver (
rx_datain
) are erroneously
swapped on the board.
“Receiver Polarity Inversion”
section in the Transceiver
Architecture in Stratix IV
Devices chapter.
Create a
tx_invpolarity
port to
allow Transmitter polarity
inversion.
This optional port allows you to dynamically reverse
the polarity of every bit of the data word fed to the
serializer in the transmitter data path. Use this
option when the positive and negative signals of the
differential output from the transmitter
(
tx_dataout
) are erroneously swapped on the
board.
“Transmitter Polarity Inversion”
section in the Transceiver
Architecture in Stratix IV
Devices chapter.
Flip receiver output data bits.
This option reverses the bit order of the parallel
receiver data at a byte level at the output of the
receiver phase compensation FIFO to support
MSB-to-LSB transmission in SONET/SDH mode.
For example, if the 16-bit parallel receiver data at the
output of the receiver phase compensation FIFO is
'10111100 10101101' (16'hBCAD), enabling this
option reverses the data on the
rx_dataout
port to
'00111101 10110101' (16'h3DB5).
“SONET/SDH Mode” (OC-12,
OC-48, and OC-96) section in
the Transceiver Architecture in
Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Flip transmitter input data bits.
This option reverses the bit order of the parallel
transmitter data at a byte level at the input of the
transmitter phase compensation FIFO to support
MSB-to-LSB transmission protocols in SONET/SDH
mode.
For example, if the 16-bit parallel transmitter data at
the
tx_datain
port is '10111100 10101101'
(16'hBCAD), enabling this option reverses the input
data to the transmitter phase compensation FIFO to
'00111101 10110101' (16'h3DB5).
“SONET/SDH Mode” (OC-12,
OC-48, and OC-96) section in
the Transceiver Architecture in
Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Table 1–18. MegaWizard Plug-In Manager Options (SONET/SDH Screen) (Part 3 of 3)
ALTGX Setting Description Reference
1–60 Chapter 1: ALTGX Transceiver Setup Guide for Stratix IV Devices
Protocol Settings
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
EDA Screen
Figure 1–19 shows the EDA screen of the MegaWizard Plug-In Manager. The
Generate Netlist option generates a netlist for the third party EDA synthesis tool to
estimate timing and resource utilization for the ALTGX instance.
Figure 1–19. MegaWizard Plug-In Manager—ALTGX (EDA Screen)
Chapter 1: ALTGX Transceiver Setup Guide for Stratix IV Devices 1–61
Protocol Settings
January 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
Summary Screen
Figure 1–20 shows the Summary screen of the MegaWizard Plug-In Manager. You can
select optional files on this page. After you make your selections, click Finish to
generate the files.
Document Revision History
Table 1–19 lists the revision history for this chapter.
Figure 1–20. MegaWizard Plug-In Manager—ALTGX (Summary Screen)
Table 1–19. Document Revision History (Part 1 of 2)
Date Version Changes
January 2014 4.4 ■Updated Table 1–5.
September 2012 4.3
■Updated Table 1–1 to close FB #65275.
■Updated Table 1–12 to close FB #37243.
December 2011 4.2 Updated Table 1–1.
1–62 Chapter 1: ALTGX Transceiver Setup Guide for Stratix IV Devices
Protocol Settings
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
February 2011 4.1
■Updated Table 1–1, Table 1–3, Table 1–7, and Table 1–17.
■Updated chapter title.
■Minor text edits.
■Applied new template.
November 2009 4.0
■Added Deterministic Latency protocol information.
■Added AEQ information.
■Updated PLL setting information.
■Consolidated Parameter Settings information (Table 1–1 to Table 1–6).
■Consolidated Reconfiguration Settings information (Table 1–7 to Table 1–9).
■Consolidated Protocol Settings information (Table 1–10 to Table 1–18).
■Minor text edits.
June 2009 3.1
■Updated Table 1–9, Table 1–29 and Table 1–35.
■Updated Figure 1–10.
■Added introductory sentences to improve search ability.
■Minor text edits.
March 2009 3.0
■Updated the figures to match the software changes.
■Removed the 'Deterministic Latency' subprotocol from Basic functional mode.
■Removed the various clock frequencies from the Reconfig Clks screen for all the
applicable functional modes.
November 2008 2.0
■Updated Table 1–1, Table 1–6, and Table 1–11.
■Updated Figure 1–8.
■Added Reconfig Clks and Reconfig 2 sections.
■Added the “Use ATX Transmitter PLL” setting.
■Changed the “Which device speed grade will you be using?” setting to the “Which device
variation will you be using” setting.
June 2008 1.1 Minor text edit.
May 2008 1.0 Initial release.
Table 1–19. Document Revision History (Part 2 of 2)
Date Version Changes
SIV53002-4.1
© 2011 Altera Corporation. All rights reserved. ALTERA, ARRIA, CYCLONE, HARDCOPY, MAX, MEGACORE, NIOS, QUARTUS and STRATIX words and logos
are trademarks of Altera Corporation and registered in the U.S. Patent and Trademark Office and in other countries. All other words and logos identified as
trademarks or service marks are the property of their respective holders as described at www.altera.com/common/legal.html. Altera warrants performance of its
semiconductor products to current specifications in accordance with Altera's standard warranty, but reserves the right to make changes to any products and
services at any time without notice. Altera assumes no responsibility or liability arising out of the application or use of any information, product, or service
described herein except as expressly agreed to in writing by Altera. Altera customers are advised to obtain the latest version of device specifications before relying
on any published information and before placing orders for products or services.
Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
February 2011
Feedback Subscribe
ISO
9001:2008
Registered
2. Transceiver Design Flow Guide for
Stratix IV Devices
This chapter describes the Altera-recommended basic design flow that simplifies
Stratix®IV GX transceiver-based designs.
Use the following design flow techniques to simplify transceiver implementation. The
“Guidelines to Debug Transceiver-Based Designs” on page 2–14 provides guidelines
to trouble-shoot transceiver-based designs. An example of a fibre channel protocol
application is also described in this chapter.
The transceiver-based design is divided into phases and are detailed in the following
sections:
■“Architecture” on page 2–3
■“Implementation and Integration” on page 2–6
■“Compilation” on page 2–10
■“Verification” on page 2–11
■“Functional Simulation” on page 2–12
■“Example 1: Fibre Channel Protocol Application” on page 2–17
Figure 2–1 shows the design flow chart of the different stages of the design flow. The
design flow stages include architecture, functional simulation, compilation, and
verification. Each stage of the design flow is explained in the sections that follow.
February 2011
SIV53002-4.1
2–2 Chapter 2: Transceiver Design Flow Guide for Stratix IV Devices
Stratix IV Device Handbook February 2011 Altera Corporation
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
Figure 2–1. Flow Chart of the Different Stages in a Transceiver-Based Design
Device
Specification
Transceiver
Configuration
Select Options in the Dynamic
Reconfiguration Controller
(if required)
Clocking
Architecture
Create Transceiver
Instances
Create Reset and Control Logic
Create a Dynamic Reconfiguration
Controller using the
ALTGX_Reconfig MegaWizard
Create Data Processing Logic
Integr ate the Design
Implementation
Synthesize the Design
Compilation
Add signals to
SignalTap II Logic Analyzer
Include SignalTap file
(.stp) in the Compilation
Verification
Is Simulation
Required ?
Require SignalTap
for Verification?
No
Yes
No
If used,
Include the Stratix IV GX ALTGX
megafunction-generated
wrapper file (.v or .vhd)
and
ALTGX_Reconfig
megafunction-generated wrapper file
Add Altera Simulation Library Files
Functional Simulation
Simulate t he Design
No
Yes
Create Pin and OCT
Assignments
Create Timing Constraints
Create Clock Grouping
Const r aints if Required
Compile the Design
Yes
Power Supplies
Is Dynamic
Reconfiguration
Required ?
Chapter 2: Transceiver Design Flow Guide for Stratix IV Devices 2–3
Architecture
February 2011 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
Architecture
The first step in creating a transceiver-based design is to map your system
requirements with the Stratix IV GX device supported features. The Stratix IV GX
device contains multiple transceiver channels that you can configure in multiple data
rates and protocols. It also provides multiple transceiver clocking options. For your
design, identify the transceiver capabilities and clocking options to ensure that the
transceiver meets your system requirements.
This section describes the critical parameters that you need to identify as part of this
architecture phase.
Device Specification
The following device specifications must meet your requirements:
■Refer to the device data sheet to ensure that the transceivers meet the data rate and
electrical requirements for your target high-speed interface application; for
example, the jitter specification and voltage output differential (VOD) range.
■Check whether the device family that you select supports your design
requirements; for example, the number of transceiver channels, FPGA logic
density, memory elements, and DSP blocks.
■If you intend to migrate to a higher logic density or higher transceiver count
device in the future, ensure that the migration device is available.
fFor information about device characteristics, refer to the “Transceiver Performance
Specifications” section in the DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices
chapter. For information about transceiver resources, refer to the Overview for the
Stratix IV Device Family chapter.
Transceiver Configuration
Use the ALTGX MegaWizard™ Plug-In Manager interface to configure the Stratix IV
transceiver channel’s features and options.
When selecting a transceiver configuration, check for the following parameters:
■Check whether the transceiver physical coding sublayer (PCS) and physical
medium attachment (PMA) functional blocks comply with your system
requirements. For example, check whether the rate match (clock rate
compensation) FIFO in the receiver channel PCS meets the parts per million (PPM)
specifications required for your application.
fFor more information about transceiver specifications, refer to the “Transceiver
Performance Specifications” section of the DC and Switching Characteristics for
Stratix IV Devices chapter.
■Select a configuration that meets your latency requirements. If your system has
maximum latency requirements through the transceiver data path, consider the
appropriate functional configuration. The Stratix IV GX transceiver supports
various configurations that differ in latency (for example, low latency PCS mode
and Basic [PMA direct] mode).
Chapter 2: Transceiver Design Flow Guide for Stratix IV Devices 2–4
Architecture
February 2011 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
■In some configurations, specific functional blocks in the transceiver are disabled or
bypassed. Before you select a transceiver configuration, understand the functional
blocks that must be implemented in the FPGA fabric. For example, Basic (PMA
direct) mode provides reduced latency but does not have PCS functional blocks
enabled (for example, word aligner and 8B/10B encoder). Therefore, implement
these functional blocks in the FPGA fabric if you need them in your application.
Some examples of functional blocks that you may need to implement in the FPGA
fabric are shown in “Create Data Processing and Other User Logic” on page 2–8.
fFor more information about the ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager, refer to the
ALTGX Transceiver Setup Guide for Stratix IV Devices chapter.
■Check whether the loopback features are available for your selected functional
mode. The Stratix IV GX transceiver provides diagnostic loopback features
between the transmitter channel and the receiver channel at the transceiver PCS
and PMA interfaces. These loopback features help in debugging your design.
■If your design uses multiple transceiver channels within the same transceiver
block, based on the transceiver channel configurations, the Quartus®II software
might impose restrictions on combining these channels.
fFor more information about these restrictions, refer to the Configuring Multiple
Protocols and Data Rates in Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Dynamic Reconfiguration
Use the Stratix IV transceivers in multiple-link interconnect environments by
dynamically reconfiguring the PMA controls (for example, VOD, Pre-emphasis,
Equalization, DC gain, and the transceiver channel configuration). You can also
reconfigure the PMA controls without affecting any other transceiver channel or the
logic in the FPGA fabric.
Use the transceiver channel reconfiguration to dynamically switch a transceiver
channel to multiple protocols and data rates. The Quartus II software allows you to
generate a memory initialization file (.mif) that stores unique transceiver settings and
provides a dynamic reconfiguration controller, which is soft logic that controls the
transceiver reconfiguration with minimal user interface logic. You can generate this
soft logic using the ALTGX_RECONFIG MegaWizard interface.
fFor more information about the ALTGX_RECONFIG interface, refer to the
ALTGX_RECONFIG Megafunction User Guide for Stratix IV Devices chapter.
1All receiver channels in the Stratix IV GX device require offset cancellation to counter
offset variations in process, voltage, and temperature (PVT) on the receiver. The
dynamic reconfiguration controller initiates the sequence to perform offset
cancellation on the receiver channels. Therefore, if you configure the Stratix IV GX
transceiver channel in Receiver only or Transmitter and Receiver configuration, you
must instantiate a dynamic reconfiguration controller.
fFor more information about offset cancellation or dynamic reconfiguration of PMA
controls or channel configuration, refer to the “Offset Cancellation Feature” section in
the Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Chapter 2: Transceiver Design Flow Guide for Stratix IV Devices 2–5
Architecture
February 2011 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
Clocking
The Stratix IV GX transceiver is clocked by various input reference clocks, for
example:
■Dedicated transceiver reference clock (
refclk
) pins. Altera recommends using
refclk
pins whenever possible because the
refclk
pins yield reduced jitter on the
transmitted data.
■Clock sources connected to global clock lines.
■Clock outputs from the phase-locked loops (PLLs) in the FPGA fabric.
Identify the transceiver channels input reference clock sources, for example:
■Ensure that your selected device has the required number of input reference clock
resources to implement your design.
■Ensure that the transceiver clock input supports the required I/O standards.
■Ensure that the clocking restrictions work with your selected device:
■Check whether the allowed frequencies for the transceiver input reference
clocks meet your system requirements.
■If you use the PLL cascade clock, understand its restrictions.
■If you are using the auxiliary transmit (ATX) PLL, understand the
recommendations for the input reference clock sources and the restrictions on
data rate ranges supported by the ATX PLL.
For transceiver-FPGA interface clocking:
■Ensure that the transceiver-FPGA interface clock frequency limits meet your
system requirements.
fFor information about transceiver specifications, refer to the DC and Switching
Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices chapter.
■Identify the clocking scheme to clock the transceiver data to the logic in the FPGA
fabric. For example, if your design has multiple transceiver channels that run at
the same data rate and are connected to the one upstream link, you might be able
to use a single transceiver-FPGA clock to provide clocks to the transceiver data
path, which can conserve clock routing resources.
■If you are using Basic (PMA direct) mode, determine whether you require a
left/right PLL to provide phase shifted clocks to the FPGA fabric. The left/right
PLL clocks the data received and transmitted between the transceiver and the
FPGA fabric interface and may be required to meet the timing requirements of the
data transfer.
fFor information about transceiver clocking, refer to the Transceiver Clocking in
Stratix IV Devices chapter.
After you identify the required transceiver parameters, start the implementation and
integration phase.
Chapter 2: Transceiver Design Flow Guide for Stratix IV Devices 2–6
Implementation and Integration
February 2011 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
Power Supplies
The Stratix IV GX device requires multiple power supplies. The pin connection
guidelines provide specific recommendations about the type of power supply
regulator (linear or switching) and the voltage supply options and restrictions. For
example, the transmitter buffer supply VCCHTx has two options—1.5 V and 1.4 V.
There are specific data rate restrictions when using 1.5 V. You must understand these
restrictions when you select a power supply value.
fFor more information, refer to the Stratix IV GX and Stratix IV E Device Family Pin
Connection Guidelines.
Estimate the power required to run your design. This estimation allows you to select
the appropriate power supply modules and to design the power distribution network
on your board.
Use the Early Power Estimator tool to estimate the transient current requirements.
fFor more information about the Early Power Estimation tool, refer to the Stratix III,
Stratix IV, Stratix V, HardCopy III, and HardCopy IV PowerPlay Early Power Estimator.
If your design is already complete, use the power optimization features available in
the Stratix IV Devices.
fFor more information about optimizing power in Stratix IV FPGA devices, refer to
AN 514: Power Optimization in Stratix IV FPGAs.
Board Design Requirements
For improved signal integrity on the high-speed serial interface, follow the best
design practices for your power distribution network, PCB design, and stack up.
fFor detailed guidelines and recommendations about your power distribution
network, PCB design, and stack up, refer to the Board Design Resource Center web
site.
fFor more information about the Stratix IV GX design process, refer to AN 519:
Stratix IV Design Guidelines.
Implementation and Integration
There are three steps to the implementation and integration phase:
■“Create Transceiver Instances” on page 2–7
■“Create Reset Logic to Control the FPGA Fabric and Transceivers” on page 2–34
■“Create Data Processing and Other User Logic” on page 2–36
Chapter 2: Transceiver Design Flow Guide for Stratix IV Devices 2–7
Implementation and Integration
February 2011 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
Create Transceiver Instances
The ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager to creates the transceiver instance. In the
architecture phase, you identified the transceiver configuration for your design. Using
the ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager, select the appropriate parameters that
apply to your architecture requirements.
Reset and Status Signals
The ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manger provides various reset and status signals:
■Reset signals—
tx_digitalreset
,
rx_digitalreset
,
rx_analogreset
, and
pll_powerdown
are required to reset the transceiver PCS and PMA functional
blocks.
■Status signals—
rx_freqlocked
and
pll_locked
indicate the state of the
receiver CDR and transmitter PLL, respectively. Use these reset and status
signals to implement the transceiver reset control logic in the FPGA fabric. For
more information, refer to “Create Reset and Control Logic” on page 2–8.
If you determine that your application requires dynamic reconfiguration, select the
options in the Reconfig screen of the ALTGX MegaWizard interface.
If you intend to dynamically reconfigure the channel into other protocol modes or
data rates, the Reconfig screen provides multiple options (for example, the channel
interface and Use alternate PLL options) to enable this feature.
fTo understand the logical channel addressing, logical PLL index, and type of
reconfiguration to select options in the Reconfig screen, refer to the “Channel and
CMU PLL Reconfiguration Mode Details” section in the Dynamic Reconfiguration in
Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Depending on your system, when you use multiple transceiver channels, you might
be able to share the transmitter and receiver parallel clocks of one channel with the
other channels. If your design requires sharing a clock resource, select the
tx_coreclk
and
rx_coreclk
ports.
fTransceiver-FPGA fabric interface clock sharing conditions are provided in the
Transceiver Clocking in Stratix IV Devices chapter.
fFor more information about using the ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager and the
functionality of the different options and signals available, refer to the ALTGX
Transceiver Setup Guide for Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Create Dynamic Reconfiguration Controller Instances
Use the ALTGX_RECONFIG MegaWizard interface to create the dynamic
reconfiguration controller instance. If you intend to use the channel and CMU PLL
reconfiguration feature, select the relevant options in the ALTGX_RECONFIG
Megawizard Plug-In Manager.
fFor descriptions of the options in the ALTGX_RECONFIG megafunction, refer to the
ALTGX_RECONFIG Megafunction User Guide for Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Chapter 2: Transceiver Design Flow Guide for Stratix IV Devices 2–8
Implementation and Integration
February 2011 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
fFor more information about using the signals, refer to the Dynamic Reconfiguration in
Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Create Reset and Control Logic
The reset sequence is important for initializing the transceiver functional blocks to
proper operating condition. Altera recommends a reset sequence for different
transceiver configurations and protocol functional modes. The ALTGX MegaWizard
Plug-In Manager provides the
tx_digitalreset
,
rx_analogreset
,
rx_digitalreset
,
and
pll_powerdown
signals to reset the different functional blocks of the transceiver.
You can reset the CMU PLL or the ATX PLL (based on your selection) using the
pll_powerdown
signal. For transceiver instances that share the same CMU PLL or
ATX PLL, the
pll_powerdown
port of these instances must be driven by the same logic.
fFor more information about reset sequences, refer to the Reset Control and Power Down
in Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Create Data Processing and Other User Logic
A typical transceiver-based design consists of custom data processing and other user
logic that must be implemented in the FPGA fabric based on your application
requirements. In addition to application-specific logic, for specific transceiver
configurations, you may need additional logic to interface with the transceivers. This
section provides examples of such logic.
PPM Detector When the Receiver CDR Is Used in Manual Lock Mode
Each receiver channel contains a clock data recovery (CDR) that you can use in
automatic or manual lock mode.
If you use the receiver CDR in manual lock mode, you can control the timing of the
CDR to lock to the input reference clock using the
rx_locktorefclk
port or lock to the
recovered data using the
rx_locktodata
port.
When you use the receiver CDR in manual lock mode, you may need to implement
the PPM detector in the FPGA fabric to determine the PPM difference between the
upstream transmitter and the Stratix IV GX receiver.
Synchronization State Machine in Manual Word Alignment Mode
Each receiver channel contains a synchronization state machine in the PCS that you
can enable in certain functional modes. The synchronization state machine triggers
the loss of synchronization status to the FPGA fabric based on invalid 8B/10B code
groups.
However, the synchronization state machine in the PCS is not available in some
functional modes. You may need to implement custom logic in the FPGA fabric to
indicate the loss-of-synchronization status of the received data.
Chapter 2: Transceiver Design Flow Guide for Stratix IV Devices 2–9
Implementation and Integration
February 2011 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
Gear Boxing Logic
Some protocols require a wider data path than provided by the transceiver interface;
for example, the Interlaken Protocol requires 64/67-bit encoding and decoding, but
the maximum data path interface in the Stratix IV GX transceiver is 40 bits. Therefore,
you must implement gear box logic to interface the 64/67-bit encoder-decoder with
the transceiver interface.
Functional Blocks to Interface with the Transceiver Configured in Basic (PMA Direct) Mode
In Basic (PMA direct) mode, all the PCS functional blocks in the transceiver channel
are disabled. Therefore, you may need to implement the following blocks in the FPGA
fabric:
■Word Alignment—To align the byte boundary on the received data.
■Byte Deserializer—To increase the data path width to the rest of the user logic and
to reduce the clock frequency of the data path by two.
■Phase Compensation FIFO (for bonded channel applications)—In bonded channel
applications in which multiple transceiver channels are connected to the same
upstream system (for example, one Interlaken Protocol link using 24 transceiver
channels). To minimize the global clock routing resources you use, implement a
phase compensation FIFO to interface the receiver side of the transceiver interface
with the logic in the FPGA Fabric.
■Use the recovered clock from each channel to clock the write side of the phase
compensation FIFO.
■Use the recovered clock from any of the channels to clock the read side of the
phase compensation FIFO.
With this method, you only use one clock resource and the subsequent receive-side
logic in the FPGA fabric can operate in this single clock domain.
■Deskew Logic (for bonded channel applications)—In bonded channel applications
in which multiple transceiver channels are connected to the same upstream
system, the data received between multiple channels are not aligned due to
potential skew in the interconnect and the upstream transmitter system. To
compensate for the skew, use deskew logic in the FPGA fabric.
■Encoding/Decoding or Scrambling/Descrambling—Many protocols require the
transmitter data to be encoded or scrambled to maintain signal integrity. This logic
may be required in the FPGA fabric based on your application requirements.
Integrate the Design
After you implement all of the required logic, integrate the transceiver instances with
the remaining logic and provide the appropriate transceiver-FPGA fabric interface
clocking. Synthesize the design using third-party synthesis tools, such as Synopsys
Synplicity or the Quartus II software synthesis tool. This allows you to detect syntax
errors in your design.
1If you are using the transceiver in Basic (PMA direct) mode, you must develop all the
PCS functionality in the FPGA fabric.
Chapter 2: Transceiver Design Flow Guide for Stratix IV Devices 2–10
Compilation
February 2011 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
Compilation
When you compile your design, the Quartus II software generates an SRAM Object
File (.sof) or programmer object file (.pof) that you can download to the Stratix IV GX
hardware. Typically, the first step in compiling the design is assigning pin locations
for the I/Os and clocks. Use the pin planner tool in the Quartus II software to assign
pins.
1For a basic tutorial about the Quartus II software, open the Quartus II
software, click the Help menu and select Tu t o r i a l .
■Stratix IV GX transceivers support a variety of I/O standards for the input
reference clocks and serial data pins. Assign pins and the logic level standard (for
example, 1.5-V PCML and LVDS) for the input and output pins.
fFor more information, refer to the I/O Features in Stratix IV Devices chapter.
■If you share the same transceiver-FPGA fabric interface clocks for multiple
transceiver channels (
tx_coreclk
and
rx_coreclk
) in your design, set the 0ppm
constraints. These constraints enable the Quartus II software to relax the legality
check restrictions on clocking.
fFor more information, refer to the “Common Clock Driver Selection Rules”
section of the Transceiver Clocking in Stratix IV Devices chapter.
■For transceiver serial pins and
refclk
pins, set the on-chip termination (OCT)
resistor settings.
fFor more information about supported OCT settings, refer to “Transmitter
Output Buffer” section of the Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
chapter.
■Create timing constraints for the clocks and data paths. Use the TimeQuest Timing
Analyzer to set timing constraints.
fFor more information about the TimeQuest Timing Analyzer, refer to the
Quartus II Development Software Handbook.
■Compile the design. This generates a .sof that can be downloaded in the FPGA.
The Quartus II software generates multiple report files that contain information such
as transceiver configuration and clock resource utilization. The following section
describes the report files relevant to using transceivers and clock resource.
Chapter 2: Transceiver Design Flow Guide for Stratix IV Devices 2–11
Verification
February 2011 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
Report Files
The Quartus II software provides a report file in the synthesis, fitter, map, placement,
and assembler stages. The report file provides useful information on the device and
transceiver configuration generated by the Quartus II software. This section only
describes the reports provided in the fitter stage. To access the report, click on the
Processing menu, select the Compilation Report option and expand the Fitter tab.
Fitter Summary
The fitter summary provides high-level information on the FPGA fabric resources and
transceiver channels used by your design. For example, to ensure that the Quartus II
software has created the number of transceiver channels as specified in your design,
refer to the GXB Receiver channels and GXB Transmitter channels field at the bottom
of the report. For detailed information on resource utilization, expand the Fitter tab.
Pin-Out File
Select the Pin-Out file option under the Fitter tab. The Quartus II software displays
the I/O standards and bank numbers of all the pins (used and unused) needed to
connect to the board. The Quartus II software also generates a PIN file (.pin) with the
above information. Altera recommends using the .pin as a guideline. Use the pin
connection guidelines for board layout.
fFor more information about pin connection guidelines for board layout, refer to
Stratix IV GX and Stratix IV E Device Family Pin Connection Guidelines.
Resource Section
Expand the Resource Section option under the Fitter tab to view the following tabs:
■The GXB Transmitter channel tab—Provides generated settings for all the
transmitter channels instantiated in your design.
■The GXB Transmitter PLL tab—Provides generated settings for all the transmitter
PLLs instantiated in your design.
■The GXB Receiver channel tab—Provides generated settings for all the receiver
channels instantiated in your design.
■The Global and other fast signals tab—Displays the list of clock and other signals
in your design that are assigned to the global and regional clock resources.
You can use the report file to verify whether the transceiver settings (for example, data
rate), are generated per your settings in the ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager.
Verification
The SignalTap® Logic Analyzer allows you to verify design functionality using the
on-chip logic analyzer. SignalTap provides options to create multiple sets of signals
that can be sampled using different trigger clocks. You can add the signals to the
SignalTap Logic Analyzer and save the file as an STP file (.stp). When you include this
.stp along with the design files and compile the design, the Quartus II software creates
an .sof that allows you to verify the functionality of the signals that you added in the
SignalTap Logic Analyzer file.
Chapter 2: Transceiver Design Flow Guide for Stratix IV Devices 2–12
Functional Simulation
February 2011 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
You can run the .stp that connects to the device through the JTAG port and displays
the signal transitions using the Quartus II software. Because the JTAG port is required
to run SignalTap, consider designing the board with the JTAG interface for debugging
your system.
fFor more information about using SignalTap, refer to the Design Debugging Using the
SignalTap II Embedded Logic Analyzer section in volume 3 of the Quartus II Development
Software Handbook.
To verify the functionality of the PCS and PMA blocks, the Stratix IV GX transceiver
provides diagnostic loopback features between the transmitter and the receiver
channels.
fFor more information, refer to the “Loopback Modes” section in the Transceiver
Clocking in Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Functional Simulation
Use the ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager-generated wrapper file to simulate the
instantiated transceiver configuration in third-party simulation software such as
ModelSim. For simulation, specific Altera® simulation library files are required (listed
in Table 2–1). The following library files are available in VHDL and Verilog versions:
■220pack
■220model
■altera_mf_components
■altera_mf
■sgate_pack
■sgate
■stratixiv_hssi_component
■stratixiv_hssi_atoms
These simulation files are available under the following folder in the Quartus II
installation directory: <Quartus II installation folder>/eda/sim_lib
1The stratixiv_hssi_component library file is only applicable if the transceiver instance
is created using VHDL.
For VHDL simulation using ModelSim, create the following libraries in your
ModelSim project:
■lpm
■sgate
■altera_mf
■stratixiv_hssi
These simulation files are available under <Quartus II installation
folder\quartus\eda\sim_lib>.
Chapter 2: Transceiver Design Flow Guide for Stratix IV Devices 2–13
Functional Simulation
February 2011 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
Compile the simulation files into the libraries specified in Table 2–1.
For example, to compile a file into a specific library using ModelSim, right click on the
file, select Properties, then click the General tab.
In the Compile to library option, select the corresponding library for the file selected.
Figure 2–2 shows the ModelSim window compilation of files in a specific library for
the Stratix II GX device.
Table 2–1. Library to Compile Simulation Files
Altera Simulation Files Library
220pack lpm
220model lpm
sgate pack sgate
sgate sgate
altera_mf_components altera_mf
altera_mf altera_mf
stratixiv_hssi_component stratixiv_hssi
stratixiv_hssi_atoms stratixiv_hssi
user design files work
Figure 2–2. ModelSim Option to Compile Files in a Specific Library
2–14 Chapter 2: Transceiver Design Flow Guide for Stratix IV Devices
Guidelines to Debug Transceiver-Based Designs
Stratix IV Device Handbook February 2011 Altera Corporation
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
Include all the libraries in the search path. Add the ALTGX and ALTGX_RECONFIG
MegaWizard Plug-In Manager-generated wrapper files (.v or .vhd) and all of the
design files to the library. Compile all the library files first, then the design files, and
lastly run the simulation.
For Verilog simulation, add the ALTGX and ALTGX_RECONFIG MegaWizard
Plug-In Manager-generated Verilog wrapper files (.v), the Altera library files, and all
of the design files. Compile all the library files first, then the simulation model file,
followed by the design files. Lastly, run the simulation.
These guidelines are further described in “Example 1: Fibre Channel Protocol
Application” below.
fFor more information about functional register transfer level (RTL) simulation or
post-fit simulation, refer to the Simulation chapter in volume 3 of the Quartus II
Handbook.
Guidelines to Debug Transceiver-Based Designs
This section provides guidelines to debug transceiver-based designs. If a system
failure occurs, the first step is to ensure the functionality of the logic within the FPGA.
Use the following information when you observe a system failure.
Guidelines to Debug the FPGA Logic and the Transceiver Interface
Before checking the functionality in silicon, perform functional simulation to ensure
the basic functionality of the RTL and the transceiver-FPGA fabric interface.
■Understand the limitations of functional simulation. If you intend to simulate
timing parameters, consider post-fit simulation. The functional simulation model
for transceivers does not model timing-related parameters or uncertainties in the
transceiver data path. For example, the PPM difference in the rate matcher clocks
(clock rate compensation) or the phase differences between the read and write side
of the phase compensation FIFO are not modeled.
fFor information about functional RTL simulation or post-fit simulation,
refer to the Simulation chapter in volume 3 of the Quartus II Handbook.
■Check whether the compiled design has timing violations in the TimeQuest
Timing Analyzer report. Set the appropriate timing constraints on the failing
paths.
fFor information about using the TimeQuest Timing Analyzer, refer to the
The Quartus II TimeQuest Timing Analyzer chapter in volume 3 of the
Quartus II Handbook.
■Verify the functionality of the transmitter and receiver data path with serial
loopback. Dynamically control the serial loopback through the
rx_seriallpbken
port. When this signal is asserted, data from the transmitter serializer is looped
back to the receiver CDR of the channel.
Chapter 2: Transceiver Design Flow Guide for Stratix IV Devices 2–15
Guidelines to Debug Transceiver-Based Designs
February 2011 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
■Use SignalTap to verify the behavior of the user logic and the transceiver interface
signals. If you have FPGA I/O pins available for debug, you can also use the
external logic analyzer to debug the functionality of the device.
fFor more information, refer to the In-System Debugging Using External Logic
Analyzers chapter in volume 3 of the Quartus II Handbook.
1To use these features, you must connect the JTAG configuration pins in the
FPGA.
■Verify the interconnect on the receive side by configuring the transceiver in reverse
serial loopback mode. In this case, the recovered data from the receiver channel is
sent to the transmitter buffer. To configure a transceiver channel operating in a
different configuration to reverse serial loopback mode, use the dynamic
reconfiguration controller.
■Check whether the transceiver FPGA fabric interface clocking schemes follow the
recommendations provided in the “FPGA Fabric-Transceiver Interface Clocking”
section in the Transceiver Clocking in Stratix IV Devices chapter.
■Ensure that you have used the recommended transceiver reset sequence.
Guidelines to Debug System Level Issues
If you have determined that the logic in the FPGA fabric is functionally correct, check
for system level issues:
■Check the voltage ripple across the 2 k resistor that is connected to the
RREF
pin.
The voltage ripple must be less than 60 mv.
■Measure the eye on the near-end and far-end of the transmitter to understand the
jitter added by the transmitter and interconnect.
■Ensure that the high-speed scopes you use for measurement have sufficient
bandwidth (the bandwidth rating on the scope and cables must be at least
three times the serial data rate).
■Check whether the eye meets the eye-mask requirements if specified by the
protocol application.
■Use scopes that provide information on the different jitter components to
understand the possible source of the increased jitter. For example, increased
intersymbol interface (ISI) indicates potential bandwidth limitations on the
interconnect.
1Some scopes, such as Agilent 86100C DCA, require pre-defined patterns
(for example, PRBS7 or PRBS23) to provide jitter components.
■Measure signals on the traces (no connector) using a high-impedance differential
probe with short leads.
2–16 Chapter 2: Transceiver Design Flow Guide for Stratix IV Devices
Guidelines to Debug Transceiver-Based Designs
Stratix IV Device Handbook February 2011 Altera Corporation
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
■Ensure that characteristic impedance on the interconnect matches the source and
load systems.
■Check for impedance discontinuities on the trace by Time Domain
Reflectometry (TDR).
■Revisit the board design, layout, and routing for any inconsistencies that can
cause impedance discontinuities.
■Check whether the termination schemes on the Stratix IV GX device and on the
upstream system are matched. Altera recommends using OCT in the
Stratix IV GX device instead of external termination to improve signal
integrity.
■Change the transmit output differential voltage to improve eye amplitude.
■Compensate for high frequency losses in the interconnect by changing the
equalization settings of the Stratix IV GX device and check for improvement of the
bit error rate. If the upstream system does not have an equalization feature,
increase the pre-emphasis (1st post tap) of the Stratix IV GX transmitter. In cases
where there are multiple interconnects between the Stratix IV GX device and the
upstream system, use the pre-tap and 2nd post tap. Altera provides tools to select
the pre-emphasis.
■Measure the increase in jitter at the near end and far end with one channel turned
on at a time if you have multiple transceiver channels connected to the upstream
system. This helps to observe the effect of cross talk from adjacent channels on the
victim channel.
■Check the board layout and routing to ensure that you have implemented the
design practices to mitigate cross talk.
■Ensure that the input voltage and duty cycle of the input reference clock source
provided to the transmitter PLLs meet the input reference clock requirements.
■Check whether the voltage drop on the power supplies is within the specified
tolerance range.
■Measure the voltage at the via beneath the power supply pin using a
high-impedance probe.
■Check whether the voltage regulator specifications meet the Stratix IV GX
power supply requirements.
■Revisit the power distribution scheme for the supply voltage to ensure that it is
designed to handle the transient current requirements of the transceiver.
fFor the tolerance values of the different power supplies, refer to the DC and
Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices chapter.
■Check for periodic modulation of other frequency components on the transmit
data. Send a high-frequency pattern (1010) from the transmitter side and connect
the transmitter serial output to a spectrum analyzer.
fFor more information about debugging Stratix IV GX transceivers, refer to
AN 553: Debugging Transceivers.
Chapter 2: Transceiver Design Flow Guide for Stratix IV Devices 2–17
Example 1: Fibre Channel Protocol Application
February 2011 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
Example 1: Fibre Channel Protocol Application
Assume that you want to implement a fibre channel protocol application using three
transceiver channels. Consider the following system requirements:
■You need three transceiver channels
■All the channels need to be placed in the same transceiver block
■All the channels need to have independent control to reset their PCS and PMA
functional blocks
Table 2–2 lists the transceiver channel configuration for Example 1.
Phase 1—Architecture
In this phase, check whether the Stratix IV GX device supports or meets your design
requirements.
Device Specification
Consider the questions listed in Table 2–3 before setting device-specific parameters.
fFor the maximum data rates supported, refer to the “Transceiver Performance
Specifications” section in the DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices
chapter.
Table 2–2. Transceiver Channel Configuration for Example 1
Channels Mode of Operation Data Rate
Input Reference
Clock Frequency
(MHz)
0Receiver and Transmitter FC4G (4.25 Gbps) 106.25
1Receiver and Transmitter FC1G (1.0625 Gbps) 53.125
2Transmitter Only FC4G (4.25 Gbps) 106.25
Table 2–3. Device Specific Parameters
Questions Answer
Do the parameters meet the fibre channel protocol
electrical requirements?
Yes
For more information, refer to the “Transceiver Performance
Characteristics” section in the DC and Switching
Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices chapter
Are three transceiver channels available? Yes
Is there support for 4.25 Gbps and 1.0625 Gbps data
rates?
Yes
Two CMU PLLs are available within each transceiver block to
support two different transmitter data rates. Each receiver
channel contains a dedicated receiver CDR that supports
4.25 Gbps and 1.0625 Gbps data rates.
2–18 Chapter 2: Transceiver Design Flow Guide for Stratix IV Devices
Example 1: Fibre Channel Protocol Application
Stratix IV Device Handbook February 2011 Altera Corporation
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
Transceiver Configuration
The fibre channel protocol uses an 8B/10B encoder and requires clock rate
compensation.
Functional Blocks
Consider the questions listed in Table 2–4 before configuring the transceiver.
The design requires a Transmitter and Receiver configuration for two channels and a
Transmitter Only configuration for one channel (Table 2–5).
Dynamic Reconfiguration
If your application requires you to dynamically reconfigure the transceiver PMA
controls, ensure that you understand the settings, options, and user logic required to
enable this feature.
fFor more information, refer to the “Interfacing ALTGX and ALTGX_RECONFIG
Instances” section in the Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices chapter.
fFor more information about initiating read and write transactions, refer to the
“Dynamically Reconfiguring PMA Controls” section in the Dynamic Reconfiguration in
Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Table 2–4. Configuring the Transceiver
Questions Answer
Is the 8B/10B encoder in the PCS block fibre channel
compliant?
No
The fibre channel protocol consists of two different
End-of-Frame (EOFt) ordered sets. The correct EOFt ordered
set sent by the user logic depends on the ending disparity of
the word preceeding the EOFt. The Stratix IV GX transceiver
does not provide running disparity flags to the user logic.
Therefore, the user logic might not be able to select the
correct EOFt ordered set.
Is there a workaround? Yes
Implement the 8B/10B encoder in the FPGA fabric.
Is the clock rate compensation block in the PCS available
without an 8B/10B encoder?
No
You can implement this in the FPGA fabric.
Table 2–5. Multiple Channels
Questions Answer
Does the Stratix IV GX transceiver support these two
configurations and allow you to combine them within the
same transceiver block
Yes
The available FPGA fabric interface width is 20 or 40 bits to
support 4.25 Gbps and 1.0625 Gbps data rates, respectively.
This FPGA fabric interface facilitates 8B/10B encoding and
decoding in the FPGA fabric without additional
re-arrangement of the received parallel data to a 10-bit
boundary.
Chapter 2: Transceiver Design Flow Guide for Stratix IV Devices 2–19
Example 1: Fibre Channel Protocol Application
February 2011 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
If you are using the channel reconfiguration feature, enable the appropriate options in
the ALTGX and ALTGX_RECONFIG MegaWizard Plug-In Managers.
fYou can dynamically use the reconfiguration modes to reconfigure different
functional blocks in a transceiver channel using .mifs. For information about
generating .mifs, refer to the “Channel and CMU PLL Reconfiguration Mode Details”
section in the Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Clocking
Consider the questions listed in Table 2–6 before configuring clocking.
fFor more information about clocking the transmitter and receiver channel data path
for this type of configuration, refer to the “Transmitter Channel Datapath Clocking”
section of the Transceiver Clocking in Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Table 2–6. Configuring Clocking
Questions Answer
Is there support for two different input reference clocks?
Yes
The Stratix IV GX transceiver has two
refclk
pins for each
transceiver block.
Do the
refclk
pins support the required frequency
range?
Yes
The minimum frequency range of
refclk
is 50 MHz; the
maximum frequency range is 622.08 MHz.
Can transceiver-FPGA fabric interface clocking be shared?
No
The design requires independent control on all channels, so
you must not share the transceiver-FPGA fabric interface
clock of one channel with another channel. Each of the
channels must use its own
tx_clkout
and
rx_clkout
signals to clock the data between the transceiver channels and
the FPGA fabric.
Does the Stratix IV GX transceiver support this feature? Yes
2–20 Chapter 2: Transceiver Design Flow Guide for Stratix IV Devices
Example 1: Fibre Channel Protocol Application
Stratix IV Device Handbook February 2011 Altera Corporation
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
Figure 2–3 shows the transmitter side of the transceiver setup for Example 1.
1The transmitter side receives its clocks from the clock multiplier unit (CMU) PLLs.
The receiver side contains its dedicated CDR that provides the high-speed serial and
low-speed parallel clocks to its PMA and PCS blocks, respectively.
Phase 2—Implementation
Create the transceiver instance using the ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager.
fFor a description of the individual options, refer to the ALTGX Transceiver Setup Guide
for Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Figure 2–3. Top-Level Transceiver Setup—Transmitter-Side Only
Channel 0
(4.25 Gbps)
TX
RX
Channel 1
(1.0625 Gbps)
TX
RX
Channel 2
(4.25 Gbps)
TX
One CMU PLL Configured for
4.25 Gbps Data Rate
Second CMU PLL Conf igured f or
1.0625 Gbps Data Rate
refclk0 (106.25 MHz)
refclk1 (53.125 MHz)
Transceiver Block
Chapter 2: Transceiver Design Flow Guide for Stratix IV Devices 2–21
Example 1: Fibre Channel Protocol Application
February 2011 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
Create the Transceiver Instance for an FC4G Configuration (Channel 0)
Figure 2–4 through Figure 2–14 show the different options available in the
ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager to create the transceiver channel instance for
the FC4G data rate. Use this instance for channel 0, with the following settings:
■General screen—You can configure the Stratix IV GX transceiver for fibre channel
protocol using Basic mode. Set the options with the values shown in Figure 2–4.
Figure 2–4. FC4G Instance Settings (General Screen)
2–22 Chapter 2: Transceiver Design Flow Guide for Stratix IV Devices
Example 1: Fibre Channel Protocol Application
Stratix IV Device Handbook February 2011 Altera Corporation
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
■PLL/Ports screen—Check the Train Receiver CDR from PLL inclk option, as
shown in Figure 2–5. When you select this option, the same input reference clock
used for the CMU PLL is provided as a training clock to the receiver CDR.
■Check the
pll_powerdown
signal. This signal allows you to power down the
CMU PLL. Use this signal as part of your reset sequence.
■Check the
pll_locked
signal. This signal indicates whether the CMU PLL is
locked to the input reference clock. The user logic waits until the
pll_locked
signal goes high before transmitting data.
■Check the
rx_freqlocked
signal. This signal indicates whether the receiver
CDR is locked to data. When the receiver CDR is configured in automatic lock
mode, assert the
rx_digitalreset
signal if the
rx_freqlocked
signal goes low
to keep the receiver PCS under reset. Altera recommends specific transceiver
reset sequences to ensure proper device operation.
fFor more information about receiver CDR and lock modes, refer to the “Receiver
Channel Datapath” section of the Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Figure 2–5. FC4G Instance Settings (PLL/Ports Screen)
Chapter 2: Transceiver Design Flow Guide for Stratix IV Devices 2–23
Example 1: Fibre Channel Protocol Application
February 2011 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
■Ports /Cal Blk screen—The calibration block is required so it is always enabled.
Select the options shown in Figure 2–6.
Figure 2–6. FC4G Instance Settings (Ports/Cal Blk Screen)
2–24 Chapter 2: Transceiver Design Flow Guide for Stratix IV Devices
Example 1: Fibre Channel Protocol Application
Stratix IV Device Handbook February 2011 Altera Corporation
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
■RX Analog screen—Select the options shown in Figure 2–7.
fFor a description of the individual options, refer to the ALTGX_RECONFIG
Megafunction User Guide for Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Figure 2–7. FC4G Instance Settings (RxAnalog Screen)
Chapter 2: Transceiver Design Flow Guide for Stratix IV Devices 2–25
Example 1: Fibre Channel Protocol Application
February 2011 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
■TX Analog screen—Select the output differential voltage and common mode
voltage values that meet the fibre channel protocol specification. If you intend to
transmit data through faulty interconnects, select the pre-emphasis settings shown
in Figure 2–8.
fFor more information about pre-emphasis settings, refer to the DC and Switching
Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Figure 2–8. FC4G Instance Settings (TX Analog Screen)
2–26 Chapter 2: Transceiver Design Flow Guide for Stratix IV Devices
Example 1: Fibre Channel Protocol Application
Stratix IV Device Handbook February 2011 Altera Corporation
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
■Reconfig screen—Set the starting channel number to 0. Because offset cancellation
is required for receiver channels, the Offset Cancellation for Receiver Channels
option is automatically enabled. Ensure that you connect the
reconfig_fromgxb
and
reconfig_togxb
ports with the dynamic reconfiguration controller
(Figure 2–9).
fFor more information about the starting channel numbers, refer to the “Logical
Channel Addressing” section of the Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices
chapter.
Figure 2–9. FC4G Instance Settings (Reconfig Screen)
Chapter 2: Transceiver Design Flow Guide for Stratix IV Devices 2–27
Example 1: Fibre Channel Protocol Application
February 2011 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
■Lpbk screen—The serial loopback option is enabled, as shown in Figure 2–10.
Figure 2–10. FC4G Instance Settings (Lpbk Screen)
2–28 Chapter 2: Transceiver Design Flow Guide for Stratix IV Devices
Example 1: Fibre Channel Protocol Application
Stratix IV Device Handbook February 2011 Altera Corporation
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
■Basic/8B10B screen—The Basic/8B10B screen is shown in Figure 2–11. The 8B/10B
encoder is not compatible with the fibre channel protocol application; therefore,
this option is unchecked.
Figure 2–11. FC4G Instance Settings (Basic 8B/10B)
Chapter 2: Transceiver Design Flow Guide for Stratix IV Devices 2–29
Example 1: Fibre Channel Protocol Application
February 2011 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
■Word Aligner screen—The fibre channel protocol requires that you use K28.5 to
align the byte boundary. In the What is the word alignment pattern? option, set
one of the 10-bit disparity values to K28.5. The word aligner automatically detects
when the other disparity value is received.
■Select the
rx_patterndetect
and
rx_syncstatus
signals. The
rx_patterndetect
signal indicates whenever the word alignment pattern is
detected in the word boundary.
■Click Finish to exit the ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager.
Figure 2–12. FC4G Instance Settings (Word Aligner Screen)
2–30 Chapter 2: Transceiver Design Flow Guide for Stratix IV Devices
Example 1: Fibre Channel Protocol Application
Stratix IV Device Handbook February 2011 Altera Corporation
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
Create the Transceiver Instance for an FC1G Configuration (Channel 1)
Creating the instance for FC1G is very similar to that of the FC4G configuration, with
the following changes:
■General screen—Set the values shown in Figure 2–13.
■Reconfig screen—Set the starting channel number to 4.
Figure 2–13. FC1G Instance (Channel 1) Settings (General Screen)
Chapter 2: Transceiver Design Flow Guide for Stratix IV Devices 2–31
Example 1: Fibre Channel Protocol Application
February 2011 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
Create the Instance for an FC4G Configuration—Transmitter Only Mode
(Channel 2)
This configuration is similar to the channel 0 configuration, with the following
changes:
■Set the operation mode to Transmitter Only, as shown in Figure 2–14. Because this
is a Transmitter Only instance, all the options relevant to the receiver are not
available in the ALTGX MegaWizard Plug-In Manager.
Figure 2–14. FC4G_TXONLY Instance (Channel 1) Settings (General Screen)
2–32 Chapter 2: Transceiver Design Flow Guide for Stratix IV Devices
Example 1: Fibre Channel Protocol Application
Stratix IV Device Handbook February 2011 Altera Corporation
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
■Reconfig screen—Set the starting channel number to 8. Select the Analog controls
option even if you do not intend to dynamically reconfigure the PMA controls, as
shown in Figure 2–15. Selecting this option is required for this example scenario
because:
■For a Transmitter Only instance, offset cancellation is not available; therefore,
the
reconfig_fromgxb
and
reconfig_togxb
ports are not available.
■The other two instances (containing a receiver channel) have these ports
available because offset cancellation is automatically enabled.
■If one transceiver instance has the
reconfig_fromgxb
and
reconfig_togxb
ports enabled, the Quartus II software requires the other transceiver instances
to have these ports enabled to combine them in the same transceiver block.
Therefore, for this Transmitter Only instance, the Analog options... must be
selected.
fFor more information about the requirements to combine multiple transceiver
instances, refer to the “Combining Transceiver Instances in Multiple Transceiver
Blocks” section in the Configuring Multiple Protocols and Data Rates in Stratix IV Devices
chapter.
Figure 2–15. FC4G_TXONLY Instance (Reconfig) Screen
Chapter 2: Transceiver Design Flow Guide for Stratix IV Devices 2–33
Example 1: Fibre Channel Protocol Application
February 2011 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
Create the Dynamic Reconfiguration Controller (ALTGX_Reconfig) Instance
This section only describes the relevant options that must be set to implement the
application.
fFor more information, refer to the Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices
chapter.
Figure 2–16 shows the options that you must set (assuming that you do not require
dynamic reconfiguration of the PMA controls in the transceiver channels).
fFor more information about selecting the Number of Channels option, refer to the
“Total Number of Channels Option in the ALTGX_RECONFIG Instance” section in
the Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Connect the following:
■
reconfig_fromgxb[16:0]
of the ALTGX_RECONFIG instance to the FC4G
instance (channel0)
■
reconfig_fromgxb[33:17]
to the FC1G instance (channel1)
■
reconfig_fromgxb[50:34]
to the FC4G Transmitter Only instance (channel2)
■
reconfig_togxb[3:0]
of the ALTGX_RECONFIG instance to all three transceiver
instances
Figure 2–16. ALTGX_Reconfig Settings (Reconfiguration Settings Screen)
2–34 Chapter 2: Transceiver Design Flow Guide for Stratix IV Devices
Example 1: Fibre Channel Protocol Application
Stratix IV Device Handbook February 2011 Altera Corporation
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
Create Reset Logic to Control the FPGA Fabric and Transceivers
The design requires independent control on each channel. Altera recommends
creating independent reset control logic for each channel.
In this design, channel 0 and channel 2 share the same CMU PLL (because they are
configured at the same data rate) and channel 1 uses the second CMU PLL. When you
create a Transmitter Only or Receiver and Transmitter instance, the ALTGX
MegaWizard Plug-In Manager provides a
pll_powerdown
signal to reset the CMU PLL
that provides clocks to the transmitter channel. In this design example, because
channels 0 and 2 share the same CMU PLL, drive the
pll_powerdown
port of channel 0
and channel 2 in the ALTGX instance from the same logic.
Chapter 2: Transceiver Design Flow Guide for Stratix IV Devices 2–35
Example 1: Fibre Channel Protocol Application
February 2011 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
Channels 0, 1, and 2 have separate
rx_digitalreset
,
rx_analogreset
, and
tx_digitalreset
signals. Figure 2–17 shows the interface between the three
transceiver instances and the FPGA fabric.
Figure 2–17. Transceiver—FPGA Fabric Interface
Receiver Sid e Logic
Transm itter Side Lo gic
Transm itter Side Lo gic
Receiver Side Logic
User Logic
Reset
Control
Logic
Transmitter Side Logic
data
processing
logic 8B/10B
encoder
8B/10B
decoder
data
processing
logic
Reset Control
for CMU PLL
Reset
Control
Logic
data
processing
logic 8B/10B
encoder
Reset
Control
Logic
data
processing
logic
data
processing
logic
8B/10B
encoder
8B/10B
decoder rx_dataout
rx_syncstatus
rx_patterndetect
tx_datain
rx_analogreset
rx_digitalreset
tx_digitalreset
rx_freqlocked
pll_locked
pll_powerdown
tx_datain
tx_digitalreset
pll_powerdown
pll_locked
rx_dataout
rx_syncstatus
rx_patterndetect
tx_datain
rx_analogreset
tx_digitalreset
rx_digitalreset
rx_freqlocked
ALTGX Instance
Channel0
Starting channel
number = 0
reconfig_fromgxb[16:0]
reconfig_togxb[3:0]
ALTGX_RECONFIG
Instance
reconfig_fromgxb[16:0]
reconfig_fromgxb[50:34]
reconfig_fromgxb[33:17]
ALTGX Instance
Channel 2
reconfig_fromgxb[16:0]
reconfig_togxb[3:0]
Starting channel
number = 8
ALTGX Instance
Channel 1
reconfig_togxb[3:0]
reconfig_fromgxb[16:0]
Starting channel
number = 4
2–36 Chapter 2: Transceiver Design Flow Guide for Stratix IV Devices
Example 1: Fibre Channel Protocol Application
Stratix IV Device Handbook February 2011 Altera Corporation
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
Create Data Processing and Other User Logic
For this example, you must implement the 8B/10B encoder and decoder in the FPGA
fabric. Figure 2–17 on page 2–35 shows the logic on the transmitter and receiver side
and the system logic controls for all channels in the FPGA fabric. This block diagram
is a representation of a typical system and may not exactly show the different blocks
in a practical application. Interface all the logic blocks with the transceiver.
If you would like to add SignalTap for verification, first complete synthesis, then add
the transceiver-FPGA fabric or other user logic signals in SignalTap. Lastly, compile
the design to generate the .sof.
Phase 3—Compilation
Assign pins for the input and output signals in your design. The Quartus II software
versions 8.1 and earlier do not allow pin assignments for the Stratix IV GX device.
Set the OCT values for the transceiver serial pins, add timing constraints for the clocks
and data paths in your logic, then compile the design.
Phase 4—Simulating the Design
To simulate the design, follow the steps outlined in “Functional Simulation” on
page 2–12.
Document Revision History
Table 2–7 lists the revision history for this chapter.
Table 2–7. Document Revision History (Part 1 of 2)
Date Version Changes
February 2011 4.1
■Applied new template.
■Updated chapter title.
■Minor text edits
November 2009 4.0
■Added Table 2–3, Table 2–4, Table 2–5, and Table 2–6.
■Minor text edits.
June 2009 3.1
■Updated the “Introduction”, “Power Supplies”, “Transceiver Configuration”, “Clocking”,
“Create Transceiver Instances”, “Create Dynamic Reconfiguration Controller Instances”,
“Create Data Processing and Other User Logic”, “Functional Simulation” sections.
■Added the “Board Design Requirements”, “Gear Boxing Logic”, “Guidelines to Debug the
FPGA Logic and the Transceiver Interface”, and “Guidelines to Debug System Level
Issues” sections.
■Added introductory sentences to improve search ability.
March 2009 3.0
■Add “Power Supplies” on page 2–6
■Updated “Dynamic Reconfiguration” on page 2–4
■Text edits
Chapter 2: Transceiver Design Flow Guide for Stratix IV Devices 2–37
Example 1: Fibre Channel Protocol Application
February 2011 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
November 2008 2.0
■Added “Transceiver Configuration” on page 2–3
■Added “Create Dynamic Reconfiguration Controller Instances” on page 2–8
■“Dynamic Reconfiguration” on page 2–15
■Updated “Create the Instance for an FC4G Configuration—Transmitter Only Mode
(Channel 2)” on page 2–28
■Added “Create the Dynamic Reconfiguration Controller (ALTGX_Reconfig) Instance” on
page 2–30
■Updated Figure 2–1, Figure 2–4, Figure 2–5, Figure 2–6, Figure 2–7, Figure 2–8,
Figure 2–10, Figure 2–11, Figure 2–12, Figure 2–13, and Figure 2–14
■Added Figure 2–9, Figure 2–15, and Figure 2–16
May 2008 1.0 Initial release.
Table 2–7. Document Revision History (Part 2 of 2)
Date Version Changes
2–38 Chapter 2: Transceiver Design Flow Guide for Stratix IV Devices
Example 1: Fibre Channel Protocol Application
Stratix IV Device Handbook February 2011 Altera Corporation
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
SIV53004-3.1
© 2011 Altera Corporation. All rights reserved. ALTERA, ARRIA, CYCLONE, HARDCOPY, MAX, MEGACORE, NIOS, QUARTUS and STRATIX words and logos
are trademarks of Altera Corporation and registered in the U.S. Patent and Trademark Office and in other countries. All other words and logos identified as
trademarks or service marks are the property of their respective holders as described at www.altera.com/common/legal.html. Altera warrants performance of its
semiconductor products to current specifications in accordance with Altera's standard warranty, but reserves the right to make changes to any products and
services at any time without notice. Altera assumes no responsibility or liability arising out of the application or use of any information, product, or service
described herein except as expressly agreed to in writing by Altera. Altera customers are advised to obtain the latest version of device specifications before relying
on any published information and before placing orders for products or services.
Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
February 2011
Feedback Subscribe
ISO
9001:2008
Registered
3. ALTGX_RECONFIG Megafunction User
Guide for Stratix IV Devices
You can use the ALTGX_RECONFIG MegaWizard™ Plug-In Manager in the
Quartus® II software to create and modify design files for the Stratix® IV device
family. This chapter describes the different Quartus II settings for dynamic
reconfiguration in the ALTGX_RECONFIG MegaWizard Plug-In Manager.
The MegaWizard Plug-In Manager helps you create or modify design files that
contain custom megafunction variations. These auto-generated MegaWizard files can
then be instantiated in a design file. The MegaWizard Plug-In Manager allows you to
specify options for the ALTGX_RECONFIG megafunction.
Start the MegaWizard Plug-In Manager using one of the following methods:
■Choose the MegaWizard Plug-In Manager command (Tools menu).
■When working in the Block Editor (schematic symbol), open the Edit menu and
choose Insert Symbol. The Symbol dialog box appears. In the Symbol dialog box,
click MegaWizard Plug-In Manager.
■Start the stand-alone version of the MegaWizard Plug-In Manager by typing the
following command at the command prompt:
qmegawiz
.
Dynamic Reconfiguration
This section describes the options available on the individual pages of the
ALTGX_RECONFIG MegaWizard Plug-In Manager.
1The MegaWizard Plug-In Manager provides a warning if any of the settings you
choose are illegal.
February 2011
SIV53004-3.1
3–2 Chapter 3: ALTGX_RECONFIG Megafunction User Guide for Stratix IV Devices
Dynamic Reconfiguration
Stratix IV Device Handbook February 2011 Altera Corporation
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
Figure 3–1 shows the first page of the MegaWizard Plug-In Manager. To generate an
ALTGX_RECONFIG custom megafunction variation, select Create a new custom
megafunction variation. Click Next.
Figure 3–2 shows the second page of the MegaWizard Plug-In Manager. Select the
following options (click Next when you are done):
1. In the list of megafunctions on the left, click the “+” icon beside the I/O item. From
the options presented, choose ALTGX_RECONFIG megafunction.
2. From the drop-down menu beside Which device family will you be using?, select
Stratix IV.
3. From the radio buttons under Which type of output file do you want to create?,
choose your output file format (AHDL, VHDL, or Verilog HDL).
4. In the box beneath What name do you want for the output file?, enter the file
name or click the Browse button to search for it.
1For the design to compile successfully, always enable the dynamic reconfiguration
controller for all the ALTGX instances in the design.
Figure 3–1. MegaWizard Plug-In Manager (Page 1)
Chapter 3: ALTGX_RECONFIG Megafunction User Guide for Stratix IV Devices 3–3
Dynamic Reconfiguration
February 2011 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
Figure 3–2. MegaWizard Plug-In Manager—ALTGX_RECONFIG (Page 2)
3–4 Chapter 3: ALTGX_RECONFIG Megafunction User Guide for Stratix IV Devices
Dynamic Reconfiguration
Stratix IV Device Handbook February 2011 Altera Corporation
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
Figure 3–3 shows page 3 of the ALTGX_RECONFIG MegaWizard Plug-In Manager.
From the drop-down menu, select the number of channels controlled by the dynamic
reconfiguration controller.
Figure 3–3. MegaWizard Plug-In Manager—ALTGX_RECONFIG (Reconfiguration Settings)
Chapter 3: ALTGX_RECONFIG Megafunction User Guide for Stratix IV Devices 3–5
Dynamic Reconfiguration
February 2011 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
Table 3–1 lists the available options on page 3 of the MegaWizard Plug-In Manager for
your ALTGX_RECONFIG custom megafunction variation. Select the Match
project/default option if you want to change the device Currently selected device
family options.
Make your selections on page 3, then click Next.
Table 3–1. MegaWizard Plug-In Manager Options (Page 3) (Part 1 of 2)
ALTGX_RECONFIG
Setting Description Reference
What is the number of
channels controlled by
the reconfig controller?
Determine the highest logical channel address among all
the ALTGX instances connected to the ALTGX_RECONFIG
instance. Round it up to the next multiple of four and set
that number in this option.
Depending on this setting, the ALTGX_RECONFIG
MegaWizard Plug-in Manager generates the appropriate
signal width for the interface signal (
reconfig_fromgxb
)
between the ALTGX_RECONFIG and the ALTGX instances.
It also gives the necessary bus width for all the selected
physical media attachment (PMA) signals.
Depending on the number of channels set, the resource
estimate changes because this is a soft implementation
that uses fabric logic resources. The resource estimate is
shown in the bottom left of Page 3 of the MegaWizard
Plug-in Manager.
“Total Number of Channels
Controlled by the
ALTGX_RECONFIG Instance”
section of the Dynamic
Reconfiguration in Stratix IV
Devices chapter.
3–6 Chapter 3: ALTGX_RECONFIG Megafunction User Guide for Stratix IV Devices
Dynamic Reconfiguration
Stratix IV Device Handbook February 2011 Altera Corporation
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
What are the features to
be reconfigured by the
reconfig controller?
This feature is always enabled by default:
■Offset Cancellation for Receiver Channels—After the
device powers up, the dynamic reconfiguration
controller performs offset cancellation on the receiver
portion of all the transceiver channels controlled by it.
The “Offset Cancellation” section of
the Dynamic Reconfiguration in
Stratix IV Devices chapter.
These features are available for selection:
■Analog Controls—Allows dynamic reconfiguration of
PMA controls such as Equalization, Pre-emphasis, DC
Gain, and voltage offset differential (VOD).
■Data rate division in TX—Allows dynamic
reconfiguration of the transmitter local divider settings
to 1, 2, or 4. The transmitter channel data rate is
reconfigured based on the local divider settings.
■Channel and TX PLL select/reconfig—The following
features are available under this option:
■CMU PLL Reconfiguration—Allows you to
dynamically reconfigure the clock multiplier unit
(CMU) phase-locked loop (PLL) to a different data
rate.
■Channel and CMU PLL reconfiguration—Allows the
dynamic reconfiguration of the transceiver channel
from one functional mode to another and also the
CMU PLL reconfiguration.
■Channel reconfiguration with TX PLL select—
Allows you to select additional transmitter PLLs for
the transceiver channel and reconfigure the
functional mode of the channel.
■Central Control Unit reconfiguration—Allows you
to reconfigure bonded mode configurations from
one to another.
■Adaptive Equalization Control —Allows you to
reconfigure the adaptive equalization hardware (AEQ) in
the receiver portion of the transceivers. Enable one
time mode for a single channel mode is a single stable
equalization value is set up and locked for the specified
channel by the AEQ hardware.
The “PMA Controls
Reconfiguration Mode Details”
section, “Data Rate Division in
Transmitter Mode Details” section,
“CMU PLL Reconfiguration Mode
Details’” section, “Channel and
CMU PLL Reconfiguration Mode
Details” section, “Channel
reconfiguration with TX PLL Select
Mode Details” section, and the
“Adaptive Equalization (AEQ)”
section in the Dynamic
Reconfiguration in Stratix IV
Devices chapter.
What are the features to
be reconfigured by the
reconfig controller?
■EyeQ control—Allows you to reconfigure the EyeQ
hardware in the receiver portion of the transceivers.
“EyeQ” section in the Dynamic
Reconfiguration in Stratix IV
Devices chapter.
Table 3–1. MegaWizard Plug-In Manager Options (Page 3) (Part 2 of 2)
ALTGX_RECONFIG
Setting Description Reference
Chapter 3: ALTGX_RECONFIG Megafunction User Guide for Stratix IV Devices 3–7
Dynamic Reconfiguration
February 2011 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
Figure 3–4 shows page 4 of the ALTGX_RECONFIG MegaWizard Plug-In Manager.
Figure 3–4. MegaWizard Plug-In Manager—ALTGX_RECONFIG (Analog Controls)
3–8 Chapter 3: ALTGX_RECONFIG Megafunction User Guide for Stratix IV Devices
Dynamic Reconfiguration
Stratix IV Device Handbook February 2011 Altera Corporation
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
Table 3–2 lists the available options on page 4 of the MegaWizard Plug-In Manager for
your ALTGX_RECONFIG custom megafunction variation.
Make your selections on page 4, then click Next.
Table 3–2. MegaWizard Plug-In Manager Options (Page 4) (Part 1 of 2)
ALTGX_RECONFIG
Setting Description Reference
Use
‘
logical_channel_add
ress
’ port for Analog
controls reconfiguration
This option is applicable only for Analog controls
reconfiguration and is available for selection when the
number of channels controlled by the ALTGX_RECONFIG
instance is more than one. The dynamic reconfiguration
controller reconfigures only the channel whose logical
channel address is specified at the
logical_channel_address
port.
The width of this port is selected by the ALTGX_RECONFIG
MegaWizard Plug-In Manager depending on the number
of channels controlled by the dynamic reconfiguration
controller. The maximum width of the
logical_channel_address
port is 9 bits.
“Dynamic Reconfiguration
Controller Port List” and
“Method 1—Using the
logical_channel_address Port”
sections of the Dynamic
Reconfiguration in Stratix IV
Devices chapter.
Use the same control
signal for all channels
This option is available for selection when the number of
channels controlled by the ALTGX_RECONFIG instance is
more than one. When you enable this option, the dynamic
reconfiguration controller writes the same control signals
to all the channels connected to it.
You cannot select this option if you enable the Use
'logical_channel_address' port for Analog controls
reconfiguration option.
Method 2 and Method 3 of the
“PMA Controls Reconfiguration
Mode Details” section of Dynamic
Reconfiguration in Stratix IV
Devices chapter.
Chapter 3: ALTGX_RECONFIG Megafunction User Guide for Stratix IV Devices 3–9
Dynamic Reconfiguration
February 2011 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
Write Control
The PMA control ports available to write various analog
settings to the transceiver channels controlled by the
dynamic reconfiguration controller are as follows:
■
tx_vodctrl
—VOD; 3 bits per channel
■
tx_preemp_0t
—Pre-emphasis control pre-tap; 5 bits
per channel
■
tx_preemp_1t
—Pre-emphasis control 1st post-tap;
5 bits per channel
■
tx_preemp_2t
—Pre-emphasis control 2nd post-tap;
5 bits per channel
■
rx_eqdcgain
—Equalizer DC gain; 3 bits per channel
■
rx_eqctrl
—Equalizer control; 4 bits per channel
These are optional signals. The signal widths are based on
the setting you entered for the What is the number of
channels controlled by the reconfig controller? option
and whether you enabled the Use
'logical_channel_address' port for Analog controls
reconfiguration option. The port width is also determined
by the Use the same control signal for all channels
option.
At least one of these PMA control ports must be enabled
to configure and use the dynamic reconfiguration
controller.
“Dynamically Reconfiguring PMA
Controls” section of the Dynamic
Reconfiguration in Stratix IV
Devices chapter.
Read Control
The PMA control ports available to read the existing values
from the transceiver channels controlled by the dynamic
reconfiguration controller are as follows:
■
tx_vodctrl_out
—VOD; 3 bits per channel
■
tx_preemp_0t_out
—Pre-emphasis control pre-tap;
5 bits per channel
■
tx_preemp1t_out
—Pre-emphasis control 1st
post-tap; 5 bits per channel
■
tx_preemp_2t_out
—Pre-emphasis control 2nd
post-tap; 5 bits per channel
■
rx_eqdcgain_out
—Equalizer DC gain; 3 bits per
channel
■
rx_eqctrl_out
—Equalizer control; 4 bits per channel
These are optional signals. The signal widths are based on
the setting you entered for the What is the number of
channels controlled by the reconfig controller? option
and whether you enabled the Use
'logical_channel_address' port for Analog controls
reconfiguration option.
The PMA controls are available for selection only if you
select the corresponding write control. Read and write
transactions cannot be performed simultaneously.
Table 3–2. MegaWizard Plug-In Manager Options (Page 4) (Part 2 of 2)
ALTGX_RECONFIG
Setting Description Reference
3–10 Chapter 3: ALTGX_RECONFIG Megafunction User Guide for Stratix IV Devices
Dynamic Reconfiguration
Stratix IV Device Handbook February 2011 Altera Corporation
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
Figure 3–5 shows page 5 of the ALTGX_RECONFIG MegaWizard Plug-In Manager.
Table 3–4 lists the available options on page 5 of the MegaWizard Plug-In Manager for
your ALTGX_RECONFIG custom megafunction variation.
Figure 3–5. MegaWizard Plug-In Manager—ALTGX_RECONFIG (Channel and TX/PLL Reconfiguration)
Table 3–3. MegaWizard Plug-In Manager Options (Page 5) (Part 1 of 2)
ALTGX_RECONFIG Setting Description Reference
Enable continuous write of all
the words needed for
reconfiguration.
For a continuous write operation, select the Enable
continuous write of all the words needed for
reconfiguration option to pulse the
write_al l signal
once to write an entire memory
initialization file (.mif).
“Dynamic Reconfiguration
Controller Port List” section in the
Dynamic Reconfiguration in
Stratix IV Devices chapter.
What is the read latency of the
MIF contents?
This option is available only if you have selected the
Enable continuous write of all the words needed for
reconfiguration option. Enter the desired latency in
terms of the
reconfig_clk
cycles it takes for each
.mif word to be present at the
reconfig_data
port.
For more information, refer to Figure 3–6.
“Dynamic Reconfiguration
Controller Port List” section in the
Dynamic Reconfiguration in
Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Chapter 3: ALTGX_RECONFIG Megafunction User Guide for Stratix IV Devices 3–11
Dynamic Reconfiguration
February 2011 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
Use ‘reconfig_address_out’
This option is enabled by default when you select the
Channel and TX PLL select/reconfig option. The
value on
reconfig_address_out[5:0]
indicates
the address associated with the words in the .mif,
which contains the dynamic reconfiguration
instructions. The dynamic reconfiguration controller
automatically increments the address at the end of
each .mif write transaction.
“Dynamic Reconfiguration
Controller Port List” section in the
Dynamic Reconfiguration in
Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Use ‘reconfig_address_en’
When high, this optional output status signal
indicates that the address used in the .mif write
transaction cycle has changed. This signal is
asserted when the .mif write transaction is
completed (when the
busy
signal is de-asserted).
“Dynamic Reconfiguration
Controller Port List” section in the
Dynamic Reconfiguration in
Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Use ‘reset_reconfig_address’
When asserted, this optional control signal resets
reconfig_address_out
(the current
reconfiguration address) to 0.
“Dynamic Reconfiguration
Controller Port List” section in the
Dynamic Reconfiguration in
Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Use ‘logical_tx_pll_sel’
This is an optional control signal. The
logical_tx_pll_sel[1:0]
signal refers to the
logical reference index of the CMU PLL. The
functionality of the signal depends on the feature
activated, as shown below:
■CMU PLL reconfiguration—The corresponding
CMU PLL is reconfigured based on the value at
logical_tx_pll_sel[1:0]
.
■Channel and CMU PLL reconfiguration—The
corresponding CMU PLL is reconfigured based on
the value at this signal. The transceiver channel
listens to the CMU PLL selected by
logical_tx_pll_sel[1:0]
.
■Channel reconfiguration with TX PLL select—
The transceiver channel listens to the TX PLL
selected by
logical_tx_pll_sel[1:0]
.
“Guidelines for logical_tx_pll_sel
and logical_tx_pll_sel_en Ports”
section in the Dynamic
Reconfiguration in Stratix IV
Devices chapter.
Use ‘logical_tx_pll_sel_en’
This is an optional control signal. When you enable
this signal, the value set on the
logical_tx_pll_sel[1:0]
signal is valid only if
the
logical_tx_pll_sel_en
is set
to 1.
“Guidelines for logical_tx_pll_sel
and logical_tx_pll_sel_en Ports”
section in the Dynamic
Reconfiguration in Stratix IV
Devices chapter.
Table 3–3. MegaWizard Plug-In Manager Options (Page 5) (Part 2 of 2)
ALTGX_RECONFIG Setting Description Reference
3–12 Chapter 3: ALTGX_RECONFIG Megafunction User Guide for Stratix IV Devices
Dynamic Reconfiguration
Stratix IV Device Handbook February 2011 Altera Corporation
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
Figure 3–6 shows that the read latency of the .mif contents is 2, as it takes two
reconfig_clk
cycles for the .mif data to become available on the
reconfig_data
port
after providing address on the
reconfig_address_out
port.
Figure 3–7 shows page 6 of the ALTGX_RECONFIG MegaWizard Plug-In Manager.
Figure 3–6. Read Latency
reconfig_clock
reconfig_address_out
reconfig_data
Address 0
Latency = 2
Address 1 Address 2
Invalid Data Data 1Data 0
Figure 3–7. MegaWizard Plug-In Manager—ALTGX_RECONFIG (Error Checks/Data Rate Switch)
Chapter 3: ALTGX_RECONFIG Megafunction User Guide for Stratix IV Devices 3–13
Dynamic Reconfiguration
February 2011 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
Table 3–4 lists the available options on page 6 of the MegaWizard Plug-In Manager for
your ALTGX_RECONFIG custom megafunction variation.
Make your selections on page 6, then click Next.
Table 3–4. MegaWizard Plug-In Manager Options (Page 6)
ALTGX_RECONFIG
Setting Description Reference
Enable illegal mode
checking
When you select this option, the ALTGX_RECONFIG
MegaWizard Plug-In Manager provides the
error
output
port. The dynamic reconfiguration controller detects the
error conditions within two
reconfig_clk cycles
,
de-asserts the
busy
signal, and asserts the error signal for
two
reconfig_clk cycles
.
The “Error Indication During
Dynamic Reconfiguration” section
of the Dynamic Reconfiguration in
Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Enable self recovery
When you select this option, the controller automatically
recovers if the operation did not complete within the
expected time. The error signal is driven high whenever the
controller performs a self recovery.
The “Error Indication During
Dynamic Reconfiguration” section
of the Dynamic Reconfiguration in
Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Use
rate_switch_out
port to read out the
current data rate division
The
rate_switch_out[1:0]
signal is available when you
select Data Rate Division in TX mode. You can read the
existing local divider settings of a transmitter channel at
this port. The decoding for this signal is listed below:
2’b00—Division of 1
2’b01—Division of 2
2’b10—Division of 4
2’b11—Not supported
The “Data Rate Division in
Transmitter Mode Details” mode
section in the Dynamic
Reconfiguration in Stratix IV
Devices chapter.
Use the
rx_tx_duplex_sel
port to enable RX only,
TX only or duplex
configuration
You can read or write the receiver and transmitter settings,
only the receiver settings, or only the transmitter settings,
based on the value you set at the
rx_tx_duplex_sel[1:0]
port;
■2’b00—Duplex mode
■2’b01—RX only mode
■2’b10—TX only mode
■2’b11—unsupported value (do not use this value)
If you disable the
rx_tx_duplex_sel[1:0]
port, the
dynamic reconfiguration controller reads or writes both the
receiver and transmitter settings.
“Dynamically Reconfiguring PMA
Controls” section of the Dynamic
Reconfiguration in Stratix IV
Devices chapter.
3–14 Chapter 3: ALTGX_RECONFIG Megafunction User Guide for Stratix IV Devices
Dynamic Reconfiguration
Stratix IV Device Handbook February 2011 Altera Corporation
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
Figure 3–8 shows page 7 (the Simulation Libraries page) of the MegaWizard Plug-In
Manager, which is used for dynamic reconfiguration selection.
Make your selections, then click Next.
Table 3–5 lists the available option on page 7 of the MegaWizard Plug-In Manager for
your ALTGX_RECONFIG custom Megafunction variation.
Make your selections on page 7, then click Next.
Figure 3–8. MegaWizard Plug-In Manager—ALTGX_RECONFIG (Simulation Libraries)
Table 3–5. MegaWizard Plug-In Manager Options (Page 7)
ALTGX_RECONFIG Setting Description Reference
Generate a netlist for synthesis area
and timing estimation
Selecting this option generates a netlist file
that third-party synthesis tools can use to
estimate the timing and resource usage.
—
Chapter 3: ALTGX_RECONFIG Megafunction User Guide for Stratix IV Devices 3–15
Dynamic Reconfiguration
February 2011 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
Figure 3–9 shows page 8 (the last page) of the MegaWizard Plug-In Manager for the
dynamic reconfiguration protocol set up. You can select optional files on this page.
After you make your selections, click Finish to generate the files.
Document Revision History
Table 3–6 lists the revision history for this chapter.
Figure 3–9. MegaWizard Plug-In Manager—ALTGX_RECONFIG (Summary)
Table 3–6. Document Revision History (Part 1 of 2)
Date Version Changes
February 2011 3.1
■Updated Table 3–1.
■Applied new template.
■Updated chapter title.
■Minor text edits.
November 2009 3.0
■Updated Table 3–1.
■Updated Table 3–3.
■Added Figure 3–6.
■Made minor text edits.
3–16 Chapter 3: ALTGX_RECONFIG Megafunction User Guide for Stratix IV Devices
Dynamic Reconfiguration
Stratix IV Device Handbook February 2011 Altera Corporation
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
June 2009 2.1
■Updated Table 3–3.
■Added introductory sentences to improve search ability.
■Minor text edits.
March 2009 2.0 Updated screen shots.
November 2008 1.0 Added chapter to the Stratix IV Device Handbook
Table 3–6. Document Revision History (Part 2 of 2)
Date Version Changes
January 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
Additional Information
This chapter provides additional information about the document and Altera.
How to Contact Altera
To locate the most up-to-date information about Altera products, refer to the
following table.
Typographic Conventions
The following table shows the typographic conventions this document uses.
Contact Contact Method Address
Technical support Website www.altera.com/support
Technical training Website www.altera.com/training
Email custrain@altera.com
Product literature Website www.altera.com/literature
Nontechnical support (general) Email nacomp@altera.com
(software licensing) Email authorization@altera.com
Note to Table:
(1) You can also contact your local Altera sales office or sales representative.
Visual Cue Meaning
Bold Type with Initial Capital
Letters
Indicate command names, dialog box titles, dialog box options, and other GUI
labels. For example, Save As dialog box. For GUI elements, capitalization matches
the GUI.
bold type
Indicates directory names, project names, disk drive names, file names, file name
extensions, software utility names, and GUI labels. For example, \qdesigns
directory, D: drive, and chiptrip.gdf file.
Italic Type with Initial Capital Letters Indicate document titles. For example, Stratix IV Design Guidelines.
italic type
Indicates variables. For example, n + 1.
Variable names are enclosed in angle brackets (< >). For example, <file name> and
<project name>.pof file.
Initial Capital Letters Indicate keyboard keys and menu names. For example, the Delete key and the
Options menu.
“Subheading Title” Quotation marks indicate references to sections in a document and titles of
Quartus II Help topics. For example, “Typographic Conventions.”
Info–2 Additional Information
Typographic Conventions
Stratix IV Device Handbook January 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 3: Transceiver Configuration Guide
Courier type
Indicates signal, port, register, bit, block, and primitive names. For example,
data1
,
tdi
, and
input
. The suffix
n
denotes an active-low signal. For example,
resetn
.
Indicates command line commands and anything that must be typed exactly as it
appears. For example,
c:\qdesigns\tutorial\chiptrip.gdf
.
Also indicates sections of an actual file, such as a Report File, references to parts of
files (for example, the AHDL keyword
SUBDESIGN
), and logic function names (for
example,
TRI
).
r An angled arrow instructs you to press the Enter key.
1., 2., 3., and
a., b., c., and so on
Numbered steps indicate a list of items when the sequence of the items is important,
such as the steps listed in a procedure.
■■■Bullets indicate a list of items when the sequence of the items is not important.
1The hand points to information that requires special attention.
h The question mark directs you to a software help system with related information.
f The feet direct you to another document or website with related information.
m The multimedia icon directs you to a related multimedia presentation.
cA caution calls attention to a condition or possible situation that can damage or
destroy the product or your work.
w A warning calls attention to a condition or possible situation that can cause you
injury.
The envelope links to the Email Subscription Management Center page of the Altera
website, where you can sign up to receive update notifications for Altera documents.
Visual Cue Meaning
101 Innovation Drive
San Jose, CA 95134
www.altera.com
SIV5V4-5.9
Volume 4: Device Datasheet and Addendum
Stratix IV Device Handbook
© 2014 Altera Corporation. All rights reserved. ALTERA, ARRIA, CYCLONE, HARDCOPY, MAX, MEGACORE, NIOS, QUARTUS and STRATIX words and logos
are trademarks of Altera Corporation and registered in the U.S. Patent and Trademark Office and in other countries. All other words and logos identified as
trademarks or service marks are the property of their respective holders as described at www.altera.com/common/legal.html. Altera warrants performance of its
semiconductor products to current specifications in accordance with Altera's standard warranty, but reserves the right to make changes to any products and
services at any time without notice. Altera assumes no responsibility or liability arising out of the application or use of any information, product, or service
described herein except as expressly agreed to in writing by Altera. Altera customers are advised to obtain the latest version of device specifications before relying
on any published information and before placing orders for products or services.
September 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 4: Device Datasheet and Addendum
ISO
9001:2008
Registered
September 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 4: Device Datasheet and Addendum
Contents
Chapter Revision Dates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v
Section I. Device Datasheet and Addendum for Stratix IV Devices
Chapter 1. DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices
Electrical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
Operating Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
Absolute Maximum Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
Recommended Operating Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–5
DC Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–7
Internal Weak Pull-Up Resistor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–11
I/O Standard Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–12
Power Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–15
Switching Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–15
Transceiver Performance Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–16
Transceiver Datapath PCS Latency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–47
Core Performance Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–47
Clock Tree Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–47
PLL Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–48
DSP Block Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–50
TriMatrix Memory Block Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–51
Configuration and JTAG Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–52
Temperature Sensing Diode Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–53
Chip-Wide Reset (Dev_CLRn) Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–54
Periphery Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–54
High-Speed I/O Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–54
OCT Calibration Block Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–61
Duty Cycle Distortion (DCD) Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–62
I/O Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–62
Programmable IOE Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–63
Programmable Output Buffer Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–63
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–64
Chapter 2. Addendum to the Stratix IV Device Handbook
Additional Information
How to Contact Altera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
Typographic Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
iv Contents
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 4: Device Datasheet and Addendum
September 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 4: Device Datasheet and Addendum
Chapter Revision Dates
The chapters in this document, Stratix IV Device Handbook, were revised on the
following dates. Where chapters or groups of chapters are available separately, part
numbers are listed.
Chapter 1. DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices
Revised: September 2014
Part Number: SIV54001-5.9
Chapter 2. Addendum to the Stratix IV Device Handbook
Revised: February 2011
Part Number: SIV54002-1.5
vi Chapter Revision Dates
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 4: Device Datasheet and Addendum
September 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 4: Device Datasheet and Addendum
Section I. Device Datasheet and
Addendum for Stratix IV Devices
This section includes the following chapters:
■Chapter 1, DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices
■Chapter 2, Addendum to the Stratix IV Device Handbook
Revision History
Refer to each chapter for its own specific revision history. For information on when
each chapter was updated, refer to the Chapter Revision Dates section, which appears
in the full handbook.
I–2 Section I: Device Datasheet and Addendum for Stratix IV Devices
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 4: Device Datasheet and Addendum
SIV54001-5.9
© 2014 Altera Corporation. All rights reserved. ALTERA, ARRIA, CYCLONE, HARDCOPY, MAX, MEGACORE, NIOS, QUARTUS and STRATIX words and logos
are trademarks of Altera Corporation and registered in the U.S. Patent and Trademark Office and in other countries. All other words and logos identified as
trademarks or service marks are the property of their respective holders as described at www.altera.com/common/legal.html. Altera warrants performance of its
semiconductor products to current specifications in accordance with Altera's standard warranty, but reserves the right to make changes to any products and
services at any time without notice. Altera assumes no responsibility or liability arising out of the application or use of any information, product, or service
described herein except as expressly agreed to in writing by Altera. Altera customers are advised to obtain the latest version of device specifications before relying
on any published information and before placing orders for products or services.
Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 4: Device Datasheet and Addendum
September 2014
Feedback Subscribe
ISO
9001:2008
Registered
1. DC and Switching Characteristics for
Stratix IV Devices
This chapter contains the following sections:
■“Electrical Characteristics”
■“Switching Characteristics”
■“I/O Timing”
■“Glossary”
Electrical Characteristics
This chapter covers the electrical and switching characteristics for Stratix® IV devices.
Electrical characteristics include operating conditions and power consumption.
Switching characteristics include transceiver specifications, core, and periphery
performance. This chapter also describes I/O timing, including programmable I/O
element (IOE) delay and programmable output buffer delay.
fFor information regarding the densities and packages of devices in the Stratix IV
family, refer to the Stratix IV Device Family Overview chapter.
Operating Conditions
When you use Stratix IV devices, they are rated according to a set of defined
parameters. To maintain the highest possible performance and reliability of the
Stratix IV devices, you must consider the operating requirements described in this
chapter.
Stratix IV devices are offered in commercial, industrial, and military grades.
Commercial devices are offered in –2 (fastest), –2×, –3, and –4 speed grades. Industrial
devices are offered in –1, –2, –3, and –4 speed grades. Military devices are offered in –3
speed grade.
For the Stratix IV GT –1 and –2 speed grade specifications, refer to the –2/–2× speed
grade column. For the Stratix IV GT –3 speed grade specification, refer to the –3 speed
grade column, unless otherwise specified.
Absolute Maximum Ratings
Absolute maximum ratings define the maximum operating conditions for Stratix IV
devices. The values are based on experiments conducted with the devices and
theoretical modeling of breakdown and damage mechanisms. The functional
operation of the device is not implied for these conditions.
September 2014
SIV54001-5.9
1–2 Chapter 1: DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices
Electrical Characteristics
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 4: Device Datasheet and Addendum
cConditions other than those listed in Table 1–1, Table 1–2, and Table 1–3 may cause
permanent damage to the device. Additionally, device operation at the absolute
maximum ratings for extended periods of time may have adverse effects on the
device.
Table 1–1. Absolute Maximum Ratings for Stratix IV Devices
Symbol Description Minimum Maximum Unit
VCC Core voltage and periphery circuitry power supply -0.5 1.35 V
VCCPT Power supply for programmable power technology -0.5 1.8 V
VCCPGM Configuration pins power supply -0.5 3.75 V
VCCAUX Auxiliary supply for the programmable power technology -0.5 3.75 V
VCCBAT Battery back-up power supply for design security volatile key register -0.5 3.75 V
VCCPD I/O pre-driver power supply -0.5 3.75 V
VCCIO I/O power supply -0.5 3.9 V
VCC_CLKIN Differential clock input power supply -0.5 3.75 V
VCCD_PLL PLL digital power supply -0.5 1.35 V
VCCA_PLL PLL analog power supply -0.5 3.75 V
VIDC input voltage -0.5 4.0 V
IOUT DC output current per pin -25 40 mA
TJOperating junction temperature -55 125 °C
TSTG Storage temperature (No bias) -65 150 °C
Table 1–2. Transceiver Power Supply Absolute Maximum Ratings for Stratix IV GX Devices
Symbol Description Minimum Maximum Unit
VCCA_L Transceiver high voltage power (left side) -0.5 3.75 V
VCCA_R Transceiver high voltage power (right side) -0.5 3.75 V
VCCHIP_L Transceiver HIP digital power (left side) -0.5 1.35 V
VCCHIP_R Transceiver HIP digital power (right side) -0.5 1.35 V
VCCR_L Receiver power (left side) -0.5 1.35 V
VCCR_R Receiver power (right side) -0.5 1.35 V
VCCT_L Transmitter power (left side) -0.5 1.35 V
VCCT_R Transmitter power (right side) -0.5 1.35 V
VCCL_GXBLn (1) Transceiver clock power (left side) -0.5 1.35 V
VCCL_GXBRn (1) Transceiver clock power (right side) -0.5 1.35 V
VCCH_GXBLn (1) Transmitter output buffer power (left side) -0.5 1.8 V
VCCH_GXBRn (1) Transmitter output buffer power (right side) -0.5 1.8 V
Note to Table 1–2:
(1) n = 0, 1, 2, or 3.
Chapter 1: DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices 1–3
Electrical Characteristics
September 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 4: Device Datasheet and Addendum
Table 1–3. Transceiver Power Supply Absolute Maximum Ratings for Stratix IV GT Devices (1)
Symbol Description Minimum Maximum Unit
VCCA_L Transceiver high voltage power (left side) -0.5 3.75 V
VCCA_R Transceiver high voltage power (right side) -0.5 3.75 V
VCCHIP_L Transceiver HIP digital power (left side) -0.5 1.35 V
VCCHIP_R Transceiver HIP digital power (right side) -0.5 1.35 V
VCCR_L Receiver power (left side) -0.5 1.35 V
VCCR_R Receiver power (right side) -0.5 1.35 V
VCCT_L Transmitter power (left side) -0.5 1.35 V
VCCT_R Transmitter power (right side) -0.5 1.35 V
VCCL_GXBLn (2) Transceiver clock power (left side) -0.5 1.35 V
VCCL_GXBRn (2) Transceiver clock power (right side) -0.5 1.35 V
VCCH_GXBLn (2) Transmitter output buffer power (left side) -0.5 1.8 V
VCCH_GXBRn (2) Transmitter output buffer power (right side) -0.5 1.8 V
Notes to Table 1–3:
(1) For the absolute maximum ratings for Stratix IV GT engineering sample (ES1) devices, contact your local Altera sales representative.
(2) n = 0, 1, 2, or 3.
Chapter 1: DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices 1–4
Electrical Characteristics
September 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 4: Device Datasheet and Addendum
Maximum Allowed Overshoot and Undershoot Voltage
During transitions, input signals may overshoot to the voltage shown in Table 1–4 and
undershoot to –2.0 V for input currents less than 100 mA and periods shorter than
20 ns.
Table 1–4 lists the maximum allowed input overshoot voltage and the duration of the
overshoot voltage as a percentage of device lifetime. The maximum allowed
overshoot duration is specified as a percentage of high time over the lifetime of the
device. A DC signal is equivalent to 100% duty cycle. For example, a signal that
overshoots to 4.3 V can only be at 4.3 V for ~5% over the lifetime of the device; for a
device lifetime of 10 years, this amounts to half of a year.
Temperature Overshoot Above Maximum Allowed Temperature
The maximum allowed operating temperature for Stratix IV industrial grade devices
is 100 °C. It is recommended that the operating temperature of the device is
maintained below 100 °C at all times. The temperature excursions over 100 °C due to
internal heating of the device should not exceed the number of cycles as specified in
the Table 1–5. Exceeding the recommended number of cycles may cause solder
interconnect failures. Altera® recommends using the StratixIV military grade devices
if the application requires operating temperatures over 100 °C.
Table 1–4. Maximum Allowed Overshoot During Transitions
Symbol Description Condition (V) Overshoot Duration as
% of High Time Unit
Vi (AC) AC input voltage
4.0 100.000 %
4.05 79.330 %
4.1 46.270 %
4.15 27.030 %
4.2 15.800 %
4.25 9.240 %
4.3 5.410 %
4.35 3.160 %
4.4 1.850 %
4.45 1.080 %
4.5 0.630 %
4.55 0.370 %
4.6 0.220 %
Table 1–5. Temperature Overshoot Above Maximum Allowed Temperature
Description Operating Temperature (°C) Number of Cycles Over 100 °C
Device operating
temperature (°C)
100 3200
105 768
110 640
115 480
120 320
125 160
Chapter 1: DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices 1–5
Electrical Characteristics
September 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 4: Device Datasheet and Addendum
Recommended Operating Conditions
This section lists the functional operation limits for AC and DC parameters for
Stratix IV devices. Table 1–6 lists the steady-state voltage and current values expected
from Stratix IV devices. Power supply ramps must all be strictly monotonic, without
plateaus.
fFor power supply ripple requirements, refer to the Device-Specific Power Delivery
Network (PDN) Tool User Guide.
Table 1–6. Recommended Operating Conditions for Stratix IV Devices (Part 1 of 2)
Symbol Description Condition Minimum Typical Maximum Unit
VCC (Stratix IV GX
and Stratix IV E)
Core voltage and periphery circuitry power
supply — 0.87 0.90 0.93 V
VCC
(Stratix IV GT)
Core voltage and periphery circuitry power
supply — 0.92 0.95 0.98 V
VCCPT
Power supply for programmable power
technology — 1.45 1.5 1.55 V
VCCAUX
Auxiliary supply for the programmable
power technology — 2.375 2.5 2.625 V
VCCPD (2) I/O pre-driver (3.0 V) power supply — 2.85 3.0 3.15 V
I/O pre-driver (2.5 V) power supply — 2.375 2.5 2.625 V
VCCIO
I/O buffers (3.0 V) power supply — 2.85 3.0 3.15 V
I/O buffers (2.5 V) power supply — 2.375 2.5 2.625 V
I/O buffers (1.8 V) power supply — 1.71 1.8 1.89 V
I/O buffers (1.5 V) power supply — 1.425 1.5 1.575 V
I/O buffers (1.2 V) power supply — 1.14 1.2 1.26 V
VCCPGM
Configuration pins (3.0 V) power supply — 2.85 3.0 3.15 V
Configuration pins (2.5 V) power supply — 2.375 2.5 2.625 V
Configuration pins (1.8 V) power supply — 1.71 1.8 1.89 V
VCCA_PLL PLL analog voltage regulator power supply — 2.375 2.5 2.625 V
VCCD_PLL
(Stratix IV GX
and Stratix IV E)
PLL digital voltage regulator power supply — 0.87 0.90 0.93 V
VCCD_PLL
(Stratix IV GT) PLL digital voltage regulator power supply — 0.92 0.95 0.98 V
VCC_CLKIN Differential clock input power supply — 2.375 2.5 2.625 V
VCCBAT (1) Battery back-up power supply (For design
security volatile key register) —1.2—3.3V
VIDC input voltage — –0.5 — 3.6 V
VOOutput voltage — 0 — VCCIO V
TJ (Stratix IV GX
and Stratix IV E) Operating junction temperature
Commercial 0 — 85 °C
Industrial –40 — 100 °C
Military –55 — 125 °C
TJ (Stratix IV GT) Operating junction temperature Industrial 0 — 100 °C
Chapter 1: DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices 1–6
Electrical Characteristics
September 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 4: Device Datasheet and Addendum
Table 1–7 lists the transceiver power supply recommended operating conditions for
Stratix IV GX devices.
Table 1–8 lists the recommended operating conditions for the Stratix IV GT
transceiver power supply.
tRAMP Power supply ramp time
Normal POR
(PORSEL=0) 0.05 — 100 ms
Fast POR
(PORSEL=1) 0.05 — 4 ms
Notes to Table 1–6:
(1) If you do not use the volatile security key, you may connect the VCCBAT to either GND or a 3.0-V power supply.
(2) VCCPD must be 2.5 V when VCCIO is 2.5, 1.8, 1.5, or 1.2 V. VCCPD must be 3.0 V when VCCIO is 3.0 V.
Table 1–6. Recommended Operating Conditions for Stratix IV Devices (Part 2 of 2)
Symbol Description Condition Minimum Typical Maximum Unit
Table 1–7. Transceiver Power Supply Operating Conditions for Stratix IV GX Devices (1)
Symbol Description Minimum Typical Maximum Unit
VCCA_L Transceiver high voltage power (left side) 2.85/2.375 3.0/2.5 (2) 3.15/2.625 V
VCCA_R Transceiver high voltage power (right side)
VCCHIP_L Transceiver HIP digital power (left side) 0.87 0.9 0.93 V
VCCHIP_R Transceiver HIP digital power (right side) 0.87 0.9 0.93 V
VCCR_L Receiver power (left side) 1.045 1.1 1.155 V
VCCR_R Receiver power (right side) 1.045 1.1 1.155 V
VCCT_L Transmitter power (left side) 1.045 1.1 1.155 V
VCCT_R Transmitter power (right side) 1.045 1.1 1.155 V
VCCL_GXBLn (3) Transceiver clock power (left side) 1.05 1.1 1.15 V
VCCL_GXBRn (3) Transceiver clock power (right side) 1.05 1.1 1.15 V
VCCH_GXBLn (3) Transmitter output buffer power (left side) 1.33/1.425 1.4/1.5 (4) 1.47/1.575 V
VCCH_GXBRn (3) Transmitter output buffer power (right side)
Notes to Table 1–7:
(1) Transceiver power supplies do not have power-on-reset (POR) circuitry. After initial power-up, violating the transceiver power supply operating
conditions could lead to unpredictable link behavior.
(2) VCCA_L/R must be connected to a 3.0-V supply if the clock multiplier unit (CMU) phase-locked loop (PLL), receiver clock data recovery (CDR),
or both, are configured at a base data rate > 4.25 Gbps. For data rates up to 4.25 Gbps, you can connect VCCA_L/R to either 3.0 V or 2.5 V.
(3) n = 0, 1, 2, or 3.
(4) VCCH_GXBL/R must be connected to a 1.4-V supply if the transmitter channel data rate is > 6.5 Gbps. For data rates up to 6.5 Gbps, you can
connect VCCH_GXBL/R to either 1.4 V or 1.5 V.
Table 1–8. Transceiver Power Supply Operating Conditions for Stratix IV GT Devices (Part 1 of 2) (1), (2)
Symbol Description Minimum Typical Maximum Unit
VCCA_L Transceiver high voltage power (left side) 3.17 3.3 3.43 V
VCCA_R Transceiver high voltage power (right side) 3.17 3.3 3.43 V
VCCHIP_L Transceiver HIP digital power (left side) 0.92 0.95 0.98 V
VCCHIP_R Transceiver HIP digital power (right side) 0.92 0.95 0.98 V
VCCR_L Receiver power (left side) 1.15 1.2 1.25 V
Chapter 1: DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices 1–7
Electrical Characteristics
September 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 4: Device Datasheet and Addendum
DC Characteristics
This section lists the supply current, I/O pin leakage current, bus hold, on-chip
termination (OCT) tolerance, input pin capacitance, and hot socketing specifications.
Supply Current
Standby current is the current drawn from the respective power rails used for power
budgeting. Use the Excel-based Early Power Estimator (EPE) to get supply current
estimates for your design because these currents vary greatly with the resources you
use.
fFor more information about power estimation tools, refer to the PowerPlay Early Power
Estimator User Guide and the PowerPlay Power Analysis chapter in the Quartus II
Handbook.
I/O Pin Leakage Current
Table 1–9 lists the Stratix IV I/O pin leakage current specifications.
VCCR_R Receiver power (right side) 1.15 1.2 1.25 V
VCCT_L Transmitter power (left side) 1.15 1.2 1.25 V
VCCT_R Transmitter power (right side) 1.15 1.2 1.25 V
VCCL_GXBLn (3) Transceiver clock power (left side) 1.15 1.2 1.25 V
VCCL_GXBRn (3) Transceiver clock power (right side) 1.15 1.2 1.25 V
VCCH_GXBLn (3) Transmitter output buffer power (left side) 1.33 1.4 1.47 V
VCCH_GXBRn (3) Transmitter output buffer power (right side) 1.33 1.4 1.47 V
Notes to Table 1–8:
(1) For the recommended operating conditions for Stratix IV GT engineering sample (ES1) devices, contact your local Altera sales representative.
(2) Transceiver power supplies do not have power-on-reset circuitry. After initial power-up, violating the transceiver power supply operating
conditions could lead to unpredictable link behavior.
(3) n = 0, 1, 2, or 3.
Table 1–8. Transceiver Power Supply Operating Conditions for Stratix IV GT Devices (Part 2 of 2) (1), (2)
Symbol Description Minimum Typical Maximum Unit
Table 1–9. I/O Pin Leakage Current for Stratix IV Devices (1)
Symbol Description Conditions Min Typ Max Unit
IIInput pin VI = 0V to VCCIOMAX -20 — 20 µA
IOZ Tri-stated I/O pin VO = 0V to VCCIOMAX -20 — 20 µA
Note to Table 1–9:
(1) VREF current refers to the input pin leakage current.
Chapter 1: DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices 1–8
Electrical Characteristics
September 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 4: Device Datasheet and Addendum
Bus Hold Specifications
Table 1–10 lists the Stratix IV device family bus hold specifications.
On-Chip Termination (OCT) Specifications
If you enable OCT calibration, calibration is automatically performed at power-up for
I/Os connected to the calibration block. Table 1–11 lists the Stratix IV OCT
termination calibration accuracy specifications.
Table 1–10. Bus Hold Parameters
Parameter Symbol Conditions
VCCIO
Unit1.2 V 1.5 V 1.8 V 2.5 V 3.0 V
Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max
Low
sustaining
current
ISUSL
VIN > VIL
(maximum) 22.5 — 25.0 — 30.0 — 50.0 — 70.0 — µA
High
sustaining
current
ISUSH
VIN < VIH
(minimum) -22.5 — -25.0 — -30.0 — -50.0 — -70.0 — µA
Low
overdrive
current
IODL
0V < VIN <
VCCIO
— 120 — 160 — 200 — 300 — 500 µA
High
overdrive
current
IODH
0V < VIN <
VCCIO
—-120—-160—-200—-300—-500µA
Bus-hold
trip point VTRIP — 0.450.950.501.000.681.070.701.700.802.00 V
Table 1–11. OCT Calibration Accuracy Specifications for Stratix IV Devices (Part 1 of 2) (1)
Symbol Description Conditions
Calibration Accuracy
Unit
C2 C3,I3, M3 C4,I4
25- RS (2)
3.0, 2.5, 1.8, 1.5, 1.2
Internal series termination
with calibration (25-
setting)
VCCIO = 3.0, 2.5, 1.8,
1.5, 1.2 V ± 8 ± 8 ± 8 %
50- RS
3.0, 2.5, 1.8, 1.5, 1.2
Internal series termination
with calibration (50-
setting)
VCCIO = 3.0, 2.5, 1.8,
1.5, 1.2 V ± 8 ± 8 ± 8 %
50- RT
2.5, 1.8, 1.5, 1.2
Internal parallel termination
with calibration (50-
setting)
VCCIO = 2.5, 1.8, 1.5,
1.2 V ± 10 ± 10 ± 10 %
20-, 40-, and
60- RS (3)
3.0, 2.5, 1.8, 1.5, 1.2
Expanded range for internal
series termination with
calibration (20-, 40-and
60- RS setting)
VCCIO = 3.0, 2.5, 1.8,
1.5, 1.2 V ± 10 ± 10 ± 10 %
Chapter 1: DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices 1–9
Electrical Characteristics
September 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 4: Device Datasheet and Addendum
The calibration accuracy for calibrated series and parallel OCTs are applicable at the
moment of calibration. When process, voltage, and temperature (PVT) conditions
change after calibration, the tolerance may change. Table 1–12 lists the Stratix IV OCT
without calibration resistance tolerance to PVT changes.
25- RS_left_shift
3.0, 2.5, 1.8, 1.5, 1.2
Internal left shift series
termination with calibration
(25- RS_left_shift setting)
VCCIO = 3.0, 2.5, 1.8,
1.5, 1.2 V ± 10 ± 10 ± 10 %
Notes to Table 1–11:
(1) OCT calibration accuracy is valid at the time of calibration only.
(2) 25- RS is not supported for 1.5 V and 1.2 V in Row I/O.
(3) 20- RS is not supported for 1.5 V and 1.2 V in Row I/O.
Table 1–11. OCT Calibration Accuracy Specifications for Stratix IV Devices (Part 2 of 2) (1)
Symbol Description Conditions
Calibration Accuracy
Unit
C2 C3,I3, M3 C4,I4
Table 1–12. OCT Without Calibration Resistance Tolerance Specifications for Stratix IV Devices
Symbol Description Conditions
Resistance Tolerance
Unit
C2 C3,I3, M3 C4,I4
25- RS
3.0 and 2.5
Internal series termination
without calibration (25-
setting)
VCCIO = 3.0 and 2.5 V ± 30 ± 40 ± 40 %
25- RS
1.8 and 1.5
Internal series termination
without calibration (25-
setting)
VCCIO = 1.8 and 1.5 V ± 30 ± 40 ± 40 %
25-RS
1.2
Internal series termination
without calibration (25-
setting)
VCCIO = 1.2 V ± 35 ± 50 ± 50 %
50- RS
3.0 and 2.5
Internal series termination
without calibration (50-
setting)
VCCIO = 3.0 and 2.5 V ± 30 ± 40 ± 40 %
50- RS
1.8 and 1.5
Internal series termination
without calibration (50-
setting)
VCCIO = 1.8 and 1.5 V ± 30 ± 40 ± 40 %
50- RS
1.2
Internal series termination
without calibration (50-
setting)
VCCIO = 1.2 V ± 35 ± 50 ± 50 %
100- RD
2.5
Internal differential
termination (100- setting) VCCIO = 2.5 V ± 25 ± 25 ± 25 %
Chapter 1: DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices 1–10
Electrical Characteristics
September 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 4: Device Datasheet and Addendum
OCT calibration is automatically performed at power-up for OCT-enabled I/Os.
Table 1–13 lists OCT variation with temperature and voltage after power-up
calibration. Use Table 1–13 to determine the OCT variation after power-up calibration
and Equation 1–1 to determine the OCT variation without re-calibration.
Table 1–13 lists the OCT variation after the power-up calibration.
Pin Capacitance
Table 1–14 lists the Stratix IV device family pin capacitance.
Equation 1–1. OCT Variation Without Re-Calibration (1), (2), (3), (4), (5), (6)
Notes to Equation 1–1:
(1) The ROCT value calculated from Equation 1–1 shows the range of OCT resistance with the variation of temperature
and VCCIO.
(2) RSCAL is the OCT resistance value at power-up.
(3) T is the variation of temperature with respect to the temperature at power-up.
(4) V is the variation of voltage with respect to the VCCIO at power-up.
(5) dR/dT is the percentage change of RSCAL with temperature.
(6) dR/dV is the percentage change of RSCAL with voltage.
Table 1–13. OCT Variation after Power-Up Calibration (1)
Symbol Description VCCIO (V) Typical Unit
dR/dV OCT variation with voltage without
re-calibration
3.0 0.0297
%/mV
2.5 0.0344
1.8 0.0499
1.5 0.0744
1.2 0.1241
dR/dT OCT variation with temperature
without re-calibration
3.0 0.189
%/°C
2.5 0.208
1.8 0.266
1.5 0.273
1.2 0.317
Note to Table 1–13:
(1) Valid for VCCIO range of ±5% and temperature range of 0° to 85°C.
ROCT RSCAL 1dR
dT
-------T
dR
dV
------- V+


=
Table 1–14. Pin Capacitance for Stratix IV Devices (Part 1 of 2)
Symbol Description Value Unit
CIOTB Input capacitance on the top and bottom I/O pins 4 pF
CIOLR Input capacitance on the left and right I/O pins 4 pF
CCLKTB Input capacitance on the top and bottom non-dedicated clock input pins 4 pF
CCLKLR Input capacitance on the left and right non-dedicated clock input pins 4 pF
Chapter 1: DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices 1–11
Electrical Characteristics
September 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 4: Device Datasheet and Addendum
Hot Socketing
Table 1–15 lists the hot socketing specifications for Stratix IV devices.
Internal Weak Pull-Up Resistor
Table 1–16 lists the weak pull-up resistor values for Stratix IV devices.
COUTFB Input capacitance on the dual-purpose clock output and feedback pins 5 pF
CCLK1, CCLK3, CCLK8,
and CCLK10
Input capacitance for dedicated clock input pins 2 pF
Table 1–14. Pin Capacitance for Stratix IV Devices (Part 2 of 2)
Symbol Description Value Unit
Table 1–15. Hot Socketing Specifications for Stratix IV Devices
Symbol Description Maximum
IIOPIN (DC) DC current per I/O pin 300 A
IIOPIN (AC) AC current per I/O pin 8 mA (1)
IXCVR-TX (DC) DC current per transceiver TX pin 100 mA
IXCVR-RX (DC) DC current per transceiver RX pin 50 mA
Note to Table 1–15:
(1) The I/O ramp rate is 10 ns or more. For ramp rates faster than 10 ns, |IIOPIN| = C dv/dt, in which C is the I/O pin
capacitance and dv/dt is the slew rate.
Table 1–16. Internal Weak Pull-Up Resistor for Stratix IV Devices (1), (3)
Symbol Description Conditions (V) Value (4) Unit
RPU
Value of the I/O pin pull-up resistor before
and during configuration, as well as user
mode if the programmable pull-up resistor
option is enabled.
VCCIO = 3.0 ±5% (2) 25 k
VCCIO = 2.5 ±5% (2) 25 k
VCCIO = 1.8 ±5% (2) 25 k
VCCIO = 1.5 ±5% (2) 25 k
VCCIO = 1.2 ±5% (2) 25 k
Notes to Table 1–16:
(1) All I/O pins have an option to enable weak pull-up except configuration, test, and JTAG pins.
(2) Pin pull-up resistance values may be lower if an external source drives the pin higher than VCCIO.
(3) The internal weak pull-down feature is only available for the JTAG
TCK
pin. The typical value for this internal weak pull-down resistor is
approximately 25 k
(4) These specifications are valid with ±10% tolerances to cover changes over PVT.
Chapter 1: DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices 1–12
Electrical Characteristics
September 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 4: Device Datasheet and Addendum
I/O Standard Specifications
Table 1–17 through Table 1–22 list the input voltage (VIH and VIL), output voltage
(VOH and VOL), and current drive characteristics (IOH and IOL) for various I/O
standards supported by Stratix IV devices. These tables also show the Stratix IV
device family I/O standard specifications. VOL and VOH values are valid at the
corresponding IOH and IOL, respectively.
For an explanation of terms used in Table 1–17 through Table 1–22, refer to “Glossary”
on page 1–64.
Table 1–17. Single-Ended I/O Standards
I/O
Standard
VCCIO (V) VIL (V) VIH (V) VOL (V) VOH (V) IOL
(mA)
IOH
(mA)
Min Typ Max Min Max Min Max Max Min
LVTTL 2.85 3 3.15 -0.3 0.8 1.7 3.6 0.4 2.4 2 -2
LVCMOS 2.85 3 3.15 -0.3 0.8 1.7 3.6 0.2 VCCIO - 0.2 0.1 -0.1
2.5 V 2.375 2.5 2.625 -0.3 0.7 1.7 3.6 0.4 2 1 -1
1.8 V 1.71 1.8 1.89 -0.3 0.35 *
VCCIO
0.65 *
VCCIO
VCCIO +
0.3 0.45 VCCIO -
0.45 2-2
1.5 V 1.425 1.5 1.575 -0.3 0.35 *
VCCIO
0.65 *
VCCIO
VCCIO +
0.3
0.25 *
VCCIO
0.75 *
VCCIO
2-2
1.2 V 1.14 1.2 1.26 -0.3 0.35 *
VCCIO
0.65 *
VCCIO
VCCIO +
0.3
0.25 *
VCCIO
0.75 *
VCCIO
2-2
3.0-V PCI 2.85 3 3.15 — 0.3 *
VCCIO
0.5 *
VCCIO
3.6 0.1 *
VCCIO
0.9 * VCCIO 1.5 -0.5
3.0-V
PCI-X 2.85 3 3.15 — 0.35 *
VCCIO
0.5 *
VCCIO
—0.1 *
VCCIO
0.9 * VCCIO 1.5 -0.5
Table 1–18. Single-Ended SSTL and HSTL I/O Reference Voltage Specifications
I/O Standard
VCCIO (V) VREF (V) VTT (V)
Min Typ Max Min Typ Max Min Typ Max
SSTL-2
Class I, II 2.375 2.5 2.625 0.49 *
VCCIO
0.5 *
VCCIO
0.51 *
VCCIO
VREF -
0.04 VREF
VREF +
0.04
SSTL-18
Class I, II 1.71 1.8 1.89 0.833 0.9 0.969 VREF -
0.04 VREF
VREF +
0.04
SSTL-15
Class I, II 1.425 1.5 1.575 0.47 *
VCCIO
0.5 *
VCCIO
0.53 *
VCCIO
0.47 *
VCCIO
VREF
0.53 *
VCCIO
HSTL-18
Class I, II 1.71 1.8 1.89 0.85 0.9 0.95 — VCCIO/2 —
HSTL-15
Class I, II 1.425 1.5 1.575 0.68 0.75 0.9 — VCCIO/2 —
HSTL-12
Class I, II 1.14 1.2 1.26 0.47 *
VCCIO
0.5 *
VCCIO
0.53 *
VCCIO
—V
CCIO/2 —
Chapter 1: DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices 1–13
Electrical Characteristics
September 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 4: Device Datasheet and Addendum
Table 1–19. Single-Ended SSTL and HSTL I/O Standards Signal Specifications
I/O Standard
VIL(DC) (V) VIH(DC) (V) VIL(AC)
(V)
VIH(AC)
(V) VOL (V) VOH (V)
Iol (mA) Ioh (mA)
Min Max Min Max Max Min Max Min
SSTL-2
Class I -0.3 VREF -
0.15
VREF +
0.15
VCCIO +
0.3
VREF -
0.31
VREF +
0.31
VTT -
0.57
VTT +
0.57 8.1 -8.1
SSTL-2
Class II -0.3 VREF -
0.15
VREF +
0.15
VCCIO +
0.3
VREF -
0.31
VREF +
0.31
VTT -
0.76
VTT +
0.76 16.2 -16.2
SSTL-18
Class I -0.3 VREF -
0.125
VREF +
0.125
VCCIO +
0.3
VREF -
0.25
VREF +
0.25
VTT -
0.475
VTT +
0.475 6.7 -6.7
SSTL-18
Class II -0.3 VREF -
0.125
VREF +
0.125
VCCIO +
0.3
VREF -
0.25
VREF +
0.25 0.28 VCCIO -
0.28 13.4 -13.4
SSTL-15
Class I —VREF -
0.1
VREF +
0.1 —VREF -
0.175
VREF +
0.175
0.2 *
VCCIO
0.8 *
VCCIO
8-8
SSTL-15
Class II —VREF -
0.1
VREF +
0.1 —VREF -
0.175
VREF +
0.175
0.2 *
VCCIO
0.8 *
VCCIO
16 -16
HSTL-18
Class I —V
REF -0.1 VREF +
0.1 —VREF -
0.2
VREF +
0.2 0.4 VCCIO -
0.4 8-8
HSTL-18
Class II —VREF -
0.1
VREF +
0.1 —VREF -
0.2
VREF +
0.2 0.4 VCCIO -
0.4 16 -16
HSTL-15
Class I —VREF -
0.1
VREF +
0.1 —VREF -
0.2
VREF +
0.2 0.4 VCCIO -
0.4 8-8
HSTL-15
Class II —VREF -
0.1
VREF +
0.1 —VREF -
0.2
VREF +
0.2 0.4 VCCIO -
0.4 16 -16
HSTL-12
Class I -0.15 VREF -
0.08
VREF +
0.08
VCCIO +
0.15
VREF -
0.15
VREF +
0.15
0.25*
VCCIO
0.75*
VCCIO
8-8
HSTL-12
Class II -0.15 VREF -
0.08
VREF +
0.08
VCCIO +
0.15
VREF -
0.15
VREF +
0.15
0.25*
VCCIO
0.75*
VCCIO
16 -16
Table 1–20. Differential SSTL I/O Standards
I/O
Standard
VCCIO (V) VSWING(DC) (V) VX(AC) (V) VSWING(AC) (V) VOX(AC) (V)
Min Typ Max Min Max Min Typ Max Min Max Min Typ Max
SSTL-2
Class I, II 2.375 2.5 2.625 0.3 VCCIO +
0.6
VCCIO/2
- 0.2 —VCCIO/2
+ 0.2 0.62 VCCIO
+ 0.6
VCCIO/2
- 0.15 —VCCIO/2
+ 0.15
SSTL-18
Class I, II 1.71 1.8 1.89 0.25 VCCIO
+
0.6
VCCIO/2
-
0.175
—VCCIO/2
+ 0.175 0.5 VCCIO
+ 0.6
VCCIO/2
-
0.125
—
VCCIO/2
+
0.125
SSTL-15
Class I, II 1.425 1.5 1.575 0.2 — — VCCIO/2 — 0.35 — — VCCIO/2 —
Chapter 1: DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices 1–14
Electrical Characteristics
September 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 4: Device Datasheet and Addendum
Table 1–21. Differential HSTL I/O Standards
I/O
Standard
VCCIO (V) VDIF(DC) (V) VX(AC) (V) VCM(DC) (V) VDIF(AC) (V)
Min Typ Max Min Max Min Typ Max Min Typ Max Min Max
HSTL-18
Class I 1.71 1.8 1.89 0.2 — 0.78 — 1.12 0.78 — 1.12 0.4 —
HSTL-15
Class I, II 1.425 1.5 1.575 0.2 — 0.68 — 0.9 0.68 — 0.9 0.4 —
HSTL-12
Class I, II 1.14 1.2 1.26 0.16 VCCIO
+ 0.3 —0.5*
VCCIO
—0.4*
VCCIO
0.5*
VCCIO
0.6*
VCCIO
0.3 VCCIO
+ 0.48
Table 1–22. Differential I/O Standard Specifications (1), (2) (Part 1 of 2)
I/O
Standard
VCCIO (V) (3) VID (mV) VICM(DC) (V) VOD (V) (4) VOCM (V) (4)
Min Typ Max Min Condition Max Min Condition Max Min Typ Max Min Typ Max
PCML
Transmitter, receiver, and input reference clock pins of high-speed transceivers use PCML I/O standard. For
transmitter, receiver, and reference clock I/O pin specifications, refer to Table 1–23 on page 1–16 and Table 1–24 on
page 1–25.
2.5 V LVDS
(HIO) 2.375 2.5 2.625 100 VCM =
1.25 V
—0.05
(5)
DMAX
700 Mbps
1.8
(5) 0.247 — 0.6 1.125 1.25 1.375
—1.05
(5)
DMAX >
700 Mbps
1.55 (
5) 0.247 — 0.6 1.125 1.25 1.375
2.5 V LVDS
(VIO) 2.375 2.5 2.625 100 VCM =
1.25 V
— 0.05 DMAX
700 Mbps 1.8 0.247 — 0.6 1 1.25 1.5
— 1.05 DMAX>
700 Mbps 1.55 0.247 — 0.6 1 1.25 1.5
RSDS
(HIO) 2.375 2.5 2.625 100 VCM =
1.25 V — 0.3 — 1.4 0.1 0.2 0.6 0.5 1.2 1.4
RSDS
(VIO) 2.375 2.5 2.625 100 VCM =
1.25 V — 0.3 — 1.4 0.1 0.2 0.6 0.5 1.2 1.5
Mini-LVDS
(HIO) 2.375 2.5 2.625 200 — 600 0.4 — 1.325 0.25 — 0.6 1 1.2 1.4
Mini-LVDS
(VIO) 2.375 2.5 2.625 200 — 600 0.4 — 1.325 0.25 — 0.6 1 1.2 1.5
LVPECL (7)
2.375 2.5 2.625 300 — — 0.6
(6)
DMAX
700 Mbps
1.8
(6) ——— — — —
2.375 2.5 2.625 300 — — 1
(6)
DMAX >
700 Mbps
1.6
(6) ——— — — —
Chapter 1: DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices 1–15
Switching Characteristics
September 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 4: Device Datasheet and Addendum
Power Consumption
Altera offers two ways to estimate power consumption for a design the Excel-based
Early Power Estimator and the Quartus® II PowerPlay Power Analyzer feature.
1You typically use the interactive Excel-based Early Power Estimator before designing
the FPGA to get a magnitude estimate of the device power. The Quartus II PowerPlay
Power Analyzer provides better quality estimates based on the specifics of the design
after you complete place-and-route. The PowerPlay Power Analyzer can apply a
combination of user-entered, simulation-derived, and estimated signal activities that,
when combined with detailed circuit models, yields very accurate power estimates.
fFor more information about power estimation tools, refer to the PowerPlay Early Power
Estimator User Guide and the PowerPlay Power Analysis chapter in the Quartus II
Handbook.
Switching Characteristics
This section provides performance characteristics of Stratix IV core and periphery
blocks for commercial, industrial, and military grade devices.
The final numbers are based on actual silicon characterization and testing. The
numbers reflect the actual performance of the device under worst-case silicon process,
voltage, and junction temperature conditions. There are no designations on finalized
tables.
BLVDS (8) 2.375 2.5 2.625 100 — — — — — — — — — — —
Notes to Table 1–22:
(1) Vertical I/O (VIO) is top and bottom I/Os; horizontal I/O (HIO) is left and right I/Os.
(2) 1.4-V/1.5-V PCML transceiver I/O standard specifications are described in “Transceiver Performance Specifications” on page 1–16.
(3) Differential clock inputs in column I/O are powered by VCC_CLKIN which requires 2.5 V. Differential inputs that are not on clock pins in column I/O are
powered by VCCPD which requires 2.5 V. All differential inputs in row I/O banks are powered by VCCPD which requires 2.5V.
(4) RL range: 90 RL 110 .
(5) The receiver voltage input range for the data rate when DMAX > 700 Mbps is 1.0 V VIN 1.6 V.
The receiver voltage input range for the data rate when DMAX 700 Mbps is zero V VIN 1.85 V.
(6) The receiver voltage input range for the data rate when DMAX > 700 Mbps is 0.85 V VIN 1.75 V.
The receiver voltage input range for the data rate when DMAX 700 Mbps is 0.45 V VIN 1.95 V.
(7) Column and row I/O banks support LVPECL I/O standards for input operation only on dedicated clock input pins.
(8) For more information about BLVDS interface support in Altera devices, refer to AN522: Implementing Bus LVDS Interfaces in Supported Altera Device
Families.
Table 1–22. Differential I/O Standard Specifications (1), (2) (Part 2 of 2)
I/O
Standard
VCCIO (V) (3) VID (mV) VICM(DC) (V) VOD (V) (4) VOCM (V) (4)
Min Typ Max Min Condition Max Min Condition Max Min Typ Max Min Typ Max
Chapter 1: DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices 1–16
Switching Characteristics
September 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 4: Device Datasheet and Addendum
Transceiver Performance Specifications
This section describes transceiver performance specifications.
Table 1–23 lists the Stratix IV GX transceiver specifications.
Table 1–23. Transceiver Specifications for Stratix IV GX Devices (Part 1 of 9)
Symbol/
Description Conditions
–2 Commercial
Speed Grade
–3 Commercial/
Industrial and
–2× Commercial
Speed Grade (1)
–3 Military (2)
and –4
Commercial/Industrial
Speed Grade Unit
Min Typ Max Min Typ Max Min Typ Max
Reference Clock
Supported I/O
Standards 1.2 V PCML, 1.4 V PCML 1.5 V PCML, 2.5 V PCML, Differential LVPECL (4), LVDS, HCSL
Input frequency
from
REFCLK
input
pins
— 50 — 697 50 — 697 50 — 637.5 MHz
Phase frequency
detector (CMU PLL
and receiver CDR)
— 50 — 425 50 — 325 50 — 325 MHz
Absolute VMAX for a
REFCLK
pin — — — 1.6 — — 1.6 — — 1.6 V
Operational VMAX for
a
REFCLK
pin — — — 1.5 — — 1.5 — — 1.5 V
Absolute VMIN for a
REFCLK
pin — -0.4 — — -0.4 — — -0.4 — — V
Rise/fall time (21) ———0.2——0.2——0.2UI
Duty cycle — 45 — 55 45 — 55 45 — 55 %
Peak-to-peak
differential input
voltage
— 200 — 1600 200 — 1600 200 — 1600 mV
Spread-spectrum
modulating clock
frequency
PCIe 30 — 33 30 — 33 30 — 33 kHz
Spread-spectrum
downspread PCIe — 0 to
-0.5% —— 0 to
-0.5% ——
0 to
-0.5% ——
On-chip termination
resistors — — 100 — — 100 — — 100 —
VICM (AC coupled) — 1100 ± 10% 1100 ± 10% 1100 ± 10% mV
VICM (DC coupled)
HCSL I/O
standard for
PCIe reference
clock
250 — 550 250 — 550 250 — 550 mV
Chapter 1: DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices 1–17
Switching Characteristics
September 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 4: Device Datasheet and Addendum
Transmitter REFCLK
Phase Noise
10 Hz — — -50 — — -50 — — -50 dBc/Hz
100 Hz — — -80 — — -80 — — -80 dBc/Hz
1 KHz — — -110 — — -110 — — -110 dBc/Hz
10 KHz — — -120 — — -120 — — -120 dBc/Hz
100 KHz — — -120 — — -120 — — -120 dBc/Hz
1 MHz — — -130 — — -130 — — -130 dBc/Hz
Transmitter REFCLK
Phase Jitter (rms)
for 100 MHz
REFCLK (3)
10 KHz to
20 MHz —— 3 — — 3 — — 3 ps
RREF ——
2000
±1% ——
2000 ±
1% ——
2000
± 1% —
Transceiver Clocks
Calibration block
clock frequency — 10 — 125 10 — 125 10 — 125 MHz
fixedclk
clock
frequency
PCIe Receiver
Detect — 125 — — 125 — — 125 — MHz
reconfig_clk
clock frequency
Dynamic
reconfiguration
clock frequency
2.5/
37.5
(5)
—50
2.5/
37.5
(5)
—50
2.5/
37.5
(5)
—50—
Delta time between
reconfig_clks
(19)
———2——2——2ms
Transceiver block
minimum
power-down
(
gxb_powerdown
)
pulse width
—1——1——1——µs
Receiver
Supported I/O
Standards 1.4 V PCML, 1.5 V PCML, 2.5 V PCML, LVPECL, LVDS
Data rate (Single
width, non-PMA
Direct) (23)
— 600 — 3750 600 — 3750 600 — 3750 Mbps
Data rate (Double
width, non-PMA
Direct) (23)
— 1000 — 8500 1000 — 6500 1000 — 6375
(22) Mbps
Data rate (Single
width, PMA Direct)
(23)
— 600 — 3250 600 — 3250 600 — 3250 Mbps
Table 1–23. Transceiver Specifications for Stratix IV GX Devices (Part 2 of 9)
Symbol/
Description Conditions
–2 Commercial
Speed Grade
–3 Commercial/
Industrial and
–2× Commercial
Speed Grade (1)
–3 Military (2)
and –4
Commercial/Industrial
Speed Grade Unit
Min Typ Max Min Typ Max Min Typ Max
Chapter 1: DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices 1–18
Switching Characteristics
September 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 4: Device Datasheet and Addendum
Data rate (Double
width, PMA
Direct) (23)
— 1000 — 6500 1000 — 6500 1000 — 6375 Mbps
Absolute VMAX for a
receiver pin (6) — — — 1.6 — — 1.6 — — 1.6 V
Operational VMAX for
a receiver pin — — — 1.5 — — 1.5 — — 1.5 V
Absolute VMIN for a
receiver pin — -0.4 — — -0.4 — — -0.4 — — V
Maximum
peak-to-peak
differential input
voltage VID (diff p-p)
before device
configuration
— — — 1.6 — — 1.6 — — 1.6 V
Maximum peak-to-
peak differential
input voltage VID
(diff p-p) after
device configuration
VICM = 0.82 V
setting — — 2.7 — — 2.7 — — 2.7 V
VICM =1.1 V
setting (7) — — 1.6 — — 1.6 — — 1.6 V
Minimum
differential eye
opening at receiver
serial input pins (20)
Data Rate =
600 Mbps to
5 Gbps
Equalization = 0
DC gain = 0 dB
100 — — 100 — — 165 — — mV
Data Rate
>5Gbps
Equalization = 0
DC gain = 0 dB
165 — — 165 — — 165 — — mV
VICM
VICM = 0.82 V
setting 820 ± 10% 820 ± 10% 820 ± 10% mV
VICM = 1.1 V
setting (7) 1100 ± 10% 1100 ± 10% 1100 ± 10% mV
Receiver DC
Coupling Support — For more information about receiver DC coupling support, refer to the “DC-
Coupled Links” section in the Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Differential on-chip
termination
resistors
85 setting 85 ± 20% 85 ± 20% 85 ± 20%
100 setting 100 ± 20% 100 ± 20% 100 ± 20%
120 setting 120 ± 20% 120 ± 20% 120 ± 20%
150- setting 150 ± 20% 150 ± 20% 150 ± 20%
Table 1–23. Transceiver Specifications for Stratix IV GX Devices (Part 3 of 9)
Symbol/
Description Conditions
–2 Commercial
Speed Grade
–3 Commercial/
Industrial and
–2× Commercial
Speed Grade (1)
–3 Military (2)
and –4
Commercial/Industrial
Speed Grade Unit
Min Typ Max Min Typ Max Min Typ Max
Chapter 1: DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices 1–19
Switching Characteristics
September 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 4: Device Datasheet and Addendum
Differential and
common mode
return loss
PCIe (Gen 1
and Gen 2),
XAUI,
HiGig+,
CEI SR/LR,
Serial RapidIO
SR/LR,
CPRI LV/HV,
OBSAI,
SATA
Compliant —
Programmable PPM
detector (8) —± 62.5, 100, 125, 200,
250, 300, 500, 1000 ppm
Run length — — — 200 — — 200 — — 200 UI
Programmable
equalization (18) ———16——16——16dB
tLTR (9) ———75——75——75µs
tLTR_LTD_Manual (10) —15——15——15——µs
tLTD_Manual (11) — — — 4000 — — 4000 — — 4000 ns
tLTD_Auto (12) — 4000 — — 4000 — — 4000 — — ns
Receiver CDR
3 dB Bandwidth in
lock-to-data (LTD)
mode
PCIe Gen1 20 - 35 MHz
PCIe Gen2 40 - 65 MHz
(OIF) CEI PHY
at 6.375 Gbps 20 - 35 MHz
XAUI 10 - 18 MHz
Serial RapidIO
1.25 Gbps 10 - 18 MHz
Serial RapidIO
2.5 Gbps 10 - 18 MHz
Serial RapidIO
3.125 Gbps 6 - 10 MHz
GIGE 6 - 10 MHz
SONET OC12 3 - 6 MHz
SONET OC48 14 - 19 MHz
Receiver buffer and
CDR offset
cancellation time
(per channel)
———
1850
0
——
1850
0— — 18500
recon
fig_
clk
cycles
Table 1–23. Transceiver Specifications for Stratix IV GX Devices (Part 4 of 9)
Symbol/
Description Conditions
–2 Commercial
Speed Grade
–3 Commercial/
Industrial and
–2× Commercial
Speed Grade (1)
–3 Military (2)
and –4
Commercial/Industrial
Speed Grade Unit
Min Typ Max Min Typ Max Min Typ Max
Chapter 1: DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices 1–20
Switching Characteristics
September 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 4: Device Datasheet and Addendum
Programmable DC
gain
DC Gain Setting
= 0 —0—— 0 —— 0 — dB
DC Gain Setting
= 1 —3—— 3 —— 3 — dB
DC Gain Setting
= 2 —6—— 6 —— 6 — dB
DC Gain Setting
= 3 —9—— 9 —— 9 — dB
DC Gain Setting
= 4 —12—— 12 — — 12 — dB
EyeQ Data Rate — 600 — 3250 600 — 3250 600 — 3250 Mbps
AEQ Data Rate
min VID
(diff p-p)
outer envelope
= 600 mV
8B/10B
encoded data
2500 — 6500 2500 — 6500 — — — Mbps
Decision Feedback
Equalizer (DFE) Data
Rate
min VID
(diff p-p)
outer envelope
= 500 mV
3125 — 6500 3125 — 6500 — — — Mbps
Transmitter
Supported I/O
Standards 1.4 V PCML, 1.5 V PCML
Data rate (Single
width, non-PMA
Direct)
— 600 —
3750 600 — 3750 600 — 3750 Mbps
Data rate (Double
width, non-PMA
Direct)
—
1000 —
8500 1000 — 6500 1000 — 6375
(22) Mbps
Data rate (Single
width, PMA Direct) — 600 —
3250 600 — 3250 600 — 3250 Mbps
Data rate (Double
width, PMA Direct)
(13)
—
1000 —
6500 1000 — 6500 1000 — 6375 Mbps
VOCM 0.65 V setting — 650 — — 650 — — 650 — mV
Differential on-chip
termination
resistors
85 setting 85 ± 15% 85 ± 15% 85 ± 15%
100 setting 100 ± 15% 100 ± 15% 100 ± 15%
120 setting 120 ± 15% 120 ± 15% 120 ± 15%
150- setting 150 ± 15% 150 ± 15% 150 ± 15%
Table 1–23. Transceiver Specifications for Stratix IV GX Devices (Part 5 of 9)
Symbol/
Description Conditions
–2 Commercial
Speed Grade
–3 Commercial/
Industrial and
–2× Commercial
Speed Grade (1)
–3 Military (2)
and –4
Commercial/Industrial
Speed Grade Unit
Min Typ Max Min Typ Max Min Typ Max
Chapter 1: DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices 1–21
Switching Characteristics
September 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 4: Device Datasheet and Addendum
Differential and
common mode
return loss
PCIe Gen1 and
Gen2 (TX
VOD=4),
XAUI (TX
VOD=6),
HiGig+
(TX VOD=6),
CEI SR/LR
(TX VOD=8),
Serial RapidIO
SR (VOD=6),
Serial RapidIO
LR (VOD=8),
CPRI LV
(VOD=6),
CPRI HV
(VOD=2),
OBSAI (VOD=6),
SATA (VOD=4),
Compliant —
Rise time (14) — 50 — 200 50 — 200 50 — 200 ps
Fall time (14) — 50 — 200 50 — 200 50 — 200 ps
XAUI rise time — 60 — 130 60 — 130 60 — 130 ps
XAUI fall time — 60 — 130 60 — 130 60 — 130 ps
Intra-differential pair
skew ———15——15——15ps
Intra-transceiver
block transmitter
channel-to-channel
skew
×4 PMA and
PCS bonded
mode Example:
XAUI, PCIe ×4,
Basic ×4
— — 120 — — 120 — — 120 ps
Inter-transceiver
block transmitter
channel-to-channel
skew
×8 PMA and
PCS bonded
mode Example:
PCIe ×8,
Basic ×8
— — 500 — — 500 — — 500 ps
Table 1–23. Transceiver Specifications for Stratix IV GX Devices (Part 6 of 9)
Symbol/
Description Conditions
–2 Commercial
Speed Grade
–3 Commercial/
Industrial and
–2× Commercial
Speed Grade (1)
–3 Military (2)
and –4
Commercial/Industrial
Speed Grade Unit
Min Typ Max Min Typ Max Min Typ Max
Chapter 1: DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices 1–22
Switching Characteristics
September 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 4: Device Datasheet and Addendum
Inter-transceiver
block skew in Basic
(PMA Direct) ×N
mode (15)
N < 18 channels
located across
three
transceiver
blocks with the
source CMU
PLL located in
the center
transceiver
block
— — 400 — — 400 — — 400 ps
N 18 channels
located across
four transceiver
blocks with the
source CMU
PLL located in
one of the two
center
transceiver
blocks
— — 650 — — 650 — — 650 ps
CMU0 PLL and CMU1 PLL
Supported Data
Range — 600 — 8500 600 — 6500 600 — 6375 Mbps
pll_powerdown
minimum pulse
width
(
tpll_powerdown
)
—1s
CMU PLL lock time
from
pll_powerdown
de-assertion
— — — 100 — — 100 — — 100 s
Table 1–23. Transceiver Specifications for Stratix IV GX Devices (Part 7 of 9)
Symbol/
Description Conditions
–2 Commercial
Speed Grade
–3 Commercial/
Industrial and
–2× Commercial
Speed Grade (1)
–3 Military (2)
and –4
Commercial/Industrial
Speed Grade Unit
Min Typ Max Min Typ Max Min Typ Max
Chapter 1: DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices 1–23
Switching Characteristics
September 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 4: Device Datasheet and Addendum
-3 dB Bandwidth
PCIe Gen1 2.5 - 3.5 MHz
PCIe Gen2 6 - 8 MHz
(OIF) CEI PHY
at 4.976 Gbps 7 - 11 MHz
(OIF) CEI PHY
at 6.375 Gbps 5 - 10 MHz
XAUI 2 - 4 MHz
Serial RapidIO
1.25 Gbps 3 - 5.5 MHz
Serial RapidIO
2.5 Gbps 3 - 5.5 MHz
Serial RapidIO
3.125 Gbps 2 - 4 MHz
GIGE 2.5 - 4.5 MHz
SONET OC12 1.5 - 2.5 MHz
SONET OC48 3.5 - 6 MHz
ATX PLL (6G)
Supported Data
Range (16)
/L = 1 4800-5400 and
6000-6500
4800-5400 and
6000-6500
4800-5400 and
6000-6375 Mbps
/L = 2 2400-2700 and
3000-3250
2400-2700 and
3000-3250
2400-2700 and
3000-3187.5 Mbps
/L = 4 1200-1350 and
1500-1625
1200-1350 and
1500-1625
1200-1350 and
1500-1593.75 Mbps
-3 dB Bandwidth
PCIe Gen 2 1.5 1.5 — MHz
(OIF) CEI PHY
at 6.375 Gbps 3 - 4.5 3 - 4.5 — MHz
Transceiver-FPGA Fabric Interface
Interface speed
(non-PMA Direct) — 25 — 325 25 — 325 25 — 250 MHz
Interface speed
(PMA Direct) — 50 — 325 50 — 325 50 — 325 MHz
Table 1–23. Transceiver Specifications for Stratix IV GX Devices (Part 8 of 9)
Symbol/
Description Conditions
–2 Commercial
Speed Grade
–3 Commercial/
Industrial and
–2× Commercial
Speed Grade (1)
–3 Military (2)
and –4
Commercial/Industrial
Speed Grade Unit
Min Typ Max Min Typ Max Min Typ Max
Chapter 1: DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices 1–24
Switching Characteristics
September 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 4: Device Datasheet and Addendum
Digital reset pulse
width — Minimum is two parallel clock cycles —
Notes to Table 1–23:
(1) The –2× speed grade is the fastest speed grade offered in the following Stratix IV GX devices: EP4SGX70DF29, EP4SGX110DF29,
EP4SGX110FF35, EP4SGX230DF29, EP4SGX110FF35, EP4SGX180DF29, EP4SGX230FF35, EP4SGX290FF35, EP4SGX180FF35,
EP4SGX290FH29, EP4SGX360FF35, and EPSGX360FH29.
(2) Stratix IV GX devices in military speed grade only support selected transceiver configuration up to 3125 Mbps. For more information, contact
Altera sales representative.
(3) To calculate the REFCLK rms phase jitter requirement at reference clock frequencies other than 100 MHz, use the following formula: REFCLK
rms phase jitter at f (MHz) = REFCLK rms phase jitter at 100 MHz * 100/f.
(4) Differential LVPECL signal levels must comply to the minimum and maximum peak-to-peak differential input voltage specified in this table.
(5) The minimum
reconfig_clk
frequency is 2.5 MHz if the transceiver channel is configured in Transmitter only mode. The minimum
reconfig_clk
frequency is 37.5 MHz if the transceiver channel is configured in Receiver only or Receiver and Transmitter mode. For more
information, refer to the Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices chapter.
(6) The device cannot tolerate prolonged operation at this absolute maximum.
(7) You must use the 1.1-V RX VICM setting if the input serial data standard is LVDS.
(8) The rate matcher supports only up to ±300 parts per million (ppm).
(9) Time taken to
rx_pll_locked
goes high from
rx_analogreset
de-assertion. Refer to Figure 1–2 on page 1–33.
(10) Time for which the CDR must be kept in lock-to-reference (LTR) mode after
rx_pll_locked
goes high and before
rx_locktodata
is asserted
in manual mode. Refer to Figure 1–2 on page 1–33.
(11) Time taken to recover valid data after the
rx_locktodata
signal is asserted in manual mode. Refer to Figure 1–2 on page 1–33.
(12) Time taken to recover valid data after the
rx_freqlocked
signal goes high in automatic mode. Refer to Figure 1–3 on page 1–33.
(13) A GPLL may be required to meet the PMA-FPGA fabric interface timing above certain data rates. For more information, refer to the “Left/Right
PLL Requirements in Basic (PMA Direct) Mode” section in the Transceiver Clocking in Stratix IV Devices chapter.
(14) The Quartus II software automatically selects the appropriate slew rate depending on the configured data rate or functional mode.
(15) For applications that require low transmit lane-to-lane skew, use Basic (PMA Direct) xN to achieve PMA-Only bonding across all channels in the
link. You can bond all channels on one side of the device by configuring them in Basic (PMA Direct) xN mode. For more information about
clocking requirements in this mode, refer to the “Basic (PMA Direct) Mode Clocking” section in the Transceiver Clocking in Stratix IV Devices
chapter.
(16) The Quartus II software automatically selects the appropriate /L divider depending on the configured data.
(17) The maximum transceiver-FPGA fabric interface speed of 265.625 MHz is allowed only in Basic low-latency PCS mode with a 32-bit interface
width. For more information, refer to the “Basic Double-Width Mode Configurations” section in the Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices
chapter.
(18) Figure 1–1 shows the AC gain curves for each of the 16 available equalization settings.
(19) If your design uses more than one dynamic reconfiguration controller (
altgx_reconfig
) instances to control the transceiver (
altgx
) channels
physically located on the same side of the device AND if you use different
reconfig_clk
sources for these
altgx_reconfig
instances, the
delta time between any two of these
reconfig_clk
sources becoming stable must not exceed the maximum specification listed.
(20) The differential eye opening specification at the receiver input pins assumes that Receiver Equalization is disabled. If you enable Receiver
Equalization, the receiver circuitry can tolerate a lower minimum eye opening, depending on the equalization level. Use H-Spice simulation to
derive the minimum eye opening requirement with Receiver Equalization enabled.
(21) The rise and fall time transition is specified from 20% to 80%.
(22) Stratix IV GX devices in -4 speed grade support Basic mode and deterministic latency mode transceiver configurations up to 6375 Mbps. These
configurations are shown in the figures 1-90, 1-92, 1-94, 1-96, and 1-101 in the Transceiver Architecture in Stratix IV Devices chapter.
(23) To support data rates lower than 600-Mbps specification through oversampling, use the CDR in LTR mode only.
Table 1–23. Transceiver Specifications for Stratix IV GX Devices (Part 9 of 9)
Symbol/
Description Conditions
–2 Commercial
Speed Grade
–3 Commercial/
Industrial and
–2× Commercial
Speed Grade (1)
–3 Military (2)
and –4
Commercial/Industrial
Speed Grade Unit
Min Typ Max Min Typ Max Min Typ Max
Chapter 1: DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices 1–25
Switching Characteristics
September 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 4: Device Datasheet and Addendum
Figure 1–1 shows the top-to-bottom AC gain curve for equalization settings 0 to 15.
Table 1–24 lists the Stratix IV GT transceiver specifications.
Figure 1–1. AC Gain Curves for Equalization Settings 0 to 15 (Bottom to Top)
Table 1–24. Transceiver Specifications for Stratix IV GT Devices (Part 1 of 8)
Symbol/
Description Conditions
–1 Industrial Speed
Grade
–2 Industrial Speed
Grade
–3 Industrial Speed
Grade Unit
Min Typ Max Min Typ Max Min Typ Max
Reference Clock
Supported I/O
Standards 1.2 V PCML, 1.4 V PCML, 1.5 V PCML, 2.5 V PCML, Differential LVPECL (3), LVDS
Input frequency
from
REFCLK
input
pins
— 50 — 706.25 50 — 706.25 50 — 706.25 MHz
Phase frequency
detector (CMU PLL
and receiver CDR)
— 50 — 425 50 — 425 50 — 425 MHz
Absolute VMAX for a
REFCLK
pin — — — 1.6 — — 1.6 — — 1.6 V
Operational VMAX for
a
REFCLK
pin — — — 1.5 — — 1.5 — — 1.5 V
Absolute VMIN for a
REFCLK
pin — -0.3 — — -0.3 — — -0.3 — — V
Chapter 1: DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices 1–26
Switching Characteristics
September 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 4: Device Datasheet and Addendum
Rise/fall time — — — 0.2 — — 0.2 — — 0.2 UI
Duty cycle — 45 — 55 45 — 55 45 — 55 %
Peak-to-peak
differential input
voltage
— 200 — 1200 200 — 1200 200 — 1200 mV
On-chip termination
resistors — — 100 — — 100 — — 100 —
VICM — 1200 ± 10% 1200 ± 10% 1200 ± 10% mV
Transmitter REFCLK
Phase Noise
10 Hz — — -50 — — -50 — — -50 dBc/Hz
100 Hz — — -80 — — -80 — — -80 dBc/Hz
1 KHz — — -110 — — -110 — — -110 dBc/Hz
10 KHz — — -120 — — -120 — — -120 dBc/Hz
100 KHz — — -120 — — -120 — — -120 dBc/Hz
1 MHz — — -130 — — -130 — — -130 dBc/Hz
Transmitter REFCLK
Phase Jitter (rms)
for 100 MHz
REFCLK (2)
10 KHz to
20 MHz —— 3 —— 3 —— 3 ps
RREF ———
2000
± 1% —2000
± 1% ——
2000
± 1% —
Transceiver Clocks
Calibration block
clock frequency — 10 — 125 10 — 125 10 — 125 MHz
reconfig_clk
clock frequency
Dynamic
reconfiguration
clock frequency
2.5/
37.5
(1)
——
2.5/
37.5
(1)
—50
2.5/
37.5
(1)
—50 MHz
fixedclk
clock
frequency
PCIe Receiver
Detect — 125 — — 125 — — 125 — MHz
Delta time between
reconfig_clks
(15)
———2——2——2ms
Transceiver block
minimum
(
gxb_powerdown
)
power-down pulse
width
——1——1——1—µs
Receiver
Supported I/O
Standards 1.4 V PCML, 1.5 V PCML, 2.5 V PCML, LVPECL, LVDS
Data rate (Single
width,
non-PMA Direct) (16)
— 600 — 3750 600 — 3750 600 — 3750 Mbps
Table 1–24. Transceiver Specifications for Stratix IV GT Devices (Part 2 of 8)
Symbol/
Description Conditions
–1 Industrial Speed
Grade
–2 Industrial Speed
Grade
–3 Industrial Speed
Grade Unit
Min Typ Max Min Typ Max Min Typ Max
Chapter 1: DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices 1–27
Switching Characteristics
September 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 4: Device Datasheet and Addendum
Data rate (Double
width,
non-PMA Direct) (16)
— 1000 — 11300 1000 - 10312.5 1000 — 8500 Mbps
Data rate (Single
width,
PMA Direct) (16)
— 600 - 3250 600 - 3250 600 — 3250 Mbps
Data rate (Double
width,
PMA Direct) (16)
— 1000 - 6500 1000 - 6500 1000 — 6500 Mbps
Absolute VMAX for a
receiver pin (4) — — — 1.6 — — 1.6 — — 1.6 V
Operational VMAX for
a receiver pin — — — 1.5 — — 1.5 — — 1.5 V
Absolute VMIN for a
receiver pin — — -0.4 — -0.4 — — -0.4 — — V
Maximum
peak-to-peak
differential input
voltage VID (diff p-p)
before device
configuration
— — — 1.6 — — 1.6 — — 1.6 V
Maximum
peak-to-peak
differential input
voltage VID (diff p-p)
after device
configuration
VICM = 0.82 V
setting ——2.7—— 2.7 —— 2.7 V
VICM = 1.2 V
setting (5) ——1.2—— 1.2 —— 1.2 V
Minimum
differential eye
opening at the
receiver serial input
pins for data rates
10.3125 Gbps.
Equalization = 0
(6)
DC gain = 0 dB
85 — — 85 — — 85 — — mV
Minimum
differential eye
opening at the
receiver serial input
pins for data rates
> 10.3125 Gbps.
Equalization = 0
(6)
DC gain = 0 dB
165 — — — — — — — — mV
VICM
VICM = 0.82 V
setting 820 ± 10% 820 ± 10% 820 ± 10% mV
VICM = 1.2 V
setting (5) 1200 ± 10% 1200 ± 10% 1200 ± 10% mV
Table 1–24. Transceiver Specifications for Stratix IV GT Devices (Part 3 of 8)
Symbol/
Description Conditions
–1 Industrial Speed
Grade
–2 Industrial Speed
Grade
–3 Industrial Speed
Grade Unit
Min Typ Max Min Typ Max Min Typ Max
Chapter 1: DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices 1–28
Switching Characteristics
September 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 4: Device Datasheet and Addendum
Differential on-chip
termination
resistors
85 setting 85 ± 20% 85 ± 20% 85 ± 20%
100 setting 100 ± 20% 100 ± 20% 100 ± 20%
120 setting 120 ± 20% 120 ± 20% 120 ± 20%
150- setting 150 ± 20% 150 ± 20% 150 ± 20%
Differential and
common mode
return loss
PCIe (Gen 1
and Gen 2),
XAUI,
HiGig+,
CEI SR/LR,
Serial RapidIO
SR/LR,
CPRI LV/HV,
OBSAI,
SATA
Compliant —
Programmable PPM
detector (7) —— ± 62.5, 100, 125, 200,
250, 300, 500, 1000 ppm
Run length — — — 200 — — 200 — — 200 UI
Programmable
equalization ———16——16——16dB
tLTR (8) ———75——75——75µs
tLTR_LTD_Manual (9) —15——15——15——µs
tLTD_Manual (10) — — — 4000 — — 4000 — — 4000 ns
tLTD_Auto (11) — 4000 — — 4000 — — 4000 — — ns
Receiver buffer and
CDR offset
cancellation time
(per channel)
— — — 17000 — — 17000 — — 17000
reconfig_clk
cycles
Programmable DC
gain
DC Gain Setting
= 0 —0——0 — —0 — dB
DC Gain Setting
= 1 —3——3 — —3 — dB
DC Gain Setting
= 2 —6——6 — —6 — dB
DC Gain Setting
= 3 —9——9 — —9 — dB
DC Gain Setting
= 4 —12——12 — —12 — dB
EyeQ Max Data Rate — — — 4.0 — — 4.0 — — 4.0 Gbps
Table 1–24. Transceiver Specifications for Stratix IV GT Devices (Part 4 of 8)
Symbol/
Description Conditions
–1 Industrial Speed
Grade
–2 Industrial Speed
Grade
–3 Industrial Speed
Grade Unit
Min Typ Max Min Typ Max Min Typ Max
Chapter 1: DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices 1–29
Switching Characteristics
September 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 4: Device Datasheet and Addendum
AEQ Data Rate
min VID
(diff p-p)
outer envelope
= 600 mV
8B/10B
encoded data
2500 — 6500 2500 — 6500 — — — Mbps
Decision Feedback
Equalizer (DFE) Data
Rate
min VID
(diff p-p)
outer envelope
= 600 mV
3125 — 6500 3125 — 6500 — — — Mbps
Transmitter
Supported I/O
Standards 1.4 V PCML
Data rate (Single
width,
non-PMA Direct)
— 600 — 3750 600 — 3750 600 — 3750 Mbps
Data rate (Double
width,
non-PMA Direct)
— 1000 — 11300 1000 — 10312.5 1000 — 8500 Mbps
Data rate (Single
width,
PMA Direct)
— 600 — 3250 600 — 3250 600 — 3250 Mbps
Data rate (Double
width,
PMA Direct) (12)
— 1000 — 6500 1000 — 6500 1000 — 6500 Mbps
VOCM 0.65 V setting — 650 — — 650 — — 650 — mV
Differential on-chip
termination
resistors
85 setting 85 ± 15% 85 ± 15% 85 ± 15%
100 setting 100 ± 15% 100 ± 15% 100 ± 15%
120 setting 120 ± 15% 120 ± 15% 120 ± 15%
150- setting 150 ± 15% 150 ± 15% 150 ± 15%
Table 1–24. Transceiver Specifications for Stratix IV GT Devices (Part 5 of 8)
Symbol/
Description Conditions
–1 Industrial Speed
Grade
–2 Industrial Speed
Grade
–3 Industrial Speed
Grade Unit
Min Typ Max Min Typ Max Min Typ Max
Chapter 1: DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices 1–30
Switching Characteristics
September 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 4: Device Datasheet and Addendum
Differential and
common mode
return loss
PCIe Gen1 and
Gen2 (TX
VOD=4),
XAUI
(TX VOD=6),
HiGig+
(TX VOD=6),
CEI SR/LR
(TX VOD=8),
Serial RapidIO
SR (VOD=6),
Serial RapidIO
LR (VOD=8),
CPRI LV
(VOD=6),
CPRI HV
(VOD=2),
OBSAI (VOD=6),
SATA (VOD=4),
Compliant —
Rise time (13) — 50 — 200 50 — 200 50 — 200 ps
Fall time (13) — 50 — 200 50 — 200 50 — 200 ps
XAUI rise time — 60 — 130 60 — 130 60 — 130 ps
XAUI fall time — 60 — 130 60 — 130 60 — 130 ps
Intra-differential
pair skew ———15——15——15ps
Intra-transceiver
block transmitter
channel-to-channel
skew
×4 PMA and
PCS bonded
mode Example:
XAUI, PCIe, ×4,
Basic ×4
— — 120 — — 120 — — 120 ps
Inter-transceiver
block transmitter
channel-to-channel
skew
×8 PMA and
PCS bonded
mode Example:
PCIe ×8,
Basic ×8
— — 500 — — 500 — — 500 ps
Table 1–24. Transceiver Specifications for Stratix IV GT Devices (Part 6 of 8)
Symbol/
Description Conditions
–1 Industrial Speed
Grade
–2 Industrial Speed
Grade
–3 Industrial Speed
Grade Unit
Min Typ Max Min Typ Max Min Typ Max
Chapter 1: DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices 1–31
Switching Characteristics
September 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 4: Device Datasheet and Addendum
Inter-transceiver
block skew in Basic
(PMA Direct) ×N
mode (14)
N < 18 channels
located across
three
transceiver
blocks with the
source CMU
PLL located in
the center
transceiver
block
— — 400 — — 400 — — 400 ps
N 18
channels
located across
four transceiver
blocks with the
source CMU
PLL located in
one of the two
center
transceiver
blocks
— — 650 — — 650 — — 650 ps
CMU PLL0 and CMU PLL1
Supported data
range — 600 — 11300 600 — 10312.5 600 — 8500 Mbps
CMU PLL lock time
from
pll_powerdown
de-assertion
— — — 100 — — 100 — — 100 s
ATX PLL (6G)
Supported Data
Range
/L = 1 4800-5400 and
6000-6500
4800-5400 and
6000-6500
4800-5400 and
6000-6500 Mbps
/L = 2 2400-2700 and
3000-3250
2400-2700 and
3000-3250
2400-2700 and
3000-3250 Mbps
/L = 4 1200-1350 and
1500-1625
1200-1350 and
1500-1625
1200-1350 and
1500-1625 Mbps
ATX PLL (10G)
Supported Data
Range — 9900 — 11300 9900 — 10312.5 — Mbps
Transceiver-FPGA Fabric Interface
Interface speed
(non-PMA Direct) — 25 — 325 25 — 325 25 — 265.625 MHz
Interface speed
(PMA Direct) — 50 — 325 50 — 325 50 — 325 MHz
Table 1–24. Transceiver Specifications for Stratix IV GT Devices (Part 7 of 8)
Symbol/
Description Conditions
–1 Industrial Speed
Grade
–2 Industrial Speed
Grade
–3 Industrial Speed
Grade Unit
Min Typ Max Min Typ Max Min Typ Max
Chapter 1: DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices 1–32
Switching Characteristics
September 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 4: Device Datasheet and Addendum
Digital reset pulse
width — Minimum is two parallel clock cycles —
Notes to Table 1–24:
(1) The minimum
reconfig_clk
frequency is 2.5 MHz if the transceiver channel is configured in Transmitter Only mode. The minimum
reconfig_clk
frequency is 37.5 MHz if the transceiver channel is configured in Receiver only or Receiver and Transmitter mode. For more information, refer to the
Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV Devices chapter.
(2) To calculate the REFCLK rms phase jitter requirement at reference clock frequencies other than 100 MHz, use the following formula: REFCLK rms phase
jitter at f (MHz) = REFCLK rms phase jitter at 100 MHz * 100/f.
(3) Differential LVPECL signal levels must comply to the minimum and maximum peak-to-peak differential input voltage specified in this table.
(4) The device cannot tolerate prolonged operation at this absolute maximum.
(5) You must use the 1.2-V RXVICM setting if the input serial data standard is LVDS.
(6) The differential eye opening specification at the receiver input pins assumes that Receiver Equalization is disabled. If you enable Receiver
Equalization, the receiver circuitry can tolerate a lower minimum eye opening, depending on the equalization level. Use H-Spice simulation to derive
the minimum eye opening requirement with Receiver Equalization enabled.
(7) The rate matcher supports only up to ±300 ppm.
(8) Time taken to
rx_pll_locked
goes high from
rx_analogreset
de-assertion. Refer to Figure 1–2 on page 1–33.
(9) Time for which the CDR must be kept in lock-to-reference mode after
rx_pll_locked
goes high and before
rx_locktodata
is asserted in manual
mode. Refer to Figure 1–2 on page 1–33.
(10) Time taken to recover valid data after the
rx_locktodata
signal is asserted in manual mode. Refer to Figure 1–2 on page 1–33.
(11) Time taken to recover valid data after the
rx_freqlocked
signal goes high in automatic mode. Refer to Figure 1–3 on page 1–33.
(12) A GPLL may be required to meet the PMA-FPGA fabric interface timing above certain data rates. For more information, refer to the “Left/Right PLL
Requirements in Basic (PMA Direct) Mode” section in the Transceiver Clocking in Stratix IV Devices chapter.
(13) The Quartus II software automatically selects the appropriate slew rate depending on the configured data rate or functional mode.
(14) For applications that require low transmit lane-to-lane skew, use Basic (PMA Direct) xN to achieve PMA-Only bonding across all channels in the link.
You can bond all channels on one side of the device by configuring them in Basic (PMA Direct) xN mode. For more information about clocking
requirements in this mode, refer to the “Basic (PMA Direct) Mode Clocking” section in the Transceiver Clocking in Stratix IV Devices chapter.
(15) If your design uses more than one dynamic reconfiguration controller (
altgx_reconfig
) instances to control the transceiver (
altgx
) channels
physically located on the same side of the device AND if you use different
reconfig_clk
sources for these
altgx_reconfig
instances, the delta
time between any two of these
reconfig_clk
sources becoming stable must not exceed the maximum specification listed.
(16) To support data rates lower than 600-Mbps specification through oversampling, use the CDR in LTR mode only.
Table 1–24. Transceiver Specifications for Stratix IV GT Devices (Part 8 of 8)
Symbol/
Description Conditions
–1 Industrial Speed
Grade
–2 Industrial Speed
Grade
–3 Industrial Speed
Grade Unit
Min Typ Max Min Typ Max Min Typ Max
Chapter 1: DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices 1–33
Switching Characteristics
September 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 4: Device Datasheet and Addendum
Figure 1–2 shows the lock time parameters in manual mode.
1LTD = Lock-To-Data; LTR = Lock-To-Reference
Figure 1–3 shows the lock time parameters in automatic mode.
Figure 1–2. Lock Time Parameters for Manual Mode
LTR LTD
Invalid Data
Valid data
r x_locktodata
LTD_Manual
CDR status
r x_dataout
rx_pll_locked
r x_analogreset
LTR
LTR_LTD_Manual
t
t
t
Figure 1–3. Lock Time Parameters for Automatic Mode
LTR LTD
Invalid data
Valid data
r x_freqlocked
LTD_Auto
r x_dataout
CDR status
t
Chapter 1: DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices 1–34
Switching Characteristics
September 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 4: Device Datasheet and Addendum
Table 1–25 through Table 1–28 lists the typical differential VOD termination settings for
Stratix IV GX and GT devices.
Table 1–29 lists typical transmitter pre-emphasis levels in dB for the first post tap
under the following conditions (low-frequency data pattern [five 1s and five 0s] at
6.25 Gbps). The levels listed in Table 1–29 are a representation of possible
pre-emphasis levels under the specified conditions only and that the pre-emphasis
levels may change with data pattern and data rate.
fTo predict the pre-emphasis level for your specific data rate and pattern, run
simulations using the Stratix IV HSSI HSPICE models.
Table 1–25. Typical VOD Setting, TX Term = 85
Symbol
VOD Setting (mV)
01234567
VOD differential
peak-to-peak Typical (mV)
170 ±
20%
340 ±
20%
510 ±
20%
595 ±
20%
680 ±
20%
765 ±
20%
850 ±
20%
1020 ±
20%
Table 1–26. Typical VOD Setting, TX Term = 100
Symbol
VOD Setting (mV)
01234567
VOD differential
peak-to-peak Typical (mV)
200 ±
20%
400 ±
20%
600 ±
20%
700 ±
20%
800 ±
20%
900 ±
20%
1000
± 20%
1200
± 20%
Table 1–27. Typical VOD Setting, TX Term = 120
Symbol
VOD Setting (mV)
0123456
VOD differential
peak-to-peak Typical (mV)
240 ±
20%
480 ±
20%
720 ±
20%
840 ±
20%
960 ±
20%
1080 ±
20%
1200 ±
20%
Table 1–28. Typical VOD Setting, TX Term = 150
Symbol
VOD Setting (mV)
012345
VOD differential
peak-to-peak Typical (mV)
300 ±
20%
600 ±
20%
900 ±
20%
1050 ±
20%
1200 ±
20%
1350 ±
20%
Table 1–29. Transmitter Pre-Emphasis Levels for Stratix IV Devices (Part 1 of 2)
Pre-Emphasis 1st
Post-Tap Setting
VOD Setting
01234567
0 00000000
1 N/A0.7000000
2 N/A10.300000
3 N/A1.50.600000
Chapter 1: DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices 1–35
Switching Characteristics
September 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 4: Device Datasheet and Addendum
4 N/A20.70.30000
5 N/A 2.7 1.2 0.5 0.3 0 0 0
6 N/A 3.1 1.3 0.8 0.5 0.2 0 0
7 N/A 3.7 1.8 1.1 0.7 0.4 0.2 0
8 N/A 4.2 2.1 1.3 0.9 0.6 0.3 0
9 N/A 4.9 2.4 1.6 1.2 0.8 0.5 0.2
10 N/A 5.4 2.8 1.9 1.4 1 0.7 0.3
11 N/A 6 3.2 2.2 1.7 1.2 0.9 0.4
12 N/A 6.8 3.5 2.6 1.9 1.4 1.1 0.6
13 N/A 7.5 3.8 2.8 2.1 1.6 1.2 0.6
14 N/A 8.1 4.2 3.1 2.3 1.7 1.3 0.7
15 N/A 8.8 4.5 3.4 2.6 1.9 1.5 0.8
16 N/A N/A 4.9 3.7 2.9 2.2 1.7 0.9
17 N/A N/A 5.3 4 3.1 2.4 1.8 1.1
18 N/A N/A 5.7 4.4 3.4 2.6 2 1.2
19 N/A N/A 6.1 4.7 3.6 2.8 2.2 1.4
20 N/A N/A 6.6 5.1 4 3.1 2.4 1.5
21 N/A N/A 7 5.4 4.3 3.3 2.7 1.7
22 N/A N/A 8 6.1 4.8 3.8 3 2
23 N/A N/A 9 6.8 5.4 4.3 3.4 2.3
24 N/A N/A 10 7.6 6 4.8 3.9 2.6
25 N/A N/A 11.4 8.4 6.8 5.4 4.4 3
26 N/A N/A 12.6 9.4 7.4 5.9 4.9 3.3
27 N/A N/A N/A 10.3 8.1 6.4 5.3 3.6
28 N/A N/A N/A 11.3 8.8 7.1 5.8 4
29 N/A N/A N/A 12.5 9.6 7.7 6.3 4.3
30 N/A N/A N/A N/A 11.4 9 7.4 N/A
31 N/A N/A N/A N/A 12.9 10 8.2 N/A
Table 1–29. Transmitter Pre-Emphasis Levels for Stratix IV Devices (Part 2 of 2)
Pre-Emphasis 1st
Post-Tap Setting
VOD Setting
01234567
Chapter 1: DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices 1–36
Switching Characteristics
September 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 4: Device Datasheet and Addendum
Table 1–30 lists the Stratix IV GX transceiver jitter specifications for all supported
protocols. For protocols supported by Stratix IV GT industrial speed grade devices,
refer to the Stratix IV GX –2 commercial speed grade column in Table 1–30.
Table 1–30. Transceiver Block Jitter Specifications for Stratix IV GX Devices (1), (2) (Part 1 of 9)
Symbol/
Description Conditions
–2 Commercial
Speed Grade
–3 Commercial/
Industrial
and –2× Commercial
Speed Grade
–3 Military (3) and
–4 Commercial/
Industrial Speed
Grade Unit
Min Typ Max Min Typ Max Min Typ Max
SONET/SDH Transmit Jitter Generation (4)
Peak-to-peak jitter at
622.08 Mbps Pattern = PRBS15 — — 0.1 — — 0.1 — — 0.1 UI
RMS jitter at
622.08 Mbps Pattern = PRBS15 — — 0.01 — — 0.01 — — 0.01 UI
Peak-to-peak jitter at
2488.32 Mbps Pattern = PRBS15 — — 0.1 — — 0.1 — — 0.1 UI
RMS jitter at
2488.32 Mbps Pattern = PRBS15 — — 0.01 — — 0.01 — — 0.01 UI
SONET/SDH Receiver Jitter Tolerance (4)
Jitter tolerance at
622.08 Mbps
Jitter frequency =
0.03 KHz
Pattern = PRBS15
> 15 > 15 > 15 UI
Jitter frequency =
25 KHZ
Pattern = PRBS15
> 1.5 > 1.5 > 1.5 UI
Jitter frequency =
250 KHz
Pattern = PRBS15
> 0.15 > 0.15 > 0.15 UI
Jitter tolerance at
2488.32 Mbps
Jitter frequency =
0.06 KHz
Pattern = PRBS15
> 15 > 15 > 15 UI
Jitter frequency =
100 KHZ
Pattern = PRBS15
> 1.5 > 1.5 > 1.5 UI
Jitter frequency = 1 MHz
Pattern = PRBS15 > 0.15 > 0.15 > 0.15 UI
Jitter frequency =
10 MHz
Pattern = PRBS15
> 0.15 > 0.15 > 0.15 UI
Fibre Channel Transmit Jitter Generation (5), (13)
Total jitter FC-1 Pattern = CRPAT — — 0.23 — — 0.23 — — 0.23 UI
Deterministic jitter FC-1 Pattern = CRPAT — — 0.11 — — 0.11 — — 0.11 UI
Total jitter FC-2 Pattern = CRPAT — — 0.33 — — 0.33 — — 0.33 UI
Deterministic jitter FC-2 Pattern = CRPAT — — 0.2 — — 0.2 — — 0.2 UI
Chapter 1: DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices 1–37
Switching Characteristics
September 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 4: Device Datasheet and Addendum
Total jitter FC-4 Pattern = CRPAT — — 0.52 — — 0.52 — — 0.52 UI
Deterministic jitter FC-4 Pattern = CRPAT — — 0.33 — — 0.33 — — 0.33 UI
Fibre Channel Receiver Jitter Tolerance (5), (14)
Deterministic jitter FC-1 Pattern = CJTPAT > 0.37 > 0.37 > 0.37 UI
Random jitter FC-1 Pattern = CJTPAT > 0.31 > 0.31 > 0.31 UI
Sinusoidal jitter FC-1 Fc/25000 > 1.5 > 1.5 > 1.5 UI
Fc/1667 > 0.1 > 0.1 > 0.1 UI
Deterministic jitter FC-2 Pattern = CJTPAT > 0.33 > 0.33 > 0.33 UI
Random jitter FC-2 Pattern = CJTPAT > 0.29 > 0.29 > 0.29 UI
Sinusoidal jitter FC-2 Fc/25000 > 1.5 > 1.5 > 1.5 UI
Fc/1667 > 0.1 > 0.1 > 0.1 UI
Deterministic jitter FC-4 Pattern = CJTPAT > 0.33 > 0.33 > 0.33 UI
Random jitter FC-4 Pattern = CJTPAT > 0.29 > 0.29 > 0.29 UI
Sinusoidal jitter FC-4 Fc/25000 > 1.5 > 1.5 > 1.5 UI
Fc/1667 > 0.1 > 0.1 > 0.1 UI
XAUI Transmit Jitter Generation (6)
Total jitter at 3.125 Gbps Pattern = CJPAT — — 0.3 — — 0.3 — — 0.3 UI
Deterministic jitter at
3.125 Gbps Pattern = CJPAT — — 0.17 — — 0.17 — — 0.17 UI
XAUI Receiver Jitter Tolerance (6)
Total jitter — > 0.65 > 0.65 > 0.65 UI
Deterministic jitter — > 0.37 > 0.37 > 0.37 UI
Peak-to-peak jitter Jitter frequency =
22.1 KHz > 8.5 > 8.5 > 8.5 UI
Peak-to-peak jitter Jitter frequency =
1.875 MHz > 0.1 > 0.1 > 0.1 UI
Peak-to-peak jitter Jitter frequency =
20 MHz > 0.1 > 0.1 > 0.1 UI
PCIe Transmit Jitter Generation (7)
Total jitter at 2.5 Gbps
(Gen1) Compliance pattern — — 0.25 — — 0.25 — — 0.25 UI
Total jitter at 5 Gbps
(Gen2) (15) Compliance pattern — — 0.25 — — 0.25 — — — UI
PCIe Receiver Jitter Tolerance (7)
Total jitter at 2.5 Gbps
(Gen1) Compliance pattern > 0.6 > 0.6 > 0.6 UI
Table 1–30. Transceiver Block Jitter Specifications for Stratix IV GX Devices (1), (2) (Part 2 of 9)
Symbol/
Description Conditions
–2 Commercial
Speed Grade
–3 Commercial/
Industrial
and –2× Commercial
Speed Grade
–3 Military (3) and
–4 Commercial/
Industrial Speed
Grade Unit
Min Typ Max Min Typ Max Min Typ Max
Chapter 1: DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices 1–38
Switching Characteristics
September 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 4: Device Datasheet and Addendum
Total jitter at 5 Gbps
(Gen2) Compliance pattern Compliant Compliant — UI
PCIe (Gen 1) Electrical Idle Detect Threshold
VRX-IDLE-DETDIFFp-p (16) Compliance pattern 65 — 175 65 — 175 65 — 175 UI
Serial RapidIO Transmit Jitter Generation (8)
Deterministic jitter
(peak-to-peak)
Data Rate = 1.25, 2.5,
3.125 Gbps
Pattern = CJPAT
— — 0.17 — — 0.17 — — 0.17 UI
Total jitter
(peak-to-peak)
Data Rate = 1.25, 2.5,
3.125 Gbps
Pattern = CJPAT
— — 0.35 — — 0.35 — — 0.35 UI
Serial RapidIO Receiver Jitter Tolerance (8)
Deterministic jitter
tolerance (peak-to-peak)
Data Rate = 1.25, 2.5,
3.125 Gbps
Pattern = CJPAT
> 0.37 > 0.37 > 0.37 UI
Combined deterministic
and random jitter
tolerance (peak-to-peak)
Data Rate = 1.25, 2.5,
3.125 Gbps
Pattern = CJPAT
> 0.55 > 0.55 > 0.55 UI
Sinusoidal jitter
tolerance (peak-to-peak)
Jitter Frequency = 22.1
KHz Data Rate = 1.25,
2.5, 3.125 Gbps
Pattern = CJPAT
> 8.5 > 8.5 > 8.5 UI
Jitter Frequency = 1.875
MHz
Data Rate = 1.25, 2.5,
3.125 Gbps
Pattern = CJPAT
> 0.1 > 0.1 > 0.1 UI
Jitter Frequency =
20 MHz
Data Rate = 1.25, 2.5,
3.125 Gbps
Pattern = CJPAT
> 0.1 > 0.1 > 0.1 UI
GIGE Transmit Jitter Generation (9)
Deterministic jitter
(peak-to-peak) Pattern = CRPAT — — 0.14 — — 0.14 — — 0.14 UI
Total jitter
(peak-to-peak) Pattern = CRPAT — — 0.279 — — 0.279 — — 0.279 UI
Table 1–30. Transceiver Block Jitter Specifications for Stratix IV GX Devices (1), (2) (Part 3 of 9)
Symbol/
Description Conditions
–2 Commercial
Speed Grade
–3 Commercial/
Industrial
and –2× Commercial
Speed Grade
–3 Military (3) and
–4 Commercial/
Industrial Speed
Grade Unit
Min Typ Max Min Typ Max Min Typ Max
Chapter 1: DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices 1–39
Switching Characteristics
September 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 4: Device Datasheet and Addendum
GIGE Receiver Jitter Tolerance (9)
Deterministic jitter
tolerance (peak-to-peak) Pattern = CJPAT > 0.4 > 0.4 > 0.4 UI
Combined deterministic
and random jitter
tolerance (peak-to-peak)
Pattern = CJPAT > 0.66 > 0.66 > 0.66 UI
HiGig Transmit Jitter Generation (10)
Deterministic jitter
(peak-to-peak)
Data Rate = 3.75 Gbps
Pattern = CJPAT — — 0.17 — — — — — — UI
Total jitter
(peak-to-peak)
Data Rate = 3.75 Gbps
Pattern = CJPAT — — 0.35 — — — — — — UI
HiGig Receiver Jitter Tolerance (10)
Deterministic jitter
tolerance (peak-to-peak)
Data Rate = 3.75 Gbps
Pattern = CJPAT > 0.37 — — — — — — UI
Combined deterministic
and random jitter
tolerance (peak-to-peak)
Data Rate = 3.75 Gbps
Pattern = CJPAT > 0.65 — — — — — — UI
Sinusoidal jitter
tolerance (peak-to-peak)
Jitter Frequency = 22.1
KHz
Data Rate = 3.75 Gbps
Pattern = CJPAT
> 8.5 — — — — — — UI
Jitter Frequency =
1.875MHz
Data Rate = 3.75 Gbps
Pattern = CJPAT
> 0.1 — — — — — — UI
Jitter Frequency =
20 MHz
Data Rate = 3.75 Gbps
Pattern = CJPAT
> 0.1 — — — — — — UI
(OIF) CEI Transmitter Jitter Generation (11)
Total jitter
(peak-to-peak)
Data Rate = 6.375 Gbps
Pattern = PRBS15 BER =
10-12
— — 0.3 — — 0.3 — — 0.3 UI
(OIF) CEI Receiver Jitter Tolerance (11)
Deterministic jitter
tolerance (peak-to-peak)
Data Rate = 6.375 Gbps
Pattern = PRBS31 BER =
10-12
> 0.675 > 0.675 — — >0.675 UI
Table 1–30. Transceiver Block Jitter Specifications for Stratix IV GX Devices (1), (2) (Part 4 of 9)
Symbol/
Description Conditions
–2 Commercial
Speed Grade
–3 Commercial/
Industrial
and –2× Commercial
Speed Grade
–3 Military (3) and
–4 Commercial/
Industrial Speed
Grade Unit
Min Typ Max Min Typ Max Min Typ Max
1–40 Chapter 1: DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices
Switching Characteristics
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 4: Device Datasheet and Addendum
Combined deterministic
and random jitter
tolerance (peak-to-peak)
Data Rate = 6.375 Gbps
Pattern=PRBS31
BER = 10-12
> 0.988 > 0.988 — — >0.988 UI
Sinusoidal jitter
tolerance (peak-to-peak)
Jitter Frequency = 38.2
KHz
Data Rate = 6.375 Gbps
Pattern = PRBS31 BER =
10-12
> 5 > 5 — — > 5 UI
Jitter Frequency = 3.82
MHz
Data Rate = 6.375 Gbps
Pattern = PRBS31 BER =
10-12
> 0.05 > 0.05 — — > 0.05 UI
Jitter Frequency =
20 MHz
Data Rate= 6.375 Gbps
Pattern = PRBS31 BER =
10-12
> 0.05 > 0.05 — — > 0.05 UI
SDI Transmitter Jitter Generation (12)
Alignment jitter
(peak-to-peak)
Data Rate = 1.485 Gbps
(HD) Pattern = Color Bar
Low-Frequency Roll-Off
= 100 KHz
0.2 — — 0.2 — — 0.2 — — UI
Data Rate = 2.97 Gbps
(3G) Pattern = Color Bar
Low-Frequency Roll-Off
= 100 KHz
0.3 — — 0.3 — — 0.3 — — UI
Table 1–30. Transceiver Block Jitter Specifications for Stratix IV GX Devices (1), (2) (Part 5 of 9)
Symbol/
Description Conditions
–2 Commercial
Speed Grade
–3 Commercial/
Industrial
and –2× Commercial
Speed Grade
–3 Military (3) and
–4 Commercial/
Industrial Speed
Grade Unit
Min Typ Max Min Typ Max Min Typ Max
Chapter 1: DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices 1–41
Switching Characteristics
September 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 4: Device Datasheet and Addendum
SDI Receiver Jitter Tolerance (12)
Sinusoidal jitter
tolerance (peak-to-peak)
Jitter Frequency =
15 KHz
Data Rate = 2.97 Gbps
(3G) Pattern = Single
Line Scramble Color Bar
> 2 > 2 > 2 UI
Jitter Frequency =
100 KHz
Data Rate = 2.97 Gbps
(3G) Pattern = Single
Line Scramble Color Bar
> 0.3 > 0.3 > 0.3 UI
Jitter Frequency =
148.5 MHz
Data Rate = 2.97 Gbps
(3G) Pattern = Single
Line Scramble Color Bar
> 0.3 > 0.3 > 0.3 UI
Sinusoidal jitter
tolerance (peak-to-peak)
Jitter Frequency =
20 KHz
Data Rate = 1.485 Gbps
(HD) Pattern = 75%
Color Bar
> 1 > 1 > 1 UI
Jitter Frequency = 100
KHz Data Rate = 1.485
Gbps (HD) Pattern =
75% Color Bar
> 0.2 > 0.2 > 0.2 UI
Jitter Frequency = 148.5
MHz
Data Rate = 1.485 Gbps
(HD) Pattern = 75%
Color Bar
> 0.2 > 0.2 > 0.2 UI
SAS Transmit Jitter Generation (17)
Total jitter at 1.5 Gbps
(G1) Pattern = CJPAT — — 0.55 — — 0.55 — — 0.55 UI
Deterministic jitter at
1.5 Gbps (G1) Pattern = CJPAT — — 0.35 — — 0.35 — — 0.35 UI
Total jitter at 3.0 Gbps
(G2) Pattern = CJPAT — — 0.55 — — 0.55 — — 0.55 UI
Deterministic jitter at
3.0 Gbps (G2) Pattern = CJPAT — — 0.35 — — 0.35 — — 0.35 UI
Total jitter at 6.0 Gbps
(G3) Pattern = CJPAT — — 0.25 — — 0.25 — — 0.25 UI
Table 1–30. Transceiver Block Jitter Specifications for Stratix IV GX Devices (1), (2) (Part 6 of 9)
Symbol/
Description Conditions
–2 Commercial
Speed Grade
–3 Commercial/
Industrial
and –2× Commercial
Speed Grade
–3 Military (3) and
–4 Commercial/
Industrial Speed
Grade Unit
Min Typ Max Min Typ Max Min Typ Max
1–42 Chapter 1: DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices
Switching Characteristics
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 4: Device Datasheet and Addendum
Random jitter at
6.0 Gbps (G3) Pattern = CJPAT — — 0.15 — — 0.15 — — 0.15 UI
SAS Receiver Jitter Tolerance (17)
Total Jitter tolerance at
1.5 Gbps (G1) Pattern = CJPAT > 0.65 > 0.65 > 0.65 UI
Deterministic Jitter
tolerance at 1.5 Gbps
(G1)
Pattern = CJPAT > 0.35 > 0.35 > 0.35 UI
Sinusoidal Jitter
tolerance at 1.5 Gbps
(G1)
Jitter Frequency = 900
KHz to 5 MHz
Pattern = CJTPAT BER =
1E-12
> 0.1 > 0.1 > 0.1 UI
CPRI Transmit Jitter Generation (18)
Total Jitter
E.6.HV, E.12.HV
Pattern = CJPAT — — 0.279 — — 0.279 — — 0.279 UI
E.6.LV, E.12.LV, E.24.LV,
E.30.LV
Pattern = CJTPAT
— — 0.35 — — 0.35 — — 0.35 UI
Deterministic Jitter
E.6.HV, E.12.HV
Pattern = CJPAT — — 0.14 — — 0.14 — — 0.14 UI
E.6.LV, E.12.LV, E.24.LV,
E.30.LV
Pattern = CJTPAT
— — 0.17 — — 0.17 — — 0.17 UI
CPRI Receiver Jitter Tolerance (18)
Total jitter tolerance E.6.HV, E.12.HV
Pattern = CJPAT > 0.66 > 0.66 > 0.66 UI
Deterministic jitter
tolerance
E.6.HV, E.12.HV
Pattern = CJPAT > 0.4 > 0.4 > 0.4 UI
Total jitter tolerance
E.6.LV, E.12.LV, E.24.LV,
E.30.LV
Pattern = CJTPAT
> 0.65 > 0.65 > 0.65 UI
Deterministic jitter
tolerance
E.6.LV, E.12.LV, E.24.LV,
E.30.LV
Pattern = CJTPAT
> 0.37 > 0.37 > 0.37 UI
Combined deterministic
and random jitter
tolerance
E.6.LV, E.12.LV, E.24.LV,
E.30.LV
Pattern = CJTPAT
> 0.55 > 0.55 > 0.55 UI
Table 1–30. Transceiver Block Jitter Specifications for Stratix IV GX Devices (1), (2) (Part 7 of 9)
Symbol/
Description Conditions
–2 Commercial
Speed Grade
–3 Commercial/
Industrial
and –2× Commercial
Speed Grade
–3 Military (3) and
–4 Commercial/
Industrial Speed
Grade Unit
Min Typ Max Min Typ Max Min Typ Max
Chapter 1: DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices 1–43
Switching Characteristics
September 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 4: Device Datasheet and Addendum
OBSAI Transmit Jitter Generation (19)
Total jitter at 768 Mbps,
1536 Mbps, and
3072 Mbps
REFCLK = 153.6MHz
Pattern = CJPAT — — 0.35 — — 0.35 — — 0.35 UI
Deterministic jitter at
768 Mbps, 1536 Mbps,
and 3072 Mbps
REFCLK = 153.6MHz
Pattern = CJPAT — — 0.17 — — 0.17 — — 0.17 UI
OBSAI Receiver Jitter Tolerance (19)
Deterministic jitter
tolerance at 768 Mbps,
1536 Mbps, and
3072 Mbps
Pattern = CJPAT > 0.37 > 0.37 > 0.37 UI
Combined deterministic
and random jitter
tolerance at 768 Mbps,
1536 Mbps, and
3072 Mbps
Pattern = CJPAT > 0.55 > 0.55 > 0.55 UI
Sinusoidal Jitter
tolerance at 768 Mbps
Jitter Frequency =
5.4 KHz
Pattern = CJPAT
> 8.5 > 8.5 > 8.5 UI
Jitter Frequency =
460 MHz to 20 MHz
Pattern = CJPAT
> 0.1 > 0.1 > 0.1 UI
Sinusoidal Jitter
tolerance at 1536 Mbps
Jitter Frequency =
10.9 KHz
Pattern = CJPAT
> 8.5 > 8.5 > 8.5 UI
Jitter Frequency =
921.6 MHz to 20 MHz
Pattern = CJPAT
> 0.1 > 0.1 > 0.1 UI
Table 1–30. Transceiver Block Jitter Specifications for Stratix IV GX Devices (1), (2) (Part 8 of 9)
Symbol/
Description Conditions
–2 Commercial
Speed Grade
–3 Commercial/
Industrial
and –2× Commercial
Speed Grade
–3 Military (3) and
–4 Commercial/
Industrial Speed
Grade Unit
Min Typ Max Min Typ Max Min Typ Max
1–44 Chapter 1: DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices
Switching Characteristics
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 4: Device Datasheet and Addendum
Sinusoidal Jitter
tolerance at 3072 Mbps
Jitter Frequency = 21.8
KHz
Pattern = CJPAT
> 8.5 > 8.5 > 8.5 UI
Jitter Frequency =
1843.2 MHz to 20 MHz
Pattern = CJPAT
> 0.1 > 0.1 > 0.1 UI
Notes to Table 1–30:
(1) Dedicated
refclk
pins were used to drive the input reference clocks.
(2) The Jitter numbers are valid for the stated conditions only.
(3) Stratix IV GX devices in military speed grade only support selected transceiver configuration up to 3125 Mbps. For more information, contact
Altera sales representative.
(4) The jitter numbers for SONET/SDH are compliant to the GR-253-CORE Issue 3 Specification.
(5) The jitter numbers for Fibre Channel are compliant to the FC-PI-4 Specification revision 6.10.
(6) The jitter numbers for XAUI are compliant to the IEEE802.3ae-2002 Specification.
(7) The jitter numbers for PCI Express (PIPE) (PCIe) are compliant to the PCIe Base Specification 2.0.
(8) The jitter numbers for Serial RapidIO are compliant to the RapidIO Specification 1.3.
(9) The jitter numbers for GIGE are compliant to the IEEE802.3-2002 Specification.
(10) The jitter numbers for HiGig are compliant to the IEEE802.3ae-2002 Specification.
(11) The jitter numbers for (OIF) CEI are compliant to the OIF-CEI-02.0 Specification.
(12) The HD-SDI and 3G-SDI jitter numbers are compliant to the SMPTE292M and SMPTE424M Specifications.
(13) The fibre channel transmitter jitter generation numbers are compliant to the specification at T interoperability point.
(14) The fibre channel receiver jitter tolerance numbers are compliant to the specification at R interoperability point.
(15) You must use the ATX PLL adjacent to the transceiver channels to meet the transmitter jitter generation compliance in PCIe Gen2 ×8 modes.
(16) Stratix IV PCIe receivers are compliant to this specification provided the VTX-CM-DC-ACTIVEIDLE-DELTA of the upstream transmitter is less than 50mV.
(17) The jitter numbers for Serial Attached SCSI (SAS) are compliant to the SAS-2.1 Specification.
(18) The jitter numbers for CPRI are compliant to the CPRI Specification V3.0.
(19) The jitter numbers for OBSAI are compliant to the OBSAI RP3 Specification V4.1.
Table 1–30. Transceiver Block Jitter Specifications for Stratix IV GX Devices (1), (2) (Part 9 of 9)
Symbol/
Description Conditions
–2 Commercial
Speed Grade
–3 Commercial/
Industrial
and –2× Commercial
Speed Grade
–3 Military (3) and
–4 Commercial/
Industrial Speed
Grade Unit
Min Typ Max Min Typ Max Min Typ Max
Chapter 1: DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices 1–45
Switching Characteristics
September 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 4: Device Datasheet and Addendum
Table 1–31 lists the transceiver jitter specifications for protocols supported by
Stratix IV GT devices.
Table 1–31. Transceiver Jitter Specifications for Protocols by Stratix IV GT Devices (Part 1 of 2)
Symbol/
Description Conditions
–1 Industrial Speed
Grade
–2 Industrial Speed
Grade
–3 Industrial Speed
Grade Unit
Min Typ Max Min Typ Max Min Typ Max
XLAUI/CAUI Transmit Jitter Generation (1), (3)
Total Jitter Pattern = PRBS-31
VOD = 800 mV
REFCLK
= 644.53 MHz
4 (XLAUI)/
10 (CAUI) channels in
Basic ×1 mode
— — 0.30 — — 0.30 — — 0.30 UI
Deterministic
Jitter — — 0.17 — — 0.17 — — 0.17 UI
XLAUI/CAUI Receiver Jitter Tolerance (1)
Total Jitter
tolerance Pattern = PRBS-31 > 0.62 > 0.62 — UI
Sinusoidal Jitter
tolerance
Jitter Frequency = 40 KHz
Pattern = PRBS-31
Equalization = Disabled
BER = 1E-12
> 5 > 5 — UI
Jitter Frequency 4MHz
Pattern = PRBS-31
Equalization = Disabled
BER = 1E-12
> 0.05 > 0.05 — UI
XFI Transmitter Jitter Generation (2), (3)
Total jitter at
10.3125 Gbps
Pattern =
PRBS-31
Vod = 800 mV
REFCLK =
644.53 MHz
10 channels in Basic ×1 mode
— — 0.3 — — 0.3 — — — UI
OTL 4.10 (1), (3)
Total Jitter at
11.18 Gbps Pattern = PRBS-31
VOD = 800 mV
REFCLK
= 698.75 MHz
— — 0.30 — — 0.30 — — 0.30 UI
Deterministic
Jitter — — 0.17 — — 0.17 — — 0.17 UI
1–46 Chapter 1: DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices
Switching Characteristics
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 4: Device Datasheet and Addendum
Table 1–32 lists the SFI-S transmitter jitter specifications for Stratix IV GT devices.
Sinusoidal Jitter
tolerance
Jitter Frequency = 40 KHz
Pattern = PRBS-31
Equalization = Disabled
BER = 1E-12
> 5 > 5 — UI
Jitter Frequency 4MHz
Pattern = PRBS-31
Equalization = Disabled
BER = 1E-12
> 0.05 > 0.05 — UI
Notes to Table 1–31:
(1) The jitter numbers for XLAUI/CAUI are compliant to the IEEE P802.3ba specification.
(2) Stratix IV GT transceivers are compliant to the XFI datacom transmitter jitter specifications in Table 9 of XFP Revision 4.1.
(3) Contact Altera for board and link best practices at BER = 1E-15.
Table 1–31. Transceiver Jitter Specifications for Protocols by Stratix IV GT Devices (Part 2 of 2)
Symbol/
Description Conditions
–1 Industrial Speed
Grade
–2 Industrial Speed
Grade
–3 Industrial Speed
Grade Unit
Min Typ Max Min Typ Max Min Typ Max
Table 1–32. SFI-S Transmitter Jitter Specifications for Stratix IV GT Devices (1), (2)
Symbol/Description Conditions
-1 Industrial
Speed Grade
-2 Industrial
Speed Grade
-3 Industrial
Speed Grade Unit
Mean Mean Mean
Total Transmitter jitter at
11.3 Gbps (4)
Pattern = PRBS-31
Vod = 800 mV
REFCLK = 706.25 MHz
12 channels in Basic ×1 mode
0.23 UI (3) ——UI
Notes to Table 1–32:
(1) Dedicated
refclk
pins were used to drive the input reference clocks.
(2) The jitter numbers are valid for stated conditions only.
(3) Two hundred channels were characterized to derive the mean transmitter jitter specification of 0.23 UI. The maximum jitter across the 200 units
characterized was 0.30 UI.
(4) Contact Altera for board and link best practices at BER = 1E-15.
Chapter 1: DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices 1–47
Switching Characteristics
September 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 4: Device Datasheet and Addendum
Transceiver Datapath PCS Latency
fFor more information about:
■Basic mode PCS latency, refer to Figure 1-90 through Figure 1-97 in the Transceiver
Architecture in Stratix IV Devices chapter.
■PCIe mode PCS latency, refer to Figure 1-102 in the Transceiver Architecture in
Stratix IV Devices chapter.
■XAUI mode PCS latency, refer to Figure 1-119 in the Transceiver Architecture in
Stratix IV Devices chapter.
■GIGE mode PCS latency, refer to Figure 1-128 in the Transceiver Architecture in
Stratix IV Devices chapter.
■SONET/SDH mode PCS latency, refer to Figure 1-136 in the Transceiver
Architecture in Stratix IV Devices chapter.
■SDI mode PCS latency, refer to Figure 1-141 in the Transceiver Architecture in Stratix
IV Devices chapter.
■(OIF) CEI PHY mode PCS latency, refer to Figure 1-143 in the Transceiver
Architecture in Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Core Performance Specifications
This section describes the clock tree, phase-locked loop (PLL), digital signal
processing (DSP), TriMatrix, configuration, JTAG, and chip-wide reset (
Dev_CLRn
)
specifications.
For the Stratix IV GT –1 and –2 speed grade specifications, refer to the –2/–2× speed
grade column. For the Stratix IV GT –3 speed grade specification, refer to the –3 speed
grade column, unless otherwise specified.
Clock Tree Specifications
Table 1–33 lists the clock tree specifications for Stratix IV devices.
Table 1–33. Clock Tree Performance for Stratix IV Devices
Performance
Unit
Symbol –2/–2× Speed Grade –3 Speed Grade –4 Speed Grade
Global clock and
Regional clock 800 700 500 MHz
Periphery clock 550 500 500 MHz
1–48 Chapter 1: DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices
Switching Characteristics
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 4: Device Datasheet and Addendum
PLL Specifications
Table 1–34 lists the Stratix IV PLL specifications when operating in the commercial
(0° to 85°C), industrial (–40° to 100°C), and military (–55°C to 125°C) junction
temperature ranges.
Table 1–34. PLL Specifications for Stratix IV Devices (Part 1 of 2)
Symbol Parameter Min Typ Max Unit
fIN
Input clock frequency (–2/–2x speed grade) 5 — 800 (1) MHz
Input clock frequency (–3 speed grade) 5 — 717 (1) MHz
Input clock frequency (–4 speed grade) 5 — 717 (1) MHz
fINPFD Input frequency to the PFD 5 — 325 MHz
fVCO (2)
PLL VCO operating range (–2 speed grade) 600 — 1600 MHz
PLL VCO operating range (–3 speed grade) 600 — 1300 MHz
PLL VCO operating range (–4 speed grade) 600 — 1300 MHz
tEINDUTY Input clock or external feedback clock input duty cycle 40 — 60 %
fOUT
Output frequency for internal global or regional clock
(–2/–2x speed grade) — — 800 (3) MHz
Output frequency for internal global or regional clock
(–3 speed grade) — — 717 (3) MHz
Output frequency for internal global or regional clock
(–4 speed grade) — — 717 (3) MHz
fOUT_EXT
Output frequency for external clock output (–2 speed grade) — — 800 (3) MHz
Output frequency for external clock output (–3 speed grade) — — 717 (3) MHz
Output frequency for external clock output (–4 speed grade) — — 717 (3) MHz
tOUTDUTY Duty cycle for external clock output (when set to 50%) 45 50 55 %
tFCOMP External feedback clock compensation time — — 10 ns
tCONFIGPLL Time required to reconfigure scan chain — 3.5 — scanclk
cycles
tCONFIGPHASE Time required to reconfigure phase shift — 1 — scanclk
cycles
fSCANCLK scanclk frequency — — 100 MHz
tLOCK
Time required to lock from end-of-device configuration or
de-assertion of areset —— 1 ms
tDLOCK
Time required to lock dynamically (after switchover or
reconfiguring any non-post-scale counters/delays) —— 1 ms
fCLBW
PLL closed-loop low bandwidth — 0.3 — MHz
PLL closed-loop medium bandwidth — 1.5 — MHz
PLL closed-loop high bandwidth (8) —4 — MHz
tPLL_PSERR Accuracy of PLL phase shift — — ±50 ps
tARESET Minimum pulse width on the
areset
signal 10 — — ns
tINCCJ (4), (5) Input clock cycle to cycle jitter (FREF ≥ 100 MHz) — — 0.15 UI (p-p)
Input clock cycle to cycle jitter (FREF < 100 MHz) — — ±750 ps (p-p)
tOUTPJ_DC (6) Period Jitter for dedicated clock output (FOUT ≥ 100 MHz) — — 175 ps (p-p)
Period Jitter for dedicated clock output (FOUT < 100 MHz) — — 17.5 mUI (p-p)
Chapter 1: DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices 1–49
Switching Characteristics
September 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 4: Device Datasheet and Addendum
tOUTCCJ_DC (6)
Cycle to Cycle Jitter for dedicated clock output
(FOUT ≥100 MHz) — — 175 ps (p-p)
Cycle to Cycle Jitter for dedicated clock output
(FOUT < 100 MHz) — — 17.5 mUI (p-p)
tOUTPJ_IO (6),
(9)
Period Jitter for clock output on regular I/O
(FOUT ≥100 MHz) — — 600 ps (p-p)
Period Jitter for clock output on regular I/O
(FOUT < 100 MHz) — — 60 mUI (p-p)
tOUTCCJ_IO (6),
(9)
Cycle to Cycle Jitter for clock output on regular I/O
(FOUT ≥100 MHz) — — 600 ps (p-p)
Cycle to Cycle Jitter for clock output on regular I/O
(FOUT < 100 MHz) — — 60 mUI (p-p)
tCASC_OUTPJ_DC
(6), (7)
Period Jitter for dedicated clock output in cascaded PLLs
(FOUT ≥100MHz) — — 250 ps (p-p)
Period Jitter for dedicated clock output in cascaded PLLs
(FOUT < 100MHz) — — 25 mUI (p-p)
fDRIFT
Frequency drift after PFDENA is disabled for duration of
100 us — — ±10 %
Notes to Table 1–34:
(1) This specification is limited in the Quartus II software by the I/O maximum frequency. The maximum I/O frequency is different for each I/O
standard.
(2) The VCO frequency reported by the Quartus II software in the PLL summary section of the compilation report takes into consideration the VCO
post-scale counter K value. Therefore, if the counter K has a value of 2, the frequency reported can be lower than the fVCO specification.
(3) This specification is limited by the lower of the two: I/O FMAX or FOUT of the PLL.
(4) A high input jitter directly affects the PLL output jitter. To have low PLL output clock jitter, you must provide a clean clock source that is less
than 120 ps.
(5) FREF is fIN/N when N = 1.
(6) Peak-to-peak jitter with a probability level of 10–12 (14 sigma, 99.99999999974404% confidence level). The output jitter specification applies
to the intrinsic jitter of the PLL, when an input jitter of 30 ps is applied. The external memory interface clock output jitter specifications use a
different measurement method and are available in Table 1–51 on page 1–62.
(7) The cascaded PLL specification is only applicable with the following condition:
A. Upstream PLL: 0.59Mhz Upstream PLL BW < 1 MHz
B. Downstream PLL: Downstream PLL BW > 2 MHz
(8) High bandwidth PLL settings are not supported in external feedback mode.
(9) External memory interface clock output jitter specifications use a different measurement method, which is available in Table 1–49 on
page 1–61.
Table 1–34. PLL Specifications for Stratix IV Devices (Part 2 of 2)
Symbol Parameter Min Typ Max Unit
1–50 Chapter 1: DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices
Switching Characteristics
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 4: Device Datasheet and Addendum
DSP Block Specifications
Table 1–35 lists the Stratix IV DSP block performance specifications.
Table 1–35. Block Performance Specifications for Stratix IV DSP Devices (1)
Mode
Resources
Used Performance
Unit
Number of
Multipliers
–1 Industrial
and–2/–2×
Commercial/
Industrial
Speed Grade
–3
Commercial
Speed
Grade
–3
Industrial
Speed
Grade
–4
Commercial
Speed
Grade
–4
Industrial
Speed
Grade
9×9-bit multiplier (A, C, E, G) (2) 1 520 460 460 400 400 MHz
9×9-bit multiplier (B, D, F, H) (2) 1 520 460 460 400 400 MHz
12×12-bit multiplier (A, E) (3) 1 540 500 500 440 440 MHz
12×12-bit multiplier (B, D, F, H) (3) 1 540 500 500 440 430 MHz
18×18-bit multiplier 1 600 550 550 480 480 MHz
36×36-bit multiplier 1 480 440 440 380 380 MHz
18×18-bit multiply accumulator 4 490 440 440 380 380 MHz
18×18-bit multiply adder 4 510 470 470 410 400 MHz
18×18-bit multiply adder-signed full
precision 2 490 450 440 390 390 MHz
18×18-bit multiply adder with
loopback (4) 2 390 350 350 310 300 MHz
36-bit shift (32-bit data) 1 490 440 440 380 380 MHz
Double mode 1 480 440 440 380 370 MHz
Notes to Table 1–35:
(1) Maximum is for fully pipelined block with Round and Saturation disabled.
(2) The DSP block implements eight independent 9b´9b multiplies using A, B, C, D for the top DSP half block and E, F, G, H for the bottom DSP half block
multipliers.
(3) The DSP block implements six independent 12b´12b multiplies using A, B, D for the top DSP half block and E, F, H for the bottom DSP half block
multipliers.
(4) Maximum for loopback input registers disabled, Round and Saturation disabled, and pipeline and output registers enabled.
Chapter 1: DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices 1–51
Switching Characteristics
September 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 4: Device Datasheet and Addendum
TriMatrix Memory Block Specifications
Table 1–36 lists the Stratix IV TriMatrix memory block specifications.
Table 1–36. TriMatrix Memory Block Performance Specifications for Stratix IV Devices (1) (Part 1 of 2)
Memory Mode
Resources Used Performance
ALUTs TriMatrix
Memory
–1 Industrial
and –2 /–2×
Commercial/
Industrial
Speed Grade
–3
Commercial/
Industrial/
Military
Speed Grade
–4
Commercial/
Industrial
Speed Grade
–3
Industrial/
Military
Speed
Grade
(2)
–4
Industrial
Speed
Grade
(2)
Unit
MLAB
(3)
Single port
64×10 0 1 600 500 450 500 450 MHz
Simple dual-port
32×20 0 1 600 500 450 500 450 MHz
Simple dual-port
64×10 0 1 600 500 450 500 450 MHz
ROM 64×10 0 1 600 500 450 500 450 MHz
ROM 32×20 0 1 600 500 450 500 450 MHz
M9K
Block
(3)
Single-port
256×36 0 1 600 540 475 540 475 MHz
Simple dual-port
256×36 0 1 550 490 420 490 420 MHz
Simple dual-port
256×36, with the
read-during-write
option set to Old
Data
0 1 375 340 300 340 300 MHz
True dual port
512×18 0 1 490 430 370 430 370 MHz
True dual-port
512×18, with the
read-during-write
option set to Old
Data
0 1 375 335 290 335 290 MHz
ROM 1 Port 0 1 600 540 475 540 475 MHz
ROM 2 Port 0 1 600 540 475 540 475 MHz
Min Pulse Width
(clock high time) — — 750 800 850 800 850 ps
Min Pulse Width
(clock low time) — — 500 625 690 625 690 ps
1–52 Chapter 1: DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices
Switching Characteristics
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 4: Device Datasheet and Addendum
Configuration and JTAG Specifications
Table 1–37 lists the Stratix IV configuration mode specifications.
M144K
Block
(3)
Single-port
4K×36 0 1 475 440 380 400 350 MHz
Simple dual-port
2K×72 0 1 465 435 385 375 325 MHz
Simple dual-port
2K×72, with the
read-during-write
option set to Old
Data
0 1 260 240 205 225 200 MHz
Simple dual-port
2K×64 (with
ECC)
0 1 335 300 255 295 250 MHz
True dual-port
4K×36 0 1 400 375 330 350 310 MHz
True dual-port
4K×36, with the
read-during-write
option set to Old
Data
0 1 245 230 205 225 200 MHz
ROM 1 Port 0 1 540 500 435 450 420 MHz
ROM 2 Port 0 1 500 465 400 425 400 MHz
Min Pulse Width
(clock high time) — — 700 755 860 860 950 ps
Min Pulse Width
(clock low time) — — 500 625 690 690 690 ps
Notes to Table 1–36:
(1) To achieve the maximum memory block performance, use a memory block clock that comes through global clock routing from an on-chip PLL set
to 50% output duty cycle. Use the Quartus II software to report timing for this and other memory block clocking schemes.
(2) This is only applicable to the Stratix IV E and GX devices.
(3) When you use the error detection CRC feature, there is no degradation in FMAX.
Table 1–36. TriMatrix Memory Block Performance Specifications for Stratix IV Devices (1) (Part 2 of 2)
Memory Mode
Resources Used Performance
ALUTs TriMatrix
Memory
–1 Industrial
and –2 /–2×
Commercial/
Industrial
Speed Grade
–3
Commercial/
Industrial/
Military
Speed Grade
–4
Commercial/
Industrial
Speed Grade
–3
Industrial/
Military
Speed
Grade
(2)
–4
Industrial
Speed
Grade
(2)
Unit
Table 1–37. Configuration Mode Specifications for Stratix IV Devices
Programming Mode
DCLK FMAX Unit
Min Typ Max
Passive serial — — 125 MHz
Fast passive parallel (1) ——125MHz
Chapter 1: DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices 1–53
Switching Characteristics
September 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 4: Device Datasheet and Addendum
Table 1–38 lists the JTAG timing parameters and values for Stratix IV devices.
Temperature Sensing Diode Specifications
Table 1–39 lists the specifications for the Stratix IV temperature sensing diode.
Table 1–40 lists the specifications for the Stratix IV internal temperature sensing diode.
Fast active serial 17 26 40 MHz
Note to Table 1–37:
(1) This denotes the maximum frequency supported in the FPP configuration scheme. The frequency supported for
each device may vary depending on device density. For more information, refer to the Configuration, Design
Security, and Remote System Upgrades in Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Table 1–38. JTAG Timing Parameters and Values for Stratix IV Devices
Symbol Description Min Max Unit
tJCP TCK clock period 30 — ns
tJCH TCK clock high time 14 — ns
tJCL TCK clock low time 14 — ns
tJPSU (TDI) TDI JTAG port setup time 1 — ns
tJPSU (TMS) TMS JTAG port setup time 3 — ns
tJPH JTAG port hold time 5 — ns
tJPCO JTAG port clock to output — 11 (1) ns
tJPZX JTAG port high impedance to valid output — 14 (1) ns
tJPXZ JTAG port valid output to high impedance — 14 (1) ns
Note to Table 1–38:
(1) A 1 ns adder is required for each VCCIO voltage step down from 3.0 V. For example, tJPCO = 12 ns if VCCIO of the TDO
I/O bank = 2.5 V, or 13 ns if it equals 1.8 V.
Table 1–39. External Temperature Sensing Diode Specifications for Stratix IV Devices
Description Min Typ Max Unit
Ibias, diode source current 8 — 500 A
Vbias, voltage across diode 0.3 — 0.9 V
Series resistance — — < 5
Diode ideality factor 1.026 1.028 1.030 —
Table 1–37. Configuration Mode Specifications for Stratix IV Devices
Programming Mode
DCLK FMAX Unit
Min Typ Max
Table 1–40. Internal Temperature Sensing Diode Specifications for Stratix IV Devices
Temperature
Range Accuracy Offset Calibrated
Option Sampling Rate Conversion
Time Resolution Minimum Resolution
with No Missing Codes
–40 to 100 °C ±8 °C No Frequency:
500 kHz, 1 MHz < 100 ms 8 bits 8 bits
1–54 Chapter 1: DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices
Switching Characteristics
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 4: Device Datasheet and Addendum
Chip-Wide Reset (Dev_CLRn) Specifications
Table 1–41 lists the specifications for the Stratix IV chip-wide reset (
Dev_CLRn
). This
specifications denote the minimum pulse width of the
Dev_CLRn
signal required to
clear all the device registers.
Periphery Performance
This section describes periphery performance, including high-speed I/O and external
memory interface.
I/O performance supports several system interfaces, such as the LVDS high-speed
I/O interface, external memory interface, and the PCI/PCI-X bus interface.
General-purpose I/O standards such as 3.3-, 2.5-, 1.8-, and 1.5-LVTTL/LVCMOS are
capable of typical 167 MHz and 1.2 LVCMOS at 100 MHz interfacing frequency with
10 pF load.
For the Stratix IV GT –1 and –2 speed grade specifications, refer to the –2/–2× speed
grade column. For the Stratix IV GT –3 speed grade specification, refer to the –3 speed
grade column, unless otherwise specified.
1Actual achievable frequency depends on design- and system-specific factors. You
must perform HSPICE/IBIS simulations based on your specific design and system
setup to determine the maximum achievable frequency in your system.
High-Speed I/O Specification
Table 1–42 lists the high-speed I/O timing for Stratix IV devices.
Table 1–41. Chip-Wide Reset (DEV_CLRn) Specifications
Description Min Typ Max Unit
Dev_CLRn
500 — — s
Table 1–42. High-Speed I/O Specifications (1), (2) (Part 1 of 3)
Symbol Conditions
–2/–2× Speed Grade –3 Speed Grade –4 Speed Grade
Unit
Min Typ Max Min Typ Max Min Typ Max
fHSCLK_in (input
clock frequency)
True Differential I/O
Standards
Clock boost factor W = 1 to 40
(3) 5—
800
(4) 5 — 717 5 — 717 MHz
fHSCLK_in (input
clock frequency)
Single Ended I/O
Standards (12)
Clock boost factor W = 1 to 40
(3) 5 — 800 5 — 717 5 — 717 MHz
fHSCLK_in (input
clock frequency)
Single Ended I/O
Standards (13)
Clock boost factor W = 1 to 40
(3) 5 — 520 5 — 420 5 — 420 MHz
fHSCLK_OUT (output
clock frequency) —5—
800
(9) 5—
717
(9) 5—
717
(9) MHz
Chapter 1: DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices 1–55
Switching Characteristics
September 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 4: Device Datasheet and Addendum
Transmitter
True Differential I/O
Standards - fHSDR
(data rate)
SERDES factor J = 3 to 10
(10),(11) (5) — 1600 (5) —1250 (5) — 1250 Mbps
SERDES factor J = 2,
Uses DDR Registers (5) —(6) (5) —(6) (5) —(6) Mbps
SERDES factor J = 1,
Uses an SDR Register (5) —(6) (5) —(6) (5) —(6) Mbps
Emulated
Differential I/O
Standards with
Three External
Output Resistor
Networks - fHSDR
(data rate) (7) SERDES factor J = 4 to 10
(5) — 1250 (5) —1152 (5) — 800 Mbps
Emulated
Differential I/O
Standards with One
External Output
Resistor - fHSDR
(data rate)
(5) —311 (5) — 200 (5) — 200 Mbps
tx Jitter - True
Differential I/O
Standards
Total Jitter for Data Rate,
600 Mbps to 1.6 Gbps — — 160 — — 160 — — 160 ps
Total Jitter for Data Rate,
< 600 Mbps — — 0.1 — — 0.1 — — 0.1 UI
tx Jitter - Emulated
Differential I/O
Standards with
Three External
Output Resistor
Network
Total Jitter for Data Rate,
600 Mbps to 1.25 Gbps — — 300 — — 300 — — 325 ps
Total Jitter for Data Rate
< 600 Mbps —— 0.2 —— 0.2 ——0.25 UI
tx Jitter - Emulated
Differential I/O
Standards with One
External Output
Resistor Network
— — — 0.125 — — 0.15 — — 0.15 UI
tDUTY
Tx output clock duty cycle for
both True and Emulated
Differential I/O Standards
45 50 55 45 50 55 45 50 55 %
tRISE & tFALL
True Differential I/O Standards — — 160 — — 200 — — 200 ps
Emulated Differential I/O
Standards with Three External
Output Resistor Networks
— — 250 — — 250 — — 300 ps
Emulated Differential I/O
Standards with One External
Output Resistor
— — 460 — — 500 — — 500 ps
Table 1–42. High-Speed I/O Specifications (1), (2) (Part 2 of 3)
Symbol Conditions
–2/–2× Speed Grade –3 Speed Grade –4 Speed Grade
Unit
Min Typ Max Min Typ Max Min Typ Max
1–56 Chapter 1: DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices
Switching Characteristics
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 4: Device Datasheet and Addendum
TCCS
True Differential I/O Standards — — 100 — — 100 — — 100 ps
Emulated Differential I/o
Standards — — 250 — — 250 — — 250 ps
Receiver
True Differential I/O
Standards -
fHSDRDPA (data rate)
SERDES factor J = 3 to 10 (11) 150 — 1600 150 — 1250 150 — 1250 Mbps
fHSDR (data rate)
SERDES factor J = 3 to 10 (5) —(8) (5) —(8) (5) —(8) Mbps
SERDES factor J = 2,
Uses DDR Registers (5) —(6) (5) —(6) (5) —(6) Mbps
SERDES factor J = 1,
Uses an SDR Register (5) —(6) (5) —(6) (5) —(6) Mbps
DPA Mode
DPA run length — — — 10000 — — 10000 — — 10000 UI
Soft CDR mode
Soft-CDR PPM
tolerance — — — 300 — — 300 — — 300 ±
PPM
Non DPA Mode
Sampling Window — — — 300 — — 300 — — 300 ps
Notes to Table 1–42:
(1) When J = 3 to 10, use the serializer/deserializer (SERDES) block.
(2) When J = 1 or 2, bypass the SERDES block.
(3) Clock Boost Factor (W) is the ratio between input data rate to the input clock rate.
(4) For 820, 530, 360, and 290 density devices, the frequency is 762 MHz.
(5) The minimum specification depends on the clock source (for example, the PLL and clock pin) and the clock routing resource (global, regional, or local)
that you use. The I/O differential buffer and input register do not have a minimum toggle rate.
(6) The maximum ideal frequency is the SERDES factor (J) x the PLL maximum output frequency (fOUT) provided you can close the design timing and the
signal integrity simulation is clean.
(7) You must calculate the leftover timing margin in the receiver by performing link timing closure analysis. You must consider the board skew margin,
transmitter channel-to-channel skew, and receiver sampling margin to determine leftover timing margin.
(8) You can estimate the achievable maximum data rate for non-DPA mode by performing link timing closure analysis. You must consider the board skew
margin, transmitter delay margin, and the receiver sampling margin to determine the maximum data rate supported.
(9) This is achieved by using the LVDS and DPA clock network.
(10) If the receiver with DPA enabled and transmitter are using shared PLLs, the minimum data rate is 150 Mbps.
(11) The fMAX specification is based on the fast clock used for serial data. The interface fMAX also depends on the parallel clock domain, which is design
dependent and requires timing analysis.
(12) This only applies to DPA and soft-CDR modes.
(13) This only applies to LVDS source synchronous mode.
Table 1–42. High-Speed I/O Specifications (1), (2) (Part 3 of 3)
Symbol Conditions
–2/–2× Speed Grade –3 Speed Grade –4 Speed Grade
Unit
Min Typ Max Min Typ Max Min Typ Max
Chapter 1: DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices 1–57
Switching Characteristics
September 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 4: Device Datasheet and Addendum
Table 1–43 lists the DPA lock time specifications for Stratix IV ES devices.
Figure 1–4 shows the DPA lock time specifications with DPA PLL calibration enabled.
Table 1–43. DPA Lock Time Specifications—Stratix IV ES Devices Only (1), (2), (3)
Standard Training Pattern
Number of Data
Transitions in
one repetition
of training
pattern
Number of
repetitions
per 256
data
transitions
(4)
Condition Maximum
SPI-4 00000000001111111111 2 128
without DPA PLL
calibration 256 data transitions
with DPA PLL
calibration
3x256 data transitions +
2x96 slow clock cycles (5)
Parallel Rapid
I/O
00001111 2 128
without DPA PLL
calibration 256 data transitions
with DPA PLL
calibration
3x256 data transitions +
2x96 slow clock cycles (5)
10010000 4 64
without DPA PLL
calibration 256 data transitions
with DPA PLL
calibration
3x256 data transitions +
2x96 slow clock cycles (5)
Miscellaneous
10101010 8 32
without DPA PLL
calibration 256 data transitions
with DPA PLL
calibration
3x256 data transitions +
2x96 slow clock cycles (5)
01010101 8 32
without DPA PLL
calibration 256 data transitions
with DPA PLL
calibration
3x256 data transitions +
2x96 slow clock cycles (5)
Notes to Table 1–43:
(1) The DPA lock time is for one channel.
(2) One data transition is defined as a 0-to-1 or 1-to-0 transition.
(3) The DPA lock time applies to commercial, industrial, and military speed grades.
(4) This is the number of repetition for the stated training pattern to achieve 256 data transitions.
(5) Slow clock = Data rate (Mbps)/Deserialization factor.
Figure 1–4. DPA Lock Time Specification with DPA PLL Calibration Enabled
rx_dpa_locked
rx_reset
DPA Lock Time
256 data
transitions 96 slow
clock cycles 256 data
transitions 256 data
transitions
96 slow
clock cycles
1–58 Chapter 1: DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices
Switching Characteristics
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 4: Device Datasheet and Addendum
Table 1–44 lists the DPA lock time specifications for Stratix IV GX and GT devices.
Figure 1–5 shows the LVDS soft-CDR/DPA sinusoidal jitter tolerance specification for
a data rate equal to or higher than 1.25 Gbps. Table 1–45 lists this information in table
form.
Table 1–44. DPA Lock Time Specifications—Stratix IV GX and GT Devices Only (1), (2), (3)
Standard Training Pattern
Number of Data
Transitions in One
Repetition of the
Training Pattern
Number of Repetitions
per 256 Data Transitions
(4)
Maximum
SPI-4 00000000001111111111 2 128 640 data transitions
Parallel Rapid
I/O
00001111 2 128 640 data transitions
10010000 4 64 640 data transitions
Miscellaneous 10101010 8 32 640 data transitions
01010101 8 32 640 data transitions
Notes to Table 1–44:
(1) The DPA lock time is for one channel.
(2) One data transition is defined as a 0-to-1 or 1-to-0 transition.
(3) The DPA lock time stated in the table applies to commercial, industrial, and military speed grades.
(4) This is the number of repetitions for the stated training pattern to achieve the 256 data transitions.
Figure 1–5. LVDS Soft-CDR/DPA Sinusoidal Jitter Tolerance Specification for a Data Rate Equal to or Higher Than
1.25 Gbps
LVDS Soft-CDR/DPA Sinusoidal Jitter Tolerance Specification
F1 F2 F3 F4
Jitter Frequency (Hz)
Jitter Amphlitude (UI)
0.1
0.35
8.5
25
Chapter 1: DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices 1–59
Switching Characteristics
September 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 4: Device Datasheet and Addendum
Table 1–45 lists the LVDS soft-CDR/DPA sinusoidal jitter tolerance specification for a
data rate equal to or higher than 1.25 Gbps.
Figure 1–6 shows the LVDS soft-CDR/DPA sinusoidal jitter tolerance specification for
a data rate less than 1.25 Gbps.
When the data rate is equals to 800 Mbps, the LVDS soft-CDR/DPA sinusoidal jitter
tolerance allows up to 0.1 UI (125 ps) for jitter frequencies between 479.9 kHz and
20 MHz.
DLL and DQS Logic Block Specifications
Table 1–46 lists the DLL frequency range specifications for Stratix IV devices.
Table 1–45. LVDS Soft-CDR/DPA Sinusoidal Jitter Mask Values for a Data Rate Equal to or Higher
than 1.25 Gbps
Jitter Frequency (Hz) Sinusoidal Jitter (UI)
F1 10,000 25.000
F2 17,565 25.000
F3 1,493,000 0.350
F4 50,000,000 0.350
Figure 1–6. LVDS Soft-CDR/DPA Sinusoidal Jitter Tolerance Specification for a Data Rate Less than 1.25 Gbps
0.1 UI P-P
baud/1667 20 MHz
Frequency
Sinusoidal Jitter Amplitude
20db/dec
Table 1–46. DLL Frequency Range Specifications for Stratix IV Devices (Part 1 of 2)
Frequency
Mode
Frequency Range (MHz)
Available Phase Shift DQS Delay Buffer
Mode (1)
Number of
Delay
Chains
–2/–2×
Speed Grade
–3
Speed Grade
–4
Speed Grade
0 90-140 90-130 90-120 22.5°, 45°, 67.5°, 90° Low 16
1 120-180 120-170 120-160 30°, 60°, 90°, 120° Low 12
2 150-220 150-210 150-200 36°, 72°, 108°, 144° Low 10
3 180-280 180-260 180-240 45°, 90°,135°, 180° Low 8
1–60 Chapter 1: DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices
Switching Characteristics
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 4: Device Datasheet and Addendum
Table 1–47 lists the DQS phase offset delay per stage for Stratix IV devices.
Table 1–48 lists the DQS phase shift error for Stratix IV devices.
4 240-350 240-320 240-290 30°, 60°, 90°, 120° High 12
5 290-430 290-380 290-360 36°, 72°, 108°, 144° High 10
6 360-540 360-450 360-450 45°, 90°, 135°, 180° High 8
7 470-700 470-630 470-590 60°, 120°, 180°, 240° High 6
Note to Table 1–46:
(1) Low indicates a 6-bit DQS delay setting; high indicates a 5-bit DQS delay setting.
Table 1–46. DLL Frequency Range Specifications for Stratix IV Devices (Part 2 of 2)
Frequency
Mode
Frequency Range (MHz)
Available Phase Shift DQS Delay Buffer
Mode (1)
Number of
Delay
Chains
–2/–2×
Speed Grade
–3
Speed Grade
–4
Speed Grade
Table 1–47. DQS Phase Offset Delay Per Setting for Stratix IV Devices (1), (2), (3)
Speed Grade Min Max Unit
–2/–2× 7 13 ps
–3 7 15 ps
–4 7 16 ps
Notes to Table 1–47:
(1) The valid settings for phase offset are -64 to +63 for frequency modes 0 to 3 and -32 to +31 for frequency modes
4 to 6.
(2) The typical value equals the average of the minimum and maximum values.
(3) The delay settings are linear, with a cumulative delay variation of 40 ps for all speed grades. For example, when
using a –2 speed grade and applying a 10 phase offset settings to a 90° phase shift at 400 MHz, the expected
average cumulative delay is [625 ps + (10 × 10.5 ps) ± 20 ps] = 730 ps ± 20 ps.
Table 1–48. DQS Phase Shift Error Specification for DLL-Delayed Clock (tDQS_PSERR) for Stratix IV
Devices (1)
Number of DQS Delay
Buffer
–2/–2X
Speed Grade
–3
Speed Grade
–4
Speed Grade Unit
1262830ps
2525660ps
3788490ps
4 104 112 120 ps
Note to Table 1–48:
(1) This error specification is the absolute maximum and minimum error. For example, skew on three DQS delay
buffers in a –2/–2x speed grade is ± 78 ps or ± 39 ps.
Chapter 1: DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices 1–61
Switching Characteristics
September 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 4: Device Datasheet and Addendum
Table 1–49 lists the memory output clock jitter specifications for Stratix IV devices.
OCT Calibration Block Specifications
Table 1–50 lists the OCT calibration block specifications for Stratix IV devices.
Table 1–49. Memory Output Clock Jitter Specification for Stratix IV Devices (1), (2), (3), (4)
Parameter Clock
Network Symbol
–2/–2X
Speed Grade
–3
Speed Grade
–4
Speed Grade Unit
Min Max Min Max Min Max
Clock period jitter Regional tJIT(per) -5050-5555-5555ps
Cycle-to-cycle period jitter Regional tJIT(cc) -100 100 -110 110 -110 110 ps
Duty cycle jitter Regional tJIT(duty) -50 50 -82.5 82.5 -82.5 82.5 ps
Clock period jitter Global tJIT(per) -75 75 -82.5 82.5 -82.5 82.5 ps
Cycle-to-cycle period jitter Global tJIT(cc) -150 150 -165 165 -165 165 ps
Duty cycle jitter Global tJIT(duty) -7575-9090-9090ps
Notes to Table 1–49:
(1) The memory output clock jitter measurements are for 200 consecutive clock cycles, as specified in the JEDEC DDR2/DDR3 SDRAM standard.
(2) The clock jitter specification applies to memory output clock pins generated using differential signal-splitter and DDIO circuits clocked by a PLL
output routed on a regional or global clock network as specified. Altera recommends using regional clock networks whenever possible.
(3) The memory output clock jitter stated in Table 1–49 is applicable when an input jitter of 30 ps is applied.
(4) The clock jitter specification is characterized with 70% utilization, 266 MHz core clock frequency, and 12.5% design toggle rate. If your design
exceeds any of these conditions, the jitter specification of the design may not meet the above specification.
Table 1–50. OCT Calibration Block Specifications for Stratix IV Devices
Symbol Description Min Typ Max Unit
OCTUSRCLK Clock required by OCT calibration blocks — — 20 MHz
TOCTCAL
Number of OCTUSRCLK clock cycles required for OCT RS/RT
calibration — 1000 — Cycles
TOCTSHIFT
Number of OCTUSRCLK clock cycles required for OCT code
to shift out — 28 — Cycles
TRS_RT
Time required between the
dyn_term_ctrl
and
oe
signal
transitions in a bidirectional I/O buffer to dynamically switch
between OCT RS and RT
—2.5— ns
1–62 Chapter 1: DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices
I/O Timing
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 4: Device Datasheet and Addendum
Figure 1–7 shows the timing diagram for the
oe
and
dyn_term_ctrl
signals.
Duty Cycle Distortion (DCD) Specifications
Table 1–51 lists the worst-case DCD for Stratix IV devices.
I/O Timing
Altera offers two ways to determine I/O timing—the Excel-based I/O Timing and the
Quartus II Timing Analyzer.
Excel-based I/O Timing provides pin timing performance for each device density and
speed grade. The data is typically used prior to designing the FPGA to get an estimate
of the timing budget as part of the link timing analysis. The Quartus II Timing
Analyzer provides a more accurate and precise I/O timing data based on the specifics
of the design after you complete place-and-route.
fThe Excel-based I/O Timing spreadsheet is downloadable from the Literature:
Stratix IV Devices webpage.
Figure 1–7. Timing Diagram for the oe and dyn_term_ctrl Signals
Table 1–51. Worst-Case DCD on Stratix IV I/O Pins (1)
Symbol
–2/–2×
Speed Grade
–3
Speed Grade
–4
Speed Grade Unit
Min Max Min Max Min Max
Output Duty Cycle 45 55 45 55 45 55 %
Note to Table 1–51:
(1) The listed specification is only applicable to the output buffer across different I/O standards.
dyn_term_ctrl
oe
RXRX
Tristate Tristate
TX
TRS_RT TRS_RT
Chapter 1: DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices 1–63
I/O Timing
September 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 4: Device Datasheet and Addendum
Programmable IOE Delay
Table 1–52 lists the Stratix IV IOE programmable delay settings.
Programmable Output Buffer Delay
Table 1–53 lists the delay chain settings that control the rising and falling edge delays
of the output buffer. The default delay is 0 ps.
Table 1–52. IOE Programmable Delay for Stratix IV Devices
Parameter
(1)
Available
Settings
Min Offset
(2)
Fast Model Slow Model
Industrial/
Military
Commercial
(3) C2 (3) C3 C4 I3/M3 I4 Unit
D1 16 0 0.462 0.505 0.732 0.795 0.857 0.801 0.864 ns
D2 8 0 0.234 0.232 0.337 0.372 0.407 0.371 0.405 ns
D3 8 0 1.700 1.769 2.695 2.927 3.157 2.948 3.178 ns
D4 16 0 0.508 0.554 0.813 0.882 0.952 0.889 0.959 ns
D5 16 0 0.472 0.500 0.747 0.799 0.875 0.817 0.882 ns
D6 7 0 0.186 0.195 0.294 0.319 0.345 0.321 0.347 ns
Notes to Table 1–52:
(1) You can set this value in the Quartus II software by selecting D1, D2, D3, D4, D5, and D6 in the Assignment Name column.
(2) Minimum offset does not include the intrinsic delay.
(3) For the EP4SGX530 device density, the IOE programmable delays have an additional 5% maximum offset.
Table 1–53. Programmable Output Buffer Delay (1)
Symbol Parameter Typical Unit
DOUTBUF
Rising and/or falling edge
delay
0 (default) ps
50 ps
100 ps
150 ps
Note to Table 1–53:
(1) You can set the programmable output buffer delay in the Quartus II software by setting the Output Buffer Delay
Control assignment to either positive, negative, or both edges, with the specific values stated here (in ps) for the
Output Buffer Delay assignment.
1–64 Chapter 1: DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices
Glossary
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 4: Device Datasheet and Addendum
Glossary
Table 1–54 lists the glossary for this chapter.
Table 1–54. Glossary Table (Part 1 of 4)
Letter Subject Definitions
A, B, C ——
DDifferential I/O
Standards
Receiver Input Waveforms
Transmitter Output Waveforms
E——
F
fHSCLK Left/right PLL input clock frequency.
fHSDR
High-speed I/O block: Maximum/minimum LVDS data transfer rate
(fHSDR = 1/TUI), non-DPA.
fHSDRDPA
High-speed I/O block: Maximum/minimum LVDS data transfer rate
(fHSDRDPA = 1/TUI), DPA.
G, H, I ——
Single-Ended Waveform
Differential Waveform
Positive Channel (p) = VIH
Negative Channel (n) = VIL
Ground
VID
VID
VID
p − n = 0 V
VCM
Single-Ended Waveform
Differential Waveform
Positive Channel (p) = VOH
Negative Channel (n) = VOL
Ground
VOD
VOD
VOD
p − n = 0 V
VCM
Chapter 1: DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices 1–65
Glossary
September 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 4: Device Datasheet and Addendum
J
J High-speed I/O block: Deserialization factor (width of parallel data bus).
JTAG Timing
Specifications
JTAG Timing Specifications:
K, L,
M, N, O ——
PPLL
Specifications
Diagram of PLL Specifications (1)
Note:
(1)
Core Clock
can only be fed by dedicated clock input pins or PLL outputs.
Q——
RR
LReceiver differential input discrete resistor (external to Stratix IV device).
Table 1–54. Glossary Table (Part 2 of 4)
Letter Subject Definitions
TDO
TCK
tJPZX tJPCO
tJPH
tJPXZ
tJCP
tJPSU
t JCL
tJCH
TDI
TMS
Core Clock
External Feedback
Reconfigurable in User Mode
Key
CLK
N
M
PFD
Switchover
VCO
CP LF
CLKOUT Pins
GCLK
RCLK
f
INPFD
f
IN
f
VCO
f
OUT
f
OUT_EXT
Counters
C0..C9
1–66 Chapter 1: DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices
Glossary
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 4: Device Datasheet and Addendum
S
SW (sampling
window)
Timing Diagram—the period of time during which the data must be valid in order to capture
it correctly. The setup and hold times determine the ideal strobe position within the sampling
window, as shown:
Single-ended
voltage
referenced I/O
standard
The JEDEC standard for SSTl and HSTL I/O defines both the AC and DC input signal values.
The AC values indicate the voltage levels at which the receiver must meet its timing
specifications. The DC values indicate the voltage levels at which the final logic state of the
receiver is unambiguously defined. After the receiver input has crossed the AC value, the
receiver changes to the new logic state.
The new logic state is then maintained as long as the input stays beyond the AC threshold.
This approach is intended to provide predictable receiver timing in the presence of input
waveform ringing, as shown:
Single-Ended Voltage Referenced I/O Standard
T
tCHigh-speed receiver/transmitter input and output clock period.
TCCS (channel-
to-channel-skew)
The timing difference between the fastest and slowest output edges, including tCO variation
and clock skew, across channels driven by the same PLL. The clock is included in the TCCS
measurement (refer to the Timing Diagram figure under SW in this table).
tDUTY
High-speed I/O block: Duty cycle on high-speed transmitter output clock.
Timing Unit Interval (TUI)
The timing budget allowed for skew, propagation delays, and data sampling window.
(TUI = 1/(Receiver Input Clock Frequency Multiplication Factor) = tC/w)
tFALL Signal high-to-low transition time (80-20%)
tINCCJ Cycle-to-cycle jitter tolerance on the PLL clock input
tOUTPJ_IO Period jitter on the general purpose I/O driven by a PLL
tOUTPJ_DC Period jitter on the dedicated clock output driven by a PLL
tRISE Signal low-to-high transition time (20-80%)
U——
Table 1–54. Glossary Table (Part 3 of 4)
Letter Subject Definitions
Bit Time
0.5 x TCCS RSKM Sampling Window
(SW)
RSKM 0.5 x TCCS
V
IH(AC)
V
IH(DC)
V
REF
V
IL(DC)
V
IL(AC)
V
OH
V
OL
V
CCIO
V
SS
Chapter 1: DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices 1–67
Glossary
September 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 4: Device Datasheet and Addendum
Document Revision History
Table 1–55 lists the revision history for this chapter.
V
VCM(DC) DC Common mode input voltage.
VICM Input Common mode voltage—The common mode of the differential signal at the receiver.
VID
Input differential voltage swing—The difference in voltage between the positive and
complementary conductors of a differential transmission at the receiver.
VDIF(AC) AC differential input voltage—Minimum AC input differential voltage required for switching.
VDIF(DC) DC differential input voltage— Minimum DC input differential voltage required for switching.
VIH
Voltage input high—The minimum positive voltage applied to the input which is accepted by
the device as a logic high.
VIH(AC) High-level AC input voltage
VIH(DC) High-level DC input voltage
VIL
Voltage input low—The maximum positive voltage applied to the input which is accepted by
the device as a logic low.
VIL(AC) Low-level AC input voltage
VIL(DC) Low-level DC input voltage
VOCM
Output Common mode voltage—The common mode of the differential signal at the
transmitter.
VOD
Output differential voltage swing—The difference in voltage between the positive and
complementary conductors of a differential transmission at the transmitter.
VSWING Differential input voltage
VXInput differential cross point voltage
VOX Output differential cross point voltage
WW High-speed I/O block: Clock Boost Factor
X, Y, Z ——
Table 1–54. Glossary Table (Part 4 of 4)
Letter Subject Definitions
Table 1–55. Document Revision History (Part 1 of 3)
Date Version Changes
September 2014 5.9 ■Removed the Remote Update only in fast AS mode programming mode from the
“Configuration Mode Specifications for Stratix IV Devices” table.
March 2014 5.8
■Added note to Table 1–49.
■Updated D6 row in Table 1–52.
January 2014 5.7 ■Updated Table 1–42.
December 2013 5.6 ■Updated Table 1–23 and Table 1–24.
November 2013 5.5 ■Updated Table 1–23 and Table 1–24.
November 2013 5.4 ■Updated Table 1–42, Table 1–23, and Table 1–24.
July 2012 5.3
■Added Table 1–5 and Table 1–40.
■Updated Table 1–15, Table 1–22, Table 1–23, Table 1–30, Table 1–33, Table 1–35,
Table 1–36, Table 1–39, Table 1–42 and Table 1–51.
■Removed “Schmitt Trigger Input” section.
1–68 Chapter 1: DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices
Glossary
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 4: Device Datasheet and Addendum
December 2011 5.2
■Added Figure 1–7.
■Updated Table 1–22 and Table 1–41.
June 2011 5.1
■Added military speed grade information.
■Updated Table 1–1 and Table 1–30.
■Updated (Note 3) in Table 1–42 and (Note 3) in Table 1–43.
■Added military speed grade to Table 1–5, Table 1–10, Table 1–11, Table 1–23, Table 1–30,
Table 1–36, and Table 1–51.
April 2011 5.0 ■Updated Table 1–1, Table 1–5, Table 1–6, Table 1–13, Table 1–16, Table 1–23, and
Table 1–24.
March 2011 4.9 ■Updated Table 1–24.
March 2011 4.8 ■Removed (Note 17) in Table 1-24.
February 2011 4.7 ■Added (Note 17) to Table 1–24.
February 2011 4.6
■Updated Table 1–1, Table 1–5, Table 1–23, Table 1–24, Table 1–30, Table 1–31, Table
1–32, Table 1–34, Table 1–37, Table 1–41, and Table 1–51.
■Updated the “Recommended Operating Conditions” section.
■Added the “Schmitt Trigger Input” section.September
■Minor text edits.
November 2010 4.5
■Updated Table 1–29.
■Updated chapter title.
■Minor text edits.
September 2010 4.4
■Applied new template.
■Updated Table 1–1 and Table 1–5.
July 2010 4.3
■Updated Table 1–7, Table 1–22, Table 1–23, Table 1–33, Table 1–35, Table 1–36, and
Table 1–40.
■Added Table 1–39.
■Changed “PCI Express” to “PCIe” throughout.
■Minor text edits
March 2010 4.2
■Updated Table 1–22, Table 1–23, Table 1–30, Table 1–46, and Table 1–49.
■Added Table 1–31.
■Minor text edits.
February 2010 4.1
■Updated Table 1–11, Table 1–22, Table 1–23, Table 1–24, Table 1–25, Table 1–26,
Table 1–27, Table 1–29, Table 1–32, Table 1–33, Table 1–34, Table 1–35, Table 1–39,
Table 1–40, Table 1–43, Table 1–46, and Table 1–49.
■Added Stratix IV GT speed grade note to Table 1–32, Table 1–35, Table 1–39, Table 1–43,
Table 1–44, Table 1–45, and Table 1–46.
■Added Table 1–28 and Table 1–30.
■Minor text edits.
Table 1–55. Document Revision History (Part 2 of 3)
Date Version Changes
Chapter 1: DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices 1–69
Glossary
September 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 4: Device Datasheet and Addendum
November 2009 4.0
■Added Table 1–9, Table 1–15, Table 1–38, and Table 1–39.
■Added Figure 1–5 and Figure 1–6.
■Added the “Transceiver Datapath PCS Latency” section.
■Updated the “Electrical Characteristics”, “Operating Conditions”, and “I/O Timing”
sections.
■All tables updated except Table 1–16, Table 1–24, Table 1–25, Table 1–26, Table 1–27,
Table 1–33, Table 1–34, and Table 1–45.
■Updated Figure 1–2 and Figure 1–3.
■Updated Equation 1–1.
■Deleted Table 1-28, Table 1-29, Table 1-30, Table 1-42, Table 1-43, and Table 1-44.
■Minor text edits.
June 2009 3.1
■Added “Preliminary Specifications” to the footer of each page.
■Updated Table 1–1, Table 1–2, Table 1–7, Table 1–10, Table 1–11, Table 1–12,
Table 1–21, Table 1–22, Table 1–23, Table 1–25, Table 1–37, Table 1–38, Table 1–39,
Table 1–40, and Table 1–44.
■Minor text edits.
March 2009 3.0
■Replaced Table 1–31 and Table 1–37.
■Updated Table 1–1, Table 1–2, Table 1–5, Table 1–19, Table 1–41, Table 1–44,
Table 1–45, Table 1–49, and Table 1–51.
■Added Table 1–21, Table 1–46, and Table 1–47
■Added Figure 1–3.
■Removed “Timing Model”, “Preliminary and Final Timing”, “I/O Timing Measurement
Methodology”, “I/O Default Capacitive Loading”, and “Referenced Documents” sections.
December 2008 2.1 Minor changes.
November 2008 2.0
■Minor text edits.
■Updated Table 1–19, Table 1–32, Table 1–34 - Table 1–39.
■Minor text edits.
August 2008 1.1
■Updated Table 1–1, Table 1–2, Table 1–4, Table 1–5, and Table 1–26.
■Removed figures from “Transceiver Performance Specifications” on page 1–10 that are
repeated in the glossary.
■Minor text edits and an additional note to Table 1–26.
May 2008 1.0 Initial release.
Table 1–55. Document Revision History (Part 3 of 3)
Date Version Changes
1–70 Chapter 1: DC and Switching Characteristics for Stratix IV Devices
Glossary
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 4: Device Datasheet and Addendum
SIV54002-1.5
© 2012 Altera Corporation. All rights reserved. ALTERA, ARRIA, CYCLONE, HARDCOPY, MAX, MEGACORE, NIOS, QUARTUS and STRATIX words and logos
are trademarks of Altera Corporation and registered in the U.S. Patent and Trademark Office and in other countries. All other words and logos identified as
trademarks or service marks are the property of their respective holders as described at www.altera.com/common/legal.html. Altera warrants performance of its
semiconductor products to current specifications in accordance with Altera's standard warranty, but reserves the right to make changes to any products and
services at any time without notice. Altera assumes no responsibility or liability arising out of the application or use of any information, product, or service
described herein except as expressly agreed to in writing by Altera. Altera customers are advised to obtain the latest version of device specifications before relying
on any published information and before placing orders for products or services.
Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 4: Device Datasheet and Addendum
February 2011
Feedback Subscribe
ISO
9001:2008
Registered
2. Addendum to the Stratix IV Device
Handbook
This chapter describes changes to the published version of the Stratix IV Device
Handbook. All changes from Revision 1.4 of this chapter are now incorporated in the
main handbook chapters or in AN 612: Decision Feedback Equalization in Stratix IV
Devices.
Adaptive Equalization (AEQ)
fThis AEQ information is now located in the Dynamic Reconfiguration in Stratix IV
Devices chapter.
Decision Feedback Equalization (DFE)
fFor more information about the DFE feature, refer to AN 612: Decision Feedback
Equalization in Stratix IV Devices.
Power-On Reset Circuitry
The Power-On Reset Circuitry information is now located in the Hot Socketing and
Power-On Reset in Stratix IV Devices chapter.
Power-On Reset Specifications
fThe Power-On Reset Specification information is now located in the Hot Socketing and
Power-On Reset in Stratix IV Devices chapter.
February 2011
SIV54002-1.5
2–2 Chapter 2: Addendum to the Stratix IV Device Handbook
Stratix IV Device Handbook February 2011 Altera Corporation
Volume 4: Device Datasheet and Addendum
Document Revision History
Table 2–1 lists the revision history for this chapter.
Table 2–1. Document Revision History
Date Version Changes
February 2011 1.5
■Removed the “Decision Feedback Equalization (DFE)” section now that AN 612: Decision
Feedback Equalization in Stratix IV Devices is published.
■Moved the “Adaptive Equalization (AEQ)” sections to the Dynamic Reconfiguration in
Stratix IV Devices chapter.
■Moved the “Power-On Reset Circuitry” and “Power-On Reset Specifications” sections to
the Hot Socketing and Power-On Reset in Stratix IV Devices chapter.
■Minor text edits.
September 2010 1.4
■Added corrections for the Adaptive Equalization (AEQ) section of the Stratix IV Dynamic
Reconfiguration chapter.
■Added new information for the Decision Feedback Equalization (DFE) feature.
April 2010 1.3
■Added corrections for the “Power-On Reset Circuitry” and “Power-On Reset
Specifications” sections to of the Hot Socketing and Power-On Reset in Stratix IV Devices
chapter.
March 2010 1.2
■Moved the “Power-On Reset Circuitry”, “Power-On Reset Specifications”, “Correct
Power-Up Sequence for Production Devices”, and “Correct Power-Up Sequence for
Production Devices” sections to the Hot Socketing and Power-On Reset in Stratix IV
Devices chapter.
■Moved the “Power-On Reset Circuit” and “JTAG TMS and TDI Pin Pull-Up Resistor Value
Specification” sections to the Configuration, Design Security, Remote System Upgrades
with Stratix IV Devices chapter.
■Moved the “Summary of OCT Assignments” section to the I/O Features in Stratix IV
Devices chapter.
February 2010 1.1
■Added the “Power-On Reset Circuitry”, “Power-On Reset Specifications”, “Correction to
POR Signal Pulse Width Delay Times”, “Correct Power-Up Sequence for Production
Devices”, “Power-On Reset Circuit”, “Summary of OCT Assignments”, and “JTAG TMS
and TDI Pin Pull-Up Resistor Value Specification” sections.
■Minor text edits.
November 2009 1.0
■Stratix IV GX enhanced transceiver data rate specifications in –4 commercial speed grade.
■Initial release.
September 2014 Altera Corporation Stratix IV Device Handbook
Volume 4: Device Datasheet and Addendum
Additional Information
This chapter provides additional information about the document and Altera.
About this Handbook
This handbook provides comprehensive information about the Altera® Stratix®IV
family of devices.
How to Contact Altera
To locate the most up-to-date information about Altera products, refer to the
following table.
Typographic Conventions
The following table shows the typographic conventions this document uses.
Contact (1) Contact Method Address
Technical support Website www.altera.com/support
Technical training Website www.altera.com/training
Email custrain@altera.com
Product literature Website www.altera.com/literature
Nontechnical support (general) Email nacomp@altera.com
(software licensing) Email authorization@altera.com
Note to Table:
(1) You can also contact your local Altera sales office or sales representative.
Visual Cue Meaning
Bold Type with Initial Capital
Letters
Indicate command names, dialog box titles, dialog box options, and other GUI
labels. For example, Save As dialog box. For GUI elements, capitalization matches
the GUI.
bold type
Indicates directory names, project names, disk drive names, file names, file name
extensions, software utility names, and GUI labels. For example, \qdesigns
directory, D: drive, and chiptrip.gdf file.
Italic Type with Initial Capital Letters Indicate document titles. For example, Stratix IV Design Guidelines.
italic type
Indicates variables. For example, n + 1.
Variable names are enclosed in angle brackets (< >). For example, <file name> and
<project name>.pof file.
Initial Capital Letters Indicate keyboard keys and menu names. For example, the Delete key and the
Options menu.
“Subheading Title” Quotation marks indicate references to sections in a document and titles of
Quartus II Help topics. For example, “Typographic Conventions.”
2–2 Additional Information
Typographic Conventions
Stratix IV Device Handbook September 2014 Altera Corporation
Volume 4: Device Datasheet and Addendum
Courier type
Indicates signal, port, register, bit, block, and primitive names. For example,
data1
,
tdi
, and
input
. The suffix
n
denotes an active-low signal. For example,
resetn
.
Indicates command line commands and anything that must be typed exactly as it
appears. For example,
c:\qdesigns\tutorial\chiptrip.gdf
.
Also indicates sections of an actual file, such as a Report File, references to parts of
files (for example, the AHDL keyword
SUBDESIGN
), and logic function names (for
example,
TRI
).
r An angled arrow instructs you to press the Enter key.
1., 2., 3., and
a., b., c., and so on
Numbered steps indicate a list of items when the sequence of the items is important,
such as the steps listed in a procedure.
■■■Bullets indicate a list of items when the sequence of the items is not important.
1The hand points to information that requires special attention.
h The question mark directs you to a software help system with related information.
f The feet direct you to another document or website with related information.
m The multimedia icon directs you to a related multimedia presentation.
cA caution calls attention to a condition or possible situation that can damage or
destroy the product or your work.
w A warning calls attention to a condition or possible situation that can cause you
injury.
The envelope links to the Email Subscription Management Center page of the Altera
website, where you can sign up to receive update notifications for Altera documents.
Visual Cue Meaning